The Republic of Plato James Adam Perseus Project, Tufts University Gregory Crane Prepared under the supervision of Bridget Almas Lisa Cerrato David Mimno Rashmi Singhal National Endowment for the Humanities Trustees of Tufts University Medford, MA Perseus Project Perseus 3.0 viaf107078652.viaf002.perseus-eng1.xml Available under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International License The Republic of Plato Plato James Adam Cambridge Cambridge University Press 1926-1929 First printed in 1902-1903 1-2 Hathi Trust HathiTrust

This pointer extracts book and section

This pointer extracts book

English Greek Latin French

Πλάτωνος Πολιτεία . On the name, characters, and date of action of the dialogue, see Introd. §§ 1, 2, 3.

327A - 328B Socrates describes how he visited the Piraeus in company with Glauco, and was induced by Polemarchus and others to defer his return to Athens.

κατέβην κτλ. Dionys. Hal. de comp. verb. p. 208 (Reiske) ὁ δὲ Πλάτων, τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ διαλόγους κτενίζων καὶ βοστρυχίζων, καὶ πάντα τρόπον ἀναπλέκων, οὐ διέλιπεν ὀγδοήκοντα γεγονὼς ἔτη. πᾶσι γὰρ δή που τοῖς φιλολόγοις γνώριμα τὰ περὶ τῆς φιλοπονίας τἀνδρὸς ἱστορούμενα, τά τ’ ἄλλα, καὶ δὴ καὶ τὰ περὶ τὴν δέλτον ἣν τελευτήσαντος αὐτοῦ λέγουσιν εὑρεθῆναι ποικίλως μετακειμένην τὴν ἀρχὴν τῆς πολιτείας ἔχουσαν τήνδε “κατέβην χθὲς εἰς Πειραιᾶ μετὰ Γλαύκωνος τοῦ Ἀρίστωνος.” See also Quint. VIII 6. 64, and Diog. Laert. III 37. The latter gives as his authorities Euphorion and Panaetius. As Cicero was tolerably familiar with the writings of Panaetius, it is possible that he too has the same story in view in de Sen. V 13, where he says of Plato “scribens est mortuus.” The anecdote may well be true, but does not of course justify any inference as to the date of composition of the Republic. See Introd. § 4.

τῇ θεῷ . What goddess? Bendis or Athena? The festival is the Bendideia (354 A) and it is perhaps safest to acquiesce in the usual view that Bendis is here meant. “Alii Minervam intelligunt, quae vulgo ἡ θεὸς appellabatur; neque mihi videtur Socrates in ista Panathenaeorum propinquitate de Minerva veneranda cogitare non potuisse: sed quod simpliciter τὴν ἑορτὴν dicit, numina diversa statuere non sinit” (Schneider). We hear of a temple of Bendis in the Piraeus in 403 B.C. (τὴν ὁδὸν ἡ φέρει πρός τε τὸ ἱερὸν τῆς Μουνυχίας Ἀρτεμίδος καὶ τὸ Βενδίδειον Xen. Hell. II 4. 11). See also Introd. § 3 and App. I.

νῦν πρῶτον . Perhaps 410 B.C. Introd. § 3.

οἱ Θρᾷκες . Probably resident aliens (as opposed to the ἐπιχώριοι or natives), living for commercial purposes in the Piraeus, which at all times contained a large admixture of foreign population. It was part of Athenian policy to encourage commercial settlers by allowing them to exercise their own cults (Foucart des assoc. relig. chez les Grecs p. 131). Foucart holds that the worship of the Thracian goddess Bendis was brought to the Piraeus by Thracian merchants (p. 84). Others have supposed that οἱ Θρᾷκες refers to envoys from Thrace, or Thracian mercenaries, the survivors of those who came to Athens in 414 B.C. (Thuc. VII 27); but the other view is more probable.

τὸ ἄστυ or ἄστυ 327 C is regular for Athens itself as opposed to the Piraeus. Hartman would omit the article (cf. Lys. 13. 88 τοὺς ἐν ἄστει οἱ ἐν τῷ Πειραιεῖ ): but it occurs infra 328 C, Phaedr. 230 C, Arist. Pol. Ath. 38. 1 and elsewhere.

αὐτός : ‘ipse’ ‘erus’ ‘the master’ as often: cf. e.g. Prot. 314 D οὐ σχολὴ αὐτῷ and the Pythagorean αὐτὸς ἔφα. With the deictic οὗτος cf. Symp. 175 A Σωκράτης οὗτος—ἕστηκεν, ‘there goes Socrates—standing.’

ἓν λείπεται . See cr. n. ἐλλείπεται (which Hermann and others retain) is less pointed, in view of the two alternatives ἢ—κρείττους γένεσθε ἢ μένετ’ αὐτοῦ. For λείπεται said of the μεταξύ τι ( Symp. 202 A) or third alternative, cf. Theaet. 188 A ἄλλο γ’ οὐδὲν λείπεται περὶ ἕκαστον πλὴν εἰδέναι ἢ μὴ εἰδέναι.

ὡς ‐‐ διανοεῖσθε : ‘well, you may make up your mind that we shall refuse to listen.’ Cf. (with Stallbaum) Crat. 439 C διανοηθέντες—ὡς ἰόντων ἁπάντων ἀεὶ καὶ ῥεόντων. μὴ is owing to the imperative: cf. Soph. O. C. 1154 and Jebb's note.

λαμπὰς κτλ . λαμπάς was the official name for a torch-race: see Mommsen Heortologie pp. 170 note, 282.

τῇ θεῷ : see on 327 A and App. I.

λαμπάδια : Harpocratio remarks ἣν νῦν ἡμεῖς λαμπάδα καλοῦμεν, οὕτως ὠνόμαζον. But λαμπάς was used for ‘torch’ even in classical Greek. Plato chooses λαμπάδιον because he has just used λαμπάς in a different sense.

διαδωσουσιν κτλ. shews that—except for the novel substitution of mounted competitors for runners—the torch-race in question was of the kind alluded to in Hdt. VIII 98 and elsewhere as held in honour of Hephaestus. The competition was not between one individual and another, but between different lines of competitors, the torch being passed on from man to man. Victory fell to the chain whose torch, still burning, first reached the goal. The well-known figure in Laws 776 B καθάπερ λαμπάδα τὸν βίον παραδιδόντας ἄλλοις ἐξ ἄλλων refers to the same form of race. Plato nowhere mentions the simpler form described by Pausanias (1 30. 2), in which individuals contended against each other: see Baumeister Denkmäler d. kl. Altert. p. 522.

ἄξιον θεάσασθαι . Songs and dances were the leading features in a παννυχίς. See Soph. Ant. 1146—1152 and Eur. Heracl. 781 —783 ἀνεμόεντι δὲ γᾶς ἐπ’ ὄχθῳ | (the Acropolis) ὀλολύγματα παννυχίοις ὑπὸ παρθένων ἰακχεῖ ποδῶν κρότοισιν (in honour of Athena at the Panathenaea).

ἐξαναστήσομεθα κτλ. The promise is nowhere fulfilled.

μὴ ἄλλως ποιεῖτε . Schanz (Novae Comm. Plat. p. 25) shews that this phrase, which is tolerably frequent in Plato, always occurs in combination with a positive command (here μένετε) except in II 369 B.

328B - 328E The scene at the house of Polemarchus. Socrates begins to interrogate Cephalus on the subject of old age.

εἰς τοῦ Πολεμάρχου . Polemarchus was older than Lysias (infra 331 D), and we are to infer that at this time Cephalus lived with him. There is no reason why we should (with Blass Att. Ber. p. 338) reject Plato's statement that Polemarchus had a house in the Piraeus: the words of Lysias (12. 16), which Blass relies upon as shewing that Polemarchus lived not in the Piraeus, but in Athens, refer to 404 B.C. and do not prove it even for that year. Lysias probably lived at this time in a house of his own in the Piraeus, as in 404 B.C. (Lys. 12. 8): it is to be noted that he is mentioned along with the visitors, in contrast with Cephalus (ἦν δ’ ἔνδον κτλ. —τεθυκὼς γὰρ ἐτύγχανεν ἐν τῇ αὐλῇ infra C). Cf. Boeckh Kl. Schr. IV p. 475 note 1 and Shuckburgh Lys. Orat. ed. 2 p. xii.

διὰ χρόνου ‐‐ αὐτόν . καί ‘indeed’ goes with the whole clause: cf. Soph. Ant. 1253 ἀλλ’ εἰσόμεσθα μή τι καὶ κατάσχετον | κρυφῇ καλύπτει καρδίᾳ θυμουμένη with Jebb's note. Tucker translates ‘for it was some time since I had so much as seen him’—throwing, I think, too much emphasis on καί.

προσκεφαλαίου τε καὶ δίφρου : virtually a hendiadys, as Hartman remarks, comparing Homer Il. IX 200 εἷσεν δ’ ἐν κλισμοῖσι τάπησί τε πορφυρέοισιν. It is somewhat fanciful to suppose (with Hartman) that Plato throughout this picture was thinking of the aged Nestor seated among his sons (Od. III 32 ff.). τινος adds a touch of vagueness: ‘a sort of combination of cushion and chair’ (Tucker).

τεθυκὼς γάρ explains ἐστεφανωμένος: “coronati sacrificabant, ut satis constat” Stallbaum. The God to whom Cephalus had been sacrificing was doubtless Ζεὺς ἑρκεῖος, whose altar stood in the αὐλή.

οὐδὲ ‐‐ Πειραιᾶ . A negative must be supplied, “ut amice expostulabundus cum Socrate senex hoc dicere videatur: tu neque alia facis, quae debebas, neque nostram domum frequentas. Simili ellipsi nostrates: Du kommst auch nicht oft zu uns” (Schneider). οὐδέ is ‘also not’: for exx. see Riddell Digest of Platonic Idioms § 141 and Jebb on Soph. O. C. 590 f. οὐδέ in οὐδὲ πάνυ ῥᾴδιον IX 587 C is another instance, in which, as here, the idiom has a kind of colloquial effect. Stallbaum takes οὐδέ with θαμίζεις “ne ventitas quidem ad nos, h. e. raro sane domum nostram frequentas”; but his equation hardly holds good, and is not justified by Xen. Symp. 4. 23. where οὐδέ coheres closely with the emphatic σοῦ. Others have suspected corruption, proposing οὔ τι (Ast, cf. Od. V 88 πάρος γε μὲν οὔ τι θαμίζεις), οὐ δέ (Nitzsch), or οὐ δή (Hartman). οὔ τι is very unlikely; for θαμίζω is not exclusively a poetic word (cf. Laws 843 B), and we need not suppose that Plato is thinking of Homer. I agree with Hartman that οὐ δέ is improbable: δέ is not sufficiently explained by saying that it is “adversative to the idea contained in ἠσπάζετο” (J. and C., with Schneider Additamenta p. 2). None of the cases quoted by Sauppe Ep. Crit. ad G. Hermannum p. 77 ( Ar. Knights 1302, Hdt. IX 108, Theogn. 659, 887, 1070 and Callinus I 2) seem to me to justify the change of οὐδέ to οὐ δέ. Hartman's correction is better: but I believe the text is sound.

μὴ οὖν κτλ. To this sentence Lach. 181 B C furnishes a near parallel. νεανίαις refers to Socrates' companions who had come from Athens, as opposed to Cephalus, Polemarchus and the others; the emphasis, as often, being on the καί clause: ‘associate with these young men, but come and visit us also.’ So also Boeckh Kl. Schr. IV p. 475. There is no sufficient reason for reading νεανίσκοις (with II and other MSS): see Introd. § 3.

καὶ μὴν κτλ. : ‘Indeed, Cephalus,’ etc. γε need not be added (with II and other MSS) after χαίρω: cf. Phaed. 84 D καὶ μήν, ὦ Σώκρατες, τἀληθῆ σοι ἐρῶ, Euthyd. 275 E 304 C al., with Jebb on Soph. O. T. 749, 1005.

τραχεῖα καὶ χαλεπή κτλ. The language (as Ast observes) is perhaps suggested by Hesiod OD. 290 ff. μακρὸς δὲ καὶ ὄρθιος οἶμος ἐς αὐτὴν | καὶ τρηχὺς τὸ πρῶτον· ἐπὴν δ’ εἰς ἄκρον ἵκηται, | ῥηιδίη δὴ ἔπειτα πέλει, χαλεπή περ ἐοῦσα. Cf. II 364 D note

ἐπὶ γήραος οὐδῷ . The phrase occurs first in the Iliad (XXII 60, XXIV 487) to denote the natural limit of the life of man. Cephalus is μάλα πρεσβύτης 328 B. The same meaning suits also in Od. XV 246 (οὐδ’ ἵκετο γήραος οὐδόν) 348 and XXIII 212, Hymn. Aphr. 106, Hes. OD. 331, Hdt. III 14 and elsewhere. Leaf can hardly (I think) be right in explaining οὐδῷ as=ὁδῷ in Il. XXII 60. γήραος is a descriptive genitive (like τέλος γήραος ἀργαλέου Mimn. Fr. 2. 6, τοῦ λογου in δόλιχον—not δολιχὸν—τοῦ λόγου Prot. 329 A), old age being itself the threshold by which we leave the House of Life. We enter as it were by one door and pass out by another. The idea underlying the phrase may be compared with Democritus' ὁ κόσμος σκηνή, ὁ βίος πάροδος· ἠλθες, εἶδες, ἀπῆλθες (Mullach Fr. Phil. Gr. I p. 356).

χαλεπὸν κτλ . χαλεπόν is neuter on account of τοῦτο in ὅ τί σοι φαίνεται τοῦτο, and τοῦ βίου is a simple partitive genitive: cf. Xen. Mem. I 6. 4 ἐπισκεψώμεθα τί χαλεπὸν ᾔσθησαι τοὐμοῦ βίου. I cannot agree with Tucker in rendering ‘disagreeable in respect of the sort of life.’ Ast takes χαλεπόν as masc. (comparing cases like III 416 B τὴν μεγίστην τῆς εὐλαβείας), but αὐτό shews that he is wrong. Translate simply ‘whether it is a painful period of life.’ It is needless to insert (with Hartman) τι after χαλεπόν: still worse is Liebhold's addition of τέλος.

ἐξαγγέλλεις : like the ἐξάγγελος in tragedy, Cephalus is the bearer of news from behind the scenes.

329A - 329D Cephalus delivers his views on old age. It is, or should be, a haven of peace; old men have themselves to blame if they are miserable.

παροιμίαν . ἥλιξ ἥλικα τέρπει ( Phaedr. 240 C).

ξυνιόντες : i.q. ὅταν ξυνίωσιν ‘whenever they come together.’ Such a use of the participle is admissible when the main verb is in the present of habitual action. ξυνόντες is a needless conjecture.

οὐδὲ ζῶντες . Soph. Ant. 1165—1167 τὰς γὰρ ἡδονὰς | ὅταν προδῶσιν ἄνδρες, οὐ τίθημ’ ἐγὼ | ζῆν τοῦτον, ἀλλ’ ἔμψυχον ἡγοῦμαι νεκρόν. Cf. also Mimn. Fr. I. 1 ff.: Sim. Fr. 71 τίς γὰρ ἁδονᾶς ἄτερ<*> θνατῶν βίος ποθεινός: Eur. Fr. 1065. Similar sentiments are very common throughout Greek literature, especially in poetry.

ἔτι ‐‐ συγγίγνεσθαι . These words are rejected by Hirschig, Cobet, and Hartman, but their genuineness is supported by the singular αὐτό in αὐτὸ ἀπέφυγον and by Plut. περὶ φιλοπλουτίας 5. 525 A ὁ Σοφοκλῆς ἐρωτηθεὶς εἰ δύναται γυναικὶ πλησιάζειν, Εὐφήμει, ἄνθρωπε, εἶπεν κτλ. In such matters Greek realism called a spade a spade. In spite of the anecdote here told, few writers have painted sadder pictures of old age than Sophocles: see for example O. C. 1235— 1238 and Fr. 684. More in keeping with the present passage is Fr. 688 οὐκ ἔστι γῆρας τῶν σοφῶν, ἐν οἷς ὁ νοῦς | θείᾳ ξύνεστιν ἡμέρᾳ τεθραμμένος.

ἀπέφυγον ‐‐ ἀποφυγών . The repetition adds a certain impressiveness to the sentence. Herwerden is in error when he ejects ἀποφυγών, which seems to have been read also by Plutarch (referred to in last note).

κατατείνουσαι is intransitive. If the meaning were (as Ast holds) transitive —man being conceived as the puppet of the desires cf. Laws 644 E—we should expect ἐπι‐ or συν‐ rather than κατατείνουσαι: see Phaed. 94 C and 98 D.

παντάπασιν κτλ. The impressive iteration is in keeping with the age and earnestness of the speaker: cf. 331 A, B.

ἐστι . Stallbaum and others eject this word, but it is not easy to see why a scribe should have inserted it, particularly in such an idiomatic position. The asyndeton before δεσποτων is regular in explanatory clauses. I read ἐστι (with A) in preference to ἔστι: the meaning ‘is possible’ does not suit, and would require ἀπαλλαγῆναι rather than ἀπηλλάχθαι. Translate ‘it is the deliverance once and for all from tyrants full many and furious.’ The grammatical subject, as in English, remains vague; it is involved in ἐπειδὰν —χαλάσωσιν. For the use of ἐστι cf. Euthyphr. 2 D φαίνεταί μοι—ἄρχεσθαι ὀρθῶς· ὀρθῶς γάρ ἐστι τῶν νέων πρότερον ἐπιμεληθῆναι. The sentence-accent falls on πολλῶν and μαινομένων and not on ἐστι. The view of old age presented here recalls the μελέτη θανάτου of the Phaedo.

εὔκολοι . Like Sophocles himself: ὁ δ’ εὔκολος μὲν ἐνθάδ’ , εὔκολος δ’ ἐκεῖ (Ar. Frogs 82).

329D - 331B Socrates further questions Cephalus. ‘Most men will say that it is your riches which make you happy in old age.’ C. ‘Character has more to do with happiness than wealth.’ S. ‘What is the chief advantage of money?’ C. ‘It enables the good man to pay his debts to gods and men before he passes into the other world.’

ἐκίνουν . κινεῖν ‘rouse’ is technical in the Socratic dialect for the stimulating of the intellect by interrogation: cf. (with Stallbaum) Lys. 223 A, Xen. Mem. IV 2. 2. See also Ar. Clouds 745.

οὐ μέντοι γε . The collocation μέντοι γε, which rarely occurs in good Greek, is condemned by Porson (on Eur. Med. 675) and others. In Plato it is found only here and in Crat. 424 C, [Sisyph.] 388 A. Here some inferior MSS omit γε. It would be easy (with Hoefer de particulis Plat. p. 38, Cobet, and Blaydes) to write οὐ μέντοι ὅσον γε, but “notanda talia potius quam mutanda.” The idiom, though exceptional, is (in my judgment) sufficiently supported (see the instances cited by Blaydes on Ar. Thesm. 709). It should also perhaps be remembered that the speaker, Cephalus, was not a native Athenian. Cf. 331 B E notes

τὸ τοῦ Θεμιστοκλέους . The story as told by Herodotus VIII 125 is probably more true, if less pointed: ὡς δὲ ἐκ τῆς Λακεδαίμονος ἀπίκετο (sc. Θεμιστοκλῆς) ἐς τὰς Ἀθήνας, ἐνθαῦτα Τιμόδημος Ἀφι<*>ναῖος—φθόνῳ καταμαργέων ἐνείκεε τὸν Θεμιστοκλέα—ὡς διὰ τὰς Ἀθήνας ἔχοι τὰ γέρεα τὰ παρὰ Λακεδαιμονίων, ἀλλ) οὐ δἰ ἑωυτόν. ὁ δὲ—εἶπε· οὕτω ἔχει τοι· οὔτ) ἂν ἐγὼ ἐὼν Βελβινίτης (Belbina was a small island about 2 miles south of Sunium) ἐτιμήθην οὕτω πρὸς Σπαρτιητέων, οὔτ’ ἂν σὺ ὤνθρωπε ἐὼν Ἀθηναῖος. The changes are not due to Plato: for τῷ in τῷ Σεριφίῳ—for which Heindorf on Charm. 155 D wrongly suggests τῳ, like Cicero's Seriphio cuidam (Cato Mai. 8)—shews that Plato's form of the story was also familiar. The Platonic version, in which Belbina has become Seriphus, and Themistocles' detractor a Seriphian, afterwards held the field.

καὶ τοῖς δή . καί is ‘also’ and δή illative.

εὔκολος ‐‐ ἑαυτῷ . The dative is used as with εὐμενής: cf. Ar. Frogs 359 μηδ’ εὔκολός ἐστι πολίταις (v.l. πολίτης). To suit the application precisely to the story we should require (1) neither would the ἐπιεικής easily endure old age with poverty, (2) nor the μὴ ἐπιεικής easily endure old age with riches. For (2) Plato substitutes ‘nor would the bad man ever attain to peace with himself by becoming rich’; thereby conveying the further idea that the bad man is not εὔκολος ἑαυτῷ under any circumstances or at any time. Richards' suggestion ἐν αὐτῷ (i.e. γήρᾳ) for ἑαυτῷ is neat, but loses sight of this additional point. The allusion to old age in the second clause, so far as it is necessary to allude to it, is contained in ποτε.

, B 8 ποἶ ἐπεκτησάμην κτλ. : ‘do you want to know what I acquired, Socrates?’ ποῖα is simply ‘what’ as in Men. 87 E σκεψώμεθα δὴ καθ’ ἕκαστον ἀναλαμβάνοντες, π οῖά ἐστιν ἃ ἡμᾶς ὠφελεῖ. ὑγίειά φαμεν καὶ ἰσχὺς καὶ κάλλος καὶ πλοῦτος δή· ταῦτα λέγομεν καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ὠφέλιμα, and in the usual τὰ ποῖα ταῦτα; There is no derision implied, as in ποῖος Κτήσιππος ( Euthyd. 291 A) and the like: had Cephalus desired to pour scorn on the suggestion, he would have said πόθεν ἐπεκτησάμην; (cf. Crat. 398 E): and it would be absurd to deride a charge to which you at once plead guilty (γέγονα χρηματιστής κτλ.). If Socrates' question had been not πότερον—τὰ πλείω παρέλαβες ἢ ἐπεκτήσω, but ποῖα ἐπεκτήσω, Cephalus would have said ὁποῖα ἐπεκτησάμην: but this idiom is inadmissible, except where the same interrogative occurs in its direct form in the original question. In view of the answer (μέσος τις κτλ.) which Cephalus gives, πόσα for ποῖα would be too precise. Of the various emendations which have been suggested, the only plausible one (in point of sense) is Richards' πότερον for ποἶ or ποῖ: this would assimilate the original and the repeated question, but is less well adapted to Cephalus' reply. Cephalus in point of fact uses an old man's privilege and accommodates his interrogator's question to his own reply. See also V 465 E note

Λυσανίας δέ . Groen van Prinsterer's suggestion (Platon. Prosopogr. p. 111) Λυσίας for Λυσανίας is at first sight plausible, since it is in harmony with the well-known Greek custom of calling grandsons after their grandfathers: but the fashion was by no means invariable: see Blümner, Gr. Privatalterth. p. 284. [Plut.] vit. Lys. 835 C also calls Cephalus son of Lysanias.

τούτοισιν . Bekker and others read τουτοισί, but there is no reason for deserting the MSS. The archaic dative in ‐οισι is tolerably often used by Plato. In the Republic alone it recurs in 345 E, 388 D, 389 B, 468 D (Homer), 560 E, 564 C, 607 B (‐αισι) (poetic): see also Schneider on III 389 B, and for the usage of inscriptions Meisterhans^{3} p. 126. In this particular passage the archaic ending suits the age of the speaker; but it should be remembered that Plato's style (at least in his more mature dialogues) is not a mere reproduction of the vernacular Attic, but also in no small measure a literary language or ‘Kunstsprache,’ in which Ionisms and poetic and archaic forms are occasionally employed: see especially Hirzel Der Dialog I pp. 246—250 notes Hirzel (ib. p. 34 note 1) gives reasons for holding that a sort of κοινὴ διάλεκτος, resembling the dialect of Herodotus, was actually spoken in certain cultivated circles at Athens in the Periclean age, e.g. by Anaxagoras and his group, by the Ionian sophists and their followers etc., and some of Plato's Ionisms may be inherited from this source. Cf. VII 533 B note

οὗ τοι ἕνεκα ‐‐ ὅτι . The reading τούτου for οὗ, though supported by Stobaeus (Flor. 94. 22), is a correction made by some one unacquainted with the idiom, which is common enough in conversational style: cf. infra 491 B ὃ μὲν πάντων θαυμαστότατον ἀκοῦσαι, ὅτι κτλ. and Ar. Frogs 108. Hartman's τοῦ τοι (interrogative) is ingenious, but unnecessary.

διπλῇ ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι . The meaning is simply ‘twice as much as the others’: cf. e.g. Laws 868 A διπλῇ τὸ βλάβος ἐκτεισάτω and 928 B ζημιούτω— διπλῇ. The ἤ is like ἤ after διπλάσιος, πολλαπλάσιος etc. If διπλῇ meant simply ‘on two grounds,’ it could not be followed by ἤ, and we should have to regard ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι as an interpolation. Cephalus expresses himself somewhat loosely, as if loving a thing on two grounds, or in two ways, were equivalent to loving it twice as much. ταύτῃ below is defined by the ὥσπερ clause, and is preferred to ὥσπερ, partly in order to correspond to διπλῇ but stiil more to suit κατὰ τὴν χρείαν. The present passage is through Aristotle (Eth. Nic. IV 2. 1120^{b} 14, cf. ib. IX 7. 1168^{a} 1—3) the source of the proverb about ‘parents and poets.’

ξυγγενέσθαι : ‘to meet’ in social intercourse, as in Ap. 41 A. ξυγγίγνεσθαι (suggested by Richards) would express habitual intercourse, which is not what Plato means to say. With the sentiment cf. Symp. 173 C ὅταν μέν τινας περὶ φιλοσοφίας λόγους ἢ αὐτὸς ποιῶμαι ἢ ἄλλων ἀκούω—ὑπερφυῶς ὡς χαίρω· ὅταν δὲ ἀλλους τινάς, ἄλλως τε καὶ τοὺς ὑμετέρους τοὺς τῶν πλουσίων καὶ χρηματιστικῶν, αὐτός τε ἄχθομαι ὑμᾶς τε τοὺς ἑταίρους ἐλεῶ, ὅτι οἴεσθε τὶ ποιεῖν οὐδὲν ποιοῦντες.

ἐπειδὰν ‐‐ τελευτήσειν : ‘when a man faces the thought that he must die,’ not (with Jowett) ‘when a man thinks himself to be near death,’ which would be ἐπειδάν τις ἐγγὺς εἶναι οἴηται τοῦ τελευτῆσαι, as Herwerden proposes to read (cf. Laws 922 C ὅταν ἤδη μέλλειν ἡγώμεθα τελευτᾶν). “Senum, non iuvenum τὸ οἴεσθαι τελευτήσειν est” (Hartman): the weakness of old age convinces us at last that we too must die. Cf. Simon. 85. 7—10 θνητῶν δ’ ὄφρα τις ἄνθος ἔχῃ πολυήρατον ἥβης | κοῦφον ἔχων θυμόν, πόλλ’ ἀτέλεστα νοεῖ· | οὔτε γὰρ ἐλπίδ’ ἔχει γηρασέμεν οὔτε θανεῖσθαι, | οὐδ’ ὑγιὴς ὅταν ᾖ, φροντίδ’ ἔχει καμάτου .

ἀδικήσαντα ‐‐ διδόναι δίκην . Plato is fond of this verbal play: cf Euthyph. 8 B and 8 E τῷ γε ἀδικοῦντι δοτέον δίκην. He who does not render justice in deeds must render justice in punishment: for the tale of justice must be made up. Note that we have here in ἀδικία and δίκη the first casual allusion to the subject of the Republic.

αὐτὸς κτλ . αὐτός=ipse s. ultro as opposed to οἱ λεγόμενοι μῦθοι. The verb is to be supplied by a kind of zeugma from μᾶλλόν τι καθορᾷ αὐτά (i.e. τὰ ἐκεῖ; or rather the predicate is accommodated to the second alternative. Cf. 344 B infra and VIII 553 C. To regard the bodily weakness of old age as in itself the cause of clearer vision of the world beyond may be in harmony with the doctrine of the Phaedo, but Cephalus is not represented as a Platonist. Tucker needlessly doubts the text.

καὶ ἐκ τῶν ὕπνων κτλ . καί is ‘both,’ not ‘and,’ and balances καὶ ζῇ: ‘many a time, like children, awakes out of sleep in terror and lives in the expectation of ill.’ For ὥσπερ οἱ παῖδες compare Phaed. 77 D, E, and for the general sentiment Arist. Eth. Nic. I 13. 1102^{b} 8—11 ἀργία γάρ ἐστιν ὁ ὕπνος τῆς φυχῆς ᾗ λέγεται σπουδαία καὶ φαύλη, πλὴν ε<*> πῃ κατὰ μικρὸν διικνοῦνταί τινες τῶν κινήσεων, καὶ ταύτῃ βελτίω γίνεται τὰ φαντάσματα τῶν ἐπιεικῶν ἢ τῶν τυχόντων.

ἡδεῖα ‐‐ γηροτρόφος . ἡδεῖα is suggested by Pindar's γλυκεῖα, and καὶ ἀγαθή, as presently appears, is not part of the quotation, but goes with ἐλπίς and is added by Plato in contrast to μετὰ κακῆς ἐλπίδος.

γηροτρόφος κτλ. : ‘to nurse him in old age, as Pindar also says.’ γηροτρόφος is best taken by itself and not with ἀγαθή .

ἀτάλλοισα κτλ . ἀτάλλω is used of rearing children, and helps out the idea of γηροτρόφος: δὶς παῖδες οἱ γέροντες. It is not clear how the fragment is to be arranged, nor to what class of Pindar's poems it belongs. See Bergk Poet. Lyr. Gr.^{4} I p. 452.

εὖ οὖν ‐‐ σφόδρα . The emphasis is quite in keeping with Cephalus' age and character; and Hartman is certainly wrong in condemning the clause: cf. 329 C, 331 B.

ὀφείλοντα ‐‐ θεῷ θυσίας τινάς . Phaed. 118 A εἶπεν, ὃ δὴ τελευταῖον ἐφθέγξατο, ὦ Κρίτων, ἔφη, τῷ Ἀσκληπιῷ ὀφείλομεν ἀλεκτρυόνα· ἀλλὰ ἀπόδοτε καὶ μὴ ἀμελήσητε. Wealth is in Cephalus' view the indispensable χορηγία ἀρετῆς.

ἀλλά γε ἓν ἀνθ) ἑνός . ἀλλά γε is extremely rare in Attic prose: in the Platonic corpus it occurs—according to the best manuscript authority—here and in Rep. VIII 543 C, Phaed. 86 E, Hipp. Maior 287 B, Phaedr. 262 A (ἀλλά γε δή), Phaed. 116 D (id.). In some of these passages ἀλλ’ ἄγε has been conjectured — wrongly, as I think (with Schneider), at all events in the passage from the Republic:—but ἀλλ’ ἄγε cannot be read in the Phaedrus and Hippias Maior. There is no a priori objection to the collocation, which is also implied in ἀλλὰ γάρ (γ’ ἄρα); and in later Greek ἀλλά γε aroused no objection. The meaning is ‘but still,’ originally ‘yes, but’: as Schneider says, “ γε in his dictionibus concedit aliquatenus praecedentia, sed magis urget sequentia.” There is perhaps also a dramatic motive for putting ἀλλά γε into the mouth of Cephalus: see on οὐ μέντοι γε in 329 E. Against the reading of Stobaeus ( Flor. 94. 22) ἀλλὰ ἕν γε ἀνθ’ ἑνός, we may urge the further objection that the idiomatic phrase ἓν ἀνθ’ ἑνός (‘setting one thing against another,’ as Jowett correctly translates it) seems to depend for its peculiar force (like μόνος μόνῳ and the like) on the juxtaposition of its two parts: cf. Phil. 63 B (ἓν ἀνθ’ ἑνός) and Laws 705 B (ἀνθ’ ἑνὸς ἕν). The passage quoted by Stallbaum from Euripides Orest. 651 ἓν μὲν τόδ’ ἡμῖν ἀνθ’ ἑνὸς δοῦναί σε χρή is quite different and does not mean ‘hoc praecipue,’ but ‘one thing in return for one thing,’ as is clear from lines 646 f.

οὐκ ἐλάχιστον is not adverbial (as Hartman and others suppose), but belongs to τοῦτο: ‘setting one thing against another, I should regard this as not the least important object for which wealth is most useful to a man of sense.’ The emphasis is characteristic: cf. 329 C, 331 A.

, D The question ‘What is Justice?’ is for the first time raised. Is it simply to speak the truth and pay what you owe? Polemarchus succeeds to Cephalus' part in the conversation.

τὴν ἀλήθειαν κτλ. This theory of justice or righteousness is deduced from the words of Cephalus: τὸ γὰρ μηδὲ ἄκοντά τινα ἐξαπατῆσαι ἢ ψεύσασθαι being generalised into ἀλήθειαν (truthfulness, cf. τἀληθῆ λέγειν below), and μηδ’ αὖ ὀφείλοντα ἢ θεῷ θυσίας τινὰς ἢ ἀνθρώπῳ χρήματα into ἀποδιδόναι ἄν τίς τι παρά του λάβῃ. Cf. (with Wohlrab) Mimn. Fr. 8 ἀληθείη δὲ παρέστω | σοὶ καὶ ἐμοί, πάντων χρῆμα δικαιότατον. It is simply Truth and Honesty, the two chief ingredients in the popular conception of morality.

ἁπλῶς οὕτως : ‘quite without qualification.’ For this idiomatic οὕτως cf. ῥᾳδιως οὕτω II 377 B note

οἷον τοιόνδε λέγω . Similar points of casuistry are raised in Socrates' conversation with Euthydemus ap. Xen. Mem. IV 2 12 ff.

οὐδ’ αὖ κτλ. I have removed the comma before οὐδέ, because the ὁ in ὁ ἀποδιδούς covers both participles, the person in both cases being the same.

ἔφη . There is not sufficient reason for changing the best supported reading ἔφη, ἐγω to ἔφην ἐγώ. Polemarchus is throughout the introduction represented as a vivacious person: e.g. in ὁρᾷς οὖν ἡμᾶς—ὅσοι ἐσμέν (327 C), and in the lively emphasis with which he breaks in just above: πάνυ μὲν οὖν—εἴπερ γέ τι χρὴ Σιμωνίδῃ πείθεσθαι. True to his name, he is first to mingle in the fray. It is this φιλολογία on the part of his son which draws a smile from Cephalus: over-much προθυμία always struck the Greeks as laughable: cf. e.g. Eur. Ion 1172 ff. The words in which Socrates addresses Polemarchus σὺ ὁ τοῦ λόγου κληρονόμος are also somewhat more appropriate if the title was self-chosen. Cephalus leaves the argument to be carried on by the assembled company (for ὑμῖν does not mean Polemarchus and Socrates alone): whereupon Polemarchus, seizing hold on the word παραδίδωμι in its sense of ‘transmit,’ ‘bequeath,’ playfully claims the right to inherit his λόγος as Cephalus' eldest son and heir. It may be added that ἔφη ἐγώ was much more likely to be changed to ἔφην ἐγώ than vice versa. With the Greek compare Phaed. 89 C ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐμέ, ἔφη, τὸν Ἰόλεων παρακάλει.

ἅμα ᾔει πρὸς τὰ ἱερά . Soph. Fr. 206 γήρᾳ πρεπόντως σῷζε την εὐφημίαν. The editors quote Cicero Epp. ad Att. IV 16. 3 “credo Platonem vix putasse satis consonum fore, si hominem id aetatis in tam longo sermone diutius retinuisset.” Cf. the words of Theodorus in Theaet. 162 B οἶμαι ὑμᾶς πείσειν ἐμὲ μὲν <*>ᾶν θεᾶσθαι καὶ μὴ ἕλκειν πρὸς τὸ γυμνάσιον, σκληρὸν ἤδη ὄντα, τῷ δὲ δὴ νεωτέρῳ τε<*>καὶ ὑγροτέρῳ ὄντι προσπαλαίειν. It is worthy of note that the entrance and exit of Cephalus are alike associated with the services of religion: see 328 C and Introd. § 2.

331E - 332B The second half of the definition of Justice which Socrates deduced from Cephalus' remarks is now taken up and discussed in the form in which it was expressed by Simonides— ‘rendering to each man his due.’ In the present section Socrates confines himself to eliciting the meaning of ‘due.’ As between friends, it is something good; as between enemies, something evil; in general terms it is that which is suitable or appropriate. Simonides in fact meant that Justice consists in doing good to friends and ill to foes.

ff. By δικαιοσύνη, it should be noted, is here meant man's whole duty to his fellows, as ὁσιότης is right conduct in relation to the gods. In this wide sense the word was commonly understood by the Greeks (cf. Theog. 147 ἐν δὲ δικαιοσύνῃ συλλήβδην πᾶσ’ ἀρετὴ ἔνι); and even in the scientific study of ethics, the word still retained the same wider connotation, side by side with its more specific meanings (Arist. Eth. Nic. v 3. 1129^{b} 11 ff.). The view that Justice consists in doing good to friends and harm to enemies, is a faithful reflection of prevalent Greek morality (Luthardt Die Antike Ethik p. 19). It is put into the mouth of Simonides as a representative of the poets, on whose writings the young were brought up: cf. Prot. 316 D, 325 E, 338 E ff. As typical illustrations we may cite: Hes. OD. 707 ff.; Solon 13. 5; Theog. 337 f.; Archilochus Fr. 65; Pindar Pyth. 2. 83— 85; Aesch. P.V. 1041 f.; Soph. Ant. 643 f.; Eurip. Med. 807—810; Meno in Plat. Men. 71 E αὕτη <*>στὶν ἀνδρὸς ἀρετή, ἱκανὸν εἶναι τὰ τῆς πόλεως πράττειν, καὶ πράττοντα τοὺς μὲν φίλους εὖ ποιεῖν, τοὺς δ) ἐχθροὺς κακῶς: cf. also Crito 49 B, Xen. Cyr. I 6. 31 ff. and Hiero II 2. Socrates himself in Mem. II 3. 14 represents the same principle as generally accepted in Greece: καὶ μὴν πλείστου γε δοκεῖ ἀνὴρ ἐπαίνου ἄξιος εἶναι, ὃς ἂν φθάνῃ τοὺς μὲν πολεμίους κακῶς ποιῶν, τοὺς δὲ φίλους εὐεργετῶν: cf. also ibid. II 6. 35. These references, which might easily be multiplied, shew that Plato is not, as Teichmüller supposes (Lit. Fehd. 1 p. 22note), specifically refuting Xenophon, but rather criticising an all but universal view. See Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. pp. 246 ff. It is seldom that a voice is raised in protest, as by Pittacus (according to D. L. I 4. 78) in the memorable words φίλον μὴ λέγειν κακῶς, ἀλλὰ μηδὲ ἐχθρόν. Plato was the first Greek who systematically protested against the doctrine, and supported his protest with arguments drawn from a loftier view of man's nature and work.

ὁ τοῦ λόγου κληρονόμος . See on παῖδες ἐκείνου τοῦ ἀνδρός II 368 A.

τὰ ὀφειλόμενα ‐‐ ἐστι . Probably some current saying attributed to Simonides: there is nothing like it in his fragments. The words do not profess to be a definition of justice: if they did, τό would appear before δίκαιον. It is not likely that Simonides himself explained this particular saying as Polemarchus does, although he would not have disapproved of the explanation. In Xen. Hier. II 2 he is represented as saying that tyrants are ἱκανώτατοι—κακῶσαι μὲν ἐχθρούς, ὀνῆσαι δὲ φίλους. The words of Socrates σὺ μέν, ὦ Πολέμαρχε, ἴσως γιγνώσκεις, ἐγὼ δὲ ἀγνοῶ tend to fix the responsibility of the explanation on Polemarchus alone. Probably Simonides (if the saying is his) meant no more than that we should ‘render unto Caesar the things which are Caesar's.’ Plato virtually confesses in 332 B that his interpretation is forced.

ἔμοιγε : said with confidence, as Σιμωνίδῃ γε with emphasis and some mockery: with you one might disagree, but not with Simonides.

σοφὸς ‐‐ θεῖος . Cf. Prot. 315 E. σοφός and θεῖος were fashionable words of praise: in the mouth of Socrates they are generally ironical. Plato's own connotation of the word θεῖος is given in Men. 99 C οὐκοῦν, ὦ Μένων, ἄξιον τούτους θείους καλεῖν τοὺς ἄνδρας, οἵτινες νοῦν μὴ ἔχοντες πολλὰ καὶ μεγάλα κατορθοῦσιν ὧν πράττουσι καὶ λέγουσιν; Ὀρθῶς ἂν καλοῖμεν θείους τε, οὓς νῦν δὴ ἐλέγομεν χρησμῳδοὺς καὶ μάντεις καὶ τοὺς ποιητικοὺς ἅπαντας· καὶ τοὺς πολιτικοὺς οὐχ ἥκιστα τούτων φαῖμεν ἂν θείους τε εἶναι καὶ ἐνθουσιάζειν, ἐπίπνους ὄντας καὶ κατεχομένους ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ, ὅταν κατορθῶσι λέγοντες πολλὰ καὶ μεγάλα πράγματα, μηδὲν εἰδότες ὦν λέγουσι.

ἀνήρ . I formerly read ἁνήρ, but ἀνὴρ (in the predicate) is satisfactory enough: cf. Men. 99 D θεῖος ἀνήρ, φασίν, οὗτος.

παρακαταθεμένου κτλ. Xen. Cyr. I 6. 31 ff. καὶ ἔτι προβὰς (sc. ἐπὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων προγόνων γενόμενός ποτε ἀνὴρ διδάσκαλος τῶν παίδων ) ταῦτα ἐδίδασκεν ὡς καὶ τοὺς φίλους δίκαιον εἴη ἐξαπατᾶν, ἐπί γε ἀγαθῷ, καὶ κλέπτειν τὰ τῶν φίλων, ἐπί γε ἀγαθῷ: Mem. IV 2. 17 ff.

ὁτῳοῦν is to be taken with παρακαταθεμένου and not with ἀπαιτοῦντι.

καίτοι γε ὀφειλόμενον . There is the same dispute about καίτοι γε as about μέντοι γε and ἀλλά γε (see on 329 E, 331 B). καίτοι γε has the best MS authority in its favour here and in IV 440D: elsewhere in Plato it is not well-attested except in the νοθευόμενοι, where it occurs Min. 318 E, Axioch. 364 B, 368 E. καίτοι γε is also found occasionally in Aristophanes, Xenophon, Aristotle, and the orators: see Blaydes on Ar. Ach. 611, and the Lex. Arist. Many distinguished critics would emend the idiom everywhere; but the instances are far too numerous for such a drastic policy. The difference between καίτοι ὀφειλόμενόν γε που (which Hoefer de part. Plat. p. 38 would read) and καίτοι γε ὀφειλόμενον would seem to be that in the former more stress is thrown on the word ὀφειλόμενον, in the latter on τοι. καίτοι γε is ‘and surely’ rather than ‘quamquam’ (as Kugler holds de part. τοι eiusque comp. ap. Pl. usu p. 20), cf. IV 440 D note The periphrasis ὀφειλόμενον—ἐστι is used of course to correspond to τὰ ὀφειλόμενα in E above: such periphrases (the principle of which is explained in Euthyph. 9 E ff.) are extremely common in Plato. See W. J. Alexander in A. J. Ph. IV pp. 299 ff.

ἀποδοτέον ‐‐ ἀπαιτοῖ : ‘well, but we were not on any account to make restoration at the time when the claimant is’—according to the Greek idiom ‘was’ —‘mad.’ Socrates, as in ὅπερ ἄρτι ἐλέγομεν, is appealing to the admissions made by the πατὴρ τοῦ λόγου (in 331 C), as he is justified in doing when addressing his heir. ὁπότε is not—as τότε shews —the particle of ‘indefinite frequency,’ but stands for ὅτε of the direct: the whole clause τότε ὁπότε τις μὴ σωφρόνως ἀπαιτοῖ is thus in the oratio obliqua of self-quotation and exactly corresponds to εἰ μανεὶς ἀπαιτοῖ in 331 C. Madvig's ἀπαιτεῖ for ἀπαιτοῖ is therefore unnecessary. Goodwin MT. p. 213 explains the optative otherwise, but not (I think) rightly.

ἀγαθὸν μέν τι δρᾶν sc. αὐτούς, for τοῖς φίλοις depends on ὀφείλειν, to which τοὺς φίλους is the subject.

μανθάνω ‐‐ ὅτι . ὅτι is ‘because,’ not ‘that,’ as always (I believe) in Plato's use of this phrase: cf. Euthyph. 3 B, 9 B and infra III 402 E, VIII 568 E. For the sentiment cf. (with J. and C.) Xen. Mem. IV 2 17 ff.

ὀφείλεται δέ . See cr. n. In explanatory clauses of this kind δέ and not δέ γε is the correct usage: cf. infra 337 D, 344 A. I therefore follow Bekker in reading δέ.

προσήκει . ὀφειλόμενον has thus been equated with προσῆκον by means of the special cases τὸ τοῖς φίλοις ὀφειλόμενον and τὸ τοῖς ἐχθροῖς ὀφειλόμενον. τὸ προσῆκον is a more general term and is the regular word in classical Greek for ‘proper conduct’ or ‘duty’ (as the Greeks conceived it), the Stoic καθῆκον being very rarely used in this sense by good authors.

332C - 336A The definition is further elucidated down to 333 B: and thereafter Socrates begins to criticise it.

In the first place, the definition is made more precise by representing justice as an art, whose business it is to benefit friends and injure foes (332 C, D). The question is then raised—how does the art of justice do good to friends and harm to foes? By the analogy of other arts Polemarchus is induced to say that Justice benefits friends and harms enemies (1) by fighting with them and against them in time of war, and (2) in connexion with partnerships concerned with money in time of peace (332 D—333 B). The explanation of Simonides' saying is now complete.

Socrates first directs his attack against (2). In cases where money has to be used, it is not justice, but some other art, that is useful for the required purpose: in other words justice is (in time of peace) useful only in dealing with useless or unused money and other unused objects: which is an unworthy view of the art (333 B— 333 E). Further the analogy of the other arts shews that the art of justice, if it is the art of keeping money safe, is also the art of stealing money—always provided that it does so for the benefit of friends and the injury of foes (333 E—334 B). Polemarchus, in bewilderment, reiterates his definition in the old form, and Socrates thereupon starts a fresh line of argument. By ‘friends’ and ‘foes’ Polemarchus means those who seem to us good and bad, not those who are so. But as bad men often seem to us good and good men bad, Justice will often consist in benefiting bad men, and harming good, i.e. in wronging those who do no wrong; or conversely, if we refuse to accept this conclusion, and hold that it is just to benefit the just and hurt the unjust, it will often be just to hurt friends and benefit enemies, viz. when our friends are bad, and our enemies good (334 C—334 E).

Polemarchus hereupon amends his explanation of ‘friend’ and ‘ enemy’ into ‘him who both seems and is good,’ and ‘him who both seems and is bad’: and the definition now becomes, ‘It is just to benefit a friend if he is good, and injure an enemy if he is bad (335 A).’

To this amended definition Socrates now addresses himself. He first proves by the analogy of the other arts that to hurt a human being is to make him worse in respect of human excellence, i.e. Justice, in other words to make him more unjust, and afterwards by means of similar analogical reasoning, that no one can be made more unjust by one who is just. Simonides' saying, if Polemarchus has explained it aright, was more worthy of a tyrant than of him (335 A—336 A).

ff. The seventh chapter is a good example of Plato's extreme care in composition. A careful study will shew that the structural basis consists of two illustrations followed by an application: this occurs seven times before the conclusion of the argument is reached. Similar, but less elaborate, examples of symmetrical structure are pointed out in my notes on Crito 49 B, Prot. 325 D.

ᾐνίξατο ‐‐ ποιητικῶς . Theaet. 194 C τὸ τῆς ψυχῆς κέαρ, ὃ ἔφη Ὅμηρος αἰνιττόμενος τὴν τοῦ κηροῦ ὁμοιότητα. The present passage is no more serious than that in the Theaetetus: Plato knew that Simonides merely meant to say ‘it is just to render what you owe.’

ἀλλὰ τί ὄει ; is a rhetorical question, which needs and receives no answer, like τί μήν; and τί μὴν δοκεῖς; ( Theaet. 162 B). It is equivalent to ‘of course.’ For the use of τί Stallbaum compares Gorg. 480 B τί γὰρ δὴ φῶμεν; to which there is also no reply. This explanation is preferable to that of Madvig, who gives ἀλλὰ τί οἴει to Socrates, and takes ἔφη as equivalent to συνέφη— a harsh usage in a narrated dialogue, and not likely to have been intended by Plato, because sure to be misunderstood. Liebhold's ἄλλο τι οἴει; <οὐκ> ἔφη has everything against it.

ὦ πρὸς Διὸς κτλ. ‘In the name of heaven, said I, if any one then had asked him’ etc. ‘what reply do you think he would have made to us?’ ὦ before πρὸς Διός is (as Schanz holds) an interjection, and does not require a vocative to follow it: cf. Euthyd. 287 A, 290 E. It is tempting (with Tucker) to take ὦ πρὸς Διός as part of the address to Simonides (cf. Euthyd. 294 B ὦ πρὸς τῶν θεῶν, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, ὦ Διονυσόδωρε—αὐτὼ τῷ ὄντι πάντα ἐπίστασθον). But on this view the presence of εἰ οὖν—ἤρετο forms a difficulty, and ὦ πρὸς Διός may very well go with τί ἂν οἴει— ἀποκρίνασθαι.

ὀφειλόμενον καὶ προσῆκον . It is characteristic of Plato to combine the thing explained and the explanation itself in this way: see my note on Prot. 314 A. Here ὀφειλόμενον is necessary to enable Simonides to recognise his own saying.

ἰατρικὴ ‐‐ μαγειρική . In Gorg. 463 A ff. Plato refuses the name of ‘art’ to ὀψοποιική: it is but an ἐμπειρία or τριβή, a sort of bastard adjunct to ἰατρική, as κομμωτική is to γυμναστική. Here, where less precision is required, both are regarded as τέχναι.

εἶεν according to Timaeus ( Lexicon s. v.) expresses συγκατάθεσις μὲν τῶν εἰρημένων, συναφὴ δὲ πρὸς τὰ μέλλοντα. It rarely expresses συγκατάθεσις (‘assent’) and no more: see on IV 436 C. The word was pronounced εἶἑν with intervocalic aspiration (Uhlig in Fl. Jahrb. 1880 pp. 790 ff.) and may possibly be a compound of εἷα and ἕν (used as in ἓν μὲν τόδ’ ἤδη τῶν τριῶν παλαισμάτων Aesch. Eum. 589). εἶἑν is the usual orthography in Paris A, and has left some traces also in the Bodleian MS e.g. Gorg. 466 C.

τέχνη δικαιοσύνη . The Socratic view that Justice is an art—a view that dominates the whole of the conversation w<*> Polemarchus—is thus introduced quite incidentally.

τὸ ‐‐ λέγει . Cf. Xen. Hiero II 2 (cited above on 331 E).

τί δέ; ὁ δίκαιος κτλ. This punctuation throws more emphasis on ὁ δίκαιος than τί δὲ ὁ δίκαιος; which appears in some editions. It is therefore to be preferred in introducing the application of the two illustrations. So also below in 333 A τί δὲ δή; τὴν δικαιοσύνην κτλ.

προσπολεμεῖν explains ἐχθροὺς βλάπτειν as ξυμμαχεῖν explains φίλους ὠφελεῖν. Ast's προπολεμεῖν (a conjecture of Stephanus) would leave ἐχθ<*>οὺς βλάπτειν unrepresented. Stephanus' conjecture was natural enough with the wrong reading καὶ ξυμμαχεῖν, which Ast also followed. For ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ Hartman demands ἔμοιγε δοκεῖν; but cf. 333 B, Crito 43 D, Phaed. 108 D, Menex. 236 B. These cases shew that δοκεῖ can be used without ὡς: and ἐμοὶ (ἔμοιγε) δοκεῖν does not occur in the Republic (Grünenwald in Schanz's Beitr. <*>ur hist. Synt. d. gr. Spr. II 3 p. 12).

ξυμβολαια are contracts where money is involved. Polemarchus (as in εἰς ἀργυρίου in B below), in harmony with the natural meaning of Simonides' saying, thinks first of pecuniary dealings as the sphere in which δικαιοσύνη acts. Socrates substitutes for ξυμβόλαια the more general term κοινωνήματα, in order once more to introduce the analogy of the arts.

εἰς τίνα δὴ κοινωνίαν is idiomatic for εἰς τίνος δὴ κοινωνίαν. Compare VIII 556 C ἢ ἐν ὁδῶν πορείαις ἢ ἐν ἄλλαις τισὶ κοινωνίαις and τὴν τιμὴν ταύτην (where the English idiom would expect τὴν τιμὴν ταύτης) in II 371 E. In spite of εἰς κρουμάτων and εἰς ἀργυρίου, it is not necessary to read (with Richards) τίνος.

παρακαταθέσθαι καὶ σῶν εἶναι . The double expression is necessary to explain κοινῇ χρῆσθαι: the κοινωνία arises because one deposits the money and by the other it is kept safe.

ἄχρηστον ‐‐ χρήσιμος . ἄχρηστος fluctuates between ‘unused’ and ‘useless’: the latter sense is predominant here and gives an epigrammatic tone to the sentence (cf. ἐν μὲν χρήσει ἄχρηστος, ἐν δὲ ἀχρηστίᾳ χρήσιμος in D). It is noticeable that Plato does not take into account the possibility of money being deposited at interest: in this case the money could not be said to be useless.

καὶ κοινῇ καὶ ἰδίᾳ : not ‘to the individual and to the state,’ but ‘both in dealings with others, and in personal concerns.’ The words καὶ ἰδίᾳ are, strictly speaking, irrelevant, for it is with κοινωνήματα (in the widest sense) that we are concerned. They are to be regarded merely as a rhetorical amplification for the sake of emphasis: cf. infra 350 A, 351 A notes

οὐκ ἂν οὖν κτλ. See cr. n. Some may think that we should read οὐκοῦν (with the majority of MSS) and cancel εἴη after σπουδαῖον (so also Vind. D), understanding ἐστι. The accidental omission of ἄν is however not uncommon in Plato's MSS: see on IV 437 B.

οὗτος καὶ φυλάξασθαι . Because knowledge of anything implies knowledge also of its opposite, according to the usual Socratic view. See Phaed. 97 D οὐδὲν ἄλλο σκοπεῖν προσήκειν ἄνθρωπον—ἀλλ’ ἢ τὸ ἄριστον καὶ τὸ βέλτιστον· ἀναγκαῖον δὲ εἶναι τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον καὶ τὸ χεῖρον εἰδέναι, Charm. 166 E, Hipp. Min. 367 A ff. See also Stewart's Notes on the Nicomachean Ethics Vol. I p. 378.

φυλάξασθαι κτλ. See cr. n. With the emendation in the text, the argument is as follows: (1) he who can πατάξαι, can φυλάξασθαι: (2) he who can φυλάξασθαι (νόσον), can λαθεῖν ἐμποιήσας ( νόσον): (3) he who can κλέψαι (τὰ τῶν πολεμίων), is a good φύλαξ of an army. Thus the predicate of each step in the argument corresponds to the subject of the step next following: for λαθεῖν ἐμποιήσας (νόσον) is to be taken as parallel to κλέψαι (τὰ τῶν πολεμίων). The argument is unsound, and not intended to be serious: it is enough that it suffices to bewilder Polemarchus. For a further discussion on this passage see App. II.

στρατοπέδου γε κτλ. The στρατηγός must be both φυλακτικος τε καὶ κλέπτης according to Socrates in Xen. Mem. III 1. 6.

κλέπτειν and κλέμμα were used (especially by Spartans) with reference to military operations involving surprise and stealth (Classen on Thuc. v 9. 5).

κλέπτης ‐‐ ἀναπέφανται . Cf. Hipp. Min. 365 C ff., where this view is worked out at length, ib. 369 B ἀναπέφανται ὁ αὐτὸς ὢν ψευδής τε καὶ ἀληθής and Xen. Mem. IV 2. 20 ff. ἀναπέφανται, as J. and C. remark, expresses an unexpected result—here a paradox. Like ὁ ἑκὼν ἁμαρτάνων ἀμείνων, the conclusion is a logical inference from the Socratic identification of virtue and knowledge, made without regard to experience.

ἀγαπᾷ , ‘esteems,’ is said with reference to ἐσθλόν in Hom. Od. XIX 395 f. μητρὸς ἑῆς πατέρ’ ἐσθλόν, ὃς ἀνθρώπους ἐκέκαστο | κλεπτοσύνῃ θ’ ὅρκῳ τε. The suggested ἄγαται for ἀγαπᾷ τε would be too strong: see Symp. 180 B μᾶλλον— θαυμάζουσιν καὶ ἄγανται—ὅταν ὁ ἑρώμενος τὸν ἐραστὴν ἀγαπᾷ, where the meaning of ἀγαπᾷ is shewn by οὕτω περὶ πολλοῦ ἐποιεῖτο in 180 A.

τοῦτο ‐‐ ἔτι . So Euthyphro (15 B) harks back to his first definition of piety (6 E) after he has been refuted by Socrates. Cf. also VII 515 E note

δοκεῖ does double duty, first with τοῦτο and then with δικαιοσύνη: cf. VI 493 A, VII 517 B, 525 B, 530 B and (with Stallbaum) Ap. 25 B. Hartman needlessly doubts the text.

φίλους δὲ λέγεις κτλ. The same mode of argument recurs in 339 B ff. Cf. also Hipp. Maior 284 D.

φίλοι κτλ. Schneider rightly observes that κατὰ δὴ τὸν σὸν λόγον below tends to shew that ἀλλ’ ὅμως —βλάπτειν is interrogative. The argument is in the form of a dilemma: either a it is just to injure those who do us no injustice (and benefit those who do), or b it is just to injure friends and benefit foes. The first alternative is immoral (πονηρός), and the second directly opposed to Simonides' view. Socrates suppresses the words which I have put in brackets, because they lessen rather than increase the immorality of the conclusion: the second alternative is expressed in full as the αὐτὸ τοὐναντίον ἢ τὸν Σιμωνίδην ἔφαμεν λέγειν .

ὅσοι κτλ. : not ‘those of mankind who are in error’ (J. and C.) but ‘those who have mistaken their men’: cf. Phaedr. 257 D τοῦ ἑταίρου συχνὸν διαμαρτάνεις. So also Schneider, and Davies and Vaughan.

πονηροὶ γὰρ κτλ. Stallbaum (followed by D. and V.) wrongly takes αὐτοῖς as ‘in their eyes.’ The reasoning is difficult only from its brevity. If it is δίκαιον βλάπτειν ἀδίκους, and men sometimes suppose that a man is good when he is bad (πονηροὶ γὰρ αὐτοῖς εἰσὶν ‘for they have bad friends’), then since friend has been defined as one whom we suppose to be good (334 C), it is sometimes δίκαιον βλάπτειν φίλους. Stallbaum's view is quite inconsistent with the definition of friends in 334 C as οὓς ἄν τις ἡγῆται χρηστούς.

τὸν φίλον καὶ ἐχθρόν . Hartman (with some inferior MSS) wishes to insert τόν before ἐχθρόν; but cf. infra III 400 D and many other examples cited by himself. To pronounce them all corrupt is to destroy the basis on which our knowledge of Platonic idiom rests.

τὸν δοκοῦντά τε ‐‐ καὶ τὸν ὄντα . The meaning required—‘he who both seems and is good’—would be more correctly expressed by τὸν δοκοῦντά τε—καὶ ὄντα (so Ast and others), but “aliquid tribuendum interpositis ἧ δ’ ὅς, quae negligentiam repetendi, si est negligentia, saltem excusant” (Schneider, who compares also infra 341 B ποτέρως λεγεις τὸν ἄρχοντά τε καὶ τὸν κρείττονα). In τὸν δὲ δοκοῦντα μέν, ὄντα δὲ μή Polemarchus expresses himself more accurately.

ὁ ἀγαθός ‐‐ ὁ πονηρός . Socrates unfairly neglects the δοκῶν, although according to Polemarchus' amended definition the ἀγαθός who seemed πονηρός would not be a friend, nor the πονηρός who seemed ἀγαθός an enemy. Polemarchus' theory indeed points to a division of men into three classes: friends, enemies, and those who are neither (viz. those who seem good and are bad, and those who seem bad and are good). The somewhat ideal view that the ἀγαθός is φίλος and the πονηρὸς ἐχθρός is genuinely Socratic (cf. Mem. II 6. 14 ff.): it is part of the wider view that all men desire the good ( Symp. 206 A, Gorg. 467 C ff.).

προσθεῖναι ‐‐ βλάπτειν . ἤ after τῷ δικαίῳ must mean ‘or in other words’: cf. infra 349 E πλεονεκτεῖν ἢ ἀξιοῦν πλέον ἔχειν and Phaed. 85 D ἐπὶ βεβαιοτέρου ὀχήματος, ἢ λόγου θείου τινός (so the Bodleian, but ἤ is cancelled by many editors). The late expression Φαίδων ἢ περὶ ψυχῆς involves essentially the same use of ἤ. .The clause ὡς—κακῶς is summed up in τούτῳ, and the whole sentence means: ‘do you wish us to make an addition to our account of justice, or in other words to say now—in addition to our original definition where we said it was just to do good to friends and harm to enemies—that it is just to do good to friends if they are good etc.’ This explanation is (I think) the least vulnerable one, if the text is to be retained. With προσθεῖναι used absolutely cf. 339 B. For other views see App. III.

ἔστιν ἄρα κτλ. Cf. Crito 49 A ff., Corg. 469 B, [περὶ ἀρετῆς] 376 E. This chapter contains the only element of permanent ethical interest and value in the discussion with Polemarchus—the only element, moreover, which reappears in a later book of the Republic (11 379 B). The underlying principle—that κακῶς ποιεῖν = κακὸν ποιεῖν—is in accordance with the traditional Greek view of life. For illustrations we may cite Od. XVIII 136 f. τοῖος γὰρ νόος ἐστὶν ἐπιχθονίων ἀνθρώπων | οἷον ἐπ’ ἦμαρ ἄγῃσι πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, Arch. Fr. 70 (Bergk), and Simon. Fr. 5. 10—14 ἄνδρα δ’ οὐκ ἔστι μὴ οὐ κακὸν ἔμμεναι | ὃν ἀμάχανος συμφορὰ καθέλοι· | πράξας μὲν εὖ πᾶς ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός, | κακὸς δ’ εἰ κακῶς <τις>, | κἀπὶ πλεῖστον ἄριστοι, τούς κε θεοὶ φιλῶσιν. The same point of view is manifest in the transition of meaning in μοχθηρός and πονηρός from ‘laborious,’ ‘afflicted’ (e.g. Hesiod Fr. 95. 1 Göttling) to ‘depraved.’ Conversely, prosperity makes one morally better, as in Solon 13. 69 f. τῷ δὲ κακῶς ἔρδοντι θεὸς περὶ πάντα τίθησιν | συντυχίην ἀγαθήν, ἔκλυσιν ἀφροσύνης, and in the frequent identification of εὐπραγία or εὐδαιμονία with εὖ πράττειν e.g. Charm. 172 A, 173 D, Alc. I 116 B, Arist. Eth. Nic. I 8. 1098^{b} 20. It is by the analogy of the arts that Socrates in this chapter seeks to prove, first the identification κακῶς ποιεῖν =κακὸν ποιεῖν, and second that the good man cannot harm others: the Socratic conception of right conduct as an art is still predominant. It is important to observe that it was by means of this Socratic weapon that Plato achieved this noble anticipation of Christian ethical theory (St Matth. 5. 44 al.). Cf. also Gorg. 472 D ff.

ἀνθρώπους δὲ κτλ. Cf. 352 E— 353 E.

οὐκ ἦν σοφὸς ‐‐ εἰπών . Teichmüller (Lit. Fehd. I p. 22 note) finds in this an allusion to Xenophon, who puts into the mouth of Socrates (addressing Critobulus in Mem. II 6. 35) the words ἔγνωκας ἀνδρὸς ἀρετὴν εἶναι, νικᾶν τοὺς μὲν φίλους εὖ ποιοῦντα, τοὺς δὲ ἐχθροὺς κακῶς: but the reference is only to 331 E σοφὸς γὰρ καὶ θεῖος ἀνήρ. The presents φησίν and νοεῖ are used in a general way, because such a theory and such an interpretation of it might be held by any one at any time: in οὐκ ἦν σοφὸς ὁ ταῦτα εἰπών the time is changed to the past to suggest οὐκ ἦν Σιμωνίδης ὁ ταῦτα εἰπών (Simonides being σοφός 331 E). But for ὁ ταῦτα εἰπών, ἦν would be ἐστι. It is a mistake to take ἦν as ‘is after all’: ἦν is hardly so used in Plato without ἄρα, nor is Phaedr. 230 A (cited by Goodwin MT. p. 13) an example of that idiom.

ἐάν τις αὐτὸ φῇ ‐‐ Σιμωνίδην : as Xenophon virtually does in Hier. II 2: see 331 E note

τῶν σοφῶν τε καὶ μακαρίων ἀνδρῶν . μακάριος is somewhat stronger than θεῖος, which it suggests, μάκαρες being a usual epithet of gods. The whole phrase is intended to carry us back to 331 E σοφὸς γὰρ καὶ θεῖος ἀνήρ. Ast's view that μακαρίων means “qui ante nostram aetatem floruerunt,” as if ‘sainted,’ misses the allusion to 331 E, and is a little far-fetched: it is enough that μακάριος conveys the same ironical commendation as θεῖος: cf. (with Stallbaum) Men. 71 A.

ἐγὼ γοῦν . See cr. n. With Hartman, I adopt Bekker's restoration: cf. VII 527 D. For γοῦν A everywhere writes γοὖν .

Περιάνδρου κτλ. Periander, Xerxes and Perdiccas are taken as types of tyrants, and no tyrant is σοφός (Rep. IX 587 D). It is noticeable that Periander does not appear in the list of the seven wise men in Prot. 343 A. The expedition of Xerxes against Greece is cited by Callicles in Gorg. 483 D in connexion with the doctrine that might is right. In Περδίκκου the allusion is to Perdiccas II, father of Archelaus ( Gorg. 471 B): he died late in 414 or early in 413, three years before the probable date of action of the Republic (Introd. § 3), after proving himself a fickle friend and foe to the Athenians during the Peloponnesian war. Ismenias is mentioned again in Men. 90 A as having become rich δόντος τινός—<*> νῦν νεωστὶ εἰληφὼς τὰ Πολυκράτους χρήματα. There can be no doubt that he is to be identified with the Ismenias who (see Xen. Hell. III 5. 1) in 395 took money from Timocrates the Rhodian, envoy of the Persian King, in order to stir up war against Sparta, and who in 382, when the Spartans had seized the Cadmea, was condemned on this charge among others (Xen. Hell. V 2. 35; Plut. Pelop. 5. 2). Plato implies that Ismenias kept enough Persian gold to enrich himself. he was no true Greek if he did not. But what is meant by saying that he had received the money of Polycrates? This question has been much discussed. Possibly ‘the money of Polycrates’ (with allusion, of course, to the riches of the Samian tyrant) was a sarcastic expression current in Athens for ‘the money of Timocrates’: this is perhaps the more likely as we are informed that the Athenians got no share of it themselves (Hell. III 5. 2). Plato would naturally avail himself of such a political gibe to express his dislike of a man who took gold from the natural enemy of Greece (Rep. V 470 C) to stir up not war, but sedition (ib. 470 B), and withdraw Agesilaus from fighting with the barbarian: for his political ideal in foreign policy was that of Cimon. See also on V 471 B. It is not however likely, I think, that the present passage was written after Ismenias' death, for Plato is not given to reviling his contemporaries after their death. That the other three persons cited by Plato were already dead would only make his reproof of the living more marked and scathing. The present passage—so far as it goes—is on the whole in favour of Teichmüller's view (Lit. Fehd. I p. 25) that the first book of the Republic was written soon after 395, when the disgraceful affair was still fresh in men's minds. See Introd. § 4.

οἰομένου is to be pressed (as in III 395 D, 409 C: cf. IV 431 C): their power is fancied, not real: they cannot even do the thing they want: cf. Gorg. 467 A ff. πῶς ἂν οὖν οἱ ῥήτορες μέγα δύναιντο ἢ οἱ τύραννοι ἐν ταῖς πόλεσιν, ἐὰν μὴ Σωκράτης ἐξελεγχθῇ—ὅτι ποιοῦσιν ἃ βούλονται;— οὔ φημι ποιεῖν αὐτοὺς ἃ βούλονται. He alone (says Plato) is truly powerful who wills what is good and has the power to obtain it.

336A - 337B Introduction of Thrasymachus.

On Plato's representation of Thrasymachus in the Republic, see Introd. § 2.

ὡς δὲ διεπαυσάμεθα . Cobet's suggestion ὡς δὲ δὴ ἐπαυσάμεθα misses the point. No doubt διαπαύομαι is (as he says) “intermitto orationem post aliquam moram denuo dicturus” (cf. Tim. 78 E, Symp. 191 C), but this is precisely the sense required, for the question with which Socrates concludes (τί ἂν ἄλλο κτλ.) shews that he desires to resume the discussion.

ταῦτ’ εἶπον refers to εἶεν—φαίη εἶναι.

συστρέψας ‐‐ διαρπασόμενος : ‘gathering himself up he sprang at us like a wild beast as though he would seize and carry us off.’ Thrasymachus comes down like a wolf on the fold. ἧκεν is not from <*>κω, but from ἵημι: this is also Ast's view (in his Lex. Plat.). The expression ἥκειν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς would be too weak after συστρέψας ἑαυτὸν ὥσπερ θηρίον. The object to ἧκεν is ἑαυτόν, easily supplied from συστρέψας ἑαυτόν: lit. ‘he let himself go at us.’ Cf. Ar. Frogs 133. It should be noted also that compounds of ἵημι occasionally drop ἑαυτόν altogether and become intransitive (e.g. VIII 563 A, Prot. 336 A). Hartman's ᾖττεν for ἧκεν is not likely to find favour. For διαρπασόμενος Cobet would read διασπασόμενος. Plato however does not use διασπᾶν of harrying by wild beasts, but in the sense of disiungere, seiungere (VI 503 B, Laws 669 D): and even Cobet does not propose to change Pol. 274 B διηρπάζοντο ὑπ’ αὐτῶν (i.e. θηρίων). J. and C.'s citation of Il. XVI 355 αἶψα διαρπάζουσιν (i.e. οἱ λύκοι τὰς ἄρνας) seems to me (in spite of Hartman's wonder) strictly relevant, if only we take διαρπάζειν as ‘harry,’ and not (with J. and C.) as ‘tear in pieces.’

τίεὐηθίζεσθε κτλ. εὐηθίζεσθε refers to the readiness of the interlocutors to assent to one another's questions: cf. Charm. 175 C οὕτως ἡμῶν εὐηθικῶν τυχοῦσα ἡ σκέψις καὶ οὐ σκληρῶν.

ὑποκατακλινόμενοι : a metaphor, not from the wrestling schools, but from taking a lower or inferior seat at table or the like: cf. Symp. 222 E ἐὰν οὖν ὑπὸ σοὶ κατακλινῇ Ἀγαθών and Plut. quomodo adul. ab amico internoscatur 58 D τὰς τοιαύτας ὑποκατακλίσεις (alluding to men who take the front seats at theatres etc., in order to flatter the rich by giving up their seats to them). Thrasymachus' brutal frankness is not intended by Plato to be altogether wide of the mark: see App. II and 335 A note

μὴ ‐‐ φιλοτιμοῦ ἐλέγχων . A common reproach against Socrates: cf. Theae<*>. 150 C.

ὅπως μοι κτλ. This idiom is colloquial and abrupt, almost rude: cf. 337 B and the examples cited in Goodwin MT. p. 94. Thrasymachus will not tolerate the stale and barren platitudes— note ὕθλους below—of ordinary disputation: cf. [Clitoph.] 409 C οὗτος μὲν—τὸ συμφέρον ἀπεκρίνατο, ἄλλος δὲ τὸ δέον, ἕτερος δὲ τὸ ὠφέλιμον, ὁ δὲ τὸ λυσιτελοῦν and Stewart's Nicomachean Ethics Vol. I p. 16, with the references there quoted.

εἰ μὴ πρότερος ‐‐ γενέσθαι . The θηρίον of 336 B has become a wolf. This is the earliest allusion in Greek literature to the belief that if a wolf sees you first you become dumb. Like Virgil Ecl. IX 53 the present passage favours Schaefer's emendation Αύκος εἶδέ ς); for Αύκον εἶδες in Theocr. XIV 22.

μὴ χαλεπὸς ἡμῖν ἴσθι : ἀεὶ θρασύμαχος εἶ, said Herodicus on one occasion to the sophist (Arist. Rhet. II 23. 1400^{b} 20).

ἐξαμαρτάνομεν ‐‐ ἁμαρτάνομεν : the preposition is often dropped in repeating a compound verb: cf. V 452 A, VII 533 A, X 608 A and my note on Prot. 311 A. I can see no sufficient reason for inserting τι before ἐξαμαρτάνομεν (with Π and some other MSS), although Stallbaum and others approve of the addition.

μὴ γὰρ δὴ οἴου κτλ. Cf. Laws 931 C, where there is a similar a fortiori sentence couched in the imperatival form.

ἑκόντας εἶναι . This phrase is used sixteen times by Plato, always in negative clauses, and generally in the nominative or accusative (Grünenwald in Schanz's Beiträge zur hist. Synt. d. gr. Spr. II 3. 1 ff.).

οἴου γε σύ, ὦ φίλε : i.e. ἡμᾶς σπουδάζειν ὅ τι μάλιστα φανῆναι αὐτό. For the justification of this view see App. IV.

εἰκός ἐστιν . There is no reason for omitting ἐστίν (with Hartman and apparently also Usener Unser Platotext p. 40).

χαλεπαίνεσθαι . This strained use of the passive of χαλεπαίνω in order to make the antithesis to ἐλεεῖσθαι formal as well as real is not found elsewhere in Plato. For parallels see Cope's Rhetoric of Aristotle Vol. 1 p. 299.

337A - 339B After some wrangling, Thrasymachus finally declares justice to be ‘the interest of the stronger.’ Rulers are stronger than those whom they rule: and in every state they pass laws in their own interest: and what is done in their own interest they call just.

ff. The natural history definition of justice (ὁ φύσει ὅρος τοῦ δικαίου Laws IV 714 C) is here for the first time mentioned in the Republic. It is to be noticed that the theory is presented by Thrasymachus not—in the first instance —as a rule of conduct for the individual, but as a political theory: his object is to describe the actual practice of Greek states (338 D ff.). We are thus for the first time introduced to the political aspect of δικαιοσύνη. The same view of the definition is taken in Laws 714 C ff., and it is the same theory which is afterwards (in II 358 E ff.) represented by Glauco as an hypothesis on which not Thrasymachus only but many others (Θρασυμάχου καὶ μυρίων ἄλλων 358 C) explained the origin and constitution of existing states: cf. also Gorg. 483 A ff. We are therefore justified in supposing that the definition which Plato puts into the mouth of Thrasymachus represents a theory current in the politics of the day. The conduct of Athens towards her allies furnished many examples of the practical application of this rule of government; and, if we may trust Thucydides, similar principles were frankly laid down by Athenian statesmen in their speeches: see for example I 76. 2 ἀεὶ καθεστῶτος τὸν ἥσσω ὑπὸ τοῦ δυνατωτέρου κατείργεσθαι, and cf. I 77. 4, V 89 and 105. 2 τὸ ἀνθρώπειον σαφῶς διὰ παντὸς ὑπὸ φύσεως ἀναγκαίας οὗ ἂν κρατῇ ἄρχειν. It is indeed not too much to say that ‘Might is Right’ was the only argument by which the existence of the Athenian empire could be defended before the tribunal of Greek public opinion, which regarded the independent πόλις as the only legitimate form of civic life. Hence the dominion of Athens is often in Thucydides called a τυραννίς, from which the Spartans claimed to be liberating their countrymen: see III 37. 2 τυραννίδα ἔχετε τὴν ἀρχήν, 62. 5 ff., IV 85. 6, and cf. Henkel Studien zur Gesch. d. gr. Lehre vom Staat pp. 126—128. The most conspicuous assertion of the principle before Plato's time was found in Pindar's much-quoted fragment (Bergk 169 and ap. Pl. Gorg 484 B) νόμος ὁ πάντων βασιλεὺς | θνατῶν τε καὶ ἀθανάτων | ἄγει δικαιῶν τὸ βιαιότατον | ὑπερτάτᾳ χειρί κτλ., though it may well be doubted (with Dümmler Prolegomena zu Platon's Staat p. 34) whether Pindar intended to suggest any such view. It is in order to refute this theory, as expounded by Glauco and Adimantus, Thrasymachus' successors in the argument (see on παῖδες ἐκείνου τοῦ ἀνδρός II 368 A) that Socrates finds it necessary to draw a picture of an Ideal State (ib. 368 D ff.), so that the political theory of Plato's Republic may truly be said to commence here. For more on this subject see Chiappelli Per la storia della Sofistica Greca in Archiv f. Gesch. d. Philos. III pp. 263 ff.

σαρδάνιον . Plato uses this expression as Homer does, of a sinister smile which bodes pain to others: Od. XX 301 f. μείδησε δὲ θυμῷ | σαρδάνιον μάλα τοῖον (of Odysseus among the suitors). Among later authors it more frequently denotes the forced smile which disguises the sufferer's own pain; and so apparently Simonides used the phrase ( Fr. 202 A Bergk). The explanations volunteered by the ancients apply only to the non-Homeric usage: the Scholiast, however, at the end of his note on this passage correctly remarks, μήποτε οὖν τὸ Ὁμηρικόν, ὅθεν καὶ ἡ παροιμία ἴσως ἐρρύη, “μείδησε δὲ κτλ.,” τὸν ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τῶν χειλῶν γέλωτα καὶ μέχρι τοῦ σεσηρέναι γιγνόμενον σημαίνει. The spelling σαρδόνιον came into vogue through the popular etymology from the bitter Sardinian herb, ἧς οἱ γευσάμενοι δοκοῦσι μὲν γελῶντες, σπασμῷ δὲ ἀποθνῄσκουσιν (Schol.). The Scholiast's suggested derivation from σαίρειν (ringi, as of an angry dog) suits the meaning which the phrase bears in Homer and Plato, and is probably right. Photius' σαρδάζων· μετὰ πικρίας γελῶν preserves the δ .

ποιήσοις is rejected by Cobet and Herwerden. “Post οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἤ, τί ἄλλο ἤ, πάντα μᾶλλον ἤ verbum omittunt” (says Cobet, quoting Theophr. Char. c. 25). ποιήσοις is not however otiose, but suggests the phrase πάντα ποιεῖν, ‘leave nothing undone,’ as in Euthyph. 8 C πάντα ποιοῦσι καὶ λέγουσι φεύγοντες τὴν δίκην: cf. Ap. 39 A.

ἐρωτᾷ . I formerly read ἐρωτῷ (with Goodwin MT. p. 277). A few inferior MSS have ἔροιτο. The optative is certainly the regular periodic construction in clauses of this kind: but the indicative may perhaps be allowed in loose conversational style.

τυγχάνει ὄν . Stallbaum explains ὄν as ‘being true,’ and τι as the subject to τυγχάνει. This view is perhaps less natural than to make ὄν the copula and τι the predicate: for the pronoun ‘it’ i.e. τὸ ἐρωτώμενον (Schneider) can be quite easily understood. For the use of τυγχάνει ὄν (‘really is’) cf. II 379 A, VII 518 E, Euthyph. 4 E with my note ad loc.

ὡς δή . The force of ὡς in this common ironical expression (quasi vero, cf. Gorg. 468 E, 499 B) is referred by Jebb (Soph. O. C. 809) to an ellipse: ‘(do you mean) forsooth that.’ An objection to this theory is that it will not explain ὡς δή τοι in cases like II 366 C, Phaedr. 242 C, Tim. 26 B. It seems better to explain these usages on the same principle. The view that ὡς is exclamatory will not account for II 366 C, and is not specially appropriate in the other places. Neither is it easy to make ὡς=ἐπεί (‘your illustration is excellent, seeing that the cases are so very similar!’ Tucker). Schneider (on II 366 C) regards ὡς as nearly equivalent to ὥστε (cf. note on II 365 D). Probably ὡς is in reality consequential (like the English ‘so’), the relative retaining its original demonstrative sense. This explanation will, I believe, suit all the passages in question.

περὶ δικαιοσύνης κτλ. περὶ δικαιοσύνης and τούτων are rejected by Herwerden, but the fulness of expression suits the arrogant tone of Thrasymachus.

τί ἀξιοῖς παθεῖν ; Here and in what follows there is a play on the judicial formula παθεῖν ἢ ἀποτεῖσαι, where παθεῖν refers to δεσμός φυγή θάνατος ἀτιμία, and ἀποτεῖσαι to fines. In a δίκη τιμητός, the defendant if found guilty would be asked in the words τί ἀξιοῖς παθεῖν καὶ ἀποτεῖσαι to propose an alternative penalty to that demanded by the accuser; after which it was the duty of the judges finally to assess (τιμᾶν) the penalty: cf. Ap. 36 B and Laws 933 D. It is partly the paronomasia in the words παθεῖν μαθεῖν (cf. the ancient text πάθος μάθος Aesch. Ag. 176) which draws from Thrasymachus the mock compliment ἡδὺς γὰρ εἶ (‘you are vastly entertaining’) although (cf. ἆ <*>διστε 348 C) Thrasymachus is also jeering at the simplicity of Socrates.

πρὸς τῷ μαθεῖν καὶ ἀπότεισον . Hertz and Herwerden conjecture παθεῖν for μαθεῖν: but this would make Thrasymachus ignore Socrates' identification of παθεῖν with μαθεῖν. In ἀπότεισον ἀργύριον Plato no doubt satirizes (somewhat crudely, it must be allowed) the avarice of Thrasymachus and his class, in contrast with whom Socrates has no money, because his conversations are gratis.

εἰσοίσομεν . The metaphor is from a banquet to which each contributes his share: cf. Symp. 177 C ἐγὼ οὖν ἐπιθυμῶ ἅμα μὲν τούτῳ ἔρανὀν εἰσενεγκεῖν κτλ.

ἀπειρημένον αὐτῷ . See cr. n. The retention of εἴη after αὐτ ῷ can only be defended by regarding μὴ εἰδὼς μηδὲ φάσκων as equivalent to εἰ μὴ εἰδείη μηδὲ φάσκοι and carrying on the εἰ; but this is excessively harsh and no parallel has yet been adduced. Of the two alternatives, to insert an εἰ before ἀπειρημένον or εἴη, and to drop εἴη (with Bremius), I prefer the latter as simpler in itself and accounting more easily for the corruption. The accusative absolute may have been misunderstood and εἴη inserted by a negligent reader owing to εἰ in the previous line. Richter (in Fl. Jahrb. 1867 p. 137) inserts δ) before αὐτῷ and retains εἴη, regarding εἴ τι καὶ οἴεται and ἀπειρημένον δ’ αὐτῷ εἴη as coordinate clauses under the rule of the same εἰ; but to this there are many objections. Tucker's suggestion εἰ, ὅ τι καὶ οἴεται περὶ τούτων, ἀπειρημένον αὐτῷ εἴη κτλ. (‘if, in regard to whatever he thinks about them, it were forbidden’ etc.) strikes me as heavy and cumbrous.

μὴ οὖν ἄλλως ποίει : 328 B note

ἄκουε δή calls for attention, ostentatiously, like a herald: cf. X 595 C, Ap. 20 D, Prot. 353 C.

Πουλυδάμας ‐‐ ὁ παγκρατιαστής . οὗτος ὁ Πουλυδάμας ἀπὸ Σκοτούσσης ἦν, πόλεως θεσσαλίας, διασημότατος παγκρατιαστής, ὑπερμεγέθης, says the Scholiast. He was victor in the ninety-third Olympian games 408 B.C. Stallbaum refers to Pausanias (VI 5) and others for the wonderful stories of his prowess. His statue at Olympia by Lysippus was very famous. Cf. Boeckh Kl. Schr. IV p. 446.

τοῦτο τὸ σιτίον κτλ. Teichmüller (Lit. Fehd. II p. 196) finds in this a confirmation of his belief that Plato was a vegetarian: but it is implied merely that a beef diet was not considered wholesome for persons out of training. Aristotle may have had this passage in view in Eth. Nic. II 5. 1106^{a} 36 ff., though his illustration is there taken from quantity, and not from quality, of food. Cf. also Gorg. 490 C.

ξυμφέρον ἅμα καὶ δίκαιον . The sophistry is undisguised. If βόεια κρέα is Polydamas' συμφέρον and δίκαιον, and δίκαιον is assumed to be everywhere identical with itself, it follows that βόεια κρέα is our δίκαιον, but not our ξυμφέρον, otherwise we are also κρείττονες. To avoid this, Wohlrab ingeniously takes ἐκείνου not with ἥττοσιν but with ξυμφέρον ἅμα καὶ δίκαιον, as if the meaning were ‘Polydamas' συμφέρον καὶ δίκαιον is also δίκαιον for us.’ This explanation is however linguistically harsh and comparatively pointless. On βδελυρὸς γὰρ εἶ Tucker aptly reminds us that the prevailing feature in Theophrastus' description of the βδελυρός (Char. c. 11) is παιδιὰ ἐπιφανὴς καὶ ἐπονείδιστος (‘obtrusive and objectionable pleasantry’ Jebb).

κακουργήσαις . Cope observes that the word is used “of the knavish tricks and fallacies which may be employed in rhetorical and dialectical reasoning” (Aristotle's Rhetoric Vol. 1 p. 17). Cf. Gorg. 483 A (cited by Tucker).

εἶτ’ οὐκ οἶσθα κτλ. ‘Do you mean to say you don't know’ etc. The division of constitutions into Monarchy, Oligarchy (for which Aristocracy is here substituted) and Democracy was familiar to everybody: see Aeschin. Ctes. 6, Tim. 4 ὁμολογοῦνται γὰρ τρεῖς εἶναι πολιτεῖαι παρὰ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις, τυραννὶς καὶ ὀλιγαρχία καὶ δημοκρατία. Cf. Whibley Greek Oligarchies pp. 17, 24. Thrasymachus proceeds to define κρείττων as ὁ κρατῶν (not ὁ ἰσχυρότερος, as Socrates had insinuated): ‐κρατοῦνται in δημοκρατοῦνται and ἀριστοκ ρατοῦνται well brings out his meaning. Cf. Laws 714 B νόμων εἴδη τινές φασιν εἶναι τοσαῦτα ὅσαπερ πολιτειῶν, and C οὔτε γὰρ πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον οὔτε πρὸς ἀρετὴν ὅλην βλέπειν δεῖν φασι τοὺς νόμους, ἀλλ) ἥτις ἂν καθεστηκυῖα ᾖ πολιτεία, ταύτῃ δεῖν τὸ ξυμφέρον ὅπως ἄρξει τε ἀεὶ καὶ μὴ καταλυθήσεται, καὶ τὸν φύσει ὅρον τοῦ δικαίου λέγεσθαι κάλλισθ) οὕτως. Πῶς; Ὅτι τὸ τοῦ κρείττονος ξυμφέρον ἐστί .

τίθεται δέ γε : Laws l. c. τίθεται δήπου, φασί, τοὺς νόμους ἐν τῇ πόλει ἑκάστοτε τὸ κρατοῦν. ἦ γάρ; Ἀληθῆ λέγεις. Ἆῤ οὖν οἴει, φασί, ποτὲ δῆμον νικήσαντα ἤ τινα πολιτείαν ἄλλην ἢ καὶ τύραννον θήσεσθαι ἑκόντα πρὸς ἄλλο τι πρῶτον νόμους <*> τὸ συμφέρον ἑαυτῷ τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ μένειν; Πῶς γὰρ ἄν; Aristotle makes it the distinguishing mark of his three perverted forms ( παρεκβάσεις) of constitution (τυραννίς, ὀλιγαρχία, δημοκρατία) that they seek their own and not τὸ κοινῇ συμφέρον: Pol. Γ 7. 1279^{b} 4 ff.

τὸν τούτου ἐκβαίνοντα κτλ. Laws 714 D οὐκοῦν καὶ ὄς ἂν ταῦτα τὰ τεθέντα παραβαίνῃ, κολάσει ὁ θέμενος ὡς ἀδικοῦντα, δίκαια ταῦτ) εἶναι ἐπονομάζων; Ἔοικε γοῦν. Ταῦτ) ἄῤ ἀεὶ καὶ οὕτω καὶ ταύτῃ τὸ δίκαιον ἂν ἔχοι. Φησὶ γοῦν οὗτος ὁ λόγος. νόμος and δίκαιον are identified by this theory.

ταὐτὸν εἶναι δίκαιον . Herwerden would expunge ταὐτόν, but ταὐτὸν is not more otiose here than τὸ αὐτὸ below.

ξυμφέρον γέ τι . There is here a hint of the main purpose of the Republic, which is to prove that δίκαιον is ξυμφέρον in the truest sense for the individual and the state.

339B - 341A Now that the meaning of the definition has been explained, Socrates proceeds to attack it. Even if we assume that rulers seek their own advantage, yet they often err, and enact laws to their own disadvantage: therefore, as it is just for subjects to obey their rulers, Justice will sometimes consist in doing what is not the interest of the stronger. Socrates reiterates this objection and is supported by Polemarchus. It is urged by Clitophon that Thrasymachus meant by ‘the interest of the stronger’ what was thought—whether rightly or wrongly— by the stronger to be to their interest. Thrasymachus declines to avail himself of this suggestion, and explains that, strictly speaking, rulers, qua rulers, cannot err. This statement he supports by arguing from the analogy of medical practitioners and others, pleading that his earlier concession was but a popular way of expressing the fact that rulers seem to err. Therefore the original definition was strictly correct. Justice is the interest of the stronger, since rulers make laws in their own interest, and, qua rulers, are infallible.

On the reasoning of Thrasymachus in these two chapters see 341 A note

οὐ ‐‐ μέντοι . “In interrogationibus haec particula” (μέντοι) “ita cum οὐ negatione coniungitur, ut gravissima sententiae vox intercedat, quo modo aliquis eis quae ex altero quaerit summam veritatis ingerit speciem” (Hoefer de part. Plat. p. 34). μέντοι is simply ‘of course,’ ‘surely’: ‘surely you regard it as just to obey the rulers, do you not?’ The idiom is frequent in Plato. The other examples of it (cited by Stallbaum) in the Republic are infra 346 A, VII 521 D, IX 581 A, 584 A, X 596 E.

πότερον δὲ ἀναμάρτητοι κτλ. The reasoning echoes that of 334 C above.

τιθέναι ‐‐ τίθεσθαι : we should expect τιθέναι in both cases, as the ἄρχοντες according to the theory we are discussing are κρείττονες and supreme as legislators: but the middle of personal interest is naturally used in combination with τὰ ξυμφέροντα ἑαυτοῖς: cf. infra 341 A.

τί λέγεις σύ ; a favourite eristic formula: see Ar. Clouds 1174 τοῦτο τοὐπιχώριον | ἀτεχνῶς ἐπανθεῖ, τὸ τί λέγεις σύ;

τοίνυν : not ‘therefore,’ but ‘also,’ a frequent use in Plato. In the Republic it occurs 29 times, according to Kugler de particulae τοι eiusque comp. ap. Pl. usu p. 34.

ὅταν οἱ μὲν ‐‐ τοῖς δέ (i.e. τοῖς ἀρχομένοις). These two clauses depend, not on ὡμολογῆσθαι, but on ποιεῖν: it is just to do τὰ ἀξύμφορα τοῖς ἄρχουσιν as often as the rulers unwillingly prescribe what is evil for themselves and so long as Thrasymachus says it is just for subjects to do what the rulers have prescribed. Desire for brevity and balance leads Plato to put both clauses under the government of ὅταν, although ‘since’ rather than ‘whenever’ is the more appropriate conjunction for introducing the second: for Thrasymachus does not sometimes but always assert that it is just to obey the rulers. The suggested reading φῄς for φῇς would require us to take τοῖς δέ κτλ. as an independent sentence, and leave μὲν in οἱ μέν without a corresponding δέ.

αὐτό is ‘the matter,’ ‘the case before us’: cf. IV 428 A (αὐτῷ), VII 518 B (αὐτῶν), 524 E (αὐτῷ ), Theaet. 172 E al. The text has been needlessly suspected by Madvig and other critics.

οὑτωσί : not ‘in that case’ (Campbell), but (with Jowett) simply ‘thus,’ as explained in δίκαιον—λέγεις: cf. Ap. 26 E οὑτωσί σοι δοκῶ; οὐδένα νομίζω θεὸν εἶναι;

ναὶ μὰ Δία κτλ. The interlude is intended to mark that the first stage has been reached in the refutation of Thrasymachus.

ἐὰν σύ γε is of course ironical. The disciples of the rival disputants now enter the fray.

τὸ γὰρ τὰ κελευόμενα κτλ. If this, and no more, had been Thrasymachus' definition, it would remain unrefuted; commands would be commands, whether expedient for the rulers or not.

δ ἡγοῖτο ‐‐ ξυμφέρειν . This explanation is involved in Clitophon's earlier statement τὸ τὰ κελευόμενα ποιεῖν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρχόντων: that which the rulers κελεύουσι is what they believe to be in their interests. Clitophon's defence finds no justification in the terms of Thrasymachus' definition; but it was the most obvious way of attempting to reconcile that definition with the admission that rulers are capable of erring.

τὸ τοῦ κρείττονος ξυμφέρον κτλ. Bonitz (Zeitschr. f. öst. Gymn. 1865 p. 648), followed by Wohlrab, proposes to add the words τὸ ξυμφέρον after ξυμφέρον, “parum venuste,” as Hartman thinks. Neither is it well (with Hartman) to omit τοῦ κρείττονος. The apparent harshness of the construction (‘that which seems to be the stronger's interest to the stronger’) is justified by its brevity and precision, and by the desire to introduce the exact words of the original definition into its amended form.

συκοφάντης . Cf. (with Tucker) Arist. Soph. El. 15. 174^{b} 9 σοφιστικὸν συκοφάντημα τῶν ἐρωτώντων and Rhet. II 24. 1402^{a} 14 ἐπὶ τῶν ἐριστικῶν τὸ κατὰ τί καὶ πρὸς τί καὶ πῇ οὐ προστιθέμενα ποιεῖ τὴν συκοφαντίαν.

λέγομεν τῷ ῥήματι οὕτως . Bekker (with whom Shilleto on Dem. F. L. § 91 agrees) would insert μέν after λέγομεν: but (as Schneider remarks) the emphasis on τῷ ῥήματι does duty instead of the particle, and even otherwise, μέν is not essential: cf. III 398 A (where Shilleto would also add μέν), infra 343 C, II 363 E, X 605 C al.

τὸ δέ =‘whereas in point of fact’ is a favourite Platonic idiom: cf. IV 443 C, VII 527 A, 527 D al.

ἐπιλιπούσης . See cr. n. The present, which Stallbaum and others adopt, may be right, but the older reading is at least as good. The failure in knowledge must precede the actual error. For the mistake see Introd. § 5.

ἀποκρίνεσθαι . The imperfect infinitive, as Schneider remarks (Addit. p. 6).

341A - 342E Socrates now meets Thrasymachus on his own ground, and attacks his definition according to the ‘strictest form’ of argument. He shews by analogy that every ruler qua ruler seeks the good of those whom he rules, since every art aims at the good of its own peculiar charge or object, and not at its own, for qua art there is nothing lacking to it.

ff. It is to be noted that the discussion is now transferred from the region of facts into an atmosphere of idealism. For this, Thrasymachus is primarily responsible. The theory that the ruler qua ruler makes no mistakes, is no doubt true ideally, but practically it is of little moment, since he will suffer qua ruler for the errors which he commits in moments of aberration. The strength of Thrasymachus' theory lay in its correspondence with the facts (real or apparent) of experience; it is the temptation to defend his theory against the criticism of Socrates which leads him to abandon facts for ideas; and as soon as he is refuted on the idealistic plane, he descends to facts again (343 A ff.). The vein of idealism struck by Thrasymachus is worked to some purpose by Socrates. To assert that rulers qua rulers always seek the good of their subjects is in reality to set before us a political ideal, and Plato's Ideal Commonwealth is intended to be its embodiment in a state. Plato was probably the first to develope and elaborate this principle of political science, but the legislations of Solon and other early lawgivers furnish examples of its application to practical politics (see especially Arist. Rep. Ath. ch. 12 and Solon's verses there cited), and it is formulated by the historical Socrates in Xen. Mem. III 2, with which compare Cyrop. VIII 2. 14. See also Henkel Studien zur Gesch. d. gr. Lehre vom Staat pp. 44, 145, and Whibley Greek Oligarchies p. 11 note 29.

συκοφαντεῖν is explained in ἐξ ἐπιβουλῆς—κακουργοῦντά σε, where κακουργοῦντα (as Schneider observes) is not used as in 338 D of putting an evil or sophistical interpretation on a theory, but of damaging a man's personal reputation and credit: “scilicet existimationis et pecuniae detrimentum facturus sibi videbatur sophista ideoque Socratem se, quamquam frustra, impugnare in sequentibus quoque criminatur.”

μὴ λαθών : “si non latueris” (Schneider). Stephanus conjectured μήν and Ast με for μή: but either change would destroy the antithesis between λανθάνειν and βιάζεσθαι—secret guile and open fraud: cf. II 365 D ἀλλὰ δὴ θεοὺς οὔτε λανθάνειν, οὔτε βιάσασθαι δυνατόν. Hirschig's excision of μὴ λαθών greatly impairs the emphasis.

τὸν ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν . The only exact parallel to this use of ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν in Plato is Laws 656 E σκοπῶν δ’ εὑρήσεις αὐτόθι τὰ μυριοστὸν ἔτος γεγραμμένα ἢ τετυπωμένα οὐχ ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν μυριοστὸν ἀλλ’ ὄντως. This idiomatic phrase is rare before Plato, who uses it 77 times with the meaning ‘to put the matter in a word,’ implying that other and possibly more exact means of describing the thing in question might be found. In 52 of these cases the phrase is combined with πᾶς or οὐδείς and their family of words, in the sense of fere, propemodum: its use in other connexions is in part a return to old poetic usage; cf. Aesch. Pers. 714, Eur. Hipp. 1162, Heracl. 167. See Grünenwald in Schanz's Beiträge zur hist. Synt. d. gr. Spr. II 3, pp. 21 ff. The other examples in the Republic are V 464 D, VIII 551 B, IX 577 C.

ὃ νῦν δὴ ἔλεγες : viz. in 340 E κατὰ τὸν ἀκριβῆ λόγον. The antecedent is the phrase ἀκριβεῖ λόγῳ. The conjecture of Benedictus, ὅν for ὅ, though adopted by several editors, would (as Schneider remarks) leave it uncertain whether λόγῳ or τόν was referred to by the relative. There is no MS authority for ὅν.

ξυρεῖν ‐‐ λέοντα . παροιμία ἐπὶ τῶν καθ) ἑαυτῶν τι ἢ ἀδύνατα ποιεῖν ἐπιχειρούντων λεγομένη (Schol.). The proverb is very rare, and does not seem to occur elsewhere in classical Greek.

οὐδὲν ὢν καὶ ταῦτα : ‘though you were a nonentity at that too’: i.e. at bluffing me, as well as in other respects. So (I think) Schneider, rightly (“aber auch darin ist's nichts mit dir”). Others (e.g. Shorey in A. J. Ph. XVI p. 234) explain ‘and that too though you are a thing of naught.’ But in that case καὶ ταῦτα would surely precede οὐδὲν ὤν. Tucker can hardly be right in making καὶ ταῦτα simply ‘moreover’ ‘too,’ ‘and proved a failure, too.’ Nor (in spite of J. B. Mayor in Cl. Rev. X p. 110) is it quite enough to translate (with Campbell) ‘though here again you are nobody,’ i.e. ‘with as little effect as ever.’

καὶ λέγε ‐‐ ὄντα is expunged by Herwerden, but the emphatic reiteration is in keeping with the whole tone of the passage. For the sense we may recall the words of the so-called oath of Hippocrates εἰς οἰκίας δὲ ὁκόσας ἂν ἐσίω, ἐσελεύσομαι ἐπ’ ὠφελείῃ τῶν καμνόντων (Vol. 1. p. 2 ed. Kühn).

ἑκάστῳ τούτων : viz. τοῖς κάμνουσι, τοῖς ναύταις, and in general the sub jects upon whom the art is exercised. The expression is a little vague (cf. VIII 543 C note) but it is rash and unnecessary to insert εἴδει or write ἑκάστῳ <τῶν εἰδῶν> τούτων, as Tucker recommends.

ἆῤ οὖν ‐‐ τελέαν εἶναι . I have retained this reading, in deference to the MSS, but it is open to grave objection. As the sentence stands, the meaning is that every art (as well as every object of an art—this is implied by καί) has one συμφέρον, viz. to be as perfect as it can, but no other. In the sequel this is interpreted to mean that no art needs any additional ἀρετή; since it is (qua art) perfect already: οὔτε γὰρ πονηρία οὔτε ἁμαρτία οὐδεμία οὐδεμιᾷ τέχνῃ πάρεστιν κτλ. (342 B). But the words of the sentence ἆρ’ οὖν—τελέαν εἶναι have to be taken very loosely in order to admit of this interpretation. We must suppose them equivalent to ‘No art has a συμφέρον of its own, unless you are to call the fact that it is perfect its συμφέρον.’ If Plato had written the passage as it stands in q and in the margin of Flor. U (both MSS probably of the fifteenth century), it would be open to no objection: ἆρ’ οὖν καὶ ἑκάστῃ τῶν τεχνῶν ἔστι τι ξυμφέρον ἄλλο <οὗ προσδεῖται>, ἢ <ἐξαρκεῖ ἑκάστη αὐτὴ αὑτῇ, ὥστε> ὅ τι μάλιστα τελέαν εἶναι; This reading was adopted by Bekker, and by Stallbaum in his first edition; and a careful study of the whole passage confirms the judgment of Schneider, “Platonem non solum potuisse, sed etiam debuisse vel haec ipsa vel consimilia scribere.” The same sense, expressed more briefly, may be obtained by the insertion of δεῖ before εἶναι: ‘has every art also a ξυμφέρον besides (i.e. besides the ξυμφέρον of its object), or must it be as perfect as possible?’ <*>κάστην does not require to be repeated any more than in 346 A below. The alteration is very slight; for δεῖ εἶναι, δεῖναι may have been written by mistake and δ afterwards ejected.

νῦν κτλ. : ‘has now been invented.’ The art of medicine is not coeval with body. I can see no reason for thinking (with Campbell) that νῦν is corrupt for ἡμῖν.

σῶμά ἐστι πονηρὸν κτλ. Lys. 217 B ἀναγκάζεται δέ γε σῶμα διὰ νόσον ἰατρικὴν ἀσπάζεσθαι καὶ φιλεῖν.

ὅπως ἐκπορίζῃ . This is said by Weber (Schanz's Beiträge II 2, p. 67) to be the only example in Plato of ὅπως with the subjunctive after a preterite tense.

ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς . Hartman proposes ἔτ’ αὐτοῖς. αὐτοῖς (sc. ὀφθαλμοῖς, ὠσίν) may be emphatic (ipsis), and ἐπί, ‘over and above,’ ‘besides’: ‘we require in addition to the organs themselves, an art’ etc. But it is perhaps simpler to make ἐπί=‘ to preside over’: cf. ἐφ’ οἷς ἔστιν VI 511 E note

εἰς ταῦτα means εἰς ὄψιν καὶ ἀκοήν. The art in question considers what is advantageous with respect to (εἰς) seeing and hearing.

ἐκποριούσης . See cr. n. ἐκποριούσης appears in three Florentine MSS. The present is difficult, if not impossible, in so close a union with the future: cf. X 604 A and VI 494 D. See Introd. § 5.

ἢ αὐτὴ ‐‐ σκέψεται ; This question (which is of course to be answered in the negative) shews the awkwardness of the reading of A in ἆρ’ οὖν—τελέαν εἶναι (341 D), which might almost be construed to mean that each art does seek its own συμφέρον, viz. the perfection of itself.

ἕωσπερ κτλ. : ‘that is, so long as an art, taken in its strict sense’ (“streng genommen” Schneider) ‘preserves its essence entire and unimpaired.’ The predicate is ὅλη ἥπερ ἐστί, and ἀκριβής =ἀκριβὴς οὖσα in the sense which ἀκριβής bears throughout this passage (341 B al.). Hartman's insertion of ἡ before ἀκριβής is unsatisfactory; his alternative proposal to change ἀκριβής to ἀκριβῶς spoils the emphasis, and gives a wrong sense.

ἐπιστήμη is here a synonym for τέχνη. All arts rule: and ruling is itself an art or science, not a happy inspiration (cf. Mem. III 6). Like other arts, ruling seeks only the good of that which it rules.

ὡμολόγηται γὰρ ‐‐ χρηματιστής . Ast compares Arist. Pol. A 9. 1258^{a} 10 ff. ἀνδρίας γὰρ οὐ χρήματα ποιεῖν ἐστιν ἀλλὰ θάρσος, οὐδὲ στρατηγικἧς καὶ ἰατρικῆς, ἀλλὰ τῆς μὲν νίκην, τῆς δ’ ὑγίειαν.

ᾧ ἂν ‐‐ βλέπων . ᾧ is of course (τῷ) ὃ, and τῷ ἀρχομένῳ is also neuter (not masculine), like ἀρχομένου in D. Bremius took τῷ ἀρχομένῳ as masculine, and consequently changed (with inferior MS authority) πρὸς ἐκεῖνο into πρὸς ἐκεῖνον: he has been followed by Stallbaum and others. But as ᾧ must be neuter, it would be intolerable to make ἀρχομένῳ masculine, since both words (as denoting the same object) are covered by the same article, viz. τῷ before ἀρχομένῳ. ἐκείνῳ is of course neuter also.

343A - 344C Thrasymachus with much insolence of tone now abandons the idealistic point of view, and takes an example from experience. The shepherd does not, as a matter of fact, seek the good of his flock, but fattens them for his own or his master's advantage. In like manner it is their own advantage that is aimed at by rulers who deserve the name. Justice is ‘other men's good’ (ἀλλότριον ἀγαθόν), whereas Injustice is one's own: the just man comes off second best everywhere, alike in commercial and in political transactions. That it is far more to one's interest to be unjust than to be just, we may see from the case of tyrants, who represent Injustice in its most perfect form. All men envy them. Finally, Thrasymachus reiterates his original theory with the remark that Injustice on a sufficiently large scale is at once stronger, more worthy of a freeman, and more masterly and commanding than Justice.

ff. It should be noted that Thrasymachus has in no way changed his theory, but only reverts to his original standpoint, that of experience. In the panegyric on Injustice in the present chapter, the new and important point is the appeal to the evidence of tyranny and the emotions which it roused in the mind of the Greeks. See on 344 B.

εἰς τοὐναντίον . Justice has now become τὸ τοῦ ἥττονος (rather than κρείττονος) συμφέρον.

κορυζῶντα : ‘snivelling,’ μωραίνοντα, μυξάζοντα· κόρυζα γὰρ ἡ μύξα, ἣν οἱ Ἀττικοὶ κατάρρουν φασίν (Schol.). Ruhnken on Timaeus Lex. s.v. quotes among other passages Lucian Alex. § 20 ἦν δὲ τὸ μηχάνημα τοῦτο ἀνδρὶ μὲν οἵῳ σοι, εἰ δὲ μὴ φορτικὸν εἰπεῖν, καὶ οἵῳ ἐμοί. πρόδηλον καὶ γνῶναι ῥᾴδιον, τοῖς δὲ ἰδιώταις καὶ κορύζης μεστοῖς τὴν ῥῖνα τεράστιον καὶ πάνυ ἀπίστῳ ὅμοιον, and Horace Sat. I 4. 8 (of Lucilius) emunctae naris.

ὅς γε αὐτῇ κτλ. “Apte αὐτῇ interpositum; nam ipsi nutrici Socratis insipientiam opprobrio esse, Thrasymachus vult significare” Ast. Richter (Fl. Jahrb. for 1867 p. 140) ought not to have suggested ὅς γε αὐτός. The sense is ‘for she cannot teach you to recognise even sheep or shepherd,’ not ‘you do not know either sheep or shepherd’ (J. and C.), which would require οὔτε— οὔτε. The phrase is clearly a half-proverbial expression borrowed from the nursery.

ὅτι οἴει τοὺς ποιμένας κτλ. Thrasymachus gives a new turn to the nursery saying. The illustration from the shepherd and his sheep (which is now for the first time introduced) was used by the historical Socrates to justify the opposite conclusion ( Xen. Mem. III 2. 1) ἐντυχὼν δέ ποτε στρατηγεῖν ᾑρημένῳ τῳ, Τοῦ ἕνεκεν, ἔφη, Ὅμηρον οἴει τὸν Ἀγαμέμνονα προσαγορεῦσαι ποιμένα λαῶν; ἆρά γε ὅτι, ὥσπερ τὸν ποιμένα ἐπιμελεῖσθαι δεῖ, ὅπως σῶαί τε ἔσονται αἱ ὄϊες, καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἕξουσιν, οὕτω καὶ τὸν στρατηγὸν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι δεῖ, ὅπως σῶοί τε οἱ στρατιῶται ἔσονται, καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἕξουσι, καὶ οὗ ἕνεκα στρατεύονται τοῦτο ἔσται; So also Arist. Eth. Nic. VIII 13. 1161^{a} 12 ff. εὖ γὰρ ποιεῖ τοὺς βασιλευομένους, εἴπερ ἀγαθὸς ὢν ἐπιμελεῖται αὐτῶν, ἵν’ εὖ πράττωσιν, ὥσπερ νομεὺς προβάτων· ὅθεν καὶ Ὅμηρος τὸν Ἀγαμέμνονα ποιμένα λαῶν εἶπεν. In Plato Pol. 271 D ff. the deities of the golden age are compared to shepherds, and the comparison of a good ruler to a shepherd is very frequent in Plato: see Ast's Lex. Plat. s. v. νομεύς. In Socrates' view ‘the shepherd careth for his sheep.’ With Thrasymachus' attitude should be compared the picture of the tyrant in Theaet. 174 D as a συβώτην ἢ ποιμένα ἤ τινα βουκόλον—πολὺ βδάλλοντα (he squeezes as much milk as he can out of his flock): also Solon ap. Arist. Rep. Ath. ch. 12 εἰ γάρ τις ἄλλος ταύτης τῆς τιμῆς ἔτυχεν, οὐκ ἂν κατέσχε δῆμον οὐδ’ ἐπαύσατο, | πρὶν ἀνταράξας πῖαρ ἐξεῖλεν γάλα. In the word ἀμοργοί or ἀμολγοί used by Cratinus in the sense of πόλεως ὄλεθροι (Meineke Fr. Com. Graec. II 1, p. 140) the image is the same. Compare the eloquent words of Ruskin in Sesame and Lilies § 43 and Milton's Lycidas 113—129.

ἡγεῖ διανοεῖσθαι . The conjecture διακεῖσθαι for διανοεῖσθαι is tempting in view of διατεθείη which follows, but διανοεῖσθαι is better suited to σκοπεῖν and βλέποντας just above. For the somewhat rare construction Schneider compares Laws 626 D αὐτῷ δὲ πρὸς αὑτὸν πότερον ὡς πολεμίῳ πρὸς πολέμιον διανοητέον, ἢ πῶς ἔτι λέγομεν; and 628 D.

πόρρω εἶ περί . πόρρω can hardly (I think) mean ‘far from’ (sc. knowing): this would require πόρρω εἶ <τοῦ τι εἰδέναι> περί, as Herwerden suggests: cf. Lys. 212 A οὕτω πόρρω εἰμὶ τοῦ κτήματος ὥστε κτλ. The meaning is (I believe) ‘so far on’; ‘so profoundly versed are you in justice’ etc.: cf. πόρρω ἤδη ἐστὶ τοῦ βίου Ap. 38 C and phrases like πόρρω σοφίας ἐλαύνειν: see also Blaydes on Ar. Wasps 192. Such biting sarcasm is appropriate in the mouth of Thrasymachus.

ἀλλότριον ἀγαθόν . Arist. Eth. Nic. V 3. 1130^{a} 3 f. διὰ δὲ τὸ αὐτὸ τοῦτο καὶ ἀλλότριον ἀγαθὸν δοκεῖ εἶναι ἡ δικαιοσύνη μόνη τῶν ἀρετῶν, ὅτι πρὸς ἕτερόν ἐστιν· ἄλλῳ γὰρ τὰ συμφέροντα πράττει, ἢ ἄρχοντι ἢ κοινωνῷ (with Stewart's note) and ib. 10. 1134^{b} 5.

τῷ ὄντι is not τῷ ὄντι δικαιῳ, but revera (as Stallbaum observes).

ὡς ἀληθῶς as well as ἀληθῶς, τῷ ὄντι, and the like, is used to indicate that a word is to be taken in its strict and full etymological sense (εὐ‐ηθικῶν): cf. Phaed. 80 D εἰς Ἅιδου ὡς ἀληθῶς, and infra II 376 B, V 474 A, VI 511 B, VIII 551 E notes

τά γε οἰκεῖα ‐‐ μοχθηροτέρως . Wells aptly cites the refusal of Deioces in Herod. I 97 to continue as an arbiter: οὐ γάρ οἱ λυσιτελέειν τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ἐξημεληκότα τοῖσι πέλας δἰ ἡμέρης δικάζειν. Cf. also Ap. 23 B, 31 B. In like manner Aristotle mentions it as one of the safeguards of a democracy engaged in agriculture that the necessity of looking after their private interests will prevent the citizens from often attending the assembly (Pol. Z 4. 1318^{b} 11). Plato is fond of the comparative ending in ‐ως (affected, says Cobet, by those “qui nitidissime scribunt”): see Kühner-Blass Gr. Gramm. I p. 577.

ἀπεχθέσθαι . ἀπέχθομαι as a present is not well attested in Plato's time; and the aorist ‘to incur the enmity of’ is at least as suitable in point of meaning here.

λέγω γὰρ ὅνπερ νῦν δὴ ἔλεγον . Ast points out that nothing in what has been already said corresponds to the words τὸν μεγάλα δυνάμενον πλεονεκτεῖν, and reads ὅπερ on slight MS authority. But no special reference is intended: the words mean simply ‘I mean the man I meant just now.’ Thrasymachus asserts that he has all along been referring to τὸν μεγάλα κτλ.

ἢ τὸ δίκαιον : i.e. ἢ τὸ δίκαιον εἶναι τῷ δικαίῳ. The reading αὑτῷ (found in A, but no dependence can be put on this MS in such matters) would require the omission of the article before δίκαιον (so Stallbaum and others). Tucker inclines to render ‘how much more he is personally benefited by being unjust than by justice,’ but the ordinary view is preferable.

ἣ οὐ κτλ. This laboured sentence is perhaps intended as a parody of some sophistic style: cf. Gorg. 448 C.

ὧν depends on μέρει .

ἀνδραποδισταί : ‘kidnappers.’ The word is defined by Pollux III 78 as ὁ τὸν ἐλεύθερον καταδουλωσάμενος ἢ τὸν ἀλλότριον οἰκέτην ἀπαγόμενος. Thessaly had an evil name for this kind of crime (Blaydes on Ar. Plut. 521); but the frequent references to it in Attic literature shew that Greece itself was not exempt. See on IX 575 B and the article in Stephanus-Hase Thes. s.v.

τῶν τοιούτων κακουργημάτων is usually explained as depending on κατὰ μέρη, but as κατὰ μέρη is adverbial, this is somewhat awkward. It is perhaps better to regard the genitive as partitive, τι being omitted as in κινήσειεν ἂν τῶν ἀξίων λόγου νόμων IV 445 E, where see note.

πρὸς τοῖς ‐‐ χρήμασιν is virtually equivalent to πρὸς τῷ τὰ τῶν πολιτῶν ἀφελέσθαι, and combined by zeugma with δουλώσηται. Cf. I 330 E note

εὐδαίμονες ‐‐ κέκληνται . The generic singular τις has become a plural, as in Phaed. 109 D, infra VII 536 A. Envy of tyranny and tyrants was common in the Athens of Plato's younger days: compare Gorg. 484 A, 470 D (where it is maintained by Polus that Archelaus of Macedon is εὐδαίμων, and Socrates says ὀλίγου σοι πάντες συμφήσουσι ταῦτα Ἀθηναῖοι καὶ οἱ ξένοι 472 A) and Alc. II 141 A ff. The plays of Euripides in particular (see VIII 568 A) often eulogised the tyrant: e.g. Troad. 1169 ff., Fr. 252, Phoen. 524 ff. In earlier days Solon's friends had blamed him for not making himself tyrant of Athens: see the dramatic fragment (33 ed. Bergk), where the prevalent passion for tyranny is forcibly expressed in the lines ἤθελον γάρ κεν κρατήσας, πλοῦτον ἄφθονον λαβὼν | καὶ τυραννεύσας Ἀθηνῶν μοῦνον ἡμέραν μίαν, | ἀσκὸς ὕστερον δεδάρθαι κἀπιτετρῖφθαι γένος (4—6). See also Newman's Politics of Aristotle I pp. 388—392.

οὐ γὰρ ‐‐ τὴν ἀδικίαν . Cf. Gorg. 483 A φύσει μὲν γὰρ πᾶν αἴσχιόν ἐστιν, ὅπερ καὶ κάκιον, τὸ ἀδικεῖσθαι, νόμῳ δὲ τὸ ἀδικεῖν.

ἱκανῶς γιγνομένη : ‘realised on an adequate scale’ (D. and V.). For the construction of γίγνεσθαι with an adverb cf. (with Ast) Soph. 230 C and infra VI 504 C. After τὸ δ’ ἄδικον below, Herwerden would insert τό to go with ἑαυτῷ λυσιτελοῦν τε καὶ ξυμφέρον, but only τυγχάνει (and not τυγχάνει ὄν) is to be understood after ἄδικον; nor is the last clause intended as a strict and formal definition of injustice.

344D - 347E The reply of Socrates falls into two parts. In the first (344 D— 347 E), after emphatically expressing his dissent from Thrasymachus' views, and protesting against the Sophist's retractation (in the example of the shepherd and his sheep) of the doctrine that every ruler seeks the good of his subjects, Socrates reverts to the stricter form of reasoning to which Thrasymachus had formerly challenged him, and points out that no rulers, properly so called, rule willingly: they require wages. When any kind of rule, e.g. an art, is attended with advantage to the ruler, the advantage comes from the concomitant operation of the ‘art of wage-earning,’ and not from the rule itself. Medicine produces health; the art of wages, wages; the doctor takes his fee, not qua doctor, but qua wage-earner. Thus it is not the ruler, qua ruler, but the subjects, as was already said, who reap the advantage. The wages which induce a man to rule, may be money, or honour, or the prospect of a penalty if he should refuse. The most efficacious penalty, in the case of the best natures, is the prospect of being ruled by worse men than themselves. In a city of good men, freedom from office would be as eagerly sought for as office itself is now. Herewith ends for the present the refutation of the theory that Justice is the interest of the stronger. Socrates promises to resume the subject on another occasion.

ff. The ensuing discussion is not a new argument (see 345 C ἔτι γὰρ τὰ ἔμπροσθεν ἐπισκεψώμεθα) in support of Socrates' view, but a restatement of his theory, with an addition necessitated by Thrasymachus' example of the shepherd. The shepherd (says Socrates) is no shepherd, when he fattens his sheep for his own gain, nor the ruler a ruler, when he enriches himself at the expense of his subjects. On such occasions both shepherd and ruler are in reality μισθωτικοί—professors of μισθωτική, an art which is distinct from that of ruling, though usually associated with it. This analysis is new and valuable in itself; it also enables Socrates (in 347 D) to make the first explicit allusion in the Republic to an ideal state, and to formulate what afterwards becomes a leading principle of the Platonic commonwealth—the reluctance of the ruling class to accept office.

καταντλήσας . For the metaphor cf. infra VII 536 B, Lys. 204 D, Lucian Dem. Enc. 16 (imitated from this passage) and other examples in Blaydes on Ar. Wasps 483 .

ἐμβαλών : cf. Theaet. 165 D, Prot. 342 E. The whole expression recalls the Latin proverb scrupulum abeunti (Cic. de Fin. IV 80).

διαγόμενος . The use of this verb in Soph. El. 782 χρόνος διῆγέ με, Dem. 18. 89 πόλεμος—διῆγεν ὑμᾶς, Xen. Rep. Lac. I 3 and elsewhere is in favour of regarding διαγόμενος (‘living’) as grammatically passive and not middle both here and in Laws 758 A. Cf. Stephanus-Hase Thes. s.v. διάγω.

ἐγὼ γὰρ κτλ. I agree with Stallbaum and others in taking this sentence as interrogative: ‘do you mean that I think otherwise about this matter?’ i.e. think that it is not a question of βίου διαγωγή. J. and C. complain that this interpretation is “wanting in point.” It is surely much to the point to make Thrasymachus repudiate the imputation of trifling. His doctrine appears all the more dangerous when he confesses that it is no sophistic paradox, but a rule of life. I can see nothing to justify Apelt's conjecture ἔγωγ’ ἄῤ for ἐγὼ γὰρ (Observ. Crit. p. 11).

ἤτοι ἡμῶν γε . ἤτοι or ἤτοι—γε= ‘or else’ (not ‘or rather’ as J. and C.). The regular construction is ἤτοι—ἤ, and ἤ—ἤτοι was condemned by the grammarians as a solecism, though it occurs in Pind. Nem. 6. 5. With the use of ἤτοι in this passage cf. III 400 C, IV 433 A τοῦτό ἐστιν—ἤτοι τούτου τι εἶδος ἡ δικαιοσύνη. Emendations have been suggested on all these passages of Plato: here ἤ τοι (van Prinsterer, Hartman) and in the other two passages ἤ: but we are not justified in altering the text. Cf. Kugler de partic. τοι eiusque comp. ap. Pl. usu p. 14.

ἔστω μὲν ἄδικος κτλ. The subject is ὁ ἄδικος, supplied from ἀδικίαν. To πείθει also ὁ ἄδικος is the subject; but ἡ ἀδικία or τὸ ἀδικεῖν is the subject of ἔστι. The effect is exactly as in the English ‘let him be unjust’ etc., ‘nevertheless he cannot convince me that it is really more profitable than justice.’ J. and C. understand τις before ἔστω, needlessly, as I think, and suppose that the “supposed impunity of injustice” is the subject to πείθει, but πείθει is much better with a personal subject. Although the sentence is a trifle loose, it is clear enough, and there is no occasion for reading πείθεις (with Vind. D and Ficinus).

ἐνθῶ . ἐντιθέναι (as Wohlrab points out) was used of nurses feeding children: cf. Ar. Knights 716 f., supra 343 A, and (for the general idea) Theognis 435 and Pl. Symp. 175 D. In μὰ Δία, μὴ σύ γε Socrates shudders at the prospect of having Thrasymachus for his intellectual nurse.

ποιμαίνειν . See cr. n. Cobet ( Mnem. IX p. 355) calls for πιαίνειν, but the “addita verba καθ’ ὅσον ποιμήν ἐστιν circa universum pastoris negotium errantem a Socrate Thrasymachum notari docent” (Schneider). How Thrasymachus errs is explained in οὐ πρὸς τὸ κτλ. πιαίνειν might perhaps be read, if the ἀλλά clause is taken closely with what precedes: you did not think it necessary (says Socrates) to adhere rigidly to the genuine shepherd, but think he fattens his sheep qua shepherd. In that case, however, we should expect ἀλλ’ οὐ—βλέπειν in place of οὐ—βλέποντα, to form the antithesis to πιαίνειν .

οὕτω δὲ ᾤμην . Some inferior MSS (with Eusebius Praep. Ev. XII 44. 2) read δή for δέ, and so Ast and Stallbaum. The connecting particle is better than the illative here, where Socrates is merely recalling his former train of reasoning: ‘and it was thus that I came to think’ etc.

οὐδεὶς ‐‐ μισθόν . Cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. V 10. 1134^{b} 5 ff. καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἀλλότριον εἶναί φασιν α<*>γαθὸν τὴν δικαιοσύνην—μισθὸς ἄρα τις δοτέος.

αὐτοῖσιν : see 330 B note

οὐχὶ ‐‐ μέντοι : 339 B note

παρὰ δόξαν is simply ‘contrary to your opinion’ (“gegen deine Ueberzeugung” Schneider) as in Prot. 337 B, cf. 349 A ἕως ἄν σε ὑπολαμβάνω λέγειν ἅπερ διανοεῖ and 350 E. The words could hardly mean an ‘unexpected or paradoxical’ reply (as Tucker construes). Socrates is appealing—note ὦ μακάριε— to Thrasymachus not to obstruct the discovery of the truth by want of candour and sincerity.

ἀλλὰ ‐‐ ἑτέρα sc. ἐστίν. The reading ἑτέραν is in itself equally good, but has inferior MS authority. Herwerden needlessly recommends the omission of ἑτέρα, or (as alternatives) ἀλλὰ τούτῳ, ἔφη, τῷ ἑτέραν, or ἀλλὰ τούτῳ, ἔφη, ἑτέραν, τῷ ἑτέραν .

οὐκοῦν κτλ. Aristotle agrees with this analysis: see Pol. A 3. 1258^{a} 10 ff. It should be noted that the antecedent to αὕτη is not μισθόν, but τὸ παρέχεσθαι μισθόν.

διὰ τὸ ξυμφέρειν . See cr. n. To ξυμφέρον there are two objections: first that διά with the participle used like διά with the infinitive is rare and dubious; second that ξυμφέρον is more naturally to be taken as a virtual adjective than as a participle. The last objection might be surmounted by reading ξυμφέρον<ὄν>, but the more serious flaw would still remain, and ξυμφέρειν is in itself so much superior, that (like most editors) I feel bound to adopt it.

οὐδέ γ’ οἶμαι τὴν μισθωτικήν sc. καλεῖς ἰατρικήν. The reasoning is somewhat subtle. ἰατρική, κυβερνητική, μισθωτική (μισθαρνητική), says Socrates, are three distinct arts. κυβερνητική is not to be called ἰατρική, even if ἰατρική should accompany its operation, nor is μισθωτική to be called ἰατρική in a similar case. Nor is ἰατρική to be called μισθωτική, even if ἰατρική should be accompanied by μισθωτική.

κοινῇ ‐‐ προσχρώμενοι : ‘from the common use of some additional element which is the same in all.’

τὸ μισθὸν ἀρνυμένους . δέ γε as usual introduces the minor premise. The semi-poetic word ἀρνυμένους is used to suggest μισθαρνεῖν and μισθαρνητική, the word μισθόν at the same time bringing the product of the art well into view. As τὸ—δημιουργούς is the subject to γίγνεσθαι, the masculine τόν—so most MSS—for τό is impossible.

ἔλεγον μηδένα ἐθέλειν . μή with the infinitive after verbs of saying, thinking and the like “carries with it the emphasis of the witness on oath, so to speak the emphasis of desire” (Gildersleeve in A. J. Ph. 1 50). Cf. Theaet. 155 A, Euthyph. 6 B, Phaed. 94 C al., and infr. III 407 E, IV 419 A.

ὡς ἔοικε belongs to ὧν ἕνεκα , and δεῖν is in indirect narration after ἔλεγον above. There would be no object in qualifying the force of δεῖν; it is not disputed that rulers must have their reward. Hence Stallbaum is wrong in regarding δεῖν as under the influence of ἔοικε, an illogical idiom which is common in Herodotus (Stein on 1 65), and found occasionally in Tragedy (Jebb on Trach. 1238) and in Plato ( Phil. 20 D, Soph. 263 D, Euthyd. 280 D). That ὡς ἔοικε has no influence on δεῖν in this passage may also be seen from the fact that δεῖν (not δεῖ) would still be used if ὡς ἔοικε were removed. δεῖν is not for δέον; the late participial form δεῖν is not found in Plato: see my note on Euthyph. 4 D.

ἄρχῃ . The transition from plural to singular and conversely is common: see for examples III 408 B, 411 C, 413 D, E, IV 426 A, C, V 463 D, VI 496 C, 500 C, VIII 554 A, C, 558 A, IX 591 A, X 601 D, E, 604 D, and cf. Heindorf on Gorg. 478 C, Prot. 319 D.

ὡς ἐν μισθοῦ μέρει . ὡς is not (with Wohlrab) to be taken with <*>ν μισθοῦ μέρει, but stands for the indirect interrogative ὅπως.

αὐτοί = ‘by themselves,’ ‘ultro,’ should be construed with λαμβάνοντες. The conjecture αὐτόν for αὐτοί is very tame.

ὅθεν κινδυνεύει ‐‐ νενομίσθαι . These words are intended to indicate parenthetically that Socrates' thesis finds support in the common judgment of men. Good men, he says, require to be compelled to rule. This may be why (ὅθεν) it is accounted a disgrace to enter on office willingly: that is to say, if you do so, you may be inferred to be, not ἀγαθός, but φιλότιμος or φιλάργυρος, which ὄνειδος λέγεταί τε καὶ ἔστιν 347 B. There is no good reason for rejecting the clause, as some have proposed to do.

πόλις ἀνδρῶν ἀγαθῶν is the first express allusion to an Ideal City in the Republic. The principle here laid down—the reluctance of the best men to undertake the task of government—is fully recognised in Plato's commonwealth, where the ἄρχοντες are represented as unwilling to desert the life of contemplation for the cares of office. ‘Nolo episcopari’ is in fact one of the leading guarantees which Plato gives against the abuse of political power (Nohle Die Staatslehre Plato's in ihr. gesch. Entwick. p. 119). See VI 520 E, 521 A, where this topic is resumed. Cf. also Sesame and Lilies § 43 “The true kings—rule quietly, if at all, and hate ruling; too many of them make ‘il gran rifiuto.’”

τῷ ὄντι κτλ . τῷ ὄντι belongs to οὐ πέφυκε, not to ἀληθινός (as Ast supposes). Richter suggests ἁληθινός for ἀληθινός, but what is said of a single ruler applies to all: cf. (with Schneider) Laws 733 E λέγωμεν δὴ σώφρονα βίον ἕνα εἶναι καὶ φρόνιμον ἕνα καὶ ἕνα τὸν ἀνδρεῖον.

πᾶς ἂν κτλ. The articular infinitive with αἱρεῖσθαι is hard to parallel, and on this ground Richards would cancel τό. I once thought that τὸ ὠφελεῖσθαι might be taken as the object after γιγνώσκων (‘he who knows what being benefited is,’ i.e. virtually ‘who knows his own interests’); but this is harsh, and I now acquiesce in the usual interpretation. With γιγνώσκων (intellegens) used absolutely cf. (with Schneider) Laws 733 E σώφρονα μὲν οὖν βίον ὁ γιγνώσκων θήσει πρᾶον ἐπὶ πάντα. For the sentiment cf. Soph. O. T. 584 —598, Eur. Ion 621—632, Hipp. 1016—1020.

εἰσαῦθις σκεψόμεθα . The reference has been much discussed. Pfleiderer's idea (Zur Lösung d. Pl. Fr. p. 72) that the words were introduced by Plato “bei der Gesammtredaktion des Werkes” to prepare us for the second half of Book X is most unlikely, because (among other reasons) Book X does not expressly revert to this topic at all. Siebeck (Zur Chron. d. Pl. Dialoge pp. 121 ff.) holds that phrases of this sort always refer either to some future dialogue contemplated by Plato, or to a later part of the same dialogue. It is difficult to establish either alternative in the present case; nor has Siebeck, I think, succeeded in proving his point even elsewhere. It is simplest to suppose that such formulae (like εἰσαῦθις ἐπισκεπτέον in Arist. Eth. Nic. I 5. 1097^{b} 14) are in general only a convenient way of dropping the subject, although there may occasionally be a specific reference. Here there is none. So also Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. d. Pl. Polit. in Fl. Jahrb. Supplementband XXIII p. 607 note 2.

347E - 348B Introduction to the second part of Socrates' reply to Thrasymachus. See 344 D, 348 B nn.

τὸν τοῦ ἀδίκου βίον ‐‐ δικαίου . In these words Socrates sums up the remarks of Thrasymachus from 343 B (καὶ οὕτω πόρρω κτλ.) to 344 C (λυσιτελοῦν τε καὶ ξυμφέρον).

ποτέρως ‐‐ λέγεσθαι . Ast's suggestion πότερον, ἦν δ) ἐγώ, ὦ Γλαύκων, αἱρεῖ; καὶ ποτέρως ἀληθεστέρως δοκεῖ σοι λέγεσθαι; is now generally adopted, but (apart from its considerable divergence from the MS reading) the juxtaposition of ποτέρως and ἀληθεστέρως is unpleasing. The ποτέρως αἱρεῖ of A is quite unobjectionable: cf. VII 528 A οὕτως—αἱροῦμαι; and it is (I think) an objection to πότερον αἱρεῖ that it would represent Socrates as asking Glauco not which view he elected to take, but which life—the just or the unjust—he chose for himself. Schneider (after Bekker) retains the reading of the best MSS in πότερον ὡς ἀληθεστέρως, and explains the last two words as equivalent to ὥσπερ ὃ ἀληθεστέρως λέγεται: but ὡς ἀληθεστέρως could not (if written by Plato) be anything but the comparative of ὡς ἀληθῶς, and that is quite different in sense from ἀληθεστέρως. I have omitted ὡς (with Bremius and a few MSS of inferior authority), “ut ortum ex varia lectione πότερον et ποτέρως in ποτερόνως conflata” (Schneider). I am glad to find that Tucker adopts the same solution.

διῆλθε : i.q. διῆλθεν ὄντα or διελθὼν ἔλεξεν εἶναι (Schneider). Cf. II 363 A ἄφθονα ἔχουσι λέγειν ἀγαθὰ τοῖς ὁσίοις with note ad loc. In view of ἐν ἑκατέρῳ λέγομεν in B below, it is easy to suggest διῆλθεν <ἐν>; but the text is probably sound.

ἂν μὲν τοίνυν κτλ. The alternatives are between continuous speech and dialectic. By λόγον in παρὰ λόγον Thrasymachus' speech in 343 A ff. is meant: to this Socrates would reply, after which Thrasymachus would speak again, and finally Socrates. Thus each party would have delivered two speeches. In Athenian lawsuits there were often two speeches delivered by the accuser and two by the defendant (Meier und Schömann Attische Process p. 924), so that Plato's imagery is borrowed from the law-court, whence δικαστῶν τινῶν τῶν διακρινούντων just below. This point escaped Ast, who reads καὶ αὖθις οὗτος ἄλλον ἡμῖν (after Ficinus and Stephanus).

ἀντικατατείναντες is intransitive: cf. II 358 D κατατείνας ἐρῶ τὸν ἄδικον βίον ἐπαινῶν and 367 B: the notion (as in ξυντείνω, ξυντεταμένως and the like) is of nervous tension. The word cannot mean ‘replying to one another in set speeches’ (J. and C.). “Setting out alternative lists of advantages” (remarks Bosanquet) “was the well-known method of fable or poetry. See Book II” 361 D—362 C and 362 E— 365 A: “and compare Prodicus' Choice of Heracles (Xen. Mem. II 1) and the discussion between the Just and Unjust arguments in the Clouds of Aristophanes.”

ὁποτέρως is virtually indirect: translate ‘whichever you please, then.’ Hermann reads ποτέρως, but the text ought not to be changed either here or in Euthyd. 271 A τίς ἦν, ὦ Σώκρατες, ᾧ χθὲς ἐν Λυκείῳ διελέγου;—τίς ἦν; Ὁπότερον καὶ <*>ρωτᾷς, ὦ Κρίτων· οὐ γὰρ εἶς, ἀλλὰ δὔ ἤστην, i.e. (it depends on) which of these you are asking about etc. Cf. also <*>τις—αὐτῶν ἡ ἀρετή 353 C. In Rep. IX 578 E ἐν ποίῳ ἄν τινι καὶ ὁπόσῳ φόβῳ οἴει γενέσθαι αὐτόν and Gorg. 522 A, the ὁπόσῳ is perhaps due to the proximity of οἴει, which gives the question a certain semblance of indirectness; ὁποίῳ in Alc. I 110 C and ὁποίου infra 400 A may be similarly explained; while in Meno 74 D ἀλλὰ μή μοι οὕτως—ἀλλ’ ὅ τι ἐστὶν τοῦτο, it is casy to supply a verb of saying. Possibly (as Heindorf thinks) ὅτι (B ὃ τί) in Euthyd. 287 B is corrupt for τί, as <*>πως for πῶς in Charm. 170 C. In Lys. 212 C ὁπότερος οὖν αὐτῶν ποτέρου φίλου ἐστιν; ὁ φιλῶν τοῦ φιλουμένου—ἢ ὁ φιλούμενος τοῦ φιλοῦντος; we ought no doubt to read ὁ πότερος (with Hermann).

348B - 350C Thrasymachus now identifies Justice with Simplicity, Injustice with Discretion. Injustice he assigns to Virtue and Wisdom, Justice to their opposites. He further declares that Injustice is strong and beautiful, and is ready to predicate of it all that is usually predicated of Justice (348 B—349 B).

Socrates then commences a very subtle refutation, addressing himself to the assertion that Injustice is Virtue and Wisdom (349 B—350 C). (1) The just man endeavours to overreach the unjust, but not the just: the unjust man to overreach both the just and the unjust. Therefore, generally, the just man endeavours to overreach the unlike; the unjust man to overreach both the like and the unlike. Further, the unjust man, being wise and good, resembles the wise and good, while the just man, being foolish and evil, resembles the foolish and evil; in brief, each is as those whom he resembles. (2) Again, from the analogy of the arts it is seen that the man who knows tries to overreach the unlike, while the ignorant man tries to overreach both the like and the unlike. But the man who knows is wise, and the wise man good; we may therefore in the last sentence substitute ‘wise and good man’ for ‘the man who knows,’ and ‘foolish and evil’ for ‘ignorant. ’ Comparing, then, conclusions (1) and (2), we see that the just are like the wise and good, that is, are wise and good (since they are such as those whom they resemble), while the unjust in like manner are foolish and evil. Thus is refuted the thesis that Injustice is Virtue and Wisdom.

ff. The second division of Socrates' reply begins here. Though professedly attacking the section of Thrasymachus' speech contained in 343 C— 344 C, and summed up in the theory that the life of the Unjust is better than that of the Just (347 E), it is not till 352 D that Socrates directly grapples with this theory. In the meantime, certain further deliver ances of Thrasymachus on the nature of Injustice are refuted by means of arguments which have an indirect bearing on the question at issue (see 352 D φαίνονται μὲν οὖν καὶ νῦν, ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ, ἐξ ὧν εἰρήκαμεν· ὅμως δ’ ἔτι βέλτιον σκεπτέον). This part of Socrates' reply may therefore be regarded as itself subdivided into two parts—the first being an indirect, the second a direct refutation of Thrasymachus. Cf. 352 D note

εἰκός γε ‐‐ τοὐναντίον . Thrasymachus' view of δικαιοσύνη is like Callicles' theory of ἀρετή in Gorg. 491 E ff. esp. 492 B τρυφὴ καὶ ἀκολασία καὶ ἐλευθερία, ἐὰν ἐπικουρίαν ἔχῃ, τοῦτ’ ἐστὶν ἀρετή τε καὶ εὐδαιμονία. The irony is clearly marked by ὦ ἥδιστε, and Hartman should not have revived Hirschig's proposal to read <οὔκουν> εἰκός γε .

ἀλλὰ τί μήν ; ‘Well, what else?’ Cf. (with J. and C.) Symp. 206 E.

πάνυ γενναίαν εὐήθειαν : ‘sublime simplicity.’ Such contempt for εὐήθεια recalls Thucydides' description of contemporary morals: cf. especially III 83. 1 καὶ τὸ εὔηθες, οὖ τὸ γενναῖον πλεῖστον μετέχει, καταγελασθὲν ἠφανίσθη.

εὐβουλία was preeminently a political virtue: cf. Alc. I 125 E πολιτείας κοινωνούντων τίνα καλεῖς ἐπιστήμην; Εὐβουλίαν ἔγωγε, Prot. 318 E, and infra IV 428 B. It is therefore fitly used by Thrasymachus to describe his theory, which is a theory of political rather than of private morality: cf. πόλεις τε—ποιεῖσθαι below.

ὑφ) ἑαυτοὺς ποιεῖσθαι . ἑαυτοῖς is found in some inferior MSS, but the accusative is also admissible. Cf. Thuc. IV 60 (cited by Schneider) εἰκὸς—αὐτοὺς τάδε πάντα πειράσασθαι ὑπὸ σφᾶς ποιεῖσθαι. In τελέως Thrasymachus recalls the τελέαν ἀδικίαν of 348 B.

σὺ δὲ οἴει ‐‐ λέγειν . Baiter (with Paris A) assigns these words to Socrates; but they come much more naturally from Thrasymachus: cf. 344 B. βαλλάντια and not βαλάντια is the spelling of A here and in VIII 552 D (βαλλαντιοτόμοι): in IX 575 B (βαλλαντιοτομοῦσι) the second λ is due to an early corrector. The double ‐λλ‐ has also the best MS authority in Gorg. 508 E, Symp. 190 E. See also Blaydes on Ar. Frogs 772. For ἦ δ’ ὅς below after ἔφη cf. Phaed. 78 A and VII 522 A.

ἤδη στερεώτερον : ‘still more stubborn.’ στερέος is like σκληρός in Theaet. 155 E σκληροὺς—καὶ ἀντιτύπους ἀνθρώπους, but stronger, suggesting castiron hardness and inflexibility.

ῥᾴδιον . See cr. n. Schneider refers to Laws 757 B τὴν δὲ ἀληθεστάτην καὶ ἀρίστην ἰσότητα οὐκέτι ῥᾴδιον παντὶ ἰδεῖν. ῥᾷον is not (I think) possible here: and a scribe might easily omit ΙΔ in ΡΑΙΔΙΟΝ. Cf. Introd. § 5.

εἰ γὰρ κτλ. Gorg. 483 C νόμῳ μὲν τοῦτο ἄδικον καὶ αἰσχρὸν λέγεται, τὸ πλέον ζητεῖν ἔχειν τῶν πολλῶν, καὶ ἀδικεῖν αὐτὸ καλοῦσιν. Dümmler (Zur Comp. d. Pl. St. p. 13) goes so far as to assert that ὥσπερ ἄλλοι τινές is an express reference to Polus in the Gorgias; but nothing is gained by so hazardous a conjecture.

προσετίθεμεν : ‘used to attribute to,’ sc. before you announced your view—with ironical deference, like ἐλέγομεν in Prot. 353 C τί οὖν φατε τοῦτο εἶναι, ὃ ἡμεῖς <*>ττω ε<*>ναι τῶν ἡδονῶν ἐλέγομεν; Stallbaum takes the imperfect as referring to 345 C, but neither there nor in 348 C (cited by Schneider) is there anything to justify a particular reference.

ἐμοὶ γὰρ ‐‐ λέγειν . A similar remark is made after Callicles has expounded kindred views in Gorg. 492 D σαφῶς γὰρ σὺ νῦν λέγεις ἃ οἱ ἄλλοι διανοοῦνται μέν, λέγειν δὲ οὐκ ἐθέλουσι.

τὰ δοκοῦντα κτλ. can only mean ‘what you think about the truth,’ not ‘what you think to be the truth’ (D. and V.) or ‘your real mind’ (Schneider and Jowett). We should expect ἀδικίας for ἀληθείας, as H. Wolf proposed to read, for it is Injustice, not Truth, which is the subject of dispute. But as ἀδικίας has not a vestige of support from the MSS, I have not ventured to make the change. The truth in question must be understood as the truth about justice and injustice. Herwerden's ἐπὶ τῆς ἀληθείας (for which he compares Dem. de Cor. 17, 226, and 294) will hardly command assent.

τί δέ ‐‐ ἐλέγχεις ; Cf. Charm. 161 C πάντως γὰρ οὐ τοῦτο σκεπτέον ὅστις αὐτὸ εἶπεν, ἀλλὰ πότερον ἀληθὲς λέγεται ἢ οὔ.

πλέον ἔχειν . The literal and derived significations of this phrase are treated as identical throughout the curious reasoning which follows. Primarily, πλέον ἔχειν refers to quantitative superiority; in its derived sense, it is used (together with πλεονεκτεῖν) more generally of ‘overreaching.’

τῆς δικαίας πράξεως . ‘To have more than the just action’ means ‘to do more than is just’ (cf. πλείω—αἱρεῖσθαι— πράττειν 350 A), outdo, overreach what is just in action. The notion of virtue as a μεσότης is implied.

οὐδὲ τῆς κτλ. See cr. n. I do not think that οὐδὲ τῆς δικαίας can be right. The whole emphasis (as οὐδὲ shews) must be on πράξεως, and the emphatic word should be expressed. οὐδὲ τῆς πράξεως τῆς δικαίας (sc. any more than the ἀνδρὸς δικαίου) gives exactly the emphasis required. In the cases quoted by Schneider ( Laws 754 B, 916 B, infra VII 516 B) the omitted word is unemphatic and easily supplied. For the error cf. Crito 50 B where the first hand of the Bodleian MS reads τὰς δικασθείσας by mistake for τὰς <δίκας τὰς> δικασθείσας. See also Introd. § 5.

οὐκοῦν καὶ ‐‐ λάβῃ . The ἄδικος πρᾶξις which the unjust man overreaches is to be regarded as ἄδικος because it has itself overreached (not fallen short of) the mean. ὡς with the subjunctive after verbs of striving does not seem to occur elsewhere in Plato: like its use in a pure final clause (of which there is only one example in Plato, viz. Tim. 92 A) it is almost exclusively confined (among Attic writers) to Xenophon and the tragedians. See Weber's tables in Goodwin MT. p. 398, and cf. Gildersleeve in A. J. Ph. IV p. 419.

τοῦ μὲν ὁμοίου ‐‐ τοῦ δὲ ἀνομοίου . This generalisation of ‘like’ and ‘unlike’ into abstract notions, without regard to their relativity, is suggestive of (but does not of course presuppose) the Ideas of τὰ πρός τι which we meet with in Phaed. 74 A.

οὐκοῦν κτλ. A proviso which is made use of in 350 C (ἀλλὰ μὴν —ἑκάτερον εἷναι ).

ὁ δὲ μὴ ἐοικέναι . ὁ δέ is simply ‘the other’ (as is marked in A by a pause after δέ), i.e. ὁ μὴ τοιοῦτος: cf. 339 E (τοῖς δέ for τοῖς δὲ ἀρχομένοις), 343 D ὁ μὲν δίκαιος ἀπὸ τῶν ἴσων πλέον εἰσφέρει, ὁ δ’ ἔλαττον and IX 587 B. J. and C., with most of the editors, adopt the reading of Stephanus (ὁ δὲ μὴ μὴ ἐοικέναι), which has the support of some inferior MSS; but the idiom is sufficiently well authenticated, and the collocation of the two negatives would be unpleasing. I am glad to see that Tucker takes the same view.

οἷσπερ ἔοικεν . Madvig's οἵοισπερ ἔοικεν is refuted by 350 C ὡμολογοῦμεν ᾧ γε (i.e. οἷος ᾧ γε) ὅμοιος ἑκάτερος εἴη, τοιοῦτον καὶ ἑκάτερον εἶναι. Cf. also Arist. Pol. H 13. 1332^{a} 22. The construction was supported by Schneider from Phaed. 92 B, but ὅ and not ᾧ is now read there on the authority of the best MS.

ἀλλὰ τί μέλλει (sc. εἶναι); A rare formula, occurring also in Hipp. Min. 377 D: cf. τί δ’ οὐ μέλλει; VIII 566 D, X 605 C. With the force of τί (‘what else’) cf. ἀλλὰ τί οἴει supra 332 C.

μουσικὸν δέ τινα κτλ. Here begin the usual Socratic illustrations from the arts, with the concomitant identification of virtue and knowledge (ὁ δὲ σοφὸς ἀγαθός; Φημί 350 B).

δοκεῖ ἂν οὖν ‐‐ ἀξιοῦν πλέον ἔχειν . Socrates ignores the proverb καὶ κεραμεὺς κεραμεῖ κοτέει καὶ ἀοιδὸς ἀοιδῷ. Strictly speaking, however, it is not qua κεραμεύς, but qua moneymaker (or the like) that the κεραμεὺς κοτέει. J. and C. cite an admirable parallel from Shakespeare (King John IV 2) “When workmen strive to do better than well, They do confound their skill in covetousness.” The words ἢ ἀξιοῦν πλέον ἔχειν have a suspicious look, and are rejected by Heller (Fl. Jahrb. 1875 p. 171) and others, but such duplicate expressions are common in Plato, and as the illustration from the harp introduces a new and important stage in the argument, Plato may have wished to remind us that after all πλεονεκτεῖν is only the πλέον ἔχειν with which we started (349 B). It should be noted, too, that ἀξιοῦν is a little more than ἐθέλειν.

ἐν τῇ ἐδωδῇ ἢ πόσει refers of course to the patient's diet. Plato carefully writes πλεονεκτεῖν here in preference to πλέον ἔχειν. The ‘overreaching’ in such a case might well consist in giving the patient less.

ἢ πράττειν ἢ λέγειν . The idea of πλεονεκτεῖν in speaking has not been introduced before, nor is it made use of in the sequel. We must regard the addition of ἢ λέγειν as merely a rhetorical device to increase the emphasis: see on 333 D and 351 A.

τί δὲ ὁ ἀνεπιστήμων; κτλ. Proclus' commentary on these words is interesting, though he probably reads more into them than Plato intended here: καὶ ὅλως τῷ μὲν ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακὸν ἠναντίωται μόνον, τῷ δὲ κακῷ καὶ τὸ καλὸν (leg. κακὸν) καὶ τὸ ἀγαθόν· ἀναιρετικὸν οὖν ἐστι τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ καὶ τοῦ πρὸς αὐτὸ ἐναντίου κακοῦ (in Alc. I p. 323 ed. Creuzer). The identifications in ὁ δὲ ἐπιστήμων σοφός and ὁ δὲ σοφὸς ἀγαθός below have been allowed before in the special cases of the μουσικός and the ἰατρικός (349 E).

ἀναπέφανται . Stallbaum naïvely reminds us that ἀναπέφανται is often used of a conclusion which “praeter exspectationem emergit et elucet.” The pervading fallacy in the discussion is akin to the a dicto secundum quid ad dictum simpliciter. Thus ‘like’ and ‘unlike’ are used absolutely, and each of them is equated with itself. The wise man is held to be good, because one is good in that in which one is wise (this might however be justified on the “stricter mode of reasoning”). Finally, the just man is inferred to be wise and good, on the principle that one is what one resembles: but whether the resemblance be in essence or in accident, we are not told. The argument should be regarded as a dialectical tour de force,—φιλόνικον μᾶλλον ἢ φιλάληθες. The reasoning in the next section of the argument strikes a deeper note.

350C - 352D Socrates now attacks the second assertion made by Thrasymachus in 349 A, viz. that Injustice is strong. Justice (he argues) is stronger than Injustice, both because it is (as we have seen) virtue and wisdom, and because in its effects it is the antithesis of Injustice, which infuses hatred and sedition, both into aggregates of individuals, and into the individual himself. Injustice weakens by preventing community of action; it makes men collectively and individually hateful to themselves and to the just, among whom are the gods. When Injustice seems to be strong, it is in virtue of some latent Justice which it still retains.

ff. The argument in this section has a deeper ethical import than any which has preceded, and foreshadows some of the central doctrines of the Republic. See notes on 351 D, E, and (for the importance of the whole discussion in the general history of philosophy) Bosanquet's Companion, p. 63, where it is justly observed that the argument “marks an era in philosophy. It is a first reading of the central facts of society, morality, and nature. In social analysis it founds the idea of organization and division of labour....In morality it gives the conception of a distinctively human life which is the content or positive end of the distinctively human will. And for natural knowledge it suggests the connection between function and definition, and consequently between purpose and reality, which is profoundly developed in the sixth and seventh books. These conceptions become corner-stones of Aristotle's Philosophy, and still, when seen in their connection, form the very core of the best thought.”

ὁ δὲ Θρασύμαχος κτλ. ‘Now Thrasymachus’ etc. δέ is not “flat” (Tucker), but at least as good as δή, and much better supported by the MSS.

οὐχ ὡς ἐγὼ νῦν ῥᾳδίως λέγω . “Expectabam certe: οὐχ ὡς ἐγὼ νῦν λέγω ῥᾳδίως,” says Herwerden; but the antecedent in Greek is idiomatically attracted into the relative clause (Kühner Gr. Gramm. II p. 922). Translate ‘not in the easy way in which I now repeat them.’

ἅτε καὶ θέρους ὄντος . The action is probably laid in Hecatombaeon (roughly our July): see Introd. § 3. Bekker (following the punctuation of A) takes τότε with ὄντος, but πρότερον δὲ οὔπω shews that it belongs to καὶ εἶδον.

τότε καὶ is simply ‘then too’; I cannot see anything “mock-heroic” in the expression, as J. and C. do.

εἰ οὖν λέγοιμι κτλ. εἰ δ) οὖν is read by Ast: “sed sufficit externum, ut ita dicam. vinculum οὖν (Schneider).” δημηγορεῖν and εἰπεῖν ὅσα βούλομαι are the opposites of διαλέγεσθαι and βραχυλογία ( Prot. 336 B, 335 A).

ὥσπερ ταῖς γραυσί . Cf. Gorg. 527 A τάχα δ’ οὖν ταῦτα μῦθός σοι δοκεῖ λέγεσθαι, ὥσπερ γραός, καὶ καταφρονεῖς αὐτῶν: Pol. 268 E ἀλλὰ δὴ τῷ μύθῳ μου πάνυ πρόσεχε τὸν νοῦν, καθάπερ οἱ παῖδες. παῖς for ταῖς was read before Ast on the authority of one MS; but ταῖς is quite satisfactory.

ὅπερ ἄρτι . The words ἔφαμεν δὲ δὴ καὶ ἰσχυρὸν εἶναι τὴν ἀδικίαν· ἢ οὐ μέμνησαι; (350 D), which are referred to in ἄρτι, involve the general question of the relation between justice and injustice; whence we have ὁποῖόν τι τυγχάνει ὂν δικαιοσύνη πρὸς ἀδικίαν. ὁποῖον depends on ἐρωτῶ, not on λόγον.

ἐλέχθη γάρ που : 344 C, 348 E. It has nowhere been expressly said that Injustice is δυνατώτερον than Justice, but καὶ δυνατώτερον is added for emphasis (see on ἢ λέγειν in 350 A); and indeed according to the theory of Thrasymachus δύναμις (power in a general sense) rests solely on ἰσχύς (physical strength). δύναμις and ἰσχύς are clearly distinguished in Prot. 351 A.

ἁπλῶς . The Platonic use of ἁπλοῦν has been investigated by Bonitz in Hermes II (1867) pp. 307 ff. Its antitheses are διπλοῦν, διάφορον, σύνθετον, πεπλεγμένον, ποικίλον, and the like, and it denotes that which is uniform, or single and simple, or true without any difference or qualifications. ἁπλῶς οὕτως means merely ‘in this simple or general way’ (“im Allgemeinen” Schneider): a more elaborate and profounder proof (thinks Socrates) is necessary.

καὶ καταδεδουλῶσθαι is rejected by Cobet, but successfully defended by Heller (Fl. Jahrb. 1875 p. 172). There is in reality no pleonasm: we have first an attempt (ἐπιχειρεῖν), then a successful attempt (καταδεδουλῶσθαι), then the results of success (πολλὰς δὲ καὶ ὑφ’ ἑαυτῇ ἔχειν δουλωσαμένην). A powerful city like Athens might, and often did, display her energy in all three directions simultaneously. For the collocation of δουλοῦσθαι and καταδουλοῦσθαι (middle) Heller compares infra IX 589 D, E and Menex. 240 A.

ἡ ἀρίστη . Thrasymachus refuses to withdraw from the position that ἀδικία is ἀρετή, in spite of Socrates' refutation. This is why Socrates says μανθάνω κτλ. ‘I understand: (you say so) because this was your theory.’ ὅτι is not ‘that’: see above on 332 A. Richter suggested κρατίστη for ἀρίστη on account of κρείττων just below; but κρείττων is said not by Thrasymachus, but by Socrates.

εἰ ‐‐ ἔχει . After ἔχει, εἰ is inserted by Stallbaum, following a suggestion of Baiter's. Cf. also J. B. Mayor in Cl. Rev. X p. 111. It so happens that ἡ is written in A over an erasure large enough to have contained εἰ ἡ, but there is no trace of εἰ, and mere erasures in A are seldom useful in determining the text. For ἡ Richter suggests ᾖ, which would however give a wrong meaning. Tucker also offers a variety of conjectures, but the text is perfectly sound: cf. II 359 B μάλιστ’ ἂν αἰσθοίμεθα, εἰ τοιόνδε ποιήσαιμεν τῇ διανοίᾳ· δόντες (i.e. εἰ δόντες ) ἐξουσίαν —εἶτ’ ἐπακολουθήσαιμεν κτλ. and IX 589 D εἴπερ τοιόνδε τι γίγνεται, λαμβάνων (i.e. εἰ λαμβάνων )—καταδουλοῦται.

ἢ λῃστὰς κτλ. Cf. (with Ast) Isocrates Panath. 226 οὐδεὶς ἂν αὐτοὺς (τοὺς Σπαρτιάτας) διά γε τὴν ὁμόνοιαν δικαίως ἐπαινέσειεν, οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἢ τοὺς καταποντιστὰς καὶ λῃστὰς καὶ τοὺς περὶ τὰς ἄλλας ἀδικίας ὄντας· καὶ γὰρ ἐκεῖνοι σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ὁμονοοῦντες τοὺς ἄλλους ἀπολλύουσιν. There must be some honour even among thieves.

ὁμόνοιαν καὶ φιλίαν . The conception of δικαιοσύνη which meets us in Book IV 433 A—434 E is dimly outlined here.

ἐν ἐλευθέροις κτλ. : ‘whether it makes its appearance among freemen or among slaves.’ Plato wishes to emphasize the universality of the rule, and that is why he specifies the two classes into which society is divided. Cf. Gorg. 514 D, 515 A. It is less natural and easy to construe (with Tucker) ‘in a society where there are both freemen and slaves.’

ἀλλήλοις τε καὶ τοῖς δικαίοις . So in 349 C above it is said that the unjust try to overreach both one another and the just.

ἐν ἑνὶ κτλ. The results of Book IV are foreshadowed more clearly in what follows. The notion that justice present in the individual keeps the individual at peace with himself is more fully developed in 441 D, and implicitly assumes a psychological theory like that in Book IV, where soul is shewn to have ‘parts’ (435 C ff.). Further, in Book IV, Plato first describes justice in the State, and afterwards justice in the individual, using the larger aggregate to assist him to find it in the smaller. The same method is observed here in the description of injustice, and afterwards in Books VIII and IX, where the varieties of ἀδικία in states and individuals are described. The present passage (351 A —352 A), in fact, contains the undeveloped germ of the whole method and doctrine of the Republic (with the exception of Books V—VII). Cf. Hirmer Entst. u. Kompos. d. Pl. Pol. p. 608.

μῶν μὴ (a strengthened num) occurs only twice in the Republic, here and in VI 505 C. In the later dialogues μῶν is especially frequent (Frederking in Fl. Jahrb. 1882 p. 539). A classified list of examples is given by Kugler de part. τοι eiusque comp. ap. Pl. usu p. 40.

οἵαν ‐‐ ποιεῖν . See cr. n. ποιεῖ would involve (as even Schneider admits) “durissimum et haud scio an vitiosum anacoluthon.” Cf. οἷοι μὴ ἀδικεῖν in 334 D. Tucker proposes to eject οἵαν and retain ποιεῖ, but the reading of II is preferable in every way. For the error see Introd. § 5.

παντὶ : i.e. whether just or unjust: cf. 351 E ἐχθροὶ ἔσονται (viz. οἱ ἄδικοι) ἀλλήλοις τε καὶ τοῖς δικαίοις.

ἔστων . On the form see Introd. § 5.

τὰ λοιπά κτλ. : viz. the discussion which begins in D below.

ὅτι μὲν γὰρ κτλ. The whole sentence is summed up in ταῦτα μὲν οὖν ὅτι οὕτως ἔχει (352 D) and placed in this recapitulated form under the government of μανθᾴνω. The introduction of the antithesis (ἀλλὰ δὴ κτλ.) to οἱ δὲ ἄδικοι οὐδὲν πράττειν μετ’ ἀλλήλων οἶοί τε, and of the explanations required by that antithesis, complicates the sentence, without, however, rendering it obscure. For similar anacolutha with ὅτι see V 465 A, VI 493 D notes and cf. Engelhardt Anac. Plat. Spec. III pp. 38, 40. The whole sentence forms a kind of transition to “the rest of the feast” by summing up what has been so far proved; viz. that Justice is wisdom and virtue (καὶ σοφώτεροι καὶ ἀμείνους), and more capable of action than Injustice (δυνατώτεροι πράττειν); even the difficulty raised in ἀλλὰ δὴ—ἀδύνατοι is not new, having been briefly explained in 351 C. Liebhold's ἔτι for ὅτι is an unhappy suggestion; nor should ὅτι be rendered ‘quoniam,’ as Hartman proposes.

μήτοι ‐‐ γε : a strong negative somewhat rarely used by Plato: cf. Phil. 67 A and infra III 388 B, C. See Kugler de part. τοι eiusque comp. ap. Pl. usu p. 11.

352D - 354C The argument here reverts to 347 E, and the rest of the book offers a direct refutation of the view that Injustice is more advantageous than Justice, in other words, that the life of the unjust man is better than that of the just. An indirect refutation, says Socrates, is afforded by the recent discussion (from 348 B to 352 D); the direct is as follows. Everything has its peculiar work or product (ἔργον)—that, namely, which it alone produces, or which it produces better than aught else. Everything moreover has its own peculiar excellence, without which it will not do its work well. Now the work of soul is to deliberate, to rule, to live: its excellence is Justice. Therefore the just soul will live well, and to live well is to be blest and happy. And as this is more advantageous than to be miserable, Injustice can never be more advantageous than Justice. In conclusion, Socrates sums up regretfully: until we know what Justice is, we are not likely to discover whether it is a virtue or a vice, and whether its possessor is happy or unhappy.

ff. The view that everything has its own peculiar function, which it can perform better than anything else, afterwards becomes one of the cardinal principles of the Ideal State (II 369 E ff.); and the statement that everything has an excellence or virtue of its own is reaffirmed in Book X, where we are also told that everything has its own peculiar vice, that of soul being ἀδικία (608 E ff.).

ὅντινα τρόπον χρὴ ζῆν . A reminiscence of the πῶς βιωτέον of Socrates: cf. 344 E.

ὃ ἂν ‐‐ ἄριστα . The political applications of this principle are developed from II 369 E onwards: cf. IV 433 A ff.

ἀκούσαις κτλ. The rapid succession of questions makes it possible to dispense with ἄν in the second: cf. II 382 E.

φαῖμεν . See cr. n. If φαμέν is retained, ἄν will belong to εἶναι (cf. VI 493 C), but it is inappropriate here to make εἶναι future or hypothetical. Schneider, while retaining φαμέν, refers ἄν to δικαίως, “ut sensus sit: οὐκοῦν, εἰ ταῦτα τούτων φαμὲν ἔργα εἶναι, δικαίως ἂν φαῖμεν”—a harsh and unnatural view. We may either drop ἄν and keep φαμέν, as (with one of Stobaeus' MSS Flor. 9. 63) I formerly did: or change φαμέν to φαῖμεν. The latter solution is easier and better. Similarly in φαῖμεν below (353 D) the ι is due to A^{2}. See also Introd. § 5.

ἀποτέμοις —see cr. n.—can hardly, I think, dispense with the particle ἄν. It should be noted that the illustrations are of two kinds—the first to illustrate ἢ μόνῳ ἐκείνῳ, the second to illustrate ἄριστα; after each division the conclusion is stated, in the second case more diffidently (ἆρ’ οὖν οὐ—θήσομεν), perhaps because it is less obvious.

μόνον τι . Cornarius unhappily suggested τις for τι and Stephanus μόνῳ τις for μόνον τι (cf. 352 E). μόνον τι is of course the subject to ἀπεργάζηται .

οὐκοῦν ‐‐ προστέτακται . Cf. Men. 72 A οὐκ ἀπορία εἰπεῖν ἀρετῆς πέρι ὅ τι ἔστιν. καθ’ ἑκάστην γὰρ τῶν πράξεων καὶ τῶν ἡλικιῶν πρὸς ἕκαστον ἔργον ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν ἡ ἀρετή ἐστιν. ὡσαύτως δὲ—καὶ ἡ κακία: also infra X 608 E with Arist. Eth. Nic. II 5. 1106^{a} 15 ff.

ἦν : ‘is, as we saw,’ viz. at 352 E: cf. infra IV 441 D, VI 490 A, VII 522 A.

ἀπεργάσαιντο . Heindorf (on Crat. 424 E) would read ἀπεργάσαιτο, and Baiter adopts his suggestion; but (as Stallbaum observes) the use of ὀφθαλμοί just above may affect the construction. In the same way, perhaps, the occurrence of γυναῖκες καὶ τἄλλα θηρία immediately before causes Plato to write δεήσοιντο (the reading of A) rather than δεήσοιτο in Tim. 76 E. Of the other alleged cases of a plural verb after a neuter plural in Plato, some (e.g. Laws 634 E, 683 B) are not supported by the best MSS; one—ἐξ ὧν τά τε ὀνόματα καὶ τὰ ῥήματα συντίθενται (so AT) Crat. 424 E—is distributive; some refer to living objects, e.g. Laws 658 C (with which contrast κρίνοι just before) and Lach. 180 E; at least one ( Phil. 24 E) is perhaps corrupt. See also on Rep. II 365 B.

τυφλότητα κτλ. τυφλότης is also said to be the disease or vice of the eyes in Alc. I 126 B, a passage probably imitated from this. In the stricter discussion of X 608 E it is not τυφλότης but ὀφθαλμία which is the vice to which the eyes are subject.

οὐ γάρ πω ‐‐ ἐρωτῶ is ‘I do not, at this stage, enquire’; but the words do not, I think, contain an express promise that the subject will be afterwards resumed. Although the peculiar vice of the eyes is specified in Book X (l.c.), their virtue is not; and τοῦτο refers to ἥτις αὐτῶν ἡ ἀρετή. Cf. 347 E note

ψυχῆς ἔστιν τι ἔργον : cf. III 407 A and Arist. Eth. Nic. I 6. 1097^{b} 22—1098^{a} 17, where this discussion is closely imitated. That it is the ἔργον of soul (and in particular of νοῦς) to rule (ἄρχειν, ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, and the like), is continually asserted in Plato: see for example Phaedr. 246 B πᾶσα ἡ ψυχὴ παντὸς ἐπιμελεῖται τοῦ ἀψύχου, Crat. 400 A, Phil. 30C, Laws 896 A. The same doctrine is made the ground of the subjection of body to soul which is inculcated in the Phaedo (80 A, 94 B), and in Alc. I 130 A. Cf. also Isocrates περὶ ἀντιδόσεως 180 ὁμολογεῖται μὲν γὰρ τὴν φύσιν ἡμῶν ἔκ τε τοῦ σώματος συγκεῖσθαι καὶ τῆς ψυχῆς· αὐτοῖν δὲ τούτοιν οὐδεὶς ἔστιν ὅστις οὐκ ἂν φήσειεν ἡγεμονικωτέραν πεφυκέναι τὴν ψυχὴν καὶ πλείονος ἀξίαν· τῆς μὲν γὰρ ἔργον εἶναι βουλεύσασθαι καὶ περὶ τῶν ἰδίων καὶ περὶ τῶν κοινῶν, τοῦ δὲ σώματος ὑπηρετῆσαι τοῖς ὑπὸ τῆς ψυχῆς γνωσθεἶσιν.

ἐκείνου . The reading ἐκείνης—see cr. n.—can only be defended by supposing that Plato was guilty of a strange confusion, unless we make a pause at ἄλλῳ, and take ἤ as ‘or,’ not ‘than’; but ἤ after ἄλλῳ would certainly here be understood as ‘than,’ and an alternative question should be less ambiguously expressed. After ψυχῇ the corruption to ἐκείνης was natural enough. Madvig would eject the word.

τὸζῆν is κατ’ ἐξοχήν the ἔργον of ψυχή in Plato: cf. Crat. 399 D, E τοῦτο ἄρα (sc. ψυχή), ὅταν παρῇ τῷ σώματι, αἴτιόν ἐστι τοῦ ζῆν αὐτῷ, τὴν τοῦ ἀναπνεῖν δύναμιν παρέχον καὶ ἀναψῦχον, ἅμα δὲ ἐκλείποντος τοῦ ἀναψύχοντος τὸ σῶμα ἀπόλλυταί τε καὶ τελευτᾷ· ὅθεν δή μοι δοκοῦσιν αὐτὸ ψυχὴν καλέσαι, and Phaed. 105 D. The influence of this idea makes itself felt in all the proofs of immortality in Plato, and not least in X 608 E ff. See notes ad loc.

συνεχωρήσαμεν κτλ. The reference is to 350 C, D: cf. also 348 C. In these passages Justice has been identified with Virtue, but not expressly with virtue of soul. For this reason Hartman would eject ψυχῆς. But as Plato has just been using ἀρετή ‘excellence’ in connexion with things other than soul (ears and eyes), it is important that he should now make it clear that in identifying δικαιοσύνη and ἀρετή, he meant soul's ἀρετή. Otherwise a soul may possess its ἀρετή without being just; in which case the conclusion which he is aiming at will not follow.

ὅ γε εὖ ζῶν κτλ. The ambiguity (as it appears to us) of εὖ ζῆν and εὖ πράττειν is frequently used by Plato to suggest that the virtuous life is the happy one, e.g. Charm. 172 A, 173 D: see note on 335 B. Aristotle says that Plato was the first to establish this identification: see the third fragment of his elegies vv. 4—6 ed. Bergk ὃς μόνος ἢ πρῶτος θνητῶν κατέδειξεν ἐναργῶς | οἰκείῳ τε βίῳ καὶ μεθόδοισι λόγων | ὡς ἀγαθός τε καὶ εὐδαίμων ἅμα γίνεται ἀνήρ.

εἱστιάσθω . The metaphor occurs again in 352 B, V 458 A, IX 571 D. It is one of the formal links connecting the Timaeus with the Republic: see Tim. 17 A. Cf. Shakespeare Macbeth Act I Scene 4 “In his commendations I am fed: It is a banquet to me.”

Βενδιδείοις . See Introd. § 3.

In ὑπὸ σοῦ γε κτλ. Plato seems to be making the amende honorable to Thrasymachus: cf. VI 498 C, D μὴ διάβαλλε— ἐμὲ καὶ Θρασύμαχον ἄρτι φίλους γεγονότας, οὐδὲ πρὸ τοῦ ἐχθροὺς γεγονότας.

παραφερομένου . Casaubon's conjecture περιφερομένου is neat, but inappropriate, the reference being to the successive courses at a feast, which were not usually carried round among the Greeks. In Athen. IV 33 the carrying round of viands is mentioned as an Egyptian custom: τρίτη δ’ ἐστὶν ἰδέα δείπνων αἰγυπτιακή, τραπεζῶν μὲν οὐ παρατιθεμένων, πινάκων δὲ περιφερομένων .

ἐγώ μοι δοκῶ κτλ. Lys. 222 E δέομαι οὖν ὥσπερ οἱ σοφοὶ ἐν τοῖς δικαστηρίοις, τὰ εἰρημένα ἅπαντα ἀναπεμπάσασθαι.

The tone of the concluding summary recalls the usual finish of the earlier and professedly negative Socratic dialogues, like the Charmides (175 B—176 A). The only section of the dialogue which Socrates passes over in silence is the refutation of the statement that Injustice is strong (350 D—352 C). The original question—the quid sit of Justice—is abandoned at 347 E: the quale sit occupies the rest of the dialogue, and Socrates enquires first whether Justice is vicious and ignorant, or wise and good (347 E— 350 C), next whether it is strong or weak (350 D—352 C), and lastly whether it is more or less advantageous than Injustice (352 D—354 A). To speculate on the quale sit of a thing before determining its quid sit is condemned by Plato in Men. 71 B ὃ δὲ μὴ οἶδα τί ἐστι, πῶς ἂν ὁποῖόν γε τι εἰδείην; cf. ibid. 86 D and 100 B. The words with which the first book concludes lead us to expect that in the remaining books the problem will be discussed in proper logical order—the essence first, and afterwards the quality, of Justice. The expectation is duly fulfilled; and Book I is therefore in the full sense of the term a προοίμιον to the whole work.

Appendices to book 1

I 327 A. προσευξόμενός τε τῇ θεῷ καὶ ἅμα τὴν ἑορτὴν βουλόμενος θεάσασθαι τίνα τρόπον ποιήσουσιν, ἅτε νῦν πρῶτον ἄγοντες.

The question whether τῇ θεῷ here and in 328 A is Bendis or Athena is not so simple as it appears.

In favour of Athena it may be urged (1) that ἡ θεός regularly means Athena in Attic literature (see for example Ar. Eq. 656, 903 al., and Plato Laws 806 B): (2) that in view of the relation between the Republic and the Timaeus it is difficult to separate τῇ θεῷ here from τὴν θεόν and τῆς θεοῦ in Tim. 21 A and 26 E, where the goddess is certainly Athena, (3) that it is dramatically appropriate for an Athenian to dedicate his ideal city to the patron goddess of Athens. Plato's perfect city would thus become in a certain sense a βασιλεία τῆς θεοῦ .

On the other hand, the goddess and the festival are mentioned so closely together that (if we have regard to the Republic by itself) we are scarcely justified in interpreting τῇ θεῷ without reference to τὴν ἑορτήν, and it is quite in harmony with Socrates' principles that he should be among the first to pay his vows at the shrine of the new goddess as soon as the νόμος πόλεως received her. See Xen. Mem. I 3. I, IV 3. 16. It is therefore safer to accept the usual view that Plato is thinking of Bendis.

I 333 E—334 A. ἆῤ οὐχ ὁ πατάξαι δεινότατος ἐν μάχῃ εἴτε πυκτικῇ εἴτε τινὶ καὶ ἄλλῃ, οὗτος καὶ φυλάξασθαι; Πάνυ γε. Ἆῤ οὖν καὶ νόσον ὅστις δεινὸς φυλάξασθαι, καὶ λαθεῖν οὗτος δεινότατος ἐμποιήσας; Ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ. Ἀλλὰ μὴν στρατοπέδου γε ὁ αὐτὸς φύλαξ ἀγαθός, ὅσπερ καὶ τὰ τῶν πολεμίων κλέψαι καὶ βουλεύματα καὶ τὰς ἄλλας πράξεις. Πάνυ γε. Ὅτου τις ἄρα δεινὸς φύλαξ, τούτου καὶ φὼρ δεινός. Ἔοικεν .

The reading φυλάξασθαι καὶ λαθεῖν, οὗτος δεινότατος καὶ ἐμποιῆσαι, which has slight MS authority, is defended by Boeckh (Kl. Schr. IV pp. 326 ff.), with whom Zahlfleisch (Zeitschr. f. öst. Gymn. Vol. XXVIII 1877, pp. 603 ff.) and others agree. Boeckh points out that καὶ λαθεῖν (sc. νόσον, according to his view) suggests (from its notion of clandestine cunning) the idea of stealing. This may be admitted, but the idea of stealing is much more forcibly suggested (as Stallbaum points out), if καὶ λαθεῖν is construed with οὗτος δεινότατος κτλ., and this involves the necessity of changing (with Schneider) ἐμποιῆσαι of the MSS to ἐμποιήσας, for the construction λαθεῖν ἐμποιῆσαι, though retained by Campbell, is destitute of authority.

Even if Schneider's emendation be adopted, the argument is (as stated in the notes) fantastical and inconclusive. In order that the conclusion ὅτου τις ἄρα δεινὸς φύλαξ, τούτου καὶ φὼρ δεινός should be valid, φυλάξασθαι should be φυλάξαι, and the objects of the two verbs in proposition (1) should be identical, as well as those in propositions (2) and (3). As it is, if we express φυλάξασθαι in terms of φυλάξαι, they are not identical: for in (1) it is the enemy whom you smite, but yourself whom you guard: in (2) it is yourself (or your patient) whom you guard, but the disease which you secretly implant: in (3) you guard your own army, but steal the enemy's plans, etc. Nevertheless Schneider's emendation is preferable to the traditional reading, which not only contains all the same fallacies as the other, but leaves the three stages of the argument in comparative isolation, attaches the first hint of ‘stealing’ (λαθεῖν) to the wrong member of the clause, and involves the use of the somewhat strained expression λαθεῖν νόσον. It should be added that the change from ἐμποιῇσαι to ἐμποιήσας is not greater than the insertion of καί before ἐμποιῆσαι, and that ἐμποιήσας was very likely to be corrupted under the influence of δεινὸς φυλάξασθαι just before. The emphatic position of καὶ λαθεῖν is necessary to call attention to the first suggestion of the idea contained in κλέψαι; nor can I agree with J. and C. that in Schneider's emendation “the emphasis falls on the wrong word.” In λαθεῖν ἐμποιήσας, which is virtually a single expression, λαθεῖν is more important, in view of the conclusion καὶ κλέπτειν δεινός, than ἐμποιήσας .

Hartman condemns the words καὶ λαθεῖν, and thinks ὅστις and οὗτος have changed places: “cum enim ubique τὸ φυλάξασθαι urgeatur (ὁ πατάξαι δεινότατος, οὗτος καὶ φυλάξασθαι—ὅσπερ κλέψαι..., ὁ αὐτὸς φύλαξ ἀγαθός), requiritur οὗτος δεινὸς φυλάξασθαι, ὅστις δεινότατος κτλ.; quibus tribus exemplis praemissis inversa ratione concludit ὅτου τις ἄρα δεινὸς φύλαξ, τούτου καὶ φὼρ δεινός.” Tucker revives the old conjecture καὶ ἀλθεῖν (‘heal’) instead of καὶ λαθεῖν, and suggests (as an alternative) that λαθεῖν should be μαθεῖν (i.e. καὶ μαθεῖν οὗτος δεινότατος ἐμποιῆσαι ‘clever at learning how to implant’). None of these conjectures appears to me so probable as that of Schneider.

I 335 A. Κελεύεις δὴ ἡμᾶς προσθεῖναι τῷ δικαίῳ, ἤ, ὡς τὸ πρῶτον ἐλέγομεν, λέγοντες δίκαιον εἶναι τὸν μὲν φίλον εὖ ποιεῖν, τὸν δ’ ἐχθρὸν κακῶς, νῦν πρὸς τούτῳ ὧδε λέγειν, ὅτι ἔστιν δίκαιον τὸν μὲν φίλον ἀγαθὸν ὄντα εὖ ποιεῖν, τὸν δ’ ἐχθρὸν κακὸν ὄντα βλάπτειν;

In this difficult passage Schneider takes ἤ as ‘than,’ and προσθεῖναι as equivalent to a comparative with a verb; but no exact parallel has hitherto been adduced, and the idiom even if admissible is exceedingly harsh. Neither the suggestion of Stephanus (προσθεῖναι τῷ δικαίῳ ἄλλως ἢ) nor that of Richards (to insert πλέον after ἤ) carries conviction. It should also be remarked that the words νῦν πρὸς τούτῳ ὧδε λέγειν follow somewhat awkwardly as an explanation of προσθεῖναι τῷ δικαίῳ if ἢ ὡς is interpreted in Schneider's way. Stallbaum's ἢ ὡς—τὸν δὲ ἐχθρὸν κακῶς; νῦν πρὸς τούτῳ ὧδε λέγειν, is very unpleasing, not so much from the necessity of understanding λέγειν after ἤ (‘or to say, as we said at first’ etc.) as because it is extremely violent to separate ἤ from νῦν πρὸς τούτῳ ὧδε λέγειν. Faesius' proposal (in which he is followed by Ast, Madvig, and several editors) to eject ἤ gives the required sense (‘do you bid us add to the view of justice which etc.,’ προσθεῖναι being explained by πρὸς τούτῳ ὧδε λέγειν), but it fails to account for the presence of ἤ in the MSS. It may seem an objection to the view which I take that ἤ in a sentence of this kind would naturally introduce an alternative, whereas πρὸς τούτῳ ὧδε λέγειν only explains προσθεῖναι. This objection, such as it is, applies with still greater force to the view that ἤ is ‘than.’ Some will probably regard the whole clause from ἤ—λέγειν as a marginal commentary on προσθεῖναι; but this is much too drastic. Possibly ἤ should be replaced by καί—the corruption is said to be common (Bast Comment. Palaeogr. p. 815); but I am not convinced that ἤ does not sometimes mean ‘or in other words’ even in classical Greek.

I 336 E. μὴ γὰρ δὴ οἴου, εἰ μὲν χρυσίον ἐζητοῦμεν, οὐκ ἄν ποτε ἡμᾶς ἑκόντας εἶναι ὑποκατακλίνεσθαι ἀλλήλοις ἐν τῇ ζητήσει καὶ διαφθείρειν τὴν εὕρεσιν αἰτοῦ, δικαιοσύνην δὲ ζητοῦντας, πρᾶγμα πολλῶν χρυσίων τιμιώτερον, ἔπειθ) οὕτως ἀνοήτως ὑπείκειν ἀλλήλοις καὶ οὐ σπουδάζειν ὅ τι μάλιστα φανῆναι αὐτό. οἴου γε σύ, ὦ φίλε· ἀλλ), οἶμαι, οὐ δυνάμεθα.

Schneider's explanation of the words οἴου γε σύ (sc. ἡμᾶς σπουδάζειν ὅ τι μάλιστα φανῆναι αὐτό) would probably have met with wider acceptance if he had taken more pains to justify his view. The key to the meaning is to be found in the affirmative οἴεσθαί γε χρή which sometimes follows a fortiori reasoning of this kind in Plato. Two examples will suffice: Prot. 325 B, C τὰ μὲν ἄλλα ἄρα τοὺς υἱεῖς διδάσκονται, ἐφ) οἷς οὐκ ἔστι θάνατος ἡ ζημία ἐὰν μὴ ἐπίστωνται, ἐφ) ᾧ δὲ ἥ τε ζημία θάνατος αὐτῶν τοῖς παισί—ταῦτα δ) ἄρα οὐ διδάσκονται οὐδ) ἐπιμελοῦνται πᾶσαν ἐπιμέλειαν; οἴεσθαί γε χρή, and Phaed. 68 A ἢ ἀνθρωπίνων μὲν παιδικῶν—ἀποθανόντων πολλοὶ δὴ ἑκόντες ἠθέλησαν εἰς ἅδου ἰέναι—φρονήσεως δὲ ἄρα τις τῷ ὄντι ἐρῶν—ἀγανακτήσει τε ἀποθνῄσκων καὶ οὐκ ἄσμενος εἶσιν αὐτόσε; οἴεσθαί γε χρή. If in place of the imperative μὴ γὰρ δὴ οἴου, Plato had used an interrogation (as he generally does in sentences of this kind), writing let us say ἢ οἴει instead of μὴ γὰρ δὴ οἴου, he would have added οἴεσθαί γε χρή. The same way of writing, dictated of course by the desire to emphasize the δέ clause, causes him to say οἴου γε when the sentence is in the imperatival form. σύ is of course necessary on account of ὦ φίλε. For the affirmative sense of οἴου cf. infra 346 E ἆῤ οὖν οὐδ) ὠφελεῖ τότε, ὅταν προῖκα ἐργάζηται; Οἶμαι ἔγωγε, and X 608 D. Of the various suggestions made on this passage that of O. Apelt ἰού, ἰού, ὦ φίλε “aber wehe, o Freund, unsere Kraft, glaube ich, reicht nicht aus dazu” (Fl. Jahrb. 1891, p. 557) deserves mention for its ingenuity; but except for the corruption of γε to τε (see cr. n.), the text is sound. There is certainly no occasion to follow q and Stallbaum in writing μὴ οἴου σύ for οἴου γε σύ.

357A - 358E Socrates had thought the conversation at an end, but Glauco revives the theory of Thrasymachus. A threefold classification of goods is first agreed upon. Goods are desirable either (1) for their own sakes, or (2) both for their own sakes and for their consequences, or (3) for their consequences alone. Justice is placed by Socrates in the second and noblest of these three classes. Glauco on the other hand asserts that the Many place it in the third, and proposes to advocate the belief of the Many, not as holding it himself, but in order to compel Socrates to defend Justice and condemn Injustice solely on their merits. Thrasymachus, he thinks, has cried off too soon.

ἐγὼ κτλ. λόγου is abstract =τοῦ λέγειν, not ‘the discussion’ (Jowett), which would be τοῦ λόγου. For τὸ δέ see on I 340 D.

ἦν ἄρα : ‘was after all,’ as in IV 443 C τὸ δέ γε ἦν ἄρα—εἴδωλόν τι τῆς δικαιοσύνης and Soph. Tr. 1172 τὸ δ’ ἦν ἄρ’ οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλὴν θανεῖν ἐμέ. With προοίμιον cf. infra VII 531 D, Aesch. P. V. 740 f. ο<*>ς γὰρ νῦν ἀκήκοας λόγους | εἶναι δοκεῖ σοι μηδέπω )ν προοιμίοις, and Shakespeare Macbeth I 3 “As happy prologues to the swelling act Of the imperial theme.” For the sense see the last note on Book I. There is no good ground for supposing (with von Sybel De Platonis Proemiis Academicis) that either Book I of the Republic or the rest of Plato's dialogues were intended merely as προοίμια or ‘Programs’ to attract pupils to his lectures.

βούλει κτλ. The antithesis is between δοκεῖν πεπεικέναι and πεῖσαι, and βούλει is used in its natural sense, not (as Ast thinks) with the force of μᾶλλον βούλει.

λέγε γάρ μοι . Other classifications of ‘goods’ in Plato will be found in Laws 631 B ff. and 697 B ff. (with which compare Arist. Eth. Nic. I 8. 1098^{b} 12 ff.). See also Euthyd. 279 A ff., Gorg. 467 E, Phil. 66 A ff. The nearest parallels to the present classification are furnished by Stoicism, in which goods were classified as a τελικά, b ποιητικά, c both τελικά and ποιητικά, and the προηγμένα as a δἰ αὑτά, b δἰ ἕτερα, c καὶ δἰ αὑτὰ καὶ δἰ ἕτερα see D. L. VII 96, 107.

χαίρειν ‐‐ ἀβλαβεῖς . These ‘innocent pleasures’ are defined in Laws 667 E as those which bring no consequences in their train, good, bad, or otherwise (cf. καὶ μηδὲν εἰς τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον διὰ ταύτας γίγνεται ἄλλο ἢ χαίρειν ἔχοντα). They are not quite identical with the ‘pure pleasures’ of Phil. 51 B, which are not necessarily devoid of all results, but only of pain. The same conception recurs in Aristotle, who regards the ἀβλαβεῖς ἡδοναί both as conducive to the ethical end and as useful for purposes of recreation (Pol. Θ 5. 1339^{b} 25).

καὶ μηδὲν κτλ. The relative passes into a demonstrative (ταύτας) in the second half of the sentence, as in III 412 D, VI 505 D, E, VII 521 B, and elsewhere. The idiom is regular in Greek, but the second pronoun is more usually some case of αὐτός than of οὗτος, e.g. III 395 D, VI 511 C, Gorg. 452 D, Theaet. 192 A. Cobet however (Mnem. XI p. 167) goes too far in maintaining that αὐτός is alone permissible in this idiom. Cf. Engelhardt Anac. Plat. Spec. III pp. 41—43. μηδέν is used in preference to οὐδέν: for “cogitatione circumscriptum genus significatur” (Schneider). With the sentiment Muretus compared Arist. Eth. Nic. X 2. 1172^{b} 22 οὐδένα γὰρ ἐπερωτᾶν τίνος ἕνεκα ἥδεται, ὡς καθ’ αὑτὴν οὖσαν αἱρετὴν τὴν ἡδονήν.

ἔχοντα : sc. αὐτάς (so also Schneider), not the idiomatic ‘to continue rejoicing’ (as Campbell suggests). The essential mark of these pleasures, viz. that they give pleasure only while they last, is brought out by ἔχοντα, which recalls δεξαίμεθ’ ἂν ἔχειν just above, and is used without an expressed object as in 366 E.

τὸ φρονεῖν ‐‐ ὑγιαίνειν . ἀκούειν is added in 367 C. Cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. I 4. 1096^{b} 16 καθ) αὑτὰ δὲ ποῖα θείη τις ἄν; ἢ ὅσα καὶ μονούμενα διώκεται, οἷον τὸ φρονεῖν καὶ ὁρᾶν καὶ ἡδοναί τινες καὶ τιμαί; ταῦτα γὰρ εἰ καὶ δἰ ἄλλο τι διώκομεν, ὅμως τῶν καθ) αὑτὰ ἀγαθῶν θείη τις ἄν: also Met. A 1. 980^{a} 2 ff. Aristotle himself does not suggest that a special class should be made of things desirable both in themselves and for their results; but integri sensus and bona valetudo are included in the Stoic category of προηγμένα καὶ δἰ αὑτὰ καὶ δἰ ἕτερα (Cic. De Fin. III 56: cf. D. L. VII 107).

γυμνάζεσθαι κτλ. Cf. Prot. 354 A and Gorg. 467 C, D (where χρηματισμός is again said to belong to this class). ἰάτρευσις as an example of χρηματισμός (in spite of the ἀκριβὴς λόγος of I 342 B ff.) is suggested by ἰατρεύεσθαι. ὁ ἄλλος is ‘the rest of,’ and should not be taken (with Stallbaum) as praeterea: cf. Gorg. l.c. οἱ πλέοντές τε καὶ τὸν ἄλλον χρηματισμὸν χρηματιζόμενοι and Crito 53 E.

μισθῶν θ’ ἕνεκα κτλ. Herwerden would read μισθῶν τε μὲν ἕνεκα, but for δέ without μέν preceding see I 340 D note The words διὰ δόξαν, which are condemned by the same critic, may no doubt be a gloss on εὐδοκιμήσεων ἕνεκα. I incline however to think them genuine. Plato is not averse to duplicate expressions of this kind (see Schanz Nov. Comm. Plat. pp. 12—15), and the emphatic addition of διὰ δόξαν helps in the absence of μέν to prepare us for the antithesis αὐτὸ δὲ δἰ αὑτὸ κτλ. Cf. 363 A below.

ψέγεται . See cr. n. The words ἀδικία δ’ ἐπαινεῖται are probably genuine: for the mention of ἀδικία seems to be necessary to justify the pronoun ἑκατέρου just below: cf. also in D βούλομαι καὶ σοῦ ἀκούειν ἀδικίαν μὲν ψέγοντος, δικαιοσύνην δὲ ἐπαινοῦντος. For the omission see Introd. § 5.

ὡς ἀναγκαῖον ἀλλ’ οὐχ ὡς ἀγαθόν . Cf. infra 360 C and VI 493 C τὴν δὲ τοῦ ἀναγκαίου καὶ ἀγαθοῦ φύσιν ὅσον διαφέρει τῷ ὄντι κτλ.

ἀμείνων ἄρα . ἄρα disclaims responsibility for the theory: cf. 362 A, 364 B, E al.

Θρασυμάχου ‐‐ ἄλλων . See on I 337 A ff.

κατατείνας κτλ. : ‘I will speak vehemently in praise of the unjust life.’ The explanation of Photius and Suidas (κατατείνας ἐρῶ· ἀντὶ τοῦ μακρὸν λόγον διεξελεύσομαι) does not suit II 367 B ὡς δύναμαι μάλιστα κατατείνας λέγω. For this intransitive use of κατατείνω cf. I 348 A and Boeckh's emendation of Eur. Iph. Aul. 336 οὔτε κατατενῶ ( καταινῶ MSS) λίαν ἐγώ.

εἴ σοι βουλομένῳ . In Crat. 384 A ἐστί is again omitted in this phrase. A still bolder example is cited by Stallbaum from Antipho 6. 8 ἐὰν ὑμῖν ἡδομένοις. See Schanz Novae Comm. Plat. pp. 31— 35.

οἷόν τέ τι . The reading of A τί ὄν τε καὶ ὅθεν γέγονε involves the separation of ὅθεν from γέγονε, and is otherwise much too harsh to be right. There is something to be said in favour of Schneider's περὶ τούτου ἅκουε τί οἴονται, καὶ ὅθεν γέγονε δικαιοσύνη (see cr. n.), especially as the confusion between οἷόν τε and οἴονται occurs rather frequently in Platonic MSS (see Schneider on 1 329 E), but the specific reference in ὃ ἔφην πρῶτον ἐρεῖν to 358 C πρῶτον μὲν ἐρῶ δικαιοσύνην οἷον εἶναί φασι καὶ ὅθεν γεγονέναι points to the presence of οἷον here. The reading οἷόν τε, adopted by Stallbaum, as well as by Jowett and Campbell, on the authority of three MSS (Vind. F, Flor. RT), is unexceptionable in point of sense, but fails to account for the presence of τί in the best MSS. I have ventured to read οἷόν τέ τι (SC. ἐστί), supposing that the confusion arose from the accidental omission of τι, which was afterwards (as τί) wrongly inserted before οἶόν (where it remained in Π), οἷον itself being afterwards changed to ὄν in order to provide a kind of construction (‘being what, and whence, it arises,’ J. and C.). This ὄν was itself fortified by τυγχάνει in Flor. B and the Aldine edition. Campbell's suggestion that “τί ὄν τε may be a corruption of τί ἐστί” is improbable: still less can Herwerden and Hartman induce us to reject the whole clause. Few will approve of Tucker's conjecture τί τῷ ὄντι καὶ ὅθεν κτλ. Dr Jackson suggests ἄκουέ τι, οἷόν τε καὶ κτλ., and a reviewer of my Text of the Republic in Lit. Centralblatt 1898 p. 296 οἷόν τ’ ἐστί κτλ.

358E - 359B Glauco will first describe the origin and nature of Justice according to the theory which he has undertaken to maintain. According to nature, to commit injustice is a good, to suffer injustice an evil. But as there is more evil in suffering than good in committing injustice, experience causes men to enter into a compact neither to commit nor suffer wrong. The collective prescriptions of this compact are called Law and Justice. Justiceis accordingly a compromise between the best policy, i.e. doing wrong without incurring any penalty, and the worst, i.e. suffering wrong without being able to exact vengeance. No one will accept the compromise who is strong enough to do wrong successfully.

ff. In thus resuscitating the theory of Thrasymachus, Glauco removes a serious stumbling-block by introducing the distinction between φύσις and νόμος. Civilisation revolts against the anti-social doctrines of Thrasymachus in their application to itself, but receives them more favourably when its own existence is safeguarded by relegating them to an age anterior to society. The view maintained by Glauco is allied to that of Callicles in Gorg. 482 E ff.; and it has already been pointed out (on 1 337 A, 344 B) that similar views were tolerably widely entertained in Plato's time. To the evidence previously adduced may be added Laws 690 B, 889 E, Eur. Phoen. 509 and Frag. 912 ἡ φύσις ἐβούλεθ’ ᾗ νόμων οὐδὲν μέλει. But whereas the doctrine of Callicles breaks down in explaining the origin of Law ( Gorg. 483 C, cf. 488 D—489 D), Glauco's theory endeavours to solve this difficulty by postulating a social contract. A kindred solution is ascribed by Aristotle to the Sophist Lycophron: Pol. Γ 1280^{b} 10 ὁ νόμος συνθήκη, καὶ καθάπερ ἔφη Λυκόφρων ὁ σοφιστής, ἐγγυητὴς ἀλλήλοις τῶν δικαίων. The theory of a Social Contract was revived by Epicurus: see D. L. X 150. The views of the “incomplete Protagoreans” in Theaet. 172 B (with which cf. Laws 889 E), though they do not offer an explanation of the origin of Law, are parallel in so far as they regard it as depending for its binding force solely upon the sanction of society.

πεφυκέναι γὰρ ‐‐ κακόν . Cf. Gorg. 483 A φύσει μὲν γὰρ πᾶν αἴσχιόν ἐστιν ὅπερ καὶ κάκιον, τὸ ἀδικεῖσθαι, νόμῳ δὲ τὸ ἀδικεῖν. That the natural relation between man and man is one of war is a view expressed in Laws 626 A ἢν γὰρ καλοῦσιν οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν ἀνθρώπων εἰρήνην, τοῦτ’ εἶναι μόνον ὄνομα, τῷ δ’ ἔργῳ πάσαις πρὸς πάσας τὰς πόλεις ἀεὶ πόλεμον ἀκήρυκτον κατὰ φύσιν εἶναι. A similar theory is contained in the myth of Protagoras ( Prot. 322 B ff.).

τοῖς μὴ δυναμένοις κτλ. : i.e. (according to the theory of Callicles) τοῖς ἀσθενέσι ἀνθρώποις καὶ τοῖς πολλοῖς ( Gorg. 483 B). In place of δοκεῖ in 359 A I have adopted Ast's conjecture δοκεῖν. Throughout this paragraph Glauco consistently presents his view at second hand. For the collocation of infinitives cf. ἀδικεῖν, ἀδικεῖν 360 D, and for the error itself Introd. § 5.

ξυνθήκας αὑτῶν : ‘covenants between one another,’ ‘mutual covenants.’ Reading αὐτῶν, Tucker suggests that the meaning is, ‘they established laws and covenants concerning them,’ i.e. concerning matters connected with ἀδικεῖν and ἀδικεῖσθαι—a very improbable view.

νόμιμόν τε καὶ δίκαιον · φημὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ τὸ νόμιμον δίκαιον εἶναι, said Socrates (Mem. IV 4. 12).

τοῦ μὲν ἀρίστου κτλ. Cf. the reasoning of Philus (whose position in Cicero's work corresponds to that of Glauco here) in Cic. de Rep. III 23 “nam cum de tribus unum esset optandum, aut facere iniuriam nec accipere, aut et facere et accipere, aut neutrum, optimum est facere, impune si possis, secundum nec facere nec pati, miserrimum digladiari semper tum faciendis tum accipiendis iniuriis.” Cicero is following Carneades (ibid. 8), who may have been thinking of the present passage. ἀγαπᾶσθαι below (as J. and C. observe) “implies acquiescence rather than decided preference.”

ἐπεὶ τὸν δυνάμενον κτλ. is further elaborated with much vigour in Gorg. 484 A. With ὡς ἀληθῶς ἄνδρα should be compared the emphatic ἀνήρ in that passage (ἐὰν δέ γε, οἶμαι, φύσιν ἱκανὴν γένηται ἔχων ἀνήρ), and Eur. Phoen. 509 ἀνανδρία γάρ, τὸ πλέον ὅστις ἀπολέσας | τοὔλασσον ἔλαβε.

359B - 360D Secondly (urges Glauco), no one is willingly just. Give the just and the unjust the fullest power to work their will, by ensuring them against all evil consequences—give them the faculty of becoming invisible, such as Gyges possessed through his ring, and the just man will shew himself no better than the unjust. If, with this power to screen himself, the just man still refused to do wrong, no doubt men would praise him openly, but in secret they would judge him wholly miserable and foolish.

εἰ τοιόνδε ‐‐ δόντες . δόντες κτλ. explains τοιόνδε. εἰ need not be twice expressed: cf. I 351 C note

νόμῳ ‐‐ παράγεται . The language is perhaps suggested by the lines of Pindar cited in Gorg. 484 B νόμος ὁ πάντων βασιλεὺς θνατῶν τε καὶ ἀθανάτων— ἄγει δικαιῶν τὸ βιαιότατον ὑπερτάτᾳ χειρί κτλ. (cf. Prot. 337 D). but the preposition in παράγεται adds the further notion that equality is not Nature's highway. For βίᾳ i.q. βιαἴως in conjunction with another dative Schneider cites VIII 552 E οὓς ἐπιμελείᾳ βίᾳ κατέχουσιν αἱ ἀρχαί. In the next line it is better to regard τοιάδε as explained by εἰ—γενέσθαι, than as balancing οἴαν, in which case εἰ αὐτοῖς γένοιτο would be superfluous. The opportunity (ἐξουσία) of working their will comes from the possession (εἰ αὐτοῖς γένοιτο) of a certain active faculty (δύναμις) like that of Gyges.

τῷ Γύγου κτλ. Cf. X 612 B τὸν Γύγου δακτύλιον. In Appendix I I have given reasons for believing that the Gyges of the proverbial ‘Gyges' ring’ was not “Gyges the Lydian”—the hero of Herodotus' story (I 7), but a homonymous ancestor of his. If so, we must (on the hypothesis that the text is sound) suppose that Plato here omits the name of the original Gyges either because he wishes tacitly to contradict a prevalent misconception, or (more probably) because his readers might be presumed to know or to be capable of inferring that the ancestor of Gyges the Lydian was also called Gyges. The MS reading is supported by Proclus (τῷ κατὰ τὸν Γύγου πρόγονον διηγήματι in Schöll Procli Comm. in Remp. Pl. part. ined. p. 60. 30). For other views of this passage see App. I.

ὡς φαίνεσθαι : with νεκρόν, as Schneider saw: “utrum vere mortuus fuerit, an specie, fabula incertum reliquit.” Stallbaum wrongly interprets ‘nimirum videbatur Gyges cernere’ etc.: this would be expressed by δοκεῖν. Ast connects the phrase with μείζω ἢ κατ’ ἄνθρωπον: but this is very weak in point of sense. The words are omitted by Cicero (De Off. III 38).

ἔχειν . See cr. n. and (for the omission in A) Introd. § 5. ἔχειν in the sense of ‘have on’ ‘wear,’ i.q. φορεῖν, is tolerably frequent in Homer, though rarer in Attic: see Stephanus-Hase Thes. s.v. For the change of subject in ἔχειν—ἐκβῆναι cf. III 414 D note Other views on the text and interpretation of this passage are discussed in App. II.

χειρί . Herwerden's δακτύλῳ is unnecessary, and even unpleasant with δακτύλιον so near. Cf. χρυσόχειρες in Luc. Tim. 20. “Etiamnunc homines ita loquuntur” (Hartman).

ἵν’ ἐξαγγέλλοιεν κτλ. : ‘to report, as was done every month.’ The present expresses the habit (J. and C.).

σφενδόνην : the ‘collet’ or ‘bezel’ (Lat. funda or pala annuli)— which is as it were the sling in which the stone is set.

ὡς δόξειεν . “Optativus eandem vim habet, quam solet in oratione obliqua habere, efficitque, ut verba οὐδεὶς ἂν γένοιτο οὕτως etc. ex aliorum ore missa videantur" (Schneider). This explanation appears to me better than any other, although I can discover no exact parallel in Greek. Glauco is most careful throughout the whole of this section to disclaim responsibility for the views he advocates: cf. ὡς ὁ λόγος 359 B, ἐπεὶ— ἀδικεῖν in C, ὡς φήσει κτλ. in D below: also 361 E al. Tucker would translate ‘as it might seem,’ defending the optative by Ar. Birds 180 ὥσπερ εἴποι τις and Eur. Andr. 929 ὡς εἴποι τις. Others erroneously hold that ἄν may be supplied from ἂν γένοιτο, while Ast is desirous of inserting the particle on conjecture. I do not think that the optative can be explained as an instance of irregular assimilation or attraction.

ἂν μείνειεν . For ἄν cf. Symp. 179 A and other examples in Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 934.

ἰσόθεον ὄντα . The halfconscious irony of ἰσόθεος foreshadows Plato's attack on the popular theology.

οὐδεὶς ἑκὼν δίκαιος here and in 366 D sums up the Thrasymachean theory in a phrase which suggests the Socratic and Platonic antithesis οὐδεὶς ἑκὼν πονηρός .

περὶ ‐‐ λέγων . περί can hardly be for ὑπέρ, nor dare we write ὑπέρ for περί (as Badham suggests). The words mean simply ‘qui de hoc argumento verba facit,’ ‘the exponent of such a theory.’ Cf. 362 D ἱκανῶς εἰρῆσθαι περὶτοῦλόγου. Muretus seems to have desiderated πατήρ for περί: cf. expressions like Phaedr. 275 E ( λόγος) τοῦ πατρὸς ἀεὶ δεῖται βοηθοῦ. On the strength of this Herwerden would read ὁ πατὴρ τοῦ τοιούτου λόγου, rejecting λέγων (“posteaquam ex πήρ factum est περί, corrector addidit λέγων”). The ‘father of the theory’ would mean Thrasymachus: see on ὦ παῖδες in 368 A. It is just possible that πατήρ was read by Ficinus (“ut sermonis huius perhibent auctores”), and if so, the variant may have some ancient authority now lost; but Herwerden's proposal is too drastic, and the text is probably sound.

ἀθλιώτατος . Apelt conjectures ἠλιθιώτατος, but cf. (with Hartman) I 344 A τοὺς δὲ—ἀδικῆσαι οὐκ ἂν ἐθέλοντας ἀθλιωτάτους.

360D - 362C In the third place, the life of the unjust man (according to our theory) is far better than that of the just. Let us suppose that each is the perfect embodiment of his character—the one a consummate artist in iniquity, able to coerce where needful, and so apt at concealment that he enjoys the highest reputation for justice, while guilty of the worst acts of injustice; the other wishful not to be esteemed, but to be, good, and labouring until he dies under the imputation of the worst injustice, although he remains just. Only by means of this supposition can we make sure that the just man has not been attracted by the rewards of justice, but by justice itself. What will be the result? The just will be wholly miserable and unsuccessful, the unjust wholly prosperous and happy, doing good to their friends and evil to their foes; nay more, the unjust will be dearer to the gods than the just, because they have wherewith to win their favour.

τὴν δὲ κρίσιν κτλ. αὐτήν opposes the third division of Glauco's speech to the other two (see 358 C), and marks it as the most important. A kindred use of αὐτός recurs at 370 E ἀλλὰ μήν,—κατοικίσαι γε αὐτὴν τὴν πόλιν —ἀδύνατον. I formerly read αὖ τὴν for αὐτήν, but the MS reading is quite de fensible. It should be noticed that κρίσιν is at first a kind of pendent accusative, afterwards “resumed as a cognate accusative with κρῖναι” (J. and C.). Tucker strangely makes κρίσιν=‘choice.’ The word means of course (our) ‘judgment’ concerning etc. Cf. 361 D ἵν’ ἀμφότεροι —κρίνωνται and εἰς τὴν κρίσιν ἐκκαθαίρεις.

εἰς goes with τέλεον: cf. δόξαν εἰς 361 A.

οὕτω ‐‐ λανθανέτω . ἐπιχειρῶν ὀρθῶς means of course attempting possible, and abstaining from impossible, ἀδικήματα. But as an ἀδίκημα is possible only if the ἀδικῶν is able to conceal it (the alternative of open violence is recognised later 361 B), it is necessary that the unjust man should escape detection. Hence λανθανέτω, although λανθάνειν was not attributed (because not essential) to the pilot and doctor (360 E).

φαῦλον means a ‘bungler’ (D. and V.). With the sentiment cf. Prot. 317 A τὸ οὖν ἀποδιδράσκοντα μὴ δύνασθαι ἀπξδρᾶναι, ἀλλὰ καταφανῆ εἶναι, πολλὴ μωρία καὶ τοῦ ἐπιχειρήματος: also Laws 845 B, and the Spartan practice of punishing boys not for stealing, but for being caught (Xen. Rep. Lac. 2. 8). With ἐσχάτη γὰρ ἀδικία κτλ. the editors compare Cicero de Off. I 41 “totius autem iniustitiae nulla capitalior est, quam eorum, qui, cum maxime fallunt, id agunt, ut viri boni esse videantur.”

κατ) Αἰσχύλον ‐‐ ἀγαθόν . Sept. 592—594 (of Amphiaraus) οὐ γὰρ δοκεῖν ἄριστος, ἀλλ’ εἶναι θέλει | βαθεῖαν ἄλοκα διὰ φρενὸς καρπούμενος, | ἐξ ἧς τὰ κεδνὰ βλαστάνει βουλεύματα. Herwerden would expunge ἀγαθόν (“mente repetatur ἁπλοῦν καὶ γενναῖον”), on the ground that if Plato had added any adjective, it would have been δίκαιον. (The Scholiast substitutes δίκαιος for ἄριστος in Aeschylus.) ἀγαθόν gives excellent sense, and is nearer to the poet's words.

εἴη is explained by Stallbaum as an optative of wish (though in a subordinate clause): ‘it is not clear therefore whether he is fain to be just,’ etc. This gives a fair sense, but the idiom is obscure, and unsupported by other examples. J. and C. remark that “the optative accords with the conditional nature of the case in an imagined future,” taking ἄδηλον as for ἄδηλον ἂν εἴη. But an omitted ἂν εἴη cannot be responsible for the mood of τοιοῦτος εἴη, nor could ἂν εἴη easily be omitted (see Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. p. 33). Still less should we accept Hartman's ἄδηλον <ἂν> οὖν, sc. εἴη. Madvig ejects εἴη altogether, understanding ἐστι after τοιοῦτος. This may be right, but its intrusion is not easy to explain. I think the word is genuine, and means ‘was’: ‘it is not clear then, say they, whether he was just,’ etc. Glauco again disclaims responsibility: cf. 360 B note εἴη would in direct speech be ἦν: and the idiom is like that in III 406 E, where see note. For the sequence of moods and tenses cf. VI 490 A note Failing this interpretation, the word must (I think) be spurious. Herwerden's proposal—τοιούτῳ εἶναι, ἄδηλον ὄν (retaining εἴη)—does not surmount the difficulty and is also wrong in point of sense.

ἀπ’ αὐτῆς . See cr. n. The sense required is not ‘what is produced by’ (ὑπό) ‘it,’ but ‘what results from it’: cf. γίγνεσθαι ἀπό (in a similar connexion) 357 C and 358 B. The scribe no doubt assimilated the preposition to the preceding ὑπό.

ἔστω . See cr. n. I formerly read ἴτω with A^{1} and the majority of editors, but I now agree with Schneider that ἔστω is right. ἴτω cannot be used by itself as a synonym for ‘live,’ or as a copula: we should require ἴτω διὰ βίου, instead of ἴτω μέχρι θανάτου (to transpose the two phrases would of course be too violent a change). The sole authority for ἴτω is the first hand in A: and this is certainly insufficient to outweigh the inherent superiority of ἔστω. Most MSS have ἤτω, a late form for ἔστω.

ἐκκαθαίρεις : not ‘polish up’ (J. and C.) but rather ‘scour clean’ (D. and V.), ‘purge’ from all extraneous matter: see 361 C γυμνωτέος δὴ πάντων πλὴν δικαιοσύνης.

ἀγροικοτέρως is said with reference to the exaggeration and coarseness of the description: cf. Ap. 32 D, Gorg. 509 A.

δεδήσεται : ‘will be kept in chains.’ δεθήσεται (so v and some other MSS) is required by Herwerden, and may be right. But in Xen. Cyr. IV 3. 18 δεδήσομαι is similarly combined with several first futures.

ἐκκαυθήσεται κτλ. Schneider refers to Hdt. VII 18 θερμοῖσι σιδηρίοισι ἐκκαίειν—τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, and Gorg. 473 C ἐὰν—στρεβλῶται καὶ ἐκτέμνηται καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἐκκάηται. That ἐκκαυθήσεται (and not ἐκκοπήσεται, the reading of some inferior MSS, and of the ancient authorities who cite this passage) is right here, is probable also from X 613 E ἃ ἄγροικα ἔφησθα σὺ εἶναι ἀληθῆ λέγων, εἶτα στρεβλώσονται καὶ ἐκκαυθήσονται, whether the last clause is genuine or not. It is not clear that Cicero (de Rep. III 27) did not find ἐκκαυθήσεται in his text; for though he has effodiantur oculi, he adds afterwards vinciatur, uratur. Herwerden recasts the words of Plato to suit Cicero's translation, but Cicero is a much less trustworthy witness than Paris A.

ἄρα : see on 358 C. τῷ ὄντι in the same line belongs not to φήσουσι, but to τὸν ἄδικον—ἐθέλειν.

βαθεῖαν κτλ. : “reaping in his thoughts the fruit of the deep furrow, from which good counsel grows” (Verrall). Plato takes τὰ κεδνὰ βουλεύματα more concretely, and places in apposition thereto ἄρχειν and the other infinitives down to ὠφελεῖσθαι, δοκοῦντι being the dative of interest after βλαστάνει. For the change from the dative δοκοῦντι to the accusative κερδαίνοντα cf. Euthyph. 5 A and infra IV 422 B, C.

κοινωνεῖν . Cobet deletes this word, as well as καὶ κοινωνήματα in Laws 738 A πρὸς ἅπαντα τὰ ξυμβόλαια καὶ κοινωνήματα. In view of the same passage Platt (Cl. Rev. III p. 72) would read καὶ κοινωνεῖν. No change is necessary, for κοινωνεῖν is a term of wider connotation than ξυμβάλλειν (see I 333 A note), and the asyndeton has a rhetorical effect: cf. III 407 B, V 465 C, VI 488 C, IX 590 A notes

πλεονεκτεῖν recalls I 343 D, E, 349 B ff., as τούς τε φίλους εὐ ποιεῖν κτλ. recalls the theory attributed to Simonides in I 334 B. Here however it is not Justice, but Injustice masquerading as Justice, which is said to benefit friends and injure enemies.

μᾶλλον προσήκειν . The comparative is attached to the verb as well as to the adjective, so as to combine the force of two expressions, viz. (1) ὥστε καὶ θεοφιλῆ αὐτὸν εἶναι μᾶλλον προσήκειν and (2) ὥστε καὶ θεοφιλέστερον αὐτὸν εἶναι προσήκειν. In cases like λαθραιότερον μᾶλλον Laws 781 A, μᾶλλον is quite redundant: in Hipp. Mai. 285 A ἔστι δέ γε—ὠφελιμώτερον—παιδεύεσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ κτλ. it is resumptive. See on the whole subject Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 25.

παρεσκευάσθαι ‐‐ ἄμεινον . For ἄμεινον Richards would read ἀμείνον) or ἀμείνονα: cf. 358 C πολὺ γὰρ ἀμείνων ἄρα ὁ τοῦ ἀδίκου ἢ ὁ τοῦ δικαίου βίος. The change is tempting at first sight; but Plato generally uses ἀμείνω and not ἀμείνονα, and the adverb expresses what is virtually the same meaning, since a βίος ἄμεινον παρεσκευασμένος (cf. πόλιν εὖ παρεσκευασμένην Laws 751 B) is (according to the views here described) a βίος ἀμείνων. Hermann's χείρον) for χεῖρον in Phaed. 85 B, though adopted by Schanz, is also unnecessary, for ἔχειν may be intransitive.

362C - 363E At this point Glauco gives way to Adimantus. Glauco had maintained the superiority of Injustice over Justice by directly praising Injustice: Adimantus will uphold the same thesis by describing the arguments usually advanced in favour of Justice. In the first place, when parents and friends exhort the young to follow Justice, they do not praise Justice herself, but the rewards which Justice earns from men and gods. Homer and Hesiod describe the benefits derived from Justice in this present life, while Musaeus and his son guarantee to her votaries sensual bliss hereafter, and others promise to the pious a long line of descendants, but relegate the wicked to punishment after death and unpopularity during life.

ἔφη . See cr. n. ἔφη is present in the majority of MSS, and cannot be dispensed with, where the interlocutor is specified, as here. See Introd. § 5.

ἀδελφὸς ἀνδρὶ παρείη : frater adsit fratri. Ast proposed to insert ἂν before ἀνδρί, making the sentence interrogative. The rhythm would thus approximate to the usual paroemiac rhythm of proverbs: but the brevity and force of the proverb would suffer. If change were needed it would be better to adopt Shilleto's elegant suggestion ἀδελφεὸς ἀνδρὶ παρείη (note on Dem. F. L. § 262), but even if this was the original expression, it would be quite in Plato's manner to substitute the modern for the archaic word, in defiance of rhythm. The source of the proverb (with which compare συγγνώμη ἀδελφῷ βοηθεῖν F. L. § 264) is found by the Scholiast in Od. XVI 97 f. ἤ τι κασιγνήτοις ἐπιμέμφεαι, οἷσί περ ἀνὴρ | μαρναμένοισι πέποιθε, καὶ εἰ μέγα νεῖκος ὄρηται. Cf. also Il. XXI 308 f. and Xen. Mem. II 3. 19.

ἐναντίους . Adimantus' λόγοι are ἐναντίοι, because they praise Justice, and censure Injustice: whereas Glauco had done the reverse: κατατείνας ε<*>ρῶ τὸν ἄδικον βίον ἐπαινῶν (358 D).

αὐτὸ δικαιοσύνην . Not αὐτοδικαιοσύνην (with the second hand in A), which would be the (chiefly postPlatonic) expression for the Idea of Justice (cf. αὐτοάνθ ρωπος and the like). αὐτό is ipsum, ‘by itself,’ as in αὐτοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν: cf. Theaet. 146 E γνῶναι ἐπιστήμην αὐτὸ ὄ τι ποτ’ ἐστιν, and infra V 472 C, X 612 B (cited by J. and C.). αὐτό may be thus used even when the feminine of the article is present, e.g. Prot. 361 A αὐτὸ ἡ ἀρετή: cf. also Crat. 411 D.

γίγνηται . The nominatives are treated as equivalent to a neuter plural, whence the singular verb. Cf. Symp. 188 B, Laws 925 E, Andocides I 145. γίγνεσθαι is the verb in each of these examples. See also infra V 462 E.

τῷ δικαίῳ . Schneider is right in refusing to change the δικαίῳ of A, II and most MSS to ἀδίκῳ, which has the authority of a few inferior MSS. The reference in διῆλθεν ἄρτι is no doubt to 362 B, where the benefits accrue to the man who seems to be just, although in reality he is unjust. But ὄντα etc. should be taken, not with διῆλθεν, but as part of the parents' exhortation. This yields a better rhythm, and much better sense. The parents exhort their children to be just, in order that (ἵνα depends on χρὴ δίκαιον εἶναι) they may obtain the rewards ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐδοκιμεῖν ὄντα τῷ δικαίῳ. They very properly assume that the surest way to seem to be just (and so to obtain the rewards of justice) is to be just: cf. Xen. Mem. II 6. 39 συντομωτάτη τε καὶ ἀσφαλεστάτη καὶ καλλίστη ὁδὸς—ὅ τι ἂν βούλῃ δοκεῖν ἀγαθὸς εἶναι, τοῦτο καὶ γενέσθαι ἀγαθὸν πειρᾶσθαι and ib. I 7. 1 with Heracl. Fr. 137 ed. Bywater συντομωτάτην ὁδὸν—εἰς εὐδοξίαν τὸ γενέσθαι ἀγαθόν. Glauco's picture of the just man as one who seems to be unjust is untrue to the facts of experience, as Socrates points out in X 612 D: nor did even Glauco go so far as to say that the unjust man, qua unjust, ηὐδοκίμει, but only ὁ δοκῶν δίκαιος εἶναι (who may, of course, be unjust). The divorce between appearance and reality is purely argumentative, and out of place in parental exhortations. Further, in order to make ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐδοκιμεῖν ὄντα etc. represent what Glauco said, we should have to read τῷ ἀδίκῳ μὲν δοκοῦντι δὲ δικαίῳ: otherwise the words δοξαζομένων δὲ ἀδίκων in the corresponding phrase (363 E) might just as well be omitted. If ὄντα is construed with διῆλθεν, the words τῷ δικαίῳ must (with Ast) be expunged: but that the clause represents what the parents say is further proved by the exact correspondence of ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐδοκιμεῖν ὄντα τῷ δικαίῳ with τὰς ἀπ’ αὐτῆς (sc. δικαιοσύνης ) εὐδοκιμήσεις, which is what the parents praise. I have dwelt on this point at some length because recent English editors (except Tucker) have wrongly deserted Paris A.

τοῖς ὁσίοις depends on ἀγαθά (‘good things for the pious’): cf. ἀγαθὰ διῆλθε τῷ τοῦ ἀδίκου I 348 A note This is much simpler than to punctuate ἀγαθά, τοῖς ο<*>σίοις ἅ as the other editors do. Such a postponement of the relative is rare, and here, I think, unduly harsh, in spite of the analogy of III 390 B and IV 425 C. Cobet felt the difficulty when in an unhappy moment he suggested ἀγαθά, ἃ τοῖς ὁσίοις κτλ.

Ἡσίοδός τε κτλ. Hesiod and Homer are appealed to as recognised theological authorities: see Hdt. II 53.

ἄκρας ‐‐ καταβεβρίθασι . OD. 232 f. τοῖσι (i.e. ἰθυδίκῃσιν ἀνδράσι) φέρει μὲν γαῖα πολὺν β<*>ον, οὔρεσι δὲ δρῦς | ἄκρη μέν τε φέρει βαλάνους, μέσση δὲ μελίσσας· | εἰροπόκοι δ’ ὄϊες μαλλοῖς καταβεβρίθασι. Further rewards of justice (ἄλλα δὴ πολλὰ ἀγαθά) are enumerated in vv. 227—231, and 235—237. Many other illustrations in support of Plato's attack on Greek religion throughout this passage will be found in Nägelsbach's Hom. Theol. and Nachhom. Theol. passim.

ὥστε τευ ‐‐ ἰχθῦς . Od. XIX 109 ff. The ἤ before βασιλῆος is difficult: apparently the author intended to give two comparisons, but dropped the second. We are hardly justified, I think, in abolishing the anacoluthon by reading (with Platt) ὥστέ τεο βασιλῆος or (with Ameis) ὥστε τευ ἦ.

Μουσαῖος κτλ. By Musaeus' son Plato probably means Eumolpus (cf. Suidas s. vv. Εὔμολπος and Μουσαῖος). In this section of the argument Plato directs his attack against certain forms of the Orphic conception of a future life: see Lobeck Aglaophamus p. 807 with Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 127, 129 notes, and Dieterich Nekyia pp. 72 ff. 77 ff. notes Lobeck refers to Plut. Comp. Cim. et Lucull. 2 Πλάτων ἐπισκώπτει τοὺς περὶ τὸν Ὀρφέα τοῖς εὖ βεβιωκόσι φάσκοντας ἀποκεῖσθαι γέρας ἐν ᾅδου μέθην αἰώνιον and id. Ne suav. quidem vivi posse sec. Epic. 1105 B, where the allusion to Plato is less clear: also D. L. VI 4.

συμπόσιον τῶν ὁσίων . ὅσιοι was the regular appellation of the μύσται (ὁσίους μύστας hymn. Orph. 84. 3 ed. Abel). For the συμπόσιον cf. [Axioch.] 371 D συμπόσιά τε εὐμελῆ καὶ εἰλαπίναι αὐτοχορήγητοι καὶ ἀκήρατος ἀλυπία καὶ ἡδεῖα δίαιτα. The stock example in antiquity of earthly virtue rewarded by the delights of a sensuous paradise is Heracles: see e.g. Pind. Nem. I 71, Theocr. XVII 28 f. and Horace Od. III 3. 9 f., IV 8. 29 f. A somewhat higher note is struck in Pind. Ol. II 61 ff. and Fr. 129 f. Several of these passages shew traces of Orphic influence, but the special instance of Heracles is traceable to Homer ( Od. XI 602 f.).

μέθην αἰώνιον may be illustrated from the fragment of Pherecrates ap. Athen. VI 268 E ff.

ἀποτίνουσιν . See cr. n. The reading of A is defended by Stallbaum as an abbreviation for μακροτέρους λόγους ἀποτείνουσι περὶ μισθῶν παρὰ θεῶν; but no other example of this harsh condensation has been adduced, and the sense is far from satisfactory. A better meaning is conveyed by Schneider's translation, “Andere aber lassen die Belohnungen der Götter noch weiter reichen als diese”: for it is clear from the next clause that μακροτέρους (‘more extensive,’ not, of course, ‘greater,’ which would be μείζους) refers to the extension of the rewards of virtue beyond the personality of the individual concerned. But μακροτέρους ἀποτείνουσιν μισθούς is (to say the least) an obscure and difficult expression; and ἀποτίνουσιν (i.q. λέγουσιν ἀποτίνεσθαι) receives strong support from the parallel use of διδόασιν in C above, and κατορύττουσιν, ἀναγκάζουσι, and ἄγοντες below. The collocation of μακροτέρους with ἀποτίνουσι may easily have led to the corruption ἀποτείνουσι, owing to the frequency of such expressions as μακροὺς λόγους ἀποτείνειν. For the error see Introd. § 5.

παῖδας ‐‐ κατόπισθεν . The Scholiast remarks ἐξ Ἡροδότου (VI 86) ἀπὸ τοῦ δοθέντος χρησμοῦ Γλαύκῳ τῷ Λάκωνι ὡς Ἀνδρὸς δ’ εὐόρκου γενεὴ μετόπισθεν ἀμείνων. The story of Glaucus admirably illustrates the view herein expressed; but Plato is more probably thinking of Hesiod OD. 285 (a line which is identical with that quoted from the oracle), and also perhaps of some such lines as those of Tyrtaeus 12. 29 f. καὶ τύμβος καὶ παῖδες ἐν ἀνθρώποις ἀρίσημοι | καὶ παίδων παῖδες καὶ γένος ἐξοπίσω.

εἰς πηλόν τινα κατορύττουσιν . τινα is contemptuous: ‘something which they call mud’: cf. 372 B infra and Symp. 210 D (ἀνθρώπου τινός). The ‘mud’ is Orphic: see Abel Orphic. p. 247 and cf. Phaed. 69 C, Rep. VII 533 D, and the σκῶρ ἀείνων of Ar. Frogs 146, with Blaydes' note. See also Rohde Psyche^{2} I p. 313 note and Dieterich Nekyia pp. 82 f. The employment of the Danaid legend in Orphic teaching is illustrated by Gorg. 493 B: cf. also Dieterich Nekyia pp. 69 f., 75.

δοξαζομένων δέ . For δέ without μέν see I 340 D note

ἄλλα δὲ οὐκ ἔχουσιν : sc. λέγειν τιμωρήματα. Adimantus means that they dissuade men from injustice merely on account of its results, ignoring τίνα ἔχει δύναμιν αὐτὸ καθ’ αὑτὸ ἐνὸν ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ (358 B). J. and C. aptly cite Theaet. 176 D, E ἀγνοοῦσι γὰρ ζημίαν ἀδικίας, ὃ δεῖ ἥκιστα ἀγνοεῖν· οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἣν δοκοῦσιν, πληγαί τε καὶ θάνατοι, ὧν ἐνίοτε πάσχουσιν οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντες, ἀλλ’ ἣν ἀδύνατον ἐκφυγεῖν, viz. “that by their wicked acts they become like the pattern of evil.”

363E - 365A Secondly (continues Adimantus), both by poets and in private life virtue is called honourable but difficult, vice easy, and disgraceful only by convention. Injustice, men say, is in general the best policy: they admire the vicious rich, and despise the virtuous poor. Strangest of all, the gods themselves are said to be sometimes kind to the wicked, and unkind to the good; and seers profess to have power from the gods to atone for unjust dealing by pleasurable rites, and undertake to damage enemies for a trifling expenditure of money. In support of such teaching they quote the poets, Hesiod for example, and Homer. There are likewise books containing sacrificial formulae, by the use of which men are persuaded that their sins may be pardoned both in life and after death.

ff. The phase of Greek religious life here censured is illustrated by Dieterich Nek. pp. 81 f. and Rohde Psyche^{2} II 74 ff.: cf. also Lobeck Aglaoph. pp. 643 ff.

ἰδίᾳ has been understood of writing in prose, but the reference is only to the representations of private persons, e.g. parents, etc.)(to poets, who were in a sense the professional teachers of Hellas: cf. X 606 C, Laws 890 A ἰδιωτῶν τε καὶ ποιητῶν, and 366 E below.

καλὸν μὲν ‐‐ ἐπίπονον . See cr. n. For the omission of τε καὶ δικαιοσύνη see Introd. § 5. The sentiment may be illustrated by Hesiod OD. 289—292 and Simon. ap. Pl. Prot. 339 B ff. ἄνδρ’ ἀγαθὸν μὲν ἀλαθέως γενέσθαι χαλεπόν κτλ.; cf. also Simonides' imitation of Hesiod (Fr. 58 ed. Bergk).

ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πλῆθος : i.q. ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ. So also Phaedr. 275 B. The sentiment recurs in Isocr. de Pace § 31.

πονηρούς is the substantive, and ἄλλας δυνάμεις ἔχοντας balances πλουσίους. πλούτους, parallel to ἄλλας δυνάμεις, and also dependent on ἔχοντας, might appear neater. But there is no reason for deserting the MSS, although Plato is fond of the plural of πλοῦτος (cf. e.g. VI 495 A, X 618 B, 619 A). The sentiment is best illustrated from Polus's description of the happiness of Archelaus in Gorg. 471 A ff.

ὡς ἄρα ‐‐ μοῖραν . ἄρα hints dissent: cf. 358 C note The gnomic poets often express themselves in this vein: e.g. Solon 15. 1 πολλοὶ γὰρ πλουτεῦσι κακοί, ἀγαθοὶ δὲ πένονται, Theogn. 373— 380. A kindred sentiment occurs in Sophocles Phil. 447—452. For the most part however it is held that Justice asserts herself in the end: see for example Solon 4. 15 f., 13. 7—32. Euripides expresses the general teaching of Greek tragedy on this subject when he writes ( Ion 1621 f.) ἐς τέλος γὰρ οἱ μὲν ἐσθλοὶ τυγχάνουσιν ἀξίων, | οἱ κακοὶ δ’ , ὥσπερ πεφύκασ’ , οὔποτ’ εὖ πράξειαν ἄν. There is no occasion to write (with Richards) πολλάκις τοῖς for πολλοῖς.

ἐπὶ πλουσίων θύρας ἰόντες . This semi-proverbial expression (cf. VI 489 B, C) stigmatises the avarice of seers and mendicant priests (ἀγύρται from ἀγείρω, cf. infra 381 D). Plato's contempt for μαντική in general is expressed in the Euthyphro and sporadically in various dialogues (see e.g. Tim. 71 E, with Archer-Hind's note); but his attack is here particularly directed (cf. infra 364 E) against such Ὀρφεοτελεσταί or Orphic friars as Theophrastus speaks of in his description of the δεισι‐ δαίμων ( Charact. 16) καὶ τελεσθησόμενος πρὸς τοὺς Ὀρφεοτελεστὰς κατὰ μῆνα πορεύεσθαι μετὰ τῆς γυναικός, ἐὰν δὲ μὴ σχολάζῃ ἡ γυνή, μετὰ τῆς τίτθης καὶ τῶν παιδίων. The kind of ceremonies which they practised may be seen from Dem. de Cor. §§ 258 ff. Plato agreed with the more enlightened section of his countrymen in condemning such degrading cults and superstitions on the ground of their immoral tendency: see especially Foucart des Assoc. religieuses chez les Grecs pp. 153 —157, where the opinions of ancient writers on this subject are collected. On ἀγύρται in general reference may be made to J. H. Wright in Harvard Studies in Cl. Philol. VI p. 66 note

ἐάν τε ‐‐ βλάψειν is in oratio obliqua: ‘et si quis inimicum laedere velit, nocituros se parvo sumptu iusto pariter et iniusto’ (Schneider Addit. p. 11). This explanation (which Tucker also proposes without knowing that Schneider had forestalled him) is by far the best and simplest. For other views see App. III.

ἐπαγωγαῖς ‐‐ καταδέσμοις . ἐπαγωγαί are ἀγωγαὶ δαίμονος φαύλου ἐπί τινα γενόμεναι (Timaeus Lex. s.v.). The datives are usually construed with πείθοντες, and καταδέσμοις understood as the binding formulae “by which the seer compels the invisible powers to work his will” (Rohde Psyche^{2} II p. 88 note). But in the κατάδεσμοι which have been discovered it is the victim and not the god who is bound down; see e.g. CIG 538 (an Athenian inscription of about 380 B.C.)—καταδῶ Κτησίαν—καὶ Κλεοφράδην καταδῶ—καὶ τοὺς μετὰ Κτησίου ἅπαντας καταδῶ. This and other instances from leaden tablets found in graves are given by Wachsmuth Rhein. Mus. XVIII (1863) pp. 560 ff.: cf. also Marquardt Röm. Staatsverwaltung III p. 109 note 6. On this account I think it better to connect ἐπαγωγαῖς τισὶν καὶ καταδέσμοις with βλάψειν, exactly as in Laws 933 D ἐὰν δὲ καταδέσεσιν ἢ ἐπαγωγαῖς ἤ τισιν ἐπῳδαῖς ἢ τῶν τοιούτων φαρυακειῶν ὡντινωνοῦν δόξῃ ὅμοιος εἶναι βλάπτοντι—τεθνάτω. Plato is still alluding to the debasing forms of oriental superstition which had gained a footing in Greece in his day: see Foucart l. c. p. 172.

θεοὺς ‐‐ σφισιν ὑπηρετεῖν : whereas true religion consists in man's ὑπηρεσία τοῖς θεοῖς Euthyph. 13 D ff.

οἱ μὲν κτλ. : ‘some declaiming about the easiness of vice, how that’ etc. οἱ μὲν—ᾄδοντες recalls 364 A, while οἱ δέ refers to the ἀγύρται καὶ μάντεις of 364 B. The reference in the first case is as precise as possible: πάντες γὰρ ἐξ ἑνὸς στόματος ὑμνοῦσιν ὡς καλὸν μὲν ἡ σωφροσύνη τε καὶ δικαιοσύνη, χαλεπὸν μέντοι καὶ ἐπίπονον· ἀκολασία δὲ καὶ ἀδικία ἡδὺ μὲν καὶ εὐπετὲς κτήσασθαι, δόξῃ δὲ μόνον καὶ νόμῳ αἰσχρόν (364 A). Those who ὑμνοῦσιν ὡς—ἀκολασία—καὶ ἀδικία—εὐπετὲς κτήσασθαι can be accurately described as κακίας περὶ εὐπετείας ᾄδοντες, but scarcely by οἱ κακίας πέρι εὐπετείας διδόντες, because ‘to offer facilities for vice’ is not the same thing as to say that vice is easy. Stallbaum attempts to evade this difficulty by taking διδόντες as equivalent to διδόσθαι λέγοντες, but neither is ‘saying that facilities are offered for vice’ quite the same as ‘saying that vice is easy.’ It is also difficult to find another instance of the plural of εὐπέτεια. The verbal echoes seem to me very strongly in favour of περὶ—ᾄδοντες. For ᾄδοντες=‘harping on’ (like the ὑμνοῦσιν to which it refers) cf. Lys. 205 C ἃ δὲ ἡ πόλις ὅλη ᾄδει and 205 D ἅπερ αἱ γραῖαι ᾄδουσι (with reference to the proverbial γραῶν ὕθλος): the use of ᾄδειν in Laws 854 C is different, but akin. For the corruption of ᾄδοντες to διδόντες see Introd. § 5. The conjectures of Liebhold (Fl. Jahrb. 1888 p. 107) and Zeller (Arch. f. Gesch. d. Phil. II p. 694) κακίας πέρι εὐπετείας διελθόντες and κακίας πέρι εὐπέτειαν διδόντας have little in their favour.

, D 20 ὡς τὴν ‐‐ ἔθηκαν . Hesiod OD. 287—289. ὡς is due to Plato: Hesiod has τὴν μέν τοι κτλ. For λείη the MSS of Hesiod read ὀλίγη: λείη (also in Laws 718 E, Xen. Mem. II 1. 20 and elsewhere) proves the existence of a different recension. Cf. G. E. Howes Harvard Studies in Cl. Philol. VI p. 165. The verses are partially quoted or referred to again in Laws 718 E, Prot. 340 D; their influence is also seen in Phaedr. 272 C.

καί τινα ὁδὸν κτλ. : Hesiod OD. 290 μακρὸς δὲ καὶ ὄρθιος οἶμος ἐς αὐτὴν | καὶ τρηχὺς κτλ. The last two words account for the marginal addition καὶ τραχεῖαν in A.

, E 26 λιστοὶ ‐‐ ἁμάρτῃ . See cr. n. The words are spoken by Phoenix to Achilles in Il. IX 497—501. Plato edits the lines to suit his own purposes. For λιστοί our text of Homer has στρεπτοί. The word λιστοί (though implied in ἄλλιστος, τρίλλιστος) does not occur elsewhere, a fact which is strongly in favour of its genuineness here. We must suppose that the recension which Plato used had λιστοί. The theology contained in these lines meets us continually in ancient literature: cf. also the words of the king in Hamlet III 3 “And what's in prayer but this twofold force To be forestalled ere we come to fall Or pardoned being down?” Plato expresses his dissent in Laws 716 E ff., 905 D: in Alc. II 149 E we read οὐ γὰρ οἶμαι τοιοῦτόν ἐστι, τὸ τῶν θεῶν ὥστε ὑπὸ δώρων παράγεσθαι οἶον κακὸν τοκιστήν.

βίβλων ‐‐ ἐγγόνων . The allusion is to Orphic liturgies. Musaeus was the son of Selene, according to Philochorus quoted by the Scholiast on Ar. Frogs 1033: cf. φαεσφόρου ἔκγονε Μήνης | Μουσαῖε in Abel Orphic. Fr. 4. Orpheus' mother was the Muse Calliope (Suidas s.v. Ὀρφεύς). There is no solid basis for the old view that ἔκγονος means ‘son,’ and ἔγγονος ‘grandson.’ The etymological form is ἔκγονος, but ἐκ‐ was often assimilated to ἐγ‐ before γ during the 4th century B.C., particularly in this word: cf. also ἐγγειτόνων etc. on Inscriptions. See Meisterhans^{3} p. 107. Elsewhere in the Republic ἔκγονος is the regular spelling.

καθ’ ἃς θυηπολοῦσιν : sacrificial liturgies. A θυηπολικόν is mentioned by Suidas (s.v. Ὀρφεύς) as one of the ‘works’ of Orpheus: see also Lobeck Aglaoph. p. 371 and Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 112, 113 notes

πόλεις : as for instance when Epimenides the Cretan purified Athens (see Grote III 85—89). Plato may be thinking of this event, which in defiance of chronology he placed ten years before the Persian wars (Laws 642 D, E). Cf. also infra 366 A and Laws 909 B.

λύσεις ‐‐ καθαρμοί . λύσεις means ‘modes of absolution’ (Lobeck Aglaoph. p. 810): cf. 366 A οἱ λύσιοι θεοί and Arist. Pol. B 4 1262^{a} 32 τὰς νομιζομένας λύσεις. The Scholium on Ar. Frogs 1033 contains the remark: οὗτος (i.e. Musaeus) δὲ παραλύσεις καὶ τελετὰς καὶ καθαρμοὺς συντέθεικεν. For παραλύσεις Blaydes proposes λύσεις, while Rutherford reads περὶ λύσεις (apparently with the Ravenna Codex), inserting also on his own conjecture ποιήματα after συντέθεικεν. I have no doubt that the Scholiast wrote παρὰ λύσεις: ‘besides Absolutions, he has composed also τελεταί and καθαρμοί.’ καθαρμοί formed a distinct class of religious literature, and were written by Epimenides, Empedocles, and others: see Grote I p. 27 note 3.

παιδιᾶς ἡδονῶν : ‘pleasures of play.’ παιδιᾶς depends on ἡδονῶν, and is here used abstractly: cf. Thuc. III 38. 7 ἀκοῆς ἡδονῇ and (with Schneider) Paus. I 21. 7 θέας ἡδονήν. Madvig would eject ἡδονῶν, but without ἡδονῶν Plato would probably have written παιδιῶν (cf. Laws 829 B): other suggestions, such as καὶ παιδιᾶς καὶ ἡδονῶν, or καὶ παιδιᾶς διὰ ἡδονῶν, or καὶ παιδιῶν καὶ ἡδονῶν are open to graver objection. For παίζειν and the like in connexion with religious celebrations Stallbaum cites Hdt. IX 11 Ὑακίνθιά τε ἄγετε καὶ παίζετε and VIII 99 ἐν θυσίῃσί τε καὶ εὐπαθείῃσι: add Phaedr. 276 B, Laws 666 B. Plato's point is that atonement if it is made a pleasure and not a penance sets a premium on sin.

τελευτήσασιν ‐‐ τελετάς . The Orpheotelestae connected τελεταί with τελευτᾶν, sometimes on the ground assigned by Plato here, sometimes because they alleged that the sensations of dying resembled those of initiation into the great mysteries (Plut. Frag. de An. 725). This and other ancient derivations are given by Lobeck Aglaoph. pp. 124, 126, 172. For περιμένει Cobet needlessly conjectures περιμένειν.

365A - 367E Finally, what is the effect on the souls of the young? Young men of ability are encouraged to practise Injustice, while outwardly pretending to be just. To escape detection by their fellow-men, they form political clubs, and employ persuasion and force. The gods they can afford to ignore; for either there are no gods, or they regard not man, or— according to those who are the sole authorities for their existence—they can be propitiated out of the proceeds of Injustice. There are special rites and gods who can deliver us from punishment after death: so the gods' own children say. So strong are the arguments in favour of Injustice that even those who can refute them make allowances, recognising that no one is voluntarily just except from innate goodness of disposition or scientific knowledge.

It rests with you, Socrates (says Adimantus), now for the first time to praise Justice and censure Injustice in and by themselves, apart from their accessories. Nay more; you must assign to each the reputation which is enjoyed by the other. Do not merely shew us that Justice is better than Injustice; tell us what effect they severally produce on their possessors, in consequence of which the one is good, and the other evil.

τιμῆς i. q. τοῦ τιμᾶν. Cf. (with J. and C.) 359 C above.

τί ‐‐ ποιεῖν . The subject to ποιεῖν is ταῦτα πάντα—λεγόμενα: ψυχάς is its secondary object. Cf. infra 367 B τί ποιοῦσα ἑκατέρα τὸν ἔχοντα κτλ. and 367 E. This view, which Schneider also holds, is better than to make ψυχάς subject to ποιεῖν and ταῦτα πάντα κτλ. dependent on ἀκουούσας.

ἐπιπτόμενοι . The image, as Jowett remarks, suggests a bee gathering honey: cf. Ion 534 B λέγουσι γὰρ—οἱ ποιηταὶ ὅτι ἀπὸ κρηνῶν μελιρρύτων ἐκ Μουσῶν κήπων τινῶν καὶ ναπῶν δρεπόμενοι τὰ μέλη ἡμῖν φέρουσιν ὥσπερ αἱ μέλιτται, Simon. Fr. 47 ὁμιλεῖ δ’ ἄνθεσιν (viz. the poet) ὧτε μέλισσα ξανθὸν μέλι κηδομένα and Pind. Pyth. X 53 f.

πότερον δίκᾳ ‐‐ ἀναβάς . The fragment (which appears tolerably often in ancient citations) is restored as follows by Bergk (Fr. 213) Πότερον δίκᾳ τεῖχος ὕψιον | ἢ σκολίαις ἀπάταις ἀναβαίνῃ | ἐπιχθονίων γένος ἀνδρῶν | δίχα μοι νόος ἀτρέκειαν εἰπεῖν. It is, I think, unlikely that θεσπέσιος βίος and κύριον εὐδαιμονίας below “si non a Pindaro, certe ex poetis petita sunt” (Bergk).

ἐὰν καὶ μὴ δοκῶ has been commonly altered to ἐὰν μὴ καὶ δοκῶ on the suggestion of Dobree and Boeckh (with a few inferior MSS): but the text is sound. We are dealing with ταῦτα πάντα— λεγόμενα κτλ.; and it has not been said that it is useless to be just, unless one is also believed to be just (ἐὰν μὴ καὶ δοκῶ). This would imply that it is useful to be just, if one is also considered just; but what has been urged is that Justice is in itself never advantageous, although its εὐδοκιμήσεις (363 A) are: see 358 C, E, 360 C (οὐδεὶς ἑκὼν δίκαιος, ἀλλ’ ἀναγκαζόμενος, ὡς οὐκ ἀγαθοῦ ἰδιᾳ ὄντος), 362 A (οὐκ εἶναι δίκαιον, ἀλλὰ δοκεῖν δεῖ ἐθέλειν). The words ἐὰν καὶ μὴ δοκῶ mean ‘if I also seem unjust,’ for οὐ δοκῶ δίκαιος εἶναι, not δοκῶ οὐ δίκαιος εἶναι, is the Greek idiom. This meaning suits exactly. What has to be established is that δοκεῖν prevails over εἶναι in human life (οὐκοῦν—βιᾶται). The proof is as follows. To be just and seem unjust is misery (see 361 E): to be unjust, and seem just is bliss (see 362 A, C): therefore δοκεῖν is everything, and ἐπὶ τοῦτο τρεπτέον ὅλως.

φασιν . Is τὰ λεγόμενα the subject? or is the sentence an anacoluthon? (“nam quo modo res ipsa comparata sit, nescio: quae quidem vulgo dicuntur, talia sunt, ut iusto mihi commodi quicquam fore negetur” Schneider). The latter view is the more likely. Similar anacolutha are cited by Engelhardt Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 40.

οἱ σοφοί . Simonides (σοφὸς γὰρ καὶ θεῖος ἀνήρ I 331 E) Fr. 76 Bergk. Plato himself sets no small store by a good name (coupled with virtue) in Laws 950 C.

πρόθυρα ‐‐ σχῆμα : ‘as my porch and trappings.’ The mixture of metaphors is thoroughly Platonic: cf. VII 527 D note With σχῆμα (any kind of external or adventitious means of impressing others or hiding one's own deficiencies) cf. Gorg. 511 E περιπατεῖ ἐν μετρίῳ σχήματι.

σκιαγραφίαν (‘perspective drawing’ VII 523 B, X 602 D) with its cognate words is continually used by Plato of things unreal, counterfeit, illusory: cf. infra IX 583 B note, 586 B al., and Wohlrab on Theaet. 208 E.

τοῦ σοφωτάτου κτλ. Archilochus seems to have canonized the fox as the embodiment of cunning in Greek literature: fragments are preserved of at least two fables of his in which the fox appears (86—88 and 89 ed. Bergk). In the second (89. 5, 6) occur the lines τῷ δ) (sc. πιθήκῳ) ἆρ’ ἀλώπηξ κερδαλέη συνήντετο | πυκνὸν ἔχουσα νόον. The κερδαλέαν καὶ ποικίλην of Plato corresponds in meaning to κερδαλέη—πυκνὸν ἔχουσα νόον, and may have ended one of the iambics in this or another Archilochean fable: it is at all events clear that they are from Archilochus. ‘The crafty and subtle fox of Archilochus’ means simply ‘the crafty and subtle fox of which Archilochus speaks’: the rest of the imagery is due to Plato. With the general sentiment cf. St Matth. vii 15 ἔρχονται πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων (this is the σκιαγραφία ἀρετῆς), ἔσωθεν δέ εἰσιν λύκοι ἅρπαγες: with ἑλκτέον ἐξόπισθεν (opposed to πρόθυρα μὲν καὶσχῆμα) Milton Samson Agonistes 358— 360 “Why are his gifts desirable, to tempt Our earnest prayers, then, given with solemn hand As graces, draw a scorpion's tail behind?” Unnecessary difficulty has been caused by an erroneous gloss of Timaeus (τὴν ἀλωπεκῆν· τὴν πανουργίαν), which seems to imply that he read ἀλωπεκῆν ‘fox's skin’ for ἀλώπεκα in this passage. Ruhnken (followed by Ast and Stallbaum) while retaining ἀλώπεκα explained it of the fox's skin; but it would be pointless to ‘drag behind a fox's skin.’ With ἀλώπεκα—‘fox’ for ‘foxiness’—cf. infra 382 D ποιητὴς—ψευδὴς ἐν θεῷ οὐκ ἔνι , Phaed. 77 E, and the well-known “astutam vapido servas sub pectore vulpem” Persius V 117.

ἀλλὰ γάρ ‘at enim,’ like ἀλλὰ δή (infra D, X 600 A al.), introduces an objection: cf. infra 366 A al.

οὐδὲ γὰρ ‐‐ μεγάλων : an audacious application of the proverb χαλεπὰ τὰ καλά .

ὡς ‐‐ φέρει . For ὡς we might expect ᾗ (Ficinus has quâ). ταύτῃ must be taken as referring to what precedes, though further explained by ὡς—φέρει. ἴχνη and φέρει shew that the metaphor is still the ὁδὸς βίου. The words ἴχνη φέρει may be from Archilochus. For the sentiment cf. III 394 D.

ξυνωμοσίας ‐‐ ἑταιρίας . An allusion to the political life of Athens: cf. Ap. 36 B, Theaet. 173 D, Thuc. VIII 54 ξυνωμοσίας, αἵπερ ἐτύγχανον πρότερον ἐν τῇ πόλει οὖσαι ἐπὶ δίκαις καὶ ἀρχαῖς. In the Laws, Plato would suppress all such secret clubs and cabals with a strong hand: see 856 B ff. The πειθοῦς διδάσκαλοι mentioned presently are the Sophists.

ὡς for ὥστε (except in idiomatic phrases like ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν, ὥς γε ἐντεῦθεν ἰδεῖν) is a curious archaism, tolerably frequent in Xenophon (e.g. Cyrop. I 2. 8, V 2. 5, VI 4. 16, VIII 5. 1 and 7. 27), but almost unexampled in Plato. The Protagoras (330 E) furnishes an instance with οὕτως preceding (cf. Xen. Cyr. IV 2. 13 ). ὡς in Phaed. 108 E is perhaps to be explained in the same way: cf. also Alc. II 141 B and Symp. 213 B παραχωρῆσαι γὰρ τὸν Σωκράτη ὡς ἐκεῖνον καθίζειν. See also on ὡς δή in I 337 C. As βιάζομαι can be followed by the simple infinitive, it might seem preferable to connect ὡς πλεονεκτοῦντες as a participial explanatory clause either with βιασόμεθα or with δίκην μὴ διδόναι (‘not to be punished for aggrandisement’); but the first alternative gives a wrong sense to πλεονεκτοῦντες, and the second involves too harsh an inversion.

οὐκοῦν κτλ. Cf. Laws 885 B θεοὺς ἡγούμενος εἰναι κατὰ νόμους οὐδεὶς πώποτε οὔτε ἔργον ἀσεβὲς εἰργάσατο ἑκὼν οὔτε λόγον ἀφῆκεν ἄνομον, ἀλλὰ ἓν δή τι τῶν τριῶν πάσχων, ἢ τοῦτο ὅπερ εἶπον οὐχ ἡγούμενος, ἢ τὸ δεύτερον ὄντας οὐ φροντίζειν ἀνθρώπων, ἢ τρίτον εὐπαραμυθήτους εἶναι θυσίαις τε καὶ εὐχαῖς παραγομένους. These three classes of heretics are severally refuted in 886 A—899 D, 899 D— 905 D, 905 D—907 B. It is clear both from this passage and from the Laws that the air was full of such heresies in Plato's day. The first was doubtless fostered by the sceptical attitude of Protagoras—περὶ μὲν θεῶν οὐκ ἔχω εἰδέναι οὔθ’ ὡς εἰσὶν οὔθ’ ὡς οὐκ εἰσίν (ap. D. L. IX 51): for the second cf. Aesch. Ag. 369—372 οὐκ ἔφα τις | θεοὺς βροτῶν ἀξιοῦσθαι μέλειν | ὅσοις ἀθίκτων χάρις | πατοῖθ’ · ὁ δ’ οὐκ εὐσεβής: the third—the most pernicious of all, according to Plato Laws 948 C—furnished the raison d'être of a degenerate priesthood.

τί καὶ ἡμῖν κτλ. ‘If the gods do not care for us, why should we in our turn (καί) care’ etc. For the text see cr. n. and App. III.

ἀκηκόαμεν ‐‐ ποιητῶν . The first ἤ is ‘or’ and the second ‘than.’ In λόγων Plato may be thinking inter alia of the works of early λογογράφοι like Pherecydes, who wrote genealogies of gods and heroes in prose; but there is no occasion to change λόγων into λογίων with Muretus. γενεαλογησάντων ποιητῶν refers to Homer and the Hesiodic and Orphic theogonies.

θυσίαις ‐‐ ἀγανῇσιν : see 364 D.

ἀπό : ‘from the proceeds of.’ Cf. Laws 906 C, D τοῦτον δὴ τὸν λόγον ἀναγκαῖον λέγειν τὸν λέγοντα ὡς εἰσὶ συγγνώμονες ἀεὶ θεοὶ τοῖς τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀδίκοις καὶ ἀδικοῦσιν, ἂν αὐτοῖς τῶν ἀδικημάτων τις ἀπονέμῃ, καθάπερ κυσὶ λύκοι τῶν ἁρπασμάτων σμικρὰ ἀπονέμοιεν, οἱ δὲ ἡμερούμενοι τοῖς δώροις συγχωροῖεν τὰ ποίμνια διαρπάζειν.

ὑπερβαίνοντες καὶ ἁμαρτάνοντες are subordinate to λισσόμενοι: “by praying when we transgress and sin, we shall persuade them,” etc. There is again a reference to λισσόμενοι ὅτε κέν τις ὑπερβήῃ καὶ ἁμάρτῃ quoted in 364 E. The position of the participles is justified by the allusion to this line.

ἢ ‐‐ ἤ . It was a common Greek belief that the sins of the fathers are visited upon the children: see the passages cited by Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. pp. 34 ff. If we take Plato at his word, Adimantus represents this vicarious punishment as extending even to the other world.

ἢ παῖδες παίδων . Baiter conjectures <ἢ παῖδες> ἢ παῖδες παίδων, and so I formerly printed. But παῖδες παίδων means little more than ‘descendants’ (cf. Laws 927 B), and the text may stand. Similarly in Ruskin Modern Painters Ch. 1 “all those labours which men have given their lives and their sons' sons' lives to complete.”

ὦ φίλε ‐‐ λογιζόμενος . ὦ φίλε is the objector who urges ἀλλὰ γὰρ—παίδων. In φήσει Plato recurs to the singular of 365 B λέγοι γὰρ ἂν κτλ. λογιζόμενος is not ‘reasoning,’ but ‘making his calculation,’ ‘calculos subducens’: such a man's morality is nothing but a balancing of profit and loss. Hermann's devotion to Paris A led him to conjecture ἀλλ’ ὠφελήσουσιν ἁγνιζομένους αἰ τελεταί rather than admit a simple case of omission arising from homoioteleuton: see cr. n. Vermehren proposes ἀλλ’ ὠφελήσουσιν αἱ νομιζόμεναι τελεταί (Plat. Stud. p. 90), but we should certainly follow Π here. See also Introd. § 5.

λύσιοι : ‘givers of absolution’: cf. 364 E. Certain Chthonian deities of the Orphic theology are meant, such as Hecate, Demeter, Dionysus λύσιος or λυσεύς, and above all Ζεὺς μειλίχιος. See Lobeck Aglaoph. p. 303.

θεῶν παῖδες : e.g. Musaeus and Orpheus (Σελήνης τε καὶ Μουσῶν ἔγγονοι 364 E). Madvig's rejection of οἵ (so also Ficinus) before ταῦτα in the last clause seriously impairs the rhythm of the sentence.

ἄκρων . ἄκρος was a fashionable expression to apply to the élite of any profession or art: cf. Theaet. 152 E τῶν ποιητῶν οἱ ἄκροι τῆς ποιήσεως ἑκατέρας, Pol. 292 E, supra 360 E, infra III 405 A, V 459 B.

ὡς δή τοι : see on I 337 C.

θείᾳ φύσει ‐‐ ἐπιστήμην . θείᾳ φύσει means a disposition which is good by divine grace or nature, not as the result of knowledge or compulsion. The virtue of such men is θείᾳ μοίρᾳ παραγιγνομένη ἄνευ νοῦ ( Men. 99 E): they are ἄνευ ἀνάγκης, αὐτοφυῶς, θείᾳ μοίρᾳ ἀγαθοί ( Laws 642 C), resembling Wordsworth's “Glad Hearts! without reproach or blot, Who do thy work and know it not.” Cf. VI 493 A note ἐπιστήμην is scientific knowledge of the good in the Socratic, not yet in the Platonic, sense.

οὐδεὶς ἑκὼν δίκαιος gives the lie to the Socratic οὐδεὶς ἑκὼν ἄδικος: cf. 360 C. For ἀνανδρίας below see on 359 B.

ἡρώων . J. and C. think “Plato is referring to well-known tales and maxims, which the poets and logographers had put into the mouths of ancient heroes.” It is simpler to understand the expression of Orpheus, Musaeus, and other θεῶν παῖδες, ποιηταὶ καὶ προφῆται τῶν θεῶν γενόμενοι: see 366 B note So also Dreinhöfer Plato's Schrift üb. d. Staat nach Disposition u. Inhalt p. 2 note 16.

ἄλλως ἤ . Praise of the δόξαι of Justice is somewhat inaccurately spoken of as praise of justice itself: but it is unnecessary to insert διά (with Richards) before δόξας. Cf. 367 D τῶν μὲν ἄλλων ἀποδεχοίμην ἂν οὕτως ἐπαινούντων δικαιοσύνην καὶ ψεγόντων ἀδικίαν, δόξας τε περὶ αὐτῶν καὶ μισθοὺς ἐγκωμιαζόντων καὶ λοιδορούντων.

ἰδίοις : see on 363 E.

ἀλλ) αὐτὸς ‐‐ ξύνοικος ᾖ . This thesis is developed and elaborated in Gorg. 472 D—481 B.

ὑπέρ is here little if anything more than περί, cf. Laws 777 A ὑπὲρ τοῦ Διὸς ἀγορεύων. This usage, which appears on Inscriptions after 300 B.C. (Meisterhans^{3} p. 222), is very rare in Plato. It occurs occasionally in the Attic orators, especially with λέγειν, and is tolerably common in Polybius and later Greek: see Stephanus-Hase Thes. s. v. ὑπέρ and Jannaris Hist. Gr. Gr. § 1685. I do not think we are justified in translating (with Tucker) ‘on behalf of their view of the relations of justice and injustice.’

κατατείνας : 358 D note

ἀλλότριον ἀγαθόν : I 343 C note

ὡμολόγησας : 358 A.

πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον . The sequence of δέ after τε is frequent in Plato with δὲ καί, εἰ δὲ βούλει, τί δέ, ἔτι δέ, μέγιστον δέ, τὸ δὲ κεφάλαιον and the like. For a classified list of examples see Hoefer de part. Plat. pp. 15—17.

ἀκούειν is added to Glauco's list (357 C) by Adimantus, who is also responsible for the exaggeration πολὺ μᾶλλον.

καὶ ‐‐ δή with ὑγιαίνειν marks it as different in kind from the other examples: cf. (with J. and C.) Men. 87 E καὶ πλοῦτος δή and infra 373 A.

γόνιμα : i.q. γνήσια, but more forcible: cf. Theaet. 151 E, Ar. Frogs 96.

καὶ ἀδικία βλάπτει . The sense is: καὶ ψέγε τοῦτ’ αὐτὸ ἀδικίας ὃ αὐτὴ δἰ αὑτὴν τὸν ἔχοντα βλάπτει. Hartman would cancel the words, needlessly, although the zeugma is bolder than usual. For the stylistic effect cf. ἀδικία δ’ ἐπαινεῖται 358 A above.

ἀποδεχοίμην and ἀνασχοίμην are equally good Greek (cf. Prot. 339 D, Phaed. 92 A, E al.), but as ἀπο‐ is supported by both Α and Π, it is more probable that the error lies in ‐σχοίμην than in ἀπο‐, especially as ἀποδεχοίμην is found also in the margin of A. The ἀπο‐ is at least as old as the Scholium, which mentions the two readings ἀποσχοίμην and ἀνασχοίμην. The latter is an obvious correction of ἀποσχοίμην, and has survived in Ξ and a few inferior MSS besides.

367E - 369B In a short interlude Socrates, after complimenting Glauco and Adimantus, remarks on the magnitude of the task before him—none other than the defence of Justice against her slanderers. As the weak-sighted are better able to recognise small letters at a distance if they have previously studied the same letters on a larger scale and on an ampler ground, so (says Socrates) let us first study Justice in magno, that is, in a state, and afterwards look for her lineaments in parvo, in other words, in the Individual. The contemplation of a State in process of creation will shew us Justice and Injustice coming into existence.

ὦ παῖδες ἐκείνου τοῦ ἀνδρός . This curious phrase occurs once again in Plato viz. Phil. 36 D, where Protarchus is addressed in the words ὦ παῖ ἐκείνου τἀνδρός. Philebus has withdrawn from the discussion, his part in which he has bequeathed to Protarchus, who is therefore playfully called his son. That this is the meaning appears from Phil. 11 A, B, 11 C δέχει δὴ τοῦτον τὸν νῦν διδόμενον, ὦ Πρώταρχε, λόγον; Ἀνάγκη δέχεσθαι· Φίληβος γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ καλὸς ἀπείρηκεν, 12 A, 16 B, 19 A: cf. also 15 C and 28 B. In precisely the same way Glauco and Adimantus are the ‘children of Thrasymachus.’ They are διάδοχοι τοῦ λόγου as appears from 357 A, 358 B (ἐπανανεώσομαι τὸν Θρασυμάχου λόγον), 367 A and 367 C, as well as from the substance of their arguments. This image is in fact one of the links by means of which Plato binds the dialogue together: as Polemarchus is heir to Cephalus (331 E), so Glauco and Adimantus are heirs to Thrasymachus. In explaining ἐκείνου τοῦ ἀνδρός of Thrasymachus, Stallbaum is therefore not “ridiculous” (as J. and C. assert) but right. See my article in Cl. Rev. X p. 237.

ὁ Γλαύκωνος ἐραστής may be Critias, as Schleiermacher supposed; but there is no evidence in support of the conjecture: see Bergk Poet. Lyr. Gr.^{4} II p. 283.

τὴν Μεγαροῖ μάχην : perhaps in 409 B.C.: see Diod. Sic. XIII 65. If so, Plato is guilty of a slight anachronism, supposing that the scene of the dialogue is laid in 410. See Introd. § 3.

παῖδες ‐‐ ἀνδρός . By Ἀρίστωνος, the author of the line of course meant Aristo, father of Glauco and Adimantus; but Ἀρίστων suggests ἄριστος (cf. IX 580 B) and the pun conveys a friendly, if halfironical, compliment to ‘his excellency’ Thrasymachus, whose παῖδες (so far as the argument is concerned) Glauco and his brother are: see on ὦ παῖδες above. In Symp. 174 B, when inviting Aristodemus to come as an uninvited guest to sup with Agathon, Socrates indulges in a similarly playful pun: ἕπου τοίνυν, ἔφη, ἵνα καὶ τὴν παροιμίαν διαφθείρωμεν μεταβάλλοντες, ὡς ἄρα καὶ ἀγαθῶν ἐπὶ δαῖτας ἴασιν αὐτόματοι ἀγαθοί. (The διαφθορά consists in the substitution of ἀγαθῶν for δειλῶν, the form of the proverb which Plato had in view being αὐτόματοι δ’ ἀγαθοὶ δειλῶν ἐπὶ δαῖτας ἴασιν, as the Scholiast remarks. Arnold Hug is ill-advised in adopting Lachmann's suggestion to read Ἀγάθων) i.e. Ἀγάθωνι for ἀγαθῶν: see Cl. Rev. X p. 238.) Other plays on proper names in Plato are collected by Riddell Digest pp. 250 f. In κλεινοῦ Stallbaum finds a ‘lusus facetus’ on ἐκείνου; but this particular lusus (if it exists) is accidental and unmeaning.

θεῖον . The addition of τι (proposed by Herwerden) is unnecessary: cf. III 388 D note θεῖος is here used, like ἔνθεος, of inspiration: if the speaker does not understand or believe what he says, he is, like a rhapsodist or poet, nothing but the mouthpiece of the inspiring deity: cf. Phaedr. 245 A, Ion 533 E, 535 E— 536 D.

τί τέ ἐστιν ‐‐ ἔχει recalls the conclusion of Book I (354 B, C).

οἵανπερ ἂν sc. ἐποιησάμεθα, the verb being omitted as it frequently is with ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ.

ἕρμαιον ‐‐ τυγχάνει . I have followed Schneider in printing a colon before ἕρμαιον: for the sentence ἕρμαιον— τυγχάνει is not the grammatical apodosis to the εἰ clause, but a further result. The asyndeton with ἕρμαιον is the usual asyndeton of ampliative clauses. For the principle underlying the method of inquiry here enunciated, see Soph. 218 C ὅσα δ’ αὖ τῶν μεγάλων δεῖ διαπονεῖσθαι καλῶς, περὶ τῶν τοιούτων δέδοκται πᾶσι καὶ πάλαι τὸ πρότερον ἐν σμικροῖς καὶ ῥᾴοσιν αὐτὰ δεῖν μελετᾶν, πρὶν ἐν αὐτοῖς τοῖς μεγίστοις and Pol. 286 A. (Contrast Phil. 48 B, where the opposite course is recommended.) In the special case of the State versus the Individual, the words ἐν σμικροῖς, ἐν ἐλάττοσιν are not applicable, but ἐν ῥᾴοσιν πρότερον δεῖ μελετᾶν is the essential part of the principle, and Justice in the State is ῥᾴων καταμαθεῖν (368 E) than in the Individual. Cf. also infra 377 C ἐν τοῖς μείζοσιν—μύθοις ὀψόμεθα καὶ τοὺς ἐλάττους. Illustrations from letters are tolerably frequent in Plato: cf. e.g. IV 402 A f., Theaet. 205 D—206 A, Pol. 277 E ff.

33—369 A 3 πρῶτον ‐‐ ἐπισκοποῦντες lays down the method to be pursued in the rest of the treatise, except in books V—VII, which are professedly a ‘digression,’ and X, which is of the nature of an epilogue. At each suc cessive stage in the exposition of his subject, Plato reminds us more or less explicitly of the method which he here proposes to follow:—at the end of the first sketch of a State 371 E; in connexion with the φλεγμαίνουσα πόλις 372 E; before entering on the theory of education 376 C, D and again in III 392 C, when he has finished the treatment of λόγοι; at Adimantus' objection IV 420 B, C; at the end of the picture of the just state IV 427 D ff.; in passing to Justice in the Individual IV 434 D ff.; at V 472 B ff., where the question is raised ‘Is this State possible?’; on beginning the account of the degenerate commonwealths and men in VIII 545 B; and finally when the whole argument draws to a head at IX 577 C.

τὴν τοῦ μείζονος ὁμοιότητα . Justice in the State is in fact to be used as a means of explaining Justice in the Individual, which is after all the real Justice: cf. IV 443 B ff. notes The relation between the two is that of a παράδειγμα and that which the παράδειγμα is intended to explain: see Pol. 278 C οὐκοῦν τοῦτο μὲν ἱκανῶς συνειλήφαμεν, ὅτι παραδείγματός γ) ἐστὶ τότε γένεσις, ὁπόταν ὂν ταὐτὸν ἐν ἑτέρῳ διεσπασμένῳ, δοξαζόμενον ὀρθῶς καὶ συναχθὲν περὶ ἑκάτερον ὡς συνάμφω μίαν ἀληθῆ δόξαν ἀποτελῇ; Φαίνεται. Plato has been severely blamed (as e.g. by Grote Plato III pp. 123 ff.) for representing the Commonwealth as the Individual “writ large.” Plato, however, laid stress upon this view, as tending to cement the union between the citizen and the State, which was rapidly dissolving in his day. This is well brought out by Krohn Plat. Frag. p. 5. Cf. also Pöhlmann Gesch. d. antik. Kommunismus etc. pp. 146 ff.

εἰ γιγνομένην ‐‐ ἀδικίαν . This would lead us to expect that we are to discover Justice and Injustice in the same State. In the sequel we find Justice only in the Ideal City: it is the degenerate Cities of VIII and IX that furnish the picture of Injustice. Plato does not expressly announce his change of plan till IV 420 B, C: ᾠήθημεν γὰρ ἐν τῇ τοιαύτῃ μάλιστα ἂν εὑρεῖν δικαιοσύνην καὶ αὖ ἐν τῇ κάκιστα οἰκουμένῃ ἀδικίαν—νῦν μὲν οὖν—τὴν εὐδαίμονα πλάττομεν—αὐτίκα δὲ τὴν ἐναντίαν σκεψόμεθα. The discrepancy must, I think, be admitted (see Krohn Pl. St. p. 32, and Kunert die doppelte Recens. d. Pl. St. pp. 10 ff.), but such corrections and developments of plan are characteristic of the dialogue as a form of literature, and do not establish the theory of a double recension of the Republic. Cf. Grimmelt de reip. Pl. comp. et unit. p. 19, and Westerwick de Rep. Pl. pp. 43—45.

369B - 372D The First Sketch of a City-state.

A city is called into being by the fact that the individual is not self-sufficient. We may regard it as the union of many men mutually helping one another in one place. The individual gives and takes because he thinks it better for himself to do so.

Now man's first need is food, his second housing, his third clothing and the like. The smallest possible State will therefore consist of a farmer, a builder, a weaver and a shoemaker etc.—four or five men in all. Each of these must work for all, because Nature has adapted different men for different kinds of work, and because every kind of work has its critical moment when it must be done and cannot be neglected. Our principle is — One man, one work. We shall accordingly require carpenters and smiths to make instruments for the farmer, weaver, and shoemaker, as well as various kinds of herdsmen, to furnish cattle for ploughing and carrying, together with hides and fleeces for the makers of clothing. Since it is almost impossible to make the city self-supporting, we shall require middlemen to introduce imports; and as imports necessarily imply exports, the number of farmers and manufacturers in our city will increase, and we shall need travelling merchants to dispose of their produce. Owners of transport-ships will also be necessary, if there is traffic by sea.

Moreover, to facilitate exchange within the city, there must be a market, and coined money, and retail traders to act as middlemen between the producer and the consumer. The retail traders should be those who are physically unfit to engage in any other pursuit. There will also be hired labourers in our city.

Where then in such a commonwealth are Justice and Injustice? Along with which of the component parts of the State do they make their appearance? Adimantus suggests that we should look for them in the reciprocal intercourse of the various classes in the city. Let us see, says Socrates. The citizens will live the simple easy-going life of vegetarians, satisfying only the modest demands of their natural appetites. On a hint from Glauco, a few additional vegetarian luxuries are conceded.

γίγνεται ‐‐ πόλις κτλ. The present episode is ostensibly an historical account of the genesis of society, and from this point of view should be compared with Laws III 676 A ff. Some of the features are derived from an analysis of the industrial basis of society as it exists in civilised times: others (see 372 B—D), are semi-mythical and idyllic, recalling pictures of the golden age such as we find in Pol. 269 C ff., and in the caricatures of the comedians (e.g. ap. Athen. VI 267 E ff.). But the prevailing atmosphere is not historical or legendary, but idealistic (note δεῖ in 369 E and elsewhere), and Plato's πρώτη πόλις (Arist. Pol. Δ 4. 1291^{a} 17) should primarily be regarded as—in its essential features—a preliminary and provisional description of the industrial foundation on which the higher parts of his own ideal city are to rest. Cf. also on 372 B, D, Rettig Proleg. in Plat. remp. p. 42 and Steinhart Einleitung p. 156.

τυγχάνει as a mere copula is very rare in Attic prose, and it would be easy here to insert ὤν after πολλῶν: see Porson on Eur. Hec. 782. In the Platonic dialogues this usage recurs in Phaedr. 263 C, Gorg. 502 B, Alc. I 129 A, 133 A, Hipp. Mai. 300 A, Laws 918 C, Tim. 61 C, nor is it possible in the last three examples to account for its omission by lipography. The idiom occurs in Sophocles and Euripides, once in Aristophanes ( Eccl. 1141), and (though condemned by Phrynichus) must also be admitted (though rarely) in prose: see the instances cited by Blaydes on Ar. (l.c.) and cf. Rutherford's New Phrynichus p. 342.

πολλῶν ἐνδεής . In the account of the genesis of society given in the Laws (676 A—680 E), more stress is laid on the social instinct of man: in Prot. 322 B ff the operating cause is man's defencelessness against wild beasts. Grote (Plato III p. 139 note) censures Plato for not mentioning the “reciprocal liability of injury” among the generative causes of civic life; but this (as well as assistance against external aggression) is hinted at in βοηθούς.

ἄλλος ‐‐ χρείᾳ . The words are short for ἄλλος ἄλλον, τὸν μὲν ἐπ’ ἄλλου, τὸν δ’ ἐπ’ ἄλλου χρείᾳ (for the omission of τὸν μέν cf. Prot. 330 A, Theaet. 181 D al.): ‘one taking to himself one man, another another—the one man for one, the other for another purpose.’ Essentially the same meaning would no doubt be conveyed without τὸν δ’ ἐπ’ ἄλλου, which Herwerden following two inferior MSS would omit; but the fuller form of expression is chosen in order, I think, to prepare us for the principle of ‘One man, one work’ to be presently enunciated.

ταύτῃ τῇ ξυνοικίᾳ . Stallbaum rightly regards the sentence as an anaco luthon, the antecedent to ταύτῃ being the words from παραλαμβάνων to βοηθούς. If the subject to ἐθέμεθα (a gnomic aorist) were ἄλλος—δεόμενοι—ἀγείραντες, we should probably have had παραλαμβάνοντες for παραλαμβάνων: and besides, Plato is not yet describing the particular city which we are ποιεῖν λόγῳ (infra line 19), but laying down the law as to the γένεσις of cities in general. For the anacoluthon see Engelhardt Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 40.

τῶν περὶ τὸ σῶμα : neuter, not masculine; otherwise Plato would have written θεραπευτῶν (as in q and some other MSS).

ἀναγκαιοτάτη πόλις . Referring to this passage, Aristotle (Pol. Δ 4. 1291^{a} 10—19) attacks Plato for making the end of his city not τὸ καλόν, but τὰ ἀναγκαῖα. No doubt, the end of this ‘first city’— so Aristotle calls it—is primarily τὰ ἀναγκαῖα; but Plato would reply that the cities of the farmers, the auxiliaries, and the rulers, are in reality one city, γινομένη μὲν τοῦ ζῆν ἕνεκεν, οὐσα δὲ τοῦ εὖ ζῆν (Arist. Pol. A 2. 1252^{b} 29. Cf. Laws 828 D δεῖ δὲ αὐτὴν καθάπερ ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ζῆν εὖ).

ἕνα ἕκαστον κτλ. Cf. Charm. 161 E δοκεῖ ἄν σοι πόλις εὖ οἰκεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τούτου τοῦ· νόμου τοῦ κελεύοντος τὸ ἑαυτοῦ ἱμάτιον ἕκαστον ὑφαίνειν καὶ πλύνειν, καὶ ὑποδήματα σκυτοτομεῖν, καὶ λήκυθον καὶ στλεγγίδα καὶ τἄλλα πάντα κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον κτλ.;

οὕτω ῥᾷον ἢ )κείνως . οὕτω refers to the alternative which is more familiar, although mentioned first: cf. (with Ast) Xen. Mem. I 3. 13 τοῦτο τὸ θηρίον—τοσούτῳ δεινότερόν ἐστι τῶν φαλαγγίων ὅσῳ ἐκεῖνα μὲν ἁψάμενα, τοῦτο δὲ οὐδ’ ἁπτόμενον—ἐνίησί τι. On the corruption ῥᾴδιον for /ῥᾷον (also in Men. 94 E) see Introd. § 5.

φύεται strikes the keynote of the City of Books II—IV. The first critic to lay sufficient stress on this point was Krohn: see Pl. St. pp. 59—62, where he collects the references to φύσις throughout Books I—IV. The City of II—IV is a κατὰ φύσιν οἰκισθεῖσα πόλις. What is meant by φύσις? Not inorganic Nature, but the ‘nature’ of a πόλις or aggregate of πολῖται, i.e. (as the unit in a city is the man) human nature, in other words, the nature of the human soul, which, according to Plato and Socrates, constitutes a man's true and proper individuality. It is not however human nature as it is, but as it ought to be, which is the foundation on which the Platonic State is built; so that, although the doctrine of transcendent Ideas is excluded from the first four books (see on III 402 C), Idealism at all events is present. See also Krohn Plat. Frage pp. 8—11, and (for the connotation of φύσις) Benn's article on ‘The Idea of Nature in Plato’ in Archiv f. Gesch. d. Phil. IX pp. 24 —49 and Pöhlmann l.c. pp. 110 ff.

ὅταν ‐‐ εἷς μίαν . This principle—the cardinal principle of the Republic, reiterated also with great emphasis in Laws 846 D—847 B—is deduced by Plato from φύσις, whose rule is specialization: cf. 370 C ὅταν εἷς ἓν κατὰ φύσιν—πράττῃ. Plato (as usual in the Republic) is thinking of Man's nature, one man being naturally fitted for one pursuit, another for another: cf. III 395 B, IV 433 A, 434 A, B. The principle of specialization had already been enunciated by Socrates: see e.g. Xen. Mem. III 9. 3, 15, Cyrop. VIII 2. 5, 6. Aristotle widens it into a general law of Nature: οὐθὲν γὰρ ἡ φύσις ποιεῖ τοιοῦτον οἷον οἱ χαλκοτύποι τὴν Δελφικὴν μάχαιραν πενιχρῶς, ἀλλ’ ἓν πρὸς ἕν ( Pol. A 2. 1252^{b} 1 ff.). In its application to politics, the principle becomes in Plato's hands a weapon for attacking the foundations of Athenian democracy (see Gorg. 455 A—C), to which, in this respect, his own Ideal City was a kind of counterblast.

κάλλιον . Did Plato write καλλίω? κάλλιον γίγνεται may no doubt mean ‘are better made,’ which is fairly satisfactory in point of sense, but καλλίω forms a better balance to πλείω τε, and is more suited to καλόν just below. With ῥᾷον immediately following, the corruption would be easy. On the other hand the collocation καλλίω καὶ ῥᾷον is unpleasing, and it is probably safer to adhere to the MSS.

ἐπὶ τὸ ἀροῦν . See on 372 B.

αὐτὴν τὴν πόλιν : ipsam urbem: the city as opposed to the inhabitants (τέκτονες, χαλκῆς etc.). Cf. 360 D note It is not necessary to adopt Hermann's conjecture αὖ for αὐτήν, or (with Hartman) to eject τὴν πόλιν.

σχεδόν τι ἀδύνατον . Plato nevertheless endeavours to secure this advantage in the Laws: see 704 A—705 B. Cf. Arist. Pol. H 5. 1326^{b} 26 ff.

ὧν ἐκεῖνοι δέονται . All exchange with foreign cities is to be in kind: money is used only for transactions within the city: see infra 371 C ff. Here again Plato is constructing his city κατὰ φύσιν: cf. Arist. Pol. A 9. 1257^{a} 28 ἡ μὲν οὐν τοιαύτη μεταβλητικὴ οὔτε παρὰ φύσιν οὔτε χρηματιστικῆς ἐστὶν εἷδος οὐδέν.

ὧν ἂν αὐτοῖς χρεία . αὐτοῖς is of course emphatic (ipsis). For the rare omission of ᾗ cf. III 416 D and Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. p. 33 with Cope's Rhetoric of Aristotle Vol. II p. 328.

ὧν ἂν δέωνται . ὧν is masculine in spite of ὧν ἐκεῖνοι δέονται just above. The reading of q ἐκείνοις ἄξουσιν, οἳ μεταδώσουσιν ὧν ἂν δέωνται is a free correction (after 371 B) intended to make ὧν neuter.

τῆς ‐‐ ἐργασίας is not the work of a seaman (as Jowett seems to suppose), but a special department of ἐμπορία, viz. ναυκληρία: see Arist. Pol. A 11. 1258^{b} 21 ff. The ναύκληρος owned a ship and conveyed passengers and cargo for payment (cf. Gorg. 511 D, E): he is frequently mentioned along with the ἔμπορος, e.g. Pol. 290 A ἐμπόρους καὶ ναυκλήρους καὶ καπήλους, Laws 831 E, Xen. Vect. 3. 4, 5. 3.

ὧν δὴ ἕνεκα . ὧν can hardly (as J. and C. suppose) refer to μεταδώσουσιν: it must denote the same objects as the previous ὧν. The meaning is ‘for the sake of which things we established the principle of community and founded a city.’ Cf. 369 C κοινωνοὺς—μεταδίδωσι δὴ ἄλλος ἄλλῳ κτλ.

νόμισμα ‐‐ ἕνεκα . Cf. Laws 742 A νόμισμα δ’ ἕνεκα ἀλλαγῆς τῆς καθ’ ἡμέραν. See also 370 E note Plato regards coined money as a necessary evil— the offspring, not of φύσις, but of νόμος (cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. V 8. 1133^{a} 30 ff. διὰ τοῦτο τοὔνομα ἔχει νόμισμα, ὅτι οὐ φύσει ἀλλὰ νόμῳ ἐστί and Pol. A 9. 1257^{b} 10 ff.), a mere conventional symbol, the private possession of which is denied to the highest classes of the State (III 416 D ff.).

οἱ ἀσθενέστατοι κτλ. Cf. Laws 918 A—920 C, where καπηλεία is confined by Plato to those ὧν διαφθειρομένων οὐκ ἂν γίγνοιτο μεγάλη λύμη τῇ πόλει (919 C).

καπήλους ‐‐ ἐμπόρους . Soph. 223 D τῆς μεταβλητικῆς οὐχ ἡ μὲν κατὰ πόλιν ἀλλαγή, σχεδὸν αὐτῆς ἥμισυ μέρος ὄν, καπηλικὴ προσαγορεύεται; Ναί. Τὸ δέ γε ἐξ ἄλλης εἰς ἄλλην πόλιν διαλλαττόμενον ὠνῇ καὶ πράσει ἐμπορική; Τί δ) οὕ;

ἀξιοκοινώνητοι : worthy of being admitted into the κοινωνία of our city. This explanation (Schneider's) is better than ‘worthy of one's society’ (L. and S.).

τὴν τιμὴν ταύτην . ταύτην is idiomatic for ταύτης: see I 333 B note

μισθωτοί . Plato does not admit slave labour in his city, unless perhaps in the persons of barbarians. The exclusion of slaves is also a touch of ‘Nature’: cf. Arist. Pol. A 3. 1253^{b} 20 τοῖς δὲ παρὰ φύσιν (sc. δοκεῖ) τὸ δεσπόζειν with Suse mihl and Hicks ad loc. If barbarians may be enslaved, it is because they are φύσει δοῦλοι: cf. V 469 B ff., with 470 C and Arist. Pol. A 2. 1252^{b} 9 ταὐτὸ φύσει βάρβαρον καὶ δοῦλον.

ἐν αὐτῶν ‐‐ ἀλλήλους . The reply is to the first question, not to the second: see on V 465 E. In so far as δικαιοσύνη can be said to exist in so elementary a state, Plato would have identified it with the performance by each class (farmers, artisans, etc.) of their own work and no more. This is the first view of δικαιοσύνη in the Republic: for the second see IV 432 ff., 441 D ff., and for the third or metaphysical VI 504 B note

ὑποδήματα . I have placed the mark of interrogation after ὑποδήματα, as it is only the present participles which belong to διαιτήσονται. ‘And when they have built themselves houses’ marks a fresh start, no longer interrogative, for which reason I have also departed from the usual punctuation after ἱκανῶς (in B) and πόλεμον (in C).

θρέψονται κτλ. The picture which Plato proceeds to draw represents the working of well-regulated ἐπιθυμία or appetite—the psychological groundwork of the third or lowest order in Plato's city. τὰ μέν is the wheaten meal (ἄλευρα), τὰ δέ the barley-meal (ἀλφιτα). Only the wheaten meal was (as a rule) baked (πέσσειν or ὀπτᾶν) into loaves (ἄρτοι): the barley-meal was “kneaded into a simple dough (μάσσειν, whence μᾶζα), dried in a mould, and afterwards moistened with water and eaten” (Blümner, Gr. Privatalt. p. 218). μᾶζαι made of barley meal was the staple food of the common Greek: the wheaten loaf was a luxury. The double chiasmus ἄλφιτα, μάξαντες, μάζας )( ἄλευρα, πέψαντες, ἄρτους is noticeable: cf. Crito 47 C.

It will be observed that the inhabitants of this ‘First City’ subsist upon a vegetable diet. Cattle are used for ploughing and carrying, and supply wool and skins to make clothing and shoes (370 D, E), but animal food is unknown. It is improbable that Plato deliberately borrowed this trait from the current legends about the golden age (cf. Pol. 271 D ff.): for he allows the slaughter of cattle for skins, whereas in the golden age animal life was held sacred (see Empedocles ap. Arist. Rhet. I 13. 1373^{b} 14 ff. and Robertson Smith Religion of the Semites pp. 282 ff.). But he no doubt regarded vegetarianism as characteristic of the primitive innocence of a pastoral community (Laws 782 A—D). In Plato's days, as now, the Greek peasant was almost a vegetarian. To argue from this and kindred passages (esp. Tim. 77 A—C and 80 E) as Teichmüller does (Lit. Fehd. II pp. 187—202), that Plato was himself a vegetarian, is somewhat hazardous. Whether Plato wished his farmers to be vegetarians or not, he permits the soldiers to eat flesh: cf. III 404 B ff.

τὰ μὲν πέψαντες κτλ. The asyndeton (as usual) is ampliative. The punctuation in the text avoids the difficulty of the two verbs θρέψονται and εὐωχήσονται. Schneider places the colon before μάζας, but this is much less natural. For μάζας γενναίας, ‘noble bannocks’ (J. and C.), cf. (with Stallbaum) Laws 844 E τὰ γενναῖα σῦκα ἐπονομαζόμενα. κάλαμον is not ‘a mat of reeds’ (Jowett, with L. and S.), which would be much too artistic, but ‘reeds,’ κάλαμον being collective as in Arist. Hist. An. IX 36. 620^{a} 35; and τινα is contemptuous (cf. II 363 D note).

παραβαλλόμενοι is also contemptuous for the παρατιθέμενοι of civilised society: it suggests throwing food before animals (cf. 372 D).

στιβάδων : not ‘mattresses’ (L. and S.): why should they ‘strew’ mattresses? The whole point of the passage is that instead of reclining on manufactured couches they lie on natural ones of bryony and myrtle boughs: contrast 372 D. στρωννύναι στιβάδας is simply ‘to make couches of leaves’: cf. στορέσαι λέχος. The word μῖλαξ means bryony (as Schneider saw): cf. Sandys on Eur. Bacch. 107 χλοήρει μίλακι καλλικάρπῳ. The ‘yew’ of the English translators would make a sombre and lugubrious couch.

ἐπιπίνοντες . ἐπί means ‘after’: cf. Xen. Cyr. VI 2 28 μετὰ δὲ τὸν σῖτον εἰ οἶνον ἐπιπίνοιμεν. In Greek banquets there was little or no drinking during dinner. The conjecture ὑποπίνοντες (Stephanus-Hase Thes. s. v. ἐπιπίνω) is unnecessary.

ἢ πόλεμον . The origin of war is over-population (373 D).

ἄνευ ὄψου κτλ. ὄψον is meant by Glauco in its narrower sense of animal food (whether fish or flesh); Socrates on the other hand uses the word in its wider sense of anything eaten in addition to, or along with, bread, e.g. vegetables (see Blümner Gr. Privatalt. p. 223). A spirited and athletic Athenian like Glauco cannot tolerate a vegetarian diet: cf. 372 D.

ἑστιωμένους : sarcastic, with reference to εὐωχήσονται: ‘you call it feasting when they have nothing but dry bread!’ (J. and C.).

ἅλας ‐‐ ἑψήσονται . ‘Of course they will make salt and olives and cheese and vegetables whether wild’ (βολβούς) ‘or cultivated’ (λάχανα) ‘into such boiled dishes as can be prepared in the country.’ ἕψημα is not ‘something for boiling,’ but something boiled; and ἑψήσονται is used with two accusatives, one external (ἅλας, &c.) and the other internal (ἑψήματα). Plato hints that cookery in the country (ἐν ἀγροῖς, cf. κατ’ ἀγρούς III 399 D) is inferior to that in the town. For the kind of dishes in question cf. Ath. II 64 E περὶ δὲ τῆς τῶν βολβῶν σκευασίας Φιλήμων φησὶ τὸν βολβόν, εἰ βούλει, σκόπει | ὅσα δαπανήσας εὐδοκιμεῖ, τυρὸν μέλι | σήσαμον ἔλαιον κρόμμυον ὄξος σίλφιον· | αὐτὸς δ’ ἐφ’ αὑτοῦ )στὶν πονηρὸς καὶ πικρός .

φηγούς : ‘acorns,’ not ‘beech-nuts’ (D. and V.): see Blaydes on Ar. Peace 1137.

ὑποπίνοντες . Wine was sipped during dessert. ὑπο‐ in ὑποπίνοντες emphasizes the moderation already expressed in μετρίως: cf. Lys. 223 B ὑποπεπωκότες ἐν τοῖς Ἑρμαίοις. Dr Jackson connects πρὸς τὸ πῦρ with ὑπο πίνοντες, comparing IV 420 E, Ar. Ach. 751 al. This may be right, but the ordinary view seems to me somewhat more natural.

372D - 373C Glauco protests against the swinish character of such a life: more comfort, he thinks, should be allowed. While expressing his opinion that the healthy State is that which he has already described, Socrates is willing to describe the ‘inflamed’ ( φλεγμαίνουσα) City, in case Justice and Injustice should be discovered in it (372 D—372 E).

The Second Sketch of a City now begins (372 E ff.).

Some will not be satisfied with the provisions of our first city, but will demand a variety of physical comforts and delicacies, and artistic delights. A crowd of hunters and imitative artists of different kinds will accordingly spring up, and the race of middlemen will be largely increased. As a flesh diet will come into fashion, swineherds will be in demand, and cattle will multiply. The new style of living will bring doctors to the front.

ff. The provisions of the πρώτη πόλις are insufficient for the satisfaction of human needs: for there is θυμός as well as ἐπιθυμία in the soul of man. Hence we must advance a stage further. Plato's method is as follows. He begins by enumerating many of the features of ordinary Greek life, as he found it, without distinguishing the good from the bad. The resulting picture he calls a τρυφῶσα or φλεγμαίνουσα πόλις. The next step is to purge this τρυφῶσα πόλις (cf. III 399 E λελήθαμέν γε διακαθαίροντες πάλιν ἣν ἄρτι τρυφᾶν ἔφαμεν πόλιν) by excluding some of the features, and correcting and regulating others, both by prescriptive enactments and still more by the influence of education. It is this κεκαθαρμένη πόλις which forms what we may call Plato's δευτέρα πόλις (II 372 E—IV): his third and crowning effort, the City of the Rulers, is contained in Books V—VII. Cf. VIII 543 E note and Hirzel der Dialog I pp. 235 ff.

ὑῶν . The city of Pigs is supposed by Zeller^{4} II 1 pp. 325, 893, and Dümmler Antisthenica pp. 5 ff., Proleg. zur Pl. Staat p. 61, to be a contemptuous allusion to Antisthenes' ideal commonwealth (on which see Susemihl in Fl. Jahrb. 1887 pp. 207—214). This conjecture requires us to interpret Plato's first sketch of a State as wholly ironical and intended ‘to warn us against the false ideal of a Nature-City’ (Zeller l. c.). I agree with Henkel (Stud. zur Gesch. d. Gr. Lehre vom Staat pp. 8 f.) in thinking that there is no solid ground for Zeller's theory. The πρώτη πόλις is not of course Plato's ideal republic, and his description of it is plentifully bestrewn with irony, but it is nevertheless the foundation on which his city is built, and, in point of fact, although some of its features are implicitly corrected or superseded in the sequel, it still remains on the whole, and as far as it goes, a not unpleasing picture of the life of the lowest stratum in Plato's city, and it is nowhere expressly cancelled or abolished. See also on 369 B and 372 E. The εὐχερὴς βίος ( Pol. 266 C) of the πρώτη πόλις is fitly compared to that of pigs, the εὐχερέστατον γένος τῶν ὄντων (ib.); and it is appropriate that Glauco, who is nothing if not θυμοειδής (Introd. § 2), should thus express his contempt for a life which hardly if at all rises above the level of ἐπιθυμία.

καὶ οἱ νῦν ἔχουσι : e.g. fish, flesh, fowl: see on 372 C. The words ἅπερ—ἔχουσι are to be taken with τραγήματα as well as with ὄψα. Glauco is thinking of delicacies like the preserved sorb-apples (ὄα τεταριχευμένα) alluded to in Symp. 190 D. See Blümner Gr. Privatalt. p. 222 note 2.

τρυφῶσαν πόλιν . Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 34, 72) thinks that Plato originally meant to look for ἀδικία in this τρυφῶσα πόλις: but see on 369 A.

ἀληθινὴ ‐‐ φλεγμαίνουσαν . There is a vein of irony in ἀληθινή: for the πρώτη τόλις is not the final form of Plato's city. The epithets τρυφῶσαν, φλεγμαίνουσαν are not however ironical (as Dümmler seems to hold Proleg. p. 62): see III 399 E.

εἰδ)αὖ ‐‐ ἀποκωλύει . I have adopted Richards' suggestion, and printed a comma after βούλεσθε, a colon before οὐδέν. The meaning is: ‘but if you wish it, let us contemplate also’ etc. The scribe in Paris A must have understood καὶ θεωρήσωμεν in the same way, for he assigns the words οὐδὲν ἀποκωλύει to Glauco. We are hardly justified in making θεωρήσωμεν the subjunctive after βούλεσθε, in the absence of other examples in which the subjunctive follows a dependent βούλει ( βούλεσθε). A possible view would be to take θεωρήσωμεν as=δεῖ θεωρῆσαι and construe ‘but if you wish it and we are to contemplate’ etc., cf. Crat. 425 D εἰ μὴ ἄρα δἠ (MSS δεῖ)—καὶ ἡμεῖς— ἀπαλλαγῶμεν (‘unless we too are to get quit’), and Postgate in Transactions of the Camb. Philol. Soc. III Pt. I pp. 50—55. But Richards' proposal is a better one.

ταῦτα ‐‐ τισιν . γάρ is introductory and means not ‘for’ but ‘well.’ τισιν contains a sly allusion to Glauco: cf. V 465 E, VI 504 C.

καὶ ὄψα δή . For δή see 367 C note

ἑταῖραι . G. W. Nitzsch (Rhein. Mus. 1857, pp. 471 f.), Richter (Fl. Jahrb. 1867, p. 141), Madvig, and Stallbaum take offence at the juxtaposition of ἑταῖραι and πέμματα and suggest respectively ἀθῆραι (apparently an error for ἀθάραι, cf. Ar. Plut. 673), ἐραῖα (=ἑψήματα in Schol. on 445 C), ἐσχαρῖται ‘panes delicati,’ and ἕτερα (with the following καί deleted),—conjectures which are altogether needless and refute one another. The text is successfully defended by Hug (Hermes 1876, p. 254), who cites an exact parallel in Ar. Ach. 1090 —1092 κλῖναι, τράπεζαι, προσκεφάλαια, στρώματα, | στέφανοι, μύρον, τραγήμαθ’ , αἱ πόρναι πάρα, | ἄμυλοι πλακοῦντες, σησαμοῦντες, ἴτρια | (varieties of πέμματα). Cf. also Amphis ap. Ath. XIV 642 A οἶνος ἡδύς, ᾠά, σησαμαῖ, | μύρον, στέφανος, αὐλητρίς and infra III 404 D, IX 573 D note From these passages it may fairly be doubted whether Plato's mention of ἑταῖραι is in any way even παρὰ προσδοκίαν (as the Oxford editors suggest): for αὐλητρίδες were almost as common a feature at dessert as the cakes ( πέμματα) etc. which accompany them here: see e.g. Xen. Mem. I 5. 4 , Symp. 2. 1, Pl. Symp. 176 E, Prot. 347 D. Vahlen (Index Lect. per sem. hib. 1875—6 Berol.) quotes also Catullus' cenabis bene si tecum attuleris bonam atque magnam cenam non sine candida puella et vino et sale et omnibus cachinnis (13. 1 ff.).

καὶ τὴν ποικιλίαν . ποικιλία means variety of colour as e.g. in embroidery: cf. 378 C, III 401 A, Euthyph. 6 C. On the omission in A see Introd. § 5.

χρυσὸν καὶ ἐλέφαντα : with reference to chryselephantine statuary. Note that (according to Plato) the demand for decorative arts does not arise till the physical necessities of man are satisfied. Cf. Nettleship Lectures and Remains, II p. 73.

μείζονά τε αὖ τήν . τέ is ἀνακόλουθον (Hoefer de part. Pl. p. 14): for other instances in the Republic see V 463 D, VII 522 B, IX 575 A. In this passage Richter would change τε αὖ τήν into τοιαύτην, comparing 372 E; but the text is sound, and τοιαύτην would be quite wrong. αὐτὴν τὴν πόλιν (cf. 370 E), conjectured by Heller instead of αὖ τὴν πόλιν, is neat but needless.

πλήθους ἅ : i.e. πλήθους τούτων ἅ, as Ficinus understood the words. Stallbaum's alternative suggestion (that ἅ refers directly to ὄγκου and πλήθους) gives a poor sense. Cf. infra 373 E note

θηρευταὶ πάντες . The addition of πάντες shews that θηρευταί is used in a wide sense, including every variety of fishing as well as hunting: Laws 823 B θήρα γὰρ πάμπολύ τι πρᾶγμά ἐστί, περιειλημμένον ὀνόματι νῦν σχεδὸν ἑνί. πολλὴ μὲν γὰρ ἡ τῶν ἐνύδρων, πολλὴ δὲ ἡ τῶν πτηνῶν, πάμπολυ δὲ καὶ τὸ περὶ τὰ πεζὰ θηρεύματα. In Euthyd. 290 B—D, Soph. 219 E ff., and Laws (l.c.), Plato makes θηρευτική include ‘fishing for men’ e.g. in war, or by Sophists etc. This wider meaning clearly rests upon a Platonic—or rather Socratic (see Xen. Mem. II 6. 29, quoted by J. and C.)—metaphor, and is not intended here. Cf. Benseler in Fl. Jahrb. 1881, pp. 236 ff. Aristotle on the other hand regards hunting as characteristic of the most primitive society ( Pol. A 8. 1256^{a} 35 ff.), and so too Plato himself in Laws 679 A.

ῥαψῳδοί ‐‐ ἐργολάβοι are the poet's servants. In Athens and elsewhere they formed regular guilds or σύνοδοι τῶν περὶ τὸν Διόνυσον τεχνιτῶν: cf. Arist. Probl. XXX 10. 956^{b} 11 οἱ Διονυσιακοὶ τεχνῖται. The ἐργολάβος contracted with the poet for the performance of his play, acting as a kind of financial agent or middleman between him and the σύνοδος to which he belonged. See Müller Bühnenalterthümer, pp. 392—414.

παιδαγωγῶν ‐‐ κουρέων . We infer that in the ‘healthy’ State fathers were παιδαγωγοί, mothers suckled (τιτθῶν) and nursed (τροφῶν) their own children, and the professional hair-dresser was unknown.

συβωτῶν . See on 372 B.

χρείαις . Cobet's χρείᾳ is not, I think, necessary. The plural (for which cf. 369 D al.) refers to the different occasions when we may require the help of doctors.

373D - 376C In consequence of the increase of population we shall require more land. We must accordingly appropriate some of our neighbours' territory, just as under similar conditions they will lay hands upon ours. Herein we have the genesis of War. The duties of War— according to our principle of the subdivision of labour—will involve us in a standing army of professional soldiers or ‘Guardians.’ Now as War demands not only concentration and application, but also a certain natural aptitude, our Guardians must be qualified by Nature for their duties: that is to say, like generous dogs, they must be quick to perceive, swift to pursue, and strong in actual fight. They should also be brave and spirited, but gentle to their fellow-citizens and one another. The union of gentieness with spirit in the same nature is rare, but not unknown among men, any more than it is among dogs. Our Guardians must in fact be ‘philosophic’ ( φιλόσοφοι), like the dog, who is a true philosopher when he defines friend and foe respectively by knowledge and by ignorance, hating the unknown, and welcoming the known. In brief, we shall require a guardian to be naturally philosophic, spirited, swift, and strong.

λέγομεν . λέγωμεν may be right, but the first hand of A was apt to err in these subjunctive forms ( Introd. § 5), and the Indicative is somewhat more natural here: cf. (with Schneider) 377 E ἀλλὰ πῶς δὴ λέγομεν καὶ ποῖα;

πολεμήσομεν . Stallbaum adds δή after πολεμήσομεν with some inferior MSS. The effect of its omission is to lay special stress on the first mention of πόλεμος in πολεμήσομεν, which should be pronounced with emphasis. Cf. IV 432 C, IX 583 C.

πολέμου ‐‐ γένεσιν . War then arises from the acquisition of territory and wealth: cf. Phaed. 66 C διὰ γὰρ τὴν τῶν χρημάτων κτῆσιν πάντες οἱ πόλεμοι ἡμῖν γίγνονται, where war is farther traced to the body and its desires, to satisfy which we seek to multiply our possessions. Cf. Arist. Pol. A 8. 1256^{b} 23 ἡ πολεμικὴ φύσει κτητική πως ἔσται.

ἐξ ὧν ‐‐ γίγνηται defines γένεσιν. War comes ἐξ ὧν i.e. ἐκ τούτων ὧν κτλ. (ὧν for ἐξ ὧν, according to the usual Greek idiom, cf. Euthyph. 10 C, and III 402 A ἐν ἅπασιν οἷς ἔστι al.), from that which involves both cities and individuals in calamities, viz. from the desire of money. Cf. 373 B note and (for the sentiment Laws 870 A ff. ἡ τῶν χρημάτων τῆς ἀπλήστου καὶ ἀπείρου κτήσεως ἔρωτας μυρίους ἐντίκτουσα δύναμις διὰ φύσιν τε καὶ ἀπαιδευσίαν τὴν κακὴν κτλ. The love of money —so Plato held—is the root of all evil. This explanation is due to Schleiermacher; others (Schneider, Stallbaum, J. and C. as an alternative) refer ἐξ ὧν to war and the like=‘ex cuiusmodi rebus’ (Stallbaum). It is an objection to such a view that it makes Plato say that evils come from War (and the like), directly after he has declined to say anything of the sort (μηδέν γέ πω — ἐργάζεται). Further, if ὧν referred to war, the sentiment would in itself be a platitude and almost deserve to be expunged from the text, as it is by Herwerden. On the other hand ἐξ ὧν—γίγνηται is on Schleiermacher's view quite consistent with μηδέν γέ πω— <*>ργάζεται, for although war arises from that which harms a State, in itself it may (and does) actually do good. Good in other words may come out of evil; which is exactly the principle on which Plato evolves his ideal city out of the τρυφῶσα πόλις. ὅταν γίγνηται (sc. κακά) is equivalent (as J. and C. remark) to ἑκάστοτε: cf. Phaed. 68 D φόβῳ μειζόνων κακῶν ὑπομένουσιν αὐτῶν οἱ ἀνδρεῖοι τὸν θάνατον <*>ταν ὑπομένωσιν.

ὅλῳ . Herwerden's conjecture μεγάλῳ seems to shew that he connected σμικρῷ with στρατοπέδῳ, but the meaning is ‘not by a small amount, but by a whole army.’ For the datives cf. IX 579 C note

αὐτοὶ οὐχ ἱκανοί ; Glauco speaks as an Athenian citizen-soldier. In making war a profession, and citizens synonymous with soldiers, Plato is laconizing. The language which Isocrates (Archid. 81) applies to Sparta might in point of fact be used of Plato's State: τῶν Ἑλλήνων διενηνόχαμεν οὐ τῷ μεγέθε<*> τῆς πόλεως, οὐδὲ τῷ πλήθει τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ) ὅτι τὴν πολιτείαν ὁμοίαν κατεστησάμεθα στρατοπέδῳ καλῶς διοικουμένῳ καὶ πειθαρχεῖν <*>θέλοντι τοῖς ἄρχουσιν. Cf. Grote Plato III pp. 176, 209.

ὡμολογοῦμεν : without εἶναι as in X 610 C ἀθανάτους τὰς ψυχὰς ὁμολογεῖν, and Soph. 246 E. The analogy of these cases shews that ἀδύνατον here is not neuter but masculine, agreeing with ἕνα. The reference is to 370 B.

ἀλλ’ ἄρα . As διεκωλύομεν is certainly interrogative, Ast conjectured ἆρα for ἄρα, but ἄρα (nimirum) is regularly present in a fortiori arguments of this kind, either in the δέ clause ( Ap. 34 C, 37 C, D, Crito 46 D) or in both (Crito 50 E, Prot. 325 B, C). In place of the second ἄρα is here written δὴ (τὰ δὲ δὴ περὶ τὸν πόλεμον κτλ.). For the combination ἀλλ’ ἄρα cf. Soph. 243 E ἀλλ) ἄρα τὰ ἄμφω βούλεσθε καλεῖν ὄν; Ἴσως.

ἀλλὰ σκυτοτόμον . See cr. n. and Introd. § 5. The homoioteleuton as well as the presence of the clause ἵνα—γίγνοιτο is in favour of the genuineness of these words: and the construction itself, which requires ἐκελεύομεν or the like to be supplied out of διεκωλύομεν (see Heindorf on Gorg. 457 C and Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 1072), is too idiomatic to have been readily invented by a scribe.

ἐφ’ ᾧ : with σχολὴν ἄγων (Schneider): cf. Ap. 36 D. The phraseology here recalls 370 B and C.

ἢ οὕτω ῥᾴδιον : singular in spite of the plural τὰ περί. Cf. (with Schneider) Hipp. Maior 299 A, Laws 708 D.

τε καὶ ὀργάνων is ejected by Herwerden, who is also inclined to denounce τὰ ὄργανα below. But it is just these words which “point the analogy: the weapons of the warrior are his tools.” (J. and C.) On similarly inadequate grounds τῶν νέων has been condemned in Euthyph. 3 A τοὺς τῶν νέων τὰς βλάστας διαφθείροντας: see my note ad loc. τινος ἄλλης μάχης below refers for example to ψιλοί or πελτασταί; the ἀσπίς (it should be remembered) was worn by the ὁπλίτης (whence ἀσπίδα μὲν λαβὼν—ὁπλιτικῆς). The necessity of special knowledge and training for success in war is insisted on by the historical Socrates in Xen. Mem. III 1.

φυλάκων . This is the first occurrence of φύλακες in the technical sense which it bears throughout the Republic. It is important to remember that the name includes not only the soldiers, but also—after they have been introduced— the rulers; when it becomes necessary to distinguish between the two classes, the former are called ἐπίκουροι (first named in III 414 B), the latter φύλακες παντελεῖς (III 414 B), τέλεοι φύλακες (IV 428 D) or the like, or more commonly ἄρχοντες (first alluded to in III 389 B, but not expressly separated off until 412 B ff., and finally and fully described only in Books VI and VII).

ὅσον γ’ ἂν δύναμις παρείκῃ . The phrase is not found elsewhere in Plato, although παρείκει is found with a personal subject (ὁ θεός, θεοί) again in Theaet. 150 D, Laws 934 C. Herwerden would eject δύναμις (cf. Symp. 187 E καθ’ ὅσον παρείκει), but such a word is very unlikely to have been interpolated. δύναμις is simply ‘our powers’: the article is omitted as in the idiomatic κατὰ δύναμιν, εἰς δύναμιν.

σκύλακος . A play on σκύλαξ and φύλαξ is intended. Analogies from the animal kingdom were freely employed by the historical Socrates: for the dog in particular cf. Xen. Mem. IV 1. 3 καὶ τῶν κυνῶν τῶν εὐφυεστάτων, φιλοπόνων τε οὐσῶν καὶ ἐπιθετικῶν τοῖς θηρίοις, τὰς μὲν καλῶς ἀχθείσας ἀρίστας γίγνεσθαι—, ἀναγώγους δὲ γιγνομένας μᾳταίους τε καὶ μανιώδεις καὶ δυσπειθεστάτας. Cf. note on φύεται 370 A.

αἰσθανόμενον : ‘the moment he perceives.’ The present (where one might expect the aorist) emphasizes the rapidity with which pursuit follows upon sight.

ἀνδρεῖος . For ἀνδρεῖος applied to beasts cf. Isocr. 15. 211 εἰ περὶ τοὺς ἵππους καὶ τοὺς κύνας καὶ τὰ πλεῖστα τῶν ζῴων ὁρῶντες τέχνας ἔχοντάς τινας, αἷς τὰ μὲν ἀνδρειότερα, τὰ δὲ πραότερα, τὰ δὲ φρονιμώτερα ποιοῦσι, περὶ τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων φύσιν μηδεμίαν οἴονται τοιαύτην ηὑρῆσθαι παιδείαν κτλ. See also Lach. 196 D— 197 B and Arist. Eth. Nic. III 11. 1116^{b} 33 ff.

θυμοειδής . The technical term θυμοειδής is here for the first time used in the Republic. Plato probably inherited the word from Socrates (see Xen. Mem. IV 1. 3 τῶν τε ἵππων τοὺς εὐφυεστάτους, θυμοειδεῖς τε καὶ σφοδροὺς ὄντας κτλ.): in practice he employs it as the adjective corresponding to θυμός (see e.g. III 411 A, B), as ἐπιθυμητικός corresponds to ἐπιθυμία. The usual translation ‘spirited’ probably expresses the meaning as nearly as can be done by a single word. For a full discussion of the word reference may be made to P. Meyer ὁ θυμὸς ap. Arist. Platonemque (1876), whose conclusion (p. 65) is “τὸν θυμὸν esse eam naturalem vim, qua ductus suam quisque propriam naturam explere studeat, quaque incitatus, quaecunque hanc naturam ipsi propriam tollere vel laedere conentur, fugiat, quae contra perfectiorem reddere possint, adpetat.” See also on IV 439 E.

ἄμαχόν ‐‐ ἀνίκητον . Ast may be right in supposing that Plato has in view the words of Heraclitus, often referred to in antiquity, θυμῷ μάχεσθαι χαλεπόν· ὅ τι γὰρ ἂν χρηίζῃ γίνεσθαι, ψυχῆς ὠνέεται ( Fr. 105 Bywater).

οὗ παρόντος ‐‐ ἀήττητος . Cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. III 11. 1116^{b} 26 ἰτητικὠτατον γὰρ ὁ θυμὸς πρὸς τοὺς κινδύνους.

ἐναντία γὰρ ‐‐ φύσις . Plato regarded this opposition as the fundamental antithesis of human character, and thought it a statesman's foremost duty to blend the θυμοειδές and πρᾶον harmoniously together: see Pol. 306 C— 311 C, infra III 410 B ff., VI 503 C, Theaet. 144 A, B.

ταῦτα ‐‐ ἔοικεν . Van Heusde (Initia Phil. Plat. p. 471 note 1) somewhat hastily declares these words to be corrupt, and supplies ἀμφότερα ἔχειν after ταῦτα δέ. ταῦτα refers like τούτων simply to the two qualities πρᾶον and μεγαλόθυμον: ‘these’—meaning the combination of these as opposed to one of them—‘are apparently unattainable’: cf. VI 499 D οὐ γὰρ ἀδύνατος γενέσθαι, οὐδ’ ἡμεῖς ἀδύνατα λέγομεν.

ἐνοήσαμεν ‐‐ φύσεις . ἐνενοήσαμεν (with q) is read by most of the editors, quite unnecessarily, as Schneider shews. νοεῖν is not ‘putare,’ nor— I think—‘perpendere,’ but simply ‘animadvertere,’ ‘notice,’ as often. Such a meaning is peculiarly appropriate with ἴδοι following. Presently ἄρα is not ‘then’ (J. and C.), but ‘after all.’

τῷ φύλακι : not τῷ σκύλακι, as Groen van Prinsterer conjectured (Plat. Prosop. p. 209). τῷ φύλακι of course depends on παρεβάλλομεν, and ἐν ᾧ is for ἐν τούτῳ ὃ.

αὐτῶν τὸ ἦθος . With αὐτῶν (unnecessary, but welcome, after τῶν γενναίων κυνῶν) cf. IV 428 A note

πρὸς μὲν ‐‐ τοὐναντίον . In Od. XVI 4—10 the dogs of Eumaeus do not bark at Telemachus, and Odysseus remarks (8, 9) Εὔμαἰ, ἦ μάλα τίς τοι ἐλεύσεται ἐνθάδ’ ἑταῖρος | ἢ καὶ γνώριμος ἄλλος, ἐπεὶ κύνες οὐχ ὑλάουσιν | ἀλλὰ περισσαίνουσι. See also Od. XIV 30, where they bark at the stranger Odysseus, and cf. Heracl. 115 (Bywater) κύνες καὶ βαύζουσι ὃν ἂν μὴ γινώσκωσι. In Aristotle similar characteristics are attributed to the lion: see Physiogn. 5. 809^{b} 34—36 μεγαλόψυχον καὶ φιλόνικον, καὶ πραΰ καὶ δίκαιον καὶ φιλόστοργον πρὸς ἃ ἂν ὁμιλήσῃ, and Hist. An. IX 44. 629^{b} 10—12.

πρὸς τῷ θυμοειδεῖ κτλ. There seems to be no other example in good Greek of προσγενέσθαι meaning ‘to become in addition’: but we may compare προσέσονται II 373 A, προσέχειν VII 521 D, προσείπωμεν X 607 B, and similar instances with other verbs. I formerly wrote φιλόσοφον for φιλόσοφος (‘that to the element of spirit nature should have added’— προσγενέσθαι, i.q. accessisse, cf. I 346 D —‘a philosophical temperament’). The accusative with infinitive has however a harsh effect. Herwerden cuts the knot by deleting the προς‐ of προσγενέσθαι.

ὅτι ‐‐ προπεπονθώς . Schneider justly observes that ὅτι is not likely to be an interpolation, and might easily have disappeared before ὅν, as it has in A (see cr. n.). In itself the presence of ὅτι is an improvement. For οὐδὲν δή v (supported also by Stobaeus Flor. 43. 149) reads οὐδέν, which may be right. Cobet's οὐδὲ ἕν is too emphatic.

οὐ πάνυ ‐‐ τὸν νοῦν : ‘I have hardly thought of the matter till now.’ μέχρι δεῦρο is more idiomatic than μέχρι τούτου in this sense, but Xen. Cyr. VIII 8. 9 and Dem. de Cor. 48 are closely analogous instances. The alternative rendering ‘my observation has hardly extended so far’ is (in view of οὔπ ω τοῦτο ἐθαύμασας;) less suitable.

ὡς ἀληθῶς φιλόσοφον . ὡς ἀληθῶς indicates that φιλόσοφον is to be taken in its etymological sense: cf. I 343 C note The dog shews ‘a love of knowledge’ because he loves the known, and hates the unknown. Brandt (Zur Entwick. d. Pl. Lehr. v. d. Seelentheilen p. 10) ingeniously takes φιλόσοφον as=σοφὀν τοὺς φίλους: but the other interpretation is more natural and relevant. There is perhaps an allusion to the Cynics: see Schol. in Arist. ed. Brandis (Berlin 1836) 23^{b} 16 ff. τετάρτη δὲ (SC. αἰτία τοῦ κληθῆναι Κυνικοὺς) ὅτι διακριτικὸν ζᾧον ὁ κύων γνώσει καὶ ἀγνοίᾳ τὸν φίλον καὶ τὸν ἀλλότριον ὁρίζον· ὃν γὰρ γιγνώσκει, νομίζει φίλον εἶναι καὶ εἰ ῥόπαλον ἐπιφέροιτο, ὃν δὲ ἀγνοεῖ ἐχθρόν, καὶ εἰ δέλεαρ ἐπιφερόμενος εἴη. οὕτως οὗν καὶ οὗτοι τοὺς μὲν ἐπιτηδείους πρὸς φιλοσοφίαν φίλους ἐνόμιζον καὶ εὐμενεῖς ἐδέχοντο, τοὺς δὲ ἀνεπιτηδείους ἀπήλαυνον δίκην κυνῶν κατ’ αὐτῶν ὑλακτοῦντες, and Philoponus ib. 35^{a} 5—12. The Cynics were themselves very fond of pointing the moral from the lower animals to man (Dümmler Proleg. p. 58 note 2), and Plato here paints them not unkindly in colours of their own. It should be noted that throughout II—IV Plato uses φιλόσοφος and φιλοσοφία with less of an intellectual than of a moral connotation. In the earlier books the word is for the most part connected with a gentle considerate disposition or character, whether naturally implanted or the result of culture (cf III 410 E, 411 C, 411 E): in 407 C the sense is somewhat different. See Nettleship in Hellenica pp. 77—79, and Krohn Pl. St. p. 71. It is not until the latter part of Book V (473 B ff.) where Plato is proposing to enter on the third and final stage of his ideal city, viz. the κατάστασις τῶν ἀρχόντων, that the intellectual aspect of the word begins to predominate over the moral. Cf. IV 439 D note

φύσει is better taken with φιλόσοφον than with πρᾶος. Cf. 375 B.

ἆρά τι προὔργου κτλ. See on 368 E.

ἵνα μὴ ‐‐ διεξίωμεν . See cr. n. The omission in the text of A may be accidental (see Introd. § 5), but the sentence is certainly a difficult one. If the MSS are right, the meaning must be “For we do not want to be tedious,”— but συχνός is rather ‘lengthy’—“and we do not want to leave unsaid what is required for completeness” (J. and C., comparing for συχνός Theaet. 185 E, Phil. 23 B al.). The conjectures of Teuffel (Rhein. Mus. 1850 p. 469) and Herwerden ( Mnem. N. S. XI p. 339)— ἵνα ἢ (so q) ἐῶμεν συχνὸν (so v) λόγον ἢ ἱκανὸν (so v) διεξίωμεν and ἵνα μὴ ἢ ἐῶμεν συχνὸν λόγον ἢ οὐχ ἱκανὸν διεξίωμεν— improve the antithesis, but are much too violent. It is safest to retain the MS reading until a thoroughly satisfactory emendation appears. Dr Jackson suggests ἵνα μὴ ἐῶμεν ἱκανὸν λόγον ἢ οὐχ ἱκανὸν διεξίωμεν.

376C - 378E Let us next consider how to educate our future Guardians: the enquiry may help us to discover the origin of Justice and Injustice.

We may accept the traditional view that Education consists in ‘Music,’ or culture of the soul, and Gymnastic, or culture of the body. ‘Music’ must be begun before Gymnastic. Now ‘Music ’ includes literature ( λόγοι), and literature is either true or false (μῦθοι). We shall educate our children by false literature before we teach them true; but we shall eschew all legends that inculcate views inconsistent with those which we desire our Guardians to entertain when they are men. Makers of legend or fable must be submitted to a censorship, and most of our present legends rejected. Caricatures of the gods, like the stories about Cronus and Uranus, Zeus and Cronus, are not only false in themselves, but ought not, even if they were true, to be told to children, lest they breed inhumanity and filial impiety; nor should children be persuaded by Poetry or other imitative arts to believe that the gods quarrel and fight among themselves. No plea of a ‘deeper meaning’ (ὑπόνοια ) can justify the telling of such tales to children; for children cannot distinguish the spirit from the letter, and impressions made thus early are difficult to efface.

ff. τίς οὖν ἡ παιδεία; κτλ. The educational scheme contained in Books II and III contributes to the purgation of the τρυφῶσα πόλις, and thereby helps to complete Plato's second picture of an ideal city: see on 372 D ff. For the correct understanding of these regulations it is well to bear in mind (1) that Plato's object in this preliminary discipline is to train the character rather than the intellect (cf. IV 430 C note), and (2) that all the guardians have to pass through this curriculum. The higher scheme of education (in Book VII), on the other hand, is confined to those guardians who are to be made Rulers in the State, and its express aim is to educate the intellect rather than the will. See especially VI 502 E, VII 521 D—522 A notes The best discussion on Plato's theory of education in its broader aspects is still, I think, Nettleship's Essay in Hellenica pp. 67—180. Platon's Erziehungstheorie n. s. Schrift. dargestellt von Dr A. Drygas Schneidemühl 1880 is a useful summary. For Plato's criticism of poetry, we may refer in particular to Heine's excellent dissertation De rat. quae Platoni c. poet. Gr. intercedit etc. Vratislaviae 1880, and to Reber's Plato und die Poesie Leipzig, 1864.

ἔστιν δέ που — μουσική . The usual Greek view (see for example Isocr. 15. 180—185), corrected by Plato in III 410 C ff.

εἶπον . Richter (Fl. Jahrb. 1867 p. 141) revives Muretus' conjecture εἶδος: but εἶπον is alone satisfactory. The confusion of ο and ω occurs in Inscriptions from the third century B.C. onwards (Meisterhans^{3} p. 24 note 128). See also Introd. § 5.

λόγων δὲ ‐‐ ἕτερον . The word ‘lies’ is here used by Plato in its popular sense of that which is false in fact: his own definition of the ‘veritable lie’ is different: see 382 B note ‘Lies’ are necessary—so Plato holds—in education: only they must be moral lies. Under ‘lies’ he includes stories ( μῦθοι) about the gods, about the daemons and heroes long since dead, about a future life—all of them subjects where the alleged facts cannot be verified. The ἀληθεῖς λόγοι are concerned with men, and are passed over by Plato, because he could not state his view without anticipating the conclusion which the Republic is intended to prove (see III 392 A—C). This point is missed by Krohn (Pl. St. p. 12).

ἀληθῆ : i.e. truths of fact or history, not yet with reference to moral truth, for nothing has been said to change the connotation of ψευδής or its opposite ἀληθής. In Plato's view legend contains some elements of historical truth.

ἀρχὴ ‐‐ μέγιστον : semi - proverbial, with reference to ἀρχὴ ἥμισυ παντός: cf. Laws 753 E, and (for the application of the sentiment) ib. 765 E.

μάλιστα ‐‐ τύπον . See cr. n. To τύπος there are two objections: (1) the subject of πλάττεται and ἐνδύεται should be the same; but the subject of πλάττεται is not τύπος, but the νέῳ καὶ ἁπαλῷ ὁτῳοῦν, cf. πλάττειν τὰς ψυχὰς in C below: (2) it is more natural and correct to say that an object which ‘is being moulded’ ‘puts on’ a τύπος, than to say that the τύπος sinks into it. Reading τύπον we obtain the proper contrast between ἐνδύεται and ἐνσημήνασθαι: the youth puts on whatever impression or type the educator desires to stamp him with. The metaphor becomes more explicit in Plutarch De lib. educ. 3 F καθάπερ γὰρ σφραγῖδες τοῖς ἁπαλοῖς ἐναπομάττονται κηροῖς, οὕτως αἱ μαθήσεις ταῖς τῶν ἔτι παιδίων ψυχαῖς ἐναποτυποῦνται. Cf. also Theaet. 191 D and Hor. Epp. II 2. 8 argilla quidvis imitaberis uda.

ῥᾳδίως οὕτω : ‘carelessly, without more ado’: cf. 378 A and I 331 C. This idiomatic οὕτω is common with adverbs like ῥᾳδίως, εἰκῇ, ἁπλῶς, νῦν, ἐξαίφνης: for examples see Blaydes on Ar. Wasps 461 .

καλὸν : sc. μῦθον, which some MSS (including II) insert. For μῦθον understood from μυθοποιοῖς cf. III 399 D, where τοῦτο i.e. αὐλός is understood from αὐλοποιούς, 410 A, where αὐτοί (i.e. ἰατροί) follows ἰατρική, IV 421 E, and (with Schneider) Laws 886 C θεογονίαν διεξέρχονται, γενόμενοί τε (sc. οἱ θεοὶ) ὡς πρὸς ἀλλήλους ὡμίλησαν.

πλάττειν κτλ. Mothers and nurses practised massage on the bodies of infants: cf. Laws 789 E τιθέντες νόμους τὴν μὲν κύουσαν περιπατεῖν, τὸ γενόμενον δὲ πλάττειν τε οἷον κήρινον ἕως ὑγρόν, καὶ μέχρι δυοῖν ἐτοῖν σπαργανᾶν, and Alc. I 121 D. A trace of massage practised for medical purposes appears in Zeno Fr. 180 (ed. Pearson).

ἐλεγέτην . The dual links together Homer and Hesiod as jointly responsible for Greek theology: see on 363 A. Among the first to rebel against their authority were Pythagoras, Xenophanes, and Heraclitus (D. L. VIII 21, IX 18, IX I). Xenophanes' protest was particularly famous in antiquity: see Sext. Emp. adv. Math. I 289 and IX 193 ap. Ritter and Preller Hist. Philos. Gr.^{7} pp. 76, 77. Plato's attack on the Olympian theology in this and the succeeding book was perhaps the severest blow that Paganism received before the Christian era, and pointed the way for those exaggerated diatribes against the heathen gods in which it afterwards became the fashion of early Christian apologists to indulge, beginning with the Apology of Aristides (cc. 8—11). Cf. X 607 B note

ὅπερ ‐‐ ψεύδηται . ὅπερ is τὸ εἰκάζειν κακῶς περἰ θεῶν etc. A distinction is drawn between mere lies and the lie which is in itself οὐ καλόν, unbeautiful and immoral in tendency, e.g. the story of Uranus and Cronus (ὁ εἰπὼν οὐ καλῶς ἐψεύσατο in E below). Such legends not merely misrepresent the gods, but also corrupt mankind.

ε<*>κάζη . It is taken for granted that Poetry is a species of imitation: cf. Laws 668 A—C.

τῶν μεγίστων : masculine, not neuter: cf. 378 B.

Ἡσίοδος . Theog. 154—181.

τὰ δὲ δὴ κτλ . δή emphasizes the case of Cronus as the most important (cf. Prot. 311 D, 312 E): it is so because the delinquent is Zeus, the reigning king of gods and men. The example set by Zeus on this occasion was no doubt sometimes used to justify wrong-doing: see for example Aesch. Eum. 640, 641, Ar. Clouds 904—906 πῶς δῆτα δίκης οὔσης ὁ Ζεὺς | οὐκ ἀπόλωλεν τὸν πατέρ’ αὑτοῦ | δήσας ; ib. 1079 ff., Eur. H. F. 1317— 1319, and especially Pl. Euthyph. 5 E— 6 A, where Euthyphro urges the analogy in all seriousness to justify his vexatious prosecution of his own father. The pernicious effect of such legends on human conduct is again pointed out in Laws 886 C, 941 B: cf. also Isocr. Bus. 38—43, Luc. Men. 3, and Grote Plato III p. 194 note

ῥᾳδίως οὕτω : 377 B note

θυσαμένους ‐‐ ἀκοῦσαι . ἀπορρήτων suggests the mysteries, whence the allusion to the ‘mystic pig’ ( Ar. Ach. 764). For ἄπορον, ‘unprocurable’ (Jowett), ἄπνρον has been suggested, absurdly enough. ἄπορον is further explained by ὅπως— ἀκοῦσαι. It should be noted that ὅπως with a past tense of the indicative in clauses of this kind is rare in Plato: it occurs again only in Laws 830 B, 959 C (where ἄν should be expunged). Cf. Weber in Schanz's Beiträge zur hist. Synt. d. Gr. Sprache II 2, p. 64.

οὐδ’ αὖ has been needlessly doubted by Richter (Fl. Jahrb. 1867 p. 142), who suggests οὐδέν. The words ἀδικῶν—ποιοῖ correspond to the conduct of Uranus and Cronus towards their children: οὐδ’ αὖ—τρόπῳ to Cronus' treatment of Uranus, and Zeus' of Cronus. Cf Euthyph. 5 E—6 A. The Euthyphro presents so many parallels to § 378 that some have—erroneously, no doubt—supposed it to be a spurious elaboration of that section: see my edition of the dialogue p. xxix.

πολλοῦ δεῖ ‐‐ ποικιλτέον . πολλοῦ δεῖ is not adverbial (like ἥκιστα), as J. and C assert: otherwise δεῖ would be δεῖν (so Herwerden would read Mnem. N. S. XI p. 339). The asyndeton is justified by emphasis and the ampliative character of the sentence. The verbals are best explained (with Stallbaum) by supposing an ellipse of εἶναι: cf. Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. p. 33.

ποικιλτέον . ποικίλλειν is used of depicting in a variety of colours (VIII 557 C), not necessarily by embroidery. Cf. 373 A note There is probably a special reference here to the πέπλος. At the greater, if not also at the lesser, Panathenaic festival, a robe woven by Athenian maidens and representing the triumph of Athena and the Olympians over the giants, together with other celestial fights, was carried in procession to the Acropolis, and presented to the statue of the goddess in the Erechtheum: cf. Euthyph. 6 B, C and Mommsen Feste d. Stadt Athen pp. 107 ff. The subject was depicted on the Parthenon frieze: see Baumeister Denkm. d. kl. Alterth. II p. 1185. The allusion to the ceremony is the more appropriate in this connexion, if, as appears to be probable, the action of the dialogue takes place just before the great Panathenaea of 410 B.C. See Introd. § 3.

ὡς οὐδεὶς κτλ. Plato desires to obtain a religious sanction for his institutions, as in the myth III 414 B ff. The best δημηγόρος, according to Socrates, is ὁ στάσεις τε παύων καὶ ὁμόνοιαν ἐμποιῶν (Xen. Mem. IV 6. 14): and the Platonic State may from this point of view be regarded as “an attempt to determine the ways and means of securing political ὁμόνοια” (Krohn Pl. St. p. 369).

λεκτέα —see cr. n.—cannot be dispensed with. Madvig's suggestion, that μᾶλλον is corrupt for φατέον or ᾀστέον or the like, and Liebhold's μελητέον for μᾶλλον, are much less probable than the accidental omission of λεκτέα in A. See Introd. § 5. Vermehren (Pl. Stud. p. 92), rejecting λεκτέα, would carry on μυθολογητέον or the like; but this solution is much too difficult.

καὶ πρεσβυτέροις γιγνομένοις . The dative goes with λογοποιεῖν (‘to make tales for them as they grow older’), and καί before τοὺς ποιητάς means etiam. This explanation was proposed by Richter (Fl. Jahrb. 1867 p. 138) and Vermehren (l. c. p. 91), and is probably right. Cf. Ar. Frogs 1054 f. Others connect the words with καὶ γέρουσι καὶ γραυσί: old men, old women, and the boys themselves as they grow older, must tell such stories πρὸς τὰ παιδία εὐθύς. But it is difficult to understand τοῖς παιδίοις with γιγνομένοις unless πρεσβυτέροις γιγνομένοις is construed with λογοποιεῖν.

ὑέος . Hephaestus. Διός is a false reading derived from a mistaken reference to Il. XV 18 ff. The story (according to Clement ap. Suid. s. vv. Ἥρας δὲ δεσμοὺς ὑπὸ υἱέος) was in Pindar: παρὰ Πινδάρῳ γὰρ ὑπὸ Ἡφαίστου δεσμεύεται ἐν τῷ ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ κατασκευασθέντι θρόνῳ—καί φασι δεθῆναι αὐτὴν ἐπιβουλεύσασαν Ἡρακλεῖ. Cf. Paus. I 20. 3.

Ἡφαίστου ῥίψεις . Il. I 586—594.

θεομαχίας ‐‐ οὐ παραδεκτέον . Homer Il. XX 1—74, XXI 385—513. Cf. Xenophanes Fr. 1. 19—22 (Bergk) and Pind. Ol. IX 43, 44 μή νυν λαλάγει τὰ τοιαῦτ’ · ἔα πόλεμον μάχαν τε πᾶσαν χωρὶς ἀθανάτων.

ἐν ὑπονοίαις : adverbial, like ἐν φαρμάκου εἴδει III 389 B (J. and C.). The allegorical interpretation of Homer probably originated in the desire to save his character for piety and morality: πάντη γὰρ ἠσέβησεν (says Heraclides Alleg. Hom. ad init.), εἰ μηδὲν ἠλληγόρησεν. Before the time of Plato it was practised by Theagenes of Rhegium, Anaxagoras, Metrodorus of Lampsacus, Stesimbrotos of Thasos and others: see Wolf Proleg. ad Homerum pp. 161—166 and Jebb's Homer p. 89. In Plato's day the Cynics were the chief exponents of this school of criticism, especially Antisthenes: examples may be found in Winckelmann's Antisth. Frag. pp. 16, 23—28: cf. also Dümmler Antisthenica pp. 16 ff. Dümmler, many of whose combinations are highly speculative, regards the present passage as directed against Antisthenes, whose rivalry with Plato is well known: but there is nothing to suggest any personal reference. The historical Socrates occasionally played with the same weapons, as appears from Xen. Symp. 3. 6, and Mem. I 3. 7: so also does Plato, but seldom, if ever, without irony, e.g. Rep. 1 332 B ἠνίξατο— ὁ Σιμωνίδης ποιητικῶς: cf. also Theaet. 194 C, Alc. II 147 B—D al. Plato's attacks upon Homer lent a great impetus to this method of exegesis—the only method, as it was thought, by which his animadversions could be met: cf. Schow's Heraclides pp. 223—234.

378E - 380C What then are the moulds in which our legends must be cast? God should always be represented as He really is. Now God is good, and as good cannot be the cause of evil, He is the cause of little to the human race, for evil is far more common in the world than good. This is one of the canons which our poets are to observe; but it is constantly violated by Homer and others. Evil must never be attributed to the gods; or, if it is, it must be represented as a chastening visitation for the sufferer's good.

οἷος τυγχάνει ‐‐ ἐν μέλεσιν . τυγχάνει ὤν=‘really is’: cf. I 337 B note On the omission of ἐάν τε ἐν μέλεσιν in A see Introd. § 5.

ἀλλὰ μὴν κτλ. It is first proved that good is not the cause of evil (ἀλλὰ μὴν—πῶς γάρ;), and next that good is the cause of εὐπραγία (τί δέ;— ναί): the conclusions are then stated in the reverse order. The step by which each conclusion is reached—the identification of ἀγαθόν and ὠφέλιμον—is Socratic (cf. Xen. Mem. IV 6. 8); but it is doubtful if the historical Socrates ever went so far as to deny that God is sometimes the cause of real evil or adversity to man, in spite of his belief in Providence ( Mem. I 4 and IV 3; yet I 4. 16 οἴει δ’ ἂν τοὺς θεοὺς τοῖς ἀνθρώποις δόξαν ἐμφῦσαι, ὡς ἱκανοί εἰσιν εὖ καὶ κακῶς ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ δυνατοὶ ἦσαν;). The moral goodness of the Deity himself was proclaimed before Socrates and Plato by Xenophanes, Pindar, and the dramatists, but the inference, that God, because He is good, is never the cause of evil, is probably due to Plato. Bacchylides expresses a kindred sentiment in Fr. 29 (Bergk) Ζεὺς ὑψιμέδων, δ(\ς ἅπαντα δέρκεται, | οὐκ αἴτιος θνατοῖς μεγάλων ἀχέων. Read in the light of Book VI, the theology of this and the succeeding chapters gains, no doubt, in significance and depth; yet it is illegitimate to argue on this account (as Susemihl does Genet. Entwick. II p. 121) that the existence of the Idea of Good is already presupposed, unless it is shewn that Plato could not have purified his theology except by metaphysics. In point of fact, Plato might have written the end of Book III even if he had never thought of the Ideas at all.

οὐδ) ἄρα ‐‐ πάντων . Contrast Aesch. Ag. 1485, 1486 Διὸς παναιτίου πανεργέτα. | τί γὰρ βροτοῖς ἄνευ Διὸς τελεῖται ; Suppl. 822—824 and many other examples in Nägelsbach Hom. Theol. pp. 26, 51 ff., and Nachhom. Theol. pp. 16, 18, 60 ff., 73 ff.

πολὺ γὰρ ‐‐ ἡμῖν . An old saying, as appears from Pind. Pyth. 3. 81 ff. μανθάνων οἶσθα προτέρων· | ἓν παρ’ ἐσλὸν πήματα σύνδυο δαίονται βροτοῖς | ἀθάνατοι, and Eur. Suppl. 196, 7: cf. also Hom. Il. XXIV 527 ff., Philem. Fr. Inc. 65 (ed. Meineke). Plato and Aristotle make room for it in their philosophies: see e.g. Pol. 273 D, Laws 906 A, and Arist. Probl. X 45. 895^{b} 39 ff. ἡ φύσις φαῦλα μὲν πάντα ποιεῖ, καὶ πλείους καὶ πλείω, σπουδαῖα δ’ ἐλάττω, καὶ οὐ πάντα δύναται. The counterpart in the sphere of morals is Bias's οἱ πολλοὶ κακοί: with which may be compared Rep. IV 428 E, 431 A, 442 A, C, IX 588 D. It is a melancholy cry born of the age of iron: in the golden age—so Plato tells us Pol. 273 C —the balance was the other way.

ἄλλ) ἄττα ‐‐ τὰ αἴτια . The dualism should not be taken too seriously, in spite of the good and evil souls in Laws 896 E. Plato is not now constructing a philosophy, but casting moulds for theology and poetry.

δοιοὶ πίθοι . See Il. XXIV 527—532 δοιοὶ γάρ τε πίθοι κατακείαται ἐν Διὸς οὔδει | δώρων οἷα δίδωσι κακῶν, ἕτερος δὲ ἑαων· | ᾦ μέν κ’ ἀμμίξας δώη Ζεὺς τερπικέραυνος, | ἄλλοτε μέν τε κακῷ ὅ γε κύρεται, ἄλλοτε δ’ ἐσθλῷ· | ᾧ δέ κε τῶν λυγρῶν δώῃ, λωβητὸν ἔθηκεν | καί ἑ κακὴ βούβρωστις ἐπὶ χθόνα δῖαν ἐλαύνει. In our Homer there is apparently only one jar of good to two of evil (see Leaf ad loc. and cf. 379 C note): in Plato there is one of each. So great a difference is not likely to be due to Plato: it is easier to believe that he used a different recension from the Alexandrian. The use of κῆρες unpersonihed was apparently not admitted by the Alexandrian critics. Cf. Wolf Proleg. p. 37, and Howes in Harvard Studies in Cl. Phil. VI p. 204.

ἀγαθῶν ‐‐ τέτυκται is either from a lost line of Homer, or from some other poet (as Schneider inclines to think): note οὔτ’ ἄλλου ποιητοῦ just above. There can hardly be any reference to Il. IV 84 Ζεύς, ὅς τ’ ἀνθρώπων ταμίης πολέμοιο τέτυκται, as Howes imagines (l. c. p. 196). The sentiment is common: cf. e.g. Hes. O. D. 669 and Pind. Isthm. IV 52, 53 Ζεὺς τά τε καὶ τὰ νέμει, Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κύριος.

σπονδῶν σύγχυσιν . Il. IV 69 ff.

θεῶν ἔριν τε καὶ κρίσιν . This is usually explained as referring to the Theomachy (Il. XX 1—74), which was caused by Zeus and Themis in the sense that Zeus sent Themis to summon the gods to the council at which it was sanctioned (v. 4). But (1) Themis' part in causing the Theomachy is very small, (2) the simplest and most natural meaning of κρίσις is not ‘contention,’ but ‘judgment’ or ‘decision,’ and (3) the Theomachy in Homer is not productive of evil to men, but only to the gods themselves: its citation here would therefore be quite irrelevant. W. R. Hardie (in Cl. Rev. IV p. 182) is, I believe, right in supposing that the strife of the goddesses three and Paris' judgment is meant. ἔρις and κρίσις are regularly thus used: e.g. Eur. I. A. 1307 κρίσιν—στυγνὰν ἔριν τε καλλονᾶς; cf. ib. 581, Hel. 708, Troad. 924. Hec. 644 f. Κρίσις was the name of Sophocles' play on the judgment of Paris (Fr. 330). The poem referred to by Plato is the Cypria (so also Wilamowitz Hom. Unters. p. 367 note 46), which traced the war of Troy to the judgment of Paris, and that to Zeus' deliberations with Themis (Ζεὺς βουλεύεται μετὰ τῆς Θέμιδος περὶ τοῦ Τρωικοῦ πολέμου Kinkel Epic. Graec. Fr. p. 17. Θέμιδος is Heyne's emendation for Θέτιδος: but it is scarcely open to doubt: for the marriage of Peleus and Thetis, at which the three goddesses quarrelled, was an episode of the poem, and Thetis could hardly therefore have been privy to the plot. See Kinkel l. c. pp. 20, 22 and Jebb's Homer p. 153). Themis was Zeus' ἀρχαία ἄλοχος (Pind. Fr. 30 Bergk), and still appears as one of the Olympians in Il. XV 87. The Cypria is quoted again by Plato in Euthyph. 12 A. We may fairly suppose that θεῶν ἔρις τε καὶ κρίσις was the heading of one of the introductory episodes in the poem: to this also the omission of the article with ἔριν τε καὶ κρίσιν seems to point. Mr Hardie thinks Plato may have attributed the poem to Homer; but Euthyph. l. c. (ὁ ποιητὴς ὁ ποιήσας) does not favour this view.

θεὸς μὲν ‐‐ θέλῃ : Aesch. Fr. 160. For other examples of this familiar Greek idea see Nägelsbach Hom. Theol. p. 321 and Nachhom. Theol. pp. 54 ff.

ἐν οἷς ‐‐ ἔνεστιν . I have left these words in the text, although they are certainly open to suspicion, and have been condemned by Platt (Cl. Rev. III p. 72). The antecedent to οἷς is apparently τὰ τῆς Νιόβης πάθη: but the play was not called ‘The sufferings of Niobe’ but ‘Niobe,’ and the relative can hardly precede its antecedent in sentences of this kind. If οἷς is referred to ταῦτα understood after ποιῇ, then ἐν is difficult: ‘if any one puts into poetry topics in which these iambics occur’ gives no good sense. Unless Plato is writing very inaccurately, we must pronounce the clause a marginal gloss on τὰ—πάθη .

ὠνίναντο κολαζόμενοι . An earlier generation looked upon punishment as retributory—δράσαντι παθεῖν. This view appears in Hes. Fr. 217, ed. Goettling, and especially in Aeschylus, e.g. Ag. 1563 f., Choeph. 309—314, 400 —404, 886, 927: in Sophocles and Euripides it is rarer (Ant. 1074—1076, El. 1411 f., 1495 f., Andr. 438, Suppl. 614 —616), and Euripides expressly argues against it in Or. 508 ff. Traces of a milder theory were however contained in the doctrine πάθος μάθος (Ag. 176 ff.), as well as in the use of words like σωφρονίζειν, δικαιοῦν, εὐθύνειν, for ‘punish.’ In Plato punishment is remedial. Ignorance or vice is in the soul what disease is in the body (IV 444 C, cf. IX 591 A, B), and the judge is the soul's physician (III 409 E ff., Gorg. 478 D): hence ( Gorg. 480 B ff.) the sinner should go before the judge as a patient visits his doctor, and we should even prosecute our guilty friends and relations. See also Laws 854 D, 862 E, 934 A, 944 D τὸν γὰρ κακὸν ἀεὶ δεῖ κολάζειν, ἵν’ ἀμείνων ᾖ. The punishment, again, which awaits the wicked after death is intended to cure their souls, unless they are incurable: and such as are themselves incurable, help to cure others by their deterrent example (X 616 A): so that in its deepest relations this doctrine reaches to the very roots of Plato's philosophy, with all due deference to Mr W. S. Lilly, who with much intemperance of language denounces those who attribute such a view to Plato (Fortnightly Review N.S. XLVI p. 116).

ἐν τῇ αὑτοῦ πόλει : ‘in one's own city,’ with reference to the subject of διαμαχετέον, not to τινα. Plato implies that the preachers of such theology must be suppressed in his ideal city. In all this Teichmüller (Lit. Fehd. I p. 114) detects an assault upon Isocrates, but his evidence is of the slightest.

μυθολογοῦντα is rejected by Herwerden: Ast suggested μυθολογούμενα. The choice of the participle is determined by λέγειν, which is more important than ἀκούειν: for without saying hearing is impossible. μήτε νεώτερον μήτε πρεσβύτερον belongs both to λέγειν and to ἀκούειν.

νόμων τε καὶ τύπων . All laws are in Plato's view only moulds or outlines, within which our actions should fall. Cf. infra 383 C and especially Pol. 294 A ff.

380D - 383C In the second place, God is changeless, and incapable of deceiving. He is changeless, since He is the best. That which is the best cannot be changed by others, and will not change itself, for it can only change to what is worse. Homer and the other poets err in attributing changefulness to the gods. Neither can God deceive, for while the true or veritable lie, that is to say, ignorance of truth within the soul, is hateful alike to gods and men, the spoken lie, which is but an image of the other, is admissible only when used against enemies, or on behalf of friends, or to invest the ancient and unknown with a semblance of reality. God has no need of lying for any of these ends: he is therefore wholly true. In this respect also Homer and Aeschylus misrepresent the divine nature.

ἆρα γόητα κτλ. Although the gods are constantly represented as deceivers in Greek poetry and legend, Plato was by no means the first to uphold the opposite view. In Pindar (Ol. 10. 4) Truth is the daughter of Zeus, and the dramatists often teach a similar doctrine: see Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. p. 46. There is a close imitation of Plato's argument throughout this passage in Arist. Fr. 15. 1476^{b} 14 ff. ed. Rose.

αὐτόν is emphatic: the contrast is between actual and apparent transformations of the Deity. After αὐτόν, Herwerden would insert παντοδαπόν, comparing 381 E; before it, Richards adds ἄλλον, by which Benedictus and Ast replace αὐτόν. Hartman proposes <τι> γιγνόμενον. It has apparently escaped notice that γιγνόμενον, as well as ἀλλάττοντα τὸ αὑτοῦ εἶδος, belongs to εἰς πολλὰς μορφάς in the sense of ‘passing into’: cf. Tim. 57 A εἰς ἄλλο τι γιγνόμενον, infra III 400 B εἰς βραχύ τε καὶ μακρὸν γιγνόμενον, IX 588 C, and the frequent idiom γένεσις εἰς e.g. Phaed. 71 B, 71 E, Phil. 26 D, Tim. 49 C, 54 B.

ἁπλοῦν : one of the watchwords of Plato's State (370 B, C, 374 A—D al.): his citizens are to be nothing if not ἁπλοῖ. In making the gods a reflection of the type of human character which he desired to foster, Plato is acting strictly in accordance with the method of Greek theology, whose Olympus is an image of human society. The end of human action is ὁμοίωσις θεῷ κατὰ τὸ δυνατόν ( Theaet. 176 B); and Plato's God, changeless and with ‘no shadow of turning,’ furnished the citizens of his ideal city with an abiding standard of human conduct. Cf. 383 C.

τί δὲ τόδε ; Steinhart (Platon's Werke V p. 680) justly observes that the method of reasoning employed here— the disproof of each of the two members of the opposite alternative—recalls the arguments by which Parmenides established the attributes of Being (see RP.^{7} §§ 95, 98); but the resemblance is not close enough to suggest that Plato was thinking of Parmenides when he wrote this chapter. Although the unchangeableness of God was taught by Xenophanes and the Eleatics, there are few if any traces of such a doctrine outside the philosophers before Plato.

ὑπὸ μὲν ἄλλου κτλ . μέν has its counterpart in ἀλλ’ ἆρα αὐτὸς αὑτὸν κτλ. 381 B.

κινεῖται : a more general word for change than ἀλλοιοῦται: cf. Theaet. 181 D δύο δὴ—εἴδη κινήσεως, ἀλλοίωσιν, τὴν δὲ περιφοράν. The doctrine of the permanence and immutability of good enunciated here foreshadows, but does not presuppose, the metaphysical predominance of the Good in Book VI.

καὶ ἀμφιέσματα . See cr. n. and Introd. § 5.

ἀνάγκη : sc. ἐστίν. For ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ without ὡς see on I 332 E. Hartman needlessly suggests ἔμοιγε δοκεῖν.

θεοὶ ‐‐ πόληας . Od. XVII 485 f. Cf. Nägelsbach Hom. Theol. pp. 166—168.

Πρωτέως καὶ Θέτιδος . For Proteus see Od. IV 456—458. Aeschylus also wrote a satyric drama called Proteus: Fragg. 208—213. The transformations of Thetis to escape marrying Peleus had been celebrated by Pindar ( Nem. IV 62 ff.), Sophocles (Fr. 548), perhaps also (as Stallbaum thinks) by Hesiod in his ἐπιθαλάμιον εἰς Πηλέα καὶ Θέτιν (see Goettling's Hesiod pp. XLIX and 304).

ὡς ἱέρειαν ‐‐ βιοδώροις : from Aesch. Ξαντρίαι (Schol. on Ar. Frogs 1344). Dindorf (Aesch. Fr. 170) restores as follows: ὀρεσσιγόνοισι | Νύμφαις κρηνιάσιν κυδραῖσι θεαῖσιν ἀγείρω, | Ἰνάχου Ἀργείου ποταμοῦ παισὶν βιοδώροις. Herwerden's βιοδώρου is a wanton change: the sons of the river-god are his tributaries, and lifegiving like himself. It is not clear why Hera was disguised as a priestess. The incident in Inachus' history most suited to dramatic treatment was the persecution of his daughter Io by Hera in consequence of her intrigue with Zeus. As Io was a priestess of Hera, Hera may have disguised herself as another priestess in order to discover her husband's unfaithfulness: see Apollod. Bibl. II 1. 3 φωραθεὶς δὲ (sc. ὁ Ζεὺς) ὑφ’ Ἥρας, τῆς μὲν κόρης ἁψάμενος εἰς βοῦν μετεμόρφωσε λευκήν, αὐτὴν δὲ ἀπωμόσατο μὴ συνελθεῖν. The subject seems to have been treated by Sophocles in his satyric drama Inachus (Fragg. 255—278). With ὡς ἱέρειαν ἀγείρουσαν cf. ἀγύρται in 364 B and note ad loc.

τοιαῦτα πολλά . For examples see Heyne's Virgil II pp. 146— 152 (cited by Ast on 381 D). πολλὰ ψεύδονται ἀοιδοί. said the proverb.

κακῶς : like οὐ καλῶς 377 E.

ὡς ‐‐ ἰνδαλλόμενοι . ἄρα expresses incredulity (358 C note) and τινες contempt. Plato is thinking, inter alia, of the bugbears of the nursery—Lamia, Mormo, and Empusa, whose power of self-transformation was unlimited: see Blaydes on Ar. Frogs 293. ξένοις need not here be limited to the masculine gender. Cf. Strab. I 19 παισὶ προσφέρομεν—εἰς ἀποτροπὴν—τοὺς φοβεροὺς (μύθους). ἥ τε γὰρ Λαμία μῦθός ἐστι καὶ ἡ Γοργὼ καὶ ὁ Ἐφιάλτης καὶ ἡ Μορμολύκη.

φάντασμα is said with reference to φαίνεσθαι just above, and should be taken both with λόγῳ and ἔργῳ. The φάντασμα λόγῳ is the spoken lie: an example of the φάντασμα ἔργῳ is a φαντασία or unreal appearance (382 E). The words ἔργῳ φάντασμα προτείνων must not be understood of actual self-transformations of the gods.

τό γε ὡς ἀληθῶς ψεῦδος κτλ. Cf. τοῦ ἀληθῶς ψεύδους Theaet. 189 C, and (for the sentiment) Laws 730 C.

οὐδεὶς ἑκὼν κτλ. With Plato, as with Socrates, vice is ignorance, and involuntary. The doctrine reappears below in III 413 A, IX 589 C: it is further implied by the entire scheme of education in Books VI and VII. For other assertions of this view in Plato see Simson der Begriff d. Seele bei Pl. p. 125 note 359. Cf. also Soph. Fr. 663 ἡ δὲ μωρία | μάλιστ’ ἀδελφὴ τῆς πονηρίας ἔφυ. The identification of ignorance and vice is in harmony with popular Greek psychology, in which the intellect was not clearly distinguished from the will; it can be traced in the moral connotation of words like ἀμαθής, ἀπαίδευτος, ἀγνώμων. In close connexion with this conception of vice is Plato's view of punishment as remedial: see 380 B note

τὰ ὄντα κτλ. τὰ ὄντα =‘the truth.’ The contrast between the act and state in ψεύδεσθαί τε καὶ ἐψεῦσθαι resembles I 351 B: ἐψεῦσθαι, moreover, suitably bridges the distance between ψεύδεσθαι and ἀμαθῆ εἶναι. ἔχειν τὸ ψεῦδος corresponds to ψεύδεσθαι, κεκτῆσθαι τὸ ψεῦδος to ἐψεῦσθαι: the contrast is between ‘holding, ready for use, that which is already possessed,’ and permanent possession: cf. Soph. Ant. 1278 and Jebb ad loc. The words ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ, ‘in such a case’ (i.e. ἐν τῷ ἐψεῦσθαι τῇ ψυχῇ περὶ τὰ ὄντα), are quite satisfactory (cf. III 393 C), and ought not to have caused Herwerden difficulty.

μίμημά τι ‐‐ ψεῦδος . τοῦ ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ παθήματος must not be explained (with Bosanquet Companion p. 93) as the state of mind of him who tells a lie: for that is knowledge, and the spoken lie certainly is not an imitation of knowledge. They refer to the ‘true lie,’ which is a certain πάθημα in the soul of the ‘true liar,’ viz. ignorance, and of which the spoken lie is an imitation. It is a tolerably accurate definition of a lie to call it ‘an imitation of ignorance in the soul’: cf. IV 443 C note The spoken lie is ‘not a wholly unmixed lie,’ because it implies that the speaker knows the truth: in a certain sense therefore it is mixed with truth. It is ὕστερον γεγονός, because the spoken lie cannot be uttered until the truth is known. Inasmuch as the spoken lie is mixed with truth, it is better than the ‘veritable lie.’ We have here nothing but a special application of the old Socratic paradox ὁ ἑκὼν ἁμαρτάνων ἀμείνων (see on I 334 A). I have placed a comma after γεγονός, to mark the antithesis between εἴδωλον and ἄκρατον ψεῦδος, and because εἴδωλον is not so much to be taken with τοῦ ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ παθήματος: rather it stands for εἴδωλον ψεύδους, as οὐ πάνυ ἄκρατον ψεῦδος shews. The distinction between veritable and spoken lies savours, no doubt, of idealism: but it enables Plato to call his ideal archons ideally truthful, even when practically they tell lies, and it is with this object in view that the distinction is introduced. See III 389 B.

πότε ‐‐ μίσους ; τῷ is masculine: it is presently shewn that the spoken lie is useless to God. Plato does not permit a man to lie in his own interest. Ordinary Greek morality, in spite of Achilles' ἐχθρὸς γάρ μοι κεῖνος <*>μῶς Ἀΐδαο πύλῃσιν etc., probably did. The saying of Democritus ἀληθομυθεύειν χρεών, ὅπου λώιον (Stob. Flor. 12. 13) leaves us to infer that we may also lie ὅπου λώιον. Cf. Soph. Fr. 323 καλὸν μὲν οὖν οὐκ ἔστι τὰ ψεύδη λέγειν· | ὅτῳ δ’ ὄλεθρον δεινὸν ἁλήθεἰ ἄγει, | συγγνωστὸν εἰπεῖν ἐστὶ καὶ τὸ μὴ καλόν. The cynical immorality of Hdt. III 72 exceeds what Greek public opinion would have tolerated: cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. IV ch. 13. See also on III 389 B and Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. pp. 240 ff.

ἆῤ οὐ ‐‐ πολεμίους κτλ. Cf. I 331 E— 332 B.

τῶν καλουμένων φίλων depends on ἀποτροπῆς. If ὅταν διὰ μανίαν—τότε had been omitted, the construction would be quite clear: as it is, some difficulty has been felt. Schneider understands τινες as subject to ἐπιχειρῶσι: by Hermann ὅταν is changed to οἳ ἂν: by Herwerden ὅταν to οἳ ἂν and τότε to τοῦτο: while Stallbaum resorts to an anacoluthon, as if Plato had intended to say τῶν καλουμένων φίλων ἕνεκα. None of these expedients is so simple as to connect ἀποτροπῆς with φίλων. The clause ὅταν—πράττειν cancels out with τότε and does not affect the construction. καλουμένων, ‘so-called,’ involves a theory of friendship, viz. that no one who is ἀνόητος καὶ μαινόμενος can be a friend to man (any more than to God: cf. 382 E).

μυθολογίαις κτλ. Plato seems to have supposed that ancient history and mythology could be manufactured to order. Cf. Arist. Pol. B 9. 1269^{b} 28 and Susemihl ad loc. He attempts the task himself in III 414 B ff., Prot. 320 C—322 D (unless this is really an extract from one of Protagoras' own works), Pol. 269 A—274 E, Tim. 21 A— 25 D, Critias, and Laws 676 B—682 D.

εἰδέναι . The omniscience of the gods was no new doctrine: see Nägelsbach Hom. Theol. p. 23, Nachhom. Theol. pp. 23 ff.

ποιητὴς ‐‐ ἔνι . ‘There is nothing of the lying poet in God.’ Cf. 365 C note I can see no point in Stallbaum's notion that there is a play on the two senses of ποιητής—‘poet’ and ‘creator.’

ψεύδοιτο . ἄν is carried on: cf. I 352 E note

μαινομένων . Phaedr. 265 A μανίας δέ γε εἴο=η δύο, τὴν μὲν ὑπὸ νοσημάτων ἀνθρωπίνων, τὴν δὲ ὑπὸ θείας ἐξαλλαγῆς τῶν εἰωθότων νομίμων γιγνομένην. Plato refers here only to the first variety: the second is discussed in Phaedr. 265 B ff.

κομιδῇ ἄρα κτλ. The words ἁπλοῦν, οὔτε αὐτὸς μεθίσταται sum up 380 D—381 E (see on ἁπλοῦν in 380 D), the rest 382 A—D.

οὔτε κατὰ φαντασίας . See cr. n. and Introd. § 5. φαίνεσθαι and ἔργῳ φάντασμα προτείνων in 381 E, 382 A favour the view that these words are genuine.

ὕπαρ οὐδ’ ὄναρ . See cr. n. ὕπαρ οὐδ’ ὄναρ is not co-ordinate with οὔτε κατὰ φαντασίας etc., but subordinate to them: for φαντασίαι, λόγοι, and especially σημείων πομπαί might be vouchsafed either in waking moments or in dreams: see Stengel and Oehmichen in Iwan Müller's Handbuch V 3 pp. 37—47. For the doctrine cf. Xen. Mem. I 3. 4.

παράγειν . παράγοντας (conjectured by Richards) would be easier, but the slip, if such it be, is excusable. ὡς—ὄντας is not the accusative absolute: if it were, ὡς would express the reason, and here it does not. We are defining the τύπος: and the construction is (they must ποιεῖν) ὡς μήτε αὐτοὺς γόητας ὄντας, ‘represent the gods as neither themselves being sorcerers,’ etc. In παράγειν the construction is changed, but the change is natural, for our rule applies both to λόγος and ποίησις (καὶ λέγειν καὶ ποιεῖν), and λέγειν takes the accusative and infinitive. Both λέγειν and ποιεῖν affect the construction, which involves a sort of chiasmus. Cf. III 390 B note

τοῦ ἐνυπνίου πομπήν . Il. II 1— 34.

ἡ Θέτις κτλ. The verses are perhaps, as Schneider conjectures, from Aeschylus' Ὅπλων κρίσις, in which Thetis was one of the characters (Schol. on Ar. Ach. 883). Apollo with his harp (ἔχων φόρμιγγα) appears as present at the marriage of Thetis also in Homer (Il. XXIV 62, 63). Plato accommodates the beginning of the quotation to his own sentence: in Aeschylus perhaps it ran ὁ δ’ ἐνεδατεῖτο τὰς ἐμὰς εὐπαιδίας (so Butler, quoted by Schneider). ἐνδατεῖσθαι, ‘to dwell upon or emphasize,’ is elsewhere always used in an ominous sense (see Jebb on Soph. O. T. 205): and here too, perhaps, it strikes a foreboding note. The words μακραίωνας βίους were doubted by Stephanus, who suggested μακραίωνος βίου (so Euseb. Praep. Ev. XIII 3. 35) or μακραίωνας βίου: but Apollo's prophecies did not refer to Achilles only, so that the plural is justified. ἀπείρους should be taken not with εὐπαιδίας, but with βίους, which is in apposition to εὐπαιδίας. In the next line θεοφιλεῖς ἐμὰς τύχας depends on the compound expression παιῶν’ ἐπηυφήμησεν—a construction frequent in Aeschylus, especially with verbs which denote singing, celebrating, etc. (Ag. 174, 175 al.): after enumerating all the blessings in store for Thetis (ξύμπαντά τ’ εἰπών) Apollo raised a paean over her θεοφιλεῖς τύχας. This explanation— Schneider's—is much better than to connect ξύμπαντα adverbially with θεοφιλεῖς.

κἀγὼ ‐‐ ε<*>ναι . Contrast Aesch. P. V. 1032 ψευδηγορεῖν γὰρ οὐκ ἐπίσταται στόμα | τὸ Δῖον, ἀλλὰ πᾶν ἔπος τελεῖ: see on 380 D above.

ἤλπιζον : ‘fancied,’ not ‘hoped’: cf. V 451 A, IX 573 C, and ἐλπίς in VII 517 B. This idiomatic usage is illustrated by Rutherford on Babrius 9. 2.

θεῖοι—οἷόν τε . The object of all worship and all religion, as of human action in general, is assimilation to God: cf. X 613 A note

Appendices to book 2

II 359 D. τῷ Γύγου τοῦ Λυδοῦ προγόνῳ .

Most of the emendations (e.g. Γύγῃ τῷ τοῦ Λυδοῦ προγόνῳ) which have been suggested in order to bring the present passage into harmony with the allusion in Book X 612 B, assume that the Gyges of ‘Gyges' ring’ is identical with the famous Gyges (who reigned about 687—654 B.C.), founder of the third or Mermnad dynasty of Lydian kings (Hdt. I 8—13). On this assumption τοῦ Λυδοῦ cannot mean ‘Lydus’ (the eponymous ruler of Lydia: see Hdt. I 7), but must mean ‘the Lydian’ i.e. (according to the usual interpretation) Croesus, who was the πέμπτος ἀπόγονος Γύγεω (Hdt. I 13). There is however no proof to shew that ὁ Γυδός could without further specification denote Croesus; and on this ground alone Wiegand's proposal (adopted by Hermann, Baiter, and Hartman) τῷ [Γύγου ] τοῦ Λυδοῦ προγόνῳ breaks down: while Jowett and Campbell's alternative suggestions τῷ Κροίσου τοῦ Λυδοῦ προγόνῳ, and Γύγῃ τῷ Κροίσου τοῦ Λυδοῦ προγόνῳ, although satisfactory in point of sense, fail to account for the disappearance of Κροίσου. The proposals of Ast— τῷ Γύγῃ τοῦ Λυδοῦ (or Λυδῶν) προγόνῳ, and [τῷ] Γύγου τοῦ Λυδοῦ [ προγόνῳ]—will hardly win favour, while Stallbaum's τῷ Γύγῃ [τοῦ Λυδοῦ προγόνῳ] merely cuts the knot.

There is however no solid reason for connecting the Gyges of the proverb with the historical Gyges. In narrating the adventures of the latter, Herodotus makes no mention of a magic ring; but if such a legend had been told of the founder of the Mermnadae, Herodotus is hardly likely to have ignored it. In Plato's narrative, on the other hand, everything hangs on the ring. Nor is the magic ring known to Nicolaus Damascenus, whose account of Gyges seems to follow a different tradition from that of Herodotus: see Müller's Frag. Hist. Graec. III pp. 382—386. It is therefore possible that Plato's story refers not to Herodotus' Gyges, but to some homonymous ancestor of his, perhaps (as Stein suggests on Hdt. I 13) the mythical founder of the family, whose name may have survived in the λίμνη Γυγαίη (Hdt. I 93). The Gyges of history was not the first member of his family to bear that name: his great-grandfather at least was also called Gyges (Nic. Dam. l.c.). The resemblance between the two stories—that of Herodotus and that of Plato—is confined to two incidents, viz. the joint murder of the reigning sovereign by the queen and her paramour, and their succession to the throne. In these two features the history of the later Gyges may well have been embellished from the legends about his mythical namesake, or he may actually have copied his ancestor's example. It is noticeable that Cicero says nothing to shew that he identified the Gyges of Plato's story with the Gyges of history; and in a poem by Nizámí (as Mr J. G. Frazer has pointed out to me), where Plato tells the story of the ring, the name of Gyges is not even mentioned. (See Prof. Cowell's article in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. 30 pp. 151—157. Prof. Cowell thinks Nizámí became acquainted with the legend through Arabic translations of the Republic.) Thinking it probable, therefore, that the proverbial ring of Gyges belonged not to Herodotus' Gyges, but to one of his ancestors bearing the same name, I have retained the MS reading. I do not think that the suppression of the name is a difficulty, though it would be easy to write (as I formerly did) <τῷ Γύγῃ>, τῷ Γύγου τοῦ Λυδοῦ προγόνῳ. See Introd. § 5. Such a solution would bring the text into strict verbal harmony with X 612 B, with Cicero De off. III 38 (where the story is related, not of an ancestor of Gyges, but of Gyges himself—hinc ille Gyges inducitur a Platone), with Lucian Nav. 41 and Bis Acc. 21, and with Philostratus Vit. Apoll. 101. In each of these places we hear of ‘Gyges' ring,’ not of ‘Gyges' ancestor's ring.’ But it is better to adhere to the almost unanimous testimony of the MSS, especially as in this particular passage they are reinforced by Proclus. Schneider can hardly be right in supposing that the older Gyges is an invention of Plato's, although in other respects his note is deserving of attention: “Platoni vero licebat alterum Gygen fingere, ingenio et fortuna similem interfectori Candaulae, quem ideo genus ab illo ducentem facit, prioris nomen, quippe quod commune ei cum posteriori esset, reticens.”

II 359 E. τοῦτον δὲ ἄλλο μὲν ἔχειν οὐδέν, περὶ δὲ τῇ χειρὶ χρυσοῦν δακτύλιον, ὃν περιελόμενον ἐκβῆναι.

If (with A) we omit ἔχειν, the meaning must still be: ‘the corpse (τοῦτον) <had> nothing else upon it, only on its hand a gold ring, which he (Gyges) took off and went out.’ But it is impossible in Greek, as in English, to dispense with ‘had.’

Dr Jackson proposes to read τούτου for τοῦτον, and omit ἔχειν and ὅν, understanding the sentence to mean ‘he took nothing from the corpse except a gold ring on its hand, and then went out’ (Proceedings of the Cambridge Philol. Soc. Vol. II 1882, p. 12). In favour of this view he urges that ‘the nudity of the corpse is not mentioned, either in Cicero's paraphrase de Officiis III 9 § 38, or in that of Nizámí’ (see App. I). Philostratus is also silent on the subject (Heroic. 28). If the principle of this solution is correct, I should prefer to retain τοῦτον: for there seems to be no reason why περιαιρεῖσθαι should not take two accusatives like ἀφαιρεῖσθαι, περικρούειν, περικόπτειν, and the like; or, as Dr Verrall remarks (Proceedings, etc. l.c.)—I think with less probability—τοῦτον might be ‘regarded as a second accusative after ποιήσαντα understood with ἄλλο μὲν οὐδέν.’ The reading τοῦτον δὲ ἄλλο μὲν οὐδέν, περὶ δὲ τῇ χειρὶ χρυσοῦν δακτύλιον περιελόμενον ἐκβῆναι is adopted also by the Zurich editors (1839) on the suggestion of Winckelmann.

Dr Jackson's view of the passage, in which I formerly concurred, gives excellent sense, and may be right. But it is to be noticed (1) that our chief authority for ἔχειν is Ven. Π, a MS which is quite independent of Paris A and constantly enables us to restore lacunae in that MS, and (2) that there are other examples in Paris A of the omission of a single word without the excuse of homoioteleuton. See Introd. § 5. Ξ and Flor. B omit ἔχειν, but add φέρειν after δακτύλιον—an obvious attempt to amend the error which survives in A.

Madvig conjectures πλούτου δὲ οὐδέν and Liebhold (Fl. Jahrb. 1888, p. 107) κόσμου δὲ ἄλλο μὲν <ἔχοντ)> οὐδέν for τοῦτον δὲ ἄλλο μὲν οὐδέν. Neither of these proposals has any plausibility, and it is best to regard this as one of the places where we owe the right reading to Π .

II 364 C. ἐάν τέ τινα ἐχθρὸν πημῆναι ἐθέλῃ, μετὰ σμικρῶν δαπανῶν ὁμοίως δίκαιον ἀδίκῳ βλάψειν κτλ.

Instead of βλάψειν, the best MSS read βλάψει. If βλάψει is retained, the subject must be either (1) τις or ὁ ἐθέλων πημαίνειν supplied out of πημῆναι ἐθέλῃ, or (2) the prophet consulted. The latter alternative gives the right sense, but the change from the singular to the plural (in πείθοντες) is very harsh. If we adopt the first alternative (to which J. and C. incline), we must regard the clause ἐάν τέ τινα— βλάψει as semi-parenthetical, and connect πείθοντες with ἀγύρται δὲ καὶ μάντεις at the beginning of the sentence. Such a solution is not less harsh than (2). βλάψει must, I think, be pronounced corrupt. Muretus read βλάψαι, depending, like ἀκεῖσθαι, on δύναμις; but βλάψαι is not likely to have been corrupted into βλάψει, nor is it clear why the aorist should take the place of the present (as in ἀκεῖσθαι). Reading βλάψειν, we might perhaps regard the construction as one of the rare cases in which δύναμις and the like are followed by a future infinitive: see Jebb's Soph. Phil. p. 252, Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 164, and cf. Phaed. 73 A οὐκ ἂν οἷοί τ’ ἦσαν τοῦτο ποιήσειν (so the Bodleian MS). There is still however a serious difficulty in the collocation of the present ἀκεῖσθαι with the future βλάψειν. The explanation given by Schneider in his Additamenta is linguistically unassailable and gives an excellent sense. For the common confusion of ‐ει and ‐ειν see Introd. § 5.

II 365 D, E. οὐκοῦν, εἰ μὲν μὴ εἰσίν, ἢ μηδὲν αὐτοῖς τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων μέλει, τί καὶ ἡμῖν μελητέον τοῦ λανθάνειν;

The reading of the best MSS, καὶ ἡμῖν μελητέον τοῦ λανθάνειν, is defended by Shorey (A. J. Ph. XVI p. 231), but (as I think) unsuccessfully, and even the most conservative editors abandon it.

We have to choose between (1) <τί> καὶ ἡμῖν μελητέον τοῦ λανθάνειν; (found in several inferior MSS besides v), (2) οὐδ’ ἡμῖν μελητέον κτλ. (q Flor. U), (3) καὶ ἡμῖν <οὐ> μελητέον κτλ. (Paris D in margin), (4) καὶ ἡμῖν ἀμελητέον (a conjecture of Baiter's). It is possible that each of these readings is due to conjecture, and we can scarcely hope to restore the hand of Plato with certainty in this passage.

I formerly (with Bekker and others) printed οὐδ’ ἡμῖν. The meaning is satisfactory, but the correction does not seem probable in itself. The same may be said of (3) and (4). I have now followed Stallbaum in supposing that τί was accidentally omitted after the ‐ει of μέλει. Such a slip is easy enough, and would be most likely to be corrected by the introduction of a negative, as in (2) and (3). Moreover, as Stallbaum says, τί καὶ ἡμῖν “huius sermonis alacritati plane est accommodatum,” and καί is, I think, sufficiently justified by the obvious contrast between the gods and ourselves. Tucker objects that ‘“If the gods do not care, why should we also care?” is as bad in Greek as in English’: but καί is hardly so much as ‘also’: it merely points the contrast. Cf. III 414 E note There is no difficulty in οὐκοῦν followed by a question, so long as the question is merely rhetorical. Hermann proposes οὔκουν—καὶ ἡμῖν μελητέον, but the negative would require to be reinforced before ἡμῖν. I can see no probability in Tucker's conjecture, viz. οὐκοῦν—<οὐδὲν> καὶ ἡμῖν μελητέον.

386A - 389A So much for the doctrines by means of which we are to foster the sentiments of piety towards gods and parents and mutual friendship among the citizens.

In order to encourage Bravery, we shall require our poets to extol and not to decry the life which awaits us after death: otherwise their poetry will be not merely untrue, but detrimental to our future soldiers. Here again Homer deserves censure. Fearinspiring names like Cocytus must be discarded, as well as lamentations put into the mouths of famous men: for the good man has no cause to bewail the death of a good comrade, either for his comrade's sake or for his own. Homer offends against this canon when he represents Achilles and Priam as indulging in lamentations over their dead; and still more when he makes the gods, and even the greatest of the gods, give way to grief. Moreover, as excessive mirth is apt to rebound into the opposite extreme, our youths must not be laughterloving. Homer errs in depicting good men and gods as overcome with laughter.

τὰ μὲν δὴ περὶ θεοὺς κτλ. Rettig (Proleg. pp. 61 ff.) and others suppose that the virtue of ὁσιότης is alluded to here—a virtue which in the earlier dialogues is sometimes placed by the side of the four cardinal virtues ( Prot. 329 C, Men. 78 D, Gorg. 507 B). But ὁσιότης is not specifically named (in spite of II 380 C), and it is clear from the words καὶ γονέας—ποιησομένοις that Plato is thinking at least as much of duty to man as of duty to gods: cf. II 378 B C, 381 E, 383 C. See also App. I.

ἀνδρεῖοι . Plato has in view chiefly courage in war: hence the importance which he attaches to removing the fear of death. Cf. Tyrtaeus 10 (τεθνάμεναι γὰρ καλὸν κτλ.) and 12. 23 — 32. The poems of Tyrtaeus are not open to Plato's censure in this connexion. Pfleiderer (Zur Lösung der Pl. Fr. p. 23) wrongly represents the present passage as tantamount (or nearly so) to a denial of the immortality of the soul, which is affirmed in Book X. It is possible to criticise the popular conception of immortality without disbelieving in a higher form of the same doctrine, and this is just what Plato does here.

καὶ περὶ τούτων τῶν μύθων should be taken with ἐπιστατεῖν rather than with λέγειν (sc. αὐτούς, i.e. τοὺς μύθους). Hartman, connecting the words with λέγειν, would expunge τῶν μύθων “cum poetae non de fabulis τὰ ἐν Αἵδου describentibus λέγειν soleant, sed ipsi Orci territamenta narrent”—a just criticism, and conclusive in favour of the construction which Hartman rejects.

λοιδορεῖν . The traditional literary picture of the Greek Hades deserves what Plato says of it (see the quotations in Nägelsbach Hom. Theol. pp. 397 ff., Nachh. Theol. pp. 396—398), although a brighter prospect was held out in the Eleusinian mysteries and the Orphic theology (Nachh. Theol. pp. 398—407).

ἁπλῶς οὕτως . 11 377 B note

λέγοντας . For the accusative after the dative ἐπιχειροῦσι cf. Euthyph. 5 A, Crito 51 D. Before λέγοντας Ξ^{1} (with a few other MSS) adds ἄν, as if εἰ λοιδοροῖεν should be understood (cf. II 380 C); but we should supply not λοιδοροῖεν, but εἰ λοιδοροῦσι (Schneider).

τοῦδε τοῦ ἔπους κτλ. The singular ἔπος is sometimes used of more than one verse, e.g. Hdt. VII 143. The lines are addressed by the shade of Achilles to Odysseus: Od. XI 489—491. On the omission of ᾧ μὴ βίοτος πολὺς εἴη see Introd. § 5.

οἰκία ‐‐ θεοί περ . Il. XX 64, 65. The words in Homer are under the construction of δείσας—μή.

ὢ πόποι . The exclamation of Achilles when the ghost of Patroclus eludes his embrace: Il. XXIII 103, 104. On φρένες as the “physical basis of life” in Homer see Leaf ad loc.

οἴῳ ‐‐ ἀΐσσουσι . Tiresias retained in the other world something of the physical reality of his earthly existence: Od. X 493—495 τοῦ τε φρένες ἔμπεδοί εἰσιν· | τῷ καὶ τεθνηῶτι νόον πόρε Περσεφόνεια | οἴῳ πεπνῦσθαι· τοὶ δὲ σκιαὶ ἀΐσσουσιν. Plato allows the force of attraction to alter τοί to ταί: cf. Men. 100 A οἶος πέπνυται τῶν ἐν Ἅιδου, αἱ δὲ σκιαὶ ἀΐσσουσι.

ψυχὴ ‐‐ ἥβην . Il. XVI 856, 857. ῥεθέων, explained by the ancients as μέλη τοῦ σώματος (Hesych. s.v.), more probably denotes the mouth (as part of the face): cf. Leaf ad loc. and Il. IX 409. Leaf plausibly suggests that ἀν in ἀνδροτῆτα, ‘manhood’—found in all but two MSS of the Iliad—was only the written sign of the nasalis sonans, and counted as a short vowel.

ψυχὴ δὲ ‐‐ τετριγυῖα . Il. XXIII 100. “The voice,” says Leaf, “is as weak a copy of the living voice as is the εἴδωλον of the αὐτός”: whence τετριγυῖα and τετριγυῖαι again just below.

ὡς δ) ὅτε ‐‐ ᾔεσαν . Said of the souls of the suitors following Hermes down to Hades: Od. XXIV 6—9. Possibly we should read ἤισαν for ᾔεσαν (with Howes, Harvard Studies in Cl. Philol. VI p. 190).

ἐνέρους καὶ ἀλίβαντας . The Scholiast writes: ἐνέρους τοὺς νεκρούς, ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐν τῇ ἔρᾳ (ὅ ἐστι γῇ) κεῖσθαι. Cf. ἔραζε. Early psychology scarcely separated the dead body from the surviving spirit: the latter still lived where the body lay ‘within the ground.’ Hence ‘those within the ground’ (opposed to the ἐπιχθόνιοι or living) became an expression for the spirits of the departed, and the denizens of the lower world in general: see Il. XV 188, XX 61. The Scholiast's derivation is more probable than that of Brugmann, who ( Grundriss II p. 180) derives the word from ἐν and a nominal suffix ‐ερο. Plato at any rate would have preferred the Scholiast. On ἀλίβαντας (not found in Homer or Hesiod) see Plut. Quaest. Symp. VIII 736 A (cited by Ast) ὁ δὲ ἀλίβας καὶ ὁ σκελετὸς ἐπὶ τοῖς νεκροῖς γέγονε, λοιδορουμένης ὀνόματα ξηρότητος. The ancients derived the word from ἀ and the root of λείβω λίψ etc., calling the dead ‘sapless’ διὰ τὴν τῆς λιβάδος ἀμεθεξίαν (Schol.). L. and S. object that the ἀ is long, relying perhaps on the line of Callimachus in Et. M. 63, 51 ἔβηξαν οἷον ἀλίβαντα πίνοντες (where ἀλίβαντα =ὄξος). There, however, the right reading may be ἁλίβαντα, i.e. οἱ ἀλίβαντα. But in Sophocles Fr. 751 ed. Dindorf the α is certainly long, unless the text is corrupt. Possibly the word is connected with ἠλίβατος; cf. Hesych. s. v. ἠλίβατον, where we are told that Στησίχορος Τάρταρον ἠλίβατον τὸν βαθὺν λέγει.

τούτου τοῦ τύπου . Instead of writing ἄλλα ὀνόματα ὅσα τούτου τοῦ τύπου ὄντα Plato writes ἄλλα ὄσα τούτου τοῦ τύπου ὀνομαζόμενα, with precisely the same meaning: τούτου τοῦ τύπου therefore depends on the copula involved in ὀνομαζόμενα. Stallbaum takes ὀνομαζόμενα as “quum pronuntiantur”; but this is pointless. The words mean simply ‘other names of this type which make all who hear them shudder’ etc.

φρίττειν δὴ ποιεῖ . The remark ὡς οἴεται, which appears in the best MSS— see cr. n.—after ποιεῖ gives no sense, and is admittedly corrupt. ὡς οἷόν τε, found in four inferior MSS besides q, is a rare phrase, occurring, I believe, nowhere else in Plato (except of course in combination with superlatives, e.g. III 412 B, VI 484 C), though found in Aristotle (Pol. E 11. 1313^{a} 39, where Bekker conjectured οἴονται); but ‘to shiver as much as possible’ is painfully frigid. No emendation at all satisfactory has yet been proposed—neither Winckelmann's οἰκέτας, nor Hermann's ὅσα <*>τη (with reference to recitations of the rhapsodists!), nor Madvig's ὡς οἰητέα, nor Campbell's ὡς ἐτεά. Hertz (Fl. Jahrb. 1872 p. 852) supposes the words to be a gloss by some Christian reader, meaning ‘as he’ (i.e Plato) ‘imagines.’ The author of the gloss wished to indicate that he at least could hear such tales without shivering. After ὡς οἴεται found its way into the text, it was probably altered to οἴονται (to suit the plural ἀκούοντας), from which οἷόν τε is a corruption: cf. 11 358 E, where q has οἴονται as against οἷόν τε of the best MSS. See also on VI 504 E.

καὶ ἴσως ‐‐ ἄλλο τι : “videlicet ad suavitatem et delectationem: v. p. 387 B, 390 A, 397 D, 398 A al.” (Stallbaum).

μὴ ἐκ ‐‐ ἡμῖν . φρίκη is a cold shiver, sometimes followed by sweat, whence ἐκ τῆς τοιαύτης φρίκης θερμότεροι. Cf. (with Hartman) Phaedr. 251 A ἰδόντα δὲ αὐτόν, οἷον ἐκ τῆς φρίκης, μεταβολή τε καὶ ἱδρὼς καὶ θερμότης ἀήθης λαμβάνει, where Thompson remarks that φρίκη is used by Hippocrates of the ‘cold fit of a fever.’ In θερμότεροι καὶ μαλακώτεροι Plato is thinking of the softening effect of heat upon iron: cf. (with J. and C.) infra 411 B ὥσπερ σίδηρον ἐμάλαξε, Laws 666 C, 671 B καθάπερ τινὰ σίδηρον τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν πινόντων διαπύρους γιγνομένας μαλθακωτέρας γίγνεσθαι; see also Il. XVIII 468—477 and Whitelaw on Soph. Ajax 651 in Cl. Rev. v pp. 66, 230. In so far as it associates heat with cowardice, the comparison breaks down, for heat meant courage to the Greeks. For this reason Stephanus conjectured ἀθερμότεροι and Ast ἀθυμότεροι, a reading afterwards found in v. Ast's conjecture is thus refuted by Hartman (l.c.): “Astii coniectura inepta est, quum ἀθυμία vitium sit, non vero iusta ac temperata μαλακία (dixit enim μαλακώτεροι τοῦ δέοντος).” In the next sentence Hartman expunges φοβούμεθα without sufficient cause.

τῶν ἐλλογίμων ἀνδρῶν : a subjective, not an objective genitive: see E below, and 388 E, 390 D εἴ πού τινες— καρτερίαι—καὶ λέγονται καὶ πράττονται ὑπὸ ἐλλογίμων ἀνδρῶν with X 605 D.

ὁ ἐπιεικὴς ἀνὴρ ‐‐ προσδεῖται . This passage is full of Socratic colouring. οὖπερ καὶ ἑταῖρός ἐστι contains a suggestion that only good men can be comrades: cf. Xen. Mem. II 6. 19, 20 and Pl. Lys. 214 C. That death has no terrors for the good man is laid down in Ap. 41 C ff. The self-sufficiency of virtue was illustrated in the person of Socrates himself ( Mem. 1 2. 14. IV 8. 11), and continually preached by him ( Mem. II 6. 2, cf. IV 7. 1). Steinhart appears to me to exaggerate the force of αὐτάρκης when he characterises the doctrine of this passage as anti-christian ( Einleitung p. 160).

ὑέος . The fortitude of Pericles on receiving the news of the death of his two sons was a case in point, and may have been known to Plato. It is commemorated in a fine fragment of Protagoras preserved by Plut. Consol. ad Apoll. 33. 118 E, F.

ὀδύρεται, φέρει . See cr. n. The infinitives ὀδύρεσθαι and φέρειν are explained by Stallbaum as dependent on λέγομεν, but this is too harsh. The rhetorical repetition of ἥκιστ’ ἄρα proves that like στερηθῆναι they should be under the government either of δεινόν itself, or of some notion supplied out of δεινόν. As the former alternative gives the wrong sense we must, if the text is sound, take refuge in the latter. Hartman by a tour de force resolves ἥκιστα δεινόν into ἥκιστα εἰκὸς αὐτὸν δεδιέναι, and carries on the εἰκός. It would be somewhat easier, I think, though still very harsh, to supply δεινός out of δεινόν, δεινός being used as in δεινὸς καταράσασθαι τῷ λίθῳ (Theophr. Char. 15, cf. infra 395 C): but it is difficult not to believe that the text is corrupt. In q, καί has been corrected to χρή, and the insertion of δεῖ before καί is suggested by Hartman. The question however is not what the good man ought to do, but what he actually does, and for this reason Richards' ἔοικε after ὀδύρεσθαι is better, although otherwise unlikely. Stallbaum's alternative proposal to read ὀδύρεται, φέρει δέ seems to me far the best both in point of sense, and because it might easily pass into ὀδύρεσθαι, φέρειν δέ under the influence of στερηθῆναι. For these reasons I have printed it in the text. Cf. Introd. § 5.

ἄλλοτ) ‐‐ ἀτρυγέτοιο . The picture of Achilles sorrowing for Patroclus in Iliad XXIV 10—12. Plato accommodates the Homeric narrative to his own ποιεῖν, and reads πλωΐζοντ’ — ἀτρυγέτοιο instead of δινεύεσκ’ ἀλύων παρὰ θῖν’ ἁλός, which appears in our Homer. πλωίζω elsewhere is always used of sail ing in the literal sense (yet ἐκ τοῦ νοῦ ἐκπλώειν in Hdt. VI 12), but it cannot bear such a meaning here. If the MSS are right, πλωΐζοντ) must be regarded (with Schneider) as a metaphor, the agitated movements of Achilles being compared to the unsteady motion of a ship upon the sea. Achilles is so to speak ‘at sea’ and shews it in his gait; cf. the metaphorical sense of χειμάζομαι. The picture savours of the burlesque, and Howes suggests that πλωίζων may be a deliberate parody on Plato's part (Harvard Studies etc. VI p. 202). As no other example of such a use of πλωίζω has been adduced, the word is perhaps corrupt. Heyne's πρωΐζοντ) “matutinum se agentem” (οὐδέ μιν ἠὼς | φαινομένη λήθεσκεν ὑπεὶρ ἅλα, says Homer) will never command a wide assent: still less πλώϊσοντ) (Benedictus), πρὼ| ἴοντ) (Ast), whose quantity is not above suspicion, or πρὼ| ἰύζοντ) (Liebhold Fl. Jahrb. 1888, p. 108). αἰάζοντ) (Herwerden and Naber) is better in point of sense, but the alteration is too great. I have thought of πόλλ’ ᾤζοντ) (ᾤζεις ‘cry ὤ’ and not ὤζεις is the spelling of the Codex Mediceus in Aesch. Eum. 124), or ἀφλοίζοντ) (cf. ἀφλοισμός in Il. XV 607). Perhaps, however, πλωΐζοντ) conceals some word meaning ‘to rush wildly from his tent,’ ἐπὶ θῖν) being probably for ἐπὶ θῖνα, not for ἐπὶ θινί. There is apparently a contrast between Achilles' anguish within his tent and without, and some word is needed to mark his exit. Nothing can be made of the variant πλάζοντ) (in a few inferior MSS). In default of anything better we must (I suppose) provisionally acquiesce in Schneider's interpretation.

μηδὲ ‐‐ κεφαλῆς . Il. XVIII 23, 24.

ἐκεῖνος . Homer.

ἐγγὺς θεῶν . Zeus was Priam's seventh ancestor (Apollod. III 12). The phrase has a dash of old-world romance about it: cf. 391 E infra and Stallbaum on Phil. 16 C οἱ μὲν παλαιοί, κρείττονες ἡμῶν καὶ ἐγγυτέρω θεῶν οἰκοῦντες.

λιτανεύοντά τε ‐‐ ἕκαστον . Il. XXII 414, 415.

ὤμοι κτλ. Said by Thetis in Il. XVIII 54.

ὢ πόποι . Il. XXII 168, 169. The words are uttered by Zeus with reference to Hector. For ἄστυ our Homer has τεῖχος.

αἲ αἲ ‐‐ δαμῆναι . Il. XVI 433, 434. The only variant is ὤμοι for αἲ αἴ.

εἰ καὶ ἐπίοι αὐτῷ . καί is not ‘even’ (J. and C.), otherwise there would be too much emphasis on ἐπίοι, but ‘also’: ‘if it should also occur to himself’ (sc. as Homer says it occurs to gods). The emphatic word is αὐτῷ. For τοιοῦτον Hartman requires either τοιοῦτόν τι or τὸ τοιοῦτον; but cf. 416 B, IV 426 B, 429 E, IX 590 E and II 368 A note

σμικροῖσιν . See on I 330 B. ἐπὶ σμικροῖσι παθήμασι has a poetical rhythm, and may possibly be from a hexameter.

ἕως ἄν τις ‐‐ πείσῃ . Cf. Phaed. 85 C, D, Gorg. 527 A.

ἐφιῇ ‐‐ τοιοῦτον . See cr. n. The present ἐφιῇ is slightly better than ἐφῇ: for τὸ τοιοῦτον denotes the state or condition rather than the act. ἐφῇ comes rather nearer to the reading of A and II, and is preferred by Baiter and Hartman. For ζητεῖ H. Wolf conjectured ποιεῖ, Herwerden τίκτει or ἐντίκτει, in both cases needlessly: cf. with J. and C. ἐθέλει in 11 370 B. The sentiment is generalised in VIII 563 E.

οὔτε ἄρα . οὔτε followed by δέ is rare (examples in Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 832) but δέ follows τε very often, especially in πολὺ δέ, μέγιστον δέ etc.: see II 367 C note Cobet's οὔτἆρα i.q. οὔτοι ἄρα, though approved by Hartman, is therefore unnecessary.

οὐκοῦν ‐‐ λόγον . The lines are Il. I 599, 600. Hermann wished to read οὔκουν and reject ἀποδεξόμεθα περὶ θεῶν, placing τὰ τοιαῦτα under the government of ἀποδεκτέον. οὔκουν may be right, but the change is not necessary. τὰ τοιαῦτα does not refer specifically to the verses, but means τὸ κρατεῖσθαι ὑπὸ γέλωτος and the like; while the two verses are themselves the object of ἀποδεκτέον. I have accordingly placed a colon after θεῶν and removed the pause after ποιπνύοντα; a remedy which removes, I think, the objections felt by Hermann to ἀποδεξόμεθα περὶ θεῶν, and by Herwerden to περὶ θεῶν. The asyndeton in ἄσβεστος δ’ ἄῤ etc. is common in ampliative and illustrative sentences.

389B - 392A A high value should also be placed upon truth. The medicinal lie may indeed be permitted to our rulers, in the interests of the State: but any others who lie are to be punished. To lie to the rulers is worse than lying to a physician about one's illness.

Not less necessary is self-control, which will enable our citizens to obey the rulers, and to rule their own appetites. Homer frequently represents heroes and gods as lacking in this virtue—as insubordinate, gluttonous, lustful, avaricious, prone to revenge, and mean. The effect is to discourage in the young the virtue which we desiderate, and all such representations must therefore be forbidden: they are both impious and untrue.

ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ ἀλήθειαν ff. On the place of this section in the general plan of the Republic see App. I.

θεοῖσι μὲν ‐‐ εἴδει . For the dative θεοῖσι see I 330 B note ἐν φαρμάκου εἴδει (cf. 11 382 C, D) implies the usual Socratic analogy between body and soul: see on II 380 B.

οὐχ ἁπτέον κτλ. Cf. Laws 916 E ff.

τοιούτους is omitted by Hartman, and is certainly open to doubt. The balance of MS evidence is in its favour, although a few inferior MSS and one MS of Stobaeus ( Flor. 46. 95), agree with A^{1} in omitting it. It must either mean rulers who act ἐπ’ ὠφελίᾳ τῆς πόλεως, or else such rulers as Plato's. The former alternative is not altogether satisfactory, and it is difficult not to believe that Plato was in reality referring to his own rulers. The serious objection to this view is that we have not yet heard anything of Plato's rulers: they are not described till 412 B. I think the solution may be that the present section on truth is a later addition made by Plato after he had written his first account of the rulers in Book III. See also App. I.

λέγοντι has caused difficulty, and Madvig would expunge the word. The explanation is simple enough. μὴ τἀληθῆ λέγειν should be repeated between ἤ and πρός, and μὴ τὰ ὄντα λέγοντι ὅπως taken closely together, ‘or to lie’ (μὴ τἀληθῆ λέγειν understood) ‘to a pilot about the ship and its crew by misrepresenting the facts about one's own condition etc.’ One MS of Stobaeus (l.c.) has λέγοντα, which is also possible, and could only be explained in this way. I have removed the comma usually printed after λέγοντι.

λαμβάνῃ : sc. ὁ ἄρχων. Cf. 1347 A note λαμβάνῃς (Ficinus and Benedictus) gives a wrong sense.

τῶν οἳ ‐‐ δούρων . Od. XVII 383, 384. κακῶν is of course neuter. If Schneider could shew that this quotation refers to a case in which a chieftain in Homer did or did not punish a δημιουργός for lying, he would make out a prima facie case for his view that Plato is here prescribing canons for poetical representations, but there is nothing of this in Homer; and we must suppose that Plato is speaking here of his own citizens. See App. I.

ἐάν γε ‐‐ τελῆται does not mean ‘if our theory is carried out’ (J. and C.) or ‘if our ideal city is ever realised’ (Rettig). Such a remark would be frigid and superfluous. The meaning is merely that the ruler will first use words, but, if these fail, he will afterwards proceed to deeds i.e. κολάσει. The first γε assents: the second enters a caveat. ἔργα τελῆται=ἔργων τέλος γίγνηται.

σωφροσύνης δὲ ‐‐ μέγιστα : ‘for the mass of men, are not the cardinal points of temperance such as these?’ (Jebb on Soph. O. C. 20 μακρὰν γὰρ ὡς γέροντι προὐστάλης ὁδόν—a precise parallel). There is no authority for interpreting these words (with Stallbaum, Hartman etc.) as ‘plerumque’ ‘in universum.’ Plato is warning us not to regard his account of σωφροσύνη here as scientifically accurate and complete. It is the most obvious and conspicuous aspects of self-control which poets should chiefly impress upon the multitude, and to these Plato confines his attention. On the Greek conception of σωφροσύνη see the passages collected by Nägelsbach, Nachhom. Theol. pp. 227 ff.

Ὁμήρῳ . For this Ξ and a few other MSS read παρ’ Ὁμήρῳ. Schneider successfully defends Ὁμήρῳ by Arist. Pol. Θ 5. 1339^{b} 7 οὐ γὰρ ὁ Ζεὺς αὐτὸς ᾄδει καὶ κιθαρίζει τοῖς ποιηταῖς. The line is addressed by Diomede to Sthenelus in Il. IV 412.

τὰ τούτων ἐχόμενα . The two verses which Plato here quotes do not follow τέττα, σιωπῇ κτλ., and do not even occur together in our Homer. ἴσαν— Ἀχαιοί is from Il. III 8 (οἱ δ’ ἄρ’ ἴσαν σιγῇ μένεα πνείοντες Ἀχαιοί), σιγῇ—σημάντορας from IV 431. Some editors bracket the first verse, but (as Hartman points out) it is not likely that a scribe should have interpolated a line from Il. III before one from Il. IV. Plato may be guilty of ‘contamination,’ or the lines may really have occurred together in his text of Homer. J. and C. suggest that Plato perhaps did not mean the lines to be connected. The objection to this view is that σιγῇ (as in our text of Homer, though there it is in a different place) goes best with ἴσαν, and that ἴσαν μένεα πνείοντες Ἀχαιοί is not by itself an illustration of obedience to rulers, and therefore would not be relevant here. See on the whole subject of Platonic quotations from Homer, Howes in Harvard Studies etc. VI pp. 153—237, with whose conclusions (p. 210) I heartily agree.

οἰνοβαρὲς κτλ. Achilles to Aga memnon in Il. I 225. The point of this illustration is not in the abusive epithets, but in the insubordination which they and the rest of the speech (τὰ τούτων ἑξῆς) express.

νεανιεύματα . See cr. n. The spelling seems established by the verb νεανιεύεσθαι: e.g. Gorg. 482 C. νεανισκεύματα has however some authority, for νεανισκεύομαι was used (Photius s.v.). νεανικεύματα, to say the least, is doubtful, nor is νεανικοῦν (Photius s.v.) enough to justify such a form, in spite of Schneider ( Addit. p. 19).

παρὰ πλέαι ‐‐ δεπάεσσι . Odysseus in Od. IX 8—10. Our text of Homer has παρὰ δἐ πλήθωσι. I have written παρὰ πλέαι for παράπλειαι or παραπλεῖαι of nearly all the MSS. Vat. r and Vind. B have ε ι περιπλεῖαι, Cesenas M παράπλειαι (sic). παράπλειαι (which Howes l.c. p. 205 thinks Plato found in his text of Homer) is in reality a vox nihili; even if it did occur, it could not mean ‘almost full,’ as L. and S. say: and such a meaning would be ludicrously inappropriate here. With παρὰ δἐ πλέαι cf. Anacr. 94. 1 ed. Bergk κρητῆρι παρὰ πλέῳ οἰνοποτάζων. See my article in Cl. Rev. XI p. 349.

λιμῷ δ) ‐‐ ἐπισπεῖν . Od. XII 342.

ἢ Δία ‐‐ ἐπιλανθανόμενον . μόνος ἐγρηγορώς refers to Il. II 1—4: the incident itself is narrated in Il. XIV 294 ff. For the postponement of the relative ἅ cf. IV 425 C. The effect is to throw emphasis on μόνος ἐγρηγορώς—that Zeus should forget what he had purposely kept awake to devise makes the scandal all the worse —and brings it into sharper contrast with καθενδόντων—ἀνθρώπων. ὡς must be taken with ἐπιλανθανόμενον, the construction being ἢ ποιεῖν Δία ὡς ἐπιλανθανόμενον: cf. II 383 A. Stallbaum explains ὡς μόνος ἐγρηγορώς as “ut solus vigil”: while J. and C. supply ἀκούειν after ἤ. Neither view seems to me at all satisfactory. The text has been often called in question. Instead of ὡς Hermann reads καί: Herwerden and Richards suggest ὅσα (dropping ἅ before ἐβουλεύσατο). The best emendation is perhaps Jackson's εἷς for ὡς (Journal of Phil. IV p. 147), but I see no good reason why ὡς cannot be construed with ἐπιλανθανόμενον. The pause which on this view is necessary after ὡς helps still further to increase the stress on μόνος ἐγρηγορώς, which Plato certainly intended to emphasize.

βουλόμενον ‐‐ τοκῆας . βουλόμενον is not otiose after ἐθέλειν (as Hartman alleges): ‘to wish’ (βούλεσθαι) and ‘to be willing’ (ἐθέλειν) are different ideas. The same critic also rejects καί before λέγοντα “quia ea verba excusationem τοῦ ἐθέλειν humi consuescere continent”; but it is more effective to represent so gross an utterance as an additional part of the picture. For φοιτᾶν πρός cf. Lys. I 15, 19. where the meaning is the same. Herwerden should not have wished to replace the preposition by παρά. In Homer the line εἰς εὐνὴν φοιτῶντε φίλους λήθοντε τοκῆας (Il. XIV 296) is not said by Zeus, as Plato—doubtless intentionally, to increase the effect—makes it appear to be.

Ἄρεως ‐‐ δεσμόν . Od. VIII 266 ff. δεσμόν is still under the government of πο<*>εῖν.

καὶ λέγονται καὶ πράττονται κτλ. : ‘are either described or done by famous men’ etc.: described e.g. in poetry by Homer's heroes, or done in actual life before our eyes. θεατέον refers to πράττονται, ἀκουστέον to λέγονται by the usual chiasmus. J. and C. translate “performed by famous men or told concerning them,” understanding περὶ ἐλλογίμων ἀνδρῶν with λέγονται, but this cannot be right.

στῆθος δὲ ‐‐ ἔτλης . Odysseus in Od. XX 17, 18.

δωροδόκους κτλ. The excessive love of money is a sign of ἀκράτεια: so that its mention here is relevant enough, although the vice was not specifically named in 389 D.

δῶρα ‐‐ βασιλῆας : an old saying attributed by some to Hesiod (οἱ μὲν Ἡσιόδειον οἴονται τὸν στίχον Suidas s. vv. δῶρα κτλ.). It is referred to by Eur. Med. 964 πείθειν δῶρα καὶ θεοὺς λόγος. Cf. Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. II p. 64.

συμβουλεύων . Il. IX 515 ff. The gentitive μήνιος, for which a few MSS read μήνιδος, is natural in paraphrasing Homer. Cf. the form Θάλεω in X 600 A.

οὐδ’ ὁμολογήσομεν . “Dele futile interpretamentum” exclaims Hartman. The words are genuine, and add a new point: cf. 391 A φάναι καὶ ἄλλων λεγόντων πείθεσθαι.

δῶρα λαβεῖν . Il. XIX 278 ff. Plato is unjust to Achilles: see ib. 147 ff. (J. and C.).

τιμὴν κτλ. Il. XXIV 502, 555, 594.

ἄλλως ‐‐ ἐθέλειν is again unfair: see Il. l.c. 560.

ἔβλαψας ‐‐ παρείη . Il. XXII 15, 20.

ποταμόν . Scamander: Il. XXI 130—132, 212—226, 233 ff.

καὶ αὖ κτλ . ὡς should be repeated with ἔφη (J. and C.). Herwerden rejects both τοῦ and Σπερχειοῦ, the former because he thinks the article would suggest the Simois. Why should it not specify the other river towards which Achilles (according to Plato) shewed insubordination? Plato (as Hartman remarks) has just as much right to mention the river's name as that of Achilles' tutor (390 E). The reference is to Il. XXIII 140—151. Although the locks were ‘sacred to Spercheius,’ the vow was nevertheless conditional on Achilles' safe return, which he knew was hopeless. This is the reason which Achilles gives for offering his locks to the shade of Patroclus rather than to Spercheius: ib. 150. ὀπάσαιμι—‘suffer me to give’—is in reality a prayer to the Spercheius.

Ἕκτορος ἕλξεις . Il. XXIV 14 ff.

σφαγάς Il. XXIII 175 ff.

τρίτου ἀπὸ Διός . Peleus' father, Aeacus, was son of Zeus.

μηδὲ ‐‐ μηδέ . Bekker read μήτε— μήτε; but μηδὲ τάδε is of course ne haec quidem.

ὥρμησαν ‐‐ ἁρπαγάς . Pi rithous assisted Theseus to abduct Helen: and Theseus Pirithous in his attempt to carry off Persephone from the lower world. οὕτως belongs to δεινάς: the order is regular and idiomatic: cf. Ap. 36 A, Symp. 192 C al. Sophocles and Euripides each wrote a play called ‘Theseus’: but Plato is probably alluding to some epic Theseis. Cf. Kinkel Epic. Gr. Frag. p. 217.

αὐτά is censured by Heller, who conjectures τοιαῦτα, while Hartman keeps αὐτά but rejects ἔργα. Stallbaum says we should expect ταῦτα for αὐτά: but ταῦτα would be too precise. αὐτά means simply ‘the actions in question.’ Cf. I 339 E note The turn of the sentence recalls II 380 A ἢ οὐ θεοῦ ἔργα ἐατέον αὐτὰ λέγειν ἢ κτλ. Cf. also infra 408 C.

κακά . Hartman approves Cobet's conjecture κακούς, “cum γεννᾶν hic translaticiam vim non obtineat.” Why not? Cf. κακὰ γίγνεσθαι just below. κακούς would be extremely tame and commonplace.

ἐν τοῖς πρόσθεν . II 378 B, 380 C.

ἄρα : II 358 C note

οἱ ‐‐ δαιμόνων . From Aeschylus' Niobe: see Dindorf Fr. 155. The passage is also quoted in part by Strabo (XII 8. 21), from whom it appears that Niobe is the speaker, and that οἱ θεῶν ἀγχίσποροι are her father Tantalus and his kindred (οἱ περὶ Τάνταλον). ὧν—αἰθέρι means ‘whose is the altar to ancestral Zeus on Mount Ida high in heaven,’ i.e. their θεὸς πατρῷος is Zeus (who was Tantalus' father), and they worship him on the heights of Ida. Tantalus' territory extended to Ida: see Strabo l.c. ὁ Τάνταλος λέγει σπείρω δ’ ἄρουραν δώδεχ’ ἡμερῶν ὁδόν, | Βερέκυντα χῶρον, ἔνθ’ Ἀδραστείας ἕδος | Ἴδη τε μυκηθμοῖσι καὶ βρυχήμασιν | πρέπουσι μήλων. For ὧν κατ’ Ἰδαῖον πάγον Strabo has οἷς ἐν Ἰδαίῳ πάγῳ, a much inferior reading. καί before οὔπω may be Plato's (so Stallbaum and others),—in which case the last line is from a different part of the play,—but is much more likely to come from Aeschylus, the resolution of κοὔπω being due to Plato. The line follows naturally on the others, and is not sufficiently important to have been selected from a different context. The verses are complete in themselves, and present a stately picture of the sons of the gods, which is the only reason why they are cited here.

—C So much for legends about gods, heroes, daemons, and the unseen world: it remains to determine what shall be said about men. But on this subject we cannot lay down rules until we have discovered the nature of Justice, and proved that Justice benefits the just, apart from all appearances.

τί οὖν κτλ. This is the ἀληθὲς εἶδος λόγων. Plato has prescribed canons for the ψευδεῖς λόγοι or legends about gods etc.; but rules for ἀληθεῖς λόγοι, i.e. λόγοι relating to men and human affairs, cannot be drawn up without begging the conclusion which the Republic seeks to establish. See also on II 376 E.

ἡμῖν . See cr. n. Without ἡμῖν, we should have τοῖς λόγων πέρι ὁριζομένοις. I agree with Hartman and the majority of editors in retaining the word. See Introd. § 5.

ἀδύνατον δή . For δή Stallbaum approves Ast's conjecture δέ. δέ would be too weak, if the meaning were adversative, but it is not. δή is only ‘well’: cf. II 368 A (Schneider).

καὶ ποιηταὶ καὶ λογοποιοί . On λογοποιοί see II 365 E note; and for the statement itself Laws 660 E ff., 662 B.

ἀλλότριον ‐‐ ἀγαθόν . I 343 C note

ζητοῦμεν . Stallbaum's conjecture —see cr. n.—is now generally accepted. ἐζητοῦμεν would imply that the discussion had changed, but it has not. Cf. IV 420 C ὃ πάλαι ζητοῦμεν.

τότε διομολογησόμεθα κτλ. This is not “an ironical or fanciful excuse for varying the order of the subject” (J. and C.), for if Socrates declared at this stage that justice is a good for its possessor he would in point of fact be presupposing the results of the whole investigation. See IX 588 B—592 B. Others (e.g. Hirzel der Dialog p. 237 note) have taken τότε διομολογησόμεθα as a hint of the additional discussion on Poetry in Book X: but there is nothing either here or in that book to justify any such interpretation. Cf. X 595 A note What Plato's regulations about λόγοι περὶ ἀνθρώπων would have been may be easily gathered from the end of Book IX and X 608 C ff., although the subject is nowhere specifically and expressly resumed in the Republic. Cf. I 347 E note

392C - 394D We have now finished our treatment of the subject-matter of poetry, and have next to discuss its form. All composition is in a certain sense narrative, narrating things past, present or future. Narration in this sense may be either (1) simple and unmixed, (2) imitative, (3) both simple and imitative. Homer furnishes an example of the third kind: his poetry is purely narrative, when he is speaking in propria persona, it is imitative, when he puts his words into the mouth of any of his characters. Tragedy and Comedy exemplify the imitative style. The best example of the purely narrative is the Dithyramb, of the third or mixed variety, the Epic. Which of these forms shall we admit, and on what occasions?

ff. That Poetry and Art are a species of μίμησις, was an accepted canon in Greece even before the time of Plato: see Butcher Aristotle's Theory of Poetry and Fine Art^{2} p. 121. Starting from this principle, Plato gradually deepens and intensifies the connotation of μίμησις as the dialogue advances. At first, the word denotes a specific variety of style— the dramatic as opposed to the narrative (392 D—394 D). But as according to Plato style is at once the expression of, and also exercises a reflex influence on, the soul (400 D note), μίμησις begins to assume an ethical import and is used to express imitation or assimilation in matters appertaining to or bearing upon character and conduct (394 E, 395 C notes: cf. also 401 B—404 C). Finally, in Book X, after the psychological point of view has been superseded by the metaphysical, the word acquires an ontological or metaphysical significance: see on X 595 C. On the subject generally, reference may be made to the dissertation of Abeken de μιμήσεως apud Platonem et Aristotelem notione.

τὸ δὲ λέξεως . Hartman approves the variant τὰ δὲ λέξεως: but the subject of λέξις is better treated as a unity until it has been subdivided.

μυθολόγων ἢ ποιητῶν . μυθολόγων is said so as to include writers of μῦθοι in prose: cf. 394 B and II 365 E note

ὥσπερ οὖν κτλ. Plato means that poor speakers cannot grapple with an abstract notion, but use a part of it, i.e. a concrete example. οὐ κατὰ ὅλον κτλ. may be illustrated from Symp. 205 B, C.

καὶ ἐλίσσετο ‐‐ λαῶν . Il. I 15, 16. Leaf. reads λίσσετο because “λίσσομαι apparently had a second initial consonant, and is never preceded by a short vowel.” The word had probably been Atticised by Plato's time.

δοκεῖν ‐‐ ὄντα . δοκεῖν is here ‘to fancy’ not ‘to seem.’ Contrast II 381 E ἡμῖν δὲ ποιοῦσι δοκεῖν σφᾶς παντοδαποὺς φαίνεσθαι—a passage which is cited by Hartman to justify ποιῆσαι as against the variant πεῖσαι.

περί τε τῶν ‐‐ παθημάτων . This clause is rejected by Herwerden. The difficulty—which lies in the collocation of Ἰθάκῃ the place and Ὀδυσσείᾳ the poem—is no doubt lessened by reading (with Richards) καὶ ἐν or κἀν before ὅλῃ, but does not wholly disappear. Possibly the last twelve books of the Odyssey, in which the scene is Ithaca, were sometimes known collectively as Ἰθάκη.

, E 23 ὅτι ἦλθεν ‐‐ βασιλέων paraphrases Il. I 12—16.

ὡς Χρύσης γενόμενος : ‘as if he had been transformed into Chryses,’ not merely ‘in the person of Chryses’ (Jowett). In ‘simple narrative’ he is Homer: when Chryses begins to speak, he becomes Chryses. Cf. 393 B ὥσπερ αὐτὸς ὢν ὁ Χρύσης (‘as if he himself were Chryses’).

ἐλθὼν ‐‐ αἰδεσθέντας . Il. I 17—21. The emphatic αὐτοὺς accurately represents Homer's ὑμῖν μέν. For λῦσαι H. Wolf conjectured ἀπολῦσαι; but Plato is closely following Homer, who has λύσαιτε. τὸν θεόν is Apollo.

ταῦτα δὲ ‐‐ βέλεσιν . Il. I 22— 42. The paraphrasis is accurate, and Plato leaves nothing essential out. There is no sign that his text differed from ours in this passage.

μὴ ‐‐ οὐκ ἐπαρκέσοι . ἐπαρκέσοι presupposes ἐπαρκέσει in the narratio recta: Homer has μή νύ τοι οὐ χραίσμῃ σκῆπτρον καὶ στέμμα θεοῖο. It is usual to regard this sentence as final: if so, it is the solitary instance in Plato where the future after a final μή must be admitted. See Weber in Schanz's Beiträge II 2, p. 60 and Goodwin MT. pp. 45, 91. The nearest parallel is Euthyph. 15 D ἀλλὰ καὶ τοὺς θεοὺς ἂν ἔδεισας παρακινδυνεύειν, μὴ οὐκ ὀρθῶς αὐτὸ ποιήσοις, where μή depends on a verb of fearing. It is better, both in point of grammar and of sense, to regard this sentence also as expressing apprehension (‘for fear lest’), although no verb of fearing is present. It is not final in any proper sense of the word. Bekker read ἐπαρκέσειε, saying that Θ has ἐπαρκέσειεν.

μὴ ἐρεθίζειν . Valckenaer's conjecture μή ἑ ἐρεθιζειν (μή μ’ ἐρέθιζε in Homer) is attractive in view of τὰ ἃ δάκρυα in 394 A for Homer's ἐμὰ δάκρυα, and because it provides an object for ἐρεθίζειν. Plato uses the pronoun tolerably often (e.g. in I 327 B, X 617 E, Symp. 175 C, 223 B): other Attic writers seldom, if ever (Kühner-Blass Gr. d. Gr. Spr. I p. 592). It is not however clear that ἐρεθίζειν could not be used without an object expressed, and I therefore revert to the MS reading.

ἐν ναῶν οἰκοδομήσεσιν shews that Plato understood Homer's ἔρεψα (εἴ ποτέ τοι χαρίεντ’ ἐπὶ νηὸν ἔρεψα) of building. According to Leaf, ἔρεψα seems to denote the most primitive form of temple —“a mere roof to protect the image of a god standing in a grove.”

τεῖσαι ‐‐ βέλεσιν . Ἀχαιούς is of course the subject to τεῖσαι (‘pay for,’ ‘expiate’): in Homer it is τίσειαν Δαναοὶ ἐμὰ δάκρυα σοῖσι βέλεσσιν. The translation ‘that he would avenge his tears upon the Achaeans’ (D. and V.) is wrong. ἅ is apparently a solitary instance of ὅς=‘suus’ in Attic prose (Kühner-Blass l.c. I 1, p. 602). Plato chooses the word because it expresses Homer's ἐμά briefly and neatly, rather than from any conscious desire to make the paraphrase archaic.

τραγῳδίας . Adimantus quotes a single concrete instance—‘tragedies’—to shew that he now apprehends the meaning of μίμησις. Socrates, out of politeness and because he wishes to make progress, interprets this as a recognition of the imitative character of Tragedy and Comedy in general (ὥσπερ σὺ λέγεις τραγῳδία τε καὶ κωμῳδία), as in point of fact it virtually is. ὥσπερ σὺ λέγεις is not true in the beggarly literal sense of λέγειν, but it is sufficiently so for polite conversation. To insert—with Herwerden and Hartman—τε καὶ κωμῳδίας after τραγῳδίας seems to me unnecessary and pedantic.

εὕροις δ) ἂν ‐‐ διθυράμβοις . The dithyramb was at first purely narrative or nearly so; it afterwards became mimetic (Arist. Probl. XIX 15. 918^{b} 19). Only one of Pindar's dithyrambic fragments appears to be ‘mimetic’ (Frag. 74). On the growth and decline of the Dithyramb see Smyth Greek Melic Poets pp. xliii—lviii.

τε ‐‐ δὲ καί . II 367 C note

εἴ μοι μανθάνεις : ‘if I can make you understand,’ with reference to μανθάνω in 392 C, 394 B, C. Heindorf's εἴ μου μανθάνεις (as in Phil. 51 C) is attractive, but the corruption is not easy to explain, and the MS reading is sufficiently defended by I 343 A ὅς γε αὐτῇ οὐδὲ πρόβατα—γιγνώσκεις (so also Hartman).

τοῦτο ‐‐ αὐτό refers to ὅτι χρείη— μιμεῖσθαι, and ἔλεγον is ‘was saying’ i.e. ‘was trying to say,’ viz. when I digressed.

εἴτε παραδεξόμεθα κτλ. Krohn (Pl. St. p. 13) declares this passage to be inconsistent with II 373 B, where ὑποκριταί, χορευταί, ἐργολάβοι are admitted. He forgets or ignores the fact that in § 373 Plato is describing the τρυφῶσα πόλις, which he is now engaged in ‘purging’ (399 E). See II 372 D note

ἴσως δὲ ‐‐ τούτων . In this remark J. and C. find “an anticipation of the condemnation of epic poetry in Book X.” I cannot see that it does more than prepare the way for ἀλλ’ ὅπῃ ἂν—ἰτέον. See on X 595 A.

394E - 397D Our guardians must not be prone to imitation. We have agreed that one man can do but one thing well, and it is impossible for one man even to imitate two things aright, as we may see from the special instances of poetical composition and acting. The sole duty of our guardians is to make and keep the city free; if they practise imitation at all, their models must be such as are appropriate to the free—that is to say, men of brave and virtuous character, for imitation means assimilation. Dramatic poetry continually offends against this canon. In general, the good man will not make use of imitation except when he is narrating the sayings or deeds of the virtuous, or some lapse of the vicious into virtue, or sometimes in mere play. His style of speech will combine plain narrative and imitation, but he will use the latter sparingly; whereas the bad man will imitate more often than narrate, and no kind of imitation will come amiss to him. In respect of mode and time, the language of Virtue will be nearly uniform, that of Vice varied.

πότερον μιμητικοὺς κτλ. The question is not ‘Are our guardians to become dramatic poets?’ but ‘Are they to have the imitative habit of mind?’ The answer is in the negative, and the drama is banished because it fosters this habit in spectators. Cf. 395 D note

ὅτι ‐‐ πολλὰ δ) οὔ explains τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν, as Hartman points out, and not τοῦτο, as D. and V. translate. ἔμπροσθεν refers to II 370 B.

πολλῶν κτλ. suggests, perhaps intentionally, πόλλ’ ἠπίστατο ἔργα, κακῶς δ’ ἠπίστατο πάντα. The words ὥστ’ — ἐλλόγιμος—equivalent to a neuter accusative—are undeservedly cancelled by Herwerden and Hartman. Translate ‘he will fail in all of them to attain creditable distinction’: cf. the adverb κακῶς in κακῶς δ’ ἠπίστατο πάντα.

οὐκοῦν κτλ. The reasoning is a fortiori: if two or more departments of merely imitative art cannot be represented by the same person, still less can imitation be combined with any serious pursuit (σχολῇ ἄρα κτλ.).

οὐδὲ τὰ δοκοῦντα ‐‐ ποιοῦντες . The reverse is affirmed by Socrates in Symp. 223 D τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀνδρὸς εἶναι κωμῳδίαν καὶ τραγῳδίαν ἐπίστασθαι ποιεῖν, καὶ τὸν τέχνῃ τραγῳδοποιὸν ὄντα καὶ κωμῳδοποιὸν εἶναι. The solution is that in the Symposium Socrates is applying to the drama the Socratic principle μία ἐπιστήμη s. δύναμις τῶν ἐναντίων: theoretically, therefore, and ideally, the tragedian is also capable of writing a comedy. In the Republic, on the other hand, he is describing Greek dramatic art as he found it: for which reason he writes δύνανται and not δύναιντ’ ἄν (a corruption in v, wrongly adopted by Stallbaum). Cf. Ion 534 C. Aristophanes did not write tragedy, nor the tragedians comedy. The passage in the Symposium is interesting as an unconscious prophecy of the Shakespearian drama. Cf. Reber Plato u. d. Poesie p. 11.

μιμήματα . See cr. n. Former editors variously read μιμήματα or μιμήματε. Either is admissible, so far as concerns the Greek, but the plural was perhaps— owing to the proximity of τούτω—somewhat more likely to be corrupted to the dual in this instance than vice versâ. Cf. X 614 C δύο—χάσματα ἐχομένω ἀλλήλοιν with note ad loc. The reading μιμήματά τε represents the correction μιμήματα. This is, I think, a somewhat simpler view than to suppose that an original μιμήματε became μιμήματέ τε by dittography, and τέ was afterwards changed to τά. Roeper, however, pronounces in favour of the dual (de dual. usu Pl. p. 14), and it must be admitted that duals are peculiarly liable to corruption in the MSS of the Republic. See Introd. § 5.

ῥαψῳδοί ‐‐ ὑποκριταί . Even ῥαψῳδοί seem to have generally confined themselves to a particular poet: see Ion 531 C, 536 B.

ἀλλ) οὐδὲ ‐‐ οἱ αὐτοί . This was true without exception till comparatively late times: see Müller Gr. Bühnenalt. pp. 185—188. κωμῳδοῖς and τραγῳδοῖς (literally ‘at the tragedians’ etc.) are local—almost adverbial—datives, regularly used to denote the exhibitions of comedies and tragedies: see e.g. Arist. Eth. Nic. IV 6. 1123^{a}23, Aesch. in Ctes. 36, and cf. the Latin use of ‘gladiatoribus’ for ‘at a gladiatorial show.’

, C 11 ἢ αὐτὰ ἐκεῖνα πράττειν . καλῶς should be repeated with πράττειν, and ἤ is simply ‘or,’ not ‘or else.’ The alternative rendering given by J. and C. ‘or else—if able to imitate—is not able to do the things themselves,’ does violence to both grammar and sense.

δημιουργοὺς ἐλευθερίας . An artificial and somewhat strained expression, selected in order at once to compare and contrast the guardians with other artists. They too are artists, and their ἔργον is Freedom. To ἐλευθερία Plato attaches his own meaning: true freedom lies in the subordination of the lower to the higher, both in private conduct and in political life: cf. Xen. Mem. I 2. 5, 6 and infra IX 577 D, E, X 617 E notes It is in this sense that ἐλευθέρους is used below.

τούτοις : viz. τοῖς δημιουργοῖς ἐλευθερίας τῆς πόλεως.

ἵνα μὴ ‐‐ ἀπολαύσωσιν reveals the object of this attack upon the drama: cf. II 383 C and infra 401 B. An admirable illustration of the sentiment is quoted by Susemihl from Plut. Sol. 29. 6 μετὰ δὲ τὴν θέαν προσαγορεύσας (sc. ὁ Σόλων ) αὐτὸν (viz. τὸν Θέσπιν) ἠρώτησεν, εἰ τοσούτων ἐναντίον οὐκ αἰσχύνεται τηλικαῦτα ψευδόμενος. φήσαντος δὲ τοῦ Θέσπιδος μὴ δεινὸν εἷναι τὸ μετὰ παιδιᾶς λέγειν τοιαῦτα καὶ πράσσειν, σφόδρα τῇ βακτηρίᾳ τὴν γῆν ὁ Σόλων πατάξας Ταχὺ μέντοι τὴν παιδιάν, ἔφη, ταύτην ἐπαινοῦντες καὶ τιμῶντες εὑρήσομεν ἐν τοῖς συμβολαίοις. To omit μή (with A and a few other MSS), and govern ἵνα by μιμεῖσθαι above is grammatically difficult, and gives an unsatisfactory sense. The genitive τοῦ εἶναι has been called in question by Hartman (following Ast) on the ground that “qui τοῦ εἶναι (sc. αἰσχροὶ) ἀπολαύσωσιν iam sunt turpitudine infecti.” This would be true, if Plato had written the present ἀπολαύωσιν, but the aorist is ingressive, and τοῦ εἶναι ἀπολαύσωσιν is virtually equivalent to γένωνται τοῦθ) <*> μιμοῦνται. Few will acquiesce in Ast's conjecture τὸ εἶναι, or in Stallbaum's view that τοῦ εἶναι is a partitive genitive.

καὶ κατὰ σῶμα ‐‐ διάνοιαν . For σῶμα Stallbaum conjectured σχῆμα, but Plato would surely have said σχήματα, as in 397 B. Hartman boldly ejects κατὰ φωνάς and reads καὶ κατὰ <τὸ> σῶμα καὶ κατὰ τὴν διάνοιαν, remarking that κατὰ τὸ σῶμα by itself includes “gestus, habitus, vocem, vultum, similia.” This is in a sense true, but there is no reason why one particular instance of physical resemblance should not be selected for special remark. Plato differentiates the external from the internal characteristics by combining σῶμα and φωνάς under a single preposition, and repeating κατά before τὴν διάνοιαν.

αὐτούς . For αὐτούς following ὧν see on II 357 B. The rule against the repetition of the relative in such cases is sometimes dispensed with for the sake of rhetorical emphasis, e.g. in II 374 B and perhaps Theaet. 192 B.

μιμεῖσθαι . In what sense can the guardians be said to ‘imitate’ in such a case, or in those specified in 396 A, B? Not as actors, but as spectators. Acting involves three elements—the character, the actor, and the spectator. In good acting the spectator identifies himself with the actor through sympathy; and as the actor ‘imitates,’ so does he. Such is Plato's theory, though merely glanced at here. Cf. X 605 C ff., Ion 533 D ff., and see the excellent remarks of Nettleship Lectures and Remains II pp. 100—104.

ἢ ἀνδρὶ κτλ. ἀνδρί is of course ‘husband,’ not simply ‘a man’ (D. and V.). Contemporary comedy doubtless furnished abundant illustrations. In πρὸς θεοὺς ἐρίζουσαν κτλ. Plato may be thinking of Aeschylus' Niobe (see on II 380 A). The emphasis on οἰομένην should be noted: cf. I 336 A note

κάμνουσαν ‐‐ ὠδίνουσαν glances at Euripides and his school: cf. Ar. Frogs 1043, 1044 and 1080, with the Scholiast's remark on 1080 ἔγραψε γὰρ (ὁ Εὐριπίδης) τὴν Αὔγην ὠδίνουσαν ἐν ἱερῷ. Plato's strictures throughout this passage tell much more heavily against Euripides than against the other two dramatists.

ἢ καὶ ἄλλα . ἄλλα must be coordinated with αἰσχρολογοῦντας, not with νήφοντας, so that Hartman's correction (καί for ἢ καί), though scarcely necessary, is an improvement, and may be right.

μαινομένοις . As in the Eumenides, Ajax, Hercules Furens.

γνωστέον κτλ. cf. 409 A.

μιμητέον . See on μιμεῖσθαι 395 D.

ἵππους ‐‐ βροντάς . The reference is probably to stage machinery and musical effects etc. in dramatic poetry generally, as well as in the later and degenerate form of the dithyramb (see on 394 C). Cf. (with Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II p. 105) Laws 669 C ff. and Ar. Plut. 290 ff. The βροντεῖον and κεραυνοσκοπεῖον for producing thunder and lightning were familiar enough (Müller Gr. Bühnenalt. p. 157 note 2). It is clear, as Nettleship remarks, that “Plato felt strongly that Greek literature and music were declining” in his days: see Laws 659 A ff., 700 A ff., 797 A ff.

ὁ μὲν ‐‐ ἀνήρ . It seems difficult (as Schneider remarked) either to connect ὁ μέν with μέτριος ἀνήρ, or to understand ὁ μέν as ‘the one’ and suppose that μέτριος ἀνήρ is in apposition to it. If the latter alternative is right, we should expect μέτριος < ὢν > ἀνήρ, or < ὁ > μέτριος ἀνήρ, and in view of other cases in which the article is placed at some distance from its noun (e.g. ὁ δέ γε, οἶμαι, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, καταληφθεὶς θανάτῳ δίδοται VIII 566 C), I still prefer the former view. Some may be inclined to regard μέτριος ἀνήρ as a gloss. I have sometimes been tempted to make μοι δοκεῖ parenthetical (exactly=‘methinks’), in which case ὁ μέν can easily be connected with μέτριος. The idiom occurs in Phaed. 108 D ὁ βίος μοι δοκεῖ ὁ ἐμός—τῷ μήκει τοῦ λόγου οὐκ ἐξαρκεῖ and Menex. 236 B: cf. also Crito 43 D, 50 B, and I 332 E note This solution would involve the change of ἐθελήσειν to ἐθελήσει—so v—and of αἰσχυνεῖσθαι to αἰσχυνεῖται just below, as well as again in D. Such a corruption, once started, ἔρχεται—as Plato might say —ὡς κύκλος αὐξανομένη; but I do not venture to change the text.

καὶ ἧττον is not superfluous with ἐλάττω. ἐλάττω means ‘in fewer respects,’ and ἧττον ‘to a less degree.’

σπουδῇ . Cf. ὅ τι μὴ παιδιᾶς χάριν in E and σπουδῇ 397 A.

ὅ τι μὴ παιδιᾶς χάριν . Cf. VII 518 B.

οἵᾳ . According to Van Cleef (de Attract. usu Plat. p. 36), οἷος is not elsewhere attracted in Plato.

τῆς ἁπλῆς . See cr. n. The reading of the MSS τῆς ἄλλης ought strictly speaking to mean ‘the rest of διήγησις,’ i.e. besides μίμησις. A reference to 392 D will shew that the rest of διήγησις includes (1) simple διήγησις, (2) the mixed style. If the text is sound, Plato therefore says that the good man's λέξις will resemble Homer's in partaking of all three varieties. This is a cumbrous and unnecessary elaboration: for if style partakes both in μίμησις and in simple διήγησις, it is already ipso facto ‘mixed.’ To take ἄλλης as ‘besides’ may be admissible, but in any case it is desirable to define the kind of διήγησις meant. I believe that Plato wrote ἁπλῆς. The good man's style will resemble Homer's, which has already been said to partake of μίμησις (393 C) and of ἁπλῆ διήγησις (394 B). The corruption—common in uncial MSS—is illustrated by Bast Comment. Palaeogr. p. 730. Cf. my article in Cl. Rev. X pp. 384 f.

μέρος (as Schneider points out) depends on μετέχουσα: cf. Euthyd. 306 A ὦν ἀμφοτέρων μέρος μετέχουσι.

μιμήσεται . See cr. n. The choice of reading lies between this and Madvig's emendation <μιμήσεται ἢ> διηγήσεται. In favour of μιμήσεται is μᾶλλον, which correlates with ὅσῳ ἂν φαυλότερος ᾖ. The corruption doubtless arose from a misinterpretation of μᾶλλον. Thinking that an ἤ clause was needed to explain it, a scribe added ἢ διηγήσεται in the margin, and διηγήσεται was afterwards taken as a variant and ousted μιμήσεται. These arguments, which are Hartman's, seem to me conclusive in favour of μιμήσεται, which Schneider first restored.

σπουδῇ τε καὶ ἐναντίον πολλῶν : like the professional dramatist or actor.

τροχιλιῶν κτλ. Cf. supra 396 B note

σχήμασιν ‘gestures.’

ἔλεγον . 396 B, C.

πρὸς τὴν αὐτήν : sc. ἁρμονίαν, as Schneider saw. To supply λέξιν with Stallbaum, Hartman, and others is not satisfactory, nor is it easy to understand χορδήν (with Campbell). On the other hand ἁρμονίαν may be readily supplied in view of ἐν μιᾷ ἁρμονίᾳ following. ὁ λόγος qualifies τὴν αὐτήν. The somewhat vague expression πρὸς τὴν αὐτήν, where the musical sense of προς may be illustrated by πρὸς Λιβὺν λακεῖν | αὐλόν (Eur. Alc. 346), is afterwards made more explicit and precise by ἐν μιᾷ ἁρμονίᾳ i.e. ‘in one musical mode’ (see on 398 E), as opposed to πασῶν—ἁρμονιῶν in C. μεταβολή was technically used of passing from one ἁρμονία to another: see Cleonid. Isag. Harm. 13 and Bacchius Isag. 53 ed. von Jan. We shall best apprehend the full meaning of the whole passage if we read it in connexion with 399 A, B. The general sentiment may be illustrated from Arist. Eth. Nic. IV 8. 1125^{a} 12 ff. καὶ κίνησις δὲ βραδεῖα τοῦ μεγαλοψύχου δοκεῖ εἶναι, καὶ φωνὴ βαρεῖα, καὶ λέξις στάσιμος, Pl. Charm. 159 B, Dem. 37. 52 and elsewhere.

διὰ τὸ παντοδαπὰς ‐‐ ἔχειν . As the λέξις itself is full of variety, it requires for its proper or appropriate ( οἰκείως) expression every variety of mode and rhythm or musical time. μορφὰς τῶν μεταβολῶν is surely good enough Greek: I cannot see the point of Richards' μορφὰς ἐκ τῶν μεταβολῶν, still less why Hartman should eject τῶν μεταβολῶν or— as an alternative—μορφάς.

ἐπιτυγχ άνουσιν = ‘hit upon,’ ‘stumble upon,’ as if by accident and ἄνευ νοῦ, not ‘succeed,’ as J. B. Mayor is disposed to construe (Cl. Rev. X p. 109). The same scholar proposes to change ξυγκεραννύντες into ξυγκεκραμένῳ, but the text is much more idiomatic as it stands.

397D - 398B We shall therefore admit that style only which imitates the good man's way of speaking. The mixed and mimetic varieties do not suit us, for the character of our citizens is simple and uniform. Those poets who refuse to comply we will dismiss with compliments into another city.

τὸν ἕτερον : ‘one or other.’ Presently τοῦ ἐπιεικοῦς ‘the good man’ is said for ‘the good man's style of speaking’; see 398 B and cf. 399 B note Before ἄκρατον, many editors add τόν (with Ξ^{2}): but the position of ἄκρατον is normal: cf. τὰ ἐν ὕδασι φαντάσματα θεῖα VII 532 C and note ad loc.

παισί ‐‐ τῷ πλείστῳ ὄχλῳ . The expression recurs in Laws 700 C (quoted by J. and C.).

οὐκοῦν διὰ ταῦτα κτλ. There is probably a satirical reference to Athenian democracy: see Prot. 319 D.

αὐτός ‐‐ ἐπιδείξασθαι : ‘anxious to shew himself off together with his poems.’ ἐπιδείξασθαι is intransitive—i. q. ἐπίδειξιν ποιήσασθαι, cf. Lach. 179 E—with αὐτός, but transitive with ποιήματα. This explanation, which is due to Schneider, gives a much better sense than if we regard αὐτός τε καὶ τὰ ποιήματα as subject to ἀφίκοιτο, or translate ‘himself, and wanting to shew his poems’ (J. and C.). A reference to αὐτός τε καὶ τὸν ἀδελφὸν παρακάλει in IV 427 D is therefore hardly to the point.

προσκυνοῖμεν . The insertion of μέν, recommended by Shilleto (Dem. F. L. § 91) and Richards, is unnecessary: cf. I 340 D note For προσκυνεῖν ‘to kiss the hand’ (adorare), as to the image or shrine of a god, see Cope's Rhetoric of Aristotle Vol. I p. 86.

οὔτ) ἔστιν ‐‐ οὔτε θέμις . It is perhaps better to correct οὐκ into οὔτ)—see cr. n.—than the second οὔτε into οὐδέ (with Bekker and the other editors).

μύρον ‐‐ στέψαντες . The idea suggested by προσκυνοῖμεν and ἱερόν, that the poet is a sort of θεός or θεῖος ἀνήρ, is now elaborated with ironical politeness. The images of the gods were anointed, and crowned with garlands, not only on great occasions (cf. Cic. Verr. IV 77), but also at other times, according to Proclus, who remarks on this passage μύρον αὐτῆς (sc. τῆς ποιητικῆς ) καταχέας, ὡς τῶν ἐν τοῖς ἁγιωτάτοις ἱεροῖς ἀγαλμάτων θέμις, καὶ ὡς ἱερὰν στέψας αὐτήν, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐκεινα στέφειν ἦν νόμος (in remp. p. 42 ed. Kroll). Schneider aptly compares Paus. X 24. 6 τούτου (a sacred stone) καὶ ἔλαιον ὁσημέραι καταχέουσι καὶ κατὰ ἑορτὴν ἑκάστην ἔρια ἐπιτιθέασι τὰ ἀργά. For other illustrations see Frazer on Paus. l.c., and Munro on Lucr. v 1199. Apropos of the present passage, Dio Chrysostom and other ancient writers cited by Ast refer to the anointing of swallows by Greek women: καὶ κελεύει μάλα εἰρωνικῶς (so Ast: MSS εἰρηνικῶς) στέψαντας αὐτὸν ἐρίῳ καὶ μύρῳ καταχέαντας ἀφιέναι παρ’ ἄλλους· τοῦτο δὲ αἱ γυναῖκες ἐπὶ τῶν χελιδόν ων ποιοῦσι (Dio Chr. Or. 53 p. 276 ed. Reiske). To this custom Ast supposes that Plato is alluding, the poets being as it were faithless and garrulous swallows (cf. χελιδόνων μουσεῖα), as well as to the Pythagorean precept ‘not to admit swallows into the house’ (Plut. Symp. VIII 727 B ff.), on which see Frazer in Cl. Rev. V pp. 1—3. This explanation lends an additional point to ἀποπέμποιμεν: and προσκυνοῖμεν might fairly be interpreted of the joyful salutations with which the Greeks hailed the advent of the swallow in the spring (see e.g. Baumeister Denk. d. Kl. Alterth. p. 1985). G. B. Hussey (Proceedings of the American Philol. Association Vol. XXII pp. xliii ff.) thinks that Plato has in his mind the wellknown χελιδονισμός of which we read in Athenaeus (VIII 360 B ff.), remarking that in the swallow song ‘the custom seems to have been to carry some sort of symbolic swallow from house to house.’ It is perhaps more probable (as Mr J. G. Frazer suggests to me) that “the ceremony of anointing the swallows and crowning them with wool was performed on the children who went from door to door in spring, singing the swallow song and apparently personating the swallow.” But the tone of the whole passage, with its air of studiously exaggerated politeness and compliment, as well as the particular expressions προσκυνοῖμεν, ἱερόν, and θαυμαστόν, are strongly in favour of Proclus' interpretation, although Plato's thoughts may have dwelt for a moment on the practices connected with the χελιδονισμός when he wrote the words ἀποπέμποιμεν— στέψαντες.

κατ’ ἀρχάς . II 379 A ff.

398C - 399E We have now to treat of lyric poetry. Song involves three factors, viz. words, a certain musical mode, and a certain movement or time. Our regulations about words when unaccompanied by music apply equally to words when sung, and the musical mode and time must conform to the words. Now we proscribed all lamentation in our city, so that we must exclude the lugubrious modes; and those which are relaxing in their effects must be rejected on similar grounds. In short, we shall retain two modes and no more, one to imitate the brave man's utterances in times of stress and strain, the other to imitate his accents in seasons of peace and calm. We shall deal similarly with instruments of music, forbidding all those which lend themselves to a variety of modes. It is thus that we purge our ‘luxurious city.’

τὸ περὶ ᾠδῆς κτλ. The discussion has hitherto confined itself chiefly to tragedy and comedy. It remains to discuss lyrical poetry also on its formal side. Now the chief formal characteristic of lyric poetry is its invariable association with music. It is therefore necessary to lay down canons for musical composition. This is the justification for the sections on ‘harmony’ and rhythm, which are wrongly pronounced to be irrelevant by Krohn (Pl. St. p. 15).

The present section, and its ancient commentators (Arist. Pol. Θ 7. 1342^{a} 28— 1342^{b} 34, Plut. de Mus. cc. 15—17, Aristid. Quint. I pp. 21, 22 ed. Meibom), have been fully discussed by Westphal (Gr. Harmonik pp. 187-234). Westphal's views have been combatted by C. von Jan (see especially his article Die Tonarten bei Platon in dritten Buche der Republik in Fl. Jahrb. 1867 pp. 815 ff. and 1883, pp. 1354—1362 and 1568—1579), and more recently (in other respects) by Monro in his ‘Modes of ancient Greek Music.’ The last edition of the Harmonik (1886) contains Westphal's reply to von Jan's criticism (pp. 209—215). See also von Jan in Baumeister's Denkmäler d. Kl. Alt. pp. 976 ff., Susemihl and Hicks The Politics of Aristotle Vol. I pp. 595 ff. and 624—631, and H. S. Jones and Monro in the Cl. Rev. VIII pp. 448—454 and IX pp. 79—81. The writers in Meibom's Antiquae Musicae auctores septem have now been re-edited—Aristoxenus by Marquard (Berlin 1868), Aristides Quintilianus by A. Jahn (Berlin 1882), Alypius and others by von Jan in his Musici Scriptores Graeci (Lipsiae 1895), where also the passages of Aristotle bearing on the subject are carefully collected, together with all the extant remains of Greek Music. The account of Die Musik der Griechen by Gleditsch in Iwan Müller's Handbuch will be found a useful and compendious introduction to the study of this part of the Republic. Von Kralik's recent monograph Altgriechische Musik (Stuttgart und Wien) is interesting, but too slight to be of much service. Taken by itself, the language of Plato in this chapter seems to me to point to the existence of four leading or simple modes, viz. Dorian, Phrygian, Lydian and Ionian (the last two having each two varieties, a σύντονος and a χαλαρά), and one composite mode, the Mixolydian. See App. II.

τρόπου . Hartman suggests τρόπον, in view of τὸ περὶ ῥυθμούς 399 E; but cf. 392 C. τρόπος is not here used in its technical sense, for which see Monro l. c. p. 63.

συμφωνήσειν . The metaphor may be suggested by the subject under discussion: cf. Phaed. 92 C.

λόγου ‐‐ ῥυθμοῦ . In the best period of Greek music, lyric poetry was written only for music, and music only for poetry, the separation of the two being condemned as illegitimate: see Monro l.c. pp. 119, 120. The elements of music are ῥυθμός and ἀρμονία. The former ‘reconciles’ ταχύ and βραδύ by arranging a proper sequence of short and long notes and syllables, the latter ὀξύ and βαρύ by a proper arrangement of notes of higher and lower pitch ( Symp. 187 A—C). In the wider sense, therefore, any ὁμολογία of ὀξύ and βαρὐ is a ἁρμονία, but in practice the word was used specifically of certain scales or modes, and it is in this sense (according to Westphal) that Plato uses it here and in 398 E, where see note.

ὡσαύτως : i.e. ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ λέξει as defined in 396 E, 397 D.

καὶ μὴν κτλ. The poet should be his own musician, and write the music to suit the words, not vice versá. This was another characteristic feature of classical Greek music, although a change set in during the fourth century B.C. See Westphal Gr. Rhythmik p. 1 and Laws 669 D, E, 812 D.

ἁρμονίαι (according to the orthodox view) are ‘musical modes’ and not simply ‘keys.’ They differed from each other both in the arrangement of the intervals (like our major and minor modes) and also in pitch. It must have been the former difference which chiefly —though not perhaps exclusively—accounted for the different effects of different modes upon the character and emotions, just as we are ourselves affected in different ways by music written in major and in minor keys. See H. S. Jones in Cl. Rev. VIII p. 449.

μιξολυδιστὶ κτλ. The omission of the article has been questioned, but in merely naming the scales it can be dispensed with: cf. (with Stallbaum) Arist. Pol. Θ 5. 1340^{b} 1 (τὴν μιξολυδιστὶ καλουμένην). On the ἁρμονίαι recognized by Plato see App. II.

Ἰαστὶ ‐‐ καλοῦνται : ‘there are also varieties of Lydian and Ionian which are called ‘slack’.’ Jowett and Campbell, reading αἵτινες (see cr. n.), remark that the “indefinite relative suits with Plato's affected ignorance”; but the speaker is Glauco, not Socrates, and Glauco is μουσικός. See note on 399 C. Richards condemns αἵτινες χαλαραὶ καλοῦνται as spurious because αἵτινες “cannot be used in this way in good Attic prose of Plato's date.” With the older and better attested reading αὖ τινες, which I have ventured to restore, everything is plain. The words αὖ τινες establish once for all what Westphal (l.c. p. 198) and von Jan (l.c. p. 816) detected even when αἵτινες was read, viz. that Plato is referring not to Ionian and Lydian, but to slack Ionian and slack Lydian, a point which escaped Monro (l.c. p. 7) but not his reviewer (Cl. Rev. VIII p. 449). See also my article in Cl. Rev. X pp. 378 f. We learn from Aristotle that certain musical critics censured Plato for rejecting τὰς ἀνειμένας ἁρμονίας and for characterising them as μεθυστικαί, βακχευτικὸν γὰρ ἥ γε μέθη ποιεῖ μᾶλλον (Pol. Θ 7. 1342^{b} 23—27). It was partly perhaps in deference to these criticisms that Plato altered his view of μέθη in Laws 666 Aff.: see also Grote Plato III p. 328 note

δωριστὶ καὶ φρυγιστί . The absence of the Aeolian mode is remarkable, for it must certainly have been known to Plato (see Pratinas quoted in App. II). Westphal agrees with Bellermann in supposing (l.c. p. 195) that αἰολιστί is included under δωριστί. Aristotle also ignores αἰολιστί, unless indeed (as Westphal holds ib. p. 196) it was identical with ὑποδωριστί. In Lach. 188 D φρυγιστί is excluded (perhaps because the speaker is Laches, whose ideal of courage is military rather than pacific), and Dorian, ‘the only national Greek mode,’ alone recognized.

ἐκείνην τὴν ἁρμονίαν : viz. Dorian, not Phrygian, as Ast seems to have thought.

μιμήσαιτο . Cf. Laws 798 D τὰ περὶ τοὺς ῥυθμοὺς καὶ πᾶσαν μουσικήν ἐστι τρόπων μιμήματα βελτιόνων καὶ χειρόνων ἀνθρώπων and 397 B above.

καὶ ἀποτυχόντος . καί connects ὄντος and ἀμυνομένου. ἀποτυχόντος (which is itself logically subordinate to ἀμυνομένου) has three subordinate alternatives (ἢ—πεσόντος), all of which are summarised in ἐν πᾶσι τούτοις .

ἄλλην : viz. Phrygian. Aristotle blames Plato for retaining the Phrygian mode, while rejecting the αὐλός, with which it was usually associated: ἄμφω γὰρ ὀργιαστικὰ καὶ παθητικά (Pol. Θ 7. 1342^{b} 3). Plato, however, rejects the flute, not because it is orgiastic, but because it is πολυαρμόνιον (399 D). In Plato's opinion the Phrygian mode expressed sobriety and resignation: Aristotle thought it ecstatic and purgative (l.c. 1341^{a} 23). The difference of view is interesting and important as shewing that the ethical effect of different modes was a disputed point even among the ancients.

ἢ εὐχῇ ‐‐ ἄνθρωπον is subordinate to πείθοντός τε καὶ δεομένου.

ὑπέχοντα . ἐπέχοντα—see cr. n.— cannot, I think, be right. ἐπέχειν τὴν διάνοιαν (Laws 926 B) certainly does not justify ἐπέχειν ἑαυτόν, and even if it did, ‘submitting to’ and not merely ‘attending to’ is the sense required. With ὑπέχοντα cf. Gorg. 497 B ὑπόσχες Σωκράτει ἐξελέγξαι ὅπως ἄν βούληται, where the reflexive pronoun is omitted, as often with παρέχειν. Here it is better to take ἑαυτόν with ὑπέχοντα than with μεταπείθοντι. By changing the construction and writing accusatives instead of genitives, Plato makes the man himself rather than his φθόγγοι appear the object of imitation (cf. 397 D note). This is natural enough, because the situations described in ἢ τοὐναντίον—ἀγαπῶντα give less scope for φθόγγοι. Stephanus wished to read the genitive throughout (ὑπέχοντος, πράξαντος etc.: so also v and two Florentine MSS), but there is also inscriptional evidence for a genitive or dative participle followed by an accusative in the course of a long sentence: see Meisterhans^{3} p. 205.

κατὰ νοῦν : ‘to his liking’: cf. εὐτυχούντων below.

ταύτας ‐‐ λεῖπε . The style is intentionally weighty and formal, as befits a solemn pronouncement: cf. X 617 D, E. After ταύτας there is a slight pause: ‘Just these, two modes and none other.’ The insertion of τάς would impair the effect. besides suggesting that Socrates had in view two of the current modes, which, not being himself μουσικός, he professedly had not. It is Glauco's business to fit the cap (398 E, 399 A); Socrates only makes it. The indefinite αἵτινες (before φθόγγους) is therefore strictly appropriate in the mouth of Socrates, although it would not be in Glauco's. ἁρμονίας is rejected by Herwerden in both places (see cr. n.), but it is almost as indispensable here as it is wrong after ἀνδρείων, although Stallbaum rejects the word here and retains it there. The genitives δυστυχούντων etc. must depend on φθόγγους. For βίαιον, ἑκούσιον (‘one involuntary, one voluntary’), Ast suggests βιαίου, ἑκουσίου, Hartman βιαίων ἑκουσίων. A human being cannot however be called βίαιος because he is engaged ἐν βιαίῳ πράξει, although the mode which imitates his accents may be so described with propriety and even elegance: cf. (with Schneider) such expressions as φόνος ξυγγενής for the slaughter of kindred. The words δυστυχούντων—κάλλιστα simply define the meaning of βίαιον and ἑκούσιον (‘whatever musical modes they be that shall best imitate the accents of’ etc.): the relative is postponed in order to keep the essential marks of the ἁρμονίαι together, but the careful reader will note that Plato begins a chiasmus with δυστυχούντων, as if to separate the genitives from what precedes and prepare us to find their construction in the sequel. Had he written εὐτυχούντων, δυστυχούντων, ἀνδρείων, σωφρόνων the double chiasmus would have compelled us to connect the genitives with δύο ἁρμονίας.

οὐκ ἄλλας ‐‐ ἔλεγον . The Dorian to express ἀνδρεία, the Phrygian σωφροσύνη. These are the two contrasting virtues which Plato's μουσική endeavours to combine (410 E).

παναρμονίου . In Plato the noun παναρμόνιον occurs only here and in 404 D ᾠδῇ τῇ ἐν τῷ παναρμονίῳ καὶ ἐν πᾶσι ῥυθμοῖς πεποιημένη. In the latter passage it certainly does not denote a musical instrument of any kind. Here the word is sometimes understood of a particular and definite musical instrument, but a careful study of the context shews that it does not bear this meaning even here. Plato has decided to admit only two modes, the Dorian and the Phrygian. ‘Consequently,’ he continues, ‘we shall have no need in our songs and melodies of πολυχορδία or παναρμόνιον, and therefore (ἄρα) we shall dispense with τρίγωνοι, πηκτίδες etc., with all instruments, in short, which are πολύχορδα and πολυαρμόνια.’ The prohibition of certain musical instruments is an inference from the general principle that πολυχορδία and παναρμόνιον are unnecessary, so that παναρμόνιον cannot itself be a particular musical instrument. Probably, as Mr Archer-Hind has suggested to me, the παναρμόνιον was “not a mode or modes, but a style of composition, in which the ‘Tondichter’ passed freely from δωριστί to φρυγιστί and λυδιστί and as many others as he chose. The name may even have been given to well-known compositions in this style—cf. νόμος πολυκέφαλος—the fantasia with many subjects. The effect, I should think, may have been analogous to a series of bold and sudden modulations in modern music.” See also on αὐτὰ τὰ παναρμονία in 399 D.

τριγώνων ‐‐ πηκτίδων . These were foreign instruments of high pitch, and many strings. The τρίγωνον in particular was associated with loose and voluptuous melodies. For an exhaustive account of both see Susemihl and Hicks' Politics of Arist. vol. 1 pp. 632—636 or von Jan's de fidibus Graecorum pp. 29 ff., 33 ff.

αὐλητἀς . The αὐλός resembled the clarinet. It had a “mouthpiece (ζεῦγος) in which a vibrating reed (γλῶττα) was fitted,” and was sometimes played in pairs. See Dict. Ant. s.v. tibia. Plato banishes the ‘flute’ and retains the Dorian mode, although Dorian melodies were often played on it, as Milton well knew: see the noble description of the “Dorian mood of flutes and soft recorders” in Par. Lost 1 550 ff. In Boeotia, where the αὐλός was highly esteemed, it was supposed rather to calm than to excite the feelings. See Rhys Roberts The Ancient Boeotians pp. 33— 35.

ἢ οὐ τοῦτο πολυχορδότατον; τοῦτο is that with which αὐλοποιοί and αὐληταί are concerned, viz. the ‘flute’: cf. II 377 C note οὗτος instead of τοῦτο would have been a trifle harsh. πολυχορδότατον has been repeatedly called in question, and there is the usual crop of emendations, intended to obliterate the metaphor. Schneider has however shewn that the MS reading is sound, by citing Pollux IV 67 Πλάτων δὲ καὶ πολύχορδον εἴρηκε τὸν αὐλόν, and Simon. Fr. 46 ὁ καλλιβόας πολύχορδος αὐλός, and comparing expressions like αὐλὸν κρέκειν, ἁρμόζειν, κρούειν. Many other illustrations are given by Smyth, Greek Melic Poets p. 326. Here the metaphor is intended to arrest attention by its boldness and prepare us for the theory of the origin of παναρμόνια in the next clause; but πολυχορδότατον in itself, like πάμφωνος in Pindar (Pyth. 12. 19 al.), refers only to the number of different notes which the flute, thanks to various contrivances, such as plugs, wax, etc., was capable of producing. See Abdy Williams in Proceedings of the Musical Association 1897—8 p. 135. Plato objects to the multiplicity of strings and notes as admitting and even inviting change and fusion of modes. We are told by Paus. IX 12. 5 (cited by Monro l.c. p. 38: cf. Ath. XIV 631 E) that it was one Pronomus of Thebes who πρῶτος ἐπενόησεν αὐλοὺς ἐς ἅπαν ἁρμονίας εἶδος ἔχοντας ἐπιτηδείως. Down to his day there were three forms of ‘flutes,’ intended for the Dorian, Phrygian and Lydian modes respectively. On the means by which this change was effected see Dict. Ant. s.v. tibia.

αὐτὰ τὰ παναρμόνια : sc. ὄργανα, such as πηκτίδες and τρίγωνοι. Plato means those instruments on which panharmonic melodies could be played (cf. Proclus in remp. p. 63 ed. Kroll): but we must beware of translating (with D. and V.) ‘the panharmonium itself,’ for no single specific instrument is here intended, as some later lexicographers appear to have supposed. The gloss in Hesychius παναρμόνιον· εἶδος ὀργάνου, ἐξ ὅλου τεταγμένον is not quite clear, and may conceivably refer to a whole class of instruments, but Photius apparently thought that there was a special instrument called παναρμόνιον. His note (p. 388, 26 ed. Porson) is as follows: παναρμόνιον· ὄργανον μουσικόν· Ἄλεξις, ἐν ᾧ τὸ παναρμόνιον τὸ καινὸν ἔντεινον τεχνῶν ( Τέχνων Meineke). Photius may of course be right in his interpretation of Alexis' line: but παναρμόνιον in Plato never, I believe, refers to one particular instrument: and even Alexis may mean no more than ‘perform the new panharmonic melody,’ ἐντείνω being used as in τὸ κάλλιστον ἐντείνας μέλος, Dionys. Hal. de admir. vi dicendi in Dem. c. 48.

λύρα ‐‐ κιθάρα . The λύρα was the stringed instrument in common use; the κιθάρα was employed chiefly by professional musicians or κιθαρῳδοί. See Monro in Dict. Ant. s.v. Lyra, where illustrations of the two instruments are given, and von Jan de fid. Gr. pp. 5—26. By admitting the professional κιθάρα, Plato perhaps lends his sanction to musical festivals or contests in the approved modes.

καὶ κατὰ κτλ. After χρήσιμα supply ἐστίν. This is better than to eject καί (with Ast and—according to Bekker— Vat. Θ). Demetrius (περὶ ἑρμ. § 185, cited by Schneider) finds in the words καὶ αὖ κατ’ ἀγροὺς τοῖς ποιμέσι (sic, not νομεῦσι) σύριγξ ἄν τις εἴη an imitation of the sound of the σύριγξ. “Ceterum Demetrii rationem me non perspicere fateor,” says Schneider. Demetrius' remark is, I believe, correct, and has reference to the sigmatismus in the words of Plato: cf. Laws 700 C τὸ δὲ κῦρος τούτων—οὐ σύριγξ (used for συριγμός) ἦν οὐδέ τινες ἄμουσοι βοαὶ πλήθους, καθάπερ τὰ νῦν. The σύριγξ was either μονοκάλαμος, resembling our flute, or πολυκάλαμος (like Pan's pipe): see Dict. Ant. s.v. The indefinite τις shews that Plato did not wish to specify which variety he intended.

οὐδέν γε ‐‐ ὀργάνων . Plato puts himself in the position of the Muses, who preferred Apollo's performance on the κιθάρα to that of Marsyas on the flute (Apollod. I 4. 2). This is the force of οὐδέν γε καινὸν ποιοῦμεν. The words τὰ τοῦ Ἀπόλλωνος ὄργανα must not be pressed; for although Apollo invented the cithara, the lyre was ascribed to Hermes (Paus. V 14. 8: cf. the Homeric Hymn to Hermes), and the syrinx to Pan. The discovery of the flute was also ascribed to Athena, especially by the Boeotians. A third account represents Marsyas as picking up the instrument after Athena had discovered and discarded it. This legend may be an attempt to reconcile the two conflicting stories, and probably dates from the decline of the flute as an instrument of education in Athens during the fourth century (Arist. Pol. Θ 6. 1341^{a} 32 ff. Cf. Preller Gr. Myth. p. 223). In making Marsyas its discoverer, Plato declares the flute a foreign instrument, and appropriately excludes it from his ‘Greek city’ (V 470 E).

νὴ τὸν κύνα . This peculiarly Socratic oath occurs only once again in the Republic (IX 592 A). In both passages it marks the highest degree of emphasis. On the oath itself see my note on Ap. 21 E and Blaydes on Ar. Wasps 83.

ἄρτι : II 372 E note

399E - 401A Let us now continue the purgation of our city by laying down rules for rhythm and time. Our rhythm must not be varied or manifold; for time as well as tune should conform to words, and not conversely. It is agreed that there are certain rhythms expressive of sobriety and courage. These and these only will be admitted into our city. For particulars, we shall apply to Damon; but we can enunciate the general principle ourselves. Rhythm and Mode reflect style, and style expresses character. It is to promote the growth of character that we shall require the young to pursue the beautiful throughout the realms alike of Art and Nature.

The section on Rhythms is hardly less difficult than that on Modes. Westphal translates it with a short commentary in his Gr. Rhythmik pp. 237—239, but without shedding any light upon the darkest places. Schneider and Stallbaum give little help. I have found Gleditsch's summary account of die Metrik der Griechen (in Iwan Müller's Handbuch) a most useful guide in dealing with the subject.

βάσεις . The word βάσις in the technical writers on Rhythm generally means a dipody or combination of two feet under one main ictus: cf. Schol. in Heph. I 3. 1 p. 124 ed. Westphal βάσις δέ ἐστι τὸ ἐκ δύο ποδῶν συνεστηκός, τοῦ μὲν ἄρσει, τοῦ δὲ θέσει παραλαμβανομένου. Such a technical use of the word would be out of place here, especially in the mouth of Socrates; and the word is employed throughout as equivalent simply to ‘step’ or ‘foot.’ Even technical writers sometimes so use it: cf. the Scholiast already cited δέξεται δὲ (sc. the Iambic metre) ἐν μὲν τῇ πρώτῃ βάσει ἴαμβον καὶ σπονδεῖον II 5. p. 151 and Gleditsch l.c. p. 702.

κοσμίου τε καὶ ἀνδρείου recalls 399 C σωφρόνων ἀνδρείων, and would seem to point to the necessity of two kinds of rhythm, one to go with the Phrygian mode and express sobriety and self-control, the other to join the Dorian mode in expressing courage. On the ethical qualities of Greek rhythm in general, consult Westphal Gr. Rhythmik pp. 226—239 and Arist. Rhet. III 8, with Cope's notes.

μὴ λόγον ‐‐ μέλει . See 398 D note

τρἴ ἄττα εἴδη . Arist. Quint. I 34 ed. Meibom γένη τοίνυν ἐστὶ ῥυθμικὰ τρία· τὸ ἴσον (2/2), τὸ ήμιόλιον (3/2), τὸ διπλάσιον (2/1). To the first belong dactyls, spondees, anapaests: the second includes paeons, cretics, and bacchei: under the third fall trcchees, iambics, ionics. See Gleditsch l.c. p. 694.

ὥσπερ ‐‐ ἁρμονίαι . What are the τέτταρα εἴδη? The following answers (among others) have been given: 1. the intervals of the fourth, fifth, octave, and double octave (Ast): 2. the four notes of the tetrachord, which was probably the historical and at all events the ‘theoretical unit of the scale’ (Stallbaum, Jowett and Campbell): 3. “the four ratios which give the primary musical intervals—viz. the ratios 2:1, 3:2, 4:3 and 9:8, which give the octave, fifth, fourth, and tone” (Monro l.c. p. 106 note; cf. also Dict. Ant. II p. 193): 4. the four ἁρμονίαι Φρυγιστί, Λυδιστί, Δωριστί, Λοκριστί (Westphal Rhythmik p. 238). Ast's view cannot be right, unless we suppose that ἁρμονίαι here includes scales of double compass, which is most unlikely. Westphal's explanation is improbable, for Plato has said nothing of Λοκριστί, and (though perhaps no great stress should be laid on this) it is awkward to derive the ἁρμονίαι (ὅθεν αἱ πᾶσαι ἁρμονίαι) from themselves. If the principle of Westphal's interpretation is right, I should be inclined to substitute Ἰαστί for Λοκριστί, having regard to 398 E, where see note Cf. Cl. Rev. X p. 379. (I have since found that Prantl also took this view: see note 116 in his translation.) I do not think that Stallbaum has hit the truth, for Plato's language is not suggestive of any allusion to the origin of the octave from the combination of two tetrachords, and a single tetrachord cannot produce a ἁρμονία (ὅθεν αἱ πᾶσαι ἁρμονίαι). Possibly the τέτταρα εἴδη ἐν τοῖς φθόγγοις denote simply the keynote, its octave, and the intervals of a tone and a semitone: for these are as it were the threads out of which all modes ‘are woven’ ( πλέκονται should be repeated with ἁρμονίαι), the difference between the modes depending on the difference in position of the tones and semitones. But Euclid lays the greatest stress upon the ratios 3:2 and 4:3 as the component elements of the octave: see for example Sect. Can. 6 τὸ διπλάσιον διάστημα ἐκ δύο τῶν μεγίστων ἐπιμορίων συνέστηκεν, ἔκ τε τοῦ ἡμιολίου καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ἐπιτρίτου and cf. ib. 8, 12, and for this reason I now believe that Monro's view has most in its favour.

ποῖα δ’ ὁποίου κτλ. On ὁποίου see I 348 B note, and for the error in Paris A Introd. § 5.

Δάμωνος . μετὰ Δάμωνος is almost a formula with Plato: cf. infra C, 424 C, and Lach. 200 B. Suseminl (on Arist. Pol. Θ 5. 1340^{b} 5) thinks that Plato is alluding to a special work by Damon on the ἦθος and πάθος of modes and rhythms. The word ἀκηκοέναι and the general tone of the passage seem rather to refer to an oral demonstration.

τίνας ‐‐ ῥυθμούς . In general, πόδες ἀπὸ ἄρσεως, or feet in which the θέσις (i.e. the syllable bearing the ictus) followed the ἄρσις, were believed to express more energy and life, than πόδες ἀπὸ θέσεως. See Gleditsch p. 694, and for details as to the ἦθος of the different rhythms ib. pp. 713, 721, 725, 730, 739, 744, 766.

οἶμαι δέ με κτλ. Schneider's δέ γε (found in some inferior MSS) is not appropriate here. The superfluous pronoun after οἶμαι is a well-established colloquialism: cf. Charm. 173 A, Symp. 175 E. οἶμαι, ἀκηκοέναι, and οὐ σαφῶς ὀνομάζοντος are just the words one might employ in giving one's recollections of an abstruse and half-understood lecture, and this is just what Plato is either doing or, more probably, affecting to do. A few technical terms and a vague idea (οὐκ οἶδ’ ὅπως) of some of the processes are all that he remembers.

ἐνόπλιον ‐‐ ήρῷόν γε . ἐνόπλιος ξύνθετος, δάκτυλος, ἡρῷος are expressions from the lecture: in English they would be in inverted commas. The ἐνόπλιος is not ˘¯¯˘˘˘˘ (Proclus in remp. p. 61, if, as appears probable, by παριαμβίς he means the παρίαμβος or pyrrich), nor the cretic (J. and C.), nor, strictly speaking, the anapaestic foot (Hartman), but ᷋<*>˘˘<*>˘˘<*>, a common processional ( προσοδιακός) or marching rhythm, consisting of an ἰωνικὸς ἀπὸ μείζονος and a choriambus (Hephaestion c. 15), or (as the Scholiast on Ar. Clouds 651 measures it) a spondee, pyrrich, trochee and iambus. For examples we may cite Sappho's αὔτα δὲ σὺ Καλλιόπη (Fr. 82) and Tyrtaeus' ἄγετ’ ὦ Σπάρτας ἔνοπλοι (Fr. 16). See Gleditsch l.c. pp. 717, 722, and Bacchius Isag. 101 ed. von Jan, whose example is ὁ τὸν πίτυος στέφανον. ξύνθετος probably refers to the composite character of the rhythm. as described, for example, by the Scholiast on the Clouds. The later technical expression for this peculiarity was ἐπισύνθετος (Gleditsch p. 746). δάκτυλον must be understood as a foot, not as a rhythm, although the ἐνόπλιος ξύνθετος certainly, and probably also the ἡρῷος, are rhythms. There is no difficulty about this, provided we remember that Plato is quoting (or pretending to quote) isolated technical expressions from Damon's lecture. The ingenious, though hazardous, proposal of Blaydes, to read καὶ <κατὰ> δάκτυλον (cf. Clouds 651), would confine the instances to rhythms until we reach ἴαμβον. Dr Jackson suggests δακτυλικόν in place of δάκτυλον. It is tempting (with J. and C.) to take ἡρῷος as ‘spondee,’ but there seems to be no authority for such a use of the word. The ἡρῷος πούς is apparently a dactyl; although the ἡρῷος ῥυθμός admits of the spondee. Unless, therefore, we take ἡρῷος as a rhythm, the spondee seems to be altogether excluded. It is unnecessary to do more than allude to Hartman's excision of ξύνθετον καὶ δάκτυλον.

ἴσον ‐‐ τιθέντος . ἄνω and κάτω refer of course to the position of the arsis and thesis (cf. ὁ ἄνω, ὁ κάτω χρόνος said of the notes at which the foot or bâton is raised and brought down respectively), but Westphal's remark that Plato uses τ ὸ ἄνω and τὸ κάτω is misleading (Rhythmik p. 104). The words must be taken as adverbs, and can only be explained by supposing that when Damon was demonstrating the equality of arsis and thesis he ‘placed’— τιθέντος is not ‘assuming’ as διακοσμοῦντος shews—the former in a diagram above the latter, in some such way as <*><*>. The position of the ictus —ἄνω καὶ κάτω, not κάτω καὶ ἄνω—shews that Plato is speaking of the dactyl and spondee which replace the anapaest in the anapaestic rhythm: for in the dactylic rhythm proper the ictus falls on the first syllable (see Gleditsch p. 693). Now the ἐνόπλιος is also anapaestic, so that it looks as if Damon had taken as the subject of his demonstration some passage like Persae 9, 10 ἤδη | κακόμαντις ἄγαν ὀρσολοπεῖται, and analysed it into an ἐνόπλιος ξύνθἐτος, a dactyl, and a spondee (included, as stated above, under the ἡρῷος ῥυθμός).

εἰς βραχύ ‐‐ γιγνόμενον . These words can only mean ‘passing into a short and a long,’ “mit kurzem und langen Ausgang” (Schneider), “so dass er sowohl in eine kurze als auch in eine lange Silbe auslief” (Prantl): see on II 380 D. The slight inaccuracy involved in saying γιγνόμενον, where τελευτῶντα (cf. VI 511 C) would have been more precise, is perhaps in keeping with the airy nonchalance of Socrates' description. The construction is missed by Westphal ( Rhythmik p. 237) and the English translators and editors. γιγνόμενον agrees with ἡρῷον: the ἡρῷος ῥυθμὸς γίγνεται εἰς βραχύ when it uses a dactyl, εἰς μακρόν when it uses a spondee (or anapaest), the two alternatives being denoted by τε καί. I have sometimes felt disposed to take the words as referring to the iambus, and place them just before ὡς ἐγὼ οἶμαι, translating ‘and when it’ (the rhythm) ‘changed to a short and a long, I think he called it an iambus’: but although this interpretation gives a somewhat better sense to γιγνόμενον, I am not convinced that the MSS are wrong. Hartman also suggests the transposition of καί, but he might have spared his “minime audax coniectura” ἐκ βραχέων τε καὶ μακρῶν γιγνόμενον. See also the next note.

μήκη ‐‐ προσῆπτε . Hartman takes these words as explaining the trochee only, laying emphasis on the precedence given to μήκη; but the use of the plural shews that the iambus is also included. The meaning is simply ‘and he assigned them longs and shorts,’ i.e. to each one long, and one short. This clause is in favour of keeping εἰς βραχύ—γιγνόμενον in its place; if we transpose (as suggested in the last note), the short and long of the iambus will be alluded to twice.

ἀγωγάς . ἀγωγή is tempo (Gleditsch p. 688). The unit of measurement was the χρόνος πρῶτος or ¯: and hence the dactyl. for example, has usually a τετράσημος ἀγωγή, the iambus a τρίσημος, and so on. See Excerpta Neapol. in von Jan's Mus. Script. Gr. § 14. The duration of the χρόνος πρῶτος was of course relative, and not absolute, so that the time occupied in singing or declaiming a foot often varied, and we are told that ἔστιν ὅτε καὶ ἐν δισήμῳ (sc. ἀγωγῇ ) γίνεται δακτυλικὸς πούς (Exc. Neap. l. c.). But it is clear that in general the ἀγωγαί of the different kinds of feet were different from one another. Hartman ejects τοῦ ποδός, “cum apud Platonem πούς et ῥυθμός non discrepent.” The distinction between πούς and ῥυθμός is not always preserved by writers on metre (e.g. Bacchius Isag. 100 ff. ed. von Jan), but Plato seems to make the πούς differ from the ῥυθμός as the unit from the whole.

ἤτοι . See on I 344 E.

εὐσχημοσύνης : grace or beauty of form in the widest sense. The word is introduced in view of the application of these principles to objects appealing to the eye: see 401 A.

ἀνάρμοστον . The article (which Baiter and Hartman require) is unnecessary. See on I 334 E.

ἀκολουθητέον (i.q. δεῖ ἀκολουθεῖν) has ταῦτα for its subject, as Stallbaum points out: cf. Laws 803 D τί παίζοντα ἐστὶ διαβιωτέον; and infra V 467 C.

τῷ τῆς ψυχῆς ἤθει ἕπεται . Le style c'est l'homme. Conversely, thought is the dialogue of the soul with itself: see Theaet. 189 E (with Wohlrab's note) and Soph. 263 E. Cf. also IV 437 C note and Homer's διελέξατο θυμός.

ὡς εὐήθειαν is expunged by Herwerden; Baiter would omit ὡς. If ὡς belonged to εὐήθειαν (as these critics apparently supposed), it would deserve expulsion; but it goes with οὖσαν understood. The antithesis is between ἄνοιαν and εὐήθειαν: and if the sentence is read so as to lay stress on these two words, it will be seen how easily οὖσαν can be repeated after εὐήθειαν. The sense is: not the εὐήθεια which is really ἄνοια, but which we euphemistically designate as if it were εὐ‐ήθεια (i.e., as before, in the good sense of the word), but εὐήθεια in its true and etymological sense (ὠς ἀληθῶς)—the εὖ τὸ ἦθος κατεσκευασμένην διάνοιαν. This explanation seems to me better than to regard ὡς εὐήθειαν as attracted for ὡς εὐήθεια (sc. ἐστίν), a construction for which we may compare Prot. 357 D: see my note ad loc. For ὡς ἀληθῶς cf. I 343 C note

τὸ αὑτῶν πράττειν . The principle of ἁπλότης, which is the corner-stone of Plato's city, presents itself in the education of the young, as the pursuit of εὐήθεια.

ἔστιν δέ γέ που κτλ. This lofty conception of ἁρμονία and ῥυθμός—for αὐτῶν shews that these are included no less than εὐσχημοσύνη—stretching throughout the whole domain of art and nature, may have been suggested by Pythagorean teaching: but the view of education as the pursuit and assimilation of all this beauty is due to Plato himself. Cf. 403 C note

ποικιλία . II 378 C note

401A - 403C To these canons not only poets but all other artists must conform. We shall admit no artists save only those who are able to track out the nature of the beautiful, and beguile our children even in their earliest years into unconscious harmony with the beauty of reason. The value of a musical training lies in its peculiar power of imparting grace and beauty to the soul. It enables the learner to discriminate between the fair and the foul in other spheres, admitting only that which is beautiful and fair, at first instinctively, but afterwards, when reason comes, with fullest consciousness, and joyful recognition of the beauty to which he is himself akin. No one is truly imbued with musical culture until he can recognise the originals of virtue wherever they are found, as well as their copies everywhere. Such an one will love supremely the union of a beautiful soul with physical beauty, but will let inner beauty atone in part for outward defect, and his passion will be pure from sensual taint. Our account of Music is now ended: for the end of Music is the love of Beauty.

τὴν τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ κτλ. This famous section describes in glowing language, like that of the Symposium, Plato's ideal of art. He does not desire to banish art, as is sometimes asserted, but rather idealises it by effecting—as he believed—its reconciliation with beauty and truth. Art aspired to be καλόν in his day: Plato wished it to be so in the fullest sense of the word: and his idea of beauty is sufficiently comprehensive to include moral and spiritual beauty as well as physical. Plato was doubtless unfair in the application of his principle to some of the Greek artists and poets, but in itself his ideal—the love of spiritual beauty —is one to which the best and most enduring art—which alone can find a place in an ideal city—consciously or unconsciously ever seeks to conform. See Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II pp. 112— 116.

τοῖς ποιήμασιν κτλ. Cf. Laws 656 D, E. Nettleship (Hell. pp. 117 f.) remarks on the fact that “Plato in his criticism of Greek art has almost ignored the painters and sculptors, and confined his assaults to the musicians and still more to the poets.” This is true, although the present passage shews that his canons were intended to regulate painting, sculpture, architecture, and the minor arts as well as music and poetry. Among other reasons, Nettleship plausibly suggests that Plato “did not see in the sculptors and architects of his time the signs of degeneracy which drew his attention to the poets and musicians.” Cf. 401 C.

ὁπόθεν ἂν κτλ. No Greek could read these words without thinking of Olympia; no Athenian without recalling the glories of the Acropolis. It was probably in the spirit of this ideal that Epaminondas—himself a man of Platonic sympathies, if not a Platonist— hinted to his countrymen that their city could not be truly great until the Propylaea crowned their citadel (Aesch. περὶ παραπρεσβείας 105. See also Nettleship Hell. pp. 115—123). Partly on grounds of style, and partly for grammatical reasons, I believe that Plato wrote τις and not τι (see cr. n.). ‘Whenever anything strikes on their eyes or ears from fair works of art’ sounds material and gross in a passage so full of poetic feeling; and in the second place ἄγουσα agrees with αὔρα, whereas it should be ἄγον and agree with τι if τι is right. Translate ‘Whensoever from beautiful works of art there smites upon their eyes or ears as it were a salubrious breath from healthful regions.’ In the same way a sort of ἵμερος flows into the soul from beauty, awakening love and admiration ( Phaedr. 251 C). The melodious current of Plato's rhythmic utterance flows onward like the steady though gentle breeze which it describes. With αὔρα—ὑγίειαν cf. Arist. Probl. I 52. 865^{b} 19 πόλις ὑγιεινὴ καὶ τόπος εὔπνους (διὸ καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑγιεινή). For the syntax of τις—ὥσπερ αὔρα· φερουσα cf. τὰς τῆς γενέσεως ξυγγενεῖς ὥσπερ μολυβδίδας VII 519 B, where a similar corruption occurs in some of the MSS: see note ad loc. Paris A has τί for τίς again in II 360 E.

ἐν μουσικῇ τροφή . The insertion of ἡ before ἐν (suggested by Rückert) is needless: cf. 404 B.

φέροντα : not ‘imparting’ (Jowett), but ‘bearing,’ ‘carrying,’ like φέρουσα in the simile: cf. Symp. 188 A ἥκει φέροντα εὐετηρίαν.

καὶ μὴ καλῶς . Herwerden's conjecture ἤ for καί misses the precise force of παραλειπομένων ‘falling short’: cf. Critias 107 D ὀξέως αἰσθανόμενοι τὸ παραλειπόμενον. The word is explained in καὶ μὴ—φύντων, where the contrast is between imperfections of art and imperfections of nature.

ἐκεῖ : i.e. ἐν μουσικῇ.

ὀρθῶς δὴ κτλ. I formerly (with Baiter and others) adopted Vermehren's proposal (Pl. Stud. p. 94) to read ὀρθῶς δὴ <χαίρων και> δυσχεραίνων τὰ μὲν καλὰ· ἐπαινοῖ καὶ [χαίρων καὶ ] καταδεχόμενος κτλ. The correction is certainly an attractive one, in view especially of Laws 653 B, C, where education is defined as μισεῖν μὲν ἃ χρὴ μισεῖν—στέργειν δὲ ἃ χρὴ στέργειν, and 654 1) τὰ μὲν ἀσπαζόμενος ὅσα καλά, τὰ δὲ δυσχεραίνων ὀπόσα μὴ καλά, and Arist. Eth. Nic. II 2. 1104^{b} 11 ff. But the MS reading, though less pointed and pregnant, is in itself satisfactory enough, if δυσχεραίνων be understood with reference to what precedes (τῶν παραλειπομένων), and we are therefore hardly justified in altering the text. (The omission of χαίρων καί in q should not be used as evidence of dislocation.) Hartman (after Stallbaum) excises καί between χαίρων and καταδεχόμενος, but this too is unnecessary. We may translate (with Jowett) ‘and rejoicing in them’ (as opposed to δυσχεραίνων just before) ‘and receiving them into his soul.’ The preposition κατα‐ in καταδεχόμενος suggests that beauty is an exile coming home again: the return of exiled truth and beauty is indeed with Plato the aim of education and of life. Cf. Phaedr. 250 A —252 A.

τρέφοιτο . For the metaphor cf. Phaedr. 248 B ff.

γραμμάτων . See on II 368 D. The reference in εἴχομεν, however, is not to that passage, but to the actual experience of the speakers.

ἐν ἅπασιν οἷς ἔστιν : i.q. ἐν ἅπασιν ἐν οἷς ἔστι, by a common idiom: see on II 373 E and cf. VII 520 D, IX 590 C.

ὡς οὐ δέοι depends on the idea of thinking involved in ἀτιμάζομεν. Richards suggested δέον, “sine causa,” as Hartman observes.

εἰκόνας γραμμάτων . The reference to letters throughout this part of the Republic is only by way of illustration, and we must beware of reading more into Plato's words than they are capable of meaning in the context where they occur. No doubt it is true, as Dr Jackson remarks, that “this passage makes us acquainted with the relation of copy and model which is to become important later,” but Bosanquet goes too far when he asserts that “the expression ‘images of letters’ points forward to the classification of grades of knowledge, at the end of Book VI, the allegory of the cave at the beginning of Book VII, and the argument of Book X.”

αὐτά is emphatic: ‘the letters themselves’ as opposed to their εἰκόνες. There is of course no allusion to ‘Ideas’ of letters.

τὰ τῆς σωφροσύνης εἴδη κτλ. Are the εἴδη Plato's Ideas? So Zeller (II^{4} 1 p. 560 note), and many other critics, understand the word; nor can it be denied that the language of Plato, if interpreted in the light of Book VII, can bear this meaning. Nevertheless we are bound in the first instance to interpret this passage by itself, and not by Book VII, the more so as the doctrine of transcendent or separate (χωρισταί) Ideas appears nowhere else in I—IV, and seems to be expressly reserved by Plato for his philosophical, as distinct from his musical education (see IV 435 D and VI 504 B note). What is meant by the words εἰκόνας αὐτῶν? The context shews conclusively that εἰκόνες refers to copies (sc. of the virtues σωφροσύνη etc.) represented in poetry and the fine arts (so also Krohn Pl. Frage p. 47). On any other interpretation the introduction of these εἰκόνες is irrelevant in a discussion on the rules which imitative art must obey. This being so, if εἴδη means the Ideas, Poetry will be a direct imitation of the Ideas, which is inconsistent with X 595 C —598 D. Or does Plato mean to suggest that Poetry and Art in his ideal city are really to imitate the Ideas directly? This is a bold and attractive solution, and there are several hints elsewhere to the same or nearly the same effect, but Plato expressly speaks of the εἴδη here only as immanent, and not transcendent (ἐνόντα ἐν οἷς ἔνεστιν), and we must therefore suppose that the artist copies from the life (cf. ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ καλὰ ἤθη ἐνόντα D). The word εἴδη is repeatedly used by Plato without reference to transcendent Ideas, as has been amply proved by Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 65, 66), Pfleiderer (Zur Lösung etc. p. 17), and Campbell (II pp. 296 ff.). Here it does not mean ‘varieties’ (as if there were more than one variety of σωφροσύνη), but simply ‘forms’ or ‘kinds,’ in the sense in which the immanent reality which every general notion attempts to express is a ‘form’ or ‘kind’—a genus or species—of the totality of things. Cf. IV 435 B note The genitives are genitives of definition. The use of εἴδη in the sense of “immanente Seinsformen” (Krohn) is interesting as a harbinger of the Ideal theory of VI and VII—a sort of half-way house between the Socratic λόγοι and Plato's ideas. It recurs in IV 434 D, 435 B, 437 D. See further Krohn Pl. Frage pp. 54—58, and cf. VI 504 D note But although the separatists have (as I think) made out their claim that transcendent Ideas do not appear in Books I—IV, I agree with Hirmer (Entst. u. Komp. d. Pl. Pol. p. 645) in thinking their deductions from this fact unwarrantable.

μεγαλοπρεπείας . μεγαλοπρέπεια in Plato is ‘highmindedness,’ not, as in Aristotle, ‘magnificence’: cf. VI 486 A note In like manner Plato's ἐλευθεριότης denotes the virtue proper to an ἐλεύθερος, and is not restricted to liberality in spending money. Contrast Arist. Eth. Nic. IV cc. 2—6.

τῶν δὴ ‐‐ ἀσπάζεσθαι . Cf. Symp. 209 B and 210 B, C. The whole of Diotima's wonderful speech (210 D— 212 A) should be compared with the closing sections of this chapter. In point of language the words κάλλιστον θέαμα— ἐρασμιώτατον closely resemble Tim. 87 D.

ἀξύμφωνος : i.e. (as Glauco's answer shews) strictly speaking one whose soul and body do not harmonise in point of beauty, but the word also suggests “the man who has no music in his soul.” Cf. Symp. 206 C τὰ δὲ (κύησις καὶ γέννησις) ἐν τῷ ἀναρμόστῳ ἀδύνατον γενέσθαι. With the sentiment in general cf. Tim. 87 D ff.

μανθάνω ‐‐ ὅτι : ‘I understand: (you say so) because’ etc.: see I 322 A note

οὐ προσοιστέον ἄρα . This somewhat extreme example of a common liberty in concord serves to increase the rhetorical emphasis by the energetic repetition of Glauco's ipsissima verba. The emphasis becomes still greater in Glauco's reply οὐ μέντοι, μὰ Δία, προσοιστεόν. The particle μέντοι is especially used in replies when the words of a previous speaker are repeated (Hoefer de part. Plat. p. 32). q and Flor. U have προσοιστέα.

φιλεῖν is ‘kiss’ (as Schneider rightly translates the word): cf. V 468 B and Arist. Pol. B 4. 1262^{a} 32 ff., where χρήσεις (as Hicks observes) means ‘endearments.’

ἅπτεσθαι κτλ. We think of Socrates and the ‘disciple whom he loved’ in the Phaedo: εἰώθει γάρ, ὁπότε τύχοι, παίζειν μου εἰς τὰς τρίχας (89 B).

ὥσπερ ὑέος . Herwerden's conjecture ὡς πατὴρ ὑέος (or ὥσπερ πατὴρ ὑέος) deserves the praise of ingenuity, but Plato's text is better and more expressive, because it represents the object of affection almost as the lover's very son. It should be noted that in Plato's ἔρως it is the elder who loves, and the younger who is loved; and that the aim and purpose of Platonic love is τόκος ἐν καλῷ ( Symp. 206 B)—the bringing to birth of noble thoughts and aspirations from the beautiful soul of youth. Socrates was the embodiment of Plato's ideal in this respect ( Symp. 216 D ff.). Some true and excellent observations on the subject will be found in Dugas L'Amitié Antique pp. 50—53 al.

τῶν καλῶν χάριν . Plato is resolved that Love, as well as Art, shall serve Virtue and not Vice.

τὰ δ) ἄλλα ‐‐ ξυγγίγνεσθαι . σπουδάζειν πρός τινα occurs with the same sense in Gorg. 510 C. Madvig's περὶ ὧν for πρὸς ὅν would give quite a wrong meaning. σπουδάζει has been suggested for σπουδάζοι (Ast, Richards, Hartman), but the optative puts the case more generally: any one in whom one may be interested. Cf. Soph. Ant. 666 ἀλλ’ ὃν πόλις στήσειε, τοῦδε χρὴ κλύειν, with Jebb's note. The previous sentence has told us what the actual relations of the pair of friends must be; and Plato now forbids all conduct likely in any way to occasion scandal or misapprehension: hence δόξει (‘be supposed to’). Such conduct is in bad taste (ψόγον ἀμουσίας), rather than positively αἰσχρόν or immoral, like actual vice. μαργότερα τούτῳ (Herwerden) instead of μακρότερα τούτων is a singularly gross conjecture.

ὑφέξοντα . “Si ὑφέξοντα non sanum, corrige ὑφέξειν” (Hartman). This catches the point, but, as Hartman admits, the text can be defended as it stands. The participle agrees with the subject of ὁμιλεῖν, εἰ δὲ μή being all but adverbial, and therefore not followed by a main clause. Cf. Prot. 311 D.

δεῖ δέ που κτλ. The love of Beauty is φιλοσοφία ( Symp. 204 B); so that the famous saying of the Phaedo (61 A) φιλοσοφία μεγίστη μουσική resembles this. I agree with Krohn (Pl. St. p. 71) in holding that τοῦ καλοῦ is still beauty as it is revealed in Nature and in Art (see on 402 C), the πολὺ πέλαγος τοῦ καλοῦ of Symp. 210 D, and not yet the transcendent Idea of the Beautiful, the contemplation of which demands a still higher flight (ib. 210 D—212 A). But Plato leaves his μουσικός already knocking at the gates ‘of the blest promised Land.’

403C - 405A Let us now discuss the subject of physical training. We may safely entrust the duty of making specific rules to the intelligences which we train, and content ourselves with tracing outlines. Every kind of excess or self-indulgence in eating, drinking, and the other appetites, must be forbidden. Gymnastic must be ‘simple’ like her sister Music. Complexity in the one case breeds disease, in the other vice; so that doctors and judges rise in public estimation, and chicanery and medicine give themselves airs.

γυμναστικῇ κτλ. Plato's statements on γυμναστική have been carefully collected and expounded by Kanter Platos Anschauungen über Gymnastik, Graudenz 1886. Admirable remarks on the whole subject will be found in Nettleship Hell. pp. 132—134: cf. also his Lectures and Remains II pp. 123—126. Plato deals here chiefly with the hygienic aspect of gymnastic—a subject which was much discussed in his day: see Dict. Ant. I p. 929, where we are reminded that gymnasia were dedicated to Apollo, father of Asclepius, and himself a god of healing. In his interesting treatise Die Platonischen Dialoge in ihrem Verhältnisse zu den Hippokratischen Schriften (Landshut 1882) Poschenrieder has shewn that Plato was strongly influenced throughout this passage by the views of Hippocrates and his school. See also Häser Lehrb. d. Gesch. d. Med. etc. I pp. 94 ff. The athletics of Gymnastic are treated of in Laws 795 D ff., 833 ff.

ψυχὴ ἀγαθὴ ‐‐ βέλτιστον . No very recondite theory of the relation of body and soul is here involved. Plato simply means that the soul has more power over the body than the body over the soul. (The restriction in ὡς οἷόν τε should be noted.) On this principle some doctors held that to cure the body one should minister to the mind diseased: see the curious passage in Charm. 156 B—157 C. The general sentiment is well illustrated by J. and C. from Democr. Fr. Mor. 128 (Müllach) ἀνθρώποισι ἁρμόδιον ψυχῆς μᾶλλον ἢ σώματος ποιέεσθαι λόγον· ψυχὴ μὲν γὰρ τελεωτάτη σκήνεος μοχθηρίην ὀρθοῖ, σκήνεος δὲ ἰσχὺς ἄνευ λογισμοῦ ψυχὴν οὐδέν τι ἀμείνω ποιεῖ.

εἴπομεν . 398 E.

ἀθληταὶ ‐‐ ἀγῶνος . Cf. Laws 829 E ἀθλητὰς τῶν μεγίστων ἀγώνων, and Lach. 182 A.

τῶνδε means contemporary athletes: cf. IV 425 C note With Plato's strictures on Greek athletics cf. Arist. Pol. Θ. 4. 1338^{b} 10 (with Susemihl and Hicks' note) and especially Eur. Fr. 284: for his attack on the diet and training of athletes cf. Dict. Ant. I pp. 98, 928 and the authorities there cited.

ἐὰν σμικρὰ ἐκβῶσιν κτλ. Poschenrieder (l.c.) cites the Hippocratean Praedictiones II c. 1 Littré τοὺς ἀθλητὰς γινώσκειν...ἤν τι τοῦ σιτίου ἀπολίπωσιν, ἢ ἑτεροῖόν τι φάγωσιν, ἢ ποτῷ πλέονι χρήσωνται, ἢ τοῦ περιπάτου ἀπολίπωσιν ἢ ἀφροδισίων τι πράξωσι· τούτων πάντων οὐδὲν λανθάνει, οὐδ’ εἰ σμικρόν τι εἴη ἀπειθήσας ὥνθρωπος.

ὥσπερ κύνας . II 375 A.

πολλὰς μεταβολὰς κτλ. Cf. [Hippocr.] de umoribus V p. 496 C. 15 Littré αἱ μεταβολαὶ μάλιστα τίκτουσι νοσηματα καὶ αι μέγισται μάλιστα καὶ ἐν τῇσιν ὥρῃσιν αἱ μεγάλαι μεταλλαγαὶ καὶ ἐν τοῖσι ἄλλοισιν: cf. also Aphorism. IV p. 486 § 1 al. and Pl. Laws 797 D ff. (Poschenrieder l.c. pp. 31 ff.)

ἁπλῆ ‐‐ πόλεμον . The sentence is usually explained by carrying on ἡ βελτίστη γυμναστικὴ ἂν εἴη and regarding ἁπλῆ—γυμναστική as the predicate both to ἡ βελτίστη γυμναστική and to ἡ τῶν περὶ τὸν πόλεμον. Besides its extreme cumbrousness, this view makes Plato say that the best gymnastic is good (ἐπιεικής is practically synonymous with ἀγαθή), which is, to say the least, unnecessary. It seems to me much simpler and better to make ἐπιεικὴς γυμναστική the subject to ἁπλῆ. The meaning is: will the best course of training be sister to the music we described? How so? ἐπιεικὴς γυμναστική, like ἐπιεικὴς μουσική (this is the force of καί), is (ἐστὶ understood) ἁπλῆ, and so above all is that of soldiers. Hartman, who saw that the passage must be taken in this way, would write ἡ for καί, and I once preferred καὶ <ἡ>, but the article can be dispensed with (cf. 401 D note), and καί is necessary. As the emphasis is primarily on γυμναστική, some may prefer to read γυμναστικὴ ἐπιεικής or γυμναστικὴ ἡ ἐπίεικής; but if the stress of the voice is laid on γυμναστική, and ἐπιεικὴς γυμναστική treated as a single expression (cf. V 453 A note), I think the text may stand.

οὔτε ἰχθύσιν κτλ. Cf. Eubulus ap. Athen. I 25 C (Jackson).

ἐν Ἑλλησπόντῳ is rejected by Cobet and Hartman; if the Homeric heroes were ἐν Ἑλλησπόντῳ, the fish forsooth would more easily have eaten them than they the fish! This is however so obvious that even Cobet's “scriba sciolus” would have seen it, and avoided the preposition ἐν. The fact is that Ἑλλήσποντος was constantly used to denote the whole coast stretching from the Pontus to the Aegean, including Bosporos and Propontis. See Stein on Hdt. IV 38 and cf. Thuc. II 9. The usage is also found in Inscriptions (Meisterhans^{3} p. 226. 16). An Athenian of Plato's day was much more likely to employ the name Ἑλλήσποντος in this idiomatic sense than a later copyist; and for this reason I have no doubt that the expression is genuine, although the words of Hartman “nihil refert utrum ἐν Ἑλλησπόντῳ an ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ sint” are nearly, if not quite, true. Plato may however intend to remind us that fish were plentiful in the region of the Hellespont: cf. Il. IX 360 and Athen. IV 157 B.

ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν . I 341 B note

καὶ ὀρθῶς γε ‐‐ ἀπέχονται . ὀρθῶς must be taken with both verbs: ‘Yes, and they do well in knowing it and in abstaining.’

Συρακοσίαν ‐‐ ὄψου . For δέ (‘autem’) Stallbaum unnecessarily reads δή. The Συρακοσία τράπεζα was proverbial: see Blaydes on Ar. Fr. 206 and the curious account of Syracusan gluttony in Pl. Epp. VII 326 B ff. There is no sufficient basis for Cobet's idea that Plato is here borrowing from some comic poet. Later scandal insinuated that it was the delights of Syracusan living that drew Plato thrice to Sicily (Hermann Gesch. u. System p. 116 note 133, where the authorities are cited).

Κορινθίαν κόρην . Cf. 11 373 A note Κορινθία κόρη is a grisette: see the commentators on Ar. Plut. 149, and on the general subject Blümner Privatalt. pp. 254—256. φίλην is more refined for ‘mistress’ (ἑταῖρα). The word κόρην has been doubted: “innocentem puellam eicere ex Platonis republica voluerunt triumviri praestantissimi Buttmannus, Morgensternius, et nuperrime Astius.” So says Stallbaum, her successful champion.

Ἀττικῶν πεμμάτων . The fame of Athenian pastry was as great as its variety: see Athen. XIV cc. 51—58 and other references in Blümner l.c. p. 220.

παναρμονίῳ . See on 399 C.

ἰατρεῖα were both dispensaries and consulting-rooms etc. See Laws 646 C and other references in Blümner l.c. p. 359. In some ἰατρεῖα patients were also housed and treated by doctors (Häser Lehrbuch d. Gesch. d. Med. etc. I pp. 86 ff.), so that in certain cases they resembled a sort of private hospital. For the remedial conception of punishment prevailing in the whole of this section see II 380 B note

δικανική . Cobet calls for δικαστική, and at first sight δικαστῶν just below seems to favour his view. But Plato deliberately selects the less reputable word, meaning by it the arts by which men try to lead the true δικαστής (cf. Ap. 40 A) astray: see infra B, C. In his own city there is no δικανική, but only δικαστική (409 E, 410 A). It appears from Laws IV 720 C ff. that a doctor's assistants were usually slaves, and that slaves for the most part treated slaves, and freemen freemen, but the rule was not universal (see Blümner l. c. p. 359 note 1). Plato holds that the increase of citizen doctors points to the spread of self-indulgence among the free-born population.

405A - 410A It is a sign of bad education when we require first-rate physicians and judges; still more shameful is it to pride oneself on escaping the punishment of wrong-doing by the aid of legal subterfuges. We should also be ashamed to enlarge the terminology of medicine by our self-indulgence. It was otherwise with medical science in the time of Homer, although Herodicus has now invented a new sort of treatment, whose only result is to prolong the process of dying. Asclepius knew better; for he saw that work was more than life. We recognise this fact in the case of artisans and mechanics; but Asclepius knew that rich men also have a work to do, and in the interests both of his patients and their country, declined to treat incurable diseases. Legends to the contrary effect are false. Yet we cannot dispense with doctors and judges: only they must be good doctors and good judges. The most skilled physicians are those who, besides having learnt their art, have had the largest experience of disease in their own persons; but no one can be a good judge whose soul is not unstained. Our judges must be old, and gain their knowledge of crime by science, not by personal experience. The vicious judge cannot recognise innocence when he sees it. Vice will never know Virtue, but Virtue may be taught to know Vice as well as herself. Our doctors will permit the physically incurable to die; the morally incurable our judges will put to death.

καὶ ἀπορίᾳ οἰκείων has suffered severely at the hands of critics, who have bracketed καί (Ast and others), or read καὶ ἀπορία οἰκείων (Hermann), or δικαίων ἀπορίᾳ οἰκείων (Madvig), or finally denounced the words as a ‘futile interpretamentum.’ Schneider explains καί as “idque” (“und zwar” in his translation), and so also Prantl, and Shilleto (on Dem. F. L. § 101). This interpretation appears to me forced and unnatural. It is simplest to make ἀπορίᾳ as well as τῷ δικαίῳ depend on χρῆσθαι, and regard χρῆσθαι ἀπορίᾳ as equivalent to εἶναι ἄποροι, just as χρῆσθαι ἀμαθίᾳ (for example) means no more than εἶναι ἀμαθεῖς. The plural οἰκείων does not refer to δεσποτῶν, but is the genitive of οἰκεῖα, which means ‘resources of one's own,’ ‘personal resources’) (ἐπακτῷ παρ’ ἄλλων. Cf. the use of τὰ οἰκεῖα in the literal sense for res familiaris I 343 E al.

ἦ δοκεῖ κτλ. Glauco has said that χρῆσθαι ἐπακτῷ τῷ δικαίῳ is the most disgraceful thing of all. Socrates asks him whether it (τοῦτο) is more disgraceful than the other case (τούτου) which he is about to mention; and Glauco's reply is ‘no: this other case is even more disgraceful than the first’ (infra C). The meaning was missed by the critic who (see Rev. de Philol. XV p. 83) ingeniously suggested the insertion of ἢ οὔ; after δικαστοῦ just before Glauco's reply. In what follows the litigiousness of the Athenian nature is satirised.

ἀποστραφῆναι : an expressive and epigrammatic condensation for ἀπολυθῆναι στρεφόμενος. λυγιζόμενος is rightly explained by the Scholiast as στρεφόμενος, καμπτόμενος, ἀπὸ τῶν λύγων· λύγος δέ ἐστι φυτὸν ἱμαντῶδες. The corruption λογιζόμενος (found in all MSS except A and—according to Rostagno —M) was easy and almost inevitable.

παρασχεῖν δίκην . The same phrase appears in Eur. Hipp. 49, 50, and Herwerden should not have proposed ὑποσχεῖν. Plato's view in the Gorgias is that the guilty should denounce themselves to the judge and be cured by suffering punishment: see II 380 B note

φύσας τε καὶ κατάρρους . The order is chiastic, φύσας referring to πνευμάτων, and κατάρρους to ῥευμάτων. Plato clearly indicates that the medical use of these words was only beginning in his day, and it is the application of these words to diseases which he derides, not the words themselves when used of bellows, blasts, and torrents (see the Lexica). The experiment in language is better preserved by rendering ‘blasts and torrents’ than ‘flatulence and catarrh.’ For φῦσα cf. (with Poschenrieder l. c. p. 47) [Hippocr.] de flatibus VI p. 94 c. 3 Littré πνεύματα δὲ τὰ μὲν ἐν τοῖσι σώμασι φῦσαι καλέονται, τὰ δὲ ἔξω τῶν σωμάτων ἀήρ, and ib. c. 7 ὅταν οὖν τὸ σῶμα σιτίων πλησθῇ, καὶ πνεύματος πλησμονὴ ἐπὶ πλέον γίγνεται τῶν σιτίων χρονιζομένων· χρονίζεται δὲ τὰ σιτία διὰ τὸ πλῆθος οὐ δυνάμενα διελθεῖν· ἐμφραχθείσης δὲ τῆς κάτω κοιλίης, ἐς ὅλον τὸ σῶμα διέδραμον αἱ φῦσαι. Other examples of the use of the term in the Hippocratean corpus are cited by Stephanus-Hase Thes. s.v. With κατάρρους cf. Crat. 440 C ἀτεχνῶς ὥσπερ οἱ κατάρρῳ νοσοῦντες ἄνθρωποι. The word is found in the Hippocratean writings, and denotes “defluxionem aut omnem humoris ex capite ad os et asperam arteriam, atque per eam ad pulmonem, delationem ac descensum” (StephanusHase s. v., where examples are quoted).

τοὺς κομψοὺς Ἀσκληπιάδας . The epithets κομψοί and χαρίεντες were often applied to the more advanced and scientific sort of physicians (Blümner Privatalt. p. 358 note 2). The Ἀσκληπιάδαι were a well-recognised sect or college of physicians, with schools in Cyrene, Rhodes, Cos and Cnidos. See Günther in Iwan Müller's Handbuch V 1 p. 103, and Hug on Symp. 186 E.

καὶ μάλ) ‐‐ ὀνόματα : ‘Yes, indeed, these are truly’ etc. Glauco does not reply to οὐκ αἰσχρὸν δοκεῖ, but simply corroborates what Socrates has said about the new medical terminology. This is simpler than to place (with Schneider) a colon after ἔφη, and take καὶ μάλα with αἰσχρόν. The asyndeton on Schneider's view is too harsh, and would almost require the insertion of καί before ὡς, or (if ὡς ἀληθῶς were taken as ὡς ἀληθῶς αἰσχρόν) before καινά; neither of which alternatives is satisfying. For similar inexactness in replies see V 465 E note

E 27 οἱ ὑεῖς ‐‐ ἐπετίμησαν . In themselves these words can only mean that Machaon and Podalirius (the two chief army doctors to the Greek host, Il. XI 833) found no fault with the damsel who gave the wounded Eurypylus an inflammatory potion, or with Patroclus, who was curing him, for directing or permitting her to do so. In our Homer, however, the potion is given, not to Eurypylus but to the wounded Machaon, by Hecamede, Nestor's slave (Il. XI 624); and this is correctly related in Ion 538 B. The inconsistency led Ast to suspect the genuineness both of Εὐρυπύλῳ—see however 408 A—and of οὐδὲ Πατρόκλῳ τῷ ἰωμένῳ; but there can be little doubt that the text is sound. We must suppose either that Plato is confused, or else that in his text of Homer such a potion was administered, not only to the wounded Machaon (as in the Ion l.c.), but also to the wounded Eurupylus, with Patroclus' sanction. The first alternative is possible, and approved by Howes (Harvard Studies etc. VI p. 198): but as it is clear from the Ion— if the Ion is genuine—that Plato was familiar with the story of Machaon's treatment, I think it more likely that Plato's Homer related a similar incident in connexion with the treatment of Eurypylus also. For the healing of Eurypylus see Il. XI 844 ff., XV 394.

οἶνον Πράμνειον . Athenaeus, alluding to this passage, informs us that Pramneian wine was παχὺς καὶ πολυτρόφος (I 10 B).

φλεγματώδη : ‘inflammatory.’ Cf. [Hippocr.] περὶ νούσων IV c. 35 (VII p. 548 Littré) ἐπήν τις φάγῃ τυρὸν ἢ ὅ τι ἐστὶ δριμύ, ἢ ἄλλο τι φάγῃ ἢ πίῃ ὅ τι ἐστὶ φλεγματῶδες, αὐτίκα οἱ ἐπιθέει ἐπὶ τὸ στόμα καὶ τὰς ῥῖνας (Poschenrieder l.c. p. 49).

τῇ παιδαγωγικῇ ‐‐ ἰατρικῇ . Cf. Tim. 89 C παιδαγωγεῖν δεῖ διαίταις πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα—ἀλλ’ οὐ φαρμακεύοντα κακὸν δύσκολον ἐρεθιστέον.

Ἡρόδικον . Herodicus, a native of Megara, and afterwards a citizen of Selymbria, is mentioned by Plato again in Prot. 316 E and Phaedr. 227 D. He was one of the earliest to study scientifically the therapeutics of exercise and diet, and particularly recommended long walks, according to Plato ( Phaedr. l.c. τὸν περίπατον Μέγαράδε. Cf. Häser Lehrb. d. Gesch. d. Med. etc. I p. 94). The description of his health given here is confirmed by Aristotle Rhet. I 5. 1361^{b} 4—6 πολλοὶ—ὑγιαίνουσιν ὥσπερ Ἠρόδικος λέγεται, οὓς οὐδεὶς ἂν εὐδαιμονίσειε τῆς ὑγιείας διὰ τὸ πάντων ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων ἢ τῶν πλείστων (a passage curiously misunderstood by J. and C., who seem to take λέγεται for λέγει). Plato himself thoroughly appreciates the connexion between γυμναστική and ἰατρική: see for example Gorg. 452 A ff., 464 B ff., Soph. 228 E, Pol. 295 C.

νοσώδης γενόμενος . εἰς φθίσιν ἀνήκεστον πάθος ἐμπεσών, says Plutarch (de his qui sero etc. 554 C).

μακρὸν ‐‐ τὸν θάνατον κτλ. Cf. Eur. Suppl. 1109—1113 μισῶ δ’ ὅσοι χρῄζουσιν ἐκτείνειν βίον | βρωτοῖσι καὶ ποτοῖσι καὶ μαγεύμασι | παρεκτρέποντες ὀχετὸν ὥστε μὴ θανεῖν· | οὓς χρῆν, ἐπειδὰν μηδὲν ὠφελῶσι γῆν, | θανόντας ἔρρειν κἀκποδὼν εἶναι νέοις, and Aesch. Fr. 395, Soph. Fr. 689 .

δυσθανατῶν : not “dum malam obit mortem” (Stallbaum), but ‘dying hard’ like δυσθνῄσκων.

καλόν . Because he was the first to profit by his own invention. The assonance γῆρας—γέρας is quite in Plato's manner: cf. IV 439 C, VI 487 C, VIII 557 C notes

οὐδενὶ σχολὴ κτλ. Steinhart (Platon's Werke V p. 172) thinks it strange that so idealistic a thinker as Plato should not recognise the power of spiritual strength to rise superior to bodily weakness. This truth was not ignored by Plato (see infra 408 E and VI 496 B), although here, perhaps, he forgets that conspicuous examples of fortitude and resignation have a political as well as a private value: “they also serve who only stand and wait.”

καύσει ἢ τομῇ . The two methods of ancient surgery: see Blümner Privatalt. p. 353 note

μακρὰν has less authority than μικράν (see cr. n.), but is probably right. The contrast with the immediate remedies just described seems to require an allusion to the duration of the regimen: cf. also μακρὸν—τὸν θάνατον in B above. μικράν is not sufficiently defended by a reference to κατὰ σμικρόν in 407 D, nor by the allusion to πιλίδια καὶ τὰ τούτοις ἑπόμενα. Moreover σμικρός, and not μικρός, is the prevailing form throughout the Republic. μικρός appears to occur only in V 453 D and VI 498 D. On the inscriptional usage see Meisterhans^{3} p. 89.

πιλίδια . Felt caps were worn by the sick and delicate (see the references in Blümner l.c. p. 180 note 5); but as artisans and sailors usually wore felt caps too (Dict. Ant. II p. 427), Plato perhaps alludes to some special coverings for the head prescribed by doctors from time to time in a course of medical treatment. The plural also points to this. If not, he uses the expression quite generally, as an example of the treatment he condemns. Well-to-do Greeks generally went bareheaded.

εἶπεν . The ‘momentary’ aorist well expresses the carpenter's decided businesslike tone. His view of life resembles that of the ‘meditative skipper’ in Gorg. 511 D ff.

ὑγιὴς ‐‐ ἀπηλλάγη . He regains his health on losing his doctor, or if he dies, dies without help. Cf. Plut. Apophth. Lac. 231 A τοῦ δὲ ἰατροῦ εἰπόντος αὐτῷ, Γέρων γέγονας, Διότι, εἶπεν, οὐκ ἐχρησάμην σοι ἰατρῷ. (The anecdote is told of Pausanias the Spartan king.)

ἦν . The carpenter is now dismissed: hence the imperfect ἦν, which should be retained in translating. Stallbaum (followed by J. and C.) explains ἦν as the ‘philosophic’ imperfect=ἐστίν, ὡς ἄρτι ἐλέγομεν (in 406 C). This is much less simple and lively. “Wohl weil er ein Geschäft hatte, bei dessen Unterlassung es ihm nicht erspriesslich war zu leben?” Schneider, rightly. Cf. II 361 C note

ἔργον προκείμενον . The view of work and duty here presented recalls I 352 E—353 E.

ἀκούεις . Phocylides, being dead, yet speaketh. The present ἀκούεις is just as legitimate as φησί, and well expresses the living voice of poetry in oral circulation. Heindorf (on Gorg. 503 C) misses the point of the idiom when he says that ἀκούεις is for ἀκήκοας; while Stallbaum's explanation ‘probas’ is positively wrong. The line, as restored by Bergk Phoc. Fr. 10, is δίζησθαι βιοτήν, ἀρετὴν δ’ ὅταν ᾖ βίος ἤδη. The Horatian ‘quaerenda pecunia primum, | virtus post nummos’ gives the meaning, if primum and post are understood in a strictly temporal sense. Phocylides' maxim is one of the earliest expressions of the all but universal cry χρήματα χρήματ’ ἀνήρ (first in Alcaeus Fr. 49 Bergk), which Socrates and Plato continually preached against. It will be noticed that Plato for his own purposes represents Phocylides as laying the stress on ἀρετὴν ἀσκεῖν rather than on δίζησθαι βιοτήν, where it really falls.

τοῦτο : viz. τὸ ἀρετὴν ἀσκεῖν, as explained in the margin of A.

τῇ προσέξει τοῦ νοῦ is added as a kind of afterthought or additional specification, precisely like the infinitives in Gorg. 513 E ἐπιχειρητέον ἐστι τῇ πόλει καὶ τοῖς πολίταις θεραπεύειν, infra 407 C, IV 437 B, 443 B, V 450 B, X 598 B, Crito 52 B. The datives τεκτονικῇ etc. depend grammatically on ἐμπόδιον only, and have nothing to do with προσέξει. παρακέλευμα presently is of course the accusative, the subject to ἐμποδίζει being νοσοτροφία, and οὐδέν adverbial. Richter (in Fl. Jahrb. 1867 p. 140) should not have revived the reading of Bekker μελετῶντι ἢ νοσοτροφία· τεκτονικῇ μὲν γὰρ κτλ., which is lacking both in authority and point.

ναὶ μὰ τὸν Δία ‐‐ εἰκός γε, ἔφην (in C). See cr. n. With the MS reading εἰκός γ’ ἔφη, the distribution of the speeches causes difficulty. It will be enough to mention three alternatives, for no one has adopted or is likely to adopt the punctuation of A, where σχεδόν γέ τι —περὶ τοῦ σώματος is assigned to Socrates. We may give either (1) the whole speech ναὶ μὰ—περὶ τοῦ σώματος to Glauco, excising εἰκός γε, ἔφη with II q and some other MSS (so Schneider 1830); or (2) ναὶ μὰ—ἐπιμέλεια τοῦ σώματος to Glauco, and καὶ γὰρ—περὶ τοῦ σώματος to Socrates (Stallbaum); or (3) ναὶ μὰ—δύσκολος to Glauco, and τὸ δὲ δὴ—περὶ τοῦ σώματος to Socrates (Baiter and others, including Schneider 1842). The first view fails to account for the appearance of εἰκός γε ἔφη in A, but is right, I think, in assigning the whole speech to Glauco. Neither at καὶ γὰρ πρὸς οἰκονομίας nor at τὸ δὲ δὴ μέγιστον is it easy and natural to change the speakers. The simple expedient of writing ἔφην for ἔφη appears to me to set matters straight. For the corruption see Introd. § 5. οὐκοῦν ταῦτα etc. is also said by Socrates.

ἥ γε περαιτέρω κτλ. ‘This excessive care of the body, which goes beyond what sound bodily regimen permits.’ The Greek has a rhetorical effect like τὸ δεινόν, τὸ μέγα ἐκεῖνο—θρέμμα IX 590 A. With περαιτέρω and the genitive cf. Gorg. 484 C περαιτέρω τοῦ δέοντος. I once conjectured ἥ γε περαιτέρω γυμναστική, ἧς (‘cuius est’) etc. (Cl. Rev. X p. 385), but Plato seems to mean that treatment of this kind has no claim to the name γυμναστική at all, and not that it is γυμναστική run mad. The MS reading is defended also by a reviewer of my Text of the Republic in Hermathena XX p. 252.

πρὸς ἑαυτόν : with μελέτας, as in μελετᾶν, φροντίζειν πρὸς ἑαυτόν etc.

διατάσεις , though its MS authority (see cr. n.) is slight, can hardly fail to be what Plato wrote. Similarly in 546 C A^{1} has ἕκαστον twice for ἑκατόν. See Introd. § 5.

ὅπῃ ‐‐ ἐμπόδιος . The reading of Ξ (followed by Stallbaum and the older editors) is certainly right. αὕτη (sc. ἔστιν) is νοσοτροφία; and ἐμπόδιος ἀρετῇ ἀσκεῖσθαι is exactly like ἐπιχειρεῖν τῇ πόλει θεραπεύειν (see 407 B note). The presence of νοσοτροφία makes it impossible for virtue to be practised or tested, as when, for example, to take a pedant's illustration, a boy evades both lectures and examinations by cherishing a nervous headache. Recent English editors have followed Baiter, and read ὅπῃ ταύτῃ ἀρετὴ ἀσκεῖται καὶ δοκιμάζεται, taking ταύτῃ as ἐν φιλοσοφίᾳ, but this gives a much less satisfactory meaning. After αὕτη had been changed to ταύτῃ, the rest of the corruption was easy; but a trace of the original reading may survive in the ἀρετῇ (not ἀρετή) of A.

ἀποκεκριμένον : an isolated, local malady; “morbum separatum, non totum corpus afficientem” (Ast). Unnecessary difficulty has been raised. The word is in no sense technical, and ἀποκρίνω in the sense of ‘separate’ is common enough. The corruption ἀποκεκρυμμένον might have been foretold.

τούτοις μέν κτλ. The words τοὺς μὲν ὑγιεινῶς ἔχοντας led us to expect ἰᾶσθαι, but the construction changes in order to introduce the invention of medicine, and the ‘healing’ reappears in a different form in φαρμάκοις τε—δίαιταν. The sentence is bad grammar, but good conversational style of the looser kind. It is not easy to say whether τε after φαρμάκοις connects the clauses, or only φαρμάκοις with τομαῖς. The former use is comparatively rare in Plato (Hoefer, de part. Plat. p. 7). Partly on this ground, and partly because the union of the aorist καταδεῖξαι with προστάττειν is a little awkward, I prefer the second alternative. The asyndeton, which is of the usual explanatory or ampliative kind, is in keeping with the loose structure of the whole sentence, and seems to me to add a certain didactic impressiveness here: cf. 409 B. τὰ δ’ εἴσω—σώματα depends not so much on ἀπαντλοῦντα directly as on the composite notion ἀπαντλοῦντα καὶ ἐπιχέοντα, which expresses a certain mode of treatment, and is as it were a species of the general idiom ποιεῖν τινά τι. φυτεύειν must depend on ποιεῖν. Plato's sentences are seldom so disjointed as this: cf. however VI 488 B ff., VIII 558 A.

μὴ οἴεσθαι : for the negative (which is the more natural here, as it belongs logically to δεῖν, though grammatically to οἴεσθαι) see I 346 E note οἴεσθαι, like ἐπιχειρεῖν, depends on φῶμεν .

λυσιτελῆ is taken by Schneider as the accusative neuter in apposition to the idea in θεραπεύειν. If so, αὐτῷ for αὑτῷ must be written (with A). It is however so natural to take λυσιτελῆ as masculine that Plato would surely have expressed the other meaning in a less ambiguous way. The usual view yields a satisfactory sense, and should be preferred.

δῆλον κτλ. See cr. n. The awkwardness of taking ὅτι as ‘because’ was early felt and led to the insertion of δεικνύοιεν ἄν in several MSS (καὶ· οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ δεικνύοιεν ἂν ὅτι τοιοῦτος ἦν)—a reading adopted by the older editors. Few will now dispute that δεικνύοιεν ἄν is a gloss. Besides Schneider's suggestion, which I adopt, two other proposals merit consideration: (1) δῆλοι, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, καὶ οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ὅτι τοιοῦτος ἦν (Sauppe, comparing Crito 44 D), (2) δῆλον, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, καὶ οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ὅτι τοιοῦτοι. ἢ οὐχ ὁρᾷς κτλ. (Madvig). The first, though regarded as possible by Schneider (Addit. p. 25), involves what is, to say the least, a very exceptional use of δῆλος, with which “subiectum sententiae verbo ὅτι incipientis idem esse solet quod sententiae primariae” (Hartman). Sauppe's parallel from the Crito is a doubtful exception to Hartman's rule. Moreover οὐχ ὁρᾷς κτλ. is too lively: we should expect ἢ (so Π ^{2} Ξ^{2} and other MSS) οὐχ ὁρᾷς κτλ. Madvig's correction already involves two changes (τοιοῦτοι and ἤ), but would be improved by making a third, viz. δῆλοι for δῆλον. The minimum of dislocation which yields a satisfactory sense is the reading which suggested itself to Schneider, although he did not himself adopt it. Some may be inclined to pronounce ὅτι τοιοῦτος ἦν a marginal gloss on δῆλον, as once occurred to Hartman.

ὡς ἐγὼ λέγω . ὡς is emphatic, ‘in the way I describe.’

αἷμ) ‐‐ ἔπασσον . Il. IV 218 αἷμ’ ἐκμυζήσας ἐπ’ ἄρ’ ἤπια φάρμακα εἰδὼς | πάσσε, said of Machaon only. Plato ingeniously accommodates the line to his own purposes. ἐκμυζήσαντ) is of course the aorist indicative ἐκμυζήσαντο, not the dual participle as J. and C. hold. This was pointed out by Schneider. Verbs denoting any kind of organic action are apt to be middle in Attic (Rutherford New Phrynichus pp. 138 ff.). It would be easy to write ἐκμύζησάν τ) (as I once did) and retain Homer's active, but it is not worth while.

κἂν εἰ has come to mean no more than καὶ εἰ: cf. infra V 477 A, IX 579 D, X 612 C and Jebb on Soph. El. pp. 224 f. The change from the plural πιόντες to the singular νοσώδη has been doubted by Herwerden; but see I 347 A note In illustration of κυκεῶνα πιόντες Schneider ( Addit. p. 25) refers to Hippocr. περὶ διαίτης ὀξέων II p. 304 f. Littré οἱ γὰρ ἀρχόμενοι τῶν ὀξέων νουσημάτων ἔστιν ὅτε οἱ μὲν σιτία ἔφαγον—οἱ δὲ καὶ κυκεῶνα ἐρρόφεον· ἅπαντα δὲ ταῦτα κακίω μέν ἐστιν ἢ εἰ ἑτεροίως τις διαιτηθείη κτλ.

Μίδου πλουσιώτεροι : with reference (as Stallbaum observes) to Tyrt. 12. 6 (Bergk): cf. Laws 660 E.

τραγῳδοποιοί τε καὶ Πίνδαρος . Aesch. Ag. 1022 f., Eur. Alc. 3, Pind. Pyth. 3. 55—58 (αἴθων δὲ κεραυνὸς ἐνέσκιμψεν μόρον).

πειθόμεθα was much more likely to be corrupted to πεισόμεθα (so q, with Stallbaum and others) than vice versâ, on account of φήσομεν. The present is more pointed and expressive; our rule has been laid down (391 D), and we abide by it now and always.

ὅσοι κτλ. Glauco's conception of the medical art resembles that of the later ἐμπειρικοί: see Celsus de med. Proem. pp. 5—9 ed. Daremberg, and infra 408 D note

καὶ μάλα ‐‐ λέγω . Socrates replies to ἆρ’ οὐκ—ἰατρούς; ignoring, or nearly ignoring, εἶεν δ’ ἂν—ὡμιληκότες: cf. V 465 E note καὶ μάλα is simply ‘certainly,’ and ἀγαθοὺς λέγω lays stress on ἀγαθούς: ‘that is, if they are really good,’ ‘good ones, I mean.’ There is perhaps a hint that the good physician and the good judge must also be good men: cf. 409 C. To substitute with Hartman μάλιστα for μάλα (as in many MSS) is to mistake the force of λέγω.

ἰατροὶ κτλ. The combination of scientific knowledge (πρὸς τῷ μανθάνειν τὴν τέχνην) and medical experience which Plato desiderates reminds us of the standpoint of the μεθοδικοί, whose principles were in some respects a compromise between those of the δογματικοί or Theorists, and those of the Empirics: see Celsus l.c. pp. 9—13 and Häser Lehrb. d. Gesch. d. Med. etc. pp. 245 ff., 268 ff.

ψυχῇ ψυχῆς . Cf. Gorg. 523 C—E.

, B 2 αὐτήν : ipsam, not eam, as Jowett apparently translates it.

διὸ δὴ καὶ εὐήθεις . “For unstained thoughts do seldom dream on evil: Birds never limed no secret bushes fear” (Rape of Lucrece). Cf. infra VII 517 D ff., Theaet. 174 C ff. The use of παραδείγματα recalls Theaet. 176 E, though the idea is somewhat different here. The word means ‘models,’ ‘standards,’ not ‘samples of experience’ (J. and C.), and τοῖς πονηροῖς is equivalent to τοῖς τῶν πονηρῶν παραδείγμασι. Cf. infra C, D, where παράδειγμα τοῦ τοιούτου is ‘a model’ (not ‘a sample’) ‘of such a character.’ So also Schneider, who translates by ‘Vorbild.’

ὀψιμαθῆ κτλ. The common taunt ὀψιμαθής is in such a case an epithet of praise.

οὐκ οἰκείαν κτλ. For the asyndeton see 407 D note δεῖ αἰσθάνεσθαι for διαισθάνεσθαι (Stob. Flor. 45. 96) is ingenious, but weak. As Steinhart remarks ( Einleitung p. 173), the scientific knowledge of virtue, according to Socrates and Plato, implies a knowledge of its opposite, viz. vice: see on I 334 A, and cf. infra 409 D.

οἰόμενος . Cf. Theaet. 173 B δεινοί τε καὶ σοφοὶ γεγονότες, ὡς οἴονται, and I 336 A note

καὶ πρεσβυτέροις κτλ. The touching allusion to Socrates' condemnation will not escape the sympathetic reader. Plato seldom talks in this vein without thinking of his master: cf. Theact. 174 C and the still more affecting words in VII 517 A. It is from incidental references such as these that we can best appreciate the profound influence which the death of Socrates exercised upon Plato. See also VIII 560 D note

πονηρία μὲν γὰρ ‐‐ λήψεται . See on 409 B and the suggestive remarks of Stewart on Aristotle's Eth. Nic. V 1. 1129^{a} 17. Strictly speaking, Vice cannot have scientific knowledge ( ἐπιστήμη) even of herselt, since Vice is ignorance (and scientific knowledge of Vice would imply a scientific knowledge of Virtue); but she recognises herself by ἐμπειρία οἰκεία: cf. 409 B.

ἀρετὴ δὲ κτλ. : ‘whereas Virtue will in course of time, if natural endowments are improved by education, attain to scientific knowledge at once of herself and Vice.’ The contrast between πονηρία μέν and ἀρετὴ δέ is much impaired if we connect ἀρετή with φύσεως (in the sense of ‘a virtuous nature’): and for this reason I now agree with Schneider in thinking φύσεως παιδευομένης a genitive absolute. I formerly accepted Richards' emendation παιδευομένη, which is decidedly more logical, if φύσεως depends on ἀρετή: but Schneider's view is better. χρόνῳ belongs to λήψεται, and not to παιδευομένης (as if ‘educated by time,’ Jowett): mere lapse of time will never give ἐπιστήμη. Cf. ὀψιμαθῆ and ἐν πολλῷ χρόνῳ διαισθάνεσθαι in 409 B.

ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐάσουσιν . Cf. Plut. Apophth. Lac. 231 A κράτιστον δὲ ἔλεγε (sc. Παυσανίας ) τοῦτον ἰατρὸν εἶναι τὸν μὴ κατασήποντα τοὺς ἀρρωστοῦντας, ἀλλὰ τάχιστα θάπτοντα. In laying down this law, Plato speaks from the standpoint of the Regal or Political Art, prescribing for the subordinate arts of Medicine and Justice the conditions under which it is good to live and good to die. See Grote Plato I p. 362.

αὐτοί = ipsi is said in opposition to the mere ‘permission to die’ which bodily disease requires. αὐταί (suggested by Richards) is unnecessary: see II 377 C note

410A - 412B Our young men will seldom need the help of judges and doctors, thanks to their education in Music and Gymnastic. They will pursue both arts with a view to the cultivation of the soul rather than of the body. Exclusive devotion to one of the two makes men in the one case hard and fierce, in the other, effeminate and mild. The psychological elements of Spirit and the Love of Knowledge must be attuned to one another. Music and Gymnastic are intended to effect this harmony: and excess or deficiency in either of these educative instruments reflects itself in morbid and degenerate phases of character. He who can best blend Music with Gymnastic is the true musician; and such an one we must provide in our city, if it is to last.

ἆρ’ οὖν κτλ. This epilogue describes concisely the aim and underlying principle of Plato's earlier scheme of education. Its object is to produce citizens who shall combine gentleness and strength—sensibility and courage—intellectual activity and moral stedfastness. It is an ideal in which the distinctive virtues of Athens and Sparta—of Greece and Rome—are united and transfigured. See II 375 C and the passages referred to there. The ideal of Pericles (φιλοσοφεῖν ἄνευ μαλακίας) in many ways resembles Plato's (Thuc. II 40). Cf. also Nettleship Hell. pp. 88—90 and Bosanquet Companion pp. 115—117. It is noteworthy that the doctrine of this section is best explained by a comparison with one of the dialogues often held to be late ( Pol. 306 C—311 C): see also Laws 773 C, D. This is not pointed out by Krohn in his otherwise acute analysis (Pl. St. pp. 24—28).

ὁ μουσικὸς ‐‐ αἱρήσει . ὁ μουσικός is ὁ τῇ ἁπλῇ μουσικῇ χρώμενος, as defined in the last sentence. ἴχνη διώκων and αἱρήσει are metaphors from the chase: see II 375 A.

αὐτὰ μὴν ‐‐ ἰσχύν . The theory of gymnastic propounded here was apparently new in Plato's time (see on II 376 E), although the practice of athletics as an educative discipline, especially at Sparta, conformed to it in no small measure (see Plut. Lyc. 17 ff., Xen. Rep. Lac. 2 ff.).

μεταχειρίζονται . See cr. n. I have followed Hermann in adopting Galen's text. With οὐχ (μὴ ) ὡς or ὥσπερ the verb should have for its subject the nominative contained in the ὡς clause: cf. VII 539 D, X 610 D. Symp. 179 E is in reality no exception to this rule.

τινες . It has been supposed that τινες refers to Isocrates, who in his Antidosis (180—185) expounds at length the usual Greek view of gymnastic. This is possible only if the present section was added within the last four years or so of Plato's life, which is most improbable. See Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. d. pl. Pol. p. 663, and Introd. § 4. In other passages the Antidosis has been held to presuppose the Republic: see Dümmler Chronologische Beitr. etc. pp. 12, 13.

καθιστᾶσιν . Cf. Dem. 24. 145 οὗτος γὰρ (sc. ὁ νόμος)—οὐκ ἐπὶ τοῖς κεκριμένοις—κεῖται, ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀκρίτοις, ἵνα μὴ—ἀναγκάζοιντο ἀγωνίζεσθαι, and Phil. 34 C (where however it is easy to write λάβωμεν). In the first of these cases the reference is, as here, to the establishment of laws or ordinances. καθιστᾶσιν is used somewhat like φησί 407 A. Madvig's emendation καθίστασαν commends itself to Weber (Entwick. d. Absichtssätze in Schanz's Beiträge II 2 p. 58) and others, but has not yet been proved to be necessary, and καθιστάναι below tells rather against it. For other examples of the idiom see Kühner Gr. Gr. II pp. 897, 898. Cases like Soph. O. C. 11 and El. 57, 760 are different, and have been justly emended. As regards the sentiment, it is characteristic of Plato to invent a historical sanction for his theories (cf. 414 B ff.); but he doubtless sincerely believed that the spirit of Greek gymnastics had degenerated.

ἦν δ’ ἐγώ . There seems to be no other case in which ἦν δ’ ἐγώ is so long deferred. Stallbaum and Bekker insert the words after σκληρότητος without any MS authority. If change is needed, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ had better be omitted (so q, whose reading is very different here). But it is better to note than to obliterate such peculiarities.

ἢ ὡς is not ‘pro simplici ἤ vel ὡς positum’ (Stallbaum), but=‘quam quomodo.’

αὐτοῦ . Does the pronoun mean τοῦ ἡμέρου or τοῦ φιλοσόφου? Four qualities are first distinguished: viz. the wild, the hard, the soft and the tame. The source of wildness is the spirited element, which if rightly cultivated becomes brave, if unduly strained, hard. So far, all is clear; but difficulties now begin. We should expect Plato to continue: τὸ ἥμερον is an attribute of τὸ φιλόσοφον, and τὸ φιλόσοφον —not τὸ ἥμερον—when relaxed becomes too soft, when rightly educated becomes κόσμιον (the virtue which contrasts with τὸ ἀνδρεῖον). At first sight, then, it looks as if αὐτοῦ meant ‘the philosophic temperament’ (so Stallbaum and J. and C.); but this is grammatically impossible, unless we make τὸ ἥμερον the subject to μαλακώτερον εἴη and therefore to ἥμερόν τε καὶ κόσμιον, which is hardly tolerable. We must therefore acquiesce in taking αὐτοῦ as τοῦ ἡμέρου, unless there is corruption somewhere. If Plato had written καὶ μᾶλλον μὲν ἀνεθὲν μαλακώτερον εἴη τοῦ δέοντος, καλῶς δὲ τραφὲν σῶφρόν τε καὶ κόσμιον, everything would be clear, but I do not venture to change the text. σῶφρον for ἥμερον is suggested also by Krohn (Pl. St. p. 26). Apelt proposes ἔμμετρον (Berl. Philol. Wochenschr. 1895 p. 969).

ἀμφοτέρα ‐‐ φύσει : viz. τὸ θυμοειδές and τὸ φιλόσοφον.

σώφρων τε καὶ ἀνδρεία . σωφροσύνη is the virtue of τὸ φιλόσοφον, ἀνδρεία of τὸ θυμοειδές: cf. 399 C and Pol. 307 C. The meaning would be caught more easily if Plato had written—as perhaps he did— σῶφρόν τε καὶ κόσμιον for ἥμερόν τε καὶ κόσμιον above, just as he wrote ἀνδρεῖον (410 D). ἄγροικος (implying, like ἀνελεύθερος, ἀνδραποδώδης, with which it is coupled in Laws 880 A, lack of power to control the feelings) is properly opposed to σώφρων here.

καταυλεῖν ‐‐ ἁρμονίας . καταυλεῖν (as Ast observes) does not govern ἁρμονίας, but is used absolutely: cf. Laws 790 E (of mothers singing and rocking their children to sleep) ἀτεχνῶς οἷον καταυλοῦσι τῶν παιδίων, καθάπερ αἱ τῶν ἐκφρόνων βακχειῶν ἰάσεις, ταύτῃ τῇ τῆς κινήσεως ἅμα χορείᾳ καὶ μούσῃ χρώμεναι. So expressive a word could ill be spared, although van Heusde's καταντλεῖν is ingenious enough. Cobet would read καταντλεῖν and cut out καὶ καταχεῖν, while Hartman inclines to eject καταυλεῖν καί, but the text is sound. ἁρμονίας depends on καταχεῖν. With χώνης cf. (with Hiller Fl. Jahrb. 1874 p. 174) Ar. Thesm. 18 δίκην δὲ χοάνης ὦτα: see Blaydes ad loc. The context in Aristophanes lends some colour to Hiller's notion that the comparison was taken from some earlier philosopher: cf. Theophr. de sensu § 9.

σίδηρον ἐμάλαξε κτλ. See on 387 C. Apparently then the first effect even of the μαλακαὶ ἁρμονίαι is good. This apparent inconsistency with 398 E ff. is emphasized by Krohn (Pl. St. p. 25), but Krohn fails to observe that Plato is here describing the facts of common experience, whereas before he was making laws of his own. It is quite possible to admit that the relaxing modes are beneficial in moderation, and yet forbid them, because moderation in them is difficult to maintain.

ὅταν ‐‐ τήκει . The object of κηλῇ, τήκει and λείβει is τὸ θυμοειδές: that of ποιήσῃ is τὴν ψυχήν. So much is, I think, certain; but ἐπέχων is less easy. The word has been interpreted as (1) ‘listening to’ (Schneider, comparing 399 B, where, however, ὑπέχοντα should probably be read), (2) ‘pressing on,’ ‘persevering,’ ‘continuing’: cf. Theaet. 165 D ἐπέχων καὶ οὐκ ἀνιείς (J. and C.). The sense which Schneider gives to ἐπέχων is ill-supported: and we must accept the second alternative. Morgenstern's emendation ἐπιχέων (accepted by Herwerden and Hartman) is attractive but not quite convincing (“when he ceases not to pour the music in” etc.). ἐπιχέων would preserve the metaphor, which is clearly intended (in καταχεῖν, χώνης, and σίδηρον ἐμάλαξε) to suggest the process of smelting, and of which an echo still survives in τήκει, λείβει and ἐκτήξῃ. See Blümner Technologie etc. IV pp. 108 ff. notes The θυμοειδές is the iron which music softens and may even dissolve: farther than this the comparison is not to be pressed.

κηλῇ : as one might charm or fascinate a snake: Euthyd. 290 A, Phaedr. 259 A.

καὶ λείβει ‐‐ αἰχμητήν . For λείβει thus used cf. Ar. Knights 327. μαλθακὸς αἰχμητής is said of Menelaus in Il. XVII 588.

ἐὰν ‐‐ λάβῃ : ‘if he has received,’ not ‘if he act upon’ (J. and C.). Plato means that if the individual in question received at the beginning a soul— ψυχήν is understood—naturally spiritless, he soon makes it a ‘feeble warrior.’ “Wenn er gleich eine von Natur zornlose Seele bekommen hat” (Schneider). The subject throughout is the τις with which the sentence began. For the usual Greek idiom, by which the person concerned is represented as acting on himself (ἐκτήξῃ τὸν θυμόν etc.) instead of being acted on, cf. Eur. I. A. 187 φοινίσσουσα παρῇδ’ ἐμὰν | αἰσχύνᾳ νεοθαλεῖ with Headlam's note: also V 462 C, D notes and IX 572 A note

ἐρεθιζόμενον . ῥιπιζόμενον, suggested by Herwerden, is picturesque enough: but ‘provoked and extinguished’ is even more natural in Greek than in English, for ἐρεθίζω could readily be used of fanning a fire: see the lexica s.v.

ἀντὶ θυμοειδοῦς ‐‐ ἔμπλεοι . θυμοειδοῦς is of course masculine and not neuter (as J. and C. suggest). Even if we allow that the dative is neuter in cases like Symp. 195 C νέος—ἐστι, πρὸς δὲ τῷ νέῳ ἁπαλός, and Theaet. 185 E, the presence of the article makes all the difference. Ast (with Ξ) reads θυμοειδῶν. So harsh a change from plural to singular (ὀργίλοι but θυμοειδοῦς) is remarkable, but hardly more so than ἀποθανουμένους ὅς in IV 426 C. Cf. also I 347 A note Krohn points out that ἀνδρεῖον is here represented as a μεσότης between σκληρόν and ὀργίλον (Pl. St. p. 27).

εὐωχῆται : should be understood literally, of good living.

ὥσπερ θήριον ‐‐ διαπράττεται . If the MSS are right, πάντα is masculine. But although διαπράττεσθαι by itself can be used without an expressed object ( Prot. 319 C al.), it is strange to find διαπράττεσθαι πρός τινα so used: see Crat. 395 B, Alc. II 143 C. On this account διαπράττεται has been by some ejected (Hermann), by others emended into διαράττεται (Morgenstern), διατάττεται (Madvig and one Florentine MS); while others read θηρίον τὰ πάντα διαπράττεται (Lambrechts), or προσδιαπράττεται πάντα (Chandler), or expunge πρός (Bywater). Perhaps we should read ὥσπερ θηρίον πρὸς <θηρίον> κτλ. (‘attains all his ends by violence and ferocity, like one wild beast with another’). Cf. Shakespeare Rape of Lucrece “The rough beast that knows no gentle right.”

σκαιότητι . ‘Ineptitude.’ Cf. Soph. Ant. 1028 with Jebb's note.

ἀχαριστίας is ‘ungraciousness.’

εἰ μὴ εἴη πάρεργον occurs also in Phaed. 91 A (according to the Bodleian MS). Phrases of this kind seldom admit of variation; for which reason we should hesitate to admit the εἰ μὴ εἰ πάρεργον of Π^{1}.

ὅπως ἄν κτλ. The soul has, so to speak, two strings, the φιλόσοφον and the θυμοειδές, which make a kind of ἁρμονία when they are tuned to the proper pitch by Music and Gymnastic. The θυμοειδές is slackened (ἀνίεται) by μουσική, tightened or braced (ἐπιτείνεται) by γυμναστική (410 D, 411 A—E); conversely, we must suppose that the φιλόσοφον is slackened by γυμναστική, and tightened by μουσική. Music and Gymnastic are therefore both of them necessary for each of the two strings (cf. IV 441 E note), although the slackening of the θυμοειδές of itself also tightens the φιλόσοφον, which is likewise slackened when the tension of the other is increased. Cf. Tim. 88 B, C. The effect of all this musical imagery is to suggest that Character is the Music of the Soul: cf. Lach. 188 D.

τοῦ ‐‐ ἐπιστάτου . Some MSS (including Ξ and q) omit τοῦ, and no precise parallel has yet been adduced for ὁ τοιοῦτός τις used in this way. In IX 581 E, cited by Schneider (Addit. p. 27), Paris A has ἐν τοιούτῳ τινί, not ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ τινί. The article may perhaps be justified by the description of the ἐπιστάτης in the last sentence, and τινὸς taken closely with τοιούτου (‘some such superintendent as we have described’); but there is certainly some ground for suspecting interpolation (with Bekker and others). The ἐπιστάτης, as Jowett observes, is a sort of minister of education, such as we find in Laws 765 D ff. The same function is in Pol. 308 D ff. assigned to the Regal or Political Art.

ὡς οἷόν τέ γε μάλιστα . I have placed a comma before ὡς; cf. Phaed. 74 B φῶμεν μέντοι νὴ Δἴ, ἔφη ὁ Σιμμίας, θαυμαστῶς γε (Hoefer Part. Plat. p. 33).

412B - 414B So much for Education. It remains to ask ‘Which of the guardians are to be our rulers?’ The elder shall rule the younger, and the better the worse. Now the best guardians are those who care most for their country and her interests. We shall make our selection on this principle; and we must further try those whom we select and see whether their patriotism is proof against all seductive influences. Every true opinion or belief —and the belief on which patriotism rests is true,—like everything else which we call good, is unwillingly discarded, but may be forcibly expelled by persuasion or forgetfulness, by pain, pleasure and the like. We shall apply these tests to prove our guardians. Those who emerge unscathed will become our rulers. They are the true Guardians; the others should be called Auxiliaries.

ff. This is the first appearance of the Rulers in Plato's State, if we except the passing allusion in 389 C. Their presence is necessary to take the place of the original νομοθέτης when the State has once been founded (VI 497 D); they represent in fact the Royal or Kingly art, whose business it is to prescribe to others their specific good or end. See on 410 A and Nohle die Statslehre Platos pp. 47 f., 85 ff., 113 ff. Such is their duty according to the later books; but here it is not so described, and the whole subject is treated in an exoteric way. The full and esoteric discussion of this subject is reserved for VI and VII. To this later treatment reference is made in 414 A and 416 B. The advocates of the original unity of the Republic justly lay stress upon the tentative and provisional nature of the regulations here laid down (e.g. Susemihl Gen. Entw. p. 143, Zeller^{4} II 1. p. 560 note); whereas the separatists hold that Plato's wider conception of the Ruling class is chronologically later than the account now given (Krohn Pl. St. pp. 28—31). An excellent defence of the conservative view will be found in Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. d. pl. Pol. pp. 613 ff. See also Introd. § 4.

χορείας ‐‐ ἱππικούς . See Laws 814 D ff., 822 D ff., 830 C ff., 832 D ff.

οὐκέτι : ‘not now,’ sc. when we have trained our Guardians. On such idiomatic uses of οὐκέτι and its opposite ἤδη see Cope's Rhetoric of Aristotle, Vol. I p. 13.

πρεσβυτέρους κτλ. The different principles on which rulers may be appointed are fully discussed in Laws 690 A ff.

φρονίμους κτλ. Intellectual ability and accomplishments, authority, and pa triotic sentiment are the three requisites of the Rulers as laid down here. In VI and VII it is the first which is emphasized, here it is the last. This is in harmony with the whole spirit of I—IV, in which, as Krohn remarks (Pl. St. p. 29), “the intellect is subordinated to the moral powers, and with the education of the character in richly-endowed natures the fruits of insight ripen of themselves.”

καὶ ἐκείνου . See cr. n. Stobaeus ( Flor. 43. 152) reads καὶ ὅτι (or ὅ τι) μάλιστα ἐκείνου κτλ., which is good enough Greek, and would mean ‘whatever policy he thinks by bringing prosperity to the other brings prosperity also to himself,’ ὅ τι being an accusative of respect belonging to εὖ πράττοντος. If the principle of this interpretation is right, I should read ὅ τι ἄν for ὅταν, taking ἄν with ξυμβαίνειν. ἄν loves the shelter of a relative, particularly ὅ τι, and the corruption is the easier because ὅταν in A and other MSS is written ὅτ’ ἄν. But φιλεῖν cannot well be said of one's attitude to a policy or course of action; and Hermann's proposal gives a more satisfactory sense. The occurrence of (τοῦτ)ό γ’ ἂν μάλιστα just before may be responsible for the slip. It is to be understood—though Plato has not expressly said so—that the guardians believe their own interests to be best consulted by promoting those of their country. μὴ δέ is μὴ δὲ εὖ πράττοντος, and τοὐναντίον is ξυμβαίνειν καὶ ἑαυτῷ κακῶς πράττειν.

ἐπιλανθανόμενοι helps out the idea in ἐκβάλλουσιν and forms a natural antithesis to φυλακικοί which, while playing upon φύλακες, also implies the notion of remembering: cf. φύλαξ μουσικῆς 413 E. The word has been undeservedly attacked, chiefly because in 413 B it receives a more special and precise signification. But each of the three temptations to be presently enumerated, κλοπή, βία and γοητεία, may be correctly described as varieties of forgetting; nor is it in Plato's manner to introduce a classification prematurely, as he would have done by writing μήτε γοητευόμενοι μήτε βιαζόμενοι — < μήτε > ἐπιλανθανόμενοι (with Heller), or adding μήτε κλεπτόμενοι before ἐκβάλλουσιν (with Hartman). Cobet, more suo, expunges the word.

ἑκουσίως ἢ ἀκουσίως : with reference to the usual Socratic theory that Knowledge or Virtue is voluntary, Ignorance or Vice involuntary: see on II 382 A.

τῶν μὲν ἀγαθῶν ‐‐ ἑκουσίως . See IV 438 A note

ἢ οὐ ‐‐ εἶναι . It is necessary expressly to equate ἀληθεύειν with ἀληθὴς δόξα, because ordinarily it means to speak rather than to think what is true. Cf. II 382 A. Hartman approves of Ast for bracketing the words “quod argumentationem turbant,” but the contrary is true. Men unwillingly relinquish what is good. ἀληθεύειν is good; and ἀληθὴς δόξα is ἀληθεύειν; therefore we unwillingly relinquish ἀληθὴς δόξα—which is just what we wished to prove.

τραγικῶς : i.e. ὑψηλολογούμενος, in lofty high-flown metaphorical language such as may well become obscure: cf. VIII 545 E. κλέπτειν thus used is tragic: cf. (with J. and C.) Soph. Ant. 681 εἰ μὴ τῷ χρόνῳ κεκλέμμεθα .

τοίνυν =‘praeterea’ here, not ‘igitur’: I 339 D note

τι δείσαντες =‘having some fear’ (J. and C.).

τοῦτο ὡς ποιητέον κτλ. : ‘that it is their duty to do that which on each occasion they think it is best for them to do in the interests of the State.’ I have provisionally retained the reading of the best MSS, although it is open to suspicion on several grounds. The position of τοῦτο is unusual, and αὑτοῖς ποιεῖν is, to say the least, superfluous. Gaisford (with whom Cobet agrees) wished to expunge the entire clause as a gloss on δόγματος. This solution, though drastic, may be right: for an explanation of δόγματος is hardly needed after 412 D, E, and τοῦτο looks like the commencement of an explanatory note ‘this, viz. that’ etc. A simpler alternative, adopted by most editors, is to cancel αὑτοῖς ποιεῖν, but it is difficult to see why a scribe should have introduced the words. The sentence, if genuine, seems to want the finishing touch. Cf. 407 D note

προθεμένοις ἔργα . It is clear that Plato is referring to specific tests, and not (as Bosanquet seems to think) to the duties of war and the public service generally. So also Susemihl (Gen. Entw. II p. 143), and Steinhart ( Einleitung p. 173), the latter of whom compares, not very aptly, the tests of the Pythagorean brotherhood and the appalling spectacles displayed in the mysteries. Three kinds of tests are required: (1) κλοπή, (2) βία, (3) γοητεία. Examples of the second kind are furnished by the severer discipline of gymnastic, the chase etc.: cf. Laws 633 B ff., where the probationary value of these and similar exercises is appropriately insisted on by the Spartan stranger. It was fully recognised in the Spartan ἀγωγή (Plut. Lyc. 17. 4 ff.). The third order of tests may be illustrated from Laws 634 A, B, 635 C, 647 D ff., 649 A, 673 E ff. ἡ ἐν οἴνῳ βάσανος (649 D) consists in giving wine to test men's selfcontrol (τοῦ σωφρονεῖν ἕνεκα μελέτης 673 E). Plato gives no account of the first variety; but a good illustration of one species of it (cf. τοὺς μεταπεισθέντας 413 B) is provided by the speeches of self-seeking statesmen and unpatriotic sophists and poets. It is a curious fact that Plato's κλοπή still leaves a loophole by which vicious poetry may creep in again. On the general question, Plato does well to insist on the educational value of temptation; the theory and practice of modern times recognises it in connexion with βία, but experience too often shews that κλοπή and γοητεία mean playing with fire. Cf. Grote Plato III p. 328.

τοῦ τῆς ‐‐ θεατέον . Two εἴδη of tests have been described, κλοπή and βία: the third is γοητεία. I incline to think that Stallbaum is right in restoring τοῦ τῆς: see cr. n. and Introd. § 5. τούτοις ‘misere languet,’ and if a dative were needed, it should rather be αὐτοῖς. Herwerden expunges θεατέον; but asyndeton before ὥσπερ is frequent in sentences of this kind.

δυσγοήτευτος . For the change from plural to singular cf. I 347 A note

λαγχάνοντα . The accusative recurs to φύλακα, and is all the easier because τιμὰς δοτέον is little more than τιμητέον. Plato's usage is lax in such matters, and it is better not to emend: cf. (with Schneider) Laws 760 E, 877 A and Engelhardt Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 45.

ὡς ἐν τύπῳ ‐‐ εἰρῆσθαι . Cf. VI 502 D note

ἐπικούρους . Plato henceforward uses this expression when he wishes specifically to allude to the second class of his citizens. φύλακες remains the general term including both ἄρχοντες and ἐπίκουροι. See on II 374 D.

414B - 415D In order to establish all these regulations in the city, we must have recourse to a heroic falsehood. We shall tell the citizens that they were only dreaming when they believed themselves to be trained by us. In reality, they were being moulded and fashioned in the womb of Earth, they and all their equipments; so that it is their duty to defend their country like a mother, and regard their fellow-citizens as brothers born of Earth. We shall add that in creating some to be rulers, God mingled in their substance gold; silver he put in the auxiliaries; iron and copper in the farmers and artisans. The citizens will for the most part produce children like themselves; but silver offspring will sometimes come from gold, or gold from silver and the like. It is the first and foremost duty of the Rulers to lift and degrade children into their proper classes, alleging an oracle that the city shall perish when iron or copper becomes its guardian. It may be impossible to convince the first generation of our citizens that the lie is true; but their posterity may credit it.

ff. After discrediting the current mythological and religious views, Plato now proceeds to replace them by something more in harmony with his own principles. Throughout this episode he is making legend in accordance with II 382 D διὰ τὸ μὴ εἰδέναι ὅπῃ τἀληθὲς ἔχει περὶ τῶν παλαιῶν, ἀφομοιοῦντες τῷ ἀληθεῖ τὸ ψεῦδος ὅ τι μάλιστα οὕτω χρήσιμον ποιοῦμεν. His particular object is to give a religious and quasi-historical sanction to the sentiment of patriotism and the institution of caste. With this aim in view he frames a μῦθος in which the belief of many Greek communities (especially the Athenians: cf. Isocr. Paneg. 24 f., Eur. Fr. 362) in an autochthonous ancestry is skilfully combined with the popular association of different metals with different degrees of merit, as in the Hesiodic ages of man. Cf. Hirzel Der Dialog pp. 263 f. The episode should not be understood as ironical: without it, the present sketch of a State would be incomplete. We require some guarantee for the permanence of the city and its institutions; and nothing could be more in keeping with the prevailingly moral and religious spirit of Plato's ‘musical’ education than that he should find that guarantee in faith rather than in reason. The case is different when the Platonic city attains its full maturity, and it is equally appropriate that Reason, embodied in the Rulers, should then become the final guarantee.

ὧν νῦν δή . See cr. n. Although νῦν occasionally refers to the immediate past (e.g. I 341 C, IX 592 A, X 611 B: see also Jebb on Soph. Ant. 151), neither here nor in οὓς νῦν δή just before can δὴ νῦν be retained: for δή “neque per se intelligi neque ad ὧν referri potest” (Schneider). The reference is to II 382 D, III 389 B.

μάλιστα μέν . See on 415 D.

μηδὲν καινὸν κτλ. We want no novelty, but something with which the Greeks are already familiar, for our city is a Greek city (V 470 E).

Φοινικικόν τι : because the story of the Σπαρτοί was Phoenician, Cadmus the Phoenician having sown the dragon's teeth from which they sprang (Apollod. III 4. 1). Cf. Laws 663 E. Steinhart ( Einleit. p. 177) and Susemihl (Gen. Entw. II p. 144) find in Φοινικικόν a further hint that the institution of caste was something foreign and non-Hellenic: but the words cannot be thus interpreted. The Egyptian system of caste (see Hdt. II 164 ff.) differed from Plato's in essential points, and there is no real evidence to shew that he was influenced by it in any way: nor is ‘Phoenician’ (‘Sidonian’ in Laws l.c.) equivalent to ‘Egyptian.’ Cf. Hermann Gesch. u. Syst. p. 55 and notes Ψεῦσμα Φοινικικόν afterwards became a proverb, perhaps owing to this passage.

πολλαχοῦ γεγονός means simply ‘which has happened in many places.’ γεγονός and γενόμενον in themselves refer to the actual occurrences, which ὥς φασιν—πεπείκασιν reduces again to legend and matter of faith. πολλαχοῦ is plentifully illustrated in Preller Gr. Myth. pp. 79 ff. Presently οὐδ’ οἶδα εἰ γενόμενον ἄν (for which Herwerden neatly but needlessly suggests οὐδ’ οἶδ’ ἂν εἰ γενόμενον) hints that the age of miracles is past.

ὁποίᾳ ‐‐ ἢ ποίοις . Cf. 400 A note It is very exceptional to find the indirect interrogative preceding the direct: cf. Soph. O. T. 71 with Jebb's note.

ἐρῶ . I have removed the colon after ἐρῶ on Richards' suggestion.

ὥσπερ ὀνείρατα ‐‐ αὐτούς : lit. ‘all these things which they fancied themselves suffering and happening to them were so to speak dreams.’ ἐδόκουν is ‘imagined’ as in Aesch. Pers. 188 (also of a dream) and elsewhere. The object of πάσχειν, viz. ταῦτα πάντα, becomes the subject of γίγνεσθαι: cf. (for the change of subject) Ap. 40 A, Symp. 200 D and supra I 333 C, II 359 D, E, 360 A. It must be allowed that the effect of this idiom is here unusually harsh. I once conjectured ὑπάρχειν for πάσχειν, taking ἐδόκουν still as ‘fancied’: but the text is probably sound.

ὑπὸ γῆς κτλ. Herwerden bids us bracket either ὑπό or ἐντός: but Plato rarely if ever lets the preposition ἐντός follow its noun. ὑπό is ‘under,’ not ‘by’ (it is ὁ θεός, not ἡ γῆ, who πλάττει, infra 415 A), and ἐντός is adverbial; “drinnen unter der Erde” (Schneider). Mortal creatures are similarly moulded within the earth in Protagoras' prehistoric myth (τυποῦσιν αὐτὰ θεοὶ γῆς ἔνδον 320 D): cf. also Symp. 191 C, Pol. 272 A, Tim. 42 D. The myth of the Politicus (269 A ff.) connects the autochthonous origin of man with the golden age, in agreement with a wide-spread tradition, which gave rise to a considerable literature (Dümmler Proleg. zu Platons Staat p. 46). It is in the spirit of this tradition that Plato here represents the first generation of his ideal city as autochthonous.

καί ‐‐ καί . The double καί marks “the correspondence of the two clauses” (J. and C.). As the Earth proved herself their mother, so they must shew themselves her sons. If the text is sound, it must be explained in this way; but exact parallels are rare. Thuc. IV 8. 9 (cited by Schneider Addit. p. 27) is different: see Classen ad loc. and on VIII 27. 5. More to the point is Soph. Ant. 1192 f. καὶ παρὼν ἐρῶ, | κοὐδὲν παρήσω τῆς ἀληθείας ἔπος: see Jebb ad loc. Ast expunges καί before ἡ γῆ, while Hermann alters it to ὡς (carrying on the ὡς of ὡς ἄρα). Neither change can be called satisfactory. I formerly suggested δημιουργουμένη ἔτι. ἤδη δὲ κτλ. (Cl. Rev. X p. 385): cf. Symp. 220 C ἤδη ἦν μεσημβρία, καὶ ἄνθρωποι ᾐσθάνοντο. The change is slight, but ἔτι ‘languet,’ and it is better to retain the MS reading.

ὡς περὶ μητρὸς ‐‐ διανοεῖσθαι . Cf. (with J. and C.) Aesch. Sept. 10—20, 412—416, and infra V 470 D. For the omission of the preposition before τῆς χώρας cf. VIII 553 B note ὑπέρ with τῶν ἄλλων is scarcely more than περί: see II 367 A note

ὡς φήσομεν . The sense (as Schneider observes) is ὡς ὁ μῦθος λέγει, ὃν πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἐροῦμεν. Hartman cancels ὡς, but it was more likely to have been wrongly omitted here than inserted.

χρυσὸν κτλ. The metals are borrowed from Hesiod (O. D. 109—201), as Plato indicates in VIII 546 E. Hesiod enumerates five ages of men (interposing the age of heroes between those of copper and iron), but the older legend probably recognised four only: see Rohde Psyche^{2} I p. 87. Plato makes the golden and the other classes coexist—a truer and profounder view than Hesiod's. In other respects, the myth (as Jackson has pointed out in Susemihl and Hicks Politics of Aristotle p. 244) is not to be pressed: for “it does not recognise the promotion of ἐπίκουροι” to be ἄρχοντες. We should expect the φύλακες to contain admixtures, both of gold and silver, such as are to be Rulers receiving more gold than silver, and conversely; but the Greek does not favour this idea. Iron again seems to be exclusively (though less emphatically) reserved for the farmers, and copper for the artisans: cf. infra B, C, VIII 547 A, B, and Arist. Pol. B 5. 1264^{b} 14. It makes the ψεῦδος all the more γενναῖον and effective to tell the citizens that the classes are even more distinct than they really are.

ἅτε οὖν ξυγγενεῖς ὄντες is said with reference to the δέ clause, on which the stress falls. The fundamental kinship of the different classes will occasionally reassert itself in their offspring. So J. and C., rightly.

ἐξ ἀργυροῦ : sc. ἐκγόνου, which should also be supplied with χρυσοῦ. Plato sees in fancy the onward march of generations καθάπερ λαμπάδα τὸν βίον παραδιδόντες: cf. IV 424 A. Ast's proposal ἀργύρου should not have received the approval of Hartman; and D. and V. miss a characteristic touch by translating ἀργυροῦ “a silver parent.”

ἐάν τε κτλ. This provision is the corner-stone of Plato's State, and as soon as it gives way, the edifice is doomed (VIII 546 E—547 A). It is only by the elevation of the worthy and the degradation of the unfit that class-distinctions can be made to coincide with those of Nature (cf. IV 423 D); and unless they do, the foundation of the city, which is τὸ ἑαυτοῦ πράττειν, is sapped. Hence the emphasis with which Plato introduces this subject. His theory, it should be noted, conforms at least as much to the interest of the individual as to that of the State; for it provides congenial work for all according to their natural capacities, and uncongenial labour, whether above or below one's powers, is a fertile source of misery and crime. Aristotle ( Pol. B 4. 1262^{b} 27) seems to doubt if Plato's scheme was feasible. Granted rulers who are φρόνιμοι εἰς τοῦτο, δυνατοί, and κηδεμόνες τῆς πόλεως (412 C), in a small city—a thousand warriors, says Plato, will suffice (IV 423 A, cf. Grote Plato III p. 206 note) —it could probably be worked without much difficulty. See also IV 423 E ff. We are not of course to suppose that the child was once for all assigned to his class at birth; he would be watched and tested again and again, before being finally disposed of, so that the likelihood of mistakes on the part of the Rulers is greatly lessened. Cf. Tim. 19 A.

τιμήσαντες : not “having estimated their values” (J. and C.): but simply ‘they will do him honour and’ etc. The suggestions ἀντιτιμήσαντες or τιμήσαντες κατ’ ἀξίαν will hardly command assent. τιμήν in τιμὴν ἀποδόντες above may also be translated ‘honour’ if τὴν τῇ φύσει προσήκουσαν is taken in its full force: the honour appropriate to his nature and no more.

ὅπως μέντ’ ἂν κτλ. Cf. Laws 663 E—664 A. Grote justly observes that “Plato has fair reason for his confident assertion that if such legends could once be imprinted on the minds of his citizens, as portions of an established creed, they would maintain themselves for a long time in unimpaired force and credit” (l. c. III p. 188). The first generation of citizens would remain incredulous, but the γενναῖον φεῦδος would be impressed upon their children, and soon be universally believed. It would require but little effort for a Greek city like Plato's (V 470 E) to entertain in course of time a view which has so many points of contact with Greek tradition. Here Plato seems to hint that even his Rulers (for οἱ τούτων ὑεῖς must include these also) will in time believe; the Rulers of VI—VII might teach the legend as an ἐν δέοντι ψεῦδος, but would themselves refuse their assent.

σχεδὸν ‐‐ λέγεις : viz. that the story is intended to form part of the city's permanent religious creed, and so encourage patriotism and fraternity.

415D - 417B Our Rulers and Auxiliaries shall have a camp within the city, so as to check lawless citizens and ward off foreign foes. Their education will prevent them from preying on the others, provided we arrange their circumstances rightly. We shall assign them common property and houses, as well as common meals, to be furnished by the other citizens in return for the protection they enjoy. The use of gold and silver must be forbidden to our Guardians.

ff. The communism of the Republic is, next to its educational curriculum, the principal guarantee which Plato provides against the abuse of political power on the part of his Guardians (Nohle die Statslehre Platos pp. 129 ff.). At the present stage Socrates gives only a brief and exoteric account of the system, reserving the full and final exposition for Book V. Plato may have been thinking of certain Spartan and Pythagorean institutions when he framed some of the regulations in this section: but his communism is much more thorough-going than anything of the kind before his day. See Steinhart Einleitung pp. 179—181, and especially Grote l. c. III pp. 207—216. Aristotle's criticisms (Pol. B 5. 1262^{b} 37—1263^{b} 29) are interesting and acute, although he ignores some essential points, and is unable throughout to rise to the level of Plato's idealism. See also Jowett Introd. pp. 175—179 and Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II pp. 136 f.

τοῦτο ‐‐ ἀγάγῃ : ‘this will be as the vox populi shall determine’: i.e. it will depend upon φήμη whether our fable is believed or not. φήμη is not of course an oracle (as Ficinus supposed), but the half-personified voice of popular belief. Cf. Laws 838 C, D.

τούς τε ἔνδον κτλ. Henkel (Studien zur Gesch. d. Gr. Lehre vom Staat p. 52 note 13) remarks that the prevention of faction inside the city is characteristically put in the foreground. The greatest danger to a Greek city was from internal dissension: cf. V 470 C ff. notes

στρατοπεδευσάμενοι . The Spartan government was compared to that of a στρατόπεδον (Isocr. 6. 81: cf. Gilbert Gr. Const. Ant. E. T. pp. 61 ff.). Plato's city is literally a camp. His proposals would probably strike the average Athenian as a dangerous and tyrannical exaggeration of Spartan usages. See Jowett Introd. p. 176.

διαφέρειν ἐκείνου is rejected by Herwerden; but Schneider's explanation hits the mark: “αὖ alterum hoc de discrimine insolentius dictum notat: prius fuerat quod domos εὐνάς dixerat.”

κακουργεῖν . See 407 B note The idiom is abundantly attested, both in Plato and in other Greek authors, although Madvig and Cobet have done their best to expel it from Plato's text here and wherever else it occurs.

μὴ τοιοῦτον ‐‐ ποιήσωσι . For τοιοῦτον cf. 388 D note Richter conjectured μὴ τοιοῦτοι—ποιηθῶσι, “parum venuste,” as Hartman mercifully says.

ἀντὶ ξυμμάχων ‐‐ ἀφομοιωθῶσιν . For the usual ampliative or explanatory asyndeton cf. 409 B. Aristotle objects that Plato's regulations would virtually divide his city into two hostile camps (Pol. B 5. 1264^{a} 24), and Grote does not see “what reply the Platonic Republic furnishes to this objection” (l.c. III p. 213). In reply to Aristotle, Plato might have pointed to his regulations about the interchange of classes (415 B ff.), which would have the effect of binding them together more securely. Moreover, where each individual has the work to do for which he is best qualified, one fruitful cause of discontent and sedition is removed. The wives and families of the lower class would also tend to keep them quiet. Nor does Aristotle's objection allow sufficient weight to the training by which Plato tries to protect his guardians from such ‘spiritual pride’ as would alienate their subjects.

καὶ ἐγὼ εἶπον . See cr. n. καὶ ἔγωγ’ εἶπον, though generally retained, is surely wrong: it could only mean ‘I too, said I.’ No editor cites any other instance of ἔγωγε in this formula.

τοῦτο μὲν κτλ. prepares us for the second scheme of education in Book VII: cf. 412 B, 414 A notes

ἥτις ‐‐ ἐπαροῖ . αὐτούς is emphatic: “ipsos per se” (Schneider). The contrast is between the guardians in themselves, and in their dealings with the others. It is difficult to decide between παύσει—ἐπαρεῖ (Bekker and others) and παύσοι—ἐπαροῖ. The latter is exquisitius, and better supported on the whole. For the confusion between ‐ῃ (subjunctive) and ‐οι (optative) in A see Introd. § 5. Cobet calls for τοῦ instead of τούς before φύλακας, but φύλακας requires the article. παύειν with the infinitive is rare, and means ‘prevent,’ not ‘make to cease’: cf. Hdt. V 67 (with Stein's note) and Ar. Ach. 634, where Reiske's conjecture πείσας should not be accepted.

πρῶτον μὲν κτλ. A certain measure of communism in property seems to have existed among the Pythagoreans (RP.^{7} p. 43); but there is no reason to suppose that Plato is deliberately borrowing from them here: cf. Steinhart Einleitung p. 179. The main object of Plato is of course to prevent the formation of private interests likely to compete with the claims of public duty. We remark that there has been no hint so far of common wives and children, although Blaschke (der Zusammenhang d. Fam. u. Gütergemeinschaft d. pl. St. m. d. pol. u. phil. Syst. Platos p. 7) thinks he finds one in 415 A. Cf. 415 D note

ἂν μὴ πᾶσα ἀνάγκη . For ᾖ omitted see II 371 A note The conjecture ἥν for ἄν (Herwerden) is elegant, but superfluous.

τὰ δ) ἐπιτήδεια ‐‐ μισθόν . It is fair that the lower classes should provide the others with the means of leisure, for it is they who ‘reap all the benefit of the laborious training bestowed on the guardians.’ They are the ‘ultimate and capital objects’ of Plato's solicitude. Grote justly adds that “this is a larger and more generous view of the purpose of political institutions than we find either in Aristotle or in Xenophon” (l.c. III p. 213).

ταξαμένους is strangely represented in Schneider's translation by “zu bestimmten Zeiten.” It refers to the fixing of fees or payments in return for services rendered. Cf. Men. 91 B.

ξυσσίτια . A Spartan feature: see Gilbert Gk. Const. Ant. E. T. p. 65. Cf. Laws 762 B ff.

χρυσίον κτλ. So also in Sparta, according to Xen. Rep. Lac. 7. 6; with which cf. Plut. Lys. 19. 6, where the ephors are said to have put to death a friend of Lysander λαβόντες ἀργύριον ἰδίᾳ κεκτημένον. Plato is keenly conscious of the corrupting influence of wealth: see Gorg. 525 D ff., and cf. II 373 E, IV 421 D notes His guardians are φύσει πλουσίω τὰς ψυχάς (VIII 547 B) and need no other riches.

ὑπὸ ‐‐ ἰέναι : as though Wealth communicated a taint, like a murderer sub isdem trabibus (ὁμωρόφιος). The Greek is much more expressive and picturesque than Apelt's conjecture ὑπὸ τὸν αὑτῶν ὄροφον προσιέναι (Observ. Cr. p. 11).

σῴζοιντό τ’ ἂν καὶ σῴζοιεν . Cf. 621 B μῦθος ἐσώθη—καὶ ἡμᾶς ἂν σώσειεν. σῴζεσθαι of moral salvation is common in Plato: cf. e.g. VI 492 E, 502 B.

ὁπότε δ) αὐτοὶ ‐‐ ἔσονται . From this sentence it seems clear that the community of goods does not extend to the lower classes, although Aristotle complains that Plato has not said anything precise upon the matter (Pol. B 5. 1264^{a} 15). Aristotle seems, however, to have understood that they were not to have common wives, for he cynically observes that it would have been better if they had, as then they would have been more divided and less likely to combine against the guardians (ib. 4. 1262^{a} 40 ff.).

Appendices to book 3

III 389 B—D. The section on truth offers some serious difficulties. Throughout the whole of this division of the Republic (377 A—392 A) Plato is laying down precepts to which the μῦθοι of poets are to conform (cf. 377 B and 392 A), and in each case it is pointed out how the precept in question has been violated by Homer and other poets. Here, however, nothing is said to shew that we are prescribing for the poets, and no illustrations, either of our precept or of its violation, are cited from them. Schneider, indeed, attempts to extort this meaning from the section; but his theory, strictly understood, would require us to suppose that ἰατροῖς δοτέον, ἰδιώταις οὐχ ἁπτέον, προσήκει ψεύδεσθαι, οὐχ ἁπτέον τοῦ τοιούτου in B, ψεύσασθαι, ψευδόμενον in C, and κολάσει in D refer not to Plato's own city, but to poetical representations; that τῆς πόλεως in B is not Plato's city, but any city figuring in poetry; and that τοὺς τοιούτους ἄρχοντας in C are not Plato's rulers, but others. Such a supposition is hardly possible, if τοιούτους in C is genuine (see note ad loc.), and in any case it is neither natural nor obvious. It may with safety be asserted that if the section had occurred in any other context no one would have supposed it to contain rules for poetical fables: in itself it merely lays down the duty of the lower classes to speak the truth, with the conditions under which the rulers may lie. Cf. Rettig Proleg. pp. 62, 63 and notes on 389 D. Rettig, following up a hint of Schleiermacher's, thinks the section was introduced to prepare the way for the rulers' ‘lie’ about the origin of the State; while Susemihl (Genet. Entw. II p. 120) in some mysterious way appears to connect it with the theory of Ideas “as the true and higher Measure of the correct representation of Gods, Daemons, Heroes and the lower world.” The latter view is altogether fanciful; and neither of these explanations justifies Plato for having inserted the passage in this particular connexion, where he is discussing poetical legend, however much Rettig may extol the “art” with which he has concealed his art. The following seems to me a more probable explanation. We are professedly dealing with poetical representations of the gods and heroes, and we should expect Plato to require the poets to represent them as truthful and to enforce his remarks by poetical illustrations. He does not do so, because it has already been done in II 382—383. Instead of this, he reverts to 382 C (τότε ἀποτροπῆς ἕνεκα ὡς φάρμακον χρήσιμον γίγνεται SC. τὸ ἐν τοῖς λόγοις ψεῦδος), and emphasizes, more than he has hitherto done, the reason why truthfulness must be ascribed to the gods, viz. in order to encourage the virtue among men. That Plato laid the greatest stress upon the virtue of Truth appears from the fine passage in Laws 730 B, C, beginning Ἀλήθεια δὴ πάντων μὲν ἀγαθῶν θεοῖς ἡγεῖται, πάντων δὲ ἀνθρώποις: thus it is not unnatural that he should recur to the subject here. The section should be taken as a kind of afterthought to 382—383, which it is intended partly to explain and partly to supplement. The whole section on Truth is for this and other reasons possibly later than the context in which it appears: see also on τοὺς τοιούτους ἄρχοντας, 389 C.

A further question has been raised as to what Plato intended by the virtue of ἀλήθεια. Rettig (l.c. pp. 61 and 65 ff.) and Stallbaum, anxious to find in all this a preliminary sketch of the cardinal virtues, interpret it as a sort of wisdom; but in that case, why did not Plato call it by its name? He is content to use the names of two other cardinal virtues, ἀνδρεία and σωφροσύνη, although they have not yet been defined. Nor does this account of ἀλήθεια contain any of the distinctive features of Wisdom, either in its popular sense or in the sense which it bears in Book IV. There is no reason to suppose that Plato means anything but what he says, and he himself describes the virtue as ‘speaking the truth.’ The whole attempt to see in this division of the dialogue a foreshadowing of the psychological theory of the virtues is, I believe, a mistake: only two of the virtues are named at all, ἀνδρεία and σωφροσύνη, and these quite without any ulterior meaning or motive. Plato is simply describing in a somewhat desultory way (ὅπῃ ἂν ὁ λόγος ὥσπερ πνεῦμα φέρῃ)—since a rigid plan is not necessary here—the kind of character which Poetry should endeavour to foster: a character which shall honour gods and parents, set value on reciprocal friendship (386 A), be courageous, truthful, and distinguished for self-control. To force this description into the strait-jacket of the cardinal virtues would be pedantic. As it is, no essential feature of the καλὸς κἀγαθός is omitted.

On Plato's ἁρμονίαι.

III 398 E—399 B. Plato enumerates in all six scales in three groups. The first group is θρηνῶδες, and includes Mixo-Lydian, Syntono-Lydian, and such like; the second is μαλακόν, and embraces Chalaro-Ionian and Chalaro-Lydian; to the third, which occupies a middle position between the other two, belong Dorian and Phrygian. Chalaro-Ionian seems further to imply the existence of Syntono-Ionian, and we read of both in Pratinas Fr. 5 Bergk, μήτε σύντονον δίωκε μήτε τὰν ἀνειμέναν Ἰαστὶ μοῦσαν, | ἀλλὰ τὰν μέσαν...νεῶν ἄρουραν αἰόλιζε τῷ μέλει, if Westphal's interpretation is (as I believe) right (Harmonik p. 186. See also Monro Modes of Greek Music pp. 5, 6). It has been supposed that Plato's μιξολυδιστί is only συντονοιαστί under another name; but the name Mixo-Lydian seems rather to point to a compromise between two distinct modes, one of which was the Lydian. Possibly the συντονοιαστί is included under τοιαῦταί τινες, as von Jan holds Fl. Jahrb. 1867 p. 823.

According to Westphal (l.c. pp. 215 ff.), whose theory is partly based upon what must, I fear, be regarded as a speculative deduction from Aristides Quintil. I pp. 21, 22 ed. Meibom, Plato's ἁρμονίαι were as follows:—

(1) Mixo-Lydian

(2) Syntono-Lydian

(3) Chalaro-Ionian

(4) Chalaro-Lydian

(5) Dorian

(6) Phrygian

It will be observed that Westphal's scales are all of them ἁρμονίαι in the strict sense of the term, i.e. they differ in the order of their intervals; and that the Syntono-Lydian begins a major third higher than the Chalaro-Lydian.

An entirely different theory has been propounded by von Jan (Fl. Jahrb. 1867 pp. 815 ff.), who gives the following series of scales:—

(1) Mixo-Lydian

(2) Syntono-Lydian

(3) Chalaro-Ionian

(4) Chalaro-Lydian

(5) Dorian

(6) Phrygian

According to this view, the Syntono-Lydian and the Chalaro-Lydian are in reality the same mode, differing from one another only in pitch. Plato's language appears to me to point to such a conclusion (see on 398 C, E), but it is not altogether easy for us to believe that the difference of a semitone in pitch could have converted τὸ θρηνῶδες into τὸ συμποτικόν. It will further be remarked that if we take the Dorian as the original and fundamental ἁρμονία ( Lach. 188 D), the θρηνώδεις ἁρμονίαι, according to von Jan's theory, can be made from it by tuning different strings a semitone higher, and the χαλαραί by tuning different strings a semitone lower.

Von Jan's hypothesis is severely censured by Westphal (l.c. pp. 209— 215), and strong arguments can be urged against it from the standpoint of modern music. I have quoted it in this Appendix because of its symmetry, and also because, so far as it goes, it seems to me to be more in harmony with the scanty indications furnished by Plato's language than the theory of Westphal. It is true, as Westphal urges, that Plato applies the term ἁρμονία to Syntono-Lydian and Chalaro-Lydian as well as to Dorian, Phrygian etc.; but I do not think it follows that SyntonoLydian and Chalaro-Lydian differed in the arrangement of intervals: for σύντονος and χαλαρά ought to refer to pitch alone: and συντονολυδιστί or χαλαραλυδιστί may have been called a ἁρμονία not qua σύντονος or χαλαρά, but qua λυδιστί. The references to Plato's ἁρμονίαι in Arist. Pol. Θ 5. 1340^{a} 40 ff. may be explained in the same way. Wherever Aristotle speaks of ἀνειμέναι and σύντονοι ἁρμονίαι, he is referring, as the editors hold, to Chalaro-Lydian, Chalaro-Ionian, and Syntono-Lydian, Syntono-Ionian; and these are properly called ἁρμονίαι as being varieties of λυδιστί and ἰαστί. See my article in Cl. Rev. X pp. 378 f. The passage on the modes or (as he calls them) τρόποι in Bacchius' Isagoge § 46 ff. seems—as far as concerns the relative pitch of the scales—to point to a solution with which neither Westphal nor von Jan agrees, but Bacchius gives us no information about the order of intervals in Plato's ἁρμονίαι.

419A - 423B Adimantus now interposes with the objection that the Guardians will be far from happy. Although they are in reality masters of the city, they have nothing which they can call their own— none of the contributing factors of individual or personal gratification. In reply, it is not admitted that the Guardians will be unhappy, but even supposing that they are, our purpose was, not to make happy Guardians, but to found a happy City, in order to discover Justice within its borders. Our Guardians must not be made happy at the cost of efficiency in their peculiar duty. Wealth is hardly less unpropitious to the exercise of arts and professions than Poverty. When our city is at war with two communities, she will not lack resources; for she will make alliance with one of the two by promising to it the other's wealth. Nor will she be in danger from her ally afterwards. Other States are each of them not one but manifold, and our city, if she have but a thousand defenders, is the greatest single state in Greece or Barbary.

ff. 1 καὶ ὁ Ἀδείμαντος κτλ. Adimantus' objection is the dying echo of the view already advocated by Thrasymachus, that a ruler should rule for his own profit: cf. I 343 A, 344 B notes Socrates declines to discuss the question now, because it is irrelevant. In the further account of the communism of the ruling class, the difficulty solves itself. A higher happiness—so we are told— comes from self-victory than from indulgence (V 465 D ff.: cf. IX 583 C note). Compare the conversation of Socrates with Aristippus in Mem. II 1. 17 ff.

μή . On μή with the infinitive after verbs of saying see I 346 E note

δἰ ἑαυτούς : i.e. they have themselves to thank for not being εὐδαίμονες. Cf. V 465 E οὐκ οἶδα ὅτου λόγος ἡμῖν ἐπέπληξεν ὅτι τοὺς φύλακας οὐκ εὐδαίμονας ποιοῖμεν, οἶς ἐξὸν πάντα ἔχειν τὰ τῶν πολιτῶν οὐδὲν ἔχοιεν; and Solon 33 1 f. οὐκ ἔφυ Σόλων βαθύφρων οὐδὲ βουλήεις ἀνήρ· | ἐσθλὰ γὰρ θεοῦ διδόντος αὐτὸς οὐκ ἐδέξατο (he of his own initiative refused). διά is used exactly as in I 354 B. This view, which is Ast's, gives an excellent meaning, and Schneider, who at first proposed a subtler explanation, adopts it in his translation (“durch ihre eigene Schuld”). The various conjectures δή, αὐτοῖς ὧν (Stephanus), δὴ αὐτοὺς ὧν (Buttmann), αὐτοὺς δἰ ὧν (Herwerden) need no refutation.

ἄλλοι : not οἱ ἄλλοι (Bekker, Stallbaum, etc.), which might be taken as referring to the lower classes in Plato's State. Plato would not be likely to permit these to have οἰκίαι καλαὶ καὶ μεγάλαι. ἄλλοι means ‘other rulers,’ i.e. rulers in other cities; and κεκτημένοι belongs to οἱ δέ: ‘possessing, like other rulers, lands,’ etc. So Schneider, rightly. For the idiomatic position of οἷον ἄλλοι cf. VII 515 A, 528 B, IX 589 B al.

μισθωτοί is not otiose as Badham supposes. We should translate ‘just like paid auxiliaries.’ The emphasis on μισθωτοί prepares us for Socrates' correction when he says they do not, strictly speaking, even get μισθός.

ἐπισίτιοι . ἐπίσιτοι (which Cobet and Hartman call for) would be more in accordance with the analogy of παράσιτος etc.; but the longer form is established by fragments of comic poets (ap. Ath. VI 246 F—247 A, where ἐπισιτίων in the fragment of Timocles defies emendation).

οἱ ἄλλοι : sc. ἐπίκουροι or mercenaries.

ἀποδημῆσαι . Regulations about ἀποδημία are laid down in Laws 949 E ff.

οἷα δὴ κτλ. For οἷα Hermann once conjectured οἷ: neatly, but οἷ is too precise. οἷα δή=οἷα δὴ ἀναλώματα. With οἱ εὐδαίμονες δοκοῦντες εἶναι cf. III 406 C. It is εὐδαιμονία in the popular sense of ‘having a good time’ which Adimantus complains is denied to the guardians.

οἶμον . A poetic word. Plato is perhaps thinking of some such phrase as Pindar's ἐπέων ο<*>μος (Ol. IX 47). The ‘way’ is simply that each class must do its own appointed work, if the city is to be a happy and harmonious whole: cf. 423 D.

εἰ καὶ οὗτοι κτλ. καί means ‘as well as the rest of the city.’ Aristotle misrepresents Plato when, in spite of this sentence and V 465 D ff., he says that the guardians are deprived of εὐδαιμονία (Pol. B 5. 1264^{b} 15 ff., with Susemihl's note). They are happy not only because they triumph over self (465 D), but—like the others—because they do the work to which Nature has called them: cf. I 352 D —354 A.

ὅπως ἕν τι κτλ. Cf. Laws 715 B and Thuc. II 60. 2, where Pericles says ἐγὼ γὰρ ἡγοῦμαι πόλιν πλείω ξύμπασαν ὀρθουμένην ὠφελεῖν τοὺς ἰδιώτας ἢ καθ’ ἕκαστον τῶν πολιτῶν εὐπραγοῦσαν, ἀθρόαν δὲ σφαλλομένην.

ᾠήθημεν ‐‐ σκεψόμεθα . See on II 369 A.

οὐκ ἀπολαβόντες ‐‐ τιθέντες . ἀπολαβόντες is absolute, almost adverbial (cf. Gorg. 495 E); and ὀλίγους goes with τιθέντες. So Schneider and others rightly explain the construction.

αὐτίκα δὲ τὴν ἐναντίαν κτλ. Here we have the first express promise of Books VIII and IX, although the promise is afterwards fulfilled in an ampler manner than is indicated here. See also 427 D.

ὥσπερ οὖν ἂν ‐‐ μέλανι . Cf. (with J. and C.) Hipp. Maior 290 B. ἀνδριάντας γράφοντας means ‘painting statues of men.’ Cf. Euripides Fr. 764. 2 γραπτοὺς ἐν ἀετοῖσι προσβλέπων τύπους. The question whether statues were ever painted in the best period is an old controversy, the echoes of which have hardly yet died away. Schubart (Fl. Jahr. 1874, pp. 20 ff.) and others prefer to take ἀνδριάντας merely as ‘likenesses of men,’ but the word was regularly, if not indeed always, used of statues. That the surface of archaic statues was regularly painted is now no longer doubtful: see Gardner Handbook of Greek Sculpture pp. 28 ff. During the best period, in the case of marble or other polished surfaces, the painting was regularly confined to the eyes, eyelids, eyebrows, hair and the like. See on the whole subject Sittl's Arch. der Kunst (in Iwan Müller's Handbuch) pp. 413, 414. μέλανι does not necessarily mean jet black, but only some dark and quiet colour. In point of fact, the eyes of the early marble statues on the Acropolis “are painted with a dark pigment, almost black” (Gardner l.c. p. 30). The use—regular in Greek—of γράφειν for painting is an interesting survival of the time when decorative art was little beyond carving in relief (Sittl l.c. p. 416). The present passage is strangely ignored by Sertorius in his interesting article “Plato und die Malerei” in Arch. f. Gesch. d. Phil. IX pp. 123—148.

ξυστίδας . The name ξυστίς was given to various kinds of purple robes or mantles—among them those worn by kings upon the stage, and by riders in festal processions. The authorities are cited in Müller Gr. Bühnenalt. p. 234 note I. If the Scholiasts on Ar. Clouds 70 and Theocr. II 74 are to be trusted, we should write ξύστιδας, not ξυστίδας.

ἐπὶ δεξιά . Whether we read ἐπιδέξια or ἐπὶ δεξιά the word should be understood as ‘from left to right.’ At a Greek banquet, the guests were always placed ἐπὶ δεξιά, i.e. so that the guest on your right hand occupied a lower place (ὑποκατακεκλιμένος) than you, and the wine circulated from left to right of the banqueters. See Blümner Privatalt. p. 237 note 7 and Darbishire Relliq. Philol. p. 78. The word suggests a banquet with all the formalities, and heightens the incongruity of the situation, like the purple robes and golden crowns of the farmers. Schneider's exhaustive discussion seems to me conclusive in favour of writing ἐπὶ δεξιά as two words. Casaubon has been followed by most of the editors (except Schneider) in taking ἐπιδέξια as an adverb=‘commode’ (Ast), ‘commode et eleganter’ (Stallbaum etc.), or ‘dexterously,’ ‘cleverly’ (J. and C.); but it may well be doubted if the word could mean ‘commode,’ and ‘dexterously’ is inappropriate. Cf. Darbishire l.c. p. 78 note I. ἐπὶ δεξιά goes with κατακλίναντες and πρὸς τὸ πῦρ (cf. Blaydes on Ar. Ach. 751) with διαπίνοντας. The fire is that by which the potters bake their pottery; their workshop has for the nonce become a hall of banqueting.

ἐξ ὧν : i.e. τούτων τῶν σχημάτων ἐξ ὧν. Cf. II 373 E note

καὶ αὖ : rursusque (Ficinus), i.e. sicuti et contra, as Ast observes.

εἰ μὲν οὖν ‐‐ λέγοι . This difficult passage has suffered severely at the hands of critics, but the text is probably nearly, if not quite, sound. If we take the words as they stand in A, they mean, broadly speaking, that if we are making true guardians, and he (ὁ ἐκεῖνο λέγων means the τις in 419 A) is making something different, he cannot, like ourselves, be speaking of a πόλις, but of something else. This is logical and gives an excellent sense: cf. 422 E εὐδαίμων εἶ— ὅτι οἴει ἄξιον εἶναι ἄλλην τινὰ προσειπει—ν πόλιν ἢ τὴν τοιαύτην οἵαν ἡμεῖς κατεσκευάζομεν. Now we are making guardians in the true sense of the term, such as are least likely to harm the city; whereas the author of the other proposals is making (not guardians, but since he gives them ἀγροί 419 A) a sort of farmers (cf. III 417 B οἰκονόμοι μὲν καὶ γεωργοὶ ἀντὶ φυλάκων ἔσονται) and men who do harm their city, because they “for their bellies' sake, Creep, and intrude and climb into the fold.” The advocates of such a theory must mean something different from a city—something like the “shearers' feast” in Lycidas: cf. I 343 A note γεωργούς is possibly corrupt; if so, I think we should read λεωργούς to contrast with ἥκιστα κακουργούς. The word occurs in the Memorabilia, if not in Plato. See Cl. Rev. X p. 385. Other emendations are enumerated in App. I.

ἐκεῖνο κτλ. : i.e. to pursue the other policy, which we enjoin. ἐκεῖνο does more than merely anticipate ὅπως— ἔσονται.

ἐατέον . The infinitive, which would naturally follow ἐατέον, is ‘drawn into construction’ with ὅπως —ἀποδίδωσι. I once thought of ἑκτέον (i.q. δεῖ ἔχειν, cf. V 468 A), taking the genitive as in πῶς ἔχεις τοῦ μεταλαμβάνειν εὐδαιμονίας; But the MS reading is satisfactory enough.

ὥστε ‐‐ γίγνεσθαι : ‘so that they also become bad.’ These words, though expunged by Hartman, are welcome, if not necessary, in view of κακίων χυτρεὺς γίγνεται and χείρους δὲ αὐτοί in D and E. καὶ indicates that κακοὺς γίγνεσθαι is more than διαφθείρει; and so it is represented in the sequel. The reading of A (see cr. n.) perhaps points to a variant διαφθερεῖ.

πλουτήσας ‐‐ τέχνης . Ar. Plut. 510—534 (cited by Ast) furnishes an excellent commentary on this text. See also on III 416 E.

παρέχεσθαι is ‘to provide out of his own resources’ (de suo praebere): cf. VIII 554 A. Cobet cancels the word; Herwerden and Hartman prefer πορίζεσθαι, for which there is no MS authority. πορίζεσθαι would imply that the χυτρεύς buys his ὄργανα ready-made from others, whereas παρέχεσθαι expresses no opinion on this point.

διδάξεται . Thompson, Cobet, and others peremptorily call for διδάξει. See however Riddell Digest of Idioms § 87. Riddell conclusively shews (1) that in Men. 93 D ἐδιδάξατο as well as ἐπαιδεύσατο is said of a parent teaching his own son (a passage misunderstood—I think—by Jebb on Soph. Ant. 356: cf. Men. 93 C), (2) that ἐδίδαξε is used of a parent getting his sons taught by others in Men. 94 B and 94 D (bis). Another example of the second usage is Prot. 324 D. The fact is that “the Active Voice is quite as susceptible as the Middle of the meaning ‘to get a thing done by another’; neither Voice, however, by any proper inherent force, but in virtue solely of the common principle, that qui facit per alium facit per se,” Riddell. Jebb (l.c.) observes that “once or twice ἐδιδαξάμην is merely ἐδίδαξα with the idea of the teacher's interest superadded”: it may be doubted if “once or twice” is strong enough, but at all events this is the usage here, and in V 467 E. The active διδάσκῃ is appropriately used of teaching others (ἄλλους κτλ.); in διδάξεται the personal interest reappears, for it is the sons who are the prominent pupils (whence ἢ ἄλλους and not καὶ ἄλλους). Richter's view (Fl. Jahrb. 1867 p. 147) that διδάξεται denotes the result of the action rather than the action itself is partly true, but it is not the middle which gives it this force. In Ar. Clouds 783, as Socrates is not Strepsiades' father, we may accept Elmsley's emendation διδάξαιμ’ ἄν for διδαξαίμην without prejudice to the present case.

αὐτοί : viz. οἱ τεχνῖται: see II 377 C note We need not change τεχνῶν to τεχνιτῶν.

ποιοῦντος = ‘producing’ gives a satisfactory sense. Wealth and Poverty are not to be allowed παραδῦναι εἰς τὴν πόλιν, because—we have here the statement of a general law—they are the authors of luxury etc. ἐμποιοῦντος (in Ξ and other MSS) is an obvious ‘emendation,’ though adopted by Stallbaum and others: cf. 444 D.

κακοεργίαν . If the form is right, Plato must intend to draw attention to the etymology of the word. κακουργίαν appears in two or three inferior MSS, and (as ε seems to be written over an erasure) was perhaps the original reading in Paris A.

πολλάκις : not ‘perhaps’ (one of J. and C.'s alternative suggestions) but ‘frequently,’ ‘repeatedly.’ πολλάκις does not mean ‘perhaps,’ except after εἰ, ἐάν, ἵνα, μή and the like: see Ast's lex. Plat. III p. 144 and Heindorf on Phaed. 60 E.

τί δέ; κτλ. ἂν πρεσβείαν κτλ. has for its apodosis οἴει τινὰς κτλ. I have placed a mark of interrogation after τί δέ. The alternatives are to place it after τῶν ἑτέρων, or else to suppose with Ast that the construction is suddenly changed at οἴει. Neither solution is so simple as to write τί δ); Cf. 425 C, 426 A, and (for the elision before a pause) 428 C.

κυσί . In the game of πόλεις, the counters were called ‘Dogs’ (Pollux IX 98). The comparison of our auxiliaries to dogs prepares the way for the allusion in 422 E: where see note. This has been pointed out by Ridgeway (Journal of Hell. Studies XVI p. 288), who gives illustrations of three ‘dogs’ of this description found in Egypt and now in the British Museum.

εὐδαίμων εἶ κτλ. : ‘you are fortunate to be able to think etc.’: cf. V 450 C. εὐδαίμων is less common in this ironical sense than μακάριος.

ἑκάστη γὰρ κτλ. : ‘for each of them is, as the saying goes, no city, but a-many cities.’ The phrase τὸ τῶν παιζόντων in Plato seems always to mean ‘as they say in the proverb’ or ‘proverbial saying’: see IX 573 C, Laws 780 C, and cf. ib. 723 D. Now it is probable from the position of τὸ τῶν παιζόντων that ἀλλ’ οὐ πόλις forms part of the proverb: so that the whole saying may have run πόλεις μέν εἰσι παμπόλεις, ἀλλ’ οὐ πόλις. (Herwerden, more suo, cancels ἀλλ’ οὐ πόλις, but we have of course no right to take this step.) The form παμπόλεις for πάμπολλαι may be allowed in a pun on πόλεις, especially as the Epic plural of πολύς is sometimes found with feminine nouns. It should be remarked also that the first hand in Paris A wrote πάμπολαι (see cr. n.), though this may be merely accidental. What the ordinary application of the proverb was, we cannot say: presumably it was generally employed, as here by Plato, in speaking of a city divided against itself. The origin of the saying is to be sought in the variety of πεττεία known as πόλεις παίζειν, an expression which, according to the Scholiast on this passage of Plato, as well as Suidas s.v. πόλις, and Hesychius s.v. πόλεις παίζειν, had itself also a proverbial signification. In this game the abacus was divided into 60 spaces, each of which was called πόλις in ancient times (Photius s.v. πόλεις παίζειν ed. Porson. Porson's alteration of ξ/ i.e. 60 into ζ/ is a gratuitous change, as Schneider hints. See also Eustathius on Od. I p. 29. 13 ff., ed. Lips., quoted by Schneider). The name πόλις was moreover sometimes applied to the game itself (Cratinus Δραπετίδες Fr. 3 ed. Meineke καὶ κύνα καὶ πόλιν ἣν παίζουσιν), as well as to the πλινθίον or abacus on which it was played (Pollux IX 98). There is also, I think, some reason for believing that each of the players' sides was called collectively his πόλις. In Susemihl and Hicks Politics of Aristotle p. 148 note, Dr Jackson remarks that the words πάμπολλαι πόλεις, ἀλλ’ οὐ πόλις make it likely “that a compact body of pieces was called πόλις.” If we may go further, and suppose that the whole of a player's side was called his πόλις, the words of Plato δύο μὲν—πολεμία ἀλλἡλαις, ἡ μὲν πενήτων, ἡ δὲ πλουσίων· τούτων δ’ ἐν ἑκατέρᾳ πάνυ πολλαί receive additional point by becoming an exact counterpart of the game. A defeated player, gazing ruefully at his depopulated squares, each of which, as well as the whole of his side, is a ‘city,’ might therefore well exclaim, ‘Cities upon cities, but no city!’ for there can be no city without men (ἔρημος ἀνδρῶν μὴ ξυνοικούντων ἔσω Soph. O. T. 57). I have thought of other possibilities, but this hypothesis as to the origin of the proverb suits the words of Plato better than any other which I can devise. For a different view see Hoffmann in Fl. Jahrb. 1863 pp. 240 ff. Cf. also Meineke Fr. Com. Gr. II pp. 44 f. It should be mentioned that Stewart (Cl. Rev. VII p. 359) thinks there need be no allusion to the game of πόλεις in this passage, but only a jest about making one into many (cf. Men. 77 A παῦσαι πολλὰ ποιῶν ἐκ τοῦ ἑνός, ὅπερ φασὶ τοὺς συντρίβοντάς τι ἑκάστοτε οἱ σκώπτοντες), while Schneider finds only a “lusus in verbis atque in consociatione singularis et pluralis.” Neither of these suggestions meets the situation.

δύο ‐‐ κἂν ὁτιοῦν ᾖ : ‘two, in any case,’ lit. ‘if there be even anything at all,’ i.e. ‘whatever there be.’ So also Schneider. The subject to ὁτιοῦν ᾖ is impersonal, and not the city, as Jowett seems to suppose.

πολεμία . On this—comparatively rare —termination of the dual feminine in Plato see Roeper de dual. usu Pl. pp. 3 ff. Cf. IX 587 B note

εὐδοκιμεῖν . Stallbaum and others read δοκεῖν with one inferior MS. But εὐδοκιμεῖν is at least equally good: ‘great, I do not say in fame, but great in the true sense of the word “great.”’ σωφροσύνη is a city's truest greatness, not aggression, and “the applauding thunder at its heels. Which men call Fame.”

χιλίων . Aristotle takes this seriously as fixing the number of Plato's ἐπίκουροι (Pol. B 6. 1265^{a} 9), but it is only the minimum: see 423 B note We hear of constitutions of a thousand very frequently throughout Greek political history, especially in the Greek colonies of Italy; and Plato may have had some of these precedents in his mind, both here and in Pol. 292 E ἐν χιλιάνδρῳ πόλει. See Whibley Gk. Oligarchies pp. 134 ff. By Aristotle's time the ruling Spartans, it is interesting to notice, numbered under 1000 ( Pol. B 9. 1270^{a} 29—31). See Grote Plato III p. 206 note

καὶ πολλαπλασίας is the predicate to δοκούσας, and καί means ‘even.’ So J. and C. rightly.

423B - 424C Our city must not be increased beyond the limits essential to its unity. It will be the duty of the Guardians to see to this, as well as to assign the children to their proper classes in the State. These and similar duties will be easy, if our educational curriculum is stedfastly upheld; and it will readily appear that the principle of community should also be applied to matrimony and procreation. Our citizens will thus improve as one generation succeeds another. We must forbid all innovations in music and gymnastic because they are productive of political change.

μέχρι ‐‐ πέρα δὲ μή . The extent to which the city may safely increase beyond 1000 προπολεμοῦντες (and the necessary farmers etc.) is therefore left to the judgment of the guardians. Like every natural organism, it should grow to the limits prescribed for it by nature (cf. 424 A note); but Plato probably conceived of it even in its maturity as relatively small. The regulations about marriage and the interchange between the different classes would be easier to work if the State was not too large. See also on χιλίων in 423 A, and on the general subject Newman's Politics of Aristotle I pp. 313— 315.

μεγάλη δοκοῦσα : ‘seeminggreat’: see 422 E.

ἴσως points the irony, which is continued in φαυλότερον.

πρόσθεν . III 415 B, C notes

ἕκαστον : with ἕνα, not of course with ἔργον, as Hartman seems to suppose. With what follows cf. Laws 847 B ἀναγκαζόντων ἕνα μόνον ἀλλὰ μὴ πολλοὺς εἶναι and infra 443 E.

μία ‐‐ ἀλλὰ μὴ πολλαί . Aristotle's criticism ( Pol. B 2. 1261^{a} 17—^{b} 15) is interesting, but captious. Plato would entirely agree with him that τὸ ἴσον τὸ ἀντιπεπονθὸς σῴζει τὰς πολιτείας. ‘The reciprocity of services and functions’ between the three classes is the very foundation of Plato's city, which is far from being an undifferentiated unity. It is rather a ἓν ἐκ πολλῶν, the πολλά being the three divisions of the State. See Susemihl and Hicks l.c. I p. 215. φύηται should be noted; unity of this kind is κατὰ φύσιν.

σμικρότερον is still ironical. In what follows Plato speaks his real mind: cf. Laws 813 D.

ἓν μέγα . ἓν balances πολλά: we need but one regulation, ‘the proverbial one great thing, or rather not great, but adequate.’ J. and C. err in translating ἱκανόν “to a sufficient extent”; and Stallbaum in making λεγόμενον “quod dicebamus.” ἓν μέγα is illustrated by J. and C. from Pol. 297 A.

εὖ παιδευόμενοι . Does this refer to the scheme of education already given, or is it a promise of the philosopher's training in Books VI and VII? Krohn takes the former view (Pl. St. p. 127), and (if we have regard only to the preceding discussion) it must be allowed that this is the natural interpretation of Plato's words. At the same time, it is not easy to see how the musical education of II and III would enable the guardians to grasp such a conception as the community of wives and children. And in the later books Plato expressly declares that the training necessary for the Rulers was inadequately discussed before: see VI 497 C ff., 502 D. For these reasons we must, I think, suppose that Plato when he wrote these words was thinking of the education still to be provided. Cf. also III 414 A.

τήν τε τῶν γυναικῶν κτλ. is the first mention of communism in wives and children. According to an ingenious chorizontic theory, it was this sentence which inspired the Ecclesiazusae of Aristophanes, to whose caricature Plato replies in Book V (Stein de Ar. Eccles. arg. etc. and Brandt Zur Entwick. d. Pl. Lehre v. d. Seelentheilen, p. 6). See on the whole subject App. I to Book V. In γάμων and παιδοποιίας there is a kind of zeugma: for κτῆσιν suits only γυναικῶν. Plato marks the difference by placing τε after τήν and not after τῶν. γάμους (conjectured by Richards) would depend on διόψονται; but διόψονται γάμους καὶ παιδοποιίας is surely an impossible expression.

κοινὰ τὰ φίλων . “Locus brevitatem loquendi paullo insolentiorem habet, quam sic explico: δεῖ πάντα ταῦτα ὅ τι μάλιστα ποιεῖσθαι κοινά, <*>στε κατὰ τὴν παροιμίαν κοινὰ τὰ φίλων εἶναι” (Schneider). Hartman's proposal to omit τὰ φίλων has much in its favour. It is more elegant to suggest than quote so familiar a proverb; and the note τὰ φίλων might well have been added by a scribe upon the margin. In V 449 C on the other hand the addition of τὰ φίλων is appropriate and right.

ὀρθότατα κτλ. Adimantus accepts the principle, both here and in V 449 C. The doubts which he expresses later concern not the principle, but the τρόπος τῆς κοινωνίας (ib.). It is obvious that the principle κοινὰ τὰ φίλων might be applied to marriage etc. in a sentimental kind of way, without involving such a kind of community as is afterwards described. As Rettig points out ( Proleg. p. 95 note), Adimantus takes ὅ τι μάλιστα as “in quantum fieri posset maxime.”

ἔρχεται κτλ. : ‘goes on growing like a circle.’ So Schneider, rightly. Others take κύκλος (1) as a hoop or wheel—“goes on with accumulating force like a wheel” (J. and C.), or (2) as an ever-widening circle in ruffled water (Krohn, Herwerden etc.). As to (2), κύκλος cannot mean a circle in water, unless we insert ἐν ὕδατι, which Herwerden has the audacity to do. If we adopt the first solution, we make κύκλος a specific kind of circle: but nothing in the context warrants this. It is also very doubtful if αὐξανομένη can= ‘with accumulating force’: certainly κύκλος αὐξάνεται could not bear this meaning; and to exclude αὐξανομένη from the comparison (as J. and C. also suggest) renders ὥσπερ κύκλος practically otiose. The fact is that the growth of a natural (κατὰ φύσιν) city is just like the drawing of a circle in Plato's way of thinking. Like a circle it grows and expands, like a circle too, when its zenith is passed, it narrows to the inevitable end. Here it is only the growth which is dwelt upon; but ὥσπερ κύκλος seems to warn us of impending decay and foreshadow Books VIII—IX. For more on this point see my Number of Plato pp. 58—62. αὐξανομένη is ‘growing’ in the widest sense i.e. reaching its full maturity of size and strength and beauty; but in what follows Plato characteristically confines himself to what he conceived to be a city's truest growth, the improvement of the citizens.

τροφὴ γὰρ κτλ. Plato seems therefore to hold that acquired characters can be transmitted to posterity. The general sentiment may be illustrated by the quaint catches sung by choirs of old men, men in their prime, and boys at Sparta: (1) Ἁμὲς πόκ· ἦμες ἄλκιμοι νεανίαι, (2) Ἁμὲς δέ γ’ εἰμές· εἰ δὲ λῇς, πεῖραν λάβε, (3) Ἁμὲς δέ γ’ ἐσσόμεσθα πολλῷ κάρρονες (ap. Plut. Lyc. 21. 3). Cf. V 461 A.

εἰς τὸ γεννᾶν ‐‐ ζῴοις . Cf. V 459 A ff.

τούτου is not intended to anticipate the ὅπως clause, but means— like αὐτό below—our system of education. This is clear from διαφθαρέν, which is the antithesis to σῳζομένη above, and like it, is said of the παιδεία. τὸ μὴ νεωτερίζειν is in loose apposition to αὐτό.

τὴν ‐‐ ἀμφιπέληται . Od. I 351 f. τὴν γὰρ ἀοιδὴν μᾶλλον ἐπικλείουσ’ ἄνθρωποι κτλ. Plato's variant probably points to a different recension; for ἐπιφρονεύουσιν (sic) ἐπακούουσιν in Hesychius seems to refer to the same passage (Schneider). For the sentiment cf. Pind. Ol. 9. 48 αἴνει δὲ παλαιὸν μὲν οἶνον, ἄνθεα δ’ ὕμνων | νεωτέρων, Xen. Cyr. I 6. 38 and many other illustrations in Smyth Greek Melic Poets p. 174.

πολλάκις . 422 C note

τρόπον ᾠδῆς νέον . Pind. Ol. 3. 4 Μοῖσα δ’ οὕτω μοι παρεστάκοι νεοσίγαλον εὑρόντι τρόπον. Pindar would incur Plato's censure for these words.

ὑπολαμβάνειν : i.e. understand such to be the poet's meaning.

μουσικῆς τρόποι . In later musical theory τρόποι was technically used to denote the three varieties of musical composition—νομικός, διθυραμβικός, τραγικός. They were called τρόποι (according to Aristid. Quint. p. 30 Meib.) because they expressed different psychical characters (διὰ τὸ συνεμφαίνειν πως τὸ ἦθος κατὰ τὰ μέλη τῆς διανοίας), because, in short, they were μιμήματα τρόπων. Plato's μουσικῆς τρόποι need not however be confined to Aristides' three varieties. On the connexion between musical and political changes see Laws 700 A—701 D. The connexion was recognised universally throughout Greece, and particularly at Sparta, where—as Pausanias (III 12. 10) tells us—Timotheus had his lyre confiscated for adding to it four new strings: cf. also Cic. de Leg. II 39. Wherever in the ancient Greek πόλις the conception of the individual is hardly separated from that of the citizen, moral and political changes are believed to go hand in hand; and the effect of music on morality is explained in III 400 D—401 A: cf. Laws 673 A τὰ μὲν τοίνυν τῆς φωνῆς μέχρι τῆς ψυχῆς πρὸς ἀρετῆς παιδείαν οὐκ οἶδ’ ὅντινα τρόπον ὠνομάσαμεν μουσικήν. Bosanquet raises the question whether musical innovations are the cause or only the symptoms of political. Plato, I think, regarded them primarily as the cause (Laws ll.cc.). We can better understand their effect if we remember that they were accompanied by changes not only in rhythm, but also in the quality, ethical and otherwise, of the words sung; and if we also bear in mind the enormous influence of the theatre in Greek life. The latter point is emphasized in this connexion by Plato (ll.cc.) and Aristoxenus (ap. Ath. XIV 31). See on the whole subject Newman's Politics of Aristotle I pp. 359—369 and Nettleship Hellenica pp. 123—130.

φησί ‐‐ Δάμων . III 400 B note

τοίνυν =‘also’: see I 339 D note

424D - 427A Our Guardians must above all things guard against changes in musical education. Musical innovations even if sanctioned only in play soon make themselves felt in every quarter of the State. The spirit of law and virtue must be infused into children even through their pastimes. For this reason, we should not neglect details of dress and manners, although they call for no special enactments, but will readily conform to the spirit of our rules about education. Many other individual points may safely be left to our guardians, if only God vouchsafes to them the preservation of our laws; otherwise it is in vain for them to pass law upon law, acting like those who hope to cure their diseases by continually changing their medicines. As nothing but a complete change in their habits will benefit such men, so only a revolution will cure a state which is similarly situated. Such cities honour and make proud the men who minister to their desires; but the true statesman does not care to cut the Hydra. In a bad city, petty legislation is useless; in a good, superfluous.

ff. This section has a certain historical interest from its scarcely-veiled impeachment of Athenian politics and manners: see on 425 A, 425 C, 426 C.

φυλακτήριον ‐‐ μουσικῇ . μουσική is at once the vital and the most vulnerable —see next note—part of our State; hence the guard-house must be built in Music. ἐν is quasi-local, as ἐνταῦθά που shews; we shall confuse the metaphor if we suppose (as some have done) that Music is itself the guard-house.

ἡ γοῦν ‐‐ αὕτη . αὕτη is ἡ ἐν μουσικῇ. Madvig's suggestion ταύτῃ should not be accepted; it would make παρανομία ‘lawlessness’ in general, whereas Socrates' reply and Adimantus' next remark shew that only ἡ ἄμουσος παρανομία (Laws 700 D) is meant. παρανομία is aptly used of heterodoxy in music, thanks to the musical sense of νόμος. Cf. infra 424 E and Shorey in Chicago Studies in Cl. Phil. I p. 222 note 4. The position of αὕτη increases its emphasis.

ἐν παιδιᾶς γε μέρει . Plato is animadverting on the common view that music should be cultivated πρὸς παιδιάν rather than πρὸς παιδείαν. Aristotle allows a threefold use of music—for pastime (παιδιά), education, and the rational employment of leisure: Pol. Θ 5. 1339^{a} 16 and^{b} 14 ff.

ὑπορρεῖ κτλ. : as a gentle river may become a destructive torrent before its course is ended. The sentence eloquently describes the decay of Athenian music, character, and politics from the simplicity of earlier times, as appears from Laws 700 A—701 D. See also on οἱ πρότερον 425 A. For πολιτείας Hartman would read the singular; but the plural is more forcible. Laws and constitutions are overthrown by the devouring flood. σύν in Plato (as in good Attic generally) is rare; one of its recognised uses is in modal phrases of this kind, especially where (as here and in VI 492 B, VIII 564 C, X 619 B) the style seeks elevation: cf. Lina De praep. usu. Plat. pp. 32 —34 and Mommsen Beiträge z. d. Lehre v. d. Gr. Praep. pp. 376 ff.

ὃ ‐‐ ἐλέγομεν : ‘as we were trying to say at the outset,’ i.e. of this discussion 424 A. No specific reference to an earlier part of the dialogue is intended: at all events II 377 B is not in point. According to Plato παιδιά should—(to borrow a saying of Aristotle's) —παιδεύειν πρὸς τὴν πολιτείαν—educate children in the spirit of their commonwealth: Laws 798 B ff. Conversely, Aristotle reminds us, education is itself the older boys' rattle (Pol. Θ 6. 1340^{b} 30). It should be noted that παιδιᾶς (cf. παίξειν in 425 A) refers like παιδιᾶς in D above to music; if music is to be a pastime, it must be one which is ἔννομος. In ἐννομωτέρου and παρανόμου there may also be a play on the musical sense of νόμος: cf. 424 D note

τοιούτων : viz. παρανόμων.

)κείνοις : those whom Adimantus in effect described in 424 D. See also next note.

οἱ πρότερον : ‘their predecessors’ (Jowett), i.e. the predecessors of our citizens. The expression betrays the fact that Plato is now censuring the decay of Athenian manners, as of Athenian music and character in 424 D. In ἐξευρίσκουσιν —πάντα Plato speaks as if his regulations were a programme for the reform of his native city. Cf. Krohn Pl. St. pp. 32, 33.

, B 7 σιγάς τε ‐‐ τοιαῦτα . Cf. Ar. Clouds 961—1023. Aristophanes mentions the σιγαὶ τῶν νεωτέρων (963), the ὑπαναστάσεις (993), the γονέων θεραπεῖαι (994, 998), and various details of τοῦ σώματος σχηματισμός (973, 983).

κατακλίσεις means literally ‘settings down,’ i.e. causing or permitting others to sit down, as when the Spartans, for example, in the well-known story, made way for the aged stranger at the Panathenaea (Plut. Apophth. Lac. 52. 235 D). Cf. κατακλίναντες in 420 E and II 363 C. The word—which has been curiously misunderstood—is coupled with ὑπανάστασις also in Arist. Eth. Nic. IX 2. 1165^{a} 28. See also Xen. Mem. II 3. 16. After πρέπει supply σιγᾶν out of σιγάς. The older editors read ὡς for ἅς with several deterioris notae MSS.

καὶ ‐‐ γέ with κουράς marks the transition to a new class of particulars: cf. Crit. 47 B, Gorg. 450 D al. Hartman should not have suggested καὶ—τε. It was the Spartans who laid greatest stress upon the points enumerated here: cf. Xen. Rep. Lac. 3. 5, Plut. Cleom. 9. 1 (κείρεσθαι τὸν μύστακα καὶ προσέχειν τοῖς νόμοις). See also Xen. Cyr. VIII 7. 10.

οὔτε γάρ ‐‐ νομοθετηθέντα . Plato means that specific enactments are powerless either to produce or to maintain civilities and proprieties of this kind. The flowers of civilisation must bloom naturally, or not at all. With the general sentiment of this passage cf. Isocr. Areop. 41 δεῖν δὲ τοὺς ὀρθῶς πολιτευομένους οὐ τὰς στοὰς ἐμπιμπλάναι γραμμάτων ἀλλ’ ἐν ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἔχειν τὸ δίκαιον· οὐ γὰρ τοῖς ψηφίσμασιν ἀλλὰ τοῖς ἤθεσι καλῶς οἰκεῖσθαι τὰς πόλεις.

ὅποι ‐‐ εἶναι : “the bent given by education will determine all that follows” (D. and V.): “wohin einer die Richtung durch die Erziehung bekommen hat, dem auch das folgende entspricht” (Schneider). The sense is satisfactory, nor is the apparent correlation of ὅποι and τοιαῦτα a sufficient reason for impugning the text, as (in common with Dobree and others) I formerly did. ὅπῃ (so Ast with q) would convey the idea of direction more precisely than ὅποι, but as the route is determined by the goal, we may be satisfied. Of the various emendations— ὁποἶ (Heller), ὁποῖος (Stallbaum, who afterwards recanted), ὁποίας (Dobree)— that of Dobree deserves high praise for elegance and point. The meaning would be ‘as is the education from which one starts, so is the sequel’; and for ὁποίας =ἐξ ὁποίας we might compare III 402 A, VII 520 D. I once thought of ὁποία ἄν τις ὁρμὴ ᾖ, but am now content with the text as it stands.

τελευτῶν ‐‐ ἀγαθόν . Cf. 424 A ἐάνπερ ἅπαξ ὁρμήσῃ εὖ, ἔρχεται ὥσπερ κύκλος αὐξανομένη.

οὐκ ἂν ἔτι . On ἔτι see III 412 B note

τί δέ; κτλ. ‘Once more: in heaven's name, said I, these markettroubles about contracts which the different classes of citizens make with one another in the market-place etc.—shall we condescend to make laws about any of them?’ I have placed a mark of interrogation after τί δέ (quid vero?): cf. 422 D note and 426 A. This increases the emphasis on ὦ πρὸς θεῶν: cf. I 332 C ὦ πρὸς Διός, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, εἰ οὖν κτλ. Herwerden puts the pause after τάδε, where it is less suitable; others wrongly omit the word. ταδε (see cr. n.) cannot well be dispensed with: it means ‘these familiar’: cf. III 403 E, and for the omission in A Introd. § 5. Herwerden also cuts out ἀγοραῖα on account of κατ’ ἀγοράν, but the reduplication is quite in Plato's way. The postponement of ἅ throws emphasis on κατ’ ἀγοράν, and thereby helps to contrast ἀγοραῖα ξυμβόλαια with χειροτεχνικά etc.: cf. III 390 B. It is natural to see in this sentence a reference to the judicial and mercantile arrangements of Athens and her empire: see 424 D note

χειροτεχνικῶν κτλ. χειροτεχνικὰ ξυμβόλαια are contracts with builders and the like (Laws 920 D).

δικῶν λήξεως means simply ‘the bringing of lawsuits’: originally ‘obtaining (by lot) one's rights,’ hence ‘obtaining leave to claim one's rights’ (Meier and Schömann Att. Process pp. 790—794). The reading λήξεις (see cr. n.) cannot be defended.

θέσεις : not ‘the imposition of taxes’ (L. and S.), but ‘the payments,’ as πράξεις is ‘the exactions.’

τὸ παράπαν means ‘in general,’ ‘generally.’ τὸ πάμπαν (see cr. n.) is never (I believe) so used, not even in Tim. 64 E cited by Baiter. Regulations on nearly all the points here specified are laid down in the Laws: on ξυμβόλαια 913 A ff., 920 D ff., on λοιδορία 934 E ff., on αἰκεία (unprovoked assault) 879 B ff., on δικῶν λῆξις 949 C, on δικαστῶν κατάστασις 767 A ff., 956 B ff., on ἀστυνόμοι and ἀγορανόμοι 763 C ff. There is no taxation in the city of the Laws (847 B).

καλοῖς κἀγαθοῖς . Cf. VI 489 E note

ὅσα δεῖ νομοθετήσασθαι shews that Plato does not wish to leave all these matters undefined by legislation; but the legislation is to come from the guardians he has educated. One reason is that laws on matters of this kind can never be final: cf. Laws 769 D. If the guardians are true to the spirit of Plato's commonwealth, they will easily frame such minor regulations, and re-adjust them—should it prove necessary—from time to time. The effort to obtain finality (οἰόμενοι ἐπιλήψεσθαι τοῦ βελτίστου) in such matters is foredoomed to failure (cf. 426 E), and no one makes it, until he has forgotten the real foundation of a nation's greatness, and lost his sense of the proportion of things. This is Plato's meaning.

πλήν γε κτλ. If the text is sound we must take πλήν γε as πλήν γε ὅτι (which H. Wolf was wishful to restore) and καί before ἀεὶ ἐλπίζοντες as=idque (with Stallbaum), unless we supply διάγουσι or the like by a sort of zeugma after ἐλπίζοντες. As regards καὶ ἀεὶ ἐλπίζοντες, J. and C. hold that the participle is resumed from ἰατρευόμενοι; but the effect of this interpretation is very harsh, because ἰατρευόμενοι goes so closely with οὐδὲν περαίνουσι as almost to form a single expression. It is not ‘they make no advance, submitting to a cure and always hoping,’ but ‘they make no advance under treatment.’ The troublesome καί before ἐλπίζοντες is omitted by some inferior MSS, is dotted in q, and apparently erased in Ξ. I once conjectured ποιοῦντες, comparing Critias 109 B πλὴν οὐ—βιαζόμενοι, but it is perhaps safer to acquiesce in the MS reading. Dümmler (Chron. Beitr. pp. 9—11) believes that Isocrates Antid. 62 expressly alludes to this passage. Isocrates at all events censures τοὺς ἐπιπλήττοντας τοῖς νῦν ἁμαρτανομένοις in words that might easily refer to Plato. See also on 426 C.

αὐτῶν ‐‐ μεθύων . On the plural passing into the singular see I 347 A note

τοιοῦτον . Cf. III 388 D note

προαγορεύουσι κτλ. Athens is plainly in Plato's mind. The Athenians carefully guarded their constitution by means of the γραφὴ παρανόμων and the εἰσαγγελία (see Gilbert's Gk. Const. Ant. E.T. pp. 299, 304 ff.); but nowhere were ψηφίσματα so common, and in these the demagogue found a wide field for exercising the arts of flattery and insinuation. Cf. Gilbert Beiträge zur innern Gesch. Athens pp. 73—93. With ἀποθανουμένους ὅς cf. III 411 C note, VIII 566 D (πάντας ᾧ ἂν περιτυγχάνῃ).

ὃς δ’ ἂν σφᾶς κτλ. Dümmler (l.c.) takes this to be Isocrates, who is also—so he thinks—satirised in the similar passage VI 493 A ff., and elsewhere. If so, σοφὸς τὰ μεγάλα, οἴονται τῇ ἀληθείᾳ πολιτικοὶ εἶναι, and ἢ οἴει—περὶ αὑτοῦ (D, E) are sufficiently true and scathing. We must however observe that Plato is describing a type, and the type is that of the demagogue rather than the merely academic and sophistical rhetorician, as appears from δεινὸς ᾖ ἀποπληροῦν and 426 E. These two types are cast in similar moulds; and Dümmler may be right in supposing that Plato thought of Isocrates as he wrote this satire, and pointed his shafts accordingly. If so, they hit the mark, and rankled, as it was natural they should. Isocrates apparently attempts a reply in his Antidosis (Dümmler l.c. p. 9).

οὗτος ἄρα ‐‐ ἔσται . To insert ὡς after οὗτος (as Richards proposes) would spoil the effect, and be grammatically awkward. Plato wishes to suggest the language of a proclamation ‘he shall be a good man and true,’ etc. ἄρα is enough (as Hartman notes) to mark the indirect: cf. II 358 C note

ἀνδρείας ‐‐ εὐχερείας : ‘courage and complaisance.’ εὐχέρεια is not ‘dexterity (L. and S., with the English translators), a meaning which the word never bears in Plato; but ‘facilitas,’ ‘humanitas,’ kind, obliging behaviour. “Herzhaftigkeit und Gutmüthigkeit,” Schneider, rightly.

τετράπηχυς : ‘a six-footer.’ Dümmler (l.c.) questions this word, without saying why. It is more appropriate than a word expressing greater height; especially if any personal allusion is intended. Isocrates was not an intellectual giant, nor would even his applauding contemporaries (I think) have called him so.

οὐκ αὖ ‐‐ τοῦτό γε : sc. οἴομαι. The point of αὖ is that Adimantus returned an affirmative answer last time (426 D). οὐκ ἄν, which is generally read, has not sufficient authority, and is difficult to justify. For οὐκ αὖ cf. III 393 D and infra 442 A.

πάντων χαριέστατοι . To this perhaps Isocrates replies in Antid. 62 χαριέντως μὲν εἰρῆσθαι ταῦτα φήσουσι, τὸ γὰρ εὖ φθονήσουσιν εἰπεῖν (Dümmler l.c.).

νομοθετοῦντες κτλ. It improves the rhetorical effect to treat all the participles as coordinate, instead of making the first two dependent on the third, or the third subordinate to them. For this reason I have placed a comma after ἐπανορθοῦντες.

οὔτ) ‐‐ ᾤμην ἄν : ‘I should not have thought so’ were it not for these great authorities. Jowett misses the irony by neglecting the tense (‘I conceive that the true legislator will not trouble himself,’ etc.). τὸν ἀληθινὸν νομοθέτην and κἂν ὁστισοῦν εὕροι would strike home, if Isocrates is meant.

ἀνωφελῆ ‐‐ ἐπιτηδευμάτων . For ἀνωφελῆ Ξ has ἀνωφελές, an obvious ‘correction.’ The plural, as Schneider observes, is supported by τὰ μὲν αὐτῶν (where αὐτῶν is also neuter). ὅτι after τὰ δέ has been called in question by Stallbaum and Hartman. Taken strictly, it must depend on a verbal notion supplied out of πραγματεύεσθαι (Stallbaum) or κἂν ὁστισοῦν εὕροι; but in a halfadverbial phrase like τὰ δέ, we should not pry too closely into the grammatical construction. The effect is exactly like the English ‘because some of them, etc., in other cases, because,’ etc.

, C In all that appertains to temples and religious worship, as well as services paid to the dead, Apollo, the guide of our fathers, and indeed of all mankind, shall direct us.

τί οὖν κτλ. With this section of the Republic we should compare V 461 E, 469 A, VII 540 C, and Laws 738 B ff. Plato would fain be no iconoclast: his object is to purify, rather than to abolish, the old religion. He tries, in short, to put new wine into old bottles. In particular, when he makes Apollo preside at the foundation of his city (οἰκίζοντές τε πόλιν οὐδενὶ ἄλλῳ πεισόμεθα), he is acting in accordance with the universal custom of the Greeks, who consulted the oracle at Delphi before planting colonies, and revered him as the universal ἀρχηγέτης and οἰκιστής (Preller Gr. Myth. p. 269). It is equally in harmony with Hellenic, and especially Athenian, usage to refer all matters of public worship to Apollo: see on 427 C. Delphi was the abiding centre of Greek religious and political unity; and it is therefore right that a Greek city (V 470 E), one of whose objects is to promote unity and comity among Greeks (ib. 469 B ff.), should attach itself to Apollo.

τῷ μέντοι Ἀπόλλωνι κτλ. Cf. Mem. I 3. 1 (of Socrates) φανερὸς ἦν καὶ ποιῶν καὶ λέγων, ᾗπερ ἡ Πυθία ἀποκρίνεται τοῖς ἐρωτῶσι, πῶς δεῖ ποιεῖν ἢ περὶ θυσίας ἢ περὶ προγόνων θεραπείας ἢ περὶ ἄλλου τινὸς τῶν τοιούτων. The answer of the priestess was ‘Serve the gods νόμῳ πόλεως’ (l.c. and IV 3. 16). The spirit in which we worship matters, rather than whom or how we worship. So large and tolerant a sentiment is worthy of the Delphic priesthood and of Plato.

τελευτησάντων τε . See cr. n. Asyndeton is indefensible here. We must either with all the editors (except J. and C.) read τε, or add καί after θεραπεῖαι.

ἐξηγητῇ ‐‐ πατρίῳ . πατρῴῳ instead of πατρίῳ is called for by Ast on slight MS authority. Ἀπόλλων was ancestor of the Ionians, being father of Ion ( Euthyd. 302 D), and was worshipped by them as Ἀπόλλων πατρῷος (Preller Gr. Myth. p. 272). But (as Schneider observes) “Socrates hic non magis quam alibi in his libris tanquam Atheniensis loquitur, sed tanquam Graecus. Graecis autem omnibus πάτριος, hoc est, a maioribus traditus harum rerum arbiter et interpres erat Delphicus Apollo.” An allusion to the special connexion of Ionians with Apollo would be out of place, particularly as πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις follows. In Athens the ἐξηγηταί formed a college of three members, charged with religious duties. According to Schöll (in Hermes VI pp. 36 ff.) the members were partly chosen by Apollo in his capacity of πάτριος ἐξηγητής; apparently the Athenians chose nine, out of whom three were selected—one from each triad —by the representatives of the god: whence their designation πυθόχρηστοι. It is on this model that Plato perhaps frames his regulations in Laws 759 D.

πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις . Delphi is then a religious centre, not for Greeks only, but for all mankind. It was certainly the nearest approach to such a centre that antiquity provided, for it commanded the homage of barbarians as well as Greeks. See Middleton Journ. of Hell. Studies IX p. 308. Middleton cites Livy XXXVIII 48. 2 “commune humani generis oraculum,” Cicero pro Font. 30 “oraculum orbis terrae,” and gives examples of the offerings paid by foreigners at Apollo's shrine. Even now, perhaps, Plato would deny that the oracle is dumb, though—true to its own principle of worshipping νόμῳ πόλεως—it speaks through other voices, and of other gods. See also on V 470 C.

ἐν μέσῳ ‐‐ ἐξηγεῖται . Cf. Eur. Ion 5, 6 ὀμφαλὸν | μέσον καθίζων Φοῖβος ὑμνῳδεῖ βροτοῖς. The ὀμφαλός was “a conical mass of ‘white marble or stone’” (Paus. X 16) in the sanctuary of Apollo at Delphi, “said to mark the centre of the earth.” Two gold eagles stood at its sides, representing the eagles which, according to the legend, met there, having been despatched simultaneously by Zeus from the extreme East and West of the world (Strabo IX 3. 6). The ὀμφαλός is frequently represented as the seat of Apollo (ἐπὶ τοῦ ὀμφαλοῦ καθήμενος), “especially upon coins, when he is represented in the character of the giver of oracles”: see for example ImhoofBlumner and P. Gardner in J. H. S. VIII p. 18, and Plate LXXIV vii. Middleton, on whose article “The Temple of Apollo at Delphi” (cited above) this note is chiefly based, thinks “the word ὀμφαλός was probably derived from ὀμφή, a voice, because the divine voice was heard there.” If this is true, the legends associating the shrine with the ‘navel’ or centre of the earth may be due to popular etymology. ὀμφαλός, ‘navel,’ is an Indo-Germanic word (Brugmann Grundriss II p. 187). Herwerden's excision of the words ἐν μέσῳ betrays ignorance of what the ὀμφαλός really was. See also Frazer on Paus. l.c.

427D - 429A Our city is now founded. Where then is Justice, where Injustice? How do they differ, and which is essential to happiness? Let us approach the question thus. Our city is perfectly virtuous, and must therefore be wise, brave, temperate and just. If we discover three of these elements in the city, the residue will be the fourth.

Let us take Wisdom first. It is not the technical knowledge or skill of the lower classes which renders our city wise, but rather the knowledge which deliberates for the whole city's interests. Now this knowledge is embodied in the Rulers. They form the smallest section of the State, but it is none the less in virtue of their presence that we call the whole city wise.

ff. The process of purgation has now been ended, and Plato's δευτέρα πόλις is complete (see II 372 E ff.). We are therefore ready to look for the second view of Justice. See on II 372 A. It should be observed that this part of the Republic has an independent value in the history of Ethics as the first explicit assertion of the doctrine of four cardinal virtues (427 E note). For an account of Plato's teaching on the Virtues we may refer to Michaelis die Entwicklungsstufen in Plato's Tugendlehre, and especially to Hammond On the Notion of Virtue in the Dialogues of Plato Boston 1892.

αὐτός τε καὶ ‐‐ παρακάλει . For the idiom cf. (with Schneider) Phaedr. 253 B μιμούμενοι αὐτοί τε καὶ τὰ παιδικὰ πείθοντες.

ποῦ ἡ ἀδικία . If our city is τελέως ἀγαθή (427 E), it is useless to look for ἀδικία in it. On this difficulty see II 369 A note

πότερον . Herwerden's ποτέραν is quite unnecessary, as Hartman shews; cf. 428 A, 433 D, 434 C, 445 B, V 449 D.

ἐάν τε λανθάνῃ κτλ. recalls II 367 E.

ὡς οὐχ ὅσιον ‐‐ τρόρῳ : II 368 B, C.

σοφή ‐‐ δικαία . This is apparently the earliest passage in Greek literature where the doctrine of four cardinal virtues (if by cardinal virtues we mean those which make up the sum of perfect goodness) is expressly enunciated. The doctrine may of course be Pythagorean, but evidence is wanting, and it is doubtful whether Pindar's τέσσαρες ἀρεταί Nem. III 74 are to be interpreted as the cardinal virtues: see Bury ad loc. The nearest approach to the doctrine before Plato is in Xen. Mem. III 9. 1—5 (as Krohn has pointed out Pl. St. p. 372), with which compare IV 6. 1—12, where Justice, Wisdom, and Courage are named, as well as other virtues, including εὐσέβεια. Cf. also Aesch. Sept. 610 σώφρων δίκαιος ἀγαθὸς εὐσεβὴς ἀνήρ. From other passages in Plato, none of which are so precise and technical as this, it would seem that ὁσιότης made a good fight for a fifth place: Prot. 329 C, Lach. 199 D, Men. 78 D, Gorg. 507 B. In Phaed. 69 C and Laws 631 C σωφροσύνη, δικαιοσύνη, ἀνδρεία and φρόνησις (not σοφία) are named together, without ὁσιότης, which in the Euthyphro (12 D ff.) is a subdivision of δικαιοσύνη. From Adimantus' ready assent (cf. V 476 A note), we may reasonably infer that the doctrine of four cardinal virtues was already a familiar tenet of the Platonic school. Schleiermacher thinks it may have been taken over “aus dem allgemeinen Gebrauch” ( Einleitung p. 26). There is however no evidence to shew that these four virtues and no others were regarded as the essential elements of a perfect character before Plato. If the theory was originated by Plato himself, it is possible enough that in restricting the number to four, Plato was not uninfluenced by the sacred character of the number four in Pythagoreanism, just as Aristotle has been supposed to have limited his categories to ten on similar grounds. An interesting conjecture is suggested by the remarks of Schleiermacher (l.c. p. 21). Our city is ex hypothesi perfectly virtuous. Its constituent elements are Rulers, Auxiliaries, Farmers and Artisans. Now the virtues which are exhibited in the lives and mutual relationship of these classes are, as Plato holds, Wisdom, Courage, Temperance, and Justice. Consequently these virtues are the component factors of moral perfection; in other words they are the cardinal virtues. We may admit that there is no petitio principii in such a method of investigation, which is, in fact, akin to the perfectly legitimate method described in Men. 86 E: cf. also V 458 A. If this suggestion is correct, the doctrine of four cardinal virtues will be directly descended from the arrangements of Plato's ideal city. But it is clear from what Plato himself says, both here and in 429 A, 430 D, 432 B, 433 B f., that the doctrine is already an accepted part of his ethical system, and not merely a provisional hypothesis which is intended to be confirmed by what follows. For the relative value and importance of the four cardinal virtues in Plato's way of thinking see Laws 630 D ff.

οὐκοῦν ‐‐ ηὑρημένον . Essentially the same method is used by Aristotle to reach his conclusion that virtue is a ἕξις (Eth. Nic. II 4). Cf. also (with J. and C.) Lys. 216 D, E. Jowett observes that the true function of “this half-logical, halfmathematical method of residues” is in dealing with “abstract quantity” and “the laws of Nature.” It is undeniable that this method is much more likely to lead us astray in ethics than in mathematics or the natural sciences, owing to the nature of the subject; but it is valid if our analysis of the phenomena is exhaustive and exact. A similar method was frequently employed in the Eleatic school: see II 380 D note Plato not unfrequently extends the methods of mathematical reasoning beyond what we should consider their proper sphere: the whole of the preliminary studies, for example, in Book VII are to be pursued according to the methods of pure mathematics. See on VII 528 E ff. and the Appendix to Book VII “On the propaedeutic studies of the Republic.”

ὥσπερ τοίνυν ‐‐ αὐτῶν . For the logically superfluous (though welcome) αὐτῶν cf. II 375 E, infra 439 B, VIII 558 A, and Heindorf on Gorg. 482 D. Theaet. 155 E is a much harsher example, and has often been emended. The apodosis to the ὥσπερ clause is contained in οὐκοῦν— ζητητέον.

οὐκ ἄλλο ἔτι ἦν . On ἔτι (i.e. “after the other three were found” J. and C.) see III 412 B note

αὐτῷ . A corrector in q wrote αὐτῇ, which Schleiermacher preferred. Hartman suggests αὐτοῖς. αὐτῷ is, however, not the city, but simply ‘the matter,’ ‘the subject under discussion’; an idiomatic usage for which cf. I 339 E note For the neuter κατάδηλον cf. 427 D note Hartman's κατάδηλος is unnecessary.

σοφία as here described means φρόνησις—so it is called in 433 B, C— in its application to politics, not metaphysical knowledge of the Idea of Good. It deliberates for the good of the whole city (428 D), but the good is not yet elevated to the rank of an Idea. This point has been rightly emphasized by Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 40, 362), who points out the essentially Socratic character of this virtue, comparing Xen. Mem. I 2. 64 and IV 1. 2 (a sentiment of which Books II—IV of the Republic are an amplification and exposition in detail). See also Prot. 352 B and Laws III 689 B. Commentators before Krohn (Steinhart for example Einleit. p. 185, and Susemihl Gen. Entw. II p. 153) did not sufficiently grasp the almost exclusively political character of σοφία here, although it is expressly dwelt upon by Plato throughout, and particularly in 429 A. I say ‘almost,’ because here, as elsewhere, Plato, as his manner is, contrives to drop some hints preparing us for a still higher conception of the virtue of the guardians. See on 429 C and 442 C.

ἄτοπον : because it is its smallest section which makes the whole city wise (428 E).

εὔβουλος . εὐβουλία was primarily a political virtue: see on I 348 D.

βουλευομένην . Heindorf's emendation (see cr. n.), which is accepted by Ast, Stallbaum, Baiter and Hartman, appears to me certain for these reasons. First, in τὴν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐκ τοῦ χαλκοῦ ἤ τινα ἄλλην τῶν τοιούτων below we must understand ἐπιστήμην βουλευομένην, so that βουλευομένην and not βουλευομένη must have been written before. Secondly, if we read βουλευομένη, we must write (with Hermann etc. and a few inferior MSS) ᾗ for ἥ before οὐχ ὑπὲρ τῶν below. Schneider retains βουλευομένη, but understands βουλευομένην before ἐπιστήμην— an indefensible construction, which Laws 807 C (to which he appeals in Addit. p. 31) in no way justifies.

τὴν ὑπὲρ ‐‐ τοιούτων . For the carrying on of the preposition (here διά) cf. (with Schneider) Phaed. 64 D ἐσπουδακέναι περὶ τὰς ἡδονὰς καλουμένας τὰς τοιάσδε, οἷον σιτίων κτλ. Ἥκιστά γε κτλ. Τί δέ; τὰς τῶν ἀφροδισίων;

ὅντιν) ἂν ‐‐ ὁμιλοῖ. ἄν cannot, I think, be dispensed with here. It is better to insert it after ὅντινα than (with Baiter) after ἄριστα, for (as Schneider shews by many examples) ἄν likes to attach itself to the relative in sentences of this kind. The political wisdom here described is akin to the βασιλικὴ τέχνη of Euthyd. 291 C ff. and elsewhere, as well as to Aristotle's view of πολιτική as the architectonic art (Eth. Nic. I 1. 1094^{b} 27 with Stewart's note). It knows what is good and evil, and legislates for the other arts, but the good which it knows is a political and moral conception, not (as yet) the metaphysical Idea of Book VI.

νῦν δή . III 414 B (φύλακας παντελεῖς).

τί τὴν πόλιν προσαγορεύεις . It should be noted that ‘wise’ (to confine ourselves for the present to the virtue of wisdom) is used (1) of the rulers in the State and the λογιστικόν in man, (2) of the city and the individual as wholes: cf. 441 D ff. Which of these two meanings is intended to be original and primary? This subject is admirably discussed by Hirzel Hermes VIII pp. 379 ff., who shews that the wisdom of the rulers and the λογιστικόν is the fundamental one: cf. Arist. Top. V 8. 138^{b} 1 ff., where τὸ πρῶτον φρόνιμον is said to be ἴδιον λογιστικοῦ. The same, mutatis mutandis, holds good of Courage; and also, though with a difference, of Temperance and Justice. In calling the whole city wise because the rulers are wise, Plato is influenced by its analogy with the individual man, whom we readily and easily call wise, although strictly speaking he is wise only by reason of the λογιστικόν within him. Comparing 443 C ff., we observe that the city is wise because its rulers are wise, and its rulers are wise because their λογιστικόν is wise. In other words the wisdom of the λογιστικόν is the unit out of which the wisdom of the whole city is constructed. See on 443 B ff.

πότερον οὖν . See cr. n. We have still to explain τι ἄτοπον in 428 B, for Adimantus' τί has not yet been answered. For this reason οὖν after πότερον is welcome, if not (as Schneider thinks) indispensable.

πολὺ ‐‐ χαλκέας . Cf. II 379 C note

ὅλη σοφὴ κτλ. The subject is πόλις κατὰ φύσιν οἰκισθεῖσα, ‘a city founded in accordance with Nature.’ On κατὰ φύσιν see II 370 A note

ἣν μόνην ‐‐ σοφίαν καλεῖσθαι . Pfleiderer (Zur Lösung d. Pl. Frage pp. 46 ff.) compares Symp. 209 A ff. πολὺ δὲ μεγίστη—καὶ καλλίστη τῆς φρονήσεως ἡ περὶ τὰς τῶν πόλεών τε καὶ οἰκήσεων διακοσμήσεις, ᾗ δὴ ὄνομά ἐστι σωφροσύνη τε καὶ δικαιοσύνη. The difference in phraseology does not obscure the essential kinship of the two passages.

429A - 430C The virtue of Courage will reside in the Warrior-class. It is owing to their bravery that we call the city brave, for the general character of the city as a whole cannot be determined by any courage or cowardice present among the others. The Soldiers will in spite of every temptation continue true to the principles laid down by law concerning what should, and what should not, be feared; and they will do so the more stedfastly, because their musical and gymnastic training has already prepared them for the legislation in question. It is in the preservation of these principles that the courage of a city consists, a kind of courage which is distinct from the corresponding virtue in lower animals and slaves, because its basis is education. Another time we may discuss the virtue of Courage more fully, but for our present purpose this suffices.

ὁ νομοθέτης ‐‐ παιδείᾳ . The δόξα is then prescribed by the legislator (i.e. in Plato's city, by Plato, cf. ὑπὸ νόμου below, νομίμου in 430 B, and σὺ ὁ νομοθέτης in VI 497 D), not by the rulers from time to time. It is important to notice this point, because it shews that the rulers are not here, as in a certain sense they are in VI—VII, in the position of the original legislator: see VI 497 C note Cf. however III 414 A note and infra 442 C note

ποίαν δὴ σωτηρίαν ; ποίαν expresses incredulity and wonder, which δή saves from falling into contempt. See I 330 A note On the definition of courage given here see 430 C note

γεγονυίας . Cf. γεγονυῖαν in 430 B.

αὐτῆς σωτηρίαν . See cr. n. αὐτήν of the MSS must mean either (1) the σωτηρία or (2) ἀνδρεία (so Hartman). In either case the αὐτήν which follows has a different antecedent viz. τὴν περὶ τῶν δεινῶν δόξαν, so that the sentence becomes both awkward and obscure. Moreover, in whichever way we understand αὐτήν, the MSS leave us with three accusatives (αὐτήν, σωτηρίαν and the clause introduced by τό), the precise relationship of which is far from clear. Various suggestions have been made to escape these difficulties. Instead of αὐτήν Jackson suggests αὖ τήν (J. Ph. IV p. 148); while Stallbaum and others read τῷ (eo quod) for τό, before which Hartman for his part wishes to insert διά. Hermann and Baiter cut the knot by expunging both αὐτήν and σωτηρίαν. Jackson's remedy is the simplest, but αὖ creates a difficulty. The new point in the explanation which he supposes it to mark is, I think, emphasized too much by αὖ; nor indeed is it quite easy to separate αὖ from ἔλεγον. I believe Plato wrote αὐτῆς. The words διὰ παντὸς αὐτῆς σωτηρίαν recall and correspond exactly to ἣ διὰ παντὸς σώσει τὴν περὶ τῶν δεινῶν δόξαν, and to 430 B σωτηρίαν διὰ παντὸς δόξης κτλ., and the meaning is ‘by preserving it perpetually I meant preserving it throughout when one is in pains and in pleasures’ etc. Grammatically, the infinitives are the direct object of ἔλεγον (‘I called’), and διὰ παντὸς αὐτῆς σωτηρίαν is its secondary object. The presence of αὐτῆς σωτηρίαν is necessary to correspond to διασῴζεσθαι αὐτήν, but διὰ παντὸς takes the first place, because it is the phrase requiring elucidation. The corruption of αὐτῆς to αὐτήν is of a piece with that of γεγονυίας to γεγονυῖαν (see cr. n.) and its all but inevitable consequence. The correction printed above is accepted by a reviewer of my Text of the Republic in Hermathena XXIV p. 252.

λύπαις ‐‐ φόβοις . III 412 E ff.

ἁλουργά =‘purple’: see Tim. 68 B, with Archer-Hind's note. Herwerden cuts out ὥστ’ εἶναι, but without these words the wool which we are dyeing would be purple, whereas it is white, and we are making it purple. See on ἐάν τε καὶ ταῦτα in E.

πρῶτον μὲν κτλ. As far as concerns the language and grammatical construction of this passage it is clear that the object of ἐκλέγονται should be the same as that of προπαρασκευάζουσιν, θεραπεύσαντες, and βάπτουσι, and identical with the subject of δέζεται. Now the object of βάπτουσι is the wool selected to be dyed; it is therefore the wool which is subjected to προπαρασκευή, and consequently white substances of wool are meant by μίαν φύσιν τὴν τῶν λευκῶν (so also Blümner Technologie etc. I pp. 221 ff.). That this interpretation is right, appears also from the application of the simile. The guardians are the white woollen substances specially selected (note ἐξελεγόμεθα 429 E), their education is the προπαρασκευή; and the δόξα περὶ δεινῶν κτλ. is the dye. This is expressly pointed out in 429 E—430 A. τοσούτων is strictly in point, for woollen substances may be of any colour, since they may have been already dyed. Plato informs us that dyers selected white woollen substances when they wished to impart a lasting purple hue. Cf. Tim. 50 D, E. The προπαρασκευή included the process called στύψις, i.e. steeping the wool in an astringent solution (πρόστυμμα) to make it take the dye better (Arist. de Col. 4. 794^{a} 29 and Probl. XXII 11. 931^{a} 13 ff. προβρέχουσιν ἐν τοῖς στρυφνοῖς τῷ διεργασθὲν μᾶλλον δέχεσθαι τὴν βαφήν: cf. also Theoph. de Odor. 17 ὑποστύφουσι γὰρ πᾶν εἰς τὸ δέξασθαι μᾶλλον τὴν ὀσμὴν ὥσπερ τὰ ἔρια εἰς τὴν βαφήν). Aristotle uses a metaphor from dyeing in a similar way in Eth. Nic. II 2. 1105^{a} 3. Cf. also Cicero Hortens. Fr. 62 ed. Nobbe “ut ei qui combibi purpuream volunt, sufficiunt prius lanam medicamentis quibusdam, sic litteris talibusque doctrinis ante excoli animos et ad sapientiam concipiendam imbui et praeparari decet,” and see on the whole subject Blümner l. c. I pp. 221 ff., 238 ff.

θεραπεύσαντες . If the text is sound, we must suppose either that two processes of preparation are alluded to, viz. θεραπεία and προπαρασκευή; or else that θεραπεύσαντες is used for θεραπεύοντες. The first alternative is inadmissible: for προθεραπεύσας in E shews that the θεραπεία and προπαρασκευή are identical. As for the second, Schneider remarks “aoristum ipsum pro praesenti positum vix credo.” There are some instances in which “an aorist participle denoting that in which the action of a verb of past time consists may express time coincident with that of the verb, when the actions of the verb and the participle are practically one” (Goodwin MT. p. 52: cf. Kühner Gr. Gr. II pp. 161 ff.), but as προπαρασκευάζουσιν is a verb of present or universal time, Goodwin's rule is inapplicable here. Hartman ejects the participle, and Schneider is anxious to read θεραπεύοντες. In my edition of the Text, I had recourse to transposition, and placed θεραπεύσαντες before οὕτω δή (‘and they do not dip the wool till they have finished dressing it’). It is, however, safer to adhere to the MSS and regard θεραπεύσαντες as one of those ‘timeless aorists,’ of which many examples are quoted by F. Carter in Cl. Rev. V pp. 4 ff. The MS reading is supported not only by Stobaeus (Flor. 43. 97), but also (as Jackson has pointed out to me) by Theo Smyrnaeus de utilit. math. p. 13 ed. Hiller.

τὸ ἄνθος : the colour, as appears from Arist. de Col. l. c. 794^{a} 34 et al. Though it is used of purple here, it was not confined to purple: see on VIII 557 C.

δευσοποιὸν ‐‐ βαφέν . δευσοποιόν· ἔμμονον καὶ δυσαπόπλυτον (Timaeus Lex. s. v. δευσοποιόν, where Ruhnken illustrates the word very fully). The point of course is that such προπαρασκευή rendered the colour proof against washing. δευσοποιός, ἀνέκπλυτος, and μόνιμος were constantly used in connexion with dyeing: see Blümner l. c. I p. 221 notes The words τὸ βαφέν are bracketed by Herwerden; but ὃ ἄν is not ‘quod,’ but ‘si quid’ (Schneider).

ῥυμμάτων . ῥύμματα is the generic word for detergents of any kind (Blümner Privatalt. p. 214 note 1): cf. παντὸς ἄλλου ῥύμματος 430 B.

ἐάν τε καὶ ταῦτα . ταῦτα is τὰ λευκά i.e. white substances: cf. τῶν λευκῶν in D above. Even white wool, unless specially prepared, will not retain the dye when it is dipped: much less other colours. This is the force of καί in καὶ ταῦτα. The words ἄλλα χρώματα refer to the colour of the wool which is dipped, not to the colour of the dye, as Herwerden supposes when he calls for τοῦτο: cf. note on ὥστ’ εἶναι in D above.

ἔκπλυτα καὶ γελοῖα : a sort of hendiadys: cf. VIII 558 A θεσπεσία καὶ ἡδεῖα. Stallbaum's suggestion ἀγελαῖα for γελοῖα is itself γελοιότερον. For τοιοῦτον cf. III 388 D note

ἐκπλύναι . Not ἐκπλύνοι (with Herwerden); for the action of ἐκπλύναι is more rapid than that of γίγνοιτο.

χαλεστραίου κτλ. χαλεστραῖον λίτρον (or νίτρον, but λίτρον is the Attic form) came from Χαλέστρα, a lake and city in Macedonia. λίτρον is supposed to be ‘native carbonate of soda’: see Blaydes on Ar. Frogs 712. The spelling χαλεστραῖον is established (as against χαλαστραῖον in Tim. Lex. s. v. and the Scholiast) by Hdt. VII 123 ( χαλέστρα) and other authorities quoted by Schneider. κονία as appears from ψευδολίτρου κονίας in Ar. l. c. was a preparation of λίτρον, whence Plato couples them here. See on the subject generally Dict. Ant. I p. 881.

παντὸς ἄλλου ῥύμματος is cancelled by Badham and others. It is difficult however not to feel that something is wanted to balance χαλεστραίου and κονίας, especially as these are two specific detergents of the same class. Further, without παντὸς ἄλλου ῥύμματος Plato would probably have written καὶ λύπη κτλ. The sentence as it stands rings Platonic; nor was παντὸς ἄλλου ῥύμματος at all likely to be added by a scribe. The words were also in the text used by Stobaeus and Theo Smyrnaeus: see Flor. 43. 97 and de utilit. math. p. 14. I suggest the following interpretation. The action of pleasure differs from that of pain, fear, and desire, in being more gentle, and less violent ( βίαιος). Pleasure in short relaxes (χαλᾷ) while pain (of which fear and desire as such are both varieties) contracts: cf. III 411 A on the effect of γλυκεῖαι ἁρμονίαι, Tim. 66 C and Stallbaum on Phil. 46 D. Now χαλεστραίου suggests χαλᾶν, and it is probably for this reason that Plato compares pleasure to it. Such a play on words is quite in Plato's manner: cf. Prot. 361 D. If we suppose that other ῥύμματα were harder, and less agreeable in their action, the point of comparing pain etc. with ‘every other detergent’ will appear.

τὴν ὀρθὴν δόξαν has been questioned, on the ground that beasts cannot have ὀρθὴ δόξα. It was no doubt a feeling of this kind which gave birth to the reading αὐτήν for ὀρθήν in some inferior MSS. Herwerden employs his favourite remedy of excision; and other equally unsatisfactory remedies will be found in Hartman. The text is quite sound. True opinion is in Plato the basis of action done in ignorance of what is right but in obedience to an authority which knows. A dog and a slave act from true opinion as often as they obey a master who orders them to do what is right. So also (among others) Rettig (Proleg. p. 109) and Krohn (Pl. St. p. 42) rightly understand the passage. Cf. note on πολιτικήν in C below.

οὔτε ‐‐ τε =‘not only not—but also’ lays stress on the second clause: cf. 427 C, VIII 566 D, E, IX 587 A al.

μόνιμον . See cr. n. The reading of some of Stobaeus' MSS (Flor. 43. 97) (which Dobree and others approved) appears to me almost certainly right, although it has been adopted by no recent editor. νόμιμον, as Rettig shews (Proleg. p. 110), must be used in precisely the same sense as in δόξης ὀρθῆς τε καὶ νομίμου just before. If so, Plato flatly (except for the οὔτε πάνυ) contradicts himself. For the only reason why a δόξα is ὀρθή is that it is νόμιμος ‘in accordance with the law’: nor is it possible for even a dog to possess an ὀρθὴ δόξα which is not νόμιμος. In obeying a just command, the δόξα of a dog is therefore not οὐ πάνυ νόμιμος, but wholly νόμιμος. On the other hand μόνιμον is not only appropriate but necessary in what is practically a résumé of Socrates' whole account of courage (δοκεῖς γάρ μοι —καλεῖν). The only difference between the ὀρθὴ δόξα of a guardian and a dog lies in this, that the former has received παιδεία, while the latter has not. And it is precisely this difference which makes the guardian's δόξα lasting, as the whole of the simile from dyeing was intended to shew (ἵνα δευσοποιὸς κτλ. 430 A). Finally, the soldier's ὀρθὴ δόξα has just been defined (in 430 B) as σωτηρίαν διὰ παντός κτλ. To διὰ παντός the words οὐ πάνυ μόνιμον are the necessary contrast: the δόξα is in both cases ὀρθή τε καὶ νόμιμος, only you can depend on the guardian always, ἔν τε λύπαις καὶ ἐν ἡδοναῖς καὶ ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἐν φόβοις (429 D), but not always on your dog and slave. Cf. Men. 97 E f.

ἄλλο τε ‐‐ ἀνδρείαν . With the sentiment cf. Lach. 197 A ff., where however it is because they are destitute of knowledge that courage is denied to the lower animals. Isocrates Antid. 211 speaks of dogs etc. as brave.

πολιτικήν γε ‐‐ δίιμεν . In this passage πολιτικὴν ἀνδρείαν means, I think, primarily the virtue of a πόλις as opposed to that of an ἰδιώτης: cf. 442 D πόλεώς τε καὶ ἰδιώτου. Our πόλις is brave because her soldiers are brave (429 B); so that in describing the courage of the soldiers we have really and truly been describing that of our city. But the ἀνδρεία with which we are now concerned is πολιτική in another, and more important sense, being based on ‘correct opinion’ (cf. Phaed. 82 A, B), i.e. in this instance on opinion which is in conformity with the law of the πόλις (cf. Aristotle's πολιτικὴ ἀνδρεία Eth. Nic. III 11. 1116^{a} 16 ff.), and not on ‘knowledge,’ like the scientific or philosophic virtue to which we are introduced in Books VI and VII. In this Platonic connotation of the term, δημοτική or πολιτικὴ ἀνδρεία is inferior both to the courage which rests upon knowledge in the Socratic sense ( Lach. 195 A, 196 E ff., Prot. 349 D ff.) and to that which rests on knowledge of the Idea of the Good (cf. VI 506 A), although it is nevertheless on a much higher plane than the so-called courage of slaves and brute beasts, because it is μετὰ παιδείας γεγονυῖα. In αὖθις—δίιμεν Siebeck (Zur Chron. d. Pl. Dial. pp. 126 ff.) finds a promise of the Laches. To this view it seems to me a serious objection that the Laches has nothing to say of the characteristically Platonic distinction between ἐπιστήμη and ὀρθὴ δόξα: for that very reason it is probably earlier than this passage. Courage in the Laches is little more than Socratic courage (cf. Mem. IV 6. 10 ff.), for the knowledge of the good into which it is finally resolved is not knowledge of the Idea. Others have found in αὖθις a reference to the account of Courage in the individual (442 B), or to V 467 A ff., or to VI 486 B. None of these references are in point; and it is simplest to take Plato at his word. He drops the subject because further discussion of it would be irrelevant; he will resume it on another occasion if Adimantus wishes, but Adimantus is content. Cf. VII 532 D note and see also on 1 347 E. The whole of this section of the dialogue is important because it emphatically reaffirms the principle that courage as well as the other virtues enumerated here rests on ὀρθὴ δόξα and not on ἐπιστήμη. We have already seen that Plato's earlier scheme of education aims at implanting only ὀρθὴ δόξα. Cf. II 376 E note

νῦν γὰρ ‐‐ ἐζητοῦμεν . νῦν=‘as it is’: so that Cobet's ζητοῦμεν (found also in one or two MSS) is unnecessary.

430D - 432A Thirdly, we consider Temperance. This virtue resembles a kind of ‘harmony’ or mutual accord. It is often explained as self-control. Self-control means that the better self rules the worse; and this is surely true of our city, for in it the higher controls the lower, and the irrational desires of the inferior many are subject to the rational desires of the virtuous few. Further, our citizens are in accord with one another as to who shall rule and who shall be ruled, so that Temperance is present in both ruled and rulers, pervading the whole city through and through and rendering it accordant with itself. We may define Temperance as accord between the naturally better and the naturally worse, on the question which of them should rule.

ff. The difficulties connected with Plato's view of Temperance and Justice and their mutual relationship have been to a large extent cleared up by Hirzel (Hermes VIII pp. 379—411). Hirzel's conclusions, some of which have been attacked by W. A. Hammond in his instructive dissertation “On the notion of Virtue in the Dialogues of Plato,” but not, I think, successfully, are now accepted in the main by Zeller^{4} II 1, pp. 884 ff. Till Hirzel wrote, the tendency was to regard the two virtues as nearly, if not quite, identical—in which case one of the two would be practically superfluous. In that case, Plato's search for Justice is little better than a fiasco, and his ideal city falls to pieces. Cf. Rettig Proleg. p. 137. Hirzel succeeds in shewing that Justice and Temperance are different, and both of them necessary to Plato's perfect city; nor does he employ any other method than a strict interpretation of Plato's own words as they occur. See on 432 A.

πρότερον is omitted by Richards as illogical. So slight a flaw is easy to forgive; and ἔτι in μηκέτι suggests that πρότερον is genuine. Nor could Adimantus well have said that in any event he did not wish Justice—οὗ δὴ ἕνεκα πάντα ζητοῦμεν—to be discovered.

εἰ μὴ ἀδικῶ . Cf. X 608 D, 612 D, Charm. 156 A, Menex. 236 B. The translation “as I am an honest man” (D. and V.) is inaccurate; but Schneider's “ich thäte ja sonst nichts recht” hits the mark. In English we require an independent clause, ‘I have no right to refuse.’

ὥς γε ἐντεῦθεν ἰδεῖν : ‘seen from where we stand,’ i.e. on a first view: cf. ὡς ἐνθένδε ἰδεῖν Pol. 289 D, infra 432 B, X 595 B, and see Grünenwald in Schanz's Beiträge etc. II 3 pp. 1—37.

ξυμφωνίᾳ ‐‐ ἁρμονίᾳ . On ἁρμονία see III 398 E note In its musical application συμφωνία is used both of consonance as in the octave or double octave and also of other musical intervals: cf. VII 531 A and von Jan's Mus. Script. Gr. p. 102 and passim. The ξυμφωνία in which σωφροσύνη consists is apparently of the former kind: cf. 432 A note

ἡδονῶν ‐‐ ἐγκράτεια . It is chiefly this which is insisted on in the popular view of σωφροσύνη taken in III 389 D ff. Cf. Xen. Cyr. VIII 1. 32, Isocr. 3. 44, and other passages cited by Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. II p. 233. Here the essential mark of σωφροσύνη is ξυμφωνία as to who shall be rulers, and who subjects; a point which is not mentioned in III. In other fundamental respects, also, the two descriptions differ; and Hirzel rightly insists that the σωφροσύνη of Book IV must be examined independently and by itself (l.c. p. 409).

κρείττω ‐‐ αὑτοῦ : a common formula in the popular acceptation of σωφροσύνη: see Nägelsbach l.c.

λέγοντες . See cr. n. λέγοντες is found also in Flor. A, in some MSS of Stobaeus (Flor. 43, 97) and in Cesenas M. λέγοντες should (with Stallbaum) be taken as agreeing with the nominative of φασι, ‘as men say, calling one lord of oneself in some mysterious way.’ δή, ‘forsooth,’ helps out οὐκ οἶδ’ ὅντινα τρόπον. For other views on this passage see App. II.

κρείττω αὑτοῦ . Stallbaum reads κρείττων αὑτοῦ, and wishes to do so also in 431 A below. The accusative is more natural in both places, partly because it suggests τὸ κρείττω αὑτοῦ εἶναι (cf. ὁ γὰρ ἑαυτοῦ κρείττων καὶ ἥττων—ἂν αὑτοῦ εἴη), partly because of κρείττω αὑτοῦ just before.

τι ‐‐ τὸ μὲν ‐‐ τὸ δέ . For the subdivision of τις cf. V 463 B, VIII 560 A, Gorg. 499 C. Other examples of ‘partitive apposition’ are V 461 D, 477 C, VIII 552 C: cf. also VIII 556 B, IX 592 A, X 618 E.

τὸ κρείττω αὑτοῦ : sc. φαίνεταί μοι τοῦτο λέγειν. The expression κρείττω αὑτοῦ is the subject, and τοῦτο the object. τόν for τό (see cr. n.) is indefensible. See also on τοῦτο δέ below.

πλήθους τοῦ χείρονος . II 379 C note

τοῦτο δὲ ‐‐ διακείμενον . τοῦτο is the object of ψέγειν, whose subject is still strictly speaking τὸ κρείττω αὑτοῦ or (which is the same thing) οὗτος ὁ λόγος. In ψέγειν and καλεῖν the λόγος is halfpersonified: ‘this the phrase censures as something disgraceful, and calls the man who is in this condition a slave to himself and intemperate.’ For the recapitulatory τοῦτο δέ cf. Ap. 28 E with my note ad loc. Hartman's τοῦτο δή is an unhappy suggestion.

ἔοικεν: sc. ὁ λόγος τοῦτο βούλεσθαι λέγειν: not (as J. and C.) “it seems a natural way of speaking.”

κρείττω ‐‐ αὑτῆς . Cf. Laws 626 E ff., where κρείττων αὑτῆς is similarly applied to a city and explained in the same way.

οὗ : not the adverb, as Stallbaum supposed, but a partitive genitive: ‘that whereof the better part rules the worse’ etc.

παισί . See cr. n. The corruption—an easy one in minuscule MSS—recurs in VI 494 B. See Introd. § 5 and Bast Comm. Pal. p. 705. The object of this part of the argument is to shew that our city is σώφρων not only as being κρείττων αὑτῆς but as being κρείττων ἡδονῶν τε καὶ ἐπιθυμιῶν—a kindred, but not quite identical, notion: cf. 431 D. In adding γυναιξί Plato speaks from the ordinary Greek standpoint; in permitting some women to be guardians, he tacitly allows that in some cases their desires (unlike those of οἰκέται etc.) are μετὰ νοῦ. Cf. Laws 780 E ff.

λεγομένων is emphatic. No one is free who is a slave to his desires. Cf. 1 336 A note

τὰς δέ γε κτλ. I have returned to the MS reading. The accusative with τυγχάνω and its congeners is—except with neuter pronouns (Jebb on Soph. O. T. 1298)—almost unexampled (ἐπιτόσσαις with accusative in Pind. Pyth. 10. 33), and Herwerden reads the dative, an easy correction; but it is perhaps safer to take the accusative as a sort of anacoluthon “occasioned by the parallel of the previous sentence” τάς γε πολλὰς—εὕροι (J. and C.). Baiter brackets the verb ἐπιτεύξει.

καὶ μὴν ‐‐ σφόδρα gives a third feature of the σωφροσύνη of a city. We have shewn our city to be (1) κρείττων αὑτῆς. (2) κρείττων ἡδονῶν τε καὶ ἐπιθυμιῶν. It is also (3) ὁμονοητικὴ περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν. (3) corresponds to κόσμος, (2) to ἐγκράτεια, (1) to κρείττω αὑτοῦ in 430 E. Thus the discussion in this chapter follows a chiastic order.

ἐν ἀμφοτέροις . Cf. 442 C, D. Aristotle and others seem to have supposed that σωφροσύνη was the special virtue of the lowest class in the State and the lowest element in the soul: see Top. V 6. 136^{b} 10 ff. and 8. 138^{b} 1 ff. and [Arist.] περἰ ἀρετῶν καὶ κακιῶν 1. 1249^{a} 30 ff. ἐν ἀμφοτέροις proves this view erroneous. The error arose partly perhaps from a desire to make the theory superficially symmetrical, partly perhaps from a notion that Plato's rulers would not be likely to dispute their own right to rule. But σωφροσύνη in Plato's sense is necessary for his Rulers as well as for their subjects; without it, they might nolle episcopari: cf. I 346 D note

δἰ ὅλης ‐‐ διὰ πασῶν . δἰ ὅλης sc. τῆς πόλεως, not λύρας, as J. and C. strangely suppose. διὰ πασῶν sc. τῶν χορδῶν should be taken with ξυνᾴδοντας (so also Schneider). ἡ διὰ πασῶν συμφωνία is the octave (Arist. Probl. XIX 35. 920^{a} 27 ff.), the καλλίστη συμφωνία, according to the Greeks (Arist. l.c.), readily sounding to the ear as absolute unison; hence the point of ταὐτόν, which is an accusative depending directly on ξυνᾴδοντας. See Arist. l.c. 14. 918^{b} 7 ff. διὰ τί λανθάνει τὸ διὰ πασῶν καὶ δοκεῖ ὁμόφωνον εἶναι, οἷον ἐν τῷ φοινικίῳ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ; The whole expression διὰ πασῶν ξυνᾴδοντας ταὐτόν therefore means that the concord of the citizens on the matter in question is absolute and complete. Further than this I do not think the comparison is to be pressed. If we seek to find analogies between ἀσθενεστάτους, ἰσχυροτάτους, μέσους and the ὑπάτη, νήτη and μέση of the scale, we are met by the difficulty that the μέση cannot be said to produce the same (ταὐτόν) note as the ὑπάτη and νήτη, and we are not at liberty to suppose that Plato is thinking of ἡ δὶς διὰ πασῶν in the face of his own words, which refer only to a single octave (διὰ πασῶν παρεχομ νη κτλ.). In talking of σωφροσύνη Plato usually distinguishes only between two classes—rulers and ruled: 431 D, E and infra χείρονός τε καὶ ἀμείνονος. See also on 443 D.

φρονήσει ‐‐ ἰσχύϊ ‐‐ πλήθει define ἀσθενεστάτους, ἰσχυροτάτους, μέσους. The equipoise and measured cadence of this stately sentence may well suggest a chorus of voices singing in unison. Cf. III 401 C. Cobet's excision of the second βούλει is sadly out of tune.

ταύτην τὴν ὁμόνοιαν prepares us for the definition about to follow. There are various ὁμόνοιαι: this one is agreement ὁπότερον δεῖ ἄρχειν etc.

χείρονος κτλ. : ‘concord between the naturally better and the naturally worse, on the question which should rule, whether in a city or in an individual.’ ἐν ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ anticipates 442 C f.; but is justified here by 431 A, B.

We may now sum up Plato's account of σωφροσύνη so far as it is a virtue of the State. It involves three elements: (1) the rule of the better over the worse, (2) the rule of φρόνησις over the desires, (3) the agreement of better and worse as to which shall rule. (1) and (2) are different ways of expressing the same thing; neither is fundamental, for (granted the presence of σοφία and ἀνδρεία) both of them follow from (3), whereas (3) does not follow from either. Plato accordingly admits (3) only into his final definition. It follows from (3) that σωφροσύνη, unlike σοφία and ἀνδρεία, is a virtue possessed by all the three classes of the City. Krohn (Pl. St. p. 372) pronounces σωφροσύνη otiose and “ornamental.” The charge is best refuted by considering whether the City is complete without it. (The part played by Justice will be discussed later.) Apart from σωφροσύνη, what virtue remains for the third class of citizens? and what guarantee is there that σοφία will consent to rule? (see on ἐν ἀμφοτέροις 431 E). Whereas σωφροσύνη not only provides for the third class, but furnishes a point of union in which all the classes may meet, and the City, so far, become μία ἐκ πολλῶν (cf. 443 E). If we bear in mind that the Rulers are only select Guardians, and that φύλακες includes both Rulers and Auxiliaries, we may tabulate the virtues of the three classes thus:—

Virtues of Rulers, σοφία + ἀνδρεία + σωφροσύνη .

Virtues of Soldiers, ἀνδρεία + σωφροσύνη.

Virtues of Farmers, etc., σωφροσύνη.

Hirzel is, I think, mistaken in holding that σωφροσύνη is a virtue of the whole and not of the parts; the fact is that it is a virtue both of the whole and of each of the parts. Strictly speaking, of course, ὁμόνοια or ξυμφωνία implies more parts than one, and concord is impossible to a unit; but the essence of the virtue consists in the view that the best shall rule, and this view is present in each of the three classes. For δικαιοσύνη see 434 C note

Plato's account of σωφροσύνη in other dialogues differs in many respects from this, and is rather a hindrance than a help in elucidating the present passage. Cf. Hirzel l.c. p. 409. The σωφροσύνη of the Charmides is fully discussed by Knuth Quaestiones de not. τῆς σωφροσύνης Plat. criticae (1874): cf. also Hammond l.c. pp. 138 f., 157 f.

432B - 434C Where then is Justice? We must beware lest she escape us. Socrates presently exclaims that he has found the trail. Justice is the principle, or else one form of the principle, which we laid down at the beginning, viz. that each individual shall fulfil that function only for which he is naturally best fitted. In other words, Justice is, in a certain sense, ‘minding one's own business.’ Four considerations point to this conclusion. In the first place, it is in order to make the other three take root that we require a fourth virtue; and it is just the division of duty according to natural capacity which renders the other three virtues possible. Secondly, this is the only principle which can be compared with the other three virtues in respect of benefit conferred upon the State: and Justice must be comparable with them in this respect. Thirdly, it is by this principle that the Rulers will direct their judicial decisions, and Justice is the principle by which our Rulers judge. Lastly, the violation of this principle works the greatest mischief in the City. So does Injustice; so that the principle itself is identical with Justice.

For Plato's view of Civic Justice see on 434 C.

ὥς γε ‐‐ δόξαι . This phrase is apparently quite unique in Plato: see Grünenwald cited on 430 E.

ὥσπερ κυνηγέτας . The image is a favourite one with Plato: cf. Laws 654 E, Parm. 128 C, Lys. 218 C. Other examples may be found in Stallbaum's note on this passage. The particular kind of hunting from which Plato takes his illustration is clearly described in Xen. de Ven. 8. 4—8. A net was drawn round the bush where the hare was, and the hunters stood round, ready μεταθεῖν κατὰ τὰ ἴχνη, ἐὰν ἐκκυλισθῇ ἐκ τῶν δικτύων.

φράσῃς : ‘point out.’ There is no occasion to read (with Ast and q) καί μοι φράσεις.

μετρίῳ . See cr. n. μετρίως χρῆσθαι could only mean ‘to treat fairly,’ but this is not to the point. The only relevant meaning is ‘you will find me very tolerable,’ and μετρίῳ μοι χρήσει conveys this sense exactly. Cf. ἑπομένῳ χρῇ—καὶ δυναμένῳ and Xen. Cyr. III 2. 4 ὀλίγοις τε καὶ ἀσθενέσι χρησαίμεθ’ ἂν πολεμίοις, Symp. 2 9, 10. On the error see Introd. § 5.

εὐξάμενος : like a pious huntsman: cf. Xen. de Ven. 6. 13 εὐξάμενον τῷ Ἀπόλλωνι καὶ τῇ Ἀρτέμιδι τῇ Ἀγροτέρᾳ μεταδοῦναι τῆς θήρας. Cf. also (with Stallbaum) Phil. 25 B εὔχου δὴ καὶ σκόπει and Tim. 27 C. ἕπου οὖν (suggested by Richards) seems to me much less spirited and picturesque than ἕπου; and the cacophony is also unpleasing. For the asyndeton cf. II 373 E note

ἔστι γοῦν ‐‐ δυσδιερεύνητος has been objected to as adding little or nothing to δύσβατος—ἐπίσκιος. But δυσδιερεύνητος, ‘difficult to beat,’ said of beating or scouring the brake to rouse (κινεῖν Xen. de Ven. 8. 7) the game and drive it out into the net, could ill be spared; so apt a word is much too good for a copyist. Cf. Menex. 240 B, where διερευνᾶσθαι is used of the famous ‘beating’ of Euboea by Datis' soldiers: and see also Laws 698 D.

ἰοῦ, ἰοῦ : ‘Joy! Joy!’ ἰού dolentis, ἰοῦ gaudentis, according to the Scholiast on Ar. Peace 318: cf. Suidas s.v. Ancient authorities differed on the point (see Blaydes' critical note l.c.), but modern scholars for the most part agree with Suidas.

ἐκφευξεῖσθαι ‐‐ εὖ ἀγγέλλεις . The contracted form of the future of φεύγω is established by the authority both of the Paris MS, and also of Aristophanes and Euripides, as Schanz has proved (Vol. XII p. xvi). Schanz may be right in supposing that it is borrowed “ex ore populi.” For εὖ ἀγγέλλεις Phrynichus (S. V. εὐαγγελίζομαί σε) apparently read εὐαγγελεῖς, on which see Lobeck Phryn. p. 632 and Cobet N. L. p. 163. εὐαγγελῶ does not seem to be used in Attic prose. In Theaet. 144 B εὖ ἀγγέλλεις is read by B, εὖ ἀγγελεῖς by T.

ἤτοι . See 1 344 E note

τι εἶδος , like τρόπον τινά in 432 E and 433 B, hints, I think, that Civic Justice is not, after all, the true and original form of Justice. Hence, in 434 D, Plato is careful to warn us that the subject of Justice is not exhausted till individual Justice has been discussed. See on τοιοῦτο in 443 C.

ἐπιτηδειοτάτη . ἐπιτηδειότατα (Herwerden) is not good: cf. II 374 E and supra 430 A. A few MSS omit πεφυκυῖα, not unnaturally; but the reduplication in φύσις—πεφυκυῖα adds to the emphasis. Plato never tires of emphasizing the ‘natural’ features of his city in Books II—IV.

δικαιοσύνη has been questioned by Richards, on the ground that “the inference announced in τοῦτο τοίνυν κτλ. is already stated in καὶ μὴν ὅτι κτλ., which from its form (καὶ μήν) is yet evidently only a step in the reasoning.” Richards suggests δίκαιον, and Hartman δικαιοσύνης, neatly but needlessly. τοίνυν in B does not express an inference, but is simply ‘well,’ as in II 369 B, III 413 C, IV 436 B and a host of other passages collected by Kugler (de part. τοι etc. p. 35). Plato first states a popular view, and then proceeds to shew that it is mainly right on grounds presently to be stated (whence οἷσθ’ ὅθεν τεκμαίρομαι;). No stress should be laid on the fact that δικαιοσύνη is in one case the predicate, and in the other the subject: complete identity is predicated in both cases, as the abstract δικαιοσύνη shews. It might be different if we read δίκαιον, but for this there is no occasion. There is still however a difficulty in δικαιοσύνη: see next note.

εἰρήκαμεν γάρ . This has not been said in the Republic, nor (so far as I know) in any of Plato's earlier dialogues (if we except Alc. I 127 C), so that εἰρήκαμεν refers to ordinary conversation. Such a view has affinities with the legal view of Justice as the virtue which respects the rights of others (cf. 433 E and I 331 A ff.), and is natural enough, especially with the loose connotation which δικαιοσύνη had in popular language. It is however curious that in Charm. 161 B ff. precisely the same account is given of Temperance: ἄρτι γὰρ ἀνεμνήσθην ὂ ἤδη του ἤκουσα λέγοντος, ὅτι σωφροσύνη ἂν εἴη τὸ τὰ ἑαυτοῦ πράττειν: cf. Tim. 72 A εὖ καὶ πάλαι λέγεται τὸ πράττειν καὶ γνῶναι τά τε αὑτοῦ καὶ ἑαυτὸν σώφρονι μόνῳ προσήκειν. In its popular connotation, σωφροσύνη was not always distinguished from δικαιοσύνη, and even the philosophers (as Strabo VII 3. 4 observes) sometimes used the words in nearly an identical sense. See Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. p. 238. Steinhart and others find in the difference between this passage and the Charmides l.c. an indication of the Socratic and Platonic doctrine of the unity of Virtue. No doubt there is a certain sense in which virtue is one (see below on 434 C), but we must insist that the specific virtues are represented by Plato in the Republic as distinct; on any other hypothesis, the perfect City falls to pieces. Perhaps δικαιοσύνη after πολυπραγμονεῖν is an error for σωφροσύνη, and Plato is here deliberately correcting the popular view. If so, καὶ μὴν—γε means ‘and yet,’ i.e. in spite of what we now say that Justice is εἷς ἓν κατὰ φύσιν, ‘we and others have also said that Temperance is τὰ αὑτοῦ πράττειν.’ Adimantus assents. ‘Well,’ continues Socrates, ‘it is apparently (not Temperance, but) Justice which is τὰ αὑτοῦ πράττειν.’ This view gives a much better sense to καί in καὶ τοῦτο, and ἡ δικαιοσύνη receives the proper emphasis.

δοκεῖ ‐‐ εὕροιμεν . Things which are equal to the same thing are equal to one another. Now (1) the Virtue which enables the others to take root, and (2) Justice, each=τὸ ὑπόλοιπον. Therefore Justice enables the other Virtues to take root. <But that which does so is τὰ αὑτοῦ πράττειν. Consequently Justice is τὰ αὑτοῦ πράττειν.> Plato seldom leaves so much to be mentally supplied in his reasoning.

παρέχει . See cr. n. Former editors (except Ast) retain παρέχειν and explain it as depending directly on δοκεῖ. If this is right, καί before ἐγγενομένοις joins τοῦτο εἶναι and παρέχειν; but καὶ ἐγγενομένοις γε, following immediately on ἐγγενέσθαι, naturally suggests that παρέχειν and ἐγγενέσθαι are coordinate and both under the government of ὥστε. That this was felt in antiquity is proved by the variant ἐγγενόμενα for ἐγγενομένοις, preserved in Stobaeus (Flor. 43. 98) and in Ξ. The author of the reading ἐγγενόμενα must have understood Plato to mean ‘which enabled them all to make their appearance in the city, and having done so, to keep it safe, so long as they are there,’ and this, I think, is the natural meaning of Plato's words, if παρέχειν is retained. But the sentiment is compara tively weak; and consequently Ast and Hartman wish to cancel παρέχειν, making σωτηρίαν depend upon παρέσχεν; but a present tense is necessary. παρέχει seems to me what Plato wrote, ‘aye, and after they have appeared it preserves them, so long as it is present in the city.’ A relative clause often passes into an independent sentence (see on II 357 B); and the idiom is appropriate here because it responds to the emphatic καὶ—γέ. For καὶ—γε cf. 425 B note

δούλῳ ‐‐ ἀρχομένῳ . On δούλῳ see V 469 C note Richards would insert καὶ γεωργῷ after δημιουργῷ, pointing out that the other words go in pairs; but the difference between δημιουργῷ and γεωργῷ is insignificant, since both artisan and farmer belong to the same class in the city.

εἷς ὤν . Most of Stobaeus' MSS ( Flor. l.c.) read εἷς ὢν ἕν. ἕν is unnecessary with καὶ οὐκ ἐπολυπραγμόνει following (Schneider).

σκόπει κτλ. This τεκμήριον turns on the judicial sense of δικαιοσύνη: cf. I 331 E ff. The judicial functions of the rulers follow naturally from 428 D, where it is said that σοφία βουλεύεται—ὅντιν’ ἂν τρόπον αὐτή τε (sc. ἡ πόλις) πρὸς αὑτὴν—ἄριστα ὁμιλοῖ κτλ. It is clear that no class except the rulers can be judges in the State, and judges are necessary: see III 408 D ff.

ἑαυτοῦ κτλ. ἑαυτοῦ is a possessive genitive depending on τοῦ. It should be noted that although ἕξις τοῦ οἰκείου is not the same thing as πρᾶξις τοῦ οἰκείου, the latter involves the former. Plato is looking for a point of contact between his own view of Justice and the popular judicial meaning of the word, and finds it in ἕξις τοῦ οἰκείου. Krohn (Pl. St. p. 49) appears to me to attach too much weight to ἕξις τοῦ οἰκείου when he calls it a new “Begriffselement,” and complains that it is “weder sachlich erläutert, noch logisch streng abgeleitet.” Cf. 442 E. It should be mentioned that the poet Gray (with less than his usual critical acumen) conjectured τοῦ <ποιεῖν> τὸ οἰκεῖόν τε καὶ <τὸ> ἑαυτοῦ, comparing οἰκειοπραγία in 434 C.

πάντα τἄλλα means everything except what Socrates is about to mention, that is everything except the interchange of rulers and ruled. So J. and C., rightly, I think: cf. 421 A, VII 518 D and Laws 798 D. Other editors explain τἄλλα as “reliquorum opificum opera”; and so also q, reading ἢ πάντα τἄλλα τά γε τοιαῦτα; but it is difficult to extract this meaning out of τἄλλα without τά γε τοιαῦτα, and the asyndeton is also very harsh. Madvig's conjecture ταῦτα is improbable, though adopted by Baiter. Adimantus would catch the meaning all the more easily on account of the similar statement in 421 A, and because πάντα would be pronounced with emphasis, as the asyndeton also indicates. I have removed the comma usually printed after μεταλλαττόμενα; for πάντα τἄλλα includes within its scope all the cases mentioned, and is directly the subject of δοκεῖ.

ἀλλ’ ὅταν κτλ. Plato is probably thinking of Athens again: cf. supra 424 D note and Krohn Pl. St. p. 46. φύσει belongs to ὤν. Hartman needlessly expunges ὤν and reads φύς for φύσει. The subject to ὤν is simply the pronoun ‘he,’ used loosely, as often in English.

βουλευτικοῦ ‐‐ ὤν . “Valde miror editt. verba βουλευτικοῦ καὶ φύλακος ἀνάξιος ὤν concoxisse” cries Hartman. The genitives of course depend on τὸ (εἶδος), and ἀνάξιος is used absolutely, as often.

μάλιστα κακουργία . μάλιστα is omitted in Ξ and one or two other MSS; but cf. VII 532 B ἔτι ἀδυναμία, VIII 564 A εἰς ἄγαν δουλείαν (with Stallbaum ad loc.), and other examples in Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 526. That μάλιστα should be taken with κακουργία is clear from μεγίστη βλάβη and κακουργίαν τὴν μεγίστην.

πάλιν : not ‘again,’ but ‘conversely,’ “umgekehrt” (Schneider).

ἑκάστου ‐‐ πόλει is cancelled by Herwerden as a marginal note on οἰκειοπραγία. The words add to the weight and impressiveness of the sentence, and have a decidedly Platonic sound.

τοὐναντίον ἐκείνου . ἐκείνου is ‘the other,’ i.e. πολυπραγμοσύνης (rather than ἀδικίας); and τοὐναντίον is probably nominative, and not adverbial accusative. So also Schneider. It is not necessary to add ὄν after τοὐναντίον as I formerly did. The style of argument is the familiar τόπος ἐκ τῶν ἐναντίων (see Arist. Rhet. II 23. 1397^{a} 7 ff.).

To sum up. Civic Justice is the fulfilment of the maxim τὸ αὑτοῦ πράττειν by the three classes in the City. There is nothing transcendental or metaphysical about it, as Krohn rightly observes (Pl. St. p. 48); it is simply the principle εἷς <*>ν κατὰ φύσιν applied to the three component units or factors of the State. Cf. II 370 A note It is moreover the soil out of which all the other virtues grow; its fruits are Wisdom, Courage, Temperance, of which the last appears in the Farmers and Artisans, the last two in the Auxiliaries, while the Rulers possess all three (432 A note). Thus all the Virtues meet in Justice (ἐν δὲ δικαιοσύνῃ συλλήβδην πᾶσ’ ἀρετή )νι ap. Arist. Eth. Nic. V 3. 1129^{b} 25 ff.) and it is in Justice, not in σοφία (as the historical Socrates held Mem. III 9. 5), that the true unity of Virtue consists. Plato's Justice is in reality not so much a specific virtue, as Virtue or Righteousness in general: καὶ οὔθ’ ἕσπερος οὔθ’ ἑῷος οὕτω θαυμαστός (Arist. l.c.): cf. 442 E note He desired to build a city, wherein Righteousness dwelleth (καινοὺς δὲ οὐρανοὺς καὶ γῆν καινὴν—προσδοκῶμεν, ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ 1 Pet. 3. 13), and interpreted Righteousness as the law of εἷς <*>ν κατὰ φύσιν. In taking this view of political δικαιοσύνη, there is every reason to suppose (with Krohn l.c. p. 46) that Plato was not uninfluenced by the πολυπραγμοσύνη (as he conceived it) of Athenian democracy, although it is in reality a particular psychological interpretation of Nature's law of ἁπλότης that forms the true philosophical basis of the City described in Books II—IV. See also on II 370 A.

434D - 435A Adimantus agrees; but Socrates will wait until he has discovered Justice in Man before being sure that he is right. If the features of Justice are the same in Man and in the State, we shall be satisfied.

παγίως ‐‐ λέγωμεν : cf. V 479 C παγίως νοῆσαι, Theaet. 157 A νοῆσαι —παγίως, Tim. 49 D. οὐκ ἔστι παγίως νοῆσαι was probably a phrase in vogue among Heraclitus' followers: see Wohlrab on Theaet. l.c.

ἰὸν τὸ εἶδος . εἶδος is not yet the Idea (III 402 C) but refers to οἰκειοπραγία. For ἰόν Richards conjectures ἰοῦσιν; but surely εἰς would then be wrong. How can ‘we’ be said to pass into an individual? The εἶδος is half personified (cf. ὅταν—ἐλθὸν ἐρώτημα ἔρηται VII 538 D); it is said to ‘pass into’ the individual merely because we have discovered it first in the State. See also on ἀπαμβλύνεται 442 D. The passage in Phaedr. 249 B is different, whether we accept Badham's conjecture ἰόντ) or not.

ἣν is a loose internal accusative, exactly like ὅ in 443 B below. The reference is to II 368 D.

ἐκεῖ . The reading ἐκεῖνο, found in Ξ and other second-rate MSS, would probably have been discarded sooner, if it had been known that A as well as Π reads ἐκεῖ. Campbell first pointed this out. ἐκεῖνο is not quite suitable because, although it must mean justice, it suggests something more remote. ἐκεῖ on the other hand helps out the antithesis between ἐν μείζονι—ἐχόντων and ἐν ἑνὶ ἀνθρώπῳ, and is in harmony with ἐκεῖ ἐφάνη below. δικαιοσύνην depends on θεάσασθαι, and τῶν ἐχόντων is ‘its possessors’: cf. II 367 B, D, E. In reciting the sentence, the voice pauses after ἐχόντων and pronounces ἐκεῖ with emphasis. ἐκεῖ (with which cf. ἐκείνου in Parm. 133 D) was rightly retained by Stallbaum, who did not know that it was the reading of A.

τοῦτο : i.e. τὸ μεῖζον τῶν ἐχόντων δικαιοσύνην.

καθ’ ὁδόν . Cf. (with Schneider) infra VII 533 B and Crat. 425 B. μέθοδον for καθ’ ὁδόν (Herwerden) is a sorry piece of criticism.

435A - 435D The point to be determined is this: are there three psychological forms or kinds in the soul of the Individual, corresponding to the three orders in our City? And is the Individual temperate, brave, wise and just in virtue of the corresponding affections of these kinds? Our present methods of investigation are wanting in exactness; but they are sufficient for our immediate object.

ff. The passages in Plato dealing with psychology have been collected and carefully expounded by E. W. Simson Der Begriff der Seele bei Plato (Leipzig 1889). I have found Simson's treatise more serviceable than Chaignet De la Psychologie de Platon (Paris 1862). Dr Brandt's Program Zur Entwickelung der Platonischen Lehre von den Seelentheilen (Leipzig 1890) will also be found useful in studying the psychological theory here unfolded. For an attempt to shew that Plato always believed in the unity of soul see ArcherHind in J. Ph. X pp. 120—131. The fundamental principle on which the theory of Book IV should be interpreted is that the just soul is an image of the just city. Now the just city is a ἕν with three πολλά: so therefore is the just soul. Plato states this quite clearly in 443 E ἕνα γενόμενον ἐκ πολλῶν. In this sense, therefore—and to Plato it was something real and no mere figure of speech—the soul has unity; but not, strictly speaking, in any other sense; otherwise we are in danger of obliterating the distinction between the three orders of the city, and so destroying the whole fabric. Of course nothing which Plato now says should be taken as prejudging the question about the nature of soul in its ἀληθεστάτη φύσις, i.e. when exempt from all the evils which are inseparable from matter (X 611 B ff.): if wholly separated from material accretions it is probably μονοειδές (612 A), λογιστικόν alone remaining. See on X 611 B. But for the present we are concerned with soul incarnate; and Plato certainly speaks of this as having three parts. Cf. Zeller^{4} II 1, pp 845 ff. In what sense an immaterial thing like the soul even when present in body can be said to contain ‘parts’ or ‘kinds’ (μέρη, εἴδη, γένη) is a further question, which Plato does not here raise, although his followers have done so. It is doubtless true (as Archer-Hind holds l.c.) that ‘parts’ of soul can only be different modes of its operation; and a consciousness of this fact seems to betray itself in 439 B, D; but we shall best apprehend the meaning of Plato in this passage by treating the analogy as Plato does, i.e. as valid throughout, and speaking, in common with Plato and his commentators, of ‘parts’ of soul. See also on 435 B.

μεῖζον ‐‐ ἔλαττον : ‘whether greater or smaller.’ The insertion of ὄν after ἔλαττον, suggested by Dobree, is unnecessary.

τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα εἴδη . εἴδη used in this sense is slightly confusing after εἶδος has just been applied to δικαιοσύνη; and τῶν αὐτῶν τούτων γενῶν would lead us to expect γένη. The psychological elements are called εἴδη, γένη, or μέρη: εἴδη in 435 B, C, E, 439 E, γένη in 441 C, 443 D, μέρη in 442 B, C and (by implication) 439 B, C, D and passim. Cf. Brandt l.c. p. 17 and Zeller^{4} II 1, p. 845. εἴδη ψυχῆς does not, strictly speaking, mean ‘varieties of soul’ but rather ‘kinds’ belonging to or present in soul (εἴδη ἐν ψυχῇ 439 E: see also on III 402 C), and much the same is true of γένη. There is some authority for holding that the Pythagoreans before the time of Plato recognised at least two ‘parts’ of soul— an ἄλογον and a λογικόν (see Diels Dox. Gr. pp. 389 f. and other evidence in Rohde Psyche^{2} II p. 170 note); but Zeller I^{5} pp. 447, 448 may be right in regarding the Pythagorean form of this theory as post-Platonic.

φαῦλον is of course ironical, although Glauco pretends to take it seriously. Cf. (with J. and C.) 423 C—E, 426 A, B.

καὶ εὖ γ) ‐‐ ἐξαρκέσει . The difficulties connected with this passage have led to much discussion: see for example Rettig Proleg. pp. 126 ff., Krohn Pl. St. pp. 128 ff., 144, Pfleiderer Zur Lösung etc. pp. 25, 73, Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. etc. p. 618. τοῦτο in ἀκριβῶς μὲν τοῦτο and in ἡ ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἄγουσα ought, so far as grammar goes, to mean the question whether the soul has τρία εἴδη or not. But the μακροτέρα περίοδος in VI 504 B ff., where Plato expressly refers back to this passage, eschews the psychological problem altogether. The μακροτέρα περίοδος of Books VI—VII is in harmony with the present enquiry in so far as it seeks to determine the nature of Justice and the other virtues (VI 504 D, 506 A), but it is nowhere in the Republic expressly used either to confirm or to overthrow the triple division of soul which is here propounded. (The analysis of mental faculties in VI 509 D—511 E is introductory to the μακροτέρα περίοδος, not a result obtained by it; nor has that analysis, strictly speaking, any bearing on the question whether soul has three εἴδη or not: cf. Pfleiderer Zur Lösung etc. p. 25.) Krohn accordingly holds that the ‘longer ways’ of IV and VI are different and distinct (Pl. St. p. 128); and Schleiermacher supposes (Einleitung p. 71) that the πλείων ὁδός of IV is to be found in the psychology of the Timaeus; but that Plato meant the two ways to be identical is certain, for he explicitly says that they are (VI 504 B ff.). The only way out of these difficulties is to suppose that τοῦτο here was not intended by Plato to refer to the psychological, but to the ethical question, to which the psychological enquiry is introductory. τοῦτο must then be taken as δικαιοσύνης τε πέρι καὶ σωφροσύνης καὶ ἀνδρείας καὶ σοφίας δ ἕκαστόν ἐστι (VI 504 A). This view becomes easy if we suppose that the words καὶ εὖ γε—ἐξαρκέσει were not written by Plato immediately after he wrote 435 C, but at a later time, when VI 504 A—D was composed. It is in itself highly probable that the most important passages referring forward or backward to one another throughout the dialogue were either written together, or at all events revised by Plato side by side. Cf. Brandt l. c. p. 13 note 3, where a kindred view is taken. In any case, we must adhere to our explanation of τοῦτο, if we would preserve the artistic unity of the Republic. See also on VI 504 A—D.

ἄλλη . See cr. n. ἄλλη is in itself much better, to say the least, than ἀλλά, and is confirmed by ἄλλη μακροτέρα— περίοδος in VI 504 B. The corruption was easy, owing to the frequency of ἀλλὰ γάρ .

435E - 439E The presence of three kinds or characters in the city establishes the existence of the same characters in the individual; but the question is, do they exist in him as three separate elements, or not? Do we employ the whole soul in every psychical act, or do we learn with one part, feel angry with a second, desire with a third? In examining this question we begin by laying it down that the same thing cannot do or suffer opposites at the same time in the same part of itself, and with reference to the same thing. This rule is of universal application; apparent exceptions there may be, but never real. Desire and Aversion are opposites; and Hunger and Thirst are two specific varieties of Desire, relating to meat and drink, considered absolutely and without qualification. Now it sometimes happens that we are at one and the same moment both thirsty and unwilling to drink, in other words, experience both Desire and Aversion. But Desire and Aversion are opposites. They must therefore spring from different psychical elements. The truth is, in such cases it is one part of soul, the Rational part, which says ‘Refrain!’, another, the Appetitive, which bids us drink.

ὅτι γε ‐‐ πόλει . Broadly speaking, what Plato says is true, that the predominant character of a State depends on the predominant character of the individual citizens (cf. Bosanquet Companion pp. 147 f.): but it does not necessarily follow, because a city contains three psychologically different classes of citizens, that each of us (ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν) has within his soul the three corresponding psychological elements. In making this assertion, Plato relies upon the fundamental hypothesis of the Republic, viz. that the individual is a commonwealth writ small. See on II 369 A. γε after ὅτι, though omitted in Ξ, is strictly appropriate, and warns us of a further point—τόδε δὲ ἤδη χαλεπόν 436 A—on which agreement is not so easy.

οἳ δὴ ‐‐ αἰτίαν : ‘that is, among peoples who bear this reputation.’ ταύτην is τοῦ θυμοειδεῖς εἷναι. The phrase αἰτίαν ἔχειν is used both in a good and in a bad sense as the passive of αἰτιῶμαι: for the good sense cf. (with Ast) Gorg. 503 B. What follows is (as Teichmüller observes Lit. Fehd. I p. 146) conceived in the vein of Hippocrates' enquiries as to the influence of climate on character: see his treatise de aere aquis locis 12 ff. ed. Kuehlewein, and cf. also Arist. Physiog. 2. 806^{b} 15, Probl. XIV 8, 15, 16, and especially Pol. H 7. 1327^{b} 23—33 with Susemihl's note. Aristotle for his part represents the Greek nature as the mean between the two extremes of oriental διανοητικόν and τεχνικόν and northern θυμός. There is no good reason for supposing (with Steinhart Einleitung p. 191) that Plato was thinking of the wild races of the North when he instituted his second order of citizens, and of Egyptians etc. when he established his third. On the Phoenician and Egyptian characters cf. Laws 747 C ff.

τὸν ἄνω τόπον : ‘the Northern region,’ not ‘the highland country’ (L. and S.): cf. Arist. Meteor. II 5. 362^{a} 33 τὸν ἄνω πόλον and Hdt. I 142 al.

αἰτιάσαιτο . εἶναι should be understood. For the construction cf. X 599 E.

φιλοχρήματον is another name for ἐπιθυμητικόν, ὅτι διὰ χρημάτων μάλιστα ἀποτελοῦνται αἱ τοιαῦται ἐπιθυμίαι (IX 580 E).

τούτων ἕκαστα refers to the actions described in μανθάνομεν μὲν ἑτέρῳ etc. τούτῳ (see cr. n.) can only be defended by referring it (with Schneider) “to the subject of the triple predicate τὸ θυμοειδές, τὸ φιλομαθές, and τὸ φιλοχρήματον.” There is a certain obscurity in this construction, and τούτων ἕκαστα prepares us for μανθάνομεν μὲν ἑτέρῳ, θυμούμεθα δέ etc. better than ἕκαστα alone would do.

ταὐτὸν ‐‐ ἅμα is the earliest explicit statement in Greek literature of the maxim of Contradiction; cf. Theaet. 188 A, Phaed. 102 E, 103 B, Soph. 230 B and infra X 602 E. Plato may have been led to formulate it in opposition to Heracliteanism, which was supposed by some to be the negation of the principle (see Arist. Met. Γ 3. 1005^{b} 24 and Theaet. 152 D ff.), or against the Megarian puzzles (see RP.^{7} § 226), or as a counterblast to both. Many of the sophistries of the Euthydemus turn on the violation of this law. In Aristotle's formula (Met. l.c. 1005^{b} 19) πρὸς ταὐτόν does not occur; and Hartman would cancel καὶ πρὸς ταὐτόν here and πρὸς τὸ αὐτό in 436 E, on the ground that it means the same as κατὰ ταὐτόν. But assuredly it does not. κατὰ ταὐτόν is ‘in the same part of it’ as the instances presently cited shew; while πρὸς ταὐτόν is ‘relatively to the same thing,’ viz. to something other than the subject of the proposition. πρὸς τὰ αὐτά and κατὰ ταὐτά are also both of them found in the parallel passage Soph. 230 B. πρὸς ταὐτόν covers such cases as are adduced in Theaet. 154 C—155 C: six dice are πλείους πρὸς τέτταρας, ἐλάττους πρὸς δώδεκα, but they are not ἐναντία πρὸς ταὐτόν. Cf. VII 524 A ff., and see also on ἢ καὶ εἴη in 437 A.

ἦν is not precisely ἐστὶν ὥσπερ ᾠόμεθα (Stallbaum); for the reference is actually to the past, and the past tense should be kept in translating it. See II 357 A note and cf. X 609 B. The so-called ‘philosophic imperfect’ gets credit for more than it deserves, because we are apt to suppose that the past excludes the present, which is not always true: cf. VI 497 C note

εἶεν by itself in replies is rare. It occurs (if the MSS are right) in Symp. 206 E, Crat. 410 C, Men. 75 C. In the last two passages, Heindorf (on Crat. l.c.) is inclined to rearrange the speakers; but it is safer, both there and here, to keep the traditional arrangement. See on I 332 D.

χαριεντίζοιτο ‐‐ κομψευόμενος may refer to some Megarian quibbles on this subject. Zeno's argument to shew that ἡ οἰστὸς φερομένη ἕστηκεν proceeded on a different principle: see Arist. Phys. VI 9. 239^{b} 30 ff.

ἢ καὶ ‐‐ δρᾷ . “Repetendum ὡς ex praegressis” (Stallbaum). Schneider connects δρᾷ with ὅταν: in that case we must understand after τοῦτο δρᾷ something like ὡς καὶ τοῦτο ὅλον ἕστηκέ τε ἅμα καὶ κινεῖται. Stallbaum's view is the simpler, and should, I think, be preferred. I have accordingly removed the comma usually printed after κινοῦνται .

ὡς οὐ ‐‐ φερομένων . This clause has proved a source of great perplexity. Schneider suggests that μενόντων is a partitive genitive, ἐστί being omitted; Stallbaum, that τὰ τοιαῦτα is adverbial, like τοιουτοτρόπως; while, according to J. and C., τὰ τοιαῦτα “is to be taken as cognate accusative with the participles.” Rather than accept any of these suggestions, it would, I think, be preferable to expunge τὰ τοιαῦτα altogether (with Ast), or to place it after ἀποδεχοίμεθα (as Gildersleeve suggests, A. J. Ph. VI p. 333 note 2), or even perhaps to read τῶν τοιούτων with Richards, although little short of a miracle could have corrupted τῶν τοιούτων to τὰ τοιαῦτα. The following interpretation, which appears to me right, has not, so far as I know, been hitherto suggested. ταὐτά goes closely with the partitive genitive ἑαυτῶν, and is a predicate to τὰ τοιαῦτα, which is also governed by κατά (cf. the familiar usage with ὥσπερ and a preposition in similes, e.g. Theaet. 170 A ὥσπερ πρὸς θεοὺς ἔχειν τοὺς ἐν ἑκάσταις ἄρχοντας etc.: see on VIII 553 B). μενόντων τε καὶ φερομένων is a genitive absolute. The sentence is in every respect an elegant and idiomatic piece of Greek, and means: ‘because such parts, in respect of which they both stand still and move on these occasions, are different parts of them.’ τὰ τοιαῦτα—the meaning of which is easy to catch after the examples given above —forms a welcome preparation for εὐθύ τε καὶ περιφερές in the following clause.

ἔστιν . I formerly rejected this word (with Galen de Hipp. et Plat. decr. IX Vol. V p. 799 ed. Kühn, Herwerden, and Flor. U). It is certainly more pointed to connect ἑστάναι with φαῖμεν ἄν, and Glauco's καὶ ὀρθῶς γε (sc. φαῖμεν ἄν) is easier without ἔστιν. But there is not sufficient ground for deserting the best MSS. For other examples of replies referring to the earlier part of the previous sentence see V 465 E note

ἢ καὶ εἴη . I agree with Bekker, Schneider, and J. and C. in retaining these words, which Galen l.c. also read, and only a few inferior MSS (with the majority of editors) omit. If the words are spurious, no satisfactory theory has yet been advanced to account for their presence in the text; certainly no scribe is at all likely to have added them. A fuller and more emphatic statement of the maxim is natural enough after the emphasis with which the sentence opens ( οὐδὲν—ἐκπλήξει), and Schneider truly observes: “obiter et quodam modo praeter exspectationem eius” (i.e. τοῦ εἶναι), “mentionem fieri adiectum καὶ indicat, quod semel positum mox sine offensione repetitur, omissis vero verbis ἢ καὶ εἴη ante ποιήσειεν non magis quam supra p. 436 B ante πάσχειν locum habiturum fuisset.” πάθοι and ποιήσειεν have reference to actions, εἴη to a state, and εἴη naturally follows πάθοι because e.g. πλείους γίγνεσθαι (an example of πάσχειν) leads up to πλείους εἶναι. It should also be observed that the meaning of πρὸς τὸ αὐτό, which the discussion has not yet brought out, is best apprehended in examples not of πάσχειν or ποιεῖν, but of εἶναι τἀναντία: see 436 B note

ἀλλ’ ὅμως κτλ. The usual Greek idiom, as shewn for example in ἀλγῶ τὴν κεφαλήν (cf. V 462 C ff.), rests on a psychological theory which is inconsistent with that now proposed by Plato. This may be one reason why Plato is at such pains to establish and emphasize his point.

λαβεῖν has been doubted: but see III 407 B note

ἂν (see cr. n.) is better inserted after ἐναντίων than after θείης (Ast) or τοιαῦτα (Hartman). Stallbaum (who formerly read ἂν θείης) in his last edition acquiesces, like Schneider, in the omission of ἄν; but few will agree with him. I have noted the—certain or probable— omission of ἄν in all or the best MSS in Phaed. 62 C, 109 E, Euthyd. 291 E (?), Rep. V 457 D, VII 516 E, VIII 558 D, where the omission is lipographical; also in Phaed. 72 B, Euthyd. 281 C, Crat. 389 E, 409 A, Alc. I 132 B, 133 E, Soph. 266 A, Phil. 47 B, H. Mai. 295 A. Sometimes (as occasionally after πρίν) the omission is perhaps a poetical touch: see my note in Cl. Rev. IV p. 103.

καὶ αὖ . Krohn (Pl. St. p. 57) presses αὖ too much when he says that ἐθέλειν and βούλεσθαι are definitely represented as not belonging to the category of ἐπιθυμίαι. Plato expresses no opinion on this point; for αὖ, ‘also,’ merely marks the introduction of two new terms.

ἐθέλει ‐‐ ἐρωτῶντος . The difference between ἐθέλει, ‘is willing,’ and βούλεται, ‘wishes,’ is well brought out by the contrast between the more active process described in προσάγεσθαι and the passive assent which ἐπινεύειν expresses. The point is missed by translating (with J. and C.) ‘beckons this with a nod towards herself’: it is merely ‘nods assent to this in reply to herself.’ One part of the soul asks, and the other answers, the psychological process being compared to a kind of dialectic or question and answer inside the soul: see III 400 D note and cf. Isocr. Antid. 256. For the confusion of ἐρῶντος and ἐρωτῶντος—ἐρῶντος is found in several MSS— cf. [ Erast.] 132 D, and Euthyphr. 14 C. With the analysis of desire in this passage cf. Phil. 34 E ff.

ἀπ) αὐτῆς . ἀφ) αὑτῆς Hartman (with Vind. E only), but ἀπελαύνειν is active, not middle. The actions are described as though by a spectator ab externo.

ἐπιθυμιῶν : a defining genitive. For εἶδος see III 402 C note

ἆρ’ οὖν κτλ. This discussion (down to 438 E) is apparently regarded by Susemihl (Gen. Entw. II pp. 163 f.) as unnecessary for the immediate purposes of the argument, but it is not so. Plato's object is to remove a difficulty which might be felt in holding that desire is restrained, and that by the λογιστικόν. Why should thirst be restrained? an objector might ask. You yourself, Socrates, hold that (1) desire is always of the good; consequently (2) thirst is always the desire of good drink, and (3) is therefore always good. See 438 A, where the gist of the objection is contained. Socrates would reply: The fallacy lurks in (2), for ‘good’ drink is ambiguous. If ‘good’ drink means drink which desire thinks good, then (2) is true; if it means drink which is in reality good, (2) is not true. Desire cannot know what is good. We must therefore amend (2) by omitting ‘good,’ for in reality it is sometimes good and sometimes bad to drink. To what then is the final appeal? To the λογιστικόν. It is this which decides on each occasion whether it is really good or bad to drink, and gives or refuses its assent accordingly (439 C). Bosanquet takes a somewhat similar view ( Companion p. 154). See also notes on 438 A.

οἷον δίψα ‐‐ ψυχροῦ . ‘Thus thirst is thirst—of hot drink, is it, or of cold?’ For the genitive with δίψα (which Richards doubts) cf. 439 A. The repetition of δίψα is like that of ἐπιστήμη in 438 C, and makes the statement formal and precise.

ψυχροῦ ‐‐ θερμοῦ . Hermann transposes these words and is followed by Stallbaum, Baiter, and others. “Palmaria emendatio,” cries Stallbaum; whereas J. and C. hold that it “makes nonsense of the passage.” It is not at first sight quite easy to decide between these conflicting views. The words ἐὰν μέν τις—προσπαρέχοιτ’ ἄν clearly mean that the desire of cold drink is due to thirst plus heat, i.e. thirst supplies the desire of drink, and the heat present in the thirst supplies in addition (προσπαρέχοιτ’ ἄν) the desire of cold: see also on τοῦ δὲ—προσγιγνόμενα below. This is in harmony with common sense and also with the theory of Lys. 215 E ἐπιθυμεῖν γὰρ τοῦ τοιούτου (sc. ἐναντίου ) ἕκαστον, ἀλλ’ οὐ τοῦ ὁμοίου. τὸ μὲν γὰρ ξηρὸν ὑγροῦ, τὸ δὲ ψυχρὸν θερμοῦ κτλ.: cf. also Symp. 186 B. But ἐὰν δὲ—πολλὴ ἡ δίψα ᾖ seems to proceed on the opposite or homoeopathic principle. The presence of πλῆθος produces a desire not for its opposite but for itself. The solution of the difficulty is to be found in the different character of the notions θερμότης and πλῆθος. θερμότης is something distinct from δίψος, though superadded to it, for which reason Plato does not use the expression θερμὸν δίψος; whereas πλῆθος is in reality πλῆθος δίψης, and πολλὴ δίψα, as experience shews, desires much drink. The common sense point of view is taken by Plato throughout, and is expressly justified by him in 438 E οὔ τι λέγω ὡς οἵων ἂν ᾖ, τοιαῦτα καὶ ἔστιν. For these reasons I heartily agree with the Oxford editors. Hermann's proposal is a product of the inveterate tendency to suppose that wherever we turn in Plato we rub against the theory of Ideas; but the use of παρουσία here (in spite of Peiper's Ontol. Pl. pp. 602 ff., Zeller^{4} II 1, p. 560 note, and many other critics) is not metaphysical, but logical, and πλῆθος is certainly not an Idea in this passage. See on this point 438 B, 438 C notes

αὐτοῦ πώματος : ‘merely of drink’ )( much drink, cold drink, etc. Cf. VIII 559 A αὐτοῦ σίτου τε καὶ ὄψου. For καὶ αὖ κτλ. Herwerden would expect καὶ αὐτὸ <τὸ> πεινῆν <αὐτοῦ> βρώματος. Further specification than Plato gives is unnecessary, for τὸ πεινῆν as well as αὐτὸ τὸ δίψος is subject to οὐ μή ποτε—οὖπερ πέφυκεν. The voice pauses slightly after πεινῆν.

τοῦ δὲ ‐‐ προσγιγνόμενα : as e.g. θερμότης, where it προσγίγνεται τῷ δίψει (cf. E above), is the desire of ψυχροῦ, ψυχρότης of θερμοῦ. The type of desires illustrated by the desire of ψυχρὸν πῶμα appears to Plato composite and not simple.

μήτοι has been doubted, and is not, apparently, elsewhere so used in Plato (Kugler de part. τοί etc. p. 11), though often in Tragedy. Here too it strikes, I think, a lofty note ‘Wherefore let not any’ etc. θορυβήσῃ is also highly dramatic. All this parade is affected because it is a deduction from one of his own favourite commonplaces which Socrates is about to parry: see next note.

πάντες γὰρ κτλ. γὰρ ἄρα—a rare combination—occurs also in Prot. 315 D, Symp. 205 B (according to Ven. T, but the Bodleian reads γάρ), Laws 698 D. ἄρα indicates that the objector is quoting another man's view (II 358 C note), and the doctrine that all men desire the good was in point of fact a commonplace in the Platonic school. See for example Gorg. 468 A, Men. 77 C ff., Symp. 204 E and Rep. III 413 A, VI 505 D. Here, as always, Socrates would of course concede that all men desire the good; but we need the λογιστικόν in each act of desire to specify what the good really is (437 D note). Moreover, according to our present theory, the desire of good drink is the product of two desires, viz. (1) thirst or the desire of drink, and (2) the desire of good. That (2) is in a certain sense universal, does not alter the fact that the two desires are logically distinct. See on τοῦ δὲ—προσγιγνόμενα 437 E.

αὐτὰ ἕκαστα . αὐτά is ipsa, i.e. by themselves, alone, without qualification: cf. αὐτὰ—μόνα αὐτῶν μόνων in D and αὐτοῦ πώματος etc. 437 E. Plato now proceeds to establish the universality of his rule. It is obvious that the reasons for believing the rule true of ἐπιθυμία are confirmed if we can shew that it is true universally. The phraseology of this passage—πλήθους παρουσία, αὐτὰ ἕκαστα, αὐτὴ ἐπιστήμη— is no doubt interesting for the light which it throws on the origin of the terminology adopted in the Theory of Ideas (cf. VI 507 B note): but we could make no greater mistake than to suppose that Plato is here speaking of hypostasized Ideas. Cf. Pfleiderer Zur Lösung etc. p. 19.

τὸ μεῖζον ‐‐ μεῖζον . Cf. (with Stallbaum) Charm. 168 B ff., where the nature of relative notions is similarly defined: also Gorg. 476 B ff.

τὰ βραδύτερα . Stallbaum and others read βραδύτερα without the article (on slight MS authority), but praestat lectio difficilior. Cf. εἴτε ἐγγείων εἴτε τῶν ζῴων VI 491 D. τά is certainly not wrong, and the variety of expression is pleasing: ‘and heavier also to lighter, and swifter to that which is slower—do they not stand to one another in this relation?’ i.e. such that if βαρύτερα, for example, is qualified, κουφότερα is qualified too.

ἐπιστήμη μὲν αὐτή . ‘Knowledge and nothing more,’ as opposed to knowledge plus some specification, e.g. astronomical knowledge, literary knowledge etc. It is interesting and instructive to study Parm. 134 A ff. side by side with this passage. There αὐτὴ ἐπιστήμη has for its object τῆς ὃ ἔστιν ἀλήθεια, i.e. the Ideas; here we do not soar so high, for μαθήματος αὐτοῦ is only ‘learning and nothing more’ )( e.g. physical learning, classical learning, etc.

ἐπειδὴ ‐‐ κληθῆναι . Plato's theory is very clearly conceived. οἰκοδομικὴ ἐπιστήμη is a combination of αὐτὴ ἐπιστήμη and οἰκοδομία: ἐπιστήμη correlates with μάθημα, οἰκοδομία with οἰκίας ἐργασία, so that ἐπιστήμη οἰκοδομική is ἐπιστήμη οἰκίας ἐργασίας μαθήματος: it is therefore ποίου τινός (i.e. in this case οἰκοδομικοῦ) μαθήματος. Cf. note on τοῦ δὲ—προσγιγνόμενα in 437 E.

τῶν ὑγιεινῶν καὶ νοσωδῶν . If we carry the analysis less far than Plato, we can still make the added determinants the same by saying that ἰατρικὴ ἐπιστήμη is of ἰατρικὸν μάθημα. But this will not suit with κακή, for ‘bad knowledge’ is not ‘knowledge of bad things’; nor does it—in many cases— apply to desires. Cf. 437 E note

αὐτοῦ οὗπερ ‐‐ ἐστίν : i.e. μαθήματος αὐτοῦ. αὐτοῦ is emphatic and contrasted with ποιοῦ τινός.

τὸ δὲ δὴ δίψος κτλ. Here begins the application of the argument on Relativity.

οὐ τούτων κτλ. : i.q. οὐ θήσεις τὸ δίψος εἶναι τοῦτο, ὄπερ ἐστί, τούτων τῶν τινός sitim esse id, quod est, inter ea s. tanquam unum eorum, quae alicuius sunt (Schneider). We must, I think, acquiesce in this interpretation, if the text is sound; but there is grave difficulty in taking εἶναι twice over, as Schneider virtually does (‘is that which it is, and is one of,’ etc.). I am strongly inclined to think that Plato wrote οὐ τούτων θήσεις τῶν τινός, <καὶ τινὸς> εἶναι τοῦτο ὅπερ ἐστὶν κτλ. With this emendation the meaning is: ‘Well now, about thirst, will you not place it in this category of things relative, and hold that it is what it is—that is, of course, thirst—relatively to something? Yes, said he, relatively to drink.’ τὰ τινός i.e. ‘the things relative to something’ for ‘the category of things relative,’ is further explained in καὶ τινὸς —ὅπερ ἐστίν. ἔγωγε answers the first part of Socrates' question, and πώματός γε the second. For other views on this passage see App. III.

δίψος δ) οὖν κτλ. δ) οὖν=‘however,’ as in I 337 C. The reading δ’ αὖ (q and some other inferior MSS) is unpleasantly cacophonous before αὐτό .

οὐ γὰρ δὴ ‐‐ πράττει . See cr. n. Ast's emendation πράττει is preferable to inserting ἄν or changing δή to ἄν (with Schanz). The particle δή could ill be spared. The infinitive πράττειν is read by Galen (de Hipp. et Plat. decr. V p. 488 ed. Kühn) and two inferior MSS. Those who retain the MS reading suppose that ἄν is carried on from ἕτερον ἂν εἴη; but the instances cited in support (I 352 E, II 360 C, 382 D, III 398 A) are very much easier than this. περὶ τὸ αὐτό refers of course to the object of the action in question: πῶμα for instance in a case of thirst. Note that Plato betrays a sense of the unity of soul when he uses the expressions αὐτὴν—διψῶσαν, and τό γε αὐτὸ—πράττει. So also in D below ᾧ λογίζεται sc. ἡ ψυχή. See on 435 A ff.

αὐτοῦ . See 428 A note The illustration, as Bosanquet conjectures, may have been suggested by Heraclitus' παλίντροπος ἀρμονίη ὄκωσπερ τόξου καὶ λύρης ( Fr. 45 Byw.).

οὐκ ἐθέλειν : ‘refuse’: cf. infra τὸ κωλῦον—κρατοῦν τοῦ κελεύοντος. So also Bosanquet ‘decline to drink.’

ἐνεῖναι δέ . The repetition of ἐνεῖναι with μέν and δέ has almost the force of a conjunction: cf. Phaed. 83 A ἀπάτης μὲν μεστὴ ἡ διὰ τῶν ὀμμάτων σκέψις, ἀπάτης δὲ ἡ διὰ τῶν ὤτων. It is quite unnecessary to insert καὶ after δὲ (with Ast and Hartman). For the verbal play in κελεῦον —κωλῦον cf. III 406 B note

ὅταν ἐγγίγνηται ‐‐ παραγίγνεται . See cr. n. The present ἐγγίγνηται is, I think, necessary, and the corruption (through ἐγγίνηται) easy enough. ὄταν ἐγγένηται could scarcely mean ἑκάστοτε, which is the meaning here required. The subject to ἐγγίγνηται is τὸ κωλῦον. It is not hinted that ‘all men have not right reason’ (J. and C.), but only that there is not on every occasion a conflict between reason and desire. See 431 C and 437 D note Reason readily acquiesces when it is good to gratify desire. τὰ—ἄγοντα καὶ ἕλκοντα is translated by Jowett ‘that which bids and attracts’: but ἄγοντα is said like ἄγοντος in 439 B and ἕλκοντα is ‘dragging.’ The plural should also be retained in the translation, otherwise τὰ ἄγοντα may be identified with the ἐπιθυμητικόν, which would be a mistake, for the appetitive part of soul is certainly not produced by παθήματα of any kind. τὰ ἄγοντα καὶ ἔλκοντα are in reality ‘impulses leading and dragging’ the soul, impulses engendered by ‘particular conditions and diseases’ (not ‘passive states’ or ‘passion,’ etc. with the English translators), i.e. in other words by abnormal bodily states favourable to desires, as for example fevers etc.: cf. Phil. 45 A, B. These impulses are no doubt special instances of the action of ἐπιθυμητικόν, but should be distinguished from the appetitive principle itself.

λογιστικόν . The φιλόσοφον of II and III shewed itself in moral rather than in intellectual relations: see II 376 B note λογιστικόν, though as yet directed only to moral questions, is intellectual more than moral. Intellect gradually asserts its predominance over will until in Books VI and VII it achieves its final triumph. Cf. 439 E, 441 E notes

439E - 441C There is also a third element or part of soul, that which we call the element of Spirit. It is distinct from the Appetitive element, with which, indeed, it frequently contends. Its function is to support the Rational part of the soul. In a man of noble character the spirited element is quiescent or the reverse in accordance with the commands of Reason. It must not however be identified with Reason; for it is present in children and the lower animals, whereas Reason is not. Homer also recognises that the two elements are distinct.

ff. The analogy between the righteous city and the righteous soul is continued throughout this section. It should be noted however that the parallel is no longer quite exact. The difference between θυμοειδές and λογιστικόν in the soul is greater than that between auxiliaries and rulers in the State: for the λογιστικόν is not a select part of the θυμοειδές—as the rulers are of the soldiers—but something generically distinct from it. Otherwise the analogy holds (with the reservations mentioned on 435 A). Cf. Steinhart Einleitung p. 192 and Susemihl Gen. Entw. II p. 166.

τὸ δὲ δὴ τοῦ θυμοῦ κτλ. Hitherto θυμοειδές has been chiefly the source of courage and the natural antithesis of φιλόσοφον (II 375 A ff., III 410 D, 411 C). It now enters on a wider sphere as the ally of λογιστικόν, and becomes, thus far, more intellectual, as Krohn points out: note also the ὀρθὴ δόξα of 430 B. Its ethical connotation is also intensified; for it is not now simply spirit, but the sentiment of moral indignation at everything evil— “ein edler Unwille über alles Schlechte” (Krohn Pl. St. p. 55)—everything which tends to destroy the πολιτεία ἐν ἡμῖν. It becomes in short, as Brandt (Zur Entwick. d. Pl. Lehr. v. d. Seelentheilen p. 18) says truly enough though ponderously, “leidenschaftlicher Selbsterhaltungs- und Selbstvervollkommnungstrieb.” Cf. Simson der Begriff der Seele bei Plato p. 110, and see also on II 375 A.

ἴσως κτλ. The θνητὸν εἶδος ψυχῆς of the Timaeus includes both the θυμοειδές and the ἐπιθυμητικόν: see 69 C ff. and cf. Pol. 309 C. Similarly in the Phaedrus the two lower faculties are figured as the two horses, and the highest as the charioteer of the soul's chariot (253 D): cf. Simson l.c. p. 109 notes

ποτὲ ‐‐ τούτῳ . The antecedent of τούτῳ is τι: ‘having once heard something I trust to this,’ i.e. ‘I rely on an incident which I once heard.’ πιστεύω means that he relies on it for a proof; and ὡς ἄρα goes with ἀκούσας. So Schneider correctly explains the Greek. The precise force of πιστεύω τούτῳ has, I think, been missed by most of those who have suspected corruption. For τι there have been various conjectures: ἔτι (Madvig), ἄρτι (Liebhold Fl. Jahrb. 1888 p. 110), τινος (Zeller Archiv f. Gesch. d. Phil. II p. 694)—all superfluous, and the first two very weak; while Campbell suggests that οὐ has dropped before πιστεύω, taking τούτῳ to refer to Glauco's suggestion. But in that case τοῦτο would be necessary.

Αεόντιος . “Ad hunc Leontium eiusque insanam cupiditatem spectat depravatissimus Theopompi comici Καπηλίδων locus” (Herwerden Mn. N.S. XI p. 346). The fragment is emended by Kock (Com. Att. Frag. I p. 739) into Αεωτροφίδης ὁ τρίμνεως (trium librarum homo, i.e. levissimus) Αεοντίῳ | εὔχρως τε φαίνεται χαρίεις θ’ ὤσπερ vεκρός. Bergk was the first to connect the two passages.

ὑπὸ ‐‐ ἐκτός : ‘close to the outer side of the North wall.’ Cf. (with Stallbaum) Lys. 203 A τὴν ἔξω τείχους ὑπ’ αὐτὸ τὸ τεῖχος. The North wall was the outer of the two walls connecting Athens with the Piraeus; the other, or South wall, was called τὸ διὰ μέσου τεῖχος, because it lay between the βόρειον and the φαληρικόν, which connected Athens and the Phalerum. See Gorg. 455 E and the other authorities cited by Milchhöfer Schriftquellen zur Topographie von Athen pp. CXIII ff., and Curtius u. Kaupert Atlas von Athen Bl. II.

παρὰ ‐‐ κειμένους : ‘lying by’ or ‘near the executioner’; not of course ‘at the executioner's’ as has been suggested. When seen by Leontius, the hangman was engaged in throwing the bodies into the pit (ὄρυγμα or βάραθρον, from which he was often called ὁ ἐπὶ s. πρὸς τῷ ὀρύγματι). The βάραθρον into which the bodies of executed criminals were thrown, was a deep ravine outside the walls, in the deme Κειριάδαι. Leontius would pass near it, just before entering the city (probably by the Μελιτίδες πύλαι): see Curtius u. Kaupert l.c. Bl. II. The place is still pointed out to visitors to Athens on the western declivity of the Hill of the Nymphs. For the ancient authorities see Milchhöfer l.c. pp. I—II. Various suggestions have been made for δημίῳ. Valckenaer's δημιείῳ is a coinage of his own, and otherwise objectionable; Αυκείῳ (also Valckenaer) is topographically impossible, and so is Διομείῳ (Hemsterhuis), if it has anything to do with the Διομηΐς πύλη. The explanation which I have given seems also to have been held by Milchhöfer, for he quotes the present passage among the authorities for the βάραθρον .

ὦ κακοδαίμονες . ‘Confound you!’

τὴν ὀργήν . q reads τὸν θυμόν, which Ast and others have preferred. But, as Schneider observes, ὀργή is to θυμός, as ἐπιθυμίαι to ἐπιθυμητικόν. If anger fights with desire, the source of anger, θυμοειδές, must be different from that of desire, ἐπιθυμητικόν. This is the whole moral of the anecdote, which is intended to establish the difference between θυμοειδές and ἐπιθυμητικόν only, not also λογιστικόν.

ταῖς δ) ἐπιθυμίαις κτλ. αὐτόν is τὸν θυμόν. ἀντιπράττειν “ad singularem aliquam actionem referendum est, quam ratio suscipere eaque in re sibi repugnare prohibeat, quasi dictum sit: μὴ δεῖν τι πράττειν καὶ τοῦτο δρῶντα ἀντιπράττειν” (Schneider). The words γενομένου τοῦ τοιούτου refer to ταῖς— κοινωνήσαντα. The anacoluthon is an easy one. Plato means merely that θυμός does not unite with the desires against the reason. For αἱροῦντος λόγου cf. X 604 C note On other views on this passage consult App. IV.

ὅσῳ ‐‐ ᾐ . The restriction will be noted. It is not οἱ γενναῖοι who, as the saying is, hate those whom they have injured.

οὐκ ἐν τούτῳ κτλ. : ‘does not he then fume and chafe—and fight on the side of what he believes to be just—both at hunger and at cold and all such inflictions, and bide his ground and conquer, abating not his noble indignation, until he has either achieved his purpose, or perished, or has been called back and soothed by the reason within him, as a herdsman recalls his dog?’ The words καὶ διὰ τὸ πεινῆν—πάσχειν must be taken with ζεῖ τε καὶ χαλεπαίνει, but possibly καὶ ξυμμαχεῖ τῷ δοκοῦντι δικαίῳ has been displaced, and we should read ζεῖ τε καὶ χαλεπαίνει καὶ διὰ τὸ πεινῆν—πάσχειν, καὶ ξυμμαχεῖ τῷ δοκοῦντι δικαίῳ, καὶ ὑπομένων κτλ. νικᾷ is not merely ‘tries to conquer’ or ‘perseveres’ (Schneider), but ‘conquers,’ in spite of the pardonable inconsistency of this translation with τελευτήση— πραυνθῆ. τῶν γενναίων cannot mean “in the case of the noble’ (P. Shorey A. J. Ph. XVI p. 237), unless θυμός is the subject of λήγει, which is not, I think, the case. The meaning is caught the more readily by reason of οὐχ ὅσῳ ἂν γενναιότερος ᾖ in C, and we ought not to substitute ἀγανακτῶν or the like with Richards. See on the whole passage App. V.

καίτοι γε =‘and surely’ has no adversative force here. See Kugler de part. τοι etc. p. 18. Hartman emends, but see on I 331 E.

ἦ. See cr. n. εἰ in direct interrogation is unclassical, and ἐρωτῶ cannot be supplied. Nor can εἰ well be taken as conditional (with Stallbaum) and τὸ ποῖον as a sudden interruption. For the confusion of ει and η see Introd. § 5.

ἀρτίως . 439 E.

τίθεσθαι κτλ. : ‘defends the rational element.’ I have retained the accusative on the strength of CIA II 317. 9 λαβόντος τοῦ δήμου τὰ ὄπλα ὑπὲρ τῆς ἐλευθ <ερί> ας καὶ παρακαλοῦ <ν> τος καὶ τοὺς στρατιώτας τίθεσθαι πρὸς τὴν πόλιν. The inscription dates from about 280 B.C. Other editors read τοῦ λογιστικοῦ (with Ξ alone among the MSS), but do not cite any example of the phrase τίθεσθαι τὰ ὄπλα πρός τινος, although πρός with the genitive is common enough in similar expressions. Thucydides (II 2. 4) has παρά with the accusative like πρός here. The original meaning of the idiom was to take up a position in arms by the side of: see Schneider's Xen. Anabasis pp. 537—540 and the commentators on Thuc. l.c. For the metaphor cf. Arist. Pol. Ath. 8. 5. F. K. Hertlein (quoted in Hartman) also defends the accusative, citing Aen. Polior. 4. 3 ἐτίθεντο τὰ ὅπλα παρὰ τοὺς πολεμίους ὡς παρὰ φιλίους.

ἐὰν μὴ κτλ. See App. IV.

ἐκεῖ : ‘in the other place,’ viz. III 390 D. If Kühn is to be trusted, Galen (Vol. V p. 500) does not, as Hartman asserts, omit the word; and there is no good reason for suspecting corruption.

441C - 443B Thus we see that the soul contains within itself the same kinds or elements as our city. It follows that the individual is wise, brave etc. in the same way and in virtue of the same internal elements. We are therefore just when each of our psychological factors does its own work. Reason should rule, with Spirit for its obedient ally; and both of them together, harmonised by music and gymnastic, will control Desire, and ward off foreign enemies from soul and body. The individual is brave in virtue of the element of Spirit, if in spite of pain and pleasure that element continues faithful to the commands of Reason touching what should and should not be feared; wise, by reason of the part of soul that rules and knows; temperate, through the harmony of ruled and ruler on the question which shall rule; and just, in virtue of our oftrepeated principle. We may examine our view of Justice by various tests derived from the popular connotation of the word, and we shall find that we are right.

ff. The parallel between the City and the Soul is maintained throughout this section. Like the City, the Soul is also wise and brave, in virtue of the wisdom and courage of its parts, and temperate and just for similar reasons (see on τί τὴν πόλιν προσαγορεύεις 428 D); the relation between λογιστικόν, θυμοειδές, and ἐπιθυμητικόν is the same as that between the three orders of the city (see however on 442 C); and the specific virtues are defined in the same way. Finally, as Justice in the State was at last identified with Righteousness or Moral Perfection, so likewise is Justice in the soul (442 E—443 B).

ὁμολογεῖται . ὡμολογεῖται (sic) q^{1}: ὡμολόγηται q^{2} (with Stob. Flor. 9. 64). The present, ‘we pretty well agree,’ is satisfactory enough.

ἀνδρείαν . See cr. n., and for the error in A cf. IX 573 B note

ἔχειν is intransitive, and not transitive as D. and V. suppose.

ὥσπερ ἐλέγομεν . III 411 E —412 A. This passage enables us to identify the λογιστικόν with the φιλόσοφον of Books II—III. See on 439 D, and cf. Krohn Pl. St. p. 57.

τὸ μέν : i.e. τὸ λογιστικόν, as τὸ δέ is τὸ θυμοειδές. As the subject to the participles is κρᾶσις, we see again that Plato did not intend ‘Music’ and Gymnastic each to affect one part of Soul exclusively. It is curious however that the participles here describe the effect of music only: for it is music ( not gymnastic) which ἐπιτείνει τὸ φιλόσοφον: see on ὄπως ἂν—προσήκοντος III 411 E. The partial ignoring of gymnastic in this passage is perhaps premonitory of the intellectualism of VI and VII: cf. on 439 D and E.

ἀνλεῖσα κτλ. : ‘slackening the other by soothing address, taming it,’ etc. The three participles are not coordinate, but παραμυθουμένη explains the action of ἀνιεῖσα. It is unnecessary to desert the best MSS (as I once did) and read ἀνιεῖσα, παραμυθουμένη καὶ ἡμεροῦσα with Ξ v and the older editors.

προστατήσετον κτλ. Bekker's emendation—see cr. n.—is now generally accepted. τούτω means λογιστικόν and θυμοειδές: so also in B below. On ὃ δὴ πλεῖστον etc. see II 379 C note

καλουμένων κτλ. καλουμένων is said because such pleasures are no true pleasures: cf. I 336 A note and (for the implication itself) IX 583 B ff., Phil. 36 C ff. On οὐκ αὖ see 426 E note The imagery of this passage suggests that the ἐπιθυμητικόν is a sort of θηρίον: cf. IX 588 E ff.

ὧν ‐‐ γένει : sc. ἄρχειν. “Dativus causam indicat, cur tertiae parti non conveniat duabus reliquis praeesse et imperare, eamque in ipsius genere et indole positam demonstrat” (Schneider). If this is the meaning, we should expect φύσει rather than γένει. Perhaps Plato wrote γενῶν (so q Flor. U, Stallbaum etc.): cf. γένη in 441 C. To προσῆκον Campbell prefers προσῆκεν, but the present (προσῆκον sc. ἐστίν) is better here.

φυλαττοίτην . The two higher parts of soul are to be φύλακες both of the lower part and (in a different sense) ‘also’ (καί) ‘of external enemies’: cf. III 415 D, E. Dobree's φυλαττοίσθην fails to give its proper force to καί before τοὺς ἔξωθεν. For φυλάττω used in this way cf. II 367 A οὐκ ἂν ἀλλήλους ἐφυλάττομεν μη ἀδικεῖν, ἀλλ’ αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ ἦν ἕκαστος φύλαξ.

ὑπὸ τοῦ λόγου . In this particular the analogy between the city and the soul is not quite exact, otherwise it would be the rulers in the city who prescribe τὸ δεινόν τε καὶ μή, whereas it is the legislator (see on ὁ νομοθέτης 429 C). This point is emphasized, perhaps unduly so, by Krohn (Pl. St. p. 43). Unless Plato made the Deity the οἰκιστής of the soul, as the original legislator is of the city, it was impossible for him to avoid placing the λογιστικόν in a position of even greater authority than the rulers. In Books VI and VII the inequality is redressed by making the power of the Rulers in the city commensurate with that of λόγος in the soul: see VI 497 C note

ἦρχέν τε κτλ. : ‘ruled within him and issued these instructions.’ The imperfect is used because the instructions must be given before they can be obeyed by θυμοειδές, as described in the last sentence. J. and C. say that ἦρχε refers to 428 E; but Plato is not there speaking of the individual, only of the State. Although a reference to 439 C or 441 E is barely possible, it is much simpler to regard the imperfect as real, and not ‘philosophic.’ See above on III 406 E. Schneider, to judge from his translation, takes the same view. With σμικρῷ μέρει cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. X 7. 1177^{b} 34 ff. εἰ γὰρ καὶ τῷ ὄγκῳ μικρόν ἐστι (sc. τὸ κράτιστον τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ) κτλ.

αὖ κἀκεῖνο κτλ. αὖ καί has been interpreted (1) as implying that the θυμοειδές also has a sort of knowledge: cf. 429 C and 439 E note: (2) as ‘like the rulers in the State’: cf. 428 B ff. The first view is slightly more natural on linguistic grounds, but I think Plato would hardly have attributed ἐπιστήμη in any shape to the θυμοειδές. Probably (2) is right, for the analogy between the city and the soul is in Plato's mind all through this section: see 441 C, D, and 442 D.

ᾧ πολλάκις κτλ. : ‘in virtue of our oft-repeated maxim and in that way’: i.e. τῷ τὰ αὑτοῦ πράττειν. Ficinus seems to have read καὶ ὡς after λέγομεν. At first sight καὶ οὔτως appears to demand the insertion; but Plato is speaking with less formality and precision than in 441 C, D. The reading of Vind. E καὶ οὗτος (for καὶ οὔτως), i.e. ‘the individual, as well as the city,’ is attractive, but unnecessary. Hartman proposes ᾧ <πόλιν> πολλάκις <ἐ> λέγομεν, τούτῳ καὶ οὗτος ἔσται, a solution which will commend itself to few.

μή πῃ ‐‐ εἶναι . ‘Do we find Justice growing dimmer in any way? Does it appear something different from what it was discovered to be in the city?’ lit. ‘blunted, so as to appear’ etc. In the language of 434 D (to which Socrates' question refers) Justice has now ‘passed into’ the Individual; and no feature has been blunted, or lost its clearness of outline. We are therefore confirmed in our view of Justice, both civic and individual. Hartman would read ἀπήμβλυνται, taking ἡμῖν as ‘by us,’ but the present is more expressive, and (with ἡμῖν) represents us as in a certain sense spectators of the selfevolution of Justice: cf. ἐὰν μὲν ἡμῖν καὶ εἰς ἕνα ἰὸν τὸ εἶδος τοῦτο κτλ. 434 D. ἀπαμβλύνεται=‘retunditur’ (Schneider).

τὰ φορτικά . Plato tests his view of Justice by four criteria taken as it were de foro and turning on various popular associations of the word: cf. IX 573 B ff. Of these the first three are concerned with honesty and trustworthiness in public and private life; while the last (μοιχεῖαι—ἀθεραπευσίαι) refers to morality in general, including the service of the gods. Taken together, they sum up the leading features of the perfect character, and shew that Plato's conception of private, as of political, Justice is in reality Righteousness or Moral Perfection, whereof the other virtues are the fruit. Plato's innovation lay in interpreting Righteousness as τὰ αὑτοῦ πράττειν, or rather in the peculiar meaning which he attached to this phrase: see on 434 C and infra 443 B note

παρακαταθήκην χρυσίου κτλ. Honesty and truthfulness were generally recognised as characteristic of the δίκαιος ἀνήρ: see the passages collected by Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. pp. 240—246.

τοῦτο αὐτόν . See cr. n. “Fortasse Plato τοῦτον αὐτό scripsit” (Schneider).

ἱεροσυλιῶν ‐‐ προδοσιῶν . See Nägelsbach l.c. pp. 293 ff., 298 f.

ἄπιστος ‐‐ κατἁ ὅρκους . εὐορκία was an indispensable element in Greek morality: see Nägelsbach l.c. p. 242, and the interesting monograph of Augustin Der Eid im Gr. Volksglauben u. in d. Pl. Ethik Elbing 1894.

μοιχεῖαι ‐‐ ἀθεραπευσίαι . Nägelsbach l.c. pp. 264 ff., 275 ff., 191 ff. The virtue of εὐσέβεια was commonly regarded as δικαιοσύνη ἡ τερὶ τοὺς θεούς (e.g. Euthyph. 12 E), and εὐσέβεια is concerned with θεῶν θερατεία. See Euthyph. l.c. and cf. also the Stoic Zeno in D. L. VII 119 εἶναί τε τὴν εὐσέβειαν ἐπιστήμην θεῶν θεραπείας, and Sext. Emp. adv. Math. IX 123.

443B - 444A We were right then in suspecting that Justice in a certain shape was with us from the first when we founded our city. But the principle that every one should do his professional work and no more, is in reality only an image or shadow of Justice. True Justice is concerned with the inner man and consists in the performance of its own peculiar office by each if the three elements within the soul. It is this which produces spiritual unity, and spiritual unity shews itself in outward acts. We may now claim to have discovered Justice both in the City and in the Individual.

ff. This section deals with the relation between Civic and Individual virtue. Although we discovered the latter by means of the former, it is the virtue of the soul which is alone original; the other, its outward expression, is but a copy. All true virtue therefore rests upon psychology; not yet, as in VI and VII, on the metaphysical knowledge of the Idea of Good. The full meaning of Plato's ‘natural city’ (κατὰ φύσιν οἰκισθεῖσα πόλις) now appears. It is a commonwealth whose institutions and political life are the outward expression or embodiment of the true and uncorrupted nature of the soul, regarded as in very truth a φυτὸν οὐκ ἔγγειον, ἀλλ’ οὐράνιον ( Tim. 90 A). Hence arise the three orders of the city; hence too, each order performs its own function; for it is part of soul's ‘nature’ τὰ ἑαυτῆς πράττειν, and πολυπραγμονεῖν is a consequence of unnatural degeneration (441 A). This optimistic view of ‘nature’ is noteworthy. It rests on the wide-spread Greek belief that good is natural, and evil unnatural; cf. infra 444 D and Aristotle's ὁ δὲ θεὸς καὶ ἡ φύσις οὐδὲν μάτην ποιοῦσι (de Caelo I 4. 271^{a} 33), οὐδὲν τῶν παρὰ φύσιν καλόν (Pol. H 3. 1325^{b} 10) and the like. For more on this subject I may be allowed to refer to my essay on Classical Education, Deighton, Bell and Co. 1895 pp. 12 ff. Although not itself expressly a deduction from the theory of Ideas, Plato's conception of ‘nature’ as good and not evil is altogether in harmony with the sovereignty of the Idea of Good in Book VI: see on 505 A ff.

τέλεον κτλ. The language is suggested by Homer's οὐκ ὄναρ, ἀλλ’ ὕπαρ ἐσθλόν, ὅ τοι τετελεσμένον ἔσται (Od. XIX 547). ὅ is a vague internal accusative: see on ἣν ᾠήθημεν in 434 D.

ἔφαμεν κτλ. The reference is to 433 A. On οἰκίζειν see III 407 B note For κινδυνεύομεν Hartman suggests ἐκινδυνεύομεν; but presents do not of course become imperfects in indirect.

τὸ δέ γε : ‘yes, but in point of fact.’ For τὸ δέ in this sense cf. I 340 D note τὸ δέ γε ἀληθές below expresses the same meaning more fully and emphatically.

δἰ ὃ ‐‐ οὕτως . The imperfect ὠφέλει (see cr. n.), ‘for which reason also it was of service to us,’ viz. in discovering the real or original justice, seems to me better than the present. See II 368 D ff. Plato is justifying himself for having taken so much trouble about a mere εἴδωλον; it was in order to learn the original through the copy. So also Hartman. The present could only mean ‘benefits the city’ (so Schneider, Rettig and others). Madvig, strangely enough, suspects the whole phrase. Civic Justice is an εἴδωλον of Justice in the soul as being its reflection in outward conduct. See also on 443 B ff. above.

τοιοῦτο takes its meaning from τὸ τὸν μὲν σκυτοτομικόν etc. ‘Justice was indeed something of this kind’ (i.e. a sort of τὰ αὑτοῦ πράττειν), but not περὶ τὴν ἔξω πρᾶξιν. The warning conveyed by εἶδος and τρόπον τινά in 433 A (where see note), 433 B and 432 E is now justified: for Justice is said to be περὶ τὴν ἐντὸς πρᾶξιν, and is therefore not, strictly speaking, that which we have called ‘Civic Justice.’

ὡς ἀληθῶς should be construed with περὶ ἑαυτόν. The soul is the true self, as Socrates continually maintained. It is better to regard περί before ἑαυτόν as coordinate with περί in περὶ τὴν ἐντός, than to translate “with internal actions which are in very truth concerned with himself” (J. and C.). ὡς ἀληθῶς περὶ ἑαυτόν etc. merely emphasizes and explains περὶ τὴν ἐντός.

ἕκαστον . Ast would read ἕκαστον τῶν; but the meaning is easily caught after τὰ ἑαυτοῦ just before.

τῷ ὄντι κτλ. : ‘having set his house in order in the truest sense.’ So Schneider, rightly. For οἰκεῖα cf. III 405 B note

ξυναρμόσαντα ‐‐ ἡρμοσμένον . Cf. 432 A, where a similar image is employed. The figure here is taken from the Octachord, the λογιστικόν being represented by the ὑπάτη or highest string (which gave out the lowest note), the ἐπιθυμητικόν by the νεάτη (an octave higher in pitch), and the θυμοειδές by the μέση or fourth. See Dict. Ant. II p. 195 or Gleditsch Die Musik d. Gr. p. 860. The single notes of a ἁρμονία could be called ὅροι because they were in reality terms in a proportion and depended on the relative length of the string: cf. Tim. 35 B, C. Hartman's correction of νεάτης, ὑπάτης, μέσης to νεάτην, ὑπάτην, μέσην is very attractive: for the genitives can only be explained as ὅρον νεάτης etc., and the effect is unpleasing, especially with ἁρμονίας coming between. Retaining the Greek nomenclature, we may translate: ‘having harmoniously joined together three different elements, just like three terms in a musical proportion or scale, lowest and highest and intermediate,’ etc. In ἄλλα ἄττα μεταξύ Plato indicates (as J. and C. observe) that his threefold division of soul may not be ‘strictly exhaustive’ (cf. VIII 548 D note). The missing faculties would thus correspond to the notes intervening between the ὑπάτη and μέση, and the μέση and νεάτη. It will be noted that the unity resulting is not that of unison, but that of a scale or mode. Nevertheless it is clear from the language used that the ἁρμονία which Plato describes is, as before, σωφροσύνη: cf. ἄρξαντα αὐτὸν αὑτοῦ with 431 A, B, φίλον γενόμενον with 442 C; κοσμήσαντα too suggests κοσμιότης, and the word σώφρονα itself is finally employed. Cf. 434 C note A different explanation is given by the Scholiast. Holding that Plato is referring to a system of two octaves (δὶς διὰ πασῶν) he explains νεάτη, μέση and ὑπάτη as e.g. A', A, and b (not a, which is the προσλαμβανόμενος). His note is as follows: νεάτη ἤγουν νήτη ὑπερβολαίων ἡ ἐσχάτη χορδὴ τοῦ δὶς διὰ πασῶν συστήματος, ὑπάτη δὲ ἡ μετὰ τὸν προλαμβανόμενον (leg. προσλαμβανόμενον) φθόγγον πρώτη χορδὴ τοῦ αὐτοῦ τοῦ δὶς διὰ πασῶν συστήματος. μέση δὲ καὶ αὐτὴ ἤτοι φθόγγος ἢ χορδὴ ἡ τελευταία μὲν τοῦ πρώτου διὰ πασῶν, ἀρχὴ δὲ τοῦ δευτέρου, ὡς εἶναι τούτων κοινήν, ὡς Πτολεμαῖός τέ φησι καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι μουσικοί. But in the δὶς διὰ πασῶν σύστημα, the ὑπάτη is not σύμφωνος with the νήτη ὑπερβολαίων, although the προσλαμβανόμενος of course is (see Gleditsch l.c. p. 861 and Euclid Sect. Can. 10 ed. von Jan): so that according to the Scholiast there is a serious breach of συμφωνία. It seems to me quite clear that in ὥσπερ ὅρους τρεῖς—μέσης Plato is thinking of three ξύμφωνοι φθόγγοι, and in the single octave or διὰ πασῶν, the ὑπάτη, μέση or fourth, and νεάτη were σύμφωνα ἀλλήλοις: see Cleonid. Isag. Harm. 5 ed. von Jan. In 432 A also, Plato contemplates only a single octave: see note ad loc.

ἕνα ‐‐ πολλῶν . Cf. 423 D note and [ Epin.] 992 B ἐκ πολλῶν ἕνα γεγονότα. The phrase εἷς ἐκ πολλῶν is a sort of Platonic motto or text (like the φωναί of post-Aristotelian ethics).

οὕτω δὴ ‐‐ ἤδη : emphatic, as Hirzel points out (Hermes VIII p. 393): for the just man will not take part in practical affairs until he has ordered his own soul aright. Cf. Alc. I 113 B ff., Ap. 36 C, and Xen. Mem. III 7. 9, IV 3. 1.

ἢ καί . Stallbaum and others add περί (with Ξ) before πολιτικόν, but τι πράττῃ περὶ πολιτικόν τι is very unpleasing. πολιτικόν depends directly on πράττῃ and is equivalent to περὶ πόλιν. The slight variety of expression is easy and elegant after ἢ καί ‘aut etiam.’

ἐπιστήμην ‐‐ δόξαν . This is, as Krohn points out (Pl. St. p. 68), the first precise and explicit separation of ἐπιστήμη and δόξα in the Republic. Each of them, however, is still concerned with conduct, and not, as in the end of V, with the theory of knowledge.

τυγχάνει ‐‐ ὄν =‘really is’: I 337 B note

444A - 444E Injustice, like every variety of Vice, implies sedition and confusion among the parts of the soul. It is spiritual disease, deformity and weakness; while Virtue is the reverse. Virtuous institutions promote virtue, vicious institutions vice.

ἀδικίαν . Now that we have discovered Justice, it is necessary to look for Injustice, in order that we may compare the two and decide the question at issue, viz. πότερον δεῖ κεκτῆσθαι τὸν μέλλοντα εὐδαίμονα εἶναι, ἐάν τε λανθάνῃ ἐάν τε μὴ πάντας θεούς τε καὶ ἀνθρώπους (427 D: cf. II 368 E note). The full exposition of Injustice is reserved for Books VIII and IX, where Plato takes the subject in its proper order, considering civic injustice first, and afterwards that of the individual. At present he contents himself with a preliminary or exoteric sketch of Injustice in the soul, representing it as unrighteousness in general, just as Justice, both in the State and in the individual, has been identified with righteousness or moral perfection (434 C, 442 E notes).

ἀλλὰ τοιούτου ‐‐ ὄντι . See cr. n. The reading of Ξ and other inferior MSS, which (in common with all the editors) I have printed above, seems to be an attempt to emend the older and more difficult reading preserved in Α and Π. Stallbaum supposes that A here represents a corruption of Ξ, αὖ δουλεύειν being presumably a correction (of αὐτῳ δουλεύειν) which has crept into the text; but this is unlikely in itself, and also leaves τοῦ δ) before αὖ δουλεύειν unexplained. The text of Ξ is not in itself quite satisfactory, as Richards has pointed out. οἵου πρέπειν αὐτῷ for ὥστε πρέπειν αὐτῷ seems unexampled, although οἵου δουλεύειν would of course be right. The expression τῷ τοῦ ἀρχικοῦ γένους ὄντι, ‘that which is of the ruling class,’ is also curious for the more direct and accurate τῷ ἀρχικῷ γένει. The reading of A and Π yields no tolerable sense, and certainly cannot come from Plato. Madvig (with Vind. E) proposes οἵου πρέπειν αὐτῷ δουλεύειν, τὸ δ’ αὖ <μὴ> δουλεύειν ἀρχικοῦ γένους ὄντι, which is intelligible, if weak. I have thought of οἵου πρέπειν αὐτῷ δουλεύειν, τῷ δ’ αὖ βουλεύειν (or δεσπόζειν, after Schneider) ἀρχικοῦ γένους ὄντι, but there are obvious objections. I should not be surprised if the whole clause ἀλλὰ —ὄντι, as it appears in A and Π, is only an attempt by some illiterate scribe to work out the antithesis of προσῆκον: lit. ‘being by nature such as to be proper for it to be a slave, and the slavery again <being such as to be slavery> to that which is of the ruling class.’ The clause, even as read in Ξ, adds nothing to the sense, and the references in τοιαῦτ’ ἄττα and τούτων just below are caught more easily without the obnoxious words. See 442 B ἄρχειν ἐπιχειρήσῃ ὧν οὐ προσῆκον αὐτῷ γένει. Cf. III 413 C note

τούτων : sc. τῶν γενῶν.

ταὐτὰ ‐‐ ταῦτα . μὲν οὖν corrects τοιαῦτ’ ἄττα: “immo haec eadem” (Schneider). For ταὐτά some prefer, with one MS of Stobaeus Flor. 9. 64, αὐτά (‘immo haec ipsa’), others τοιαῦτα, but there is not sufficient reason for deserting A.

δίκαια ‐‐ ἐμποιεῖ . Krohn (Pl. St. p. 59) reminds us of Arist. Eth. Nic. II 1. 1103^{a} 34 ff. τὰ μὲν δίκαια πράττοντες δίκαιοι γινόμεθα κτλ. On the Socratic analogy between body and soul cf. II 380 B note

ὑγίειαν ποιεῖν . Ξ (with a few other MSS) reads ἐμποιεῖν; and Stallbaum and others adopt this reading. ποιεῖν, ‘to produce,’ is however satisfactory: cf. 422 A.

τὸ δὲ νόσον ‐‐ ὑπ) ἄλλου . Here and in Tim. 82 A ff. Plato adopts the Hippocratean theory of the origin of disease: see de nat. hom. VI p. 40 c. 4 Littré ὑγιαίνει μὲν οὖν μάλιστα, ὁκόταν μετρίως ἔχῃ ταῦτα (sc. αἷμα καὶ φλέγμα καὶ χολὴ ξανθή τε καὶ μέλαινα) τῆς πρὸς ἄλληλα κρήσιός τε καὶ δυνάμιος καὶ τοῦ πλήθεος, καὶ μάλιστα μεμιγμένα ᾖ. ἀλγέει δὲ ὁκόταν τι τουτέων ἔλασσον ἢ πλέον ᾖ ἢ χωρισθῇ ἐν τῷ σώματι καὶ μὴ κεκρημένον ᾖ τοῖσι ξύμπασιν (Poschenrieder die pl. dial. in ihr. Verhältnisse zu d. Hippokr. Schr. p. 37). Cf. also Pl. Symp. 186 D with Hug ad loc. On κατὰ φύσιν see 443 B note

κάλλος ‐‐ εὐεξία : with reference perhaps to Thrasymachus' statement in I 348 E f. that Injustice is καλόν and ἰσχυρόν.

444E - 445E It remains to ask whether Justice is better than Injustice. Regarding Injustice as a disease of soul, Glauco is ready to declare for Justice; but Socrates would examine the question more carefully. There are four varieties of Vice which deserve investigation, alike in cities and in individuals. Let us take them in order. The perfect commonwealth, which we have described, may be called Kingship or Aristocracy, according as there are one or more rulers. Glauco assents.

τὸ δὴ λοιπὸν κτλ. ‘What remains for us now to enquire is whether,’ etc. For the position of ἡμῖν cf. that of πάντων in 445 B. Herwerden suggests τόδε or τόδε δή, neither of which is necessary.

πότερον αὖ κτλ. See I 354 B, C, and note on 444 A.

ἐάν τε λανθάνῃ . Cf. 427 D and II 367 E.

βελτίων ‐‐ κολαζόμενος . II 380 B note

ᾧ ζῶμεν . Cf. I 353 D τί δ) αὖ τὸ ζῆν; ψυχῆς φήσομεν ἔργον εἶναι; μάλιστά γε and note ad loc. βιωτὸν ἄρα ἔσται should not be made interrogative. The sentence means: ‘if life, which men deem unbearable when the bodily constitution decays, even when they are surrounded by every variety of food and drink and wealth and power, shall be, forsooth, when tumult and decay affect the constitution of the very principle whereby we live, worth living, if so be we do what we desire, and take no steps to escape from wickedness and injustice, and acquire justice and virtue.’ Life is not (says Plato) βιωτός to the guilty man who works his will; it may become so if he takes steps to rid himself of vice, i.e. ἐὰν διδῷ δίκην καὶ βελτίων γίγνηται κολαζόμενος. For the sentiment cf. Crit. 47 D, E, Gorg. 477 B—E, Prot. 313 A, B.

ὅσον ‐‐ σαφέστατα . “Quam certissime fieri potest” is Ficinus' rendering, with which Schneider and later editors agree, taking κατιδεῖν as explanatory of ἐνταῦθα. But it is hard to find another instance of ὅσον οἶόν τε, although καθ’ ὅσον οἷόν τε and ὅσον δυνατόν (Thuc. I 22. 2) occur. ὡς οἷόν τε is the almost invariable phrase. For ὅσον Stephanus proposed ὅθεν, Ast ὅπου. I think the meaning is ‘now that we have come far enough to be able most clearly to descry that these things are so,’ ἐνταῦθα being equivalent to ἐπὶ τοσοῦτον, and ὅσον οἷόν τε to ὅσον ἐλθόντας οἷόν τέ ἐστιν.

ἀποκνητέον . I have reverted to the MS reading. Bekker's emendation ἀποκμητέον is very attractive, but ἀποκνητέον gives excellent sense (cf. I 349 A), and there is no real reason why Glauco should repeat the word employed by Socrates (see on V 465 E); nor does there appear to be any instance in Greek literature of the verbal of ἀποκάμνω.

ἄξια θέας . Plato does not claim that his enumeration of degenerate commonwealths is complete. Cf. VIII 544 D.

ἓν ‐‐ κακίας . An old Pythagorean principle, whence the parade with which Plato announces it. See Arist. Met. I 5. 986^{a} 22 ff. (RP.^{7} § 55) and Eth. Nic. I 4. 1096^{b} 6 with Stewart's note.

εἴδη ἔχοντες : ‘having’ (i.e. as we should say ‘forming’) ‘specific kinds’: cf. VIII 544 D.

ἐγγενομένου ‐‐ ἀριστοκρατία . Knowledge, not number, is the criterion of good government: cf. Pol. 292 C. Hitherto however the rulers have always been represented as a plurality, and we have heard nothing of a king. In the later books (from V 473 C onwards) we often hear of kingship; and in IX 576 D (as Newman points out Politics of Aristotle I p. 413 note) the ideal city is called βασιλευομένην, οἵαν τὸ πρῶτον διήλθομεν. With the present passage cf. VII 540 D ἢ πλείους ἢ εἷς and IX 587 D, where the ἀριστοκρατικός and the βασιλικός are identified. The fact is, as Henkel has pointed out (Stud. zur Gesch. d. gr. Lehr. v. St. p. 57), that “Kingship is only a form of Aristocracy throughout the whole political theory of antiquity, and rests on no distinct and independent basis of its own.” It must be regarded as exceptional when in the Politicus (302 C ff.), probably a later dialogue, Plato distinguishes between kingship and aristocracy and places aristocracy on a lower plane. See also Whibley Gk. Olig. pp. 15 ff.

τῶν ‐‐ νόμων . For the genitive cf. (with Stallbaum) Gorg. 514 A δημοσίᾳ πράξοντας τῶν πολιτικῶν πραγμάτων, and infra VI 485 B.

Appendices to book 4

IV 421 A, B. εἰ μὲν οὖν ἡμεῖς μὲν φύλακας ὡς ἀληθῶς ποιοῦμεν, ἥκιστα κακούργους τῆς πόλεως, ὁ δ’ ἐκεῖνο λέγων γεωργούς τινας καὶ ὥσπερ ἐν πανηγύρει ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐν πόλει ἑστιάτορας εὐδαίμονας, ἄλλο ἄν τι ἢ πόλιν λέγοι.

I hope my note has proved that this sentence is sound in the main; but Madvig's emendation has obtained such a wide currency, owing to its adoption by Baiter, that the text has fallen under grave suspicion, and it may be well to record the different conjectures.

They are as follows:

(1) εἶεν οὖν· ἡμεῖς κτλ. (Orelli, cited by Schneider): (2) ἡμεῖς μὲν οὖν φύλακας κτλ. (Ast in his third edition): (3) ᾗ μὲν οὖν ἡμεῖς <λέγο>μεν, φύλακας κτλ. (Herwerden, with whom Hartman agrees so far, although Hartman goes further and expunges καί before ὥσπερ as well as the entire clause ἄλλο ἄν τι ἢ πόλιν λέγοι): (4) εἰ μὲν οὖν—ἑστιάτορας, εὔδαιμον ἄλλο ἄν τι ἢ πόλιν λέγοι (Madvig): (5) εἰ [μὲν] οὖν ἡμεῖς—λέγων ἀργούς (or κακούργους) τινας—εὐδαίμονας, ἄλλο δή τι ἢ πόλιν λέγει (Richards).

It should be mentioned also that Wyttenbach (quoted by Stallbaum) had conjectured ἑστιάτορας καὶ δαιτυμόνας instead of ἑστιάτορας εὐδαίμονας (ἑστιάτορας καὶ εὐδαίμονας in a few inferior MSS).

A glance at these proposals will shew that the difficulties felt have been chiefly in connexion with a εἰ μὲν οὖν ἡμεῖς μέν, b γεωργούς, c ἑστιάτορας εὐδαίμονας and d ἄλλο ἄν τι ἢ πόλιν λέγοι. I can see no reason for Richards' correction of d: ‘mixed’ conditional sentences of this kind are surely common enough.

For ἑστιάτορας εὐδαίμονας cf. III 420 A οἱ εὐδαίμονες δοκοῦντες εἶναι and especially X 612 A τῶν εὐδαιμόνων λεγομένων ἑστιάσεων. The μέν after εἰ is omitted in one Florentine MS, but μέν without δέ occurs tolerably often in Plato (cf. V 475 E note). Here it has the effect of italicising the preceding word by suggesting a possible antithesis. The only real difficulty is in γεωργούς, and in view of 419 A to which ὁ δ’ ἐκεῖνο λέγων refers, some may doubt whether even γεωργούς is not also genuine. For my own part I am inclined to think that Plato wrote λεωργούς.

IV 430 E. Κόσμος πού τις, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, ἡ σωφροσύνη ἐστὶν καὶ ἡδονῶν τινῶν καὶ ἐπιθυμιῶν ἐγκράτεια, ὥς φασι, κρείττω δὴ αὑτοῦ λέγοντες οὐκ οἶδ’ ὄντινα τρόπον. καὶ ἄλλα ἄττα τοιαῦτα ὥσπερ ἴχνη αὐτῆς λέγεται.

The reading φαίνονται, which replaces λέγοντες in A^{1}, Π and a majority of MSS, is admittedly corrupt. One Florentine MS has λέγοντες φαίνονται, another φαίνονται λέγοντες: and it is possible that φαίνονται was originally only an adscript intended to be taken with λέγοντες. The emendations proceed for the most part on the assumption that λέγοντες and not φαίνονται is the gloss. This may be so, but unfortunately no satisfactory remedy has yet been suggested on these lines. The most important corrections are ἀποφαίνονται (Cornarius), φαίνοντα (Madvig, taking the participle in agreement with κόσμος and ἐγκράτεια, but φαίνοντα cannot be used for ἀπεργαζόμενα, as Hartman points out), φαίνεσθαι (Hartman, who connects the infinitive with φασί, and construes ὡς boldly as quoniam). Other corrections enumerated by Hartman are φασίν τινα (Dobree), φαμέν (Badham), ἀποφαίνοντες (Richards). Apelt has thought of cancelling the entire clause κρείττω δὴ—τρόπον as an “interpretatio etymologica ad praegressam vocem ἐγκράτεια pertinens” (Obs. cr. in Pl. dialogos, p. 11). It would be easy to multiply conjectures of this sort; but until something better is proposed, we should hold fast to λέγοντες. The λέγεται of the next sentence suits λέγοντες very well, for the phrase κρείττω αὑτοῦ is itself one of the ἴχνη. I have placed a full stop before καὶ ἄλλα. Ast suggested a colon, and wished to add ἅ after τοιαῦτα, but no change is necessary.

IV 438 E—439 A. Τὸ δὲ δὴ δίψος, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, οὐ τούτων θήσεις τῶν τινὸς εἶναι τοῦτο ὅπερ ἐστὶν—ἔστι δὲ δήπου δίψος—; Ἔγωγε, ἦ δ’ ὅς· πώματός γε.

In this difficult passage Stallbaum, who is followed by the Oxford editors, construes εἶναι with τούτων (“is one of” etc.), and regards τοῦτο ὅπερ ἐστίν as no more than “ipsam per se” (“as far as its essence is concerned,” J. and C.). This interpretation is grammatically awkward, and otherwise objectionable, inasmuch as it anticipates δίψος δ’ οὖν αὐτό below. Plato evidently means to present his argument in two steps: (1) Thirst, as you will agree, is something relative to drink, (2) Thirst qualified is relative to drink qualified, and thirst by itself, without qualification, to drink by itself, without qualification.

A large number of emendations has been proposed. The late Mr W. A. Gill was inclined to omit τοῦτο ὅπερ ἐστίν (Proceedings of the Cambridge Philol. Soc. XVIII p. 35), and Hartman boldly expunges the words, leaving ἔστι δὲ δήπου δίψος, as it appears to me, in a lonely and unsheltered situation. The suggestion τῶν οἵων τινος (Madvig), i.e. ‘which are such as to be that which they are relatively to something,’ is very cumbrous, and renders ἔστι δὲ δήπου δίψος far from natural. Mr Cook Wilson's defence or explanation of Madvig's proposal in the Academy no. 824 (Feb. 18, 1888) does not carry conviction to my mind. Baiter combines the conjecture of Madvig with Morgenstern's δή του for δήπου, in which case Socrates repeats his question, if ἔστι δὲ δήπου δίψος is interrogative, or, if not, answers it himself. It seems to me clear that ἔστι δὲ δήπου δίψος is intended to explain τοῦτο ὅπερ ἐστίν and nothing more. J. and C. translate “Thirst is, I imagine— Yes, said he, thirst is of drink,” remarking that “two questions are asked; before the second is completed Glauco breaks in with a reply to the first (ἔγωγε): and in πώματός γε he completes and answers the second.” I can see no occasion for so much impatience on Glauco's part. The insertion of καὶ τινός after τῶν τινός appears to me to solve all the difficulties, and the error is of a kind that frequently occurs in our oldest MS. See Introd. § 5.

IV 440 B. ταῖς δ’ ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτὸν κοινωνήσαντα, αἱροῦντος λόγου μὴ δεῖν ἀντιπράττειν, οἶμαί σε οὐκ ἂν φάναι γενομένου ποτὲ ἐν σαυτῷ τοῦ τοιούτου αἰσθέσθαι, οἶμαι δ’ οὐδ’ ἐν ἄλλῳ.

The difficulties of this passage have been much canvassed. The only important variant is ἐν ἑαυτῷ (Π and corr. A^{2}, with several other MSS) instead of ἐν σαυτῷ...Π does not, as Bekker asserted, give μηδέν, but μὴ δεῖν like A. The ἄν τι πράττειν for ἀντιπράττειν of q, although adopted by Bekker, is indefensible, as other editors have observed, for ἄν has no meaning or construction.

Against the ordinary interpretation, which I have given in the notes, it has been urged that θυμός does, in point of fact, sometimes join with the Desires against the Reason. Thus in the degenerate phases of character depicted in VIII 553 C ff. and elsewhere, θυμοειδές is the slave and minister of the ἐπιθυμητικόν, and in 441 A ἐπίκουρον ὂν τῷ λογιστικῷ φύσει ἐὰν μὴ ὑπὸ κακῆς τροφῆς διαφθαρῇ, the same implication appears to be involved. Cf. Krohn Pl. St. pp. 52 ff. But in such cases the λογιστικόν would seem also to be corrupted (τὸ δέ γε, οἶμαι, λογιστικόν τε καὶ θυμοειδὲς χαμαὶ ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν παρακαθίσας ὑπ’ ἐκείνῳ—sc. τῷ ἐπιθυμητικῷ—καὶ καταδουλωσάμενος VIII l.c.), so that there is no conflict between the allied forces of the θυμοειδές and ἐπιθυμητικόν on the one hand and the λογιστικόν on the other. It is true that the language of 441 A, taken in its full force, appears to imply that the θυμοειδές can be corrupted without the λογιστικόν, but Plato would hardly, I think, have held such a view, and the implication is not to be pressed. See Phaedr. 253 D—256 E. There is some difficulty about the construction of ἀντιπράττειν, and Hartman would expunge the word. Schneider's punctuation, which I have adopted, connects it with δεῖν. Others make its subject αὐτόν (‘but that θυμός, having made common cause with the desires, when Reason forbids, should oppose Reason—this’ etc.). The explanation of Hermann (adopted also by Schmelzer) avoids the anacoluthon, but is exceedingly tortuous and unpleasing: ‘I think you would not say that you have perceived θυμός making common cause with the desires and opposing Reason when Reason forbade’ etc. Richter also (Fl. Jahrb. 1867 p. 139) evades the anacoluthon by defending the more than dubious construction αἰσθέσθαι αὐτὸν κοινωνήσαντα. Finally Nitzsch conjectures (Rh. Mus. 1857 p. 472) μὴ δεῖν <τι πράττειν>, ἀντιπράττειν, or μηδ’ εἶν<αί τι πράττειν>, ἀντιπράττειν. None of these devices seems to me so probable as Schneider's view.

An entirely different view of this passage is suggested by a Scholiast's note, to which Warren has recently again called attention. The Scholium runs: ὁ δὲ νοῦς οὗτος. ταῖς δὲ ἐπιθυμίαις σε κοινωνήσαντα ταῖς εὐλογίστοις, καὶ γινώσκοντά σε τοῦτο ἐκ τῆς πείρας, οὐχ ὑπολαμβάνω σε εἰπεῖν ὅτι ᾔσθημαι ἐν ταῖς τοιαύταις ἀγαθαῖς ἡδοναῖς τὸν θυμὸν ἀντιπράττοντα ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις, ὥσπερ ἐπὶ ταῖς τοῦ Λεοντίου ἀλόγοις ἡδοναῖς ἀντέπραττεν. It is obvious that the Scholiast connected σε with αὐτόν and took the sentence to mean, broadly speaking, that when Reason on the other hand sanctions indulgence (αἱροῦντος λόγου μὴ δεῖν ἀντιπράττειν SC. ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις), we do not find any conflict between θυμός and the desires. The meaning is satisfactory, and furnishes a fair antithesis to the first half of the sentence ὅταν βιάζωνται—τοῦ τοιούτου, but it is difficult to reconcile this view with the Greek as we have it. Warren, who sympathises in general with the Scholiast, translates “but that dealing with desires it”—viz. θυμός—“should, when reason says it ought not, oppose them, this I imagine” etc. κοινωνήσαντα must however be more than ‘dealing with,’ and the aorist (which on the ordinary view means ‘having joined,’ ‘made common cause with’) presents a serious difficulty in this interpretation.

Reading ἐν ἑαντῷ, for which there is good authority (see cr. n.), I formerly construed the passage as follows: ‘but when he’ (αὐτόν with reference not to τὸν θυμόν, but to τινά and τοῦ τοιούτου alone) ‘has joined partnership with his desires, because reason decides that he ought not to oppose them, you will not, I imagine, say that he has observed anything of the sort’ (i.e. such internal στάσις as has just been described) ‘ever happen in his own soul, or in the soul of another? Assuredly not.’ By this solution we get rid of the anacoluthon, while adopting generally the Scholiast's view; but it is an unnecessary and irrelevant elaboration to make Glauco speak of what the hypothetical person has observed in himself or in another: we wish to know what Glauco has himself observed.

On the whole I am now inclined to believe that the traditional interpretation is correct.

IV 440 C. Τί δέ; ὅταν ἀδικεῖσθαί τις ἡγῆται, οὐκ ἐν τούτῳ ζεῖ τε καὶ χαλεπαίνει, καὶ ξυμμαχεῖ τῷ δοκοῦντι δικαίῳ, καὶ διὰ τὸ πεινῆν καὶ διὰ τὸ ῥιγῶν καὶ πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα πάσχειν, καὶ ὑπομένων νικᾷ, καὶ οὐ λήγει τῶν γενναίων, πρὶν ἂν ἢ διαπράξηται ἢ τελευτήσῃ ἢ ὥσπερ κύων ὑπὸ νομέως ὑπὸ τοῦ λόγου τοῦ παῤ αὐτῷ ἀνακληθεὶς πραυνθῇ;

The interpretation of this sentence is very difficult, and has given rise to a vast amount of discussion. The only important variants are καὶ διὰ τοῦ πεινῆν καὶ διὰ τοῦ ῥιγοῦν in q and Flor. U, and ὑπομένων καί (A, Π etc.) instead of καὶ ὑπομένων.

On account of ὀργίζεσθαι καὶ πεινῶν καὶ ῥιγῶν καὶ ἄλλο ὁτιοῦν τῶν τοιούτων πάσχων in the previous sentence, it appears to me certain (1) that καὶ διὰ τὸ πεινῆν etc. is right as against καὶ διὰ τοῦ πεινῆν etc., and (2) that these words should be construed with ζεῖ τε καὶ χαλεπαίνει. That which in the first case was represented as the cause of anger should be so represented in the second case also. The same view was held by Schneider. It is more difficult to defend ὑπομένων καί, and Schneider is probably justified in preferring the less authoritative reading καὶ ὑπομένων. The expression πάσχειν ὑπομένων can hardly be a mere periphrasis for πάσχειν, nor is πάσχειν ὑπομένων altogether equivalent to ὑπομένειν πάσχων, as Jowett supposes. If the best MSS are right in placing καὶ after ὑπομένων, it is possible that ὑπομένων is corrupt, and conceals ὑπό with a genitive (cf. πάσχων ὑπ’ ἐκείνου in the parallel passage just before), but until the right correction has been proposed, we must adhere to the text of Ξ.

The subject of ζεῖ and the other verbs is supposed by J. and C. to be not the man himself, but ὁ θυμός. This is unlikely, on account of πεινῆν etc., and still more of τελευτήσῃ. The parallel with 440 C τοσούτῳ ἧττον δύναται ὀργίζεσθαι κτλ. is also in favour of making the individual the subject.

That the text of A is in the main sound I have no doubt, although I should like to read καὶ ξυμμαχεῖ τῷ δοκοῦντι δικαίῳ after πάσχειν rather than after χαλεπαίνει.

There is an unusually large supply of emendations. That of Madvig is peculiarly unhappy, though adopted by Baiter in his text, and apparently approved by Apelt (Berl. Philol. Wochenschr. 1895 p. 968): καὶ δἰ αὐτὸ πεινῆν καὶ δἰ αὐτὸ ῥιγοῦν καὶ πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα πάσχειν ὑπομένων, κἂν νικᾶται, οὐ λήγει κτλ. The other proposals are enumerated by Hartman. They are as follows: καὶ διὰ τὸ πεινῆν καὶ διὰ τὸ— πάσχειν καὶ ὑπομένει νικᾶν καὶ οὐ λήγει κτλ. (Ast): καὶ δἰ αὐτὸ πεινῆν καὶ δἰ αὐτὸ—πάσχειν ὑπομένων διανεκῆ οὐ λήγει κτλ. (H. Sauppe, quoted by Hartman): καὶ διὰ τοῦ πεινῆν καὶ διὰ τοῦ—πάσχων ὑπομένειν νικᾷ καὶ κτλ. (Liebhold): καὶ διὰ τοῦ πεινῆν καὶ διὰ τοῦ κτλ. (Campbell, who in other respects acquiesces in the text of A): καὶ διὰ τοῦ πεινῆν καὶ διὰ τοῦ—ὑπομένων [καὶ] νικᾶν [καὶ ] οὐ λήγει κτλ. (Hartman). Richards apparently accepts the suggestion of Madvig as far as it goes, but thinks that τῶν γενναίων ‘is most feeble. Plainly Plato wrote οὐ λήγει ἀγανακτῶν, possibly with some additional word before ἀγανακτῶν’ (Cl. Rev. VII p. 254). The reading printed above is not only more authoritative but also in my judgment infinitely better than any of these rash and unjustifiable alterations.

449A - 451C Socrates is about to describe the different kinds of depraved polities, when Adimantus, prompted by Polemarchus, and supported by Glauco and Thrasymachus, demands from him a fuller explanation of the community of wives and children, and of the arrangements for begetting and rearing offspring. Socrates professes reluctance, both because it will be doubted whether his scheme is either practicable or expedient, and because he is himself uncertain of his ground and unwilling to involve his friends in possible discomfiture. At last, after propitiating Nemesis, and being exonerated by his friends, he proceeds to comply with their request.

ff. Considered in its merely formal aspect, the portion of the Republic contained in Books V—VII may be described as a digression (ἀναμνησθῶμεν πόθεν δεῦρο ἐξετραπόμεθα VIII 543 C). In reality, these books fulfil the hopes held out in sundry parts of III and IV (see III 414 A, 416 B, IV 423 E, 435 D, 439 E, 442 C notes), and complete the picture of the perfect city and the perfect man by giving us Plato's third or crowning effort —the philosophic City and the Philosopher-King. See on II 372 D. As we often find in Plato (see e.g. Phaed. 84 C ff.), the new departure is occasioned by an objection, or rather a request for further information, on the part of one of the interlocutors. Adimantus invites Socrates to explain the remark made by him in IV 423 E f. and fully expound the principle of κοινὰ τὰ φίλων as it affects women and children. The challenge is accepted, and Socrates deals with the question under three main heads, which he figures as waves through which the argument must swim in safety. The first wave concerns Community of Education between the male and female Guardians (451 C— 457 B); the second, Community in wives and children (457 B—466 D); the third and greatest, whose advent is long delayed, deals with the question whether Communism and therewithal the perfect city itself can be realised in the world (471 C ff.). The last of these three waves is not finally surmounted until the description of the Philosopher and his City reaches its conclusion at the end of VII: so that Books V—VII closely cohere together. In the first two divisions (V 451 C—466 D), the dominating principle is still φύσις or Nature (see on 451 C): but from 474 D onwards the psychological standpoint is gradually superseded by the metaphysical, until in Book VII the Idea of Good becomes the supreme inspiring force—at once the formal, the efficient, and the final cause—of Plato's City. See on VI 506 E, 509 B ff. On the alleged connexion between the earlier part of Book V (451 C—466 D) and the Ecclesiazusae of Aristophanes see App. I.

ἰδιωτῶν ‐‐ κατασκευήν : ‘the organization of the character of the individual soul.’ ψυχῆς was doubted by Ast; but cf. IV 445 C τοσοῦτοι κινδυνεύουσι καὶ ψυχῆς τρόποι εἶναι, and for the collocation of genitives VII 525 C αὐτῆς τῆς ψυχῆς ῥᾳστώνης μεταστροφῆς, VIII 544 D, 559 E, 560 B, Tim. 24 B and other cases in Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 289. ψυχῆς τρόπου is practically a single word like ‘soul-character’ (“Seelenbeschaffenheit” Schneider).

σμικρὸν κτλ. explains ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα: ‘paullo longius ab Adimanto, quam clandestinum colloquium requirebat’ or ‘paullo remotior, quam reliqui a suis vicinis,’ not “a little further away from Socrates than Adimantus” (J. and C.): for “cur propterea manum protenderit et Adimantum attraxerit, non apparet” (Schneider).

, C 12 τί μάλιστα κτλ. ‘What particular thing is it that you decline to let off?’ ‘You,’ said he. ‘Because of what particular remark of mine?’ (lit. ‘because I said what in particular?’) There is not, as J. and C. suppose, a play on the two senses of τί μάλιστα —cur potissimum and quid potissimum: for it must be observed that ἀφήσομεν has no expressed object, and Socrates could not have known that it was intended to refer to him. The removal of the commas usually printed after ὅτι and εἶπον restores sense, I think, to the remainder of this passage. ἔτι for ὅτι (see cr. n.) can scarcely stand, for ἔτι ἐγὼ εἶπον cannot mean ‘I repeated’ (Jowett), nor can we read ἔτι, ἐγὼ εἶπον, τί μάλιστα ‘once more, said I’ etc. In none of the parallels hitherto cited does ἔτι mean merely ‘once more’ or ‘again.’ Those who print ὅτι, ἐγὼ εἶπον, τί μάλιστα (Stallbaum) mostly take ὅτι—τί μάλιστα as in I 343 A ὅτι δὴ τί μάλιστα; ἦν δ’ ἐγώ. Ὅτι κτλ. But in such cases (as Schneider points out) there must be a second ὅτι to introduce the answer, and here there is not.

ἐκκλέπτειν = ‘to cheat out of’ as in μὴ—ἐκκλέψῃς λόγον Soph. Trach. 436 f.: see Jebb ad loc.

κοινὰ τὰ φίλων . See IV 423 E, 424 A notes κοινὰ τὰ τῶν φίλων is preferred by Ast and Stallbaum (with two late MSS), but the shorter form is far more racy of the soil, and occurs also in Lys. 207 C, Laws 739 C (Schneider on IV 424 A).

καὶ ὅλῃν κτλ. : i.e. καὶ ἐξηγήσεσθαι or the like, supplied from μνησθήσεσθαι. The construction cannot (as J. and C. suggest) go back to μὴ οὖν παρῇς.

μέγα κτλ. καί after φέρειν=‘or rather’ (atque) as in ὀλίγου τινὸς—καὶ οὐδενός ( Ap. 23 A). For γιγνόμενον Liebhold proposes γιγνομένην, but see on IV 427 D. The feminine would be awkward after πολιτείαν, and κοινωνίαν—παίδων, though grammatically feminine, is logically neuter.

ἄλλης ‐‐ πολιτείας is explained by ᾖα τὰς ἐφεξῆς ἐρῶν (449 A). Stallbaum makes a curious slip: “quoniam ad alias πολιτείας partes considerandas celeriter accedis.”

, B 3 τίθετε . Glauco addresses both Polemarchus and Adimantus. There is no occasion to write τίθει (with Hartman).

οἶον ‐‐ εἰργάσασθε κτλ. Chiappelli (Riv. di Filologia etc. XI p. 195) finds in this and the following sentences a vaticinium ex eventu of Aristophanes' Ecclesiazusae. But the word παρῆκα shews that the ἐσμὸς λόγων does not refer to swarms of adverse criticism, but merely to the topics which Socrates must now discuss. See App. I, and (on the subject in general) Laws 779 E.

τότε . IV 423 E.

ἃ νῦν ὑμεῖς κτλ. : ‘in appealing to these topics now you’ etc. παρακαλοῦντες means literally ‘calling to you’: “das ruft ihr nun herbei” (Schneider). This interpretation is in harmony with ἐπεγείρετε, and gives the right antithesis to ἐάσοι. Neither “excitantes” (Ast), nor “in disputationem vocantes” (Stallbaum) is quite accurate. J. and C. give two alternative renderings (1) “and in now calling in this fresh argument,” (2) “and in now urging me to this.” But the antecedent can only be ταῦτα.

χρυσοχοήσοντας κτλ. Socrates shudders at the swarm of λόγοι to be encountered. ‘Why,’ says Thrasymachus, ‘it was precisely to listen to λόγοι, and not to smelt ore for gold, that we came here.’ χρυσοχοεῖν is a proverbial expression said of those who neglect their proper duty for some more fascinating— if less profitable—pursuit. Cf. Harpocr. s.v. χρυσοχοεῖον: Δείναρχος ἐν τῷ κατὰ Πυθέου· πάλιν παρ’ Αἰσχίνην ἀποφοιτήσας παρὰ τούτῳ δῆλον ὅτι χρυσοχοεῖν ἐμάνθανεν, ἀλλ’ οὐ τὸ προκείμενον αὐτὸ ποιεῖν ἢ πάσχειν. Here τὸ προκείμενον is λόγων ἀκούειν. The origin of the proverb is thus explained. A heap of gold-dust having been discovered on Hymettus, the Athenian populace deserted their usual avocations, and sallied out to seize it. But as it was guarded ὑπὸ τῶν μαχίμων μυκτήρων (cf. Hdt. III 102 ff. with the parallels cited by Stein), they failed. On returning ἔσκωπτον ἀλλήλους λέγοντες ‘σὺ δὲ ᾤου χρυσοχοήσειν.’ Cf. Suidas s.v. and Leutsch u. Schneidewin Paroem. Gr. I p. 464, II pp. 91, 727. A gloss in Bekker's Anec. Gr. I p. 316 (cited by Schneider) explains χρυσοχοεῖν in Dinarchus as proverbial for πορνεύειν; but it cannot have so offensive a meaning here, for (among other reasons) Thrasymachus and Socrates are now reconciled. Ast's explanation “aurum fundere proverbialiter dicitur, quem magna, quam animo conceperat, spes frustratur” expresses only one side of the proverb: the other—neglecting the duty which lies nearest—is more important and relevant here. “To find an Eldorado” (Warren) may perhaps meet the case. Thomas Gray's explanation is not altogether right: “a proverbial expression used of such as are idly employed or sent (as we say) on a fool's errand.”

μέτρον δὲ κτλ. An argumentum ad hominem, for the sentiment is Socratic: cf. VI 504 C. δέ γε=‘yes, but’ helps to bring out this point. ἀκούειν is the common epexegetic infinitive: cf. III 407 B note To insert τοῦ before τοιούτων (with Herwerden and Richards) is both unnecessary and inelegant.

τὸ μὲν ἡμἑτερον ἔα : ‘never mind us’: we are equal to a long discourse (so also J. and C.).

τῷ μεταξὺ χρόνῳ . The interval between γένεσις and παιδεία is nowhere defined in the Republic: in Laws 794 C it is reckoned at six years. For the regulations applying to this period see infra 460 B—D, and cf. Laws 788 D ff.

οὖν . See cr. n. It is admitted that Π is independent of A, so that οὖν (which most MSS have) may well be right. The tendency to confuse οὖν and ἄν may help to explain A's variants οὔκουν and οὐκ ἂν οὖν in I 333 E. Baiter reads δή. The confusion of ἄν and δή occurs no doubt in MSS, but its frequency has been much exaggerated, as for instance in Cl. Rev. VI p. 338.

ὦ εὔδαιμον . Cf. IV 422 E note

μὴ εὐχὴ κτλ. For εὐχή=an impossible aspiration, a Utopian or chimerical proposal, cf. 456 C, VII 540 D and see Susemihl and Hicks on Arist. Pol. B 1. 1260^{b} 29.

ἀγνώμονες : i.q. ἀνεπιστήμονες, as explained (with reference to this passage) in Bekker's Anec. Gr. I p. 334: cf. Phaedr. 275 A. Hence φρονίμοις in E below. The more usual meaning, ‘inconsiderate,’ ‘unkind,’ is less suitable here on account of δύσνοι.

φίλων κτλ. φίλων though neuter is of course intended to balance φίλοις. The conjecture φιλτάτων (Richards, Hartman) destroys the balance and is in itself superfluous: see Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 23. Note the characteristic chiasmus ἀσφαλὲς καὶ θαρραλέον—φοβερόν τε καὶ σφαλερόν.

ὀφλεῖν κτλ. The infinitive depends on φοβερόν, and is like the infinitive after φοβοῦμαι. In the antithetical clause Plato substitutes the more usual construction with μή. The future indicative (κείσομαι) is rare after words of fearing (Goodwin MT. p. 132), and represents the danger as imminent. To regard οὔ τι γέλωτα ὀφλεῖν as a reference to the Ecclesiazusae is rash and unjustifiable: see App. I.

προσκυνῶ κτλ. The apology looks forward, and not backward; whence δέ rather than δή (which Herwerden would read).

Ἀδράστειαν . Adrasteia was originally, perhaps, a personification of ἀνάγκη in its relation to humanity and the issues of human conduct. This meaning survived in the Orphic theology (Abel Orph. Fr. 36, 109—111) and appears in Phaedr. 248 C. Specifically, she was viewed as a variety of Nemesis, θεά τις τοὺς ὑπερηφάνους τιμωροῦσα (Schol. on Aesch. Prom. 936), and in this sense Aeschylus (l.c.) writes οἱ προσκυνοῦντες τὴν Ἀδράστειαν σοφοί (the first mention of Adrasteia in Greek literature). Adrasteia is in a still more special sense the punisher of proud words; so that προσκυνῶ Ἀδράστειαν becomes, as here, a sort of apologetic preface to a bold assertion or rash utterance: cf. Eur. Rhes. 342, 468 (ξὺν δ’ Ἀδραστείᾳ λέγω). See Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. p. 47 and Seymour in the Proceedings of the Amer. Philol. Assoc. for July 1891 pp. XLVIII ff.

ἐλπίζω κτλ. ἐλπίζω is ‘I fancy,’ not ‘I expect’: cf. II 383 B note The omission of εἶναι is curious: Madvig would restore it after ἁμάρτημα. I can find no parallel to its omission with ἐλπίζω, but οἴομαι, ἡγοῦμαι and other verbs of thinking often dispense with it. For examples see Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. p. 34.

καλῶν κτλ. : “concerning noble and good and just institutions” (D. and V.), not “about the beautiful, the good, and the just, in the matter of laws” (J. and C.). The latter explanation gives a good sense, but it is harsh to separate δικαίων from νομίμων, and still harsher to take καλῶν as equivalent to περὶ καλῶν. Schneider was inclined to treat δικαίων as a gloss on νομίμων. But ‘about things beautiful and good and institutions’ is an anti-climax; and, besides, it is of institutions in conjunction with, not as distinct from, justice etc. that Plato is about to speak. In his translation Schneider takes the right view.

εὖ . q has οὐκ εὖ, an obvious but audacious correction, suggested, no doubt, by καλῶς εἶχεν ἡ παραμυθία in 450 D. εὖ is ironical. Glauco had comforted Socrates by saying inter alia that his hearers were friendly (οὔτε δύσνοι οἱ ἀκουσόμενοι 450 D). Excellent comfort! says Socrates: I had rather, in the circumstances, that they were enemies! Stallbaum and others read οὐκ εὖ, and Hermann οὐ, for εὖ, thinking the irony misplaced; but Glauco's smile (γελάσας) favours the ironical interpretation, and so does the ‘Socratic irony’ with which the whole sentence is overflowing. I agree with J. and C. in rejecting the pointless alternative rendering ‘you do well to comfort me.’

ὥσπερ φόνου κτλ. See cr. n. καί before καθαρόν is absent from the great majority of MSS and can scarcely, I think, be sound: for the difference in meaning between καθαρόν and μὴ ἀπατεῶνα is hardly enough to carry off the double καί. ὥσπερ belongs to the whole expression φόνου καθαρόν, which is virtually one word. Hartman would expunge καὶ μὴ ἀπατεῶνα ἡμῶν, but it is quite in Plato's way to subjoin the interpretation of a metaphor or simile (cf. 470 C, VIII 553 D, 555 D, and my note on Prot. 314 A), nor have we any right to excise such expressions wholesale, as many Dutch critics would do (especially J. J. Hartman de embl. in Pl. text. obviis 1898).

ἐκεῖ : viz. in cases of φόνος ἀκούσιος (so Schneider, Stallbaum, etc.), not (with D. and V.) ‘in the next world.’ κἀνθάδε is relevant only if it means ‘in this case too,’ i.e. ἐν τῷ ἀπατεῶνα εἶναι καλῶν τε καὶ ἀγαθῶν κτλ.: and this fixes the meaning of ἐκεῖ.

ὡς ὁ νόμος λέγει is explained by Dem. πρὸς Πανταίνετον 58 καὶ γὰρ ἀκούσιοι φόνοι—καὶ πολλὰ ἄλλα τοιαῦτα γίγνεται· ἀλλ’ ὅμως ἁπάντων τούτων ὅρος καὶ λύσις τοῖς παθοῦσι τέτακται τὸ πεισθέντας ἀφεῖναι, and ib. 59. See also Laws 869 E.

ἀνδρεῖον δρᾶμα κτλ. There is probably a playful allusion to the mimes of Sophron, as was first pointed out by R. Förster in Rhein. Mus. XXX (1875) p. 316. According to Suidas (s.v. Σώφρων) and others, Sophron's mimes were classified as ἀνδρεῖοι μῖμοι and γυναικεῖοι μῖμοι. In the former, as may be inferred from Choricius' Defence of Mimes (first published by Graux in Revue de Philologie 1 pp. 209 ff.) Sophron represented male characters, in the latter female (μιμεῖται μὲν ἄνδρας, μιμεῖται δὲ γύναια ib. p. 215). This is corroborated by many of the titles of his plays, such as ὁ ἀγροιώτας, ὁ θυνναθήρας, ὁ ἄγγελος contrasted with ταὶ ἀκ<*>στρίαι, ἁ νυμφόπονος, ἁ πενθερά etc. Sophron's mimes are called δράματα (cf. ἀνδρεῖον δρᾶμα) by Demetrius περὶ ἑρμηνείας § 156 σχεδόν τε πάσας ἐκ τῶν δραμάτων αὐτοῦ τὰς παροιμίας ἐκλέξαι ἐστίν. The point here is that just as custom required an ἀνδρεῖος μῖμος to precede a γυναικεῖος—this is not otherwise attested, so far as I can discover—, so it will be proper (ὀρθῶς ἂν ἔχοι) for Plato's women to come on the stage after his men have played their part. Plato's partiality for Sophron is frequently mentioned by ancient authors, as for example by D. L. III 18, Quintil. I 10. 17: see Schuster in Rhein. Mus. XXIX (1874) pp. 605 ff., where these and other authorities are cited. Susemihl (Bursian's Jahresbericht 1874—1875 III p. 343) doubted whether Plato has Sophron in view here; but the allusion, which was admitted by Graux (l.c. p. 215 note), and successfully reaffirmed by Förster (Rhein. Mus. for 1880 p. 472), is highly probable. I can see no point in making δρᾶμα γυναικεῖον an ironical reference to the Ecclesiazusae of Aristophanes (with Munk die nat. Ordnung d. Pl. Schr. p. 296, and Chiappelli l.c. p. 196), nor is it likely that the words allude to a dramatic caricature of Plato's policy by some other comedian, as is supposed by Bergk Gr. Literaturgesch. IV p. 462 note 134. On Sophron's prose-mimes as a preparation for the Socratic Dialogue see Hirzel der Dialog I pp. 20—26.

451C - 452E We declared at the outset that our men were to be as it were guardians of the flock. Now the principle of community requires that our female watch-dogs shall share the active duties of the males, allowance being made for their inferiority in strength. Their education must therefore be the same: they will have to learn music, gymnastic, and the art of war. No doubt the spectacle of women, especially old women, exercising themselves naked along with men, will seem ludicrous at first; but it is not long since the Greeks would have thought it ludicrous even for men to strip for athletic exercises. Nothing is truly ludicrous except what is mischievous.

ff. Socrates now prepares to encounter the first ‘wave’ (451 C—457 B): see on 449 A ff. The outstanding feature in his argument throughout this part of the dialogue is the constant appeal which he makes to φύσις (452 E, 453 B, C, E, 454 B, C, D, 455 A, D, E, 456 A, B, C, D). He maintains that community of work and education between certain selected men and women is ‘natural’ in two senses. In the first place, it is, he maintains, in harmony with human nature, that is, with the nature of man and woman (455 E ff.), and in the second place, it is recommended by the analogy of Nature's other children, the lower animals (451 D). See also on II 370 A. Pöhlmann (Gesch. d. antik. Kommunismus etc. pp. 114—146) has shewn that the desire for a ‘return to Nature’ found frequent and manifold expression in the literature of Plato's times, and we can see that Plato was himself powerfully affected by the same impulse, although his interpretation of ‘Nature’ is coloured by an Idealism which is peculiarly his own (IV 443 B note). The special regulations of Book V may be illustrated in some particulars from the practices of certain ‘Natur-völker’ before the time of Plato (see e.g. Hdt. IV 116 and infra 463 C note), as well as by certain features of the Pythagorean and Spartan disciplines (see RP.^{7} 48 A f. and notes on 452 B al.), but it is more important and relevant to observe that Plato's assignment of common duties and common training to the two sexes is part of a well-reasoned and deliberate attempt by the Socratic school to improve the position of women in Greece. In this respect, as in many others, the teaching of Socrates inaugurated an era of protest against the old Hellenic view of things. See in particular, for the views of Socrates himself, Xen. Mem. II 2. 5, Symp. 2. 9 ἡ γυναικεία φύσις οὐδὲν χείρων τῆς τοῦ ἀνδρὸς οὖσα τυγχάνει, γνώμης δὲ καὶ ἰσχύος δεῖται, Oecon. 3. 12— 15, 7. 11 ff.; for Plato, Symp. 201 D ff. and Laws 780 E ff.; and for the opinion of Antisthenes consult D. L. VI 12 ἀνδρὸς καὶ γυναικὸς ἡ αὐτὴ ἀρετή. It is possible that some of Euripides' pictures of noble and disinterested women were also inspired in some measure by the influence of the same movement. In later times the Stoics constituted themselves the champions of similar views, and Cleanthes wrote a treatise entitled περὶ τοῦ ὅτι ἡ αὐτὴ ἀρετὴ καὶ ἀνδρὸς καὶ γυναικός: see Dyroff Ethik d. alten Stoa pp. 311 —314, where other evidence is cited. A learned and acute discussion on the attitude of the Socratic school in this matter will be found in Chiappelli Riv. di Filologia etc. XI pp. 229 ff. Finally it should be observed that, from Plato's point of view, the selection of suitable women as φύλακες is strictly in harmony with the fundamental principle of our city, viz. ‘to each one work according to his or her nature’ (II 370 B note); that it removes a dangerous source of unrest, intrigue, and sedition, by providing an outlet for the energies of able and politically-minded women in legitimate channels and silencing them with the responsibilities of rule, while it at the same time secures for the service of the State all that is best in the other half of the population ( Laws 781 A), and justifies the claim of the perfect city to be in literal truth an Aristocracy.

κατ’ ἐκείνην κτλ. : “in following out that original impulse which we communicated to them” (D. and V.).

ὡρμήσαμεν (sc. αὐτούς) is causative, and not intransitive, as Jowett supposes.

ἀγέλης . Cf. II 375 D and infra 460 C, 466 D notes

πλὴν κτλ. One MS inserts ταῖς μέν after πλήν; but, “ταῖς θηλείαις utpote ex ipsa sententia et ex adjectivo ἀσθενεστέραις facile intelligendum enuntiatum non est” (Schneider). Schneider's explanation is more accurate than to say (with Stallbaum) that ταῖς μέν is idiomatically suppressed, like τὸ μέν before ἄλλο in Prot. 330 A (ἄλλο, τὸ δὲ ἄλλο): cf. infra 455 E. This passage is thus criticised by Aristotle (Pol. B. 5. 1264^{b} 4) ἄτοπον δὲ καὶ τὸ ἐκ τῶν θηρίων ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν, ὅτι δεῖ τὰ αὐτὰ ἐπιτηδεύειν τὰς γυναῖκας τοῖς ἀνδράσιν, οἷς οἰκονομίας οὐδὲν μέτεστιν. But, from Plato's point of view, the analogy holds; for he regards οἰκονομία as παρὰ φύσιν even for human beings, and aims at abolishing it.

μουσικὴ μέν . The particle μέν “Latino atqui non multo debilius” (Schneider, comparing I 339 B and III 412 C ὅτι μὲν πρεσβυτέρους τοὺς ἄρχοντας δεῖ εἶναι—δῆλον). Richards conjectures μήν, which would certainly be more usual (cf. 465 B): but no change is necessary. Although the position of τε (which a few inferior MSS omit) is irregular, we ought not to read γε: cf. infra 465 E note, and (with Schneider) Laws 800 A, 966 A (ἢ καὶ ὅπως ἕν τε καὶ ὅπῃ). In these cases τε suffers hyperbaton, being attracted forward by καί. The reverse kind of hyperbaton is more usual with this word: see Prot. 316 D, with my note ad loc. Here it would be awkward to place τε after either μουσική or μέν. For ἐδόθη Richards proposes ἀπεδόθη, to correspond with ἀποδιδῷς above; but cf. δοτέον infra 457 A and see on I 336 E.

παρὰ τὸ ἔθος : ‘contra consuetudinem,’ not ‘respectu consuetudinis’ as Hartman thinks. The phrase specifies the particular variety of γελοῖα intended by Plato: ‘many ludicrous breaches of etiquette.’ It is not quite easy (with J. and C.) to understand πραττόμενα.

πράξεται . q has πεπράξεται, which is tempting, and may be right; but, as Schneider points out, ‘si peragentur’ is somewhat more appropriate than ‘si peracta fuerint.’ πράξεται as passive seems to occur only here in Attic.

ἤδη = demum adds emphasis to ἀλλὰ καί. We may translate: ‘but positively also the older women.’ On this use of ἤδη (‘now that we have reached this point’) and kindred words see Cope Aristotle's Rhetoric Vol. I pp. 13 ff. J. and C. (with other editors) suppose a hyperbaton for τὰς ἤδη πρεσβυτέρας (which Herwerden would actually read): but the hyperbaton is harsh, and no parallel has yet been adduced. The rules laid down by Plato in this passage are an exaggeration of Spartan usage: cf. Plut. Lyc. 14 and the passages cited by Paley on Eur. Androm. 596 ff. Σπαρτιάδων —αἳ ξὺν νέοισιν ἐξερημοῦσαι δόμους | γυμνοῖσι μηροῖς καὶ πέπλοις ἀνειμένοις | δρόμους παλαίστρας τ’ οὐκ ἀνασχέτους ἐμοὶ | κοινὰς ἔχουσι, and by Blaydes on Ar. Lys. 82: cf. also Laws 813 E ff., 833 C ff. and infra 457 A. The words ὅταν ῥυσοὶ— φιλογυμναστῶσιν are a characteristically Hellenic touch: cf. Theaet. 162 B.

τῶν χαριέντων . It is tempting to see in this an allusion to the author of the Ecclesiazusae (with Krohn Pl. St. p. 81 and Chiappelli Riv. di Filol. XI p. 198). If —with the majority of modern critics— we hold that the Ecclesiazusae is earlier than Book V, and if we consider the play as at least in some measure directed against theories on communism and the position of women with which the Socratic school sympathised, it is easy to interpret Plato here as addressing a rebuke to the comic stage in the form of a further challenge. In any case, however, the words οὐ φοβητέον—ὀχήσεις are not a vaticinium ex eventu, for the Ecclesiazusae does not touch on any of the points specifically mentioned here. See also on 452 D, 455 A, 457 B, 464 B, and 473 E f. In each of these passages there is some prima facie ground for suspecting a personal or polemical motive of some kind. See on the whole subject App. I.

τὰ αὑτῶν πράττειν : i.e. παίζειν. Herwerden's conjecture τὰ τοιαῦτα παίζειν is both needless and inelegant.

οὐ πολὺς χρόνος κτλ. Stallbaum cites Hdt. I 10 παρὰ γὰρ τοῖσι Λυδοῖσι, σχεδὸν δὲ καὶ παρὰ τοῖσι ἄλλοισι βαρβάροισι, καὶ ἄνδρα ὀφθῆναι γυμνὸν ἐς αἰσχύνην μεγάλην φέρει, and Thuc. I 6 ἐγυμνώθησάν τε πρῶτοι (Λακεδαιμόνιοι ) κτλ.

γυμνασίων is used in its strict etymological sense of γυμνοὶ ἀγῶνες: we ought not to insert γυμνῶν (with Richards) or τοιούτων (with Herwerden) before γυμνασίων.

πρῶτοι ‐‐ Κρῆτες . Plato contradicts Thucydides l.c. Cf. [Minos] 318 D, where Spartan institutions are derived from Crete, and see Hermann-Thumser Gr. Staatsalt. p. 141 notes

καὶ κτλ. καί begins the apodosis: ‘then too’ etc. The general idea is that when experience proved that it was better to take exercise in a nude condition, nudity also ceased to be ludicrous. Plato thus prepares the way for the identification to be presently made (see next note). The particle δή (‘forsooth’) hints that the eye is less trustworthy than the reason; and the contrast is further accentuated by the somewhat artificial balance between ἐν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς and ἐν τοῖς λόγοις. D. and V. wrongly make the apodosis begin with καὶ τοῦτο (where τοῦτο is of course nominative).

μάταιος κτλ. I have (with the Oxford editors) retained the text of A. It at least affords an intelligible sense, and none of the numerous variants or emendations is at all convincing. The general drift of the passage is clear enough. Nothing is γελοῖον except what is κακόν ( μάταιος—κακόν), and, conversely, nothing is σπουδαῖον except what is ἀγαθόν (καὶ καλοῦ—ἀγαθοῦ. σπουδαῖον is involved in σπουδάζει). Both inferences are expressed in such a way as to suggest a personal reference: cf. χαριέντων in B, and see App. I. γελωτοποιεῖν, especially after κωμῳδεῖν just above, points to the comic stage: and Aristophanes is perhaps intended. See on 452 B. The whole sentence means: ‘Foolish is the man who identifies the laughable with anything but the bad, and he who attempts to raise a laugh by looking at any spectacle as laughable except the spectacle of folly and evil aims in all seriousness also at another standard of beauty, which he has set up for himself, than the standard of the good.’ The analysis of τὸ γελοῖον, so far as it goes, is in harmony with Phil. 48 A ff.: cf. especially 49 A. With στησάμενος we must supply αὐτόν, i.e. τὸν σκοπόν. On the difficulties of this passage see App. II.

452E - 456C Let us first determine whether our proposal is possible—in other words, whether woman is naturally able to share the duties of man—all, or none, or some, and, if some, whether war is one of these. It may be argued: ‘man's nature is different from that of woman: we should therefore assign them different duties.’ A little analysis will shew the superficial and eristic character of such reasoning. The word ‘different’ is ambiguous. Natures may differ without differing at all in respect of the powers by which certain duties are performed. Consequently, if man and woman differ only in sex, they may each perform those duties in which sex plays no part. Among such duties are those which appertain to the administration of a city. Doubtless man is superior, as a whole, in capacity and strength, although many women excel many men; but the natural aptitudes of individual women are as various as those of men, and there is no administrative duty which is by Nature exclusively appropriated either to men, or to women. Thus Nature produces women who are fitted to guard our city. These we shall select as the wives and colleagues of the male guardians. Our proposal is possible, because it is natural: the term ‘unnatural’ may sooner be applied to the present condition of women.

ff. On the principle laid down in this part of Socrates' argument see 451 C ff. notes

ἡ ἀνθρωπίνη was objected to by Cobet; but ἡ θήλεια alone would be too general: we are dealing only with ‘female human nature.’

καὶ κάλλιστα . Dobree conjectured κάλλιστα καί, neatly, but needlessly, for καλὴ τελευτή, like καλὴ ἀρχή, may be treated as a single notion. Cf. III 404 B note

κατοικίσεως : sc. τῆς πόλεως, but the antecedent is attracted into the relative clause (ἣν ᾠκίζετε πόλιν), as often: cf. I 350 C note

ὡμολογεῖτε . II 369 E ff.

πῶς δ’ οὐ διαφέρει; Baiter follows Hirschig in bracketing διαφέρει. The formula πῶς δ’ οὔ; is however so common, that no scribe is likely to have added διαφέρει. Cf. διαφέρει in VI 496 A. For the sentiment see Xen. Oec. 7. 22 τὴν φύσιν—εὐθὺς παρεσκεύασεν ὁ θεὸς—τὴν μὲν τῆς γυναικὸς ἐπὶ τὰ ἔνδον ἔργα καὶ ἐπιμελήματα, τὴν δὲ τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ἐπὶ τὰ ἔξω ἔργα καὶ ἐπιμελήματα—the orthodox Greek view.

οὐ γὰρ εὐκόλῳ κτλ. The MS reading has been defended in two ways. Schneider prints a colon after ἔφη, and explains οὐ μὰ τὸν Δία as “minime, per Jovem, <temere tu et sine causa hanc rem tractare dubitabas>”; but it is exceedingly difficult to supply the words in brackets. This difficulty induced Apelt (Obs. Crit. p. 12) to suggest οὐ <μάτην> μὰ τὸν Δία, ἔφη· οὐ γὰρ κτλ. Others explain the oath as emphasizing οὐ γὰρ εὐκόλῳ ἔοικεν, and compare X 605 E οὐ μὰ τὸν Δἴ, ἔφη, οὐκ εὐλόγῳ ἔοικεν and Parm. 131 E οὐ μὰ τὸν Δία, φάναι, οὔ μοι δοκεῖ εὔκολον εἶναι τὸ τοιοῦτον διορίσασθαι. But the whole difficulty centres round γάρ, and γάρ is absent from each of these passages. Hartman strangely explains γάρ as ‘profecto’; while Stallbaum inclines to cut it out. Groen van Prinsterer (Prosop. Plat. p. 209) proposed to read οὐ γὰρ εὐκόλῳ ἔοικεν. Οὐ μὰ τὸν Δία, ἔφη. Οὐ γάρ, εἶπον. It appears to me that the emphatic οὐ μὰ τὸν Δία is more appropriate in the mouth of Socrates, who is continually dwelling on the difficulty of his task, and I therefore think that Plato wrote Οὐ γὰρ εὐκόλῳ ἔοικεν, ἔφη. Οὐ γάρ, εἶπον, οὐ μὰ τὸν Δία, although I have not ventured to change the text. εὐκόλῳ is of course neuter, not masculine, as Richter supposed (Fl. Jahrb. 1867 p. 143).

κολυμβήθραν : a swimming tank. See Blümner Privatalt. p. 210 note 2. In what follows we have the first suggestion of the wave metaphor, which dominates nearly the whole of Book V: see on 449 A.

ἄπορον . As ἄλλην here means ‘other’ and not ‘else,’ the epithet ἄπορον (‘difficult to procure,’ cf. II 378 A) must be applicable to the dolphin also. The Platonic litotes seems delicately to suggest that the miraculous story of Arion and the dolphin is not above suspicion. Herwerden conjectured ἄτοπον, but no change is necessary.

κατηγορεῖτε . Socrates identifies his audience with the imaginary opponents of 453 A—C, and Glauco replies in their name. As ἡμῶν means primarily Socrates and Glauco (453 B), the situation is somewhat confusing: and some may wish to read κατηγορεῖται, as I formerly printed (with Vind. F, Flor. R T, Ficinus and Hartman). The confusion of ε and αι is of course common (see Introd. § 5), but it is better to adhere to the best MSS. Cf. VI 489 B.

ἀντιλογικῆς τέχνης . ἀντιλογική is defined in Soph. 225 B as a variety of ἀμφισβητητικόν: viz. τὸ ἐν ἰδίοις—opposed to τὸ δικανικόν, which is δημοσίᾳ—αὖ καὶ κατακεκερματισμένον ἐρωτήσεσι πρὸς ἀποκρίσεις. It is described in Phaedr. 261 D ff., and practical illustrations are given in the sophisms of Euthyd. 275 C ff. The Ἀντιλογικοί are spoken of as almost a distinct sect in Plato's time: see Lys. 216 A and Isocr. περὶ ἀντιδόσεως 45 ἄλλοι δέ τινες περὶ τὰς ἐρωτήσεις καὶ τὰς ἀποκρίσεις—οὓς ἀντιλογικοὺς καλοῦσιν. Here Plato probably has in view some of the ‘Sophists’ (as in VI 499 A) as well as the Megarian school, whose well-known puzzles—ὁ ψευδόμενος, ὁ διαλανθάνων, Ἠλέκτρα, ὁ ἐγκεκαλυμμένος: see D. L. II 108—are excellent examples of verbal fallacies. The same class of people are also called ἐριστικοί and ἀγωνιστικοί: see Men. 75 C and cf. Theaet. 167 E, Phil. 17 A and Isocr. in Soph. 20 τῶν περὶ τὰς ἔριδας καλινδουμένων—τοιαῦτα λογίδια διεξιόντες οἷς εἴ τις ἐπὶ τῶν πράξεων ἐμμείνειεν, εὐθὺς ἂν ἐν πᾶσιν ε<*>η κακοῖς. On the history and place of Eristic in Greek philosophy see E. S. Thompson's elaborate excursus in his edition of the Meno pp. 272—285.

κατ) εἴδη διαιρούμενοι . εἴδη is not of course ‘the Ideas’: but ‘species’ ‘kinds’: cf. Pol. 285 A κατ’ εἴδη— διαιρουμένους and Soph. 253 D κατὰ γένη διαιρεῖσθαι. That κατὰ γένη (s. εἴδη) διαλέγειν is the peculiar province of dialectic was the iew of Socrates as well as of Plato: see Xen. Mem. IV 5. 12 ἔφη δὲ καὶ τὸ διαλέγεσθαι ὀνομασθῆναι ἐκ τοῦ συνιόντας κοινῇ βουλεύεσθαι διαλέγοντας κατὰ γένη τὰ πράγματα. See also on III 402 C.

κατ) αὐτὸ ‐‐ ἐναντίωσιν : lit. ‘pursue the contradiction of what has been said according to the name and nothing more’ i.e. ‘aim at the merely verbal contradiction of what has been said.’ We are told by Clement (Strom. II 7. 968 B ed. Migne) that Critolaus called such persons ὀνοματομάχοι. With διώκειν ἐναντίωσιν cf. III 410 B γυμναστικὴν διώκειν. The implied antithesis to κατ’ αὐτὸ τὸ ὄνομα is κατ’ αὐτὸ τὸ πρᾶγμα: cf. Soph. 218 C δεῖ δὲ ἀεὶ παντὸς πέρι τὸ πρᾶγμα αὐτὸ μᾶλλον διὰ λόγων ἢ τοὔνομα μόνον συνομολογ(ήσασθαι χωρὶς λόγου.

ἔριδι ‐‐ διαλέκτῳ : a common opposition: cf. Men. 75 C ff. and Phil. 17 A.

τὸ μὴ τὴν αὐτὴν κτλ. See cr. n. The omission of μή was perhaps due to the erroneous idea that διώκομεν below meant ‘to attack.’ In reality, it means ‘we are pursuing’ (the proposition that), i.e. ‘we are insisting that.’ The way for this somewhat strained use is prepared by διώκειν τὴν ἐναντίωσιν just above. Plato is in fact applying the expression τοῦ λεχθέντος τὴν ἐναντίωσιν to the special case before us. τὸ λεχθέν would in this case be that ‘different natures are to follow the same pursuits’ (453 E τὰς ἄλλας φύσεις τὰ αὐτά φαμεν νῦν δεῖν ἐπιτηδεῦσαι). Its ἐναντίωσις is that ‘different natures are not to have the same pursuits.’ For τὴν αὐτήν we must therefore read either <μὴ> τὴν αὐτήν or else τὴν ἄλλην (with Baiter). I prefer the former, both because it has some MS authority, and also because, if Plato had chosen to use ἄλλος, he would probably have written τὰς ἄλλας φύσεις as in 453 E. It is also true, as J. and C. observe, that “the opposition of μὴ τὴν αὐτήν, οὐ τῶν αὐτῶν is more like Plato than the conjectural reading τὴν ἄλλην.” Translate ‘we cling to the verbal point and insist that what is not the same nature ought not to have the same pursuits.’

ὡς ἔοικεν marks the irony. For ἡ ἐναντία in the next line a few MSS have ἐναντία, which Hartman approves. If ἡ αὐτή were predicative, Plato would have written ἐναντία, but, as it is, ἡ ἐναντία is correct, being, like ἡ αὐτὴ φύσις, the subject to an ἐστίν understood.

πρὸς ‐‐ τεῖνον corresponds to πρὸς τί τεῖνον in B above. On the corruption in A see Introd. § 5.

ἰατρικὸν κτλ. Plato is illustrating that particular variety of ὁμοίωσις and ἀλλοίωσις which πρὸς αὐτὰ τείνει τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα. As an instance of ὁμοίωσις he gives two ἰατρικοί (cf. I 350 A): these clearly have the same nature πρὸς αὐτὰ τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα, i.e. in this case πρὸς τὸ ἰατρεύεσθαι. ἀλλοίωσις he illustrates by the difference between an ἰατρικός and a τεκτονικός: these have different natures πρὸς τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα, for the one is qualified ἰατρεύεσθαι, the other τεκταίνεσθαι. Nothing could be more clear; but the text has been plunged into confusion by the introduction of the words τὴν ψυχὴν ὄντα after the second ἰατρικόν. The reading of A—see cr. n.—is indefensible; and the majority of recent editors print ἰατρικὸν μὲν καὶ ἰατρικὸν τὴν ψυχὴν ὄντα with q. But τὴν ψυχὴν ὄντα adds nothing to ἰατρικόν. It has indeed been thought that ἰατρικόν by itself suggests a doctor in actual practice, whereas an ἰατρικὸς τὴν ψυχήν need not practise. If so, we may fairly doubt whether the two have the same nature; and at all events the difference between them renders them inapt illustrations of Plato's argument. Jowett and Campbell attempt to escape these difficulties by taking τὴν ψυχὴν ὄντα with the first ἰατρικόν as well as with the second; but the Greek does not permit of this solution. Similar objections apply to the readings of Bekker (and apparently Ficinus) ἰατρὸν μὲν καὶ ἰατρικὸν τὴν ψυχὴν ὄντα, of Stephanus and other early editors ἰατρικὸν μὲν καὶ ἰατρικὴν τὴν ψυχὴν ἔχοντα (partly supported by Θ), and also, with some modifications, to Richards' otherwise unhappy proposal ἰατρικὸν μὲν καὶ ἰατρικὸν <εὐφυᾶ> τὴν ψυχὴν ὄντα. Hermann reads ἰατρικὸν μὲν καὶ ἰατρικὴν τὴν ψυχὴν ὄντας, but the introduction of women is of course premature. I regard τὴν ψυχὴν ὄντα as a relic of ἰατρὸν τὴν ψυχὴν ὄντα, a marginal annotation on ἰατρικόν. Cf. Introd. § 5.

ἐλέγομεν : ‘we were saying,’ i.e. ‘we meant.’ Nothing of the sort was actually said before.

διαφέρον : ‘excelling’ rather than ‘differing’ (D. and V.): hence τοῦτο δὴ— ἀποδιδόναι. Richards proposes διαφέρειν, to avoid the singular. But the subjects are distributed, as appears from καὶ τό— καὶ τό, as well as from ἑκατέρῳ; and the infinitive is somewhat less suitable here than it is below. Translate ‘if either the male or the female sex plainly excels the other’ etc.

οὐκοῦν κτλ. ‘Is not our next step to invite?’ &c. Ξ reads κελεύωμεν, which may be right, but the indicative is quite defensible. With τὸν τὰ ἐναντία λέγοντα cf. infra 455 A. It is not likely that a specific allusion to Aristophanes is here intended (see Chiappelli Riv. di Filolog. XI p. 200), but there is some plausibility in the conjecture that the coming argument may be inspired in some measure by the Ecclesiazusae, where the essentially domestic qualities of women are contrasted with their incapacity for government. See App. I.

ὀλίγον πρότερον . 453 C.

τοῦ ‐‐ ἀντιλέγοντος . 454 E note

ἢ μακρολογῶμεν κτλ. Socrates is unwilling to bore us (μακρολογεῖν) by enumerating the exceptions, which are —he implies—quite trivial. Cf. Xen. Mem. III 9. 11 ἐν δὲ ταλασίᾳ καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας ἐπεδείκνυεν ἀρχούσας τῶν ἀνδρῶν, διὰ τὸ τὰς μὲν εἰδέναι ὅπως χρὴ ταλασιουργεῖν, τοὺς δὲ μὴ εἰδέναι. It is hinted in οὗ—ἡττώμενον that, even in these, women may sometimes be excelled by men; but the general rule was the other way, otherwise the ridicule would be pointless. Grote somewhat exaggerates the significance of the clause οὗ —ἡττώμενον, when he suggests that Plato may have seen finer webs in Egypt— where weaving was performed by men— than in Greece (Plato III p. 200 note). Cf. Proclus in remp. I pp. 242, 253 ed. Kroll.

κρατεῖται is construed like ἡττᾶται, μειοῦται, νικᾶται and the like; but a parallel instance is hard to find. (In Aeschin. F. L. 152, cited by J. and C., the reading is ποίᾳ κρατηθεὶς ἡδονῇ;). Richards proposes κρατεῖ, in which case τὸ γένος would be the male sex—an awkward change of subject.

ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν . See I 341 B note The sentiment is illustrated by J. and C. from Crat. 392 C πότερον οὖν αἱ γυναῖκες ἐν ταῖς πόλεσιν φρονιμώτεραί σοι δοκοῦσιν εἷναι ἢ οἱ ἄνδρες, ὡς τὸ ὅλον εἰπεῖν γένος; Οἱ ἄνδρες.

πάντων μὲν κτλ. Plato, in short, makes government a question of capacity, and not of sex. With what follows cf. the passages cited above on 451 C. For the relative weakness of woman cf. infra 457 A and Laws 781 A.

ἐπὶ πᾶσι is doubted by Herwerden, who proposes ἐν πᾶσι or ἐν ἅπασι. ἐπί may however mean ‘with a view to,’ ‘for,’ as in 471 A.

ἡ δ) οὔ . ἡ μέν is idiomatically omitted: see 451 D note

ἄρα is better, I think, than ἆρα, though somewhat more difficult: the interrogative ἆρα is moreover generally elided before οὐ. The sentence (as J. and C. remark) is “an ironical negation with an interrogative tone.” The irony in this passage lies in ἄρα. As might be expected from the accumulation of negatives, late MSS shew a great variety of readings. Bekker follows q and reads καὶ γυμναστικὴ ἄρα καὶ πολεμική—an obvious but wholly superfluous attempt to simplify the authoritative text.

πλὴν ὅσα κτλ. For ὅσα Eusebius (Praep. Ev. XII 32. 5) read ὅσῳ followed by ἀσθενεστέρα, ἡ δὲ ἰσχυροτέρα ἐστί, and the dative was also preferred by Schneider (Addit. p. 38). The neuter plural of ὅσος is however used adverbially as well as the neuter singular; and the dative of ‘amount of difference’ is scarcely to the point. Instead of ἀσθενεστέρα ἢ ἰσχυροτέρα we might read (with A^{2}) ἀσθενεστέρα ἰσχυροτέρας. But the reading in the text is preferable, because it lays more stress on the identity of the male and female nature. It is the same nature, only it is stronger in men, and weaker in women. ἤ=‘or’ and not ‘than.’

ξυγγενεῖς ‐‐ τὴν φύσιν . J. and C. remark that “in the Politicus and Laws, on the other hand, the aim of the legislator is rather to unite in marriage opposite natures that they may supplement each other: Pol. 309, 310, Laws 773 ff.” Such a marriage law is unnecessary in the Republic, where the opposite qualities of strength and sensibility are already united in the character of each of the parents. See on II 375 C.

εὐχαῖς ὅμοια . Cf. 450 D note

κατὰ φύσιν . 449 A notes Plato's proposals — so he asserts — are ‘natural,’ because in harmony with the natural endowments of gifted women; and it is because they are natural that he calls them possible. The definition of δυνατόν is interesting and noteworthy: see 466 D and 471 C note Grote ( Plato III p. 201) has observed that Plato is here refuting a current objection to his theories: in the next sentence he turns his adversaries' weapon against themselves.

ἦν . 452 E.

456C - 457B It remains to prove that our policy is the best for the State. We are agreed that the training which qualifies a man to be a guardian will qualify a woman also, if their natural capacities are the same to start with. Now our male guardians, owing to their education, are the best men in the city. Our female guardians will in like manner be the best women. And there is nothing better for a city than to be peopled by the best women and the best men. This end is secured by our system of education. Therefore our women must strip for athletic exercises, and share all the labours of guardianship, in spite of the foolish laughter of those who forget that utility is the true standard of good taste.

ἀρετὴν ‐‐ ἀμφιέσονται : ‘they will clothe themselves with excellence instead of garments,’ viz. by thus stripping for exercise, because τοῦ βελτίστου ἕνεκα γυμνάζονται: see B below. Jowett's translation “for their virtue will be their robe” is incorrect, and would require the future perfect instead of ἀμφιέσονται. The correct explanation is given by Schneider on p. 300 of his translation. ἀμφιέσονται (for the usual Attic ἀμφιοῦνται, which Herwerden would write) has a certain archaic effect (cf. I 330 B note), and the saying may be borrowed or adapted from some earlier author. The same metaphor is found in Plutarch Praec. Coniug. 10. 139 C τοὐναντίον γὰρ ἡ σώφρων ἀντενδύεται τὴν αἰδῶ (with reference to Hdt. I 8, a passage which is hardly likely—as Ast supposed— to have suggested Plato's phrase), but Plutarch's meaning is different from Plato's. So—except for the metaphor— is Tennyson's in the line quoted by Warren from Godiva “Then she rode forth, clothed on with chastity.”

κοινωνητέον πολέμου κτλ. The wives of the Sauromatae are described by Herodotus (IV 116) as ἐπὶ θήρην ἐπ’ ἵππων ἐκφοιτέουσαι ἅμα τοῖσι ἀνδράσι καὶ χωρὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν, καὶ ἐς πόλεμον φοιτέουσαι καὶ στολὴν τὴν αὐτὴν τοῖσι ἀνδράσι φορέουσαι. Cf. also Laws 804 E—806 B. See also on 451 C ff.

δοτέον . There is no reason whatever for thinking (as some critics have thought) that Plato is not serious in making these regulations. Stobaeus (Flor. 43. 100) has ἀποδοτέον: but see 452 A note

γελῶν ἀνήρ . ἀνήρ is said with a fine touch of scorn. It is difficult to read this passage without suspecting a personal reference, perhaps to some representative of the comic stage. J. and C. remark that jests of the kind objected to by Plato occur in Ar. Lys. 80—83. See also next note and App. I. Spartan precedents are cited by Hermann-Thumser Gr. Staatsalt. p. 180 note 3.

ἀτελῆ ‐‐ καρπόν : ‘plucking unripe fruit of laughter.’ Pindar ( Fr. 209 Bergk) satirised physical speculation (τοὺς φυσιολογοῦντας) in the words ἀτελῆ σοφίας δρέπων καρπόν, where σοφίας is a defining genitive, denoting not the tree, but the fruit. Pindar means that their σοφία is ἀτελής or inconsummatc—misses its mark —is no real σοφία at all. More suo Plato adapts the Pindaric fragment to his own purpose. The object of his attack is Comedy, and Comedy cultivates, not σοφία, but τὸ γελοῖον. Hence—according to the reading of the text—Plato replaces Pindar's σοφίας by the words τοῦ γελοίου. The humour of his adversary is ἀτελές or inconsummate—no real humour at all: for οὐδὲν οἶδεν—ἐφ’ ψ(= γελᾷ οὐδ’ ὅ τι πράττει. Cf. 452 D μάταιος ὃς γελοῖον ἄλλο τι ἡγεῖται ἢ τὸ κακόν. This interpretation assumes that σοφίας in Plato is a gloss interpolated to complete the quotation. See cr. n. and App. III.

κάλλιστα κτλ. The doctrine of this famous sentence, which sounds like a manifesto, and was characteristically selected by Grote as one of the mottoes to his Plato, is essentially Socratic: see especially Xen. Mem. IV 6. 8, 9 and other passages quoted by Zeller^{4} II 1. pp. 149—153. Utilitarianism of this kind pervades the Republic, as Krohn has amply proved (Pl. St. p. 370), and asserts itself even in the highest flights of Plato's idealism (ἡ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ἰδέα—ᾗ δίκαια καὶ τἄλλα προσχρησάμενα χρήσιμα καὶ ὠφέλιμα γίγνεται VI 505 A). But even Socrates ennobles his utilitarianism by placing soul far above body in dignity and worth. In Plato utilitarianism becomes transfigured by Idealism and the doctrine of Immortality. Here it should be noted that καλόν combines, as often, the ideas of artistic fitness or propriety, and propriety of conduct. The moral sense of the Greeks lay in their appreciation of the beautiful.

457B - 458B Thus do we successfully evade one of the waves which threatened us, but a more formidable wave is now approaching. The women and children are to belong to all the guardians in common. No one shall know his father or his child. That such a state of society is both possible and beneficial, we shall have to prove; but for the present, we will assume its possibility, and try to shew that community of wives and children is the best of all policies for the city and its guardians.

ff. We now confront the second wave (see 449 A ff. note). The Platonic doctrine of community in wives and children, as a certain critic drily remarks, has been more often censured than understood. The object of the present note is not to sit in judgment upon Plato, but to endeavour to explain his attitude on this subject. In its general aspect, the theory should be regarded as an extreme development of the Naturalism prevailing in Books II—IV: see on II 370 A f. and supra 451 C ff. Several precedents have been cited from the institutions of various primitive peoples who were sometimes regarded by the Greeks as types of ‘natural’ societies, as for example the Scythians (see on 463 C and other references in Pöhlmann Gesch. d. antik. Kommunismus etc. pp. 121 ff., with Newman's Politics of Aristotle Vol. II p. 282 and especially Riese's interesting tract on Die Idealisirung der Naturvölker d. Nordens in d. gr. u. röm. Literatur 1875), and even Sparta, a State which was constantly extolled by Greek political theorists as a model of the κατὰ φύσιν οἰκισθεῖσα πόλις (Pöhlmann l.c. pp. 125 ff., Grote Plato III p. 209 f.), furnished some parallels to the Platonic communism in this respect (Plut. Lyc. 15. 9—11, Xen. Rep. Lac. 1. 8, 9). But Plato's real motive in advocating his theory is simply and solely the good of the commonwealth (462 A). On the one hand, he dreaded the effect of domestic ties in encouraging selfishness and weakening the bonds of civic obligation; and, with his customary disregard of the limitations of ordinary human nature, he expected his citizens to transfer the domestic affections, without surrendering aught of their intensity, from the family to the State. We may therefore truly say that Plato's intention was not to abolish the family, but rather to enlarge its borders and make it coincident with the State. “Die Sonderfamilie,” as Nohle remarks (die Statslehre Platos etc. p. 133), “wird nur aufgehoben, damit das Ganze eine grosse Familie sei.” On the other hand, he was profoundly impressed with the necessity of restricting the population, and at the same time maintaining and improving the breed of guardians, and the measures which he here prescribes are to a large extent devised with a view to securing these ends (459 A—461 E). In this respect Plato might fairly hope that his proposals would not be abhorrent to a nation whose idea of marriage was primarily only a legalised union for the procreation of legitimate children. It may be argued that Plato sacrifices more than he gains, even if we judge him from the standpoint of his own political idealism, but it shews a complete misapprehension of the situation to charge him with deliberate encouragement of vice: the community of wives and children “hat mit ‘freier Liebe’ nichts zu thun” (Pöhlmann l.c. p. 280). Finally, we should remember that it is only the Guardians and Auxiliaries who are subject to these rules (see on III 417 A), and that in the second-best city depicted in the Laws Plato revives the institution of marriage, as we understand the word, without, however, surrendering in the smallest degree his earlier ideal (807 B). Perhaps the wisest and most temperate discussion on Plato's conception of marriage and the family is that of Grote (Plato III pp. 220 —234). Some judicious remarks will also be found in Jowett Introduction pp. clxxxi—cxciv, and Nettleship Lectures and Remains II pp. 174—180: but Jowett goes beyond the province of the interpreter, and lays too much stress on the antagonism between the views of Plato and those of modern civilised communities. See also on 458 E and App. I ad fin.

διαφεύγειν . The present is less presumptuous than διαφυγεῖν conjectured by Herwerden. It is proved to be right by διαφεύγεις below, which Herwerden more suo ejects.

γυναικείου ‐‐ νόμου . If γυναικεῖος is equivalent only to περὶ γυναικῶν, it is strangely used. I suspect that Plato is playing on the musical sense of νόμος, as in VII 532 A: cf. IV 424 D, E notes γυναικείου νόμου—a melody sung by women— is thus exactly parallel to the γυναικεῖον δρᾶμα (451 C note), which it is clearly intended to recall.

λέγε is changed to φέρε by Cobet, to ἄγε by Richards. ἄγε may of course be right: the confusion occurs in the MSS of Plato Theaet. 162 D and 169 C (see Schanz's critical notes on these two passages), and doubtless elsewhere also. But in default of MS authority, it is safer to retain λέγε. Praestat lectio difficilior. ‘Say on: let me see it’ gives an excellent meaning, and could not have been otherwise expressed. The hortatory subjunctive of the first person is occasionally used after imperatives other than ἄγε and φέρε, as in Eur. Hipp. 567. See Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 185.

τὰς γυναῖκας κτλ. Plato imitates the emphasis and precision of a legal enactment. The Aristophanic parallel is καὶ ταύτας γὰρ κοινὰς ποιῶ τοῖς ἀνδράσι συγκατακεῖσθαι (Eccl. 614, 615). See App. I.

οὐκ οἶμαι κτλ. Aristotle disappointed Plato's expectations: for he will not admit that such arrangements are even ὠφέλιμα (Pol. B 1. 1261^{a} 2 ff.).

πλείστην ἂν κτλ. On the omission of ἄν see IV 437 B note and Prot. 316 C, with my note ad loc. Without ἄν, the reference must, I think, be to the past, in which case πλείστην—γενέσθαι will allude to some controversy which the doctrine of the community of wives may have occasioned before these words were written. But εὖ μάλ’ ἂν ἀμφισβητηθείη makes it pretty clear that Plato is thinking of the future.

λόγων σύστασιν : “sermonum conspirationem” Ficinus, rightly. The passage which follows is an excellent example of Socratic εἰρωνεία .

ὑφεκτέον ‐‐ δίκην : ‘I must pay the penalty,’ viz. for trying to run away. The natural penalty for running away is of course to have to stay and fight. Herwerden misses the point when he proposes to excise δίκην and understand λόγον .

ἔασόν με κτλ. For the metaphor in ἑορτάσαι and ἑστιᾶσθαι see I 354 A note ἑστιᾶσθαι ὑφ’ ἑαυτῶν is like our ‘castles in the air.’

πρὶν ἐξευρεῖν κτλ. Cf. Men. 86 E.

θέντες κτλ. εἶναι goes with θέντες: “das Dasein des gewünschten als gegeben annehmend” (Schneider). A few inferior MSS omit εἶναι; but “apparet εἶναι facile supervacaneum, minime vero explicationis gratia addendum videri librariis potuisse” (id.). To write ἤδη for εἶναι (with Vind. E: cf. also Postgate in J. Ph. XV p. 113) is too great a change, and otherwise objectionable, in view of the ἤδη which follows.

καὶ ὕστερον . καί is ‘and’ (Jowett), not ‘also’ (Campbell).

ᾗ δυνατά . Stallbaum (with q and a few late MSS) reads εἰ δυνατά, which is more accurate, no doubt. But in saying ‘how it is possible’ instead of ‘whether it is possible’ Socrates hints that he will be able to prove the possibility of his scheme. We have here in fact a sort of prophecy of 473 B ff. Schneider (Addit. p. 39) cites a close parallel from Tim. 27 C ᾗ γέγονεν ἢ καὶ ἀγενές ἐστιν.

ὅτι πάντων κτλ. Cf. Ar. Eccl. 583 καὶ μὴν ὅτι μὲν χρηστὰ διδάξω πιστεύω. See App. I.

458B - 461E The mutual association of male and female guardians will naturally lead them to form conjugal ties. But no irregular unions will be permitted. We too shall have our ‘holy wedlocks,’ but by ‘holy’ we shall mean ‘profitable’ or ‘beneficial.’ Now the most beneficial unions among lower animals are those by which the best offspring is produced from parents in the prime of life. If the same is true of the human race, how skilful must our rulers be! They must unite the best couples as frequently, the worst as rarely as possible; and only the children of the best couples shall be reared. No one except the archons is to know how this result is attained. Bridegrooms and brides will be brought together at certain marriage festivals, accompanied with sacrifice and song; and the number of marriages will be settled on each occasion by the rulers, so as to keep the population as far as possible the same. The rulers will effect their object by using lots with which they have already tampered. They will also reward excellence in fighting and otherwise by more liberal intercourse with women. The children who are to be reared will be taken to an establishment of nurses, where the mothers, and other women, will come to suckle them, but every precaution will be taken to prevent the mothers from recognising their offspring. Woman is in her prime from twenty to forty, man from twenty-five to fifty-five, and it is only during these periods that we shall permit them to bear and beget children for the State. Violations of this rule will be severely condemned. After the prescribed age has been passed, we shall remove the restrictions on sexual intercourse, observing only such regulations as are necessary to prevent incest; but, if possible, these unofficial unions shall be barren, and, in any case, their offspring must not be reared. Socrates lays down some further regulations about new meanings to be attached to names of family relationships, and adds that ‘brothers’ and ‘sisters’ may marry, with the sanction of the lot and the Pythian priestess's approval.

αὐτοὺς ‐‐ νόμοις . In issuing their commands, the rulers will either themselves obey the laws (i.e. issue such orders as the laws direct) or act in accordance with the spirit of the laws: see next note. αὐτούς=ipsos sc. as well as τοὺς ἀρχομένους. The reading αὐτοῖς (K and Ficinus) is intrinsically good, and may be right: for it accentuates the contrast between cases prescribed for by actual law, and such as are left to the rulers' discretion. But there is hardly sufficient ground for deserting A.

μιμουμένους : sc. τοὺς νόμους. In matters not actually prescribed for by legislative enactment, the rulers will ‘imitate,’ i.e. will issue commands in harmony with the spirit of, such laws as do exist. The reading of q^{2}, μὴ πειθομένους, recommended by Herwerden, gives a poor, if not actually an erroneous, meaning.

ὁμοφυεῖς . See on 456 B.

ἀναμεμιγμένων . ἀναμεμιγμένοι would be more usual, but the genitive lays more stress on the participial clause: cf. Thuc. III 13. 6 βοηθησάντων δὲ ὑμῶν προθύμως πόλιν τε προσλήψεσθε κτλ., and other examples quoted in Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 666. See also infra on 459 C. Here, too, it should be noted that the addition of a parenthetical οἶμαι helps to render ἀναμεμιγμένων independent of ἔσονται. The genitive absolute in ἰδίᾳ δὲ—κεκτημένου may also, as Jackson suggests, have influenced Plato's choice of construction in this clause. Plato perhaps thought of Sparta when he wrote the present sentence: cf. Plut. Lyc. 15. 1 ἦν μὲν οὖν καὶ ταῦτα παρορμητικὰ πρὸς γάμους· λέγω δὲ τὰς πομπὰς τῶν παρθένων καὶ τὰς ἀποδύσεις καὶ τοὺς ἀγῶνας ἐν ὄψει τῶν νέων, ἀγομένων οὐ γεωμετρικαῖς, ἀλλ’ ἐρωτικαῖς, ὥς φησιν ὁ Πλάτων, ἀνάγκαις.

γεωμετρικαῖς γε : sc. ἀναγκαῖα, with which the dative goes, as in Soph. 252 D ταῖς μεγίσταις ἀνάγκαις ἀδύνατον (cited by J. and C.). We have here one of the earliest assertions of the famous doctrine which has played so large and important a part in the history of philosophy—the doctrine of the so-called ‘necessity’ of mathematical reasoning. See for instance Mill's Logic Book II c. 5. In the rest of this sentence Schneider suspects that Glauco is paraphrasing some passage of poetry. τὸν πολὺν λεών certainly sounds tragic.

γάμους ‐‐ ἱερούς . Cf. Laws 841 D ταῖς μετὰ θεῶν καὶ ἱερῶν γάμων ἐλθούσαις εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν. The nuptials of Zeus and Hera were known as the Θεογαμία, or ἱερὸς γάμος, and were celebrated by a special festival in Athens and elsewhere: see H. Graillot's article on ἱερὸς γάμος in Daremberg and Saglio's dictionary, where the authorities are cited, or Farnell's Cults of the Greek States I pp. 184—192. To Greek religious sentiment the marriage of Zeus and Hera was (as Graillot says) the ideal type of all human marriages, and for this reason Plato characteristically applies the expression ἱερὸς γάμος to his ideal of marriage in his ideal city. Cf. also Proclus in Tim. 16 B τῶν ἐν ἀπορρήτοις λεγομένων ἱερῶν γάμων, οἶς καὶ ὁ Πλάτων εἰς δύναμιν ἐξομοιῶν περὶ τοὺς πολίτας καὶ τοὺς τῶνδε γάμους ἱεροὺς γάμους προσηγόρευσε, and see Abel Orphic. p. 243. It is clear from Plato's words that he would have repudiated with scorn the charge of seeking to abolish marriage. We have already seen that he endeavours to make the State into one vast family (457 B note); and it is in the same spirit that he now tries to raise marriage from a private into a public institution, without sacrificing any of the religious ceremonies and associations by which the union of the sexes was hallowed in the eyes of his contemporaries: cf. 459 E. If his vaulting idealism “o'erleaps itself and falls on the other,” that is no reason why we should impugn his motives, or refuse our homage to his unquenchable faith in the possibilities of human nature.

κύνας θηρευτικοὺς κτλ. Cf. 451 D and Plut. Lyc. 15. 12 πολλὴν ἀβελτερίαν καὶ τῦφον ἐνεώρα τοῖς περὶ ταῦτα τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετήμασιν· οἳ κύνας μὲν καὶ ἵππους ὑπὸ τοῖς κρατίστοις τῶν ὀχείων βιβάζουσι—τὰς δὲ γυναῖκας ἐγκλεισάμενοι φρουροῦσιν κτλ. See also on 451 C, 460 C.

γίγνονται : ‘prove themselves to be’ (J. and C.), rather than ‘grow to be’ (D. and V.): cf. III 412 C οἱ δὲ γεωργῶν ἄριστοι ἆρ’ οὐ γεωργικώτατοι γίγνονται;

γεννᾶται : viz. τό τε—γένος, not τὸ γεννώμενον (suggested as an alternative explanation by J. and C.). For the sense cf. Xen. Mem. IV 23 (Jackson).

ἄκρων εἶναι . εἶναι is omitted by q and Flor. U. Without it, however, as Schneider points out, σφόδρα might be taken with δεῖ; whereas the sense requires it to go with ἄκρων. We should expect ἄκρους εἶναι—τοὺς ἄρχοντας, but the accusatives are attracted into the genitive by δεῖ. For an analogous idiom see III 407 B note

ἰατρὸν δέ που κτλ. μέν after δεομένοις balances δέ in ὅταν δὲ δή, and not ἀλλὰ—ὑπακούειν, which merely explains φαρμάκων by stating its antithesis. There is consequently no sufficient reason for changing ἐθελόντων into ἐθέλουσιν (with some inferior MSS, Stephanus, Madvig, and others), although ἐθέλουσιν would no doubt be more usual. For the genitive absolute cf. 458 D note I agree with Schneider and Campbell in taking the participle as neuter and not masculine (so Stallbaum and Jowett). ὑπακούειν is not ‘submit to’ but ‘respond to’—‘are willing to respond to,’ i.e. be cured by ‘a course of treatment without drugs’: cf. Prot. 325 A, and for δίαιτα contrasted with drugs III 406 D.

ἡγούμεθα κτλ. See cr. n. If εἶναι is retained after ἡγούμεθα, we must (with Ast in his second edition) understand Plato to mean ἡγούμεθα ἐξαρκεῖν καὶ φαυλότερον εἶναι, i.e. καίπερ φαυλότερον ὄντα, or else suppose that ἰατρὸν καὶ φαυλότερον εἶναι is an accusative and infinitive forming the subject to ἐξαρκεῖν. Neither explanation is simple or natural; and Stephanus, Madvig, and others have in my judgment some reason for expunging εἶναι, although its intrusion is not altogether easy to explain. It is possible enough that Plato wrote ἀνδρειοτέρου δεῖ <εἶναι> τοῦ ἰατροῦ in line 19 (cf. δεῖ ἄκρων εἶναι τῶν ἀρχόντων in B above); and the possibility is raised, I think, into a probability, when we thus obtain a natural explanation of the erroneous εἶναι after ἡγούμεθα. εἶναι following δεῖ appeared difficult, and was omitted, as it is in B above by q; a later scribe reinserted it in the wrong place. I have therefore ventured to transpose the word.

ἀνδρειοτέρου . It needs more courage to use drugs than to prescribe a regimen, because the risk is greater. Nothing could be more appropriate than Plato's use of the word, although it has been doubted by Richards. who proposed αὖ δριμυτέρου at first, and afterwards ἀνδρικωτέρου. With the general sentiment Poschenrieder (die Plat. Dial. in ihrem Verhältnisse zu den Hippokr. Schr. p. 57) compares [Hippocr.] de victus ratione VI p. 592 c. 67 Littré προκαταλαμβάνειν τὴν <*>γίειαν, ὥστε τὰς νούσους μὴ προσπελάζειν, εἰ μή τις μεγάλα πάνυ ἐξαμαρτάνοι καὶ πολλάκις· ταῦτα δὲ φαρμάκων δέεται ἤδη.

ἔφαμεν . III 389 B. Cf. also II 382 C, D.

τὸ ὀρθὸν τοῦτο : i.e. this which you call right, viz. τὸ ψεῦδος. The medicinal lie frequently appears (γίγνεται οὐκ ἐλάχιστον) in connexion with the marriages of the guardians, as Plato proceeds to shew. τοῖς γάμοις should not be made general; the reference is specific.

δεῖ μὲν κτλ. “The case resembles that of a breeding stud of horses and mares, to which Plato compares it: nothing else is wanted but the finest progeny attainable” Grote Plato III p. 205. It is worth while to compare Plato's arrangements with those of Aristophanes in Eccl. 616—634, in spite of the comedian's lewdness and buffoonery.

τῶν δὲ μή . Cf. 460 C and 461 C. It seems to me certain from these passages that Plato in this book lends his sanction to infanticide. This has often been denied, but without sufficient reason. The subject is discussed in App. IV.

ἀκρότατον . Cf. (with Schneider) σφόδρα ἄκρων in B above and ὡς ἀκρότατον in Laws 730 E. Stephanus' ἀκρατότατον is neat, but unnecessary, in spite of καθαρόν in 460 C.

ἀγέλη , like ποίμνιον, is intended “to recall the analogy of the lower animals” (J. and C.). Cf. 451 C note αὖ serves the same purpose, by suggesting that ἀγέλη has another and a more primitive signification.

ἑορταὶ κτλ. As the ἱερὸς γάμος was celebrated with a procession and sacrifices, ending with the κλίνη τῆς Ἥρας, so Plato's ἱεροὶ γάμοι are attended with religious rites and ceremonies: see 458 E note Plato apparently does not intend these State-marriages to last beyond the duration of a single festival. At each successive festival fresh unions would be tried.

τὸν αὐτὸν ἀριθμόν . See IV 423 A note

γέρα κτλ. Special privileges seem to have been awarded at Sparta for bravery in the field (cf. Tyrtaeus Fr. 12. 35—44): it is certain at all events that cowardice was visited with every mark of disgrace (Xen. Rep. Lac. 9. 4—6 and other references in Gilbert's Gk. Const. Ant. E. T. p. 77). γέρα must be nominative, and δοτέον passive, in spite of its singular number: cf. Symp. 188 B πάχναι καὶ χάλαζαι καὶ ἐρυσῖβαι— γίγνεται. Examples like Crat. 410 C αἱ μὲν δὴ ὧραι Ἀττικιστὶ ὡς τὸ παλαιὸν ῥητέον (cited by Schneider and others) are not to the point, because αἱ—ὧραι means τὸ ὄνομα ‘αἱ ὦραι.’ It is scarcely possible to take δοτέον as active, and understand from it a passive δοτέα with ἐξουσία, because the connexion between γέρα, ἆθλα, and ἐξουσία—note ἄλλα τε καὶ κτλ.—is too close to permit of γέρα being in the accusative case.

ἐπὶ τούτων . For the construction cf. Dem. F. L. 298 τοὺς ἐπὶ τῆς πολιτείας ἐφεστηκότας and de Cor. 247 τοὺς ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων.

ἀμφότερα . q and some other MSS read ἀμφότεραι, which is quite wrong: cf. Lach. 187 A πείθωμεν ἢ δώροις ἢ χάρισιν ἢ ἀμφότερα.

καὶ ἀρχαί : sc. as well as the other duties of guardians. It has not yet been specifically said that magistracies are to be open to women as well as men. J. and C. observe that “Plato seems to betray a certain consciousness that the office immediately in question might be specially suitable for women.’ Kindred duties are actually assigned to a female vigilance committee in Laws 784 A, 794 A ff.

τὸν σηκόν . A σηκός is an enclosed pen or fold in which the young of animals may be reared. Hartman prefers τινα σηκόν (with q and a Florentine MS), because the σηκός has not been mentioned before. The way has, however, been prepared for it by 459 A, 459 B (τί δὲ ἵππων κτλ.), ποίμνιον (459 E), ἀγέλη (ib.), and σύνερξις (460 A). The comparison with a sort of ‘breeding-stud’— see above on 459 D—runs through all this passage and supplies the metaphors. See also on 460 E. The whole discussion affords an excellent example of the uncompromising rationalism with which Plato carries out his theories to their logical conclusion.

ἀνάπηρον . Pollux (II 61) explains this word as ὁ πᾶν τὸ σῶμα πεπηρωμένος; but it is little more than πηρός: cf. ἀνάπλεως, ἀναπιμπλάναι etc. The present passage is not inconsistent with III 415 B, for ὑπόχαλκος and ὑποσίδηρος do not imply deformity.

ἐν ἀπορρήτῳ κτλ. is a euphemism for infanticide: see App. IV. Compare the Spartan usage: εἰ δ’ ἀγεννὲς καὶ ἄμορφον, ἀπέπεμπον εἰς τὰς λεγομένας Ἀποθέτας, παρὰ Ταΰγετον βαραθρώδη τόπον (Plut. Lyc. 16. 1). (The word for the exposure of infants was ἀπόθεσις.) See also Whibley Greek Oligarchies p. 113 notes

εἴπερ μέλλει . μέλλοι (see cr. n.) might possibly be defended, if it referred to a previous statement to the same effect (‘if, as we saw,’ etc.). But there has been no such statement, unless with Stephanus we write ἀκρατότατον for ἀκρότατον in 459 E. εἴπερ γε μέλλει, conjectured by Herwerden, would be in danger of meaning κατακρύψουσιν, εἴπερ μέλλει κτλ. As it is, εἴπερ μέλλει qualifies ὡς πρέπει ‘as is proper.’ Gl. ‘If the class of guardians is to be kept pure.’ Glauco, in fact, takes the words out of Socrates' mouth. On the meaning and usage of εἴπερ in Greek see E. S. Thompson's edition of the Meno pp. 258—264.

πᾶσαν μηχανὴν κτλ. Aristotle (Pol. B 3. 1262^{a} 14 ff.) argues that no precautions would prevent parents from occasionally recognising their children. In such cases Plato might reasonably hope that the general weakening of parental sentiment would secure his city against serious harm.

ἄλλας . The mothers of the children who have been exposed.

αὐτῶν τούτων : viz. the mothers. This provision is conceived in their interests, rather than in the interests of the children, as the next clause also shews.

θηλάσονται . θηλάσωνται has more MS authority than θηλάσονται; but the future indicative (and not the aorist subjunctive) is the regular construction after ὅπως in semi-final clauses: cf. IV 429 D, VII 519 E. The exceptions are—besides this passage— Symp. 198 E, Phaed. 91 A, Gorg. 480 A, B, 510 A. In most of these places there is inferior MS authority for the future, which editors now for the most part read. See Weber Entwickelung d. Absichtssätze in Schanz's Beiträge II 2. p. 66; and for the confusion in Paris A of ο and ω Introd. § 5.

προὐθέμεθα . See cr. n. προὐθέμεθα is intrinsically so much better than προθυμούμεθα that we can hardly refuse to regard this as one of the passages in which v has preserved the right reading. See Introd. § 5.

ἔφαμεν . Cf. 459 B.

ἐξ ἀκμαζόντων . The same principle was observed in Sparta (Xen. Rep. Lac. 1. 6 and Plut. Lyc. 15. 4). It is possible, though I believe incapable of proof, that Plato's limits of age were in agreement with Spartan usage.

τὰ εἴκοσι ἔτη κτλ. A woman's ἀκμή lasts ‘the twenty,’ a man's the thirty' years. Glauco asks ‘which twenty and which thirty?’ and Socrates then explains. τά before εἴκοσι is correctly explained by Stallbaum: “articulum ponit de certo quodam cogitans temporis spatio quod deinceps definit accuratius.” The antecedent to αὐτῶν is not simply ἔτη (so J. and C., with the English translators), but the duplicate expression εἴκοσι ἔτη and τριάκοντα. In γυναικὶ μὲν κτλ. Socrates proceeds as if Glauco had not interrupted: the construction is μέτριος χρόνος ἀκμῆς—γυναικί, ἀνδρὶ δὲ τὰ τριάκοντα, γυναικὶ μὲν— τίκτειν, ἀνδρὶ δὲ—γεννᾶν. τὸ ποῖον, τὰ ποῖα and the like are idiomatically used in asking for further specification, and are sometimes only impatient interruptions, intended to draw attention to the important point and add liveliness to the style: see Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 540. Schneider takes τὰ εἴκοσι ἔτη and τὰ τριάκοντα as twenty and thirty years of age respectively, comparing τῶν ἐνενήκοντα ἐτῶν in Tim. 21 A, but χρόνος in χρόνος ἀκμῆς means duration, as is clear from ἀμφοτέρων—φρονήσεως below. It should be observed that in the Laws Plato fixes the inferior limit for men sometimes at 25 (772 D), sometimes at 30 (721 A, 785 B). By thirty-five he expected them to be married (ib.). Girls are to marry between 16 (785 B) or 18 (833 D) and 20 (ib.). Cf. Hesiod OD. 696 ff., pseudo-Solon Fr. 27. 9 and Arist. Pol. H 16. 1335^{a} 28. The Greeks seem generally to have recommended men to marry a little under or a little over thirty. See on this subject Blümner Privatalterthümer p. 36 note 1.

τίκτειν τῇ πόλει ‐‐ γεννᾶν τῇ πόλει . These phrases express concisely the Platonic view of marriage. They are equally applicable to the Spartan ideal, and may have been borrowed from Sparta. Cf. Plut. Pyrrh. 28. 5 τῶν δὲ πρεσβυτέρων τινὲς ἐπηκολούθουν βοῶντες· Οἷχε, Ἀκρότατε, καὶ οἷφε τὰν Χιλωνίδα· μόνον παῖδας ἀγαθοὺς τᾷ Σπάρτᾳ ποίει. “What Lucan observes about Cato of Utica, is applicable to the Guardians of the Platonic Republic: — Venerisque huic maximus usus | progenies: Urbi pater est, Urbique maritus” (Phars. II 387 f.) Grote.

ἐπειδὰν ‐‐ ἀκμήν : ‘when he has outlived his swiftest prime of running.’ The expression ὀξυτατην δρόμου ἀκμήν is doubtless borrowed from some epinikian poet, perhaps Bacchylides or Pindar. The dactylic rhythm is not in itself enough to justify us in assigning the phrase (with Herwerden) to epic or elegy. The author of the quotation was probably speaking not of a man, but of a race-horse. By applying the phrase (of course in a metaphorical sense) to his bridegrooms, Plato contrives again to suggest the now familiar analogy of a ‘breeding-stud of horses and mares’: see on 460 C. The comparison gains in realism and point, if it was the custom of antiquity, as it is now, to bring a first-rate racer to the stud (ἱπποφόρβιον, ἱπποτροφεῖον) when he ceased to run. This is probable in itself, and supported to some extent by a comparison of Plut. Lyc. 15. 12 ἵππους ὑπὸ τοῖς κρατίστοις τῶν ὀχείων βιβάζουσι, χάριτι πείθοντες ἢ μισθῷ τοὺς κυρίους with Virg. Georg. 3. 209—211. Just so Plato will not allow his guardians to marry until the fever in the blood has somewhat cooled: cf. Laws 775 B—776 B and J. B. Mayor in Cl. Rev. X p. 111. Stallbaum was the first to detect the poetical quotation. J. and C., though translating by “his swiftest prime of running,” follow Schleiermacher in understanding the phrase literally; but we may fairly doubt if Greek runners had passed their prime at 25, and, even if they had, “non hic erat tali designationi locus, nisi forte ob id ipsum, quod cursui minus idonei forent, ad nuptias idoneos visos credimus” (Schneider). παρῇ means ‘let go by,’ “hinter sich hat” (Schneider): cf. such expressions as παριέναι καιρόν (II 370 B al.), νύκτα μέσην παρέντες (Hdt. VIII 9), and especially Soph. O. C. 1230 εὖτ’ ἂν τὸ νέον παρῇ ‘when he hath seen youth go by’ (Jebb), and Bacchylides 3. 88 ed. Kenyon ἀνδρὶ δ) [οὐ θ]έμις πολιὸν π[αρ]έντα | γῆρας θάλ[εια]ν αὖτις ἀγκομίσσαι | ἥβαν.

ἂν λάθῃ . “Si non latuerit foetus praeter legem susceptus, ne in lucem quidem edetur, sed antea opprimetur” (Schneider). Cf. C below.

γεννήσεται = ‘will be produced’ must, if right, refer to birth (“hervorkommen wird” Schneider), otherwise φύς is superfluous. Bekker and others are possibly right in reading γενήσεται with Ξ^{1} q, and some other MSS: cf. Hdt. VI 69, where Stein prints γεγενημένος in place of γεγεννημένος. See Introd. § 5.

φὺς ἅς . See cr. n. and Introd. § 5.

ἐξ ὠφελίμων κτλ. Cf. IV 424 A note

ὑπὸ σκότου . Cf. (with J. and C.) σκότιος=‘an unlawful child.’

γεγονώς =‘produced,’ ‘a product of,’ is cancelled by Hartman; but φύς is too far away, and γίγνεσθαι (‘to be produced’) is sufficiently accurate: cf. γένηται in 461 C.

ἀνέγγυον : ‘unauthorised,’ because the child of an irregular union. An ἀνέγγυος γάμος is a marriage without an ἐγγύη or contract between the parents of the betrothing parties (Blümner Privatalt. p. 262 note 2).

ᾧ. ᾗ is read by Ξ, Vind. E and Eusebius (Praep. Ev. XIII 19. 18); but αὐτούς includes both sexes, and in such cases the masculine is preferred to the feminine. Hartman strangely thinks ᾧ neuter.

θυγατρὶ κτλ. The cases enumerated are all in the direct line, and nothing is said forbidding unions between ‘brothers’ and ‘sisters.’ See however 461 E note Greek law permitted the marriage of uncles with nieces, aunts with nephews, and even half-brothers and halfsisters, provided they were not ὁμομήτριοι (Becker's Charicles E. T. p. 478, with the passages there cited). Some of Plato's contemporaries, notably the Cynics, entertained peculiarly revolting views on this subject, and the question was frequently agitated in his time: see Dümmler Proleg. zu Pl. St. pp. 52 ff. The Stoics agreed with the Cynics: see the authorities cited in Henkel Stud. zur Geschichte d. Gr. Lehre vom Staat p. 30.

καὶ ταῦτά γ’ ἤδη κτλ. : ‘and all this only after we have exhorted them’ etc. ἤδη goes with ἀφήσομεν (or the like) understood after πάντα. J. and C. wrongly connect πάντα with προθυμεῖσθαι (‘to use all diligence’). The voice should pause a little before διακελευσάμενοι.

μηδ’ εἰς φῶς κτλ. : ne in lucem quidem efferre. Much less shall we permit it to live if born: see App. IV. μηδέ prepares the way for ἐὰν δέ τι βιάσηται κτλ. Hartman strangely prefers μή, “cum post μάλιστα coniunctio μηδέ prorsus frigeat.” But μάλιστα μέν is, of course, ‘if possible.’

μηδὲ ἕν . See cr. n. μηδέ γ’ ἕν occurs in a few inferior MSS besides A, and is read by Baiter and others, but we do not find γε thus interposed between οὐδέ (μηδέ) and εἷς.

γένηται κτλ. γένηται sc. κύημα. βιάσηται means ‘force its way’ sc. εἰς τὸ φῶς (J. and C.). The extreme emphasis shews what importance Plato attached to this provision. The procuring of abortion, though perhaps in certain cases punishable by law (Meier and Schömann Att. Process p. 381), was in practice common enough: see Blümner Privatalt. p. 76. Plato permits it also in the Laws (740 D). The general Greek sentiment on this matter is fairly represented by Aristotle when he says (Pol. H 16. 1335^{b} 22 ff.) ὡρίσθαι γὰρ δεῖ τῆς τεκνοποιίας τὸ πλῆθος. ἐὰν δέ τισι γίνηται παρὰ ταῦτα συνδυασθέντων, πρὶν αἴσθησιν ἐγγενέσθαι καὶ ζωήν, ἐμποιεῖσθαι δεῖ τὴν ἄμβλωσιν· τὸ γὰρ ὅσιον καὶ τὸ μὴ διωρισμένον τῇ αἰσθήσει καὶ τῷ ζῆν ἔσται .

τιθέναι κτλ. : ‘so deal with them.’ τιθέναι is more delicate than ἐκτιθέναι, which was read before Bekker, although it has no MS authority. Herwerden suggests that τιθέναι means θάπτειν (as in 469 A), but Plato expresses himself with more refinement. τροφῆς does not mean, as some are fain to believe, merely the educational system reserved for the guardians: see on 459 E and App. IV.

πατέρας κτλ. : ‘how will they distinguish one another's fathers’ etc.? The Aristophanic parallel is here very close: Πῶς οὖν οὕτω ζώντων ἡμῶν τοὺς αὑτοῦ παῖδας ἕκαστος | ἔσται δυνατὸς διαγιγνώσκειν; Τί δὲ δεῖ; πατέρας γὰρ ἅπαντας | τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους αὑτῶν εἶναι τοῖσι χρόνοισιν νομιοῦσιν (Eccl. 635—637). The question touches an obvious difficulty in any system of the community of children; but, as a link in the chain of evidence connecting the Ecclesiazusae and the Republic, the parallel deserves to carry weight, although it has sometimes been pressed too far. See on the one hand Teichmüller Lit. Fehd. 1 pp. 18—19 and Chiappelli Riv. di Filolog. XI p. 213, and on the other Zeller^{4} II 1. p. 551 note 2. Cf. also App. I.

δεκάτῳ κτλ. : ‘in the tenth month and also in the seventh month.’ δή (as J. and C. remark) draws attention to the more exceptional case: cf. II 367 C note The Greek cannot, I think, be taken as an inexact way of saying “from seven to ten months after” (J. and C.). In point of fact the majority of ancient writers on the subject denied that children were ever born in the eighth month of pregnancy: see Gellius Noct. Att. III 16 and Censorinus de die natali 7. 2.

ἐγέννων : ‘were engaged in begetting children’: cf. 460 E, and 461 B (τῶν ἔτι γεννώντων). Richards has pointed out (Cl. Rev. IV p. 7) that the imperfect refers “to the whole time of life during which father and mother were allowed, if the lot fell upon them, to take part in the regular unions.” Cf. Tim. 18 D νομιοῦσι δὲ πάντες πάντας αὐτοὺς ὁμογενεῖς, ἀδελφὰς μὲν καὶ ἀδελφοὺς ὅσοιπερ ἂν τῆς πρεπούσης ἐντὸς ἡλικίας γίγνωνται. Jowett's version—“all who were begotten at the time when their fathers and mothers came together”—mistakes both ἐν and ἐγέννων. Schneider translates the passage correctly.

ὥστε ‐‐ ἅπτεσθαι . I agree with Richards in understanding this of the “irregular unions which were last mentioned” (461 C). But in spite of the explicit reference in ὃ νῦν δὴ ἐλέγομεν, Plato has not as yet forbidden such unions between ‘brothers’ and ‘sisters’: see 461 C note The discrepancy is hard to explain, especially as the list in 461 C seems intended to be exhaustive. The effect of the prohibition (owing to the meaning now given to ‘brother’ and ‘sister’) would be greatly to restrict, but not to abolish, unauthorised liaisons.

ἀδελφοὺς κτλ. refers only to State-marriages, as ὁ κλῆρος shews. Without this exemption Plato's proposals would (according to Richards l.c.) “have rendered all unions whatever practically impossible.” Surely not; although they would have unduly favoured the τηλύγετος παῖς. A son, for example, who is born when his mother is 21 and his father 26, cannot marry till he is 49, because he is 29 before his bride can possibly be born, and she cannot marry under 20; whereas a son, whose father is 54 and mother 39 when he is born, can marry a girl only one year younger than himself, because his father and mother retire at 55 and 40 respectively. Did Plato intend the sons of elderly couples to marry young, and those of young couples to marry late? Such an inference is unlikely, although it is the logical outcome of his theories. In any case Plato did well to introduce a saving clause. The κομψὸς κλῆρος, obedient to the archons, would couple ‘brothers’ and ‘sisters,’ whenever it seemed desirable in the interests of the State, so long as they were not really blood-relations. (This the archons of course would know.) Apollo's priestess would platonize. We must suppose that her assent is given in advance, and once for all (although προσαναιρῇ is present and follows ξυμπίπτῃ), unless she had an accredited representative on the spot, which there is nothing to indicate. On Plato's attitude to Apollo see IV 427 C note

461E - 464B Let us now endeavour to shew that community of wives and children is best, and in agreement with the general plan of our constitution. That it is the best policy Plato proves as follows. A legislator should above all things aim at maintaining unity within his city. The most effective instrument for this purpose is community of pleasure and pain. As in an individual man, the sufferings of a single member affect the whole, so also in a well-governed city, the joys and sorrows of every citizen are shared by all. It is easy to shew that our ideal city fulfils this condition in a unique degree, both by means of its other institutions, and more especially through the community of wives and children.

ἑπομένη ‐‐ πολιτείᾳ . This topic was not specified in the original distribution of the subject (458 B), but it is closely connected with ὡς μακρῷ βελτίστη. Plato does not deal with it till 464 B.

βεβαιώσασθαι κτλ. Hirschig cancelled παρὰ τοῦ λόγου: but cf. (with Stallbaum) Gorg. 489 A ἵνα—βεβαιώσωμαι ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ. ‘The argument’ is personified, as often.

ἆρα . <εἰ> ἄρα was suggested by Dobree; but cf. (with Stallbaum) Gorg. 475 B πρῶτον μὲν δὴ σκεψώμεθα, ἆρα—ὑπερβάλλει κτλ. The exact translation is ‘to enquire, Do the institutions we have described’ etc.

ἔχομεν οὖν κτλ. Cf. IV 422 E. στάσις was the greatest evil which a Greek city had to fear, and Athens had suffered from it grievously. Now individualism was the peculiar pride and glory of the Athenian State (Thuc. II 37), so that we need not wonder if Plato traced στάσις to individualism, and rushed to the opposite extreme. Cf. Krohn Pl. Fr. p. 4, Pöhlmann Gesch. d. ant. Kommunismus etc. pp. 146—184, and see on II 369 A.

ποιῇ μίαν . J. and C. assert that Plato “has no idea of a unity of opposites or differences—τὸ ἀντίξουν συμφέρον,” and Aristotle argues to the same effect in Pol. B 2. 1261^{a} 22 ff. But it is in fact on such a unity that the entire fabric of Plato's city rests: see IV 423 D note, and cf. also 432 A, 443 D. The perfect city is a ἕν with three πολλά—rulers, auxiliaries, farmers and artisans, or, if rulers and auxiliaries are classed together as guardians, then with two. Plato's object throughout this episode is to keep the whole city ‘one’ by preventing one of its constituent factors, viz. the guardians, from becoming ‘many.’ If the guardians are united—so he holds—no danger to the city's unity need be apprehended from the others (465 B). With the sentiment generally cf. Ar. Eccl. 594 and 674 (μίαν οἴκησίν φημι ποιήσειν συρρήξασ’ εἰς ἓν ἅπαντα | ὥστε βαδίζειν εἰς ἀλλήλους). See also on 463 E and App. I.

οἱ μὲν ‐‐ τῆς πόλεως . As when a national disaster is made the occasion of a party victory. Plato may be thinking of scenes which he had witnessed in his native city. Bosanquet cites an excellent illustration from Dem. de Cor. 217.

καὶ ‐‐ ταὐτά : i.e. ὅταν μὴ ἅμα φθέγγωνται—τό τε ἀλλότριον καὶ τὸ οὐκ ἀλλότριον. Hartman ejects καὶ περὶ τοῦ ἀλλοτρίου as a “futile interpretamentum” on τὸ οὐκ ἐμόν. There is nothing to prove that καὶ—ταὐτά was read by Aristotle ( Pol. B 3. 1261^{b} 18), Plutarch (140 D, 484 B, 767 D), Iamblichus (de vita Pythag. 167) or Proclus (in remp. ed. Kroll II pp. 78. 28, 365. 11), though Iamblichus uses the word ἀλλότριον instead of Plato's οὐκ ἐμόν. But as none of these authors pretends to be quoting Plato's ipsissima verba, the omission proves nothing. Although the words add nothing to the sense, they approach the matter from another point of view, and are in my judgment certainly genuine.

ἐν ᾗτινι κτλ. ‘Thus in whatever city the largest number of men agree in applying these expressions, “mine” and “not mine,” to the same thing,’ etc. τοῦτο agrees with the nearest of the two objects, viz. τὸ ἐμόν. For the use of ἐπί cf. Parm. 147 D. The reading ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό—see cr. n.—is as old as Iamblichus: see the passage referred to above, where Iamblichus has ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ τὸ ἐμὸν φθέγγεσθαι καὶ τὸ ἀλλότριον. It is retained by the majority of editors; but no other instance of λέγειν ἐπί τι has yet been adduced, and the expression is certainly very strange. φέρειν ὄνομα ἐπί τι ( Soph. 237 C, D: cf. also Tim. 37 E), of which Schneider reminds us, is a different thing from λέγειν ὄνομα ἐπί τι. Various emendations have been proposed. The choice seems to me to lie between ἐπὶ τῷ αὐτῷ and ἐπὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ. The latter emendation—which I once adopted—was (as I learn from Schneider) proposed by Küster instead of ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό in Iamblichus: cf. ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τοῦ δακτύλου ἐλέγομεν VII 524 E (‘in the case of the finger’) al. Although the genitive may be right, the dative now seems to me slightly more natural and easy. Hartman ejects ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό altogether, but there is no occasion for the knife. Cf. IV 436 B note For the error see Introd. § 5.

καὶ ἥτις δὴ κτλ. δή is illative, and καί ‘also.’ καὶ—ἔχει (sc. ἄριστα διοικεῖται) is certainly interrogative, as Schneider pointed out: see in D below τοῦτο δ ἐρωτᾷς. Plato recurs to his favourite analogy between man and the State: cf. II 368 E f. notes

οἷον ὅταν κτλ. Poschenrieder (Die Pl. Dial. in ihrem Verhältnisse zu d. Hippokratischen Schr. p. 67) cites a remarkable parallel from the author of the treatise de locis in homine (Littré VI p. 278 c. 1) εἴ τις βούλεται τοῦ σώματος ἀπολαβὼν μέρος κακῶς ποιέειν τὸ σμικρότατον, πᾶν τὸ σῶμα αἰσθήσεται τὴν πεῖσιν, ὁκοίη ἄν τις ᾗ, διὰ τόδε, ὅτι τοῦ σώματος τὸ σμικρότατον πάντα ἔχει, ὅσαπερ καὶ τὸ μέγιστον· τοῦτο δ’ ὁποῖον ἄν τις πάθῃ ἐπαναφέρει πρὸς τὴν ὁμοεθνίην ἕκαστον πρὸς τὴν ἑωυτοῦ, ἤν τε κακόν, ἤν τε ἀγαθόν ᾗ· καὶ διὰ ταῦτα καὶ ἀλγέει καὶ ἥδεται ὑπὸ ἔθνεος τοῦ σμικροτάτου τὸ σῶμα, ὅτι ἐν τῷ σμικροτάτῳ πάντ’ ἔνι τὰ μέρεα καὶ ταῦτα ἐπαναφέρουσι ἐς τὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν ἕκαστα καὶ διαγγέλλουσι πάντα. The ‘sympathy’ of the different parts of the human body was a Hippocratean tenet (ξυμπαθέα πάντα de alimento IX c. 23 Littré). Cf. Shakespeare Othello III 4. 146—148, “For let our finger ache, and it indues Our other healthful members ev'n to that sense Of pain.” Plato goes farther, and represents the partnership as extending also to the soul: see next note.

πᾶσα ἡ κοινωνία κτλ. : ‘the entire partnership pervading the body with the soul, organized into a single composite organization, viz. that of the ruling power in the partnership’ etc. Plato's language is precise, but difficult. I take ἡ—ψυχήν as defining the κοινωνία. κατὰ τὸ σῶμα is written rather than τοῦ σώματος, because the partnership is not only a partnership of body with soul, but also a partnership of the different parts of body with one another. τεταγμένη—see cr. n. and App. V —appears to suit σύνταξις better than τεταμένη. A σύνταξις is the ordered combination of two or more elements: cf. Tim. 24 C and Laws 903 D ψυχὴ συντεταγμένη σώματι. The words τοῦ ἄρχοντος define the σύνταξις; although neuter in gender, they really refer, not to the soul, but to the whole σύνταξις or σύνολον, i.e. ὁ ἄνθρωπος. It is ὁ ἄνθρωπος who rules in the partnership, although he is himself a partner only in the sense in which the whole is partner with its parts. The expression ὁ ἄνθρωπος τὸν δάκτυλον ἀλγεῖ is thus seen to be as exact as possible. The confusion between τεταγμένος and τεταμένος is easy: συντεταμένως, for example, and συντεταγμένως are often confused in MSS: see Ast's Lex. Plat. s.v. ξυντεταμένως and my edition of the Apology p. 127. Cf. also infra 474 A note

ἐν αὐτῇ : i.e. ἐν τῇ κοινωνίᾳ (so also Schneider), not (as Stallbaum) ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ. Plato means that every single man (ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου above) is a single organized whole—a partnership in which the whole is partner with, and rules, the parts. See also App. V.

ᾔσθετό ‐‐ ξυνήλγησεν : ‘momentary’ aorists: cf. Theaet. 156 E.

ἄλλου ὁτουοῦν : sc. besides the finger.

ἑνὸς δὴ κτλ. We may compare the Stoic doctrine “incommoda autem et commoda (ita enim εὐχρηστήματα et δυσχρηστήματα appello) communia (sc. inter sapientes) esse voluerunt” (see Cicero de Fin. III 69, and Madvig's note). Not a few of Plato's regulations in Book V foreshadow the communistic theories of Stoicism: see Dyroff Ethik d. alten Stoa pp. 211 f., 226—231. Plato however contrives to make his communism live; whereas the Stoics seldom did.

αὕτη . See cr. n. Schneider says αὐτή is “ea potissimum,” referring to VII 516 B, where however we should (I believe) read οὗτος. See note ad loc. Here αὕτη is required by the contrast with εἴτε καὶ ἄλλη τις μᾶλλον. For the error cf. VIII 552 A, where q and several MSS wrongly read αὐτή. See also Introd. § 5.

ἔστι . For the syntax see on II 363 A. ἔστι is a privileged verb in Attic prose: cf. Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 61.

δεσπότας . Demosthenes remarks that the subjects in an oligarchy are ‘cowards and slaves’ (ἄνανδροι καὶ δοῦλοι). See in Timocr. 75 and Whibley Gk. Oligarchies p. 143.

ἄρχοντας . Plato is thinking of the Athenian Archons. The object of this chapter, which seems at first sight somewhat loosely constructed, is to prove that συμπάθεια prevails to a unique extent in the Platonic city. The appellations σωτῆρες and ἐπίκουροι, on the one hand, and μισθοδόται and τροφεῖς on the other, involve a greater degree of interdependence than is expressed by the corresponding names in other cities. The archons too are more than fellow-rulers: they are fellow guardians, their official designation among one another serving continually to remind them of their duty to the lower classes. Among themselves they use the terms of family relationship, and with these their actions correspond. Thus the distinction between meum and tuum is more nearly obliterated than in any other city. Everything is meum.

ἐπικούρους . The official designation of the second order is applied by the people to the ruling class as a whole. They are expected to look upon the ἐπίκουροι as ‘helpers of the people’ rather than as the rulers' auxiliaries, although it is the latter function which gave them their name (III 414 B). This is clear from σωτῆράς τε καὶ ἐπικούρους, both of which epithets are suggestive of protecting deities. See also on 464 B.

παντὶ γὰρ ‐‐ ἐντυγχάνειν . A slight exaggeration: see 461 D, E notes Cf. Hdt. IV 104 ἐπίκοινον δὲ τῶν γυναικῶν τὴν μῖξιν ποιεῦνται (οἱ Ἀγάθυρσοι), ἵνα κασίγνητοί τε ἀλλήλων ἔωσι καὶ οἰκήιοι ἐόντες πάντες μήτε φθόνῳ μήτε ἔχθει χρέωνται ἐς ἀλλήλους and ib. 180 ad fin. Similar motives for domestic communism are mentioned by Diod. Sic. II 58. See also, for other traces, whether real or legendary, of community of wives and children in antiquity Xanthus Fr. 28, Ephorus Fr. 76 and Theopompus Fr. 222 (in Müller Frag. Hist. Gr. Vol. I), together with Arist. Pol. B 3. 1262^{a} 19.

περί τε κτλ. τε is ἀνακόλουθον: we should expect καὶ περὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ξυγγενεῖς to follow. Instead, we have a change of construction, and καὶ περὶ πατέρων—καὶ περὶ τῶν ἄλλων ξυγγενῶν (line 27). Cf. II 373 B note ἤ=‘alioquin,’ as often after a verb of obligation (here δεῖν): cf. VI 489 E, 503 A.

νόμος : sc. ἔστι πράττειν.

αὐτῷ : though αὐτοῖς in C: cf. I 347 A note

φῆμαι . See on III 415 D. φήμη is the half-personified vox populi, vox Dei: cf. Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. p. 165. It is the quasi-personification of φῆμαι which accounts for the active ὑμνήσουσιν (‘will sing in the ears of’ etc.): cf. IX 573 A περὶ αὐτὸν βομβοῦσαι.

ὃ ‐‐ ῥῆμα is the object of ξυμφωνήσουσιν (Schneider), just as in IV 432 A ταὐτόν depends upon ξυνᾴδοντας. Aristotle's criticism deserves to be quoted (Pol. B 3. 1262^{a} 1 ff.) οὕτως ἕκαστος ‘ἐμὸσ’ λέγει τὸν εὖ πράττοντα τῶν πολιτῶν ἢ κακῶς, ὁπόστος τυγχάνει τὸν ἀριθμὸν ὤν, οἷον ‘ἐμὸς ἢ τοῦ δεῖνος,’ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον λέγων καθ’ ἕκαστον τῶν χιλίων, ἢ ὅσων ἡ πόλις ἐστί, καὶ τοῦτο διστάζων· ἄδηλον γὰρ ᾧ συνέβη γενέσθαι τέκνον ἢ σωθῆναι γενόμενον. There is a far deeper truth in Plato's saying than in Aristotle's animadversions thereupon, and “das schöne Wort, dass alle dasselbe mein nennen sollen, hat es nicht verdient, von Aristoteles mit logischen Regeln gehetzt zu werden. Die Geschichte hat überall wo eine erhabene Idee eine Gruppe von Menschen so durchdringen sollte, dass der Wille jedes Einzelnen nur auf dieses Gemeinsame gerichtet sei, dem platonischen Gedanken im Prinzipe Recht gegeben” (Nohle Die Statslehre Platos etc. p. 133). See also on 457 B ff.

ἔφαμεν κτλ. 462 B, C. οὐκοῦν—ἕξουσιν sums up. ὃ δὴ—ὀνομάσουσιν is parenthetical, ‘to which, as we have seen, they will apply the name “mine.”’

ἀπεικάζοντες κτλ. See on 462 C and App. V.

ἐπικούροις . Why not φύλαξι? The word φύλακες regularly includes both the ἄρχοντες and the ἐπίκουροι, but it is strange to find ἐπίκουροι including the τέλεοι φύλακες or rulers (see on II 374 D), as it appears to do here and in 466 A. The following explanations may be suggested. (1) Plato intends the community of wives and children to extend only to the Auxiliaries, and not also to the Guardians. This view is taken by Blaschke (Familienu. Gütergem. d. Pl. St. p. 10), who asserts that the Rulers proper have already past the limits of age prescribed for matrimony. In point of fact, however, a man may become a τέλεος φύλαξ at 50 (VII 540 A, B), whereas he can marry till he is 55 (460 E). (2) As by far the largest number of husbands would be only Auxiliaries, Plato speaks somewhat loosely, as if matrimonial community were confined to them. This explanation is possible enough in itself, but fails to explain the usage in 466 A. (3) ἐπίκουροι is used with the new and deeper meaning given to it in 463 B (where see note), ‘helpers of the people,’ rather than in its original and technical sense of the rulers' auxiliaries. This suits all the passages, and is in my judgment what Plato intended. ἐπίκουρος is not the only term whose connotation deepens as the Republic proceeds: cf. II 376 B, III 392 C notes

464B - 465D Domestic communism is also in harmony with the general communistic character of the city. It will cement the union of the guardians and so consolidate the State. It will also deliver us from lawsuits arising out of disputes about the family and property. In cases of attempted violence to the person, we shall expect a man's fellows to defend him. The older citizens will exercise disciplinary powers over the younger; reverence and fear will keep the latter from retaliating. All these arrangements will tend to keep the rulers at peace with one another, and, if they are united, we shall not expect sedition in the rest of the State. Other minor advantages there are, too trivial to specify.

ὡμολογοῦμεν . I formerly read <*>μολογοῦμεν with Ξ q^{2}, Stallbaum, and others; but Schneider, as I now think, is right in retaining the imperfect and referring it to the original mention of domestic communism in Book IV. The whole of this discussion may in fact be regarded as a defence in the form of an explanation of the sentence IV 423 E— 424 A. See also App. I.

τροφὴν λαμβάνοντας κτλ. summarises III 416 D, E.

ἑτέρους =μὴ τοὺς αὐτούς depends on ὀνομάζοντας understood. D. and V. make ἕλκοντα govern γυναῖκα— ἑτέρους, as Stallbaum formerly did, but Plato could not have said anything so ludicrous.

ὁμοπαθεῖς : ‘simultaneously affected by’ D. and V. ὁμοιοπαθής (Ast) would mean ‘of like passions with.’

ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν with οἰχήσεται=‘almost have disappeared,’ “so gut wie verschwunden sein” (Schneider): see on I 341 B. The English translators either omit or misinterpret the phrase. Aristophanes furnishes several pretty close parallels to Plato's reasoning here: cf. Eccl. 560—610 and especially 657 (ἀλλ’ οὐδὲ δίκαι πρῶτον ἔσονται)—672. See Chiappelli Riv. di Filol. XI pp. 212 ff. and on the whole subject App. I.

οὐδὲ ‐‐ αὐτοῖς . The first οὐδέ is of course ne—quidem. Hoefer should not have conjectured οὔτε—οὔτε (de part. Pl. p. 41).

δικαίως is ejected by Cobet and Herwerden, but δίκαιον just below supports it. There cannot justly be any lawsuits for outrages on the person, if we declare it just and honourable for a man to take the law into his own hands. This explanation is perhaps better than to translate ‘we may fairly suppose that there will not be’ etc.

ἥλιξι κτλ. Cf. (with J. and C.) Laws 879 E ἧλιξ δὲ ἥλικα—ἀμυνέσθω κατὰ φύσιν ἄνευ βέλους ψιλαῖς ταῖς χερσίν. It should be remembered that in cases of αἰκεία the guilty party was the one ὃς ἂν ἄρξῃ χει<*>ῶν ἀδίκων πρότερος (Meier u. Schömann Att. Process p. 648).

ἀνάγκην ‐‐ τιθέντες =‘curae corporum necessitatem imponentes,’ ‘compelling them to keep themselves in condition.’ Cf. Xen. Rep. Lac. 4. 6 ἀνάγκη δ’ αὐτοῖς εὐ εξίας ἐπιμελεῖσθαι· καὶ γὰρ πυκτεύουσι διὰ τὴν ἔριν, ὅπου ἂν ξυμβάλωσι. It is probably of Sparta that Plato is thinking. I have now reverted to the best supported reading, although the use of τιθέντες as virtually equivalent to ἐπιτιθέντες is not free from difficulty. There is considerable MS authority (including II) for ἀνάγκῃ, and as ἐπιμέλειαν was read by A^{1} (see cr. n.) and several other MSS, I once conjectured <ἐν> ἀνάγκῃ σωμάτων ἐπιμέλειαν τιθέντες, taking ἐν ἀνάγκῃ as meaning ἀναγκαίαν; but this idiom is very rare except with ἐστί, ἦν and the like. Stobaeus (Flor. 43. 102) and Stallbaum read ἀνάγκην σωμάτων ἐπιμελείας. In q and two other MSS the text runs ἀνάγκῃ (or ἀνάγκη) σωμάτων ἐπιμελείας τιθέντες. Does this mean ‘requiring them to guard against violence to the person’ (ἀνάγκῃ σωμάτων)? If Plato meant to convey this meaning, it would be preferable to read ἀνάγκῃ σωμάτων ἐπιμέλειαν τιθέντες (for which there is also better MS authority), or possibly ἀνάγκῃ σωμάτων <*>πιμέλειαν <ἀντι> τιθέντες, but ἀνάγκῃ σωμάτων would be a fantastic expression, though perhaps intelligible after βιαίων and αἰκείας. On the whole, I think the reading printed above has most in its favour.

ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ : i.e. by a personal encounter.

πρεσβυτέρῳ κτλ. This too is probably Spartan: cf. Xen. Rep. Lac. 2. 10. Patriarchal discipline is in perfect harmony with Plato's conception of the State as a single family.

καὶ μὴν ὅτι γε κτλ. An anacoluthon, the construction being broken by οἶμαι δ’ οὐδὲ κτλ.: see I 352 B note and infra 471 C. Here the apodosis would have been δῆλον ἂν εἴη or the like: cf. Stallbaum on Laws 677 B. Schneider and others suppose that ὡς τὸ εἰκός is substituted ἀνακολούθως for εἰκός ἐστι— a tolerably common form of anacoluthon in Plato and elsewhere (I 347 A note): but such an idiom is awkward here. It is difficult again to supply δῆλον from Glauco's answer, though the presence of δῆλον may render the anacoluthon a trifle easier; nor can a governing verb be elicited from προστετάξεται. Others propose to abolish the anacoluthon: Ast by reading ὅ γε νεώτερος, Hartman by emending to προστετάξεσθαι <δῆλον>. Δῆλον. Καὶ μὴν κτλ. Neither alternative is satisfactory: and Hartman's is not even Greek. It should be noted that Aristophanes deals with the same subject in Eccl. 638 ff. See App. I.

ἄρχοντες . Stallbaum reads οἱ ἄρχοντες with q. “At varii sunt in civitate magistratus, neque semper eorundem nedum omnium est, tale quid mandare iunioribus” (Schneider).

τὸ ‐‐ βοηθεῖν . τό belongs to δέος, “ut sensus idem sit, ac si dictum esset δέος δὲ τὸ τῆς τῶν ἄλλων βοηθείας τῷ πάσχοντι. δέος ἐστὶ τοὺς ἄλλους βοηθεῖν quin recte dicatur, nemo ambigit: quidni etiam τὸ τοὺς ἄλλους βοηθεῖν δέος dicere liceat” (Schneider)? Cf. οὐ παρὰ φύσιν τὴν τοῦ θήλεος πρὸς τὸ ἄῤῥεν (466 D). Madvig's change of τό to τοῦ has met with much favour, and is accepted even by J. and C. To my mind it destroys the balance of the two clauses, by dropping the personification of δέος, while retaining that of αἰδώς. For the sense cf. Ar. Eccl. 641 —643 ἀλλ) <*> παρεστὼς οὐκ ἐπιτρέψει· τότε δ) αὐτοῖς οὐκ ἔμελ) οὐδὲν | τῶν ἀλλοτρίων (sc. πατέρων) ὅστις τύπτοι· νῦν δ’ ἢν πληγέντος ἀκούσῃ, | μὴ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον (illum ipsum sc. suum ipsius parentem, as Blaydes explains) τύπτῃ δεδιὼς τοῖς δρῶσιν τοῦτο μαχεῖται. Aristophanes' verses illustrate τοὺς μὲν ὡς ὑεῖς exactly; the parallel could scarcely be closer. Cf. App. I.

οὐδὲν δεινὸν μή . This construction occurs only four times in the Platonic corpus: viz. in Ap. 28 A, Phaed. 84 B, Gorg. 520 D, and Epp. 7. 344 E (Weber in Schanz's Beiträge II 2, p. 50).

κολακείας κτλ. πένητες has been variously explained as (1) for <αἷς ἔνοχοι ἂν εἶεν> πένητες or the like (Schneider), (2) in partitive apposition with the subject of ἀπηλλαγμένοι ἂν εἶεν (one of J. and C.'s alternatives), (3) nominative to ἴσχουσι (Shorey in A. J. Ph. XVI p. 237). J. and C. also suggest that κολακείας is “genitive singular in the same case as ὧν.” If so, we should read ἀλγηδόνος with q: but there is no room for doubt that κολακείας is the accusative plural. Of these interpretations (1) is too difficult, while (3) is hardly possible, unless πένητες is placed after ἴσχουσι, as was once proposed by Ast, who afterwards preferred to read ἀπηλλαγμένοι ἂν εἶεν <πένητες>, and finally wished to excise the word altogether. (2) is, I think, defensible, if we remember the Greek partiality for this kind of construction (IV 431 A note), and the occasional irregularities of Platonic style. See also on VIII 556 C, D. Jackson conjectures πένητος (‘the poor man's flatteries of the rich’), Stallbaum πενίας in the sense of πενήτων. I think πένητες is probably due to Plato: but if not, the word may be a gloss on κολακείας τε πλουσίων or on ἴσχουσι .

οἰκετῶν : not= οἰκείων as the Scholiast says, but domestici, ‘those of the household’ (οἱ κατὰ τὸν οἷκον πάντες Hesychius), including, of course, slaves. Where there is no οἰκία, as in Plato's eity, there can be no οἰκέται. Plato's communism involves the abolition of domestic slavery as well as of family ties. See also on 469 B, C.

τὰ μὲν ‐‐ παραδόντες : an interesting glimpse of the economic condition of the Athenian poor. Cf. Ar. Clouds 1172 ff. The agreement in tense makes it probable that πορισάμενοι, θέμενοι, and παραδόντες are grammatically coordinate; although the money must of course be procured before it is deposited. The asyndeton has a rhetorical effect: cf. II 362 B note Hartman would omit παραδόντες; but παραδιδόναι takes an infinitive more easily than τίθεσθαι .

ὅσα τε κτλ. : ‘and the various and manifold troubles which men suffer in connexion with such matters, all of them obvious enough and ignoble, and not worth spending words upon.’ δειλά τε for δῆλά τε δή has slight MS authority, but is only an absurd attempt to represent δἰ ἀπρέπειαν in C above. Still worse is the conjecture δοῦλά, which Herwerden approves.

465D - 466D The life of our guardians will be more glorious than that of victors in the games. So far from being unhappy, they are the happiest of the citizens, and any attempt to aggrandise themselves at the expense of their country will only make them miserable. We conclude that the best policy for a city is to make women share with men in everything, and such community is in harmony with the natural relations between the sexes.

ἀπαλλάξονται . I formerly adopted Cobet's conjecture ἀπηλλάξονται (N. L. p. 243), which is attractive in itself, and also because of its correspondence with ἀπηλλαγμένοι ἂν εἷεν in C. But even on the score of meaning the change can hardly be called a necessary one, and there is no MS authority for the form ἀπηλλάξονται either here or (so far as I can discover) elsewhere.

ὀλυμπιονῖκαι κτλ. ‘To him that overcometh’ etc. Plato frequently borrows similitudes and phrases from the national games. Cf. VI 503 A, 504 A, IX 583 B note, X 613 B, C, 621 D, and Phaedr. 256 B. Here he sings a sort of paean in honour of his more than Olympic conquerors. νίκη, ἡ <*>κ τοῦ δημοσίου τροφή (cf. Ap. 36 D), ἀναδοῦνται, γέρα (such as προεδρία Xenophanes Fr. 2. 7) and ταφῆς ἀξίας μετέχουσιν are each of them significant points in the comparison.

ὧν ‐‐ ὑπάρχει . The nominative of a relative pronoun is very rarely attracted into the genitive. Van Cleef (de attract. in enunt. rel. usu Plat. p. 42) cites only two other certain instances in Plato, viz. Theaet. 158 A and Alc. II 148 A. περὶ πάντων ὧν γέγονε is found in an Attic inscription about the end of the fourth century B.C. (Meisterhans^{3} p. 238). In Phaed. 69 A the nominative passes into a dative: cf. also οἷς ἐξόν in 466 A and Gorg. 492 B.

ζῶντές τε . We should expect τε to follow γέρα, but cf. 452 A. Here, as there, one or two MSS (with Stobaeus Flor. 43. 102 ad fin.) omit τε. Hartman is suspicious of ταφῆς ἀξίας μετέχουσιν, especially as καὶ μάλα—καλά refers to γέρα. καλά might conceivably be the marginal comment of an approving reader; but this kind of looseness is not uncommon in replies (cf. II 372 A, III 405 D, IV 436 E, 468 A, VI 500 B, VII 535 C, VIII 558 A, B, Gorg. 467 E and elsewhere, with Riddell Digest of Platonic Idioms § 306), and the expression ταφῆς ἀξίας μετέχουσιν is much too quiet and refined for the ordinary scribe.

οὐκ οἶδα ὅτου : said with a glance at Adimantus, who had been the spokesman of these views (IV 419 A ff.). Cf. the use of τισίν in II 372 E.

ποιοῖμεν ‐‐ σκεψοίμεθα . See cr. nn. I agree with most of the recent editors in writing the optative. σκεψόμεθα is perhaps defensible, for we may regard τοῦτο μὲν—σκεψόμεθα as oratio recta; but ποιοῦμεν would be very awkward, if not positively wrong, in view of the optative ὡς οἷοί τ’ εἶμεν. It is noticeable that Plato did not expressly promise to examine this point; although the solution is already hinted at in IV 420 B.

οἷς ἐξόν . Hirschig would write οἵ for οἷς, but see 465 D note The same attraction is found in other authors besides Plato: see Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 925.

ἐπικούρων has now a more exalted sense than formerly (see 463 B, 464 B notes), and includes the Rulers. Aristotle perversely misrepresents Plato's position in regard to the happiness of the guardians when he remarks ἔτι δὲ καὶ τὴν εὐδαιμονίαν ἀφαιρούμενος τῶν φυλάκων, ὅλην φησὶ δεῖν εὐδαίμονα ποιεῖν τὴν πόλιν τὸν νομοθέτην (Pol. B 5. 1264^{b} 15 ff.): see Susemihl ad loc.

ἐκεῖ . IV 420 ff.

διὰ δύναμιν : ‘because he has the power,’ “weil er kann” (Schneider). The possession of the power to do wrong is itself a temptation, according to Plato: cf. Gorg. 525 D οὗτοι (tyrants etc.) γὰρ διὰ τὴν ἐξουσίαν μέγιστα καὶ ἀνοσιώτατα ἁμαρτήματα ἁμαρτάνουσι, and ib. 526 A. Whibley points out that in the language of Greek politics and political science δύναμις was often used in a quasitechnical sense, denoting ‘power due to wealth, connexions,’ etc. (Gk. Olig. p. 125 note 7), but it can hardly have such a meaning here. Madvig conjectures, absurdly enough, διαδῦναι.

Ἡσίοδον . OD. 40.

μενεῖ ἐπί : ‘will remain true to,’ as in VI 496 B.

συγχωρεῖς is followed first by the accusative κοινωνίαν and afterwards by the accusative with infinitive κατά τε πόλιν—ἄῤῥεν (J. and C.). Ast desired to cancel καί before παίδων, and is commended for this by Hartman, who remarks “quasi unquam παῖδες gigni possint sine mulieris et viri κοινωνίᾳ!” “Nodum in scirpo,” as Schneider caustically observes. Plato is speaking of κοινωνία περὶ παίδων not between one woman and one man, but between several women and several men (τῶν γυναικῶν τοῖς ἀνδράσι). The children are common to all the guardians of either sex.

οὐ παρὰ φύσιν . Before taking leave of the subject, Plato reiterates the principle on which his communism rests. “Equal companionship in the work and interests of life is the natural relation of the sexes, whereas it is the existing relation which is unnatural” (Bosanquet). Cf. 456 C note

466D - 467E We have still to determine whether such a state of society is possible among men, as it is among the lower animals. But first let us provide for the management of war.

Our men and our women will take the field in common, accompanied by such of their offspring as are not too young. The children will attend to their parents' wants and encourage them by their presence on the ground. They will thus have the advantage of witnessing the actual exercise of the profession which awaits them in later life. The risk is considerable, but the issues at stake require it to be run: and we shall take every precaution to ensure the children's safety.

ὥσπερ ‐‐ ζῴοις . Cf. 451 D.

περὶ μὲν γὰρ κτλ. = ‘for as to war’ etc. is a dexterous way of making room for the episode on war, and at the same time postponing ‘the great peripeteia, the on-rushing of the third wave,’ which “is made more impressive by being delayed” (J. and C.). For μὲν γάρ cf. VIII 562 A note

ὥσπερ κτλ. Handicrafts were usually hereditary among the Greeks: cf. Prot. 328 A and Blümner Privatalt. p. 395 notes διακονεῖν should be taken with ἄξουσι. The change of construction is illustrated by Schneider (Addit. p. 41) from Tim. 74 B ἐμηχανᾶτο, ἵνα—παρέχοι, τὴν δὲ σάρκα—ἔσεσθαι κτλ. Herwerden inserts δεῖ, and Richards διδάσκωνται, after θέᾳ, but the text is probably sound.

μαχεῖται ‐‐ τέκῃ . Cf. Xen. Cyr. IV 3. 2 and Tac. Germ. 7 quodque praecipuum fortitudinis incitamentum est —in proximo pignora, unde feminarum ululatus audiri, unde vagitus infantium.

ἀναλαβεῖν =‘to recover.’ This intransitive use of ἀναλαμβάνειν is especially common in medical writers: see Stephanus-Hase Lex. s.v. It arises from the omission of the reflexive pronoun, which is a common way of making transitive verbs into intransitive: see on I 336 B.

παῖδας τοὺς ἄνδρας. Ξ with several other MSS reads τοὺς παῖδας instead of παῖδας. But παῖδας is predicative, and goes with θεωρεῖν. “Socrates plurimum referre dicit, ut qui adulti bellicosi futuri sint, iam pueri res bellicas spectent” (Schneider). Hartman seriously weakens the contrast between παῖδας and ἄνδρας by reading ἄνδρας <τοὺς> πολεμικούς.

διαφέρει . We should at first sight expect <πολὺ> διαφέρει, and so Richards suggests. But (as Hartman points out) the introduction of οὐκ ἄξιον κινδύνου breaks the continuity between the original question and the reply. Hence, too, the reply has διαφέρει, not διαφέρειν (the reading of Ξ and a few other MSS, wrongly preferred by Hartman).

τοῦτο μὲν κτλ. ὑπαρκτέον=δεῖ <*>πάρχειν (intransitive), not ‘we must begin with,’ as J. and C. suppose. Cf. ἑκτέον 468 A. τοῦτο (accusative: see on III 400 D) is explained by θεωροὺς— ποιεῖν. With προσμηχανᾶσθαι, δεῖ or the like is understood out of ὑπαρκτέον: cf. Gorg. 492 D τὰς μὲν ἐπιθυμίας φὴ|ς οὐ κολαστέον—<*>ῶντα δὲ αὐτὰς ὡς μεγίστας πλήρωσιν—ἑτοιμάζειν and Crito 51 C. Richards needlessly proposes to read προσμηχανητέον or to insert “something like δεήσει.”

εὐλαβήσονται : sc. ἄγειν.

παιδαγωγούς . The tutorial office in Athens was assigned to slaves. In Plato it is exercised by the very best of the citizens. Bosanquet justly emphasizes the revolution which Plato's arrangement would involve in the education of the young.

ἀλλὰ γάρ . II 365 C note

διδαξαμένους . Schneider reads διδαχθέντας, while preferring his own conjecture δεδιδαξομένους. The future διδαξομένους cannot be right: for the children would certainly be taught to ride, before going on such expeditions (J. and C.). It would be too hazardous in such a case ἐν πίθῳ κεραμεύειν. Against Schneider's conjecture it may be urged that the future perfect participle should not be used where the aorist participle is enough. διδαχθέντας is an obvious ‘correction.’ With διδαξαμένους the meaning is simply ‘when they have taught them to ride.’ The middle expresses personal interest; and does not imply that the ἐπίκουροι get them taught by others. See on this point IV 421 E note It may be noted that in Sparta great importance was attached to learning the accomplishment of riding (Müller Dorians II p. 316).

468A - 469B Touching the citizens' duty to one another in the field, Socrates enumerates various means by which cowardice will be discouraged and bravery rewarded.

τί δὲ δὴ κτλ. This punctuation is better than to place the mark of interrogation after δή, and take τὰ περὶ τὸν πόλεμον as an internal accusative with πῶς ἑκτέον κτλ., because τὰ περὶ τὸν πόλεμον is already practically involved in the word στρατιώτας. I agree with Hartman that Richards' proposal—τί δὲ δή; εἶπον· τὰ περὶ τὸν πόλεμον, πῶς— πολεμίους, ἆρα κτλ.;—is far from elegant.

ποῖα . See cr. n. ποἶ ἄν, which is generally read, surely cannot be right. Schneider remarks “ποἶ ἄν breviter dictum accipio pro ποῖα ἂν ὄντα τὰ περὶ τὸν πόλεμον ὀρθῶς ἔχειν λέγεις.” J. and C. are content with supplying εἴη τὰ σοὶ καταφαινόμενα. But ellipses of this kind are too severe a strain upon the imagination. ποῖα δή is suggested by Richards, πῇ δή by Hartman: but is δή in place here? I think not. I take ποῖα sc. ἐστι to refer to τὰ περὶ τὸν πόλεμον. Glauco addresses himself to the first of Socrates' questions: cf. 465 E note and Soph. Trach. 421—423. The corruption is common enough: see Introd. § 5.

αὐτῶν = ‘ipsorum’ contrasts Plato's soldiers with their enemies (cf. πρὸς α<*>τούς τε καὶ τοὺς πολεμίους just before). μέν prepares us for the second part of this topic, beginning at 469 B. We certainly should not read μήν (with Hartman). Plato's treatment of cowardice in battle may be compared with the punishment of τρέσαντες in Sparta: see Gilbert Gk. Constit. Ant. E.T. p. 77. Cf. also Laws 943 D ff.

ἑλοῦσι . Van Leeuwen's emendation—see cr. n.—seems to me admirable. The contrast between ἁλόντα and ἑλοῦσι is precisely what is wanted: cf. Xen. Cyr. VII 5. 73 νόμος γὰρ ἐν πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἀΐδιός ἐστιν, ὅταν πολεμούντων πόλις ἁλῷ, τῶν ἑλόντων ἐ=ναι καὶ τὰ σώματα— καὶ τὰ χρήματα. With the infinitive van Leeuwen compares Laws 879 A παραδότω τὸν δοῦλον—χρῆσθαι ὅ τι ἂν ἐθέλῃ. θέλουσι is not free from objection. Paris A generally has ἐθέλω, the usual Attic form; moreover, the word itself, if taken with χρῆσθαι, is too weak; nor can we (with J. and C.) readily understand ἔχειν. Plato's ordinances on this matter are far more drastic than anything known even in Sparta: see Müller Dorians II p. 238.

οὐκέτι σοι δοκεῖ : said with playful irony, for Glauco is an ἀνὴρ ἐρωτικός (474 D). A vein of irony runs through all this passage, as Dugas has pointed out (L'Amitié Antique p. 121); but it is not wholly ironical. Plato may have been willing to allow more latitude to soldiers on a campaign than he would permit to others, without sanctioning the usual abuses of camp life (see Dugas l.c. p. 87). There is nothing in this passage which is necessarily inconsistent with the self-restraint enjoined in III 403 B, although in practice abuses might have arisen. See also Laws 636 C ff.

καὶ προστίθημί γε κτλ. Glauco's enthusiasm is in keeping with his character: see last note.

βούληται : sc. ὁ ἀριστεὑσας τε καὶ εὐδοκιμήσας.

ἐάν τις ‐‐ φέρειν . See Symp. 178 E— 179 B. The principle underlying Glauco's remark was widely accepted by Greek military authorities (see Hug on Symp. l.c. and Dugas l.c. pp. 90—104). The Theban Sacred Band, composed of ἐρασταί and ἐρώμενοι, is the best-known instance of its application in actual warfare (Athen. XIII 561 F).

αἱρέσεις means selections by the rulers (so also Schneider): cf. 460 B, to which εἴρηται ἤδη refers. J. and C.'s alternative rendering “success in winning such prizes” cannot stand: still less the translation of D. and V. “to exercise more than the usual liberty of choice in such matters.”

τῶν τοιούτων : i.e. τῶν ἀγαθῶν.

Ὅμηρος κτλ. Il. 7. 321 f. νώτοισιν δ’ Αἴαντα διηνεκέεσσι γέραιρεν | ἥρως Ἀτρείδης. In Plato, Αἴαντα is omitted by q, and three other MSS: one MS places it before νώτοισιν, and four after ἔφη. The word may be a gloss; but as it is present in ΑΠΞ, in the same position as in Homer, it is safer to retain it. Plato often makes his Homeric quotations complete, even at the cost of a little awkwardness: cf. II 363 B. Aristophanes, it may be noted, has the converse of Plato's proposal in Eccl. 680.

γε reminds us that Homer is not in other respects a persona grata in our city.

ἕδραις κτλ. ἕδρῃ τε κρέασίν τε ἰδὲ πλείοις δεπάεσσιν in Il. VIII 162 al.

στρατείας : not of course στρατιᾶς (Herwerden), for στρατιά is ‘army,’ στρατεία ‘campaign.’

τοῦ χρυσοῦ γένους . III 415 A. Cf. Heracl. Fr. 102 ed. Bywater ἀρηιφάτους θεοὶ τιμῶσι καὶ ἄνθρωποι.

τοῦ τοιούτου γένους . Plato compares his ‘golden citizens’ with the heroes of the Hesiodic golden age. He would fain surround them with some of the romantic and religious sentiment that clung around the golden age of Greek poetry and legend.

οἱ μὲν ‐‐ ἀνθρώπων . Cf. Crat. 397 E. The nearest approach to these lines in our Hesiod is to be found in OD. 122 f. τοὶ μὲν—the departed children of the golden age—δαίμονές εἰσι Διὸς μεγάλου διὰ βουλὰς | ἐσθλοί, ἐπιχθόνιοι, φύλακες θνητῶν ἀνθρώπων.

τοῦ θεοῦ . Apollo, our πάτριος ἐξηγητής: see IV 427 B note

τιθέναι : ‘to bury.’

τίνι διαφόρῳ : ‘with what distinction’ (“mit welcher Auszeichnung” Schneider). The occurrence of θήκας διαφόρους in Laws 947 B is no ground for reading <θήκῃ> τίνι διαφόρῳ here, as Richards bids us read.

ὡς δαιμόνων ‐‐ θήκας is another link with Greek religion. Cf. Eur. Alc. 1000 ff. καί τις δοχμίαν κέλευθον | ἐμβαίνων τόδ’ ἐρεῖ | “αὕτα ποτὲ προὔθαν’ ἀνδρός, | νῦν δ’ ἐστὶ μάκαιρα δαίμων. | χαῖρ’ ὦ πότνἰ, εὖ δὲ δοίης.” | τοῖαί νιν προσεροῦσι φᾶμαι, and other passages cited by Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. pp. 108—110.

469B - 471C We have also a duty to our enemies. No Greek city is to be enslaved, and there must be no unseemly plundering of the dead. Armour captured in the field shall not be dedicated in temples, least of all such armour as we take from Greeks, unless the God shall otherwise decree. We forbid Greek territory to be ravaged, or Greek houses to be burnt. The entire Hellenic race are children of one family, and conflicts between its members should not be called war, but civil strife. Our natural enemy is the Barbarian, and if we plunder Greece, we do but ravage our nurse and mother. Remember that our city is a Greek city. She may chastise, but will not enslave, other Greek States. Glauco agrees: he thinks our citizens should treat the Barbarian as Greeks now treat their fellowcountrymen.

ff. In this episode Plato discusses the principles which are to regulate the international policy of his city in her dealings both with Greeks and Barbarians. The Greeks themselves recognised certain unwritten laws or usages (νόμοι κοινοὶ τῆς Ἑλλάδος, νόμιμα τῶν Ἑλλήνων) in matters of this kind, and to these Plato frequently makes allusion throughout his argument: see on 469 E, 470 C al. Cf. Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. pp. 300—307. The policy which Plato here prescribes for his ideal city was clearly intended by him to have a direct and immediate bearing on the circumstances of his own day; and this part of the Republic is in no small degree, as Jackson remarks, “a contribution to practical politics.” See on 470 C.

Ἕλληνας ‐‐ ἄλλῃ . Ἕλληνας is the object, not, as is sometimes held, the subject, of ἀνδραποδίζεσθαι. It rightly occupies the emphatic place, because the point is that Greek cities should not enslave Greeks—no one objects to their enslaving barbarians,—and not that Greeks (as opposed to barbarians) should not enslave Greek cities. Cf. the order in 471 A οὐδ’ ἄρα τὴν Ἑλλάδα Ἕλληνες ὄντες κεροῦσιν. A further reason for taking this view is that Ἑλληνίδας πόλεις points the allusion to Plato's city, which is a Ἑλληνὶς πόλις (470 E), and therefore will not reduce Greeks to slavery. Finally, μηδ’ ἄλλῃ (sc. Ἑλληνίδι πόλει) is easy and natural only if Ἑλληνίδας πόλεις is treated as the subject. The difficulty of μηδ’ ἄλλῃ (on the usual interpretation) led to the correction μηδ’ ἄλλοις (Stallbaum with v and Flor. RT), and has recently caused Hartman to propose μηδαμῇ, on the ground that ἄλλῃ after Ἕλληνας could only mean βαρβάρῳ. In so saying, he goes. I think, too far; but my explanation removes the difficulty.

ἐθίζειν : sc. τοὺς Ἕλληνας.

ες)λαβουμένους agrees with the subject of φείδεσθαι rather than with that of ἐθίζειν. The Spartan Callicratidas agreed with Plato here: οὐκ ἔφη ἑαυτοῦ γε ἄρχοντος οὐδένα Ἑλλήνων εἰς τοὐκείνου δυνατὸν ἀνδραποδισθῆναι (Xen. Hell. I 6. 14). To enslave barbarians, on the other hand, is just: for the barbarian is φύσει δοῦλος (Eur. Iph. Aul. 1401 and elsewhere: Arist. Pol. A 2. 1252^{b} 9). See also on 470 C.

ὅλῳ καὶ παντί . So in Phaed. 79 E, Crat. 433 E. In VII 527 C we have τῷ ὅλῳ καὶ παντί, and even τῷ παντὶ καὶ ὅλῳ in Laws 734 E.

μηδέ : with ἐκτῆσθαι. They must neither enslave their countrymen (ἀνδραποδίζεσθαι above), nor hold a Greek in slavery: cf. I 351 B. J. and C. wrongly translate μηδέ as ‘not even,’ and Hartman needlessly proposes μηδέν). Greek slaves were of foreign nationality, except such as had been sold into slavery on the destruction of their city by war (Blümner Privatalt. p. 87 note 1). Plato disapproves of the exception: does he mean to approve the rule, so far as his own city is concerned? Steinhart (Einleitung p. 202) asserts that Plato expressly recognises slavery in his State. It is clear from the present section that Plato does not impugn the principle of slavery, so long as the slaves are of barbarian origin; but he nowhere says that his perfect city is actually to contain slaves, nor is it easy to see what there would be for them to do, unless they were employed to work under the farmers and artizans, or as personal attendants at the συσσίτια and the like. Slaves are present, of course, in the city of the Laws (776 C ff.).

σκυλεύειν ‐‐ καλῶς ἔχει . Cf. Xen. Hell. II 4. 19 (quoted by J. and C.) καὶ τὰ μὲν ὅπλ<*> ἔλαβον, τοὺς δὲ χιτῶνας οὐδενὸς τῶν πολιτῶν ἐσκύλευσαν. Such moderation was unusual.

ἀποπταμένου is (as Schulze pointed out in Fl. Jahrb. 1887 pp. 226 ff.) a reminiscence of Homer's ἀπὸ δ’ ἔπτατο θυμός ( Il. 16. 469 and elsewhere). Hence the poetic form, as in οἴχεται ἀποπτάμενος ( Symp. 183 E from Il. II 71). The ordinary aorist in prose is ‐επτόμην, as in II 365 A. Compare Phaed. 115 C f. and Eur. Fr. 176. 3—6 τίς γὰρ πετραῖον σκόπελον οὐτάζων δορὶ | ὀδύναισι δώσει; τίς δ) ἀτιμάζων νέκυς, | εἰ μηδὲν αἰσθάνοιτο τῶν παθημάτων; and Plut. Apophtheg. Lac. 228 F.

αἳ ‐‐ ἁπτόμεναι . Aristotle read βάλλοντος, and not βαλόντος (see cr. n.), as appears from Rhet. III 4. 1406^{b} 33, where he refers to Plato's illustration as follows: καὶ τὸ ἐν τῇ πολιτείᾳ τῇ Πλάτωνος, ὅτι οἱ τοὺς τεθνεῶτας σκυλεύοντες ἐοίκασι τοῖς κυνιδίοις, ἃ τοὺς λίθους δάκνει τοῦ βάλλοντος οὐχ ἁπτόμενα. The present is more picturesque and true to nature: the dog worries the stones, while his tormentor amuses himself by throwing more. It is true that the simile is not quite accurate, because a ‘flown antagonist’ cannot continue to do mischief; but βαλόντος, which is generally read, though not by Schneider, is also inexact, because you cannot attack a vanished foe. In either case, the analogy is near enough. Moreover the consensus of all the other MSS, coupled with Aristotle, outweighs the authority of A where lipography is possible. See Introd. § 5.

ἀναιρέσεων . The laws of Greek warfare permitted ἀναίρεσις of the dead, unless the petitioning parties had forfeited their rights by robbing a temple or desecrating a shrine (Busolt Gr. Alterth. p. 55, where the authorities are cited).

οὐδὲ μὴν ‐‐ Ἑλλήνων : as was usual in Greece: see for example Thuc. III 114. 1. Plutarch however implies that the Spartans were an honourable exception to this rule (Apophtheg. Lac. 224 B). With Plato's sentiment cf. “aeternum inimicitiarum monumentum Graios de Graiis statuere non oportet” (Cic. de Inv. II 70. Cicero is referring to an incident arising out of a war between Sparta and Thebes).

ἐὰν μή τι ‐‐ λέγῃ . Apollo might not wish to surrender his rights, and Plato would do no violence to the patron god of his city (IV 427 B). It was usual to dedicate a tithe of the spoil to the gods (Xen. Hell. III 3. 1 ).

τί δέ; κτλ. So Schneider punctuates. Stallbaum and others place the mark of interrogation after ἐμπρήσεως, comparing VII 515 B, IX 582 C (where however see my notes), and other examples: but the analogy of 469 B and 469 C, as well as the emphasis on γῆς, is in favour of Schneider's view. We may compare the use of the genitive instead of περί with the genitive after verbs of speaking, asking about etc.; cf. IX 576 D and Jebb on Soph. Trach. 169.

ὥσπερ καὶ ‐‐ δύο . Literally ‘as these names, war and civil discord, are named two, so also they are two.’ ὀνομάζεται δύο is opposed to εἷναι δύο, which means δύο οὐσίας εἶναι ‘are,’ ‘express two realities,’ as is further explained in ὄντα—διαφοραῖν. Instead of ταῦτα τὰ ὀνόματα, ταῦτα ὀνόματα—see cr. n.—is now usually read. With this reading, the sense would be ‘as these things’ (viz. War and Discord) ‘are called by two names, so also they are in reality two,’ ὄντα ἐπὶ κτλ. That is to say, ὄντα ἐπί would be said of things; but it is clearly intended to be said of names: cf. κέκληται ἐπί just below. Schneider noticed the difficulty, but thought the confusion between names and things excusable. It is surely a grave blemish in a passage which is written expressly to distinguish between the two. Richards would transpose and read ὥσπερ καὶ— στάσις, ὄντα ἐπὶ δυοῖν τινοῖν διαφοραῖν, οὕτω καὶ ε<*>ναι δύο, or make ὄντα—διαφοραῖν follow ὀνόματα. This solution effects, at great cost, what is only after all a partial cure.

ὄντα ἐπὶ κτλ. ἐπί governs διαφοραῖν, and δυοῖν τινοῖν, which is neuter, depends on διαφοραῖν. The literal meaning is ‘being applied to two kinds of disagreements, arising in two things.’ The two things—continues Plato—are τὸ οἰκεῖον (ξυγγενές), and τὸ ἀλλότριον ( ὀθνεῖον). Disagreement—for διαφορά is substituted <*>χθρά—in τὸ οἰκεῖον is called στάσις, in τὸ ἀλλότριον, πόλεμος. ὄντα— διαφοραῖν is a marvellous example of Greek brevity, simplicity, and precision. Schneider, and J. and C., explain the words correctly; but D. and V. plunge everything into confusion by taking δυοῖν τινοῖν with διαφοραῖν.

φημὶ γὰρ κτλ. : a formal declaration of Plato's political faith in the Panhellenic ideal, which Cimon— Πανελλήνων πρόμος, as Cratinus calls him ( Archil. 1 ed. Meineke)—and Callicratidas (see Grote VII pp. 406—415) had striven to realise in fact, and which Isocrates as well as Plato constantly proclaimed in theory. See on I 336 A, and cf. Spengel Isokrates u. Plato pp. 7 ff. and Isocrates Panegyricus passim. The rallying points of Plato's Panhellenism are two—internally, the Delphic oracle (IV 427 B, C notes), and externally, hostility with Persia: cf. Menex. 245 C ff. See also on πολεμίους φύσει below.

πολεμεῖν μαχομένους . Hirschig and others transpose these words, on slight MS authority, including a marginal correction in A. But it is hard to see why they should have become displaced. By adopting the order in the text Plato restricts μαχομένους to πολεμεῖν: otherwise the participle would naturally go with πολεμίους φύσει too. The MS order also lays more stress on the emphatic πολεμεῖν than Hirschig's transposition would do. Cf. (with Stallbaum) Ap. 18 D.

πολεμίους φύσει . The universal Greek view: see e.g. Hdt. I 4 ad fin., Eur. Hec. 1199, Isocrates Paneg. 158 al., and Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. pp. 305— 307. “We should bear in mind,” says Bosanquet, “that Greek civilisation was to Plato much what white civilisation is to us.” This is, in part at least, true; but sentiments of chivalry and romance were far more powerful factors in fostering the ancestral feud with Persia than any apprehensions for the safety of Greek civilisation. The idea of a war against Persia always stirred the pulse of Hellas with a sense of continuity with the heroic past; and it was more than a meaningless ceremony when Agesilaus sacrificed at Aulis, and Alexander visited Achilles' tomb. See Grote IX p. 81 and XI pp. 395—397. None the less, in spite of his emphatic expression of the old Greek policy of splendid isolation, it is difficult to overestimate the effect of Plato's writings, and especially of the Republic, in breaking down the barrier between Barbarian and Greek. See on 470 E.

νοσεῖν κτλ. Compare the melancholy picture of the state of contemporary Greece in Isocr. Paneg. 115—117. Hartman would cancel καὶ στασιάζειν; but see 451 B note

συγχωρῶ κτλ. ‘I agree to view the matter in this way.’ οὕτως ὀνομάζειν would be more pointed, but is unnecessary. We are hardly justified in making νομίζειν=‘to hold this language’ (with J. and C.): for φωνῇ νομίζειν, φωνὴν νομίζειν and the like have a somewhat different meaning. See StephanusHase Thes. s. v. νομίζειν.

ὅτι ‐‐ ὡς . ὡς can hardly be exclamatory, as J. and C. suppose. For the anacoluthon cf. Hdt. III 71 ad fin. ἴστε ὑμῖν ὅτι, ἢν ὑπερπέσῃ ἡ νῦν ἡμέρη, ὡς οὐκ ἄλλος φθὰς ἐμεῦ κατήγορος ἔσται and other examples cited in Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 886. τῇ—στάσει is not ‘that which we have acknowledged to be sedition’ (Jowett), but ‘that which, as things now are, is allowed to be sedition,’ viz. when one city is divided against itself (διαστῇ πόλις). Plato, it will be observed, does not deny that the abuses which he condemns occasionally happened in Greek civil strife: they certainly often did. He only asserts (and the admission is interesting and important) that the public conscience of Greece condemned them. The conduct of Athens in emergencies of this kind was sometimes honourable and patriotic: see for example Grote VII p. 318, VIII pp. 69, 70.

τρόφον τε καὶ μητέρα . Cf. III 414 E. Not patriotism only, but filial love, such as Virgil felt for Italy ( Georg. II 136—176), inspires these words.

μέτριον εἶναι : sc. δοκεῖ. Plato is still describing Greek public opinion.

διανοεῖσθαι κτλ. The converse of Bias's maxim φιλεῖν ὡς μισήσοντας (D. L. I 87). ἐκείνης=‘than the other,’ viz. the γνώμη which διανοεῖται ὡς οὐ διαλλαγησομένων καὶ ἀεὶ πολεμησόντων. In view of Arist. Rhet. II 21. 1395^{a} 25, where an orator is recommended, if he wishes to seem amiable, to say οὐ δεῖ ὥσπερ φας<*>, φιλεῖν ὡς μισήσοντας, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον μισεῖν ὡς φιλήσοντας, it is tempting on a first glance to regard ἐκείνης as the maxim of Bias itself: but the other interpretation is more natural and relevant. On Bias' saying see Jebb's Appendix on Soph. Ajax 679 ff.

οὐχ Ἑλληνὶς ἔσται ; Plato speaks hopefully, as if his perfect city were but one Greek city among many— a living example to the brotherhood of Hellas. It may be admitted that the city of II—IV has not a few claims to be called Hellenic. But the ‘third city’— that of the philosopher-king—is not Hellenic, nor even, in any proper sense, an earthly city at all: it is an ideal, an ensample in the heavens — ἐν οὐρανῷ παράδειγμα τῷ βουλομένῳ ὁρᾶν καὶ ὁρῶντι ἑαυτὸν κατοικίζειν (IX 592 B). The animating spirit of V 473 B—VII is assuredly not Hellenic exclusiveness, but the enthusiasm of humanity, if by ‘humanity’ we understand (with Plato) the divine element in man, in virtue of which we are most distinctively and truly human. See on VI 501 B, IX 589 D. In a certain sense it is even true that Platonism is the “strongest protest ever raised against pre-Christian hellenism” (Krohn Pl. St. p. 33). But Plato's is no barren protest; for his city foreshadows the future while it passes judgment on the past. Cf. VI 499 C note and IX 592 B notes, with Zeller^{4} II 1. pp. 921—923 and the same author's article on Der platonische Staat in seiner Bedeutung für die Folgezeit in his Vorträge u. Abhandlungen I pp. 68—88.

οὐδὲ ὀνομάσσυσιν : much less consider it so.

σωφρονιοῦσιν . The word σωφρονίζω (‘make σώφρων,’ i.e. ‘chastise’) implies the remedial view of punishment: see on II 380 B.

οὐ πολέμιοι . A few inferior MSS read ὡς οὐ πολέμιοι, and ὡς appears also in the margin of A. Campbell suggests <καὶ> οὐ πολέμιοι, Förster <ὡς> σωφρονισταί; but neither suggestion is nearly so expressive and good as the reading of the best MSS.

αὑτοῖς . The ambiguity in αὑτοῖς can mislead nobody, and αὐτοῖς (Hartman, with A etc.) would be very unpleasing. In such cases the authority of Plato's MSS is nought. The behaviour of Athens in connexion with the Mitylenean revolt is a conspicuous example of the inhumanity which Plato here condemns: see Thuc. III 36 ff.

ἀλγούντων . “Significatur necessitas innocentibus quoque damnum inferendi, quo nocentes punire et ad pacem adigere cogantur” Schneider.

τοὺς ἐναντίους . “Graecos adversarios vocat, non hostes” Stallbaum. q has Ἕλληνας for ἐναντίους—an obvious ‘interpretamentum.’

πρὸς δὲ ‐‐ ἀλλήλους . A bitter commentary on the foreign policy of Greek cities. The ‘natural’ relations between Greece and Barbary had been reversed: not only did Greeks treat Greeks as enemies, but they had begun to treat barbarians as friends. Christ (Pl. Stud. pp. 37—39) supposes that Plato wrote this passage in 374, when Plataea was destroyed by Thebes, and the surviving inhabitants fled to Athens (Xen. Hell. VI 3. 1, Isocr. Plat. 1 ff.). The same view is held by Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. etc. p. 662. Plato's rebuke would have been equally or even more telling in 386, when Greece was exhausted by the Corinthian war, and friendship with the ‘natural enemy’ had forced the peace of Antalcidas upon the Greeks, to the bitter grief and shame of patriots: cf. Isocr. Paneg. 120, 121. In any case νῦν should no doubt be referred to the time when Plato wrote these words, and not to the date of action of the dialogue. See also Introd. § 4.

471C - 472B Glauco recalls Socrates to the task, already twice postponed, of demonstrating that such a State is possible.

Here begins the transition to the ‘third’ or philosophic city. See on 449 A.

ὡς δυνατή . In a certain sense, this has already been proved, for the city is κατὰ φύσιν: cf. 456 C, 466 D. We have, however, still to shew that the harmony with nature can be attained, and this is what Plato proceeds to do.

ἐπεὶ ὅτι γε κτλ. We should expect ὁμολογῶ after ᾗ γένοιτο, but anacolutha after ὅτι are so frequent that something of the sort may be mentally supplied: cf. I 352 B, V 465 A notes Richards would insert ὁμολογῶ in the text. I formerly proposed καὶ ἐγὼ λέγω, <καὶ> ἃ σὺ παραλείπεις ὅτι κτλ., ‘I too assert’ (sc. no less than you), ‘and also what you omit, that’ etc., but now acquiesce in the anacoluthon.

φόβων ‐‐ ἐχθροῖς . Cf. Laws 806 B.

στραγγευομένῳ . See cr. n. στρατευομένῳ could only be understood (with Stallbaum, who retains it, and Huber zu den Plat. Gleichnissen p. 10) as half-jocular for ‘de re militari disputanti.’ Such a usage is possible in itself (see on ἀποτίνουσι II 363 C); but ὤκνουν τε καὶ ἐδεδοίκη and μὴ διάτριβε (in B) are strongly in favour of στραγγευομένῳ. The same corruption—due to confusion of γ and τ, combined with lipography—occurs in the MSS of Ar. Ach. 126, as well as in Hesychius (στρατεύομαι· διατρίβω) and elsewhere: see Blaydes on Ar. l.c.

τὼ δύο κύματε . See 457 B, C. The first was ὡς δεῖ κοινῇ πάντα ἐπιτηδεύειν τούς τε φύλακας καὶ τὰς φυλακίδας; the second community of wives and children.

λέγειν λόγον τε . J. and C. read λόγον λέγειν τε with Ξ and Μ; but the other reading has far more authority, and is perhaps exquisitius. Cf. 452 A.

472B - 472E Socrates reminds Glauco that it is the investigation of Justice and Injustice which has brought us to this point. It was in order to reach a standard or model of Justice that we examined the nature of perfect justice and the perfectly just man. By comparing them with their opposites in respect of happiness and unhappiness, we intended to obtain a measure by which to estimate the effect of Justice and Injustice upon happiness in human life. Our object was not to prove that perfect justice is attainable, and therefore we are not obliged to shew that our city can be realised.

ἀλλὰ τί τοῦτο ; See cr. n. γε after τοῦτο is certainly wrong. It has no MS authority except that of A^{2}, and (as Stallbaum shews) ἀλλὰ τί τοῦτο is the regular form of this phrase in Plato: cf. Gorg. 497 E, Charm. 164 A. In both these cases the reply is Οὐδέν, followed by ἀλλά, as here.

παραδείγματος κτλ. παράδειγμα is not here an ‘illustration,’ but a ‘model’ or ‘standard’ (“Musterbild” Schneider) exactly as in IX 592 B and Theaet. 176 E.

αὐτό ‐‐ δικαιοσύνην : ‘justice by itself’: see II 363 A note Here however the expression means ‘abstract justice’ rather than merely ‘justice apart from its consequences.’ It is not yet a metaphysical ‘Idea’ in the sense of VI and VII: see on III 402 C, and cf. Pfleiderer zur Lösung etc. p. 19 with Susemihl Gen. Entw. II pp. 176 f.

καὶ ἄνδρα κτλ. : ‘and the man who is perfectly just if he should come into existence, and what his character would be if he did.’ εἰ γένοιτο must be understood as a kind of protasis to τὸν τελέως δίκαιον (i.q. τὸν τελέως ὄντα or ἂν ὄντα δίκαιον). Schneider's explanation is less simple: “virum perfecte iustum quaesituri ea conditione rem susceperant, si fieri et existere talis posset.” We must beware of translating ‘num existeret’ (Stallbaum): for it is just in order to shew the irrelevancy of the question, ‘Can such a man exist?’ that Plato wrote this sentence. Madvig omits καί before οἷος. In that case εἰ γένοιτο goes with the following clause (cf. IV 419 A note), and the meaning is: ‘if he should come into existence, what his character would be when he did.’ By this means we obtain an exact parallel between δικαιοσύνην οἷόν <*>στι and ἄνδρα—οἷος ἂν εἴη. It must be admitted, I think, that the emendation is an improvement: but the MS reading may stand. Campbell needlessly questions εἰ γένοιτο, thinking it a gloss on γενόμενος. The pleonasm is characteristic: cf. 471 C εἰ γένοιτο, πάντ’ ἂν εἴη ἀγαθὰ ᾗ γένοιτο.

καὶ ἀδικίαν αὖ κτλ. See IV 420 C note

ἵνα ‐‐ ἕξειν . Cf. VIII 544 A.

ἐκείνοις . See cr. n. ἐκείνης, which Schneider alone retains, can hardly be defended. For the error see Introd. § 5.

τοῦτο μέν . On μέν without δέ see 475 E note

οἴει ‐‐ ἄνδρα . For οἴει <*>ν Richards reads οἴει δή: but δή is unpleasing here. See also on 450 C. After ἂν—εἶναι we might expect δς ἂν—μὴ ἔχοι, ‘who would not be able,’ and so Ξ, q and several other MSS actually read. The irregularity is however no more than ‘cannot’ for ‘would not be able to’ in English. I have restored οἷος (which used to be read before Bekker) for οἷον (see cr. n.). The corruption is easy, and in such cases the relative regularly agrees with its subject: see Phil. 29 E with Stallbaum's note. It is also wrong in point of sense to refer the relative to παράδειγμα here. Art is credited with higher possibilities in this passage than in Book X, unless we suppose that the painter's κάλλιστος ἄνθρωπος is only an artificial combination of individual features imitated from human beings. But in that case the illustration is less apposite; for Plato's perfect city is more than imitation of the actual. See also on X 598 A, and cf. Xen. Mem. III 10. 2 and Arist. Pol. γ. 11. 1281^{b} 10—15.

παράδειγμα κτλ. Cf. Laws 713 B and 739 C—E.

472E - 474C I am nevertheless willing, says Socrates, to shew you how our constitution may be realised most nearly. A perfect realisation we cannot expect, for action is everywhere less true than language or theory. One great, yet possible change, and only one, is needed, and it is this. ‘Philosophers’ must become kings or kings ‘philosophers.’ Till this shall come to pass, there will be no respite from trouble, either to cities or to mankind, nor will our hypothetical city ever become (so far as may be) a reality. A paradox, you say, and certain to arouse hostility and scorn; but let us explain what we mean by ‘philosophers.’

With the breaking of the third and greatest wave (473 C note) begins the transition to the third and final stage of Plato's ideal city. See on 449 A.

δυνατώτατα κτλ. “Superlativus facultatem, quam relativam dicunt, indicat” Schneider. It is important to observe that Plato does not expect a perfect realisation even when philosophers become kings: cf. 473 E. Why he does not, is explained in 473 A. πάλιν refers to 472 C.

κἂν εἰ μή τῳ δοκεῖ shews that Plato is contradicting a common view: cf. IX 577 D. Most men would of course admit that a perfect scheme must usually be modified if it is to be put in force. But they would not allow that λέξις has more truth than πρᾶξις; for the truth of a theory—they would say —is best tested by experience. Not so Plato, according to whom the world of Mind is not only more perfect, but truer than the world of Matter: cf. ἡ παντελῶς ἀληθής VI 502 D and note ad loc. The pointed ἀλλὰ σύ invites the assent of Glauco as a Platonist: cf. infra 475 E.

δεῖν κτλ. δεῖν is tautological after ἀνάγκαζε, but the addition of τοῦτο μέν makes it easier. Π has δεῖ, perhaps a mistake for δή, which was read by Stobaeus Flor. 43. 109. For γιγνόμενα Bywater (J. Ph. X p. 73) would write γιγνόμεν’ ἄν or ἂν γιγνόμενα. The categoric statement is however more in harmony with ἆρ’ οἷόν τέ τι—ἐφάπτεσθαι. ‘Do not compel me to shew that what we described in words is in all respects reproduced by experience.’ See also on ἐπιτάττεις below.

φάναι : infinitive for imperative as in VI 508 B, 509 B, all of them examples of φάναι, although Plato is not averse to φάθι (VI 508 E) and ξύμφαθι (VII 523 A). The imperatival infinitive is very common in Attic inscriptions (Meisterhans^{3} p. 244).

ἐπιτάττεις : sc. γίγνεσθαι. It is hardly possible to understand ἐξευρεῖν ὡς δυνατὰ ταῦτα γίγνεσθαι (with J. and C.). As in γιγνόμενα above, so also here Socrates represents Glauco as requiring that the city should be made into a reality: cf. ἣν σὺ πόλιν οἰκίζεις in 470 E.

πειρώμεθα : subjunctive, i.q. δεῖ πειρᾶσθαι: cf. λέγωμεν δή, ὡς ἔοικεν ( Theaet. 173 C, quoted by J. and C.).

ἐπ) αὐτὸ ‐‐ εἶμι : ‘well, said I, I will enter on the very topic which’ etc. Cf. Thuc. II 36. 4 εἶμι καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν τῶνδε ἔπαινον. I have returned to the most authoritative reading, though previously I read (with Richards) ἐπ’ αὐτῷ δὴ —εἰμί. In point of sense, εἶμι is only a sort of quasi-future, and should be compared with ἀλλ’ εἶμι in the mouth of characters just about to leave the stage (e.g. Soph. Trach. 86). Cf. also Phaed. 100 B ἔρχομαι —ἐπιχειρῶν—καὶ εἶμι πάλιν ἐπ’ ἐκεῖνα— καὶ ἄρχομαι κτλ. According to KühnerBlass (Gr. Gr. I 2, p. 217) the present use of εἶμι is found only in poetry and late prose; but ἀνίασιν in VII 531 C is a certain case, and so also in my opinion are ἐπίασιν and ἀπίασι in Thuc. IV 61. 3, 8. It should also be remembered that Plato by no means abjures archaic and poetic forms and idioms: see I 330 B note Vind. F reads ἐπ’ αὐτῶ (i.q. αὐτῷ) δ’ εἰμι, and εἰμί was the reading of q ^{1}. ἐπ’ αὐτῷ δή εἰμι is highly idiomatic and may be supported (with Richards) by VI 490 D, Pol. 274 B; but it is safer to follow the MSS, which are all but unanimous.

εἰ καὶ ‐‐ κατακλύσειν : ‘even al though it is likely—just like a wave with its cachinnations—to swamp me with laughter and disgrace.’ Hartman would insert <με> before μέλλει, but the object is easily supplied; and με before μέλλει is very cacophonous. For other views of this passage see App. VI.

ἐὰν μὴ κτλ. Cf. Laws 709 E ff. Plato's famous and often quoted paradox is not in its essence so paradoxical as it appears. The abiding truth of Plato's suggestion is “that somehow or other the best and deepest ideas about life and the world must be brought to bear on the conduct of social and political administration if any real progress is to take place in society” (Bosanquet). But it was a paradox in the Athenian democracy, or so at least Plato, like Socrates, thought: hence πολὺ παρὰ δόξαν ῥηθήσεται 473 E. See for example Prot. 319 A—323 A and Gorg. 514 A—519 D: and cf. Krohn Pl. St. p. 93. Political evil is in Plato's view the result of a divorce between political power and knowledge of the good; it can only be cured by effecting their reconciliation. In the Politicus Plato's remedy is to make the philosopher (who is the true king) act through the statesman (305 C ff.: cf. Nohle Die Statslehre Platos pp. 82, 88, whose interpretation is—wrongly, as I think—questioned by Zeller^{4} II 1, p. 901 note 5): but in the Republic the union between Thought and Action is complete, and the philosopher is himself a statesman. Whether even then he would be strong enough to found the perfect city of the Republic, depends upon the amount of resistance which he would be likely to encounter: see on VI 499 B and IX 577 A.

λεγόμενοι . Though called kings and potentates, they are so in nothing but the name: cf. I 336 A note True kingship belongs only to the scientific ruler: Euthyd. 291 B ff. It is probable that Plato was already thinking throughout this passage of the hopes which he seems to have formed of the Syracusan dynasty: see Epp. VII and XIII with note on VI 499 B.

τοῦτο κτλ. : ‘unless this coalition of political power and philosophy come to pass,’ lit. ‘unless this coalesce,’ i.e. unless there be this coalescence, viz. ‘political power and philosophy.’ For a somewhat similar idiom see VII 527 B note δύναμις—φιλοσοφία is in explanatory apposition to the whole phrase τοῦτο—ξυμπέσῃ, rather than to τοῦτο alone. Otherwise we must suppose that τοῦτο is virtually for ταῦτα, the singular number emphasizing by anticipation the union of political power and philosophy (so J. and C.). But on this explanation the singular τοῦτο goes ill with εἰς ταὐτὸν ξυμπέσῃ, and with ἑκάτερον; nor are we justified in writing ταῦτα (with Richards). The dual τούτω might easily have been corrupted into τοῦτο, but τούτω ξυμπέσῃ is hardly defensible, in spite of εἰ ἔστι τούτω διττὼ τὼ βίω ( Gorg. 500 D): cf. Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 57.

τῶν δὲ νῦν κτλ. : ‘while the numerous natures who at present pursue either to the exclusion of the other are forcibly debarred,’ sc. from exclusively pursuing either. The genitive τῶν— πορευομένων is not partitive (Schneider, Stallbaum, and others), but rather possessive, and depends on φύσεις. Had Plato meant to say ‘most of those who pursue’ he would have written οἱ πολλοί instead of α<*> πολλαὶ φύσεις, as Hartman points out. There is moreover no reason to suppose that Plato wishes to allow any exceptions whatever to his rule. Nor is πολλαί ‘volgares’ (Baiter), or ‘commoner’ (Jowett), but simply ‘numerous,’ ‘plentiful’: cf. the usage of ό πολύς in II 376 E τῆς ὑπὸ τοῦ πολλοῦ χρόνου ηὑρημένης ( παιδείας) and τὸν πολὺν λεών 458 D. Exclusive devotion either to politics or φιλοσοφία was common, but by no means universal, as the examples of Pythagoras, Solon, and many others sufficiently attest: see Arist. Rhet. II 23. 1398^{b} 16—19. Various emendations have been proposed for πολλαί, such as χωλαί (Madvig), πονηραί (Liebhold), and πολιτικαί (Apelt), but the above explanation removes the difficulty. As regards the sentiment, it should be noted that Plato refuses to sanction the exclusive pursuit of knowledge as well as of politics. He holds “that a specialised study of merely abstract questions unfits a man for the true grasp of life and character which is the centre of real philosophy” (Bosanquet), and on this ground he would probably have condemned the one-sided enthusiasm which many persons now profess for what is usually called by them ‘research.’ Cf. VI 497 A note and 499 B.

εἰς τὸ δυνατόν . See 472 E note

πολὺ παρὰ δόξαν . 473 C note

ἐκβέβληκας =‘have let fall’ is more appropriate here than ἐμβέβληκας, which Hartman (with Flor. T) prefers, on the strength of I 344 D and other passages. ἐκβάλλειν in this sense is half-poetic, and suits well with Glauco's excited mood.

πάνυ πολλούς τε κτλ. Chiappelli (l.c. p. 202) supposes that the allusion is to Aristophanes and the comic stage. Comedy would doubtless join in the outcry; but the loudest clamour would be raised by the ‘practical politician’ to whom philosophy is foolishness, and worse: see Gorg. 484 C—486 C and cf. Theaet. 172 D—175 B. The attitude of Isocrates and his adherents would also be hostile and contemptuous (Dümmler Chron. Beiträge pp. 43—45). Glauco clearly anticipates a combined assault from different quarters.

νῦν οὕτως : “jetzt ohne weiteres” (Schneider). οὕτως is used as in ἐξαίφνης οὕτως and the like: cf. II 377 B note

ῥίψαντας τὰ ἱμάτια is illustrated by Blaydes on Ar. Wasps 408.

διατεταμένους . Here and in VI 501 C Ξ (with a few other MSS) reads διατεταγμένους, which is less appropriate: “nulla enim τάξις in turba tumultuantium” (Stallbaum). Cf. 462 C note

ὡς ‐‐ ἐργασομένους : “intending to do heaven knows what” (Jowett). The phrase is idiomatic in Plato for any excess of ill-regulated zeal: cf. Ap. 35 A with my note ad loc.

τῷ ὄντι ‐‐ δίκην : ‘you will learn to your cost what flouting means.’ τῷ ὄντι indicates that τωθαζόμενος is to be taken in the fullest sense of the word: cf. IX 579 D, I 343 C, VI 511 B notes τωθάζω always implies personal abuse, often of an indecent kind: see Cope's interesting account of the word in Aristotle's Rhetoric Vol. II pp. 49 f.

ἀμύνεσθαι . The promise is fulfilled in VI 501—502 C.

474C - 480A The philosopher, as analogy proves, is one who loves not a part of knowledge, but the whole. His passion is for Truth, and Truth means the Ideas. The Ideas are each of them One, but they appear many by union with particular things and one another. Lovers of sights and sounds and such like persons believe only in the many beautifuls; they cannot understand the One. Like dreamers, they mistake the copy for the original. Their condition of mind may be described as Opinion, that of the philosophers as Knowledge.

Let us proceed to prove this statement. The object of Knowledge ‘is’; that of Ignorance ‘is not.’ If therefore anything both ‘is’ and ‘is not,’ it must lie between Being and not-Being, and the faculty which cognizes it will be something between Knowledge and Ignorance.

‘Powers’ differ from one another according to the objects over which they preside, and the effects which they produce. The ‘power’ called Knowledge presides over Being, and produces the act of knowing. It is therefore different from the ‘power’ called Opinion, whose result is opining. What then is the object over which Opinion presides? We have seen that it is not Being; neither is it not-Being. Therefore Opinion is different both from Knowledge and from Ignorance. It is, in fact, something between Knowledge and Ignorance, less luminous than the one, more luminous than the other. Its object will therefore be that which both ‘is’ and ‘is not.’

Now it is just the many beautifuls etc. which both are and are not. There is not one of them which ‘is’ more than it ‘is not’ that which we say it is. We are therefore justified in saying that the many beautifuls etc. lie between Being and notBeing. Thus we have discovered the object of Opinion.

We conclude that those who have eyes for the many beautifuls etc., opine; while those who see the Beautiful itself, know. The former are lovers of Opinion, the latter lovers of Knowledge or philosophers.

ff. The δευτέρα πόλις of Books II—IV rested on a psychological basis and was the expression of a moral rather than of an intellectual ideal: see on II 370 A and IV 443 B. In harmony with this conception Plato formerly used the word φιλόσοφος primarily and for the most part in its ethical sense (II 376 B note). Now that he is about to leave psychology for metaphysics, and describe the kingship of Knowledge, it becomes necessary to analyse again the meaning of φιλόσοφος. Henceforward, throughout Books VI and VII, the φιλόσοφος is one whose consuming passion is the love of Truth, that is, of the Ideas. See 480 A and VI 486 E notes

ἐννοῶ : i.q. νῷ ἔχω, ‘remember,’ not ‘understand’ (as D. and V.). Cf. Euthyphr. 2 B, Polit. 296 A. The illus tration which follows is all the more appropriate because the φιλόσοφος is himself an ἐραστής, in love with Truth: cf. VI 490 B.

πάντες οἱ ἐν ὥρᾳ κτλ. So in Charm. 154 B (cited by J. and C.) Socrates, an ἀνὴρ ἐρωτικός ( Symp. 177 D), confesses ἀτεχνῶς γὰρ λευκὴ στάθμη εἰμὶ πρὸς τοὺς καλούς· σχεδὸν γάρ τί μοι πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ ἡλικίᾳ καλοὶ φαίνονται.

ὁ μέν, ὅτι σιμὸς κτλ. The point is that the ἀνὴρ ἐρωτικός, loving πάντας τοὺς ἐν ὥρᾳ, finds beauty even where there is none. He ‘sees Helen's beauty in a brow of Egypt.’ The passage has often been imitated, and may have suggested the well-known satirical outburst of Lucretius (IV 1160—1170).

ἐπίχαρις : ‘pleasing,’ χάριν ἔχουσα πρὸς τὴν ὄψιν Arist. Pol. E 9. 1309^{b} 24. With τὸ γρυπὸν βασιλικόν cf. Phaedr. 253 D and Arist. Physiog. 6. 811^{a} 36 οἱ δὲ γρυπὴν ἔχοντες (τὴν ῥῖνα ) καὶ τοῦ μετώπου διηρθρωμένην μεγαλόψυχοι· ἀναφέρεται ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀετούς. Neither τὸ σιμόν nor τὸ γρυπόν are marks of beauty; the straight nose is the fairest (Arist. Pol. l.c.).

λευκοὺς δὲ θεῶν παῖδας is in harmony with Laws 956 A χρώματα δὲ λευκὰ πρέποντ’ ἂν θεοῖς εἴη καὶ ἄλλοθι καὶ ἐν ὑφῇ. See also Dieterich Nekyia pp. 39 ff.

μελιχλώρους κτλ. : ‘and honey-pale darlings, with their name—do you suppose they are the creation of anybody but a fond and euphemistic lover, who readily excuses pallor, if appearing on the cheek of youth?’ Plato is ridiculing the idea, as well as the name, μελίχλωρος: there never was a μελίχλωρος except in the lover's brain. The word is not, apparently, earlier than Plato, and does not occur again till Aristotle (Physiog. 6. 812^{a} 19): Theocritus uses it hypocoristically of the silkworm (10. 27). It is difficult, if not impossible, to connect τοὔνομα with μελιχλώρους, as is usually done, translating, ‘and the name honeypale, too,’ etc. Hartman proposes μελίχλωρος, which is ungrammatical, Richards μελιχλώρου. μελιχλώρου (which the poet Gray had already conjectured) is harmless enough: but emendation is unnecessary if καί is ‘and.’ μελιχλώρους—see cr. n.— has less MS authority than μελαγχλώρους, though supported by the Scholiast on VI 485 B, by μελίχλωρος in Aristotle and Theocritus (ll. cc.), and by the suitability of the word in the mouth of an ἐραστὴς ὑποκοριζόμενος. μελίχρους was apparently read by Plutarch (de recta rat. audiendi 45 A) and other ancient authorities: see Schneider's note.

ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ : ‘in my case,’ ‘taking me as your example’: cf. VII 524 E ὡσπερ ἐπὶ τοῦ δακτύλου ἐλέγομεν and X 597 B.

τριττυαρχοῦσιν . If they cannot become (not ‘be’ as J. and C.) στρατηγοί, they are glad to be τριττύαρχοι. In time of war, a στρατηγός was commander in chief; next to him came the 10 ταξίαρχοι, or “commanders of the 10 τάξεις of hoplites corresponding to the 10 φυλαί”; under the ταξίαρχοι were the τριττύαρχοι, who each commanded the hoplites of a single τριττύς. There were in all 30 τριττύες, 3 in each tribe. See Gilbert's Gk. Const. Ant. pp. 209 f. and Sandys on Arist. Pol. Ath. 61 §§ 1—3.

τὸν ἄρα κτλ. Cf. Lach. 182 D ἀλλ’ ἔστι μὲν—χαλεπὸν λέγειν περὶ ὁτουοῦν μαθήματος, ὡς οὐ χρὴ μανθάνειν· πάντα γὰρ ἐπίστασθαι ἀγαθὸν δοκεῖ εἶναι and Xen. Mem. IV 1. 2.

καταμανθάνειν . Apelt conjectures καλὰ μανθάνειν, but the text is free from objection.

τοιοῦτοι εἶναι : i.e. φιλοθεάμονες εἶναι, not φιλόσοφοι εἶναι, as the English translators appear to suppose. Glauco has clearly indicated that he does not consider such men philosophers. But as it is the love of learning which produces them, they will have to be included, unless Socrates narrows his definition, as Glauco is in fact inviting him to do. σοφία in φιλο‐σοφία is presently defined so as to exclude sense-perception: hence ‘lovers of sights and sounds’ are not ‘lovers of knowledge.’ See also on ὁμοίους μὲν φιλοσόφοις in E.

πρὸς μὲν λόγους κτλ. Cf. Prot. 347 C, D with my note ad loc. ἐπακοῦσαι should be taken with ἀπομεμισθωκότες.

οὔτε ‐‐ κώμας . Hartman would read πόλιν for πόλεις, “verum non Atticis solis urbana et ruralia erant Dionysia” (Schneider, quoting Laws 637 A, B). In Attica rural Dionysia were held during the month of Poseidon in many κῶμαι, e.g. Eleusis, Phlya, etc. “Prizes were offered by the different demes, and companies seem to have been formed in Athens for the purpose of travelling about the country and taking part in these provincial competitions” (Haigh Att. Theatre pp. 42 ff. Cf. Mommsen Fest. d. Stadt Athen pp. 349—359).

τοὺς τῶν τεχνυδρίων : sc. μαθητικούς, or rather perhaps φίλους or the like, supplied from the termination of μαθητικούς. Cf. φιλοτέχνους in 476 A. Athenaeus (X 452 C) wrongly connects τούς with φιλοσόφους.

ὁμοίους μὲν φιλοσόφοις . μέν without δέ is common enough after ἀλλά, the antithesis being contained in the preceding negative: cf. Prot. 344 A and Crito 43 D. It is also found in other cases where the antithesis is easy to supply: cf. IV 421 A, V 472 D, and Heindorf on Theaet. 161 E. Such men resemble φιλόσοφοι as the shadow resembles the substance; for the objects of sense, which they love, are shadows or copies of the objects of knowledge. The phrase receives its fullest interpretation from the simile of the Cave in Book VII.

οὐδαμῶς ‐‐ τοιόνδε . Cf. 473 A note Socrates again appeals to Glauco as one Platonist to another. We are to infer that the Theory of Ideas was already familiar in the school of Plato.

δύο αὐτὼ εἶναι should not be translated ‘that they are two things’ (D. and V.), but simply ‘that they are two.’

καὶ περὶ δικαίου κτλ. This is the first appearance of the Theory of ‘Ideas’ properly so called in the Republic. It should be carefully noted that Plato is not attempting to prove the theory: Glauco, in fact, admits it from the first. The Theory was approached from two directions, from the side of Mind or Thought (οἱ λόγοι οἱ ἐκ τῶν ἐπιστημῶν Arist. Met. 19. 990^{b} 12), and from the side of Existence (τὸ ἓν ἐπὶ πολλῶν l.c. Cf. Zeller^{4} II 1, pp. 652 ff.). It is the first of these methods which is followed throughout the present investigation. The εἴδη provide objects for Knowledge, as opposed to Opinion, and they are capable of being known: see 476 C, E ff., 478 A, 479 E. Throughout a large part of the following discussion, we are not much concerned with the Ideas as strictly transcendent entities or χωριστά, existing apart not only from particulars but also from the knowing Mind, for it is only in so far as he knows the Ideas that the philosopher-king can make use of them (cf. VI 484 C, D): he cannot possibly frame political institutions on the model of Ideas which he does not know. We must admit that the philosopher's apprehension of the Ideas is the relevant consideration here (cf. VI 484 C ἐναργὲς ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ ἔχοντες παράδειγμα), but it is none the less true, and the fact cannot be too strongly insisted on, that the Ideas themselves are not mere concepts of the mind, but have a separate and independent existence of their own. See the Appendix to Book VII ‘On Plato's Dialectic.’ The translation ‘Class’ for εἶδος (Jowett) is inappropriate on many grounds: ‘Form’ is better: but it will be most convenient to retain the usual expression ‘Idea,’ although it is not a translation, but a transliteration, whose unfortunate identity with the English word ‘idea’ is responsible in no small measure for many imperfect and erroneous interpretations of Plato's Ideal Theory. The German translators mostly render by ‘Begriff.’ The further specifications of the Ideal Theory in this passage are as follows. Each Idea is, in and by itself, one (476 A), changeless (479 A, 479 E), and perfect (VI 484 C, D), contrasting, in each of these respects, with the phenomena which ‘partake’ of or ‘imitate’ it (476 D note). Plato does not now touch on the question how it is that Mind has knowledge of a perfection above and beyond what can be derived from observation and experience. This faculty of Mind is elsewhere—in the Meno and the Phaedo—explained by the pre-existence of the Soul. See on 476 C.

Krohn has pointed out (Pl. St. p. 96) that the examples of εἴδη now cited by Plato are all of them attributes—δίκαιον, ἄδικον, ἀγαθόν, κακόν, etc. It does not however follow from this that the theory of Ideas is still in process of formation: on the contrary, the appeal to Glauco just above (475 E) implies that it was already a recognised dogma of the Platonic school. The simple explanation is that Plato prefers to cite relevant examples. The εἴδη of δίκαιον, ἀγαθόν, καλόν etc. are precisely those which it is the philosopher's duty to introduce into the practical administration of the State: cf. VI 484 C and X 596 A note

αὐτὸ μὲν κτλ. : ‘each is, in itself’ (i.e. viewed apart from its association with πράξεις etc.), ‘one, but by reason of their partnership with actions and bodies and one another, they each of them make their appearance everywhere and appear many.’ The εἷδος of Beautiful, for example, is, in itself, one, but by κοινωνία with e.g. an act of heroism, a sunset, a river, etc., it appears many. Similarly the εἷδος of Beautiful appears many by κοινωνία with other εἴδη, as when we say ‘the Good is beautiful,’ the ‘Useful is beautiful’ etc. The expression πανταχοῦ φανταζόμενα is better suited to describe Ideas allied with sensible particulars, than Ideas allied with Ideas; but statements involving the κοινωνία of Ideas with Ideas ‘make their appearance everywhere’ as well as those which connect the objects of sense with Ideas. In all such cases the statements themselves are of course true or false according as the κοινωνία is real or imaginary; but whether they are false or true, the appearance of plurality which they give to the Idea is always fallacious. Cf. Zeller^{4} II 1, p. 738 note 3 and see on 479 D. The words ἀλλήλων κοινωνία are further discussed in App. VII.

πρακτικούς : ‘men of action.’ These were not mentioned in 475 D, but they clearly belong to the same category.

τὴν φύσιν . Krohn (Pl. St. p. 95) justly observes that the φύσις τοῦ καλοῦ of III 401 C is “the true beauty, which has an adequate external form, whereas that of Book V is the essence of Beauty, which is never fully expressed in any outward form.” The contrast significantly marks the greater Idealism of Books V—VII. Cf. X 597 B note

καλὰ ‐‐ πράγματα . πράγματα is a sufficiently general term to include all the φαινόμενα πολλά which are specified in 476 A. The persons in question may be willing to assert that a σῶμα, a πρᾶξις, τὸ δίκαιον, τὸ ἀγαθόν etc. are καλά. But they refuse to go beyond isolated observations of this sort and admit that Beauty itself exists αὐτὸ καθ’ αὑτὸ μεθ’ αὑτοῦ μονοειδὲς ἀεὶ ὄν ( Symp. 211 B); and hence their notions of beauty are uncoordinated, inconsistent, unstable.

ἄν τις ἡγῆται κτλ. Cf. Symp. 210 A.

ἐάν τε ἐν ὕπνῳ κτλ. It is the pre-existence of the soul which qualifies her by nature to distinguish between the Idea or Original, and the phenomenon or copy. But as we lost at birth our ante-natal knowledge of the Idea, we cannot distinguish between Ideas and phenomena until we recover that knowledge. To effect this recovery is the aim of education. The uneducated wander in a sort of dreamland, taking shadows for realities, the copy for the Original. Cf. Phaed. 74 A—76 D, Men. 81 A ff., Symp. 209 E—212 A.

μετέχοντα . Cf. Phaed. 100 D. The words by which Plato describes the relation of Ideas and particulars are of necessity figurative. κοινωνία is the vaguest, and least metaphorical; side by side with it comes παρουσία (of the Idea) and μέθεξις (of the particular). A somewhat different figure is involved when the Idea is regarded as the Original (Urbild), and the particular as its likeness. Plato does not scruple to use both figures side by side: here, for example, the Idea was a παράδειγμα just above (αὐτὸ—ᾧ ἔοικεν 476 C: cf. VI 500 E ff., X 596 B).

οὗτος . Dümmler (Antisthenica p. 42) supposes that Plato means Antisthenes. There was undoubtedly no love lost between the two philosophers: see the authorities cited in Urban Ueber die Erwähnungen der Phil. d. Antisthenes in d. Pl. Schr. (Königsberg 1882), and Zeller^{4} II 1, p. 296 note 2. Antisthenes was in particular a bitter opponent of the Theory of Ideas. The passage of arms between Plato and him is well known: ὦ Πλάτων, ἵππον μὲν ὁρῶ, ἱππότητα δὲ οὐχ ὁρῶ, καὶ ὃς εἶπεν ἔχεις μὲν ᾧ ἵππος ὁρᾶται, τόδε τὸ ὄμμα, ᾧ δε ἱππότης θεωρεῖται, οὐδέπω κέκτησαι (Simplicius in Schol. Arist. 66^{b} 44 ed. Brandis, and other authorities quoted by Urban l.c. p. 3). It is no doubt true, as Stein observes in his Geschichte des Platonismus, that Plato's “Kunst verallgemeinert nicht bloss das Historische, sondern individualisiert auch das Allgemeine”; but Antisthenes himself could scarcely deny that the cap fits. The deictic οὗτος is in favour of Dümmler's view, which certainly adds point to the whole passage; note in particular χαλεπαίνῃ, παραμυθεῖσθαι, πείθειν ἠρέμα (allusions perhaps to the ferocity of his opponent: Antisthenes had nicknamed Plato Σάθων! cf. Ath. V 220 D), οὐχ ὑγιαίνει (‘is barely sane’), οὐδεὶς αὐτῷ φθόνος, and the delightful innuendo ἄσμενοι ἂν ἴδοιμεν εἰδότα τι. Antisthenes himself wrote a work περὶ δόξης καὶ ἐπιστήμης (D. L. VI 17), and Plato may well be thinking of it here: see next note. But we must be careful to note that Plato, even if we allow that Antisthenes is in his mind, does not refer to Antisthenes alone; he merely individualizes the type in him.

πῶς γὰρ ‐‐ γνωσθείη ; ‘for how can something which is not, be known?’ Cf. Parm. 132 B, C ἓν ἕκαστόν ἐστι τῶν νοημάτων, vόημα δὲ οὐδενός; Ἀλλ’ ἀδύνατον, εἰπεῖν. Ἀλλὰ τινός; Ναί. Ὄντος ἢ οὐκ ὄντος; Ὄντος. Οὐχ ἑνός τινος, ὃ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν τὸ νόημα ἐπὸν νοεῖ, μίαν τινὰ οὖσαν ἰδέαν; Ναί. “Quod Parmenides simpliciter dicit ταὐτὸν δ’ ἐστὶ νοεῖν τε καὶ οὕνεκέν ἐστι νόημα, id sibi prorsus probari Plato plus semel significat” Bonitz Disput. Plato. duae p. 11. That everything which is known exists in a certain sense, is of course a truism. But when Plato says that the objects of knowledge ‘are,’ the kind of οὐσία which he means is substantial, selfexistent οὐσία. If it is really Antisthenes for whom Glauco is answering (ὑπὲρ ἐκείνου ἀποκρίνου), the words πῶς—γνωσθείη are exceedingly well chosen; for Antisthenes (perhaps in his περὶ δόξης ἢ ἐπιστήμης, perhaps in Σάθων, ἢ οὐκ ἔστιν ἀντιλέγειν) had argued in almost exactly the same way to prove the impossibility of contradiction. See Proclus in Crat. 37 (Zeller^{4} II 1 p. 302 note 1) Ἀντισθένης ἔλεγεν μὴ δεῖν ἀντιλέγειν· πᾶς γάρ, φησί, λόγος ἀληθεύει· ὁ γὰρ λέγων τὶ λέγει· ὁ δὲ τὶ λέγων τὸ ὂν λέγει· ὁ δὲ τὸ ὂν λέγων ἀληθεύει and cf. Plat. Crat. 429 D. It is by no means improbable that Plato has this or some similar argument of Antisthenes in view, and feathers his arrows from his victim's wing. Antisthenes and his friends would not of course admit the connotation which Plato gives to ὄν, but Plato is not attempting to prove the Ideal theory. The object of the whole investigation is to shew that his opponents possess only δόξα, on the assumption that the theory of Ideas is true: cf. 476 A note

κἂν εἰ ‐‐ σκοποῖμεν . Further investigation from other points of view cannot weaken the conviction which Socrates and Glauco have already formed. The phrase is another indication that we are not here proving the Ideal Theory: see last note. Hartman should not have revived Ast's conjecture ἔχομεν <ἢ> καὶ πλεοναχῆ σκοπῶμεν.

εἰ ἐπὶ κτλ. See cr. n. Hermann's conjecture, that ἐπεί has been lost before ἐπί, has met with most favour. But ἐπεὶ ἐπί has an unpleasing sound, and εἰ might just as easily have disappeared as ἐπεί. Schneider and Stallbaum (with Ξ and the older editors) read οὐκοῦν ἐπὶ μὲν—ἐπὶ τῷ μεταξὺ δὲ κτλ., but the reading of q is intrinsically better, and the error an easier one. The reference in ἦν (‘is, as we saw’) is to 476 e—477 A.

κατ) αὐτὴν ‐‐ αὑτῆς : ‘each of them in accordance just with its own peculiar power,’ i.e. in accordance with this, and nothing else. αὐτήν is ipsam in the sense of solam. Cf. 477 D, where it is shewn that δυνάμεις should be classified on this same principle: also 478 A ἐφ’ ἑτέρῳ ἄρα ἕτερόν τι δυναμένη ἑκατέρα αὐτῶν πέφυκεν. The reading κατὰ τὴν αὐτήν—see cr. n.—gives precisely the wrong sense. Schneider and others— perhaps rightly—omit αὐτήν (with Vind. F), while Baiter adopts Hermann's ἄλλην —a very improbable correction. It is best, I think, to follow Schmidt, supposing that αὐτήν was accidentally omitted, and afterwards wrongly replaced.

μᾶλλον δὲ κτλ. Socrates had somewhat awkwardly called δόξα a δύναμις, and at the same time spoken of it as possessing a δύναμις. The present sentence introduces a sort of πάρεργον in which the notion δύναμις is more accurately defined. We may infer that δυνάμεις in the sense of (the intellectual) ‘powers’ was unfamiliar at the time when this section was written. It was perhaps— like ποιότης for example—one of Plato's experiments in language. ‘Faculties’ is, I think, too concrete to be a right translation.

αὐτήν is difficult. It is not quite easy to understand the word as ipsam, especially as it is so far from ἐπιστήμην. Had Plato written αὐτὴν τὴν ἐπιστήμην, or ἐπιστήμην—καὶ αὐτήν there would have been little or no difficulty. As it is, if the text is right, we should probably (with Schneider and others) regard αὐτήν as tautological: cf. IV 428 A note Should we perhaps read Δεῦρο δὴ πάλιν, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, ὦ ἄριστε, <ἐπὶ> ἐπιστήμην. πότερον κτλ.? The conjecture is not convincing, although it was at ἐπιστήμη that the digression began in 477 B. “If I were to make any change” says Jackson “I would put αὐτήν before or after τίθης.”

οἴσομεν . Θ with two Vienna MSS reads θήσομεν, which is also a correction in Cesenas M. θήσομεν was likewise conjectured by Cobet. A precise parallel is hard to find; but φέρειν is used elsewhere of the operations of the mind (cf. 478 B), and θήσομεν would not be likely to suffer corruption, especially as εἰς τί γένος τίθης occurs just before.

δόξα . Instead of δόξα O. Schneider (Versuch ein. genet. Entw. d. Pl. ἀγαθόν p. 13) would read δύναμις, but δυνάμεθα should of course be taken in its full etymological sense.

πῶς γὰρ ἂν ‐‐ τιθείη . The infallibility of knowledge is a cardinal principle with Plato: cf. Gorg. 454 D and Theaet. 152 C, 186 C ff. See Zeller^{4} II 1, p. 591.

δοξάζει . See cr. n. The same conjecture had occurred to Jackson. δοξάζειν is in itself defensible and seems at first sight required by the balance of clauses ἐπιστήμη μέν γέ που—δόξα δέ. But the introduction of φαμέν breaks the balance, and suggests a new departure. The real reason for writing δοξάζει is the occurrence of ἆρ’ οὖν τὸ μὴ ὂν δοξάζει (SC. δόξα); in 478 B. Unless δοξάζει is read here, it is very difficult to supply the subject of δοξάζει there. Reading δοξάζει, again, we supply after ἦ ταὐτόν not δοξάζειν (as must be done if the infinitive is read), but δοξάζει. This too is an improvement, because it provides an exact balance to γιγνώσκει. If Plato had meant ἢ ταὐτὸν δοξάζειν, we should expect him to have written not γιγνώσκει, but γιγνώσκειν. On the corruption see Introd. § 5.

ἀμφότεραί ἐστον . The union of a plural subject with a dual verb is tolerably frequent in Plato: cf. Euthyd. 278 E, 303 C. These and other examples are quoted in Roeper de dualis usu Plat. p. 30.

ἆῤ οὖν ‐‐ δοξάζει ; J. and C. understand ὁ δοξάζων: but δόξα is more appropriate in itself, and much more easily supplied, especially if δοξάζει is read in 478 A: see note ad loc.

ἢ ἀδύνατον κτλ. Cf. Theaet. 189 B οὐκ ἄρα οἷόν τε τὸ μὴ ὂν δοξάζειν, οὔτε περὶ τῶν ὄντων οὔτε αὐτὸ καθ’ αὑτό. μὴ ὄν is here the bare negative—absolute not-being. Cf. Bosanquet Companion p. 212.

μὴ ὄν γε : i.q. τὸ μὴ ὄν γε (cf. μὴ ὄντι just below), not εἰ μὴ εἴη γε (as Stallbaum and Campbell suppose). Schneider and Jowett take the right view.

δοξάζει . The subject is δόξα rather than ὁ δοξάζων, in spite of ὁ δοξάζων above. δόξα was the subject of the verb where the two stages of the argument began (478 A ἦ ταὐτόν sc. δόξα δοξάζει and 478 B ἆρ’ οὖν τὸ μὴ ὂν δοξάζει), and ought to be so in the conclusion also.

σαφηνείᾳ ‐‐ ἀσαφείᾳ . The full significance of these words does not appear till VI 508 D ff., where the relation between Light and Truth is explained. See note ad loc. and VI 511 C note

ἐντὸς δ’ ἀμφοῖν . Hartman (with Ast) prefers ἐντὸς δὴ ἀμφοῖν. It is much better to regard the expression as a step in the argument, leading to the conclusion μεταξὺ ἄρα κτλ.

οἷον ‐‐ ὄν . οἷον is adverbial; if it were an adjective the infinitive would follow. The qualification suggests that in the ultimate analysis it is inaccurate to say that phenomena ‘both are and are not’: the truth is that they lie somewhere between being and not being. Hence also οὕτως ἔχει ὡς εἶναί τε καὶ μὴ εἶναι in 477 A. See also on καὶ γὰρ ταῦτα κτλ. in 479 C. It should be noted that Plato now adds ἅμα: in 477 A it was absent. See on 479 A τούτων γὰρ δὴ κτλ.

ὁ χρηστός . Antisthenes is perhaps in Plato's mind (Dümmler Antisth. p. 42). Others have thought of Isocrates, but with less reason. λεγέτω μοι, φήσω, καὶ ἀποκρινέσθω certainly sounds like a personal challenge. See also on 476 D and 480 A.

ἰδέαν τινά . ἰδέα has not yet been used in the Republic of the Idea; hence τινά. Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 64, 96) has pointed this out, but makes too much of it. In ἰδέα, as Cohen remarks (Platons Ideenlehre u. d. Mathematik p. 12), “das ἰδεῖν pulsirt”: cf. 475 E τοὺς τῆς ἀληθείας —φιλοθεάμονας, VI 486 D and Symp. 211 D.

ἀεὶ ‐‐ νομίζει . μέν after ἀεί—see cr. n.—is retained by Schneider and others. It is however much harsher than the ordinary cases of μέν without δέ (see on 475 E), and the majority of MSS agree with II in omitting it. Madvig would delete the article before καλά; but its retention provides a better antithesis to ἄν τις ἓν τὸ καλὸν φῇ εἶναι. τὰ καλά is here the plural, not of καλόν τι, but of τὸ καλόν; and Plato means that the φιλοθεάμων has many standards of beauty: cf. 479 D notes

ἐκεῖνος ‐‐ καί . These words are certainly genuine, though omitted in Ξ, and supposed by Hartman to be a marginal note on ὁ χρηστός. οὐδαμῇ ἀνεχόμενος by itself would be comparatively tame.

τούτων γὰρ δή κτλ. The many καλά ‘are’ and ‘are not,’ because they are beautiful and not-beautiful. We may infer, on the other hand, that the αὐτὸ κάλλος always ‘is,’ because (among other reasons) it is always beautiful. In other words, the essence of an Idea consists in its eternal unity and identity with itself. Cf. Symp. 211 A, where the αὐτὸ καλόν is said to be οὐ τῇ μὲν καλόν, τῇ δ’ αἰσχρόν, οὐδὲ τότε μέν, τότε δ’ οὔ, οὐδὲ πρὸς μὲν τὸ καλόν, πρὸς δὲ τὸ αἰσχρόν, οὐδ’ ἔνθα μὲν καλόν, ἔνθα δὲ αἰσχρόν, ὡς τισὶ μὲν ὂν καλόν, τισὶ δὲ αἰσχρόν. This passage will explain what Plato means by saying that there is not one of the πολλὰ καλά which is not also αἰσχρόν. Cf. also Bosanquet Companion pp. 213 f. Krohn (Pl. Fr. p. 73) argues that this passage is inconsistent with the Maxim of Contradiction as laid down in IV 436 B. But Plato does not mean that τὰ πολλὰ καλά are αἰσχρὰ κατὰ ταὐτὸν καὶ πρὸς ταὐτόν, nor should ἅμα in 478 D be interpreted in this sense. A particular καλόν is ἅμα καλὸν καὶ αἰσχρόν, ὡς τισὶ μὲν ‐ὂν καλόν, τισὶ δὲ αἰσχρόν. Cf. Zeller^{4} II I, p. 627 note 2.

τὰ πολλὰ διπλάσια are πρὸς μὲν τὸ διπλάσια, πρὸς δὲ τὸ ἡμίσεα, whereas the αὐτὸ διπλάσιον is always and in every relation διπλάσιον: see last note and VII 523 C ff., Phaed. 102 B, C. The examples of διπλάσια, μεγάλα, βαρέα are examples and nothing more; the others, καλά, δίκαια, ὅσια, are relevant in a wider sense, for the aim of the philosopherking is to frame his καλλίπολις on the model of the αὐτὸ ἀγαθόν. See on 476 A.

ἀμφοτέρων ἕξεται : “utrisque adhaerescet” Stallbaum.

τοῖς ἐν ταῖς κτλ. ἐπαμφοτερίζουσιν is certainly neuter, as Schneider shews, and not masculine: cf. ταῦτα ἐπαμφοτερίζει below. The word is very frequently used in agreement with neuter or inanimate subjects: see Stephanus Hase Thes. s.v. The ‘children's riddle’ is (according to one of the two versions given by the Scholiast) αἶνός τίς ἐστιν ὡς ἀνήρ τε κοὐκ ἀνὴρ | ὄρνιθα κοὐκ ὄρνιθ’ ἰδών τε κοὐκ ἰδών, | ἐπὶ ξύλου τε κοὐ ξύλου καθημένην | λίθῳ τε κοὐ λίθῳ βάλοι τε κοὐ βάλοι. Athenaeus (X 452 C) assigns it (on the authority of Clearchus) to Panarces. The interpretation is “a eunuch aimed at a bat which he saw imperfectly sitting upon a reed with a pumice-stone and missed him” (J. and C.). This riddle was used as an exercise in logic among the Stoics (Dümmler Antisth. p. 43), but that is not a sufficient reason for supposing (with Dümmler) that they took it from Antisthenes.

τῆς βολῆς πέρι κτλ. The MSS apparently read περί: πέρι is due to Benedictus. Stephanus wishes to delete the second, Richards the first preposition, but the whole sentence is loosely constructed, as if a mere child's riddle was not worth remembering or dwelling on: ‘the children's riddle about the eunuch, don't you know, about hitting the bat, what it was the riddle says he struck it with, and on what it was sitting.’ ᾧ and not ὡς (as Baiter supposed) is the reading of A.

καὶ γὰρ ταῦτα κτλ. ταῦτα is of course τὰ πολλά, as Jowett and others rightly explain. Campbell appears strangely to take it of the children's riddle. I agree with Ast that ἐπαμφοτερίζειν—see cr. n.—must be wrong. It is usual to supply ἔοικε, but this is very difficult, and the categoric affirmative is much more to the point. For the error see Introd. § 5. Hartman hastily pronounces οὔτ’ ἀμφότερα οὔτε οὐδέτερον spurious on the ground that “illas res οὐδέτερον esse modo (οὔτε εἶναι—νοῆσαι) dictum est,” and that “non verum est illas res non esse ἀμφότερα.” The text is perfectly sound. Phenomena, says Glauco, cannot be ‘fixedly conceived of’ as either a being or b not being, nor yet as c neither of the two. The fourth alternative is to ‘fix them in the mind’ as d both being and not being. This too is impossible, although we may say that they ‘both are and are not’ (477 A, 478 D). The reason is that they are not, in the last analysis, ‘both being and notbeing,’ but something between the two, as Socrates presently points out. (See also on οἷον in 478 D.) Phenomena cannot be fixedly conceived (παγίως νοῆσαι) in any kind of way, because they have no fixity themselves. They are in a constant state of Heraclitean flux: cf. κυλινδεῖται, πλανητόν in D and (for παγίως) IV 434 D note

τὰ τῶν πολλῶν κτλ. : “the multitude's multitudinous formulae” Bosanquet. The words refer to general rules, standards, canons, believed in by the multitude (cf. τὰ τῶν πολλῶν δόγματα VI 493 A), who have on every single subject many such standards (πολλὰ νόμιμα), mutually inconsistent and uncoordinated, because they do not know that τὸ καλόν, τὸ ἀγαθόν etc. are each of them ἕν. They say, for example, ‘τὸ ἡδύ is καλόν,’ ‘τὸ συμφέρον is καλόν,’ ‘τὸ ἀγαθόν is καλόν,’ and so on. Such assertions give the appearance of plurality to τὸ καλόν, by connecting it, not indeed with the objects of sense, but with other εἴδη (cf. 476 A, 476 C notes). The form in which Plato expresses his conclusion (τὰ τῶν πολλῶν πολλὰ νόμιμα καλοῦ πέρι and not simply τὰ πολλὰ καλά) prepares us for VI 484 C, where the whole purpose of this enquiry is disclosed. It is the business of the philosopher-king to bring order out of chaos by remodelling the νόμιμα of the many in conformity with the Idea. He must not allow them to predicate κοινωνία of εἴδη unless the εἴδη really intercommunicate.

πολλὰ καλά . Is καλά the plural of ‘ the beautiful,’ or of ‘a beautiful’? This question is raised by Bosanquet, who answers it thus: “the sentence about formulae leads me to interpret it in the former sense=‘many standards,’ or cases accepted as standards, ‘of beauty.’” Cf. 479 A, where however we have πολλὰ τὰ καλά, and its antithesis ἓν τὸ καλόν. The expression πολλὰ καλά must, I think, be taken in its usual sense, as the plural of καλόν τι; but it includes not only the objects of sense, but also νόμιμα περὶ καλοῦ, which are themselves πολλὰ καλά, because they connect αὐτὸ τὸ καλόν with another εἶδος. See last note.

αὐτὰ ἕκαστα : the generalised expression including αὐτὸ καλόν, αὐτὸ δίκαιον and all the Ideas. Cf. VI 507 B note

ἔφαμεν . 476 B.

ἆρα ‐‐ λέγωμεν ; See Isocrates de Soph. 8 πλείω κατορθοῦντας τοὺς ταῖς δόξαις χρωμένους ἢ τοὺς τὴν ἐπιστήμην ἔχειν ἐπαγγελλομένους. To this (according to Teichmüller Lit. Fehd. I p. 103) Plato here replies, and the retort is supposed to be the more telling, because Isocrates, in spite of the sentence just quoted, aspired to the name φιλόσοφος: see Spengel Isokrates u. Platon pp. 13, 22 ff. Dümmler, on the other hand, supposes that Antisthenes is meant, as before (see on 476 D). I can see no sufficient reason for holding that Plato is here thinking specially of either, although the cap fits both.

φιλοσόφους . The connotation of φιλόσοφος has greatly altered or developed since Book II: see II 376 B note, and cf. Krohn Pl. St. pp. 9, 20, 102. Krohn is fully justified when he calls the concluding part of Book V “the turning-point” of the Republic (ib. p. 107). Plato's hitherto ‘Hellenic city’ is now well on the road to become an ‘ensample in the Heavens.’

— 485 A We have now to shew that Philosophers, as defined by us, should be entrusted with the government. It is they alone who, by virtue of the Ideal in their souls, are able to guard the laws and institutions of a city. We shall therefore make them our Guardians, if they possess the necessary practical qualifications. A study of their nature will shew that it is possible for them to unite both kinds of requisites.

διὰ μακροῦ ‐‐ λόγου : ‘through the conclusion of a somewhat lengthy argument.’ διεξελθόντος is intransitive, as Schneider saw: cf. Laws 805 B ἀλλὰ γὰρ εἶπον τὸν μὲν λόγον ἐᾶσαι διεξελθεῖν, εὖ διελθόντος δὲ οὕτω τὸ δοκοῦν αἱρεῖσθαι δεῖν. (The reference in εἶπον is to 799 E κἂν ἡ διέξοδος αὕτη ὅλη σχοῦσα τέλος ἱκανῶς ἂν μηνύσειε κτλ.) Cf. also Dem. in Mid. 84. The word διεξελθόντος is not otiose, because it is not till the very end of the argument that the φιλόσοφος is discovered (V 480 A). The mistaken notion (held by Stallbaum) that the word must be transitive induced Herwerden ( Mnem. N. S. XIX p. 333) to propose διεξελθοῦσι, a conjecture repeated also by Richards. Baiter (after Hermann and Ast) reads διεξελθόντες with three inferior MSS, as if the philosophers had “run the gauntlet of the argument through which their nature is revealed” (J. and C.). τοῦ λόγου (found in a few MSS) is favoured by Stallbaum, and suggested as an alternative also by Herwerden, as if διὰ μακροῦ τινὸς could mean ‘at some length.’ The first hand in Ξ omits διά, but it occurs in all the other MSS. None of these expedients is nearly so good as the reading of the best MSS, if Schneider's explanation be adopted. μακροῦ has also caused difficulty, since the investigation extends over only six pages of Stephanus: see Krohn Pl. St. pp. 105 ff. By Pfleiderer (Zur Lösung etc. p. 54), who maintains (in partial agreement with Spengel) that V 471 C—VII (inclusive) embodies the dialogue Φιλόσοφος announced in the beginning of the Politicus and Sophist, μακροῦ is hailed as a significant lapsus calami, and referred to the investigations of the Sophist, Euthydemus and Politicus. But μακροῦ is qualified by τινός, and surely 474 C—480 A may be described as ‘a somewhat lengthy enquiry.’ There is no allusion to the proverbial μακρὸς λόγος of which Aristotle speaks in Met. N 3. 1091^{a} 7 ff. ὁ Σιμωνίδου μακρὸς λόγος· γίγνεται γὰρ ὁ μακρὸς λόγος ὥσπερ ὁ τῶν δούλων, ὅταν μηδὲν ὑγιὲς λέγωσιν .

οἵ is found only in A and Π^{1}: all the other MSS have οἷοι. For οἵ cf. (with Schneider) 493 B and VIII 559 A.

πολλὰ κτλ. Herwerden conjectures πολλὰ <ἦν>, which would weaken the emphasis on πολλά. For the omission of ἦν see Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. p. 33. From the standpoint of Books VI and VII it is impossible to say what ‘just life’ means unless we know the ἰδέα τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ etc. (see 506 A): hence πολλὰ τὰ λοιπὰ διελθεῖν.

πάντως κτλ. παντοίως was conjectured by Ast and is read by Stallbaum. It occurs as a late correction in Π as well as in A (see cr. n.), and has some insignificant MS authority besides. The difference is like that between ὅς and οἷος: see 484 A note With πλανώμενοι cf. πλανητόν in V 479 D. It is the fluctuation of the Object which makes the Subject fluctuate.

καθιστάναι : “sc. λέγοντες h.e. κελεύοντες” Schneider.

τυφλῶν . They who cannot see the Ideas are blind: cf. Plato's retort to Antisthenes quoted on V 476 D.

καὶ μηδὲν κτλ. A transcendental παράδειγμα of which he knew nothing would be useless to the philosopherking. It does not however follow that the Ideas are not αὐτὰ καθ’ αὑτά, but merely that we are concerned with them in so far as they are known by the φιλόσοφος. See on V 476 A. ὡς οἷόν τε ἀκριβέστατα admits that he may not see them in all their fulness and purity.

εἰς τὸ ἀληθέστατον κτλ. Cf. 500 C, 500 E—501 C (where the same figure is employed). The political value of the philosopher's knowledge of the Idea is here for the first time explicitly affirmed and explained: see V 479 D note

ἐκεῖσε : because truth is ‘yonder’— in the Heaven of the Ideas. The philosopher must call it from Heaven to Earth, by assimilating to it ‘the earthly canons’ (τὰ ἐνθάδε νόμιμα).

οὕτω δή =‘then and not till then’ suggests that it is otherwise in existing States.

ἐὰν δέῃ τίθεσθαι . If he has the happiness to be born ‘in his own country’ (IX 592 A), whose institutions are already modelled on the Ideas, he need only guard ( φυλάττοντες suggests the φύλακες) and preserve what is already established. Otherwise he must himself become a legislator. Cobet's excision of τίθεσθαι is wholly gratuitous: his omission of τά in τὰ κείμενα is even worse, for the laws need not be of the philosopher's own making.

διαφέρει . It would be easy to write διαφέρειν (with q etc.), but διαφέρει may be impersonal, or Glauco may be substituting the singular for the plural: see on I 347 A and V 465 E. Cf. also infra 496 A.

ἐλλείποιντο . Cf. Xen. Mem. II 6. 5 μὴ ἐλλείπεσθαι εὖ ποιῶν τοὺς εὐεργετοῦντας ἑαυτόν and Soph. 258 B.

κἀκεῖνα : viz. τἄλλα, as defined in ἐμπειρίᾳ—ὑστεροῦντας.

ταῦτα : i.e. ‘the special attributes of the philosopher’ (J. and C.).

ἐλέγομεν . V 474 B.

δεῖ . See cr. n. and Introd. § 5.

485A - 487A The philosophic nature loves eternal and changeless Being in its entirety. It follows that the philosopher naturally loves Truth, despises the pleasures of the body, is temperate, free from avarice, high-minded, courageous, just and gentle. He is also quick to learn, retentive in memory, not given to extravagance in conduct, but modest and well-bred. To such men, when years and education have perfected their natural qualities, we may fairly entrust our city.

ff. This section should be compared on the one hand with II 375 A— 376 C, 377 B—III 391 E, and on the other with VII 535 A, B notes In Book II the natural qualities insisted on were primarily moral; here and in VII they are primarily intellectual. This is in harmony with the difference between the earlier and later schemes of education: for the basis of the first was ὀρθὴ δόξα, whereas that of the second is ἐπιστήμη. There is little or no indication to shew that even the ἄρχοντες of I—IV knew or aspired to the Ideas (see 497 C note) and the ἐπίκουροι certainly did not. Krohn is, in a certain sense, right when he maintains that in VI—VII we have “einen neuen Archontenstand und eine neue Archontendisciplin” (Pl. St. p. 107), but the distinction of the ‘golden’ and ‘silver’ races in III 415 A ff. prepares us for a more thorough-going discrimination between the two higher classes than was attempted in the earlier sketch, and we must of course remember that the new discipline is not intended to supersede, but to supervene upon the old. See also Hirzel Der Dialog I p. 236.

ἐκείνης τῆς οὐσίας . For the genitive cf. IV 445 E note

γενέσεως καὶ φθορᾶς have not yet been employed in this half-technical sense (Krohn Pl. St. p. 112). The substance of the Ideas always ‘is’: that of phenomena ‘is driven to and fro by generation and destruction’—by generation when it becomes determined in one particular direction (e.g. καλόν, ἵππος, ἄνθρωπος), by destruction when it loses that particular determination and puts on another. Cf. V 479 A, B. Plato's form of expression seems to imply that there is a sort of οὐσία or substratum in phenomena. At a later stage he seems to have identified this with space—the ἐκμαγεῖον —κινούμενόν τε καὶ διασχηματιζόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν εἰσιόντων, φαίνεται δὲ δἰ ἐκεῖνα ἄλλοτε ἀλλοῖον ( Tim. 50 C): but of this there is no hint here. Cf. Zeller^{4} II 1. p. 725.

πάσης αὐτῆς : i.e. οὐσίας τῆς ἀεὶ οὔσης, not (as Ast) ἐπιστήμης or μαθήσεως.

οὔτε τιμιωτέρου κτλ. Cf. Parm. 130 C—E.

πρόσθεν . V 474 D—475 B.

τὴν ἀψεύδειαν κτλ. Cf. III 389 B.

ἑκόντας εἶναι is ‘voluntarily,’ not ‘if it can be helped’ (D. and V.): cf. I 336 E note

ψεῦδος should be understood in its strict Platonic sense, as ‘ignorance in the soul respecting the truth’ (II 382 B notes). The politician who knows not the Ideal is, according to Plato, a liar, not the statesman who employs for example κλῆροί τινες κομψοί to attain his Ideal. There is absolutely no reason to suppose (with Bosanquet) that Plato means to withdraw from the regulations of V 460 A.

τὸν ἐρωτικῶς κτλ. Love me, love my friend. The Philosopher loves Wisdom, and Truth is Wisdom's kinswoman and familiar friend.

ὥσπερ ῥεῦμα κτλ. The simile becomes almost an identification, as often in Greek: the desires are as it were a stream diverted εἰς ἕν τι. Cf. III 401 C (reading τις—ὥσπερ αὔρα), VII 519 A τὰς τῆς γενέσεως ξυγγενεῖς ὥσπερ μολυβδίδας and VII 534 D note To explain ἀπωχετευμένον as for ἀπωχετευμέναι (with Stallbaum and others) is to obtrude our standpoint upon the Greeks. Schneider formerly agreed with Stallbaum, but afterwards drew back ( Addit. p. 45) and translated “wie ein dorthin abgeleiteter Strom.”

τὰς δέ . τάς is probably an ‘internal accusative’ depending on ἐκλείποιεν, though rendered easier by the occurrence of περὶ τὴν ἡδονὴν—εἶεν ἄν just before. Schneider carries on περί, but the preposition is difficult to supply when the two clauses have different verbs. Cf. IV 428 C note

σώφρων κτλ. Cf. III 389 D —390 E.

ὧν γὰρ ἕνεκα : i.e. such bodily and other delights as money can buy.

χρήματα ‐‐ δαπάνης : ‘wealth with its accompaniment of lavish outlay.’ μετὰ πολλῆς δαπάνης should not, I think, be taken with σπουδάζεται (Schneider, D. and V., J. and C., although Jowett's translation takes the correct view), but rather with χρήματα. Herwerden formerly explained δαπάνης as=τῆς τοῦ δαπανᾶν ἐπιθυμίας, but afterwards ( Mnem. N. S. XIX p. 333) took it to mean “pecunia cuius ope sumptus fieret” comparing inter alia VIII 550 D and Laws 718 A. This view agrees closely with mine, but it is not necessary to suppose that δαπάνη means more than simply ‘outlay.’

ἀνελευθερίας . ἀνελευθερία or σμικρολογία is in Plato the antithesis of ὑπερηφανία: cf. II 391 C and Critias 112 C. The virtuous mean is μεγαλοπρέπεια, which is a sort of highmindedness (cf. 503 C): hence μεγαλοπρέπεια just below and μεγαλοπρεπής in the summary at 487 A. Plato does not, like Aristotle (Eth. Nic. IV cc. 4—6), restrict μεγαλοπρέπεια and its opposing vices to pecuniary dealings, although φιλοχρηματία, for example, is a symptom of ἀνελευθερία (II 391 C).

τοῦ ὅλου καὶ παντός . Cf. Theaet. 173 E ff. This and the following sentence admirably describe the peculiar genius of Plato himself. See the eloquent words of Longinus περὶ ὕψους 35, and compare them with Goethe's noble characterisation of Plato: “Er dringt in die Tiefen, mehr um sie mit seinem Wesen auszufüllen, als um sie zu erforschen. Er bewegt sich nach der Höhe, mit Sehnsucht seines Ursprungs wieder theilhaft zu werden. Alles, was er äussert, bezieht sich auf ein ewig Ganzes, Gutes, Wahres, Schönes, dessen Forderung er in jedem Busen aufzuregen strebt.”

ᾗ ‐‐ διανοίᾳ . ᾧ—διανοίας (the reading of q and some other MSS, followed by Ast and Stallbaum) is an obvious ‘emendation,’ to suit τούτῳ below. It is much less elegant, notwithstanding the irregularity involved in τούτῳ, for which Schneider compares Gorg. 523 B, a precise parallel, in spite of Stallbaum's assertion to the contrary. Cf. also X 606 B note ᾗ οὖν is moreover found in the quotation of this passage by Marcus Aurelius, according to the text of Vaticanus A: see Stich's edition p. 87 note

μέγα τι δοκεῖν . Cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. IV 7. 1123^{b} 32 τίνος γὰρ ἕνεκα πράξει αἰσχρά, ᾧ οὐθὲν μέγα (of the μεγαλόψυχος).

θάνατον κτλ. Cf. III 386 A ff.

ἀλαζών is a special case of φιλοψευδής (485 D). Cf. 489 E.

ἄδικος is used of course in the popular sense, not with the meaning assigned to it in Book IV.

ἥμερος ‐‐ ἀγρία . Cf. II 375 B ff.

εὐμαθὴς κτλ. J. and C. wrongly supply εἰ ἄρα. πότερον is often omitted in such sentences: cf. Phaedr. 270 D and other examples in Ast's Lexicon s.v. πότερον.

αὐτὴν ‐‐ εἶναι . The text is successfully defended by Vahlen (Hermes 1877 p. 196) who compares II 375 E οὐ παρὰ φύσιν ζητοῦμεν τοιοῦτον εἶναι τὸν φύλακα and (for the pleonasm) Phaed. 101 E ἱκανοὶ γὰρ—δύνασθαι αὐτοὶ αὑτοῖς ἀρέσκειν. Madvig's proposal (adopted by Baiter) αὖ ἣν ζητοῦμεν δεῖ εἶναι is neat but unnecessary; still less should we (with Herwerden) bracket δεῖν εἶναι. With the sentiment Krohn (Pl. St. p. 363) compares Xen. Mem. IV 1. 2.

ἀσχήμονος . Herwerden should not have conjectured ἀμνήμονος. We are passing to a fresh point. ἀμουσία and ἀσχημοσύνη (‘bad form’) tend to ἀμετρία ‘excess,’ ‘extravagance’ in behaviour (cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. IV 8. 1125^{a} 12—16); and extravagant behaviour is a form of untruth, because it makes a man appear what he is not. The love of truth will therefore save the philosopher from selfassertion and bad manners.

φύσει κτλ. The antecedent of ἥν is διάνοιαν: and φύσει (‘by nature,’ ‘naturally’) should be taken with the adjectives ἔμμετρον and εὔχαριν. It might seem possible to translate: ‘Let us insist, then, on a modest and agreeable habit of mind for a nature whose innate disposition is to make it easy to lead to the Form of each essential Being,’ making φύσει the antecedent to ἥν: but the ordinary view gives a better sense. The preceding note will explain how ἐμμετρία inclines one to the love of Truth or the Ideas. Stallbaum connects ἑκάστου with τὸ αὐτοφυές, but cf. V 480 A ad fin. and 484 D (ἕκαστον τὸ ὄν). ἰδέαν is, I think, ‘Form,’ ‘Idea’ (so Schneider etc.), rather than ‘contemplation’ (as Stallbaum translates). The word however suggests ἰδεῖν: see on V 479 A.

ἑπόμενα ἀλλήλοις is fully justified. The love of Truth begets the love of Wisdom (485 C) and the love of Wisdom Temperance (485 D, E). Highmindedness is connected with the contemplation τοῦ ὅλου καὶ παντός (486 A), of which Courage is also a result (486 A, B). Justice and Kindness accompany the other moral virtues (486 B). Aptness to learn, memory, and the virtue of a modest and agreeable disposition also fit one for the study of the Ideas: cf. 486 D note It will be noticed that all the Virtues receive an intellectual colouring from their connexion —direct or indirect—with ‘amor intellectualis’: see above on 485 A ff.

μνήμων κτλ. The summary is complete, μεγαλοπρεπής being the opposite of ἀνελεύθερος and σμικρόλογος (486 A note).

487A - 487E But, in point of fact, urges Adimantus, actual philosophers are regarded as useless, or worse. Socrates admits the correctness of this view, and proceeds to solve the difficulty by a parable.

οἱ ἀκούοντες ‐‐ λέγεις : ‘those who from time to time hear what you now say.’ The text has been suspected, but is, I think, sound. Adimantus implies that the philosopher-king was one of Socrates' favourite themes, as—in one form or another—it certainly was: see on V 473 C. The effect produced by Socrates' usual way of reasoning on the subject is illustrated by a general description of the unsatisfying nature of Socrates' dialectic; and λέγω δ’ εἰς τὸ παρὸν ἀποβλέψας recalls us to the special case. The looseness lies chiefly in the use of ἅ, where οἷα—Steinhart's conjecture — would be expected; but ἅ need not be taken too strictly. Ficinus omits νῦν .

ἡγοῦνται κτλ. Cf. Euthyph. 11 B—D, Men. 80 A, B and the description of the elenchus quoted by J. and C. from Soph. 230 B ff.

μέγα ‐‐ ἀναφαίνεσθαι . For the anacoluthon cf. Ap. 21 C καὶ διαλεγόμενος αὐτῷ, ἔδοξέ μοι, Laws 686 D and Xen. An. III 2. 12. In all these cases the verb used is ἔδοξε, and ἀναφαίνεσθαι is a word of the same kind. Other examples of similar anacolutha are cited by Engelhardt Anacol. Pl. Spec. III p. 39. Richards would read παραγομένοις, but παραγομένοις could hardly mean παραγομένοις ἑαυτοῖς .

ἀποκλείονται κτλ. The simile is probably taken from the game of πόλεις, on which see IV 422 E note φέρωσιν is technical of a move at draughts: cf. Laws 739 A. The balance φέρωσιν— λέγωσιν deserves notice: in both words, stress should be laid on the first syllable. Cf. III 406 B note and Phaed. 83 D with Geddes ad loc. ἐν is used as in Euthyph. 11 C τὰ ἐν τοῖς λόγοις ἔργα ἀποδιδράσκει καὶ οὐκ ἐθέλει μένειν.

ταύτῃ =‘isto modo,’ ‘as you say.’ The simile is imitated by the author of the Eryxias (395 B).

ἔργῳ δὲ ὁρᾶν κτλ. expresses a widely prevalent view in ancient as well as in modern times. It is enunciated with admirable force and vigour by the Platonic Callicles in Gorg. 484 C—486 C: cf. also Theaet. 173 C ff. and Phaed. 64 B. Although Isocrates called himself a φιλόσοφος, he was in general agreement with the popular verdict on Philosophy in the Platonic sense of the term (τήν τε γεωμετρίαν καὶ τὴν ἀστρολογίαν καὶ τοὺς διαλόγους τοὺς ἐριστικοὺς καλουμένους, as he calls it Panath. 26): see adv. Soph. 1—8, 20, Antid. 258—269 (διατρῖψαι μὲν οὖν περὶ τὰς παιδείας ταύτας χρόνον τινὰ συμβουλεύσαιμ’ ἂν τοῖς νεωτέροις, μὴ μέντοι περιιδεῖν τὴν φύσιν τὴν αὑτῶν κατασκελετευθεῖσαν ἐπὶ τούτοις κτλ. 268) and Panath. 26— 32 (Spengel Isokr. u. Plato pp. 15 ff., Dümmler Chron. Beitr. pp. 43 ff. and Teichmüller Lit. Fehd. I p. 103. Teichmüller supposes that τις in νῦν γὰρ φαίη ἄν τις κτλ. above is a specific reference to Isocrates, but this is very improbable). The well-known sentiment of Ennius' Neoptolemus “philosophari est mihi necesse, at paucis; nam omnino haut placet. Degustandum ex ea, non in eam ingurgitandum censeo” (ap. Gell. Noct. Att. V 15. 9, 16. 5: cf. Cic. Tusc. Disp. II 1. 1 ff. al.) is probably translated from Euripides, but it admirably expresses the ordinary Roman view. See also on V 473 C, D.

ἀλλοκότους . They have, as we should say, ‘a twist.’

σὺ δέ γε is of course ironical, as σκώπτεις shews. Müller in his translation (p. 53) strangely misses this point.

487E - 489C Imagine a ship, in which the sailors struggle with one another to gain possession of the helm, although they have never learnt the art of steering, and actually deny that steering can be taught at all. They overpower the master of the vessel by opiates or strong drink, and sail merrily away to shipwreck. It never occurs to them that in order to steer a ship, it is necessary to learn how. The true pilot is to them a star-gazer, an idle babbler, altogether useless. Our simile explains itself. What wonder that the philosopher is useless in a city? But the fault lies with those who make no use of him. It is not his part to sue for employment: those who need his services ought to appeal to him.

ὡς γλίσχρως εἰκάζω : ‘how greedy I am of parables’ (lit. ‘how greedily I make parables), not (as J. and C.) ‘what a poor hand I am’ at similes, an interpretation which deprives ἔτι μᾶλλον of all its force. γλίσχρος (connected with γλία ‘glue’ and γλίχομαι) is used as in Ar. Ach. 452 γλίσχρος προσαιτῶν λιπαρῶν τε. ‘Niggardly,’ ‘stingy’ is a secondary meaning, as for example in VIII 553 C and Crat. 414 C. The idea is that a man must be greedy of similes when he runs all over the world to find one (ἐκ πολλῶν ξυναγαγεῖν). αὐτό should be taken with εἰκάζοντα, by an easy hyperbaton.

τραγελάφους and similar fantastic creations were of frequent occurrence in Oriental art. The word is fully illustrated by Blaydes on Ar. Frogs 937.

μιγνύντες should be taken with γράφουσι: ‘as painters paint goat-stags and the like by fusing creatures together.’

τοιουτουὶ κτλ. There is no occasion to read τοιοῦτόν τι: see III 388 D note For γενόμενον Richards would write γιγνόμενον, because of ὁρῶντα etc. in B ff. and γιγνομένων in 488 E. But Plato rightly asks us to conceive of the completed scene, although the scene itself must of course be described by present participles.

ναύκληρον κτλ. The ναύκληρος is the Demos, as Aristotle observed (Rhet. III 4. 1406^{b} 35): cf. also Olympiodorus Proleg. 27 ed. Hermann. Cope on Arist. l.c. erroneously asserts that the ναύκληρος is the ‘governor or governors of the unruly mob of citizens’; and Windelband's identification of the ναύκληρος with the younger Dionysius is a strange freak of fancy: see Hirmer Entsteh. u. Komp. etc. p. 620. As the ναύκληρος owned his own ship (II 371 B note), it is right that the Demos should be ναύκληρος in a democracy. For the frequent comparison of the State to a ship in Greek literature see Smyth's Gk. Melic Poets p. 215. With ὑπόκωφος cf. Ar. Knights 42, 43 Δῆμος πυκνίτης, δύσκολον γερόντιον ὑπόκωφον and Blaydes ad loc. Plato's picture of the Δῆμος is not unamiable: cf. 499 E ff. Though unwieldy, sluggish, and dullwitted (cf. Ap. 30 E ὑπὸ μεγέθους δὲ νωθεστέρῳ καὶ δεομένῳ ἐγείρεσθαι ὑπὸ μύωπός τινος), he is placid, and not deliberately vicious. It is the δημαγωγοί (in the widest sense of the term, including demagogues, sophists etc.), and not the δῆμος who are here attacked. With μεγέθει καὶ ῥώμῃ cf. μεγάλου καὶ ἰσχυροῦ 493 A.

μήτε μαθόντα ‐‐ ἐμάνθανεν . See V 473 C note and Xen. Mem. IV 2. 4—7. Politics, according to both Socrates and Plato, is a science: see especially Mem. III 9. 11. The heaviest count in their indictment of Athenian democracy was its practical denial of this fact.

φάσκοντας κτλ. The thesis that ‘Politics cannot be taught’ was (in Plato's view) the theoretical basis of Athenian political life: see Prot. 319 A—320 D. We are here invited to suppose that it was actually maintained in so many words by sophists, demagogues, and others. Something of the sort is asserted by Isocrates adv. Soph. 14, 21; but it is unlikely that Plato is alluding to Isocrates in particular, as Teichmüller supposes (Lit. Fehd. I p. 104).

τὸν λέγοντα κτλ. as Socrates and Plato constantly did. ἑτοίμους κατατέμνειν admirably expresses the vindictive fury of the insulted demagogues, but should not be taken as an allusion to Socrates' fate. Plato felt his master's death too deeply to exaggerate on such a subject. See VII 517 A note

αὐτῷ is ejected by Herwerden “quod omni vi caret.” Bywater (J. Ph. X p. 73) proposes αὖ. The translators for the most part ignore the word, except Schneider, who translates ‘him, the master of the ship.’ Perhaps αὐτῷ is ‘by himself,’ ipsi in the sense of soli, as in αὐτοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν, and we should translate ‘while they themselves constantly swarm around the solitary master of the ship.’ Failing this explanation we must follow Schneider; unless we venture to take αὐτῷ in the sense of ‘the Master’ (cf. I 327 B note) and regard τῷ ναυκλήρῳ as an explanatory gloss. On the whole I am inclined to think that Schneider is right.

περικεχύσθαι : an anacoluthon, like ἄρχειν and πλεῖν below: we should expect περικεχυμένους. For a parallel see Laws 686 A. Here, doubtless, the change of construction is in order to avoid too many participles.

ἀποκτεινύντας . On the orthography of this word see Introd. § 5. ἀποκτεινῦντας (sic) in v and Vind. F may also be a trace of the spelling with ει. The reference in ἀποκτεινύντας ἢ ἐκβάλλοντας is of course to the slaying or banishment of rival candidates for office: cf. Gorg. 466 B.

μανδραγόρᾳ κτλ. False rulers dull the senses of the Demos by the opiate of Pleasure, and so escape detection. With μανδραγόρᾳ cf. [Dem.] Phil. 4. 6 ἀλλὰ μάνδραγόραν πεπωκόσιν ἤ τι φάρμακον ἄλλο τοιοῦτον ἐοίκαμεν ἀνθρώποις.

πίνοντάς τε κτλ. They are the ἑστιάτορας εὐδαίμονας of IV 421 B, where see note. For ὡς τὸ εἰκός Cobet writes ὡς εἰκός, and so also Herwerden, who suggests as an alternative that we should bracket τοὺς τοιούτους. The expression ὡς εἰκός would refer to πίνοντάς τε καὶ εὐωχουμένους (“and pass their time at sea in drinking and feasting, as you might expect with such a crew” D. and V.); but with ὡς τὸ εἰκός (sc. πλεῖν) the meaning is “make just such a voyage as might be expected of men like them” (J. and C. with Schneider, comparing Pol. 302 A and Laws 906 D), i.e. make shipwreck.

ἐπαινοῦντας is omitted by Cobet, but (as Richards points out) ψέγοντας supports it. Richards would transpose and read μὲν ναυτικόν. But ναυτικὸν μὲν καλοῦντας etc. is only an explanatory reduplication of ἐπαινοῦντας: hence μέν is placed where it would have been if ἐπαινοῦντας had been omitted. In any other position it would have failed to mark the antithesis between ναυτικόν (with its companion epithets) and ἄχρηστον. For the rhetorical asyndeton cf. II 362 B note An alternative (less good) is to take ἐπαινοῦντας as logically subordinate to καλοῦντας (‘in awarding praise they call’ etc.).

ὃς ἂν ξυλλαμβάνειν κτλ. Jackson suggests that Isocrates is intended (Proceedings of the Camb. Phil. Soc. XI 1882, p. 13). Possibly: but for my own part I do not think the description is sufficiently apposite to justify the identification.

ἐπαΐοντες . I should adopt the accusative with Stallbaum and others were it not for οἰόμενοι. Schneider is fully justified in saying “si Plato ἐπαΐοντες scripserat et οἰόμενοι, fieri vix poterat, quin prius vitiosum quibusdam et in accusativum mutandum videretur: alterum ipsa distantia tutum erat.” This is precisely what has happened, for while q (with some other MSS, but not Π or Ξ) has ἐπαΐοντας, all the MSS, without exception, have οἰόμενοι. The anacoluthon is not harsher than other instances in which the best MSS have the nominative of the participle instead of the accusative, e.g. Phaedr. 241 D, Soph. 219 E, Laws 885 D, Phaed. 81 A. See also Classen on Thuc. II 53. 4, where many parallel instances are quoted from Thucydides. A long and unperiodic sentence like the present is peculiarly liable to anacolutha: and one has occurred already in 488 C. For these reasons I now agree with Schneider and others that the text is sound. The nominatives πείθοντες and βιαζόμενοι may have suggested the change to Plato: “ψέγοντας propter ἐπαινοῦντας tenuit, mox velut impatiens tenoris diu servati paullisper de via deflexit” (Schneider). Similar ungrammatical anacolutha are found occasionally also in Inscriptions, when the sentence runs to a considerable length: see Meisterhans^{3} pp. 203, 205.

ὅπως δὲ...κυβερνητικήν . The sailors, Plato has already told us, have not the smallest idea that the true pilot must study the year and the seasons etc., if he is to be truly qualified to rule a ship (that is to say, from Plato's point of view, if he is to know how to steer), but as for how he shall steer—let people wish him to or no—of that they think it impossible to acquire either art or study and therewith (lit. ‘at-once-and’) the art of steersmanship. We may translate the sentence thus: ‘but art or system of how to steer, let alone whether people wish him to steer or no—that they think it impossible to acquire, and therewithal the art of steering.’ The true pilot, according to Plato, is one who knows how to steer. Whether others wish him to steer or no, is wholly irrelevant; see Pol. 293 A ff., where this principle is declared to be of universal application, and illustrated as follows from the case of doctors: ἰατροὺς δὲ οὐχ ἥκιστα νενομίκαμεν, ἐάν τε ἑκόντας ἐάν τε ἄκοντας ἡμᾶς ἰῶνται— πάντως οὐδὲν ἧττον ἰατρούς φαμεν, ἕωσπερ ἂν ἐπιστατοῦντες τέχνῃ—σῴζωσιν οἱ θεραπεύοντες ἕκαστοι τὰ θεραπευόμενα. Cf. ibid. C ἀναγκαῖον δὴ καὶ πολιτειῶν— ταύτην ὀρθὴν διαφερόντως εἶναι καὶ μόνην πολιτείαν, ἐν ᾗ τις ἂν εὑρίσκοι τοὺς ἄρχοντας ἀληθῶς ἐπιστήμονας καὶ οὐ δοκοῦντας μόνον, ἐάν τε κατὰ νόμους ἐάν τε ἄνευ νόμων ἄρχωσι, καὶ ἑκόντων καὶ ἀκόντων κτλ. The expressions ἐάν τε ἑκόντας ἐάν τε ἄκοντας, and καὶ ἑκόντων καὶ ἀκόντων in these two passages, the general drift of which is the same as Plato's argument throughout this part of the Republic, exactly correspond to ἐάν τέ τινες βούλωνται ἐάν τε μή, and enable us to interpret that clause, as Schneider has already pointed out. Cf. also 296 E— 297 B. Plato, indeed, is ready to go farther still, and would maintain that he who knows how to steer is a true pilot, even although he does not touch the helm (cf. ibid. 292 E). If others wish for his services, it is their business to apply to him, not his to sue for the opportunity of doing them a service (infra 489 B, C). A like principle holds good in the government of cities, and the Platonic Socrates, though abstaining from political life, may fairly claim ἐπιχειρεῖν τῇ ὡς ἀληθῶς πολιτικῇ τέχνῃ καὶ πράττειν τὰ πολιτικὰ μόνος τῶν νῦν ( Gorg. 521 D). The foolish sailors, on the other hand, desire only to get the helm into their hands (488 C): how to handle it, they know not, and deny that it is possible to learn (μήτε τέχνην— λαβεῖν). What of ἅμα καὶ τὴν κυβερνητικήν? These words should be taken closely with what goes before. The literal translation is (to acquire) ‘at once and the art of steering’: cf. Phil. 22 D ὁ βίος οὗτος γέγονεν αἱρετὸς ἅμα καὶ ἀγαθός ‘this life is at once choiceworthy and good.’ Now ‘to acquire at once the art of how to steer (ὅπως κυβερνήσει, τούτου τέχνην) and the art of steering’ is merely a way of saying ‘to acquire the art of how to steer and therewith the art of steering.’ He who learns the art and study of how to steer necessarily learns therewith the art of steering (“quarum qui compos factus sit, simul gubernatoriam artem teneat” Schneider): for κυβερνητική is, according to Plato, simply and solely the art of how to steer. τὴν κυβερνητικήν, in short, is nothing but the τέχνη and μελέτη τούτου ὅπως κυβερνήσει, expressed from Plato's point of view. Thus in denying that it is possible to learn either τέχνη or μελέτη of how to steer, the sailors are in effect emphatically denying that it is possible to learn κυβερνητική in Plato's sense of the word at all: cf. 488 B φάσκοντες μηδὲ διδακτὸν εἶναι. So much for the meaning of this passage as a whole. In regard to details, it should be noted that ὅπως means ‘how’: ‘ ὅπως ad τούτου spectans modum et rationem potius quam finem significat’ (after Schneider). With Schneider also I understand κυβερνήσει as ‘shall steer’ and not ‘shall get possession of the helm.’ μελέτη is ‘study’ (in the more concrete sense of the word), rather than actual exercise or practice: cf. III 402 B ἔστι τῆς αὐτῆς τέχνης τε καὶ μελέτης. With τέχνην λαβεῖν cf. Pol. 300 E.

The above explanation agrees in the main with that of Schneider, and is in my opinion what Plato meant to say. For other views see App. I.

οἰόμενοι . οἰομένους is read by Stallbaum and others, but see note on line 25.

μετεωροσκόπον κτλ. A frequent taunt: cf. e.g. Pol. 299 B μετεωρολόγον, ἀδολέσχην τινὰ σοφιστήν, Phaedr. 270 A, Parm. 135 D, Ap. 18 B, Isocrates adv. Soph. 8, Antid. 262, and Ar. Clouds 228, 1480 with Blaydes' note. The implication is that ὁ μετεωροσκόπος is blind to τὰ ἐν ποσίν: cf. Theaet. 174 A. Cobet revives Porson's conjecture μετεωροκόπον (after μετεωροκοπεῖς in Ar. Peace 92), but the text is perfectly good: cf. μετεωρολέσχας in 489 C.

ἐξεταζομένην : ‘cross-examined.’

καὶ ὅτι ‐‐ λέγεις . ‘And also that what you say is true’ etc. Socrates identifies Adimantus with his hypothetical objector in 487 D; cf. σε λέγειν in D below. Another possibility—less good, I think—is to take ὅτι as introducing a direct address: “and say to him also ‘You speak truly, when you say’” etc. λέγειν is found in a few inferior MSS; and λέγει, which Stallbaum and Baiter adopt, occurs in Par. D. λέγειν is indefensible, and the corruption of λέγειν or λέγει to λέγεις is exceedingly improbable here. On τοίνυν=‘also’ see I 339 D note

τοὺς μὴ χρωμένους . Those who will not use them are to blame for their uselessness. The etymological figure is of course intentional.

οὐ γὰρ ἔχει φύσιν κτλ. See 488 D note

τοὺς σοφοὺς κτλ. “The learned pate Ducks to the golden fool” (Timon of Athens IV 3). See also VIII 568 A note The author of the saying was, according to Aristotle (Rhet. II 16. 1391^{a} 8 ff.), Simonides. Being asked on one occasion by Hiero's queen whether it was better to be a man of genius (σοφός) or rich, he replied “Rich; for men of genius are found at the court of the rich”—a characteristic reply, by which the courtliest of ancient poets contrived to flatter the queen without forgetting himself. (It should be remembered that σοφός often means ‘poet’.) There is no reason for supposing (with e.g. Teichmüller Lit. Fehd. I p. 102) that Plato attributed the saying to Aristippus, although a witticism on the subject is ascribed both to him (D. L. II 8. 69) and to Antisthenes (Winckelmann Antisth. Frag. p. 58). Plato liked to get his knife into Simonides: see I 331 E ff.

δεῖσθαι is governed by the idea of obligation carried on from ἀναγκαῖον. The alternative suggested by J. and C., that the infinitive depends on πέφυκεν, is impossible.

ἐν τούτοις . τούτοις is neuter, like τούτων: otherwise ὑπὸ—ἐπιτηδευόντων is hardly necessary. The balance of clauses —‘in consequence of these circumstances, and amid these circumstances’—is also in favour of this—Schneider's—view.

489C - 491A So much for the ‘uselessness’ of the philosopher. But the most serious prejudice from which Philosophy suffers is owing to those who pretend to be philosophers when they are not. It is they who are meant, when people assert that the majority of philosophers are depraved. Let us endeavour to shew that Philosophy is not responsible for the corruption of the philosophic nature. The true philosopher, in spite of popular misconceptions, is, as we have seen, naturally a lover of Truth, and therefore possesses all the virtues of character already named. We have to enquire (1) how this disposition becomes in many cases depraved and (2) what is the character of the false philosophers who are responsible for the prejudice against Philosophy.

οὓς δή ‐‐ λέγειν : ‘of whom it is that you say the accuser of philosophy declares that,’ etc. For τὸν ἐγκαλοῦντα see 487 C note

ἰόντων ἐπί almost=‘woo her’: cf. 495 C ff., Symp. 210 A. πλησιάζω is similarly used in 490 B.

τὴν ἀνάγκην should be taken strictly. There is no possibility of escape: the majority must inevitably succumb. Cf. 492 E note

ἐκεῖθεν ‐‐ ὅθεν . As ἀναμιμνῄσκομαι takes the genitive of a noun, so it can be followed by a genitival— originally ablatival—adverb. ὅθεν is attracted for οὗ: cf. Soph. Tr. 701 and other examples in Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 915.

καλόν τε κἀγαθόν . The fashionable Greek phrase καλὸς κἀγαθός for an ἐλευθέριος, or gentleman, was continually used by Socrates and his followers to express their ideal of what a man should be. An excellent discussion of the Socratic connotation of the word will be found in Döring Die Lehre des Sokrates pp. 398—415: for its usual implications reference may be made to Schmidt Ethik d. alten Griechen I pp. 328—334. In politics, the expression was applied to the wealthy or oligarchical party (cf. VIII 569 A and Thuc. VIII 48. 6). It is therefore probable that Socrates' habitual use of καλὸς κἀγαθός fostered the not unwarranted suspicion that he and his friends were out of sympathy with democracy, and so contributed in some measure to his condemnation and death.

νῷ ἔχεις : ‘you remember.’ ἐν νῷ ἔχεις (as in some inferior MSS) would mean ‘you intend.’ Compare Euthyph. 2 B with Ap. 20 B. The reference is to 485 B—487 A.

ἤ =‘alioquin.’ Cf. V 463 D note

οὕτω κτλ. οὕτω “ex Adimanti verbis repetitum et praecise dictum est pro οὕτω λεγόμενον ἦν.” If the word is genuine, it must be taken in this way. J. and C. translate “to say no more,” comparing ῥᾳδίως οὕτω and the like (see on II 377 B). But there appears to be no other instance of this idiomatic οὔτω with the adverb σφόδρα. οὑτωσὶ σφόδρα in Ar. Frogs 88 is quite different, in spite of Blaydes on Ar. Wasps 461. It is just possible that οὕτω is an interpolation from οὕτω just before.

παρὰ δόξαν . By selecting this form of expression Plato “opinionibus opinionem tribuit” (Schneider), loosely enough, but the words are practically equivalent to ἐναντίον. παράδοξον would be somewhat easier, but the text is probably sound. For a similar pleonasm see my note on Crito 44 C.

δοκουμένοις . With the passive cf. X 612 D.

αὐτοῦ is masculine, and means Plato's καλὸς κἀγαθός, i.e. the philosopher, whom popular opinion regards as an ἀλαζών, if not as a liar.

ἆρ’ οὖν δὴ κτλ. ‘Shall we not then fairly plead that the true lover of learning was disposed by nature to strive towards Being and tarried not at the many particulars which are opined to be’ etc.? Socrates has just said that Truth is the leading attribute of the Philosopher. This proposition is challenged by public opinion (παρὰ δόξαν τοῖς νῦν δοκουμένοις), and in support of it Socrates urges, what he had asserted before (485 A—C) that the philosopher is a lover of τὸ ὄν. εἴη (‘was,’ i.e. ‘is, as we saw’) would be the ‘philosophic imperfect’ in direct speech. For the rare change from ἦν to εἴη after a primary tense cf. Xen. Mem. I 2. 34 δῆλον (sc. ἐστὶν) ὅτι ἀφεκτέον εἴη τοῦ ὀρθῶς λέγειν, where εἴη stands for ἦν (the usual ‘erat’ for ‘esset’ with words denoting obligation or necessity) of the direct, and Plato Charm. 156 B λέγουσί που ὅτι οὐχ οἷόν τε αὐτοὺς μόνους ἐπιχειρεῖν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἰᾶσθαι, ἀλλ’ ἀναγκαῖον εἴη ἅμα καὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν θεραπεύειν. (Madvig's insertion of ἄν after ἀναγκαῖον in this passage is without authority.) Cf. also II 361 C note The sequence is all the more easy with the philosophic imperfect because its very nature involves a reference to the past. Ast's conjecture ἀπελογησάμεθα is incorrect; for the philosopher's zeal for Being has not yet been urged in defence of the statement—now for the first time formally challenged— that Truth is his leading characteristic. Madvig conjectures ἀπελογισάμεθα, which Baiter adopts, although the word is wholly inappropriate here. Cf. X 607 B note

ξυγγενεῖ . νοῦς is akin to Being and the Eternal: cf. Phaed. 79 D, Tim. 90 A—C and infra X 611 E.

ᾧ πλησιάσας κτλ. : ‘whereby having come nigh unto and married with true Being, begetting Reason and Truth, he attained unto knowledge and enjoyed true life and nourishment, and then but not before ceased from travail of the soul.’ The mystic union of the Soul with Being is here described in passionate and glowing language. Cf. Phaedr. 246 E—247 D, Symp. 210 A—212 A, and many parallels in Plotinus, for whom, as for the Neoplatonists generally, the mystic side of Platonism had an extraordinary fascination: see Zeller^{3} III 2, pp. 611—618. The imagery should be compared with Theaet. 156 A ff. where the phenomena of Perception are thus analysed. The Subject unites with the Object, and from this union are born two children, one the αἴσθησις e.g. Sight, the other the αἰσθητόν e.g. τὸ μέλαν. The former belongs more peculiarly to the Subject, the latter to the Object. Similarly with the phenomena of Knowledge. The Subject unites with the Idea, and the children of this union are νοῦς (or rather, strictly speaking, νόησις i.e. the action of νοῦς), on the side of the Subject, and the νοητόν, i.e. Truth, on the side of the Object. We miss an essential point if we take νοῦν as the object of Knowledge; it is the faculty of Reason, no longer dormant, but suddenly called into actuality. Plato means that Reason does not really live until it lays hold on the Idea. γνοίη corresponds to νοῦν; it is by the begetting of νοῦς that we come to know. The aorist denotes the instantaneous act; cf. Symp. 210 E πρὸς τέλος ἤδη ἰὼν—ἐξαίφνης κατόψεταί τι θαυμαστὸν τὴν φύσιν καλόν κτλ. See also on 508 D and cf. VII 517 C. In like manner ἀληθῶς ζῴη balances ἀλήθειαν: there is no true life without knowledge of the Truth. ἀληθῶς goes also with τρέφοιτο: cf. Phaedr. 247 D and 248 B, C. With ὠδῖνος cf. Phaedr. 251 E (ὠδίνων ἔληξεν) and Symp. 206 E. It is tempting to suppose that in ὠδῖνος Plato is thinking not merely of the lover's pangs, but also of the pangs of birth. The knowledge of the Idea is indeed in Plato's view an intellectual and moral regeneration. But ἀπολήγοι τοῦ ἔρωτος shews that ὠδῖνος means the throes of love; and the further view introduces a confusion of ideas which is alien to the peculiar character of Plato's ‘mysticism.’

μετέσται . With μετέσται cf. X 606 B λογίζεσθαι γὰρ—ὀλίγοις τισὶ μέτ‐ εστιν and Theaet. 186 E. τι is adverbial and does not go with ψεῦδος. There is no occasion for Madvig's conjecture ἐπιμελὲς ἔσται: nor need we write ψεύδους, as I formerly proposed.

ἡγουμένης κτλ. ‘Now where Truth was leader’ (as we saw it was with the φιλόσοφος) ‘we shall never, I think, allow that a quire of evils joined her train.’ ἡγουμένης is not the present, but the imperfect participle (cf. ἡγεῖτο δ’ αὐτῷ—ἀλήθεια 490 A): the ‘philosophic’ past is carried on from the earlier sentence. The tense is strictly to the point, for our ἀπολογία is not yet finished: see 490 A note We ought not to regard ἀκολουθῆσαι (with Goodwin MT. p. 55) as a gnomic aorist: still less should we read ἀκολουθήσειν with q, or φαμεν for θαῖμεν (Stobaeus Flor. 11. 18 and Vind. F), taking ἄν with ἀκολουθῆσαι (as I formerly suggested). The past tense is the only one appropriate to the situation both in Greek and in English. See also on line 17.

ἦθος : sc. ἀκολουθῆσαι. These ‘joined the train’ of virtue at 486 B.

καὶ δὴ κτλ. καί is ‘also’ and goes with τὸν ἄλλον: cf. καὶ—δή in 494 A.

ἀναγκάζοντα has been doubted. It is read by all the MSS except Ξ, which has ἀναλαμβάνοντα (cf. 490 D). Stallbaum accepts ἀναλαμβάνοντα, while Baiter adopts Madvig's picturesque conjecture ἀναβιβάζοντα. The text is perfectly sound. ἀναγκάζοντα is ἀναγκάζοντα τῷ λόγῳ, i.e. λέγων ἀναγκαῖα εἶναι, ‘insisting on their necessity’: see on II 363 D (ἀποτίνουσιν) and cf. X 611 B and Theaet. 153 C (where Cobet wrongly brackets ἀναγκάζω). Much the same view is taken by Jackson (J. of Ph. XIII p. 218), who compares 486 E μή πῃ δοκοῦμέν σοι οὐκ ἀναγκαῖα ἕκαστα διεληλυθέναι. J. and C.'s translation “compelling your assent” is scarcely accurate here.

φαίη . In 487 C we have φαίη ἄν τις, and Richards would add ἄν here. But the hypothetical critic (with whom Socrates himself agrees 487 E) is now treated as what he really is—the exponent of opinions held by all. We should translate ‘after you objected that all men would be compelled to agree with what we say, but when they set words aside, and looked at the actual people of whom the argument spoke, they declared that’ etc. For φαίη after ἀναγκασθήσεται (rather than ἀναγκασθήσοιτο) see Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 1061.

τῆς διαβολῆς . Π and the majority of MSS have τῆς ἤδη διαβολῆς. If ἤδη is right, it must, I think, be taken with τῆς διαβολῆς in the sense of ‘ea διαβολή quae iam apparebat et in conspectum venerat, cum antea animadversa non fuisset’ (so Bernhardy and Schneider Addit. p. 46). Even so, it is harsh, but not so harsh as if we take it with ἐπισκοποῦντες, as Stallbaum—and formerly Schneider—did. So extreme a hyperbaton would be more difficult than that in Soph. O. T. 1245, and scarcely admissible in prose. Perhaps Plato wrote τῆς διαβολῆς ἤδη. Otherwise we must suppose that A and other MSS are right in omitting the word.

τὰς μιμουμένας κτλ. Plato distinguishes between two kinds of πονηρία, that which results from the corruption of the truly philosophic nature, and the πονηρία of pretenders to philosophy. It is the latter—so we are told—which is responsible for the prejudice under which Philosophy labours (cf. 489 D): but the former is by far the more serious evil (491 E, 495 B), though engendered, not by Philosophy, but by the seductive influence of public opinion.

491A - 495B The philosophic nature is a rare growth, whose very virtues render it peculiarly liable to corruption, when it is placed in unfavourable surroundings. The clamorous voice of public opinion, expressed in assemblies and other gatherings of the people, inevitably corrupts the youth by moulding them into conformity with itself. Where necessary, force is employed, under the name of punishment. Against these influences, no teacher can possibly contend, although the providence of God may save some. As for the Sophists, they do but make into a system and teach the opinions of the Multitude, which they are wholly unable to justify, but accept without reserve, as their profession requires them to do. Remember too that the Ideas are foolishness to the Many, so that they will never love Wisdom or her followers. Socrates concludes with a vivid and lifelike picture of a philosophic nature in process of corruption.

ἀνάξιον =‘too good for’: cf. Prot. 355 D and Soph. Phil. 1009. ἀντάξιον (Benedictus) and ἀνοίκειον (Herwerden) are unhappy conjectures.

ἐπὶ πάντας : ‘all the world over.’ Cf. ἐπ’ ἀνθρώπους in Tim. 23 B.

ἐ ‐‐ γενέσθαι . Cobet, who formerly proposed γενήσεσθαι, afterwards rejected the whole clause. The aorist infinitive with μέλλω is rare, but thoroughly established in Plato, if any reliance is placed on the best MSS: see the examples collected by Schanz Vol. V p. vii.

ὀλιγάκις ‐‐ ὀλίγας . ὀλιγάκις καὶ ὀλίγας is half-proverbial. For καὶ ὀλίγας Stephanus conjectured καὶ ὀλίγοις or καὶ ἐν ὀλίγοις, Richards κἀν ὀλίγοις, comparing Arist. Eth. Nic. VII 11. 1151^{b} 30 διὰ το τὴν ἑτέραν ἐν ὀλίγοις καὶ ὀλιγάκις εἶναι φανεράν. But ἐν ὀλίγοις would be inelegant after ἐν ἀνθρώποις, and Plato could not have written ὀλίγην. A similar but easier change from the generic singular to the plural occurs III 408 B and infra 500 C. Translate, keeping the anacoluthon; ‘that such a nature—one possessed of all the qualities’ etc.—‘such natures are few and far between among mankind.’

ὃ ‐‐ ὅτι . Cf. I 330 B note

ἀπόλλυσι κτλ. Krohn (Pl. St. p. 114) asks how courage and temperance can tend to corrupt the character. The answer is given by Plato in 494 B ff. They bring their possessor to the front, and therefore expose him to the solicitations of selfish and unscrupulous men. It should be carefully borne in mind that ἀνδρεία and the other virtues are here regarded, not as the result of education, but as natural qualities, derived from the philosopher's native love of truth. We are in fact dealing with the potentiality of the τελέως φιλόσοφος (491 A). It is this which suffers corruption, not the actualized philosopher. Cf. Krohn l.c. p. 115 and Pfleiderer Zur Lösung etc. p. 26.

ἔχεις γὰρ ‐‐ λέγω : not “now I have given you an outline of my meaning” (D. and V.), but ‘you understand the general type of the things I mean,’ that is, the general character of things which φθείρει καὶ ἀποσπᾷ, though in themselves advantages or even virtues. Adimantus assents, but would like to have them specified more precisely. In reply, Socrates bids him grasp the notion of them correctly as a whole (αὐτοῦ is neuter and ὅλου αὐτοῦ is practically equivalent to τύπου), and it will become clear to him, and τὰ προειρημένα περὶ αὐτῶν (viz. that they ἀπόλλυσι καὶ ἀποσπᾷ —φθείρει καὶ ἀποσπᾷ B, C) will not appear ἄτοπα as before ( ἄτοπον—ἀκοῦσαι in B). The passage is somewhat loosely written; but αὐτῶν is certainly neuter and not ‘the philosophic natures,’ as J. and C. suppose.

ἐγγείων ‐‐ ζῴων . These are possessive genitives. Richards says that “τῶν should probably be omitted before ζῴων or added before ἐγγείων.” Cf. however IV 438 C note In this instance I think Plato wrote τῶν ζῴων in order to call special attention to ζῷα as opposed to ἔγγεια. They are not on the same level of importance, as far as the argument is concerned, for it is the degeneration of ζῷα, not of ἔγγεια, which Plato has to explain.

πλειόνων is much more elegant than Madvig's conjecture πλεῖον. Plato's position on this matter, in the way in which he states it, is open to objection. It might be argued that the naturally strong nature is the best fitted to resist the corrupting influences of its environment. But the philosophic nature is remarkable for sensibility as well as strength, and the sensitive plant needs careful fostering. The general sentiment of this passage is Socratic, as Hermann (Gesch. u. System p. 330 note 33) and Krohn (Pl. St. p. 365) have pointed out: cf. Mem. IV 1. 3, 4 τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοὺς εὐφυεστάτους ἐρρωμενεστάτους τε ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὄντας—παιδευθέντας μὲν καὶ μαθόντας ἃ δεῖ πράττειν, ἀρίστους τε καὶ ὠφελιμωτάτους γίγνεσθαι —ἀπαιδεύτους δὲ καὶ ἀμαθεῖς γενομένους κακίστους τε καὶ βλαβερωτᾴτους γίγνεσθαι.

τὴν ἀρίστην φύσιν κτλ. The contrast is between the ἀρίστη φύσις and the φαύλη, where both are subjected to (οὖσαν ἐν cf. 495 A) bad τροφή. The former ‘comes off worse,’ ‘suffers more’ (κάκιον ἀπαλλάττειν), because the τροφή is more alien to its nature than to that of the others: cf. τοσούτῳ πλειόνων ἐνδεῖ τῶν πρεπόντων. So Schneider correctly explains the passage. Cf. generally Dante Inferno VI 106—108 “Ritorna a tua scienza, Che vuol, quanto la cosa è più perfetta, Più senta 'l bene, e così la doglienza.” Van Heusde's ἐν ἀλλοτρίῳ τραφεῖσαν misses the point. Even more unhappy is Boeckh's κακίον’ ἀπαλλάττειν, which Stallbaum adopts. κάκιον ἀπαλλάττειν is simply the comparative of κακῶς ἀπαλλάττειν: see Cobet in Mnem. XI p. 168, where Stallbaum is severely rebuked.

ἐκ νεανικῆς κτλ. : “out of a fulness of nature ruined by education” Jowett. Plato's attitude on this subject is highly characteristic. The educator's whole efforts are to be directed towards saving and improving strong and gifted natures: cf. VII 519 A, B. Weak natures may be almost neglected, without serious injury to the State. They will never do anything great—whether good or evil: see 495 B. For this and other reasons Plato does not trouble to lay down rules for the education of the lower classes in his city.

μὴ ἐν προσηκούσῃ : i.q. ἐν μὴ προσηκούσῃ (which Stephanus wrongly read), by a common hyperbaton: cf. Crito 47 D and other examples in Braun De Hyperb. Pl. p. 15. With προσηκούσῃ it is usual to supply μαθήσει. I think Plato intentionally selects a vague expression, intending ἐν προσηκούσῃ to be taken with σπαρεῖσα—φυτευθεῖσα as well as with τρέφηται: for it is just as important that the philosophic nature should be sown and planted in a proper soil (491 D), as that it should receive proper education. Morgenstern, who formerly proposed προσηκούσῃ <γῇ>, afterwards adopted much the same view as this: see Schneider Addit. p. 46.

θεῶν . See on θεοῦ μοῖραν 493 A.

ἢ καὶ σὺ ἡγεῖ κτλ. This passage is appealed to by Grote (VIII pp. 200 ff.) in his famous defence of the Sophists. Plato certainly implies that the Sophists did not independently corrupt the young ‘to any extent worth mentioning’ (ὅ τι καὶ ἄξιον λόγου). It is the Demos which is the primary source and fount of corruption; the Sophists are only the mouthpiece of a disgraceful public opinion which it is their profession to flatter and court (493 A—D). But from Plato's point of view this is itself a sufficiently grave indictment to bring against a professional teacher of Morality (see 493 C), so that the present attack on the Athenian people is far from being an apology for the Sophists.

ξυγκαθεζόμενοι κτλ. The Athenians sat at an Ecclesia: see Ar. Ach. 24 f. with Blaydes' note. For πολλοί I formerly read οἱ πολλοί with Hermann; but ἁθρόοι πολλοί is sound, and means ‘in large numbers together,’ like πολλοὶ ἁθρόοι in Gorg. 490 B. The subject is of course οἱ ταῦτα λέγοντες, i.e. οἱ πολλοί (492 A). The mention of numbers is to the point: how can one man stand against so many? Cobet is wrong in deleting πολλοί.

ξύν . See on IV 424 D.

ὑπερβαλλόντως . Cf. VIII 561 C ff. Exaggeration and excess are characteristic marks of democracy.

πρὸς δ’ αὐτοῖς κτλ. Plato is doubtless thinking of the Acropolis and the Dionysiac theatre. Cobet does ill to bracket τοῦ ψόγου καὶ ἐπαίνου: for Plato characteristically makes the rocks themselves applaud. Cf. VIII 563 C. Translate ‘Yea, and besides themselves, the rocks and the place wherein they are resound and give forth a reduplicated uproar of censure and applause.’ Cf. Euthyd. 303 B ἐνταῦθα δὲ ὀλίγου καὶ οἱ κίονες οἱ ἐν τῷ Λυκείῳ ἐθορύβησάν τ’ ἐπὶ τοῖν ἀνδροῖν καὶ ἥσθησαν.

τίνα ‐‐ ἴσχειν . ‘Where, think you, is a young man's heart?’ For the saying cf. Isocr. Trap. 10 τίν’ οἴεσθέ με γνώμην ἔχειν; and Dem. adv. Aphob. II 21 τίν) οἴεσθε αὐτὴν ψυχὴν ἔξειν; καρδία as the seat of courage is colloquial and rare: cf. Archil. Fr. 58. 4 καρδίης πλέος and Plut. Reg. et imp. apophthegmata 185 E τοὺς δὲ Ἐρετριεῖς—ἔλεγεν ὥσπερ τευθίδας μάχαιραν μὲν ἔχειν, καρδίαν δὲ μὴ ἔχειν. q has τίνα ἂν οἴει, and Bywater and Herwerden propose τίν’ ἂν οἴει, but the MS reading is better and more picturesque.

ποίαν ἄν . I agree with Goodwin ( MT. pp. 66, 68, 71) and others that ἄν with the future was occasionally used by the best Attic prose writers. In Plato it occurs Ap. 29 C, 30 B, Symp. 222 A, Rep. X 615 D, Crito 53 D, Euthyd. 287 D, Phaedr. 227 B, and probably also elsewhere. All these instances have been ‘emended,’ and it is possible enough that some of them are corrupt. Here ἄν is in all the MSS, and is therefore better retained, although it may of course be an erroneous repetition of the last syllable of ποίαν (as Cobet and others suppose). We may regard the idiom as one of Plato's numerous half-poetical efforts: see X 615 D note Richards proposes δή: but see V 450 C note

καὶ φήσειν κτλ. In oratio recta the whole sentence would have run ποία ἂν αὐτῷ παιδεία ἰδιωτικὴ ἀνθέξει, ἢ οὐ κατακλυσθεῖσα—οἰχήσεται φερομένη—καὶ φήσει—καὶ ἐπιτηδεύσει—καὶ ἔσται τοιοῦτος; i.e. (literally translated) ‘what private training of his will stand fast, which will not be swamped by such censure or praise, and carried down the stream wherever the stream leads, and he will say’ etc. (The metaphor is from a mole or breakwater swept away by a flood.) In this there is nothing but the common passage of a relative into a main sentence (see II 357 B note and cf. Ap. 40 A with my note ad loc.), coupled with an easy change of subject, as in Crito 46 A. The sentence assumes the form which it has in the text, because both subordinate and main clauses can take the accusative with infinitive in Greek oratio obliqua: see Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 1056. Stallbaum (followed by J. and C.) understands οὐκ οἴει to account for φήσειν, but the negative cannot be supplied, and if it could, it would give a wrong sense. Schneider's translation is correct, but not his note in the text. With the sentiment cf. Gorg. 510 D ff.

σοφισταί . The Demos is the Arch-Sophist: cf. 492 A note οὗτοι is the contemptuous isti: ‘these teachers and sophists of yours.’

θανάτοις . The fate of Socrates was the most conspicuous example of this in Plato's time, but it is hardly likely that Plato is specifically alluding to it here (as Steinhart and Susemihl suppose). The description is quite general. Contrast VII 517 A note

οὔτε γὰρ κτλ. Plato has just declared that it would be the height of folly in a teacher even to attempt to make a young man run counter to public opinion. The present sentence explains why. There is not, never has been, and never will be produced a character different (from the Many) in respect of virtue, by having been educated on principles opposed to the education which the Many provide (the force of public sentiment, expressed in assemblies etc.). Consequently every attempt to produce such a character by means of education in the teeth of public opinion is foredoomed to failure. The statement appears at first sight extraordinary; but from Plato's point of view it is, with the limitations which he makes, strictly correct. Cities are either actual or ideal. In the ideal city, education does not produce a type of character which conflicts with public opinion, because public opinion is itself formed by education. In actual cities, education must conform to the same standard if it is to exist at all: for τὸν μὴ πειθόμενον ἀτιμίαις τε καὶ χρήμασι καὶ θανάτοις κολάζουσι (492 D). How then are we to explain the presence of great and good men in existing cities? They are θεῖοι ἄνδρες, saved from corruption by grace of God: see on 493 A. In these circumstances, what is the political reformer to do? He must break with all existing cities (497 B), and found—as Plato now wishes to do—a new commonwealth in which sound education and public opinion no longer differ, but agree. In other words, his policy must be to make the Philosopher King. For other views of this passage see App. II.

ἀνθρώπειον : sc. <*>θος: ‘a merely human character.’ Plato makes an exception in favour of a θεῖον ἦθος, playing on the proverb τὸ θεῖον ἐξαιρῶ λόγου, for which cf. Symp. 176 C Σωκράτη δ ἐξαιρῶ λόγου , Phaedr. 242 B Σιμμίαν Θηβαῖον ἐξαιρῶ λόγου (a delicate way of hinting that Socrates and Simmias are θεῖοι ἄνδρες), and Theaet. 162 D. Any ἦθος which in existing cities conspicuously transcends the public standard of morality (and is thus ἀλλοῖον πρὸς ἀρετήν) is θεῖον, and for that very reason sporadic and exceptional (see next note).

θεοῦ μοῖραν is best explained by Men. 94 B ff. and 99 C, D. Distinguished statesmen like Pericles, Themistocles etc. are θεῖοι, just as much as the χρησμῳδοί, μάντεις, and ποιητικοί: they are ἐπίπνοι—καὶ κατεχόμενοι ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ, ὅταν κατορθῶσι λέγοντες πολλὰ καὶ μεγάλα πράγματα (99 D). Education did not produce them, nor have they any scientific knowledge of statesmanship; for which reason also they cannot teach their sons to be statesmen ( Men. 94 B, Prot. 320 A). It was by this theory that Plato accounted for the fact that good men appear from time to time even in corrupt States: εἰσὶ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς πολλοῖς ἄνθρωποι ἀεὶ θεῖοί τινες, οὐ πολλοὶ—φυόμενοι οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἐν εὐνομουμέναις πόλεσιν ἢ καὶ μή (Laws 951 B). There is more than a touch of irony in the epithet θεῖος when Plato applies it to Themistocles, Pericles and other successful politicians with whom he had little sympathy, but θεοῦ μοῖραν is not ironical here (cf. 492 A), nor is Plato ever otherwise than grateful for the birth of statesmen who are truly θεῖοι. But they do not solve the difficulty, for the scientific knowledge of πολιτική is not only better and more stable in itself, but guarantees the permanent prosperity of a State, because it can be transmitted to posterity. Nor can we be sure that our statesmen ‘by grace of God’ will appear when they are most wanted. For a full discussion of θεία μοῖρα in Plato see Zeller^{4} II 1, p. 594 note 4.

ἕκαστος : sc. δοξάτω. Cf. I 334 B note and Phaed. 80 A, B, where ψυχή, the reading of the best MSS, should be retained. Baiter is certainly wrong in reading ἕκαστον (with Stephanus and v): for with personal subjects δοκεῖ is used personally. Dümmler (Chr. Beitr. p. 12) and Teichmüller (Lit. Fehd. I p. 104) suppose that Plato means Isocrates in particular. It is possible enough that he had Isocrates in his mind, but the description applies to many besides him: cf. IV 426 C note

δοξάζουσιν = ‘opine’ is technical: cf. V 479 E. With θρέμματος etc. cf. “The beast with many heads Butts me away” Shakespeare Coriol. IV 1; and a similar figure in Solon ap. Arist. Ath. Pol. 12 ad fin. and Theaet. 174 D.

ἑκάστας . See cr. n. Van Prinsterer's emendation is now universally accepted.

οἵας αὖ κτλ. The party-cry.

καλέσειεν (though κατεμάνθανεν) is written because of καταμαθὼν δέ, after which ἐκάλει would be less suitable. The situation is now treated as a possible one, after the picture has once been allowed.

ὡς τέχνην συστησάμενος . Cf. the Stoic definition of τέχνη as a σύστημα ἐκ καταλήψεων κτλ. (Zeno Fr. 12 Pearson).

ὀνομάζοι κτλ. : ‘employs all these terms in accordance with’ (literally ‘in dependence on’) ‘the opinions of the mighty Beast.’ This interpretation is better than to suppose with Stallbaum that Plato means ‘applies all these names to the opinions’ etc., though ὀνομάζειν τι ἐπί τινι is idiomatically used in that way.

τἀναγκαῖα ‐‐ καλοῖ . τἀναγκαῖα does not mean “the physical necessities and exigencies of the great beast's nature” (J. and C.), but simply ‘the inevitable.’ Whatever happens, a public teacher or Sophist must conform to the opinions of the Beast (492 D). In what follows there is a hint of the profound philosophical view that the Works of Necessity are evil (cf. Tim. 29 E, 47 E ff.), and that Moral Freedom consists in following what is good. See on X 617 E.

δοκεῖ . Ast would read δοκοῖ, but ἄν of course goes with εἶναι: cf. IV 422 B. See for this idiom my note on Prot. 351 B and Blaydes on Ar. Wasps 1405.

ὁ τὴν τῶν πολλῶν κτλ. Jackson thinks of Isocrates again (Proceedings of the Camb. Philol. Soc. II 1882 p. 13). See above on 493 A.

ὅτι μὲν γὰρ κτλ. An anacoluthon. The apodosis which requires to be supplied is ‘that much is certain’ or the like: cf. V 465 A note I formerly thought the anacoluthon too harsh, and proposed to read ὅ τι μὲν γὰρ ἄν—ἐπιδεικνύμενος, ἢ κτλ., taking ὅ τι as the object of ἐπιδεικνύμενος, and ἢ ποίησιν (‘either poetry’ etc.) as in apposition to ὅ τι: but the text is better as it stands. Richards' proposal to read ἔστι for ὅτι is very unpleasing.

ποίησιν . Compare a striking passage in Laws 659 B, C, where Poetry is said to have deteriorated after she accepted οἱ πολλοί as her judge. See also Laws 700 E, 797 B, Gorg. 502 B ff. and infra X 605 A.

κυρίους αὑτοῦ . We should certainly (with Schneider and the majority of editors) read αὑτοῦ and not αὐτοῦ (which Stallbaum and others adopt, referring it to ποίησιν etc.). The MSS (except q) mostly read αὐτοῦ, but their authority in this matter is of no account. Cobet would read αὐτούς and eject τοὺς πολλούς—on what ground, it is difficult even to conjecture.

πέρα τῶν ἀναγκαίων . By coming forward in a public capacity as a poet or statesman or the like, he ‘makes the Many his masters more than is necessary.’ In a private station, he is, comparatively speaking, independent; but even then the Many are (in a certain sense) of necessity his masters: see 496 D. Ast and Stallbaum take the phrase with ἡ Διομήδεια ἀνάγκη. “Iungenda sunt verba sic: ἀνάγκη (ἐστὶν ) αὐτῷ πέρα τῶν ἀναγκαίων (ultra necessaria quae progrediatur) ἡ Διομήδεια λεγομένη, ut vocabulis ἡ λεγομένη Διομήδεια istud πέρα ἀναγκαίων declaretur” (Stallbaum). If this is what Plato meant, he expresses it in a harsh and dangerously ambiguous way, and it would be preferable to cancel πέρα τῶν ἀναγκαίων (with Cobet and Herwerden). But there is fortunately no occasion for such drastic treatment.

ἡ Διομήδεια κτλ. Most of the MSS write Διομηδεία (sic), but Διομήδειά γε at the end of a line in Ar. Eccl. 1029 makes it clear that the word is proparoxyton, unless, as Schneider supposes ( Addit. p. 47), Aristophanes shortens the final syllable by poetic license. The proverb, which is used of an overmastering necessity, is illustrated by Leutsch u. Schneidewin Paroem. Gr. I p. 59, II p. 367, and also by Blaydes on Ar. l.c. Two explanations of it were given. According to the first, which is adopted by the Scholiast on this passage, the phrase originated in the treatment meted out by Diomede to Odysseus, when they were returning from Ilium to the Greek camp after stealing the Palladium. Odysseus attempted to kill Diomede, but failed, and Diomede paid him out by tying his arms together and driving him home with blows from the flat of his sword. The Scholiast on Ar. l.c. explains differently. Διομήδεια: ὅτι Διομήδης ὁ Θρᾴξ, πόρνας ἔχων θυγατέρας, τοὺς παριόντας ξένους ἐβιάζετο αὐταῖς συνεῖναι ἕως οὗ κόρον σχῶσι καὶ ἀναλωθῶσιν οἱ ἄνδρες. ἃς καὶ ὁ μῦθος ἵππους ἀνθρωποφάγους εἶπεν. I agree with Schneider that the proverb is more likely to have originated from the first story than from a euhemeristic explanation of the man-eating mares of Diomede of Thrace.

αὐτῶν . The μισθαρνοῦντες ἰδιῶται, not ‘the Many.’ Plato is probably thinking of actual eulogies of the Athenians by Isocrates and others like him.

ἀναμνήσθητι . See V 475 E.

φιλόσοφον ‐‐ εἶναι . The theory of Ideas is not a democratic philosophy. With Plato's attitude here to οἱ πολλοί cf. Gorg. 474 A τοῖς δὲ πολλοῖς οὐδὲ διαλέγομαι.

καὶ ‐‐ δή . Cf. 490 C note

ὡμολόγηται . See 486 C, 486 A, B: and cf. also 490 C.

παισίν . See cr. n. πᾶσιν is retained by Schneider, who takes it as masculine and ἅπασιν as neuter. Herwerden also approves of πᾶσιν: but εὐθὺς ἐν παισίν (which most of the editors adopt) gives the only correct antithesis to ἐπειδὰν πρεσβύτερος γίγνηται (‘when he is growing older’). α and αι are easily interchanged in ninth century MSS: see Introd. § 5.

φυῇ . Herwerden proposes φύσῃ προσφερές, comparing Soph. Ajax 1077 κἂν σῶμα γεννήσῃ μέγα, but no change is necessary, as Herwerden himself allows. For προσφερής, some inferior MSS have προσφερές, an easier, but less elegant and idiomatic reading. Schneider also points out that if Plato had written προσφερές, he ought to have added αὐτοῦ with τὸ σῶμα.

ὑποκείσονται =‘they will lie prostrate at his feet’ is the future perfect of ὑποπίπτω. ὑποπεσοῦνται, which Herwerden conjectures, would be less expressive, and denote an act, or series of acts, instead of a never-wearying attitude of supplication and adoration. They so to speak besiege his soul with flatteries and prayers.

ἐὰν τύχῃ κτλ. It has long been admitted that this picture is drawn chiefly from Alcibiades. In antiquity Plutarch seems to have suspected something of the sort, for he describes Alcibiades' degeneration in language adapted from the present passage ( Alc. 4. 1). But the personal touches must not blind us to the fact that Plato is portraying the type, although Alcibiades sits for the portrait.

πλούσιος ‐‐ μέγας describe Alcibiades exactly: cf. Alc. I 104 A, B, Thuc. VI 16 1—3, Isocr. περὶ ζεύγους 25 ff., Plut. Alc. 1. 4, 4. 1 and elsewhere. The Greeks thought tallness essential to beauty: see e.g. Arist. Eth. Nic. IV 7. 1123^{b} 7 and Pol. VII 4. 1326^{a} 33.

ἡγούμενον κτλ. Plutarch (Alc. 17. 2, 3) declares that Alcibiades intended the Sicilian expedition to be a step towards an almost universal empire: Sicily was to be merely the ἐφόδια τοῦ πολέμου. Alcibiades says nearly as much himself in Thuc. VI 90. 2, with which compare 15. 2. Grote (VII p. 79) is inclined to deny that even Alcibiades dreamt of anything beyond the conquest of Sicily, but the ancient historians thought differently: cf. also Alc. II 141 B ff. Many of the Athenians, probably not without reason (though Plutarch l.c. 35. 1 leaves the point unsettled), suspected him of aiming at a τυραννίς (Thuc. VI 15. 4 and Isocr. περὶ ζεύγους 38).

ἐξαρεῖν κτλ. See cr. n. ἐξαρεῖν appears also in several MSS besides v. The present, though retained by Schneider, is very difficult after πληρωθήσεσθαι. For the interchange of αι and α cf. Introd. § 5. Alcibiades' φρόνημα was notorious: see for example Alc. I 104 A, Thuc. V 43. 2, VI 16 ff., Plut. Alc. 34. 6 and the highly characteristic anecdote in 23. 8. Plato's words appear to embody an extract from some tragic poet (probably Euripides), as may be inferred both from the rhythm ( σχηματισμοῦ—κενοῦ) and the language. ἄνευ νοῦ is declared by van Prinsterer, Cobet and others to be a gloss on κενοῦ. Possibly they are right; but (as Schneider remarks) ὅτι νοῦς οὐκ ἔνεστιν αὐτῷ is in favour of retaining the words, and they occur in all the MSS.

οὕτω διατιθεμένῳ : not “while he is in this frame of mind” (D. and V.), but ‘when he is sinking into this condition.’

ἐάν τις κτλ. As Socrates often did to Alcibiades: see VIII 560 D note and Symp. 215 D ff. “The two conversations with Alcibiades are an example of this” (Thomas Gray).

τὸ δέ is not here the idiomatic τὸ δέ (as in IV 443 C), but ‘hoc autem’ i.e. νοῦς (Stallbaum).

τὸ ξυγγενὲς κτλ. : i.e. the affinity of what is said with his nature, “weil die Reden mit ihm verwandt sind” (Schneider). D. and V.'s translation “an inborn taste for philosophic inquiry” is wrong.

εἷς has often been doubted; but Schneider's explanation is certainly right, that τῷ οὕτω διατιθεμένῳ is the individual typifying a class, and that εἷς denotes one of the class. The idiom is analogous to the plural after a typical or generic singular: see on I 374 A. The emendations proposed (διαισθάνηται for εἷς αἰσθάνηται Stallbaum, εἰσαῦθις Richter, εἴσω Madvig, εἰσακούων or εἰσακούσας Richards) are not only superfluous, but indefensible in themselves. Plato hardly expects more than one such person to pause at all on his downward career. Here again we naturally think of Alcibiades, whose interviews with Socrates (according to Symp. 215 D) profoundly impressed him for the moment, but failed to effect a permanent reform in the midst of so many temptations (ib. 216 B). Perhaps Socrates once hoped that Alcibiades would be his ‘scientific ruler,’ and bring back true prosperity to Athens. A tone of sorrow for the ‘lost leader’ seems to make itself felt in Plato's words.

τοὺς ἡγουμένους : i.q. οἳ ἡγοῦνται, whence the article, which Herwerden wrongly rejects. The voice should pause a little between ἐκείνους (which refers to 494 C) and τοὺς ἡγουμένους.

λέγοντάς τε κτλ. We should expect the future indicative, and on this ground the insertion of διατελεῖν has been proposed by Richards (Stephanus had previously desiderated διατελέσειν). So serious an alteration lacks every element of probability. Ast must be wrong in making λέγοντας etc. depend on οἰόμεθα. If the text is sound, we should supply πάντα δράσειν or the like after οὐ, and regard the participles as agreeing with the subject of δράσειν. (Schneider and J. and C. take nearly the same view). δράσειν is of course easy to understand, but it is less easy to dispense with πάντα. Could Plato have written οὐ <πᾶν>, πᾶν μὲν ἔργον κτλ.? Cf. IX 575 E and πᾶν ποιεῖν in Ap. 39 A and Gorg. 479 C. I prefer the anacoluthon.

τὸν πείθοντα . Such was Socrates, and he was brought to trial. Plato may well have thought of his master when he wrote δημοσίᾳ εἰς ἀγῶνας καθιστάντας. The most fatal count in the charge against Socrates was that he corrupted the youth ( Ap. 24 B), and Alcibiades was held to be a case in point (Xen. Mem. I 2. 12). Plato now turns the tables on the Athenian people. He says in effect ‘It was you who corrupted Alcibiades: and you impeached Socrates for trying to save him.’

ἐλέγομεν . 491 B ff.

εἰς should be taken with ὄλεθρος and διαφθορά, as Schneider points out. They are spoiled ‘with reference to’ or ‘for’ the best of all vocations. Jowett wrongly connects εἰς with βελτίστης.

φαμέν . 491 A, B.

ἐκ τούτων κτλ. Corruptio optimi pessima.

οἱ ‐‐ ἐργαζόμενοι was true of Alcibiades: see Grote VIII p. 116 and Lysias In Alc. I 16, 30, 35 ff. Isocrates' attempt in his περὶ ζεύγους to make out that Alcibiades was a benefactor to his city is a futile and fantastic performance.

ῥυέντες κτλ. With the metaphor cf. 485 D. For σμικρὰ—δρᾷ see 419 E note

495B - 496A Abandoned by her rightful lovers, Philosophy, alone and desolate, is forced into a shameful alliance with base pretenders. The offspring of this unhallowed union is a bastard brood of sophisms.

προσήκει : sc. φιλοσοφία: “nam philosophia cum virgine ἐπικλήρῳ comparatur, qualem in matrimonium ducere proximis cognatis aut permissum aut iniunctum fuit” (Stallbaum). See Meier u. Schömann Att. Proc. pp. 614—617.

ἀτελῆ κτλ. ἀτελῆ is said with reference to the rites of marriage: cf. Philostrat. Vit. Apoll. IV 45 ἐπ’ ἀτελεῖ γάμῳ and Soph. Ant. 1240 f. τὰ νυμφικὰ | τέλη λαχὼν δείλαιος ἔν γ’ Ἅιδου δόμοις. With τε followed by δέ cf. X 611 D and other examples quoted by Hoefer de part. Pl. p. 16.

ἀληθῆ is like ἀληθῶς ζῴη in 490 B, a passage where the same kind of imagery is employed.

ᾔσχυνάν τε κτλ. Is the aorist gnomic or past? It is usually taken as gnomic, but Plato may be thinking of his own times, in which Philosophy had come to shame, because the unworthy had defiled her.

σὺ φῄς . Cf. 489 D and 487 C, D.

ἐκ τῶν τεχνῶν κτλ. It has been supposed that Plato has in view Antisthenes and the Cynic Diogenes, the latter of whom apparently started life as a moneychanger (D. L. VI 20). But the description which follows applies to sophists and sophistical rhetoricians rather than to the Cynic philosophers. The poet Gray says “this seems to be aimed at Protagoras, who was an ordinary countryman and a woodcutter” (see Gellius Noct. Att. V 3 and other authorities cited by Frei Quaest. Prot. pp. 6 ff.). Hermann (Gesch. u. Syst. p.628) cites Euthydemus and Dionysodorus as cases in point (cf. 496 A note). Each of these sophists had formerly taught the art of fighting in full armour ( Euthyd. 271 C— 272 B, 273 E). As speech-writing and rhetoric generally were counted among the arts, we may think also of Isocrates, who loved above everything to call himself a φιλόσοφος (Antid. 271 ff.). But although these and other examples may be quoted in illustration of what Plato here says, the tone of the whole passage shews that Plato is describing a familiar phenomenon of his own times, when clever and ambitious young men were in the habit of forsaking their handicrafts and devoting themselves to ‘culture.’ Cf. Prot. 318 E τὰς γὰρ τέχνας αὐτοὺς πεφευγότας ἄκοντας πάλιν αὖ ἄγοντες ἐμβάλλουσιν εἰς τέχνας (sc. Hippias etc.), λογισμούς τε καὶ ἀστρονομίαν καὶ γεωμετρίαν καὶ μουσικὴν διδάσκοντες, and my article in Cl. Rev. XV p. 220.

ἐφιέμενοι κτλ. is an anacoluthon. The natural flow of the sentence is interrupted by the question ἢ οὐκ ἀνάγκη; which is intended to obtain Adeimantus' assent to τὰς ψυχὰς—τυγχάνουσιν. On resuming, Plato interposes a comparison, and to this the general idea which forms the logical predicate to πολλοί is accommodated in ποἶ ἄττα—φαῦλα. The sentence was thus understood by the editor of q; for τυγχάνουσιν, which seems a difficulty on this theory, is in q τυγχάνοντες. But τυγχάνοντες would be extremely inelegant; and Plato writes τυγχάνουσιν to correspond to λελώβηνται. Even in other cases a finite verb sometimes replaces a participle in the second of two contrasted clauses, e.g. Ap. 21 E. J. and C. explain the passage in nearly the same way, as well as (apparently) Schneider and Stallbaum. It is impossible for many reasons to connect τυγχάνουσιν with ἐφιέμενοι and so escape the anacoluthon. I formerly suspected the text, and proposed <ἀπο> τυγχάνουσιν (‘miss the mark,’ i.e. fail to win the distinction which they covet). Another solution might be to place the troublesome τυγχάνουσιν after πολλοί. But neither change is in any degree probable; and it is better to acquiesce in the reading of the MSS. Plato's anacolutha are a device for imparting life and reality to his dialogues. A careful translation should preserve them all.

ἀποτεθρυμμένοι : lit. ‘broken off’ i.e. ‘truncated,’ ‘maimed.’ The word is rare, and apparently used only here by Plato. Schneider thus explains the preposition: “quorum animis quasi arboribus cacumina defracta et vires ad enitendum necessariae debilitatae sunt.” A comparison of Theaet. 173 A πολλὰ κάμπτονται καὶ συγκλῶνται and Prot. 325 D ὥσπερ ξυλον διαστρεφόμενον καὶ καμπτόμενον εὐθύνουσιν ἀπειλαῖς καὶ πληγαῖς makes it not unlikely that the metaphor is as Schneider supposes. On the vox nihili ἀποτεθρυωμένοι (in the margin of Flor. A) see Ruhnken on Timaeus Lex. s.v. Timaeus seems to have found it in his text of the Republic.

διὰ τὰς βαναυσίας . Cf. Xen. Oec. 4. 2 αἵ γε βαναυσικαὶ καλούμεναι (sc. τέχναι)—καταλυμαίνονται—τὰ σώματα τῶν τε ἐργαζομένων καὶ τῶν ἐπιμελομένων, ἀναγκάζουσαι καθῆσθαι καὶ σκιατραφεῖσθαι, ἔνιαι δὲ καὶ πρὸς πῦρ ἡμερεύειν. τῶν δὲ σωμάτων θηλυνομένων καὶ αἱ ψυχαὶ πολὺ ἀρρωστότεραι γίγνονται. It is probable that βαναυσία was “primarily a military conception, dependent for its origin on the obvious fact that certain modes of life and the exercise of certain trades disqualify from prowess in the field” (Greenidge Gk. Const. History p. 22, quoting in support Hdt. II 165—167). “Sedentary and within-door arts,” says Bacon (quoted by Newman Politics of Aristotle I p. 105), “have in their nature a contrariety to a military disposition.” In practice the term is freely applied by the writers of the best period to every kind of mechanical or illiberal labour or pursuit. Aristotle defines βαναυσία in these words: βάναυσον δ’ ἔργον εἶναι δεῖ τοῦτο νομίζειν καὶ τέχνην ταύτην καὶ μάθησιν, ὅσαι πρὸς τὰς χρήσεις καὶ τὰς πράξεις τὰς τῆς ἀρετῆς ἄχρηστον ἀπεργάζονται τὸ σῶμα τῶν ἐλευθέρων ἢ τὴν ψυχὴν ἢ τὴν διάνοιαν (Pol. Θ 2. 1337^{b} 8 ff.). See also Whibley Gk. Olig. pp. 42 ff. and Newman l.c. pp. 104—115. The ancients mostly derived the word from βαῦνος ‘a furnace’ and αὔω, “quasi βάναυσος qui caminum accendit” (Stephanus-Hase Thes. s. v.). In view of the Boeotian βανά=γυνή and βανῆκας· γυναῖκας Βοιωτοί in Hesychius, I have conjectured in Cl. Rev. VII p. 112 that βάναυσος, which does not look like an Attic word, may be connected with βανά. If so, the word perhaps originally meant ‘effeminate’ ‘unmanly’: cf. θηλυνομένων in the extract quoted from Xenophon. In any case, however, the ancient etymology can hardly be right.

δοκεῖς οὖν τι κτλ. In the ‘little bald tinker’ several critics have recognised Isocrates: see for example Teichmüller Lit. Fehd. I p. 105 and Jackson's article on the Sophists in the Enc. Brit. ἐκ δεσμῶν λελυμένου—ἐν βαλανείῳ δὲ λελουμένου is an admirable example of rhetorical παρομοίωσις, and satirises the tricks of style for which Isocrates was notorious. But all the sophistical rhetoricians of the school of Gorgias affected meretricious ornaments of this kind (see Hug on Symp. 194 E ff. and especially Cope's Rhetoric of Aristotle III pp. 105, 106), and Plato's shafts are not levelled at Isocrates alone. As usual, he individualises the type, and if the resultant picture resembles Isocrates, so much the worse for him. Plato would not be sorry (cf. Euthyd. 305 ff., with Spengel's Isokr. u. Pl. pp. 36—40), and doubtless intended his readers to think of Isocrates, as they certainly would. See also on 498 E.

ἀργύριον κτλ. Cf. Cratin. Seriph. 2 Meineke ἀνδρῶν νεοπλουτοπονήρων | αἰσχρῶν .

φαλακροῦ καὶ σμικροῦ . Was Isocrates bald and short? The bust of him in the Villa Albani is not bald, and it would be pressing the personality to the verge of absurdity to take these words so seriously. The poverty ( πενίαν etc.) and loneliness is of course the daughter's (cf. 495 C ἔρημον καὶ ἀτελῆ φιλοσοφίαν λείποντες), not her father's, as D. and V. suppose. In other words τοῦ δεσπότου belongs only to τὴν θυγατέρα.

διαφέρει . See on 484 D. Herwerden ejects the word, quite needlessly, as usual.

ποἶ ἄττα ‐‐ δόξας . Cf. Symp. 210 D πολλοὺς καὶ καλοὺς λόγους καὶ μεγαλοπρεπεῖς τίκτῃ καὶ διανοήματα ἐν φιλοσοφίᾳ ἀφθόνῳ. τίκτειν or γεννᾶν ἐν is the usual expression for begetting on or out of: cf. τόκος ἐν καλῷ Symp. 206 B.

προσήκοντα κτλ. : ‘deserving to be called sophisms.’ The fallacies in the Euthydemus are cases in point : cf. 495 D note With φρονήσεως ἀληθινῆς ἐχόμενον cf. Euthyd. 306 D. ἄξιον, which occurs in A after φρονήσεως, is probably, as Cobet supposed, a marginal note directing attention to this vigorous and highly elaborated passage: cf. 504 E note and see the curious description by Diogenes Laertius (III 65 f.) of the different σημεῖα by which it was customary to draw attention to noteworthy or difficult places in the text of Plato. Schneider and Jowett can hardly be right in retaining the word. Stephanus' conjecture οὐδὲ ἄξιον οὐδὲ φρονήσεως ἀληθινῆς is awkward and not likely to be correct. Campbell neatly conjectures ἀξίως, but Cobet's solution, which Ast foreshadowed, is more probable.

496A - 497A The few who, from various reasons, remain faithful to philosophy, withdraw from political life. By so doing, they keep themselves unspotted from the world—no mean achievement, yet not the greatest. If they meet with a commonwealth appropriate to them, they will themselves attain a larger growth, as well as prove the saviours of their country.

ὑπὸ φυγῆς καταληφθέν : ‘arrested by exile,’ so as not ἐκπεσεῖν ἐκ τοῦ ἐπιτηδεύματος (495 A): cf. κατασχεῖν below. Stallbaum's explanation ‘overtaken by exile,’ which D. and V. apparently accept, is in my judgment wrong. The reading καταλειφθέν (q and several other MSS, followed by Ast and one or two other scholars) is less expressive and picturesque, though it gives a fair sense if interpreted as καταλειφθὲν τῇ φιλοσοφίᾳ. Van Heusde's conjecture ἀπὸ φυγῆς καταλειφθέν would (as Schneider observes) mean ‘those who survived after exile’ and is wholly inadmissible, as well as ἀπὸ φυγῆς καταληφθέν (‘debarred from exile’), which Herwerden proposes, inserting also ἤ after ἦθος. Has Plato any special instances in view? Steinhart ( Einleitung p. 208) thinks of Anaxagoras, and even of Plato himself. But it cannot be said that either of them was saved by exile from deserting Philosophy, and Plato was hardly exiled, even metaphorically speaking. Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 117, 384) declares for Xenophon. It is however more than doubtful, even after Boeckh's attempt to overthrow the tradition about unfriendliness between Xenophon and Plato (De simultate quam Pl. c. Xen. exercuisse fertur 1811), whether Plato would have gone out of his way to pay a compliment to his fellow-disciple. Can Plato be thinking of his friend Dio? If so, this passage must have been written in or after 367 B.C., the year of Dio's banishment from Syracuse. A personal reference is easily combined with the description of a class, and a tribute to Dio would be very pleasing here. I have lately found the same conjecture in Thomas Gray's notes on the Republic. See also Introd. § 4 and (for Plato's connexion with Dio) Grote X pp. 332 ff. See also 499 B note

ὅταν κτλ. There is no reason to suppose (with e.g. Steinhart Einleitung p. 208) that Plato means Euclides of Megara. Heraclitus is a good instance, although Ephesus was hardly a σμικρὰ πόλις .

βραχὺ δέ πού τι κτλ. Some have thought of Phaedo of Elis, and Simon the Athenian, both of whom were members of the Socratic circle (Steinhart l.c. p. 208). The latter (whose very existence has been denied by some recent critics, but—as Hirzel Der Dialog pp. 102 ff. shews—on wholly inadequate grounds) was once a shoemaker (D. L. II 122). We may also in some respects compare the architect-philosopher Hippodamus of Miletus: see Susemihl and Hicks' Politics of Aristotle I pp. 331—334. Zeller^{4} II 1, p. 52 note 1 thinks Plato may have had Socrates himself in view, but the δαιμόνιον σημεῖον accounts for him.

Θεάγους . Cf. Ap. 33 E, where it is implied that Theages died before Socrates. The tribute which Plato pays to his memory is all the more touching because Greek literature too seldom recognises that physical weakness may be combined with mental and moral strength: see III 406 C note Plutarch (de tuenda san. praecepta 126 C, quoted by Stallbaum) remarks καὶ γὰρ φιλοσοφεῖν ἀρρωστίαι πολλοὺς παρέχουσι—a reminiscence, perhaps, of Plato.

τὸ δαιμόνιον σημεῖον . Socrates regarded his divine sign as a special if not unique revelation from God, without submitting it to further analysis. As here, so in Ap. 31 D, it is this which forbids him to enter on political life (τοῦτ’ ἔστιν ὅ μοι ἐναντιοῦται τὰ πολιτικὰ πράττειν). What the phenomenon really was, is a question which different writers have answered differently, according to their different points of view: see Zeller^{4} II 1 pp. 75—91. The subject is treated with great fulness in Ribbing's Socrat. Stud. II pp. 1 ff. and in Riddell's edition of the Apology pp. 109—117. τῶν ἔμπροσθεν γέγονε does not deny that such a sign may be vouchsafed to others in the future. Schneider conjectures that Plato added this limitation with a view to himself—an unlikely supposition, although no doubt the present passage is in some measure intended as a defence of Plato's abstention from political life: cf. 496 D note

ἢ γάρ που κτλ. Cobet and Herwerden reject ἄλλῳ, because ἤ τις ἢ οὐδείς is the regular phrase: cf. Ap. 17 B and Hdt. III 140. But the separation of ἤ from τινι makes ἄλλῳ desirable to help out the meaning of τινι, and to ἄλλῳ in itself there cannot possibly be any objection.

τούτων ‐‐ γενόμενοι : ‘those who have become members of this small band.’ J. and C. quote an exact parallel from Thuc. III 56. 6 ὧν ἡμεῖς γενόμενοι: cf. also supra II 360 A, Phaed. 69 D, Parm. 127 D (τὸν τῶν τριάκοντα γενόμενον) and Laws 754 D. γευόμενοι is found in some inferior MSS, and was accepted till Schneider, who restored the true reading. Liebhold absurdly conjectures ἑλόμενοι .

ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν . See on I 341 B.

τῷ δικαίῳ was restored by Schneider instead of τῶν δικαίων, on the sole authority of Vind. F. It has since been found that τῷ δικαίῳ is actually the reading of A. ἡ τῶν δικαίων βοήθεια would mean something quite different, as Schneider shews; viz. “auxilium vel a iustis vel rebus in iustis, vel contra iustos seu iusta latum vel ferendum.” With the general sentiment cf. Ap. 31 E—32 A, a passage which proves —if proof were needed—that Liebhold's extraordinary proposal to read σπουδάζοι for σῴζοιτο is untenable.

εἰς θηρία ἄνθρωπος κτλ. Herwerden would read ἀνθρώπους ‘among men who are as beasts.’ But the point is that the philosopher in existing commonwealths is like a lonely human being in the midst of wild beasts. Cf. Timon of Athens IV 3 “The commonwealth of Athens is become a forest of beasts.” The comparison may have been suggested to Plato by Pherecrates' Ἄγριοι, to which he alludes in Prot. 327 D. In Pherecrates' play the Ἄγριοι were savages, to whom apparently some Athenians betook themselves, in the hope of finding more happiness than they enjoyed in Athens: see Kock's Com. Graec. Fr. I pp. 146—150. Plato points out that there are savages enough at home. In πᾶσιν ἀγρίοις the emphasis is on πᾶσιν: we should translate ‘to hold out alone where all are savages.’ Cf. ὑπὸ πάντων πολεμίων IX 579 B. Herwerden weakens the effect by adding οὖσιν after ἀγρίοις.

λαβών : singular, in spite of γενόμενοι in 496 C. Cf. I 347 A note

οἷον ἐν χειμῶνι κτλ. Jowett construes χειμῶνι with κονιορτοῦ; but χειμὼν κονιορτοῦ for ‘a storm of dust’ is scarcely a Greek idiom. κονιορτοῦ—φερομένου is of course a descriptive genitive absolute. In this way Schneider also took the passage. ζάλη is ‘tempestuous rain’ μετὰ ὄμβρου πνοή, as Hesychius explains. χαλάζης was once conjectured by Ast, but he afterwards rightly withdrew the suggestion. Herwerden proposes οἷον ἐν ζάλῃ κονιορτοῦ ὑπὸ κτλ., and Richards ἐν χειμῶνι καὶ κονιορτοῦ ζάλῃ (or ζάλῃ κονιορτοῦ). Neither proposal is supported by any of the ancient citations, except that of Themistius (Or. VIII p. 104 C) whose reproduction of this passage is in other respects, as in this, extremely inaccurate: see Schneider's note. And ζάλη κονιορτοῦ is, to say the least, a questionable phrase. It is not well to mar the wonderful force and beauty of writing such as this by tasteless and inept conjectures. The passage has often been compared with Lucretius' “Suave mari magno,” but the difference is greater than the resemblance. The Platonic philosopher is content (ἀγαπᾷ), if he can keep his own soul pure, because he cannot, as things now are, save both himself and others. But it is no pleasure for him to see “quibus ipse malis careat,” for he would fain help others if they would but let him. That they will not is a misfortune, not for others only, but for him (αὐτός τε μᾶλλον αὐξήσεται κτλ.). We seem to catch in Plato's words a certain tone of sorrow, as if he had not himself attained the highest of which he was capable, because he could not find a philosophic city in which to dwell: see Morgenstern De Plat. rep. p. 161, where reference is made to Ap. 31 E and to the Platonic Epistles V 322 A, B, VII 324 B—326 B, 330 C—331 D: cf. also Gorg. 515 A— 522 E, and Susemihl Gen. Entw. II p. 190.

προσηκούσης . The only city suited to the philosophic nature is Plato's: cf. IX 592 A.

497A - 498C Our justification of Philosophy is now complete. It remains to ask—Where is the political constitution adapted to the philosophic nature? Where, in other words, is the best polity? In the city which we have founded, except that the position of the Rulers requires to be more fully explained. A State, which is to handle Philosophy without danger, must assume a new attitude towards the subject. Philosophy should receive more, instead of less attention, as a man grows older.

κατάστασιν πόλεως is treated as a single noun: cf. πόλεως διοίκησις in Prot. 319 D and Pol. 296 E.

ὥσπερ ‐‐ ἐκπίπτειν explains and amplifies στρέφεσθαί τε καὶ ἀλλοιοῦσθαι. Asyndeton is regular in such cases, and Stephanus ought not to have proposed the insertion of καί before ὥσπερ: cf. IV 432 D, VIII 557 C and Prot. 311 E, where more illustrations are cited in my note. Stallbaum's punctuation is here, I think, preferable to that of Schneider, who prints only a comma before ὥσπερ.

εἰς τὸ ἐπιχώριον : as though ‘a foreign geranium, allowed to run wild in England’ were to ‘degenerate into one of the English wild geraniums.’ The illustration is due to Bosanquet. Plato's botanical error, such as it is, does not affect the argument.

ἦθος is read by Π as well as Α. The majority of MSS read εἶδος, which was accepted till Schneider restored the better and more authoritative reading.

δηλώσει =‘experience will shew’ is idiomatic. See Blaydes on Ar. Frogs 1261.

ἦν . The past does not exclude the present: cf. IV 436 C note

τίς ‐‐ πολιτεία : i.e. what the best constitution is. Adimantus was about to ask whether the ἀρίστη πολιτεία is not the one which they have described. The reply is yes, provided that the position and status of the Rulers is made clearer. As it stands it is not the best: cf. VIII 543 E καλλίω ἔτι ἔχων (imperfect participle) εἰπεῖν πόλιν τε καὶ ἄνδρα (the Philosopher's City and the Philosopher), where see note.

ὅτι δεήσοι κτλ. : ‘that there would always have to be present in the city a certain factor possessed of a reasoned theory of the constitution, identical with that possessed by you, the legislator, when you made the laws.’ The rulers must understand the constitution and not merely accept it on the legislator's authority, if the spirit of the original legislator is to survive his death. ὀρθὴ δόξα is not enough; in order to fill the place of the founder of the city they require ἐπιστήμη. Plato confesses that he did not make this clear enough before (οὐχ ἱκανῶς ἐδηλώθη), and his confession is most true. In one passage (IV 429 C note), indeed, he seems expressly to imply that the Rulers do not fill the legislator's shoes. But there are also some hints or traces of the later view: see on III 414 A, IV 423 E (to which, perhaps, ἐρρήθη is intended to refer, although the reference is hardly justified), and 442 C. Cf. 502 D, 503 A, 504 D notes

ὧν κτλ. : i.e. ἐκείνων ὧν κτλ. The literal translation is ‘through dread of the topics to which cleaving you have shewn that the demonstration thereof is long and difficult.’ (So also Schneider.) ἀντιλαμβανόμενοι (the opposite of ἀφιέναι as used in V 449 B and infra 504 E) refers to Adimantus' and the others' resolute determination not to let Socrates slur over the questions relating to women and children (V 449 B ff.) and to the possibility of realising the perfect city (471 C ff.). Cf. infra 505 A. φόβῳ is explained by V 450 C ff., 457 C, 473 E. J. and C. take ὧν as “ἐκείνων ἅ (cognate accusative),” understanding ἀντιλαμβανόμενοι as ‘objecting to’ or ‘attacking,’ but no objections were made by Glauco and Adimantus. They merely asked for further explanation, and were in fact favourably disposed rather than otherwise (V 450 D, 451 B). Herwerden's conjecture ὡς for ὧν refutes itself.

αὐτοῦ (like the subject of ἐδηλώθη) refers to the position of the Rulers in Plato's city—with everything that it involves, including the Community of wives and children, the Philosopher-king and all the leading topics discussed in V—VII; and τὸ λοιπόν is what remains of this topic —the rest of VI and VII in fact.

πάντως . Bekker's πάντων (cf. Laws 779 E οὐ πάντων εὐκολώτατον) is a neat emendation, which Baiter and others have accepted. But οὐ πάντως ῥᾷστον ‘not in every respect quite easy’ (with the usual Greek litotes), is quite unobjectionable, as Schneider points out, and the confusion of ς and ν is rare.

τὸ λεγόμενον κτλ. D. and V. wrongly make τῷ ὄντι part of the proverb. Translate ‘and it is true, as the proverb says, that beautiful things are hard.’ Cf. IV 435 C and (for τῷ ὄντι) VIII 563 E.

οἱ καὶ ἁπτόμενοι κτλ. καί =‘at all.’ Cf. ἐὰν καὶ—ἐθέλωσιν 498 A.

τὸ μεταξύ means ‘in the interval before entering upon’ (Richards in Cl. Rev. II p. 324). The correlating or contrasting notion is idiomatically omitted: cf. note on περιαγωγῆς in VII 518 E. Plentiful examples of this usage are supplied by Shilleto on Dem. F. L. 181, and Blaydes on Ar. Ach. 434 μεταξὺ τῶν Ἰνοῦς and Birds 187. With the sentiment cf. 487 C note Richards was, I believe, the first to point out the true meaning of this passage: see also Solomon in Cl. Rev. VII p. 11. The traditional view, that μεταξὺ κτλ. means ‘in the spare moments of housekeeping and business,’ though still given as an alternative by J. and C., is untenable.

οἱ ‐‐ ποιούμενοι : ‘and they it is, forsooth, who are regarded as accomplished in philosophy.’ Sarcasm is often expressed by an appositional participial clause at the end of a sentence: cf. e.g. Ap. 34 A, Crito 51 A. ποιεῖσθαι here is the passive of ποιεῖν in the sense of ‘to construct in fancy,’ ‘represent,’ as e.g. in Theaet. 197 D and infra X 609 C. The usage is at first sight strange, but occurs again in VIII 538 C, IX 573 B and 574 D, where no other meaning is suitable. Stallbaum's attempt to explain the passages differently is unsuccessful, and the proposed emendations (such as Ast's δοκούμενοι for ποιούμενοι) are unsatisfactory in each of the four cases. See notes ad ll.

ἐὰν καί goes with ἐθέλωσιν (Schneider): ‘if they do consent’ (cf. καὶ ἁπτόμενοι above). It is implied that many, or most of them, do not.

μεγάλα κτλ. Plato distinguishes three stages. In the first, τὸ περὶ λόγους is a man's ἔργον after boyhood until he begins practical life; it then becomes his πάρεργον, and he ‘thinks it great things’ to go to an occasional lecture: towards old age all but very few neglect philosophy entirely. The proper study of philosophy reverses all this (πᾶν τοὐναντίον) as is shewn in B and C.

τοῦ Ἡρακλειτείου ἡλίου . Heraclitus Fr. 32 Bywater νέος ἐφ’ ἡμέρῃ ἥλιος. Heraclitus meant the saying to be taken literally, and not merely as an expression of the universal law of change: see the authorities cited by Bywater ad loc. and Zeller^{5} I p. 684 note 2.

φιλοσοφίαν κτλ. φιλοσοφίαν in its wider sense denotes any ‘liberal’ training or study: cf. Theaet. 143 D, 172 C, and Prot. 335 D with my note ad loc. D. and V. are in error (as Bosanquet remarks) when they translate παιδείαν καὶ φιλοσοφίαν by ‘a course of training in philosophy.’ Nor is Susemihl (Gen. Entw. II p. 187) right in supposing that the reference is to the musical education of the earlier books. Plato explains what he means in VII 536 D, E.

ἀνδροῦται . The early editors read ἁδροῦται (with Ξ). ἁδροῦμαι is a rare and somewhat obscure word, nowhere found in Plato; and it is better to retain ἀνδροῦται, although the subject is not μειράκια, but σώματα.

ὑπηρεσίαν φιλοσοφίᾳ κτωμένους sums up in a single phrase the Platonic theory of athletics: see on III 410 A ff. and cf. IX 591 C, D.

ἐν ᾗ . Richards would write ἐν ᾧ as in ἐν ᾧ βλαστάνει above, asserting that “ἡ ἡλικία is their years, not any particular time of life”; but ἡ ἡλικία is often so used, e.g. Symp. 209 B and Men. 89 B. Nor is ἐν ᾧ, ‘while,’ appropriate here. Translate ‘when the years advance, in which the soul begins to reach its maturity.’

γίγνηται κτλ. The subject is still ἡ ῥώμη, ‘their physical strength,’ not τις (as J. and C. assert). In ἀφέτους νέμεσθαι the metaphor (as observed by Heindorf on Prot. 320 A) is taken de grege numini alicui consecrato: cf. Critias 119 D ἀφέτων ὄντων ταύρων ἐν τῷ τοῦ Ποσειδῶνος ἱερῷ. νέμεσθαι is properly ‘to graze.’ The effect of the Greek may be conveyed by rendering ‘they roam the sacred fields at will,’ although ἀφέτους of course agrees with the subject of νέμεσθαι .

498C - 502C Adimantus hardly expects the reasoning of Socrates to carry conviction to most of his hearers. But Socrates will not despair, believing that his words may perhaps bear fruit hereafter, if not here. As for the Multitude, their dissent is easily explained. They have heard enough of jingling rhetoric, but they have never yet seen a Philosopher-king, nor are they accustomed to discourses whose only aim is truth. Our perfect city is realised always and everywhere, wheresoever and whensoever Philosophy sits on the throne. The Multitude will assent, if we approach them rightly; for their hatred is against the false philosophers, and not against the true. The lover of Truth is absorbed in contemplation of the changeless Realities, on the model of which he will frame human institutions, should he be called upon to enter public life. Point this out to the Many, and reason with them, and they will agree. Our proposals, though difficult, are not impossible.

ἀντιτείνειν κτλ. I formerly read ἀντιτενεῖν with Stephanus and others; but the present, which is in all the MSS, gives a good sense and makes a better balance with λέγειν προθύμως. Translate ‘offer a still more enthusiastic opposition, being not in the least likely to agree.’ The majority of editors retain the present.

ἀπὸ Θρασυμάχου κτλ. Thrasymachus was not likely to agree with so fierce an onslaught on his profession: see 493 A ff., 495 C ff.

οὐδὲ ‐‐ ὄντας . Cf. 1 354 A note

αὖθις γενόμενοι ‘born again’ implies the re-incarnation of the Soul, as described in the end of Book X: see on 608 D ff. It is from casual allusions like the present, made in all seriousness, that we can best understand how profound and practical was Plato's belief in immortality. The seed sown here may bear its fruit in another life, so that the educator need not despair.

εἰς μικρὸν κτλ. is not merely ironical but incredulous. We need not therefore (with J. and C.) be surprised at Glauco's incredulity and wonder in X 608 D. For οὐδέν ‘a mere nothing’ ‘nought,’ the much less expressive οὐδένα was conjectured by Hirschig and others. An exact parallel may be found in X 608 C. The grandeur and elevation of this passage recall VI 486 A.

τοιαῦτ’ ἄττα κτλ. Plato is here alluding to epideictic harangues by sophistical rhetoricians of the school of Gorgias. τοιαῦτ’ ἄττα ῥήματα=‘expressions of this sort’ refers to the jingle in γενόμενον—λεγόμενον, which is an example of the rhetorical device called παρομοίωσις: see Arist. Rhet. III 9. 1410^{a} 24 ff. παρομοίωσις δ’ ἐὰν ὅμοια τὰ ἔσχατα ἔχῃ ἑκάτερον τὸ κῶλον, e.g. ἐν πλείσταις δὲ φροντίσι καὶ ἐν ἐλαχίσταις ἐλπίσι, and many other examples: see Cope ad loc. In ἐξεπίτηδες—ὡμοιωμένα, ‘assimilated to one another of set purpose,’ the same device is meant. Isocrates and his literary brethren employed it constantly: see the references on 495 E.

ἀλλ) οὐκ ‐‐ συμπεσόντα κτλ. : ‘instead of spontaneously chiming together, as in the present case’ etc., where the παρομοίωσις of γενόμενον and λεγόμενον is ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου (‘natural,’ ‘spontaneous,’ ‘accidental’ as opposed to ἐξεπίτηδες). παρισωμένον and ὡμοιωμένον are said with a reference to παρίσωσις (the equality of clauses, as for example in Isocr. Paneg. 76: see Cope l.c. p. 106) and παρομοίωσις. The Many have had quite enough of παρίσωσις etc. in words; but they have never seen a Man παρισώμενον τῇ ἀρετῇ. Plato means that the time for mincing Rhetoric is past; we want a Man (ἄνδρα is emphatic), “with heart head hand, One still strong man in a blatant land, Who can rule, and dare not lie” (Tennyson). It is highly probable, as Dümmler holds (Chron. Beitr. p. 14), that Plato has specially in view Isocrates' Panegyricus throughout this passage. The contemptible devices which Plato here ridicules are extraordinarily common in that harangue. For other views of this passage see App. III.

δόξαν is ‘seeming,’ ‘appearance’)(τὸ ἀληθές above (Schneider): cf. 505 D. The rendering ‘applause’ (D. and V.) or ‘fame,’ is, I think, less likely to be right. For ἔριν cf. V 454 A note

τότε . V 473 D.

οὔτε ‐‐ οὔτε ‐‐ οὐδέ γε is a common sequence where stress is laid on the last alternative: cf. 492 E and X 608 B. οὐδέ γ’ ἀνήρ=‘no, nor yet an individual man’ is said because even the philosopher is not τέλεος except in the philosopher's city: cf. 497 A. ὁμοίως means simply ‘in like manner,’ ‘likewise,’ and should not be construed with τέλεος in the sense of ‘equally perfect,’ as J. and C. translate.

ἀνάγκη ‐‐ παραβάλῃ . See cr. n. παραβάλλειν means accedere (not, as has been asserted, accidere): cf. VIII 556 C and Lys. 203 B. The word is not however quite appropriate here: and I should much prefer a convincing emendation of the text of Α, Π and other MSS (ἀνάγκη—περιβάλῃ). As it stands, περιβάλῃ must either be intransitive, or else the infinitive ἐπιμεληθῆναι serves as its object in place of an accusative. Neither view is supported by any evidence. I formerly conjectured ἀνάγκην τις ἐκ τύχης περιβάλῃ ‘until some one happens to compel these philosophers’ etc., but τις ἀνάγκη—γέγονεν in C does not favour this remedy. It is perhaps safest to read παραβάλῃ provisionally and pro tempore. With ἐκ τύχης cf. IX 592 A ἐὰν μὴ θεία τις ξυμβῇ τύχη and Ep. VII 327 E.

κατηκόῳ . Schleiermacher's conjecture is accepted by Madvig, Baiter, and J. and C. Stallbaum was inclined to read κατηκόοις. If κατήκοοι is right, it must stand for κατηκόοις, the nominative being due to the interposition of εἴτε βούλονται κτλ. But the construction is difficult, and the sense unsatisfactory. We require some guarantee that the city will obey (cf. 502 B), and κατηκόῳ is the only reading which provides it.

τῶν νῦν ‐‐ ὑέσιν . “I do not doubt but that this was meant as a compliment and incitement to the younger Dionysius (see Plato Epist. 7, p. 327). And I understand what follows p. 502 in the same manner. Hence it seems that this part of the dialogue was written after his first voyage to Sicily, and probably not long before his second, about Ol. 101, 3, when the elder Dionysius was just dead” (Thomas Gray Works ed. Gosse IV p. 251). In the parallel passage V 473 D Plato speaks of kings and δυνάσται, but not yet of kings' sons. The substance of Gray's conjecture is confirmed by recent criticism (see e.g. Hirmer Entst. u. Kompos. etc. p. 668): but Dionysius I died in Ol. 103, 2 (367 B.C.) and not in Ol. 101, 3 (374 B.C.), and Plato's second visit to Sicily seems to have taken place just after the old tyrant's death (Grote X pp. 346—356). See also on V 473 D, VI 496 B and Introd. § 4.

τούτων δὲ πότερα κτλ. Grote pronounces the Platonic commonwealth impossible because “we cannot understand from whence the force is to come, tending and competent to generate” it at the first. Once begun, he holds, “there is no reason why it might not have continued.” That the real difficulty is in starting it, Plato himself clearly understands (cf. 501 A note). He would not however allow that the difficulty is insurmountable; since a θεία τις τύχη (IX 592 A) may well occur. But the true fulfilment of Plato's Ideal, as he himself foretells in IX 592 B, is to be sought, not in any single earthly commonwealth, but in its influence, direct and indirect, upon the moral, political, religious, and intellectual progress of mankind: see V 470 E note and Zeller's dissertation on Der platonische Staat in seiner Bedeutung für die Folgezeit in his Vorträgen und Abhandlungen^{2} pp. 68 ff.

ἄλλως κτλ. For ἄλλως ‘merely’ cf. Theaet. 176 D γῆς ἄλλως ἄχθη. On εὐχαῖς see V 450 D note

βαρβαρικῷ ‐‐ ἐπόψεως . Cf. Phaed. 78 A. Touches of this kind are rare in Plato and generally full of pathos, as if the hope of mankind no longer lay in Hellas. The present sentence is a confession of the fact that the foundations of Plato's city are not laid in Hellenism, but in Humanity, understood as Plato himself understands the word in 501 B. See on V 470 E.

ἕτοιμοι . The ellipse of the first person of the copula is rare, except when ἐγώ or ἡμεῖς is expressed, but ἕτοιμος is a privileged word: cf. Parm. 137 B and other examples in Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. p. 35.

αὕτη ἡ Μοῦσα . Philosophy.

μὴ πάνυ κτλ. Plato's attitude to οἱ πολλοί (as Krohn remarks Pl. St. p. 118) has somewhat altered since 492 B ff., partly, perhaps, because his wrath has been diverted against the false philosophers. But this attempt to soothe the many-headed Beast should not be taken too seriously: see 501 E— 502 A note

ἀλλοίαν τοι κτλ. See App. IV.

ἢ καὶ κτλ. ‘Or even if they view them in this light, will you deny that they will change their opinion?’ Baiter's correction—see cr. n.—is, as I now think, the simplest, and best explains the corruption. I can see no ground for writing ἐὰν οὕτω αἴσθωνται or ἐὰν τοῦτ’ αἴσθωνται with Richards. With οὐ φήσεις cf. VII 534 B. For other views on this passage see App. IV.

πρᾶον is an allusion to the universally admitted πραότης of the Athenian δῆμος; see Arist. Ath. Pol. 22. 4 τῇ εἰωθυίᾳ τοῦ δήμου πραότητι (where Sandys quotes Dem. Timocr. 51) with Isocr. Antid. 20, 300. Hence (as Schneider points out) δημοτικόν τι καὶ πρᾶον in Euthyd. 303 D. Cf. also Soph. O. C. 1126 f.

ἐν ὀλίγοις τισίν . Dümmler (Chr. Beit. p. 45) thinks of Isocrates, but there is nothing to suggest a specific reference here.

τοὺς ἔξωθεν κτλ. Isocrates seems to have taken this as a personal attack, as perhaps it was intended to be. His reply may be found in Antid. 260 ff. περὶ τοὺς πολιτικοὺς λόγους ἡμεῖς ὄντες, οὓς ἐκεῖνοί φασιν εἶναι φιλαπεχθήμονας (cf. φιλαπεχθημόνως ἔχοντας here), πολὺ πραότεροι τυγχάνομεν αὐτῶν ὄντες· οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἀεί τι περὶ ἡμῶν φλαῦρον λέγουσιν, ἐγὼ δ’ οὐδὲν ἂν εἴποιμι τοιοῦτον, ἀλλὰ ταῖς ἀληθείαις χρήσομαι περὶ αὐτῶν κτλ. See the interesting discussion in Dümmler l.c. pp. 8 ff.

αὑτοῖς and not αὐτοῖς is certainly what Plato wrote. False philosophers, like bad scholars, are always abusing one another. The middle, which is reciprocal, is also decisive in favour of αὑτοῖς: cf. Charm. 154 A λοιδορουμένους ἀλλήλοις. J. and C. (with Stallbaum and the editors generally, except Schneider) read αὐτοῖς, remarking that “it was by no means an uncommon practice of the old philosophers to abuse the people.” Plato is not speaking of the old philosophers at all, but only of sophists and pretenders, who do not abuse, but flatter and cajole the people (493 A ff.).

ἀεὶ περὶ ἀνθρώπων κτλ. The seeker after Truth does not indulge in personalities (cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. IV 9. 1125^{a} 5 ff. and Rhet. II 4. 1381^{b} 7), or scandal ( Theaet. 173 D: cf. 174 E ff.). His singleminded pursuit of Truth leaves him neither time nor inclination to talk about people.

πολύ γε : sc. ἥκιστα. Adimantus accommodates his answer to the last clause of Socrates' question. See on V 465 E.

σχολή . Cf. Theaet. 172 D ff.

εἰς τεταγμένα ἄττα κτλ. With the general sense cf. Theaet. 174 D ff., Phaed. 79 C, D, Tim. 47 B, C and Euripides Fr. 902 ὄλβιος <*>στις τῆς ἱστορίας | ἔσχε μάθησιν | μήτε πολιτῶν ἐπὶ πημοσύνην | μήτ’ εἰς ἀδίκους πράξεις ὁρμῶν | ἀλλ’ ἀθανάτου καθορῶν φύσεως | κόσμον ἀγήρων, πῇ τε συνέστη | καὶ ὅπῃ καὶ ὅπως. | τοῖς δὲ τοιούτοις οὐδέποτ’ αἰσχρῶν | ἔργων μελέτημα προσίζει. Euripides' lines are conceived in the spirit of Plato and exactly illustrate his meaning, especially if, as is usually supposed, they refer to the philosopher Anaxagoras. An eloquent modern parallel may be found in Stevenson's ‘Virginibus puerisque’ p. 260.

ὁρῶντας . For the change from singular to plural cf. I 347 A note

κοσμίῳ . It has been thought that there is a play on κόσμος in the sense of the Universe or Heavens. But the philosopher's gaze outsoars the Heavens, and is fixed on the ὑπερουράνιος τόπος, where the Ideas dwell ( Phaedr. 247 C).

διαβολὴ κτλ. ἐν πᾶσι is neuter, ‘albeit misrepresentation is rife everywhere,’ “there is always detraction going on” (J. and C.).

ἂν οὖν τις κτλ. Cf. 484 C.

δημοτικῆς ἀρετῆς . Not scientific virtue, because its intellectual basis in the minds of the people is ὀρθὴ δόξα, and not ἐπιστήμη. See IV 430 C note, and on δημοτικὴ ἀρετή generally Zeller^{4} II 1, pp. 593—601, and Archer-Hind's edition of the Phaedo App. I. The ‘demotic virtue’ which the philosopher constructs is of course the best of its kind.

ὃ οὐ πάνυ ῥᾴδιον . Cf. 499 C note Plato's κάθαρσις is sufficiently drastic. He would rusticate the entire population above ten years of age, and bring up the remainder in the principles of his καλλίπολις (VII 540 E ff. note).

διενέγκοιεν . See cr. n. Schneider retains διενεγκεῖν, comparing other passages in which ὅτι is followed by an infinitive. Instances of this irregularity occasionally occur (Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 877), but it is unusually awkward here, and the majority of editors are probably right in following q. With the sentiment cf. Laws 735 B—736 C, where the necessity of an initial κάθαρσις is equally insisted on, and various forms of legislative purgation are described.

μήτε ἰδιώτου κτλ. The individual is cleansed by the Socratic elenchus, which purges him of his false persuasion of knowledge: cf. Soph. 230 B—E, where this kind of κάθαρσις is expounded in detail. Gildersleeve (A. J. Ph. III p. 201) points out that the ‘articular infinitive’ with ἄν is rare in Plato.

γράφειν νόμους : ‘to paint or draft laws.’ Richards is inclined to cancel μηδὲ—νόμους as involving “a most awkward and inartistic confusion of the figure (painting) with the thing figured (legislation).” Nothing is more usual in Plato than such a ‘confusion,’ if the phrase employed bears, like γράφειν νόμους, or is capable of bearing, like ἀνδρείκελον below, a meaning of its own as well as an application in the simile, and it is a narrow conception of art which pronounces the idiom inartistic. Cf. 507 A note and Euthyph. 3 A with my note ad loc., and see also on V 451 B. Cobet's ἐγγράφειν νόμους, which Baiter adopts, is another unsuccessful attempt to obliterate this characteristic feature of Plato's stvle.

παραλαβεῖν καθαράν . Plato would cite as examples a tutor who is entrusted with the sole authority over a child, and legislators who (as in the Laws 702 B ff.) receive autocratic power in order to found a colony. Cf. 499 B note

τὸ φύσει δίκαιον is assuredly the Idea of Justice, as opposed to τὸ νόμῳ δίκαιον ‘conventional justice’: cf. 500 C and (for φύσει) V 476 B. See also on X 598 A. Bosanquet ignores the most essential and characteristic feature of Plato's teaching when he remarks that “the ‘natural’ principles of justice and other moral qualities are no doubt those which Plato believes himself to have found present, in various degrees, throughout inorganic and organic nature and the animal world, and culminating in the life of man.” It is better to let Plato soar where we cannot follow him than thus to clip his wings. See the Appendix to Book VII On Plato's Dialectic.

καὶ πρὸς ἐκεῖνο κτλ. The legislative painter looks now at his model (the φύσει δίκαιον etc.), now at his picture (the δίκαιον etc. which he is implanting among men), rubbing out one part and painting another in again (τὸ μὲν—ἐγγράφοιεν), till he is satisfied with the result. He combines and mixes various ἐπιτηδεύματα or institutions, till he produces the true ἀνδρείκελον or ‘colour and likeness of true Manhood’; just as the painter mixes various colours to produce his ἀνδρείκελον or flesh-tint. ἀνδρείκελον in painting was a sort of flesh-colour, made by mixing various colours together: see Crat. 424 E, Xen. Oec. 10. 5, Arist. de gen. an. I 18. 725^{a} 26 and Ruhnken on Timaeus Lex. s.v. To this Plato of course alludes, but he intends us also to take the word in its etymological signification, as is clear from θεοείκελον below. The stress in ἀνδρείκελον, as in θεοειδές and θεοείκελον, is on the first part of the compound: it is not the mere ἀνθρωποειδές, but the Man-like, at which the legislator aims: cf. the force of ἄνδρα in 498 E. ἀνδρείκελον might be translated by ‘the human form divine,’ except that ‘form’ suggests a wrong notion. For other views on this passage see App. V.

θεοείκελον . Il. I 131 et al. It is pleasing to meet with so cordial and spontaneous an acknowledgment of Homer as a kindred spirit in a passage so full of Plato's characteristic idealism. There is more than a grain of truth in Longinus' observation: μόνος Ἡρόδοτος Ὁμηρικώτατος ἐγένετο; Στησίχορος ἔτι πρότερον ὅ τε Ἀρχίλοχος, πάντων δὲ τούτων μάλιστα ὁ Πλάτων ἀπὸ τοῦ Ὁμηρικοῦ κείνου νάματος εἰς αὑτὸν μυρίας ὅσας παρατροπὰς ἀποχετευσάμενος (περὶ ὕψους 13. 3). By the words τὸ ἀνδρείκελον—θεοείκελον Plato means to suggest that Man is then most manlike when he most resembles God: and (as Tennyson says) “then most godlike being most a man.” Cf. IX 589 D note This sure and abiding conviction of the presence of a divine element within us, rendering our nature essentially and truly human, makes itself felt in nearly all the dialogues of Plato. It is the ultimate source of all his idealism, religious and metaphysical, no less than moral and political, and may well be considered the most precious and enduring inheritance which he has bequeathed to posterity.

ὅ τι μάλιστα should be taken with ποιήσειαν, and εἰς ὅσον ἐνδέχεται with θεοφιλῆ: ‘until, as far as possible, they have made mere human characters as dear to God as human characters can be.’ For the σχῆμα ἐκ παραλλήλου see Schanz, Nov. Comm. Pl. pp. 12—15. Schneider can hardly be right in connecting ὅ τι μάλιστα with ἀνθρώπεια. For θεοφιλῆ Badham conjectured θεοειδῆ—a most arbitrary change, though approved by Cobet and Baiter. How could θεοειδῆ have degenerated into θεοφιλῆ, which is in all the MSS? The opposite corruption was far more likely. Plato means us to understand that God loves those most who most resemble Him: cf. X 612 E and Laws 716 C.

ἔφησθα . V 474 A.

αὐτό : viz. the statement ὡς τοιοῦτος —αὐτούς with its interpretation in the preceding exposition.

φήσει . We should expect φήσουσι, but the transition from plural to singular is common (see on 1 347 A), and Plato is probably thinking of the objector in 487 C (φαίη ἄν τις κτλ.): cf. 489 D and 490 D. οὐκ ἀγαθήν just above (instead of μὴ ἀγαθήν as in μὴ τὴν φύσιν) prepares the way for φήσει, by shewing that the infinitives are beginning to escape from the sway of ἀμφισβητῆσαι. φήσει in φήσει λογιζόμενος II 366 A furnishes an exact parallel to φήσει here. The best MSS—see cr. n.—read φήσειν, which is retained by Schneider and others. If φήσειν is right, we must either (1) refer it to ἕξουσι, and suppose that the future is “ob ἔσεσθαι pro φάναι receptum” (Schneider, Stallbaum), or (2) supply an οἴει (J. and C.). Neither explanation is in my judgment possible. φήσεις, the reading of q and editors before Bekker, may be defended from 489 B and 489 D, where Adimantus is identified with the antagonist of 487 C, but the corruption is not a very likely one. Madvig, more suo, expels the word. Cf. Introd. § 5.

μὴ ἧττον . Herwerden would insert χαλεπούς or πικρούς, Richards ἀγρίους or ἀγριαίνειν. If ἧττον is pronounced with emphasis, its meaning is easily caught, after ἧττον in Adimantus' reply. It is virtually a quotation: “wollen wir nicht statt dieses weniger” etc. (Schneider).

πεπεισμένοι ἔστων . See on 499 E. Plato's attempt to conciliate the Many is obviously half-hearted. The Multitude can never be philosophers (494 A), and are not likely to believe in the Philosopher-king. But it was necessary to prove or postulate some degree of assent or at least quiescence on their part in order to demonstrate the possibility of the perfect city. Cf. 502 C note

τις . τίς is read by A, but Adimantus's reply makes it probable that the indefinite pronoun is correct.

βασιλέων ἔκγονοι . See on 499 B.

εἷς ἱκανὸς κτλ. Krohn (Pl. St. p. 125) justly sees in this sentence “an expression of the convictions which led Plato to Sicily” in 367 B.C. Cf. Grote Plato I p. 126 and supra 499 B note Richards would read “<σῶς> γενόμενος or γενόμενός <τε καὶ σῶς γενόμενος> or something similar.” <περι> γενόμενος would give the same sense, and be better Greek. But γενόμενος=εἰ γένοιτο, ‘should he arise,’ is sufficient. He could not be said to be ἱκανός if he were corrupted.

ἅπερ ἡμῖν δοκεῖ : i.e. the arrangements of Plato's καλλίπολις, as J. and C. point out. A ruler may arise who will approve of these, and frame laws accordingly. Plato is trying to prove that his ideal city is not impossible.

οὐ μέντοι ἀδύνατά γε . ‘Not impossible’ is the final verdict which Plato's readers, like Plato himself, will pass upon his city. His tone is far less hopeful than in Books II—IV, and even in V 473 B ff. he is, I think, more optimistic. It is impossible not to feel that 501 C—502 C is written, in some measure, invita Minerva. Plato is glad to escape from so difficult and uncongenial a topic into his native element again. He is beginning to see that the Perfect City is in truth a παράδειγμα ἐν οὐρανῷ (IX 592 B). See on V 470 E, VI 499 C, 499 E, 502 A and VII 540 D— 541 B, and cf. Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. etc. p. 638.

502C - 504A Our next duty is to describe the Rulers and their position in our city. We have already seen that they must be patriotic; let us now add that they must be philosophers. Those who combine the peculiar features of the philosophic temperament are necessarily few, and they must be submitted to stringent intellectual as well as moral tests, to see whether they will be able to endure the greatest of all studies.

ἐνέσονται . ἐγγενήσονται is conjectured by Richards, who compares 521 C and VIII 552 E, 557 C. The proposal is attractive, but involves too great a departure from the MSS. ἐνέσονται moreover is better suited to καὶ κατὰ ποίας—ἁπτόμενοι than ἐγγενήσονται would be. τίνα τρόπον ἐνέσονται means, I think, not how they will be produced (that is expressed in ἐκ τίνων—ἐπιτηδευμάτων), but how they will be in the city, i.e. the whole subject of their position and standing in the State. It is this, as well as their education, which is described in the sequel. The present sentence is intended as a full and accurate forecast of the rest of VI and VII. Ξ has ἔσονται, which was read till Bekker restored ἐνέσονται.

οὐδὲν κτλ. Cf. 497 C, D notes There, as here, the κατάστασις τῶν ἀρχόντων and the position of women and children etc. are treated as parts of one and the same question. The first obscure hint of this connexion is in IV 423 E, but it is not till V 471 C ff. that we begin to see the intimate relation between the two subjects. In V 450 C Socrates for the first time touches on the question ‘Are our proposals about women’ etc. ‘possible?’ The same question reappears in 471 C, but with a larger scope ‘Is the perfect city possible as a whole?’ The reply is ‘Yes, if Philosophers are Kings’; and thus is re-opened the whole subject of the κατάστασις τῶν ἀρχόντων. Plato is therefore justified in connecting, as he does, the two topics here mentioned. But he overstates the case when he asserts that the κατάστασις τῶν ἀρχόντων has been omitted in Books III and IV (see III 412 B ff.), or slurred over in the same way as the Community of Wives and Children, in spite of various hints of a fuller treatment still to come (III 414 A: cf. IV 442 C note). See also on 503 A and Krohn Pl. St. p. 127, Pfleiderer Zur Lösung etc. p. 28, with the replies of Grimmelt de reip. Pl. comp. et unit. p. 49 and Westerwick de rep. Pl. comm. pp. 54 ff.

τὴν ‐‐ κατάστασιν =‘the appointment of the Rulers’ is equivalent, as in the title or heading of a chapter, to τὸ περὶ τῆς—καταστάσεως. Of this subject the Rulers' education naturally forms the most important part; but we ought not to explain τῶν ἀρχόντων as brachylogical for τῆς τῶν ἀρχόντων παιδείας (with Krohn Pl. St. p. 126).

παντελῶς ἀληθής . The adjective should be translated literally, so as to suggest that the best κατάστασις is also the truest. The ideal is the true in Plato: cf. V 473 A note

τὸ δὲ ‐‐ δεῖ . Plato admits that the subject of the Rulers requires to be reinvestigated practically from the beginning. Their strictly intellectual needs have hitherto been almost ignored: see 497 C note But Plato does not propose to supersede the earlier education in Music and Gymnastic, nor are the two schemes theoretically incompatible, as Krohn appears to hold (Pl. St. p. 127). We are clearly intended to suppose that the Rulers receive the moral as well as the intellectual training, although in practice, no doubt, some modifications might be necessary, so long as the two proceeded simultaneously. See VII 536 D and II 376 E notes

ἐλέγομεν . III 412 C—414 B.

τὸ δόγμα τοῦτο . The patriot's creed: see III 412 E, 413 C.

ἤ =‘alioquin.’ Cf. V 463 D note

καὶ ἆθλα is ejected by Cobet. The precise words do not occur in III 414 A, but they are unobjectionable, and end the sentence well. Cf. V 460 B καὶ γέρα δοτέον καὶ ἆθλα, and see also on V 465 D.

παρακαλυπτομένου : ‘putting on her veil.’ The λόγος is personified, as often.

κινεῖν τὸ νῦν παρόν . There is perhaps a hint of the proverb εὖ κείμενον κακὸν μὴ κίνει. No one who reads III 412 B —414 B without reference to the present passage would detect that the λόγος ‘leaves the high road’ in 414 B because she is afraid to raise the question of the Philosopher-king. The words ὡς ἐν τύπῳ, μὴ δἰ ἀκριβείας, εἰρῆσθαι would not suggest to him anything of the kind; and the impression which the earlier account of the Rulers leaves on us is that it was intended by Plato himself to be complete in outline, though not in detail. From the standpoint of Book VI it is certainly even in outline incomplete. Cf. Krohn Pl. St. p. 126, where the case is somewhat overstated; and see on 497 C, 502 D. But there is nothing in all this to justify any chorizontic inference, if only we have regard to the laws of the Dialogue as a form of literary art. See Introd. § 4.

ὄκνος κτλ. Examples of the omission of ἦν will be found in Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. p. 33. q^{2} has ὤκνουν: but cf. V 450 D.

ὅτι ‐‐ καθιστάναι : lit. ‘that we must appoint philosophers in the persons of our most perfect guardians,’ i.e. that the rulers we appoint must be philosophers. The ἀκριβέστατοι φύλακες are the same as the τέλεοι φύλακες of IV 428 D: and the whole expression is equivalent to ὅτι φιλοσόφους δεῖ εἶναι τοὺς ἀκριβεστάτους φύλακας οὓς καθίσταμεν. To read καθεστάναι for καθιστάναι (with v) is much less elegant; still less should we follow D. and V. in transposing φύλακας and φιλοσόφους. For the sense of ἀκριβεστάτους cf. (with Jackson) I 341 B, 342 D.

διεσπασμένη . Cobet proposes διεσπασμένα, which he wrongly asserts to be the reading of A. But the parts of the philosophic φύσις are not torn asunder; it is the φύσις itself which is in partes disiuncta. Bywater's διεσπαρμένα avoids this difficulty; but διεσπασμένη is much better, because it suggests that the disjunction is ‘unnatural’ (in the Platonic sense of παρὰ φύσιν): see on IV 443 B. The philosophic nature ought to be born whole.

εὐμαθεῖς κτλ. ‘The faculty of learning easily, memory, sagacity, quickness, and so on, together with spirit and high-mindedness, are, as you know, not often naturally combined with the disposition to live soberly in quiet and stedfast ways’ etc. Plato means that natural intelligence and vivacity, with their accompaniments of spirit and highmindedness, rarely go with moral stedfastness. A good illustration is afforded by the contrast between “the Athenian and the Spartan, the former ‘neither resting themselves nor letting anyone else rest, the latter so slow that aggression can hardly rouse them to repel it’” (Bosanquet). Cf. Thucyd. I 70. For other views on the text and interpretation of this difficult passage see App. VI.

ὑπὸ ὀξύτητος κτλ. Theaet. 144 A οἵ τε ὀξεῖς—καὶ ἀγχίνοι καὶ μνήμονες—ᾄττοντες φέρονται ὥσπερ τὰ ἀνερμάτιστα πλοῖα.

τὰ βέβαια κτλ. Theaet. 144 B οἵ τε αὖ ἐμβριθέστεροι νωθροί πως ἀπαντῶσι πρὸς τὰς μαθήσεις καὶ λήθης γέμοντες.

ἔφαμεν . 484 D—487 A.

ἀμφοτέρων is explained in 503 C note

αὐτῷ is probably masculine (Schneider), in spite of αὐτό (the philosophic ἦθος) immediately following. We can hardly speak of assigning concrete τιμή or ἀρχή to an ἦθος. The pronoun refers to the philosophic guardian that is to be. See on δυνατὴ ἔσται 503 E.

ἐλέγομεν . III 413 A ff.

δυνατὴ ἔσται : sc. ἡ φύσις αὐτῶν. φύσις was last employed in 503 B, since when it has been represented both by the individual and by the ἦθος (αὐτῷ and αὐτό in 503 D). We must bear in mind that the Greek inflexions of gender made it easier for them than it is for us to tolerate such irregularities. No Greek could possibly misunderstand the reference, as soon as he heard the ‐η of δυνατή. A tolerably close parallel will be found in Phaedr. 254 B (not D, as Stallbaum prints). See also 508 D and X 605 C notes Bywater conjectures δυνήσεται, but δυνήσεται is unlikely to have been corrupted into δυνατὴ ἔσται.

ἄθλοις . See cr. n. Orelli's emendation has met with considerable favour; but Schneider, Stallbaum, and J. and C. still retain ἄλλοις. With the MS reading we must, I think, translate ‘in the other cases’ i.e. in the πόνοι etc. spoken of just before. (If Plato merely meant ‘in other kinds of effort’ it was not worth his while to insert the clause at all.) But ὥσπερ certainly suggests something more than a mere comparison between flinching at moral, and flinching at intellectual tests; and nothing could be more appropriate, or more in Plato's way, than an allusion to the games: see on V 465 D. That <*>θλοι in this sense is half-poetic, “occurring only in the Timaeus and the Laws” (J. and C.), is scarcely an objection in Plato. ἄθλοις also suits well with γυμνάζειν. In [Axioch.] 365 A occur the words ὡς γὰρ ἀγωνιστὴς δειλός, ἐν τοῖς γυμνασίοις γενναῖος φαινόμενος, ἀπολέλοιπας ἐν τοῖς ἄθλοις. The author of the Axiochus may have been thinking of the present passage, and if so, he certainly read ἄθλοις. See also the fine anecdote in Plut. Them. 11. 3.

504A - 505B Glauco enquires what these ‘greatest studies’ are. You will remember, says Socrates, that we described our earlier or psychological method of arriving at the Virtues as inadequate and incomplete. Our guardians must travel by a longer road, if they would reach their proper goal, i.e. the highest of all studies, which is something above and beyond even the virtues. And these very virtues must no longer be seen merely in outline; they must be studied in all their fulness and perfection. The highest study is the Idea of the Good, as Glauco has often heard before. It is the knowledge of this Idea which alone renders all other knowledge useful and profitable.

διαστησάμενοι . IV 436 A ff.

ξυνεβιβάζομεν : ‘we drew conclusions,’ viz. in IV 441 C ff. The use of συμβιβάζειν as a synonym for συμπεραίνεσθαι, συλλογίζεσθαι, is common in Aristotle: for examples see Bonitz Ind. Ar. s. v.

ἐλέγομεν . See IV 435 D note

ἦν : “ut ἐχρῆν et similia dictum” (Schneider). There is no reason to eject the word (with Madvig) or to write εἴη: why should not the mood of the oratio recta be retained? εἴη would be unpleasing with εἴη following so soon. Liebhold's ὡς μὲν δυνατὰ ᾖ is unclassical: see on I 349 C. Richards conjectures ὡς μὲν <ὡς or ὅσον or εἰς τὸ> δυνατὸν κάλλιστα κτλ., taking ὡς with κατιδεῖν. But we ought not to multiply instances of ὡς for ὥστε in Plato (II 365 D note). The infinitive means simply ‘for descrying,’ ‘in order to descry them in the best possible way’: see Goodwin MT. p. 308 and Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 586.

αὐτά is of course the four cardinal virtues, like ταῦτα in 504 D. The ‘longer circuit’ is the educational training necessary in order to enable the guardians to obtain scientific knowledge of the virtues by discerning their relation with the Idea of Good: cf. 506 A. In Book IV Justice, Temperance etc. were regarded as psychological qualities or relations; but the philosophic Guardians must learn their metaphysical import. Throughout the rest of VI and VII Plato, in short, discards Psychology for Metaphysics. Thus much is clear; but many difficult and interesting questions arise in connexion with this passage, as Krohn and others have pointed out. The μακροτέρα περίοδος mentioned in IV 435 D appears to be a longer way of determining, not the essential nature of the virtues, but whether Soul has ‘parts’ or not. (A solution of this difficulty is suggested on 435 D). Socrates' shorter road, again, is not a way by which the Guardians are to go, but a method employed by himself in studying primarily the Soul, and secondarily the virtues. Finally, what is the relation between the psychological conception of Virtue and the metaphysical? And does the metaphysical conception involve a revised psychology or not? The last question is touched on in the notes to X 611 B, where Plato himself appears to raise it. For the last but one see on 504 D.

ἑπομένας : ‘corresponding with’ ‘on a level with’ (Jowett) viz. in point of ἀκριβεία: cf. IV 435 D τῶν γε προειρημένων τε καὶ προεσκεμμένων ἀξίως, where see note. For the genitive with ἑπόμενος cf. (with Stallbaum) Pol. 271 E and Laws 899 C (ὁπόσα τούτων ξυνεπόμενα, according to the best MS). Bywater would read ἐχομένας here and ἐχόμενα in the Politicus, but it is safer to make no change, although the reverse corruption of ἐχόμενα for ἑπόμενα apparently occurs in Gorg. 494 E, if Bekker's restoration is correct.

ἀλλ’ ὦ φίλε κτλ. Socrates σοφίζεται περὶ τὸ ὄνομα (509 D)—plays on the etymological sense of μετρίως. In effect he says “Don't say ‘μετρίως’: short measure in such cases is no measure at all: for—if ‘Measure’ be rightly understood—there can be no imperfect measure of anything.” Etymologically, for example, ἀτελὲς μέτρον ὕδατος is a misnomer, for the measure must be exactly commensurate with the water. Hence the μέτρον τῶν ἀκριβεστάτων must itself be ἀκριβέστατον (cf. 504 E). The essential perfection of μέτρον, τὸ μέτριον and the like is expounded in Pol. 284 A ff., Phil. 64 D ff. and 66 A: cf. also Laws 716 C ff., where we read that God, not Man, is the Measure of all things. The translation ‘Nothing imperfect is the measure of anything’ (Jowett and others) suggests, I think, a wrong idea, and is not so well adapted to μέτρον—γίγνεται.

τισιν : with reference, perhaps, to Adimantus and the others (J. and C., comparing II 372 E. Cf. also V 465 E). Adimantus betrays no consciousness of the allusion in his reply.

ἤ =alioquin. Cf. V 463 D note

νῦν δή . The reference (somewhat loose, as usual) is to 503 E.

καὶ μεῖζον κτλ. κοὶ—καί=‘not only—but also.’ αὐτῶν τούτων is ‘harum ipsarum virtutum.’

οὐχ ὑπογραφὴν ‐‐ ὥσπερ νῦν is as clear a proof as we could wish that Justice and the other virtues, as described in Book IV, are not the transcendental αὐτὰ καθ’ αὑτὰ εἴδη: see on III 402 C. They are only a ὑπογραφή or ‘adumbratio’ of the Ideas, being, we may suppose, simply the psychological relations which result from the παρουσία of the Ideas in certain particulars, viz. in human souls, during their union with human bodies. ὥσπερ νῦν admits moreover that the Rulers of III and IV (apart from a few suggestions to the opposite effect: see on 497 C) had only ‘correct opinion’ and not ‘knowledge’ (in the strict Platonic sense): it was their duty to accept and carry out the precepts of Plato, the founder of the city (IV 429 C note).

παριέναι . The present is better than παρεῖναι, which Herwerden conjectures.

καὶ μάλα . See cr. n. The words ἄξιον τὸ διανόημα are not strictly suitable to ἢ οὐ γελοῖον, and although διανόημα is of course a Platonic word, it is questionable whether Plato could have used it in this way. Perhaps we owe the comment to a gratified monk, who may have applied the observation to systematic theology. The comment is at all events a just one. Cf. 496 A note Plato's remark is best illustrated by the case of the exact sciences; and in a certain sense it may be said that he wished to make Politics into an exact science.

ὃ μέντοι κτλ. : lit. ‘but that which you call the greatest study, and that which you call its subject whatever it be—do you suppose any one would let you off without asking what they are?’ Richards finds a difficulty, but there is none, if only we take ὅ τι not as interrogative, but as the indefinite relative. For εἶναι omitted see Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. p. 33. The μέγιστον μάθημα is Dialectic; and its subject the Idea of Good, though of course the latter can itself be called the μέγιστον μάθημα, as in 505 A. For ἐρωτᾷ Richards neatly conjectures ἐρωτᾷς, but the text (‘You may ask it yourself if you like’) is better. See next note.

ἀντιλαμβανόμενος : ‘by holding on fast to me,’ ‘refusing to let me go,’ is the opposite of ἀφεῖναι: cf. VIII 544 B note ‘By raising objections’ (D. and V.) is incorrect: see on 497 D. Socrates means ‘you intend to bother me as before’—αὖ refers to V 449 B ff.—‘by not letting me off, but on this occasion you won't succeed, for I have the answer ready, so ask away!’ Cf. ἐρώτα in Gorg. 448 B.

ἡ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ἰδέα κτλ. It is clear from πολλάκις ἀκήκοας that the supremacy of the Idea of Good was already a recognised tenet of the Platonic school. No proof of the doctrine is here attempted by Plato (cf. V 475 E note): it is merely expounded and explained. τὸ Πλάτωνος ἀγαθόν was in antiquity a proverb for any dark or obscure saying: see Amphis ap. D. L. III 27 ἧττον οἶδα τοῦτ’ ἐγώ, | ὦ δέσποτ’ , ἢ τὸ Πλάτωνος ἀγαθόν. (Another allusion occurs in Alexis ap. Athen. VIII 354 D). Some account of the enormous literature of the subject will be found in Zeller^{4} II 1. pp. 709 ff., 718 note 1. In addition to Stumpf's treatise to be presently named, I have found the monograph by Biehl Die Idee des Guten bei Platon Graz 1870 particularly good and useful. Other special treatises are also referred to in the course of the notes. The majority of interpreters are now agreed in identifying Plato's Idea of the Good with his philosophical conception of the Deity. The best and fullest proof of the identity is still, I think, Stumpf's exhaustive dissertation Das Verhältniss des Platonischen Gottes zur Idee des Guten Halle 1869. There is only one passage in his works where Plato himself appears expressly to identify the two, viz. Phil. 22 C, but on the principle that things which are equal to the same thing are equal to one another, the identification is complete, and I have therefore thought myself at liberty throughout the notes occasionally to illustrate Plato's metaphysics by his theology.

δίκαια καὶ τἄλλα . It is only by κοινωνία with the Idea of Good that δίκαια, καλά etc. become good i.e. useful and beneficial (synonyms of ‘good’: see V 457 B note). Otherwise they are altogether useless. δίκαια does not of course mean the Idea of Justice, but τὰ πολλὰ δίκαια in the widest sense of the term, including νόμιμα περὶ δικαίου: see on V 476 A, 476 C, 479 D. Baiter's δὴ καί for δίκαια καί occurs in one or two inferior MSS, but is certainly wrong: s<*>e on 506 A.

ὅτι ‐‐ ἴσμεν . Cf. 506 D ff., VII 517 B ff., 532 E ff. and Tim. 28 C, where much the same is said of the πατὴρ τοῦ παντός.

εἰ δὲ μὴ ἴσμεν κτλ. : ‘and if we know it not, and should know all else excepting it never so well’ etc. Cobet does ill to expunge εἰ δὲ μὴ ἴσμεν. The repetition of εἰ before ἐπισταίμεθα is necessary because, while ἴσμεν expresses a fact, ἐπισταίμεθα is only an improbable supposition: see next note. The sentiment is one of Plato's commonplaces: see for example Alc. II 144 D ff. (where it is expounded in detail), 147 B, Charm. 173 A ff., Euthyd. 280 E ff., 289 A ff., 291, and cf. also Lach. 199 C, Lys. 219 B ff., Phaed. 69 B. Stumpf das Verhältniss etc. p. 87 note compares also the language about the Gods in Laws 905 C. The Euthydemus and Charmides already forecast the city of the Philosopher-king, in which the Knowledge of Good shall ‘sit alone in the helm of the state’ ( Euthyd. 291 D): see Nohle die Statslehre Pl. pp. 39—48.

κεκτήμεθα . To possess a thing ἄνευ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ is matter of common and daily occurrence; to know everything (except the Good) is not. Hence the indicative κεκτήμεθα is as appropriate now as the optative ἐπισταίμεθα was before. I formerly read κεκτῄμεθα with Π and the majority of editors, but now agree with Schneider that there is no reason to depart from the text of A.

φρονεῖν ἄνευ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ . The last three words were suspected by Morgenstern and bracketed by Stallbaum and others. If we take these words (like ἄνευ ταύτης above) with τἄλλα, they are not superfluous; ‘eo enim quod quis reliqua omnia excepto bono intelligit, efficitur ut nihil, quod pulchrum et bonum sit, intelligat’ (Schneider). That some writers might have omitted the phrase is no ground for interfering with Plato's characteristic fulness of expression.

505B - 506A What then is the Good? The majority answer ‘Pleasure,’ others, who are more refined, ‘Knowledge.’ Neither of these views is tenable. Men are constantly disputing about the Good, but its existence is practically admitted by all, for it is the ultimate object of all endeavour. The Idea of the Good must be known by our Guardians; for unless they know the connexion between the Good, and particular instances of the just, the honourable etc., they cannot guard the latter, or even indeed be said to know them in any adequate measure.

τοῖς μὲν πολλοῖς κτλ. We need not (with Tietzel Die Id. d. Guten u. d. Gottesbegriff p. 9) find in this an allusion to Aristippus and the Cyrenaics. Plato means what he says and no more. Pleasure is always the summum bonum of the Many: cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. I 3. 1095^{b} 16. In τοῖς κομψοτέροις Dümmler (Antisth. p. 43) and others have recognised Antisthenes: cf. RP^{7} § 218 B note b. Hermann (Gesch. u. System p. 329 note 323) interprets the words—more correctly, I think—of Socrates (cf. Xen. Mem. IV 5. 6) and his immediate followers, Antisthenes included. The Megarians sometimes held the same view (D. L. II 106). See also next note.

ἐπειδὰν κτλ. : “when they utter the mysterious word ‘good’.” For φθέγγεσθαι of a high-sounding, oracular, impressive utterance cf. VII 527 A, VIII 568 A, Prot. 342 E, Phaedr. 238 D, Ar. Clouds 315. Plato's criticism applies to himself, in common with the other pupils of Socrates, and was doubtless intended to do so. He constantly declares that ‘knowledge of the good’ is the all-important possession for man: see on εἰ δὲ μὴ ἴσμεν 505 A. The present discussion removes the petitio principii by explaining what the ἰδέα τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ really means.

ἢ οὐ καὶ οὗτοι κτλ. This is exactly what happens to Callicles in Gorg. 495 A—499 C. If Plato is referring to any dialogue at all, the Gorgias l.c. illustrates his point much better than the Philebus (13 A—C), to which Zeller^{4} II 1. p. 548, Susemihl Gen. Entw. II p. 192, and others of the older generation of scholars suppose that Plato is alluding. But there is nothing to suggest any crossreference at all. On the question whether the Philebus is or is not prior to the Republic see Jackson in J. Ph. XXV pp. 65—82.

τόδε οὐ φανερὸν κτλ. The contrast is between δίκαια, καλά on the one hand, and ἀγαθά or ὠφέλιμα (V 457 B note) on the other. All men desire the reality of good (cf. IV 438 A note), but many are content with the semblance of honour. Cobet expunges τὰ δοκοῦντα, and καί before δοκεῖν, thereby leaving a very crabbed piece of Greek. Ast's καὶ διώκειν for καὶ δοκεῖν is on a higher plane of criticism. The text is nevertheless sound. δοκεῖν ‘to seem’ is used absolutely, as in II 361 B, and prepares the way for δόξαν ‘seeming’ (cf. 499 A) below. So also Schneider and Stallbaum understand the passage. For ἔτι and ἤδη see on III 412 B.

ὃ δὴ διώκει κτλ. With ὃ followed by τούτου cf. II 357 B note Cobet's ὅτου for τούτου is an unlucky venture. Stumpf justly observes that the Idea of Good is here regarded as the final cause: cf. Phaed. 98 B ff. and Phil. 20 D, 54 C. For a striking theological presentation of the same view see Laws 715 E ff. and 903 B—D. Plato's ἰδέα τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ laid “the foundations of the teleological view of the world” (Krohn Pl. St. p. 131).

ἀπομαντευομένη . Cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. X 2. 1173^{a} 4 f. ἴσως δὲ καὶ ἐν τοῖς φαύλοις ἔστι τι φυσικὸν [ἀγαθὸν ] κρεῖττον ἢ καθ’ αὑτά, ὃ ἐφίεται τοῦ οἰκείου ἀγαθοῦ. ἀπομαντευομένη implies the same instinctive, half-unconscious, divination of something beyond our grasp.

διὰ τοῦτο κτλ. See 505 A note

καὶ ἐκείνους : i.e. as well as οἱ πολλοί. For καί cf. VII 519 B.

οἶμαι γοῦν κτλ. No one who does not know the ἰδέα τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ can possibly know in what respect or how far particular δίκαια (such as, for example, a particular νόμιμον περὶ δικαίου: see V 479 D note) are good, because it is the παρουσία τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ in them which makes them good (505 A note). And no one who is ignorant ὅπῃ ποτὲ ἀγαθά ἐστιν can possibly defend δίκαια (such as for example the δίκαια ἐπιτηδεύματα of Plato's city), because he is at the mercy of anyone who attempts to shew that they are bad. Nor, until we know how far particular δίκαια are good ( πρότερον), can we adequately know these δίκαια themselves, i.e. know which of these really is δίκαιον and which not, for we do not know how they stand in relation to the ultimate source of all justice, viz. the Idea of the Good. It is this which, in the last resort, is the true ‘measure of all things’ (Laws 716 C ff., where Plato employs the language of theology). Hence the supreme necessity for our Guardians to know the ἰδέα τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ. Bekker first restored the true reading of this passage, which had been strangely mutilated in earlier editions. Stallbaum reads μηδ’ ἂν ἕνα with q, but instances of the future with ἄν—see on 492 C—should not be wilfully multiplied.

τούτων : i.e. τὰ δίκαιά τε καὶ καλά, ὅπῃ ποτὲ ἀγαθά ἐστιν.

506B - 508B After some hesitation, Socrates undertakes to describe the Idea of Good, not as it is in itself, but through its image, analogue, or offspring.

Let me remind you (he proceeds) of our usual distinction between Particulars and Ideas, the former apprehended by Sight, the latter by Reason. In the case of most of the senses, nothing is required except the faculty and its object in order that a sensation may take place. But in order that we may see, a third requisite is necessary, viz. Light. Now the author of Light is the Sun, and we may therefore say that the Sun is the cause of Sight. We must not identify either Sight or the Eye with the Sun, although the Eye resembles the Sun more closely than any other organ of sense, and the Sun himself is seen by the Eye.

πότερον ἐπιστήμην κτλ. Even if it could be shewn that the Philebus is earlier than the Republic— and recent critics take the opposite view —there would be no sufficient reason for holding (with Zeller^{4} II 1. p. 708 note) that Plato is referring to that dialogue, although he there denies that either Knowledge or Pleasure is the Chief Good (20 B ff., 60 E). See also on 505 C and 506 E.

οὗτος κτλ. καλῶς has in reality— see cr. n.—more and better MS support than καλός, which Schneider retained in the belief that A read καλός. Used in this way, καλῶς is colloquial (Jebb on Soph. O. T. 1008 καλῶς ε<*> δῆλος οὐκ εἰδὼς τί δρᾷς).

δοκεῖ σοι δίκαιον κτλ. The sentence is ironical, as is clear from ἐξὸν παρ’ ἄλλων (the Sophists forsooth) ἀκούειν φανά τε καὶ καλά in D below. Plato frequently feigns ignorance and self-distrust before expounding some great principle of whose truth he is himself profoundly convinced: cf. V 450 D. The notion that he really lays claim only to δόξα or even ὀρθὴ δόξα of the Good is hardly to be entertained, although he does not claim to have perfect knowledge: to that we may, perchance, attain hereafter. See 505 A note

ἢ δοκοῦσί τί σοι κτλ. On ὀρθὴ δόξα see Men. 97 A—98 A, Theaet. 201 C, Tim. 51 D, E. Correct opinion believes, but does not know, and is therefore blind and insecure. Its ethical correlate is πολιτικὴ or δημοτικὴ ἀρετή: cf. 500 D and IV 430 C notes See in general Zeller^{4} II 1. pp. 588 ff.

σκολιά =‘crooked,’ ‘awry’ is objected to by Hermann on the ground that ὀρθαὶ δόξαι may be blind, but cannot be ‘crooked.’ This is true, but αἱ ἄνευ ἐπιστήμης δόξαι may be both blind and awry; and αἰσχρά, which looks back to αἰσχραί, shews that it is not correct opinions, but opinions without knowledge generally, which are described in τυφλά— σκολιά. Socrates' mock humility will not pretend to more than δόξα, let alone ὀρθὴ δόξα. If you wish for ‘science,’ go to your sophistical rhetoricians, forsooth, and ‘hear things bright and beautiful.’ φανά τε καὶ καλά may be an allusion to the ‘lumina orationis’ of Isocrates and his friends: see 498 E note σκότια, which Hermann conjectures, is apparently not used by Plato.

ὥσπερ ἐπὶ τέλει ὤν : not ‘just as you are reaching the goal’ (Jowett), but ‘as if you were at the end.’ Jowett practically omits ὥσπερ in his translation.

ὁρμήν . The idea is as of a start or impulse which enables one to clear the obstacles in the way: cf. V 451 C.

τὰ νῦν should be taken with ἐφικέσθαι. If we take it with δοκοῦντος, we must suppose that Socrates intends to suggest that his view of the matter may change (so D. and V.). He is hardly likely to have made such a suggestion, even ironically. ἐάσωμεν τὸ νῦν εἶναι is also in favour of connecting τὰ νῦν with ἐφικέσθαι. Cf. Tim. 48 C f. τὴν μὲν γὰρ περὶ ἁπάντων εἴτε ἀρχὴν εἴτε α<*>ρχὰς—τὸ νῦν οὐ ῥητέον, δἰ ἄλλο μὲν οὐδέν, διὰ δὲ τὸ χαλεπὸν εἶναι κατὰ τὸν παρόντα τρόπον τῆς διεξόδου δηλῶσαι τὰ δοκοῦντα κτλ. The emphasis on τὸ νῦν εἶναι and τὰ νῦν seems to hint that a description of the ἀγαθόν, as it is in itself, may be expected on some future occasion. But there is no dialogue in which the Idea of Good is so clearly described as in the Republic, and it is not without reason that every historian of Philosophy regards this passage as the locus classicus on the subject. O. Schneider (Versuch einer genet. Entw. d. Pl. ἀγαθόν p. 15) thinks of the Philebus; Susemihl (Gen. Entw. II p. 193) of the Φιλόσοφος, which was perhaps planned, but probably never executed (see on 484 A). The Philebus is unsuitable; and of the Φιλόσοφος we know nothing. I am inclined to think—in view especially of βουλοίμην ἂν κτλ. below—that, although Plato may have cherished the idea of describing the Good without the aid of a simile—εἴδεσιν αὐτοῖς δἰ αὐτῶν—, he never, at all events in any of his dialogues, did so. In a certain sense, perhaps, the Timaeus describes the Good (see Archer-Hind's edition p. 27), but even there, we study the ‘Father of all’ not in himself so much as in his works. I agree with Stumpf's conclusion (l.c. p. 75) that Plato could hardly have depicted the Idea of Good at all except by means of a comparison. Certainly nothing else could have made it equally clear; and, in point of fact, ‘es wird nirgends Mehr gegeben’ (Stumpf, l.c. p. 59 note). See also next note.

ὃς δὲ ἔκγονος κτλ. The ἔκγονος is the Sun, as presently appears. Socrates' procedure in Phaed. 99 C—E is in some respects like his procedure here. A nearer parallel is Phaedr. 246 A, where, before describing the soul, Socrates observes οἷον μέν ἐστι, πάντῃ πάντως θείας εἶναι καὶ μακρᾶς διηγήσεως, ᾧ δὲ ἔοικεν, ἀνθρωπίνης τε καὶ ἐλάττονος. The Idea of Good, like the Soul, is best described by one man to another in a figure. On εἰσαῦθις see last note and IV 430 C note

τοὺς τόκους . The comparison, which is already suggested in ἀποτείσεις, ἀποδοῦναι (‘pay’ as well as ‘render’), and κομίσασθαι, culminates in the word τόκος (‘interest’ and ‘offspring’). See on γράφειν νόμους 501 A and (for a similar play on τόκος) cf. VIII 555 E and Ar. Thesm. 842 —845. κίβδηλον below is a metaphor from counterfeit coinage.

διομολογησάμενός γε . γε (‘yes,’ ‘not until’: cf. with Schneider Phaedr. 228 D δείξας γε πρῶτον κτλ.) was restored by Bekker from the best MSS. Stephanus (with Ξ etc.) read δέ.

ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν . Cf. V 475 E note

εἶναι is not of course used in its technical sense, otherwise it would be inconsistent with the end of Book V. Socrates means only that the Platonist distinguishes between two categories—τὰ πολλά, and the Ideas.

καὶ αὐτὸ δὴ κτλ. The literal meaning of the text above printed is as follows: ‘So likewise a Beautiful itself, and a Good itself and similarly about all which we formerly took’ (or ‘postulated’) ‘as many: reversing our procedure (πάλιν αὖ), we postulate also one Idea of each, believing that there is but one, and call it the essential so-and-so.’ καὶ—ἐτίθεμεν is best explained as still under the influence of φαμέν—λόγῳ. τότε (as Schneider observes) refers ‘ad eam, quae modo facta est, multorum commemorationem’: cf. 510 B. Stallbaum is mistaken in supposing that the allusion is to V 475 E ff. Plato's meaning will appear from a single example. We postulate both πολλὰ δίκαια and also ἓν δίκαιον, viz. the ἰδέα μία δικαίου, and we call the latter ὃ ἔστιν δίκαιον: cf. Phaed. 75 B τοῦ ὃ ἔστιν ἴσον, Symp. 211 C and elsewhere. We postulate only one ἰδέα δικαίου, because we believe that there is but one: see X 597 C, D, where Plato shews why there cannot be more. For αὐτό used of the Ideas, see on IV 438 B, 438 C and V 476 A note Instead of καὶ ἰδέαν, the MSS— see cr. n.—read κατ’ ἰδέαν ( κατιδέαν Vind. F.). For the interchange of καί and κατά see Schaefer's Greg. Cor. p. 234 note 26. An unduly sloping accent is enough to account for the corruption of ΚΑῚΙΔΕΑΝ into ΚΑΤΙΔΕΑΝ (as in uncial MSS it would be written: see Thompson Gk. Palaeogr. p. 127). See also my article in Cl. Rev. XIII p. 100. Other views on the text and interpretation of this difficult passage are discussed in App. VII.

ἆρ’ οὖν κτλ. On the unique position of Sight among the senses see Phaedr. 250 D and Bonitz on Arist. Met. A 1. 980^{a} 23: cf. also Phaed. 65 B, Tim. 47 A ff., Hipp. Maior 297 E ff. It is the costliest (πολυτελεστάτη) because it requires an additional precious or valuable element (μὴ ἄτιμον 508 A) beyond what is necessary for the operation of the others, viz. Light: cf. Tim. 45 C, D and Arist. de An. II 7. 418^{b} 2 ff.

ἔστιν ὅ τι κτλ. Steinhart (p. 689 note 213) and others remark on Plato's error in denying that a medium is necessary in Hearing etc. Aristotle was well aware of this fact (see his de An. II 7. 419^{a} 25 ff.), and there are several indications that it was not altogether unknown to Plato. In Tim. 67 B, for example, air is regarded as in a certain sense the medium of sound. Here, however, where a scientific analysis of perception is not proposed, Plato takes his stand upon the broad fact of experience, that whereas we can hear, touch, etc. either in light or in darkness, we can see only where there is light.

οὐδ’ ἄλλαις πολλαῖς . ‘Non αἰσθήσεσι supplendum est, quippe quae non amplius tres supersint, sed δυνάμεσι vel δυνάμεων συζεύξεσι’ (Schneider). It may be added that the antecedent of ἄλλαις is the same as that of τινα and τὴν τῆς ὄψεως καὶ τοῦ ὁρατοῦ, and τὴν is certainly for τὴν δύναμιν: cf. τὴν τοῦ ὁρᾶν τε καὶ ὁρᾶσθαι δύναμιν in C. Plato is thinking quite generally of δυνάμεις τοῦ ποιεῖν τε καὶ πάσχειν: cf. Theaet. 156 A.

ἐν αὐτοῖς κτλ. If ἐν αὐτοῖς is right, αὐτοῖς must be interpreted as τοῖς ὁρωμένοις, for it is clear from 508 C ὧν ἂν τὰς χρόας τὸ ἡμερινὸν φῶς ἐπέχῃ that colour is here regarded as inherent in the object. Grammatically, however, αὐτοῖς can scarcely mean anything except τοῖς ὄμμασιν, and in my edition of 1897 I accordingly proposed to read ἐν αὐτοῖς <τοῖς ὁρωμένοις>. Ficinus translates praesente item colore, omitting ἐν αὐτοῖς altogether. For other views see App. VIII.

τίνος ‐‐ τούτου ; The genitive has been variously explained as (1) dependent on γένος (Schneider), (2) in agreement with παραγενομένου understood (Stallbaum, Campbell), (3) like ἵππων in τί δὲ ἵππων οἴει; V 459 B (Jowett). (2) is in my opinion grammatically impossible. For (3) cf. V 470 A note Jowett's view is perhaps possible, but we should have expected simply τί δὴ λέγεις—τοῦτο; Schneider's explanation (‘Pray what is this whose γένος you mention?’) is, I think, the least unsatisfactory. Perhaps we should read δεῖν for δή .

ὃ δὴ σὺ καλεῖς . Herwerden needlessly writes ὃ δὴ καὶ σὺ καλεῖς.

οὐ σμικρᾷ κτλ. ἰδέα, ‘kind,’ ‘class,’ is here a synonym for γένος as in Theaet. 184 D, Pol. 289 B. The dative expresses the ‘amount of difference’ after the comparative τιμιωτέρῳ (‘more precious:’ cf. πολυτελεστάτην in 507 C). Cf. II 373 E and IX 579 C τοῖς τοιούτοις κακοῖς πλείω καρποῦται with note ad loc.

τῶν ἐν οὐρανῷ θεῶν : the heavenly constellations, which form the οὐράνιον θεῶν γένος ( Tim. 40 A). Plato's description of the sun is instinct with religious feeling. The ‘clear god and patron of all light, From whom each lamp and shining star doth borrow The beauteous influence that makes him bright’ claims adoration from Plato not merely as an οὐράνιος θεός, like the other stars, but as the symbol and scion (ἔκγονος) of the Supreme Idea or God. Cf. Bonitz Disp. Plat. duae, p. 6 note 3, and especially Paul Shorey in Chicago Studies in Cl. Phil. Vol. I pp. 224 ff. The sunworship of some of the Neo-Platonists was inspired in no small measure by this passage of the Republic; see in particular Julian's ‘Address to the Sovereign Sun’ (εἰς τὸν βασιλέα ἥλιον) Or. IV. Cf. 508 D note

ἡλιοειδεστάτην . The Eye is the Body's Sun: cf. Ar. Thesm. 16, 17 ᾧ μὲν βλέπειν χρὴ πρῶτ’ ἐμηχανήσατο | ὀφθαλμὸν ἀντίμιμον ἡλίου τροχῷ. A similar idea appears in St Matth. 6. 22 ὁ λύχνος τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν ὁ ὀφθαλμός. Conversely, the Sun is often in Greek poetry called the Eye of the World or of Day, and Shakespeare invokes the Sun in the words ‘O eye of Eyes!’ (Rape of Lucrece): cf. also Milton Par. Lost V 171 ‘Thou Sun! of this great world both eye and soul.’ Both comparisons rest ultimately on the favourite Greek idea of the Universe as the Macrocosm, and Man as the Microcosm. See on this subject Zeller^{3} II 2. p. 488, III 2. pp. 136, 397 notes, and Stein Psych. d. Stoa I pp. 205—214.

οὐκοῦν κτλ. Pindar Fr. 107 (Bergk) expresses the same idea in the language of poetry: Ἀκτὶς ἀελίου, τί πολύσκοπ’ ἐμήσαο, θοῶν μᾶτερ ὀμμάτων.

τὴν δύναμιν is of course τὴν δύναυιν τοῦ ὁρᾶν, ‘the power of seeing.’ The translation ‘faculty’ (D. and V.) for δύναμιν is incorrect; for the faculty of ὄψις is supposed to be present in the eyes even when there is no light (507 D). But the eye has no ‘power’ to see, i.e. cannot exercise the faculty of ὄψις unless such a power is constantly dispensed (ταμιευομένην) to it from the Sun. Cf. Biehl die Id. d. Guten p. 52, where the same view is taken. The word ἐπίρρυτον (‘flowing over,’ ‘overflowing it,’ cf. Tim. 80 D) as well as ταμιευομένην unmistakably points the allusion to Light. See also on ὅταν μὲν κτλ. and τοῦτο τοίνυν κτλ. in 508 D.

508B - 509A So much for our similitude. The interpretation is as follows. The offspring and image of the Good is the Sun, whose relation to Sight and its objects is the same as that of the Good to Thought ( νοῦς) and the objects of Thought. The analogue of Light is Truth; as we cannot see without Light, so, where Truth is absent, we cannot know. The Idea of the Good is the source of Truth and Knowledge, although itself apprehended by Knowledge. As Light and Sight resemble the Sun, so Truth and Knowledge resemble the Good, but the Good is not identical with either, for it transcends both.

φάναι . Cf. 473 A note

ὅ τί περ ‐‐ ὁρώμενα explains ἀνάλογον ἑαυτῷ, which should be understood in its strict sense of proportionate or ‘geometrical equality’: see Gorg. 508 A ἡ ἰσότης ἡ γεωμετρικὴ καὶ ἐν θεοῖς καὶ ἐν ἀνθρώποις μέγα δύναται.

τοῦτον after τοῦτο is needed to balance αὐτό (cf. 511 E): in construction, it depends, like ὅν, on ἐγέννησεν (Schneider). τοῦτο itself, like ἀνάλογον ἑαυτῷ, is predicative (‘ut hoc esset’). Stallbaum erroneously supplies φάναι με λέγειν to govern τοῦτον.

ὧν ἂν ‐‐ ἐπέχῃ . ἐπέχῃ ‘occupat’ as in the Homeric ἑπτὰ δ’ ἐπέσχε πέλεθρα and the like. With ἐπί of light cf. Mimn. 2. 8 ἐπὶ γῆν κίδναται ἠέλιος. The Greek will not admit of D. and V.'s translation ‘upon which the light of day is shedding colour’; and Plato moreover, both here and in Tim. 67 C, looks on Colour as something inherent in the Object, not imparted by Light, although Light is of course necessary in order to see it. Cf. 507 D note

φῶς ‐‐ φέγγη : ‘lux — lumina.’ The words are constantly interchanged, but, when contrasted with φέγγος, φῶς denotes a natural or primary, φέγγος an artificial or derivative light. See Neil on Ar. Knights 1319. Plato knew that the Moon's light is borrowed from the Sun (X 616 E).

ὧν ὁ ἥλιος κτλ. ‘The Sun’ is here said loosely for ‘the Sunlight’ or ‘light of Day’ (τὸ ἡμερινὸν φῶς above); for, as appears from 508 E, 508 A, it is not the Sun, but Light, which is to be equated with Truth and Being (οὗ καταλάμπει ἀλήθειά τε καὶ τὸ ὄν in D). See also on τοῦτο τοίνυν κτλ. in 508 D. Instead of καταλάμπει, καταλάμπῃ is read by a majority of editors, with several MSS, including Ξ: but ὅς for ὃς ἄν is, to say the least, extremely rare in prose, and the corruption καταλάμπῃ was easy after ὅταν. καταλάμπει was, if I mistake not, originally the reading of A (see cr. n.), and is at least as well supported by the other MSS as καταλάμπῃ. J. and C., reading καταλάμπῃ, strangely observe that ‘ἄν would be felt as superfluous after ὅταν .’

ἐνοῦσα φαίνεται : sc. καθαρὰ ὄψις, supplied from καθαρᾶς ὄψεως above. ‘<ὄψις> ἐνοῦσα <σαφὴς> lubens suppleverim’ says Herwerden, and ὄψις is found in a few MSS, including q. But the feminine inflexion prevents the possibility of mistake: cf. 503 E note The initial syllable of ἐνοῦσα should be emphasized to point the contrast with οὐκ ἐνούσης, where οὐκ is also emphatic.

ὅταν μὲν κτλ. ἀπερείσηται=‘is stayed upon’ (cf. IX 581 A), not ‘has fastened upon’ (D. and V.), which suggests an altogether different and much less appropriate idea. Cf. Phaed. 79 D πέπαυται τοῦ πλάνου, Plot. XX 4 Kirchhoff παύσασα δὲ τῆς περὶ τὸ αἰσθητὸν πλάνης ἐνιδρύει τῷ νοητῷ, and Dante Parad. 4. 124, 125 Io veggio ben che giammai non si sazia Nostro intelletto, se 'l ver non lo illustra. The soul can find no rest except in that ‘whereon Truth and Being shine’: elsewhere she is tossed to and fro with every wind of doctrine (ἄνω—μεταβάλλον. For ἄνω καὶ κάτω see Heindorf on Gorg. 495 A). Instead of οὗ, van Heusde proposes ὅ, but οὗ is proved correct by ὧν above. With ἐνόησέν τε καὶ ἔγνω cf. 490 B note Here, as there, the aorists denote instantaneous action. The faculty of νοῦς is suddenly actualized into νόησις by being turned upon its proper object. Then and not till then does the Soul ‘appear to have reason,’ for Reason has hitherto lain dormant within. Cf. (with Biehi l.c. p. 51) Tim. 37 C, Parm. 136 E and VII 518 C—519 A. See also on τοῦτο τοίνυν κτλ. below, and 508 E note

κεκραμένον . The suggestion κεκρυμμένον forgets that τὸ γιγνόμενον is not total darkness but only twilight. It is ἀμφοτέρων μετέχον, τοῦ εἶναί τε καὶ μὴ εἶναι (V 478 E: cf. also 479 C)—a halfway house between absolute Not-Being and absolute Being.

δοξάζει is explained by V 476 D ff.

τοῦτο τοίνυν κτλ. The following equations are involved:

With regard to (2), Light has been variously interpreted as symbolizing the Idea of Good (Plotinus, as appears from XXIII 4), Reason (Steinhart, Einleitung pp. 212 ff.), and the Ideas (Susemihl Gen. Entw. II pp. 195 ff.). But the chiasmus in 508 E, 509 A (<*>πιστήμην— ὄψιν) clearly establishes equation (2) as well as (6), and the entire simile is plunged in confusion if Light is equated with anything except Truth. Cf. Stumpf l.c. p. 60 notes and Biehl l.c. pp. 50—53. Plato means that as Light, coming from the Sun, enables colours to be seen, and the faculty of Sight to see, so Truth (or rather Trueness, as Bosanquet remarks), coming from the Good, enables the Ideas to be known, and the faculty of νοῦς to know. It should be carefully noted that Truth (or its source, the Idea of Good) is not yet regarded as creating, but only as actualizing the faculty of Reason. The conception of the Good as the ultimate cause of all Existence follows later (509 B ff.): here it is represented only as the cause of Knowledge. See also on 490 B, 508 D (ὅταν μὲν κτλ.). If we would grasp the full significance of Plato's comparison, we must not be content with the merely philosophical interpretation of Light, but remember also the many poetical and religious associations which attached themselves to such words as φῶς and φέγγος, especially in the Mysteries: see Neil on Ar. Knights 1319, Mommsen Feste d. Stadt Athen pp. 229 f., 238 f. and Hatch on The influence of the Mysteries upon Christian usages in his Hibbert Lectures pp. 283—309. The prominent position occupied by Light in the half-religious, half-philosophical teaching of Plotinus (see Zeller^{3} III 2 pp. 498 f., 500 note 2, 616 al.) may to a large extent be attributed to the elaboration and expansion of the mystical elements involved in Plato's simile, the whole of which, together with the similes of the Line and the Cave, is of the greatest importance for the history of Neoplatonism. Cf. also 508 A, B notes

τὴν δύναμιν sc. τοῦ γιγνώσκειν is not the faculty of Knowledge or Reason, but the power to exercise that faculty, hardly different, indeed, from the actual exercise of Reason (‘die thatkräftige Aeusserung’ Biehl l.c.). Hence γνώσεως (‘the exercise of knowledge,’ cf. ὅρασις, νόησις and the like) below. Plato's exposition suffers somewhat from the want of a strict philosophical nomenclature. Aristotle would have expressed the same meaning by saying that ὄψις and νοῦς are two δυνάμεις, which ἐνεργοῦσι through Light and Truth respectively, becoming in the one case ὅρασις, in the other νόησις. Plato's τὴν δύναμιν, in fact, is nearly equivalent to Aristotle's τὴν ἐνέργειαν. Cf. Biehl l.c. pp. 50—53.

αἰτίαν κτλ. ‘And being the cause of Knowledge and Truth, I would have you conceive of it as apprehended, no doubt, by Knowledge, but beautiful as is the act of Knowledge, and beautiful though Truth be, you will be right in thinking that it is something other and even more beautiful than these.’ The words αἰτίαν—ἀληθείας sum up and carry on τὸ—ἀποδιδόν. ὡς γιγνωσκομένην is in predicative agreement with αἰτίαν after διανοοῦ (cf. Pol. 258 C πάσας τὰς ἐπιστήμας ὡς οὔσας δύο εἴδη διανοηθῆναι): the words are the counterpart of ὁ ἥλιος— ὁρᾶται ὑπ’ αὐτῆς ταύτης (sc. τῆς ὄψεως) in the simile 508 B. μέν after γιγνωσκομένην balances δέ after οὕτω: though apprehended by Knowledge, and therefore in some sense subject thereto, the Idea of Good is (as being the cause of both) more beautiful than Knowledge and Truth. I have (with van Heusde) altered γιγνωσκομένης of the best MSS— see cr. n.—to γιγνωσκομένην. On other interpretations of this difficult passage see App. IX.

τὴν τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ἕξιν : i.q. τὸ ἀγαθὸν ὡς ἔχει (J. and C.).

οὐ γὰρ δήπου κτλ. is said in view of the question in 506 B. There is certainly no allusion to the Philebus: see 505 C note

—C In the second place the Sun also provides the objects of sight with generation (γένεσις), increase, and nutriment, although generation is not identical with the Sun. In like manner, the objects of Knowledge receive their Being and Existence from the Good, which is itself distinct from and higher than Existence.

ff. 8 τὸν ἥλιον κτλ. The Good has been shewn to be the cause of Knowledge: Socrates now proceeds to shew that it is also the cause of Being. In the philosophy of Plato, Knowledge is the epistemological counterpart of Being, Being the ontological counterpart of Knowledge: see V 476 E ff. notes The final unity in which both Knowledge and Being meet is the Idea of the Good, which is therefore the supreme and ultimate cause of the Universe. See also on οὐκ οὐσίας κτλ. below and the Appendix to Book VII On Plato's Dialectic.

οὐ γένεσιν αὐτὸν ὄντα . See on οὐκ οὐσίας ὄντος τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ below.

φάναι . V 473 A note

ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ εἶναι κτλ. Cf. Arist. Met. A 6. 988^{a} 10 τὰ γὰρ εἴδη τοῦ τί ἔστιν αἰτία τοῖς ἄλλοις, τοῖς δ’ εἴδεσι τὸ ἕν. Plato identified τἀγαθόν and τὸ ἕν: see the anecdote in Aristox. Harm. § 30 Marquard.

οὐκ οὐσίας κτλ. has occasioned a vast amount of discussion. Krohn boldly declares that ‘Die ἰδέα τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ist keine Idee, denn sie hat keine οὐσία, sondern es ist eine Macht, die mit unserer Denkweise nur als die Gottheit begriffen werden kann’ (Pl. St. p. 146). Fouillée La Philosophie de Platon II p. 109 draws an over-subtle distinction between εἶναι and οὐσία, holding that although the Good is not οὐσία, it nevertheless is ὄν (cf. VII 518 C). Others have suspected the text, O. Schneider, for example, proposing οὐ <μόνον> οὐσίας κτλ. (Versuch einer genet. Entw. d. Plat. ἀγαθόν p. 16). That the text is right, the balance with οὐ γένεσιν—ὄντα conclusively shews. The Sun, said Socrates, is the cause of γένεσις, though not himself γένεσις. Just so the Good is the cause of οὐσία, though not itself οὐσία, but (to use a Neoplatonic expression) ὑπερούσιος. Plato's meaning is as follows. The Sun is not γένεσις in the sense in which the objects which he produces are γιγνόμενα. Yet in a certain sense he too is γένεσις, for he is ὁρατός: see VII 529 C ff. and Tim. 28 B. (Bosanquet cannot be right in denying that Plato regards the Sun as a γιγνόμενον). As the cause of γένεσις, we may, in fact, regard the Sun as the only true γένεσις, for all γιγνόμενα are derived from him. Similarly the Good is not οὐσία in the sense in which the Ideas are οὐσίαι; but in a higher sense it is the only true οὐσία, for all οὐσίαι are only specific determinations of the Good. The ὑπερουσιότης of the Good is merely Plato's way of saying that the first Principle of all existence must itself be underived. See on ἀρχὴν ἀνυπόθετον 510 B and cf. Biehl l.c. p. 62 and Fouillée l.c. II pp. 105—111, where the matter is very clearly explained. The doctrine of the ὑπερουσιότης of the Highest afterwards became a cardinal point with the Neoplatonists: see Plotinus ap. RP.^{7} p. 528, and for other references Hermann Vind. disp. de id. boni pp. 40 note 84, 41 note 87, Zeller^{3} III 2. pp. 490 ff., Fouillée La Philosophie de Platon III pp. 289, 291 notes, and Shorey Chicago Studies in Cl. Phil. I p. 188 note 1. It is highly characteristic of Plato's whole attitude that he finds the true keystone of the Universe—the ultimate fountain from which both Knowledge and Existence flow—in no cold and colourless ontological abstraction, like Being, but in that for which πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις συστενάζει καὶ συνωδίνει ( Rom. 8. 22)—viz. τὸ ἀγαθόν. Cf. Phaed. 97 C ff. and see also on 508 D. The conception is poetical and religious no less than philosophical, and may be compared with Dante's ‘L’ Amor che muove il Sole e l' altre Stelle' and Tennyson's ‘For so the whole round world is every way Bound by gold chains about the feet of God,’ as well as with Aristotle's πρῶτον κινοῦν ἀκίνητον Met. Λ 7 et al.

καὶ ὁ Γλαύκων κτλ. “Glauco exclaimed, very comically, ‘Save us all, what an amazing transcendence!’” It is Glauco's προθυμία which is γελοῖον: see 506 D. ὑπερβολῆς is not ‘exaggeration’ (Jowett), but refers to ὑπερέχοντος: cf. ἀμήχανον κάλλος λέγεις 509 A. A ὑπερβολή which transcends existence may well be called δαιμονία (‘supernatural,’ ‘miraculous’).

εἰ μή τι, ἀλλὰ κτλ. Stephanus proposed ἄλλο for ἀλλά (as in 501 E), but cf. Men. 86 E εἰ μή τι οὖν, ἀλλὰ σμικρόν γέ μοι τῆς ἀρχῆς χάλασον.

509C - 511E Socrates, at Glauco's request, now proceeds to expound the similitude more fully. Let us take a line, and divide it into two unequal parts, to represent the objects of Sight and the objects of Thought respectively. If we further subdivide each part in the ratio of the original sections, we shall have four segments, representing, in order of clearness, (1) Images and the like, (2) so-called real things, (3) the objects of that intellectual method which descends from assumptions to a conclusion, using sensible objects as images or illustrations, (4) the objects of that intellectual method, which ascends from assumptions to an unassumed first principle, without making use of any sensible illustrations whatsoever, and thereafter descends to a conclusion. The third section represents the subjects investigated by the so-called ‘Arts’ or mathematical sciences; the fourth is the sphere of Dialectic. The corresponding mental states are called by Socrates εἰκασία, πίστις, διάνοια, and νόησις. Each of these is clear or sure exactly in proportion as its objects are true.

ff. The simile of the Line contains perhaps more Platonic teaching than any passage of equal length in Plato's writings, and is of primary and fundamental importance for the interpretation of his philosophy. I have discussed the various difficulties as they occur, partly in the notes and partly in the Appendices to this Book. For a consecutive exposition of the whole simile in its connexion with the simile of the Cave see App. I to Book VII.

αὐτώ : the Sun and the Idea of the Good.

ἵνα μὴ οὐρανοῦ κτλ. “I do not say ‘of heaven,’ lest you should imagine that I am etymologising on the name.” The Sun might well be called βασιλεὺς οὐρανοῦ. Socrates pretends to avoid the word οὐρανός, lest by thus equating it with ὁρατόν (for the contrast with νοητοῦ would suggest that οὐρανοῦ=ὁρατοῦ) he should be accused of deriving οὐρανός from ὁρᾶν, as certain clever people did in Plato's time ( Crat. 396 B. The same derivation is given by Philo Jud. de mund. opif. 10). For σοφίζεσθαι in this sense cf. σοφία in Crat. 396 C, D. E. S. Thompson (Proceedings of the Camb. Phil. Soc. 1888 p. 14) takes σοφίζεσθαι simply as ‘pun’ and thinks that the pun is between νοῦ (suggested in νοητοῦ above) and οὐρα‐νοῦ, quoting ἀπ’ ὄνου πεσεῖν, and the anecdote in D. L. II 118, VI 3: cf. also Isocrates Apophth. Fr. 8 ed. Blass. But such a pun is both far-fetched and pointless, and in view of the passage from the Cratylus there should be no doubt that Plato more suo is merely scoffing at a well-known contemporary etymology. The reading οὐρανόν—see cr. n.—would be fatal to Thompson's theory, but οὐρανοῦ (which most MSS read) is more pointed and idiomatic, and perhaps right, though the accusative is not indefensible.

ἄνισα . It appears from the Scholiast that even ancient critics debated whether ἄνισα or ἴσα (εἰς ἴσα v) should be read. Proclus (in Plat. remp. I p. 288 Kroll) and the author of the third Quaest. Plat. in Plutarch (1001 C ff.) read ἄνισα: ἴσα appears in a grammarian cited by Stallbaum from Villoison Anecd. Gr. II p. 199. The dispute still reigns, Stallbaum and some others preferring ἴσα, others, such as Richter (Fl. Jahrb. 1867 p. 145) and Dümmler (Antisth. p. 80) ἀν’ ἴσα, others even ἂν ἴσα (which is certainly not Greek, though found in a few inferior MSS); but there should be no question that Plato wrote ἄνισα. If the line is bisected, all four segments are equal, and the elaborate proportions drawn in 510 A, 511 E, VII 534 A represent no corresponding relations between the different segments of the line. The inequality, as Schneider and Steinhart point out, is intended to represent the difference in σαφήνεια or ἀλήθεια between the δοξαστόν (or ὁρατόν) and the γνωστόν (or νοητόν): cf. σαφηνείᾳ καὶ ἀσαφείᾳ below and 510 A. (So also Benson in Nettleship's Lect. and Rem. II p. 239 note). For this reason the νοητόν should be represented by a longer segment. Others assign the larger part to the ὁρατόν, as being the region of τὰ πολλά (Plutarch l.c. and Espinas in his edition of Book VI), but the length of the two main segments should follow the primary and fundamental principle of Plato's classification. The relevant consideration is not at present multiplicity versus unity, but different degrees of clearness and truth. Beckman's excision of ἄνισα τμήματα (num Plato artefactorum ideas statuerit p. 38) needs no refutation. See also next note.

πάλιν τέμνε κτλ. See Figure 1 on p. 65.

AD : DC :: AC : CB, and CE : EB :: AC : CB.

It follows (1) that AD : DC :: CE : EB, (2) that DC=CE; for

Similarly

But

has been proved equal to CE.

therefore DC=CE.

(This last equality—so far as it goes—is a slight though unavoidable defect in the line, for DC is not equal to CE in point of clearness. See last note). Neither of these inferences is expressly drawn by Plato himself; but he appears to make use of the first in 532 A ff.

καί σοι ἔσται κτλ. : ‘and when classified according to their relative clearness and obscurity, the different segments will represent—in the visible sphere, segment 1, Images’ etc. The datives, like ἀληθείᾳ in 510 A, are causal, and state the principle on which the entire classification (of νοητά as well as ὁρατά) rests. With ἐν μὲν τῷ ὁρωμένῳ Socrates begins to describe the contents of the particular segments. This is interrupted by the definition of εἰκόνες, and resumed, in a different form, at τὸ τοίνυν ἕτερον in 510 A. μέν before τῷ ὁρωμένῳ contrasts with σκόπει δὴ αὖ in B, much as τὸ τοίνυν ἕτερον balances the second μέν. On σαφηνείᾳ see below 511 C note

ὅσα πυκνὰ κτλ. Cf. Tim. 46 A ff. πυκνά ) ( μανά is ‘of close texture,’ ‘close grained’ (D. and V.), not exactly ‘solid’ (as Jowett).

πᾶν τὸ τοιοῦτον . Although the productions of imitative art and the like must be held to belong to this category (see App. I to Book VII), there is nothing to shew that Plato was thinking of them when he wrote this sentence.

ᾧ τοῦτο ἔοικεν : ‘whereof this is an image.’ ἔοικεν corresponds to εἰκόνας above.

αὐτό : viz. τὸ ὁρώμενον, with reference to ἐν μὲν τῷ ὁρωμένῳ above.

ὡς τὸ δοξαστὸν κτλ. i.e.

AD : DC :: AC : CB.

Hitherto AC has not been called δοξαστόν, only ὁρατόν. The new terminology appears again in 511 D (δόξης) and VII 534 A: see also on VII 516 D, 523 C. δοξαστόν is of course a wider term than ὁρατόν, for it includes the entire domain of τὰ πολλά, by whatever sense or faculty apprehended (V 479 D ff.). δόξα is, in fact, the intellectual state of the ordinary uneducated man. This further specification of AC is of no small importance for the understanding of the similes of the Line and Cave: see VII 514 A, 517 A notes and App. I to Book VII.

ᾗ κτλ. With ᾗ cf. Theaet. 172 D. τὸ μέν is CE.

τοῖς τότε μιμηθεῖσιν : i.e. the objects represented by CD, which were ‘imitated’ or copied in AD. They were originals then, but are only images now: this is the force of the collocation μιμηθεῖσιν—εἰκόσι. Cf. 510 E ἃ πλάττουσίν τε καὶ γράφουσιν, ὧν καὶ σκιαὶ καὶ ἐν ὕδασιν εἰκόνες εἰσί, τούτοις μὲν ὡς εἰκόσιν αὖ χρώμενοι, 511 A εἰκόσι δὲ χρωμένην αὐτοῖς τοῖς ὑπὸ τῶν κάτω ἀπεικασθεῖσι, and for the meaning of μιμηθεῖσιν X 599 A τό τε μιμηθησόμενον καὶ τὸ εἴδωλον and Laws 668 B. I have restored the reading of A, μιμηθεῖσιν, with which Proclus (in Plat. remp. I p. 291 Kroll) also agrees. τμηθεῖσιν, which appears to be adopted by all other editors, occurs in all the available MSS except A. But τοῖς τότε τμηθεῖσι would include AD as well as DC, and the illustrations employed in the inferior νοητόν are drawn solely from DC, as is proved by 510 E (cited above), as well as by the actual facts of the case. The sole objection to μιμηθεῖσι is that the word is generally used only of “artificiosa imitatio” (Schneider): yet in Pol. 293 E, 297 C, Phil. 40 C and Arist. Hist. An. II 8. 502^{b} 9 the ‘imitatio’ can hardly be called ‘artificiosa.’ 511 A seems to me sufficient by itself to prove that A is right. Schneider (Addit. p. 51) refers to a dissertation by Mommsen published in 1842 as taking the view here advocated.

ἐξ ὑποθέσεων . ὑπόθεσις is correctly defined in the Platonic ὅροι (415 B) as ἀρχὴ ἀναπόδεικτος, a starting-point which is not demonstrated, but taken for granted, assumed, postulated. The arithmetician, for example, ὑποτίθεται the odd, the even, etc., i.e. assumes that his definition of odd, even, etc. is correct, and draws conclusions from his ὑπόθεσις of the odd, the even, etc. by means of exclusively deductive reasoning: cf. H. Sidgwick in J. Ph. II p. 100. If we attack his ὑπόθεσις, as Lucian for example does (Hermot. 74, quoted by Stallbaum), he must, quâ arithmetician, throw up the sponge, for the ὑποθέσεις of the inferior νοητόν can be demonstrated (or overthrown) only by Dialectic. Cf. generally Men. 86 E ff. Schneider may be right in supposing that Aristotle had the present passage in view when he wrote εὖ γὰρ καὶ Πλάτων ἠπόρει τοῦτο καὶ ἐζήτει, πότερον ἀπὸ τῶν ἀρχῶν ἢ ἐπὶ τὰς ἀρχάς ἐστιν ἡ ὁδός, ὥσπερ ἐν τῷ σταδίῳ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀθλοθετῶν ἐπὶ τὸ πέρας ἢ ἀνάπαλιν (Eth. Nic. I 2. 1095^{a} 32), though it is perhaps better (with Zeller^{4} II 1, p. 587 note 2) to suppose that he is alluding to Plato's oral instruction.

τὸ δ) αὖ ἕτερον κτλ. τὸ ἕτερον is EB. The article after ἕτερον (see cr. n.) stands self-condemned, although its intrusion is difficult to explain. ὅ, which Schneider proposes, is also difficult, though in harmony with Ficinus (alterum vero, quod excogitat animus), for the verb of the relative clause can hardly be omit ted. λόγῳ, once proposed by Hermann, has nothing in its favour. ζητεῖ must be supplied to govern τὸ ἕτερον.

ἀρχὴν ἀνυπόθετον . The only ἀρχὴ ἀνυπόθετος is the Idea of the Good: cf. VII 532 A f. Towards this the Dialectician travels, starting from ὑποθέσεις. He may begin, for example, by ‘assuming’ the ‘just.’ In such a case he assumes that his definition of ‘just’ is correct, i.e. corresponds exactly to the Idea of ‘Just.’ But whereas the arithmetician treats his ὑπόθεσις as an ultimate truth, and proceeds deductively to a conclusion, making use of sensible images by way of illustration, the dialectician treats his hypothesis as purely provisional, testing, revising, rejecting (VII 533 C note), and reconstructing, and gradually ascending step by step to the first principle of all (τὴν τοῦ παντὸς ἀρχήν), without employing any sensible objects to illustrate his reasoning. The one gives no account of his ὑπόθεσις (οὐδένα λόγον—φανερῶν in C below); the other not only does, but must do so, just because he is a dialectician: cf. VII 533 C ff. He connects his ὑποθέσεις with others, subsuming them under higher and yet higher —better and truer—ὑποθέσεις, until at last he has traversed the whole region of νοητά. Such of his ὑποθέσεις as survive will be improved at each stage in the ascent, and finally, as soon as the Idea of Good is reached, all his surviving ὑποθέσεις will actually have become perfect counterparts of the Ideas which they have hitherto been only assumed to represent. In the meantime the ἀρχὴ τοῦ παντός, which Plato himself described dogmatically δἰ εἰκόνος in 507 A—509 C, will have ceased to be a mere ὑπόθεσις: it will have become, in the fullest sense of the term, an ἀρχὴ ἀνυπόθετος: for the highest rung of the ladder is not reached until the entire domain of the knowable has been exhausted, and shewn to be the expression of the Idea of Good. Plato's ideal—it is no more—is a comprehensive and purely intellectual view of the totality of νοητά, in which every department is seen in its connexion with every other, and all in their dependence on the Good, which is in itself ἀνυπόθετος and ὑπερούσιος—ἀνυπόθετος because higher than all ὑποθέσεις and itself proved by an exhaustive scrutiny of all νοητά, ὑπερούσιος because higher than, and the cause of, all existence. See also on 511 B and the Appendix to Book VII On Plato's Dialectic, together with Jackson J. of Ph. X pp. 145 f., where the distinctive peculiarities of the two methods are very clearly explained.

ὧνπερ ἐκεῖνο εἰκόνων : i.q. ἄνευ τῶν αἷσπερ ἐκεῖνο (ζητεῖ) εἰκόνων. I formerly read τῶν περὶ ἐκεῖνο εἰκόνων (with q), but now think (with Schneider and others) that A is right. The attraction of a relative in the dative case is rare, but not unexampled. Van Cleef (de attract. in enunt. rel. usu Plat. p. 45) cites Gorg. 509 A, Prot. 361 E, Theaet. 144 A, Rep. VII 531 E (all examples of ἐντυγχάνω, whose proper construction in the sense of ‘fall in with’ is the dative, not the genitive), and Ep. VII 327 A (with προσέτυχον); for examples in other authors see Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 914. If ἄνευ and ἐκεῖνο are pronounced with emphasis, the meaning, I think, is easily caught. Stallbaum reads ὧν περὶ κτλ. with one Vienna MS, understanding, I suppose, χρῆται .

αὐτοῖς ‐‐ δἰ αὐτῶν . αὐτοῖς (ipsis= solis) is further accentuated by δἰ αὐτῶν (‘through themselves alone’): cf. 511 C. The εἴδη of the dialectician do not employ the adventitious aid of εἰκόνες: see on 511 B. The use of εἴδεσι here must not be held to imply that even the dialectician's conceptions of the Ideas are correct before he has reached the Idea of the Good. Till then, they are only ὑποθέσεις, though the false ὑποθέσεις are weeded out (VII 533 C note), and the hypothetical character of the survivors is gradually eliminated in the course of the ascent. See on ἀρχὴν ἀνυπόθετον above, and contrast 511 C.

ἀλλ’ αὖθις κτλ. ‘Then have it over again, said I.’ The ellipse has a colloquial effect. Ast's εὐθύς for αὖθις is unlikely: nor does Cobet's <ἐρῶ> after ἐγώ sound right. If Plato had written ἐρῶ, he would, I think, have placed it after αὖθις. μάνθανε, or the like, supplied from ἔμαθον, suits the con text (ῥᾷον γὰρ—μαθήσει) best. Similarly in D below, οἶσθα is understood out of Glauco's reply. Cf. also ἀλλ’ ὧδε in I 352 E.

οἱ περὶ κτλ. In CE, as will afterwards appear, are included five sciences, which form the προοίμιον (VII 531 D) or προπαιδεία (ib. 536 D) to Dialectic, represented by EB. They are the Science of Number, Plane Geometry, Stereometry, Astronomy, and Harmonics: VII 522 C—531 C. In each of these the method, according to Plato, is the same. Certain ὑποθέσεις are taken for granted, and inferences drawn from them by purely deductive reasoning, aided by the use of sensible likenesses or illustrations. See also App. I to Book VII.

ὡς εἰδότες . They have no knowledge of their ὑποθέσεις, otherwise they would be able to give an account of them: see VII 533 C and 531 E μὴ δυνατοί τινες ὄντες δοῦναί τε καὶ ἀποδέξασθαι λόγον εἴσεσθαί ποτέ τι ὧν φαμὲν δεῖν εἰδέναι; Οὐδ) αὖ, ἔφη, τοῦτό γε.

ὁμολογουμένως =“folgerechterweise” (Cohen Pl. Ideenl. u. d. Math. p. 29) refers to the agreement between premises, intermediate steps, and conclusion: cf. VII 533 C, where ὁμολογία is used in the same way. “With perfect unanimity” (D. and V.) is incorrect and pointless.

τοῖς ὁρωμένοις εἴδεσι κτλ. They use the ‘visible kinds,’ i.e. visible squares, visible diagonals, etc., but they are thinking about mathematical squares and diagonals etc. Cf. generally Euthyd. 290 B οἱ δ’ αὖ γεωμέτραι καὶ οἱ ἀστρονόμοι καὶ οἱ λογιστικοί· θηρευτικοὶ γάρ εἰσι καὶ οὗτοι· οὐ γὰρ ποιοῦσι τὰ διαγράμματα ἕκαστοι τούτων ἀλλὰ τὰ ὄντα ἀνευρίσκουσιν, and VII 527 A.

ἔοικε . Visible σχήματα are imperfect copies of ‘mathematical’ σχήματα: cf. VII 526 A and App. I to Book VII.

τοῦ τετραγώνου αὐτοῦ κτλ. : ‘for that with a view to which they are discoursing is the square itself and a diagonal itself, not this which they draw’ etc. αὐτοῦ (‘by itself,’ i.e. apart from its embodiment in perceivable squares) is ambiguous, and might (so far as language is concerned) refer either to the Idea of Square (cf. v 476 A ff.) or to the Mathematical Square (cf. VII 525 D, E notes), which—see App. I to Book VII—Plato holds to be distinct from the Idea. But the ambiguity is resolved as soon as we are shewn (in 511 C ff.) how to interpret διανοούμενοι and διανοίᾳ (511 A), and we then see that Plato is here speaking of the mathematical square. The singular τοῦ τετραγώνου is generic (cf. ὁ σοφιστής for the whole class of Sophists), for there are many ‘mathematical’ squares, diagonals etc. (VII 526 A note and App. I to Book VII). It is conceivably for this reason that Plato drops the article with διαμέτρου (‘a diagonal itself’), thereby also getting a more precise antithesis to ἀλλ’ οὐ ταύτης, or else (if this suggestion is hypercritical) διαμέτρου is also generic. Sidgwick is, I think, mistaken when he says (J. Ph. II p. 103) that the language of this passage “in no way supports the interpolation of intermediates (Aristotle's τὰ μεταξύ) between particulars and Ideas”: for διανοούμενοι involves διάνοια, and since διάνοια is intermediate between νοῦς and δόξα (511 D), we may reasonably suppose that its objects are likewise intermediate between the higher νοητά and δοξαστά. See App. I to Book VII.

πλάττουσιν : with reference to models of geometrical figures, orreries etc., all of which belong to CD, and may themselves have shadows and likenesses in AD.

ὡς εἰκόσιν αὖ χρώμενοι . See 510 B note The anacoluthon in αὐτὰ μὲν ταῦτα—τούτοις μὲν χρώμενοι is illustrated by Engelhardt Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 8: cf. also VII 520 D.

ζητοῦντές τε . Instead of τε, I formerly read δέ (on slight MS authority), with Ast and Stallbaum; but the corruption of δέ to τε is exceedingly improbable here. The antithetical force of the clause ζητοῦντες—ἰδεῖν is weakened by the occurrence of the words ὡς εἰκόσιν αὖ in the μέν clause. If the objects in question are used as images, the further statement that the real object of investigation is their originals (αὐτὰ ἐκεῖνα) loses its antithetical force, and becomes a sort of adjunct. Hence τε following ζητοῦντες is more appropriate than αὐτὰ δὲ ἐκεῖνα ζητοῦντες ἰδεῖν, which would be the natural way of expressing an antithesis. Cf. Laws 927 B ὀξὺ μὲν ἀκούουσι βλέπουσί τε ὀξύ (where the order is the same as here), Phaedr. 266 C and other examples cited by Hoefer de part. Pl. pp. 17 f.

τῇ διανοίᾳ . See on τοῦ τετραγώνου αὐτοῦ 510 D.

ἔλεγον . 510 B.

ἀναγκαζομένην . For the participle we might expect ἀναγκάζεσθαι. But ἀναγκαζομένην gives a better balance with νοητόν, and the meaning is ‘Accordingly I described this class as intelligible indeed, but the soul as compelled’ etc.

τῶν ὑποθέσεων ‐‐ ἐκβαίνειν : ‘to step out of and above assumptions,’ viz. by reaching the ἀρχὴ ἀνυπόθετος: cf. 510 B note

αὐτοῖς τοῖς κτλ. αὐτοῖς is ‘the actual things,’ ‘the originals,’ as in αὐτὰ μὲν ταῦτα 510 E: ‘employing as images the originals from which images were made’ (lit. ‘the imaged-from’ “abgebildet” Schneider) ‘by the objects below,’ i.e. employing as images the originals in CD, which were copied by the shadows etc. in AD. For ἀπεικασθεῖσι in this sense cf. ἀπεικασθῆναι in Tim. 48 C and (with J. and C.) εἰκασθέντος in Phaedr. 250 B. Other views of this passage are discussed in App. X.

καὶ ἐκείνοις κτλ. : ‘those also, in comparison with those remoter objects, being esteemed and honoured as palpable and clear.’ καί is ‘also’ and not ‘and,’ as some have supposed. ἐκείνοις is DC, and ἐκεῖνα AD. Plato uses the pronoun ἐκείνοις to indicate that the objects in CD are less near to the mind of the mathematician than those in CE, which are the immediate object of his study (cf. Sidgwick in J. Ph. II p. 98). He could not, even if he had wished to, have written καὶ αὐτοῖς (et ipsis) without sacrificing αὐτοῖς just before. ἐκεῖνα is said because AD is remoter still. See also App. X.

δεδοξασμένοις means, I believe, ‘esteemed,’ ‘valued’ as in Polyb. VI 53. 9 τῶν ἐπ’ ἀρετῇ δεδοξασμένων ἀνδρῶν: cf. the regular use of δοξάζειν for ‘glorify’ in the N. T. No other certain instance of this usage appears to occur in Plato, or even in classical Greek: at all events neither Thuc. III 45. 6 nor Dionys. Thesm. 1. 24 Meineke, cited by L. and S., is a case in point. But the collocation with τετιμημένοις makes it probable that the usage, though rare, is Platonic; and every other interpretation of the word is beset with serious difficulties, as is shewn in App. X.

τετιμημένοις . τετμημένοις is read by Schneider, with several MSS (see cr. n.), and understood as ‘cut off’ (abgeschnitten); but, as J. and C. observe, this does not suit δεδοξασμένοις, and it is doubtful if the objects can be said to be ‘cut,’ although the line is: see on τοῖς τότε μιμηθεῖσιν 510 B.

ταύτης in spite of γεωμετρίαις because Geometry is itself one art: cf. VII 533 C γεωμετρίας τε καὶ τὰς ταύτῃ ἑπομένας. The plural γεωμετρίαις does not mean the ‘various branches of geometry’ (as D. and V. suppose), but geometrical investigations: cf. λογισμούς for ‘Arithmetic’ in 510 C.

αὐτὸς ὁ λόγος κτλ. : ‘the argument grasps by itself, through the power of dialectic.’ λόγος is not the faculty of reason (“Vernunft” Schleiermacher), which is νοῦς, or even ‘thought’ (“Gedanke” Schneider), but rather “the impersonal reason, or drift of the argument” (Bosanquet), the instrument by which νοῦς works (Krohn Pl. St. p. 140). ὁ λόγος is of course personified, as it constantly is in this sense.

δυνάμει should not be translated ‘faculty,’ but simply ‘power’ (cf. 508 E note): the argument, unaided by εἰκόνες (αὐτός ‘by itself,’ cf. αὐτοῖς εἴδεσι 510 B note), grasps its object by the inherent power of dialectical argumentation (διαλέγεσθαι), and nothing else. In spite of Grimmelt (de reip. unit. etc. p. 52) it is certainly an error to identify ὁ λόγος with νοῦς. Why does Dialectic dispense with all sensible images or illustrations? Plato (it should be remembered) holds that the intrusion of any element of sense-perception, however small, impedes the exercise of thought: see Phaed. 79 C ff. The ὑποθέσεις of the dialectician may be and often are generalisations from αἰσθητά, but a generalisation, regarded in itself, is wholly νοητόν. These ὑποθέσεις it is the province of Dialectic to test in every possible way, to demolish where necessary (VII 533 C note), to correct by one another, to classify according to their mutual coherence and interdependence, until by an exhaustive scrutiny of all νοητά we grasp the unifying principle of all existence—the Idea of the Good. Cf. VII 517 C note and see on τοῦ ἀνυποθέτου below and the Appendix to Book VII On Plato's Dialectic.

τῷ ὄντι indicates that we are to take the word in its literal etymological signification, ‘literally hypotheses or underpositions, stepping-stones as it were and starting-points.’ For this use of τῷ ὄντι and kindred expressions see I 343 C, V 474 A notes and W. G. Headlam On editing Aeschylus pp. 138 ff. With ἐπιβάσεις cf. Symp. 211 C ὥσπερ ἐπαναβαθμοῖς χρώμενον.

τοῦ ἀνυποθέτου . See on ἀρχὴν ἀνυπόθετον 510 B. Plato makes no attempt in the Republic to classify Ideas in such an ascending scale as he here suggests, though it is probable from 509 A that Knowledge and Truth would rank near to the Good. Nor is there any dialogue in which an exhaustive classification is even attempted. Such hints as Plato gives us throughout his writings are enumerated in Stumpf das Verhältniss etc. pp. 50, 56, 76, and in Zeller^{4} II 1, pp. 704—707: cf. also Fouillée La Philosophie de Platon II pp. 99—104. We must suppose that each higher Idea will excel all the lower both in range and in excellence. These two characteristics are, from Plato's point of view, the same. The wider an Idea is in range and extension, the greater will be the sum of existences of which it is the cause. But the Idea of Good is the cause of all existence, so that each higher Idea will be better than all below it, because it contains more of Good. Beyond this it is perhaps safer not to go. A systematic attempt to correlate all intelligibles among themselves and in their connexion with the Good would have been premature in Plato's day, and is premature still. The permanent value of Plato's conception lies in the ideal which it sets before every succeeding generation of investigators.

πάλιν αὖ κτλ. The dialectician's progress involves both an ascent and a descent—an ascent ἐπὶ τὴν ἀρχήν, and a descent ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἐπὶ τὴν τελευτήν (cf. Aristotle quoted on 510 B). By the time that he reaches the Idea of the Good, all his surviving ὑποθέσεις have become exact counterparts of the Ideas which are their objective correlates; the others have all of them been demolished (VII 533 C note). The conclusions (τελευταί) of dialectic are therefore impregnable; ψευδὴς ἐπιστήμη is a contradiction in terms (V 477 E note). For more on this subject see the Appendix to Book VII On Plato's Dialectic.

εἴδεσιν ‐‐ εἴδη . On αὐτοῖς δἰ αὐτῶν see 510 B note εἴδεσιν may now be taken in its full force; for after the Idea of Good has been reached, the dialectician's conception of each εἶδος is accurate and complete: see last note. I formerly read αὐτοῖς δἰ αὑτῶν, rejecting εἰς αὐτά as superfluous on account of καὶ τελευτᾷ εἰς εἴδη. But αὑτῶν is certainly wrong (cf. 510 B), and εἰς αὐτά, which may well be taken loosely with καταβαίνῃ or a participle supplied from it, merely states that the conclusions of dialectic are likewise εἴδη: whereas καὶ τελευτᾷ εἰς εἴδη seems to lay emphasis on the fact that dialectic never descends below εἴδη to particulars (“und bei Begriffen endigt” Schneider). We may translate ‘and with Ideas end.’ Plato means to emphasize the fact that the Dialectician quâ Dialectician does not draw conclusions as to particulars: if he did, he could scarcely be said αἰσθητῷ παντάπασιν οὐδενὶ προσχρῆσθαι. See the Appendix to Book VII On Plato's Dialectic.

ὅτι μέντοι κτλ. There is no anacoluthon as Engelhardt (Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 9) supposes, but ὅτι depends on μανθάνω. With σαφέστερον cf. V 478 C and 509 D above. σαφής, originally ‘clear,’ often=‘true’ in Greek. Plato's comparison between Light and Truth in 507 C ff. gave a new and profound significance to the equation. The present passage should be compared with Phil. 57 B ff., where Dialectic is said to excel mathematical and all other sciences in respect of ‘the clearness’ (τὸ σαφὲς καὶ τἀκριβὲς καὶ τἀληθέστατον) of its object. In general, the higher a science is, the greater (according to Plato) is the amount of truth or knowability which its subjectmatter contains. Plato's theory on this subject is the source of Aristotle's doctrine of ἁπλῶς γνώριμα or γνωριμώτερα φύσει, for which see Stewart on Eth. Nic. I 4. 1095^{b} 2.

τὸ ‐‐ καλουμένων . καλουμένων implies that τέχναι (‘Arts’) sometimes bore the specific meaning of ‘mathematical sciences’ as early as the time of Plato. This use of the word may have been introduced by some of the Sophists, perhaps Hippias: cf. Prot. 318 E, where Protagoras says οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἄλλοι λωβῶνται τοὺς νέους· τὰς γὰρ τέχνας αὐτοὺς πεφευγότας ἄκοντας πάλιν αὖ ἄγοντες ἐμβάλλουσιν εἰς τέχνας, λογισμούς τε καὶ ἀστρονομίαν καὶ γεωμετρίαν καὶ μουσικὴν (the medieval quadrivium) διδάσκοντες— καὶ ἅμα εἰς τὸν Ἱππίαν ἀπέβλεψεν. If we can understand μουσικήν as ‘theory of Music,’ Hippias' quadrivium is identical with Plato's, except that Plato would like to add Stereometry. Cf. also Theaet. 145 A, B and see Tannery L'Éducation Platonicienne in Rev. Philos. X p. 523, the Appendix to Book VII On the propaedeutic studies of the Republic and my article in Cl. Rev. XV p. 220, where I have tried to shew that our use of the word ‘Arts’ in ‘Bachelor of Arts’ etc. is an inheritance from the Platonic Academy.

καὶ ‐‐ θεώμενοι . The relative sentence passes into a main clause, as in II 357 B, where see note.

αὐτά : viz. the subject-matter of the so-called ‘Arts’: cf. VII 518 B.

καίτοι ‐‐ ἀρχῆς : ‘although they are intelligibles with a first principle.’ The mathematician does not ascend to an ἀρχή, and therefore does not exercise— for ἴσχειν in its original half-inchoative sense cf. IX 585 B and Kühner-Blass Gr. Gr. I 2, p. 434 note—νοῦς on his subject, but nevertheless his subject is νοητόν (as we have been told before 510 B, 511 A, C) and has an ἀρχή, viz. his ὑποθέσεις (αἷς αἱ ὑποθέσεις ἀρχαί above). καίτοι is not found elsewhere in Plato for καίπερ with a participle (Hoefer de part. Pl. p. 28) but occurs in Simonides ap. Prot. 339 C, in Axioch. 364 B and Lysias 31. 34. To write καίπερ (with Kugler de part. τοι etc. p. 18) would be rash. For other views on this difficult clause see App. XI.

καλεῖν μοι δοκεῖς . See 510 D note

ὡς ‐‐ οὖσαν . διάνοια is the most general word for a state (ἕξις) of mind or mode of thought in Greek; and the limitation here introduced is entirely Plato's own. Plato apparently attempts to fortify his innovation by etymology, hinting that the word διάνοια is by derivation that which is between (διὰ μέσου) νοῦς and δόξα. So also J. and C. Cf. εἰκασία (with allusion to εἰκόνες) in E. On δόξης see 510 A note

νόησιν is used in its strict sense of νοῦς in actual exercise, not merely the faculty of νοῦς: cf. 508 E note The exercise of νοῦς is correctly spoken of as a πάθημα ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ γιγνόμενον, but the faculty itself could hardly be thus described.

πίστιν κτλ. If we strictly limit DC to ὁρατά, πίστις must be understood as the state of mind which believes only in visible, palpable (ἐναργῆ) things (τὰ περὶ ἡμᾶς ζῷα καὶ πᾶν τὸ φυτευτὸν καὶ τὸ σκευαστὸν ὅλον γένος 510 A): ‘seeing,’ as we still say, ‘is believing.’ But Plato has already spoken of AC as δοξαστόν (510 A note); so that πίστις should not be confined to the objects of sight. It is in fact a subdivision of δόξα, superior in point of ‘clearness’ (σαφήνεια) to εἰκασία. We may regard it as the normal condition of the average uneducated mind. εἰκασία is the state of mind in which εἰκόνες are held to be true. Here again, if εἰκόνες are strictly limited to images of ὁρατά (cf. 509 E, 510 A), εἰκασία must be similarly confined in its scope, and loses all metaphysical interest and importance: see VII 517 A note But since the εἰκόνες are a lower grade of δοξαστά (510 A note), εἰκασία should be understood as a lower variety of δόξα (as in VII 534 A), viz. the state of mind which accepts as true that which is a copy of a copy (τρίτον πρὸς ἀλήθειαν). In this sense εἰκασία (with a play on εἰκόνες) is a new coinage of Plato's. The translation ‘conjecture’ is misleading, for conjecture implies conscious doubt or hesitation, and doubt is foreign to εἰκασία in Plato's sense. Plato may however have intended to suggest that such a state of mind is in reality no better than conjecture. See also X 598 A note and Bosanquet Companion pp. 261 f. with Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II pp. 242—246.

ὥσπερ ἐφ’ οἷς κτλ. : “attributing to them such a degree of clearness as their objects have of truth” J. and C. Liebhold's ἐφ’ ὅσον for ἐφ’ οἷς is an unhappy suggestion: cf. VII 534 A. A corrector in q changed the first μετέχειν to μετέχει, which, in deference to Schneider's arguments, I formerly printed. But the text is quite sound. Stated categorically, the clause would run ὥσπερ ἐφ’ οἷς ἔστιν ἀληθείας μετέχει, οὕτω ταῦτα σαφηνείας μετέχει. Under the government of ἡγησάμενος, the first as well as the second μετέχει becomes μετέχειν; for the accusative with infinitive may be employed even in the subordinate clauses of Indirect. See on 492 C. The jingle μετέχειν— μετέχειν is inoffensive: cf. X 614 A, 621 B.

514A - 517A The following comparison represents our nature in respect of education and the absence thereof. Let us imagine a number of prisoners confined in a subterranean cave, and unable to see anything except shadows of images and other such objects, cast by the light of a fire. Such men will believe that shadows of manufactured things are the only truth. If they are released, and led up step by step towards the light, they will turn and flee back into the cave; but if we compel them to emerge, they will gradually grow accustomed to the brightness, and be able to gaze upon the Sun and understand his sovereignty in the domain of visible things. Pity for their former friends will then begin to mingle with joy at their own escape. Should they redescend into their former place, the darkness will at first affect their vision, and expose them to the laughter of the others, who will, it may be, lay hands upon their deliverer and slay him.

ff. The simile of the Cave presents us with a picture of the life of the uneducated man (τὴν ἡμετέραν φύσιν παιδείας τε πέρι καὶ ἀπαιδευσίας 514 A: cf. also 515 A). From this point of view it should be compared with Theaet. 172 C —177 C, and (in spite of the different situation) with Phaed. 109 A—E, where the equation is:—Depths of Ocean : Hollows of Earth=Hollows of Earth : The true Earth. Plato bids us connect the Cave with the Line (517 A), and does so himself (l.c., and 532 C). We have seen that the lower segment of the line ( AC) is spoken of sometimes as ὁρατόν, sometimes as δοξαστόν (VI 510 B note). Plato does not even now distinguish between the two terms; and since the ἀπαίδευτος is concerned with τὸ δοξαστόν in general rather than with τὸ ὁρατόν exclusively, we shall best apprehend Plato's meaning if we interpret the simile by the following proportion:—Cave : ὁρατὸν s. δοξαστόν = δοξαστόν s. ὁρατόν : νοητόν. See on 517 A and App. I.

ἰδὲ γὰρ κτλ. Empedocles spoke of the terrestrial region as a cave (ἠλύθομεν τόδ’ ὑπ’ ἄντρον ὑπόστεγον 31 ed. Karsten), and similar expressions occur in the Orphic verses e.g. ταῦτα πατὴρ ποίησε κατὰ σπέος ἠεροειδές (ap. Procl. in Tim. 95 D): see Rohde Psyche^{2} II p. 178 note and Dieterich Nekyia p. 159 note There is however nothing to shew that Plato borrowed the underlying idea, much less the details, of his simile from any previous writer: for the metaphorical application of ἄνω, ὑψόθεν and kindred words in connexion with true παιδεία is a favourite usage of Plato's (cf. Theaet. 175 B, Soph. 216 C, Phaed. 109 A ff.), and the simile might easily have been elaborated from such a metaphor. For a strikingly eloquent imitation see Cic. de nat. deor. II 95 (translated from Aristotle: see Frag. 14. 1476^{a} 34 ff.). With the life of the cave-dwellers Bosanquet aptly compares the account of uncivilized humanity in Aesch. Prom. 447—453. A kindred though not identical figure is employed in Fitzgerald's Omar Khayya/m LXVIII: “We are no other than a moving row Of magic Shadow-shapes that come and go Round with the Sun-illumined Lantern held In Midnight by the Master of the Show.”

ἀναπεπταμένην κτλ. Herwerden suspects corruption, on the ground that the cave is dark, except for the light of the fire. But unless the entrance to the cave is open to the light of day, how are the prisoners ever to emerge, as they ultimately do (515 E)? The εἴσοδος is long (μακρά) and steep (515 E), so that the daylight cannot reach the cave in any case. Prantl is right, I think, in understanding μακράν of length and not width, although Schneider and the English translators apparently hold the other view. See next note.

παρ’ ἅπαν τὸ σπήλαιον should (I believe) be taken separately from μακράν. The words define the width of the entrance, which is ‘along the whole of,’ i.e. ‘as wide as,’ the cave. The reason will appear later: see on ὅρα τοίνυν 514 B. The translation “extending along the entire length of the cavern” (D. and V.) seems to render μακράν altogether otiose. See Fig. ii on p. 65.

μένειν τε αὐτοῦ . See cr. n. Hirschig's emendation, which Cobet approves and Hermann and others adopt, I now think right. μένειν is not, I believe, used absolutely in the sense of μένειν αὐτοῦ, which is the meaning required here. It might be possible to understand μένειν as equivalent to μένειν ἀκινήτους, in view of Crat. 426 E and Phaedr. 261 D, but ‘remain motionless’ is not quite suitable in point of sense. Still less does the possible rendering ‘remain by themselves’ fit the situation. On the other hand μένειν τε αὐτοῦ ‘remain where they are,’ ‘remain in one place’ (cf. I 327 C, II 371 C), corresponds exactly to ἐν δεσμοῖς τὰ σκέλη, just as εἴς τε τὸ πρόσθεν μόνον ὁρᾶν echoes ἐν δεσμοῖς τοὺς αὐχένας. The τε—τε after καὶ—καί suggests that Plato intended this correspondence. There is nothing to be said for Herwerden's proposal to insert ἀκινήτους.

ὑπὸ τοῦ δεσμοῦ κτλ. “Puerile interpretamentum” says Herwerden, quite superfluously. Hirschig's ἀδυνατοῦντας for ἀδυνάτους is no improvement. The word, like ὄντας, depends of course on ἰδέ. For καόμενον, Hirschig, with Cobet's approval, conjectures καομένου, and so Baiter also reads: but καομένου leaves αὐτοῖς out in the cold. “Vide ne φῶς πυρὸς ita in unam notionem coalescant, ut alterius attributum simul etiam alteri conveniat” Hermann. This explanation is correct: cf. 517 B.

ἐπάνω ὁδόν . ἐπάνοδον (Badham), which means ‘ascensum,’ is out of place here. ἐπάνω means only that the road is at a higher elevation than the prisoners (so also Schneider): it should not be taken with ὁδόν in the sense of a ‘raised way’ (Jowett). There is no reason why the ὁδός should be raised above the level of the ground, and it is unnecessarily harsh to construe the adverb with the noun. The fact that verbal nouns occasionally take an adverb in Plato (see on IV 434 C) does not justify Jowett's construction in this passage.

ὥσπερ τοῖς θαυματοποιοῖς κτλ. As in a Punch and Judy show. Cf. [Arist.] de Mundo 6. 398^{b} 16 ff. οἱ νευροσπάσται μίαν μήρινθον ἐπισπασάμενοι ποιοῦσι καὶ αὐχένα κινεῖσθαι καὶ χεῖρα τοῦ ζῴου καὶ ὦμον καὶ ὀφθαλμὸν κτλ. (Blümner, Privatalterth. p. 503 note 5, where other references are given). I agree with the Oxford editors in holding that τῶν ἀνθρώπων denotes the performers, and not, as Schneider and others translate, the spectators. οἱ ἄνθρωποι could not, without further specification, stand for the spectators, and no further specification is given. But Jowett and Campbell are, I think, in error when they distinguish between the θαυματοποιοί and the ἄν‐ θρωποι, and suppose that the θαυματοποιός is “not the actual exhibitor or puller of the strings, but the master of the show.” The ἄνθρωποι and the θαυματοποιοί are the same, and Plato might, if he had been so minded, have written ὥσπερ τοῖς θαυματοποιοῖς πρὸ ἑαυτῶν κτλ. The substitution of τῶν ἀνθρώπων for ἑαυτῶν puts the matter in a more objective way, and has also a contemptuous effect.

ὅρα τοίνυν κτλ. τοίνυν is ‘also’ (I 339 D note). The low wall which crosses the εἴσοδος at a point between the prisoners and the fire intercepts the shadows of the παραφέροντες: but the σκεύη which they carry, presumably on their heads, overtop the wall, and are reflected on the wall of the cave in front of the prisoners. See Fig. ii on p. 65. Plato adopts various devices in order to suggest a due proportion between the objects inside and outside the cave in point of reality. Thus (1) the typical examples ἀνδριάντες etc. are themselves images of the natural objects of the superior ὁρατόν: (2) the originals of the Cave are all (except the prisoners themselves 515 A) σκευαστά, whereas those of the superior ὁρατόν are —primarily speaking—φυτευτά (for the significance of this see 532 C note): (3) the contents of the Cave, both originals and shadows, may be regarded as less luminous and true than the ὁρατά outside, because they derive their light and truth, not from the Sun, but from an artificial Fire (see also on 517 C). The interpretation of the simile is to be sought in the δοξαστόν generally as well as in the ὁρατόν in particular (see on 517 A), but we need not suppose that every detail is significant. Comparisons have been made between the παραφέροντες and (in the ὁρατόν) δαίμονες (Campbell II p. 16, comparing Tim. 43), or (in the δοξαστόν) Sophists etc. (Shorey, Idea of Good etc. p. 238). The latter analogy is the more fruitful, but neither of them is altogether free from difficulty, and Plato may have intended the παραφέροντες only as part of the machinery of his similitude. If the Cave is to represent the world of τὰ πολλά, it must have a semblance of life and motion; and without the παραφέροντες the shadows would be motionless and dead.

οἷον εἰκὸς should be taken with what follows: cf. IV 419 A note

φθεγγομένους merely prepares the way for 515 B εἰ καὶ ἠχὼ κτλ., and beyond this, it has, I think, no meaning. It certainly does not “prepare for the science of harmonics” (as J. and C. hold): see 532 B note and App. I.

τῶν παραφερόντων (bracketed by Baiter) is natural enough, παρὰ τοῦτο τὸ τειχίον φέροντας being too distant to cause difficulty.

τί δέ; τῶν παραφερομένων κτλ. After τοῦτο supply οἴει ἂν ἑωρακέναι αὐτούς. I have placed a mark of interrogation after τί δέ, in order that τῶν παραφερομένων may have its proper emphasis: cf. V 470 A note

οὐ ταῦτα κτλ. : ‘do you not suppose they would believe that they were naming these particular passing objects which they saw?’ They have never seen anything of the real παριόντα (or παραφερόμενα): therefore (οὖν) they suppose themselves to be naming, i.e. using the name of, not (as is in point of fact the case) the real παριόντα, but only these παριόντα which they see. For example, they call the shadow of a table ‘a table,’ and in so doing they are, without knowing it, naming, not, as they suppose, the shadow, but the substance. J. and C. remark that “ παριόντα is rather confusing as it might signify either the shadows” (cf. 516 C) “or the realities” (cf. 515 D). True: but ταῦτα τὰ παριόντα, ἅπερ ὁρῷεν can signify only the shadows. The corruption παρόντα for παριόντα (see cr. n.) is easy, and occurs in some MSS at 516 C (where παριόντα again=παριοῦσαι σκιαί). Plato means (to interpret the allegory) that what the ἀπαίδευτος calls a substance is only a shadow. For other views of this sentence see App. IV.

εἰ καὶ ἠχὼ κτλ. The voices heard by the ἀπαίδευτος are as shadowy as the forms he sees: βλέποντες ἔβλεπον μάτην, | κλύοντες οὐκ ἤκουον, ἀλλ’ ὀνειράτων | ἀλίγκιοι μορφαῖσι τὸν μακρὸν βίον | ἔφυρον εἰκῆ πάντα (Aesch P. V. 447—450).

νομίζοιεν κτλ. νόμος, not φύσις, is the watchword of ἀπαιδευσία .

σκευαστῶν is said by J. and C. to be “diminutive images of ordinary artificial objects,” but the word does not convey this meaning. For the purposes of this simile σκευαστά are reckoned as less real than φυτευτά: see on ὅρα τοίνυν κτλ. 514 B and φαντάσματα θεῖα 532 C. Plato takes no account of the fact that the prisoners also see shadows of themselves (515 A).

λύσιν κτλ. According to 532 B (where see note), λύσιν—τῶν ἄλλων εἴδωλα (516 A) symbolizes Plato's προπαιδεία or inferior νοητόν.

εἰ φύσει τοιάδε κτλ. φύσει has been variously interpreted as follows. (1) ‘φύσει est revera’ (Ast, Stallbaum): (2) ‘si res et natura ferret,’ ‘in the course of nature’ (Schneider, J. and C., D. and V.): (3) ‘ φύσει, no one knows how’ (Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II p. 260). None of these explanations is either linguistically easy or altogether suitable in point of meaning. It should be remembered that the condition of the prisoners, shut out as they are from light and truth amid the darkness of the Cave, is ‘unnatural’ (παρὰ φύσιν) in the Platonic sense of the word (see IV 443 B note). Their release is therefore a return to their true nature, and may for this reason be described as ‘natural.’ This, I think, is what Plato means to suggest by φύσει. It is true, as we are presently told (515 E βίᾳ), that force has to be employed in order to drag the prisoners on high; but their deliverance is none the less ‘natural’ in Plato's way of thinking. Schleiermacher and Herwerden wish to read οἵα τις ἂν εἴη φύσει, εἰ τοιάδε κτλ. The fact that εἰ was omitted by A^{1}, and is absent from five other MSS, may appear to favour this conjecture. We might suppose that εἰ fell out by ὁμοιοτέλευτον after φύσει, disappeared altogether from several MSS, and was wrongly replaced in A. (The evidence of Π is unfortunately wanting here.) But on this view it is difficult to see what φύσει adds to οἵα τις ἂν εἴη, and for this and other reasons I prefer the solution which I have given.

τὸ φῶς is the light of the fire (514 B): contrast αὐτὸ τὸ φῶς 515 D.

ἀναβλέπειν . ἀνα‐ is appropriate, for the fire is ἄνωθεν (514 B). Education always points upward in Plato (514 A note).

ἐγγυτέρω . It is needless to add <ὢν>, as I formerly did (with Richards, who compares I 330 E). The copula is easily supplied, especially with τετραμμένος following.

ὀρθότερον and not ὀρθότερα (as seems to be generally believed, even by J. and C.) is the reading of A. The adverb (‘more truly sees’) can alone be justified. For the meaning see VI 490 B note

βλέποι . The indicative βλέπει (which I formerly read, with q, Flor. U, Bekker and others) would be more usual, “in an indirect quotation depending on an optative which refers to the future” (Goodwin MT. p. 61). But the rule which excludes the optative in such cases is not absolute, as appears from Dem. 16. 5 (cited by Goodwin l.c.), and ἔχοι in VIII 544 A is in principle the same as βλέποι here. For the collocation of indicative (ἑώρα) with optative Schneider quotes Phaed. 96 B and 95 D.

καὶ δὴ κτλ. ἀπορεῖν is almost a technical term of Socrates' dialectic (cf. Xen. Mem. III 10. 7 and Theaet. 149 A ff.), but Plato has in mind the effect of his own προπαιδεία, as appears from 532 B, C.

φεύγειν ἀποστρεφόμενον κτλ. As when a bewildered disputant takes refuge again in the fallacious position from which he has been dislodged: see I 334 B note For δύναται Richards would read δύναιτο, comparing ἅπερ ὁρῷεν in 515 B. δύναται treats the simile as a reality, exactly like ἀμβλυώττει in 516 E: compare also 538 A note, and (for the construction) Phaed. 67 E οὐ πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ μὴ ἅσμενοι ἐκεῖσε ἴοιεν, οἷ ἀφικομένοις ἐλπίς ἐστιν οὗ διὰ βίου ἤρων τυχεῖν .

ἕλκοι κτλ. Cf. Theaet. 175 B ὅταν δέ γέ τινα αὐτός, ὦ φίλε, ἑλκύσῃ ἄνω κτλ. The alliteration of ἀν‐ (ἀναβάσεως, ἀνάντους, ἀνείη, ἀγανακτεῖν) should be noticed: see on 514 A. With αὐγῆς ἂν ἔχοντα κτλ. we may compare Theaet. 175 D βλέπων μετέωρος ἄνωθεν ὑπὸ ἀηθείας ἀδημονῶν τε καὶ ἀπορῶν καὶ βαρβαρίζων κτλ.

πρῶτον μὲν κτλ. πρῶτον μὲν—εἴδωλα (the lower ὁρατόν of the line) symbolizes the higher stages of Plato's προπαιδεία, and ὕστερον δὲ αὐτά—οἷός ἐστιν (the higher ὁρατόν) corresponds to the higher νοητόν. See 532 B, C notes αὐτά, τὰ ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ—νύκτωρ and τὸν ἥλιον represent an ascending scale of Ideas up to the Good: cf. note on τοῦ ἀνυποθέτου VI 511 B. It may be doubted whether in point of fact the released prisoner would not be able to look on the heavens by night sooner than upon ‘objects themselves’ (αὐτά) by day. But the simile holds good in so far as the eye mounts ever higher: and the moon and stars are nearest to the sun ( ἡλιοειδῆ, says Proclus in remp. I p. 294. 6 Kroll), which is the ultimate goal.

συλλογίζοιτο κτλ. should be interpreted by VI 509 B (the Good as the cause of Being). οὗτος is preferred by Stallbaum and others to αὐτός (see cr. n.), in which J. and C. find “a solemn emphasis.” There is no difficulty about the repetition (αὐτοῦ—αὐτός), but αὐτός ‘ipse’ is less suitable here than the deictic οὗτος: cf. αὕτη in 517 C and VI 462 E note

τῷ ὀξύτατα καθορῶντι κτλ. “Induction conceived as inference from particulars to particulars, its test being prediction (not explanation), and its method being association of images or unanalysed likenesses, by contiguity in co-existence or succession” Bosanquet. Plato is thinking chiefly of the empirical politician and political adviser, who foretells the future from the present and the past (cf. Thuc. I 22), but limits his intellectual horizon by his own experience, and knows nothing of the real determining causes of events. The vast majority of Athenian statesmen belonged in Plato's opinion to this category: see on V 473 C and VI 488 B.

αὐτῶν does not of course depend on πρότερα (as D. and V. translate), but is a partitive genitive after ὅσα.

τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου κτλ. I formerly proposed to omit πεπονθέναι, but a precise parallel is furnished by Symp. 198 C ἀτεχνῶς τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου ἐπεπόνθη. ἄν makes πεπονθέναι equivalent to the future perfect—a more vigorous form of expression than the future (or aorist with ἄν) would be. The quotation (which is from Od. XI 489, cf. supra III 386 C) “has a curious felicity, being the words of Achilles in expressing his detestation of the world of shades (lit. shadows) in comparison with the world of human life” (Bosanquet). It is better, I think, to connect ἄλλῳ with θητευέμεν (Ameis on Od. l.c.) than with παρά (as Schneider does).

καὶ ὁτιοῦν κτλ. ἄν (which Richards would alter to δή) is as suitable here as before, since ἂν πεπονθέναι depends in both cases directly on δοκεῖς. The confusion of ἄν and δή is not so frequent as some have thought: see on V 450 C.

δοξάζειν =‘opine’ is technical: for the cave is an allegory of τὸ δοξαστόν (514 A note).

ἄν . See cr. n. and IV 437 B note Stallbaum proposes ἂν πλέως, but Baiter's solution (which Cobet and Herwerden also recommend) is easier and better. ἀνάπλεως suggests contagion: see Ruhnken on Tim. Lex. s. v.

σχοίη as usual is inchoative or ingressive (‘get’): cf. 520 D and 527 B.

γνωματεύοντα : ‘discriminating,’ ‘distinguishing,’ ‘judging,’ as explained by the Scholiast (διακρίνοντα, διαγιγνώσκοντα ἀκριβῶς), Suidas and Timaeus (if with Ruhnken we read γνωματεύοντα for γνωμονεύοντα). A similar explanation appears in the margin of A (γρ κρίνοντα γρ γιγνώσκοντ’ ἀκριβῆ). The word is derived of course from γνῶμα (‘means of judging,’ ‘test’), for which see Jebb on Soph. Tr. 593. γνωματεύω occurs only here in good Greek, but became more frequent afterwards (for instances see Ruhnken in Tim. Lex. s. v.). Here, as J. and C. remark, it seems to be “used with some degree of contempt” (like τευτάζω in 521 E).

ἀμβλυώττει . For the mood see 515 E note ἀμβλυώττοι occurs in q and Flor. U, and is read by Bekker and others. Herwerden adds ἔτι after ἀμβλυώττει, comparing 517 D, but the text is sound.

οὗτος δ’ ὁ χρόνος κτλ. is still under the influence of εἰ. With ἆρ’ οὐ γέλωτ’ ἂν κτλ. cf. Phaedr. 249 D ἐξιστάμενος δὲ τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων σπουδασμάτων, καὶ πρὸς τῷ θείῳ γιγνόμενος, νουθετεῖται μὲν ὑπὸ τῶν πολλῶν ὡς παρακινῶν, ἐνθουσιάζων δὲ λέληθε τοὺς πολλούς, Theaet. 172 C, 174 C—175 B, Soph. 216 D and infra 517 D.

οὐκ ἄξιον κτλ. The prisoners are almost relieved to find themselves able to suppress their higher promptings and sink back into indolence and self-complacency.

καὶ τὸν ἐπιχειροῦντα κτλ. is a mani fest and touching allusion to the death of Socrates, whose fate was the most conspicuous example in Greek history of the principle here laid down. See Zeller^{4} II 1, pp. 223—227 and cf. VI 496 C, D notes Read in the light of another and even more momentous sacrifice, the sentence assumes a kind of prophetical import, like the famous passage about the λόγος θεῖος in the Phaedo (85 C, D). See Geddes's Phaedo of Plato pp. 280—283. The text is difficult to determine. If we retain λαβεῖν καὶ ἀποκτείνειν, ἀποκτιννύναι ἄν, we must either a regard ἆρ’ οὐ— λέγοιτ’ ἄν as equivalent to ἆρ’ οὐκ οἴει γέλωτ’ ἂν αὐτὸν παρασχεῖν καὶ λέγεσθαι ἄν, and take λέγεσθαι ἄν as equivalent to ἐκείνους ἂν εἰπεῖν, carrying on ἐκείνους as subject to ἀποκτιννύναι ἄν (Schneider), or b supply οὐκ οἴει, although these words do not occur after 516 C (J. and C.). The second solution is preferable to the first, but either is a tour de force. No satisfactory explanation of the infinitive ἀποκτιννύναι ἄν appears to be possible, and the immediate juxtaposition of the two forms of the infinitive is also in itself suspicious. A few inferior MSS read ἀποκτενεῖν for the ἀποκτείνειν and αὖ for the ἄν of A: but otherwise there is no important variant. The emendations proposed are (1) λαβεῖν, κἂν ἀποκτείνειαν (Ast), (2) λαβεῖν, καὶ ἀποκτείνοιεν ἄν (Stallbaum), (3) λαβεῖν, κἂν ἀποκτιννύοιεν (Cobet), (4) λαβεῖν, καὶ ἀποκτείνειαν ἄν (Baiter). The correction in the text appears to me not only easier, but more in harmony with Plato's fulness of expression. I suppose that the error arose thus. A scribe accidentally omitted ἀποκτιννύναι, and the infinitive was wrongly replaced after, instead of before, ἀποκτείνειαν. This would give λαβεῖν καὶ ἀποκτείνειαν, ἀποκτιννύναι ἄν, from which the change is inevitable to the text of A.

517A - 518B The simile of the Cave should be connected with the Line. The Cave is the visible world, the fire is the Sun, and the prisoners' journey towards the light resembles the ascent of the soul into the intelligible sphere, in which the Idea of Good reigns supreme. We need not wonder that the philosopher is unwilling to leave the light of thought for the darkness of practical affairs, or that he is dazed and confused when he does.

ταύτην κτλ. If we interpret the lower section of the line as ὁρατόν and nothing more, the following comparisons are involved:—(1) Fire=Sun: (2) Shadows of ἀνδριάντες and other σκευαστά cast by Fire = Shadows etc. of φυτευτά and σκευαστά cast by the Sun: (3) ἀνδριάντες and other σκευαστά in the Cave=φυτευτά and σκευαστά in the ὁρατόν: (4) the ascent from the Cave into the ὁρατόν=the ascent from the ὁρατόν into the νοητόν. The second comparison is of little or no importance, for the ἀπαίδευτος, of whose condition the Cave is an allegory, does not contemplate exclusively or even principally natural shadows of φυτευτά and σκευαστά (cf. VI 511 E note). Nor do the other comparisons exhaust the significance of the Cave as an allegory of ἀπαιδευσία. In order fully to apprehend its meaning, we must regard the lower section of the line as δοξαστόν in the sense of V 475 E ff. Plato himself does so: see VI 510 A note The shadows and originals within the cave will then symbolise δόξαι which are respectively twice and once removed from the truth which they seek to portray (see on 517 D), and the ascent from the Cave into the ὁρατόν will represent the soul's ascent from the δοξαστόν into the νοητόν—from the πολλά (in the widest sense) to the ἕν. Cf. 514 B and 532 B, C notes

ἐλπίδος : ‘surmise’: cf. II 383 B note The diffidence of tone recals VI 506 E: cf. infr. 523 A.

φαίνεται . For the construction cf. I 334 B note

τελευταία as well as μόγις should be taken predicatively with ὁρᾶσθαι. The sentiment is as in VI 505 A (ὅτι—ἴσμεν), where see note.

τεκοῦσα κτλ. τεκοῦσα reminds us that the Sun is the ἔκγονος of the Good (VI 506 E). On ἀλήθειαν καὶ νοῦν see VI 508 D note ὅτι δεῖ depends on φαίνεται, not (as D. and V. translate) on συλλογιστέα. Cf. VI 505 A, 506 A notes Plato's guardians are not to rest satisfied with the εἰκών or ἔκγονος of the Good; they must see the Good itself, and infer (not by intuition, but) by means of reasoning ( συλλογιστέα) that it is the cause of all. See the notes on VI 511 B (αὐτὸς ὁ λόγος and τοῦ ἀνυποθέτου).

ἀσχημονεῖ κτλ. Cf. Theaet. 174 B, C ὅταν ἐν δικαστηρίῳ ἤ που ἄλλοθι ἀναγκασθῇ περὶ τῶν παρὰ πόδας—διαλέγεσθαι, γέλωτα παρέχει—ἡ ἀσχημοσύνη δεινὴ—γελοῖος φαίνεται. The whole of the description of the φιλόσοφος in the Theaetetus should be carefully compared with this passage.

ἔτι ἀμβλυώττων is logically subordinate to ἀναγκαζόμενος.

τῶν τοῦ δικαίου κτλ. treats the Cave as an allegory of δοξαστά (see on VI 510 A, VII 517 A). The expression ‘shadows of the just’ is vague (cf. σκιαμαχούντων in 520 C), and ἢ ἀγαλμάτων ὧν αἱ σκιαί introduces more precision. We may regard ἀγαλμάτων as symbolising the enacted laws of a city, and their shadows as the “representation or misrepresentation of the existing laws (themselves only ‘images’ of justice) by a rhetorician or pleader” (Nettleship Hell. p. 141 note 1). Compare (with Shorey Idea of Good etc. p. 287) Soph. 234 C and Pol. 303 C.

ὅπῃ ποτὲ ‐‐ ἰδόντων . For the real point at issue is not the law, but the judges' interpretation thereof. Plato is doubtless thinking of Socrates and his judges throughout the whole of this passage.

φανότερον (‘greater brightness,’ ‘more light’) and λαμπροτέρου are neuter. The omission of articles elevates the style. Richards would delete ὑπὸ λαμπροτέρου, but the words balance ὑπὸ ἀηθείας exactly as ἐσκότωται balances μαρμαρυγῆς ἐμπέπλησται (‘has been dazzled’). Any stronger antithesis than ὑπὸ ἀηθείας would give a false meaning, for the blindness is not caused by σκότος, but only by ἀήθεια: ξυνεθιζόμενοι γὰρ μυρίῳ βέλτιον ὄψεσθε τῶν ἐκεῖ κτλ. (520 C).

εἰ γελᾶν κτλ. Cf. Theaet. 175 B, D. There is more of pity than of malice in Plato's philosophic smile.

518B - 521B It follows that Education is not a way of putting knowledge into empty souls, but a revolution of the Reason or organ of Knowledge, whose gaze must be directed upon Being and the brightest part thereof, which is the Good. The entire soul turns round along with Reason in this revolution. Other virtues are secondary and adventitious, but Reason never loses its power, and works weal or woe, according as it is or is not converted by means of Education. The best natures in our city, after they have ascended to the Good, must rejoin the prisoners whom they have left. To force them thus to redescend, may seem unjust; but Law seeks to make the whole city prosperous rather than a single class. And indeed it is also just that they should thus repay their country for having reared and educated them. They will themselves admit the force of our demands, and take their turn in the work of government, not eagerly, but as a necessity. We have seen that a well governed city is impossible unless a life better than that of ruling is open to its rulers, and the life of true philosophy is better.

ff. Nothing that Plato has bequeathed to us is more valuable than his theory of education as developed in this part of the Republic, and there is probably nothing in the whole range of educational literature, ancient or modern, which takes so far-reaching and profound a view of the aim and scope of education, or is so well fitted to inspire the teacher with indomitable courage and inextinguishable hope. See on 518 C and App. II.

αὐτῶν : ‘the subject before us’: cf. VI 511 C, and αὐτό in I 339 E note

ἐπαγγελλόμενοι κτλ. ἐπαγγέλλεσθαι of sophistic ‘professions’ is almost technical: cf. e.g. Prot. 319 A, Gorg. 447 C and Isocr. Soph. 1. τινές from its position is emphatic, and makes us halfsuspect some allusion to a particular Sophist: cf. Aristotle's use of τινές (Bonitz Ind. Arist. p. 598). Similar sophistic ἐπαγγέλματα are ridiculed, though on different grounds, by Isocrates Soph. 2 ff.: see also Prot. 318 E ff. and Euthyd. 273 D ff. (ἀρετήν, ἔφη sc. ὁ Εὐθύδημος,— οἰόμεθα οἵω τ’ εἶναι παραδοῦναι κάλλιστ’ ἀνθρώπων καὶ τάχιστα), and cf. Newman Politics of Aristotle I p. 387. It should be mentioned that the double εἶναι has been suspected by Richards, who would omit the first; but Plato himself is not averse to such repetitions: cf. μετέχειν— μετέχειν in VI 511 E and X 621 B note

ἐντιθέναι . Cf. Theognis 429—438 (εἰ δ’ ἦν ποιητόν τε καὶ ἔνθετον ἀνδρὶ νοήμα 435). The grossly material and mechanical view of education which Plato here attacks has some affinity with what is sometimes called ‘cram.’ ἐντιθέναι was used of a nurse feeding children (I 345 B note); but such an allusion, though not in itself inappropriate, is scarcely intended here. Cf. also Symp. 175 D, E.

ὁ δέ γε νῦν λόγος κτλ. Sophists profess to put ἐπιστήμη into the soul; but Plato's argument indicates that the power or faculty of ἐπιστήμη (ταύτην τὴν δύναμιν), and its organ νοῦς are already present in the soul of each individual, just as ὄψις and ὄμμα are already possessed by the prisoners in the cave. νοῦς is in fact the θεῖόν τι ἐν ἡμῖν, according to Plato, through whose indwelling man is most truly man by being like to God (VI 501 B, IX 589 D notes). The doctrine that μάθησις is ἀνάμνησις implies what is fundamentally the same view: see Meno 81 A ff. and Phaed. 72 E—76 D, especially 73 A ἐρωτώμενοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι, ἐάν τις καλῶς ἐρωτᾷ, αὐτοὶ λέγουσιν πάντα ᾗ ἔχει· καίτοι εἰ μὴ ἐτύγχανεν αὐτοῖς ἐπιστήμη ἐνοῦσα καὶ ὀρθὸς λόγος, οὐκ ἂν οἷοί τ’ ἦσαν τοῦτο ποιήσειν. We may even go further and say that Plato's conception of the divine element in man is the ultimate basis of all his proofs of Immortality. In its deeper bearings, therefore, the view of education here presented is incomparably grander and more profound than the usual connotation of the word either in ancient or in modern times. We educate our pupils not only for time, but for eternity, and therefore πείρας οὐδὲν ἀνήσομεν, ἕως ἂν ἢ πείσωμεν καὶ τοῦτον καὶ τοῦς ἄλλους, ἢ προὔργου τι ποιήσωμεν εἰς ἐκεῖνον τὸν βίον, ὅταν αὖθις γενόμενοι τοῖς τοιούτοις ἐντύχωμεν λόγοις (VI 498 D). See also X 618 C ff. and Phaed. 107 D f. οὐδὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἔχουσα εἰς Αἵδου ἡ ψυχὴ ἔρχεται πλὴν τῆς παιδείας τε καὶ τροφῆς κτλ. Michael Angelo used to say that every block of marble contained a statue, and that the sculptor brings it to light by cutting away the encumbrances by which the ‘human face divine’ is concealed. In like manner, according to Plato, it is the business of the teacher to prune the soul of his pupil of those unnatural excrescences and incrustations which hide its true nature (519 A, B note), until the human soul divine (VI 501 B note) stands out in all its pristine grace and purity. It should carefully be noted that in Plato's theory of education the entire soul is involved (ξὺν ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ). The Platonic περιαγωγή, although, or rather, perhaps, because, it applies primarily and immediately to the intellect, effects a moral no less than an intellectual revolution. The moral discipline of Books II—IV, so far from being overthrown, is strengthened and consolidated by being intellectualised. Cf. also 519 A B note

ἑκάστου . ἑκάστῳ was read by Iamblichus ( Protrept. 16) for ἑκάστου: but cf. 527 D note

ξύν . See on IV 424 D. Here, as in Gorg. 513 A and Laws 678 C, it implies an intimate, almost organic, connexion (‘in conjunction with’). Lina (de praepos. usu Plat. p. 33) is mistaken in holding that ξύν introduces a mere “Anhängsel” in this passage.

τούτου τοίνυν κτλ. “Construe: (ἡ παιδεία) εἴη ἂν τέχνη τῆς περιαγωγῆς (i.q. τοῦ περιάγειν, quod praecedit) τούτου αὐτοῦ (τοῦ ὀργάνου τῆς ψυχῆς, ᾧ καταμανθάνει ἕκαστος)—οὐ (τέχνη ) τοῦ ἐμποιῆσαι αὐτῷ τὸ ὁρᾶν—ἀλλὰ (τοῦ) μηχανήσασθαι τοῦτο (ὥστε βλέπειν οἷ ἔδει)” Ast. This interpretation is, I believe, correct. Plato began by asserting that Education is not what certain Sophists declare it to be—the putting of sight, as it were, into blind eyes. For there is already in every man's soul an eye or ὄργανον, which sees or learns already; what is required is to turn this ὄργανον round. Hence he concludes (τοίνυν) Education is not (as the Sophists say) an art of putting sight into the soul's eye (τοῦ ἐμποιῆσαι αὐτῷ τὸ ὁρᾶν refers to τυφλοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ὄψιν ἐντιθέντες), but an art of turning round just this very eye or ὄργανον which is present in every soul from the first. The prevailing view since Schneider regards τούτου αὐτοῦ as anticipating and explained by, not as depending on, τῆς περιαγωγῆς. This yields a tolerable sense, but makes it difficult to supply the subject of μεταστραφήσεται, and αὐτῷ is also awkward. On Ast's view τίνα— μεταστραφήσεται explains τούτου αὐτοῦ τῆς περιαγωγῆς, and the subject of μεταστραφήσεται as well as the antecedent of αὐτῷ is at once seen to be τὸ ὄργανον ᾧ καταμανθάνει ἕκαστος, for it is identical with the antecedent of τούτου αὐτοῦ.

τοῦ ἐμποιῆσαι κτλ. The genitive has been wrongly taken as one of the rare examples in good Greek of an independent final infinitive (Weiske quoted in A. J. Ph. IV p. 418), a construction for which see Jannaris Historical Greek Grammar pp. 483, 578. It depends on τέχνη: see last note. For διαμηχανήσασθαι Ast (with some inferior MSS) reads δὴ μηχανήσασθαι: but cf. (with Schneider) Laws 746 C τοῦτ’ αὐτὸ διαμηχανᾶσθαι ὅπως ἂν γίγνηται.

αἱ μὲν τοίνυν κτλ. ἄλλαι is anticipative )( ἡ δὲ τοῦ φρονῆσαι below. καλούμεναι (as Bosanquet points out) should be taken with ψυχῆς (lit. ‘which are called soul's’ i.e. ‘which are commonly said to belong to the soul’). Plato does not mean to deny that they are virtues, but they do not belong to soul essentially and from the first. Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 185 ff.), who, with the editors generally, takes καλούμεναι as ‘sogenannten,’ affirms that Plato here discards the virtues of Book IV; but he is merely contrasting these and other virtues or excellencies with νόησις.

ἐγγύς τι εἶναι . Campbell conjectures ἐγγύς τι τείνειν. I once thought of ἐγγύς τι τεῖναι, taking the aorist as an explicit reference to the ethical virtues already discussed; but the text is doubtless sound: cf. V 472 C and VIII 544 D (μεταξύ τι τούτων πού εἰσιν).

ἔθεσι καὶ ἀσκήσεσιν . Aristotle Nic. Eth. II 1 is in effect a commentary on this text: note in particular ἡ δ’ ἠθικὴ (ἀρετὴ) ἐξ ἔθους περιγίγνεται (1103^{a} 17)—οὐδεμία τῶν ἠθικῶν ἀρετῶν φύσει ἡμῖν ἐγγίγνεται (ibid. 19)—τὰς δ’ ἀρετὰς λαμβάνομεν ἐνεργήσαντες πρότερον (1103^{a} 31).

ἡ δὲ τοῦ φρονῆσαι κτλ. The ἀρετή of φρονῆσαι (=νόησις or the exercise of νοῦς) is not merely καλουμένη ψυχῆς, but does in reality belong to (for τυγχάνει οὖσα cf. I 337 B note)—is an essential attribute of—something more divine (than that to which the other virtues belong), viz. νοῦς. The meaning of φρόνησις has changed since IV 433 B (see on IV 428 B) in conformity with the intellectualism of Books VI and VII.

παντὸς μᾶλλον has been suspected, and Madvig proposes ὑφάσματος or πλάσματος μᾶλλον, Richards ὀργάνου μᾶλλον: but the text is indubitably sound. The phrase, like πάντων μάλιστα, means ‘most assuredly,’ and has nothing to do with the comparative θειοτέρου, but emphasises the whole assertion exactly as in Crit. 49 B and Prot. 344 B.

τὴν μὲν δύναμιν κτλ. Plato means that νοῦς can never lose its power or function, which is νόησις. οὐδέποτε should not be limited to this life. The Peripatetic doctrine of “das unsterbliche Attribut der denkenden Function” is here foreshadowed, as Krohn observes (Pl. St. p. 160). See also on 518 C.

ὑπὸ δὲ τῆς περιαγωγῆς is equivalent to ὑπὸ δὲ τῆς περιαγωγῆς τε καὶ μή (‘according as it is or is not turned round’). See on VI 498 A.

δριμὺ μὲν κτλ. δριμύ is ‘shrewdly.’ ‘astutely,’ like a quick-sighted lawyer: cf. (with J. and C.) Theaet. 175 D τὸν σμικρὸν ἐκεῖνον τὴν ψυχὴν καὶ δριμὺν καὶ δικανικόν. For ταῦτα Cobet needlessly proposes τά: cf. 519 B note Instead of ὥστε (which three MSS omit) Ast conjectured καί, and E. S. Thompson (Camb. Phil. Soc. Proceed. XXI p. 13) ὥς τε: but the clause ὅσῳ—ἐργαζόμενον is a logical inference from οὐ φαύλην—ὑπηρετεῖν and should not therefore be introduced by καί, still less by ὥς τε. I formerly printed ἐργάζεται (Ξ and the three MSS already referred to reading ἐργάσεται), but the finite verb is not likely to have been corrupted into a participle, and exactly the same ungrammatical assimilation appears with ὥστε in Andoc. 4. 20, Isaeus 9. 16 and Isocr. Paneg. 64, 65 (quoted by Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 1015 note 3). The instances cited by Schneider ( Addit. p. 52) viz. Tim. 56 B, [Eryx.] 404 A and Thuc. I 25 are not strictly parallel to this.

, B 7 τὰς τῆς γενέσεως κτλ. : ‘as it were the leaden weights, which are of the family of Becoming, and which, through indulgences in eating and through pleasures and gluttonous desires connected with such like indulgences, adhere to it’ (i.e. to such a nature, τὸ τῆς τοιαύτης φύσεως) ‘and turn the soul's vision round below.’ The eye of the soul ought to be turned round ἐκ τοῦ γιγνομένου (518 C): and it is our duty to shake the soul clear of τὰς τῆς γενέσεως ξυγγενεῖς μολυβδίδας. For γενέσεως see on VI 485 B, and cf. μεταστροφῆς ἀπὸ γενέσεως ἐπ’ ἀλήθειάν τε καὶ οὐσίαν infra 525 C and 525 B, 526 E, 534 A al. With ξυγγενεῖς cf. VIII 554 D where τὰς τοῦ κηφῆνος ξυγγενεῖς ἐπιθυμίας =τὰς κηφηνώδεις ἐπιθυμίας. The μολυβδίδες are the accumulated products of sensual indulgence and desire: see X 611 C ff., especially ἃ νῦν αὐτῇ, ἅτε γῆν ἑστιωμένῃ, γεηρὰ καὶ πετρώδη πολλὰ καὶ ἄγρια περιπέφυκεν ὑπὸ τῶν εὐδαιμόνων λεγομένων ἑστιάσεων 611 E—612 A, and Phaed. 81 C together with Ep. VII 326 B. Cf. also Clement Strom. IV 4 p. 1228 C Migne ὥσπερ μολυβδίδας τὰς ἐπιθυμίας. These μολυβδίδες are akin to the world of γένεσις because they are σωματοειδῆ, γεώδη, γεηρά (Plato ll. cc.), of the earth earthy. They become incorporate with the soul (προσφυεῖς γιγνόμεναι, cf. προσπεφυκέναι X 611 D), making it, as Plato does not hesitate to say, σωματοειδῆ, δοξάζουσαν ταῦτα ἀληθῆ εἶναι, ἅπερ ἃν καὶ τὸ σῶμα φῇ ( Phaed. 83 D, cf. ib. 82 E, 83 C). Milton is platonizing when he tells how the soul “grows clotted by con tagion, Imbodies and imbrutes, till she quite lose The divine property of her first being” (Comus 464 ff.). Through the weight of these encumbrances the eye of the soul is turned down (cf. IX 586 A κάτω ἀεὶ βλέποντες καὶ κεκυφότες εἰς γῆν καὶ εἰς τραπέζας κτλ.), nor can the soul look upwards until they are knocked away (περιεκόπη: cf. περικρουσθεῖσα in X 611 E). We may again compare the lines of Milton “Mammon, the least erected spirit that fell From Heaven; for e'en in Heaven his looks and thoughts Were always downward bent” (Par. Lost I 679 ff.). For περικάτω cf. Photius περικάτω τραπήσεται· ἀντὶ τοῦ περιτραπήσεται κάτω. The περι‐ balances περι‐ in περιεστρέφετο just below. Instead of ἐδωδαῖς, Jackson suggests ἐδωδῆς, comparing III 389 E τῶν περὶ πότους καὶ ἀφροδίσια καὶ περὶ ἐδωδὰς ἡδονῶν. The proposal is attractive and may be right; but I think there is hardly sufficient reason for departing from the MSS. See also on περικάτω and the whole of this difficult and highly important sentence, App. V.

ὧν εἰ ἀπαλλαγὲν κτλ. For the anacoluthon cf. Laws 810 D, E (Engelhardt Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 37). Cobet gratuitously adds τά before ἐφ’ ἅ. Cf. 519 A note With the sentiment cf. VI 491 C, D notes, 494 C ff. notes Plato may well be thinking of Alcibiades again. The present passage is a conspicuous proof of the almost boundless influence which Plato ascribed to education, when applied to gifted natures.

σκοπὸν ‐‐ ἕνα κτλ. The εἷς σκοπός of Plato's guardians is the Idea of Good, which is therefore clearly not only a metaphysical but also an ethical concept—the goal of conduct as well as the ultimate cause of knowledge and existence. Cf. 540 A and App. III.

ἑκόντες εἶναι . I 336 E note

τῶν οἰκιστῶν =‘the founders’ is in explanatory apposition with ἡμέτερον .

ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν . VI 505 A.

ἰδεῖν τε κτλ. depends on ἀναγκάσαι and explains ἀφικέσθαι—μέγιστον (J. and C.). τε balances καί before ἀναβῆναι. This explanation is better than to regard τε as ‘and’ (with Schneider and D. and V.).

ἔπειτα and ε<*>τα are used like our ‘what!’ in indignant or quasi-indignant questions. Cf. Gorg. 466 C, Ap. 28 B and elsewhere, with Blaydes on Ar. Av. 911.

, E 29 ἐπελάθου κτλ. πάλιν does not mean that Glauco has forgotten twice, but only that he remembered before. The emphasis falls on ἐπελάθου rather than on πάλιν. Plato is thinking of V 466 A, where Glauco says μέμνημαι when challenged on this point. To this explanation, which he gives as an alternative, Schneider inclines to prefer the view which sees in πάλιν a reference directly to IV 419 A ff. But the interlocutor there is Adimantus, not Glauco, and even Adimantus in IV could not strictly be said to forget what Socrates for the first time expressly asserts (IV 420 B οὐ μὴν πρὸς τοῦτο—ἡ πόλις) in reply to Adimantus' difficulties.

νόμῳ is the reading of all the best MSS, and was restored by Schneider for νομοθέτῃ. Law is personified throughout the whole sentence: cf. (with Schneider) Tim. 24 B. νομοθέτῃ gives a good sense, but is weaker than νόμῳ: Law, we feel, is free from selfishness and partiality, but a legislator need not be.

ἐπὶ τὸν ξύνδεσμον is not ‘so as to be the bond of the State’ (as J. and C. suggest), but ‘for binding the city together,’ with reference to ξυναρμόττων τοὺς πολίτας. Cf. Laws 921 C.

τοίνυν =‘further’ (I 339 D note). Socrates has not yet replied to Glauco's indignant ἀδικήσομεν αὐτούς; but proceeds to do so now.

οὐδ’ ἀδικήσομεν : (besides what I have just said) we shall not be wronging them either. οὐδέ is used in the same way in Euthyph. 12 A and Laws 673 C. δέ in οὐδέ cannot mean ‘in spite of what you say’ (as J. and C. imagine).

ὥσπερ ἐν σμήνεσιν κτλ. is probably a Socratic comparison: cf. Xen. Cyr. V 1. 24 (quoted by Ast) βασιλεὺς μὲν γὰρ ἔμοιγε δοκεῖς σὺ πεφυκέναι οὐδὲν ἧττον ἢ ὁ ἐν τῷ σμήνει φυόμενος τῶν μελιττῶν ἡγεμών. See also Pöhlmann Gesch. d. ant. Komm. p. 134 note

ἀμφοτέρων : “et publicorum negotiorum et philosophiae” Stallbaum. Cf. Gorg. 485 A ἀλλ), ο<*>μαι, τὸ ὀρθότατόν ἐστιν ἀμφοτέρων μετασχεῖν. Is the θεωρητικός or the πρακτικὸς βίος the better? It is clear that the subject was often debated in Plato's time: see the fragments of Euripides' Antiope in Pl. Gorg. 484 E ff. and Arist. Eth. Nic. I 3. 1095^{b} 17 ff., X 7. 1177^{a} 12 ff. If we contrast them with each other, Plato would reply, the θεωρητικός easily wins the prize, but under the existing conditions of human nature the best life is a combination of both. The practical statesman must derive his inspiration from θεωρία, and experience of affairs is an advantage as well as a duty to the thinker. Cf. VI 496 D—497 A notes

ξυνεθιζόμενοι κτλ. Cf. 518 A note

εἴδωλα . 517 D note The word is here used quite generally of all the idols of Plato's cave. “We have risen to a point of view from which the σκευαστά and the σκιαί are included under one notion as εἴδωλα” (J. and C.).

ὕπαρ κτλ. Cf. V 476 C. The Homeric line οὐκ ὄναρ, ἀλλ) ὕπαρ <*>σθλόν, ὅ τοι τετελεσμένον ἔσται (Od. 19. 547) is in Plato's mind, though ὕπαρ and ὄναρ are here adverbial accusatives (cf. Cobet V. L.^{2} pp. 523 ff.).

σκιαμαχούντων : ‘fighting about shadows.’ See 517 D note and cf. IX 586 C note Dreamland is also shadowland.

ἐν πόλει ᾗ κτλ. On ᾗ for ἐν ᾗ see note on ἐν ἅπασιν οἶς ἔστι III 402 A. Van Cleef (de attr. in enunt. rel. usu Plat. p. 46) explains the construction as equivalent to ἐν ᾗ πόλει, comparing Men. 96 C, which is however (like Tim. 45 D) only an example of inverse attraction.

ταύτην : an anacoluthon, as in VI 510 E. For the sentiment see I 347 D note

σχοῦσαν =‘which gets’: a gnomic aorist participle. See Goodwin MT. p. 55. Richards conjectures ἔχουσαν, and ἴσχουσαν (which appears in the margin of A) has slight MS authority; but the inchoative sense (516 E note) is better suited to οἱ μέλλοντες ἄρξειν.

ἕκαστοι . The plural implies relays of governors relieving one another from time to time: cf. ἑκάστοις in 540 B.

μετ’ ἀλλήλων κτλ. “Far from the madding crowd's ignoble strife.” ἐν τῷ καθαρῷ means ‘in the undefiled.’ The phrase is half-mystical, as καθαρόν constantly is in Plato. It is natural to think of the myth of the Phaedo (109 B ff. αὐτὴν δὲ τὴν γῆν καθαρὰν ἐν καθαρῷ κεῖσθαι τῷ οὐρανῷ), but we should not translate “sub divo” (Ast), nor even “auf der reinen Höhe” (Schneider). Either version is too precise, and ἐν καθαρῷ does not mean sub divo even in Homer. The Ideas in Plato are τὸ καθαρόν: see Phaed. 79 D ἐκεῖσε οἴχεται εἰς τὸ καθαρόν τε καὶ ἀεὶ ὂν καὶ ἀθάνατον καὶ ὡσαύτως ἔχον.

παντὸς μὴν κτλ. The πόλις ἀνδρῶν ἀγαθῶν has now been found. That Plato intended to recal the prophecy of I 347 D is clear from the verbal echoes between the two passages. On the absence of the preposition before τὸ ἄρχειν see VIII 553 B note

οὐ χρυσίου κτλ. Cf. VIII 547 B φύσει ὄντε πλουσίω τὰς ψυχάς and Phaedr. ad fin. πλούσιον δὲ νομίζοιμι τὸν σοφόν.

πτωχοὶ κτλ. : ‘men who are poor and an-hungered for lack of goods of their own.’ So Schneider and Bosanquet rightly explain the passage. πεινᾶν is used almost in its original etymological sense (πεῖνα from πέν‐ης, πέν‐ομαι): cf. Xen. Cyr. VII 5. 50 and VIII 3. 39 ὦ μακάριε σὺ τά τε ἄλλα καὶ αὐτὸ τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐκ πένητος πλούσιος γεγένησαι· πολὺ γὰρ οἴομαί σε καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἥδιον πλουτεῖν, ὅτι πεινήσας χρημάτων πεπλούτηκας. The contrast with πλούσιοι, and the presence of πτωχοί, make it easy to catch the meaning. The translation ‘hunger after private advantages’ (D. and V., Jowett) is in my opinion incorrect.

τἀγαθόν ‘their good’ (Bosanquet), hardly ‘the chief good’ (Jowett). Not possessing any ἴδια ἀγαθά in the shape of virtue, they are fain to make up for it at the expense of the State.

περιμάχητον κτλ. For the construction cf. (with J. and C.) Phaed. 69 B.

τοῦ ἄρχειν is personified and ἰέναι ἐπ’ αὐτό should be translated ‘woo her.’ Cf. VI 489 D note

οἳ κτλ. The copula is rarely omitted in a relative clause except in statements of proportion like Gorg. 465 C. An example occurs in II 370 E: see also Kühner-Blass Gr. Gr. II 1, p. 41. We ought not to revert to the old reading οἵπερ for οἳ περὶ (with q and E. S. Thompson, Camb. Phil. Soc. Proc. XXI p. 14, who also suggests οἵπερ περὶ), even if— which is far from clear—ὅσπερ can, as Thompson says, dispense with the copula more easily than ὅς .

521C - 523A We have next to consider how we can lead our guardians up into the light. The studies which we re- quire are such as will tend to draw the soul from Becoming to Being, and are at the same time of some practical utility in war. Our earlier training in gymnastic and music will not serve the purpose; nor yet will the mechanical arts. What do you say to Number and Calculation, which enter into every art and science? Their importance in strategy is obvious, and we shall find that they do emphatically, if rightly used, lead the soul towards Intelligence and Being.

ff. For Plato's theory of the higher education see Appendix II on ‘The Propaedeutic Studies of the Republic’ and Appendix III on ‘ Dialectic.’

λέγονται δή τινες κτλ. With εἰς θεοὺς ἀνελθεῖν cf. Plut. de ser. num. vind. 566 A ἔλεγε δὲ ταύτῃ τὸν Διόνυσον εἰς θεοὺς ἀνελθεῖν. If Plato's words are to be taken in their full significance, we can hardly (with J. and C.) suppose that the allusion is to Heracles, Pollux etc., for Heracles' descent to Hades was an incident which happened long before his ascent to Heaven; and Pollux's life among the gods was intermittent. Cf. Schneider in his translation p. 304 note 187. Schneider himself suggests that Plato is thinking of legends about e.g. Aesculapius' deliverance from Hades, after Zeus had smitten him (cf. III 408 C and Roscher's Lexicon d. Mythologie I p. 620), and others have thought of Briareos and the ἑκατόγχειροι: see Il. I 402—405 and cf. Hes. Theog. 617—721. Mr Walter Headlam has pointed out to me that Semele was also raised from Hades to Heaven, citing Paus. II 31. 2 and ib. 37. 5: cf. also Plut. l.c. Διόνυσον εἰς θεοὺς ἀνελθεῖν καὶ τὴν Σεμέλην ἀνάγειν ὕστερον. These examples are certainly more to the point. It is worthy of remark that Justin Martyr in a remarkable passage of his Apologia pro Christianis speaks of the ascent of Asclepius and others into Heaven as Pagan parallels to the Christian doctrine of the Ascension: Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν—σταυρωθέντα καὶ ἀποθανόντα καὶ ἀναστάντα ἀνεληλυθέναι εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, οὐ παρὰ τοὺς παρ’ ὑμῖν λεγομένους υἱοὺς τῷ Διῒ καινόν τι φέρομεν. πόσους γὰρ υἱοὺς φάσκουσι τοῦ Διὸς οἱ παρ’ ὑμῖν τιμώμενοι συγγραφεῖς ἐπίστασθε, Ἑρμῆν μὲν λόγον τὸν ἑρμηνευτικὸν καὶ πάντων διδάσκαλον· Ἀσκληπιὸν δὲ καὶ θεραπευτὴν γενόμενον, κεραυνωθέντα, ἀνεληλυθέναι εἰς οὐρανόν· Διόνυσον δὲ διασπαραχθέντα κτλ. (l.c. I 21: cf. also Dialogus cum Tryphone 69). I was once half inclined to suspect that the clause ὥσπερ ἐξ Αἵδου —ἀνελθεῖν (although it appears in all MSS) might be an early satirical adscript by some Pagan scribe on the doctrine of our Lord's descent into Hell, and subsequent resurrection and ascent into Heaven. τινες might well be a specific allusion (518 B note), and there is more than a suspicion of satire in δή. But I have no longer any doubt that the text is sound.

ὀστράκου ‐‐ περιστροφή . On the different interpretations given by the ancients of this proverb see App. VI. The proverb is derived from the game of ὀστρακίνδα, the authorities for which are cited by Grasberger Erziehung u. Unterricht I pp. 57—60. The players were divided into two parties, separated by a line. A shell, black on one side, and white on the other, was thrown on the ground by one of the boys, who shouted νὺξ ἡμέρα or νὺξ ἢ ἡμέρα, ‘Heads or Tails,’ as he threw it. According as the white or black fell uppermost, one side ran away and the other gave chase. Plato means that education is not, like the ‘spinning of a coin,’ an affair of no consequence, to be settled off-hand, and by chance, but a slow and laborious scientific process, dealing with the gravest of all possible issues. See also App. VI.

ψυχῆς περιαγωγὴ κτλ. : ‘the turning round of a soul from a day which is as night into the true day, that is, the ascent into Being’ (not the tarrying in γιγνόμενον, which is the νυκτερινὴ ἡμέρα). In νυκτερινῆς τινος ἡμέρας (for which see 520 C notes) Plato, more suo, plays on the exclamation ‘νὺξ ἡμέρα’: cf. IV 422 D, E notes (It may be noted that Plato's adaptation is from νὺξ ἡμέρα rather than from νὺξ ἢ ἡμέρα.) The words τοῦ ὄντος—ἐπάνοδον explain the figure, οὖσαν ‘that is’ being used as in φορὰν οὖσαν βάθους 528 D. The daylight in which the ἀπαίδευτος lives is darkness; the true day is the ascent of the soul out of the ὁρατόν and δοξαστόν into the νοητόν: cf. 517 B τὴν δὲ ἄνω ἀνάβασιν καὶ θέαν τῶν ἄνω τὴν εἰς τὸν νοητὸν τόπον τῆς ψυχῆς ἄνοδον τιθεὶς οὐχ ἁμαρτήσει τῆς γ’ ἐμῆς ἐλπἰδος. This and this alone is true philosophy. The phrase τὴν τοῦ ὄντος ἐπάνοδον is copied by Alcinous from Plato (Isag. p. 7 ed. Hermann). Cf. also Clement Strom. V 14 p. 196 Migne ψυχῆς περιαγωγὴ ἐκ νυκτερινῆς τινος ἡμέρας εἰς ἀληθινὴν τοῦ ὄντος (vv. ll. ὄντος and ὄντως ὄντος) οὖσαν ἐπάνοδον κτλ. Other views on the text and interpretation of this passage are discussed in App. VI.

μέντοι . For μέντοι in questions see on I 339 B.

ἔφαμεν . Cf. III 403 E, 416 D and VIII 543 B.

δεῖ ἄρα κτλ. The subject of προσέχειν is τὸ μάθημα ὃ ζητοῦμεν: its object is τοῦτο. With προσέχειν ‘insuper habere’ (a rare use) cf. προσγενέσθαι II 375 E note

ἔν γε τῷ πρόσθεν . II 376 E ff.

τετεύτακεν . τευτάζων· πραγματευόμενος, ἐνδιατρίβων (Tim. Lex. S.V., where Ruhnken elaborately illustrates the word. See also Stephanus-Hase Thes. S.V.). τευτάζω is always, I believe, semi-contemptuous in Plato ( Phil. 56 E. Tim. 90 B). Brugmann's connexion of the word with σεύω (Vergl. Gr. I p. 362) may not be right, but the notion that τευτάζω is for ταὐτάζω (L. and S.) is certainly wrong.

ὅσην κτλ. There is (as J. and C. remind us) a sense in which φιλοσοφία itself is μουσική: cf. III 403 C note and VI 499 D.

ἀντίστροφος κτλ. is best explained by III 410 C—412 A, and κατά τε ἁρμονίαν—εὐρυθμίαν by III 400 D, E.

τοῖς λόγοις . II 377 ff., III 392 A ff.

ἔφη is repeated as in Phaed. 78 A: cf. I 348 D note and VIII 557 C, Euthyd. 296 D (ἦν δ ἐγώ repeated). Here “iteratum ἔφη—ethicam, ut ita dicam, vim habet” (Schneider). I formerly omitted the word (with Flor. T), but now believe it genuine. ἔθη (Π ^{2}, v and two other MSS, with Eusebius Praep. Ev. XIV 13. 3) is unsuitable in point of sense, and also because of ἄττα.

ἀληθινώτεροι : not=‘more true’ but ‘true on the other hand.’ The comparative only points the contrast with μυθώδεις: cf. Homer's well-known γυναικῶν θηλυτεράων.

πρὸς τοιοῦτόν τι κτλ. : ‘useful for any such purpose as you now require.’ ἀγαθόν goes with πρός: cf. with Schneider Xen. Mem. IV 6. 10 <*>ῤ οὖν τοὺς μὲν ἀγαθοὺς πρὸς τὰ δεινὰ καὶ ἐπικίνδυνα ὄντας ἀνδρείους ἡγεῖ εἶναι, τοὺς δὲ κακοὺς δειλούς; The words οἷον—ζητεῖς are equivalent to πρὸς οἷον—ζητεῖς sc. μάθημα ἀγαθὸν εἶναι: cf. ἐν πόλει ᾗ=ἐν πόλει ἐν ᾗ (520 D note), and (for ζητεῖς with infinitive) IV 443 B. The Oxford editors connect ἀγαθόν with τοιοῦτον and not with μάθημα, referring οἷον σὺ νῦν ζητεῖς ‘probably to μάθημα’—a highly unnatural interpretation, because it separates οἷον from τοιοῦτον, and leaves πρός out in the cold. ἄγον (γρ Π and Eusebius l. c.) for ἀγαθόν is an obvious but wholly unnecessary ‘emendation.’ The present passage is Plato's authoritative statement of the relation between his two curricula of education. The aim of the first is morality, and its method habituation; in the second knowledge is attained by a scientific discipline. Cf. II 376 E, VI 502 E notes

αἵ τε κτλ. On τε used ἀνακολούθως see II 373 B note “Quid addere Socrates in animo habuerit, Glauconis intercipientis verba docent: καὶ μὴν τί ἔτ) <*>λλο λείπεται μάθημα” (Schneider).

ἔδοξαν . VI 495 D.

διάνοιαι scarcely means the mathematical sciences here, as J. and C. suggest, but simply ‘modes of thought’: cf. VI 511 D note Plato does not, I believe, use the plural of διάνοια in its peculiar technical sense, and in any case such a meaning is here unsuitable.

τὸ ἕν τε κτλ. Cf. Laws 818 C μήτε ἓν μήτε δύο μήτε τρία μήθ’ ὅλως ἄρτια καὶ περιττὰ δυνάμενος γιγνώσκειν, μηδὲ ἀριθμεῖν τὸ παράπαν εἰδώς and [Epin.] 977 C.

ἀριθμόν τε καὶ λογισμόν . See on λογιστική τε καὶ ἀριθμητική 525 A.

ἐν ταῖς τραγῳδίαις κτλ. Plato speaks as if he were bored to death by Palamedes' damnable iteration. Plays on the subject of Palamedes were written by all three dramatists (see the fragments of Aeschylus 180 ff., Sophocles 426 ff., Euripides 582 ff. Dindorf), and the invention of number or the like is ascribed to him by Aesch. l.c. Soph. Fr. 379 and Eur. l.c. Aeschylus also gives Prometheus the credit of the discovery (P. V. 459 f.).

καίτοι κτλ. ‘Well, what d'ye think of Agamemnon for a general now?’ καίτοι (lit. ‘and yet’ sc. if this was true) is often thus used to introduce a question ‘cum quadam indignatione’ (real or, as here, feigned); for examples see Kugler de part. τοι ap. Pl. p. 18. ποῖόν τινα is derisive, as ποῖος constantly is: see on 1330 A. D. and V.'s translation “Yet what do you think of Agamemnon as a general?” misses the ἦθος of the original, which is correctly reproduced by Schneider and Jowett.

καὶ λογίζεσθαί τε κτλ. καί ‘also,’ because “et aliarum rerum et arithmetices peritum imperatorem esse decet” (Schneider). Cf. VI 506 A. The word is omitted by Π ^{1} q Ξ and some other MSS. καί may of course be spurious, but it was not likely to have been added by a scribe, and the balance of MS evidence is in its favour. The other variants (ἤ and ἢ τό and μᾶλλον ἤ in place of καί) are corruptions due to the erroneous idea that ἄλλο τι is ‘any other’ and not ‘nonne.’

μᾶλλον δὲ κτλ. μᾶλλον δέ is ‘vel potius,’ as usual. ἄνθρωπος=‘human being,’ not ‘anything of a man’ (D. and V.), which suggests an entirely wrong idea. We may compare the Latin use of homo, for example in Cic. ad Quint. II 11. 5 “sed cum veneris, virum te putabo, si Sallusti Empedoclea legeris: hominem non putabo.” For the sense cf. Laws 819 D, where the Greek ignorance of arithmetic appears to Plato ούκ <*>νθρώπινον ἀλλὰ ὑηνῶν τινῶν εἶναι μᾶλλον θρεμμάτων. The knowledge of number is one of the characteristic differences between man and the lower animals: see Tim. 39 B and [Epin.] 978 C.

φύσει belongs to ἀγόντων (Schneider) rather than to εἶναι (Stallbaum and others), as is clear from the antithesis χρῆσθαι δ’ οὐδεὶς αὐτῷ ὀρθῶς (explained in 525 C).

τό γ’ ἐμοὶ δοκοῦν . Cf. 517 B note Plato is careful to eschew the appearance of dogmatism, even where his convictions are most profound.

523A - 524C I distinguish (says Socrates) between two classes of perceptions, those which stimulate the intellect, and those which do not. To the former belong all such sense-presentations as are selfcontradictory. We have here, for example, three fingers. Sight tells us that each is a finger. So far there is no contradiction and the intellect is not roused. But it is otherwise with size and smallness, thickness and thinness, and the like. The perception which reports that suchand-such a thing is hard frequently tells us that it is also soft, and the same, mutatis mutandis, may be said of all perceptions which deal with relative qualities of this kind. In such cases the soul is perplexed, and appeals to the intellect for help. The intellect, promptly respond- ing, apprehends ‘great’ and ‘small’ (for example) as distinct and separate from one another, unlike the senses, by which they were seen together and in confusion. It is thus that we are first led to ask ‘What is the great?’ ‘What is the small?’

ff. In this section of the Republic, Plato ascribes the originating impulse of his intellectual discipline to the stimulus supplied by the self-contradictory evidence of sense-perception. On the connexion of this principle with earlier Greek philosophy see 523 C note, and on the aim and scope of Plato's theory of Education as a whole App. II.

ὡς ἱκανῶς κτλ. is taken by Krohn (Pl. Fr. p. 91) as excluding the possibility of Ideas of concrete things. Such an inference is unwarranted. ἱκανῶς, ‘adequately’ ‘satisfactorily’ (cf. E below), does not imply that sensation can apprehend everything there is to know about e.g. a finger, but merely that in the case of a finger etc., sensible perception is as a rule all that we demand: we are not impelled to summon νόησις to our aid. Even the perception of a finger may awaken the intelligence, and in such cases we shall be led to the Idea of finger (523 D note).

ὡς τῆς αἰσθήσεως κτλ. On αἰσθήσεως see 523 C note ποιούσης has been doubted by Ast, who conjectures νοούσης; “sed αἰσθήσεως non est νοεῖν” (Schneider). The Greek means ‘produces no sound result,’ “nichts zuverlässiges giebt” (Schneider): the product of sensation is, in such cases, ὕπουλον or νοσῶδες. For οὐδὲν ὑγιές metaphorically used cf. Phaed. 90 E and (with Schneider) Ar. Plut. 50, 355 (πρὸς ἀνδρὸς οὐδὲν ὑγιές ἐστ’ εἰργασμένου).

τὰ πόρρωθεν κτλ. readily suggest themselves to Glauco, for they were familiar examples of optical delusion in the Platonic school: cf. (for πόρρωθεν φαινόμενα ) Prot. 356 C, Theaet. 191 B, infra X 602 C ff., and (for ἐσκιαγραφημένα) II 365 C note

αἴσθησιν . Strictly speaking, of course, αἴσθησις by itself does not, and cannot, present us with a judgment of any kind. It merely furnishes a particular sensation, which is referred to our mental picture of the objects in question, and the resulting judgment is not αἴσθησις, but δόξα, which is, according to Plato, a combination of μνήμη and αἴσθησις (see Phil. 38 B ff. with Bury's notes). And in point of fact, the sort of contradictory judgments which are here ascribed to the initial step in the psychological process, viz. αἴσθησις (524 A), have already been attributed to δόξα in V 479 B—479 E. We have already seen that Plato throughout the whole of this part of the Republic is not careful to distinguish between αἰσθητόν (especially ὁρατόν) and δοξαστόν (VI 510 A note); and the same tendency shews itself again here. But in this part of the dialogue, Plato's argument is no way affected by his imperfect analysis of the psychological process involved in such a judgment as ‘This is a finger.’ The relevant consideration is that in such cases the intellect is not, as a rule, aroused, and this is equally true whether we regard the judgment as an act of αἴσθησις alone or as the joint product of αἴσθησις and μνήμη.

εἴτ’ ἐγγύθεν κτλ. (like ὡς ἐγγύθεν etc. below) is said to prevent misapprehension, in view of Glauco's τὰ πόρρωθεν etc. in B.

ὧδε δὲ κτλ. The best commentary on the following exposition is Phaed. 101 A ff., especially 102 B ff.: cf. also Theaet. 154 C. These passages should be carefully read in connexion with the view enunciated here. I have endeavoured to explain some of the wider bearings of Plato's principle in a pamphlet on Classical Education published by Deighton, Bell and Co. 1895: see also App. II and Nettleship Hellen. pp. 152 ff. We should bear in mind that the antithesis of ἕν and πολλά was the fons et origo of Greek philosophy, and runs throughout its entire history. In Plato's time the question had become acute in connexion particularly with the problem of predication, and it was in trying to solve this special form of the antinomy that Plato devised his theory of Ideas. Nothing could be more natural or just than that his philosopher-kings should receive their first scientific impulse from the problem which had proved so great an intellectual stimulus in the past, and which had also led Plato himself to the goal whither he would have his guardians arrive, the contemplation of the Idea.

ἐάν τε ἐν μέσῳ κτλ. :

i.q. <*>άν τε ἐν μέσῳ ᾖ ὁ ὁρώμενος κτλ. This is said with reference to their size: cf. E below and Phaed. 102 B, C, where the difficulty is explained by the theory of Ideas. Thus b is both great and small, great relatively to a, small relatively to c. Similarly with the other antinomies. The Philebus dismisses such puzzles as τὰ δεδημευμένα τῶν θαυμαστῶν περὶ τὸ ἓν καὶ πολλά (14 D)—an indication perhaps of the priority in date of the Republic (cf. VI 505 C note and Jackson in J. Ph. X pp. 263 ff.).

ἀναγκάζεται is said of the ‘Drang nach Wahrheit’: cf. 524 C, E, 525 D and 518 E ff. It is not the ‘nature’ of Soul to acquiesce in falsehood: for man is an οὐράνιον φυτόν, οὐκ ἔγγειον (IV 443 B note).

τῶν πολλῶν . Some exceptional natures, who are endowed with an uncommon share of noble curiosity, may find intellectual stimulus even in perceptions such as these: cf. 523 B note Ast, who missed the point, wanted to excise the phrase. Herwerden seriously proposes <μὰ> τὸν Ἀπόλλω.

οὐδαμοῦ : ‘at no stage’ viz. in the psychological process, not exactly ‘never’ (as Jowett, D. and V. etc.).

παραγγέλλει κτλ. : ‘intimates to the soul that the same thing is both hard and soft when it perceives it to be so.’ With παραγγέλλει (needlessly suspected by Stephanus) cf. Tim. 70 B τοῦ λόγου παραγγείλαντος ὥς τις ἄδικος περὶ αὐτὰ γίγνεται πρᾶξις. The English translators, together with Schneider, appear to take ὡς with αἰσθανομένη (“that it feels the same thing to be both hard and soft” D. and V.). But such a construction is difficult (cf. Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 652) and the meaning scarcely satisfactory. It should be remembered that touch does not always report that an object is both hard and soft, but only when it feels the object hard in relation to one thing and soft in relation to another, and similarly in other cases. This limitation is expressed by αἰσθανομένη (as well as by <*>ν τοῖς τοιούτοις), and explains its emphatic position. I have sometimes thought that <οὕτως> should be added after αἰσθανομένη, but the object can be supplied from ὡς—μαλακόν. Prantl understands the construction in somewhat the same way as I do.

ἀπορεῖν . The word is Socratic: see on 515 D. It is worthy of note that Plato, like Socrates, makes intellectual ἀπορία the beginning of Education. See App. II.

αὕτη ἡ αἵσθησις means ‘this present sensation,’ not the sense of touch in general, and similarly with ἡ τοῦ κούφου κτλ., which J. and C. erroneously understand as a special sense, apparently ‘the same which modern philosophers call the sense of resistance.’ But Plato nowhere recognises any such sense, and if he did, he would call it ἡ τοῦ κούφου καὶ βαρέος, and not ἡ τοῦ κούφου καὶ ἡ τοῦ βαρέος. The parallel in τί ποτε σημαίνει—λέγει shews that Plato means: ‘what do the sensation of light and the sensation of heavy mean by light and heavy, if they indicate, the one that the heavy is light and the other that the light is heavy?’ The last clause contains an elegant chiasmus. Schneider understands αὕτη ἡ αἴσθησις as ἡ αἴσθησις τοῦ σκληροῦ, but it is better taken as deictic: cf. 516 B, 523 C. Otherwise his view agrees with mine.

ἄτοποι . Herwerden's ἄποροι is an elegant conjecture, in view of ἀπορεῖν in A and 524 E; but the text is more forcible.

ἑρμηνεῖαι =‘communications,’ not ‘interpretations,’ as D. and V. translate. αἴσθησις is as it were the ἑρμηνεὺς καὶ ἄγγελος ( Crat. 407 E) between the object of the perception and the soul: cf. παραγγέλλει in A.

λογισμόν . See on λογιστικῷ 525 B.

οὐκοῦν ἐὰν κτλ. Thus: Perception reports ‘This finger’ (let us say) ‘is big-and-little.’ Thereupon the soul is puzzled (ἀπορεῖ), and calls in νόησις. If big-and-little appear (viz. to νόησις) not one but two, then each of them appears distinct from the other, and one: cf. V 476 A and Parm. 143 D. ‘Accordingly—if each appears one, and both together two—νόησις, conceiving as it does of two (τά γε δύο), will conceive of them as separate; for otherwise it would have conceived, not of two, but of one.’ Plato's object is to make out that νόησις, in order to clear up the συγκεχυμένον τι of sensation (διὰ τὴν τούτου σαφήνειαν) is compelled to view sensation's μέγα‐καὶσμικρόν (for example) separately, i.e. as τὸ μέγα and τὸ σμικρόν. These antinomies consequently force us to ask ‘What is the great?’ ‘What is the small?’ etc.; and just herein consists their periagogic or educative value, for to such questions the theory of Ideas alone furnishes an adequate and final answer ( Phaed. 99 B ff.). κεχωρισμένα νοήσει perhaps=‘are separate to νόησις,’ but the ordinary view, which understands νόησις as subject to νοήσει, is better. It may have been this passage of the Republic, or Phaed. 96 E ff., or both which inspired the line of Theopompus τὰ δὲ δύο μόλις (sic) ἕν ἐστιν, ὥς φησιν Πλάτων (D. L. III 26).

καὶ ὄψις : ‘sight also’ sc. as well as νόησις.

ἠναγκάσθη . See 523 D note

— 526 C Now consider — to which of these classes do number and ‘one’ belong? Our perception of ‘one’ is self-contradictory; for any unit which we see, we see both as one and as infinite in number. This is also true of number generally, since it is true of ‘one.’ The science of number is therefore a suitable study on educational as well as on utilitarian grounds, provided it is pursued in such a way as to lead the soul from visible to the invisible numbers of true mathematics. We may add that arithmetical studies are an excellent test of general capacity, a good intellectual discipline, and difficult.

ff. On Plato's treatment of ἀριθμητική—i.e. the Science of Number, not Arithmetic in the modern sense of the word: see on 525 A—reference may be made to Blass de Platone mathematico (Bonnae 1861), Cantor Gesch. d. Mathem. pp. 183 ff., and especially Rothlauf's excellent monograph Die Mathem. z. Platons Zeit u. s. Beziehungen zu ihr (Jena 1878) pp. 19—49. See also App. II.

ποτέρων is intrinsically better than πότερον, which has considerable MS authority (including Α^{1}, Ξ and Μ), and is read by Hermann and Baiter. Cf. τῶν ἀγωγῶν ἂν εἴη κτλ. 525 A. For the error see Introd. § 5.

εἰ δ’ ἀεί τι κτλ. A visible ἕν is always seen both as ἕν and πολλά (one wood, many trees; one tree, many branches etc.).

ἐν αὐτῷ is not ἐν τῷ ἑνί, but ‘in the case in question,’ ‘in such a case,’ “dabei” (Schneider): cf. I 339 E note

αὐτὸ τὸ ἕν . See on αὐτῶν τῶν ἀριθμῶν 525 D.

ἡ περὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὄψις . I formerly read αὐτό instead of τὸ αὐτό with Ξ and a few inferior MSS. αὐτό, which Bekker, Schneider and Stallbaum adopt, is easier, but lacking in authority; and τὸ αὐτό is in reality more elegant. The marked antithesis between ἡ περὶ τὸ ἓν μάθησις (‘the intellectual apprehension of the one’) and ἡ περὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὄψις (‘the visual apprehension of the same’) makes it clear that τὸ αὐτό means ‘the same’ as that with which ἡ μάθησις was concerned (viz. τὸ ἕν), and not (as Hermann imagined) ‘one and the same object of vision’ (like ταὐτόν presently). Plato may have deliberately employed the two forms τὸ αὐτό and ταὐτόν in order to dissociate them from one another.

καὶ ξύμπας ἀριθμὸς κτλ. Because ἀριθμός is τὸ ἐκ μονάδων συγκείμενον πλῆθος (Euclid VII def. 2), or in other words a σύστημα μονάδων (Theo Smyrn. p. 18 ed. Hiller), and thus for example a visible three (i.e. three visible things) presents us with three separate cases of the contrast between ἕν and πολλά.

τοῦτο (see cr. n.) is preferable to τούτῳ, which appears in no MS except A, and would be superfluous after εἴπερ τὸ ἕν. Two MSS do in point of fact omit the word altogether.

λογιστική τε καὶ ἀριθμητική . Greek mathematicians distinguished between ἀριθμητική ‘the science of numbers’ and λογιστική ‘the art of calculation’ (Gow Greek Math. p. 22). It has been doubted whether Plato also held this distinction; but a comparison of Gorg. 451 B, 453 E, Theaet. 198 A (on ἀριθμητική) with Gorg. 451 C, Charm. 166 A, Pol. 259 E (on λογιστική) proves that he did (Rothlauf, l. c. pp. 19—21). Plato does not insist on the distinction here, but we may reasonably suppose that his pupils would begin with λογισμοί (λογιστική) and rise from thence to ἀριθμητική: cf. C, D and Laws 817 E, 819 A ff. See also on λογιστικῷ in B.

ταῦτα : i.e. τὰ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ.

ἀλήθειαν : viz. the Ideas, and ultimately the Idea of Good (517 B).

γενέσεως . See on 519 A.

ἤ =‘alioquin’ (V 463 D note). Liebhold absurdly adds ἔστιν after γενέσθαι.

λογιστικῷ : ‘a reasoning proficient in the art of calculation,’ with a play on λογιστικός in its deeper sense, as Shorey points out (Chicago Studies I p. 222 note 4), comparing the double meaning of παρανομία in IV 424 D. λογισμόν in 524 B prepared the way for this; and the same ambiguity partly explains why Plato puts λογιστική rather than ἀριθμητική in the forefront of this discussion (cf. λογιστικήν below and λογισμούς in C). We readily feel that λογιστική will arouse τὸ λογιστικόν. Cf. also X 602 E note

καὶ πείθειν . προσῆκον ἂν εἴη is carried on: cf. I 334 B note and infra 530 B. J. and C.'s explanation, that “μάθημα (or αὐτό) is to be repeated in the accusative after νομοθετῆσαι and πείθειν ἐπὶ λογιστικὴν ἰέναι,” is untenable.

τῶν μεγίστων is idiomatically used of government: cf. 534 D and Apol. 22 D with my note ad loc.

θέαν ‐‐ αὐτῇ . The ‘nature of numbers’ cannot be fully seen except in their connexion with the Good and with all other νοητά (VI 511 B—D notes). Plato does not of course imply that ἀριθμητική by itself will achieve this result (although it may be doubted whether some of his successors did not exalt the science to something like this dignity: see e.g. the Epinomis): neither ἀριθμητική nor all the propaedeutic studies taken together will ever carry us so far. He only means that the student, having once set foot on the ladder, must not redescend until he reaches the Good. Then and then only will he understand the ‘nature of numbers’ i.e. the Ideas of 1, 2, etc., because only then will he know Numbers dialectically (VI 511 B). On the use of φύσις see X 597 B note

τῇ νοήσει αὐτῇ : ‘by thought alone.’ αὐτῇ is ‘by itself’ i.e. (in this case) unadulterated with αἴσθησις: cf. 525 D note and supra IV 437 E, 438 B, VI 510 B, D notes

ῥᾳστώνης . A few inferior MSS add καί after this word: A alone has ῥᾳστώνης τε. I agree with Schneider in holding that the conjunctions are interpolated to avoid the concurrence of genitives, in which there is, however, no difficulty at all: cf. V 449 A note

νῦν καὶ ἐννοῶ . Cf. (with J. and C.) II 370 A ἐννοῶ γὰρ καὶ αὐτὸς εἰπόντος σοῦ .

λογισμούς : see on λογιστικῷ in B.

αὐτῶν τῶν ἀριθμῶν : ‘numbers themselves,’ e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4 etc., in other words individual mathematical numbers and nothing more. αὐτῶν means ‘by themselves,’ ‘alone,’ i.e. with nothing αἰσθητόν about them, such as is present in the ὁρατὰ ἢ ἁπτὰ σώματα ἔχοντας ἀριθμούς (=Aristotle's αἰσθητικοὶ or σωματικοὶ ἀριθμοί: v. Bonitz Ind. Arist. s. v. ἀριθμός), e.g. one man, two men etc. These mathematical numbers are not Ideas, but (like τὰ μαθηματικά generally) a half-way house between sensibles and Ideas, and for this reason valuable as a προπαιδεία to Dialectic: cf. 526 A note and see on VI 510 D and App. I. For αὐτῶν in this sense cf. αὐτὸ τὸ ἕν in E, αὐτῇ τῇ νοήσει 526 B and ἀριθμῶν αὐτῶν ἀλλ’ οὐ σώματα ἐχόντων [Epin.] 990 C.

δεινούς . The word δύο, which was originally written after δεινούς (see cr. n.) in Α and Π, is probably due to a marginal adscript on the words ἐάν τις αὐτὸ τὸ ἓν ἐπιχειρῇ—τέμνειν. Burnet neatly conjectures δεινοὺς αὖ, but αὖ is inappropriate here.

ἐάν τις κτλ. αὐτὸ τὸ ἕν means ‘the unit itself’ i.e. the mathematical number ‘one’ which is ex hypothesi and by definition ἀμέριστον καὶ ἀδιαίρετον (Theo Smyrn. 18). If any one maintains that the mathematical unit is divisible, the mathematicians καταγελῶσί τε καὶ οὐκ ἀποδέχονται. Quâ mathematicians, they never condescend to justify either this or any other mathematical definition (οὐδένα λόγον οὔτε αὑτοῖς οὔτε ἄλλοις ἔτι ἀξιοῦσι—διδόναι VI 510 C), and think it ridiculous that any one should question the foundations of their science. The moment they begin to render an account of their ὑποθέσεις they cease to be mathematicians and become διαλεκτικοί. See also on VI 510 C and App. III.

ἐὰν σὺ κερματίζῃς κτλ. : ‘if you mince it, they multiply it.’ If you insist on dividing their unit, they insist on multiplying it (viz. by your divisor), and so defeat your purpose and keep the unit one and indivisible as before. ‘I cut that unit up!’ you exclaim. ‘I multiply it!’ is their reply; and you are checkmated. They have just as much right to multiply it as you to divide it; for the mathematical unit is only a ὑπόθεσις when all is said and done. Plato is humorously describing a passage-atarms between mathematicians and some obstinate fellow who will not admit the indivisibility of their unit. The words ‘back again’ in D. and V.'s translation “they multiply it back again” correspond to nothing in the Greek and suggest an erroneous idea; nor can the Greek mean “that division is regarded by them as a process of multiplication, for the fractions of one continue to be units” (as Jowett suggests). Each of these explanations misses the humour of the original. The word μόρια is doubtless genuine, though its rejection (proposed by Herwerden) would improve the antithesis. Cf. μόριόν τε ἔχον ἐν ἑαυτῷ οὐδέν (526 A), for which μόρια here prepares the way.

περὶ ποίων κτλ. On the derisive ποῖος see 522 D n. Mathematical units are in every case ( ἕκαστον) equal each to each (πᾶν παντί), and destitute of parts; whereas sensible units (e.g. one horse, one cow etc.) are not equal to each other, and are divisible. In πᾶν παντί Plato copies the formal language of mathematics: cf. ἑκατέραν ἑκατέρᾳ and the like in Euclid passim. For the sense see Phil. 56 C ff., where these two kinds of number are made the basis of a distinction between philosophical or scientific and popular or unscientific ἀριθμητική. It should be carefully noted that a plurality of mathematical units is expressly recognised both here (ἴσον τε ἕκαστον πᾶν παντί κτλ.) and in Phil. l. c. (μονάδα μονάδος ἑκάστης τῶν μυρίων μηδεμίαν ἄλλην ἄλλης διαφέρουσαν). This entirely confirms what Aristotle tells us, viz. that Plato placed μαφηματικά between αἰσθητά and εἴδη, τῷ τὰ μὲν πόλλ’ ἄττα ὅμοια εἶναι, τὸ δὲ εἶδος αὐτὸ ἓν ἕκαστον μόνον (Met. A 6. 987^{b} 14 ff.). There are therefore three kinds of μονάδες in Plato's scheme—the Ideal μονάς, of which only one exists, the Mathematical and the Sensible, of each of which there are many. See on VI 510 D and App. I, where I have quoted further evidence on this subject, and endeavoured to explain the philosophical truth which is contained in the Platonic doctrine of mathematical numbers, magnitudes etc. as intermediates between the Ideas and sensibles.

ὧν κτλ. ὧν is for περὶ ὧν rather than <*> (as J. and C. hold): cf. VI 510 D οὐ περὶ τούτων διανοούμενοι, and (for the grammatical construction) III 402 A note διανοηθῆναι should be understood in the technical sense of VI 511 E.

τῷ ὄντι ἀναγκαῖον . Perhaps with a play on προσαναγκάζον (J. and C.): see on τῷ ὄντι VI 511 B.

ὀξεῖς κτλ. Plato was very emphatic on this point: see Laws 747 B and 819 C φύονται was restored by Schneider from the best MSS. Earlier editions read φαίνονται on inferior authority.

ἂν ‐‐ γυμνάσωνται κτλ. Even Isocrates admits this, although his self-styled ‘Philosophy’ was something very different from Plato's: see Antid. 265—266, especially γυμνασίαν μέντοι τῆς ψυχῆς καὶ παρασκευὴν φιλοσοφίας καλῶ τὴν διατριβὴν τὴν τοιαύτην (mathematical studies).

ἅ γε μείζω κτλ. is an important principle with Plato, who does not believe in any royal road to learning: cf. 530 C and VI 503 E. In antiquity, while algebra was still unknown, ἀριθμητική must have taxed the powers of thought far more than now, and been, from the Platonic point of view, all the more valuable on that account as an educative discipline. The treatment of numbers by Euclid Books VII—X will illustrate Plato's observation: see Gow Gk Math. pp. 74—85, with De Morgan's remarks there quoted.

ὡς τοῦτο . ὡς=‘quam’ instead of ἤ is found sporadically in Greek literature after comparatives: see my note on Ap. 30 B, 36 D. To say that in all such cases the comparative is equivalent to οὕτω with the positive is only to shelve the difficulty; and it is better to recognise the usage as exceptional than summarily to dismiss it as a barbarism (with Thompson on Gorg. 492 E). J. and C. after οὐδὲ πολλά supply ἃ πόνον οὕτω μέγαν παρέχεται, but the ellipse is too difficult, especially as οὐδὲ πολλά is only a kind of afterthought to or elaboration of οὐ ῥᾳδίως.

526C - 527C Next in order comes Plane Geometry. On its practical uses we need not dilate; the important question is whether it tends to turn the soul towards Being. A mere tiro in Geometry knows that it is not a practical art, in spite of such terms as ‘squaring’ etc., which the poverty of language compels it to employ. The object of geometrical knowledge is ever-existent Being. For this reason we shall prescribe the study of Geometry, a subject which is moreover practically useful and an excellent educational propaedeutic.

ff. On the subject of this section consult Blass and Cantor referred to on 524 D, Rothlauf l.c. pp. 50—69, and App. II to this book. The great importance attached by Plato and his school to geometry and kindred studies is attested from many sources: see for example Philoponus in Arist. de an. I 3 (Comment. in Arist. p. 117. 26 ὁ Πλάτων οὗ καὶ πρὸ τῆς διατριβῆς ἐπεγέγραπτο Ἀγεωμέτρητος μὴ εἰσίτω, Tzetzes Chil. VIII 973 μηδεὶς ἀγεωμέτρητος εἰσίτω μου τὴν στέγην, Proclus in Euclid. pp. 29 f. Friedlein Πλάτων καθαρτικὴν τῆς ψυχῆς καὶ ἀναγωγὸν τὴν μαθηματικὴν εἶναι σαφῶς ἀποφαίνεται, τὴν ἀχλὺν ἀφαιροῦσαν τοῦ νοεροῦ τῆς διανοίας φωτὸς κτλ., and D. L. IV 10 πρὸς δὲ τὸν μήτε μουσικὴν μήτε γεωμετρίαν μήτε ἀστρονομίαν μεμαθηκότα, βουλόμενον δὲ παρ’ αὐτὸν (Ξενοκράτη) φοιτᾶν· Πορεύου, ἔφη· λαβὰς γὰρ οὐκ ἔχεις φιλοσοφίας. Among Plato's companions or pupils in the Academy, Eudoxus and Menaechmus rendered the most conspicuous services to mathematical science (see Allman Greek Geometry from Thales to Euclid pp. 129—179), and Euclid himself, according to Proclus (in Euclid. p. 68), was τῇ προαιρέσει Πλατωνικὸς καὶ τῇ φιλοσοφία ταύτῃ οἰκεῖος. That ὁ θεὸς ἀεὶ γεωμετρεῖ was a characteristic and profound saying of Plato's (Plut. Conv. Disp. VIII 2. 718 C ff.), on the meaning of which see App. I.

τὸ ἐχόμενον τούτου . If γεωμετρία i.e. ἡ τοῦ ἐπιπέδου (plane surfaces) πραγματεία (528 D) concerns itself with δευτέρα αὔξη, and Stereometry with τρίτη αὔξη, we may infer that ἀριθμητική deals with the πρώτη αὔξη, i.e. presumably the line, which, according to the Pythagoreans, is a collection of points (cf. Laws 894 A and Rothlauf l.c. p. 51). And in point of fact the line represented number among the Pythagoreans exactly as the point is the geometrical symbol for the unit: cf. IX 587 D note Hence ἐχόμενον τούτου: we take the δευτέρα αὔξη after the first. See also App. II to this Book, and App. I to Book VIII Part I § 2.

ἢ γεωμετρίαν κτλ. The sequence —Geometry after ἀριθμητική—was probably a usual one with teachers, even in Plato's time: see Grasberger Erziehung u. Unterricht II p. 340 and cf. App. II.

ὅσον μὲν κτλ. is exactly the attitude of the historical Socrates, as Krohn (Pl. St. p. 376) and others have pointed out, comparing Xen. Mem. IV 7. 2 ff. Practical necessities of this kind probably originated the science (Gow Gk Math. pp. 134 ff.) and gave it its name γεωμετρία. The name μαθήματα (or μαθηματικά) in the special sense of Mathematics owes its origin, no doubt, to the position occupied by mathematical studies in Plato's μαθήματα: but the usage itself is not found till Aristotle (Rothlauf l.c. p. 18), although it is clear from [Epin.] 990 D, that some Platonists resented the γελοῖον ὄνομα γεωμετρίαν. Glauco represents the practical point of view throughout: cf. 527 D.

καὶ πορείαις . “Scriptum vellem καὶ ἐν πορείαις” (Stallbaum). The idiom is common enough: see KühnerBlass Gr. Gr. II 1, p. 548.

τὸ εὐδαιμονέστατον τοῦ ὄντος is cited by Stumpf (l.c. p. 95 note 3) in support of his identification of the Idea of Good with God: see on VI 505 A.

γένεσιν . 519 A note

αὕτη ἡ ἐπιστήμη κτλ. : ‘the nature of this science is in precise contradiction to’ etc. πᾶν τοὐναντίον is adverbial, and ἔχει intransitive. In what follows Plato is not (as Stallbaum strangely supposes) censuring contemporary geometricians, “sed vitium quoddam ipsius scientiae” (Schneider, who refers to VI 510 B—511 A), for even those ὅσοι καὶ σμικρὰ γεωμετρίας ἔμπειροι agree with him. It is however probable on other grounds that Plato himself was afraid lest his pupils should depend too much on geometrical figures and instruments; and Plutarch tells us that he reproved Eudoxus and others for this very fault: ἀπόλλυσθαι γὰρ οὕτω καὶ διαφθείρεσθαι τὸ γεωμετρίας ἀγαθὸν αὖθις ἐπὶ τὰ αἰσθητὰ παλινδρομούσης, καὶ μὴ φερομένης ἄνω μηδὲ ἀντιλαμβανομένης τῶν ἀϊδίων καὶ ἀσωμάτων εἰκόνων, πρὸς οἷσπερ ὢν ὁ θεὸς ἀεὶ θεός ἐστι (Conv. Disp. VIII 2. 718 F: cf. also Vit. Marc. 14. 5—7. The anecdote refers in particular to stereometrical instruments, but its moral applies equally to the study of plane geometry). See Rothlauf l.c. pp. 66 ff. and Gow Gk Math. p. 181.

ἀναγκαίως ‘in beggarly fashion’ (“nothgedrungenen Weise” Prantl). They are ‘hard up’ for words to express their meaning, and must consequently use language which does not: cf. VI 510 D. J. and C.'s explanation “with merely practical needs in view” is quite wrong; nor does the word appear to me to contain “a facetious allusion to geometrical necessity” (in the sense of V 458 D), as they assert. Madvig's ἀκάκως for ἀναγκαίως is a singularly unhappy suggestion.

παρατείνειν = ‘to apply,’ e.g. a parallelogram to a given line: cf. Men. 87 A (παρὰ τὴν δοθεῖσαν—γραμμὴν παρατείναντα κτλ.) with E. S. Thompson's note. Blass takes the same view (de Pl. math. p. 19). Euclid's expression for this is παραβάλλειν (X 18 ff. and passim: cf. Cantor l.c. p. 145). The ordinary translation ‘produce’ (as e.g. a line) has no authority, and Euclid's word for ‘producing’ a line is ἐκβάλλειν or προσεκβάλλειν (I 5, 17 and passim. So also in Aristotle: see the Ind. Arist. s.v.).

προστιθέναι : ‘to add,’ sc. one μέγεθος to another in any geometrical construction: cf. Nicom. Introd. Ar. II 12. 2. Euclid uses συντιθέναι, σύγκειμαι (X 16 and passim) of such an operation.

φθεγγόμενοι is said “non sine eleganti quadam irrisione” (Stallbaum): cf. VI 505 C note

τὸ δέ : ‘whereas’: cf. I 340 D note

τοῦ ἀεὶ ὄντος . Plato held the objects of mathematical study to be ἀΐδια καὶ ἀκίνητα ‘eternal and unchangeable’ (Arist. Met. A 6. 987^{b} 16: cf. VI 510 C ff., VII 526 A note), but not Ideas. The Platonic meaning of τοῦ ἀεὶ ὄντος is certainly not exhausted by the observation that “the truths of every science are always true” (Bosanquet). ὄντος implies substantial existence, independently of our thoughts, and independently also of particulars. The existence of τὰ μαθηματικά as μιμήματα τῶν ὄντων or copies of the Ideas, ‘moving in and out of’ the material substance of the Universe, which they stamp with an infinite diversity of forms and shapes, is a cardinal doctrine of Plato's physics ( Tim. 50 C al.), and Bosanquet appears to me to rob the words of Plato of half their significance, in the fruitless attempt to find in his ontology nothing but what commends itself to certain schools of philosophy in the present day. See V 476 E and App. I.

τοῦ ποτέ κτλ. : ‘that which at some particular time is a particular instance of becoming and perishing.’ τι γιγνομένου= ὄντος (the copula) γιγνομένου τινός, but γιγνομένου itself involves the copula, the presence of which would here be intolerable. Cf. V 473 D note and Euthyph. 10 C εἴ τι γίγνεται ἤ τι πάσχει, οὐχ ὅτι γιγνόμενόν ἐστι, γίγνεται, ἀλλ’ ὅτι γίγνεται, γιγνόμενόν ἐστι. Here τι is indeclinable like τι in Lach. 200 B, Menex. 247 B (οἰομένῳ τι εἶναι), Euthyd. 303 C (δοκούντων τι εἶναι), οὐδέν, μηδέν etc. tolerably often in tragedy, and the adverbial use of ἀμφότερα and τἀναντία (e.g. Lach. 185 A ὑέων γὰρ που ἢ χρηστῶν ἢ τἀναντία γενομένων κτλ.): cf. also (with Schneider Addit. p. 57) Procl. in Tim. 136 E τοῦ—ἀδιαιρέτως πάντα ὄντος et al. The indeclinable form adds to the emphasis, and indeed τινὸς (if placed after ποτέ) could hardly stand at all. Schneider translates “des etwas werdenden und vergehenden,” apparently taking τι predicatively with γιγνομένου. But the expression ‘that which becomes something’ suggests a substratum underlying γιγνόμενον, whereas the only correct antithesis to ὄν (τοῦ ἀεὶ ὄντος) is γιγνόμενον itself. Stallbaum wrongly explains τι as “aliqua ratione.” A few inferior MSS omit the word. I believe the text is sound, though possibly τι should be accented, as in the exactly similar Aristotelian usage of τις “ad significandam τὴν ἀτομότητα” (Bonitz Ind. Ar. p. 763) e.g. ὁ τὶς ἄνθρωπος. The use of ποτέ also reminds us of the ποτέ of the Categories.

γεωμετρική is an adjective (Schneider).

σχεῖν . The tense is inchoative or ingressive, as usual: see 516 E note

καλλιπόλει . Socrates rallies Glauco on his ‘braif toun.’ The word, as J. and C. point out, is full of tenderness and affection. Callipolis was the name of several cities in Greece (PapeBenseler Gr. Eigennam. s.v.), a fact which sufficiently refutes Herwerden's doubts as to the formation of the word: see also (with Schneider) Lobeck's Phrynichus pp. 600—607. Herwerden ought not to have revived the tasteless and prosaic conjectures καλῇ πόλει (Π^{2}) and καλλίστῃ πόλει (Ξ).

αὐτοῦ : viz. τοῦ μαθήματος.

καὶ δὴ καὶ κτλ. See on 526 B.

ἡμμένος τε . Herwerden excises τε, comparing 526 D; but the MSS are a safer guide.

527C - 528E Shall we prescribe Astronomy as our third subject? Glauco approves, pointing to its usefulness in practical affairs. After reproving his friend for advocating the Platonic curriculum chiefly on this ground, Socrates observes that the solid should first be studied in itself, and afterwards the solid in motion. In other words Stereometry should precede Astronomy. Although the problems of Stereometry are not yet solved, we may hope for success under proper guidance, and with the support of the State.

ff. On stereometry in the age of Plato see Rothlauf l.c. pp. 69—74, Cantor l.c. pp. 194—202, Tannery Rev. Phil. X (1880) pp. 523 ff. The most famous stereometrical problem of Plato's time was the so-called ‘Delian problem’ or duplication of the cube, and it is highly probable that Plato had this question in his mind when he wrote the present chapter. A dramatic poet, whom Valckenaer supposed to be Euripides, had already made allusion to it in the lines μικρόν γ’ ἔλεξας βασιλικοῦ σηκὸν τάφου· | διπλάσιος ἔστω. τοῦ καλοῦ (v.l. κύβου) δὲ μὴ σφαλεὶς | δίπλαζ’ ἕκαστον κῶλον ἐν τάχει τάφου (Nauck Trag. Gr. Fr. p. 676). The story runs that the Delians, having been commanded by an oracle to double a certain altar, were in great perplexity, διαπεμψαμένους δὲ τοὺς παρὰ τῷ Πλάτωνι ἐν Ἀκαδημίᾳ γεωμέτρας ἀξιοῦν αὑτοῖς εὑρεῖν τὸ ζητούμενον (Eratosthenes, quoted by Eutocius in Archimed. III pp. 102 ff. Heiberg. See also Plut. de gen. Socr. 7. 579 B—D and de εἰ ap. Delphos 6. 386 E f., and Johannes Philop. quoted by Sturm Das Delische Problem p. 10). Plato favourably entertained their application, and the students of the Academy set to work with extraordinary enthusiasm. A remarkable stimulus was thereby given to the study of stereometry, and the Delian problem was successfully solved. The anecdote may of course be apocryphal, but we have not the smallest reason for rejecting it. The memory of such incidents is usually cherished with peculiar care in the history of a College, and Eratosthenes (276—194 B.C.) was born only seventy-one years after Plato's death. In any case the duplication of the cube may well have seemed in Plato's time a question of the first importance for the purposes of stereometrical science, for, as Tannery remarks (l.c. p. 256), the duplication of the square, which had already been discovered ( Men. 82 B ff.), was believed to be the key to plane problems, and so it was probably surmised that the διπλασιασμὸς τοῦ κύβου would give the solution of a whole series of solid problems. English readers will find a short account of this classical ἀπορία with some of its ancient solutions in Rouse Ball's Math. Recreations and Problems pp. 154 ff. The most elaborate and exhaustive history of the problem and its solutions in antiquity is that of Sturm Das Delische Problem 1896.

ἐμοὶ γοῦν . Schneider and others write ἔμοιγ’ οὖν (see cr. n.), but οὖν is too strongly illative for this passage. Cf. I 335 E note

τὸ γὰρ περὶ κτλ. Cf. 526 C note and Xenophon there quoted, esp. § 4 ἐκέλευε δὲ καὶ ἀστρολογίας ἐμπείρους γίγνεσθαι, καὶ ταύτης μέντοι μέχρι τοῦ νυκτός τε ὥραν καὶ μηνὸς καὶ ἐνιαυτοῦ δύνασθαι γιγνώσκειν κτλ. and infra τὰς ὥρας τῶν εἰρημένων διαγιγνώσκοντες. The ana logy of this passage suggests that in Plato καὶ (‘both’) μηνῶν καὶ ἐνιαυτῶν depends on ὥρας, which is the accusative plural: cf. Laws 812 B εὐαισθήτους δεῖν γεγονέναι περί τε τοὺς ῥυθμοὺς κτλ. Practical astronomy will enable one to tell both the time of month and the time of year by looking at the moon and the sun. For ὥρας μηνῶν cf. also, besides the passage of Xenophon just quoted, Eur. Alc. 449 f. Σπάρτᾳ κυκλὰς ἁνίκα Καρνείου περινίσσεται ὥρα | μηνός κτλ. Schneider and the English translators take ὥρας as genitive and parallel with μηνῶν κτλ., but it is difficult to see what εὐαισθητοτέρως ἔχειν περὶ ἐνιαυτῶν can mean: for ἐπιμέλειαν ποιεῖσθαι ἐνιαυτοῦ καὶ ὡρῶν in VI 488 D is quite different. Schleiermacher translates the passage correctly.

εὐαισθητοτέρως . For this form of the comparative adverb see I 343 E note

ἡδὺς εἶ : ‘you amuse me.’ See I 337 D note

μὴ δοκῇς κτλ. The usefulness of ‘useless’ studies is a fundamental principle in Plato's theory; and (as Schneider points out) ὅτι ἐν τούτοις κτλ. is intended to shew that liberal studies are in the highest and truest sense useful.

τὸ δ’ ἔστιν . I 340 D note

χαλεπόν . Cobet's παγχάλεπον (after Nicom. Introd. Ar. III 7) is a wholly gratuitous change: see App. VII.

ἑκάστου . Every human being has an ὄργανον ψυχῆς viz. νοῦς: it is indeed the possession of νοῦς which makes him at once truly human and therewithal divine (VI 501 B note). The genitive is much more expressive than ἑκάστῳ, which Herwerden proposes: cf. 518 C note, and for the combination of genitives V 449 A note

ἐκκαθαίρεται κτλ. : ‘is purged and rekindled.’ In passages like this Plato hurls his metaphors about with Shakespearian vehemence and profusion. Cf. II 365 C note, and see the admirable remarks on metaphor by the author of the treatise περὶ ὕψους 32. 4 πλήθους καὶ τόλμης μεταφορῶν—τὰ εὔκαιρα καὶ σφοδρὰ πάθη καὶ τὸ γενναῖον ὕψος εἶναί φημι ἴδιά τινα ἀλεξιφάρμακα, ὅτι τῷ ῥοθίῳ τῆς φορᾶς ταυτὶ πέφυκεν ἅπαντα τἄλλα παρασύρειν καὶ προωθεῖν, μᾶλλον δὲ καὶ ὡς ἀναγκαῖα πάντως εἰσπράττεσθαι τὰ παράβολα, καὶ οὐκ ἐᾷ τὸν ἀκροατὴν σχολάζειν περὶ τὸν τοῦ πλήθους ἔλεγχον διὰ τὸ συνενθουσιᾶν τῷ λέγοντι. The eye of soul is purged of its blindness: its smouldering fires flame forth afresh. To translate “‘is polished’ like a soiled mirror” (J. and C.), besides being wrong, falls far below the level of Plato's ὕψος. The chiasmus in ἐκκαθαίρεται—τυφλούμενον adds to the literary effect. On other readings in this passage see App. VII.

οἷς μὲν οὖν κτλ. The logical sequence is somewhat difficult. Do not (says Socrates) be so anxious to persuade οἱ πολλοί of the usefulness of our curriculum. Its true utility is difficult to understand, and οἱ πολλοί will not easily be persuaded of it. Those who agree with us about its true utility will highly approve of your proposals; but οἱ πολλοί will not, for they can see no practical advantage (worthy of mention) accruing from them. δόξεις λέγειν attributes the proposals to Glauco as in D μὴ δοκῇς—προστάττειν, and ἄλλην is said with reference to τούτου. To the ὠφελία of intellectual salvation such persons are blind; and they cannot see any other, i.e. any practical ὠφελία worth mentioning in Plato's studies. ἄλλην cannot be understood as “beyond their practical applications” (D. and V.) unless we refer it to Glauco's remark τὸ γὰρ περὶ κτλ. in D, to the detriment both of grammar and of sense.

527E - 528A 35 σκόπει οὖν κτλ. ‘Very well: make up your mind once for all with which of these parties you are discoursing: or are you not addressing your remarks to either, but’ etc.? Glauco's insistence on the practical uses of astronomy may be all very well with a popular audience, but are out of place in a philosophical discussion. For this peremptory αὐτόθεν cf. Symp. 213 A. οὐ πρὸς οὐδετέρους lit. ‘not to neither’: cf. the familiar μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ for μᾶλλον ἤ (Kühner Gr. Gr. II pp. 771—773). I understand ἢ—ὄνασθαι (with Ast) as an independent question: for it is difficult to supply ‘whether.’ Schneider's objections to this view are based on the idea that ἢ οὐ (if interrogative) must have an affirmative answer; but οὐ has nothing to do with ἤ, and only balances ἀλλά: cf. Ar. Plut. 372 μῶν οὐ κέκλοφας, ἀλλ’ ἥρπακας; Plato makes this clear by placing the two contrasting clauses in close juxtaposition. οὐ is omitted by Ξ and some inferior MSS. The text is, however, sound, and none of the proposed corrections— σὺ for οὐ (Schneider), εἰ πρὸς οὐδετέρους (Madvig), οὐδὲ πρὸς ἑτέρους (Cobet), εἰ οὐδὲ πρὸς ἑτέρους (Baiter), ἦ που πρὸς οὐδετέρους (Liebhold)—will bear examination, though Cobet's deserves the praise of elegance.

ἄναγε ‐‐ εἰς τοὐπίσω : ‘fall back then’: cf. Ar. Birds 383 ἄναγ’ ἐπὶ σκέλος, with Blaydes' note. The metaphor is not naval (as Ast and Stallbaum hold), but military, nor is ἀνάγειν (ναῦν) even in naval language ‘inhibere,’ but ‘put out to sea,’ as in Hdt. VII 100, VIII 76 et al. and occasionally in Attic (for ἀνάγεσθαι). Cf. ἀνεχώρησας 528 D.

οὐκ ὀρθῶς : see on τὸ ἐχόμενον τούτου 526 C. The subjects ought to follow each other in the order of their complexity: see App. II. Plato's error was of course deliberately “contrived to emphasize the principle which it violated” (Bosanquet), and also, it may be added, to enable him to call especial attention to the study of Stereometry, on which he laid very great stress (527 D note).

ἤδη should be taken with ὄν (‘already in revolution’), not (as D. and V.) with λαβόντες.

δευτέραν αὔξην κτλ. It is better (with Schneider) to translate αὔξη by ‘increase’ than by ‘dimension’; for αὔξη always implies something increased, and in the phrases δευτέρα αὔξη etc. this ‘something’ is the point. Among the Pythagoreans, who probably originated these expressions, the line was regarded as an αὔξη of the point, the plane of the line, the solid of the plane. See App. II.

κύβων αὔξην : ‘cubic increase,’ i.e. the increase which belongs to, or results in, cubes, with perhaps also a play on a different sense of κύβων αὔξην, ‘how to increase cubes,’ as in the famous ‘Delian problem’ of the διπλασιασμὸς κύβου (so also Tannery l. c. X p. 525). See on 527 D. But as cubes are not the only solid bodies, Plato adds τὸ βάθους μετέχον. By Aristotle's time the name στερεομετρία had been invented to designate the science as a whole (An. Post. II 13. 78^{b} 38).

ταῦτά γε ‐‐ ηὑρῆσθαι . Plato does not of course mean to say that the study of Stereometry had not yet been invented, for the subject had already in one form or another engaged the attention of the Py thagoreans, Anaxagoras and Democritus (Blass l.c. p. 21, Tannery l.c. X p. 524), not to speak of Hippocrates of Chios, who had concerned himself in the fifth century B.C. with the question of the duplication of the cube (Allman Gk Geometry etc. pp. 84 ff.). He only means that its problems had not yet been ‘discovered’ ( ηὑρῆσθαι as in Pythagoras' ηὕρηκα) or solved. When and by whom the ‘Delian problem’ in particular was definitively solved to the satisfaction of the Academy, is not quite clear. The tradition which ascribes a solution of it to Plato himself is beset with grave difficulties, as Blass (l.c. pp. 21—30) and others have pointed out (see especially Cantor l.c. pp. 194—202 and Sturm Das Delische Problem pp. 49 ff.). It is however universally allowed that the principle involved —the finding of “two mean proportionals between one straight line and another twice as long” (Gow Gk Math. p. 169) —was first stated by Hippocrates of Chios and well known to Plato, at all events when he wrote the Timaeus (32 A ff.: see also Häbler Ueber zwei Stellen in Platons Timaeus etc. pp. 1—17). We may perhaps infer from οὔπω ηὑρῆσθαι that Plato did not think a final solution of this as of other stereometrical problems had yet been reached: there is at all events nothing in the Republic to justify the curious statement of Diogenes Laertius that (Ἀρχύτας) πρῶτος κύβου διπλασιας μὸν εὗρεν, ὥς φησι Πλάτων ἐν πολιτείᾳ (VIII 83), although it is probably true that Archytas was the first to offer a solution of the famous difficulty (see Sturm l.c. pp. 22—32). In D. L. l.c. Cobet reads πρῶτος κύβον εὗρεν κτλ., whether on his own responsibility, or on MS authority, he does not tell us. See also on 527 D, 528 C.

ὅτι τε κτλ. In Laws 819 E ff. Plato reproaches the Greeks for their ignorance of and indifference to stereometrical questions.

ἐντίμως ἔχει : ‘holds in honour,’ as in VIII 548 A. The expression usually means ‘is honoured’ (Xen. An. II 1. 7): hence ἄγει for ἔχει is proposed by Herwerden, who compares 528 C, 538 E. But the error is not an easy one in such a MS as A, and it is safer to keep ἔχει and take the phrase as=ἐν τιμῇ ἔχει (cf. ἐν ἀτιμίῃ ἔχει Hdt. III 3, ἐν εὐνοίᾳ ἔχειν [Dem.] 284. 11, and Jebb on Soph. Ant. 639) as ἄγειν ἐντίμως=ἄγειν ἐν τιμῇ (538 E).

ὡς νῦν ἔχει belongs no doubt to the following clauses (IV 419 A note): but see also on 528 C.

μεγαλοφρονούμενοι is condemned as un-Attic by Cobet (V. L.^{2} pp. 232, 531); but μεγαλόφρων, μεγαλοφροσύνη are Attic, and Xenophon uses μεγαλοφρονεῖν. μεγαλαυχούμενοι (Cobet's emendation) would mean ‘vaunting’: cf. III 395 D.

εἰ δὲ πόλις κτλ. is perhaps the earliest demand in literature for the State-encouragement—we might almost say the State-endowment—of pure science (cf. Krohn Pl. St. p. 169). Plato implies that in his city this claim will be fully satisfied; and the Platonic Utopia is in fact “la revendication du pouvoir pour la science” (Tannery l.c. p. 521).

ξυνεπιστατοῖ κτλ. : ‘should cooperate with the superintendent’ etc. not (as Jowett) ‘become the director of these studies’: for a special ἐπιστάτης—Plato has just said—is needed in any case. Plato's picture of the odium stereometricum, if the phrase may be allowed, is evidently drawn from life. He seems to speak as if he had himself an ἐπιστάτης ready, and wished to secure for him public support in order that students might be willing to work under him. Now although ὡς νῦν ἔχει belongs, strictly speaking, to the following clause, the words may, so far as the Greek is concerned, be connected with ἔπειτα καὶ γενομένου, and will then be equivalent to ὡς νῦν ἐγένετο ἐπιστάτης. I think it not impossible that Plato intended his readers to suspect him of this further meaning. If there is anything in this conjecture, to whom does Plato allude? Not, surely, to himself, although some have suspected the philosopher of blowing his own trumpet in a somewhat similar passage of the Phaedo (78 A): see Lutoslawski's Plato's Logic pp. 263 f. We are told by Plutarch de genio Socratis 7. 579 C that Plato referred the Delian deputation to Eudoxus, telling them that the problem was οὔ τοι φαῦλον οὐδ’ ἀμβλὺ διανοίας ὁρώσης, ἄκρως δὲ τὰς γραμμὰς ἠσκημένης ἔργον εἶναι· τοῦτο μὲν οὖν Εὔδοξον αὐτοῖς τὸν Κνίδιον ἢ τὸν Κυζικηνὸν Ἑλικῶνα συντελέσειν κτλ. Now we know that Eudoxus not only himself achieved a solution of the Delian problem (Sturm l.c. pp. 32—37), but was also, in the fullest sense of the term, ‘the founder of scientific Stereometry’ (Günther in Müller's Handbuch V 1, p. 30), and did more for the subject than any of Plato's disciples (Cantor l.c. pp. 208—210). For these reasons I think it not unlikely that Plato has Eudoxus in his mind. Eudoxus and his pupils seem to have been living and working in the Academy along with the followers of Plato sometime between Plato's second and third visits to Sicily (368 B.C. and 361 B.C.: see Allman Gk Geometry etc. p. 178), and it is a pleasing and I hope pardonable conjecture—I do not claim that it is more—to suppose that Plato avails himself of this opportunity to pay a graceful compliment to his fellow-workers. See also on line 19 below and Introd. § 4.

ἐντίμως ἄγουσα . The phrase is illustrated by Lobeck Phryn. p. 419.

ὑπὸ δὲ κτλ. ὑπὸ depends on ἀτιμαζόμενα καὶ κολουόμενα. There is a sense in which the students also ἀτιμάζουσι καὶ κολούουσι a subject, which they ἀσθενῶς ζητοῦσιν (B above). κολουόμενα is in harmony with αὐξάνεται—though cut short, the study still grows or advances. For other views on this sentence see App. VIII.

λόγον κτλ. The ζητοῦντες are the ζητητικοί of B—not, I think, Plato's pupils, but men who cannot explain the true utility of stereometry (as described in 527 D, E), and are unwilling to throw their whole hearts into a ‘useless’ study.

βίᾳ ‐‐ αὐξάνεται . Blass (l.c. p. 22) observes that in these words “sine dubio mathematici ex schola Platonis profecti intelligendi sunt.” It is just conceivable —though of course no stress should be laid on the conjecture—that ὑπὸ χάριτος conceals some complimentary allusion to a particular person. If so, Eudoxus may be intended (see above on 528 C). There is, it is true, a tradition that Plato and Eudoxus had not always been on the best of terms (Allman Gk Geom. pp. 128 f.), but during the visit of Eudoxus to Athens between 368 and 361 B.C., they appear to have worked harmoniously and even cordially together (ib. pp. 133, 178). See also 530 A note But we have no evidence to shew that Eudoxus bore the sobriquet of χάρις, though his character and personality (see Arist. Eth. Nic. X 2. 1172^{b} 15 ff.), and even perhaps his name, deserved such a compliment. I think Plato means merely ‘through elegance,’ i.e. through the inherent elegance of the subject: cf. τό γε ἐπίχαρι καὶ διαφερόντως ἔχει. The use of ὑπό is as in ὑπὸ δέους φωνὴν ἔρρηξε and the like: see KühnerGerth Gr. Gr. II 1, p. 523. Badham's ἐπιχάριτα for ὑπὸ χάριτος is an unlucky venture. Dr Jackson suggests that ὑπὸ χάριτος may perhaps mean ‘by grace, favour,’ ‘on sufferance’: but Glauco's reply appears to me against this view.

, D 20 οὐδὲν ‐‐ φανῆναι : ‘be brought to light,’ ‘discovered,’ ‘solved’: cf. X 602 D and ηὑρῆσθαι and ἐκφανῆ above. Unless Badham, Madvig, and Baiter had entirely mistaken the meaning of φανῆναι, they could scarcely have conjectured or approved of τοιαῦτα in place of αὐτά. Plato's language seems to point to some exceptional activity in connexion with the study of stereometrical problems, such as may have been occasioned by the application from Delos (527 D note), and to encourage his pupils to hope for success at no distant date.

ἀλλά μοι κτλ. The recapitulation is intended to emphasize once more the principle regulating Plato's sequence of subjects (528 A note and App. II).

σπεύδων ‐‐ βραδύνω : a proverbial saying, like our ‘more haste, less speed’: cf. (with Stallbaum) Pol. 264 B. If we σπεύδομεν ταχέως, we are apt σπεύδοντες βραδύνειν; hence the proverb σπεῦδε βραδέως ‘Eile mit Weile.’ See Jebb on Soph. Ant. 231.

ὅτι τῇ ζητήσει κτλ. : not “quia ita est comparata, ut de ea quaerere ridiculum sit” (Stallbaum), but ‘quia ridicule tractatur’: cf. (with Schneider) 529 E.

528E - 530C Astronomy will accordingly be fourth in order, and Stereometry third. Yes, says Glauco; for assuredly Astronomy compels the soul to look ‘on high.’ On the contrary, Socrates replies, as studied at present, Astronomy turns the soul's eye down, though the bodily eye looks upward. True astronomy is not observation of the visible heavens, which are, like all things seen, imperfect and subject to change; it is a mathematical science, which studies the true movements of intelligible stars and uses the visible firmament as its orrery. We shall therefore pursue Astronomy by making use of problems and leave the heavens alone.

ff. We have seen that the study of Stereometry, the science which deals with τρίτη αὔξη, naturally follows the study of Geometry, in which δευτέρα αὔξη is investigated (526 C note). Astronomy, like Stereometry, is still concerned with bodies of three dimensions, but in Astronomy we have one additional element, viz. Motion, so that the study of Astronomy, as Plato conceives it, is a degree more complicated than Stereometry, and forms its natural sequel: cf. 528 A, B. Plato's conception of ἀριθμητική and γεωμετρική would have commended itself in the main to the mathematicians of his day (cf. 525 D ff., 527 A), although they might not have accepted his view of the ontology of these sciences; but in the two remaining subjects of his curriculum, Astronomy and Harmonics, he consciously and deliberately parts company with his contemporaries (see 529 A—530 C, 530 E—531 C). After every allowance has been made for the perfervid enthusiasm of Plato's style, it must be confessed that the application of the principles laid down in this chapter would have checked the progress of astronomical science. Both Astronomy and Harmonics are treated by Plato as branches of pure rather than applied mathematics; and in each of these sciences Plato either discredits or altogether prohibits observation. It must be remembered, on the other hand, that Plato's object is not to promote the study of physical science for its own sake, but to provide a suitable προπαιδεία for those who are to crown their lives by the contemplation of the Idea, from which every element of sense-perception is far removed. The astronomy which Plato sketches in this chapter is a unique compound of poetry, metaphysics and mathematics. Besides the powerful appeal which it makes to the poetical imagination, it has a permanent value even in the history of Astronomy as a passionate protest against mere empiricism, and an emphatic if exaggerated vindication of the theoretical side of the science. See also on 529 C, D and App. II.

528E - 529A 31 ᾗ σὺ μετέρχει : lit. ‘in respect of that, in respect of which you pursue it,’ i.e. ‘in the way in which you pursue it,’ no longer for its practical uses, as I did before (527 D), but because it leads the soul ‘on high,’ and from things here yonder (“from the things of this world to the next,” say D. and V., quite wrongly). The object of ἐπαινῶ is not ᾗ σὺ μετέρχει, but astronomy. Glauco has assimilated the phraseology of Socrates without its meaning. ‘On high’ and ‘yonder’ mean to Glauco the material heavens, not the νοητὸς τόπος: and he thinks the soul looks upwards if the bodily eye is turned aloft! The essence of Glauco's error consists in materializing the spiritual; and Plato here warns us against a danger which is responsible for countless errors, not only in Platonic criticism, but in every department of human thought and dogma. See also on 529 B, C.

οἱ εἰς φιλοσοφίαν ἀνάγοντες : ‘those who would lead us upwards to philosophy (“welche zur Wissenschaftsliebe hinaufführen wollen,” Schneider). Plato is thinking of teachers who recognise (with Isocr. Antid. 261) that Astronomy and kindred subjects are the παρασκευὴ φιλοσοφίας, but nevertheless teach Astronomy on methods directly calculated to turn the soul's eye down. His description fits some of the Sophists, particularly Hippias (see Prot. 318 E and cf. Isocr. Pan. 26—28). In οἱ—ἀνάγοντες Plato takes them at their own valuation. For the Greek cf. 521 C ψυχῆς περιαγωγὴ ἐκ νυκτερινῆς τινος ἡμέρας εἰς ἀληθινήν, τοῦ ὄντος οὖσαν ἐπάνοδον, ἣν δὴ φιλοσοφίαν ἀληθῆ φήσομεν εἶναι, where ἀληθῆ points the contrast with the false philosophy to which some would lead the soul. ἀνάγοντες preserves the idea of education as an ascent, in harmony with the prevailing metaphor throughout this book. The translation “those who embark on philosophy” (D. and V.) is untenable: so also are the two other versions in J. and C. (‘raise astronomy to the rank of a science,’ ‘refer astronomy to philosophy’), as Shorey—whose view is more nearly correct—has pointed out (A. J. Ph. XVI p. 237).

οὐκ ἀγεννῶς : ‘with a fine audacity,’ “non sine generosa fiducia” (Schneider), as in Gorg. 492 D οὐκ ἀγεννῶς γε—ἐπεξέρχει τῷ λόγῳ παρρησιαζόμενος, and elsewhere.

, C 7 κινδυνεύεις γὰρ κτλ. Glauco conceives of astronomy in exactly the same way as the Aristophanic Socrates; and this indignant repudiation by the Platonic Socrates is the more intelligible, if (with Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II p. 274 note) we suppose that Plato is thinking of the Clouds. Our astronomy (says Plato in effect), our vision upward, is not what Aristophanes made it appear to be, but something very different. See below on ἄνω κεχηνώς in B and ἐξ ὑπτίας νέων in C.

ἄλλο τι νομίσαι κτλ. : ‘think any other study one that makes,’ etc. “Aliud esse puto νομίσαι τι ποιεῖν, aliud ποιοῦν idque huic loco magis aptum, scilicet non solum facere sive faciendo in praesentia occupatum esse, sed vim et consuetudinem faciendi habere aliquid existimare” (Schneider). ποιοῦν is half adjectival, like συμφέρον in Xen. Rep. Lac. I 6 (quoted by Ast) τοῦτο συμφέρον τῇ εὐγονίᾳ νομίζων. Heindorf's conjecture ποιεῖν was approved by Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 631; but ποιοῦν is in all the MSS, and should be retained.

ἐάν τέ τις κτλ. : ‘and if any one attempts to learn aught which is perceivable I care not whether his open mouth yawn upwards or his closed mouth look below—he will never, as I hold, learn’ etc. For ἐάν τε, Hermann and Stallbaum read ἐὰν δέ on slight MS authority; but οὐ δύναμαι and οὔ (τε)—φημι are properly joined by τε (Schneider). The English translators understand συμμεμυκώς of closed eyes; but the eyes must of course be open in any case, and the balance with ἄνω κεχηνώς is conclusive against this view. συμμύω, as the Lexica shew, is used of closing any bodily aperture. The state of the mouth is ludicrously irrelevant, but κεχηνώς, which betokens rapt stupidity, inevitably suggests συμμεμυκώς, and the whole expression is a finely indignant outburst of exuberant and extravagant satire on a gross misapprehension of Socratico-Platonic views.

ἄνω κεχηνώς refers perhaps specifically to Clouds 171—173 ζητοῦντος αὐτοῦ τῆς σελήνης τὰς ὁδοὺς | καὶ τὰς περιφορὰς εἶτ’ ἄνω κεχηνότος | ἀπὸ τῆς ὀροφῆς νύκτωρ γαλεώτης κατέχεσεν. It will be admitted that Plato had some ground for his anger. I don't in the least care, he says in effect to Aristophanes, whether your Socrates looks up or down: so long as he studies αἰσθητά, he is not my Socrates, and I disown your caricature. For the general sense cf. (with J. and C.) Tim. 91 D.

ἐπιστήμην ‐‐ ἔχειν : ‘admits of knowledge.’

τὴν ψυχήν : though his bodily eye looks upwards.

κἂν ἐξ ὑπτίας κτλ. : ‘aye, even though the learner float face upwards on land or in the sea.’ I understand ἐξ ὑπτίας νεῖν ἐν γῇ as an allusion to Socrates in the κρεμάθρα: cf. Ap. 19 C ταῦτα γὰρ ἑωρᾶτε καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀριστοφάνους κωμῳδίᾳ, Σωκράτη τινὰ ἐκεῖ περιφερόμενον, φάσκοντά τε ἀεροβατεῖν κτλ. and see Ar. Clouds 218—226. If we suppose that Socrates lay supine in his swinging κρεμάθρα, as presumably he did, since he was looking at the moon, then any one who had seen the Clouds would at once catch the allusion, especially after ἄνω κεχηνώς and the other references just above. For νεῖν of floating in the air, cf. ἀερονηχής Ar. Clouds 337, with Blaydes ad loc. and on Peace 831.

ἢ ἐν θαλάττῃ is thrown in by Plato with the same extravagant mockery as κάτω συμμεμυκώς. Float him on land, float him, if you like, in the sea; but though his body's eye looks upward, his soul looks down. On the text and other views of this passage see App. IX.

, D 19 ταῦτα μὲν κτλ. ‘Yonder embellishments in the heavens, forasmuch as they are wrought in that which is seen with the bodily eye, we should indeed consider more beautiful and perfect than anything visible, but far inferior to those which are genuine and true—far inferior to the movements wherewith essential speed and essential slowness, in true and genuine number and in all true forms, are moved in relation to each other and therewithal make that which is essentially in them to move: the true adornments, which are apprehended by reasoning and the mathematical intelligence, but not by sight.’ The clause κάλλιστα μὲν —ἔχειν is concessive, and ἐπείπερ ἐν ὁρατῷ πεποίκιλται gives the reason why τὰ ἐν οὐρανῷ ποικίλματα πολὺ ἐνδεῖ τῶν ἀληθινῶν (sc. ποικιλμάτων), for the ἀληθινὰ ποικίλματα are wrought, not ἐν ὁρατῷ, but ἐν νοητῷ, i.e. in the lower νοητόν, with which and which alone the true astronomer as such is conversant. See App. I. The clause ἃς τὸ ὀ=ν τάχος—φορὰς κτλ. explains τῶν ἀληθινῶν ( ποικιλμάτων), being equivalent, as Schneider points out, to τοῦτ’ ἔστι, τῶν φορῶν, ἂς κτλ., ‘that is, the movements which’ etc. So much for the relation between the different members of the sentence. In order to grasp the meaning of Plato, we should read the sentence aloud, letting the full stress of the voice fall on the words ἀληθινῶν, ὄν, οὖσα, ἀληθινῷ, ἀληθέσι and ‐όντα in τὰ ἐνόντα φέρει. Each of these words is emphatic, and expresses that degree of Truth or Being which belongs to the mathematical realities of true astronomy, as opposed to the sensibles or αἰσθητά which form the subject-matter of the astronomy which Plato has just condemned. Popular astronomy observes with the bodily eye the movements of visible and material planets, e.g. Mercury and Mars. These two planets φορὰς πρὸς ἄλληλα φέρει in γιγνόμενος or κινητὸς ἀριθμός, i.e. in time (cf. Tim. 37 C ff.), Mercury, as astronomers tell us, completing his orbit in about three, and Mars in about twenty-three, months. In the second place, these planets travel in γιγνόμενα (not ἀληθῆ) σχήματα, i.e. in forms or orbits which belong to the world of γιγνόμενα, and as they travel they carry with them the γιγνόμενα which they contain, Mars for example his snow-caps and canals. The Platonic astronomer, on the other hand, looks with the eye of διάνοια at the ἀληθινὰ ποικίλματα, i.e. at the motions of true or mathematical stars. These mathematical stars φορὰς πρὸς ἄλληλα φέρεται ἐν τῷ ἀληθινῷ ἀριθμῷ, i.e. in mathematical number, e.g. in 3 and 23 (not three months, etc.), and also ἐν ἀληθέσι σχήμασιν, i.e. in mathematical orbits, viz. the perfect ellipses which are imperfectly reproduced in the orbits of the visible material planets. Furthermore, although here perhaps our imagination may refuse to follow Plato in his flight, just as the visible Mars in his journey carries with him the γιγνόμενα which he contains, so Plato represents the true stars of mathematical astronomy as carrying round with them τὰ ἐνόντα, i.e. the mathematical realities which are in them. The mathematical counterpart of Mars, for example, will take with it in its revolution those perfect mathematical forms which are imperfectly reproduced in the canals and snow-caps of the visible Mars. Plato in short conceives of a mathematical οὐρανός of which the visible heavens are but a blurred and imperfect expression in time and space, just as every visible and material triangle is only an approximation to a true or perfect, i.e. a mathematical, triangle. The following remark of Aristotle's is intended as an objection to Plato's theory, but, according to the doctrine of this part of the Republic, Plato would have accepted the criticism as containing a just and true account of the astronomy which he prescribes: ἔτι δὲ εἴ τις παρὰ τὰ εἴδη καὶ τὰ αἰσθητὰ τὰ μεταξὺ θήσεται, πολλὰς ἀπορίας ἕξει. δῆλον γὰρ ὡς ὁμοίως γραμμαί τε παρ’ αὐτὰς καὶ τὰς αἰσθητὰς ἔσονται καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν ἄλλων γενῶν. ὥστ’ ἐπείπερ ἀστρολογία μία τούτων ἐστίν, ἔσται τις καὶ οὐρανὸς παρὰ τὸν αἰσθητὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ἥλιός τε καὶ σελήνη καὶ τἄλλα ὁμοίως τὰ κατὰ τὸν οὐρανόν (Met. B 2. 997^{b} 12 ff.). It remains to speak of two particular difficulties. What does Plato mean by ταῦτα τὰ ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ποικίλματα, and by τὸ ὂν τάχος καὶ ἡ οὖσα βραδυτής? The ποικίλματα seem to be generally identified with the stars and nothing more. But inasmuch as astronomy deals with φορὰ βάθους, and the ordinary astronomer, according to Plato, studies τὰς τῶν ἄστρων φοράς (cf. 533 A) rather than ἄστρα themselves, it may be presumed that the ποικίλματα ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ in reality denote the stars regarded as moving bodies, i.e., strictly speaking, the movements of the heavenly bodies revolving in their orbits (cf. Tim. 39 D and 40 C); and the presumption becomes a certainty when we reach the words τῶν ἀληθινῶν, ἃς—φέρει, for since the true ποικίλματα which true astronomy studies are identified with the movements of true stars, we are bound in like manner to suppose that the γιγνόμενα ποικίλματα which observational astronomy studies are the movements of γιγνόμενα ἄστρα. Some may be disposed to think that τὰ ἐν οὐρανῷ ποικίλματα refers to the intricate and complex patterns which the orbits of the celestial bodies weave upon the Heavens: cf. Tim. 39 D τὰς τούτων πλάνας, πλήθει μὲν ἀμηχάνῳ χρωμένας, πεποικιλμένας δὲ θαυμαστῶς. But in view of expressions like Aesch. P. V. 24 ἡ ποικιλείμων νύξ and Eur. Hel. 1102 ἀστέρων ποικίλματα, it is better to hold that Plato adopts the word which was usually applied to the ‘spangles’ in the heavens, the “patines of bright gold,” with which “the floor of heaven is thick inlaid” (Merchant of Venice V 1), and uses it of the movements of the stars, especially as throughout this chapter he consistently represents the visible stars which popular astronomy investigates as nothing but visible or material φοραί. I understand τὸ ὂν τάχος and ἡ οὖσα βραδυτής as the mathematical counterparts of visible stars. This interpretation is, I think, the only one which gives a proper sense to φοράς τε πρὸς ἄλληλα φέρεται καὶ τὰ ἐνόντα φέρει, and no other solution preserves in its full and unimpaired significance the necessary contrast between the astronomy of observation and Plato's form of the science. The place which in popular astronomy is occupied by a γιγνόμενον τάχος, e.g. the planet Mercury, and a γιγνομένη βραδυτής, e.g. the planet Mars, is in true astronomy filled by ὂν τάχος and οὖσα βραδυτής. Plato's conception of a true science of Astronomy is a remarkable product of his peculiar half-poetical, half-philosophical imaginative faculty, and differs fundamentally from the theory and practice of the science both in antiquity and now. But it must in fairness be allowed that if a science of astronomy could be constructed on Platonic principles, admitting no element of sense-perception, and dealing exclusively with incorporeal mathematical abstractions, it would prove a better prelude to the study of the ἀχρώματός τε καὶ ἀσχημάτιστος καὶ ἀναφὴς οὐσία ( Phaedr. 247 C) than could ever be provided by the astronomy which depends on observation of the heavenly bodies. See further App. II, and for other views of this passage App. X.

, E 25 παραδείγμασι κτλ. The visible heavens may be used as a moving orrery, but nothing more. ὁμοίως κτλ. is a singularly apt illustration, because the special feature of Daedalus' statues was that they moved ( Euthyph. 11 B ff., Men. 97 D ff., Eur. Frag. 373).

τῷ ὄντι δὴ κτλ. It has been conjectured by Brandt (z. Entw. d. plat. Lehr. v. d. Seelenteilen p. 8) that Plato is thinking of Eudoxus; but there is nothing to suggest a specific reference here, as there was in 528 B, C, and as Eudoxus, “the father of scientific astronomical observation in Greece” was preeminently “a practical observer” (Allman Gk. Geometry etc. p. 142), he would hardly be described by Plato in this passage as τῷ ὄντι ἀστρονομικός. See also Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. d. plat. Pol. p. 667.

τὰ τοιαῦτα : i.e. ὁρατά, σωματοειδῆ.

τῷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ δημιουργῷ : the Demiurgus of the Timaeus.

τὴν δὲ νυκτὸς κτλ. : with which astronomical observation is concerned. Plato's tone is very different in the Timaeus (47 A ff.) as Grote points out (Plato III p. 235 note, where also an amusing parallel is quoted from Malebranche); but it should be remembered that it is with the educational value of astronomy as a preparation for Dialectic that we are here concerned (note εἰ μέλλομεν—ποιήσειν in B, and see App. II).

τῶν ἄλλων ἄστρων : ‘the other stars’ (Schneider), as ταῦτα shews, not ‘the stars besides’ (as Stallbaum).

ταῦτα : viz. the Sun and Moon, which make day, night, year, and month.

παραλλάττειν ‐‐ ὁρώμενα is a cardinal principle with Plato: see Tim. 28 A, B, 37 D and especially Pol. 269 D, E. παράλλαξις is used half-technically of any change or deviation in the courses of the heavenly bodies, as for example in the legend of Atreus ( Pol. 269 A): cf. Tim. 22 C.

ζητεῖν depends on ἄτοπον ἡγήσεται, ἄτοπον being now taken as neuter. A reference to 525 B note will shew that Madvig's ζητήσει (or ζητεῖν δεῖν), and Richards' ζητοῦντα, with other conjectures, are wholly beside the mark. J. and C. (following Stallbaum) say ζητεῖν “depends on νομίζοντα with the common ellipse of δεῖν”: but δεῖν is not commonly omitted. In ζητεῖν—λαβεῖν there is a slight suggestion of something like the historical Socrates' distrust of astronomy (Xen. Mem. IV 7. 6).

προβλήμασιν κτλ. Some have cited in illustration “Leverrier and Adams calculating an unknown planet into existence by enormous heaps of algebra” (De Morgan, quoted by Bosanquet p. 293: cf. Lutoslawski Plato's Logic p. 300). The example is striking but inapposite; for, according to this passage, the visible perturbations of Uranus, which occasioned the search for Neptune, would not have seemed to Plato anything very extraordinary. Unless he is greatly exaggerating here, and I do not deny that throughout this passage there is a touch of γενναῖον πάθος, ὥσπερ ὑπὸ μανίας τινὸς καὶ πνεύματος ἐνθουσιαστικῶς ἐκπνέον καὶ οἱονεὶ φοιβάζον τοὺς λόγους (Longinus περὶ ὕψους 8. 4), Plato's views on law in the heavens must have undergone considerable modification before he wrote the Laws: see the striking passage 821 B ff., and Tim. 47 A ff.

τὰ δ’ ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἐάσομεν : ‘we will dispense with the starry heavens.’ There is a touch of fine audacity, not to say impiety, in Plato's phrase. Greater than the starry heavens is the mind of man. Nettleship (Lect. and Rem. II pp. 271— 277) and Bosanquet (Companion pp. 290—293) are, as it seems to me, unduly anxious throughout the whole of this episode to minimise and explain away Plato's depreciation of the senses and their objects, although by so doing they can make his theories harmonize more nearly with the views of certain modern philosophers, and possibly also with the truth. Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 170—174) inclines to the opposite error, although, except perhaps on verbal grounds, Plato would not quarrel with his definition of Platonic astronomy as “die Wissenschaft von den Bewegungen intelligiblen Körper.” Plato's Astronomy is in fact a kind of idealised Kinematics, with occasional illustrations from the visible movements of the heavenly bodies (τῇ περὶ τὸν οὐρανὸν ποικιλίᾳ παραδείγμασι χρηστέον κτλ. 529 D).

οἶμαι δέ γε κτλ. 526 C note

530C - 531C Next will come the science which is sister to Astronomy, viz. Harmonics. For particulars we will refer to the Pythagoreans, taking care, however, to maintain our leading principles intact. We may ignore the good people who try to determine a minimum interval and unit of measurement by the ear; but the Pythagoreans are also wrong, for it is the numerical ratios of audible consonances which they study. They ought to ascend to problems and examine which numbers are consonant, which not, and why. The science of Harmonics is useless for our purpose if otherwise pursued.

ff. With the science of Harmonics we reach the end of Plato's προπαιδεία. Plato's conception of Harmonics is in all respects analogous to his view of Astronomy. We have seen that the visible movements of the celestial bodies are only imperfect copies of those mathematical movements which true Astronomy seeks to apprehend. In like manner, the audible movements which produce audible consonances are imperfect reproductions of those mathematical movements from which result mathematical consonances, and it is these true consonances which the ἁρμονικός should study. The methods of pure mathematics are to be employed in Harmonics as well as in Astronomy, and observation and experiment are forbidden. If we criticise Plato from the standpoint of acoustical science, we must allow that he falls into the same error as before, but the emphasis, however exaggerated, which he lays on the mathematical and theoretical element in Harmonics, is not without importance in the history of the science; and we must remember that the study of Harmonics is valuable to Plato only as a preparation for Dialectic. The poetical affinities of the Platonic science of Harmonics are worthy of remark, though this chapter refrains from any allusion to them. It is altogether in harmony with Plato's theory to hold that ‘the solemn and divine harmonies of music, heard or learned,’ appeal to us so powerfully because they are one expression of those ‘unheard harmonies’ which are also expressed in the sister souls of Nature and of Man ( Tim. 35 A ff.), and although there is much in Browning's Abt Vogler to which Plato would demur, the idea which inspires that noble poem has its philosophical basis in some such theory as Plato here suggests.

“But here is the finger of God, a flash of the will that can, Existent behind all laws, that made them and lo they are! And I know not, if, save in this, such gift be allowed to man, That out of three sounds he frame, not a fourth sound, but a star. Consider it well: each tone of our scale in itself is nought; It is everywhere in the world—loud, soft, and all is said: Give it to me to use! I mix it with two in my thought; And there! ye have heard and seen: consider and bow the head!”

It is perhaps because he believed that the Soul of the Universe no less than that of Man is attuned to these eternal harmonies, as well as for other reasons, that Plato makes his προπαιδεία culminate in Harmonics. See also App. II.

ἀλλὰ γὰρ κτλ. Socrates means: If you criticise my curriculum (as in ἦ πολλαπλάσιον—προστάττεις), you are doubtless ready with suggestions of your own: hence I appeal to you: ‘what suitable study can you suggest?’ ‘I cannot,’ says Glauco, ‘make any suggestion straight off.’ ἀλλὰ γάρ (‘however’ as in Theaet. 144 B, Symp. 220 E) goes closely with the previous sentence; if it were otherwise, Plato would have added ἦν δ’ ἐγώ or the like. The reading ἀλλὰ γάρ τι (q Vind. F, Hermann etc.) can hardly stand; nor is Steinhart's ἄλλο γάρ τι κτλ., or Richards' ἀλλὰ γὰρ <ἄλλο> τι (or ἀλλὰ γὰρ <ἔτι> τι) pleasing or probable. I formerly suggested ἀλλὰ γάρ τι ἔχεις <σὺ> ὑπομνῆσαι κτλ., the other subjects having all been suggested by Socrates and not Glauco, with the partial exception of geometry 526 C; but now believe (with Schneider) that the text is sound.

πλείω κτλ . φορά is (according to both Plato and Aristotle) a specific variety of κίνησις, being in fact, ἡ κατὰ τόπον κίνησις. Of the genus κίνησις Plato enumerates ten varieties in Laws 893 B ff.; of φορά in particular some specific εἴδη are mentioned by Arist. Eth. Nic. X 3 1174^{a} 30 ff.

πρὸς τούτῳ : “praeter astronomicum φορᾶς s. motus genus” (Stallbaum).

ὡς πρὸς ἀστρονομίαν κτλ . ἀστρονομία is φορὰ βάθους (528 E note), and appeals to the eye in the same way as ἐναρμόνιος φορά, or movement in accordance with the laws of ἁρμονία (III 397 B, 398 D, E notes), appeals to the ear. In ἐναρμόνιος φορά the air moves more or less quickly etc., and this accounts for the different pitch etc. of notes: see Tim. 67 B, 80 A ff. and Theo Smyrn. p. 50 Hiller, where this—Pythagorean as well as Platonic—theory of sound is very clearly explained. Cf. also von Jan Musici Scriptores Graeci pp. 130 ff.

ἀδελφαί τινες . Cf. [Archytas] in Mullach Frag. Phil. Graec. I p. 564 περί τε δὴ τᾶς τῶν ἄστρων ταχυτᾶτος καὶ ἐπιτολᾶν καὶ δυσίων παρέδωκαν ἁμῖν διάγνωσιν καὶ περὶ γαμετρίας καὶ ἀριθμῶν καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα περὶ μωσικῆς· ταῦτα γὰρ τὰ μαθήματα δοκοῦντι εἶμεν ἀδελφά, ib. p. 565 and (with J. and C.) Tim. 47 B, C. The sisterhood of Music and Astronomy is best seen in the ‘harmony of the Spheres’: see X 617 B note and RP^{7}. 68 B notes

ἐκείνων πευσόμεθα κτλ. Plato does not claim to be a specialist in musical matters: cf. III 400 A. The words καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο πρὸς τούτοις look like a general acknowledgment of obligation throughout this part of the Republic to the Pythagoreans. See App. II.

ἐξῆκον κτλ. The MS reading ἀεί, οἷ gives a weightier and better meaning than οἷ ἀεί, which Richards proposes. For ἀφήκειν Eusebius (Praep. Ev. XIV 13. 5) has ἀνήκειν, also a rare word: Stephanus conjectured ἐφήκειν. ἀφήκειν is better, though rarer, than either: cf. (with Schneider) ἀφίκηται in 531 D. The reference in ἄρτι is to 529 A ff.

τὰς γὰρ ἀκουομένας κτλ. The intervals reckoned as consonant (σύμφωνα) were such as the octave, double octave, fifth and fourth: see on IV 430 E. These the Pythagoreans ‘measure by’ (or ‘against’) ‘one another,’ by comparing the lengths of vibrating strings of the same material, thickness and tension. It is thus found that the octave is 2 : 1, the double octave 4 : 1, the fifth 3 : 2, and the fourth 4 : 3. See Dict. of Ant. II p. 193 with Theo Smyrn. pp. 48—51, 56—61 Hiller, and Aristox. Harm. 20 ff. Marquard. Richards proposes <ἐν> ἀλλήλοις, but the dative is strictly accurate: cf. Tim. 39 D τῷ τοῦ ταὐτοῦ καὶ ὁμοίως ἰόντος ἀναμετ ρηθέντα κύκλῳ.

ὥσπερ οἱ ἀστρονόμοι . The parallel is exact: as the astronomers studied visible, so the Pythagoreans investigated audible φοραί (Theo l.c.). To Plato, on the other hand, ἁρμονίη ἀφανὴς φανερῆς κρείσσων (Heracl. Fr. 47 Bywater). ‘Heard harmonies are sweet, but those unheard are sweeter.’ See above on 530 C.

νὴ τοὺς θεοὺς κτλ. There were two rival schools of musical theory in Greece, viz. “(1) the Pythagorean or mathematical, who identified each interval with a ratio, (2) the ‘musical’ (μουσικοί), who measured all intervals as multiples or fractions of the Tone” (Monro in Dict. Ant. II p. 193). Cf. Modes of Anc. Gk. Mus. p. 124. Plato's criticism was intended to apply to the first school; but Glauco erroneously understands it of the second.

πυκνώματα κτλ . ἄττα (nescio quae) and ὀνομάζοντες shew that πυκνώματα is a technical term. The word πύκνωμα does not appear to occur elsewhere in this sense, but πυκνόν was a favourite word with writers of the ‘musical’ school, as may be seen from its constant employment by Aristoxenus. πυκνόν is thus defined: τὸ ἐκ δύο διαστημάτων συνεστηκὸς ἃ συντεθέντα ἔλαττον διάστημα περιέξει τοῦ λειπομένου διαστήματος ἐν τῷ διὰ τεσσάρων (Aristox. Harm. 24. 10 ff. Marquard) i.e. any combination of two intervals which are together less than the interval remaining in the Fourth when the πυκνόν is subtracted from the Fourth, e.g. two quarter tone intervals, or even two semitone intervals (but not more): see Aristox. l.c. 50. 15 ff. The definition in Bacchius Isag. 20 von Jan τὸ ἐκ δύο διαστημάτων ἐλαχίστων συγκείμενον ἐν ἑκάστῳ γένει is less exact, but not, so far as it goes, inconsistent with that of Aristoxenus. Plato's πυκνώματα must be “haec ipsa πυκνά vel alia parva et tamen composita intervalla,” so called “propter sonorum in angusto spatio quasi confertorum frequentiam” (Schneider). Cf. πυκνότης in Laws 812 D, καταπυκνοῦσθαι, καταπύκνωσις etc. in Theo 91 and often in Aristoxenus, and see generally Westphal and Rossbach Gr. Harm. etc. pp. 105 ff. It is possible that the musical application of these terms was originally a metaphor borrowed from the art of weaving: for “vestes spatha textae, ob densitatem, quam inde consequebantur, πυκνώματα dictae ap. Aesch. Suppl. 235 πέπλοισι βαρβάροισι, καὶ πυκνώμασι” (Stephanus-Hase s.v. πύκνωμα, where reference is made also to Hesych. s.v. σπάθημα and a Scholiast on Ar. Ach. 180). I agree with Schneider in doubting whether Gellius' “frequentamenta” (I 11. 12, V 1. 1) are the same as Plato's πυκνώματα.

οἷον ἐκ γειτόνων κτλ. : ‘as if they were trying to catch a sound in the neighbourhood.’ Cf. Heliod. I 17 πίνει δὲ ἐνταῦθα ἐκ γειτόνων and Blaydes on Ar. Plut. 435 or Stephanus-Hase Thes. s.v. γείτων, where numerous examples of this highly idiomatic phrase are quoted. J. and C.'s translation “from a neighbour's house” is incorrect and pointless: still worse is Westphal's “als ob sie die Intervallgrösse dem Nachbarton ablauschen wollen.” The idiom was understood by Ficinus, who translates it by “viciniore loco.”

οἱ μέν φασιν κτλ. Some will have it that they overhear a note between (let us say) B and C, and that this is the smallest interval, and should be the unit of measurement: others say ‘No! it is not different from B.’ Plato (who is all for simplicity in music Laws 812 C) here satirises the μουσικοί, who made the quartertone or δίεσις their unit: see Theo 55 δίεσιν δὲ καλοῦσιν ἐλαχίστην οἱ περὶ Ἀριστόξενον τὸ τεταρτημόριον τοῦ τόνου, ἥμισυ δὲ ἡμιτονίου, ὡς ἐλάχιστον μελῳδητὸν διάστημα, and on the ἐναρμόνιον γένος generally, which Plato strongly disliked (Theo 56; cf. also Procl. in Tim. 191 E), and in which the δίεσις played a large part, Dict. of Ant. l.c. and Westphal and Rossbach l.c.

ἀμφισβητοῦντες . We should expect ἀμφισβητοῦσιν (so Theo 6) or else φάσκοντες instead of φασιν above. Cobet would emend, but the anacoluthon is not difficult in a writer like Plato: see on VI 488 C, D and supra 519 A note

φθεγγομένων : sc. τῶν χορδῶν, omitted as in ἡ διὰ πασῶν.

ὦτα κτλ. This bitter epigram was applied by Adrastus to Aristoxenus (Procl. in Tim. 192 B). The cap fits admirably; for Aristoxenus was afterwards the leader of the μουσικοί whose principle is here ridiculed. With the expression itself cf. Pliny Epp. VII 27, 8 sed offirmare animum auribusque praetendere.

σὺ μὲν κτλ. Socrates now corrects Glauco's error: see on νὴ τοὺς θεοὺς κτλ. 531 A. τοὺς χρηστούς is of course contemptuous. Plato has no sympathy with the ‘ μουσικοί.’

τοὺς ταῖς χορδαῖς κτλ. : ‘who persecute and torture the strings, racking them upon the pegs. But lest my figure become somewhat tedious if I dwell upon the blows delivered with the plectrum, and the accusations brought against the strings, as well as their denials and braggadocio behaviour’ etc. The figure (εἰκών) is from torturing and beating slaves, as βασανίζοντας, στρεβλοῦντας and πληγῶν shew: even πράγματα παρέχοντας suggests a court of law (cf. Crit. 44 E). The strings are the victims, while the pegs are the pulleys by which they were racked upon the τροχός (see Dict. Ant. s. v. eculeus). For ἐπί Herwerden proposes ὑπό: but the strings are racked by the musicians upon the pegs.

πλήκτρῳ τε πληγῶν κτλ. The etymological meaning of πλῆκτρον adds point to this part of the comparison.

πέρι from its position divides πληγῶν and κατηγορίας, which refer to the behaviour of the musicians, from ἐξαρνήσεως καὶ ἀλαζονείας, in which the behaviour of the strings is described. For the anastrophe of πέρι see Lina de praeposit. usu Plat. pp. 26—30. The angry musician is like the prosecutor, and blames the strings, which in their turn repudiate the charge and swagger away like a stubborn slave however savagely the screw is turned. For a further discussion of this passage see App. XI.

ἐκείνους : i.e. the Pythagoreans, and not the μουσικοί, as Glauco supposed.

τοὺς γὰρ κτλ. It is strange that in spite of οὓς ἔφαμεν νῦν δὴ κτλ. this should have been so frequently understood as referring to the school satirised by Glauco: see for example Susemihl Gen. Entw. II p. 210. Plato is of course, as Schneider pointed out, speaking about the Pythagoreans who investigated the numbers or ratios of audible consonances: see 531 A note and RP.^{7} § 56 C.

ἀλλ’ οὐκ κτλ. Cf. 530 B. ἀνίασιν is undoubtedly present, and not future, here: see on V 473 C.

τίνες ξύμφωνοι κτλ. As the true astronomer should study intelligible stars with the mathematical intelligence, using the visible stars only as imperfect παραδείγματα (529 C, D note), so the true ἁρμονικός must investigate intelligible, and not audible, consonances. In the words of a modern writer, he must “look, not into the tone-world here, but into the world of harmony beyond.” Plato holds that certain mathematical numbers are in themselves ξύμφωνοι, and others not: see Theo 72—75, where examples of both varieties are given. The numbers or ratios of audible consonances are only particular and imperfect embodiments or expressions of these numbers: they may serve as παραδείγματα, but nothing more. In the Timaeus Plato represents the World-soul as the grandest expression of certain ξύμφωνοι ἀριθμοί, so that it is natural enough for him to crown his προπαιδεία with the study of mathematical ξυμφωνία, and say that it is ‘useful in seeking out the beautiful and good.’ It must nevertheless be admitted that Plato's conception of Harmonics as well as of Astronomy is fundamentally different from that of modern science, in spite of the attempts which Bosanquet and others have made to prove their essential harmony. See on 530 C and App. II.

531C - 533D The pursuit of these studies, if carried far enough to reveal their mutual relationship, will contribute to the end which we desire; but after all, they are only the prelude to Dialectic. We may compare Dialectic to the prisoner's progress from looking on real animals to beholding the sun, and these preparatory studies to his release and ascent from shadows and images within the cave to shadows of real objects in the world above. Socrates declines to give an account of the method and object of Dialectic; but insists that the Good must be seen, and that Dialectic alone can reveal it, for Dialectic is the only study which ascends on the ruins of its hypotheses to the Idea of Good, leading the soul on high, and using the ‘Arts’ as handmaidens and helpers in the process of education.

ff. Plato's conception of Dialectic and dialectical science is fully discussed in App. III.

ᾗ ‐‐ οἰκεῖα κτλ. Cf. [Epin.] 991 E ff. πᾶν διάγραμμα ἀριθμοῦ τε σύστημα καὶ ἁρμονίας σύστασιν ἅπασαν τῆς τε τῶν ἄστρων περιφορᾶς τὴν ὁμολογίαν οὖσαν μίαν ἁπάντων ἀναφανῆναι δεῖ τῷ κατὰ τρόπον μανθάνοντι, ἀναφανήσεται δὲ ἂν— ὀρθῶς τις εἰς ἒν βλέπων μανθάνῃ· δεσμὸς γὰρ πεφυκὼς πάντων τούτων εἷς ἀναφανήσεται διανοουμένοις· εἰ δ’ ἄλλως πως ταῦτα μεταχειριεῖταί τις, τύχην δεῖ καλεῖν. The apprehension of the ‘one in the many’ in these preliminary studies prepares us for the dialectical conception of the universe of Thought as an organic and correlated whole (VI 511 B—D notes); but the mere specialist in mathematics for example, or astronomy, can never become a dialectician. Cf. 537 C and Euthyd. 290 B ff.

νόμου : ‘song’ or ‘strain.’ There is no pun on νόμος ‘law,’ as Bosanquet supposes. Dialectic is not a ‘law’ in the Greek sense of the word.

οὐ γάρ που κτλ. Theodorus in the Theaetetus (146 B) is a good example, and everyone who knows men who are distinguished mathematicians and nothing more will heartily echo Glauco's emphatic οὐ μὰ τὸν Δία. Taught on the Platonic method, not as an end, but as a means, by teachers who have themselves penetrated into regions beyond and above the sphere of pure mathematics, and who are constantly on the alert to direct their pupils thither, the study of mathematics may prove one of the most valuable of all instruments of education. See App. II.

ὧν . For the attraction see VI 510 B note

ἀλλ’ ἤδη κτλ. ‘Well, did it ever seem to you that persons who are unable’ etc. The subject is μὴ δυνατοί τινες ὄντες— λόγον, and after ἤδη “supplendum est ἔδοξαν, quod ipsum Glauconis verbis magis accommodatum est quam δοκοῦσι” (Schneider). The form of Socrates' question is in fact affected by Glauco's reference to the past in ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα. I formerly, with v and three other MSS, including Vind. F, read ἀλλὰ δή, understanding δοκοῦσι: but ἀλλὰ δή is scarcely appropriate here (see on II 365 C), and Schneider's explanation gives a satisfactory meaning to ἤδη. J. and C. take ἤδη with μὴ δυνατοί τινες ὄντες (‘persons who are as yet unable’ etc.); but the hyperbaton is too difficult, and the meaning (which Plato would rather have expressed by μήπω δυνατοὶ κτλ.) unsuitable. Few will approve of Badham's ἀλλ’ οἱ δὴ κτλ. or even of Burnet's ἀλλὰ δή, εἶπον, μὴ δυνατοὶ οἵτινες δοῦναί τε κτλ. For the sentiment, which is a commonplace of the Socratic school, cf. Xen. Mem. IV 6. 1, Prot. 336 C, Phaed. 76 B, Crat. 390 C ff. al.

οὐδ’ αὖ κτλ. ‘My answer to this question is also no.’

περαίνει =‘performs’: cf. Plut. Crass. 33. 3 ἀναβακχεύσας ἐπέραινεν ἐκεῖνα τὰ μέλη κτλ., Tim. 29 D τὸ μὲν οὖν προοίμιον θαυμασίως ἀπεδεξάμεθά σου, τὸν δὲ δὴ νόμον ἡμῖν ἐφεξῆς πέραινε, and Laws 723 E. The metaphor is still from music, though D. and V. erroneously translate “of which dialectical reasoning is the consummation.”

ἣν ἐλέγομεν κτλ. It follows that the progress of the prisoner after he has begun to look on real objects outside the Cave represents Dialectic: cf. 516 A note and 532 B.

αὐτὰ ἄστρα . I formerly read αὐτὰ <τὰ> ἄστρα with Baiter; but there is no MS authority for the article, and its presence is unnecessary even between αὐτὰ τὰ ζῷα and αὐτὸν τὸν ἥλιον.

οὕτω καὶ κτλ. : ‘so also whenever by means of dialectic one attempts through discourse of reason’ etc. On τοῦ λόγου and ἄνευ πασῶν τῶν αἰσθήσεων see VI 511 B note and App. III. Ast's conjecture ὁρμᾶν (see cr. n.) is supported by Clement Strom. V 112 B Migne (quoted by Schneider) ἐὰν ἐπιχειρῇ τις ἄνευ πασῶν τῶν αἰσθήσεων διὰ τοῦ λόγου ἐπ’ αὐτὸ ὃ ἔστιν ἕκαστον ὁρμᾶν κτλ., and closely corresponds with ἐπιχειρεῖν ἀποβλέπειν in the last sentence. There is no occasion for Stallbaum's professional ridicule of Schneider's view: ‘quasi vero recte dici potuerit: τῷ διαλέγεσθαι ἐπιχειρεῖν διὰ τοῦ λόγου ὁρμᾶν ἐπί τι!’ for οὗ αὐτὸς ὁ λόγος ἅπτεται τῇ τοῦ διαλέγεσθαι δυνάμει in VI 511 B is an exact parallel. On other views see App. XII.

ἕκαστον is omitted in A (see cr. n.) and some other MSS. It is however necessary both in itself, and in order to provide a proper contrast with αὐτὸ ὃ ἔστιν ἀγαθόν. For the process here described see App. III.

τότε . 516 B.

ἡ δέ γε κτλ. Having described διαλεκτική in terms of the cave-simile, Plato now proceeds to describe his προπαιδεία in the same way: cf. 515 C, 516 A notes Bosanquet finds a difficulty in ἡ λύσις—ἐπάνοδος, and thinks it just conceivable that these words describe the training in music and gymnastic and not the προπαιδεία (so also Susemihl Gen. Entw. II p. 201). But Plato's language is perfectly definite; and τῶν τεχνῶν ἂς διήλθομεν (532 C) cannot mean anything beyond or except the five studies just described. Nor is this the only passage where the ‘turning round’ of the prisoners while still in the cave and their gradual ascent are identified with the προπαιδεία, or with part of it: see 521 C. Plato means that the emancipation of the soul is a gradual process, and that we are not to expect our mathematical studies to deliver us from δόξα all at once. ἡ λύσις —εἴδωλα suggests that their first effect will be to loosen our intellectual bonds, and turn us as it were from reflected to original δόξαι—from εἰκασία to πίστις (VI 511 E, VII 517 A notes). The higher we mount, the less of δόξα we retain, and in the higher stages of the προπαιδεία (symbolized by ἐκεῖ—ἀποσκιαζομένας) we escape from δόξα altogether. See App. I.

, C 13 καὶ ἐκεῖ κτλ. ‘and when there, their inability still to look upon animals and plants and the light of the sun, but upon divine reflections in water and shadows of things real, not, as before, shadows of images thrown by a light which is itself but an image compared with the sun.’ Cf. 516 A, B. ἔτι ἀδυναμία is due to Iamblichus: see cr. n. and cf. Bywater in J. Ph. X p. 78. Nägelsbach also conjectured ἔτ’ ἀδυναμία. The difference between ἔτι and ἐπ in an uncial MS is practically nil. With πρὸς δὲ τὰ κτλ. the positive counterpart of ἀδυναμία (βλέπειν) is to be supplied: cf. Ap. 36 B (where Schanz's insertion of οὔ after οἱ πολλοί is inelegant and unnecessary) and Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 1072. For ἔτι with a verbal noun cf. IV 434 C note ‘Divine’ φαντάσματα is a half-technical Platonic phrase for reflections of natural objects produced by natural lights: they are θεῖα because θείας ἔργα ποιήσεως ( Soph. 266 C, where the whole matter is very clearly explained). Even without the aid of the Sophist, we might deduce the meaning from the antithetical clause ἀλλ’ οὐκ —ἀποσκιαζομένας, if we remember that the sun is a θεός (VI 508 A). The adjective is regularly placed after the substantive when two coordinate qualifications have to be expressed (here ἐν τοῖς ὕδασιν and θεῖα): cf. III 397 D τὸν τοῦ ἐπιεικοῦς μιμητὴν ἄκρατον, IX 573 A τῶν ἐν ταῖς τοιαύταις συνουσίαις ἡδονῶν ἀνειμένων. Other examples are given by Jebb on Soph. O. T. 1245 and Sandys on Arist. Ath. Pol. 51. 3: cf. also Stallbaum on Phil. 20 B. The present passage explains why Plato was so careful to make the originals in the Cave σκευαστά and εἴδωλα, and not φυτευτά: see on 514 B. Other views of this sentence are discussed in App. XIII.

πᾶσα κτλ. The anacoluthon is illustrated by Engelhardt Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 45.

ταύτην τὴν δύναμιν : viz. λύσιν ἀπὸ τῶν δεσμῶν κτλ.

οὐ γὰρ ἐν τῷ νῦν κτλ. We ought not to interpret this as a promise of future dialogues (with Siebeck Unters. z. Phil. d. Griechen p. 118); it is only a way of indicating, before we pass on, that the subject is not exhausted. See on IV 430 C.

532E - 533A 30 οὐκέτι κτλ. With the general tenour and form of the sentence cf. (with Jackson) Symp. 210 A. I can see no reason for suspecting the text (with Madvig, who proposes εἴ γ’ ἔτι, or εἰ σύ γ’ ἔτι, and Badham, who would insert εἰ before οἷός τ’ ἔσει). Glauco has not without difficulty (517 C) followed Socrates thus far: nor is there anything rude in telling him frankly that he has reached his limit, and even if there were, Socrates does not spare Glauco's feelings (cf. 527 D, 529 A). That his audience would not be able to follow a description of the Good, has already been implied in VI 506 E ff. βουλοίμην ἄν, εἶπον, ἐμέ τε δύνασθαι αὐτὴν (the account of the Good itself) ἀποδοῦναι καὶ ὑμᾶς κομίσασθαι. Here Socrates appears to be a trifle more confident of his own expository powers, though he is careful, as before, to avoid the appearance of dogmatism and therefore introduces the expression ὅ γε δή μοι φαίνεται etc. (cf. τοῦ γε δοκοῦντος ἐμοί l.c.) and προθυμίας (cf. προθυμούμενος δὲ κτλ. VI 506 D). Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 179 ff.) bitterly complains of Socrates for drawing back; and Whewell (Phil. of Discovery p. 436) observes “We may venture to say that it does not appear that he had any answer ready.” The dialectical method recommended by Plato in the Republic is doubtless, in its full significance, an unrealised ideal (cf. nn. on ἀρχὴν ἀνυπόθετον VI 510 B and τοῦ ἀνυποθέτου 511 B), just as the ultimate object of Dialectic, the Idea of Good, will still recede as we approach it. The description which follows merely recapitulates the account already given in Book VI, with a few additional characteristics already familiar in the Socratic school: but the majority of the Platonic dialogues furnish practical illustrations of many essential features in Plato's dialectical method: so that it is possible to form a tolerably clear idea of the kind of answer which the Platonic Socrates might have made in reply to Glauco's invitation. See on the whole subject App. III.

οὐδ’ εἰκόνα ἂν ἔτι κτλ. : such as we saw before in VI 506 E ff. Glauco's question refers to the method, Socrates' reply to the object, of Dialectic: it is of course impossible to separate the two. On διισχυρίζεσθαι followed by ἰσχυριστέον see I 336 E note

ὅτι μὲν δεῖ κτλ. Cf. VI 505 E ff., supra 517 C (δεῖ ταύτην ἰδεῖν κτλ.), 519 C, 526 E (ὃ δεῖ αὐτὴν παντὶ τρόπῳ ἰδεῖν). These passages are strongly in favour of δεῖ as against δή (see cr. n.), which Schneider, Hermann, and Stallbaum retain. ἰδεῖν is unpleasing if we read δή, and μὲν δή is not free from difficulty here. For μέν without δέ following see V 475 E note

, B 7 τόδε γοῦν κτλ. Socrates proceeds to establish what he has just asserted, viz. that only dialectic can reveal the Good to those who are versed in the propaedeutic ‘arts’ or sciences. In this at least (he says) every one will agree with us, viz. ‘that it is some other μέθοδος’ (different from the five propaedeutic ‘arts’) ‘which endeavours in every case to apprehend by scientific procedure concerning each several self’ (e.g. αὐτοῦ καλοῦ, αὐτοῦ δικαίου, etc.) ‘that which they severally are’ (the οὐσία of each) e.g. ὃ ἔστιν καλόν, etc. Cf. 531 D οὐ γάρ που δοκοῦσί γε σοι οἱ ταῦτα (the five propaedeutic ‘arts’) δεινοὶ διαλεκτικοὶ εἶναι. Socrates continues: while all the other arts (except τὰ μαθηματικά) address themselves πρὸς δόξας ἀνθρώπων, etc., even the mathematical ‘arts’ give no λόγος of their ὑποθέσεις (and so do not apprehend the ὃ ἔστιν of their subject). Dialectic and Dialectic alone does this (533 C), so that Dialectic is the ἄλλη τις μέθοδος and alone satisfies our needs. τόδε is the object of λέγουσιν, on which, and not on ἀμφισβητήσει, ὡς depends. ἄλλη means other than ὧν νῦν δὴ διήλθομεν. ἀλλά is opposed to the negative notion contained in ἄλλη (another μέθοδος, not that of the five ‘arts,’ but etc.). Badham arbitrarily proposes to read ὅρῳ περιλαμβάνειν for ὁδῷ περὶ παντὸς λαμβάνειν. The expression περὶ παντός ‘about everything’ is of course different from αὐτοῦ ἑκάστου πέρι, and μέθοδος ὁδῷ is the kind of collocation in which Plato delights. For other views on this sentence see App. XIV.

αἱ μὲν ἄλλαι κτλ. Cf. Phil. 55 E— 58 E. Plato is thinking of a threefold classification of arts under κολακική, ποιητική, and ἐπιμελητική or the like (J. and C., comparing Gorg. 463 ff., 501, 502, Soph. 222 E, 265 ff., Pol. 261 ff.).

τετράφαται is one of Plato's archaisms: see on I 330 B. Such forms are not found in inscriptions after 410 B.C. (Meisterhans^{3} p. 166).

γεωμετρίας ‐‐ ταύτῃ . For the syntax cf. VI 511 B note

ὀνειρώττουσι κτλ. Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 179—181) accuses Plato of a sudden volte face in regard to mathematical studies. It is true that the same language is used of δόξα in V 476 C (cf. VII 520 C), but there are dreams and dreams, and we may fairly say that if the προπαιδεία is only a dream in comparison with Dialectic, at least it is one of those dreams which come through the gates of horn.

ᾧ γὰρ ἀρχὴ κτλ. See VI 510 C, D notes ὁμολογίαν means ‘agreement’ ‘harmony’ (“Übereinstimmung” Schneider), viz. of ἀρχή, τελευτή and τὰ μεταξύ, not ‘admissions’ (as D. and V. translate): cf. ὁμολογουμένως l.c.

οὐκοῦν κτλ. ‘Well then,’ said I, ‘the method of dialectic alone proceeds by the destruction of hypotheses to the actual first principle, in order to make its results secure.’ Dialectic examines and cancels (ἀναιρεῖ) one ὑπόθεσις after another, till in the end it reaches the Idea of Good. Suppose for example that ὁσιότης is the subject of discussion. Various ὑποθέσεις are proposed, tested, and overthrown. Out of the ruins of the former ὑποθέσεις we built a new and better one, which must in its turn be thoroughly tested, tried, and perhaps overthrown, before it can serve as a stepping-stone to one which is higher, truer and better: cf. 534 B, C. Now this process of testing, revising, discarding, is not, ideally speaking, complete until we examine the relations of our ὑπόθεσις of ὁσιότης with all νοητά, and in such an examination we apply the same ‘hypothetical method’ throughout the whole noetic sphere, testing and correcting all our ὑποθέσεις by one another. In the final stage, which is of course only an ideal, all our ὑποθέσεις become exact counterparts of the Ideas, and we have reached the ἀρχή or Good. Thereafter the results of Dialectic are βέβαια: see VI 511 B. The earlier steps in this dialectical ascent may be illustrated from many, if not most, of the Platonic dialogues. For ἀναιροῦσα cf. Arist. Topic. Γ 6. 120^{a} 6—31, and especially Eth. Eud. II 6. 1222^{b} 27 f. κινουμένης τῆς ἀρχῆς πάντα μάλιστ’ ἂν τὰ δεικνύμενα μεταβάλλοι, αὐτὰ δ’ αὑτὰ οὐ μεταβάλλει ἀναιρουμένου θατέρου ὑπὸ θατέρου, ἂν μὴ τῷ τὴν ὑπόθεσιν ἀνελεῖν καὶ δἰ ἐκείνης δεῖξαι. The word is often used in connexion with the Eleatic dialectic, of which Plato's ἡ ἐξ ὑποθέσεως ἀνάλυσις (Alcin. Isag. 7), here described, is a development: see RP^{7}. §§ 95 note a, 105 A—106, 110—115. For other views on this passage see App. XV: and for a farther discussion of the method itself and its permanent value in the history of investigation consult App. III.

βορβόρῳ . The image is taken from Orphic theology: cf. II 363 D note

ἔν γε τῷ πρόσθεν . VI 511 D, E.

ἔστι δ’ , ὡς κτλ. Cf. Laws 864 A. Plato constantly reminds us that he has no fixed terminology (see Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. d. pl. Pol. p. 647 and Hirzel Der Dialog pp. 246 ff.), and the ancients were well aware of this fact, though modern interpreters of Plato too often forget it; see the references collected by Hermann Gesch. u. Syst., p. 573 note 106 and D. L. III 63 (quoted by Hirmer).

533E - 534E In conclusion, after pointing out the proportions between the different intellectual states, Socrates declares that the essential feature of Dialectic is its power to grasp the reason or principle of all Being, separating the Idea of Good, for example, from everything else, defining it in words, and scrutinizing the definition by tests, from each and all of which it must emerge triumphantly. Glauco agrees that such a study is indispensable to the rulers, and that the curriculum is now complete.

οὐ γὰρ οὖν, ἔφη . See cr. n. The interpolation which follows these words in all MSS except Ξ is discussed in App. XVI.

ἀρέσκει οὖν . See cr. n. Though γοῦν is in A and Ξ, a majority of MSS read οὖν, which is alone suitable. The same error occurs in one or more MSS in V 455 E and VI 506 C (Schneider).

ὅ τι νόησις ‐‐ εἰκασίαν . That is to say, in the Simile of the Line (see Fig. i on p. 65), (1) CB : AC :: EB : DC and (2) CB : AC :: CE : AD. We have already seen that CE : EB :: AD : DC (VI 509 D note); therefore componendo

CE + EB : EB :: AD + DC : DC

i.e. CB : EB :: AC : DC ; therefore alternando CB : AC :: EB : DC. This proves (1), and (2) is proved as follows. Since

CE : EB :: AD : DC ,

therefore invertendo EB : CE :: DC : AD; hence componendo

EB + CE : CE :: DC + AD : AD

i.e. CB : CE :: AC : AD; therefore alternando CB : AC :: CE : AD. I owe this proof to the kindness of a mathematical friend.

τὴν δ’ ἐφ’ οἷς κτλ. Liebhold (who also conjectured καὶ ἔτι νόησις for καὶ ὅ τι νόησις) makes the extraordinary suggestion τὴν δ’ ἐφ’ οἶς ταῦτ’ ἂν διέχῃ ἀναλογίαν καὶ διαίρεσιν ἑκατέρου (Philol. 1876 p. 372). The text is of course quite sound and=τὴν δὲ <τούτων> ἐφ’ οἷς ταῦτά <ἐστιν> ἀναλογίαν κτλ.: cf. VI 511 E. I cannot agree with Shorey when he says (Idea of Good etc. p. 235) that Plato “avoids drawing out the proportion εἴδη: objects of διάνοια= σκευαστά etc.: εἰκόνες, because he is aware that the second member is a blank and the fourth is largely fantastic.” Both of these assertions are in my opinion quite wrong, and if they were true, Plato would have refrained from drawing out the proportions between the faculties themselves for exactly the same reasons. See App. I. As it is, we should take Plato at his word. He may well decline to enter on the tedious and unprofitable task of expounding and illustrating in detail the proportions which may be conjectured to obtain between the different objects of our intellectual powers. It would for example lead to no useful result if we tried to establish a proportion between a particular ε<*>δος, one of the five μαθήματα, a particular object of πίστις, and a particular object of εἰκασία. Such attempts would certainly involve us in an endless amount of talk, and would hardly result in anything but a series of barren and pedantic formulae and subdivisions.

ἢ ὅσων . See cr. n. ὅσων is read by a large majority of MSS, and the confusion of ο and ω is common: see Introd. § 5. The construction (as Schneider points out) is ἢ ὅσων λόγων οἱ παρεληλυθότες λόγοι ἡμᾶς ἐνέπλησαν: cf. (with Schneider) παρὰ δόξαν τοῖς νῦν δοκουμένοις VI 490 A. Madvig's ὅσοι has little probability, although it avoids a certain awkwardness.

ἦ καὶ διαλεκτικὸν κτλ. Cf. 531 E note As far as words go, this definition of Dialectic might almost have come from the historical Socrates, although of course λόγον λαμβάνειν, οὐσία and λόγον διδόναι meant less to him than to Plato.

οὐ φήσεις =‘negabis.’ οὐ is not here ‘nonne.’ The interrogation is carried on from the last clause.

διορίσασθαι ‐‐ ἀφελών perhaps suggests the διαίρεσις, which was an essential part of Plato's dialectical method: see App. III. It is noteworthy however that the Republic lays far more stress on συναγωγή than on διαίρεσις: cf. 537 C, Zeller^{4} II 1. p. 617 note and App. III.

ὥσπερ ἐν μάχῃ κτλ. : ‘as it were in a battle, exhausting every elenchus, striving to test his view not by that which seems, but by that which is’ etc. For διὰ πάντων—διεξιών cf. Thuc. III 45. 3 διεξεληλύθασί γε διὰ πασῶν τῶν ζημιῶν and Parm. 136 E διὰ πάντων διεξόδου. We apply the ἔλεγχοι ourselves: cf. ἐξελέγξωμεν in X 610 A. The ordinary interpretation supposes that the ἔλεγχοι are applied by others (‘running the gauntlet of all questionings’ J. and C.); but in that case we must take ἐλέγχειν as=ἐλέγχειν τοὺς τῶν ἄλλων ἐλέγχους, which is difficult, because ἐλέγχειν is most naturally interpreted by ἐλέγχων just before, and ἐλέγχων certainly means tests or elenchi which are applied to the theory which the dialectician is himself maintaining. Plato means that the dialectician tests his view of good not by ‘seeming’ i.e. by what ‘seems’ (good, bad etc.) to the many, but by the Truth i.e. by that which ‘is’ in the Platonic sense of οὐσία, viz. the Ideas, such as (let us say) the Ideas of κάλλος, δίκαιον and so forth. The Idea of Good has connexions and relations with all the other Ideas (cf. VI 510 B, 511 B notes); and our knowledge of these may therefore be used to test the accuracy of our conception of Good. Zeller^{4} II 1. p. 620 note rightly compares the present passage with Parm. 135 C—136 E: see App. III. It is perhaps unnecessary to notice Liebhold's foolish conjecture νόησιν for οὐσίαν.

ὀνειροπολοῦντα κτλ. 533 C note

οὐκ ἂν ἐάσαις κτλ. : ‘you will not suffer to be mere irrational quantities, if they are to rule in the city and control the higher issues.’ ἄλογοι γραμμαί are irrational magnitudes (cf. Arist. περὶ ἀτόμων γραμμῶν 968^{b} 18), which Greek mathematicians treated “geometrically through a symbolism of irrational lines,” as in Euclid Bk. X (Gow Gk Math. p. 78). They are ἄλογοι or ἄρρητοι because “nicht aussprechbar” (Cantor Gesch. d. Math. p. 154 note), whereas rational lines are ῥηταί, ‘expressible’ (cf. Blass de Pl. Math. p. 18). In its application to Glauco's ‘children,’ ἄλογοι is active, and means of course μὴ λόγον ἔχοντες διδόναι (534 B). Has γραμμάς also any special application? Probably it has: otherwise the witticism seems unnecessarily far-fetched and frigid, even if we make every allowance for Plato's love of a mathematical jest (cf. Pol. 266 B), as well as for the interest which the subject of irrationals seems to have excited among the mathematicians of his day (see Theaet. 147 D ff. and Cantor l.c. pp. 182, 191, 203). Lucilius (II 20) has the line “vix vivo homini ac monogrammo” (“a dead-alive sketch of an anatomy” Tyrrell Lat. Poetry p. 175), and Cicero mocks at Epicurus' gods as “monogrammos” (N. D. II 59: cf. I 123 homunculi similem deum—liniamentis dumtaxat extremis, non habitu solido— praeditum etc., and other passages in Usener Epicurea p. 234). Perhaps Plato means to suggest that his “airy burgomasters,” as Milton calls them, would in such a case be only as it were mere silhouettes (“Schattenrisse” Bertram Bilderspr. Pl. p. 46) of rulers moving blindly to and fro in a sort of dreamland (cf. ὀνειροπολοῦντα 534 C and 533 C note). For other views see App. XVII.

τῶν μεγίστων . 525 B note

ἐρωτᾶν τε καὶ ἀποκρίνεσθαι κτλ. Plato concludes by emphasizing the most conspicuous and characteristic feature of the Socratic method: cf. Crat. 390 C.

535A - 536B It only remains to apportion these studies and prescribe how they are to be pursued. Our pupils must possess not only the qualities of stedfastness and courage etc., but also those other natural qualifications which our peculiar course of training demands. These are now enumerated by Socrates.

διανομὴ κτλ. Herwerden needlessly and wantonly inserts σκεπτέα after τὸ λοιπόν.

τὴν προτέραν ἐκλογήν . III 412 B ff.

ἐκείνας τὰς φύσεις κτλ. ‘I would have you suppose that it must be those natures which are to be selected,’ lit. ‘those natures must be to-be-selected.’ Kopetsch (de verbalibus Plat. p. 29) confesses himself unable to quote any parallels for the ‘pleonasm.’ We might compare the use of δεῖν in μνημονικὴν αὐτὴν ζητῶμεν δεῖν εἶναι VI 486 D, where see note; but the fact is that δεῖν is not altogether pleonastic in the present passage. Without δεῖν we should translate ‘that it is those natures’ etc. and not ‘that it must be those natures’ etc.; and there is a slight but appreciable difference between the two. Richards would expunge δεῖν or read ἀεί, but ἀεί is quite unsuitable here. ἐκλεκτάς (which I once proposed, taking the words as=‘ought to have been selected’) is equally unsatisfactory, nor does θεῖναι, which might be suggested in place of εἶναι, carry conviction. The text is in my judgment sound.

βεβαιοτάτους ‐‐ ἀνδρειοτάτους . The contrast is between stedfastness and spirit: cf. II 375 A ff. and VI 503 C with Appendix VI to Book VI. εὐειδεστάτους has not hitherto been mentioned as a qualification of Plato's rulers: for VI 494 C cannot be interpreted in such a sense. The word is however certainly genuine: cf. ἀρτιμελεῖς in 536 B.

γενναίους ‐‐ τὰ ἤθη : ‘of noble and masculine characters.’ Cf. Theaet. 149 A μαίας μάλα γενναίας τε καὶ βλοσυρᾶς, Nicostrat. Frag. 35 ed. Kock νὴ τὴν Ἀφροδίτην, ὦ ξένη, βλοσυράν γε τὴν φυχὴν ἔχεις, and Aelian Var. Hist. 12. 21 δεμνὸν ἅμα καὶ βλοσυρὸν ὁρῶσαι (of Spartan women). In Cl. Rev. XIII p. 10 I have tried to shew that the original meaning of this vigorous and expressive word is ‘hairy,’ ‘shaggy,’ ‘bristling’ (horridus), from which to ‘virile’ the transition is natural enough. Mr L. D. Barnett has since supplied me with an interesting confirmation from Pollux IV 136 (on tragic masks) ὁ δὲ οὖλος, ξανθός, ὑπέρογκος. αἱ τρίχες τῷ ὄγκῳ προσπεπήγασιν, ὀφρύες ἀνατέτανται, βλοσυρὸς τὸ εἶδος.

ἃ ‐‐ πρόσφορα : ‘the natural characteristics suitable for our scheme of education.’ τῆς φύσεως depends on ἅ, not (as Stallbaum supposes) on τῇδε τῇ παιδείᾳ. The following list of qualifications should be compared with that in VI 485 A ff. The difference is slight, but φιλοπονία as a special attribute is new, and on the other hand some of the secondary moral qualities are not insisted upon here.

ἀποδειλιῶσι κτλ. Cf. VI 504 A.

ἄρρατον . The word ἄρρατος, which occurs again in Crat. 407 D, is apparently, like βλοσυρός, an expressive vulgarism de foro arreptum. There is considerable variety here in the inferior MSS, but the evidence of the Scholiast places the reading beyond doubt. ἄρρατος is explained by Timaeus (s. v.) as ἰσχυρός, στερεός, and with this explanation the Scholiast and Lexicographers agree. Some of the ancients derived the word from an obsolete verb ῥάω = ῥαίω. Schneider remarks that the α must be long “si verum est quod scholiastes Victorianus ad Il. XIIII 56 tradit, pro ἄῤῥηκτον alios legisse ἄῤῥατον.” See Stephanus-Hase Thes. s. v.

οὐδένα : ‘I think no one will.’ Van Prinsterer's οὐδενί, as Stallbaum observes, is unnecessary. In written dialogue, as in actual conversation, the answer does not always accommodate itself to the exact form of the question: cf. V 465 E note

πρότερον κτλ. The reference in πρότερον is to VI 495 C—496 A. In οὐ κατ’ ἀξίαν αὐτῆς ἅπτονται Dümmler sees an allusion to Antisthenes (Antisth. p. 34), but see on 535 D, E.

ἄπονον : not μισόπονον, although μισοπονῇ appears below. Plato loves variety as well as uniformity, and Herwerden should not have proposed to write μισόπονον.

φιλόθηρος . Dümmler thinks Plato perhaps means Xenophon, who loved the chase; but it is unlikely that any personal reference is intended either here or in 535 C. See also on 535 E.

ὁ ‐‐ φιλοπονίαν : ‘whose love of work has taken the opposite direction.’

αὐτή τε καὶ κτλ. See on αὐτός τε καὶ—παρακάλει IV 427 D.

τὸ δ’ ἀκούσιον . See II 382 A—C.

θηρίον ὕειον . Dümmler again recognises the unhappy Antisthenes, remembering, no doubt, the ‘city of pigs.’ See however on II 372 D.

μεγαλοπρέπειαν : ‘highmindedness,’ not (as Jowett) ‘magnificence.’ See VI 486 A note

τὰ τοιαῦτα (“das dazu gehörige” Schneider) is quite general, and means how so-and-so is in respect of the virtues just enumerated: cf. VIII 549 D. The Oxford editors wrongly understand τὰ τοιαῦτα as τὰ τῆς ἀρετῆς μέρη.

λανθάνουσι κτλ. : ‘they unconsciously use cripples and bastards for any of these services that happen, as friends in the one case, and in the other rulers.’ Schneider explains τούτων as “horum negotiorum, hoc est, aliquam ex his, quae dictae sunt, virtutibus requirentium.” This is perhaps safer than to understand it merely of the services rendered by friends and rulers. In either case cf. for τούτων VIII 543 C note J. and C. have rightly noted that “the subject of τύχωσι is the same with that of λανθάνουσι”: but they are mistaken in referring τούτων to τὰ τῆς ἀρετῆς μέρη, and in connecting πρός with χωλοῖς τε καὶ νόθοις. It is certain that χρώμενοι is understood with τύχωσι, and, if so, πρός can belong only to χρώμενοι. D. and V. are consistently wrong in the translation of this somewhat perplexing little clause.

ἀρτιμελεῖς κτλ. For ἀρτιμελεῖς cf. 535 A. ἄσκησιν is of course the physical discipline: note the chiasmus.

ἥ τε δίκη κτλ. Cf. VI 487 A where οὐδ’ ἂν ὁ Μῶμος, ἔφη, τό γε τοιοῦτον μέμφαιτο similarly concludes the earlier enumeration of qualities necessary to the philosophic ruler.

καὶ πράξομεν . καί (which some inferior MSS omit) is “paullo insolentius positum, sed ita ut τἀναντία πάντα partim ad civitatis conditionem—partim ad opinionem hominum atque existimationem philosophiae, quam sequi errorem istum oporteat, spectare et utramque contra, quam dictum optandumque sit, casuram esse significet” (Schneider).

γελοῖον takes up γέλωτα just before, hence καί. My extreme προθυμία, says Socrates in effect, was fitted to provoke a smile (cf. VI 506 D).

ἐν τῷ παρόντι . The reference is to 535 C and VI 495 C—496 A. After παρόντι Burnet adds <τι>, needlessly: see on III 388 D.

536B - 537C After apologising for his excessive zeal in defence of Philosophy, Socrates lays down his ordinances. We must select our pupils while they are young, and put before them in their boyhood all the propaedeutic studies, taking care to avoid compulsion. At the same time they will be brought on the field of battle and receive their baptism of fire. From eighteen to twenty, gymnastic exercises claim their undivided attention. At twenty, those who have proved themselves the best will enter on a systematic comparative study of mathematics etc., lasting ten years.

ἐπαίζομεν . Literature is not life, but ‘noble play’—παγκάλην— παιδιὰν—τοῦ ἐν λόγοις δυναμένου παίζειν ( Phaedr. 276 E. Cf. also X 599 A note). See Hirzel der Dialog I p. 180, where this thoroughly Platonic view is admirably expounded. There is a touch of pathos in Plato's application of it to his own dialogues, recalling to my mind, I know not exactly why, the saying of Isaac Newton about gathering pebbles by the shore, as well as Heraclitus' αἰὼν παῖς ἐστι παίζων πεσσεύων ( Fr. 79 Bywater).

μᾶλλον ἐντεινάμενος . Plato's apology is by no means intended to appease the ‘bald little tinker’ (VI 495 E) and his crew; for he still holds them responsible for the insults levelled at philosophy (τοῖς αἰτίοις). He is merely apologising, not without a characteristic touch of irony, for an offence against the canons of literary taste. One ought not to turn ‘play’ into earnest, and, as Longinus remarks, κἀν βακχεύμασι νήφειν ἀναγκαῖον (περὶ ὕφους 16. 4).

πρεσβύτας ἐξελέγομεν . III 412 C. It is quite clear that the προτέρα ἐκλογή is not supplemented but superseded by the provisions now laid down. Cf. VIII 543 D note

γηράσκων κτλ. γηράσκω δ) αἰεὶ πολλὰ διδασκόμενος Solon Fr. 18 Bergk. The line is quoted in [ Erast.] 133 C and alluded to again in Lach. 188 B, 189 A.

ἧττον . ἔτι ἧττον, which Herwerden proposes, is no improvement, but rather the reverse. Plato may be alluding to some proverbial saying, as D. and V. appear to believe, translating thus: “an old man can sooner run than learn.”

νέων δὲ κτλ. Cf. Eur. I. T. 122 μόχθος γὰρ οὐδεὶς τοῖς νέοις σκῆψιν φέρει and Theaet. 146 B, Symp. 175 E.

παισὶν οὖσι κτλ. This preliminary survey is clearly meant to take place in the years during which ‘Music’ and Gymnastic are chiefly cultivated. See Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II p. 290.

οὐχ ὡς ἐπάναγκες κτλ. We must bear in mind throughout the whole of this subject that Plato is legislating for a select class who naturally love labour and truth. They alone are nature's freemen and must be treated as such in their education, but the compulsory method may be necessary, Plato would say, in order to educate others, so far as others can be educated at all. With the general sense cf. Phaedr. 240 C and Theogn. 472 πᾶν γὰρ ἀναγκαῖον χρῆμ’ ἀνιηρὸν ἔφυ.

παίζοντας : with a play on παῖδας: cf. infra VIII 545 E and ἀτεχνῶς παισὶν—μετὰ παιδιᾶς—μανθάνειν in Laws 819 B, a passage in which the general idea is that play should be study, whereas here it is that study should be play.

ἔφαμεν . V 467 C—E.

ἐντρεχέστατος : ‘most agile in’ (“der rührigste” Schneider). The word is rare, and apparently not elsewhere found in writers of the best period. It occurs in Longinus περὶ ὕψους 44. I δριμεῖαί τε καὶ ἐντρεχεῖς (φύσεις) and Marc. Aur. VI 14: cf. id. VII 66 ( ἐντρεχέστερον) and I 8 (ἐντρέχειος). For a kindred use of the verb ἐντρέχειν see Hom. Il. 19. 385 εἰ οἷ ἐφαρμόσσειε (sc. ἔντεα) καὶ ἐντρέχοι ἀγλαὰ γυῖα.

οὗτος ‐‐ ὁ χρόνος κτλ. The compulsory military or militia service of Athenian youth during their eighteenth and nineteenth years is probably in Plato's mind: see Gilbert Gk. Const. Ant. E. T. pp. 311—313.

προκριθέντες . See on 537 D.

ἐν τῇ παιδείᾳ . It is difficult to decide whether Plato in this instance wrote παιδιᾷ, παιδίᾳ or παιδείᾳ. παιδιὰ| is supported by three inferior MSS as well as by A^{2} and the oldest MS of Theo (see Hiller's edition p. 3), and παίζοντας τρέφε in 536 E seems at first sight to favour it. But ἐν τῇ παιδιᾷ is different from ἐν παιδιᾶς μέρει, and ought to mean ‘in their play’; whereas 536 E does not distinguish between ‘study’ and ‘play’ (see note ad loc.). παιδίᾳ ‘boyhood’ has also some MS support, and the existence of the word in Greek is fully proved by Schneider in his elaborate note. But ἐν τῇ παιδίᾳ would be superfluous after παισίν, and on the whole I now prefer the traditional reading παιδείᾳ, which appears to be in a majority of MSS.

τούτοις συνακτέον κτλ. τούτοις (sc. τοῖς προκριθεῖσι) goes with συνακτέον. The propaedeutic studies now begin to be pursued no longer χύδην, but systematically and comparatively, so as to reveal the ‘kinship of the studies with one another and with the nature of Being’: cf. 531 D note, and (for the meaning of οἰκειότης) 526 C note Platt would omit τῶν μαθημάτων as a gloss on ἀλλήλων, but without these words the Greek might mean ‘their mutual kinship and the kinship of true being’ (with itself). τῶν μαθημάτων is also in Theo (l. c.). For the genitives ἀλλήλων and τῆς—φύσεως, (which D. and V. wrongly connect with σύνοψιν), cf. VI 501 D τὴν φύσιν αὐτῶν οἰκείαν εἶναι τοῦ ἀρίστου .

ὁ μὲν γὰρ συνοπτικὸς κτλ. Cf. 531 D note: also Phaedr. 265 D ff. εἰς μίαν —ἰδέαν συνορῶντα ἄγειν τὰ πολλαχῇ διεσπαρμένα, Laws XII 965 B (συνορῶντα), Phaedr. 273 E, Soph. 253 D ff. and other passages cited by Zeller^{4} II 1. p. 616 note 3. See also App. III.

ἐν αὐτοῖς . αὐτοῖς is masculine (Schneider), not neuter (as D. and V. translate).

537D - 540C At this stage the best proficients will be advanced to higher honours, and tested by Dialectic. Great care must be taken in introducing them to this study; for where the character is immature and weak, dialectical debate too frequently engenders lawlessness, by overthrowing inherited beliefs. We shall therefore forbid such disputations to the young. After five years devoted solely to Dialectic, the next fifteen will be spent in acquiring experience of government and practical affairs. At the age of fifty those who have triumphantly passed through every trial, will thenceforward contemplate the Good, descending when their turn comes into the Cave to order human institutions after its likeness. All these regulations apply of course to women as well as to men.

ἐκ τῶν προκρίτων . πρόκριτοι was a familiar term in the organisation of Greek polities: see Arist. Ath. Pol. 8. 1 with Sandys ad loc., and cf. also Pl. Laws 753 C f.

ὀμμάτων ‐‐ μεθιέμενος . See VI 511 B note

παρανομίας κτλ. Like Phidippides in Ar. Clouds 1399 ff. ὡς ἡδὺ καινοῖς πράγμασιν καὶ δεξιοῖς ὁμιλεῖν | καὶ τῶν καθεστώτων νόμων ὑπερφρονεῖν δύνασθαι κτλ. Schneider retains ἐμπίπλαται (see cr. n.), making the subject τὸ διαλέγεσθαι, but the present tense (‘they become filled with lawlessness’) favours the plural. Or does Plato mean that the dialectic of his day was degenerating? I think not; for that is scarcely a reason for exercising special care in connexion with his own (ἐνταῦθα δὴ πολλῆς φυλακῆς ἔργον). αὐτούς is not decisive, though it points to the plural, which is also supported by 539 A παράνομος δὴ— δόξει γεγονέναι ἐκ νομίμου.

τῶν φασκόντων γονέων : ‘his self-styled parents.’ For the omission of εἶναι see Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. p. 34. γονέων <εἶναι>, which Herwerden proposes, is weaker and less emphatic.

ὑποβαλομένους is the reading of A and Cesenas M; whereas all, or nearly all, the other MSS have ὑποβαλλομένους. “Ac nescio an qui suppositum sibi aliquando filium pro suo habere et venditare pergunt, ὑποβαλλόμενοι dici potuerint” (Schneider, comparing καθιστάντες in III 410 B). This is true, and the present may be right, especially as in V 469 E, A has βαλόντος (wrongly, as I think) for the βάλλοντος of all the other MSS. But M may here perhaps be allowed to turn the scale.

ἤδει . εἰδείη (suggested by Richards) would be more regular (as in B below), but cf. δύναται 515 E note

εἰς αὐτούς . εἰς (which Herwerden brackets) is used as in ὑβρίζειν εἰς.

αἰσθόμενος . αἰσθόμενον, which is read by Hermann and others, has no MS authority except a variant, perhaps an early variant, in A, and apparently also M. The anacoluthon will of course be scouted by many scholars; but although it is ungrammatical, no doubt, it is scarcely harsher than many anacolutha in Plato; see Schneider on IV 430 E and Engelhardt Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 40, where numerous examples of the nominativus pendens are given. Plato begins as if he were going to write δοκεῖ μοι instead of μαντεύομαι: compare Ap. 21 C διασκοπῶν οὖν τοῦτον—καὶ διαλεγόμενος αὐτῷ, ἔδοξέ μοι κτλ., where ἔδοξέ μοι is substituted for ἔγνων or the like. Here the nominative seems to me to emphasize the contrast with ἐν ᾦ χρόνῳ—εἰδείη better than the accusative could have done; but in any case it is safer to retain than to expunge such echoes of conversational style in Plato wherever the weight of MS evidence is in their favour. For this reason I now, with Schneider and others, revert to αἰσθόμενος.

πατρὸς δὲ ἐκείνου κτλ. : ‘his former father’ etc. i.e. the reputed father of his earlier days. ποιουμένων ‘reputed’ (J. and C.), lit. ‘made out to be,’ is scarcely different from δοκούντων (τοὺς ἄλλους οἰκείους δοκοῦντας in B). Cobet conjectures προσποιουμένων, but the text is sound: cf. VI 498 A note

ἔστι που κτλ. Plato, as Bosanquet points out ( Companion p. 305), seems to think it possible enough that the higher education will lead his rulers to criticise the δόγματα of the earlier ‘musical’ training. “But if this criticism is only the negative side of the deepening grasp with which a mature and stedfast mind lays hold on reality, no harm, he urges, will be done” (Bosanquet l.c.). We may even go farther and say that Dialectic and its ancillary studies are expressly intended to place the Guardians in the same position as the original legislator (VI 497 D) and enable them within limits to modify and reconstruct the authoritative δόγματα of the city (VI 500 E ff.).

ἐλθὸν ἐρώτημα . See IV 434 D note

ἀποκριναμένου . The genitive is defended by Schneider from IX 590 D. ἀποκρινάμενον (Ξ and two other MSS) is obviously a ‘correction.’

καὶ πολλάκις κτλ. The whole of this passage should be compared with the account of the genesis of μισολογία in Phaed. 90 B ff.

μήτε ‐‐ τε . See on IV 430 B.

τὸν κολακεύοντα is explained by the Oxford editors as ‘the life that is flattering him,’ with reference to 538 D. It is rather, I think, ‘the flattering life’ i.e. the life of the κόλαξ (cf. ὁ ἀπολαυστικὸς βίος and the like in Arist. Eth. Nic. I 2. 1095^{b} 17 ff.). In other words the epithet which properly belongs to the person who lives the life is transferred to the life which he lives. Aristotle reminds us that ὁ δημαγωγὸς καὶ ὁ κόλαξ οἱ αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀνάλογον (Pol. Δ 4. 1292^{a} 20), and the demagogic life may be taken as one among many illustrations of Plato's meaning, especially as in παράνομος κτλ. he seems to be thinking of Alcibiades: cf. Thuc. VI 15. 4 and 28. 2. See VI 494 C ff. notes and Bosanquet Companion p. 306.

δόξει . The appearance does not exclude the reality: cf. (with J. and C.) Soph. O. T. 402 and Thuc. III 10. 1.

εὐλαβουμένῳ refers not to the pupils, but to Glauco as legislator, who ‘meddles with Dialectic’ by introducing the Guardians to it. This appears clearly both from εὐλάβεια and from ἐνταῦθα δὴ πολλῆς φυλακῆς ἔργον in 537 D. εὐλαβουμένους (Madvig) and εὐλαβουμένοις (Baiter) are therefore wrong.

μὴ νέους κτλ. Cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. I 1. 1095^{a} 2 τῆς πολιτικῆς οὐκ ἔστιν οἰκεῖος ἀκροατὴς ὁ νέος. It is clear from the present passage that Dialectic is largely concerned with moral and religious questions, as Bosanquet (Companion p. 302) and Nettleship (Lect. and Rem. II p. 291) remark. See App. III. Grote (III pp. 237—239) has some interesting observations on Plato's exclusion of the young from dialectical debate; but it is scarcely right to say that the Parmenides (135 C—136 E) contradicts Plato's precept in the Republic, for the disputations in the Parmenides are a preliminary exercise ( γυμνασία 135 D) to be undertaken before we attempt to define καλόν τε τί καὶ δίκαιον καὶ ἀγαθὸν καὶ ἓν ἕκαστον τῶν εἰδῶν (135 C).

οἶμαι γάρ σε κτλ. The same phenomenon is similarly described in Phil. 15 D—16 A: cf. also Ap. 23 C and Isocr. Panath. 26.

ἀντιλογίαν . See on V 454 A.

τούτου : this provision, viz. that they shall not begin Dialectic in youth (539 B). The genitive depends on προειρημένα (which refers to passages like VI 485 ff., 490, 503 C, VII 535 A ff.), and not, as J. and C. suggest, on εὐλαβείᾳ .

ὡς ‐‐ ἔρχεται . On the construction see III 410 B note

ἔτη ‐‐ τότε . 537 B.

πέντε θές . Krohn thinks five years very short, compared with the time allotted to the προπαιδεία, and suspects that we have here ‘a silent confession that there is not so very much to say about the Ideas after all.’ (Pl. St. p. 187). Five years devoted ἐνδελεχῶς καὶ ξυντόνως to Dialectic exclusively is a good deal; and we may be sure that Plato does not intend his Guardians to neglect the subject between 35 and 50, although practical duties occupy most of their time. Moreover at 50, Dialectic is resumed, and it is not till then that the Idea of Good is fully apprehended, so that the five years from 30 to 35 were certainly not thought by Plato to exhaust the subject. We must also beware of supposing that there is any break of continuity in the education of the Guardians. The study of each propaedeutic ‘art’ by itself prepares us for seeing all the ‘arts’ in their mutual relations and interdependence, and the comparative survey of the ‘arts’ in turn prepares us for Dialectic (537 C), nor need the subjects of the προπαιδεία be finally abandoned after we enter on Dialectic. See Appendices II and III.

πεντηκοντουτῶν . We are told that in Chalcis the magistrates had to be at least 50 years of age: νόμος δὲ ἦν Χαλκιδεῦσι μὴ ἄρξαι μηδὲ πρεσβεῦσαι νεώτερον ἐτῶν πεντήκοντα (Heraclides Fr. Hist. Gr. II p. 222), but advanced age was rarely a condition of holding office in Greek states. See Whibley Gk. Olig. pp. 148 f.

τὴν τῆς ψυχῆς αὐγήν : ‘the radiant light of the soul.’ αὐγή is highly poetic in this sense: cf. Soph. Ajax 70. There is more than a touch of mysticism in this and similar passages throughout Books VI and VII (cf. especially VI 490 A, B), but it is exaggerated by Krohn (Pl. St. p. 187), who boldly declares that “the only person who correctly understood the later phase of the Republic was Plotinus,” and that “the so-called Platonic Dialectic is a Missverständniss.”

παραδείγματι κτλ. See VI 484 C, 501 A—C notes

ἑκάστους . See 520 D note

οὐχ ὡς καλόν τι κτλ. 520 E note

ἐὰν καὶ ἡ Πυθία κτλ. See on IV 427 B, C.

ξυναναιρῇ . See cr. n. The error in Α, Π, and several MSS besides, is a pretty example of lipography: contrast προσαναιρῇ in V 461 E, where the temptation is absent and the MSS right. Burnet says that A^{2} has ξυναναιρῇ, I know not on what authority: I found no trace in the MS of anything except ξυναιρῇ.

εὐδαίμοσι . If not δαίμοσιν, then εὐ‐δαίμοσιν.

ὥσπερ ἀνδριαντοποιός . Jowett seems to find an allusion to the fact that Socrates had been a sculptor; but the same words might have been used if he had not: cf. (with J. and C.) II 361 D.

ὡς διήλθομεν . V 451 C ff.

540D - 541B Finally, we repeat, our perfect city is not an idle aspiration, but capable of being realised, when true philosophers become kings and educate the young themselves, after banishing every one above the age of ten. Our account of the perfect city and man is now completed.

εὐχάς . V 450 D note

χαλεπὰ κτλ. See VI 502 C note

ἢ πλείους ἢ εἷς . See on IV 445 D.

ἀναγκαιότατον . They will admit no compulsion save that of Right; Non civium ardor prava iubentium Non vultus instantis tyranni Mente quatit solida. Contrast VI 492 B—493 D.

ὅσοι μὲν ἂν κτλ. Newman (Aristotle's Politics I p. 413 note) thinks this proposal is “a softened version of the sentence which Heraclitus passed on the Ephesians for expelling Hermodorus” (Bywater's Heracl. Fr. 114), but the parallel is not very close. Plato's καθαρμός is sufficiently explained by the precepts which he himself lays down in VI 501 A: see also Pol. 293 D and especially Laws 735 B—736 C, where he gives an interesting survey of the various καθαρμοί applicable to commonwealths, and 752 B ff. Whether the καθαρμός of the Republic is itself either possible or adequate is another matter: Grote pronounces it an εὐχή (Plato III p. 218 note). An age which had witnessed the διοικισμός of Mantinea (Xen. Hell. V 2. 7) might well have regarded it as feasible. ‘Possible, but difficult’ is perhaps the safest verdict. The purgation, even if successfully applied, might not be sufficient to start the city well, but it would be a useful auxiliary to that “express initiative force, exceptional and belonging to some peculiar crisis,” which (according to Grote l. c.) would float the enterprise. Bosanquet raises the question how far the καθαρμός is seriously meant. To me it appears to be neither more nor less serious than Plato's treatment of the general question as to the possibility of his ideal city: see on VI 502 C and Hirmer Entstehung u. Komp. d. pl. Pol. p. 638.

ἐκπέμψωσιν ‐‐ θρέψωνται . Stephanus (with some inferior MS authority) reads the future, which Liebhold also would restore; but ὅταν is carried on. Cf. II 359 B note

θρέψωνται κτλ. J. and C. accuse Plato of barely considering “how the provision, which he here abruptly introduces, is to be reconciled with what precedes. For how are the children to be taught music and gymnastic when all their elders have been sent away? From what other State are the new teachers to be brought?” Plato is perfectly consistent. The new teachers are οἱ ὡς ἀληθῶς φιλόσοφοι δυνάσται ἐν πόλει γενόμενοι (540 D: cf. VI 499 B, 502 A ff.), and they rusticate the parents etc. just because their presence makes it impossible to bring up children on the new lines. If ‘their elders’ could teach the young children, it would be unnecessary and wrong to send them into the country. Jowett seems to forget for the moment that Plato is not here speaking of his own city, but of an actual city which he wishes to transform into his καλλίπολις.

καὶ οὕτω κτλ. The infinitives still depend on ξυγχωρεῖτε.

ἐλέγομεν . Liebhold's λέγομεν is harmless, but unnecessary: cf. διεληλύθαμεν τότε above.

εἴπερ ποτὲ γίγνοιτο . Cf. VI 502 C note

ὅπερ ἐρωτᾷς refers to Socrates' question οὐκοῦν—ἀνδρός; Cf. X 595 C ἀλλ’ ὃ λέγω, ῥητέον. “The present inquiry is, I believe, concluded” (D. and V.) is an erroneous translation.

543A - 545C Socrates now returns to the point at which the digression occupying Books V—VII began. There are, as we observed, four leading varieties of States and individuals, in addition to the perfect polity and perfect man. In order of merit they are (1) Timarchy, or the Cretan and Laconian State, (2) Oligarchy, (3) Democracy, (4) Tyranny. All other kinds of commonwealths, such as dynasties etc., lie somewhere between these primary and conspicuous varieties. Furthermore, inasmuch as the specific character of States is determined by that of individuals, there will be five leading types of individual character, embodied respectively in (1) the aristocratic, (2) the timarchical, (3) the oligarchical, (4) the democratical, (5) the tyrannical man. The first of these we have already described; but we must review the others also, in order that, by contrasting the best and worst, we may apprehend the relation between undiluted justice and undiluted injustice in respect of the happiness and misery of their possessors. As before, we will examine the commonwealths first, and afterwards the individuals.

ff. The description of the philosopher and the philosophic city is at last complete, and the argument returns to the point at which the ‘digression’ began, viz. V 449 A: see note ad loc. Plato has already said repeatedly, and reminds us yet again in 544 A, that the aim of our whole investigation was to decide εἰ ὁ ἄριστος εὐδαιμονέστατος καὶ ὁ κάκιστος ἀθλιώτατος, ἢ ἄλλως ἔχοι (cf. II 368 E, 369 A notes). With the character of the perfect man we are now familiar, but we have still to discover and describe τὸν κάκιστον, in order that we may institute our comparison and pronounce our verdict. This is the task to which Plato addresses himself in VIII and IX (down to 576 B). The method which he follows resembles that adopted in II 369 B ff.—IV. In the first place, he retains throughout the former analogy between the Soul and the City, and his account of the imperfect man is in every instance preceded by an account of the imperfect State. Secondly, instead of going straight to the mark and giving us a single ready-made sketch of total and complete depravity, Plato draws an elaborate and quasi-historical picture of the gradual descent of the perfect State and the perfect Man through successive phases of ever-growing degeneration down to the lowest depth of wickedness and crime. In the same way, as Nettleship observes (Lect. and Rem. II p. 295), “in describing a perfect state, or certain steps in the process of forming a perfect state,” he sometimes wrote “as if one step of that process succeeded another in a historical order.” See on II 369 B, 372 D, 373 D et al. The question has often been discussed whether the sequence of polities in VIII and IX was intended to be really historical or not: see for example Zeller^{4} II pp. 923—925, Henkel Studien zur Gesch. d. Gr. Lehre v. Staat p. 56 and Krohn Pl. St. pp. 204 ff. Aristotle seems to have understood Plato's account as an attempt to describe the actual facts of Greek history, and severely criticizes it from his usual standpoint in Pol. E 12. 1316^{a} 1—^{b} 27 ; but Plato himself must of course have known as well as Aristotle that the historical development of Greek constitutions did not by any means always correspond with his scheme. See Whibley Gk Olig. pp. 62—88 and Greenidge Gk Const. Hist. pp. 12—35. The fact is that Aristotle altogether ignores the real object of Plato, which is, as we have seen, to arrive at the worst State and the worst man, and treats him as if he had undertaken to exhibit a full and complete genealogical tree of all the changes good or bad which had ever taken place in Greek constitutional history. But Plato does not here profess to describe political advance, but only political decay; and even his theory of political decay is itself based upon a theory of psychological degeneration which justly and deliberately ignores, as irrelevant for our present purpose, the undoubted power of human character to improve as well as to deteriorate. The question, as Nettleship says, which Plato puts before himself is this: “The human soul being as we have described it, and having in it a certain capacity for evil as well as for good, what would it come to, and through what stages would it pass, if its capacity for evil were realized gradually but without any abatement? In actual human experience there is always some abatement; there are always counteracting circumstances which prevent any one tendency working itself out in isolation and unhindered; but the philosopher may, as Plato here does, work out the result of a single tendency logically. These books therefore put before us an ideal history of evil, as the previous books put before us an ideal history of good” (l. c. p. 295). The different stages in the decline of the individual soul are each reflected in the decline of the πολιτεία, which is still, as in II—VII, not ‘a lifeless instrument, or dead machine,’ but in the words of Isocrates, simply the soul of the State (ἔστι γὰρ ψυχὴ πόλεως οὐδὲν ἕτερον ἢ πολιτεία Areop. 14). But although Plato treats the whole question from a psychological rather than a historical standpoint, it is none the less true that the materials of his picture are taken from Greek political and social life. In Books VIII and IX of the Republic we have an extraordinarily vivid and life-like embodiment of the results of Plato's observation and experience of the Greek character, both private and public, in all its different phases, Lacedaemonian, oligarchical, democratical or Athenian, and tyrannical; and the student of Greek history, whether political, economical or social, will obtain a clearer idea of the inner life and animating spirit of Greek constitutions from Plato's description than from any other ancient source whatever. For the rest, it should be noted that Plato has given us in this part of the Republic the earliest attempt at a Philosophy of History, and founded the psychological interpretation of the State. Every political movement is, according to him, the expression of some particular psychological impulse or impulses, and the Constitution inevitably assumes different forms, according as one or another element or ‘part’ of soul obtains the mastery in the individual citizen. See on this subject Krohn Pl. St. pp. 199 ff., and Bluntschli Theory of the State pp. 76 f.

τῇ μελλούσῃ ἄκρως κτλ. Cf. Laws 739 C, D. The adverb ἄκρως is said by Herwerden (Mn. XIX p. 335) to be a ἅπαξ εἰρημένον in classical Greek. On the word βασιλέας Pfleiderer (Zur Lösung etc. p. 73) bases a chorizontic argument; but see on IV 445 D. Plato's rulers may well be called ‘Kings,’ for Plato holds that there is no difference of principle between Kingship and Aristocracy: cf. VII 520 B with V 473 C, IX 587 B, and Henkel Stud. zur Gesch. d. Gr. Lehre vom Staat p. 57.

αὐτῶν . The genitive is partitive: ‘and that those of their number are to be Kings who have shewn themselves best’ etc. Jowett wrongly translates ‘their kings.’

ξυνεχωρήσαμεν . III 415 D ff.

οἷαι . The reference is to III 416 D ff. Liebhold's conjecture ὅτι κοιναί is an undeserved reflection on Glauco's powers of memory.

οἱ ἄλλοι . οἱ ἄνθρωποι, which I once suggested (Cl. Rev. IV p. 357), would be more exact, and ΑΛΛΟΙ and ΑΝ—ΟΙ are pretty easily confused in uncial MSS (Cobet V.L.^{2} p. 432: cf. Heindorf on Prot. 354 B). Owing to νῦν, οἱ ἄλλοι can only mean ‘the rest of mankind,’ and the Guardians are therefore virtually spoken of as a section of living men. This kind of looseness is not uncommon, though here it has no stylistic effect. An alternative view might be to understand οἱ ἄλλοι of the rest of the citizens (τῶν ἄλλων below) and νῦν as ‘in point of fact’ or ‘in our present discussion’; but this explanation is much less satisfactory. ὡς, which some inferior MSS write for ὧν, does not remove the inaccuracy in οἱ ἄλλοι: nor is οἷον ἄλλοι in IV 419 A precisely parallel, though it supports the view that οἱ ἄλλοι means ‘the rest of mankind.’

ἀθλητάς ‐‐ πολέμου . VII 521 D note

εἰς ἐνιαυτόν . Nothing is to remain over at the end of the year (III 416 E).

εἰς ταῦτα : viz. εἰς τὰ τῆς φυλακῆς etc. For the use of the pronoun cf. VII 536 A and infra 558 E notes Madvig's εἰς τακτά is unnecessary, and ταξαμένους in III 416 D means something quite different.

ἀλλά γ’ ἐπειδὴ κτλ. : ‘yes, but after we finished that subject, let us recall where we digressed to come here, that we may resume the old path.’ “γε ad sequentia ε<*>πειδὴ τοῦτ) ἀπετελέσαμεν pertinet et priora recte quidem dicta a Glaucone, sed unum idque non leve reliquum esse significat, quod item sit in memoriam revocandum, ut relictam viam denuo capessere possint” (Schneider). The MSS fluctuate between ἀλλά γ) (the reading of A), ἀλλ’ ἄγ) and ἀλλ’ ἄγε (Π), the last of which readings is adopted by all editors except Schneider. α<*>λλά γε, though rare, is, I believe, firmly established in Plato: see on I 331 B. It fits the situation in this passage exactly, whereas ἀλλ’ ἄγε does not, if we translate ἐπειδὴ τοῦτ’ ἀπετελέσαμεν correctly, and not (with D. and V., Jowett etc.) by ‘now that we have concluded the subject.’ τοῦτο is not Books V—VII, but the arrangements of the earlier city of II—IV, as described in 543 B, C: and ἀπετελέσαμεν is aorist, not perfect. ἀναμνησθῶμεν (as Schneider observes) is necessitated by ἵνα —ἴωμεν, otherwise Socrates might simply have said ἀλλά γ’ ἐπειδὴ τοῦτ’ ἀπετελέσαμεν, πόθεν δεῦρο ἐξετραπόμεθα; There is moreover no need for so vigorous an exhortation to exercise the memory as would be conveyed by ἀλλ’ ἄγε ἀναμνησθῶμεν, especially as Glauco's recollection had left nothing to be desired in B and C above.

καθάπερ νῦν . νῦν refers to 541 B.

ὡς διεληλυθὼς ‐‐ πόλεως : “quasi disputatione de civitate absoluta” (Stallbaum): cf. V 450 A. The MSS vary between this reading, and ὡς διελήλυθας or διελήλυθας alone: but A (with which Π^{2} and several other MSS agree) is certainly right.

λέγων κτλ. V 449 A.

καὶ ταῦτα κτλ. : ‘and that, too, though, as it seems, you could have told us of a still more beautiful city and man’ viz. the city of the philosopherking and the philosopher-king himself, afterwards described by Socrates in V 472 B—VII. The city of V—VII is spoken of as a different city from that of II— IV: see on ἐν μὲν τῇ προτέρᾳ ἐκλογῇ VII 536 C, II 372 D note, and Hirzel Der Dialog pp. 235 ff. Jowett's translation “although, as now appears, you had more excellent things to relate both of State and man” is a defensible construction, but unnatural, and certainly not what Plato meant. The passage has been curiously misunderstood by some critics, through inattention to the force of the imperfect participle ε<*>χων. Herwerden, for example, actually proposes to insert <οὐ> before καλλίω. Schneider and Stallbaum translate the sentence correctly.

ἔφησθα κτλ. IV 445 C. On the pronouns ὧν—αὐτῶν see II 357 B note Plato is very careful to make it clear that he does not profess, like Aristotle, to give a complete account of faulty States. From his watch-tower he can descry infinite varieties, but only four on which he need expatiate. We may take it that these are, in Plato's view, the four most conspicuous landmarks in the history of political degeneration, as well as the most important and clearly-outlined varieties of existing States. Cf. IV 445 C and infra 544 D ἥτις καὶ ἐν εἴδει διαφανεῖ τινι κεῖται.

ἵνα πάντας κτλ. reminds us of the thread which is the clue to the labyrinthine reasoning of the Republic: cf. 545 A, 548 D and II 368 E note

ἔχοι . The optative, for which Ast and Stallbaum needlessly read ἔχει with Ξ q and some other inferior MSS, is due to the oratio obliqua: cf. VII 515 D note

ἐρομένου . V 449 A.

ὥσπερ παλαιστής . The Scholiast remarks ἔθος γὰρ τούτοις, ὅταν πέσωσιν ὁμοῦ—πάλιν ἐγερθέντας ἐφ’ ὁμοίῳ συμπλακῆναι σχήματι, ὅπερ τὴν αὐτὴν εἶπε λάβην. Plato, as Stallbaum points out, uses the same figure in Phaedr. 236 B: cf. Phil. 13 D, Laws 682 E and ἀντιλαμβανόμενος VI 505 A note

ἐπιθυμῶ ‐‐ ἀκοῦσαι : ‘I am desirous also on my own account to hear’ sc. apart from the half-polemical motive suggested by the figure. Herwerden remarks “locus vix sanus,” but it is sound enough, although the English translators (“I shall particularly wish” etc. Jowett) miss the meaning.

ἥ τε ‐‐ ἐπαινουμένη . The Spartan constitution in its palmy days was widely praised for εὐνομία and discipline (pseudo-Archytas in Mullach Frag. Philos. Gr. I p. 560, Xen. Mem. III 5. 15 f., IV 4. 15, Plato Hipp. Mai. 283 E, 285 B, Laws 692 C and elsewhere), and became on this ground a sort of political ideal in the eyes of many Greeks: see for example Isocr. Panath. 108 ff. 200 ff. 216 ff. and the fragments of Critias' Λακεδαιμονίων πολιτεία in Müller Frag. Hist. Gr. II pp. 68 f. Cf. Nohle Statslehre Plat. pp. 108 ff. and Whibley Gk Olig. pp. 57 ff.

αὕτη : ista ‘that of yours,’ ‘your Cretan and Lacedaemonian constitution.’ On their connexion see Arist. Pol. B 10. 1271^{b} 22 ff. with Susemihl and Hicks's notes. It is, I think, fanciful to see in αὕτη an allusion to Glauco's sympathies for Sparta, in spite of 548 D below.

καὶ δευτέρως . Hermann prints his own conjecture ἡ δευτέρως, but the common confusion of καί and ἡ (Bast Comm. Pal. p. 815) is, I believe, later than the date of Paris A, and the text is free from objection: ‘and second in order as in esteem, a constitution fraught with many evils, bearing the name of oligarchy.’ δευτέρα agrees with πολιτεία, not with ὀλιγαρχία.

διάφορος : not of course ‘different’ (as Jowett), but ‘antagonistic,’ adversaria (Stallbaum). διάφορος ‘different’ gives a poor sense, and would take the genitive, which Ast erroneously proposed to read. Greek history furnished only too many proofs of the natural feud between democracy and oligarchy: see Greenidge Gk Const. Hist. pp. 208 ff. and Gilbert Gr. Staatsalt. II p. 285 note 2.

ἐφεξῆς γιγνομένη . From this and other indications it would appear on a first perusal that the sequence of commonwealths in VIII and IX is intended by Plato to be not merely logical, but historical also; but there is no question that the political evolution of Greek constitutions was far more complex than would appear from Plato's description. See on 543 A. We must above all things remember that it is in order to furnish a picture of the worst city and the worst man that the whole of this enquiry is undertaken, and Plato is at liberty to adopt whatever mode of presentation is best adapted for the object which he has in view. The form which he does in point of fact select is that of a historical narrative (see on 543 A, 548 D), but the real order of the development which he describes is a ‘logical order,’ and is primarily determined by psychological, and not by historical considerations. Although there are many points of contact between the development of Greek constitutional history and Plato's arrangement, Plato here employs narration primarily and chiefly as a vehicle or instrument for expressing the results of psychological analysis, and not because he believes that political development always and inevitably follows the same lines. See also on 543 A and infra 544 D.

διαφέρουσα κτλ. The reading of Ξ—see cr. n.—is confirmed by v and two other MSS, as well as by Stobaeus ( Flor. 43. 115) and Ficinus (ab his omnibus differens). All other MSS appear to have διαφεύγουσα. “Errori—occasionem pronuntiatio non absimilis dedisse videtur” (Schneider). The word does not mean ‘differs’ (as Jowett) but ‘excels’ (ironically, of course, like ἡ γενναία δή). Father Rickaby has suggested to me that we should read καὶ ἡ πασῶν τούτων διαφέρουσα, ἡ γενναία δὴ τυραννίς, τέταρτον κτλ. The conjecture is an attractive one, both on other grounds and also because it enables us to retain the article which appears before πασῶν (see cr. n.) in A: but it is perhaps safer to follow Ξ.

νόσημα . Greek political theory regards tyrants as νοσήματα τῶν πόλεων (Isocr. Hel. 34: cf. Henkel l. c. p. 156).

ἢ τίνα . Ast and others write ἤ τινα (with slight MS support), but τίνα is perfectly good: cf. IX 573 A.

ἐν εἴδει διαφανεῖ τινι . See on 544 A.

δυναστεῖαι . δυναστεία is that form of polity in which the son succeeds the father καὶ ἄρχῃ μὴ ὁ νόμος ἀλλ’ οἱ ἄρχοντες (Arist. Pol. Δ 5. 1292^{b} 5 ff.: cf. Laws 680 A, B). Such a πολιτεία might be good, but was of course generally bad: see Susemihl and Hicks on Arist. Pol. B 10. 1272^{b} 3. Examples are pro vided by Thessaly (Thuc. IV 78. 3) and (about 480 B.C.) Thebes (Thuc. III 62. 3: cf. Gilbert Griech. Staatsalt. II pp. 10, 46). See Whibley Gk Olig. pp. 124— 126.

ὠνηταὶ βασιλεῖαι : like Carthage (Arist. l.c. 11. 1273^{a} 36 with Susemihl and Hicks p. 349). Herwerden sins through ignorance when he proposes αἱρεταί for ὠνηταί.

τοιαῦταί τινες : such as, for example, αἰσυμνητεία, and the other specific varieties (as Aristotle reckons them) of Plato's typical πολιτεῖαι: see Pol. Γ, Δ Ζ passim.

εὕροι δ’ ἂν κτλ. : whereas Plato confines himself to Greek history throughout VIII and IX.

καὶ ἀνθρώπων κτλ. Cf. IV 445 C, and on the principle here laid down see IV 435 E note The present passage is a clear and emphatic statement of the psychological basis on which Plato's philosophy of History rests. Political ἀδικία, like political δικαιοσύνη (IV 443 B note), is after all no more than εἴδωλόν τι: injustice in the truest sense is στάσις within the individual soul (IV 444 B), and social and political wrong-doing is but its outward manifestation. The double genitive, which is easy enough (cf. E below and V 449 A note), has led to the corruption τρόπον τινά in several MSS. Liebhold also suggests καὶ τρόπων instead of τρόπων. The expression εἴδη τρόπων (‘specific characters’) is treated as a single word, and should be repeated with πολιτειῶν: cf. IV 445 C ὅσοι πολιτειῶν τρόποι εἰσὶν εἴδη ἔχοντες, τοσοῦτοι κινδυνεύουσι καὶ ψυχῆς τρόποι εἶναι (a passage which proves, I think, that Schneider and Stallbaum are wrong in supplying only εἴδη with ὅσαπερ κτλ.)

ἐκ δρυὸς κτλ. Hom. Od. XIX 162 f. ἀλλὰ καὶ ὥς μοι εἰπὲ τεὸν γένος, ὁππόθεν ἐσσί· | οὐ γὰρ ἀπὸ δρυός ἐσσι παλαιφάτου οὐδ’ ἀπὸ πέτρης, i.e. you have a γένος (cf. Ap. 34 D) and are not miraculously sprung ἀγενεαλογήτως out of tree or stone, like the fabled men of old (see Preller-Robert Gr. Myth. p. 79 note 4). In Plato the saying is used much like the German ‘es ist doch nicht aus der Luft gefallen’ (Schück de scholiis p. 32, where the proverb is illustrated).

ἃ ἂν κτλ. οἶ ἄν was read till Schneider on the authority of Ξ; but ἃ ἄν (ΑΠ and a large majority of MSS) is quite satisfactory. “Reipublicae formae eos dicuntur sequi mores, qui in quavis civitate veluti pondere praegravantes ad se suamque regionem attraxerint reliqua” (Schneider, comparing for ῥέψαντα Hdt. VII 139). The word ῥεύσαντα (Ξ and some other MSS) is unattic (Lobeck Phryn. p. 738): Plato's form is ῥυέντα e.g. VI 495 B.

ὀρθῶς is more naturally taken with φαμέν (Jowett etc.) than with the adjectives (as Schneider). We rightly call him ‘good’ etc., because he is ὅμοιος ἀριστο‐κρατίᾳ.

ἵνα κτλ. See 544 A note

ἠρξάμεθα . II 368 E note

ὄνομα γὰρ κτλ. : ‘for I have no other name in our language for it: we must call it either “timarchy” or “timocracy”’ (“Ehrenherrschaft oder Ehrenobmacht” Schneider). Plato called the constitution in question φιλότιμος πολιτεία, which may be cumbrous, but is certainly Greek. If we want a single name, we must, he says, invent: and either τιμαρχία or τιμοκρατία will do. The Oxford editors erroneously suggest that ἢ—κλητέον is interrogative: nor is there any reason to suspect the text, as W. H. Thompson did. Both of Plato's coinages survived, but they never became popular, and were used in another sense from Plato's— τιμοκρατία with the meaning of the vox nihili τιμηματοκρατία or ἡ ἀπὸ τιμημάτων ἀρχή (Arist. Eth. Nic. VIII 12. 1160^{a} 36) and τιμαρχία for the Roman censorship (Stephanus-Hase Thes. s.v.).

πρὸς ‐‐ ταύτην =‘ad hanc’: cf. IX 577 B and Tim. 24 A τοὺς μὲν οὖν νόμους σκόπει πρὸς τοὺς τῇδε (Schneider).

545C - 547C How does Timarchy arise out of Aristocracy? We may lay it down as a universal rule that constitutional change is originated by dissension within the governing class. Socrates invokes the Muses to tell ‘how first sedition entered.’ Like everything else, our perfect city is subject to Nature's universal law, that whatever is created perishes. Out of the elements of the number which expresses the shortest period of gestation in the human kind, Socrates builds up a ‘geometrical number,’ which he calls ‘the lord of better and worse births.’ When, through ignorance of these, couples are united inopportunely, as one day they will be, a degenerate race of offspring arises. The best of these in due course become rulers; but the mixture of races—golden, silver, copper, iron—waxes greater, and sedition is the result. The contending parties finally, by means of a compromise, effect the transition to Timarchy—a form of commonwealth standing midway between Aristocracy and Oligarchy.

ff. I have discussed the famous ‘Number of Plato’ at length in Appendix I, and must refer the reader to that Appendix for a fuller justification of views which considerations of space preclude me from defending totis viribus throughout the notes. The connexion of the episode with the argument of the Republic may be expressed as follows. In accordance with the form of a historical narrative which he employs throughout these two books, Plato invites us to conceive of his perfect city as having actually existed long ago, just as in the Timaeus (23 C ff.) and Critias (109 B ff.) the Platonic Utopia appears as prehistoric Athens. In making this demand upon the imagination of his countrymen, Plato could count upon the support to be derived from the prevalence of the view that mankind had degenerated from an age of innocence and bliss in the far-distant past: see the references in my edition of the Protagoras p. xxiii and Rohde Griech. Roman pp. 216 ff. What, then, was the originating cause of degeneration? Plato finds the cause, not in anything peculiar to the Ideal city, but in a law which prevails throughout the whole of Nature—the law that everything created is doomed to decay. There cannot be any ἴδιος μεταβολή (to quote the phrase of Aristotle Pol. E 12. 1316^{a} 12) of a perfect City; for a city which carries within itself the seeds of decay is not perfect, but imperfect. In the sequel Plato first describes the manner in which degeneration begins to take effect (οὐ μόνον —δέον 546 A, B), and afterwards proceeds to construct a Number which is the expression of that law of inevitable degeneration to which the Universe and all its parts are subject. The substance of what he has to say on the first head is that a psychologically inferior offspring gradually makes its appearance because children are sometimes begotten inopportunely. It is noteworthy that here, as everywhere in Books VIII and IX, the decline of the constitution or soul of the State (543 A note) is traced to the decline of the soul of the individual. In the words ἀνθρωπείῳ δὲ—τριάδος (546 B, C), Plato, copying the method of the Pythagoreans, and closely following their calculations, at all events in the first part of the reckoning, attempts to give an arithmetical expression to the Law of Change in that which he calls the γεωμετρικὸς ἀριθμός. According to the view which I have endeavoured to establish in Appendix I, the arithmetic, in which each of the factors and processes involved was full of significance to ancient speculators on the theory of numbers, may be thus expressed in modern arithmetical notation: (1) 3^{3} + 4^{3} + 5^{3}=216. (2) (3 x 4 x 5)^{4}=12,960,000 =3600^{2}=4800 x 2700.

The first number, 216, is the shortest period of gestation in the human race expressed in days. In the second equation, the number 12,960,000 expresses, also in days, the duration of a Great Year in the life of the Universe. Expressed in years, the number is 36,000, if we count, as Plato here does, 360 days in the year. The two ‘harmonies,’ 3600^{2} and 4800 x 2700, are the two cycles described in the Politicus, each of which is a Great Year. In the first ὁμοιότης prevails, in the second ἀνομοιότης: the World ‘waxes’ in the first, and ‘wanes’ in the second, without, however, suffering dissolution. In what sense the whole number 36,000 years, which astronomers sometimes called the Platonicus annus in the middle ages, is at once the numerical Cause of Change, and the ‘lord of better and worse births,’ is pointed out in App. I, Pt ii § 7, and also in the notes on 546 C. How far Plato attached a serious value to his Number and the calculations from which he derives it, I have briefly discussed at the end of App. I, Pt ii. Here it must suffice to say that the episode, like many other passages in Plato, is half-serious, and half-playful. The setting of the whole is mythical, for it is only for literary and artistic purposes that Plato pictures his ideal city as historically true: and the meaning of the latter part of the Number is deciphered by the aid of one of Plato's myths. Moreover, the style of the whole passage, though extraordinarily rhythmical and highly-wrought, acquires a touch of fantastic humour from the bewildering parade of mathematical terms, at some of which even Plato's own contemporaries would probably have smiled. On its serious side, the Number affords an interesting example of the application of Number and Mathematics to explain the life of the Universe and Man; and, as I have said in the Appendix, finds its fittest apology in the saying θεὸς ἀεὶ γεωμετρεῖ. It is of some importance in the history of philosophy because of its connexion with Pythagorean embryology and physics, and its employment by the Neoplatonists to justify the wildest astrological vagaries. The extreme difficulty of the Greek has made the Platonic Number a favourite hunting-ground of successive generations of scholars, and the works which have been written on the subject, a few of which are mentioned in the Appendix, are very numerous.

ἁπλοῦν . See on I 351 A. For the statement itself cf. Laws 683 E ff. Aristotle, whose standpoint is historical rather than psychological, enumerates many and diverse causes of revolutionary change (Pol. E passim).

κινηθῆναι : an ominous word, used here, as constantly throughout Greek literature, of constitutional changes for the worse.

ὅπως δὴ κτλ. An imitation of Hom. Il. XVI 112 f. ἔσπετε νῦν μοι, μοῦσαι —ὅππως δὴ πρῶτον πῦρ ἔμπεσε νηυσὶν Ἀχαιῶν. Homer appeals to the Muses at the turning-point of his narrative (see Leaf ad loc.); and Plato, like Milton (“Of man's first disobedience and the fruit Of that forbidden tree, sing heavenly Muse”), fitly invokes them at the commencement of his Epic of the Fall of Man. Cf. Tim. 27 C.

καὶ φῶμεν κτλ. : ‘and shall we say that they speak in the lofty tragic vein, as if it were all earnest, whereas it is only the banter of the Muses playing with us as if we were little children?’ Instead of φῶμεν, I once suggested θῶμεν (cf. Laws 654 A and 677 C), but φῶμεν, which is in all MSS, though less picturesque, may stand. Herwerden's excision of παιζούσας καί obliterates a tender touch; for there is of course a play on παῖδας (cf. VII 536 E note). The remarks of Proclus in Tim. 300 C ff. on the style of this and similar passages deserve to be quoted: ὁ δὲ χαρακτὴρ τῶν λόγων ἐστὶν ἐνθουσιαστικός, διαλάμπων ταῖς νοεραῖς ἐπιβολαῖς, καθαρός τε καὶ σεμνός—ἐξηλλαγμένος τε καὶ ὑπερέχων τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων ἐννοιῶν, ἁβρός τε ὁμοῦ καὶ καταπληκτικὸς καὶ χαρίτων ἀνάμεστος κάλλους τε πλήρης καὶ σύντομος ἅμα καὶ ἀπηκριβωμένος. ‘The Muses playing’ warns us that there is an element of the mythical and fantastic in what follows, but by no means implies that it is fooling and nothing more. See on 545 C and App. I, Pt ii ad fin.

γενομένῳ κτλ. This is a universally recognised principle of ancient philosophy, alluded to again by Plato in Tim. 41 A. Cf. Arist. de cael. I 12. 282^{b} 8 τὸ γὰρ γενητὸν καὶ τὸ φθαοτὸν ἀκολουθοῦσιν ἀλλήλοις and ib. 10. 279^{b} 20 ἅπαντα γὰρ τὰ γινόμενα καὶ φθειρόμενα φαίνεται. That τὸ ἀγένητον is ἄφθαρτον and τὸ ἄφθαρτον ἀγένητον was also held (cf. Phaedr. 245 D, Arist. l. c. 282^{a} 30 ff., al.): hence Plato always regards the preexistence and immortality of the soul as involving one another. γένεσις is here, as usual, σύγκρισις, and φθορά διάκρισις. The point of ἐπεὶ—ἐστιν is that the cause of decay is not contained in the ideal city itself—the city would be less than ideal if it were—but springs from a universal law of Nature, to which the city, like everything else, is necessarily subject: see on 545 C and App. I, Pt iii.

λύσις δὲ ἥδε κτλ. Here begins Plato's description of the mode of dissolution. οὐ μόνον—ἐναντίας, literally trans lated, is ‘Not only to plants within the ground, but also among animals above the ground, there cometh production or non-production of souls and bodies, as

often as turnings-round join for each species’ (of animals, plants etc.) ‘circumferences of circles faring a short way for the short-lived, and the reverse for the reverse.’ See Fig. 1. Suppose the revolution starts at the fixed point A. The circumference is joined as soon as the revolving wheel reaches A again, and at that point there is φορὰ ψυχῆς τε καὶ σώματος, if the seed was sown at A and has come safely to maturity. If the seed was not sown, or, though sown, did not take root or miscarried on the way, there is ἀφορία. The phrase is only a fantastic way of saying ὅταν περίοδοι ἑκάστοις ἀποτελεσθῶσιν. The περιφορά of a short-lived species is βραχύπορος and conversely, because short-lived creatures have short periods of gestation, and long-lived creatures long (Arist. de gen. an. IV 10. 777^{a} 31 ff., al. See App. I, Pt ii § 2). Soul, viewed merely as the vital principle, is one and the same in every organic creature: hence the singular ψυχή (App. l. c.). This explanation, so far as I know, is new, the περίοδος being generally supposed to be ‘Umlaufszeit.’ Cf. App. l. c.

, B 7 γένους δὲ κτλ. The literal translation is: ‘Now of your kind’ (i.e. mankind: it is the Muses who are speaking), ‘clever though the leaders of the city be whom you educated’ (the middle of personal interest IV 421 E note), ‘none the more will they by calculation together with perception obtain’ (lit. hit the obtaining of) ‘good offspring and no offspring, but it will escape them, and the time will come when they will beget children wrongly or inopportunely’ (cf. παρὰ καιρόν 546 D). In arranging matters connected with marriages and the treatment of children etc., the rulers of our city employ both λογισμός and αἴσθησις. αἴσθησις helps them to decide what couples should be joined, what children should be reared etc.: by λογισμός they calculate what number of marriages they should permit ἵνα ὡς μάλιστα διασῴζωσι τὸν αὐτὸν ἀριθμὸν τῶν ἀνδρῶν (V 460 A) etc.: see App. I, Pt ii § 2. But however well they use these instruments, the time will come when children are begotten οὐ δέον. The fault lies not with the rulers, but with the inevitable law of Change, which is beginning to affect our city together with the rest of the Universe. ἀφορίας is said, because the rulers must if possible make illicit unions unproductive (V 461 C). Possibly the εὐ of εὐγονίας may affect ἀφορίας also: cf. 555 A note See also App. l. c.

ἔστι δὲ ‐‐ τέλειος . ‘For a divine creature, there is a period comprehended by a number which is final.’ The ‘divine creature’ is the World: it is θεῖον, because it is a God, γεννητόν, because it is created (i.e. has been brought out of chaos into order). Cf. Tim. 30 A and Proclus in Tim. 89 D. With περιλαμβάνει cf. Theaet. 148 A. The ἀριθμὸς τέλειος is the period expressing the gestation of the Universe, i.e. the time which its creation occupies. For the metaphor cf. the Orphic verses cited by Proclus in Tim. 94 B and 95 E. The number is a final or consummating number because it τελειοῖ τὴν γένεσιν: cf. Theol. Ar. p. 58 ed. Ast. Plato wisely leaves this number shrouded in silence and obscurity. See App. I, Pt ii § 3 for a full discussion of the sentence.

ἀνθρωπείῳ δὲ ‐‐ ἀπέφηναν gives us the περίοδος or period of gestation for the human creature: ‘and for a human creature the number is the first in which root-and-square increases, comprehending three distances and four limits, of elements that make like and unlike and wax and wane, render all things conversable and rational with one another.’ The construction is ἀνθρωπείῳ δὲ <γεννητῷ. ἔστιν ἀριθμὸς> ἐν ᾦ κτλ., and that is itself short for ἀνθρωπείῳ δὲ <γεννητῷ ἔστι περίοδος ἣν ἀριθμὸς περιλαμβάνει> ἐν ᾧ κτλ. The ‘first’ number is of course the first number after unity. αὐξήσεις ‘increases’ may in itself mean either ‘additions’ or ‘multiplications.’ δυνάμεναι refers to ‘roots’ (cf. Eucl. X def. 11), δυναστευόμεναι to ‘squares’ (Procl. in remp. comm. ed. Kroll II p. 36. 9—12 et al.), and ‘root-and-square increases’ means either ‘additions of roots to squares’ or ‘multiplications of roots by squares.’ τρεῖς ἀποστάσεις etc. shew that multiplications and not additions are meant. The three distances are μῆκος, πλάτος and βάθος, and the four ὅροι their attendant limits. Thus in Fig. 2 AB,

BC, CD are the three ἀποστάσεις, AB μῆκος, BC πλάτος, CD βάθος, and A, B, C, D the four ὅροι. Cf. Nic. Introd. Ar. p. 116 Ast εἴ τι γὰρ στερεόν ἐστιν, τὰς τρεῖς διαστάσεις—they are called ἀποστάσεις in Theol. Ar. p. 23—πάντως ἔχει, μῆκος, πλάτος καὶ βάθος· καὶ ἔμπαλιν εἴ τι ἔχει τὰς τρεῖς διαστάσεις, ἐκεῖνο πάντως στερεόν ἐστιν, ἄλλο δ’ οὐδέν: also Iambl. in Nic. Introd. Ar. p. 93 Pistelli στερεὸς δέ ἐστιν ἀριθμὸς ὁ τρίτον διάστημα παρὰ τὰ ἐν ἐπιπέδοις δύο προσειληφώς, δηλονότι τετάρτου ὅρου προσγενομένου· ἐν γὰρ τέσσαρσιν ὅροις τὸ τριχῇ διαστατόν, Arist. Top. Z 5. 142^{b} 24 f. and many other passages quoted in App. I, Pt i § 1. Consequently the arithmetical meaning of αὐξήσεις—λαβοῦσαι is merely ‘root-and-square multiplications’ i.e. ‘multiplications of root by square,’ in other words cubings (thus w x w^{2}=w^{3}, x x x^{2}=x^{3}, y x y^{2}=y^{3}), or κυβικαὶ αὐξήσεις, a phrase which itself might well have been employed by Plato, except that he has an object in drawing attention to the different stages in the process of augmentation (see App. I, Pt ii § 4); and partly also he wants the Muses to preserve their character as ὑψηλολογούμεναι. The period of human gestation is therefore the first number, in which ‘cubings make everything ῥητὰ πρὸς ἄλληλα’—but cubings of what? The answer is ‘of elements which make like and unlike and wax and wane.’ These elements are the numbers 3, 4 and 5, which measure the three sides of the Pythagorean ζῳογονικὸν τρίγωνον (Procl. in remp. II p. 43. 10), the triangle which,
as we are informed by many authorities— Aristotle, Plutarch, Aristides Quintilianus, Proclus and others—Plato made use of in his Number. The antecedent of ὧν in ὧν ἐπίτριτος πυθμὴν πεμπάδι συζυγείς is ὁμοιούντων τε καὶ ἀνομοιούντων καὶ αὐξόντων καὶ φθινόντων, and as ὧν ἐπίτριτος πυθμήν means ‘of which 4, 3,’ Plato himself tells us two of the numbers, and the third is also readily suggested by πεμπάδι. 3, 4 and 5 are said to ‘make like,’ because, as we shall see, in the latter part of the Number, where the triangle fulfils its office as a κοσμικὸν τρίγωνον (Proclus l.c. II p. 45. 23), they produce the ‘harmony’ 3600^{2}, and square numbers are ὅμοιοι (Iambl. l.c. p. 82): they ‘make unlike’ because they produce the ‘harmony’ 4800 x 2700, and oblong numbers are ἀνόμοιοι (ib.): they are said to wax and wane in a figurative sense—to wax in the first harmony, which represents in a certain sense the waxing of the Universe, and to wane in the second, which represents its wane. As the elements out of which the Universe is formed, they may be said to grow with its growth, and decline with its decline. The words have also a further meaning as a description of 3, 4, 5 regarded as the ἀρχαί of everything which exists: see App. I, Pt ii § 5. Now the first number in which cubings of 3, 4 and 5 are present is 3^{3} + 4^{3} + 5^{3}=216, and Aristides Quintilianus, in the passage where he refers to Plato's number, speaking of the Pythagorean triangle, remarks ἀλλ’ εἰ καὶ τῶν πλευρῶν ἑκάστην κατὰ βάθος αὐξήσαιμεν (βάθος γὰρ ἡ σώματος φύσις) ποιήσαιμεν ἂν τὸν διακόσια δεκαέξ, ἰσάριθμον σύνεγγυς τῷ τῶν ἑπταμήνων (p. 151 Meibom). Aristotle also in Pol. E 12. 1316^{a} 5—8, according to Schneider's interpretation of his words, which I believe to be right, informs us that the whole number of this section is 216: see App. I, Pt iii. On πάντα— ἄλληλα see next note. In App. I, Pt ii § 4 I have fully treated of the meaning of all these calculations. The different mathematical terms are discussed in detail ib. Pt i § 1. My explanation of this passage is, as far as I can discover, new, except as regards αὐξήσεις—δυναστευόμεναι. Some other views are mentioned in App. I, Pt i § 1 ad fin. notes

πάντα προσήγορα κτλ. Cf. Philol. Fr. 13 Mullach πάντα γνωστὰ καὶ ποτάγορα ἀλλήλοις—ἀπεργάζεται. The Pythagoreans asserted that the embryo develops according to the proportions of the ἁρμονία or musical scale. The first stage is complete in 6 days, the second in 8, and 8 : 6 is ‘the fourth’ (διὰ τεσσάρων). The third stage (making flesh) takes 9 days, and 9 : 6 is ‘the fifth’ (διὰ πέντε). In the next 12 days the body is formed: and 12 : 6 is the octave (διὰ πασῶν). Total 6 + 8 + 9 + 12=35, and 35 is a ἁρμονία (Plut. de anim. gen. in Tim. 1017 F). Now 216=(6 x 35) + 6, so that 216 contains 6 ἁρμονίαι together with 6 times ἡ πάντων ἀρχή i.e. the unit (Excerpt. ex Nicom. in v. Jan's Mus. Script. Gr. p. 279), or if you like together with the marriage number 6. For the evidence and further details see App. I, Pt ii § 4.

ὧν ἐπίτριτος πυθμὴν κτλ. In ἀνθρωπείῳ δὲ—ἀπέφηναν the Pythagorean triangle was employed to construct the period of gestation for the microcosm or man: here it is used to construct two periods in the lifetime of the macrocosm or Universe, for that is what Plato means by the two ‘harmonies.’ The translation is: ‘of which, 4, 3 married with 5, yields two harmonies when thrice increased, the one equal an equal number of times, so many times 100, the other of equal length one way, but oblong:—on the one side, of 100 squares of rational diameters of five diminished by one each, or if of irrational diameters, by two: on the other of one hundred cubes of three.’ The antecedent of ὧν is ὁμοιούντων τε καὶ ἀνομοιούντων καὶ αὐξόντων καὶ φθινόντων, which I have already interpreted as the numbers 3, 4, 5. Of these numbers (ὧν) the ἐπίτριτος πυθμήν i.e. 3, 4 (cf. Theo Smyrn. p. 80 ed. Hiller, Proclus l. c. II p. 37 ὁ ἐπίτριτος πυθμὴν γ/ καὶ δ/), is ‘married’ or ‘coupled’ with 5. That is to say, 3, 4, and 5 are multiplied together: whence we get 3 x 4 x 5=60. ‘Thrice increased’ is ‘three times multiplied by itself’; and 60 thrice increased is therefore 60 x 60 x 60 x 60. This sum, which is 12,960,000, yields two harmonies. One of the two harmonies is ‘equal an equal number of times, viz. so many times 100,’ in other words, it is a square (cf. Theaet. 147 E) each of whose sides is a certain number of times 100 (for τοσαυτάκις cf. τοσοῦτον in Alc. I 108 E), viz. of course 36 times 100, for 60 x 60 x 60 x 60=3600^{2}. See Fig. 4.

The other harmony which 60 x 60 x 60 x 60 yields is a rectangle (with προμήκη cf. Theaet. 148 A), one of whose sides is one hundred cubes of 3, i.e. 2700, and the other the number which Plato describes in ἑκατὸν μὲν—δυοῖν. What is that number? ἀριθμοὶ ἀπό means (numerical) ‘squares of’ (cf. Procl. l. c. II p. 38. 9 et al.): the side in question is therefore ‘100 squares of’—what? Of the rational diameter of 5 etc. Now the ‘rational diameter of 5’ is the nearest rational number to the real diameter of a square whose side is 5 (Theo l. c. pp. 43 ff. and other authorities). The real diameter
of a square whose side is 5 is √50. See Fig. 5. AC^{2}=5^{2} + 5^{2}=50 (by Pythagoras' famous εὕρημα Eucl. I 47): therefore AC=√50. And the nearest rational number to √50 is 7: for √49=7. Consequently 7 is ‘the rational diameter’ of 5. And 100 squares of 7=100 x 49=4900. But we are told to diminish the 100 squares by 1 each. Do so: 4900 - (1 x 100)=4800. This side is therefore 4800. The words ἀρρήτων δὲ δυοῖν give us an alternative way of reaching the number 4800. The construction is <ἀπὸ> ἀρρήτων δὲ <διαμέτρων δεομένων> δυοῖν <ἑκάστων> = (or of 100) ‘squares of irrational diameters of 5, wanting 2 each.’ Now the irrational diameter of 5 is √50. Square this and it becomes 50. 100 squares of 50= 5000. Subtract 2 from each square and you have 5000 - (2 x 100)=4800. The two sides of the oblong are therefore
4800 and 2700 (‘one hundred cubes of three’). The area is 4800 x 2700= 12,960,000 which is 60 x 60 x 60 x 60. See Fig. 6. Thus the arithmetical meaning of this part of Plato's Number may be expressed by us as follows:

(3 x 4 x 5)^{4}=3600^{2}=4800 x 2700.

In this explanation, which is defended at length in App. I, Pt i § 2, the most important novelty is my view of τρὶς αὐξηθείς. Most, but not quite all, of the other expressions have been explained in the above way at one time or another, though never, as far as I have noticed, by any single critic. The meaning of ἐπίτριτος πυθμήν was perfectly well known to ancient mathematicians: and Proclus fully understood the ‘rational’ and ‘irrational’ diameters of 5. The full explanation of ἑκατὸν μὲν—τριάδος is due to Barozzi, except that he did not multiply the sides. As regards τρὶς αὐξηθείς, I believe that I have proved my view in App. I, Pt i § 2 and Pt iii. Here I will only say that just as in the increasing series 1, 60, 3600, 216000 the number 216000 or 60^{3} is the ‘third increase’ (τρίτη αὔξη) of unity, so in the increasing series 60, 3600, 216000, 12960000, the number 12960000 or (as we express it, but as Plato, to whom ‘power’ means either ‘square’ or ‘root,’ never did or could express it, 60^{4}) is the third increase of 60.

συζυγείς . The metaphor is from marriage, and marriage, among the Pythagoreans, was usually expressed by multiplication. Thus 6, which is the product of the first male number 3 and the first female number 2, was called by them marriage. συζυγεῖσα also means ‘multiplied with’ in Proclus l. c. II p. 544 (App. I, Pt i § 2).

δύο ἁρμονίας . The square and oblong may be regarded as ἁρμονίαι because in them, as in the number 216 above, all things are προσήγορα καὶ ῥητὰ πρὸς ἄλληλα. Thus 12,960,000=(35 + 1) x 360,000, so that, as 35 is a ἁρμονία, 12,960,000 contains the portentous number of 360,000 ἁρμονίαι plus (1 x 360,000=) 360,000, each ἁρμονία thus having added to it, as before, the unit which is ἡ πάντων ἀρχή. The analogy between the Microcosm and the Macrocosm is thus preserved : see on πἁντα—ῥητά 546 B above. So much for the arithmetical meaning of the term ἁρμονίας. In App. I, Pt ii § 5 I have given my reasons for connecting the two ἁρμονίαι with the myth of the Politicus. In that myth we are told how two cycles of equal and vast duration invariably succeed one another in the life of the Universe, a progressive and a retrogressive cycle. These two cycles are two Great Years, in the first of which ὁμοιότης prevails and the Universe is fresh and strong, while in the second, in which we are living now, ἀνομοιότης begins to assert itself and the Universe flags and wanes. Cf. 547 A note Here the first ἁρμονία, which is a square and therefore ὅμοιον, represents the progressive cycle, the cycle of όμοιότης, and the second ἁρμονία, which is an oblong, and therefore ἀνόμοιον (see above on 546 B line 12), stands for the retrogressive cycle, the cycle of ἀνομοιότης. If this identification is, as I believe, correct, each ἁρμονία represents a Great Year. The area or number of each harmony, according to Plato, is 12,960,000, and as Plato elsewhere says that the Great Year is measured τῷ τοῦ ταὐτοῦ καὶ ὁμοίως ἰόντος κύκλῳ ( Tim. 39 D), i.e. by the diurnal revolutions of the heavens, we may take this number as denoting days. Converted into years, on the astronomical calculation of 360 days to the year, followed by Plato here and elsewhere, the number becomes 36,000 years, which was known in Ptolemaic astronomy as the magnus Platonicus annus. For the evidence on all these points, see App. I, Pt ii §§ 5, 6.

ξύμπας δὲ οὗτος κτλ. ‘This whole number, a number measuring the earth, is lord of better and worse births.’ On its arithmetical side, γεωμετρικός means only that the number is reached by means of γεωμετρία and expressed in geometrical figures: but I have no doubt that Plato meant the word to bear another and profounder meaning, suitable to the real import of the two harmonies whereof this is the number. The number is τῷ ὄντι γεωμετρικός, for it measures an aeon of the Universe, of which the Earth is part (cf. 555 A note and VI 511 B note): and indeed it is artistically right that the meaning of the two harmonies should be summed up at the climax of the whole in a single pregnant word. How do good and bad births depend upon this number? Because in the early days of our era, when God had but lately left the world, and ἀνομοιότης and ἀνωμαλία were young, Nature produced better children than οἶοι νῦν βροτοί εἰσιν. Plato in fact invites us to think of his city as having existed soon after the change to the aeon in which we now live, just as throughout Book VIII and part of IX the Ideal City is figured in the past. For more on this subject see App. I, Pt ii §§ 5—7. I know not what others will think, but to me it seems that the extraordinary range and elevation of its central ideas make the Platonic number worthy even of a writer who is full of ‘thoughts that wander through eternity.’ The connexion between the Human Child and the Divine, the Microcosm and the Macrocosm, has played no small part in the history of human thought, and the story of a Great Year, with the hope which it affords of the ἀποκατάστασις of all things (Acts 3. 21), has been and is, in its religious setting, the solace and support of many a ‘human child.’

παρὰ καιρόν : ‘inopportunely,’ ‘improperly’: cf. Pol. 277 A and οὐ δέον 546 B. The phrase does not, as I once thought, imply that Nature has appointed certain periodic times or seasons in the life of men and women when their union will produce good offspring, but refers to unions of wrong couples, superabundance of marriages, and the like: cf. V 459 E ff. The notion that the number of the Great Year is to be used by the rulers as a means of determining at what time unions should take place, derives no support from the Greek, and ought not to be entertained. In point of fact, the number is not a nuptial but a secular number, being γεωμετρικὸς ὡς ἀληθῶς. The expression ‘nuptial number’ is not applied to it either by Plato or by Aristotle, and it is only in later writers that we meet with ὁ τοῦ λεγομένου γάμου τόπος (Nicom. Introd. Ar. p. 144 Ast), γαμήλιον διάγραμμα (Plut. de Is. et Os. 373 F) and γαμικὸς ἀριθμός (Iambl. in Nic. Ar. p. 82. 21 Pistelli).

καταστήσονται . The active καταστήσουσι, found in v and two other MSS of little moment, is read by Hermann. Some may prefer it because καταστήσονται is passive just below: but Plato is careless about matters of this kind, and it is better to follow the best MSS.

ἡμῶν κτλ. : ‘us they will first begin to neglect when they are Guardians’ (i. e. after they have come εἰς τὰς τῶν πατέρων δυνάμεις), ‘setting too little store by music first, and second by gymnastic.’ Political decay is constantly associated by Plato with neglect of ‘Music’: see on IV 424 C. In place of δεύτερον δὲ τὰ γυμναστικῆς, which is in all MSS, Baiter adopts Madvig's conjecture δεύτερά τε γυμναστικῆς. At first sight ὅθεν ἀμουσότεροι—νέοι would seem to favour such an alteration, as well as the fact that in the city which comes next in order Gymnastic is more esteemed than Music (548 C). But πρῶτον after ἡμῶν supports the MS tradition, and the decline of the ideal city, which, as we have seen, arises from inevitable organic deterioration, shews itself in a general lowering of vital energy, rather than in the exaltation of any one pursuit at the expense of another. In the Spartan city Gymnastic ranks higher than Music, because Music has fallen from the high position which she formerly occupied, and not because Gymnastic stands higher than before.

ὅθεν ‐‐ νέοι : ‘and so our children will forget us.’ The Muses are speaking, and the children of Plato's Muse may well be called the Muses' children. This is the force of ἡμῖν, which is the reading of A, Ξ and some other MSS: Π and others have ὑμῖν. Schneider says ‘Μούσαις—ἄμουσον γίγνεσθαι nullo modo tolerabile est.’ That is true, only ἡμῖν does not go with ἀμουσότεροι, but is an ethic dative, and seems to me at least to be full of a strange beauty and pathos. As true Gymnastic educates the soul and not the body (III 410 C ff.), the neglect of Gymnastic in the ideal city itself contributes to ἀμουσία.

τὰ παρ’ ὑμῖν γένη . See III 415 A ff.

ἀνομοιότης καὶ ἀνωμαλία ἀνάρμοστος . We have already seen that as the second scroll of the World's life unfolds itself, ἀνομοιότης, ἀνωμαλία, and ἀναρμοστία, with their attendant retinue of sedition, strife and war, make their appearance and wax more and more aggressive, until at last, in the words of the Politicus, careful lest the world χειμασθεὶς ὑπὸ ταραχῆς διαλυθεὶς εἰς τὸν τῆς ἀνομοιότητος ἄπειρον ὄντα τόπον δύῃ, God takes the helm again and κοσμεῖ τε καὶ ἐπανορθῶν ἀθάνατον αὐτὸν καὶ ἀγήρων ἀπεργάζεται ( Pol. 273 D f.). See on 546 C and App. I, Pt ii § 5. The same insidious enemies, not from any fault of the rulers, but because the part must neces sarily suffer with the whole, fasten both on the perfect individual and on the perfect State, and the fall of men and cities, which Plato describes in VIII and IX, is one long record of the triumphal progress of ἀνομο<*>ότης, until at last she sits enthroned in the soul and city of the tyrant. The Platonic number is thus the setting in which Plato's ‘Philosophy of History’ is framed.

ταύτης τοι γενεᾶς . From Homer Il. VI 211 al. ταύτης τοι γενεῆς τε καὶ αἵματος εὔχομαι εἶναι. Plato means of course ‘Such, as we must say, is the pedigree of Sedition, wheresoever she arises.’ D. and V. are wholly wrong when they translate: “so that we may positively assert that the rise of such a generation will invariably be marked by divisions.”

εἱλκέτην κτλ. The logical object of εἱλκέτην and ἠγέτην (in line 13) is τὴν πολιτείαν. For the omission of the object with ἕλκω and ἄγω cf. 560 B, X 604 A, 604 D et al. It is only another way of expressing oneself to say that the verbs are practically intransitive. The sedition which arises is not between rulers and ruled, but between the rulers among themselves, as is clear from 545 D and elsewhere: hence τὸ μὲν σιδηροῦν καὶ χαλκοῦν does not refer to the farmers and artisans, who probably possessed οἰκίαι from the first (III 417 A note), but to the section of the rulers who have become σιδηροῦν and χαλκοῦν by the intermixture of different breeds. Cf. the oracle foretelling the destruction of the city ὅταν αὐτὴν ὁ σίδηρος ἢ ὁ χαλκὸς φυλάξῃ (III 415 C). γῆς κτῆσιν κτλ. means ‘the possession of land and a private dwelling-place as well as of gold and silver,’ all of which were forbidden to Plato's rulers. ἔγκτησις γῆς καὶ οἰκίας was a familiar expression to the Greeks, and one of the well-recognised privileges of μέτοικοι at Athens (Gilbert Gr. Staatsalt. II p. 295). On the reading χρυσοῦ see cr. n. It is usual to read χρυσίου, but ἀργύρου immediately following favours χρυσοῦ, whose authority is not much inferior to that of χρυσίου. Cf. χρυσόν τε καὶ ἄργυρον 548 A. Herwerden, retaining χρυσίου, would write ἀργυρίου instead of ἀργύρου with some MSS of little value: but the reading printed above has much more MS support. His further proposal ἐπὶ χρηματισμὸν χρυσίου τε καὶ ἀργυρίου καὶ γῆς κτῆσιν καὶ οἰκίας will not find favour among scholars.

φύσει ‐‐ ψυχάς . They are not rich in worldly possessions, but they have the true riches—the riches of the soul. Cf. the prayer of Socrates in Phaedr. 279 C πλούσιον δὲ νομίζοιμι τὸν σοφόν, and see also on III 416 E. The usual view, which makes τὰς ψυχάς depend on ἠγέτην (Schneider, J. and C., D. and V., etc.) is surely wrong. Jowett from his translation appears to have caught the meaning.

εἰς μέσον ὡμολόγησαν κτλ. The change is effected, as in the case of the corresponding man (550 B), by a peaceful compromise. In the later stages of political decay, when ἀνομοιότης has gathered strength, revolution is attended by civil war (557 A), and the tyrant wades through bloodshed to his throne (565 E ff.).

περιοίκους τε καὶ οἰκέτας . We meet with περίοικοι not only in Sparta, of which city Plato is chiefly thinking, but also in Crete, Thessaly and Argos: see Gilbert Gr. Staatsalt. II pp. 16, 74, 220. In each of these States there was also an inferior grade, in Sparta the Helots, in Crete the vοικέες of the Gortynian inscription, sometimes also spoken of as οἰκέται, in Thessaly the πενέσται, and in Argos the γυμνῆτες or γυμνήσιοι (Gilbert l.c.). It is clear, I think, that in οἰκέτας Plato is thinking of this lowest order. The Spartan Helots had to perform the duties of domestic servants, as appears from Plut. Lyc. et Num. comp. 2. 4 ἦν ἡ περὶ τὰ χρήματα κατασκευὴ δεδομένη δούλοις καὶ Εἵλωσιν, ὥσπερ ἡ περὶ τὸ δεῖπνον καὶ ὄψον διακονία.

φυλακῆς αὐτῶν : the duty of watching and guarding—sensu inimico— the περίοικοι and οἰκέται. The institutions and history of Sparta are a sufficient commentary on the phrase.

οὐκοῦν ‐‐ πολιτεία . Cf. 547 C note

547C - 548D So much for the origin of Timarchy. In character, it will resemble Aristocracy on the one hand, and Oligarchy on the other; partly also it will have peculiarities of its own. The aristocratical features of Timarchy are respect for the ruling class and so forth; its own distinctive peculiarity is the love of war and warlike matters; in cupidity and avarice it is like Oligarchy. On the whole Timarchy is a mixture of good and evil; but the one conspicuous feature of this polity is the love of victory and honour.

Plato's description of ‘timocracy’ is, as he says himself, a sketch (548 D), but one in which hardly any feature of first-rate importance is wholly ignored. He regards ‘timocracy’ as primarily and essentially the political embodiment of θυμοειδές (548 C), and consequently a sort of half-way house between aristocracy and oligarchy, as θυμοειδές is between λογιστικόν and φιλοχρήματον. It is, however, at the same time a ‘mixed’ constitution (548 C note), and partakes in the characteristics of both its neighbours. The portrait of timocracy is drawn in the main from Sparta, as the notes will shew, but it represents the Sparta of the fifth rather than of the fourth century, during which the oligarchical element in the Spartan constitution began to acquire an undue predominance, owing to the temptations of empire and other causes: cf. Isocr. de Pace 95—103. Plato's sketch may be filled in from the sources enumerated in Hermann-Thumser Gr. Staatsalt. pp. 176—191, 251—260. The student of Greek history and political science should read Aristotle's account of the Lacedaemonian and Cretan polities (Pol. Β 9, 10) in connexion with Plato's description of the timarchical constitution and the timarchical man. See also Schoemann-Lipsius Griech. Alterthümer pp. 196—323.

γεωργιῶν ‐‐ χρηματισμοῦ : as in Sparta: see Xen. Rep. Lac. 7. 1—2 and other authorities in HermannThumser l.c. p. 182 notes

ξυσσίτια . Cf. Hermann-Thumser l.c. pp. 185—191. In Crete, the ξυσσίτια were maintained at the expense of the State; in Sparta, by the contributions of the ξύσσιτοι. The former arrangement of course prevailed in the ideal city (III 416 E), and as timarchy copies the ideal city in regard to ξυσσίτια (τὴν προτέραν μιμήσεται below), we may suppose that in the timarchical polity, as conceived by Plato, the Cretan method was observed. Cf. Arist. Pol. Β 9. 1271^{a} 28 ff. and see also on 551 A, B.

τῷ δέ γε φοβεῖσθαι κτλ. The Spartans were notorious for their dislike and distrust of knowledge and intellectual cultivation: see Hipp. Mai. 285 B ff. and Arist. Pol. Β 9. 1271^{b} 1 ff., with Susemihl and Hicks' notes. For the anacoluthon τῷ δέ γε—τὰ πολλά—ἕξει (548 A) cf. (with Schneider) Laws 931 C, 949 A.

κεκτημένη . See cr. n. Bekker's silence is often untrustworthy, and as he omitted Α and Ξ as well as v in the list of MSS which read κεκτημένην, it is doubtful if even v has the nominative here. κεκτημένην is however very awkward from its position between τὴν προτέραν μιμήσεται and πολεμοῦσα, and the error is so easy and common that I agree with Bekker and others in rejecting the accusative. See Introd. § 5. In illustration of what Plato says we may contrast Pausanias for example and Lysander with Brasidas and Callicratidas. The former were σοφοί but far from ἁπλοῖ: the latter θυμοειδεῖς and ἁπλούστεροι.

τοὺς τοιούτους : i.q. τοὺς σοφούς. With μεικτούς cf. 547 A.

ἁπλουστέρους = ‘more singleminded.’ Since they distrust σοφοί because their σοφοί are not ἁπλοῖ, it is natural enough that they should seek ἁπλούστεροι, and find them in θυμοειδεῖς, whose single all-engrossing idea is war (548 A) and φιλονικίαι (548 C). The text would hardly have been suspected if critics had grasped the meaning of ἁπλοῦς (see on I 351 A, II 370 B and IV 434 C). As it is, there is a host of superfluous conjectures: ἀλλοκωτέρους, αὐστηρούς, αὐθαδεστέρους, ποικιλωτέρους (Ast), πολλαπλουστέρους (Stallbaum), ἀγχινουστέρους (Müller), ὑποαμουσοτέρους (Herwerden), ἀμουσοτέρους (Herwerden, Apelt, Richards). It should be remembered that the Spartans prided themselves upon τὸ ἁπλοῦν in the ordinary sense of the term.

ἐντίμως ἔχειν . See VII 528 B note For the statement itself cf. for example Laws 630 D, 666 E στρατοπέδου—πολιτείαν ἔχετε and elsewhere, with Isocr. Archid. 81 and Arist. Pol. Η 14. 1333^{b} 12 ff.

καὶ πολεμοῦσα κτλ. Isocrates says much the same of Sparta in Paneg. 128 and Philipp. 51: cf. also Laws 686 B. The description up to this point recalls to some extent the city of Books II—IV, minus the ἄρχοντες proper and some parts of the ‘musical’ education, and Plato may well have looked on the constitution of Lycurgus, from which he borrowed several features, as in some respects a kind of imperfect edition of his earlier καλλίπολις. See on this subject K. F. Hermann Die historischen Elemente d. plat. Staatsideals, in his Gesammelte Abhandlungen, pp. 132—159. Cf. also Laws 692 C, where the Lacedaemonian polity is called a παράδειγμα γεγονός. In what follows the strictly oligarchical features of the Spartan polity are described.

ἐπιθυμηταὶ δέ γε κτλ. Spartan avarice was the theme of universal com ment: see the references collected by Susemihl and Hicks on Arist. Pol. Β 9. 1271^{b} 16 with Eur. Andr. 451, Ar. Peace 622 ff. and Isocr. Bus. 20.

τιμῶντες ἀγρίως : ‘passionately adoring.’ The adverb was unnecessarily suspected by Herwerden.

ταμιεῖα κτλ. In spite of the formal prohibition of gold and silver (Xen. Rep. Lac. 7. 6, Plut. Lyc. 9. 2, Lys. 17. 6), an immense amount of gold and silver money was accumulated in private hands throughout Laconia: cf. Alcib. I 122 E χρυσίον δὲ καὶ ἀργύριον οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν πᾶσιν Ἕλλησιν ὅσον ἐν Λακεδαίμονι ἰδίᾳ· πολλὰς γὰρ ἤδη γενεὰς εἰσέρχεται μὲν αὐτόσε ἐξ ἁπάντων τῶν Ἑλλήνων, πολλάκις δὲ καὶ ἐκ τῶν βαρβάρων, ἐξέρχεται δὲ οὐδαμόσε κτλ. and other authorities quoted in Hermann-Thumser p. 252 notes or Gilbert Gk Const. Ant. E. T. pp. 12, 13.

οἰκείους ‐‐ κρύψειαν refers specifically to the hoarding of specie as practised by Spartan citizens. It may be doubted whether the Thucydidean Pericles was justified even at the beginning of the Peloponnesian war in telling the Athenians that the Spartans possessed οὔτε ἰδίᾳ οὔτε ἐν κοινῷ χρήματα (I 141. 3), in spite of Xenophon Rep. Lac. 7. 6.

περιβόλους οἰκήσεων κτλ. : not ‘walled houses’ (D. and V.) but ‘dwellings to encompass them withal, veritable private nests’: cf. Theaet. 174 E σηκὸν ἐν ὄρει τὸ τεῖχος περιβεβλημένον and Crat. 400 C. The phrase has a poetical sound and may be taken from the drama, but is more likely to be one of Plato's own poetical flourishes. A Spartan husband could occasionally escape from the rigid discipline of camp-life and take shelter— this is the force of περιβόλους—in his domestic nest: see Plut. Lyc. 15. 4—7. Plato seems to imply that this arrangement encouraged habits of extravagance and luxuriousness in the wives as well as in the husbands: cf. Arist. Pol. Β 9. 1269^{b} 22 ζῶσι γὰρ (the Spartan wives) ἀκολάστως πρὸς ἅπασαν ἀκολασίαν καὶ τρυφερῶς. Aristotle's remark is amply borne out by other evidence: see Hermann-Thumser l. c. p. 180 note 5 and Newman on Arist. l.c.

οἷς ἐθέλοιεν ἄλλοις : masculine, not (as D. and V. translate), neuter. The reference is probably intended to include παιδικά as well as others. The Spartan's domestic nest was doubtless occasionally a nest of vice.

τὸν νόμον ἀποδιδράσκοντες . The expression is borrowed by Aristotle Pol. Β 9. 1270^{b} 34, where see Newman's note.

τῆς ἀληθινῆς ‐‐ φιλοσοφίας . Cf. the famous saying φιλοσοφία μεγίστη μουσική in Phaed. 61 A.

μεμιγμένην and μέμικται sound half-technical, and it is clear from Laws 712 D ff., 691 E, 693 D, Isocr. Nicocles 24 (with Areop. 61) and Arist. Pol. Δ 9. 1294^{b} 18 ff. that Greek political theorists were in the habit of viewing the Spartan constitution as a ‘mixed polity,’ although they did not always analyse the μῖξις in the same way: cf. Henkel Studien zur Gesch. d. Gr. Lehre v. Staat p. 62 notes 35, 36, and Whibley Gk Olig. pp. 14, 19. The analysis which is attributed to Archytas may serve as a specimen: δεῖ δὴ τὸν νόμον τὸν κάρρονα καὶ τὰν πόλιν ἐκ πασᾶν σύνθετον ἦμεν τᾶν ἄλλαν πολιτειᾶν, καὶ ἔχεν τι δαμοκρατίας, ἔχεν τι ὀλιγαρχίας, ἔχεν τι βασιλῄας καὶ ἀριστοκρατίας, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐν τᾷ Λακεδαίμονι. τοὶ μὲν γὰρ βασιλέες τᾶς μοναρχίας, τοὶ δὲ γέροντες τᾶς ἀριστοκρατίας, τοὶ δὲ ἔφοροι τᾶς ὀλιγαρχίας, ἱππαγρέται δὲ καὶ κόροι τᾶς δαμοκρατίας (Stobaeus Flor. 43. 134). On mixed polities in ancient political science see Henkel l.c. pp. 85 ff., 102, 106 ff., 112, 115 and Greenidge Gr. Const. Hist. pp. 74—121.

ἕν τι μόνον . For τι μόνον Apelt conjectures τιμώμενον: but Plato expresses himself emphatically in case the oligarchical features of the Spartan polity should make us forget that after all it is and must be essentially θυμο‐κρατία—the expression of θυμοειδές and not φιλοχρήματον (547 C note).

φιλονικίαι κτλ. Cf. Plut. Ages. 5. 4. Plato is not thinking of ‘divisions in Sparta between the partisans of the ephors and kings’ (as J. and C. suppose), but of the passion ὑπείροχον ἐμμέναι ἄλλων: for this and not ‘quarrelsomeness’ is the distinctive feature of timarchy. We are in danger of misconceiving the whole position of ‘timarchy’ and the ‘timarchical’ man if φιλόνικος (or φιλόνεικος) is connected with νεῖκος instead of with νίκη. On the spelling and derivation of the word see IX 581 B note

διὰ τὸ ἐξαρκεῖν κτλ. See 544 A note With ἀμήχανον δὲ κτλ. cf. IV 443 D, E note

548D - 550C The character of the timarchical man is now described in close analogy with that of the timarchical State (548 D—549 B). In origin (continues Socrates) he was the son of a good father living in an ill-regulated city and abstaining from public life. Drawn by his father's precepts and example towards the higher life, and by maternal and other influences towards the lower, he finally surrendered himself to the dominion of the intermediate principle in the soul, and thus became timarchical.

πῶς τε γενόμενος : ‘how did he arise?’ Richards proposes γιγνόμενος: but the past tense is in harmony with ἔμπεσε 545 D, with είλκέτην, ἠγέτην, ὡμολόγησαν 547 B, and indeed with the whole of Plato's exposition, which is deliberately arrayed in the vesture of a historical narrative or epic poem: see on 543 A, 544 C. It appears to be the custom to translate most of the aorists of this kind in Books VIII and IX by the present, but in some cases the effect is much more realistic and picturesque if we make them past, and I think that Plato intended some of these aorists to be understood in that way. The instances in point are 550 B ἦλθε, παρέδωκε, ἐγένετο, 550 E ἀπειργάσαντο, 551 B κατεστήσαντο, 555 D ἠνάγκασαν, 560 A—C ὑπεχώρησε, διεφθάρησαν, ἐξέπεσον, κατεκοσμήθη, ἐγένοντο, εἵλκυσαν, ἐνέτεκον, κατέλαβον, κατέσχον, 565 B ἔσχον, 566 E ἠλευθέρωσε, διένειμε. Except in 550 E, 551 B, 555 D, 565 B, and 566 E, in which the aorists are no doubt the so-called gnomic aorists “used in animated language to express general truths” (Goodwin MT. p. 53), each of these tenses is in my opinion correctly translated by a past in English. Plato of course repeatedly employs the present also, not only where he is painting a scene (e.g. 549 B ff., 553 A ff., 555 C ff.), but also when he is describing the actual genesis of a particular sort of commonwealth or individual (e.g. 550 D, 551 A, B al. and many instances of γίγνεται), and in such cases the appearance of historical narration is not preserved, for it would be pedantic to view all these presents as merely examples of the praesens historicum. See also on 549 C.

φιλονικίας : ‘desire to excel.’ The translations ‘party-spirit’ (D. and V.), ‘spirit of contention’ (Jowett) are misleading: see 548 C note On Glauco's φιλονικία see Introd. § 2.

ὑποαμουσότερον . It is unnecessary (with Herwerden) to add <μέν>, although ὑποαμουσότερον is contrasted with φιλόμουσον: see on I 340 D.

φιλόμουσον . The ‘timocratical’ man has neglected τῆς ἀληθινῆς Μούσης τῆς μετὰ λόγων τε καὶ φιλοσοφίας (548 B), but he is nevertheless φιλόμουσος, though somewhat less so than Glauco, whom Socrates calls μουσικός in III 398 E. On the Spartan love of music cf. Plut. Lyc. 21 and other evidence in Hermann-Thumser l.c. p. 178 notes 5, 6.

φιλήκοον κτλ. This characteristic of the Spartans is well illustrated by J. and C. from Hipp. Mai. 285 D ff.: Ἀλλὰ τί μήν ἐστιν ἃ ἡδέως σου ἀκροῶνται καὶ ἐπαινοῦσιν (sc. οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι);—Περὶ τῶν γενῶν—τῶν τε ἡρώων καὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, καὶ τῶν κατοικίσεων, ὡς τὸ ἀρχαῖον ἐκτίσθησαν αἱ πόλεις, καὶ συλλήβδην πάσης τῆς ἀρχαιολογίας ἥδιστα ἀκροῶνται. Schneider is mistaken in taking οὐδαμῶς with all three adjectives: it belongs only to ῥητορικόν. The carefully qualified expression ὑποαμουσότερον would be inconsistent with calling the Spartan οὐδαμῶς φιλόμουσον: and φιλήκοον is not used as in VII 535 D, but rather as the antithesis to ῥητορικόν .

ἄγριος κτλ. : like the Spartans towards slaves and Helots: cf. Laws 777 A ff. and Gilbert Gk Const. Ant. E. T. pp. 32 ff.

οὐ καταφρονῶν κτλ. is a subtle psychological touch. Those who have no moral or intellectual right to ‘despise’ inferiors are apt to treat them harshly, in the vain effort to convince themselves of their own superiority. ὁ ἱκανῶς πεπαιδευμένος uses those below him “as creatures of another place” (All's well that ends well I 2. 41). Cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. IV 8. 1124^{b} 5. 20 and (for καταφρονῶν) Thuc. II 62. 4 αὔχημα μὲν γὰρ καὶ ἀπὸ ἀμαθίας εὐτυχοῦς καὶ δειλῷ τινι ἐγγίγνεται, καταφρόνησις δὲ ὃς ἂν καὶ γνώμῃ πιστεύῃ τῶν ἐναντίων προέχειν.

οὐκ ἀπὸ τοῦ λέγειν κτλ. Cf. Prot. 342 E ff. The Spartans were men of deeds, not words.

φιλογυμναστής ‐‐ φιλόθηρος . as in Sparta: see Hermann-Thumser l.c. p. 182 notes 1, 2.

ὅσῳ δὲ πρεσβύτερος κτλ. The life of the timocratical man is an epitome of that of the State, in which, as actually happened at Sparta, the oligarchical element grows more and more powerful as time goes on (547 C note).

λόγου ‐‐ κεχραμένου recalls the ἀληθινὴ Μοῦσα of 548 B.

σωτὴρ ἀρετῆς . Virtue is never secure unless it rests on knowledge, and can render a λόγος of itself: cf. VI 497 C and VII 531 E notes

ἐνίοτε κτλ. Krohn finds a difficulty in οὐκ εὖ πολιτευομένῃ, for timarchy is a degeneration of the perfect city (Pl. St. pp. 208 ff., insufficiently refuted by Grimmelt de reip. Pl. comp. et unit. p. 71). But Plato is here speaking of the origin of the ‘timarchical’ man, not of the ‘timarchical’ State, and the ἀριστοκρατικός whose son becomes τιμοκρατικός may be found in any one of the degenerate commonwealths, although he will not rule except ‘in his own city,’ i.e. aristocracy. We must beware of supposing that there is no remnant of good men in depraved States (cf. VI 492 E ff., 496 C ff., IX 591 E ff.). If Plato had here preserved the fiction of a historical narrative and made the τιμοκρατικὸς νεανίας the son of an ἀριστοκρατικός in his own ideal city, he could only have attributed his fall to the same law of natural degeneration which subverted the καλλίπολις (546 A ff.). As it is, the description is drawn from facts of daily experience and observation, and Plato, as is suggested by the Oxford editors, may well be thinking of some ‘Laconizing youth of Athens,’ perhaps of some member of the Socratic circle. We have already seen that Plato frequently deserts the epic or narrative form of exposition which he has chosen to express his views: see above on 548 D. I formerly printed a comma after πως and a full stop after ἔχειν, but now revert to Stallbaum's punctuation, because (1) the contrast with καὶ ἔστι μέν γε κτλ. seems to require a fuller pause after πως, (2) ἐνίοτε —ἔχειν does not explain the γένεσις of the τιμοκρατικός, as it ought to do, if γίγνεται—ἔχειν is all one sentence, (3) Adimantus' interruption πῇ δὴ—γίγνεται, which calls attention in a lively manner to the point which Plato wishes to emphasise, is most easily accounted for on the supposition that ἐνίοτε κτλ. begins a separate sentence: cf. 567 E note and Soph. O. C. 644 f., with Jebb's note. νέος ὑός is resumed in νέος (550 A), and has no other predicate except ἦλθε etc. in 550 B.

φεύγοντος κτλ. Cf. VI 496 C ff. and Theaet. 173 C ff. φυγαρχία (if the word may be allowed) on the part of the best men was a growing evil in Athenian politics: see Hermann-Thumser l.c. p. 749 note 4. In a bad State, according to Aristotle (Pol. Γ 4), the good man is apt to be a bad citizen.

, D 19 ὅταν κτλ. : ‘whenever, I continued, he listens in the first instance to his mother, who is annoyed because her husband has no place in the government and is on that account belittled among the other wives, and who also sees’ etc. πρῶτον μέν has nothing to do with ἔπειτα, but prepares us for καὶ οἱ οἰκέται κτλ. in 549 E. See also on 549 D. Krohn (Pl. St. p. 198) thinks the present sentence inconsistent with the position assigned to women in V; but actual wives ἐν πόλει οὐκ εὖ πολιτευομένῃ may be allowed to differ from the perfect products of an ideal city. Plato's description is as realistic as anything could well be: he speaks as though ξυνῳκηκὼς ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ καὶ παραγεγονὼς ἐν ταῖς κατ’ οἰκίαν πράξεσιν (IX 577 A). Socrates and his relations with Xanthippe possibly furnished some details of the picture (so also Müller on p. 749 of his Translation).

λοιδορούμενον is certainly middle, not passive, as Ast imagined: cf. VI 500 B.

ἐν δικαστηρίοις . The opposition between ἴδιαι and δημόσιαι δίκαι (cf. Laws 957 A) is not to the point here, as Vermehren remarks (Plat. Stud. p. 107), but we should not, with that critic, expunge ἐν δικαστηρίοις. The expression ἰδίᾳ ἐν δικαστηρίοις refers to ἴδιαι δίκαι: and δημοσίᾳ to other public gatherings, as e.g. the assembly: cf. Theaet. 174 C ὅταν ἐν δικαστηρίοις ἤ που ἄλλοθι ἀναγκασθῇ κτλ.

ῥᾳθύμως κτλ. : ‘indifferent to everything of the sort’: cf. Xen. Mem. II 9. 1, Theaet. 173 C, D and (for the vague use of τὰ τοιαῦτα) VII 536 A.

αἰσθάνηται is usually explained as by anacoluthon for αἰσθανομένης: but no parallels have been cited, nor are the anacolutha by which Engelhardt (Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 42) illustrates the sentence in any degree comparable. The sense compels us to regard the subject of αἰσθάνηται as the mother, but grammatically it can only, as with ἀκούῃ, be the son. I formerly placed αἰσθάνηται after ἀχθομένης τε: Richards excises it altogether. Neither solution is perfectly satisfactory; and it is possible that the sentence by some accident or other was imperfectly revised by Plato. The grammatical structure of this chapter from ἐνίοτε πατρός down to ἐπαινουμένους (550 A) is considerably freer than is usual even with Plato, and there are other passages in Book VIII which seem to stand in need of revision: cf. 558 A note Nothing is easier than to ‘emend’ them all in accordance with our grammatical rules, but such emendations involve so great a departure from the MSS that they lack every element of probability, and as it is possible that the fault is Plato's, it is safer for us to adhere to the MSS. Nearly all the greatest writers occasionally offend against the rules by which we seek to bind them. See the excellent remarks of Longinus on the subject of correctness versus fire in composition (περὶ ὕψους 33—36).

ἄνανδρος ‐‐ καὶ λίαν ἀνειμένος rings poetical. The rhythm may be intentional, to suit ὑμνεῖν: or Plato may have taken the words from a tragedian. Such a line as ἄνανδρός ἐστι καὶ λίαν ἀνειμένος might well have been applied by Zethus to Amphion in Euripides' Antiope, which was in effect a comparison between the πρακτικός and the θεωρητικὸς βίος: see Gorg. 485 E ff. and Eur. Frag. 187 Dind. Cf. also VI 494 D note

ἀκούει . See cr. n. If we retain ἀκούῃ, ὅταν must be carried on from 549 C, in spite of the intervening sentences in 549 E. In that case we should regard Socrates' description (549 C —550 B) as virtually a single sentence ἐνίοτε—ἔχειν, ὅταν—ὑμνεῖν, καὶ ἐξιὼν— ἐπαινουμένους, τότε δὴ—ἀνήρ, and ignore Adimantus' replies, as well as οἶσθα οὖν —πατρός (549 E). But although ὅταν sometimes extends its influence in this way (VII 540 D—541 A), the interposition of 549 E makes it very difficult to retain the subjunctive here, and I therefore agree with other editors in holding the sentence to be independent. Cf. 553 B note

παρὰ τὰ τῶν ἄλλων . Others know his father πόρρωθεν: the son sees him near at hand, comparing his ways of life with those of other men—and consequently understands and appreciates his father more. J. and C. wrongly translate “having a nearer view of his father's ways than of the ways of others.”

ἑλκόμενος κτλ. describes the στάσις in the soul. Cf. 545 C, D.

ἄρδοντος . The metaphor is common: cf. X 606 D and Euthyph. 2 D with my note ad loc. So also in Cor. I 3. 6 ἐγὼ ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπόλλως ἐπότισεν.

διὰ τὸ κτλ. : ‘because he is not naturally a bad man,’ lit. ‘his nature is not that of a bad man’: not ‘because he is by birth the son of no bad man.’

εἰς τὸ μέσον ‐‐ ἦλθε κτλ. A compromise is effected, reminding us of the compromise which converted the aristocratical State into τιμαρχία: cf. 547 B εἰς μέσον ὡμολόγησαν κτλ. The aorists ἦλθε, παρέδωκε etc. are past, and should be so translated: see on 548 D.

ἔχομεν ἄρα κτλ. Richards thinks this sentence interrogative; but ἄρα rather points the other way.

550C - 551C Next in order comes Oligarchy or Plutocracy. The change originates in the growth of avarice and cupidity within the timarchical State; it is completed as soon as a property qualification for the holding of office has been established by law.

οὐκοῦν μετὰ τοῦτο κτλ. As θυμοειδές in Timarchy superseded λογιστικόν, so in Oligarchy φιλοχρήματον supersedes θυμοειδές. The lower ‘parts’ of soul assert the mastery in turn, as the scale of commonwealth descends (cf. 553 D and 547 C note); and the continuity is unbroken, for the element of φιλοχρήματον already displayed an ominous activity in the Spartan State, although it had not yet attained the sovereign place. Plato's description of Greek oligarchies, if we judge it by the facts of history, probably lays rather too much emphasis on τὸ φιλοχρήματον: but it is certainly true that the pursuit of riches was the characteristic feature of ancient oligarchy. See on the whole subject Whibley Greek Oligarchies, and Newman The Politics of Aristotle IV pp. xxi— xxxvi, and compare the account which Aristotle gives of the causes producing revolution in what he calls ‘aristocracies’ (Pol. Ε 7).

τὸ τοῦ Αἰσχύλου . The line is a playful adaptation from Sept. 451 λέγ’ ἄλλον ἄλλαις ἐν πύλαις εἰληχότα and 570 Ὁμολωίσιν δὲ πρὸς πύλαις τεταγμένος. There is no good reason for holding (with Herwerden) that Plato is quoting from one of Aeschylus' lost plays.

τὴν ὑπόθεσιν . See 545 B ff.

τὴν ἀπὸ τιμημάτων . By Herodotus (III 81) ὀλιγαρχίη is used in its strictly etymological sense; and Socrates' own name for that which Plato calls ‘oligarchy’ was πλουτοκρατία ( Mem. IV 6. 12). The establishment of a property qualification for full citizenship was the central feature in the programme of the Athenian oligarchical party from 412 B.C. onwards: see (for 411) Thuc. VIII 65. 3, 97. 1 and (for 404) Xen. Hell. II 3. 48, with Hermann-Thumser l.c. pp. 724—734. It is therefore natural enough that Plato should define oligarchy as he does, especially as in his younger days, both personally and through his friends, he was himself connected with the Athenian oligarchical faction (Grote VIII p. 30). The term ‘oligarchy’ retained its Platonic sense after Plato (cf. e.g. Arist. Pol. Γ 8. 1280^{a} 1 f. ἀναγκαῖον μέν, ὅπου ἂν ἄρχωσι διὰ πλοῦτον ἄν τ’ ἐλάττους ἄν τε πλείους, εἶναι ταύτην ὀλιγαρχίαν κτλ.), though Aristotle recognises also the wider meaning, e.g. in Pol. Ζ 2. 1317^{b} 39 ὀλιγαρχία καὶ γένει καὶ πλούτῳ καὶ παιδείᾳ ὁρίζεται. See especially Whibley Gk Olig. pp. 15—22.

ὡς μεταβαίνει . The leading features in Plato's narrative are probably taken from the history of Sparta, which had degenerated during his lifetime from a ‘timarchy’ to what was virtually an oligarchical polity: cf. Nohle die Statslehre Pl. p. 106 and Hermann-Thumser l.c. p. 258. Others have referred to the Solonian constitution and the oligarchical revolutions at Athens in 411 and 404. In neither of these instances was the previous government timarchical, for the rule of the Eupatrids had become an oppressive oligarchy by the time of Solon (Holm Gk Hist. E. T. I p. 389); but it is likely enough that Plato was thinking of these among other oligarchies and oligarchical movements in some parts of his descriptions: see 551 B note

τὸ ταμιεῖον ‐‐ ἐκεῖνο . 548 A notes The oracle spoke truly ἁ φιλοχρηματία Σπάρταν ὀλεῖ, ἄλλο δὲ οὐδέν (Tyrtaeus 3. 1).

γυναῖκες . See on 548 A.

ἀπειργάσαντο . On the tense see 548 D note A few MSS read ἀπειργάσατο: but ἄλλος ἄλλον is in partitive apposition to the plural subject, according to the regular idiom: cf. II 369 B, C, IX 581 C note

ἢ οὐχ κτλ. Cf. 555 C and especially Laws 743 A ff. ἀγαθὸν δὲ ὄντα διαφερόντως καὶ πλούσιον εἶναι διαφερόντως ἀδύνατον (‘how hardly shall a rich man’ etc.). Other parallels are quoted by Spiess Logos Spermatikos p. 74. Cf. also III 416 E note

ὥσπερ κτλ. : ‘as it were inclining always in opposite directions when each is placed in the scale of a balance.’ As the scale containing virtue rises, that containing riches falls, and vice versa. Cf. Hom. Il. XXII 209 ff. Madvig's κείμενον ἑκάτερον, though adopted even by J. and C., is questionable Greek, and certainly no improvement. ὥσπερ should be taken with ῥέποντε “quasi non πλούτου ἀρετὴ διέστηκεν, sed πλοῦτος καὶ ἀρετὴ διεστήκατον praecessisset” (Schneider). There is a kindred figure in 544 E above: ἃ ἂν ὥσπερ ῥέψαντα τἄλλα ἐφελκύσηται. Ξ and some other inferior MSS have the obvious ‘correction’ ῥέποντος. Other conjectures are ῥέπουσα (Liebhold) and ἂν ῥέπουσα (Price), but neither could ever have been changed to ῥέποντε.

φιλοχρηματισταὶ κτλ. Although Aristotle ( Pol. Ε 12. 1316^{a} 39 ff.) pronounces it ἄτοπον to think that oligarchy arises ὅτι φιλοχρήματοι καὶ χρηματισταὶ οἱ ἐν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς, there is no doubt that the special oligarchy which Plato probably has in view, viz. Sparta in the fourth century B.C., became to all intents and purposes an oligarchy chiefly from this cause, as in fact Aristotle himself recognises ib. 7. 1307^{a} 34 ff.: cf. also Β 9. 1270^{a} 14 ff. It should also be remembered that Plato's selection of the αἰτία τῆς φθορᾶς is primarily determined by his psychological standpoint: see on 543 A.

ἐγένοντο . See 548 D note

νόμον τίθενται κτλ. In Sparta, apparently, matters never went so far as this, although those who were unable to make the statutory contribution to the public mess forfeited their citizenship, according to the laws of Lycurgus, and later abuses swelled the ranks of the ὑπομείονες from this cause: see Arist. Pol. Β 9. 1271^{a} 34 and Hermann-Thumser l.c. pp. 258— 260 notes ‘The minimum amount of property qualifying for privilege in an oligarchy’ was of course different in different oligarchical States: cf. Whibley Gk Olig. p. 22.

οὗ μὲν μᾶλλον κτλ. See again Whibley l.c. pp. 126—132. As an example of a moderate oligarchy (in the Platonic sense) we may take the Solonian constitution, which was, broadly speaking, the ideal of the moderate oligarchs at Athens towards the end of the fifth century (Beloch Att. Pol. p. 74: cf. Thuc. VIII 97. 2), and is commended by Plato in Laws 698 B ff.

ἢ βίᾳ κτλ. “To an Athenian, as to ourselves, this would naturally suggest a revolution against a democratic system such as took place at the establishment of the Four Hundred in 411 B.C., or of the Thirty in 404 B.C., and constantly throughout Greece during the Peloponnesian war” (Bosanquet). The remark applies with equal force to πρὸ τούτου φοβήσαντες (cf. Thuc. VIII 66. 2), and it can scarcely be doubted that the familiar struggles of oligarchy against democracy in his own as well as other times supplied Plato with this detail of the picture. But the employment of force would be equally necessary in order to transform a timarchy into an oligarchy, owing to the opposition to be apprehended from the impoverished and relatively poorer sections of the timarchs, who would under an oligarchy be formally and for ever excluded from office. The conspiracy of Cinadon partly illustrates Plato's point; for it was supported by ὑπομείονες, and suppressed by force (Xen. Hell. III 3. 4—11 with Grote IX pp. 70 ff.). Krohn (Pl. St. p. 211) asserts that Plato has already forgotten 545 C, D, where constitutional change was said to originate from στάσις in the ruling class. But the struggle between those timarchs who have, and those who have not, the proposed τίμημα, is in reality στάσις between the rulers, for until timarchy is abrogated by law, the poor, if otherwise qualified, are de iure rulers as well as the rich. In Sparta it would be otherwise, because those who failed to pay their contributions to the ξυσσίτια ceased ipso facto to be rulers; only Plato's timarchy is not in this particular a copy of Sparta, but rather resembles Crete (547 D, 551 A notes). See also on 545 C.

κατεστήσαντο κτλ. For the aorist cf. 548 D note ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν is illustrated on I 341 B. ἔφαμεν refers to 544 C.

551C - 553A There are many grievous faults in the oligarchical city. It makes wealth instead of knowledge the qualification for ruling, is divided against itself, incapable, in all probability, of waging war, and false to our principle of ‘one man, one work.’ Worst of all, Oligarchy is the first constitution which permits a man to dispose of all his property by sale. From this cause springs up a large impoverished class resembling drones, some stingless and others stinging. The former are only poor, but the latter are criminals who have to be repressed by force.

πρῶτον μέν : sc. ἁμάρτημά (ἐστιν ).

ὅρος ‐‐ ἐστιν : ‘terminus eius qualis sit.’ ὅρος is the limit or defining mark which separates it from all the other πολιτεῖαι: cf. I 331 D. Few will approve of Badham's conjecture τοῦτο αὐτὸ ὁρᾷς αὐτῆς οἷόν ἐστιν, especially as ὅρος echoes ὅρον in 551 A. οἷός ἐστιν, ἄθρει· εἰ γὰρ νεῶν κτλ. (Liebhold) is scarcely less unhappy. The text is above suspicion.

εἰ νεῶν κτλ. The illustration is a favourite one both with Socrates and Plato: cf. Xen. Mem. III 9. 11 and supra VI 488 A ff. notes There is probably no aposiopesis after ἐπιτρέποι: we should translate ‘Just consider if one were to choose pilots on the census principle and refuse to let a poor man steer though better qualified!’

πονηρὰν κτλ. “Adimantus quasi non videre, sed quid videat renuntiare iussus, πονηράν, inquit, τὴν ναυτιλίαν αὐτοὺς ναυτίλλεσθαι sc. ὁρῶ” (Schneider). Cf. VII 535 C note This explanation is, I think, easier than that of Stallbaum, who prints ἄθρει γάρ· εἰ νεῶν κτλ., understand ing (after ἐπιτρέποι) τί λέγοις ἂν περὶ τούτου; or the like, and λέγοιμι ἄν to govern the accusative with infinitive. J. and C.'s solution is in principle the same as Stallbaum's. The text may be corrupt, but no convincing emendation has hitherto been offered. The different proposals are εἰκός (Ast, Richards) and ἂν εἴη δέος (Liebhold) for ἦ δ’ ὅς: <φαίην ἂν> added after ἦ δ’ ὅς (Stephanus): πονηρὰ εἴη ἂν ναυτιλία αὐτοῖς ναυτίλλεσθαι (Ast): πονηρὰν <ἀνάγκη> κτλ. Richards—but it would surely be better to add the word after ναυτιλίαν. I have sometimes fancied that Plato wrote πονηράν, ἦ δ’ ὅς, τὴν ναυτιλίαν αὐτοῖς ναυτίλλεσθαι, taking the accusative as in apposition to the previous sentence (cf. in some respects Hipp. Mai. 291 E and infra 567 C); but, for a reason to be mentioned presently on 551 D, perhaps ναυτιλίαν <ἀνάγκη> is right.

περὶ ἄλλου κτλ. See cr. n. ἤ τινος is retained by Schneider, who takes it as neuter, and ὁτουοῦν as masculine. The words can hardly be anything except a gloss or variant on ὁτουοῦν: the corrections ἥστινος or ἡστινοσοῦν (Ast) are much less easy and probable. περὶ governs ἀρχῆς, on which ἄλλου ὁτουοῦν, which is neuter, depends. Cobet's περὶ ἄλλης οὕτως ὁτουοῦν ἀρχῆς (‘about any other ἀρχή whatsoever’) does not suit with πλὴν πόλεως (i.e. ἄλλου—not ἄλλης —ὁτουοῦν πλὴν πόλεως).

μὴ μίαν κτλ. Aristotle (Pol. Ε 12. 1316^{b} 6 ff.) urges that this is equally true of all States where inequality of property prevails: but Plato would not allow that it is true of his ideal city, or even of timarchy except in so far as timarchy is itself oligarchical (548 A).

ἀνάγκῃ . See cr. n. The word could be dispensed with here, and, as all those MSS which are in the habit of writing the iota subscript at all regularly appear to have the nominative and not the dative, it is possible, and even perhaps probable, that this is the ἀνάγκη which Richards desiderated in 551 C: see note ad loc.

τὸ ἀδυνάτους κτλ. The sense of course is ‘to be—probably—unable’ i.e. ‘that they are in all probability unable.’ Richard says ἴσως is ‘feeble’: to me it seems exactly the right word in the right place. The conjectures σῶς (Badham) and ἰσχυρῶς (Richards) are each of them for different reasons very unpleasing, and even if the passage were corrupt ἰσχυρῶς is far too violent a change to deserve consideration.

χρωμένους κτλ. In illustration the Oxford editors cite Thuc. III 27. The Spartans in particular had regularly to arm and employ the πλῆθος, both Perioeci and Helots, in their wars (see e.g. Thuc. VII 19. 3), and were consequently sometimes exposed to grave dangers (Thuc. IV 80).

ὡς ἀληθῶς ὀλιγαρχικούς : ‘literally olig-archical or masters of few’ (Herren von wenigen, Schneider). Cf. ὀλιγαρχικῶς 555 A note and (for ὡς ἀληθῶς) VI 511 B note Jowett's translation “few to fight as they are few to rule” does not bring out the peculiar force of ὀλιγαρχικούς here.

φιλοχρημάτους : with emphasis on φιλο‐ (Schneider, who compares 568 B for ἅτε without the copula). The sentiment is illustrated by Bosanquet from Arist. Pol. B 9. 1271^{b} 13 εἰσφέρουσί τε κακῶς (of the Spartans): cf. also infra 554 E f. and Theophr. Char. 26, where the ὀλιγαρχικός cries πότε παυσόμεθα ὑπὸ λειτουργιῶν καὶ τριηραρχιῶν ἀπολλύμενοι; and more in Hermann-Thumser l. c. p. 685 note 1.

πάλαι . IV 434 A ff.

τὸ ἐξεῖναι κτλ. According to some ancient authorities (cited in Hermann-Thumser l. c. pp. 186 f.), the constitution of Lycurgus absolutely forbade the alienation of a certain minimum of the original κλῆρος, called the ἀρχαία μοῖρα. The evidence of Plato does not go far, but so far as it does go, it supports this view; for he says that oligarchy is the first polity which permits a citizen πάντα τὰ αὑτοῦ ἀποδίδοσθαι: cf. also Laws 744 D. Aristotle says nothing of the ἀρχαία μοῖρα, and states that a Spartan might legally part with his estate by gift or bequest, although to sell it was οὐ καλόν (Pol. B 9. 1270^{a} 19 ff.). The conflict of evidence is discussed by Newman and Susemihl on Arist. l.c.: see also on the other side Hermann-Thumser l. c. pp. 259 f. In many Greek States besides Sparta it was either illegal, or at least dishonourable, to dispose of the ‘ancient lot’: see Whibley Gk Olig. pp. 113—115.

οὔκουν κτλ. Schneider was the first to give this sentence to Adimantus, and ὀρθῶς to Socrates, “qui quum paucorum gubernationem primam illud vitium recipere persuasum haberet eamque sententiam verbis ὅρα δή etc. aperte demonstrasset, suffragante Adimanto rursus in dubium sine causa rem vocare non debebat.” Cf. 554 B. Baiter and others ought not to have reverted to the old arrangement. For οὔκουν—γε see Neil's edition of the Knights of Aristophanes p. 195.

εἰς ἅ : i.e. for χρηματισμός, δημιουργία and the other purposes specified in 552 A.

ἐδόκει : sc. ἄλλο τι ἢ ἀναλωτής (Schneider). This explanation, which is, I think, neater and more pointed than to supply τῶν ἀρχόντων, makes ἦν—ἀναλωτής indispensable. Herwerden was wrong in any case when he bracketed these words.

ἐν κηρίῳ : not ‘in the hive’ (as D. and V.), but ‘in a cell.’ The drone-cell in which the drone is produced stands to the whole hive as the οἰκία to the πόλις. For κηρίον in this sense, see Bonitz Ind. Arist. s.v.

τὸν τοιοῦτον ‐‐ κηφῆνα . The comparison is frequent in Greek literature from Hesiod onwards (O D. 304 ff.): see Ruhnken on Tim. Lex. s.v. κηφήνεσσι κοθούροισι and Blaydes on Ar. Wasps 1114. “We would purge the land of the drones, that rob the bee of her honey” (Pericles Prince of Tyre II 1. 50).

τελευτῶσιν : i.q. τελευτῶντές εἰσιν. ‘To the stingless belong those who die paupers in their old age.’ πρὸς τὸ γῆρας is adverbial as in VI 498 A. Stallbaum and others understand τελευτῶσιν as only ‘tandem fiunt’; but the other view— Schneider's—is better and more natural: cf. II 372 D γηραιοὶ τελευτῶντες and Symp. 179 E.

πάντες : sc. εἰσίν (understood from τελευτῶσιν) rather than γίγνονται (as J. and C. explain).

ἐν πόλει κτλ. Compare the melancholy picture of Athens in Isocrates Areop. 83 τότε μὲν οὐδεὶς ἦν τῶν πολιτῶν ἐνδεὴς τῶν ἀναγκαίων, οὐδὲ προσαιτῶν τοὺς ἐντυγχάνοντας τὴν πόλιν κατῄσχυνε, νῦν δὲ πλείους εἰσὶν οἱ σπανίζοντες τῶν ἐχόντων· οἷς ἄξιόν ἐστι πολλὴν συγγνώμην ἔχειν, εἰ μηδὲν τῶν κοινῶν φροντίζουσιν ἀλλὰ τοῦτο σκοποῦσιν, ὁπόθεν τὴν ἀεὶ παροῦσαν ἡμέραν διάξουσιν. The Areopagiticus was published about 354 B.C.

ὀλίγου γε ‐‐ ἀρχόντων . Plato's description may be illustrated from the state of Athens just before Solon's legislation: see Solon Fr. 36 ed. Bergk = Arist. Ath. Pol. 12. 4. The words χρησμὸν λέγοντας (in line 9 of the fragment) are certainly not, as some have thought, a corruption of χρείους φυγόντας (as in Aristotle's text), but point to a different recension. χρῃσμὸν λέγοντας ‘gathering alms’ has been suggested (cf. χρῄζω, χρησμοσύνη), and may I think be the original from which the first of the two variants comes.

μὴ οὖν οἰώμεθα : ‘are we, then, not to suppose?’ μή is not ‘num,’ but the negative and goes with οἰώμεθα: cf. I 337 B μὴ ἀποκρίνωμαι ὧν προεῖπες μηδέν; and infra 554 B with other examples cited by Stallbaum: see also Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 187. The positive counterpart of this idiom is οἰώμεθα or βούλει οἰώμεθα: and the negative is due to the jussive idea on which the subjunctive logically depends. οἰόμεθα (see cr. n.) is retained by Schneider and others, μή being construed as ‘num.’ But ‘we do not, then, suppose, do we,’ overdoes the irony, and Stallbaum's explanation is better in every way. On the interchange of ο and ω in Paris A see Introd. § 5.

ἐπιμελείᾳ = ‘deliberately,’ ‘consulto,’ is a rare but well-established adverb: see Xen. Cyr. V 3. 47, Mag. Eq. 7. 9 and cf. κατ’ ἐπιμέλειαν in Hell. IV 4. 8. The magistrates resign themselves to the presence of these κακοῦργοι, and instead of removing the cause—ἀπαιδευσία καὶ κακὴ τροφὴ καὶ κατάστασις τῆς πολιτείας—as they should do, they ‘deliberately hold them down by force.’ Plato emphatically believed that ‘force is no remedy.’ Cf. the corresponding account of the oligarchical man in 554 C, D κατέχει ἄλλας κακὰς ἐπιθυμίας ἐνούσας, οὐ πείθων ὅτι οὐκ ἄμεινον, οὐδ’ ἡμερῶν λόγῳ, ἀλλ’ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ φόβῳ κτλ. Schneider's translation ‘carefully’ (sorgfältig) is inaccurate; but he was right in holding that ἐπιμελείᾳ and not βίᾳ (as J. and C. suppose) is the adverb. We certainly cannot understand ἐπιμελείᾳ as = ὑπὸ τῆς ἄλλης ἐπιμελείας in spite of 554 C. The suggestions καὶ βίᾳ (Stephanus) and [ἐπιμελεία ] βίᾳ (J. J. Hartman) are superfluous.

ἀπαιδευσίαν . ἀπαιδευσία is a feature of the oligarchical State and man: cf. 554 B, 559 D.

553A - 553E The oligarchical man is the son of a timarchical father, whose fortunes have been shipwrecked by an unjust condemnation. Profiting by his father's example, the son deposes the love of honour from its sovereign place, and enthrones desire and avarice within his heart. The amassing of wealth is henceforward his one consuming passion.

ὅταν κτλ. Plato (as suggested by Hermann Gesch. Abhandl. pp. 155 ff.) may have in view some of the generation of Athenian oligarchs who succeeded to the political party of Cimon; for Cimon was τιμοκρατικός rather than ὀλιγαρχικός (cf. V 470 C note). The description of the progress of individual degeneration from the aristocrat down to the tyrant constantly reflects Plato's own experience of Athenian society and domestic life: cf. 549 C, D notes Abundant materials for the picture were doubtless ready at hand in the παντοδαποὶ ἄνθρωποι (557 C) of the ‘bazaar of polities’ (557 D). For the construction of this sentence cf. 549 C—550 A note We ought not to understand μεταβάλλει before ὅταν, for the μεταβολή does not take place until 553 C, and ἆρ’ οὐκ—παραζωννύντα is the only apodosis which Plato thinks it necessary to provide.

πταίσαντα κτλ. For the figure cf. Aesch. Ag. 1006 and Eum. 554—565.

ὥσπερ πρὸς ἕρματι κτλ. In some other examples of this idiom (III 414 E, VII 520 E, supra 545 E, IX 573 E et al.) only the first preposition is expressed; but in Euthyph. 2 C, Phaedr. 255 D and Phaed. 67 D (according to Ven. T) we find as here both prepositions. Cobet is not justified in excising the second preposition either here or elsewhere (V. L.^{2} pp. 54, 164 ff., 532); for while ὥσπερ πρὸς ἕρματι πρὸς τῇ πόλει (for example) is only a similitude, in ὥσπερ πρὸς ἕρματι τῇ πόλει the connexion is much closer, amounting almost to identification: see my note on Euthyph. l. c. and cf. Braun de Hyperb. Plat. II p. 9.

ἢ στρατηγήσαντα κτλ. The words ἢ στρατηγήσαντα—ἀποβαλόντα interpret the figure in ἐξαίφνης πταίσαντα—ἑαυτόν: ‘having either been a Strategus or held some other high office, and then, when brought to trial, been either put to death, or banished, or disfranchised and deprived of all his property, by the damaging evidence of lying informers.’ βλαπτόμενον ὑπὸ συκοφαντῶν might be taken as subordinate to ἐμπεσόντα, but πρὸς πόλει πταίσαντα seems rather to imply that the prosecution is not wholly vexatious, although the evidence turns out to be so. Some misfortune, such as happened for example at the battle of Arginusae (Xen. Hell. 16. 33 ff., 7. 4 ff., with Grote VII pp. 411 ff.), arouses a great wave of popular feeling, in consequence of which the general is put upon his trial, and συκοφάνται manage to secure his condemnation (cf. Xen. l.c. I 7. 11). Badham and Cobet ignominiously expel βλαπτόμενον, apparently for no better reason than that ἐμπεσόντα can be followed by ὑπό of the agent (Cobet N. L. p. 752, V. L.^{2} p. 54). If the passage is taken as I take it, βλαπτόμενον cannot be cancelled without grave inconvenience; and even if βλαπτόμενον ὑπὸ συκοφαντῶν be construed with ἐμπεσόντα, its excision is unnecessary. On the mischief wrought by συκοφάνται in Athens see Hermann-Thumser Gr. Staatsalt. p. 686 notes 2—4.

ξυλλέγεται . See cr. n. and 550 A, 553 A notes ξυλλέγηται is impossible after ὠθεῖ, and ὠθῇ would be very awkward.

τιάρας κτλ. : symbols of Oriental sovereignty—note μέγαν βασιλέα—and distinction: see Dict. Ant. s.vv. and Schück de Scholiis p. 32.

χαμαὶ ‐‐ παρακαθίσας . Plato makes them squat like servile Oriental courtiers. The picture expresses with admirable clearness the psychological basis of Plato's sequence of polities: see on 547 C and 550 C, and compare the lines of Milton Paradise Lost IX 1127 ff. “Understanding ruled not, and the will Heard not her lore; both in subjection now To sensual appetite, who from beneath Usurping, over sovran reason claimed Superior sway.” The poet Gray's note, though not, I think, correct, is worthy of quotation: “An allusion to those statues or bas-reliefs where some king, or conqueror, is represented with captive nations in chains sitting at his feet; as in that erected to the honour of Justinian, in the Hippodrome at Constantinople.”

καὶ καταδουλωσάμενος is excised by J. J. Hartmann: but see V 451 B note

μηδέν is written rather than οὐδέν owing to the infinitives θαυμάζειν καὶ τιμᾶν.

ἄλλη : i.e. other than you have just described. Jowett's translation “Of all changes, he said, there is none so speedy or so sure as the conversion of the ambitious youth into the avaricious one” is quite wrong.

εἴη . Stallbaum and some others place a mark of interrogation after εἴη: “quod ego non penitus ineptum, sed inter proxime praecedentem et proxime sequentem interrogationem minus aptum existimo” (Schneider). Cf. 550 C.

554A - 555B In character, the oligarchical man resembles the oligarchical State. He gratifies his ‘necessary’ desires and no others. He is avaricious, niggardly, sordid, and the blind god of wealth is leader of the chorus of his soul. From time to time, as opportunity offers, the drone-like desires within him assert themselves, but for the most part he forcibly represses them through fear of consequences. Thus, although his soul is a prey to sedition, his better desires generally prevail over those which are worse. In public competitions he is usually content to be beaten and save his money.

ἐργάτης : not simply ‘hardworking’ (D. and V.), but with reference to illiberalis labor.

ἀναγκαίους . This form of the feminine recurs in IV 425 D, supra 558 D, 559 A, 561 A (ter) and IX 572 C; but in 558 D we have ἀναγκαῖαι, and ἀναγκαία in 559 B, C. See Schneider on IV 425 D. There is no justification for making ἀναγκαῖος consistently an adjective of either two or three terminations (as suggested by Richards). The full meaning of ἀναγκαῖοι ἐπιθυμίαι is explained in 558 D ff.

τὰ ἄλλα ἀναλώματα “sunt pecuniae in cetera impendendae, quas hic negatur παρέχεσθαι, de suis praebere” (Schneider). With ἄλλα cf. ἄλλης 554 C, and with παρεχόμενος IV 421 D note The translation ‘not affording or allowing himself’ (J. and C.) is inaccurate. παραδεχόμενος, which was read, with slight MS authority, before Bekker, has been rightly discarded by later editors.

οὓς δή . For the plural cf. (with Stallbaum) Laws 908 D and Eur. Hel. 440 <*>λλην πεφυκώς, οἷσιν οὐκ ἐπιστροφαί. See also on I 347 A.

τυφλὸν κτλ. τὸν Πλοῦτον, οἷμαι, φησίν says a Scholiast in the margin of A. See Blaydes on Ar. Plut. 90. Hirmer (Entst. u. Komp. d. Pl. Pol. p. 658 note) doubts whether the god of Wealth is represented as blind earlier than Aristophanes; but a σκόλιον of Timocreon began ὤφελέν σ’ ὦ τυφλὲ Πλοῦτε (Schol. on Ar. Ach. 532). With the figure in τοῦ χοροῦ cf. VI 490 C and infra 560 E.

ἐτίμα μάλιστα . See cr. n. Schneider's admirable emendation is now universally accepted: cf. μάλιστα ἔντιμα above and τιμᾶν μηδὲν ἄλλο ἢ πλοῦτον 553 D. On the corruption see Introd. § 5.

κηφηνώδεις κτλ. As oligarchy has ‘drones’ (552 C), so the oligarchical man has ‘drone desires.’ The parallel is worked out with unusual completeness, even for Plato: see on 555 A.

μὴ φῶμεν . 552 D note

κατεχομένας κτλ. Cf. 552 E. ἄλλης=περὶ τὰ ἄλλα: cf. ἄλλα in 554 A. The translation ‘his general habit of carefulness’ (J. and C.) is scarcely right: cf. περὶ τῆς ἄλλης οὐσίας τρέμων in D below.

αὐτῶν : not κηφηνωδῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν, but the plural masculine, in spite of αὐτῷ above (I 347 A note).

ὥστε πολλῆς κτλ. See II 359 B ff. Socrates would say that the picture which Glauco there draws is only too true of the oligarchical man.

τούτῳ δῆλον : ‘clear by this,’ ‘clear from this,’ as in Eur. Hipp. 627 τού τῳ δὲ δῆλον and Ar. Plut. 587 (τούτῳ δηλοῖ). Stallbaum reads τοῦτο with Ξ and a majority of the inferior MSS; but there is no reason for deserting A and II. The antecedent to τούτῳ is contained in οἶσθ’ οὖν—ἀδικεῖν. From the fact that such a person κακουργεῖ when he gets the chance, it is clear (says Socrates) that when he εὐδοκιμεῖ δοκῶν δίκαιος εἶναι, he achieves this result only by doing violence to himself.

ἐπιεικεῖ κτλ. : ‘by a sort of virtuous self-constraint’ not (as Campbell) ‘by some virtuous element in himself he forcibly restrains.’ βίᾳ is a verbal noun as in βίᾳ τῶν ἐχθρῶν (566 A) and the like. τινι qualifies ἐπιεικής: there is no real ἐπιείκεια in this sort of thing: cf. Phaed. 69 A ff.

εὑρήσεις : see cr. n. The addition of ἐν above the line by A^{2} is hardly sufficient to justify ἐνευρήσεις, especially as εὑρήσεις has much more support from the other MSS. ἐνευρίσκω has not yet been proved classical (see Jebb on Soph. Aj. 1144), and Schneider afterwards ( Addit. p. 65) retracted his defence of it here. The distance of τοῖς πολλοῖς from ἐνούσας ἐπιθυμίας is no real difficulty, especially after ἐπιθυμίας ἐνούσας just above.

τὰς τοῦ κηφῆνος ξυγγενεῖς κτλ. Cf. VII 519 B, C note For ἀστασίαστος see on 545 C. διπλοῦς: like the oligarchical State, which is ‘not one, but two’ (551 D).

ἡρμοσμένης τῆς ψυχῆς . Richards would omit τῆς, but the article (which is in all MSS), implies, I think, that such a soul exists and has already been described, as it has in ἕνα γενόμενον ἐκ πολλῶν, σώφρονα καὶ ἡρμοσμένον IV 443 D, E.

ἀνταγωνιστής γε κτλ. See on 551 E. Susemihl Gen. Entw. II p. 232 reminds us of the disinclination on the part of rich Athenians to undertake λειτουργίαι: see Hermann-Thumser l.c. pp. 687 ff.

τῶν καλῶν : sc. φιλοτιμιῶν. In χρήματά τε the τε connects its own with the preceding clause, and does not here mean ‘both.’ τοιούτων: i.e. εὐδόξων. This interpretation is more idiomatic and forcible than to refer τοιούτων to φιλοτιμίας κτλ.

φιλονικίαν κτλ. The ὀλιγαρχικός, when competing for νίκη, is a φαῦλος ἀνταγωνιστής, because he is afraid to summon his ἀναλωτικαὶ ἐπιθυμίαι ‘to fight and strive for victory along with him,’ precisely as the oligarchical city was afraid to arm the πλῆθος (551 D note). And just as the oligarchs found themselves ὡς ἀληθῶς ὀλιγ‐αργικοὶ ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ μάχεσθαι (551 E), so the ὀλιγαρχικὸς ἀνήρ, ‘true to his name of olig-arch’ ( ὀλιγαρχικῶς), ‘employs but few of his forces in the war, and is usually beaten and keeps his money’ (‘loses the prize and saves his money’ Jowett). The force of ξυμ‐ in ξυμμαχίαν may perhaps extend to φιλονικίαν (cf. 546 A note), which must not be translated ‘rivalry’ (with D. and V.): see on IX 581 B. ἡττᾶται καὶ πλουτεῖ has an epigrammatic effect somewhat like Juvenal's “probitas laudatur et alget.”

ὁμοιότητι = ‘in virtue of similarity’: cf. IX 576 C. Baiter and others would expunge the word in both places as an ‘inutile glossema,’ and it is true that the meaning could be apprehended without ὁμοιότητι, as in 561 E—562 A. There are, however, many principles (e.g. ἀνομοιότης etc.) on which things can be τεταγμένα κατ’ ἄλληλα ‘ranged over against one another,’ and it is right that in summing up, Plato should emphasise the principle which has determined the form of his exposition from σκοπῶμεν δὴ εἰ ὅμοιος ἂν εἴη (554 A) onwards: see 554 B, D, E notes For the dative cf. IX 575 C note

555B - 557A Oligarchy is succeeded by Democracy. As dissipated young men in an oligarchical government are permitted and even encouraged to squander their property, a large impoverished class of ‘stinging drones’ makes its appearance in the city. The rulers take no steps to remedy an evil which increases their own fortunes, and become luxurious and effeminate. In seasons of stress and common danger, the poor discover their own strength and the weakness of the rich, and thereafter it needs but a little impulse to overthrow the rotten fabric. Democracy is established as soon as the introduction of the lot affirms the principle of equality.

δημοκρατίαν δὴ κτλ. We have seen that the dominant feature in the oligarchical State is τὸ φιλοχρήματον, and the present chapter describes how in process of time the polity itself is inevitably overthrown by that very principle. The incidents which prove the immediate cause of revolution are such as may frequently have happened in Greek history: see 556 C, D, E and 557 A notes It is instructive to compare with this chapter Aristotle's a posteriori analysis of the causes of revolution in oligarchical cities ( Pol. E 6). On the psychological basis of democracy see 557 A note

παραστησώμεθα κτλ. For the use of παραστήσασθαι Schneider refers to II 360 E, 361 B and Lucian Icarom. 17, ὥσπερ ἂν εἴ τις παραστησάμενος πολλοὺς χορευτὰς—ἔπειτα προστάξειε κτλ.

ὁμοίως κτλ. See 543 A note μεταβάλλει = ‘it changes,’ viz. the πολιτεία. The verb is scarcely impersonal, as the English translators appear to suppose.

προκειμένου κτλ. προκειμένου is not ‘publicly acknowledged’ (D. and V.), but ‘propositus,’ as in τὸ τέλος τὸ προκείμενον. δεῖν (wrongly rejected by J. J. Hartman) ‘resumes the notion of προκειμένου’ (J. and C.). Similar pleonasms occur in Crit. 44 C, Gorg. 500 C and elsewhere: cf. also ἐξεῖναι in C below and VII 535 A note

ἅτε ‐‐ ἄρχοντες κτλ. As in timarchy (550 D ff.), so in oligarchy, it is the love of money which sows the seeds of party strife and political degeneration. Cf. generally 552 A note and Aristotle Pol. E 6. 1305^{b} 39 ff., with his criticism of Plato ibid. 12. 1316^{b} 15 ff.

εἰσδανείζοντες : i.e. ‘lending money on-the-security-of’ (εἰς). The τὰ τῶν τοιούτων should be taken with the εἰς of εἰσδανείζοντες as well as with ὠνούμενοι: cf. Arist. Pol. Z 4. 1319^{a} 13 δανείζειν εἴς τι μέρος τῆς ὑπαρχούσης ἑκάστῳ γῆς and Dem. in Aphob. I 28. The word εἰσδανείζω is a ἅπαξ εἰρημένον, but we certainly ought not to substitute ἐκδανείζοντες (suggested by Stephanus) or προσδανείζοντες (with Richards).

δῆλον ἤδη τοῦτο κτλ. See 550 E note

οὐκ ἀγεννεῖς κτλ. =‘of no common stamp’ etc. (von nicht gemeiner Art, Schneider), not simply ‘of noble birth’ (as D. and V.). Catiline would have seemed to Plato a case in point (cf. Sallust Cat. 5), and the Catilinarian conspiracy illustrates not inaptly the description which follows (555 D, E). The aorist ἠνάγκασαν is gnomic, as appears from the plural ἐν ταῖς ὀλιγαρχίαις.

κεκεντρωμένοι κτλ. See 552 C, D notes ἐξωπλισμένοι does little more than explain the metaphor, more Platonico: see on V 451 B and cf. καὶ πτωχόν (wrongly discarded by J. J. Hartman) in 556 A below.

ἐγκύψαντες . τοιαῦτα γὰρ τὰ τῶν ἄγαν φροντιζόντων καὶ περὶ τὴν διάνοιαν ἐχόντων σχήματα (Schol. on Ar. Clouds 191). A comparison with IX 586 A κάτω ἀεὶ βλέποντες καὶ κεκυφότες εἰς γῆν suggests that the stoop of the χρηματιστής in reality betrays the inherent earthliness of his soul: see on VII 519 A, B and cf. Dante Purg. 19. 70—72.

τοῦ πατρὸς κτλ. Cf. VI 507 A note τόκους is bracketed by Herwerden, but τὸν τόκον τε καὶ ἔκγονον (l.c.) supports it.

οὔτε γε κτλ. καί appears before οὔτε in ΠΞ q and a majority of MSS, but the reading of A is, I now think, right. We should translate ‘At all events, said I, they are unwilling to extinguish this kind of mischief when it is beginning to break into a flame, either by preventing’ etc. If they quenched it in its earlier stages, then the πτωχοί would not be πολλοί: and πολύν bears the emphasis in both the previous sentences. For this use of γε see 559 B note, and cf. IX 581 C and (with Schneider) Isocr. Paneg. 153. With ἐκκαόμενον cf. Ar. Peace 1132. D. and V. understand the word of ‘cauterizing,’ wrongly, as ἀποσβεννύναι shews.

ὅπῃ . I formerly, with two inferior MSS, Bekker and Ast, read ὅποι, which is certainly more exact: see the examples cited by Blaydes on Ar. Clouds 858 τὰς δ’ ἐμβάδας ποῖ τέτροφας; The verb βούλεται is however treated as more than a mere auxiliary, and the relative accommodated to it by a species of attraction, even at the cost of sacrificing something of the peculiar force of τρέπειν. Translate ‘to dispose of one's property as one likes.’

ἕτερον νόμον . Plato's language here and in ὃς μετ’ ἐκεῖνόν ἐστι δεύτερος seems to imply that such a law would not be altogether a novelty in Greece. According to Theophrastus (Frag. 97. 5 Wimmer=Stob. Flor. 44. 22), it found a place among the laws of Charondas: ἐὰν δέ τις πιστεύσῃ, μὴ εἶναι δίκην· αὐτὸν γὰρ αἴτιον εἶναι τῆς ἀδικίας. Plato makes a similar provision in Laws 742 C, 849 E, 915 E.

τοὺς μὲν δὴ κτλ. μέν balances δέ after σφᾶς, and should not be taken with δή in the ordinary sense of the collocation μὲν δή: so that there is no reason to omit δή (with Ξ and two other MSS) on the ground that μὲν δή comes too late in the sentence. δή “priori membro dilatando inservit et vinculi per μέν iniecti nexum relaxans alterum membrum ut nova interrogatione instructum minus miremur efficit” (Schneider, comparing Laws 751 E).

ἆρ’ οὐ τρυφῶντας κτλ. Note the usual Platonic chiasmus.

, D 18 παραβάλλωσιν : ‘come alongside,’ originally perhaps a nautical expression (J. and C.), as in Arist. de gen. anim. III 11. 763^{a} 31. The usage occurs again in Lys. 203 B, and tolerably often in Aristotle.

ἢ καὶ κτλ. ὅταν extends its influence to καταφρονῶνται and ἴδῃ. On θεώμενοι κτλ. Schneider remarks “post verba ἀλλήλους θεώμενοι exspectabatur μηδαμῇ ὡς πρότερον περὶ ἀλλήλων διανοῶνται, vel tale quid, quod ad utrosque se invicem conspicientes pertineret; cuius loco statim divisione facta quid iam de pauperibus divites, de divitibus pauperes sentiant, infertur. Cuius non inconsequentiae, sed breviloquentiae significandae causa supra post θεώμενοι comma—sustuli.” The effect is analogous to that produced by so-called partitive apposition (IV 431 A note), of which idiom a somewhat similar extension occurs in V 465 C, where see note. Richards suspects corruption, proposing to read either (1) θεωμένων and perhaps also ἢ κἄν or ἢ καὶ <ἐάν> instead of ἢ καί, or (2) simply to insert καί before μηδαμῇ. The second proposal is neat and scholarly; but καί was unlikely to disappear, and Plato's rapidity of thought and style renders him particularly liable to grammatical and other irregularities in his more spirited and dramatic passages: cf. VI 488 C, D, VII 531 A, and infra 558 A. See also on 549 D above.

ταύτῃ is emphatic, implying that it is otherwise when danger does not threaten.

πολλὰς κτλ. : ‘with quantities of alien fat about him’ (viel fremdes Fleisch an sich habend, Schneider), ‘cumbered with much fat.’ παχεῖς ‘bloated’ was, it may be remembered, a nickname for oligarchs: see Gilbert Gr. Staatsalt. II p. 275 note 2 and Neil's edition of Ar. Knights App. II p. 209. ἀλλοτρίας is ‘not his own,’ i.e. no real part of him, and hence useless, superfluous. As Graser points out (Spec. advers. in serm. Pl. p. 91), it is Homer's γναθμοῖσιν ἀλλοτρίοισι (Od. XX 347) which is the source of this and other kindred uses of ἀλλότριος, e.g. Thuc. I 70. 6 and Isocr. Faneg. 86. Hermann thinks the meaning is that he has grown fat at the expense of others, like the drone. This explanation is less pointed, and the drone represents not the rich oligarch, but the πτωχός (555 E). With the feeling of this passage cf. Plut. Apoph. Reg. et Imp. 192 D τοῖς πολυσάρκοις ἐπολέμει (Ἐπαμεινώνδας) καί τινα τοιοῦτον ἀπήλασε τῆς στρατιᾶς, εἰπὼν ὅτι μόλις αὐτοῦ σκέπουσι τὴν γαστέρα ἀσπίδες τρεῖς ἢ τέσσαρες.

ἄνδρες ‐‐ οὐδέν . ‘We have them at our mercy: for they're good for nothing.’ ἄνδρες ἡμέτεροι is virtually an exhortation to rise in revolt: hence παραγγέλλειν. The omission of the article heightens the dramatic effect: cf. X 617 D. ἡμέτεροι has a colloquial ring (‘they are ours’). A kindred meaning, but without any colloquial touch, appears in Xen. Cyr. II 3. 2 (quoted by Schneider Addit. p. 65) ἢν μὲν ἡμεῖς νικῶμεν—δῆλον ὅτι οἵ τε πολέμιοι ἡμέτεροι καὶ τὰ τῶν πολεμίων ἀγαθὰ πάντα: cf. also VII 5. 73. This interpretation, which Schneider finally suggested, has the support of A, II and other MSS. Baiter's ἄνδρες ἡμέτεροι εἰσὶ παρ’ οὐδέν has found considerable favour, and gives a fair sense, but παρ’ οὐδέν (for which see Jebb on Soph. Ant. 466) appears to me unpleasantly weak. ἄνδρες ἡμέτεροι εἰσὶν οὐδέν (q and others) is intrinsically better (cf. 562 D), and may be right, but the intrusion of γάρ in the best MSS remains a difficulty, and παραγγέλλειν (as in Baiter's reading) is shorn perhaps of its full force. It is on the whole easier, I think, to understand ἡμέτεροι as I do than to explain the insertion of γάρ in our two oldest and best MSS.

οὐκοῦν ὥσπερ κτλ. Cf. Soph. O. T. 961 σμικρὰ παλαιὰ σώματ’ εὐνάζει ῥοπή. The Platonic simile is imitated by Arist. Pol. Z 6. 1320^{b} 33 ff. and may also, as Stallbaum thinks, have been in Demosthenes' mind when he wrote Ol. II 21.

ἔξωθεν ἐπαγομένων κτλ. A familiar feature in the history of Greek revolutions: cf. Whibley Gk Olig. p. 52 and (for examples) Gilbert Gr. Staatsalt. II passim.

καὶ ὡς τὸ πολὺ κτλ. : ‘and the magistracies in the city are for the most part given by lot.’ These words, which depend, of course, on ὅταν, explain ἐξ ἴσου—ἀρχῶν, and should be taken in close connexion with that clause, as Ast long ago pointed out. The difference in tense (μεταδῶσι but γίγνωνται), no less than the meaning, clearly indicates that the two clauses do not express two separate and distinct acts. It is by means of the lot that ἰσότης is secured; and hence democracy is not established until offices are assigned thereby: cf. Hdt. III 80 πάλῳ μὲν ἀρχὰς ἄρχει and Arist. Rhet. I 8. 1365^{b} 32 δημοκρατία μὲν πολιτεία ἐν ᾗ κλήρῳ διανέμονται τὰς ἀρχάς, with Whibley Gk Olig. p. 35 and Greenidge Gk Const. Hist. pp. 139 ff. The clause was, strangely enough, condemned by Hermann. Plato was not likely to omit all mention of the most characteristic and necessary factor in the establishment of a democracy, especially as he introduces the same feature in describing the democratical man (561 B ὥσπερ λαχούσῃ). J. and C., with Schneider and others, read γίγνονται, for which there is very little MS support, remarking that ‘the subjunctive is inexact, because any words dependent on ὅταν should describe a characteristic of the origin of democracy, not merely a characteristic of democracy.’ The fact is that the words do explain the origin of democracy by explaining ἐξ ἴσου μεταδῶσι κτλ., where the aorist is rightly used of the act by which democracy is established; whereas if we read γίγνονται the clause must be taken by itself, and then it can only express a characteristic of democracy after that constitution is in force, so that its proper place would be in the next chapter. It should be observed that in no ancient democracy that we know of was the lot employed in electing to all magistracies: see Gilbert l.c. II p. 318. For this reason Plato writes ὡς τὸ πολύ .

557A - 558C The peculiar characteristics of Democracy are liberty and licence. It is of all governments the most manifold and many-coloured, resembling a bazaar of constitutions rather than a single polity. In a democratic city the individual is free to adopt his own policy independently of the State. Little trouble is taken to execute judicial sentences. The people are indulgent to educational defects in their leaders and require nothing beyond a profession of loyalty to the masses. Truly a delightful constitution, full of anarchy and colour, distributing a species of equality to equal and unequal alike!

τίνα δὴ οὖν κτλ. The psychological principle of Democracy, as well as of Oligarchy, is τὸ ἐπιθυμητικόν. But whereas in Oligarchy everything was subjected to the dominion of one particular desire, viz. the desire of wealth (550 C note), Democracy, on the other hand, is the political embodiment of absolute freedom and equality among all desires, unnecessary as well as necessary: see on 558 C ff. The materials for Plato's picture of democracy are of course taken from Athens more than any other single city. It is an extraordinarily vivid sketch; and indeed Plato's whole account of democracy and the democratical man (557 A—565 C), in spite of manifest exaggerations, brings Athens nearer to us than almost any monument of ancient literature, Aristophanes alone excepted. We can see that Plato was fully alive to the wonderful variety and colour of Athenian life; but even on this ground democracy did not appear to him worthy of praise. Multiplicity and variety are the offspring of that fatal ἀνομοιότης which works ruin alike in the city and the soul (547 A note). In other respects, Plato represents democracy as a land of Hedonism, peopled by Anarchy and Waywardness, and darkened by the shadow of the Tyranny to which it must at last succumb. Nearly all the greatest writers of Greek antiquity were on the whole unfavourable to democracy, except of course the Orators: and least of all in Plato could democracy expect a champion. For the other side of the picture, we should of course take Pericles' speech in Thuc. II 35 ff. See Neil's Knights of Aristophanes pp. vii ff.

δῆλον γὰρ κτλ. It is the ἀνήρ rather than the πολιτεία which is the ultimate object of our search; but as the ἀνήρ in a democracy will be δημοκρατικός τις, we cannot understand him until we understand δημοκρατία. Hence the question ποία τις—πολιτεία. Cf. 545 B, C.

ἐλευθερίας . ἐλευθερία was the fundamental ὑπόθεσις of ancient democracy: ὑπόθεσις μὲν οὖν τῆς δημοκρατικῆς πολιτείας ἐλευθερία, says Aristotle Pol. Z 2. 1317^{a} 40. Cf. 562 B. It involves, according to Aristotle l.c., two ideas, viz. (1) τὸ ἐν μέρει ἄρχεσθαι καὶ ἄρχειν, (2) τὸ ζῆν ὡς βούλεταί τις (ib. 1317^{b} II). Throughout this chapter Plato illustrates the second of these characteristics. Cf. Whibley Gk Olig. pp. 33—35.

παρρησία and ἐξουσία are democratical watchwords; see e.g. Gorg. 461 E, Eur. Hipp. 422, Ion 671 ff., and Thuc. VII 69 (τῆς—ἀνεπιτάκτου πᾶσιν ἐς τὴν δίαιταν ἐξουσίας) with II 37. 2 and infra 557 D, 563 E, Arist. Pol. Z 4. 1318^{b} 39 al.

ὥσπερ ἱμάτιον κτλ. For the asyndeton cf. VI 497 B note ποικίλον=‘many-coloured’ is cancelled by Herwerden and J. J. Hartman. The word is in every MS and thoroughly harmonises with Plato's characteristic fulness of style: ‘like a many-coloured garment, diversified with every shade of colour.’ In itself it is the antithesis of ἁπλοῦς, and symbolical of kaleidoscopic diversity and changefulness, just as in recent years we have heard the expression ‘Joseph's coat of many colours’ applied to a versatile and distinguished statesman. See also on 561 E. ἄνθεσι is not ‘flowers’ (as seems to be generally supposed), but ‘dyes,’ ‘colours’ (IV 429 D note): nor need πεποικιλμένη be understood of embroidery: for ποικίλλειν means no more than ‘to diversify with colours’ and implies nothing whatever as to the process: cf. II 378 C. On the verbal play in ἄνθεσι—ἤθεσι see III 406 B note For ἦν δ’ ἐγώ repeated cf. VII 522 A note

πάντα γένη κτλ. Cf. Laws 681 D πολιτείας σχῆμα—ἐν ᾦ δὴ πάντα εἴδη καὶ παθήματα πολιτειῶν καὶ ἅμα πόλεων ξυμπίπτει γίγνεσθαι. On ἐξουσίαν see 557 B note

τοῦτον ἐκλέξασθαι κτλ. Pericles (Thuc. II 37. 1) regarded the Athenian constitution as a παράδειγμα: Plato humorously describes it as a motley aggregate of παραδείγματα. Democracy is πόλεις παμπολλαί, ἀλλ’ οὐ πόλις, the different varieties of individuals living in it representing so many different constitutions. In view of 561 C we may even go farther, and say that every democratical individual is himself a kaleidoscopic succession of polities—χαμαιλέων τις καὶ σαθρῶς ἰδρυμένος (ap. Arist. Eth. Nic. I 11. 1100^{b} 6). Hence, as Plato would hold, the waywardness and instability of democratic policy, constantly reversing to-morrow what it decrees today. See Thuc. I 44, II 65, III 36 ff., IV 28 and VIII 1. Democracy in fact, from Plato's point of view, is the political expression of monochronous Hedonism: cf. 558 A and 561 C notes

ἀνάγκην . The Athenians gloried in their ἀνειμένη δίαιτα. See Thuc. II 39. 1 and Laws 642 C μόνοι γὰρ ἄνευ ἀνάγκης, αὐτοφυῶς, θείᾳ μοίρᾳ, ἀληθῶς καὶ οὔ τι πλαστῶς εἰσιν ἀγαθοί .

μηδὲ α<*> ‐‐ δικάζειν : ‘nor again, if any law prevents you from being a magistrate or judge—actually to be both magistrate and judge in spite of the law, if you take it into your own head to be so.’ The grammatical construction would naturally be μηδὲ αὖ (ἀνάγκην ε<*>ναι)— μηδὲν ἧττον καὶ ἄρχειν καὶ δικάζειν κτλ. This could only mean ‘nor any necessity compelling you to act as magistrate or judge if a law forbids you,’ etc. i.e. ‘you are not even compelled to follow your own inclination when it goes against the law.’ The sentiment is intelligible, but too extravagant and subtle a piece of satire even for so highly coloured a passage as the present. As it is, Plato starts as if he would write ‘nor again—to refrain from being a magistrate or judge,’ but by a dramatic anacoluthon expresses the last part of his sentence in a positive form. μηδὲν ἧττον and the emphatic καὶ‐καί make it easy to catch the meaning. The corruptions in A Π (see cr. n.) and some other MSS are probably due to assimilation.

θεσπεσία καὶ ήδεῖα is almost a hendiadys: cf. IV 429 E note Democracy is political hedonism: see on 561 C. Hermann's θεσπεσία ὡς ἡδεῖα is inelegant and even questionable Greek: nor does θεσπεσία καὶ θεία (Stallbaum) merit praise.

τί δέ; ἡ πραότης κτλ. : ‘And is not the perfect good temper of some who have been tried exquisite? or have you never seen in such a State, when people have been condemned to death or exile, how none the less they remain and roam about in public, and the culprit saunters round as though unheeded and unseen like some spirit from another world?’ They bear the State no malice, and shew their good temper by stopping where they are—for the sentence remains unexecuted. See also App. II.

δικασθέντων has been thought to be neuter (Weil Rev. d. Phil. VIII pp. 171 ff.); but although the usage of the word in other passages of Plato ( Critias 120 C, Laws 867 E, infra X 614 D, Crit. 50 B, Gorg. 523 C and elsewhere) favours this view, it yields no satisfactory sense, and πραότης is an attribute of persons rather than of things. The perfect passive—it is not the middle—of δικάζω is similarly used of persons in Lysias 21. 18 αἰσχρὰς δίκας δεδίκασμαι. The circumstances of Socrates' own imprisonment after his condemnation illustrate, though only imperfectly, what is said here, for the Athenians were not careful to prevent him from escaping: see Crit. passim and my Introduction to that dialogue pp. ix f.

ἀνθρώπων κτλ. The construction is extremely irregular. Perhaps the simplest and least unsatisfactory solution is to make καταψηφισθέντων a genitive absolute and regard μενόντων etc. as attracted by ἀνθρώπων καταψηφισθέντων (so also J. and C.). See App. II.

θανάτου ἢ φυγῆς κτλ. For the genitive Kühner (Gr. Gr. II p. 332) compares θανάτου κρίνεσθαι, ὑπάγεσθαι and the like, in which δίκην is probably understood. The genitive of the penalty seems not to occur elsewhere with καταψηφί‐ ζεσθαι, and we should perhaps, read θάνατον ἢ φυγήν. The pronoun αὐτῶν is half pleonastic: cf. IV 428 A note

καὶ ὡς κτλ. The change from plural to singular (cf. 1 347 A note) “rem magis insignem et imaginem evidentiorem reddit” (Schneider). The same effect is produced by making the clause independent—a common transition, for examples of which see Engelhardt Anac. Pl. Spec. III pp. 41—43.

περινοστεῖ κτλ. : i.e. ἀπὸ τόπου εἰς τόπον μεταβαίνει κτλ. (Schol. on Ar. Plut. 121). The word has a contemptuous ring—a rolling stone gathers no moss— and suggests a vagrant or loafer. Cf. Ar. l.c. and ib. 494 ἢν γὰρ ὁ Πλοῦτος νυνὶ βλέψῃ καὶ μὴ τυφλὸς ὢν περινοστῇ, with Lucian Tim. 24 ἄνω καὶ κάτω πλανῶμαι περινοστῶν. The comparison ὥσπερ ἥρως is suggested by ὁρῶντος οὐδενός. They excite no more notice and remark than an invisible ἥρως or circumambient spirit of one who has joined the happy or unhappy dead: see Rohde Psyche^{2} I pp. 146 ff. and especially p. 182 notes, or Roscher Lex. d. Myth. s.v. Heros. Weil (Rev. d. Phil. VIII pp. 171 ff.) seems to think there is a specific reference to such an invisible hero as sometimes rendered service in battle (cf. Paus. III 19. 12 with Frazer's note, and Hdt. VIII 64); but Plato's language is quite general. The meaning cannot be ‘parades like a hero’ (as Jowett translates), for ἥρως is not thus used in Greek, and a parading hero always excites popular attention. J. and C. think ‘there is an implied allusion to the νόστοι. “He is welcomed wherever he goes like one of the heroes returning from the siege of Troy”.’ But what of οὔτε φροντίζοντος οὔτε ὁρῶντος οὐδενός? It may be noted that the superstition of which Plato here avails himself was widely prevalent in Greece as elsewhere. Hence some of the Pythagoreans asserted ψυχὴν ε<*>ναι τὰ ἐν τῷ ἀέρι ξύσματα (Arist. de An. I 2. 404^{a} 18), and commanded τὰ πίπτοντα ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης μὴ ἀναιρεῖσθαι (Mullach Fr. Phil. Gr. I p. 507)—a precept on which Diogenes Laertius remarks Ἀριστοφάνης δὲ τῶν ἡρώων φησὶν εἶναι τὰ πίπτοντα (VIII 34). The famous passage in Cor. I 11. 10 looks like a relic of some similar idea. Cf. also Phaed. 81 C, Zeller^{5} I p. 452 notes, Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 320 note 1, 346 ff. notes, 361 notes, and Dieterich Nekyia pp. 88 f. notes For other views on the whole of this difficult sentence see App. II.

καὶ πολλούς γε . The reply differs somewhat in form from the question: cf. V 465 E note It is difficult not to believe that Plato is exaggerating, although the frequency of the δίκη <*>ξούλης in Athens shews that in civil cases at all events it was often far from easy to enforce the verdict.

συγγνώμη : ‘considerateness,’ viz. in making allowance for want of education in their demagogues, as the rest of the sentence shews. The irony is of the truly Platonic kind. Jowett's “forgiving spirit” misses the point.

σμικρολογία κτλ. : ‘haggling about trifles’ etc., like education, forsooth ! ἐλέγομεν refers to IV 424 E ff. and VI 492 E.

καταπατήσασα κτλ. Cf. Gorg. 484 A. The reading αὐτά for ταῦτα—see cr. n.—is intrinsically weak, and has no MS support except A. On ἐξ ὁποίων κτλ. see VI 488 B note

γενναία . γενναῖα—see cr. n.—is much less elegant, in spite of the exclamatory anacoluthon ὡς μεγαλοπρεπῶς κτλ. See on V 465 E. Apelt strangely suggests ἔφη. Γενναῖα ταῦτά τε κτλ. (Fleck. Jb. for 1893, p. 556).

ἄλλα ἀδελφά . It is remarkable that Plato says nothing of ψηφίσματα, which were regarded as an essential feature of advanced democracy: see Arist. Pol. Δ 4. 1292^{a} 19 and Gilbert Beitr. zur innern Gesch. Ath. etc. pp. 79 ff.

ἡδεῖα κτλ. True political equality, according to Plato, is γεωμετρικὴ ἰσότης, which τῷ μὲν—μείζονι πλείω, τῷ δ’ ἐλάττονι σμικρότερα νέμει (Laws 757 C and Gorg. 508 A): ἀριθμητικὴ ἰσότης, which is the democratic principle, is a spurious kind of equality, not κατὰ φύσιν: τοῖς γὰρ ἀνίσοις τὰ ἴσα ἄνισα γίγνοιτ’ ἄν, εἰ μὴ τυγχάνοι τοῦ μέτρου (Laws 757 A). Cf. Isocr. Nicocles 14 and Arist. Pol. Γ 9. 1280^{a} 11 ff., with other passages cited by Henkel Gr. Lehre vom Staat p. 154 note 63.

558C - 559D We cannot describe the origin of the democratical man, until we explain what we mean by ‘necessary’ and ‘unnecessary’ desires. Desires which cannot be eradicated, and desires which we gratify with advantage to ourselves, are called ‘necessary’: those of the opposite kind are ‘unnecessary.’ The oligarchical man is ruled by the former; the latter sway the drone.

βίᾳ δὴ κτλ. The description is interrupted by the digression on Desire: hence the anacoluthon.

οὐκ ἀναγκαῖαι . See 554 A note

ἵνα μὴ σκοτεινῶς κτλ. It becomes important at this stage to investigate the subject of the Desires, because τὸ <*>πιθυμητικόν in the widest sense is the psychological basis of the democratical as well as of the oligarchical character. Plato's complete classification distinguishes between (1) necessary desires, (2) not-necessary, (3) not-necessary and παράνομοι (IX 571 B). The ὀλιγαρχικός is the embodiment of (1): the δημοκρατικός of (1) and (2) equally (561 A ff.): the τυραννικός of (3). Cf. IX 571 A note If we translate παράνομοι by ‘unnatural’ (as in view of IX 571 C ff. we are justified in doing: cf. IX 571 B note), Plato's account becomes almost identical with that of Epicurus, who classified Desires as (1) natural and necessary, (2) natural and not-necessary, (3) neither natural nor necessary. For the authorities see Usener Epicurea pp. 78, 294. Cf. also Athen. XII 511 E.

ἄν . See cr. n., and for the loss of ἄν before ἀναγκαῖαι IV 437 B note

ὅσαι ‐‐ ἡμᾶς . As Aristotle would say, those also are ἀναγκαῖαι <*>ν ἄνευ τὸ ἀγαθὸν μὴ ἐνδέχεται ἢ εἶναι ἢ γενέσθαι (Met. Δ 5. 1015^{a} 22).

τούτων ‐‐ ἀνάγκη justifies the appellation ἀναγκαῖαι. The pronoun τούτων is used somewhat vaguely, and denotes not the desires themselves, but their objects. Cf. 543 C note

τῆ φύσει . It follows that no desires which are necessary can be unnatural: see Epicurus referred to on 558 D.

καὶ πρός : ‘and which moreover’ (“idem est quod καὶ προσέτι, ac praeterea, atque insuper” Stallbaum). Two kinds of necessary desires were distinguished viz. (1) ἃς—ἀποτρέψαι, (2) ὅσαι—ἡμᾶς. Corresponding to this, which is not of course a mutually exclusive, division, Plato emphasises two distinct features of unnecessary desires: so that καὶ πρός (‘and which moreover,’ or according to the Greek idiom, ‘and these moreover’: see on II 357 B) is altogether appropriate. Cf. (with Stallbaum) Euthyd. 298 D and Blaydes on Ar. Knights 578. Schneider takes πρὸς οὐδέν together (“nullius rei habita ratione”), but οὐδὲν cannot easily be separated from ἀγαθόν, unless we read <οὐδὲν> πρὸς οὐδὲν ἀγαθόν, as I formerly suggested. I have no longer any doubt that Stallbaum's view is right. Ast's conjecture πρὸς οὐδέν) is refuted by Schneider.

αὐτοῦ σίτου : ‘merely of food,’ as opposed to e.g. pleasant food, sweet food (τῶν τοιῶνδε σιτίων in Epicurus: Usener Epic. p. 295). See in particular IV 437 D —439 A notes

ἡ μέν γε κτλ. On γε see 556 A note and Neil's Appendix on γε in his edition of Ar. Knights p. 192. The words ᾗ τε—δυνατή should be explained as follows. Hunger, which is the desire of σῖτος, ‘is capable of putting an end to life’: i.e. it must be gratified (οὐκ ἂν οἷοί τ’ εἶμεν ἀποτρέψαι 558 D), or else we die. On this ground, and also because it is ὠφέλιμος (i.e. ἀποτελουμένη ὠφελεῖ ἡμᾶς 558 E), we pronounce it an ἀναγκαία ἐπιθυμία. The Greek is terse but not obscure. With παῦσαι ζῶντα cf. Gorg. 523 C, D and Menex. 241 B. Jowett thinks the expression ‘very strange’ for ἀποκτιννύναι. It is strictly accurate: the sword kills, but hunger παύει ζῶντα: we merely ‘cease to live.’ Other views on this passage are discussed in App. III.

ἀλλοίων ‐‐ ἢ τοιούτων : “alius generis—quam quales modo diximus” (Stallbaum).

559C 16 χρηματιστικὰς ‐‐ χρησίμους : ‘money-making or productive, because useful in production.’ Plato more suo σοφίζεται περὶ τὸ ὄνομα (VI 509 D note).

οὕτω δή : they also are ἀναλωτικαί. Epicurus l.c. describes ἡ τῶν ἀφροδισίων ἐπιθυμία as φυσικὴ μέν, οὐκ ἀναγκαία δέ.

νῦν δή . 552 C ff., 555 E ff.

559D - 562A Let us now return and explain the genesis of the democratical man. An oligarchical father has a son, whom he brings up on narrow and parsimonious principles. The young man tastes the ‘honey of drones,’ and sedition is engendered within his soul. A struggle ensues, and after perhaps a temporary check the unnecessary desires prevail; but with the help of fortune and advancing years a sort of equality of all desires is finally established; and the man becomes an impartial devotee of pleasure in all its forms—a beautiful and many-coloured creature, ‘everything by starts and nothing long.’

πάλιν τοίνυν κτλ. Plato's description of the genesis of the democratical man is one of the most royal and magnificent pieces of writing in the whole range of literature, whether ancient or modern. Throughout most of this chapter, in the words of Longinus, the style πλουσιώτατα καθάπερ τι πέλαγος εἰς ἀναπεπταμένον κέχυται—μέγεθος (περὶ ὕψους 12. 2), and no better example will ever be discovered of that full tide of lofty thoughts and images and words—a tide ‘too full for sound and foam’—in which the author of the treatise On the Sublime places the essence of <*>ψος. We owe to Longinus what is by far the best appreciation of Plato's hierophantic vein: see especially cc. 33—36, where we can hear more than a mere echo of that sublimity which is itself, according to Longinus, the ‘echo of high-mindedness’ (ὕψος μεγαλοφροσύνης ἀπήχημα ib. 9. 2). For a very different estimate the student may be referred to Dionysius of Halicarnassus (ad Cn. Pomp. Gem. 753—765 Reiske), whose pedantic criticisms make it tolerably plain that a study of the Attic orators does not qualify a man to sit in judgment upon Plato. The present episode is hardly less remarkable for psychological insight than for elevation of style, and the description of the democratic man as the chameleon of human society paints him for all time (561 C ff.). As a representation of actual fact, the picture is doubtless somewhat exaggerated, as usual; but it is extraordinarily vivid and powerful, and shews that the Platonic analogy between the individual and the State may prove in the hands of a master an admirable clue whereby to unravel the workings of the human soul in the individual as well as in the State.

νῦν δὴ κτλ. See 558 C, D. With ἀπαιδεύτως cf. 552 E note

κηφήνων κτλ. It is clear from the summary of this passage in IX 572 C συγγενόμενος δὲ κομψοτέροις ἀνδράσι καὶ μεστοῖς ὧν ἄρτι διήλθομεν ἐπιθυμιῶν that κηφήνων and αἴθωσι θηρσὶ καὶ δεινοῖς refer to human drones, and not to the κηφηνώδεις ἐπιθυμίαι in the young man's heart. αἴθωσι ‘furious,’ ‘wild’ (Jebb on Soph. Ajax 221) shews that the drones are of the ‘stinging’ order (552 C ff., 555 D ff.).

ὀλιγαρχίας ‐‐ δημοκρατίαν . See cr. n. Schneider defends the MSS by explaining μεταβολὴ ὀλιγαρχική as “ea quae ad ὀλιγαρχίαν pertinet eamque efficit,” and referring τῆς ἐν ἑαυτῷ “ad ipsam ὀλιγαρχίαν in adjectivo latentem.” δημοκρατικήν he thinks is written for δημοκρατίαν by a sort of attraction. This explanation is much too difficult and obscure. Nor can ὀλιγαρχικῆς by itself stand for ὀλιγαρχικῆς πολιτείας, at all events in this connexion. The MS reading can only mean ‘of the oligarchical change within himself into a democratical,’ an expression which bears no sense. I formerly wrote ὀλιγαρχικοῦ τοῦ—δημοκρατικόν, comparing 559 E, 560 A; but it may fairly be objected that the ‘oligarchical element’ within the man does not change into a democratical: it is the government that changes. For this reason I now prefer my old suggestion (Cl. Rev. IV p. 357), although the corruption of ὀλιγαρχικοῦ — δημοκρατικόν is perhaps somewhat easier to explain. For the combination of genitives cf. V 449 A note An alternative solution would be to insert πολιτείας after ἑαυτῷ. This gives excellent sense, but it is difficult to assign a plausible reason for the loss of πολιτείας in all our MSS. I am unable to resist the conclusion that the text is corrupt, otherwise I should not venture to make any alteration. If Plato did not write the passage as it is printed above, there can be little doubt that πολιτείας has accidentally disappeared.

μετέβαλλε κτλ. See 556 E. τῷ ἑτέρῳ τῶν means of course τῷ ἑτέρῳ εἴδει τῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν.

τῷ ἐν ἑαυτῷ ὀλιγαρχικῷ : ‘the oligarchical element within one.’ ἑαυτῷ is ‘oneself’: cf. III 407 C μελέτας πρὸς ἑαυτόν. ἐν αὐτῷ, which Ast adopted (after Stephanus), would be easier; but I think Plato means to suggest that the oligarchical element present in this νεανίας is a universal feature of the human race. J. and C. think ἐκείνῳ and ἑαυτῷ may have changed places—a conjecture which is surely too bold. Schneider, taking ἑαυτῷ as ‘himself’ and not ‘oneself,’ compares ἐν αὐτῷ πρὸς αὑτόν below and αὐτῷ—ἐν ἑαυτῷ in 559 D, E; but here there is nothing corresponding to the αὐτῷ in each of these passages, and ἑαυτῷ cannot therefore be translated in Schneider's way.

στάσις κτλ. Cf. 556 E, 557 A. On the tense of ὑπεχώρησε and the other aorists throughout this passage see 548 D note

τινες ‐‐ αἱ μὲν κτλ. Cf. IV 431 A note The words διεφθάρησαν—ἐξέπεσον correspond to ἀποκτείνωσι—ἐκβάλωσι in 557 A. Madvig's διετράπησαν is an unlucky venture.

ἀνεπιστημοσύνην ‐‐ πατρός : the father is himself ἀπαίδευτος (552 E note), and the ἀπαίδευτος cannot παιδεύειν. On the genitives see V 449 A note

τὰς αὐτὰς ὁμιλίας κτλ. The reference in τὰς αὐτάς is to ξυγγένηται—δεινοῖς 559 D. Ast's conjecture τὰς αὑταῖς ὁμιλίας is wrong in point of sense. λάθρᾳ ξυγγιγνόμεναι: viz. with the desires of the ‘drones’: see 559 D.

ἐν ἀνδρῶν κτλ. The stately cadence is worthy of the theme: cf. τὴν— τέλεσι 560 E, and see the remarks of Longinus on rhythm and the arrangement of words as an element of ὕψος (περὶ ὔψους 39 ff.).

ἀναδραμόντες κατέσχον : ‘ran up and seized.’ ἀναδραμόντες preserves the metaphor in ἀκρόπολιν (560 B).

εἰς ‐‐ Λωτοφάγους : ‘to those Lotos-eaters' land.’ ἐκείνους refers to κηφήνων 559 D. The figure is strikingly appropriate, for the lotos-flower of sensual indulgence makes man, who is an οὐράνιον φυτόν (Clem. Alex. Cohort. ad Gent. 96 A ed. Migne, following Plato Tim. 90 A), forget ‘the imperial palace whence he came.’ Cf. VII 519 A, B notes, and (for Λωτοφάγοι) Luc. Salt. 2-4, Anth. Pal. XV 12. 8 μισῶ Λωτοφάγων γλυκερὴν λιπόπατριν ἐδωδήν (with reference to Epicureanism).

φανερῶς κατοικεῖ : no longer λάθρᾳ (560 B). He glories in his shame. Herwerden's κατοικεῖ <ἐκεῖ> in place of κατοικεῖ is wholly unnecessary and spoils the rhythm.

τοῦ βασιλικοῦ τείχους : i.e. the wall enclosing the ἀκρόπολις (560 B), where the soul's king or ruling power inhabits.

οὔτε πρέσβεις κτλ. : ‘nor admit an embassy of wise words spoken by private persons of maturer years.’ The contrast is between the ξυμμαχία itself, consisting of the λόγοι of οἰκεῖοι, and ‘ambassador-words’ of ἰδιῶται, i.e. men who take no part in public or official life. Their representations would serve as ambassadors to those of the οἰκεῖοι, whether the οἰκεῖοι inspire them or not. It has often been pointed out that Plato is thinking of Alcibiades in various parts of this description (see e.g. Steinhart Einleitung pp. 239, 698 note 238), Susemihl Gen. Entw. II p. 233 and Herwerden Mnem. XIX p. 337); and here, I believe, he has in mind the efforts of Socrates to reclaim him. Cf. VI 494 D note and especially Symp. 215 D ff. <*>πρεσβύτερος with reference to Socrates see ἀγαθοῖς καὶ πρεσβυτέροις III 409 C note; and for ἰδιώτης as applied to him, Apol. 32 E— 33 B. The order and rhythm, as in ἐν ἀνδρῶν θεοφιλῶν εἰσι διανοίαις above, is in keeping with the stately and sonorous eloquence of the whole passage: cf. IX 573 D. On Badham's conjecture δἰ ὤτων for ἰδιωτῶν see App. IV.

μαχόμενοι : viz. with τὸ φειδωλόν (560 C).

αἰδῶ . See 560 A. With what follows cf. Thuc. III 82. 4 ff. and Isocr. Areop. 20, Panath. 131 (Dümmler's Chron. Beiträge pp. 15 ff.).

σωφροσύνην κτλ. Thuc. l.c. τὸ δὲ σῶφρον τοῦ ἀνάνδρου πρόσχημα. Cf. Eur. Phoen. 509 ἀνανδρία γὰρ τὸ πλέον ὅστις ἀπολέσας | τοὔλασσον ἔλαβε. It is probable that Plato had Thucydides in his mind: see Susemihl Gen. Entw. II p. 234.

μετά : ‘with the aid of’ (in Vereinigung mit, Schneider).

καθήραντες κτλ. The imagery is borrowed from the Eleusinian rites. On the first day of the Greater Mysteries, which was called ἅλαδε μύσται, took place the cleansing of the μύσται in the sea: cf. Mommsen Feste d. Stadt Ath. p. 207 note 2. κατεχομένου is used as in Men. 99 D κατεχομένους ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ.

μεγάλοισι τέλεσι κτλ. The archaic termination in μεγάλοισι adds solemnity: see on I 330 B. λαμπράς = ‘in a blaze of light.’ Plato's language would suggest to an Athenian the brilliant scene on the evening of the Iacchus-day, when the ‘procession following the figure of Iacchus transformed itself into a λαμπαδηφορίἀ (Mommsen l.c. p. 229): cf. Ar. Frogs 340 ff. ἔγειρε φλογέας λαμπάδας ἐν χερσὶ τινάσσων Ἴακχ’ , ὦ Ἴακχε. The exiled ὕβρις etc. are conducted home like Iacchus to Eleusis. In χοροῦ there is an allusion to the χορὸς μυστῶν .

μεγαλοπρέπειαν . See on VI 486 A.

τοῦ ‐‐ τρεφομένου . Masculine, not neuter.

τὴν ‐‐ ἄνεσιν . I formerly read εἰς τὴν (with ΠΞ and many other MSS) instead of τήν, but now believe that A is right. “Non est idem, εἰς δημοκρατικὸν μεταβάλλειν, et τὴν—ἐλευθέρωσιν μεταβάλλειν. Hoc prius, illud posterius, haec via, ille finis est” (Schneider). If Plato had written εἰς, it should have been followed by an accusative masculine, contrasting with ἐκ τοῦ—τρεφομένου, as in 553 A εἰς ὀλιγαρχικὸν ἐκ τοῦ τιμοκρατικοῦ ἐκείνου μεταβάλλει. For the use of μεταβάλλει cf. (with Schneider) IV 424 C et al. With the force of ἄνεσιν cf. IX 575 A (ἀνεθέντα) and 590 A.

εὐτυχὴς ᾖ =‘if he is fortunate’ is much better than εὐτυχήσῃ (Cobet), which would mean ‘if he becomes fortunate.’ Cf. IX 578 C note

ἀλλά τι κτλ. : ‘but, owing also in some measure to the influence of years, when the tumult of the soul has mostly passed’ etc. Cf. I 329 C. Plato means that good fortune does something, and growing age the rest.

εἰς ἴσον κτλ. Pleasures are regarded by the δημοκρατικὸς ἀνήρ as individual men are regarded by the δημοκρατικὴ πολιτεία (557 A, 558 C notes): they are all equal. For ὥσπερ λαχούσῃ see on 557 A. ἕως ἂν πληρωθῇ means ‘till he’ (not ‘it,’ as D. and V. etc.) ‘is filled.’ Sensual pleasures πληροῦσι because they are πληρώσεις: cf. Phil. 35 D ff. This is the χαραδριοῦ βίος so powerfully described in Gorg. 493 A—494 D.

τὸ φρούριον κτλ. The φρούριον is the ἀκρόπολις of 560 B. With ἐάν τις λέγῃ κτλ. cf. Gorg. 495 A ff.

διαζῇ κτλ. The δημοκρατικός, like the State of which he is the counterpart, is a living example of the Cyrenaic cult of μονόχρονος ἡδονή: see 557 A, D, notes and RP.^{7} 207 B, 211. Steinhart ( Einleitung p. 698 note 239) with much probability thinks that the portrait is drawn from Alcibiades, whose ἦθος (says Plut. Alc. 2. 1) πολλὰς—ἀνομοιότητας καὶ πρὸς αὑτὸ μεταβολὰς ἐπεδείξατο. Cf. Eur. Hipp. 1115—1117 ῥᾴδια δ’ ἤθεα τὸν αὔριον | μεταβαλλομένα χρόνον ἀεὶ | βίον ξυνευτυχοίην, and (with Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II p. 311 note) the striking parallel in Dryden's Absalom and Achitophel 545 ff. On ἀνομοιότης as marking decay in men and cities see 547 A, 557 A notes

οὔτε τις τάξις κτλ. “The absence of principle, he, like the democratic state, makes into a principle” (Nettleship l.c. II p. 310). On οὔτε ἀνάγκη see 557 E note, and on ήδύν 561 C note

ἰσονομικοῦ : ‘to whom all laws are equal.’ ‘Equal laws’ (ἰσονομία) was the proud claim of democracy (Hdt. III 80, Bergk Poet. Lyr. Gr.^{4} III Scol. 12). The δημοκρατικός practises what he preaches ὡς ἀληθῶς—by impartially ignor ing every law ! For the etymological figure cf. II 376 B note

παντοδαπόν τε καὶ ‐‐ μεστόν . Richards proposes to write the genitive, remarking “surely the words are parallel to ἰσονομικοῦ.” Logically they are, but grammatically they need not be, for the life of an ἰσονομικὸς ἀνήρ is of course ἰσονομικός. With πλείστων ἠθῶν cf. πᾶσιν ἤθεσι πεποικιλμένη 557 C.

καὶ τὸν καλόν τε κτλ. lit.: ‘and that this man is the beautiful and manycoloured man, as the city described above’ (was the beautiful and manycoloured city). “Sunt diversa hominum et civitatum genera, unum simplex ac rectum, alterum duplex, aliud multiplex et varium. Qui primo accensendus est, ὁ ἁπλοῦς, qui alteri, ὁ διπλοῦς, hic vero ὁ καλός τε καὶ ποικίλος audit” (Schneider). Thus understood the article is strictly to the point, and there is no reason for writing τῶν καλῶν τε καὶ ποικίλων with Vind. B and W. H. Thompson. On ποικίλον see 557 C note It is worthy of remark that Clement interprets Joseph's ‘coat of many colours’ in the Old Testament as symbolical of desire: εἴη δ’ ἂν ἐπιθυμία ποικίλον ἔνδυμα (Strom. V 8. 84 C ed. Migne).

ἐκείνην τὴν πόλιν . See 557 C, with which and 557 D the words ὂν πολλοί κτλ. are also in close correspondence.

562A - 563E It remains to describe tyranny and the tyrannical man. As oligarchy was overthrown by the insatiate pursuit of wealth, so democracy begins to change to tyranny, when evil cupbearers provide the wine of Freedom in excessive draughts. Anarchy under the name of Freedom infects every department of life—political, domestic, educational, and social: the very dogs and beasts of burden become tainted with the prevailing vice. In the final stage no regard whatever is paid to laws, whether written or unwritten.

ff. 3 ἡ καλλίστη κτλ. As Oligarchy fell a victim to the excessive pursuit of its ideal, viz. Wealth, so also the extravagant devotion to liberty and equality subverts in course of time the democratic State. In 562 A—565 D Plato puts before us the different stages in the fall of democracy: cf. Arist. Pol. Δ 4 1291^{b} 30—1292^{a} 38, where the various εἴδ<*>ς δημοκρατίας are distinguished, and Newman The Politics of Aristotle IV pp. xxxvi—lxi. Plato's description, as usual, can be illustrated in many places from Greek and especially Athenian political and social life: see 562 D, E, 563 B, C, D al. notes

γίγνεται =‘prodit,’ ‘quaerentibus se offert’ (Schneider). Cf. III 412 C οἱ δὲ γεωργῶν ἄριστοι ἆρ’ οὐ γεωργικώτατοι γίγνονται, Euthyd. 298 E ὥστε σὸς πατὴρ γίγνεται ὁ κύων καὶ σὺ κυναρίων ἀδελφός, infra 566 A, IX 576 B and Prot. 325 B with my note ad loc. ‘What,’ asks Socrates, ‘do we find to be the character of tyranny? As for its origin, it is pretty obvious that tyranny comes from democracy.’ For the order of questions cf. 558 C. The words ὅτι μὲν γὰρ κτλ., when taken in connexion with the preceding question, seem at first sight to suggest that the μεταβολή will not be described: but cf. V 466 D, where μὲν γὰρ is used in exactly the same way, and followed by a full account of the topic to which its clause refers. See also App. V.

ἆρ’ οὖν κτλ. begins a long description of the τρόπος τῆς γενέσεως: the τρόπος τῆς πολιτείας is not described till 566 D ff. Here again the situation in V 466 D is nearly, though not quite, analogous: see note ad loc. For other views on this passage consult App. V.

προὔθεντο : sc. the citizens of the oligarchical State. Stallbaum reads προὔθετο, on inferior MS authority; but the plural is easy enough: cf. 550 D.

καὶ δἰ ὃ κτλ. explains and amplifies ὃ—ἀγαθόν. Wealth is the cause of oligarchy, that ‘on account of’ which it was established: cf. 550 D ff., 551 C, 555 B (τοῦ προκειμένου ἀγαθοῦ). The reading δἰ οὗ (see cr. n.) would make wealth the means or instrument in producing the result, and this it was not, except in the loose sense in which the προκείμενον ἀγαθόν is also a means. I formerly conjectured δἰ ὃ αὖ (Cl. Rev. IV p. 357), but αὖ is unsuitable. For the corruption in the MSS see note on διὰ τοῦτο X 610 D. Jowett wrongly translates καθίστατο by ‘was maintained.’

πλοῦτος . See cr. n. The majority of editors reject ὑπέρπλουτος: rightly, for the word is not used except as an adjective. A host of emendations has been suggested, ὁ πέρα πλοῦτος (Richter Fleck. Jb. 1867 p. 146), ὑπέρπλουτος <πλοῦτος> (Stallbaum), ὑπὲρ πλούτου (Madvig—but the use of ὑπέρ is not above suspicion), που πλοῦτος (Campbell), ὑπερπλουτεῖν (apud J. and C.), εἴπερ τι, πλοῦτος (Apelt Berl. Phil. Woch. 1895 p. 968). Stephanus' conjecture γίγνεσθαι ὑπέρπλουτον was adopted by Ast. The expression ὑπέρπλουτος πλοῦτος occurs in Joan. Damasc. III 733 A ed. Migne, but in a highly rhetorical passage and without any reference to Plato. It is probably best to read πλοῦτος, with Schneider and Hermann. ὑπέρπλουτος may have originally been a marginal note intended to recall ὑπέρπλουτοι in 552 B.

ἀπώλλυ . 555 C—557 A.

ἐλευθερίαν . See 557 B note

ἀκούσαις ‐‐ ἐλεύθερος rings like an echo from some of the panegyrists of Athens: cf. Eur. Ion 669—675 with Menex. 239 A ff. and Thuc. II 37. 2.

ἔχει ‐‐ κάλλιστον (sc. ἡ δημοκρατουμένη πόλις)=‘is its fairest possession,’ not ‘it has this in the highest perfection’ (as suggested in J. and C.).

προστατούντων . See on 565 C.

ἂν μὴ ‐‐ ὀλιγαρχικούς . For a striking example see the account of the proceedings after Arginusae in Xen. Hell. I 7. 12—15.

μέχρι τῶν θηρίων . See on 563 C, D.

πατέρα μὲν κτλ. Cf. Laws 701 B, [Xen.] Rep. Ath. I 8—12 and Mem. III 5. 15, 16 (Hermann Gesch. u. System d. Pl. Phil. p. 91).

ξυγκαθιέντες . V 467 B note

τὸ δέ γε κτλ. ‘But the extremest amount of freedom which appears in such a city is when’ etc.: lit. ‘the extreme of the amount of freedom’ etc. τὸ—ἔσχατον is the subject to something like ἐστιν or γίγνεται understood: cf. such idioms as οὗ τοι ἕνεκα ἠρόμην—ὅτι κτλ. I 330 B, where see note. The sentence is not exclamatory, as some have supposed. With πλήθους ἐλευθερίας cf. πολλὴν—τὴν ἐλευθερίαν 562 D, and (for πλῆθος) IX 591 E (πλῆθος οὐσίας), Laws XI 913 D, Theaet. 158 D (πλῆθος χρόνου) and Dem. Phil. IV 2. This explanation is that of Schneider, and indubitably right. The English editors and translators make τοῦ πλήθους depend on ἐλευθερίας: but “servi servaeque non sunt pars τοῦ πλήθους,” and ὅσον—πόλει is not easily either separated from πλήθους or connected with ἔσχατον.

ὅταν ‐‐ πριαμένων . Cf. [Xen.] Rep. Ath. I. 10 ff. τῶν δούλων δ’ αὖ καὶ τῶν μετοίκων πλείστη ἐστὶν Ἀθήνῃσιν ἀκολασία, καὶ οὔτε πατάξαι ἔξεστιν αὐτόθι, οὔτε ὑπεκστήσεταί σοι ὁ δοῦλος κτλ. In Arist. Pol. E 11. 1313^{b} 35 δούλων ἄνεσις is said to be a symptom of extreme democracy.

ἐν γυναιξὶ κτλ. Arist. l.c. goes farther and speaks of a γυναικοκρατία περὶ τὰς οἰκίας. A German critic characteristically sees an ‘admirable’ illustration of Plato's remarks in the social life “jenes transatlantischen Staatvereins” (Steinhart Einleitung p. 243). Some have accused Plato of already forgetting the liberalism of Book V (Krohn Pl. St. p. 214): but an ideal city is one thing, and a lawless democracy another; and corruptio optimi, in the relations between the sexes, as in other cases, may well be pessima.

ὅ τι νῦν ‐‐ στόμα : “‘what rose to our lips just now, whatever it be,’ as Aeschylus observes.” See Aesch. Frag. 337 Dindorf=334 Nauck. The reference in νῦν, which here as in some other places (III 414 B note) has the meaning of ‘just now,’ is to 562 E καὶ τελευτᾶν μέχρι τῶν θηρίων τὴν ἀναρχίαν ἐμφυομένην. Nauck restores the fragment of Aeschylus in the form ὅτι νυν ἦλθ’ ἐπὶ στόμα: but the enclitic is unpleasing, and as ὅτι is absent from the other two places where the quotation occurs (Plat. Amat. 763 B, Them. Or. IV 52 B) Aeschylus probably wrote νῦν γὰρ ἦλθ’ ἐπὶ στόμα (‘just come to my lips’) or something of the sort. With the general sense cf. III 394 D. Similar expressions in Greek literature are collected by Schaefer on Dion. Hal. de comp. verb. pp. 12, 13. Jackson ingeniously proposes to connect the present passage with Arist. Eth. Nic. III 2. 1111^{a} 9 ff., where he conjectures οἷον λέγοντές φασιν ἐκπεσεῖν αὑτοὺς ἃ (for ἢ) οὐκ εἰδέναι ὅτι ἀπόρρητα ἦν, ὥσπερ Αἰσχύλος τὰ μυστικά (Proceedings of the Camb. Phil. Soc. XIII 8 and Journal of Philology XXVII p. 159 f.). “Is it possible” he asks “that the phrase ἦλθ’ ἐπὶ στόμα is a proverbial survival of the plea urged by Aeschylus in plain prose on the occasion referred to in the Ethics?” I think an Athenian speaking in plain prose would have said ἦλθεν ἐπὶ στόμα or ἐπὶ τὸ στόμα, not ἦλθ’ ἐπὶ στόμα. The elision is tragic.

οὕτω : i.e. in the spirit of the Aeschylean phrase: the idea occurred to me, and it shall out, though never so extravagant and absurd!

ἐλευθερώτερα . For the concord cf. Phil. 45 E and Laws 657 D (Ast).

τὴν παροιμίαν . The proverb was οἵαπερ ἡ δέσποινα, τοία χἀ κύων (Schol.), and meant <*>τι ὁποία δέσποινα, τοιαύτη καὶ ἡ θεραπαινίς ‘like mistress, like maid.’ Plato takes κύων literally: hence ἀτεχνῶς. See Leutsch und Schneidewin Paroem. Gr. II p. 44. The traveller in modern Greece will remember the ‘democratic dogs’ of Peloponnesian villages.

γίγνονταί τε δὴ κτλ. : ‘aye, and there arise both horses and asses’ etc. This explanation—Jowett's—catches the mock-heroic humour of the passage and is at the same time easier grammatically than to supply, with Schneider, οἷοίπερ οἱ δεσπόται or, with Campbell, ἐλεύθεροι or the like. There is no ground for suspecting the text as some have done. Plato's humorous description brings vividly before us the anarchical condition of the Athenian streets. Foot-passengers have a poor time of it where the very beasts of burden forsooth are tainted with the spirit of democracy! “The regulation of traffic,” remarks Bosanquet, perhaps a little sententiously, “is in some degree a real test of social order.” No doubt this is what Plato means.

ἐμβάλλοντες κτλ. See the amusing and characteristic anecdote about Alcibiades' childhood in Plut. Alc. 2. 4 μικρὸς ὢν ἔπαιζεν ἀστραγάλοις ἐν τῷ στενωπῷ, τῆς δὲ βολῆς καθηκούσης εἰς αὐτὸν ἅμαξα φορτίων ἐπῄει. πρῶτον μὲν οὖν ἐκέλευε περιμεῖναι τὸν ἄγοντα τὸ ζεῦγος· ὑπέπιπτε γὰρ ἡ βολὴ τῇ παρόδῳ τῆς ἁμάξης· μὴ πειθομένου δὲ δἰ ἀγροικίαν, ἀλλ’ ἐπάγοντος, οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι παῖδες διέσχον, ὁ δ’ Ἀλκιβιάδης καταβαλὼν ἐπὶ στόμα πρὸ τοῦ ζεύγους καὶ παρατείνας ἑαυτὸν ἐκέλευεν οὕτως, εἰ βούλεται, διεξελθεῖν, ὥστε τὸν μὲν ἄνθρωπον ἀνακροῦσαι τὸ ζεῦγος ὀπίσω δείσαντα, τοὺς δ’ ἰδόντας ἐκπλαγῆναι καὶ μετὰ βοῆς συνδραμεῖν πρὸς αὐτον .

τὸ ἐμόν γ) ‐‐ ὄναρ is manifestly proverbial (Schneider). For ὄναρ cf. Charm. 173 A ἄκουε δὴ—τὸ ἐμὸν ὄναρ and Theaet. 201 E.

αὐτὸς γὰρ κτλ. ‘I frequently experience what you describe when I am on my way to the country,’ sc. through the congested streets of Athens. Jowett's ‘when I take a country walk’ is hardly accurate. The present πορευόμενος should be taken in its full force.

κἂν ὁτιοῦν κτλ. If the middle is to be pressed, we must translate: ‘if any man applies to himself the very least degree of slavery’ etc. That is to say, they are so sensitive that they cannot bear to see any one making himself even a willing slave. In the sacred name of Freedom, Democracy, which is now on the verge of Tyranny, puts freedom down. The sentiment is perhaps a little exaggerated, but otherwise suitable enough; only we should rather have expected Plato to express this meaning by αὐτὸς α<*>τῷ προσφέρῃ. If there were any well-authenticated examples of the middle of προσφέρειν used for the active, it would be better to construe προσφέρηται as if it were προσφέρῃ, and suppose that the slavery is applied to others: but the instances of προσφέρεσθαι= προσφέρειν in Stephanus-Hase s. v. are either dubious or from late authors. The syllable ‐ται at the end of a line is sometimes abbreviated in uncial MSS (see Bond and Thompson Public. of the Pal. Soc. I Plate 106), and this fact lends additional plausibility to W. H. Thompson's conjecture, that we should write προσφέρῃ for προσφέρηται. I once proposed τισί, and the proposal is approved by a critic in Hermathena XXIV p. 252. The citizens become so sensitive that the least degree of pressure applied to any section of them rouses them all. Meantime, as neither of these conjectures is quite convincing, I have retained the MS reading pro tempore, although I think Thompson's conjecture represents what Plato meant to say.

τελευτῶντες γὰρ κτλ. There is steady deterioration; and the last stage of democracy is the worst. Aristotle holds the same opinion: see Pol. Δ 6. 1293^{a} 1 ἡ τελευταία τοῖς χρόνοις ἐν ταῖς πόλεσι γεγενημένη along with 1291^{b} 30 —1292^{a} 37.

οὐδὲ τῶν νόμων κτλ. Cf. Laws. 701 B and Xen. Hell. I 7. 12 ff. Such a democracy works by means of ψηφίσματα rather than laws, and is ἀνάλογον τῶν μοναρχιῶν τῇ τυραννίδι (Arist. l.c. Cf. also Gilbert Beiträge zur inn. Gesch. Athens pp. 79 ff.).

563E - 566D Such is the seed which developes into Tyranny, excessive freedom generating excessive servitude, in accordance with a common law. The drones wax more numerous and violent, and ruin the democracy in course of time as once they ruined oligarchy. A democratical State contains three classes of citizens (1) the drones, stinging as well as stingless, (2) the rich who serve as drones' provender, (3) the Demos, with whom the sovereignty lies. The most active members of the drone-fraternity become leaders of the Demos against the rich. By dint of extortion and calumny the propertied classes are at last compelled in self-defence to form an oligarchical party. Hence arise impeachments etc., and the people range themselves under a single Champion. As in the fable he who tasted human flesh became a wolf, so this Champion of the People, as soon as he spills the blood of fellow-citizens, is doomed to become a tyrant. Civil war begins; the Champion is either driven from the city, and returns a full-fledged tyrant, or receives a bodyguard to protect him from secret assaults, and thus achieves his end.

ff. 29 αὕτη μὲν τοίνυν κτλ. In his account of the genesis of tyranny, as in his description of the tyrant himself, Plato has borrowed several features from the career of the most conspicuous tyrant of his own age, Dionysius I of Syracuse. See on 564 A, and for other historical references 566 B al.

καλὴ καὶ νεανική : ‘fair and proud.’ For νεανική cf. IV 425 C.

νόσημα : viz. the drones, as explained in 564 B (ἐκεῖνο τοίνυν κτλ.).

ἐξουσίας κτλ. See on 557 B. For τῷ ὄντι cf. VI 497 D note

καὶ δὴ καὶ κτλ. See cr. n. The omission of καὶ δή was a natural slip, and a majority of MSS agree with II. For καὶ δὴ καί with οὐχ ἥκιστα following cf. (with Schneider) Soph. 216 B. The present passage brings out very clearly Plato's conception of the State as a living organism and no mere ‘dead machine.’ See on this subject Bluntschli Theory of the State E. T. pp. 18—24 and cf. 543 A note

ἄγαν δουλείαν . For the omission of the article cf. IV 434 C note We certainly should not read, with Schaefer, τὴν ἄγαν, or delete ἄγαν with Cobet.

οὐκ ἐξ ἄλλης κτλ. In early times, according to Aristotle (Pol. E 5. 1305^{a} 7 ff.) democracies used to give rise to tyrannies. The tyranny of Dionysius I of Syracuse is a notorious illustration from later history (see Grote c. 81). But tyranny had other origins as well: it constantly appeared for example during the transition from Aristocracy to an oligarchical form of government (Whibley Gk Olig. pp. 72—83). Plato deliberately selects that particular origin which accords with his psychological standpoint. In the decline of an individual soul, ‘lawless’ or unnatural (παράνομοι) desires succeed the ἰσονομία in which all desires are treated as equal. Hence tyranny, which is only the political expression of unnatural desire, succeeds democracy in the fall of a State. Granted that Plato thought Athens was still degenerating, he must certainly have expected her, unless the process of decay should be arrested, to end in a tyranny. See also on IX 576 B. With the position of οἶμαι cf. 568 C and other examples in Braun de hyperb. Plat. II p. 12.

ἀκροτάτης . Herwerden (with Flor. T) conjectures ἀκρατοτάτης: but ἄκρατος does not easily admit the superlative, and the word is less suitable here than in the elaborate similitude about the wine of freedom 562 D. For the superlative of ἄκρος cf. V 459 E al.

ἠρώτας : ‘you were asking about’ (doch wohl nicht danach fragtest du, Schneider), viz. when you said τί τὸ μετὰ τοῦτο; (563 E). Cf. Crat. 407 C τὸν Ἄρη ἐρώτα (‘ask about Ares’). καὶ τῷ ὄντι—ἀγριωτάτη (563 E—564 A) is a digression, and Adimantus' question is not answered until Socrates specifies what particular νόσημα was meant by the allusion in 563 E. J. and C. erroneously refer ἠρώτας to πῶς—τὸ τοιοῦτον λέγομεν; (562 E).

ἐκεῖνο κτλ. ‘Well then,’ said I, ‘I was referring to yon class’ etc. ἐκεῖνο=‘already-mentioned’ (in 552 C and later). On τὸ μὲν—ἑπόμενον see 564 D note

ἀφωμοιοῦμεν . See cr. n. The present is less suitable, especially with δή (=ut scis, Schneider). For the error see Introd. § 5.

ταράττετον κτλ. ταράττετον is used absolutely as in Hipp. Min. 373 B Σωκράτης—ἀεὶ ταράττει ἐν τοῖς λόγοις. On φλέγμα τε καὶ χολή the Oxford editors refer to Arist. Probl. I 29. 862^{b} 27 τῶν κατὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἡ χολὴ μέν ἐστι θερμόν, τὸ δὲ φλέγμα ψυχρόν, and rightly hold that ‘the hot humour answers to the stinging, the cold to the stingless drones.’ Cf. Tim. 85 D ff.

μελιττουργόν is the reading of Ξ q Μ as well as Π (see cr. n.), and is elsewhere better attested than μελιτουργόν, which “api magis quam homini convenit” (Schneider).

ξύν has been suspected by W. H. Thompson and Herwerden; but the preposition is occasionally found with this idiom both in poetry and prose (Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 356 and Lina de praep. usu Plat. p. 33). The half-poetic ξύν (see on IV 424 E and VII 518 C) suits well with the archaic form αὐτοῖσι (I 330 B note).

τριχῇ διαστησώμεθα . With what follows cf. Eur. Suppl. 238 —245 τρεῖς γὰρ πολιτῶν μερίδες· οἱ μὲν ὄλβιοι | ἀνωφελεῖς τε πλειόνων τ’ ἐρῶσ’ ἀεί· | οἱ δ’ οὐκ ἔχοντες καὶ σπανίζοντες βίου | δεινοί, νέμοντες τῷ φθόνῳ πλέον μέρος, | ἐς τοὺς ἔχοντας κέντρ’ ἀφιᾶσιν κακά, | γλώσσαις πονηρῶν προστατῶν φηλούμενοι· τριῶν δὲ μοιρῶν ἡ )ν μέσῳ σῴζει πόλεις κόσμον φυλάσσουσ’ ὅντιν’ ἂν τάξῃ πόλις. Plato is thinking primarily of course of Athens. See also Arist. Pol. Δ 11. 1295^{b} 1 ff. and (on the whole subject) Whibley Pol. Parties in Athens pp. 35 ff. and Beloch Att. Pol. pp. 1—19.

τὸ τοιοῦτον γένος : viz. the drones.

ἐξουσίαν . See on 557 B.

προεστός refers not only to the εἷς προστάτης τοῦ δήμου (565 C note), but to δημαγωγοί in general and all who lead the people whether as orators or as officers (λέγει τε καὶ πράττει).

ἐκτὸς ὀλίγων . The leaders in a democracy, says Plato, belong to the class of drones—with a few exceptions. Pericles, for example, was an illustrious exception (Thuc. II 65. 8, 9 and Xen. Symp. 8. 39); and so, according even to Plato himself, was Aristides ( Gorg. 526 B). Plato's general attitude towards Athenian demagogues has often been censured; but nearly all the greatest writers of antiquity, except the orators, pronounce the same verdict.

τὸ μὲν δριμύτατον ‐‐ βομβεῖ . Cf. Dem. Ol. II 29 πολιτεύεσθε κατὰ συμμορίας. ῥήτωρ ἡγέμων ἑκατέρων, καὶ στρατηγὸς ὑπὸ τούτῳ, καὶ οἱ βοησόμενοι τριακόσιοι. οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι προσνενέμησθε οἱ μὲν ὡς τούτους, οἱ δὲ ὡς ἐκείνους. προσίζον (used of a bee alighting in Arist. Hist. An. VIII 11. 596^{b} 15) and βομβεῖ keep up the figure.

τοῦ ἄλλα λέγοντος . Vermehren proposes του, comparing V 479 A οὐδαμῇ ἀνεχόμενος ἄν τις—φῇ and IX 579 A. If Plato had wished to say ‘any one,’ he would, I think, have written οὐδενός· του is too weak. The article is generic.

τοῦ τοιούτου : the class of drones in general, not simply τὸ δριμύτατον αὐτοῦ. Cf. τὸ τοιοῦτον γένος in C above.

χωρίς τινων ὀλίγων is neuter and should be taken with πάντα. The different liturgies etc. would scarcely be performed by the drones; and some departments of civic administration might be in the hands of the few exceptions noted above (ἐκτὸς ὀλίγων D).

τοίνυν is ‘also’: see I 339 E note

χρηματιζομένων κτλ. : ‘if all are engaged in making money’ etc. παντων is the whole of which οἱ κοσμιώτατοι form a part; not ‘all the citizens of a democracy,’ for the aim of democracy is not πλοῦτος but ἐλευθερία, and the drones at least are not engaged in money-making.

πλεῖστον δὴ κτλ. : ‘thus, I imagine, there is plenty of honey for the drones, and it is most easy to squeeze honey from this source.’ My correction βλίττειν for βλίττει (see cr. n.) is regarded as certain by a reviewer of my Text of the Republic in Hermathena XXIV p. 252. βλίττει is retained by J. and C.; but there is no authority for the intransitive use of the verb, and βλίσειεν in the very next sentence is active. Schneider reads βλύττει, which would be a ἅπαξ εἰρημένον. Ruhnken's βλίττεται is unexceptionable in point of sense, and has found much favour. The author of this emendation claims (in his note on Tim. Lex. s.v. βλίττειν) that it is confirmed “cum Scholiastae, tum Codicis Parisini auctoritate.” But the Paris MSS have all either βλίττει or βλύττει; and Bekker's collation of the Scholium is βλίττει· ἀφαιρεῖ (not ἀφαιρεῖται ) τὸ μέλι ἀπὸ τῶν κηρίων. Moreover, although the syllable ται was sometimes abbreviated in uncial MSS (see on 563 D), it is easier to suppose that the horizontal stroke for final ν was here accidentally omitted, as constantly in the Republic: see Introd. § 5. For the sense cf. I 343 A note and on the word βλίττειν (i.e. *μ (β)λίττειν from μέλι) Blaydes on Ar. Knights 794.

πλούσιοι ‐‐ καλοῦνται . The oligarchs were frequently called πλούσιοι, κτηματικοί and the like: see Whibley Pol. Part. in Ath. p. 48 and Beloch Att. Pol. p. 2.

κηφήνων βοτάνη has a proverbial ring: cf. the proverb κηφῆνες μόχθους ἄλλων κατέδονται (Leutsch u. Schneidewin Paroem. Gr. II p. 179). The same expression, as Schneider points out Addit. p. 69, is used by Plut. Mor. 42 A with a different meaning.

κυριώτατον . In a democracy the sovereignty lies with the δῆμος in its assemblies.

οὐ θαμὰ κτλ. Under the earliest and best form of democratical government, according to Aristotle, the δῆμος consists chiefly of farmers, and ἐκκλησίαι are infrequent, for διὰ τὸ ἐσπάρθαι κατὰ τὴν χώραν οὔτ’ ἀπαντῶσιν οὔθ’ ὁμοίως δέονται τῆς συνόδου ταύτης (Pol. Ζ 4. 1319^{a} 30 ff., 3. 1318^{b} 11, and Δ 5. 1292^{b} 27). It is a later and degenerate phase when assemblies are multiplied by the payment of ἐκκλησιαστικὸς μισθός and other forms of ‘honey’ (ib. Δ 6. 1293^{a} 1 ff.). Plato in this passage contributes some hints towards a historical analysis of the evolution of Greek democracy such as we find in Aristotle.

ἐὰν μὴ ‐‐ μεταλαμβάνῃ . Cf. Ar. Peace 632—643. There is little doubt that the compulsory migration of Athenian farmers into Athens at the beginning of the Peloponnesian war had a decisive effect on the course of Athenian democracy: cf. Thuc. II 14 and 16 and Gilbert Beiträge etc. pp. 98 ff.

τοὺς ἔχοντας κτλ. On the oppression of the rich in Athens see Hermann-Thumser Gr. Staatsalt. pp. 688 ff., 747.

διανέμοντες κτλ. : ‘while dividing it among the people to retain the lion's share themselves.’ The epigram is spoiled if (with Cobet) we read <ὀλίγα> διανέμοντες. For the sentiment cf. Dem. Ol. III 31, Ar. Peace l.c., Knights 46 ff., 792 ff., 1218 ff. and (with J. and C.) Wasps 655—679.

οὕτως : emphatic, ‘with that proviso’ (D. and V.).

πράττοντες is quite satisfactory: cf. λέγει τε καὶ πράττει 564 D. Richter should not have proposed ταράττοντες .

ὅπῃ δύνανται κτλ. : ‘in any way they can.’ Their opportunities of public action in self-defence are limited; hence they form e.g. secret associations and the like. On the tense of ἔσχον see 548 D note, and for the statement itself (αἰτίαν—ὀλιγαρχικοί) many passages in Aristophanes, e.g. Wasps 488 ff. and others quoted by Whibley Pol. Part. in Athens p. 65 note 3.

τότ) ἤδη ‐‐ οὐχ ἑκόντες . Isocrates makes a similar complaint (Antid. 318): οὐ τοὺς μὲν ἐνδοξοτάτους τῶν πολιτῶν καὶ μάλιστα δυναμένους ποιῆσαί τι τὴν πόλιν ἀγαθόν, ὀλιγαρχίαν ὀνειδίζοντες καὶ λακωνισμόν, οὐ πρότερον ἐπαύσαντο (sc. οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν ) πρὶν ἠνάγκασαν ὁμοίους γενέσθαι ταῖς αἰτίαις ταῖς λεγομέναις περὶ αὐτῶν; Cf. also Arist. Pol. E 5. 1304^{b} 21 ff. Observe how Plato now begins to insist on the inevitable necessity which dogs the footsteps of political decay: see on 566 A and 567 C.

εἰσαγγελίαι : ‘impeachments,’ as e.g. for κατάλυσις τοῦ δήμου. On eisangelia in Attic legal procedure see Hager Dict. Ant. s.v. and Meier u. Schömann Att. Proc. I pp. 312—335.

ἀγῶνες περὶ ἀλλήλων : ‘trials of one another’ (Jowett): lit. ‘trials about one another,’ i.e. trials in which the individuals chiefly concerned, viz. the defendants, belong to one or other of the two parties in the State. ἀλλήλων by itself would be better suited to the words εἰσαγγελίαι καὶ κρίσεις, but ἀγῶνες ἀλλήλων is too harsh an expression, and that, I think, is why Plato writes ἀγῶνες περὶ ἀλλήλων. This explanation is in my opinion better than to translate “Processe um Leben und Tod” (Schneider: cf. ἀγῶνας—περὶ σφέων αὐτῶν Hdt. VIII 102). Some may think that ἀλλήλους should replace ἀλλήλων: but περί with the accusative would not express a close enough connexion in this passage.

οὐκοῦν κτλ. So in Ar. Knights 1127 Demos says βούλομαι τρέφειν ἕνα προστάτην. The προστάτης τοῦ δήμου in Athens was simply, “the leading demagogue, who acted as guardian and representative of the demos, as the ordinary προστάτης did of the metoecs” (Whibley Pol. Part. in Ath. p. 51). He was not a magistrate, although his position was recognised and much sought after. Pericles was certainly προστάτης, and, among his successors, apparently Cleon and others. For the authorities see Whibley l.c. and Gilbert Beiträge etc. pp. 78 ff. For ἕνα τινά Cobet substitutes ἕνα γέ τινα, without sufficient reason: cf. VI 494 D note To my mind the emphasis on ἕνα is much stronger without γε: and Plato clearly intends to emphasise that word, for it is by the rise of a single champion that tyranny is caused.

ἐκ προστατικῆς ῥίζης κτλ. Arist. Pol. E 10. 1310^{b} 14 ff. σχεδὸν γὰρ οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν τυράννων γεγόνασιν ἐκ δημαγωγῶν ὡς εἰπεῖν, πιστευθέντες ἐκ τοῦ διαβάλλειν τοὺς γνωρίμους. This was especially true of earlier times, when the orator also held military command (ib. 5. 1305^{a} 7 ff.). See Gilbert Gr. Staatsalt. II pp. 280 ff.

καὶ οὐκ ἄλλοθεν . If we treat this sentence as a statement of historical fact, Plato expresses himself too strongly; for tyranny sometimes arose in other ways. See however on 564 A and 543 A, 544 C notes

τῷ μύθῳ . See [Hecat.] Frag. 375 in Müller Frag. Hist. Gr. I p. 31 and Paus. VIII 2. 6. In his note on the latter passage, Frazer collects the ancient legends about werewolves. For the later history of the superstition consult M^{c}Lennan's article Lycanthropy in Enc. Brit. ed. 9, and for parallels in non-classical mythologies Tylor Prim. Culture^{2} I pp. 308— 315.

ἑνός is bracketed by Herwerden; but τοῦ in τοῦ ἀνθρωπίνου σπλάγχνου proves it genuine. But for ἑνός Plato must have written τοῦ ἀνθρωπίνου σπλάγχνου <τοῦ> ἐν ἄλλοις κτλ. The werewolf superstition was similarly associated with cannibalism in some of its later European forms (M^{c}Lennan l.c.).

ἀνάγκη δὴ κτλ. The anacoluthon is illustrated by Engelhardt Spec. Anac. Pl. III p. 40.

ἐμφυλίου αἵματος . Cf. Pind. Pyth. II 32 ἐμφύλιον αἷμα πρώτιστος οὐκ ἄτερ τέχνας ἐπέμιξε θνατοῖς. The style rises into poetry as usual in passages of solemn import and sustained emotion; cf. 560 B, D notes

ἀνδρός is poetic for ἀνθρώπου: cf. Aesch. Ag. 1020 f. ἀνδρὸς μέλαν αἷμα τίς ἂν πάλιν | ἀγκαλέσαιτ’ ἐπαείδων; and often in Pindar (Ol. I 35, 66 etc.).

γλώττῃ τε καὶ ‐‐ ξυγγενοῦς . The blood of fellow-citizens is kindred blood: for all are sons of the same fatherland. ‘The unholy tongue and lips’ is an eloquent amplification of γευόμενος, in harmony with the story to which Plato has referred in D above. J. and C. seem to me to mar the effect of Plato's eloquence by remarking that “the tongue and lips which make the slanderous accusation are vividly imagined as actually tasting blood.”

ἀνδρηλατῇ κτλ. Cf. Gorg. 466 C τί δέ; οὐχ ὥσπερ οἱ τύραννοι ἀποκτιννύασί τε (sc. οἱ ῥήτορες) ὃν ἂν βούλωνται, καὶ ἀφαιροῦνται χρήματα καὶ ἐκβάλλουσιν ἐκ τῶν πόλεων ὃν ἂν δοκῇ αὐτοῖς; Νὴ τὸν κύνα. The unscrupulous mob-orator is a budding tyrant.

ὑποσημαίνῃ : ‘hints at.’

χρεῶν ‐‐ ἀναδασμόν : phrases ominous of revolution to a Greek ear: see Laws 684 E, [Dem.] 24. 149 ψηφιοῦμαι—οὐδὲ τῶν χρεῶν τῶν ἰδίων ἀποκοπὰς οὐδὲ γῆς ἀναδασμὸν τῆς Ἀθηναίων οὐδ’ οἰκιῶν (in the Heliastic oath), Isocr. Panath. 259, Arist. Pol. E 5. 1305^{a} 5 al. and Sandys on Ath. Pol. 6. 1. Cf. also Gilbert Gr. Staatsalt. II p. 279.

ἀνάγκη ‐‐ καὶ εἵρμαρται κτλ. Once more Necessity rings her knell (565 C note): the instinct of self-preservation makes the final stage inevitable. For the same reason Xenophon remarks ( Hier. 7. 12, 13) that a tyrant never dare lay down his power: cf. also Periander in D. L. I 97 and the pathetic saying καλὸν μὲν εἶναι τὴν τυραννίδα χωρίον, οὐκ ἔχειν δὲ ἀπόβασιν (Plut. Sol. 14. 10). See also on 545 C and 547 A.

οὗτος κτλ. ‘This then,’ said I, ‘is the man who is guilty of sedition against the holders of property.’ γίγνεται is not ‘becomes’ (“the leader of the faction against the rich becomes that person” J. and C.), but ‘turns out to be,’ ‘is’ sc. in our argument or picture: cf. 562 A note οὗτος γίγνεται is similarly used at the end of the picture of the tyrannical man in IX 576 B. Schneider seems to suppose that στασιάζων refers to civil war (“vim et arma civilia”) such as is described in what follows, but the incidents just enumerated would certainly be called στάσις by a Greek, and οὗτος δὴ—γίγνεται points backward rather than forward, as is clear both from δή and from Adimantus' reply.

ἐκπεσὼν κτλ. He is transformed into a full and finished tyrant in one of two ways: either by being expelled (in course of the στάσις) and returning βίᾳ τῶν ἐχθρῶν, or else in the way described in ἐὰν δὲ—ἀποτετελεσμένος (D). Pisistratus is not a perfect example to illustrate ἐκπεσών etc., for he had made himself a tyrant before he was expelled (Arist. Ath. Pol. 14. 3).

διαβάλλοντες τῇ πόλει : ‘by setting the citizens against him’ (J. and C.) rather than ‘by accusing him to the State’ (D. and V.). Cf. VI 498 C and Phaed. 67 E.

βιαίῳ ‐‐ λάθρᾳ . Cf. Thuc. VIII 65. 2.

αἵτημα τὸ πολυθρύλητον : as in the case of Theagenes of Megara, Pisistratus, and Dionysius of Syracuse: see Arist. Rhet. I 2. 1357^{b} 30—33 with Cope ad loc., and (for Dionysius) Grote X pp. 202 ff. and Freeman's Sicily III p. 558. Gilbert (Gr. Staatsalt. II p. 281 note 1) remarks that the body-guard plays a part in the genesis of nearly every Tyrannis.

, D 14 θαρρήσαντες ‐‐ ἑαυτῶν . Cf. Solon Frag. 11. 5—8 Bergk.

τὸν Κροίσῳ κτλ. See Hdt. I 55.

αἰδεσθείη κτλ. Liebhold's conjecture οἰκισθείη is of course absurd. The expression θανάτῳ διδόναι is paullo exquisitius dictum, resembling our phrase ‘is done to death’: cf. (with Stallbaum) IX 571 E, 574 C and Phaedr. 254 E (ὀδύναις ἔδωκεν, imitated from Homer Od. XVII 567).

μέγας μεγαλωστί . Il. XVI 776.

ἐν τῷ δίφρῳ κτλ. The figure—a common one—is of course suggested by the Homeric allusion. Cebriones ἀρνευτῆρι ἐοικὼς | κάππεσ’ ἀπ’ εὐεργέος δίφρου (ib. 743). Not so the προστάτης: he fells others, but himself (αὐτὸς) ἕστηκεν ἐν τῷ δίφρῳ τῆς πόλεως.

566D - 569C The tyrant begins his reign with popular measures, but as soon as his position is secure, he impoverishes and oppresses the citizens by a continual succession of wars. All who expostulate, he ‘removes’: it is a sad necessity of his situation that he should purge the city of wealth and virtue. To provide against his growing unpopularity, he must increase his standing army by enlisting foreign mercenaries and the slaves of private citizens. These are his ‘new citizens’ forsooth! Euripides and other tragedians praise tyranny and its retinue: that is why we exclude them from our city. The higher they climb the hill of commonwealths, the more the honour paid to poets flags. As for the tyrant, after exhausting the property of temples and the proscribed, he will compel the Demos that begat him to support his rabble rout. All remonstrance is in vain. The Demos now learns what slavery means—slavery in its most cruel form, where slaves are masters.

ff. 26 διέλθωμεν δὴ κτλ. Throughout the whole of this picture, it is tolerably clear that Plato has Dionysius the first of Syracuse in his mind: see on 566 E, 567 B, E, 568 A, D. The reader should compare Aristotle's brief account of the three kinds of Tyranny in Pol. Δ 10. 1295^{a} 1—24. That which Plato describes is of course the worst variety ἥτις ἀνυπεύθυνος ἄρχει τῶν ὁμοίων καὶ βελτιόνων πάντων πρὸς τὸ σφέτερον αὐτῆς συμφέρον, ἀλλὰ μὴ πρὸς τὸ τῶν ἀρχομένων (ib. 20— 22).

βροτός : ‘creature’ (Jowett). The tyrant is something less than human.

πάντας ὣ| ἂν κτλ. For the grammatical concord cf. IV 426 C note The sense is well illustrated by Stallbaum from Eur. I. A. 337—342, where Menelaus says to Agamemnon: οἲσθ’ ὅτ’ ἐσπούδαζες ἄρχειν Δαναίδαις πρὸς Ἴλιον | —ὡς ταπεινὸς ἦσθα, πάσης δεξιᾶς προσθιγγάνων, | καὶ θύρας ἔχων ἀκλῄστους τῷ θέλοντι δημοτῶν, | καὶ διδοὺς πρόσρησιν ἑξῆς πᾶσι, κεἰ μήτις θέλοι, | τοῖς τρόποις ζητῶν πρίασθαι τὸ φιλότιμον ἐκ μέσου; On οὔτε followed by τε (neque—et) where the stress falls on the affirmative clause (non modo non— sed etiam) see IV 430 B note

ἠλευθέρωσε ‐‐ διένειμεν : fulfilling the hopes held out by him as προστάτης (566 A note). A redistribution of landed property was one of Dionysius' earliest measures after he had established himself in the tyranny (Grote X pp. 221 ff.). As Mr Giles points out, such a step would tend to keep up the enthusiasm of the πλῆθος, especially when the tyrant succeeded to an oligarchy which had added field to field by lending on mortgage to the small farmers and selling them up after a bad year. It would be easy enough to carry out, because the tyrant's opponents would have fled the country: cf. 566 C. For the aorists see 548 D note

πρὸς τοὺς ἔξω ἐχθροὺς κτλ. : ‘in his relations to foreign enemies’ etc. With the construction of τοῖς μὲν κτλ. cf. IX 591 E—592 A ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ τιμάς γε— τῶν μὲν μεθέξει καὶ γεύσεται ἑκών, ἃς ἂν ἡγῆται ἀμείνω αὑτὸν ποιήσειν, ἃς δ’ ἂν λύσειν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἕξιν, φεύξεται ἰδίᾳ καὶ δημοσίᾳ. In both cases the idiom resembles so-called partitive apposition, for which see IV 431 A note

πολέμους τινὰς κτλ. Cf. Arist. Pol. E 11. 1313^{b} 28 ff. ἔστι δὲ καὶ πολεμοποιὸς ὁ τύραννος, ὅπως δὴ ἄσχολοί τε ὦσι καὶ ἡγεμόνος ἐν χρείᾳ διατελῶσιν ὄντες. The history of Dionysius the elder is again in point: see Grote X pp. 224—331.

οὐκοῦν καὶ κτλ. Arist. Pol. l.c. 1313^{b} 18 ff. καὶ τὸ πένητας ποιεῖν τοὺς ἀρχομένους τυραννικὸν ὅπως—πρὸς τῷ καθ’ ἡμέραν ὄντες ἄσχολοι ὦσιν ἐπιβουλεύειν—καὶ ἡ εἰσφορὰ τῶν τελῶν, οἶον ἐν Συρακούσαις· ἐν πέντε γὰρ ἔτεσιν ἐπὶ Διονυσίου τὴν οὐσίαν ἅπασαν εἰσενηνοχέναι συνέβαινεν. Cf. Grote l.c. p. 223.

πρὸς τῷ . A majority of MSS have πρὸς τό, which is also the older reading (see cr. n.); but εἰμι πρός τι in this sense lacks authority, and is inherently improbable. Cf. Phaedr. 249 D and IX 585 A, X 604 C, D note

ὅπως ‐‐ πολεμίοις : sc. πολέμους τινὰς ἀεὶ κινεῖ as before. ἕτοιμον in line 7 is impersonal—a rare usage, for which cf. Epp. 7. 333 A and Eur. H. F. 86.

ὑπεξαιρεῖν . For the corruption ὑπεξαίρειν (cr. n.) cf. Xen. Hiero 5. 2 ὅταν δὲ τοὺς τοιούτους—ὑπεξαιρῶνται (J. G. Schneider's conjecture for ὑπεξαίρωνται of the MSS). On this passage the poet Gray remarks: “Compare this description with the Hiero of Xenophon: it is in almost every step a picture of the politicks and way of life of the elder Dionysius.”

ἕως ἂν μήτε φίλων κτλ. There is no solitude or desolation like the tyrant's: for he is the enemy of the whole human race. See the passages quoted by Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. p. 304.

καλόν γε ‐‐ καθαρμόν . Cf. VII 540 E note The famous anecdote of Thrasybulus and Periander (Hdt. V 92: cf. Arist. Pol. Γ 13. 1284^{a} 26 ff., E 10. 1311^{a} 20 ff., also Eur. Suppl. 445—449, where the poet borrows his imagery from the same story) is one instance out of many in Greek history: see Greenidge Gk Const. H. pp. 31 ff.

ἀνάγκη : sc. ἐστιν. J. and C. strangely say that “ἀνάγκη is the subject of ἔοικε.” For αὐτῷ ἀνάγκη cf. 568 E and IX 579 A. On the force of ἀνάγκη here and just below see 565 C, 566 A notes

ἥξουσι πετόμενοι : ‘will wing their way.’ πετόμενοι leads up to κηφῆνας.

τὸν μισθόν : ‘the pay,’ i.e. ‘the necessary pay’ (J. and C.). W. H. Thompson would omit τόν or replace it by μόνον: but insufficient pay would not attract mercenaries.

ξενικούς ‐‐ παντοδαπούς . The body-guard of foreign mercenaries was a familiar feature in Greek tyrannies: see Xen. Hiero 5. 3 and (for Dionysius in particular) Grote X p. 221.

τί δέ;—ποιήσασθαι ; The words from αὐτόθεν to ποιήσασθαι form a single sentence, πῶς being neglected: cf. πῇ δὴ—γίγνεται in 549 C, where see note and Jebb quoted ad loc. αὐτόθεν by its emphatic position already suggests what Socrates is about to say; and Adimantus' interruption, besides its stylistic effect, expresses the anxiety and horror with which the bare idea of such a proceeding would inspire a Greek. “Slaves were normally of non-Greek race; so this is what enlisting a band of negroes would be in the United States to-day” (Bosanquet). The best MSS read τίς δὲ αὐτόθεν κτλ., but τίς is indefensible, and retained by no editor. Schneider's τοὺς δὲ αὐτόθεν (with several MSS of inferior authority) seems to me grammatically awkward, as well as lifeless and dull. In Richards' proposal τί δέ; αὐτόθεν ἆῤ οὐκ ἂν ἐθελήσειέ πως τοὺς δούλους etc., the enclitic πως is singularly weak. J. and C., who print, with Hermann and Stallbaum, τί δέ; αὐτόθεν—ἐθελήσειε; and a full-stop after ποιήσασθαι, supply “some general notion such as λαβεῖν or ποιήσασθαι” with ἐθελήσειεν “from μεταπέμψεται in the previous sentence”—surely an impossible solution. The punctuation in the text removes, I think, all difficulty, if the words are taken as I take them.

τοὺς δούλους κτλ. As Dionysius, for example, did (Grote X p. 221 and Freeman's Sicily IV p. 13).

οἱ νέοι πολῖται : ‘the new citizens,’ viz. these quondam slaves etc., not (as D. and V.) ‘the young citizens.’ It is, in view, for example, of νέους ἑταίρους ‘new friends’ IX 575 D, quite unnecessary to read οἱ νεοπολῖται (apparently with Pollux III 56: cf. also id. IX 26), although according to Diodorus XIV 7 Dionysius called his body-guard of emancipated slaves νεοπολῖται. See Freeman's Sicily l.c.

οὐκ ἐτὸς κτλ. A highly ironical and sarcastic sentence. It is not without reason that tragedy ‘in general’ (ὅλως is not ‘on the whole’ as D. and V. render) is thought σοφόν, and Euripides a mastertragedian (Euripides was notoriously ‘σοφός’—see Blaydes on Ar. Clouds 1378): for he gave utterance inter alia to this sapient remark (for ἐφθέγξατο of an oracular, would-be-profound observation, see on VI 505 C): σοφοὶ τύραννοι τῶν σοφῶν συνουσίᾳ, in which by ‘τῶν σοφῶν’ he meant of course οἷς ξύνεστιν (ὁ τύραννος), the associates of the tyrant, i.e., as we have seen, a rabble of emancipated slaves and foreign mercenaries. In τραγῳδία— σοφὸν δοκεῖ εἶναι Plato is also perhaps scoffing at the constant use of σοφός in tragedy, especially by Euripides: σοφός is, no doubt, that σοφόν says! None but a σοφός could have written σοφοὶ τύραννοι τῶν σοφῶν συνουσίᾳ. The poet of course really meant that tyrants gain wisdom from the wise men who throng the ‘rich man's courts’ (VI 489 B note); but Plato maliciously twists the words into a compliment to tyrants and their rabble rout, and makes them a reason for tabooing tragic poets as τυραννίδος ὑμνητάς (B). Cobet would omit τούς before σοφούς: but the article is necessary because τοὺς σοφούς represents τῶν σοφῶν of the quotation. As regards the verse itself, it was Sophocles (in his Αἴας ὁ Αοκρός), and not Euripides, who was the author: see the references in Schneider, with Blaydes on Ar. Thesm. 21, Frag. 311 and Dindorf on Soph. Frag. 12 = Nauck Frag. 13. Plato's error is repeated in Theag. 125 B, and the Scholiast on Ar. Thesm. l.c. remarks that Aristophanes and Antisthenes made the same mistake, suggesting that either Aristophanes misled the others (so also Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. d. pl. Pol. p. 658 note 2), or that the two tragedians wrote the same line independently (so Schneider also thinks). The latter supposition is unlikely. Perhaps the reduplication of the cant Euripidean σοφός is responsible for a kind of error which was easier in antiquity than it would be now. There is little to be said in favour of Dümmler's conjecture (Akadem. p. 16), that Antisthenes had quoted the line as from Euripides in an attack on Plato for associating with tyrants (Dionysius I and II), and that Plato, in his hurry to reply, forgets to rectify his assailant's error. Still less should we suppose that Plato's perverse exegesis is meant to caricature Antisthenes' way of expounding poetry.

ἰσόθεόν γε κτλ. Eur. Troad. 1169 τῆς ἰσοθέου τυραννίδος. Isocrates ad Nic. 5 appears to allude to the same verse (Dümmler Chronol. Beiträge p. 32).

ἕτερα πολλά : e.g. Phoen. 524 f., Fragg. 252, 336 Dindorf. In point of fact, however, Euripides blames tyranny at least as often as he praises it: see e.g. Ion 621 ff., Suppl. 429 ff., Fragg. 277, 288, 608 and other passages in Stob. Flor. 49. The elder Dionysius himself had the effrontery or candour to write the line ἡ γὰρ τυραννὶς ἀδικίας μήτηρ ἔφυ (Stob. Flor. 49. 9, quoted in Freeman's Sicily IV p. 7 note I).

παραδεξόμεθα : not παραδεχόμεθα (as Stephanus suggested), in spite of the present συγγιγνώσκουσιν, for “civitas ipsa nondum exstitit, sed veniam iam nunc sibi dari sperat Socrates” (Schneider).

καλὰς φωνὰς κτλ. τὰς τῶν ὑποκριτῶν (Schol.). With this whole sentence should be compared Laws 817 C, where Plato addresses tragic poets in these words: μὴ δὴ δόξητε ἡμᾶς ῥᾳδίως γε οὕτως ὑμᾶς ποτε παρ’ ἡμῖν ἐάσειν σκηνάς τε πήξαντας κατ’ ἀγορὰν καὶ καλλιφώνους ὑποκριτὰς εἰσαγαγομένους, μεῖζον φθεγγομένους ἡμῶν, ἐπιτρέψειν ὑμῖν δημηγορεῖν πρὸς παῖδάς τε καὶ γυναῖκας καὶ τὸν πολὺν ὄχλον κτλ.

τυραννίδας τε καὶ δημοκρατίας . Democracy is next door to tyranny: in fact, ἡ δημοκρατία ἡ τελευταία τυραννίς ἐστιν (Arist. Pol. E 10. 1312^{b} 5). Attic tragedy, of course, praises Democracy more often than Tyranny. On the political influence of poetry see Laws 817 C ff., Gorg. 501 E ff. and other passages in Reber Platon u. die Poesie pp. 55—59.

μισθοὺς κτλ. We may recall Pindar's ἀργυρωθεῖσαι πρόσωπα μαλθακόφωνοι ἀοιδαί ( Isthm. 2. 8).

τιμῶνται κτλ. “For good and evil,” says Bosanquet, “Plato's assertion is true on the whole.” But as far as concerns Greece, at any rate, we may doubt whether tragic poets were not more honoured in the democracy of Athens than in imperial courts.

ὑπὸ τυράννων : e.g. Hiero, Archelaus, and such like patrons of poetry and the drama.

ὅσῳ δ’ ἂν κτλ. The honour paid to Poetry varies inversely with the merit of the constitution. This is perhaps the severest thing which Plato has yet said against Poetry. The striking metaphor in ὥσπερ ὑπὸ ἄσθματος κτλ. is curiously like Dante, as Bosanquet points out.

θρέψεται . Is the verb middle or passive? It is passive in E below, but that does not decide the question: see on 546 D. If we confine our attention to the single sentence λέγωμεν—θρέψεται, the verb is most readily understood as passive; but ἀναλώσει in the next sentence favours the view that it is middle. On the whole, I prefer the passive. It is easy to supply the subject of ἀναλώσει from τοῦ τυράννου.

ἐάν τε ἱερὰ κτλ. The elder Dionysius in particular greatly shocked the conscience of Hellas by plundering temples: see Grote X pp. 300, 302 note 3.

<καὶ> τὰ τῶν ἀπολομένων : ‘and the property of his victims’: cf. ἀπολλύῃ 567 A, ἀπολέσας 568 A, as well as the καθαρμός of 567 B, C. ἀπολομένων is itself so used in Laws 628 B. In the indictment of Dionysius I by the Syracusan knight Theodorus (Diodor. XIV 65) occur the words οὗτος δὲ τὰ μὲν ἱερὰ συλήσας, τοὺς δὲ τῶν ἰδιωτῶν πλούτους ἅμα ταῖς τῶν κεκτημένων ψυχαῖς ἀφελόμενος τοὺς οἰκέτας μισθοδοτεῖ κατὰ τῆς τῶν δεσποτῶν δουλείας. The sentence exactly illustrates what Plato here says. On the text and other views of this passage see App. VI.

δὴ . Badham suggests ἤ η, needlessly: cf. IX 573 E and 574 C (Baiter).

ἐπιλίπῃ κτλ. ἐπιλείπῃ (see cr. n.) is retained by Hermann, but the aorist, which nearly all the MSS read, is no less necessary here than in I 340 E, IX 573 E and X 601 B. Cf. Heller Curae Criticae pp. 3 ff. On τῶν πατρῴων see IX 574 A note

μανθάνω ‐‐ ὅτι . A comparison with 584 A line 8 and with 496 A line 8 (see cr. nn. ad loc.) shows that ἔφην ἐγώ, and not ἧν δ’ ἐγώ is in all probability the right reading in this place. ὅτι = (you say so) ‘because,’ not ‘that’: see on I 332 A.

πῶς δὲ λέγεις κτλ. ‘And how say you,’ quoth I, ‘if the Demos be somewhat wroth’ etc. I formerly read πῶς λέγεις with Ξ and some other inferior MSS, but now revert to the best supported reading, except that, with q, I print ἐάν τι for ἐάν τε (see cr. n.). If we read πῶς λέγεις, we must take the words as referring to πολλὴ αὐτῷ—ἀνάγκη: if πῶς δὲ λέγεις, the reference will be to the words which follow εἷπον, and πῶς δὲ λέγεις will then invite the reply which Adimantus gives below, viz. γνώσεταί γε— ἐξελαύνει. It seems to me better in every way to make the question refer to the new point which is about to be raised by Socrates; for the statement that the Demos will have to support the tyrant is already complete, and needs neither further elucidation nor any expression of surprise. A majority of editors read ἐὰν δέ for ἐάν τε. I think that τε must be wrong in any case, unless (with Schneider) we postulate an awkward anacoluthon, as though Socrates meant to add ἐάν τε μή. The reading of τι for τε enables us to retain πῶς δὲ λέγεις, and refer the question to what follows: for which reasons I now follow q.

ἀπὸ is read by Flor. U and V as well as q. Schneider alone retains ὑπό, but ἐλευθεροῦσθαι ὑπὸ means only ‘be freed by.’ It is better to write ἀπό than (with Baiter) to excise the preposition. For the corruption see Bast Comment. Pal. p. 794.

καλῶν κἀγαθῶν . See on VI 489 E.

κελεύει . Baiter's conjecture κελεύῃ is a curious error. κελεύει depends of course on ὅτι: in oratio recta the δῆμος would say κελεύω σε ἀπιέναι. Cf. διακελεύοιντο in X 614 D and note ad loc.

τὸ λεγόμενον . τὸν καπνὸν φεύγων εἰς τὸ πῦρ ἐνέπεσον. ἐπὶ τῶν τὰ μικρὰ τῶν δεινῶν φευγόντων, καὶ εἰς μείζονα δεινὰ ἐμπιπτόντων. (Diogen. VIII 45 in Leutsch u. Schneidewin Paroem. Gr. I p. 314, where the other authorities are also cited.)

φεύγων κτλ. : ‘in trying to escape the smoke of servitude to free men will have fallen into the fire of the masterdom of slaves.’ Herwerden proposes to excise ἐλευθέρων and δούλων (both here and in C below). It is difficult to believe that he had read 567 E and 569 A (δουλεύων τοῖς αὑτοῦ δούλοις) before making this audacious suggestion. The chiasmus δουλείας ἐλευθέρων—δούλων δεσποτείας is in Plato's finest style.

ἀκαίρου . ἀκράτου (Herwerden: cf. 562 D) would be grossly incongruous with μεταμπισχόμενος, and is otherwise less suitable here than ἀκαίρου.

δούλων is emphatic: ‘the most galling form of slavery’ is slavery to slaves (J. and C.). Cf. 567 E note

571A - 572B There remains the tyrannical man. Before beginning to describe his origin and character, we must complete our analysis of desire. Among the unnecessary desires, there is a special class which we call lawless or unnatural. It is these which are apt to be aroused in sleep, after over-indulgence in eating or drinking. But when we retire to rest with Desire and Anger in abeyance, and the rational element within us in full play, our dreams are innocent, and much is revealed to us in visions of the night.

οὐ ‐‐ διῃρῆσθαι . The psychological foundation of Tyranny, as well as of Oligarchy and Democracy, is Desire; but there are three varieties of Desire, and it is the lowest of these, viz. the Unnecessary and παράνομοι, which Tyranny represents. See VIII 558 D note, and cf. Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II pp. 310—314.

ἔτ’ ἐν καλῷ . See cr. n. ἐν καλῷ might well be written ἐγκαλῶ in early Greek script: see Meisterhans Gr. d. Att. Inschr.^{3} pp. 106—108. It is strange that Apelt (Berl. Philol. Woch. for 1895 p. 965) should defend ἔτ’ ἐγκαλῶ: “soll ich (das Fehlende) noch einklagen” gives a poor sense. For ἐν καλῷ see Jebb on Soph. El. 384 νῦν γὰρ ἐν καλῷ (i.q. εὔκαιρον) φρονεῖν.

παράνομοι is more like our ‘unnatural’ than ‘lawless’: cf. Phaed. 113 E, Phaedr. 254 A, Eur. Med. 1121 ὦ δεινὸν ἔργον παράνομόν τ’ εἰργασμένη (addressed to Medea after she has slain her children), and the author of the Διαλέξεις ἠθικαί in Mullach Frag. Phil. Gr. I p. 546 τοὶ δὲ Ηέρσαι—καλὸν νομίζοντι καὶ τᾷ θυγατρὶ καὶ τᾷ ματρὶ καὶ τᾷ ἀδελφᾷ συνίμεν· τοὶ δὲ Ἕλλανες καὶ αἰσχρὰ καὶ παράνομα. The phrase οὐ κατὰ νόμον in Hdt. I 61 has the same connotation. Compare the ‘bestial’ states—θηριώδεις like θηριῶδες below in 571 C—described in Arist. Eth. Nic. VII 6. 1148^{b} 16 ff.

ἐγγίγνεσθαι παντί : ‘are born in,’ ‘form an original part of every one’ (D. and V.), not simply ‘arise in’ (as Bosan quet suggests, ignoring or forgetting ἀπαλλάττεσθαι and λείπεσθαι). Cf. ἐγγίγνεται in 572 A and ἑκάστῳ ἔνεστι 572 B. There is something of ‘the ape and tiger’ in every human being: see infra 588 C ff. These παράνομοι ἐπιθυμίαι doubtless represent “der verbrecherische Hang der menschlichen Natur” (Krohn Pl. St. p. 216), but we ought not to compare Plato's conception with the doctrine of ‘original sin,’ as Schleiermacher (Platons Staat p. 601) and Susemihl (Gen. Entw. II p. 238) appear to do. According to Plato, Man is an οὐράνιον φυτόν, οὐκ ἔγγειον.

λέγεις δὲ καὶ κτλ. ‘And pray what are these desires?’ lit. ‘and you mean by these desires, pray, which?’ καί “significat accessionem aliquam pro interrogantis voluntate necessariam vel maiorem in modum expetitam” (Schneider, who compares Polit. 291 A τίνας αὐτοὺς καὶ λέγεις ; Euthyd. 271 A and Heindorf ad loc.).

τὰς περὶ τὸν ὕπνον κτλ. “The cursed thoughts that Nature Gives way to in repose” (Macbeth II 1. 8). We must however beware of supposing that Plato regards sleep as the time when the lowest part of soul normally and naturally asserts its sway. It is only in the vicious, and after acts of self-indulgence, that the beast within us pollutes our slumber: cf. Cic. de div. I 115 and II 119. To translate ὅταν by ‘when’ (D. and V.) is therefore misleading: it means ‘as often as.’ See 571 D note

ἰέναι “vix sanum videtur,” says Herwerden. The text is perfectly sound. Although the man is, as we say, sleeping, his θηριῶδες ‘has shaken off sleep’ and ‘seeks to go and gratify its instincts.’ The theory is that in dreams the part of the soul concerned is not asleep, but awake, and goes out to seek the object of its desire. Cf. 572 A note

μητρί τε κτλ. Cf. Soph. O. T. 981 f. πολλοὶ γὰρ ἤδη κἀν ὀνείρασιν βροτῶν | μητρὶ ξυνηυνάσθησαν, with Jebb ad loc.

ὡς οἴεται goes closely with μίγνυσθαι (‘intercourse, as it supposes, with’ etc.). ὡς Οἰδίπους (suggested by Förster Rhein. Mus. for 1885 p. 631) is a tasteless conjecture, which confuses reality and dreamland.

μιαιφονεῖν τε ὁτιοῦν : such as parricide and other unnatural murders (φόνοι παράνομοι Phaed. 113 E).

βρώματός τε κτλ. Cannibalism, etc.: cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. VII 6. 1148^{b} 20—25.

αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ . The genitive depends on ὑγιεινῶς ἔχῃ as in ἡδέως ἔχων ἐμαυτοῦ Alexis ap. Athen. X 419 C and other examples quoted by Blaydes on Ar. Lys. 1125 and Wasps 357.

ἑστιάσας κτλ. For the metaphor in ἑστιάσας see I 354 A note The general meaning of this passage is best illustrated from Tim. 45 E—46 A γενομένης δὲ πολλῆς μὲν ἡσυχίας βραχυόνειρος ὕπνος ἐμπίπτει, καταλειφθεισῶν δέ τινων κινήσεων μειζόνων, οἶαι καὶ ἐν οἵοις ἂν τόποις λείπωνται, τοιαῦτα καὶ τοσαῦτα παρέσχοντο ἀφομοιωθέντα ἐντὸς—φαντάσματα, with which Aristotle's theory closely agrees: see Eth. Nic. 113. 1102^{b} 7 ff. and Stewart's note. In like manner Zeno recommended his followers to gauge their moral ‘progress’ ( προκοπή) by the nature of their dreams (Frag. 160 ed. Pearson). See also on 572 A.

τὸ ἐπιθυμητικὸν κτλ. In Cic. de div. II 119 the Pythagorean veto on beans is attributed to this motive. Plato's psychology in this passage recalls the myth of the Phaedrus: cf. especially 253 C— 256 E of that dialogue.

ἀλλ’ ἐᾷ κτλ. The bearing of this remarkable chapter on the theory of divination did not escape Cicero, who has translated, or rather paraphrased, from ὅταν 571 C to ἅπτεται 572 A: see his de div. I 60, 61. In Tim. 71 D— 72 B it is not, as here, the best part of soul which is said to perceive ‘past, present, or future’ in dreams, but ἡ περὶ τὸ ἧπαρ ψυχῆς μοῖρα κατῳκισμένη, the function of λογισμός being to interpret the visions seen by the ἐπιθυμητικόν in divination (whether ὄναρ or ὕπαρ ), ὅπῃ τι σημαίνει καὶ ὅτῳ μέλλοντος ἢ παρελθόντος ἢ παρόντος κακοῦ ἢἀγαθοῦ (ib. 72 A). In the present passage Plato appeals to the widespread popular view that the soul during sleep is freed from the trammels of the body, foresees the future, and has access to a region of truth denied, with few exceptions, to the waking mind: “viget enim animus in somnis, liberque est sensibus et omni impeditione curarum, iacente et mortuo paene corpore” (Cic. de div. I 115): see Pind. Frag. 131 3-5 Bergk τὸ γὰρ ἐστὶ μόνον | ἐκ θεῶν· εὕδει δὲ πρασσόντων μελέων, ἀτὰρ εὑδόντεσσιν ἐν πολλοῖς ὀνείροις | δείκνυσι τερπνῶν ἐφέρποισαν χαλεπῶν τε κρίσιν, Aesch: Ag. 179 ff. (στάζει δ’ ἔν θ’ ὕπνῳ κτλ.), Eum. 104 εὕδουσα γὰρ φρὴν ὄμμασιν λαμπρύνεται and Xen. Cyr. VIII 7. 21, and cf. generally Rohde Psyche^{2} I pp. 6 ff., II pp. 309 note 2 and 414. On this view the Stoic theory of divination by dreams was based (see Cic. l.c. I 110 ff.), and the same idea appears also in Aristotle Frag. 12 ὅταν—ἐν τῷ ὑπνοῦν καθ’ ἑαυτὴν γένηται ἡ ψυχή, τότε τὴν ἴδιαν ἀπολαβοῦσα φύσιν προμαντεύεταί τε καὶ προαγορεύει τὰ μέλλοντα. We may compare the lines of Wordsworth:

“that serene and blessed mood In which the affections gently lead us on Until, the breath of this corporeal frame And even the motion of our human blood Almost suspended, we are laid asleep In body, and become a living soul: While with an eye made quiet by the power Of harmony, and the deep power of joy, We see into the life of things.”

ὀρέγεσθαί του . Schneider and Stallbaum read ὀρέγεσθαι τοῦ αἰσθάνεσθαι with II (see cr. n.) and a majority of MSS; but such an expression would be heavy and unpleasing. Jowett and Campbell think “καὶ αἰσθάνεσθαι should perhaps be struck out and the accent restored to του,” while Burnet omits καί, reading ὀρέγεσθαί του αἰσθάνεσθαι. The text, I believe, is sound, but cannot mean ‘to aspire further (καὶ) to perceive something which it knows not’ (J. and C.). We may translate ‘to yearn after it knows not what and perceive what it knoweth not.’ Just as in evil dreams the baser part of soul reaches out after the object of its desires (571 C), so also the βέλτιστον, in these happier visions of the night, has longings which are all its own. ὀρέγεσθαι expresses the instinctive and unconscious turning of the soul towards the fountain of her being, and the waking counterpart of these visions of the night are just

“those shadowy recollections, Which, be they what they may, Are yet the fountain light of all our day, Are yet a master light of all our seeing.”

With the use of ὀρέγεσθαι cf. Phaed. 65 C ὀρέγηται τοῦ ὄντος κτλ., a passage which throws light on Plato's meaning here in more ways than one.

ἡσυχάσας . ἡσυχάζω is used transitively only in the aorist: cf. Solon ap. Arist. Ath. Pol. 5. 3. Schleiermacher (Platons Staat p. 601) thinks that Plato recognises here, and in ἐγείρας, ἑστιάσας, πραύνας, κινήσας etc., a fourth principle or ‘part’ of soul, that viz. which is able to excite or calm the others. Krohn on the other hand sees in this passage a sort of implicit recognition of the ‘ego’ as a separate and distinct entity (Pl. St. p. 217). The latter view is nearer the truth (cf. V 462 C, D notes); but we ought not to press the words too much: cf. ἐπιεικεῖ τινι ἑαυτοῦ βίᾳ κατέχει ἄλλας κακὰς ἐπιθυμίας VIII 554 C, and III 411 B note

εἴδη . Other examples of this rare form of the dual in Plato are cited by Roeper de dual. usu Plat. p. 12.

μάλιστα : i.e. more than when he retires to sleep in any other condition. It is better, in view especially of the second half of this clause, to understand μάλιστα in this way, than to take the word generally, as if divination by dreams were the best way of grasping truth. Plato would hardly say this, nor indeed would the average Greek. See especially Tim. 71 D ff.

παράνομοι . 571 B note

572B - 573C The origin of the tyrannical man is as follows. A democratical father has a son, who is led away by evil associates into every form of lawlessness. When his family come to the rescue, these tyrant-breeders implant in him a masterpassion to act as champion of his dronedesires. The history of the corresponding State repeats itself in the young man's soul, and the champion Lust becomes a tyrant in due course. We look on Lust, Drink, Madness as tyrants; and the tyrannical man arises when these three tyrants establish their dominion over the soul.

βουλόμεθα . W. H. Thompson's ἐβουλόμεθα is unnecessary and even awkward with the present ἐστίν just following. The Greek means simply ‘but what we want to notice is this’ etc.

καὶ πάνυ belongs to μετρίοις (Schneider) rather than to δοκοῦσιν (J. and C.): ‘however virtuous we may some of us appear to be.’

οἷον ἔφαμεν ἐ=ναι . VIII 561 A— 562 A.

ἦν δέ που κτλ. : ‘he had been, you remember, produced, by having been brought up from early years’ etc. Socrates recalls the genesis of the democratical man (described in 558 C, 559 D ff.) before recalling his nature (in D below). Ast suggested γεγονὼς <καὶ> or γεγονώς <τε καὶ>, taking γεγονώς of birth. The correct interpretation was pointed out by Schneider.

παιδιᾶς ‐‐ καλλωπισμοῦ . Plato is less severe than in VIII 559 D— 562 A. He has since discovered a yet lower depth than merely democratical desire, and the democratical man is almost virtue itself compared with the tyrannical.

κομψοτέροις κτλ. VIII 559 D note

τὸ ἐκείνων εἶδος : ‘their kind of conduct.’ εἶδος is used almost like τρόπον, as in Thuc. II 41. 1, VI 77. 2 and VIII 56. 2. Ficinus has mores, but it does not follow that he read <*>θος, which is less suitable with ὁρμήσας .

κατέστη κτλ. VIII 561 A —562 A. The words ὡς ᾤετο qualify μετρίως: cf. 571 D.

οὔτε ἀνελεύθερον κτλ. : i.e. ‘in the mean between ὀλιγαρχία and ἀναρχία’ etc. (J. and C., comparing VIII 561 A and 561 E). ἔζη for ζῇ was conjectured by Ast, on account, no doubt, of ᾤετο. Schneider holds that ᾤετο refers to the time “quo primum ingrediens in istam vivendi rationem optimum factu statuebat omnibus pariter cupiditatibus obtemperare.” It is difficult to understand ᾤετο otherwise than as the imperfect of recapitulation; and I prefer to think that Plato, in spite of the inconsistency, wrote ζῇ rather than ἔζη in order to bring the δημοτικός before us as a living reality, so as to prepare for θὲς τοίνυν—τεθραμμένον. There is no MS authority for ἔζη.

περὶ τὸν τοιοῦτον : “anlangend den so beschaffenen” (Schneider), “touching such a person” (D. and V.).

τίθει κτλ. The present echoes τίθημι (cf. I 339 D, VII 514 B, 519 B, 527 B, VIII 564 A al.), and is in itself more appropriate than θές to introduce a succession of pictures. τοίνυν means ‘further’ (I 339 D note). The reference in ἅπερ καὶ —πατέρα is to VIII 559 E ff.

προστάτην κτλ. This overmastering passion becomes the champion of the drone-desires, exactly as the budding tyrant is the προστάτης of the proletariate: see VIII 564 D, 565 C ff. With ἕτοιμα διανεμομένων cf. τῶν ἑτοίμων ἀναλωτής VIII 552 B (J. and C.).

ὑπόπτερον is doubly appropriate: for Ἔρως too has wings.

τῶν τοιούτων . Masculine, not neuter, as Stallbaum once supposed.

ὅταν . A large majority of MSS have ὅταν δή, which Schneider retains. δή is unsuitable after οὐκοῦν, and may possibly have arisen from the accidental reduplication of ΑΝ: see on V 450 C. I agree with most editors in accepting the text of A.

αὐτὸν κτλ. αὐτόν means ἔρωτα, the μέγαν κηφῆνα. On βομβοῦσαι see VIII 564 D note The position of the participial adjective ἀνειμένων is illustrated on VII 532 C.

αὔξουσαί τε καὶ τρέφουσαι . The object is τὸν κηφῆνα, not of course πόθου κέντρον, as Jowett translates. This master-passion grows by what it feeds on, until it becomes acute, and ends in madness and frenzy. πόθου κέντρον (cf. Phaedr. 253 E πόθου κέντρων) is ‘the sting of unsatisfied desire’ ( Sehnsucht Schneider): cf. the definition of πόθος in Crat. 420 A πόθος—οὐ τοῦ παρόντος—ἀλλὰ τοῦ ἄλλοθί που ὄντος καὶ ἀπόντος. Ast conjectured τρέφουσαι πόθον, κέντρον κτλ., “namque πόθος s. ἔρως iam inest in fuco.” But in point of fact the ἔρως is the drone, and the MS text is far more picturesque and expressive.

δορυφορεῖται . Cf. VIII 566 B ff.

ἐν αὑτῷ . The Oxford editors, with Herwerden, read ἐν αὐτῷ, “i.e. the man,” remarking that “good opinions and desires could hardly be supposed to exist” in the drone. True; but παρ’ αὑτοῦ shews that αὑτῷ is right, and αὐτῷ is unpleasing on aesthetic as well as on grammatical grounds. Plato speaks as if the master-passion were itself the soul. The inaccuracy is easily excused because the whole soul is rapidly falling under its sway.

ποιουμένας =‘accounted.’ Hermann proposes ποτωμένας, Herwerden ἐμποιουμένας: but the text is sound. See VI 498 A note

καθήρῃ : as in the καθαρμός of VIII 567 C.

μανίας δὲ κτλ. See cr. n. A few deterioris notae MSS agree with A, which is certainly in error here. Cf. IV 441 D. The epithet ἐπακτοῦ recalls the ξενικοί of VIII 567 D f.

καὶ μεθυσθεὶς κτλ. Ast compares Bacchyl. Frag. 27. 6 f. Bergk (on the effects of wine) αὐτίχ’ ὁ μὲν πόλεων κρήδεμνα λύει | πᾶσι δ’ ἀνθρώποις μοναρχήσειν δοκεῖ. But τυραννικόν τι φρόνημα ἴσχει has of course a wider meaning than this.

ὑποκεκινηκώς =‘deranged’ (D. and V.). The litotes in ὑπο‐ is only euphemistic. ὑποκεκινηκώς with this meaning does not apparently occur elsewhere in classical Greek: see StephanusHase Thes. s.v., where the only parallel cited is from a scholium on Soph. Aj. 531 ὑποκεκινηκότι μὴ πιστεύουσα. W. H. Thompson (on Phaedr. 249 D) proposes παρακεκινηκώς, in view of Ar. Frogs 643, where he approves ‘on MS authority’ the reading ἤν με παρακινήσαντ’ ἴδῃς. In point of fact, however, this reading will not scan, and the Ravenna with other MSS has ἤν μ’ ὑποκινήσαντ’ ἴδῃς, although ὑποκινεῖν is not used with the same sense as here.

οὐ μόνον κτλ. The madman also τυραννικόν τι φρόνημα ἴσχει. ἐλπίζει is not here ‘expects’ (D. and V.) but ‘fancies,’ ‘imagines’ (II 383 B note).

τυραννικὸς δὲ κτλ. I formerly printed δή for δέ (with q and Vermehren Plat. Stud. p. 112), but now prefer the reading of the best MSS. Plato is testing his account of the origin of the tyrannical man by obvious and admitted facts: cf. (with Schneider) IV 442 E ff. Lust, Drink, and Madness are confessedly tyrants; and we hold that a τυραννικὸς ἀνήρ in the strictest sense of the term (for ἀκριβῶς cf. I 341 C) is produced when a man falls under the dominion of all three. So that our theory accords with everyday experience. μελαγχολικός is not of course ‘passionate’ (Jowett), but ‘insane’: cf. ὅ γε μαινόμενος καὶ ὑποκεκινηκώς above.

573C - 576B In respect of his character and mode of life, the tyrannical man plunges into every form of dissipation, and is hounded on by ever fresh desires. His income and property soon disappear; and in order to satisfy his clamorous lusts, he plunders his father's estate, not hesitating if need be to lay violent hands on father and mother. Then follow sacrilege and theft, and every variety of crime; for he has now become in living fact that which once he rarely was in dreams. Such men, if few in number, may go abroad and join a tyrant's bodyguard or remain to swell the ranks of petty criminals at home; but if they are numerous, they make the worst of all their crew into a tyrant over their fatherland. Tyranny is the goal and consummation of such a man's desires. Throughout his whole existence, both before and after he attains the crown of his ambition, the tyrannical man is a stranger to freedom and friendship, faithless and superlatively unrighteous— in one word, he is the living embodiment of the monstrous lusts we found in dreams, and the longer he rules, the worse he grows.

ff. Plato's τυραννικός is a monster without a single redeeming feature of any kind, the incarnation of unnatural desire, “bloody, Luxurious, avaricious, false, deceitful, Sudden, malicious”—“not in the legions Of horrid hell can come a devil more damned In evils” ( Macbeth Act IV Sc. 3). It must be admitted that Plato takes a terrible revenge on Dionysius: see on 577 A.

γίγνεται κτλ. ‘Such, apparently, is the origin also of the tyrannical man.’ The stress of the voice falls on τοιοῦτος i.q. τυραννικός (τυραννικὸς ἀνήρ in Socrates' last sentence). καί is etiam : we have now described his origin as well as that of the others. J. and C. propose ἁνήρ, as if Plato meant γίγνεται οὕτω, καί <*>στιν τοιοῦτος. But the character of the man has still to be described (ζῇ δὲ δὴ πῶς;): hitherto we have been concerned only with his genesis (γίγνεται μέν). Schneider caught the meaning (“so nun entsteht auch dieser Mann”); but recent English translators are wrong. For μέν Richards conjectures μὲν οὖν (or οὐκοῦν γίγνεται μέν as an alternative). The asyndeton helps of course to accentuate the antithesis between γίγνεται and ζῇ .

τὸ τῶν παιζόντων . παροιμία ἡνίκα τις ἐρωτηθείς τι ὑπὸ γινώσκοντος τὸ ἐρω‐ τηθέν, αὐτὸς ἀγνοῶν, οὕτως ἀποκρίνηται ‘σὺ καὶ ἐμοὶ ἐρεῖς’ (Schol.). Cf. Phil. 25 B.

αὐτοῖς : the τυραννικός and his associates.

θαλίαι . See cr. n. θάλεια is either an adjective or the name of the Muse. Schneider (who was unaware that II has θαλίαι) retains θάλειαι, but his note conclusively proves, I think, that the Attic writers as well as Homer invariably observed the distinction. Stallbaum alone of recent editors reads θαλίαι .

ἑταῖραι . “Nullus locus scortis est inter ἑορτὰς atque κώμους καὶ θαλίας” says Stallbaum. On this account he prefers ἑταιρίαι (a conjecture of G. W. Nitzsch), taking the word, strangely enough, for lupanaria. There is not the shadow of a difficulty: cf. II 373 A note and ἑταίρας 574 B below.

ὧν κτλ. : ‘in whoso's breast the tyrant Love indwelling steers all their soul.’ The words are tinged with poetical colouring, as often in passages of this kind: cf. VIII 560 D, E al. J. and C. erroneously make ὧν neuter and dependent on Ἔρως. The pronoun is construed with τὰ τῆς ψυχῆς ἅπαντα by Shorey (A. J. Ph. XVI p. 237), but in that case οἷς would have been more natural. The view I take agrees with Schneider's.

παραβλαστάνουσιν : ‘shoot up beside’ the master-passion. These desires correspond to τὸ τοῦ τυράννου στρατόπεδον τὸ καλόν τε καὶ πολὺ καὶ ποικίλον καὶ οὐδέποτε ταὐτόν in the τυραννουμένη πόλις (VIII 568 D).

ἀναλίσκονται κτλ. Cf. VIII 568 D.

τῆς οὐσίας παραιρέσεις κτλ. : ‘encroachments on his capital’ etc. (J. and C.), viz. to meet the moneylender's claims. See VIII 555 E. On ἐπιλίπῃ see VIII 568 E note

ἀνάγκη μὲν κτλ. Bekker reads ἀνάγκη τὰς μέν with q and Flor. U: “recte, si cupiditates ipsis opponi statuimus. Sed nihil impedit, quo minus alteram necessitatem—quae postea hanc consequi particula δή significatur, iam hic scriptori obversatam atque hanc illi alteri oppositam putemus. Accedit quod si τὰς μὲν ἐπιθυμίας scripsisset, non τοὺς δέ, sed αὐτοὺς δὲ dicturus fuisse videtur” (Schneider). We have no right to change τούς to αὐτούς as Stallbaum is fain to do.

ἐννενεοττευμένας is copied, as Ast observes, by Longinus περὶ ὕψους 44. 7.

κέντρων . The other desires (as well as the master Passion) are compared to goads. For the idiom ὥσπερ ὑπὸ κέντρων τῶν κτλ. cf. VIII 553 B note

αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἔρωτος κτλ. is not for τῶν αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἔρωτος κτλ., as Stallbaum seems to hold; for the ἔρως is itself an ἐπιθυμία: see 572 E ff. With δορυφόροις cf. VIII 567 D.

ἀναγκαῖον δὴ κτλ. The civic parallel is in VIII 568 D ff. φέρειν=‘lift’ (in the sinister sense of ἄγειν καὶ φέρειν: cf. Laws 762 A). On the position of ἐπιγιγνόμεναι see VII 532 C note The words ἀξιώσει νεώτερος <*>ν κτλ. correspond to VIII 568 E ff., and ἐὰν — ἀναλώσῃ is subordinate to ἀπονειμάμενος τῶν πατρῴων (‘his father's property,’ not, of course, ‘his patrimony’: cf. VIII 568 E).

ἀντεχομένων . The middle of ἀντέχω in the sense of ‘resist’ is extremely rare; but occurs in Arist. H. A. VII 3. 583^{a} 18, possibly in Xen. de Ven. 6. 6, and occasionally in later Greek: see Stephanus-Hase Thes. s.v. The presence of μαχομένων makes it unlikely that ἀντεχομένων means ‘cleaving to’ sc. in the attitude of supplication.

οὐκ ἀναγκαίας . The adjective ἀναγκαῖος throughout this sentence combines the two senses of ‘necessary’ )( ‘superfluous,’ and ‘related by the ties of blood.’ Bosanquet justly draws attention to the singular pathos and pietas of Plato's words: cf. V 470 D note For the parallel in the State see VIII 569 B.

πληγαῖς ‐‐ δοῦναι . See VIII 566 C note

ἐπιλείπῃ . The present has better MS authority, and is intrinsically more appropriate than the aorist: “nam et ei quod sequitur ξυνειλεγμένον ᾖ magis respondet et eo ipso temporis puncto quo patrimonium deficere incipit filium istum ad latrocinia et sacrilegia abripi accuratius significat” (Heller Cur. Crit. p. 4). Contrast VIII 568 E note

ἐφάψεται : ‘put himself in touch with’ (sich in Berührung setzen Schneider). The delicate euphemism is missed by the English translators.

ἱερόν τι νεωκορήσει : ‘will sweep out a temple.’ The euphemism may be illustrated by Cicero's jest about Verres, “futurum ut omnia verreret” (Quint. VI 3. 55). Suidas has νεωκορήσει. ἐνίοτε ἀντὶ τοῦ ἱεροσυλήσει· κορεῖν γὰρ λέγουσι τὸ καλλύνειν, τὸ σαροῦν (‘sweep’) καὶ ἐκκαλλύνειν. The explanation of the Scholiast is less accurate. See also Shück de Scholiis p. 34 and Photius I p. 103 (ed. Porson) ἱερόν τι νεωκορήσας· εὐφημότερον ἀντὶ τοῦ ἱεροσυλήσας (as emended by Schneider). L. and S. say that νεωκόρος does not mean ‘templesweeper’ till Philo, but the present passage shews that this meaning is at least as old as Plato.

δικαίας . The letters αια are written over an erasure in A, so that the scribe may have originally written δίκας, which appears in all other MSS. The Scholiast read δικαίας, as appears from his paraphrase τῶν δοξῶν τῶν ἀγαθῶν, ἃς πάλαι εἶχεν, and no one, since Bekker, has adopted δίκας except Stallbaum. τὰς δίκας ποιουμένας is indefensible, and χρηστάς in 573 B, to which Plato here refers, proves δικαίας right.

ποιουμένας κτλ . ποιουμένας = ‘accounted’: see on VI 498 A. The words ἐκ δουλείας λελυμέναι correspond to VIII 567 E. ὄναρ is an adverbial accusative: cf. VII 520 C note The expression ἐν ὕπνῳ, though excised by Cobet (V. L.^{2} p. 525), is quite in keeping with Plato's ubertas orationis.

ἐν ἑαυτῷ . So also in 579 C. Herwerden calls for ἐν ἑαυτοῦ, which could, of course, only mean ‘in his senses’: see Blaydes on Ar. Wasps 642.

γενόμενος κτλ. γιγνόμενος (Richards in Cl. Rev. VIII p. 23, following Stephanus) is a groundless conjecture. The tyrannical man must have reached this stage before he sticks at nothing. On βρώματος see 571 D note

ἅτε αὐτὸς κτλ. : ‘being himself a monarch with sole sway will not only lead the man in whom he dwells as in a city unto every form of daring’ etc. τε is used ἀνακολούθως: see on II 373 B. The words ἅτε αὐτὸς ὢν μόναρχος suggest as the proper supplement of the τε clause something like ‘but will also make him a tyrant too’; and the sentiment appears in a somewhat different form in 575 C, D (where see notes). So Hoefer (de part. Pl. p. 14) correctly explains the passage. Schneider understands κυβερνῶν or the like (to balance ὤν) after πόλιν—an impossible solution, which he himself abandoned afterwards in his translation. Others cancel τε (q and Stallbaum), or suggest ἔχοντά τε καὶ τρέφοντα (Richards). Neither proposal is either necessary or probable. The words ὥσπερ πόλιν have also caused difficulty; and Vind. E offers the ingenious emendation πώλον (sic). Should ὥσπερ πόλιν be connected with τὸν ἔχοντά τε αὐτόν or with ἄξει? The latter view has hitherto, I believe, been held; but the introduction of the parallel is very awkward, and, in point of fact, neither Ἔρως nor even the tyrant himself was said in Book VIII to lead the city into daring deeds (VIII 566 D ff., quoted by Stallbaum, is nothing to the point). On the other view ὥσπερ πόλιν is natural and easy: if ὁ ἔρως is a μόναρχος, ὁ ἔχων τὸν ἔρωτα is the πόλις where he rules. Cf. ἕως ἂν ἐν αὐτοῖς ὥσπερ ἐν πόλει πολιτείαν καταστήσωμεν 590 E.

ὑπὸ τῶν ‐‐ ἑαυτοῦ has been called ‘nonsense’ by Richards, who conjectures for καὶ ἑαυτοῦ either ἑαυτῷ, or καὶ αὐτόν: Herwerden contents himself with deleting καί. The text is assuredly sound; and although Stallbaum is here at fault, Vermehren correctly explained the passage as long ago as 1870 (Pl. Stud. pp. 112 ff.). καί is quoque, and we should translate ‘by means of the same dispositions in himself also’ (“durch dieselben Eigenschaften auch seiner selbst” Vermehren). τῶν αὐτῶν sc. as those of his evil associates. The history of the State furnishes an exact parallel in the contrast between the foreign mercenaries and the emancipated slaves (VIII 567 D, E). Jowett's translation is right, but in his edition he still takes καί as ‘and.’

κλέπτουσι κτλ. recalls I 344 B (where see note) and 348 D. From Xen. Mem. I 2. 62 and Symp. 4. 36 it would seem that these crimes were commonly cited as instances of ἀδικία in the Socratic school. Cf. also Ar. Thesm. 817 ff.

ἐὰν ‐‐ τοιοῦτοι is bracketed by Herwerden. The words are certainly difficult, if σμικρά γε κακά be taken as ironical, for we have no right to render ἐάν by ‘even if’: “a small catalogue of evils—(even) if there are only a few such men!” J. and C. But there is no irony. The meaning is ‘True, they are small evils, if such men are few in number.’ ‘Yes,’ said I, ‘for small is small in comparison with great.’ Adimantus' caveat prepares us for ὅταν γὰρ δὴ πολλοὶ κτλ. below.

πονηρίᾳ : ‘in respect of a city's wretchedness and misery.’ For the datives cf. VI 509 D (σαφηνείᾳ καὶ ἀσαφείᾳ), VIII 555 A and infra 576 C. Its union with ἀθλιότητι seems to shew that πονηρία is here ‘wretchedness’ rather than ‘vice,’ although the Greeks did not clearly separate the two ideas (see on I 335 B), and in Plato wickedness is misery.

οὐδ’ ἴκταρ βάλλει : ‘are not within sight of.’ The proverb means οὐδὲ ἐγγύς ἐστιν (Diogen. III 46. The other sources are given in Leutsch u. Schneidewin Paroem. Gr. II p. 43). Eustathius (in Od. II 292. 27, quoted by Schneider) argues for the rough breathing ἵκταρ (see cr. n.), on the ground that the word comes from ἱκνοῦμαι; but it is clear from his argument, as well as from the other authorities, that ἴκταρ was the regular pronunciation.

ὅταν γὰρ δὴ κτλ. The tyrannical man is like the philosopher in one respect. He does not attain to his full development except in a city meet for him. See VI 497 A and Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II p. 318. With μετὰ δήμου ἀνοίας cf. Solon Frag. 11 ed. Bergk.

πλεῖστον ‐‐ τύραννον . The τύραννος is ἔρως: see 575 A τυραννικῶς ἐν αὐτῷ ὁ Ἔρως—ζῶν and 573 D. This explanation, with which Schneider agrees, is better than to make τύραννος equivalent merely to ‘the tyrannical element’ (cf. II 382 D note) and so weaken the force of τυραννικώτατος γὰρ ἂν εἴη. Plato here ignores the fact that if a successful tyrant has strong passions he is usually not less strong in capacity and will. If he were entirely the slave of Passion, he would not prove successful.

ἐὰν μὲν κτλ. Cf. Prot. 325 D. The idiom, which begins with Homer, is illustrated at length by Herwerden Mn. XIX pp. 338 f. The reference in ὥσπερ τότε is to 574 C. νέους is ‘new’ (Schneider), not ‘young’: cf. VIII 568 A note, and νεωστὶ φίλης, νεωστὶ φίλου 574 B, C. μητρίδα Photius (ed. Porson I p. 268) thus explains: μητρίδα· τὴν πατρίδα. καὶ Πλάτων καὶ Φερεκράτης. Cf. Synes. Ep. 93. 1460 A Migne μητρίδος, ὡς ἂν Κρῆτες εἴποιεν.

ἕξει τε καὶ θρέψει : ‘will have and hold’ (“haben und halten” Schneider). There is no sarcasm in θρέψει (“that is his way of supporting her!” J. and C.): nor does the word in this passage mean more than ‘keep.’

τοιοίδε γίγνονται . τοιοίδε “ad sequentia spectat” (Schneider), and γίγνονται=‘prove themselves,’ ‘shew themselves,’ as often.

ἀλλότριοι : sc. γιγνόμενοι, rather than γίγνονται, which Schneider supplies. The participles are all in explanatory apposition with τοιοίδε. Ast bids us repeat ὡς, wrongly: see Heindorf on Theaet. 167 E.

φίλοι μὲν ‐‐ οὐδενί . Cf. Xen. Hiero 3 and VIII 567 B note

οἷον κτλ. : “qui vigilans talis est, qualem finximus supra (571 C, D, E) somniantem” (Stallbaum). The Oxford editors, with D. and V., and apparently also Schneider, translate ‘He is the man who in reality is such as we imagined him in our dream.’ The Greek is perhaps a little simpler if we take this view, but I agree with Bosanquet in preferring Stallbaum's, partly because such a statement could scarcely be called a κεφάλαιον, and partly on account of 574 E οἷος ὀλιγάκις ἐγίγνετο ὄναρ, ὕπαρ τοιοῦτος ἀεὶ γενόμενος — a striking observation which would be at once recalled to Adimantus' mind, although the strong antithesis between ὄναρ and ὕπαρ is alone sufficient to suggest the meaning. We expect brevity and compression in a summary description of this kind. For the purposes of grammatical explanation we should supply εἶναι after διήλθομεν (‘as we described a man to be in dreams’). The ellipse is easy because of ᾖ: for ὃς—ᾖ is logically antecedent to οἷον—διήλθομεν .

οὗτος γίγνεται . οὗτος is in the predicate. For γίγνεται see on VIII 562 A.

διαδεξάμενος κτλ. We have now finished our account of depraved cities and individuals, and the change of interlocutors shews that we are about to enter on a new stage in the discussion: cf. VI 487 A, 506 D al. Aristotle blames Plato for not saying what is to follow tyranny (Pol. E 12. 1316^{a} 25 ff.). In reply, Plato would, I think, first point out that he is not required to touch on this subject either by the main thesis of the Republic or by the special aim which he has in view throughout Books VIII and IX (see VIII 543 A note). He might afterwards observe that, since the best hope of founding the perfect city lies in imbuing an absolute ruler or one of his descendants with a love of genuine philosophy (VI 499 B—502 C), the deepest darkness perhaps contained a promise of the dawn. See especially the striking passage in Laws 709 E—712 A. Aristotle seems to have understood him to mean this (ἐπεὶ κατ’ ἐκεῖνον δεῖ εἰς τὴν πρώτην καὶ τὴν ἀρίστην· οὕτως γὰρ ἂν ἐγίνετο συνεχὲς καὶ κύκλος l.c.), and criticises him accordingly from the facts of experience; but the succession of polities in the Republic is not intended to be in all respects, or even primarily and chiefly, historical (VIII 543 A note).

576B - 577B What shall we say then about the happiness or unhappiness of the individual who is most depraved? As is the city, so will the individual be in point of happiness as well as virtue. And the city in which a tyrant rules is of all cities the worst and most unhappy. What of the tyrannical man? He that has lived with a tyrant, and is himself moreover capable of judging, will best decide. Let us pretend, says Socrates, that we ourselves possess these qualifications.

ff. We have now discussed ὁ κάκιστος, and it only remains to compare him with ὁ ἄριστος in respect of happiness and misery. The present chapter is introductory to the triad of arguments by means of which Plato proves that the victory rests with ὁ ἄριστος. His description of the misery of the tyrant is based, as he virtually tells us, on the evidence of his own eyes (577 A, B notes), but we should of course remember that in such cases we are apt to see what we wish to see, and Plato's description, regarded as a portrait of Dionysius I, though it doubtless possesses a certain historical value, may well be somewhat overdrawn.

τοῖς δὲ πολλοῖς κτλ. = ‘although the multitude are multitudinous also in their views’ expresses the antithesis implied in the emphatic τῇ ἀληθείᾳ )( τῇ δόξῃ. Herwerden's conjecture τοῖς δὲ πολλοῖς ἄλλα δοκεῖ is singularly feeble and inelegant. The Scholiast neatly remarks πολλὰ δοκεῖ· ἀντὶ τοῦ ψευδῆ· τὸ γὰρ ψεῦδος πολυχοῦν, ‘ἁπλοῦς δ’ ὁ μῦθος τῆς ἀληθείας ἔφυ.’ On Plato's contempt of the many see VI 494 A note

ταῦτα refers to the two questions, not to τοῖς—δοκεῖ. If otherwise, Plato would, I think, have written τοῦτο here.

ὁμοιότητι , though doubted by Ast, Cobet, Herwerden, and others, is sound enough: see on VIII 555 A.

ἀρετῇ . See cr. n. The correct reading was first restored by Schneider.

εὐδαιμονίας ‐‐ ἀθλιότητος κτλ. For the genitive see on V 470 A. μὴ ἐκπληττώμεθα = ‘do not let us be dazzled’ (D. and V.): cf. 577 A. Jowett's ‘panicstricken’ suggests a wrong idea.

ἀλλ’ ὡς κτλ. : ‘but as it is necessary to go into and survey the entire city, do not let us give our opinion until we have crept into the whole of the interior and seen it.’ It is best to make ὡς virtually causal, as it often is when dependent on imperatives or imperatival expressions (here ἀποφαινώμεθα): cf. I 336 D, IV 420 E, Symp. 189 B et al. With εἰς ὅλην τὴν πόλιν κτλ. cf. IV 421 B ἢ τοῦτο μὲν εἰς τὴν πόλιν ὅλην βλέποντας θεατέον κτλ. καταδῦναι playfully suggests that we mean to elude the tyrant's eye (cf. infra 579 B, Gorg. 485 D). He shall not catch us if we can help it. For other views on this clause see App. I.

τῆς ‐‐ σχηματίζονται : ‘circumstance and pomp of majesty, which they put on to the world outside.’ Cf. προστήσασθαι X 599 A note and (with Schneider) II 365 C πρόθυρα μὲν καὶ σχῆμα — περιγραπτέον. τῶν τυραννικῶν seems to be usually taken as masculine, in which case it might have been omitted without any loss to the meaning. I think it is the genitive of τὰ τυραννικά: cf. B below ἐν οἷς μάλιστα γυμνὸς ἂν ὀφθείη τῆς τραγικῆς σκευῆς.

εἰ οὖν οἰοίμην κτλ. ‘If then I should think it right for all of us to listen to the man who is both capable of judging’ etc. The dialogue form is strained almost to breaking in this remarkable sentence. We are all to be silent and listen to Plato himself. Plato might fairly claim from his psychological studies and experience as a teacher, to be δυνατὸς τῇ διανοίᾳ εἰς ἀνδρὸς ἦθος <*>νδὺς διιδεῖν and so δυνατὸς κρῖναι, and he had lived under the same roof with Dionysius I of Syracuse. The poet Gray was one of the first to observe that Plato is here meant.

ἐν οἷς =‘among whom’ is surely better and more natural than ἐν αἷς, which Richards has conjectured. The tyrant lays aside the mask in his own family.

τραγικῆς σκευῆς =“theatrical garb” (D. and V.) again betrays “a feeling of the kinship between the shows of tyranny and those of tragedy” (Bosanquet: cf. VIII 568 A note). Dionysius I was himself a writer of tragedies, and notoriously jealous—so we are told—of his poetical reputation (Grote X pp. 302 ff.): but it would be frigid to suppose that this was in Plato's mind when he wrote the word τραγικῆς .

αὖ τοῖς was first conjecturally restored by Heindorf (on Soph. 262 A), following Ficinus, instead of the vulgate αὐτοῖς. It has since been found to be the reading of most of the other MSS as well as A.

κελεύοιμεν . The singular κελεύοιμι (q Flor. U) is still read by Stallbaum. There is surely no reason why Socrates should not associate Glauco with himself in this hypothetical invitation.

ὀρθότατ) ἂν ‐‐ προκαλοῖο forms the apodosis to what Socrates has said (cf. 582 E), but refers “ad initium potius quam ad exitum orationis Socraticae” (Schneider. Cf. V 465 E note). Glauco admits most fully the claim that Plato has earned a right to speak with authority on this subject.

προσποιησώμεθα κτλ. Plato cannot appear in propria persona, so that it is necessary for Socrates and Glauco to pretend that they also belong to the number of those ‘who would be able to judge’ and have met with τύραννοι and τυραννικοί. The fiction is rendered necessary by the laws of dialogue as ἵνα— ἐρωτῶμεν frankly states. We must beware of supposing that it is Plato who ‘pretends’: Plato does not pretend, but is δυνατὸς μὲν κρῖναι, ξυνῳκηκὼς δὲ ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κτλ. (577 A). Richards objects to ἄν with δυνατῶν, and it is certainly unusual to find ἄν with an adjective in this way. But as δυνατῶν can itself take an infinitive, it hardly differs from the participle δυναμένων, and the suggestions δυνατῶν ὄντων, or δυνατῶν ἂν <ὄντων>, are unattractive. I should add in conclusion that nearly all critics are now agreed in holding that Plato throughout the whole of this passage is referring to his own experience of Dionysius I: see for example Susemihl Gen. Entw. II pp. 240, 294 ff., Teichmüller Lit. Fehd. I p. 110, Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. d. Pl. Pol. pp. 667 ff., with Zeller^{4} II p. 413 note 1. The date of Plato's first visit to the elder Dionysius was in or near 388 B.C. Compare Epp. VII 324 A—327 D. Whether this epistle be genuine or not, the visit is abundantly attested, as Zeller proves (l.c. pp. 413—415 notes), and it is strange that J. and C. should still have doubts upon the subject. See also on V 473 D, VI 496 B, 499 B and infra 579 B note

577B - 580C Like the city whose counterpart he is, the tyrannical man is in reality a slave, powerless to work his will, penniless and insatiate, full of fear and lamentation. A still greater depth of misery awaits him if he becomes a tyrant. Imagine the piteous plight of one who is suddenly transported into a solitary place where he is at the mercy of his own slaves, and surrounded by free neighbours who make common cause with them! Such is the position of the tyrant, a prisoner in his own palace, tormented by longings which he can never appease. To sum up, he is the supreme embodiment of vice and misery, and the longer he holds sway, the worse he becomes.

Let us now give judgment. In respect of virtue and happiness the different individuals stand as follows: (1) Kingly, (2) Timocratical, (3) Oligarchical, (4) Democratical, (5) Tyrannical. He who is most kingly is best and happiest, he who is most a tyrant over himself and city, worst and most miserable,—whether their true character be hidden from men and gods, or not.

ff. The arguments by means of which Plato establishes his conclusion may be briefly described as the political argument, the psychological argument, and the metaphysical argument. The first (577 B—580 C) depends on the resemblance between the soul and the State, the second (580 C—583 A) on the threefold division of the soul into λογιστικόν, θυμοειδές, and ἐπιθυμητικόν, the third (583 B—587 B) on Plato's theory of Reality or Being. Now it is just these three methods of investigation, and these alone, which have been employed in the different parts of the dialogue, the political and psychological in II—IV and VIII—IX, the metaphysical in V—VII; and it is therefore altogether appropriate and right that Plato should bring them together now, and use their united forces ‘in making up the last account.’ The sequence of the three arguments follows the usual Platonic way of progression from the exoteric to the esoteric, and as the ideal city culminated in metaphysical idealism, so it is a metaphysical argument that crowns our citadel of proof.

καθ) ἕκαστον κτλ. καθ) ἕκαστον=‘point by point,’ ‘in detail,’ not ‘singly’ (D. and V.), which would be καθ’ ἑκάτερον here, since only two objects of comparison are involved. ἀθρῶν: sc. ἑκάτερον, viz. the city and the man (J. and C.). On ὡς πόλιν εἰπεῖν and ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν (‘I might almost say’) see I 341 B note

ἁνήρ . See cr. n. I have followed the advice of a reviewer of my Text of the Republic in Hermath. XXIV p. 256 and accepted Campbell's ἁνήρ. It is difficult to dispense with the article here: cf. τῆς τε πόλεως καὶ τοῦ ἀνδρός above.

ἀνελευθερίας κτλ. In ἀνελευθερίας there is here a strong suggestion of the etymological meaning (“Unfreiheit” Schneider). μικρόν, as J. and C. observe, is introduced to make the parallel between State and individual as complete as possible. From another point of view it might be held that the μοχθηρότατον in the tyrannical soul is not σμικρόν but πολύ (573 D—576 B).

, E 29 καὶ ἡ τυραννουμένη κτλ. There is no βούλησις, in the true sense of that term, except τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ: cf. I 336 A with the Gorgias quoted ad loc. and Men. 77 C ff. Or in other words Virtue alone is free: cf. ἀρετὴ δὲ ἀδέσποτον X 617 E with note ad loc. See also Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II p. 317.

ὡς ‐‐ ψυχῆς . The restriction (for which cf. 579 E) is necessary, for the μοχθηρότατον part of the τυραννουμένη ψυχή will have its way.

ἑλκομένη κτλ. Badham's ἐλαυνομένη would be less suitable with βίᾳ than ἑλκομένη (cf. VII 515 E), and is otherwise a gratuitous alteration. On ταραχῆς see VIII 547 A, 557A, 561 C notes In the tyrannical soul the fatal principle of ἀνομοιότης attains its highest development. With μεταυελείας cf. ὁ δ’ ἀκρατὴς μεταμελητικός (Arist. Eth. Nic. VII 9. 1150^{b} 30).

ἄπληστον : like the sieve in Gorg. 493 A—D (Nettleship). Nothing can ‘fill up the cistern’ of his lust.

τήν τε ‐‐ πόλιν . I follow the Oxford editors in putting τε for γε (see cr. n.). γε is not indefensible; but the balance with τόν τε τοιοῦτον ἄνδρα is strongly in favour of τε: see the examples cited in Hoefer de part. Plat. p. 12.

ὀδυρμοὺς δέ . See cr. n. Jowett defended τε: Campbell and all the other editors do better in accepting the text of Ξ. A few MSS have γε: and Plato may have written ὀδυρμοὺς δέ γε as Schneider suggests.

ἐν ἀνδρὶ κτλ. : ‘and in an individual,’ viz. as contrasted with a πόλις, whence the emphatic position to which the words are assigned. In ἐν ἄλλῳ τινὶ the idiom is akin to ‘partitive apposition’: see IV 431 A note

τήν γε πόλιν . γε is restrictive: our verdict on the individual has still to be pronounced. Cf. 582 B, C. J. and C. are the only editors who retain τε here (see cr. n.), but the anacoluthon would be too harsh, and τὸν ἔχοντά τε in 575 A is different: see note ad loc.

τοιοῦτος μάλιστα : i.q. ἄθλιος μάλιστα. The subject is οὗτος, and ὁ τοιοῦτος μάλιστα is in the predicate.

τυραννικὸς ὤν . “Have a care of inserting any negative particle here, as H. Stephanus would do, which would wholly destroy the sense” (Thomas Gray). Cf. 575 C, D and 579 C.

δυστυχὴς ᾖ . Cobet (V. L.^{2} p. 534) revives Bekker's δυστυχήσῃ: but the MS reading is preferable: “significatur infelicitatem ei qui tyrannus factus sit, usque adesse perpetuoque eum comitari” (Schneider). Cf. VIII 561 A note and δυστυχεῖ εἷναι 580 A.

ἀλλ’ εὖ μάλα κτλ. : ‘but carefully study by means of argument the two individuals in question.’ τὼ τοιούτω is literally ‘the two such people,’ i.e. the two τυραννικοί, viz. the τυραννικός who lives an ἰδιώτης βίος, and the τυραννικός who becomes a τύραννος. It is the relative position of these two individuals in respect of misery which is the question before us now, and the rest of this chapter aims at answering it by argument: see 579 C, D, where the conclusion of the reasoning is given. No satisfactory explanation of the MS reading τῷ τοιούτῳ λόγῳ σκοπεῖν (cr. n.) has yet been offered. Some hold that τοιούτῳ refers forward (“nach folgender Regel,” Schleiermacher, Prantl), but τῷ τοιούτῳ cannot be thus used, although τοιούτῳ by itself might be. Others translate “by the help of such a process of reasoning as we now employ” (J. and C. etc.). I doubt whether this meaning, which does not, by the way, furnish a sufficiently pointed antithesis to οἴεσθαι, is easily conveyed by τῷ τοιούτῳ. The translations “bei einer solchen Untersuchung” (Schneider), “where the argument is of such a nature” (J. and C., comparing the altogether different τοῖς τοιούτοις κακοῖς in 579 C), and ‘in this high argument’ are untenable on grammatical grounds; nor can we easily explain the dative as meaning ‘in the interests of’ (“videndum ne dativus eam rem significet, cuius gratia accurate quaerendum esse Socrates dicat” Schneider). The emendations proposed are (1) τὼ τοιούτω λόγω (Stephanus), (2) τὸ τοιοῦτον λόγῳ or τὸν τοιοῦτον λόγῳ (Ast), (3) fortasse εὖ μάλ’ ἐν κτλ. (W. H. Thompson J. Ph. V p. 218). Did Stephanus mean by τὼ τοιούτω λόγω something like the δίκαιος and ἄδικος λόγος of the Clouds? τοιούτω could not convey so much, but Stephanus was, I believe, on the right track when he restored τὼ τοιούτω. The corruption was all the easier, because the dual is constantly corrupted in the MSS of the Republic: thus in III 410 E all MSS have ἀμφότερα, in III 412 A ἐπιτεινομένῳ was written by A^{1}, in IV 422 E πολέμια is the reading of A, and in IV 442 D both A and Π give τῷ ἀρχομένῳ for τὼ ἀρχομένω. Cf. also III 395 A note

ὅσοι πλούσιοι . We ought not, with J. and C., to understand ὄντες. The adjective logically belongs to ἰδιωτῶν, but is idiomatically placed in the relative clause: see Kuhner Gr. Gr. II pp. 924 ff.

ἐκείνου . On the transition from plural to singular see I 347 A note

τί γὰρ κτλ. : ‘Why of course, what should they be afraid of?’ sc. in their slaves. τί is not ‘why,’ but ‘what,’ as οὐδέν shews: cf. V 449 B note Campbell, making τί ‘why,’ translates οὐδέν by ‘Oh, for no reason,’ and refers to Prot. 310 B; but there too οὐδέν is ‘nothing’: see my note ad loc.

εἴ τις θεῶν κτλ. It is a mistake to suppose from this passage that the treatment of slaves in Athens or Greece generally was exceptionally cruel or unkind. Granted the existence of slavery at all, what Plato here says would nearly always be found true, especially where, as in Athens, the slaves belonged for the most part to an alien and inferior race. See Gilbert Gk Const. Ant. E. T. pp. 170—174. Fifty slaves would of course be more than the average number belonging to a single citizen. In Athens, during the fourth century B.C., the slaves were probably little, if at all, more numerous than the free-born population and metoecs (Beloch Die Bevölk. d. Gr.Röm. Welt p. 99).

ὁπόσῳ . On ὁπόσῳ following ποίῳ see I 348 B note

αὐτῶν τῶν δούλων . “Quum ingenui desint, a quibus auxilium petat, nonnullis ex servorum ipsorum, quos timet, numero adulari cogitur” (Schneider). This explanation, which Vermehren also approves (Pl. Stud. p. 114), exactly meets the case, and there is no reason either to change αὐτῶν to αὖ (with Stephanus) or to delete τῶν δούλων (with Ast and Herwerden).

οὐδὲν δεόμενος : ‘when he needn't.’ He is under no obligation to set them free: why then should he make them a present of their freedom? The innuendo is in Plato's neatest style. For the language cf. (with Schneider) Plut. Tib. Gracch. 21. 2 δείσασα περὶ τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ἡ βουλὴ ψηφίζεται μηδὲν δεομένη πέμπειν αὐτὸν εἰς Ἀσίαν. The conjecture οὐδὲν δεομένους (Groen v. Prinsterer Prosop. Plat. p. 211, Ast, and Herwerden, who appeals in vain to Plut. Cato Maior 12. 3, Dem. 11. 9, and Isocr. Areop. 25) is, as Schneider shews, inept; for if the slaves do not need to be set free, because they are practically free already, “ne ero quidem opus est ut ad eos coercendos illam aliamve ineat rationem.”

ἄλλους ‐‐ γείτονας . These freeborn neighbours in Plato's simile represent surrounding independent States, who detest tyranny, and help the tyrant's subjects. See Newman's Politics of Aristotle II p. 315.

ὑπὸ πάντων πολεμίων : ‘by none but enemies’: cf. πᾶσιν ἀγρίοις in VI 496 D. The tyrant's splendid but awful isolation is admirably brought out by Plato: see also on VIII 567 B. In this respect Plato's similitude faithfully reflects the position of Dionysius I in Sicily and indeed, except for the support which Sparta lent him, in the whole Hellenic world. See Grote X p. 306 ff.

ἐν τοιούτῳ κτλ. The picture which follows is no doubt also drawn from Dionysius I: see Grote X pp. 244, 328 notes

λίχνῳ “is the same with regard to the eye, that liquorishness is to the taste” (Thomas Gray).

οὔτε ἀποδημῆσαι κτλ. The parallel with Xen. Hiero 1. 11 is singularly close. Plato speaks con amore, thinking doubtless of his own sojournings in foreign lands. See Zeller^{4} II pp. 404—414. Neuman de locis Aegypt. in oper. Plat. (1874) discovers many allusions to Plato's ‘Wanderjahre’ throughout his works.

ὅσων δὴ κτλ. Such as the Olympian games etc.: cf. Xen. l.c. τὰς κοινὰς πανηγύρεις ἔνθα τὰ ἀξιοθεατότατα δοκεῖ εἶναι ἀνθρώποις συναγείρεσθαι. Dionysius was represented at Olympia by deputy, as Hermann reminds us (Gesch. u. System p. 116). Cf. Grote X p. 303. The phrase τι ἀγαθὸν ὁρᾷ, with which the sentence concludes, has a curiously modern sound.

οὐκοῦν κτλ. : ‘greater then, by evils such as these, is the profit which is reaped by the individual who’ etc. (“Um so grosse Übel reicher also ist der Mann” Schleiermacher). τοῖς τοιούτοις κακοῖς is dative of amount of difference: cf. II 373 E μείζονος—οὔτι σμικρῷ, ἀλλ’ ὅλῳ στρατοπέδῳ, VI 507 E οὐ σμικρᾷ—ἰδέᾳ— τιμιωτέρῳ and Laws 848 B (Schneider Addit. p. 72). The passage has been strangely misunderstood, Stephanus suggesting variously <ἐπὶ> or <πρὸς> τοῖς τοιούτοις or τῶν τοιούτων, and Ast <ἐν> τοῖς τοιούτοις. Stallbaum comes nearer to the truth in his “per huius modi mala,” but the dative is exactly as in τοσούτῳ πλείω. The view that the dative is merely one of ‘circumstance’—an alternative suggestion in J. and C.—cannot be upheld. See also on 578 C. The reference in νῦν δή is to 578 B.

ὡς μὴ κτλ. I have returned to the text of A, Π, and nearly all the MSS. Θ^{1} with Stobaeus (Flor. 50. 50) has μὴ ὡς, and so Stallbaum and Baiter read. μὴ ὡς suits better with ἀλλὰ ἀναγκασθῇ, but the irregularity is slight, and, as Schneider observes, the sentence opens as if it were meant to be positive and not negative, so that ὡς μή is suited to what precedes. We may add that ὡς μὴ ἰδιώτης καταβιῷ is a clearer echo of μὴ ἰδιώτην βίον καταβιῷ 578 C, which Plato wishes to recall.

κἂν εἰ μή τῳ δοκεῖ κτλ. Cf. V 473 A and (for κἄν) III 408 B note The reading δοκῇ (see cr. n.) is retained by Schneider, but ε and η are easily confused, and, even if we allow sporadic instances of εἰ with the subjunctive in Attic, the analogy of V 473 A, as well as the sense, is in favour of δοκεῖ. There need not be a specific allusion in τῳ: for praises of tyranny and the tyrant's lot were common enough in Greece: cf. I 344 B, VIII 568 A notes The phrase τῷ ὄντι invites us to understand τύραννος and δοῦλος in the fullest sense: cf. V 474 A note

δοῦλος κτλ. I once too rashly placed καὶ κόλαξ after δοῦλος, in order to obtain a chiasmus, understanding δουλείας τῶν πονηροτάτων like δούλων δουλείαν in VIII 569 C. Two inferior MSS have δουλείας καὶ θωπείας: but the inversion is not difficult, because the two notions are so closely allied: cf. (with Schneider) Euthyd. 302 B ἄπορόν τινα στροφὴν ἔφευγόν τε καὶ ἐστρεφόμην (where Schanz's brackets ‘nemini nocent’).

καὶ τὰς ἐπιθυμίας κτλ. Xenophon's Hiero is in effect a diluted commentary on this sentence: cf. also Gorg. 524 E ff., and especially Shakespeare's Macbeth IV 3. 50—99, V 3. 22— 29.

σφαδᾳσμῶν =‘convulsive movements’ is a rare word. The spelling σφαδᾳσμός appears in no MS except A^{1}; but the iota is attested from other sources: see Stephanus-Hase Thes. s. v. The verb σφαδᾴζειν (μετὰ σπασμοῦ πηδᾶν Hesych.) denotes any nervous, twitching, convulsive motion, outside one's own control, the result of excitement, fear, pain, disease etc. (Stephanus-Hase l.c.). For the sense of this passage cf. 577 E note

τὸ πρότερον κτλ. The reference is to VIII 567 and supra 576 A, B. ἢ πρότερον might of course have been spared, and Herwerden more suo cuts it out; but the sentence gains in weight by the addition.

, B 7 νῦν ἤδη (‘nunc demum’) is fully illustrated by Jecht de usu part. ἤδη in Pl. dialog. pp. 44 f.

ὥσπερ ὁ διὰ πάντων κτλ. The comparison is borrowed from the Athenian method of judging in musical or dramatic competitions. According to Petersen, who in his Dorpat program über die Preisrichter der Grossen Dionysien zu Athen (1878) has carefully investigated the whole subject, the mode of procedure was as follows. Some time before the festival a number of qualified persons were selected by the βουλευταί in cooperation with the χορηγοί, and their names deposited in 10 urns, one for each φυλή. On the day of the contest, one name was drawn from each urn, and the ten judges thereby constituted, after witnessing the performance, each wrote down in his γραμματεῖον the order in which he arranged the several competitors. Of these ten judges five were next selected by lot, and the final verdict was given in accordance with the votes already registered by these five. The most important piece of evidence in support of this theory is furnished by Lysias 4. 3 ἐβουλόμην δ) ἂν μὴ ἀπολαχεῖν αὐτὸν κριτὴν Διονυσίοις, <*>ν) ὑμῖν φανερὸς ἐγένετο ἐμοὶ διηλλαγμένος, κρίνας τὴν ἐμὴν φυλὴν νικᾶν· νῦν δὲ ἔγραψε μὲν ταῦτα εἰς τὸ γραμματεῖον, ἀπέλαχε δέ. In none of the ancient authorities, which are fully cited by Petersen, do we find the expression ὁ διὰ πάντων κριτής: but Petersen thinks the phrase may perhaps denote any one of the surviving five, who had lasted through all the stages, having been originally chosen by the Senate, and afterwards by lot on the two remaining opportunities. The singular number, according to Petersen, is generic, as in Laws 659 A, B and elsewhere. It is true of course that the matter could not always be brought to an immediate issue in this way; for, to take a single instance, in a case where there were, let us say, three competitors, the votes of the five judges might result in a tie between two competitors for each of the three prizes. Thus we might have:

In such a case we must, I suppose, believe either that one of the five judges, who will then be ὁ διὰ πάντων κριτής, had a casting vote, or else—and this is the more reasonable view—that C was held to be disqualified for the first prize, and fresh scrutinies began. Petersen's explanation is accepted in the main by Müller (Griech. Bühnenalt. pp. 369— 372), and, though to some extent conjectural, appears to me the best available, except in one point. ὁ διὰ πάντων κριτής can hardly be separated from ὁ διὰ πάντων ἀγών, a phrase which is quoted from Cratinus' Panoptae (Fr. 157 Kock), and explained as ὁ ἔσχατος ἀγών in Bekker's Anecdota p. 91. 10. The διὰ πάντων κριτής must surely mean the judge of the διὰ πάντων ἀγών, and if so, διὰ πάντων should be similarly interpreted in both phrases. In διὰ πάντων ἀγών it cannot mean “der durch alle Stadien oder besser durch alle Collegien hindurchgegangen war” (Petersen l. c. p. 24), but may possibly mean the last and greatest ἀγών, as τὸ διὰ πασῶν is the greatest interval in a scale of one octave. The expression is strangely reminiscent of the musical terms διὰ πέντε, διὰ τεττάρων, διὰ πασῶν etc., and in a competition between χοροί, it is natural enough that musical analogies should provide a name for the decisive struggle in which the claims of the competitors as it were contend with one another for the final victory. It will be seen that I understand ἀγών in the quotation from Cratinus as referring, not to the actual dramatic or musical representation, but to the final struggle in which the lot arbitrates between the rival claims, the earlier ἀγών being presumably that which is decided by the votes of the ten judges: so that the upshot of the whole matter will be that Socrates appeals to Glauco, as the Archon might to one of the five judges in what we may be forgiven for calling the ‘grand finale,’ calling on him to pronounce τίς πρῶτος κτλ. The word ἀποφαίνεσθαι is probably formal: cf. Laws 659 B and Dio Chrys. quoted by Petersen l. c. p. 7. For a further discussion of this passage see App. II.

πέντε ὄντας : viz. in all.

εἰσῆλθον κτλ. “in scenam ingressi sunt” (Stallbaum). In dramatic and musical contests the victor's name was publicly proclaimed by a herald (see Müller l. c. p. 372 note 2): hence μισθωσώμεθα κτλ. pursues the comparison introduced by ὥσπερ ὁ διὰ πάντων κτλ. Cf. also Phil. 66 A πάντῃ δὴ φήσεις—ὑπό τε ἀγγέλων πέμπων καὶ παροῦσι φράζων ὡς ἡδονὴ κτῆμα οὐκ ἔστι πρῶτον κτλ. (the result arrived at in the dialogue). For the verbal play in Ἀρίστωνος—τὸν ἄριστον cf. II 368 A note

580 C ἐάν τε λανθάνωσιν κτλ. is said with reference to the challenge in II 367 E.

580C - 583A A second proof may be founded on our psychological theory. Let us agree to call the three varieties of soul, knowledge-loving, honour-loving, and gain-loving respectively, and let us distinguish three corresponding varieties both of men and of pleasures. If you ask any three men who represent these different classes, which of the three lives is the most pleasurable, each will pronounce in favour of his own. Which of them is right? The necessary requisites for deciding this, like every other question, are experience, intelligence or wisdom ( φρόνησις), and argument. Now the lover of knowledge is the only one among the three in whom any of these qualifications are present, and he possesses them all. We therefore accept his verdict, and arrange accordingly, placing love of knowledge first, love of honour second, and love of money last.

ff. 21 εἶεν δὴ κτλ. After the political follows the psychological argument: see 577 C note

δὲ ἰδέ . My correction of δεῖ δέ (the reading of the best MSS: see cr. n.) has been generally accepted. The reading δὲ δεῖ is intrinsically unsatisfactory, and can only be an attempt to ‘emend’ δεῖ δέ. See Cl. Rev. XI p. 349.

δέξεται κτλ. : ‘it will admit also of another demonstration.’ The subject is simply ‘our thesis,’ as stated just before in the conclusion of the first argument (580 C). Cf. (with Stallbaum) V 453 D οὐ γὰρ εὐκόλῳ ἔοικεν and Phaed. 69 E τοῖς δὲ πολλοῖς ἀπιστίαν παρέχει (unjustly bracketed by Schanz), where the subject similarly ‘latet in antegressis.’ Idiomatic expressions like δηλώσει (VI 497 C note), δείξει etc. belong to a somewhat different category. It is impossible to extract any satisfactory sense out of the passage if (with Schneider alone of all the editors) we retain τὸ λογιστικόν (see cr. n.) or λογιστικόν, the latter of which occurs before δέξεται in many MSS. The Oxford editors, with much probability, suggest that λογιστικόν is the relic of some such gloss on τριχῇ as we actually find in Par. K, viz. λογιστικον. ἐπιθυμητικὸν θυμικον (sic).

ἡδοναὶ κτλ. Hitherto in the Republic the words Pleasure and Desire have, with few exceptions (e.g. I 328 D, VI 485 D, VIII 554 E al.), had an evil, or at least unmoral, connotation. The view now put forward, viz. that each ‘part’ of soul has its own pleasures and desires differing in point of virtue and vice (cf. VI 505 C) like the ‘parts’ to which they belong, is related not only to the theory of the Philebus but also to the Aristotelian analysis of pleasure in Eth. Nic. X cc. 3—5.

ἰδία . Paris A has ἰδίᾳ—see cr. n.— “multo minus concinne” (Schneider). Cf. ἰδίῳ αὐτοῦ infra E.

ἀρχαὶ κτλ. Any one of the three may hold rule in the soul. The reference in ἦν is to IV 436 A ff.

ὃ μέγιστον κτλ. : viz. ἐπιθυμία. The words τούτῳ ἐπωνομάσαμεν mean ‘we gave the name of ἐπιθυμία to this part,’ when we called it ἐπιθυμητικόν (ἐπιθυμητικὸν γὰρ κτλ.). Cf. (with Stallbaum) Theaet. 185 C ᾧ τὸ ἔστιν ἐπονομάζεις, Crat. 420 B and elsewhere. J. and C. wrongly understand τούτῳ as instrumental. The variant τοῦτο has little authority and is much inferior: still worse is τούτου which Madvig (Adv. Cr. I p. 431) ‘suspicatur fuisse.’

ἐπιθυμητικὸν κτλ. IV 439 D. The lowest part of soul was called φιλοχρήματον in IV 436 E et al.: see next note.

εἰς ἓν κεφάλαιον κτλ. Plato recognised three varieties in τὸ ἐπιθυμητικόν, corresponding respectively to the oligarchical, democratical, and tyrannical man (VIII 558 D note). In the present chapter these varieties again recede into the background. This apparent ‘Inconsequenz,’ together with other reasons, led Krohn to suppose that the whole of this proof, as well as the next, was written at a different time from the rest of Books VIII and IX (Pl. St. pp. 221 ff. Cf. Pfleiderer Zur Lösung etc. p. 75. Krohn has since retracted his view: see his Pl. Fr. p. 104). But the unity of the ἐπιθυμητικόν as such has never been sacrificed, since each of its varieties are also expressions of desire; and Plato is therefore fully justified in setting it over against φιλόσοφον and θυμοειδές. To have compared each of its varieties separately with the two higher principles would have greatly lengthened and complicated Plato's proof; and he reserves this point for another mode of treatment at a later opportunity (587 C note). Why does he select the word φιλοχρήματον (s. φιλοκερδές) to denote the ἐπιθυμητικόν here? He wishes to find a single word to contrast with φιλόσοφον and φιλόνικον (s. φιλότιμον). The word ἐπιθυμητικόν itself is excluded, because we have agreed that the φιλόσοφον and φιλόνικον have also ἐπιθυμίαι of their own (580 D), and, as φιλοχρήματον made its appearance in each of the three forms of ἐπιθυμία (VIII 551 A, 553 C, 555 A, 558 D, 561 A, 568 D, IX 572 C, 573 D), it is the best summary description available. Plato himself claims no more for it, and that is why he says μάλιστα ἂν εἰς ἓν κεφάλαιον ἀπερειδοίμεθα. Cf. Grimmelt de reip. Pl. comp. et unit. pp. 73 ff.

οὐ ‐‐ μέντοι . See on I 339 B.

φιλόνικον . For the spelling of this word see VIII 548 C note and my note on Prot. 336 E. The present passage and also 586 C, D below conclusively prove that Plato connected the word with νίκη and not with νεῖκος, from which indeed it could not be derived without doing violence to the laws of the Greek language (cf. Schanz Vol. VI p. x). Now Plato certainly did not write νείκη, but νίκη: and it is therefore highly improbable that he wrote φιλόνεικος. φιλόνικος has also considerable support from the inferior MSS of the Republic. The substitution of ει for long ι became extremely common in imperial times, especially in proper names derived from νίκη (Meisterhans^{3} p. 49), and even ἐνείκων and the like are also found on late inscriptions (e.g. CIG 1585). In the case of φιλόνεικος the error was apparently established by Plutarch's time: see his Ages. 5. 4. The meaning ‘lover of strife’ is often unsuitable in Plato; where it suits, it is secondary and derivative, for the lover of victory must also love strife: non sine pulvere palma. For an exhaustive discussion of the question the student may be referred to Schmidt Ethik d. alten Griechen I pp. 386—391. While admitting that ‘φιλόνικος and its derivatives are far more frequent in Attic writers,’ Schmidt is inclined to admit the existence of φιλόνεικος as a separate word, connected with νείκη as a byeform—so he thinks—of νεῖκος: but νείκη, at least in classical Greek, is only a conjecture on Aeschylus Ag. 1378 and Eum. 903: and in Plato, at all events, there is, I believe, no case in which φιλόνικος does not give the meaning required by the context.

ἥκιστα τούτων : ‘less than any of them,’ lit. ‘least of these’ three εἴδη of soul. There is no good reason for suspecting the text; for although strictly speaking the φιλόσοφον can only care for σοφία, the φιλόσοφος, who presently (581 C ff.) takes the place of the φιλόσοφον, is not wholly indifferent to either (582 B, C): he merely cares much less for them than the φιλόνικος and φιλοχρήματος do. τούτων is necessary to bring out the contrast: ἥκιστα alone, proposed by Baiter, or ἥκιστα πάντων (W. H. Thompson) would express too much.

διὰ ταῦτα δὴ κτλ. Cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. I 3. 1095^{b} 17 ff. τρεῖς γάρ εἰσι μάλιστα οἱ προὔχοντες (sc. βίοι), ὅ τε νῦν εἰρημένος (i.e. ὁ ἀπολαυστικὸς ) καὶ ὁ πολιτικὸς (i.e. ὁ φιλότιμος here) καὶ τρίτος ὁ θεωρητικός.

λέγομεν κτλ. ‘And for this reason we say that the primary classes of men are also three in number’ etc.? λέγομεν (see cr. n.) is the reading of all MSS except ΑΠ q^{1}, and Schneider is right, I think, in retaining it, not only because these three γένη have been named before (IV 435 E), but still more because the classification was apparently a familiar one: see Stewart on Arist. l.c. For the orthographical error see Introd. § 5. I take τριττά as predicative: the hyperbaton is not, I think, a difficult one, because the stress of the voice falls on τριττά, and to my ear it sounds more idiomatic than τὰ πρῶτα γένη τριττὰ εἶναι would be. A possible alternative would be to take εἶναι with φιλόσοφον κτλ. (‘that the three primary classes of men are lovers of wisdom’ etc.), but this is somewhat less natural and satisfactory, in view especially of καὶ ἡδονῶν κτλ. The words τὰ πρῶτα mean ‘the first’ or ‘original,’ as in Aristotle's πρώτη ὕλη, the Stoic πρῶται ἀρεταί and the like: it would be possible to subdivide each of these primary classes into δεύτερα γένη, τρίτα γένη etc. It should be mentioned that Shorey (A. J. Ph. VIII p. 364), reading λέγωμεν, renders ‘we may begin by assuming,’ but it is harsh to separate τὰ πρῶτα from γένη, and the adverbial τὰ πρῶτα generally, if not always, refers back to something said or done ‘at the beginning.’

ὑποκείμενα . The singular ὑποκείμενον (see cr. n.), retained by Schneider and all other editors except Baiter, is questionable Greek. In such cases the adjective, participle, or verb agrees with the whole and not with the part. ὑποκείμενα is little inferior to ὑποκείμενον in authority and the corruption was easy. Cf. VIII 550 E note

τὸν ἑαυτοῦ κτλ. Cf. Pind. Frag. 215 Bergk ἄλλο δ’ ἄλλοισιν νόμισμα, σφετέραν δ’ αἰνεῖ δίκαν ἕκαστος and Gorg. 484 E ff.

ὅ γε . See cr. n. Hermann's conjecture is, I now think, right. We may perhaps explain τε as ἀνακόλουθον (cf. II 373 B note) and taken up in τί δὲ ὁ φιλότιμος; κτλ., but γε is much livelier and better: ‘the money-maker, at all events’ etc. Cf. VIII 556 A note If γε is right, we should not, as Hermann does, make the sentence interrogative.

ἀργύριον ποιεῖ : ‘produces money.’ ποριεῖ (Badham) is a neat conjecture; but the text is sound: cf. χρήματα ποιεῖν Arist. Pol. A 9. 1258^{a} 11.

καπνὸν καὶ φλυαρίαν . This contemptuous, half-proverbial, use of καπνὸς is illustrated by Blaydes on Ar. Clouds 320.

, E 27 τὸν δὲ φιλόσοφον κτλ. ‘But the lover of knowledge, said I, what value shall we suppose that he assigns to the other pleasures compared with that of knowing how the truth stands and always enjoying a kindred sort of pleasure while he learns? Will he not think them very far away?’ (viz. from ἡ τοῦ εἰδέναι κτλ.). The χρηματιστικός considers the pleasures of honour and learning οὐδενὸς ἀξίας, compared with his own; the φιλότιμος similarly, mutatis mutandis; what then does the φιλόσοφος consider his pleasures to be compared with the others? What are his pleasures? Let us see. He either knows (i.e. has learnt) the truth in any given instance or is getting to know (i.e. is learning) it; his pleasures are therefore that of knowing and that of learning, i.e. τοιοῦτόν τι τῆς ἡδονῆς, for the pleasures of learning are akin to those of knowing. From each of these pleasures those of gain and fame are far removed. With the general sense, cf. Phaed. 64 D: for the use of ἐν IV 429 C, D: for τοιούτῳ τινὶ τῆς ἡδονῆς Xen. An. I 7. 5 ἐν τοιούτῳ εἷναι τοῦ κινδύνου προσιόντος: and for the position of τῆς ἡδονῆς Braun de hyperb. Pl. II p. 4, where many examples of similar hyperbata are quoted. The MSS read ποιώμεθα (see cr. n.), but Graser's emendation is in my opinion certainly right. I have taken τῆς ἡδονῆς with τοιούτῳ τινί: others wrongly, as I believe, join it to οὐ πάνυ πόρρω. See on the whole passage App. III.

οὐ πάνυ πόρρω : sc. οἰώμεθα νομίζειν; as before.

ἀναγκαίας : necessarias, quippe ceteris nihil indigentem nisi necessitas cogeret (after Stallbaum). Hence τῷ ὄντι: see on VI 511 B.

δεῖ εἰδέναι : we should not suppose (οἴεσθαι), but be sure of it. Badham's conjecture διείλου (ad Euthyd. p. 98) is wholly needless and inept.

ἀμφισβητοῦνται : ‘are in dispute’ (Jowett). For this somewhat irregular use of the passive cf. Cope's Rhetoric of Aristotle I p. 299. It is tempting to make the verb middle (‘dispute with one another’), as in Laws 957 D, and suppose that the pleasures are personified, as the two lives are in Prodicus' apologue of Heracles at the cross-roads (Xen. Mem. II 1. 21 ff.). αὐτῶν in τίς αὐτῶν will then mean τῶν ηδονῶν, and not τῶν ἀνδρῶν. But on such a theory, instead of αὐτὸς ὁ βίος, we should rather have had αὐτοὶ οἱ βίοι: and on the whole it is doubtless better to acquiesce in the ordinary interpretation, which is also more in harmony with τριῶν ὄντων τῶν ἀνδρῶν κτλ. below.

τῶν ἑτέρων . “Glauco simul utrisque philosophum praefert experientia, quoniam Socrates quis omnium experientissimus esset voluptatum rogaverat” (viz. in 582 A τριῶν ὄντων κτλ.) Schneider. The English translators take τῶν ἑτέρων as ‘the other’ (Jowett), viz. ‘gain’; but that would be τοῦ ἑτέρου.

τί δὲ τοῦ φιλοτίμου ; ‘and how does he stand in relation to the lover of honour?’ Supply διαφέρει ὁ φιλόσοφος, or rather a more general idea of comparison out of διαφέρει: cf. 585 D and X 597 D. We must beware of translating ‘but what of the lover of honour?’ (D. and V.), as if τοῦ φιλοτίμου were here equivalent to περὶ τοῦ φιλοτίμου (V 470 A note). This error caused Groen v. Prinsterer (Prosop. Pl. p. 210) to suggest ἆρα μᾶλλον ἔμπειρός ἐστι τῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ φρονεῖν ἡδονῆς, ἢ ἐκεῖνος τῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ τιμᾶσθαι; with which the translation of Davies and Vaughan also agrees. The subject of ἄπειρός ἐστι is of course ὁ φιλόσοφος, and ἐκεῖνος means ὁ φιλότιμος.

ὁ ἀνδρεῖος represents ὁ φιλότιμος: cf. ἀνδρείᾳ 582 E and πολεμικοῦ 583 A note

τοῦ ὄντος . The presence of such metaphysical terms in this and the succeeding proof is what chiefly encourages Pfleiderer (Zur Lösung etc. pp. 74 ff.) and some others to maintain that §§ 580— 587 were written at a later period than the rest of this Book, most of which they believe to be earlier than V 471 C—VII inclusive. See also on 581 A. Others with much more reason find in these expressions a strong argument in defence of the structural unity of the Republic; for it would seem that τῆς τοῦ ὄντος θέας and the like presuppose the discussions of Book VII. See Zeller^{4} II p. 561 note

κρίνει . Bekker's conjecture κρινεῖ is unnecessary.

μετά γε φρονήσεως corresponds to φρονήσει in 582 A. Plato is taking the three requisites in order. The ἐμπειρία of the φιλόσοφος is alone intelligent, and, without φρόνησις, ἐμπειρία is no more than a sort of ἄτεχνος τριβή ( Phaedr. 260 E: cf. Gorg. 463 B). It is indeed quite true, as Nettleship reminds us (Lect. and Rem. II p. 322), that the higher kind of man learns more from the experience which he shares with the lower kind without having to go through nearly the same amount of it.

ἀλλὰ μὴν κτλ. Bosanquet observes that “this is perhaps a good argument to prove that the man of culture is preeminently competent to appraise the value of different ideals of life, but it is not a good argument to prove that he is a good judge of degrees of agreeable feeling in lives fundamentally different from his own” (similarly Nettleship l. c. p. 321). True; but that is not the point. Plato is attempting to prove that the φιλόσοφος is the best judge, not of ‘the degrees of agreeable feeling’ experienced, in one particular kind of life, but of the relative pleasure of three different kinds of life, and his reasoning, granted that pleasures can be compared at all, is perfectly legitimate. Each of the three men pronounces his own life not merely pleasant, but pleasanter than those of the other two: how then are we to decide? Nothing but argument will help us, and the φιλόσοφος is the only one of the triad who possesses that weapon. It should be observed that throughout this part of the discussion Plato takes it for granted that some kinds of pleasure are in point of fact more pleasant than others. At present his object is to discover what these are, but in the argument which is still to come (585 B ff.), he grapples with the metaphysical question—for to him it was a question, not of psychology, but of metaphysics—and attempts to shew that pleasures contain more or less of pleasure according as there is in them more or less of truth.

ἔφαμεν κτλ. The reference is to 582 A. λόγοι means ‘rational arguments,’ ‘reasoning’ (cf. VI 511 B note), and τούτου is of course τοῦ φιλοσόφου, not τοῦ κρίνειν, as Stallbaum thinks.

ἀληθέστατα here and in ἀληθέστατα εἶναι below contains a hint of the theory which is afterwards developed in 585 B ff., where the various kinds of pleasure are shewn to be different in respect of reality and truth.

φιλόνικος . See on 581 B.

ἀνάγκη, ἔφη κτλ. supplies the apodosis to ἐπειδὴ—λόγῳ: cf. supra 577 B note

ὁ κριτὴς κτλ. ὁ κριτής is the φιλόσοφος, as αὐτοῦ in the next sentence shews. There is therefore no reference to 580 B. For πολεμικοῦ Herwerden proposes φιλονίκου, very arbitrarily: see on 582 C. It is worth noting that the conclusion of this argument incidentally furnishes a further reply to the objection raised by Adimantus in IV 419 A ff., viz. that Plato's guardians cannot possibly be happy.

583B - 585A Our third and crowning proof is as follows. All the pleasures except those of the wise (φρόνιμοι) are untrue and impure. We must recognise the existence of three distinct states, viz. Pleasure and Pain, which are positive and opposite, and the Neutral state, which is negative and intermediate. Men frequently identify the intermediate condition with Pleasure; but they are mistaken when they do so, for there are some pleasures, e.g. those of smell, which have a positive character of their own. Now bodily pleasures, so-called, together with the corresponding pleasures of anticipation, are for the most part merely ways of escape from pain, and belong to the neutral state. They are falsely judged pleasant through juxtaposition and contrast with positive Pain.

ff. 9 ταῦτα μὲν κτλ. The political and psychological λόγοι have registered their votes, and it only remains for us to hear the verdict of the metaphysical, to which Plato characteristically assigns the greatest value (καίτοι —πτωμάτων below). See on 577 C. Plato's theory of true or pure and false or impure pleasures reappears in the Philebus. Both dialogues teach (1) that Pleasure consists in πλήρωσις, (2) that the majority of bodily pleasures are not pleasures at all, but only λυπῶν ἀπαλλαγαί, and (3) that there are other—true or pure—pleasures (e.g. smell) which are not preceded or followed by pain. The last generation of scholars mostly placed the Republic after the Philebus. I am inclined to agree with more recent critics in thinking it earlier (see on VI 506 B and Jackson in Journal of Philology XXV pp. 65—82), but the greater degree of elaboration which marks the treatment of this subject in the Philebus may be and has been accounted for on either hypothesis. Aristotle also touches on the question of Mixed and Unmixed Pleasures in Eth. Nic. VII 12. 1152^{b} ff., especially 1152^{b} 35—1153^{a} 7, ib. 15. 1154^{a} 22—^{b} 31 and again in X. 2—5, especially 2. 1173^{a} 22—^{b} 20. The present section is further important in the history of ethics for its clear distinction between the μέση κατάστασις and the two extremes; a distinction already noted by the Cyrenaics (RP^{7}. § 208^{b}) and afterwards adopted by Epicurus (ib. § 380 ff.).

δύο and δὶς refer of course to the two preceding proofs 577 B—580 C and 580 C—583 A.

τὸ δὲ τρίτον κτλ. The libations at banquets (according to the Schol. on Phil. 66 D: cf. also Schol. on Charm. 167 A and on Pind. Isthm. 5. 7 with Hesych. s. v. τρίτος κρατήρ and Pollux VI 15, 100) were offered in the following sequence: (1) to Olympian Zeus and the Olympian gods, (2) to the heroes, (3) to Zeus Soter. Hence the proverb τὸ τρίτον τῷ σωτῆρι, with which Plato sometimes introduces the third or culminating stage in an argument, demonstration, or the like ( Phil. and Charm. ll. cc., Laws III 692 A, Epp. VII 340 A). In the present instance there is also an allusion to the Olympic games, as appears from Ὀλυμπικῶς (‘Olympic-wise’). Stallbaum conjectures that competitors at Olympia were in the habit of making their third libation “non uni tantum Διὶ σωτῆρι, sed sicuti consentaneum fuit, τῷ σωτῆρί τε καὶ τῷ Ὀλυμπίῳ Διί”: but there is no authority for this idea. Is Plato thinking of the πένταθλον, in which it was necessary to win in three (probably leaping, discusthrowing, javelin-throwing) out of the five events in order to obtain the prize (see P. Gardner in J. of H. Studies I p. 217, where the evidence is quoted)? Schneider takes this view: but the words τῶν πτωμάτων below make it clear that the reference is only to wrestling. The point manifestly is, that as in wrestling the third throw decided the contest between two athletes (Schol. on Aesch. Eum. 592 et al.), so here the δίκαιος wins after he has thrice defeated the ἄδικος (cf. also Euthyd. 277 C). I think Ὀλυμπικῶς is intended to suggest that the contest between justice and injustice is the greatest of all moral, as the Olympic was of all physical, παλαίσματα: the victors ζήσουσι τοῦ μακαριστοῦ βίου δ\ν οἱ ὀλυμπιονῖκαι ζῶσι μακαριώτερον (V 465 D note). Compare Phaedr. 256 B τῶν τριῶν παλαισμάτων τῶν ὡς ἀληθῶς Ὀλυμπιακῶν ἓν νενικήκασιν. Plato adds the epithet τῷ Ὀλυμπίῳ de suo: in an Olympic contest Zeus Soter is also in the truest sense Olympian too, although in banquets Zeus Olympius received only the first, and not also the third libation. With similar and even greater emphasis on the word Ὀλυμπίῳ Pindar prays for an Olympic victory for Phylacidas in the words εἴη δὲ τρίτον | σωτῆρι πορσαίνοντας Ὀλυμπίῳ Αἴγιναν κάτα | σπένδειν μελιφθόγγοις ἀοιδαῖς (Isthm. l.c.: see Donaldson ad loc.).

οὐδὲ παναληθὴς ‐‐ καθαρά . In what sense is pleasure said by Plato to be pure and true? It is pure when unadulterated by pain, whether antecedent, present or consequent; and there is also perhaps in Plato's use of the epithet ‘pure’ a relic or hint of the old half ceremonial, half-religious idea of ‘pure from taint’: see App. III and Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 281 ff. al. But in its deepest signification the truth or purity of Pleasure involves the ontological theory that soul and its sustenance (knowledge etc.) have more part in Being and Truth than Body and its food: the spiritual and not the material is the true. See also on 586 E and especially Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II pp. 322—327, where the farther bearings of Plato's theory are admirably traced.

πλὴν τῆς τοῦ φρονίμου . Cf. Phaed. 69 B, C.

ἐσκιαγραφημένη . See on II 365 C. Bodily pleasure is ἐσκιαγραφημένη in the fullest sense of the word, because it depends on contrast and balance of pleasure with pleasure, and pleasure with pain (584 A), just as perspective produces its effect by the contrast of light and shade (586 B). Similarly in Phaed. 69 B Plato hints that the so-called virtue which consists in bartering one bodily pleasure for another is σκιαγραφία τις—καὶ οὐδὲν ὑγιὲς οὐδ’ ἀληθὲς ἔχουσα, and ib. 81 B the soul is said to be γεγοητευμένη ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ σώματος) ὑπό τε τῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν καὶ ἡδονῶν. Cf. also Phil. 44 C αὐτὸ τοῦτο αὐτῆς (sc. τῆς ἡδονῆς) ἐπαγωγὸν γοήτευμα, ἀλλ’ οὐχ ἡδονὴν εἶναι. In each of these passages there is probably a conscious reminiscence of Orphic doctrines: see next note and App. IV.

τῶν σοφῶν alludes, I believe, to Orphic or Pythagorean ascetics, who preached the doctrine σῶμα σῆμα and regarded bodily pleasure as essentially false and impure: see especially Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 121—130, and 161—166. Evidence for this view is given in App. IV, where the other interpretations are also discussed.

καίτοι is hardly ‘et vero’ ‘and surely’ (as Kugler takes it de part. τοί etc. p. 18, comparing Gorg. 452 E, Theaet. 187 C al.), but rather ‘quamquam’ ‘and yet’ (sc. ‘strong as were the other two proofs,’ or the like): “und das wäre doch wohl” Schneider.

τὸ μήτε χαίρειν κτλ. This τρίτη διάθεσις is described in Phil. 32 E ff.: cf. ib. 42 E ff. and Tim. 64 C ff.

μεταξὺ κτλ. : ‘something which is intermediate between these two, a sort of repose of the soul so far as these are concerned.’ Herwerden is fain to cancel either μεταξύ or ἐν μέσῳ: but the fulness of expression is characteristic. See Introd. § 5.

ἡσυχίαν : whereas λύπη and ἡδονή are κινήσεις 583 E.

ἆρ’ οὐ . Three inferior MSS have ἆρ’ οὖν, which is easier; but ἆρ’ οὐ is much more lively, and not more abrupt than e.g. πολεμήσομεν τὸ μετὰ τοῦτο, ὦ Γλαύκων; II 373 E (quoted by Schneider). The stylistic effect is exactly like Lucretius' ‘Nonne vides’ etc.: e.g. II 263 al.

τοῦτο γὰρ κτλ. The argument is as follows. While suffering pain, men are apt to look upon the ἡσυχία from pain as the highest pleasure. Perhaps (suggests Glauco) at such a time the neutral state is in point of fact found positively pleasant and welcome by them. Socrates proceeds to shew (by a reductio ad absurdum proof) that Glauco's suggestion is untenable. ‘In that case,’ he argues, ‘ἡσυχία from pleasure will in like manner be positively painful: and thus the neutral state, which we declared to be between the two extremes, will upon occasions be both, viz. both pleasure and pain.’ Glauco allows that that which is neither cannot become both, and Socrates proceeds: In this instance the ‘both’ is a κίνησις, and the ‘neither’ a ἡσυχία, and lies, as we have seen, between the two: so that it is wrong to identify the absence of pain with pleasure or the absence of pleasure with pain. Hence your suggestion is erroneous: οὐκ ἔστιν ἄρα τοῦτο, ἀλλὰ φαίνεται κτλ. See below on 584 A. The argument is really complete when Glauco says οὔ μοι δοκεῖ, but the words καὶ μὴν τό γε ἡδύ introduce a new reason for refusing to identify ἡσυχία with pleasure or with pain, by explicitly stating for the first time that pleasure and pain are each of them a κίνησις. ἡσυχία and κίνησις are mutually exclusive notions. Cf. Phil. 43 D—44 B, where the reasoning follows nearly the same lines. See also next note.

ἀμφότερα ‐‐ ἡδονή . Does Plato mean that the neutral state will sometimes be both painful and pleasant at one and the same time,—or only at one time painful and at another pleasant? According to Gorg. 497 C ff., in eating when hungry, drinking when thirsty etc., we cease from pain and pleasure simultaneously, so that in such a case the neutral state will appear to be both pleasant and painful. But the rest of the argument does not support this interpretation; and in the corresponding passage of the Philebus (43 D) we have τὸ δὲ μηδέτερα τούτων ἔσθ’ ἡμῖν ὅπως θάτερα γένοιτ’ ἄν. The simpler view should therefore be adopted.

κίνησις . In Pleasure the κίνησις is πλήρωσις, in pain, κένωσις, as is afterwards pointed out (585 A note).

οὐχὶ ‐‐ μέντοι κτλ. See I 339 B note It is safer to construe ὀρθῶς with ἡγεῖσθαι than with ἔστι (as D. and V. translate). Cf. Euthyph. 5 E ταῦτα ὀρθῶς ἂν εἴη οὕτω γιγνόμενα, where ὀρθῶς belongs to γιγνόμενα, or to a γιγνόμενα understood.

οὐκ ἔστιν κτλ. contradicts Glauco's suggestion τοῦτο γὰρ—ἡσυχία 583 D. There is no reality about this (as you suggest): it is only a φάντασμα—the neutral state appearing pleasant by the side of pain, being, in fact, a sort of σκιαγραφία, as we said in 583 B. On γοητεία see 583 B note

αἳ οὐκ ἐκ λυπῶν κτλ. are the so-called ‘pure’ pleasures of Phil. 51 B ff. τὰς περί τε τὰ καλὰ λεγόμενα χρώματα καὶ περὶ τὰ σχήματα καὶ τῶν ὀσμῶν τὰς πλείστας καὶ τὰς τῶν φθόγγων καὶ ὅσα τὰς ἐνδείας ἀναισθήτους ἔχοντα καὶ ἀλύπους τὰς πληρώσεις αἰσθητὰς καὶ ἡδείας, καθαρὰς λυπῶν, παραδίδωσιν. They are never preceded by pain, but may, according to the Philebus, be preceded by κένωσις and ἔνδεια, so long as these are imperceptible; and they are caused by πλήρωσις no less than the pleasures which are called impure, although the πλήρωσις in the case of the pure pleasures is ἀληθεστέρα: cf. 585 B and Tim. 65 A.

ἵνα μὴ πολλάκις κτλ. : ‘in case, perhaps, you should suppose in the present instance’ etc. (sc. as you did in the other 583 D). μὴ πολλάκις is ‘ne forte’ (IV 422 C note), and ἐν τῷ παρόντι refers to the example which Socrates is about to give. Glauco's ποῦ δή asks for an explanation of ἐν τῷ παρόντι, just as ποίας invites Socrates to specify the ἡδονὰς αἳ οὐκ ἐκ λυπῶν εἰσίν. The English translators are in error.

πολλαὶ μὲν κτλ. In spite of this passage and Phil. 51 B ff. Aristotle seems actually to insinuate that Plato made all pleasures conditional on release from pain: see Stewart on Eth. Nic. X 2. 1173^{b} 12 ff.

ὀσμάς . Has Heraclitus' curious fragment (38 Bywater) αἱ ψυχαὶ ὀσμῶνται καθ’ ᾅδην any bearing on this doctrine of the ‘purity’ of smell? If the soul, after it is ‘purified’ from the body by death, still retains this sense, presumably ὀσμὴ is (in Orphic language) ‘pure.’ It is possible enough that Plato's whole theory of ‘pure pleasures’ was suggested by some such early theological notion, though he afterwards developed it in his own way. See however Rohde Psyche^{2} II p. 152 note Aristotle also looks upon smell as a painless pleasure: see Eth. Nic. X 2. 1173^{b} 18 ff. et al.

αἵ γε ‐‐ ἡδοναὶ κτλ. The emphasis is on διὰ τοῦ σώματος. All pleasures belong of course to the soul ( Tim. 64 B); but some come through the body, while others—the pleasures of knowledge, for example, according to Plato—do not (cf. Theaet. 184 E—185 E and generally Phil. 47 D ff.). Most of the former class—smell is an exception— and the greatest among them (τἀφροδίσια Phil. 65 C) are only λυπῶν ἀπαλλαγαί (cf. Phaedr. 258 E, Phil. 45 A—47 B and Arist. Eth. Nic. VII 13. 1153^{a} 33, 15. 1154^{a} 26 ff.), and so ‘mixed’ and unreal: compare the picture of the χαραδριοῦ βίος in Gorg. 494 B ff. The same is true of the purely spiritual pleasures and pains which come from the anticipation of these ‘mixed’ pleasures and pains. On the pleasures and pains of anticipation see Phil. 32 C ff.

προησθήσεις is a Platonic coinage not found elsewhere. The reading προαισθήσεις (Ξ and Vind. B) held its ground till Bekker; but προησθήσεις had already been conjectured by Floyer Sydenham (Lupton in Cl. Rev. II p. 228).

προλυπήσεις : thus for example τὸ πρὸ τῶν λυπηρῶν (sc. ἐλπιζόμενον) is φοβερὸν καὶ ἀλγεινόν (Phil. l. c.). If bodily pleasure is ‘mixed,’ the same must be true of bodily pain: and so the προλυπήσεις as well as the προησθήσεις of anticipation are ‘mixed’ (κατὰ ταὐτὰ ἔχουσιν). Fear for example (which is προσδοκία κακοῦ) is a ‘mixed’ pain: see Phil. 47 E.

νομίζεις κτλ. This is the popular conception of ‘above’ and ‘below’ held also by most of the philosophers, e.g. Heraclitus, the Pythagoreans, Anaxagoras, the Atomists (RP^{7}. §§ 29, 68 A, 124 B notes, 149 B notes), and even Aristotle (Phys. IV 4. 212^{a} 24 ff.), and found also in the Phaedo (109 ff.). In the Timaeus, on the other hand, Plato takes a different and more scientific view: φύσει γὰρ δή τινας τόπους δύο εἶναι διειληφότας διχῇ τὸ πᾶν ἐναντίους τὸν μὲν κάτω,—τὸν δ)ἄνω— οὐκ ὀρθὸν οὐδαμῇ νομίζειν κτλ. (62 C ff.). It is possible (with Solomon Cl. Rev. III p. 418) to construe the divergence as “an incidental proof of the distance separating the Republic from the Timaeus,” especially as the myth in Book X agrees with the view of Above and Below given here: but too much stress should not be laid on the present passage, which is intended only as an illustration and nothing more.

οἴει οὖν ἄν τινα κτλ. Cf. Phaed. 109 C.

εἰ καὶ κτλ. : ‘if men also who are ignorant of truth’ etc. καί sc. like ὁ μὴ ἔμπειρος τοῦ ἀληθινῶς ἄνω τε ὄντος κτλ. in our simile. Three deterioris notae MSS have εἰ καὶ οἱ ἄπειροι, and Hermann conjectures οἱ for καί: but cf. the use of εἰ καί in X 597 A. The article is not necessary, and ought not to be introduced without better MS authority.

πληρώσει prepares the way for the coming argument, in which Pleasure is viewed as πλήρωσις, Pain as κένωσις (cf. Phil. 31 E ff.). So far, we have been told only that they are κινήσεις (583 E).

ὥσπερ δὲ κτλ. The equations are of course Black=Pain, Grey=Absence of Pain, White=Pleasure. Plato's simile is particularly appropriate, because Grey is a mixture of white and black ( Tim. 68 C φαιὸν δὲ λευκοῦ τε καὶ μέλανος sc. κράσει γίγνεται), just as λυπῆς ἀπαλλαγή according to this discussion (584 C al.) may be regarded as a mixture of pleasure and pain (584 C, 586 B), or in other words only a ‘mixed’ pleasure. With the simile itself cf. Arist. Phys. V 1. 224^{b} 34 τὸ φαιὸν λευκὸν πρὸς τὸ μέλαν καὶ μέλαν πρὸς τὸ λευκόν and ib. 5. 229^{b} 16 ff. The best MSS omit δέ after ὥσπερ, and all the MSS have καὶ πρὸς τὸ ἄλυπον οὕτω λύπην instead of καὶ τὸ ἄλυπον οὕτω πρὸς λύπην (see cr. n.), but it is impossible to believe that they are right. On the text and other views of this passage see App. V.

ἔχει . There is slight MS authority for ἔχοι, which Neukirch (in Pl. Pol. quaest. phil. I p. 47) and Richter (Fleck. Jb. 1867 p. 147) approve. ἔχει is sound enough: cf. Prot. 315 E οὐκ ἂν θαυμάζοιμι, εἰ—τυγχάνει ὤν.

585A - 586C Consider the question also in this way. Hunger, thirst etc. are modes of physical depletion; and Ignorance is a form of spiritual emptiness. He who partakes of food, and he who acquires Knowledge or Reason, are each ‘filled’; but which of them is the more truly ‘filled’? Knowledge and its kindred have more reality and truth than Food etc., Soul than Body: hence the acquisition of knowledge is a truer form of replenishment than the other. The resulting Pleasure will therefore be more true. Those who are strangers to wisdom and virtue know nothing of true delights, but fight with one another for delusive and unsatisfying joys.

ὧδέ γ’ οὖν . “In his γε vim acuit vocabuli ὧδε, sed οὖν inservit continuandae argumentationi. Ferri non potest γοῦν, quod ad universam sententiam pertineret, habens illud vim asseverandi cum restrictione quadam” (Stallbaum). Contrast I 335 E, VII 527 D notes Here most of the MSS appear to have γε οὖν .

οὐχὶ πεῖνα καὶ δίψα κτλ. For the sense cf. Phil. 31 E and (in general) VII 519 A, B notes The form πεῖνα (see cr. n.) is supported also by IV 437 D; but πείνη is in itself legitimate and occurs tolerably often in Plato, as Schneider shews.

ἆρ’ οὐ κενότης κτλ. Ignorance, as well as hunger, is κενότης (cf. 584 B note); but whereas we are conscious of physical depletion and therefore suffer pain, we are not—speaking generally— conscious of intellectual depletion, so that Ignorance is not, as a rule, painful; and thus the pleasures of Learning—the πλήρωσις of that whereof Ignorance is the κενότης—not being preceded by pain, are pure. This conclusion is worked out in Phil. 52 A, B, but not here, where the argument takes a different course. On ἴσχω ‘acquire’ ‘get’ see VI 511 D note

τὸ δόξης τε ἀληθοῦς κτλ. So in Phil. 60 D μνήμην καὶ φρόνησιν καὶ ἐπιστήμην καὶ ἀληθῆ δόξαν τῆς αὐτῆς ἰδέας τιθέμενος: cf. also ib. 19 D, 21 A, B, D. These objects are here conceived of as the τροφή of the soul, cf. Phaed. 84 B.

ff. 15 ὧδε δὲ κρῖνε κτλ. The following sentences are among the most perplexing in the whole of the Republic, or indeed in the whole of Plato's writings. That the reading of the MSS is corrupt has been admitted by the majority of critics, and will be proved in App. VI, to which I must refer for a full discussion on the text and interpretation of this difficult passage. Here it is possible only to set down what seems to me, after a review of all the conditions of the problem, the least unsatisfactory solution. The emendation in the text, which I printed in my Text of the Republic, has been approved by a critic in Hermathena XXIV p. 252. We have to discover whether food, drink etc. participate in pure Being more than true opinion, knowledge etc.; and the answer is arrived at by the following steps. (1) Which is more—that which is connected with the ever-like, the immortal and Truth, and which is itself of this nature, and found in something of this nature; or that which is connected with the never-like and mortal, and which is itself of this nature (never-like etc.) and found in something of this nature? That which is connected with the ever-like, says Glauco, is more. (2) Then does the Being of the never-like (ἀεὶ ἀνομοίου= μηδέποτε ὁμοίου) participate in Being at all more than the Being of Knowledge does? Certainly not (οὖν is strictly illative: if it is true that what is connected with the ever-like is more than what is connected with the never-like, then the Being of the never-like cannot be more than Knowledge is—for Knowledge of course ἔχεται τοῦ ἀεὶ ὁμοίου. Knowledge is in short taken as a type of that which ἔχεται τοῦ ἀεὶ ὁμοίου). (3) Or has the Being of the never-like more part in Truth than Knowledge has? To this also the answer is no: [for that which is connected with the ever-like—and Knowledge is so—is connected also with Truth: see above τὸ τοῦ ἀεὶ ὁμοίου ἐχόμενον—καὶ ἀληθείας]. (4) And if it has less part in truth [as it has], it must also have less part in Being. [This deduces from step (3) the conclusion already implied in (2), and also paves the way for οὐκοῦν ὅλως—μετέχει]. (5) Thus—since what is true of Knowledge is true of all the spiritual γένη, [and since food etc. are of course only particular examples of the ἀεὶ ἀνόμοιον or never-like], universally ( ὅλως) those γένη which are concerned with the care of the body have less part in Being and Truth than those which are concerned with the care of the soul. For a further discussion of this passage and other suggested solutions and emendations see App. VI.

τὸ τοῦ ἀεὶ ὁμοίου κτλ . The whole of this passage presupposes, as Grimmelt shews (de reip. Pl. comp. et unit. pp. 74 ff.), the metaphysical theory of V—VII. With τοῦ ἀεὶ ὁμοίου cf. V 479 A and VI 500 C: with ἀθανάτου VI 485 B (ἐκείνης τῆς οὐσίας τῆς ἀεὶ οὔσης): and with καὶ ἀληθείας VI 508 D. The last two words are rejected by Madvig and Baiter on the grounds that (1) we should expect an adjective, (2) καὶ ἀληθείας has no antithesis expressed, whereas ἀεὶ ὁμοίου and ἀθανάτου have: (3) the words unduly anticipate τί δ); ἀληθείας; below. As I understand the passage, the mention of Truth is necessary— see above—just in view of τί δ); ἀληθείας; and there is little weight in Madvig's first two arguments.

καὶ αὐτὸ κτλ. Is καί here and in καὶ αὐτό again below ‘and’ (Schneider) or ‘both’? The first view is perhaps more likely: for it is more in keeping with the somewhat loose structure of the argument throughout this passage, and καί in D below (καὶ αὐτό) is most probably ‘and.’

16, 18 ἐν τοιούτῳ (bis). The soul is of the nature of τὸ ἀεὶ ὅμοιον: see VI 490 B, 508 D, and especially Phaed. 79 A ff.: the body on the other hand is never constant, for like everything material πλανᾶται ὑπὸ γενέσεως καὶ φθορᾶς (VI 485 B).

ἡ οὖν ἀεὶ ἀνομοίου κτλ. These words have already been discussed: but it should here be remarked that the insertion of τοῦ before the adjective (Ast, Madvig etc., both here and in μηδέποτε ὁμοίου above) is not necessary. On the connexion between ἐπιστήμη, οὐσία and ἀλήθεια see especially Theaet. 186 C, D.

σῶμα ‐‐ οὕτως ; ‘And don't you think the same is true of the body itself as compared with the soul?’ For the sense cf. Phaed. 80 B, and with the genitive ψυχῆς 582 C note On this sentence Bosanquet remarks: “The only way to master this conception in its true light is to consider body and mind not as two things (body and soul) on a level or side by side, but, as daily experience really teaches us, under some such point of view as that of part and whole” ( Companion p. 362). This point of view is suggestive, but it is scarcely that of the Republic, in spite of 584 C; and the student will best apprehend Plato's meaning both here and especially in X 608 D ff. if he carry his analysis no further than Plato himself does, and regard soul and body as two distinct and separate entities.

μᾶλλον μᾶλλον . The first μᾶλλον belongs both to τῷ ὄντι (=ὄντως) and to τῶν ὄντων: the second to ὄντως. After the stage of the argument reached in οὐκοῦν—ἧττον ὄν, it would have been enough to write here τὸ τῷ ὄντι πληρούμενον μᾶλλον μᾶλλον ὄντως —ἀληθεῖ, τὸ δὲ ἧττον ὄντως πληρούμενον ἀπιστοτέρας ἂν—μεταλαμβάνοι. Plato characteristically amplifies his conclusion, even at the risk of obscuring the relation between it and the preceding step.

κάτω κτλ. refers to the illustration in 584 D ff. The meaning of μέχρι πάλιν is ‘as far as back again’ sc. to the intermediate point: cf. μέχρι δεῦρο, μέχρι ἐνταῦθα, and other instances of the same usage in Stephanus-Hase Thes. s.v. μέχρι and Kühner-Blass Gr. Gr. II 1 p. 539 f.

πλανῶνται . They are like ‘wanderers’ who have lost the way: cf. the common use of πλανᾶσθαι in the New Testament; e.g. Pet. II 2. 15.

τὸ ἀληθῶς ἄνω refers to 584 D: but the words are intended also to suggest the deeper Platonic use of ‘the true Above,’ where Truth and Pureness dwell: see Phaed. 109 B ff., with VII 514 A note

βοσκημάτων δίκην κτλ. Cf. Tim. 91 E (the heads etc. of brute beasts are εἰς γῆν ἑλκόμενα in sympathy with their earthly souls) and VII 519 A, B notes With κεκυφότες εἰς τραπέζας cf. the description of Syracusan gluttony in the seventh Platonic Epistle 326 B ff. χορταζόμενοι (cf. II 372 D) and ὀχεύοντες are properly used of brute beasts, and therefore suitable after βοσκημάτων δίκην. ἕνεκα τῆς τούτων πλεονεξίας is equivalent to ὥστε τούτων πλέον (sc. than others) ἔχειν .

σιδηροῖς κτλ. The epithet is significant and should be pronounced with emphasis. The horns and hoofs wherewith these human βοσκήματα ‘kick and butt’ are lethal weapons made of iron. Van Leeuwen's conjecture σκληροῖς for σιδηροῖς (Mnem. N. S. XXV Pt 4) only emasculates a fine comparison. J. and C. aptly cite in illustration Aesch. Ag. 1115 ff. ὁπλαῖς may be said “with a glance at ὅπλοις” (J. and C.). War springs from the insatiate desires of the flesh (II 373 E note): hence δἰ ἀπληστίαν.

ἅτε οὐχὶ ‐‐ πιμπλάντες explains ἀπληστίαν. They cannot be ‘filled’ because that part of themselves which they fill is not the real, not the continent part, and that wherewith they fill it is not the real either. Bosanquet aptly compares “Whoso drinketh of this water shall thirst again.” In οὐδὲ τὸ στέγον Plato doubtless has in mind the story of the Danaids, in which the πίθος τετρημένος was interpreted by certain ‘wise men’—probably preachers of the Orphic-Pythagorean way of life: cf. App. IV—as the bottomless or incontinent part of soul: see Gorg. 493 A ff., especially the words τῶν δ’ ἀμυήτων τοῦτο τῆς ψυχῆς, οὗ αἱ ἐπιθυμίαι εἰσί, τὸ ἀκόλαστον αὐτοῦ καὶ οὐ στεγανόν, ὡς τετρημένος εἴη πίθος, διὰ τὴν ἀπληστίαν ἀπεικάσας together with Rohde Psyche^{2} I pp. 326—329. Schneider makes a curious error when he says “τὸ στέγον hic corpus quasi vas animi significare videtur.”

χρησμῳδεῖς refers to the halforacular style of Socrates' description: compare for instance σιδηροῖς κέρασί τε καὶ ὁπλαῖς with the famous ξύλινον τεῖχος in the oracle to the Athenians (Hdt. VII 141—144: see also id. 1 55 al. for more examples).

ἐσκιαγραφημέναις κτλ. See on 583 B. The words ὑπὸ τῆς—ἀποχραινομέναις mean ‘taking their colour from juxtaposition.’ The word ἀποχραίνειν had also a more technical sense (τὸ τὰ χρωσθέντα ἑνοποιεῖν Tim. lex. Pl. s.v. χραίνειν), to which Plato alludes in Laws 769 A.

ὥσπερ κτλ. The many σκιαμαχοῦσι (VII 520 C) like the Trojans fighting for Helen's shadow in the fields of Troy.

Στησίχορος κτλ. See Phaedr. 243 A and Bergk Poet. Lyr. Gr.^{4} III pp. 214 ff. There is no real ground for supposing (with Teichmüller Lit. Fehd. I pp. 113 ff.) that Plato intends an allusion to Isocrates' Helena, in spite of περιμάχητος in Hel. 40 and the reference to Stesichorus ib. 64. Instead of τοῦ ἀληθοῦς Floyer Sydenham conjectured τῆς ἀληθοῦς (see Cl. Rev. II p. 229). It is more like Plato's suggestiveness to say ‘the truth’ than ‘the true Helen,’ which would moreover (as Lupton points out l.c.) rather be τῆς ἀληθινῆς.

586C - 588A The pleasures of anger, unless pursued in conformity with reason, are similarly unreal. We may even venture to say that it is only when obedient to knowledge that the desires of the two lower parts of soul can attain those pleasures which are in the highest sense their own and true—so far as it is possible for them to have true pleasures at all. Now the tyrannical desires are farthest from reason, so that the tyrant has least pleasure. By an elaborate calculation it is shewn that the king lives seven-hundred and twenty-nine times more pleasantly than the tyrant; and if the just man so far surpasses the unjust in respect of pleasure, how much greater will be his transcendence in beauty and virtue!

ἕτερα τοιαῦτα κτλ. The satisfaction of τὸ θυμοειδές is also no true pleasure, but only λύπης ἀπαλλαγή. See Phil. 47 E. αὐτὸ τοῦτο means τὸ τοῦ θυμοειδές. The verb διαπράττηται is used as in IV 440 D οὐ λήγει τῶν γενναίων, πρὶν ἂν ἢ διαπράξηται ἢ κτλ. φιλοτιμίαν, φιλονικίαν and δυσκολίαν (‘ill temper’ cf. III 411 C) are particular forms of the principle which Plato calls τὸ θυμοειδές. Each of them is a κενότης and painful. The κενότης is filled, as the case may be, by τιμή, νίκη, or θυμός (indulgence in anger): hence πλησμονὴν τιμῆς κτλ. On the spelling φιλονικίαν, which the present passage, like others in Plato, clearly points to, see 581 B note

ἄνευ λογισμοῦ τε καὶ νοῦ is emphatic, and prepares us for θαρροῦντες λέγωμεν κτλ., where Plato concedes after all a certain measure of reality and truth to the pleasures of the two lower parts of soul, provided they act in obedience to reason. That the φιλοκερδές should in any degree whatsoever participate in true pleasure, has been judged inconsistent with the previous argument (Krohn Pl. St. pp. 227 ff.), but is not so, if we fully appreciate the restrictions which Plato makes (cf. Grimmelt de reip. comp. et unit. p. 76), and also remember that in the perfect city, which is the counterpart of the perfect soul, the lower orders found their truest pleasure in working for the common welfare under reason as embodied in the Guardians. The gist of the present passage is well expressed by Nettleship, who in his Lectures and Remains II p. 331 remarks “that in the most trivial satisfaction there may be a sense of serving something wider and higher than animal appetite: that this gives to the satisfaction of appetite a permanence and a satisfactoriness which by itself it cannot have.” Appetite, in short, behaves like a loyal citizen of the πολιτεία ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ. Cf. IV 443 D, E.

αἳ μὲν κτλ. The antithesis is supplied in a different form by ὅταν δὲ κτλ. 587 A. Instead of ἑπομένων in line 29 Stephanus read ἑπόμεναι, without MS authority: but cf. (with Schneider) ὡς ἄμεινον ὂν παντὶ ὑπὸ θείου καὶ φρονίμου ἄρχεσθαι, μάλιστα μὲν οἰκεῖον ἔχοντος ἐν αὑτῷ κτλ. 590 D. See note ad loc.

τὸ βέλτιστον ‐‐ οἰκειότατον . Cf. Arist. Eth. Nic. X chapter 7 ad finem δόξειε δ’ ἂν καὶ εἶναι ἕκαστος τοῦτο (sc. τὸ κράτιστον τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ), εἴπερ τὸ κύριον καὶ ἄμεινον κτλ. The whole of the latter portion of that famous chapter, in which Aristotle comes nearer to the spirit of Plato than anywhere else throughout his writings, might be summed up in the pregnant saying τὸ βέλτιστον ἑκάστῳ, τοῦτο καὶ οἰκειότατον—a saying which reaches to the very foundations of Plato's philosophy: for if that which is best for each thing, is also most its own—most truly akin to it, part of its very being,—it follows that each thing truly is just in proportion as it is good. In other words the cause of all existence is the Good; see on VI 505 D, 509 B.

τῷ φιλοσόφῳ κτλ. τῷ φιλοσόφῳ is of course neuter, and not masculine. With μὴ στασιαζούσης κτλ. cf. IV 441 D— 444 A. Soul attains its true unity (so far as is possible in this life: see on X 611 B) when the two lower ‘parts’ obey the highest; only then does a man become εἷς ἐκ πολλῶν (IV 443 E note). δικαίῳ εἶναι: i.e. according to the definition of Justice in Book IV l.c.

μήτε ‐‐ ἀναγκάζειν κτλ. : as in the eloquent picture of the λογιστικόν and the θυμοειδές, seeking for pleasures to lay at the feet of the φιλοχρήματον VIII 553 C, D. Cf. also infra 590 B. For μήτε—τε see IV 430 B note

ὁ δέ : viz. ὁ βασιλεύς. It is unnecessary to insert βασιλεύς in the text, as Baiter wishes to do: cf. 1 349 D note

ὅσῳ ἀηδέστερον κτλ. Plato loved to play with mathematics, and in the following passage he endeavours to give an arithmetical expression to the pleasures of justice and injustice. His motive in introducing this “hedonistic calculus,” as Bosanquet calls it, has been much discussed. The following considerations deserve attention. (1) On artistic grounds, now that the argument has been concluded, it is not inappropriate that Justice and Injustice, represented by the King and the Tyrant, should as it were be weighed in the balance. The importance of ἀριθμεῖν, μετρεῖν, ἱστάναι is constantly present to Plato's mind. See on X 602 D. (2) The Pythagoreans were in the habit of expressing virtues and other immaterial ideas in terms of numbers (see Zeller^{5} I pp. 389 ff.), and there is reason to suppose that the number 729 played a part in a Pythagorean calendar (588 A note). Some of the terms employed by Plato, such as τρίτη αὔξη, are also in all probability of Pythagorean origin. See App. I to Book VIII pp. 279 ff. (3) The arithmetical method of calculation enables Plato to set forth in a very striking and dramatic way his own dissent from the popular estimate of the tyrant's happiness (Schneider). (4) When all is said we must allow that some of the steps are arbitrary, and that Plato's main object is to reach the significant number 729, so as to indicate that the king has more pleasure than the tyrant every day and every night of his life. There is of course an element of playfulness in the episode, and we need not suppose that Plato set any particular store by his calculations: but neither ought we on the other hand to dismiss the whole reckoning as a meaningless and foolish jest. See also on VIII 545 C.

τριῶν ἡδονῶν κτλ. The three pleasures are those of the king, the timocrat, and the oligarch. The first variety is genuine, the second and third spurious: but the tyrant has ‘crossed the line into the region beyond the spurious,’ i.e. his pleasures represent a still lower depth (see 571 B ff.), being in fact only εἴδωλα twice removed of the oligarch's spurious pleasures (587 C). Schleiermacher made τῶν νόθων depend partitively on τὸ ἐπέκεινα (“so ist der Tyrann auf die jenseitige der unächten hinübergestiegen”). This view is linguistically defensible (cf. Phaed. 112 B), and even attractive at first sight; but τῶν νόθων must be interpreted by δυοῖν νόθαιν, and δυοῖν νόθαιν certainly does not include the tyrant's species of pleasure. The feminine dual ending ‐ᾳιν (instead of the commoner ‐οιν) is “magis elatioris quam vulgaris sermonis” (Roeper de dual. us. Pl. p. 6). Cf. IV 422 E note

δορυφόροις ἡδοναῖς . These are described in 573 D ff.

οὐδὲ should not be taken with εἰπεῖν. The hyperbaton is too difficult, and the meaning (“not even to express it” J. and C.) weak. We should translate ‘and it isn't very easy, either, to say’ etc., taking οὐδέ as ‘also not,’ a usage illustrated by Riddell Digest § 141. See on οὐδὲ θαμίζεις κτλ. I 328 C.

ὁ τύραννος . We might expect ὁ τυραννικός, but throughout the whole of this comparison Plato is content to take the tyrant—who is, we remember, τυραννικώτατος 575 D—as the type of the tyrannical, and the king as the type of the kingly or aristocratic man. See above on 587 B and also below 587 E note

οὐκοῦν καὶ ἡδονῆς κτλ. If the tyrant is third from the oligarch, his pleasure will also be, in respect of truth, third from the oligarch's, i.e. will be an image of an image (τρίτῳ εἰδώλῳ cf. X 597 E and 599 A, D) of the oligarch's pleasure.

ἐὰν εἰς ταὐτὸν κτλ. See on IV 445 D.

τριπλασίου ἄρα κτλ. The distance of the tyrant from true pleasure is measured first ἀριθμῷ, i.e. “numero seu secundum longitudinem, numerus enim omnis quatenus monadibus constat, lineae instar habendus” (Schneider III p. LXXXXV. See also for ἀριθμῷ VII 526 C note and cf. the expression γραμμικὸς ἀριθμὸς in

Nicom. Introd. Ar. p. 117 Ast. Relatively to themselves, we reckoned the oligarch, democrat, and tyrant, as 1, 2, 3; but we have since found that the distance of the oligarch from true pleasure is in reality 3 times I: hence that of the tyrant must be 3 times 3, as in the line AB. We should doubtless regard the intervening numbers (4, 5, and 7, 8) as indicating different stages in the gradual degeneration of the oligarch into the democrat (559 D ff.) and the democrat into the tyrant or tyrannical man (572 D ff.). It might seem more natural to make the distance of the tyrant from true pleasure 5 and not 9 (King 1, Timocrat 2, Oligarch 3, Democrat 4, Tyrant 5); but (as Schneider reminds us) the pleasures of the Democrat and Tyrant lie beyond the two spurious pleasures, so that the modulus of progression may reasonably be increased. Plato's chief object is however to reach the number 729, and he could not do so except by making a fresh departure with the oligarch.

ἐπίπεδον ἄρα κτλ. The number 9 is ἐπίπεδος, because=3 x 3: εἰσὶ δὲ τῶν ἀριθμῶν οἱ μὲν ἐπίπεδοι, ὅσοι ὑπὸ δύο ἀριθμῶν πολλαπλασιάζονται, οἷον μήκους καὶ πλάτους· τούτων δὲ οἱ μὲν τρίγωνοι, οἱ δὲ τετράγωνοι κτλ. (Theo. Smyrn. p. 31 Hiller. Cf. Gow Gk Math. p. 69 and Müller in Hermes 1870 p. 394 note 1). This explanation, which so far agrees with that of the Scholiast, is adopted by the English translators and editors; but Schneider (l.c. and on p. 313 of his translation) holds that ἐπίπεδον κτλ. invites us to raise to the second power not 3, but 9—the number which we are presently expected to raise to the third power. The inferential ἄρα seems to me in favour of the Scholiast's view, as well as κατὰ τὸν τοῦ μήκους ἀριθμόν (cf. κατὰ τὸ μῆκος in Theo p. 31 al.), an expression which corresponds to ἀριθμῷ in the previous sentence while at the same time preparing us for κατὰ δὲ δύναμιν καὶ τρίτην αὔξην in the next. The whole sentence is, I believe, only a way of saying that, if the tyrant is 3 x 3 degrees distant from true pleasure, his εἴδωλον of pleasure may be represented by 9. The use of the mathematical term ἐπίπεδον has a playful effect, both in itself and also because it sounds wilful and eccentric to express a number of one ‘increase’ (τὸν τοῦ μήκους ἀριθμόν) in terms of two. δύναμις= δευτέρα αὔξη: cf. Tim 54 B and Cantor Gesch. d. Mathem. p. 178. The first increase (viz. of the unit or point) was ὁ τοῦ μήκους ἀριθμός, i.e. in this case (1 x 9=) 9: by the second-and-third increases (on the same scale) we obtain 9 x 9 (second increase or δύναμις) x 9 (third increase or τρίτη αὔξη)=729. See App. I to Book VIII p. 279. Schneider's erroneous idea that the squaring of 9 has already been alluded to in ἐπίπεδον—εἴη leads him to take δύναμιν as merely ‘power’ and τρίτην αὔξην as “per epexegesin ad δύναμιν additum.” What motive induced Plato to cube the distance? Was it something purely fanciful, e.g. “in order to gauge the depth of the tyrant's misery” (J. and C.), or because the king and the tyrant are themselves solid creatures (cf. Arist. Quint. de Mus. III p. 89. 35 Jahn)? I think not. He probably intended to suggest that “the degradation proceeds by increasingly wide intervals” (Bosanquet), but the actual calculations are inspired by a desire to reach the total 729. See on 588 A.

μεταστρέψας : ‘conversely’ (“umgekehrt” Schneider).

ἀμήχανον κτλ. I do not think there can be any doubt that Schneider is right in retaining καταπεφόρηκας, which is found in all the best and also in a majority of the inferior MSS. The word has reference to the gigantic and tempestuous numeral ἐννεακαιεικοσικαιεπτακοσιοπλασιάκις, which Socrates has by a mighty effort of exspiration—γηγενεῖ φυσήματι—hurled down upon his hearers' heads. Cf. generally Theaet. 180 A and Ar. Frogs 822—825. καταφορεῖν “contentionem vocis ad praelongum vocabulum numeri a Socrate prolati adhibendam significare potest; nec multum ab hoc abludit illa καταφορά, quam oratoribus esse inter accusandum longiorem spiritus productionem ex Hermogene refert vetus lexicon apud Stephanum Thes. T. IIII p. 109 C” (Schneider). See StephanusHase Thes. s.v., and also on καταφορικός, where the words ἀδιόριστον τέθεικε τὸν ἀντιλέγοντα, ἵνα μετὰ ἀδικίας καταφορικῷ χρώμενος λόγῳ σφόδρα πλήξῃ τοὺς ἀκούοντας are quoted from Chrysost. X p. 386 C. The reading καταπεφώρακας is much less dramatic and appropriate, and has very little MS authority (Ξ^{2}, v and two other MSS, in one of which it is only a correction).

τοῦ τε δικαίου ‐‐ ἀδίκου . These words might have been dispensed with, and accordingly Herwerden brackets them. But the point at issue, as originally raised in Book II, was the relation between Justice and Injustice, not the relation between the King and the Tyrant: and before giving his final answer, Plato does well to remind us that the King and the Tyrant are only types of Justice and Injustice. Cf. ὁ ἀγαθὸς— ἄδικον just below.

προσήκοντά γε κτλ. 729 is twice 364 1/2, and Philolaus counted 364 1/2 days, and presumably therefore 364 1/2 nights in the year (Censor. de die nat. 19). This explains ἡμέραι καὶ νύκτες. It is not so obvious in what way the number 729 is related to months. On this subject J. and C. remark “12 months in a year: 30 + 1/3 days in a month: 12 x (30 + 1/3)= 364: 2 x 364 1/2=729.” I can see no point in such a calculation. Susemihl on the other hand reminds us that Philolaus believed in a so-called great year of 729 months, and as Plato is following Philolaus in ἡμέραι καὶ νύκτες, we may reasonably suppose that he does so in the rest of the passage, so that καὶ μῆνες will be a reference to Philolaus' great year. See Sus. Gen. Entw. II p. 244 note 3, and on the subject of Philolaus' year of 729 months Zeller^{5} I p. 428 note 3. I have as yet found no evidence for supposing that Philolaus went a step farther and postulated a yet greater year of 729 ordinary years, but the words καὶ ἐνιαυτοί in Plato make it probable that he did so. On this supposition the full explanation of προσήκοντα—ἐνιαυτοί will be

days and nights=1 year.

months =1 great year.

years =1 greatest year.

The general upshot is that the king is happier than the tyrant every day and every night of his life, rather than (as Bosanquet suggests) that “one day of the good life is worth a year of the bad”; “a day in thy courts is better than a thousand.”

πλέον . See cr. n. πλέον and not πλεῖον is the classical form, though both πλέονι and πλείονι were admissible (Meisterhans^{3} p. 152). The diphthong ει (in A^{2} Π etc.) may therefore be held to favour the reading πλείονι, which I formerly adopted; but the dative is undeniably awkward, and it is better to acquiesce in πλέον: cf. τοσοῦτον ἡδονῇ νικᾷ above.

588A - 589B We are now in a position to refute the thesis that Injustice combined with a reputation for Justice is profitable for him who is unjust. The soul may be likened to a composite creature —part bestial, part leonine, part human, —wearing the outward semblance of humanity. He who maintains that Injustice profits a man, holds that it is profitable to starve the human element and make strong the rest, and encourage strife and sedition within the soul. The advocate of Justice on the other hand asserts that the human element should have the mastery and bring the others into harmony with one another and itself.

ἦν δέ που λεγόμενον . The reference is to II 361 A ff. For αὐτῷ C. Schmidt conjectured αὖ οὕτω, which I too hastily adopted in my edition of the text. Glauco and Adimantus are careful in Book II to disclaim the views which they expound; and after ἦν δέ που λεγόμενον it is easy to refer αὐτῷ to the hypothetical person (not necessarily Thrasymachus in particular: see II 358 C and 367 A) for whom they speak: cf. ὁ ἐκεῖνα λέγων presently and ὁ περὶ τοῦ τοιούτου λόγου λέγων (II 360 D), as well as φήσει λογιζόμενος (ib. 366 A). See also on 590 A.

εἰκόνα πλάσαντες κτλ. Cf. Tim. 69 D—70 E and the picture of the soul in Phaedr. 246 A, 253 D ff. We are told by Clement (Strom. II 20, 1058 C Migne) that Basilides compared man to a wooden horse, peopled by a host of different spirits. The underlying idea of Plato's similitude is that man is a compound of the mortal and the immortal, standing midway between corruptibility and incorruptibility: θνητῆς καὶ ἀθανάτου φύσεως μεθόριον (Philo de mund. opif. 46). In the noble lines of George Herbert:

“To this life things of sense

Make their pretence:

In th' other Angels have a right by birth:

Man ties them both alone,

And makes them one,

With th' one hand touching heav'n, with th' other earth.

In soul he mounts and flies,

In flesh he dies.

He wears a stuffe whose thread is coarse and round,

But trimm'd with curious lace,

And should take place

After the trimming, not the stuffe and ground.”

Nettleship (Lect. and Rem. II p. 333) justly observes “that it was no mere figure of speech with Plato to represent these psychical tendencies in man as animals, for he clearly believed that there was continuity between the different forms in which life appears; that somehow or other souls rose and fell in the scale of being according as they behaved in each form in which they were embodied; and that there was a real identity between certain elements in man's soul and certain elements in other organic creatures.” See X 618 B ff., Phaed. 81 E ff.

Χιμαίρας κτλ. The Scholiast thus explains: ἡ Χίμαιρα τὸ εἶδός ἐστι ‘πρόσθε λέων, ὄπιθεν δὲ δράκων, μέσση δὲ Χίμαιρα’—Σκύλλα δὲ—πρόσωπον ἔχουσα καὶ στέρνα γυναικός, ἐκ λαγόνων δὲ κυνῶν κεφαλὰς ἓξ καὶ πόδας δώδεκα—εἶχε δὲ οὗτος (Κέρβερος) τρεῖς μὲν κυνῶν κεφαλάς, οὐρὰν δὲ δράκοντος, κατὰ νώτου δὲ παντοίων ὄφεων εἷχε κεφαλάς .

καὶ ἄλλαι τινὲς κτλ. : e.g. Hippocentaurs, Gorgons, Pegasus ( Phaedr. 229 D). The relatival is succeeded by an independent sentence, as often (II 357 B note).

θηρίου ‐‐ πολυκεφάλου . Cf. Phaedr. 230 A θηρίον—Τυφῶνος πολυπλοκώτερον καὶ μᾶλλον ἐπιτεθυμμένον, Tim. 70 E (the ἐπιθυμητικόν as a θρέμμα ἄγριον) and Arist. Pol. Γ 16. 1287^{a} 30 ἥ τε γὰρ ἐπιθυμία τοιοῦτον (viz. θηρίον). For the epithet ποικίλου see VIII 557 C, 561 E and πολυειδίαν in 580 D.

ἡμέρων δέ . Madvig would write ἡμέρων τε: but ἡμέρων—ἀγρίων is loosely treated as a new point in the description, although it only elaborates and explains πολυκεφάλου, and δέ does not balance the preceding μέν. So also J. and C.

μέγιστον ‐‐ τὸ πρῶτον . The ἐπιθυμητικόν is the largest part of soul: see IV 442 A and II 379 C note

σύναπτε τοίνυν κτλ. Krohn finds fault with Plato for failing to preserve the essential unity of the individual throughout this comparison (Pl. St. p. 229). But, according to Plato, the true unity of the individual is realised only through the subjection of the two lower ‘parts’ of soul to the highest (586 E note); and this subjection is described in 589 A, B.

τοῦ ἀνθρώπου . “The genitive,” say the Oxford editors, “may be governed by ἐγκρατέστατος or may be taken partitively with ὁ ἐντὸς ἄνθρωπος.” The former is the correct view. Stephanus suggested ἐγκρατέστερος: but “quum tria sint quae de imperio contendant, superlativus recte habet” (Schneider). ὁ ἐντὸς ἄνθρωπος has been compared with Paul's ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος in Rom. 7. 22: cf. also Eph. 3. 16.

ἐπιμελήσεται . The subject is of course still ὁ ἐντὸς ἄνθρωπος, and therefore no comma should be placed after ἐγκρατέστατος. Jowett's translation “He should watch over” etc. is very misleading.

ὥσπερ γεωργός clearly belongs to the following clause, not, as supposed by Stallbaum and the other editors except Schneider, to that which goes before. Cf. IV 419 A note For the illustration cf. Euthyph. 2 D.

ξύμμαχον κτλ. The θυμοειδές is the natural ally of the λογιστικόν: see IV 440 E ff.

589B - 591A The panegyrist of Justice is thus victorious on every count. His opponent will surrender when he understands that Virtue subjects the bestial to the human, nay rather to the element of God within us, while of Vice the opposite is true. Shall it profit a man to take gold unjustly and make his soul a slave? We may also define intemperance, selfwill, discontent, cowardice, servility and meanness, and the vulgarity which we associate with mechanical pursuits, in terms of our comparison. The better must rule the worse—such is our principle, and it is in harmony with the aims both of law and of the government of children.

οὐδὲν ὑγιές . We ought not to supply λέγει: for οὐδὲν ὑγιὲς ψέγει is itself idiomatic for οὐδὲν ὑγιὲς ψέγων λέγει (Schneider).

οὐ γὰρ ἑκὼν ἁμαρτάνει : according to the usual Socratic view: see II 382 A note

μᾶλλον δὲ ‐‐ θείῳ . “Both Plato and Aristotle thought that there was in human nature a certain imperfect presence of God, and that it was this divine presence, however small, which made it specifically human nature” (Nettleship Lect. and Remains II p 334). Cf. VI 501 B note with Tim. 90 A ff. (man is a φυτὸν οὐκ ἔγγειον, ἀλλ’ οὐράνιον) and Arist. Eth. Nic. X 7. 1177^{b} 30 ff. The doctrine of a θεῖόν τι ἐν ἡμῖν was by no means new to Greek philosophical and religious thought (see Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 121, 184 ff., 207 ff.), but Plato gave it a far deeper meaning than it ever had before.

δουλούμενα is bracketed by Herwerden, who suggests as an alternative the omission of ὑπό before τῷ ἀγρίῳ. Neither change should be adopted: cf. ὑπὸ τῷ ἀθεωτάτῳ—δουλοῦται 589 E.

ἐάν μοι ‐‐ πείθηται . ‘If he takes my advice, he will.’ ἐμοί, which I once read (with Stobaeus Flor. 9. 65, W. H. Thompson, Baiter)—‘if he takes my advice’—is certainly more pointed; but there is no real ground for deserting the MSS, and the unemphatic pronoun is quieter and, as it seems to me, more in keeping with the general spirit of this ‘gentle exhortation’ (πείθωμεν τοίνυν αὐτὸν πράως 589 C).

λαμβάνων τὸ χρυσίον κτλ. On the construction see I 351 B note For the structure of the sentence beginning εἰ μὲν λαβὼν κτλ. cf. I 336 E note

εἰς ἀγρίων ‐‐ ἀνδρῶν : sc. δουλείαν or the like (supplied from ἐδουλοῦτο) rather than οἰκίαν, which J. and C. supply. Cf. IV 425 A note and for the genitive VIII 569 C.

Ἐριφύλη . Hom. Od. XI 326 f. Μαῖράν τε Κλυμένην τε ἴδον στυγερήν τ’ Ἐριφύλην, | ἣ χρυσὸν φίλου ἀνδρὸς ἐδέξατο τιμήεντα.

ὑπὲρ ἐκείνου . See 588 B note Glauco will speak for the champions of Injustice in their surrender as well as in their attack.

τὸ δεινόν, τὸ μέγα κτλ. “Socrates quasi monstrum conspicatus, quod τὸ δεινὸν θρέμμα appellaturus erat, denuo descriptionem eius incipit et per asyndeton horridulam orationem facit” (Schneider). The asyndeton has a highly rhetorical effect: see the remarks of Longinus on rhetorical asyndeton combined with ἀναφορά and διατύπωσις (‘vivid description’) in his περὶ ὕψους 20. Jowett and Campbell understand τὸ δεινόν substantively (‘the dangerous thing, viz. that great beast’)—a most improbable view, as it appears to me. On the other hand, Stallbaum, writing τὸ δεινὸν τὸ μέγα κτλ. without any comma, compares Crat. 398 B ἔν γε τῇ ἀρχαίᾳ τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ φωνῇ and other passages, none of which is parallel except (in some respects) Soph. O. R. 806 κἀγὼ τὸν ἐκτρέποντα, τὸν τροχηλάτην | παίω δἰ ὀργῆς, and there a comma is required. We certainly should not (with Stephanus and Ast) read τὸ δεινὸν καὶ τὸ μέγα κτλ.

ὀφεῶδες . The serpentine element has not hitherto been mentioned, but (as Schleiermacher points out, Platons Staat p. 609) may well be included in τὰ περὶ τὸν λέοντα 588 E. It symbolizes some meaner forms of the θυμοειδές which cannot well be attributed to the king of beasts, e.g. δυσκολία (III 411 C), perfidiousness etc. Cf. Theogn. 601 f. ἔρρε, θεοῖσίν τ’ ἐχθρὲ καὶ ἀνθρώποισιν ἄπιστε | ψυχρὸν ὃς ἐν κόλπῳ ποικίλον εἶχες ὄφιν. Clement (Strom. IV 3. 1225 B Migne) is thinking of the Old Testament when he says ὄφις ὁ ἀπατεών, but the idea is also Greek. It should also be remarked that expansions and amplifications like the addition of ὀφεῶδες in this passage are characteristic of the style of Plato: cf. for example Theaet. 147 A, B and 161 C. The emendation ὀχλῶδες, which Nettleship appears to favour (Lect. and Remains II p. 335), is excessively weak, and would moreover refer not to the θυμοειδές, but to the ἐπιθυμητικόν (cf. τῷ ὀχλώδει θηρίῳ below). It seems to me clear both from λεοντῶδες and from αὐτοῦ τούτου below that at present Plato is thinking only of the θυμοειδές and its degenerate kinds. We must therefore beware of referring ὀφεῶδες to τοὺς φιληδόνους, τοὺς γαστρὶ καὶ αἰδοίοις δουλεύοντας (Clement's interpretation of Matt. 3. 7: see Strom. IV 16. 1308 A).

τρυφὴ δὲ καὶ μαλθακία κτλ. Cf. III 411 A, B. On πίθηκον see X 620 C note

βαναυσία . See on VI 495 D.

δύνηται has been suspected by Stephanus, Ast, and Herwerden. The word could well be spared, but, as it is in all the MSS, was read by Stobaeus (Flor. 9. 67) and is not in itself an error, we are hardly justified in resorting to excision. The subjunctive depends of course on ὅταν, and καί connects δύνηται with ἔχῃ. By reading τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ (not αὑτῷ) θρεμμάτων, and making τὸ τοῦ βελτίστου εἶδος the subject to δύνασθαι and θεραπεύειν, Schneider makes it rather easier to refer δύνηται to ὅταν τις: but on the whole it is more natural to retain αὑτῷ and make the subject of δύνασθαι the same as that of δύνηται, viz. the individual himself. Even at the cost of a little awkwardness, Plato prefers to make the sentiment expressed by καὶ τὰ θωπεύματα —μανθάνειν co-ordinate with, rather than a consequence of, ὅταν τις ἀσθενὲς κτλ. For the imagery of the sentence cf. (with J. and C.) VI 493 A ff.

ἵνα καὶ κτλ. is Plato's justification for assigning the farmers and artisans to a dependent position in his city. For the syntax of ὑπὸ ὁμοίου—οἵουπερ see III 402 A note

ὥσπερ Θρασύμαχος ᾤετο . See I 343 A ff.

μάλιστα μὲν κτλ. A profounder and truly Platonic form of Hesiod's famous saying οὗτος μὲν πανάριστος ὃς αὐτὸς πάντα νοήσῃ, | ἐσθλὸς δ’ αὖ κἀκεῖνος ὃς εὖ εἰπόντι πίθηται (OD. 293 f., as quoted by Arist. Eth. Nic. I 2. 1095^{b} 10). Instead of οἰκεῖον ἔχοντος ἐν αὑτῷ Madvig proposes to read οἰκείου ἐνόντος ἐν αὐτῷ. The emendation is neat and gets rid of the difficulty both in ἔχοντος and in ἐφεστῶτος: but ἔχοντος ἐν αὑτῷ appropriately recalls ἔχοντος ἐν αὑτῷ above, and the genitive absolute may be compared with ἀποκριναμένου VII 538 D, ἑπομένων 586 D and δοκιμασθέντων Laws 755 D. (Badham's δοκιμασθέντας is of course only a conjecture.) Cf. Riddell Digest § 274.

ἐφεστῶτος is another independent genitive absolute. The double peculiarity is certainly unusual. Stephanus obliterates first one, and then both by suggesting (1) ἐφεστῶτα, and (2) ἔχοντι— ἐφεστώς (intended, I suppose, as neuter, but the neuter should be ἐφεστός: see Schanz Vol. II p. XII). I believe the text is sound: there is hardly any limit— except that required by intelligibility—to Plato's rapid changes of construction, and they are especially common with participles. See VI 488 D note with Engelhardt Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 45.

βούλεται κτλ. See cr. n. The reading βούλεται is found also in v, Flor. R, Flor. T, Stobaeus (Flor. 9. 67) and Iamblichus (Protrept. 88 p. 33 Pistelli). βουλεύεται, which Schneider and Hermann, following the best MSS, still retain, is much less suitable, and the corruption is easy and tolerably frequent: cf. (with Schneider) Phil. 35 D and 50 E, “ubi βουλεύεσθαι et βουλεύομαι pro βούλεσθαι et βούλομαι in quibusdam scriptum est.” Plato means that the purpose, intention or meaning of Law is that the better should rule the worse, and we may fairly appeal to the witness of Law on such a subject, for Law does not, as Thrasymachus argued (I 343 C), hold a brief for ὁ κρείττων, but is the ally of every class and individual in the city without exception, πᾶσι τοῖς ἐν τῇ πόλει ξύμμαχος. Law is “the ally of everybody in the community without distinction, because the ally of that which is best in him” (Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II p. 336).

ἀντικαταστήσωμεν κτλ. : sc. as a counterpart or substitute for our own βέλτιστον (τῷ παρ’ ἡμῖν τοιούτῳ), by which he has hitherto been guided. Madvig's conjecture ὄντι καταστήσωμεν is both unnecessary and inelegant. On the singular αὐτῷ in spite of the plural παίδων see I 347 A note

591A - 592B It is also better for him who is guilty of Injustice to be detected and punished than to escape. The wise man will honour those studies which promote the welfare of his soul, and the same great object will be his guiding principle in all that appertains to the body and its state, as well as to the acquisition of riches and honours. Will he take part in political life? Perhaps not in the land of his birth, but in his own true city assuredly he will. It may be that the perfect city is an ensample laid up in Heaven for him who would plant a city in his soul.

ἀδικεῖν ‐‐ ποιεῖν . It is more natural and better in point of literary effect to make the infinitives coordinate (with the English translators) than to suppose (with Schneider) that ἢ—ἤ is ‘either—or’ and ἀκολασταίνειν and τι αἰσχρὸν ποιεῖν intended as different species of the genus ἀδικία.

πῇ δ’ ἀδικοῦντα κτλ. It was maintained in II 361 A ff., 365 C ff. that Injustice could evade detection and punishment. So much the worse, says Socrates, for the sinner, who thereby forfeits his only chance of reformation, since Punishment is the appointed cure for Vice. It may be doubted whether so humane a view altogether corresponded to the actual administration of the Athenian or any other State; but to an idealist like Plato ‘is’ means ‘should be,’ and in so far as human laws fulfil their true function by reflecting the divine ordinances, we may truly say that punishment is remedial. See on the whole subject II 380 B note

ἀπεργάσεται κτλ. Editors rightly abandon the present ἀπεργάζεται (see cr. n.) as indefensible. ζήσει is condemned by Cobet (V. L.^{2} p. 610) as an interpolation, but some verb is needed, and Cobet himself allows that “ ζήσω apud Atticos semel et iterum comparet” (e.g. V 465 D, Ar. Plut. 263 and Fr. 498 Dindorf). ζώσει (see cr. n.) can hardly be maintained in Plato, though not, apparently, unknown in Ionic: see Kühner-Blass Gr. Gr. I 2, p. 436. The erroneous ζῴη is clearly due to a misunderstanding of οὐχ ὅπως (non modo non).

ἀλλ’ ἀεὶ κτλ. With the sentiments cf. III 410 A ff., VI 498 B note On φανεῖται see cr. n. If we retain φαίνηται, as I formerly did, with J. and C., Schneider and the early editions, the conjunctive is parallel to the future ἔσται, both depending on ὅπως: cf. (with Schneider) Tim. 18 E μηχανᾶσθαι κλήροις τισίν, ὅπως— ξυλλήξονται, καὶ μή τις αὐτοῖς ἔχθρα— γίγνηται. A few additional examples are cited by Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 893 note 5. In this instance, however, φαίνηται is particularly awkward, and may easily be a corruption of φανεῖται, under the influence of the preceding ἐάν. q has φαίνοιτο, which doubtless springs from the same misunderstanding which produced the corruption ζῴη for ζήσει in C. φανεῖται is adopted also by Ast, Stallbaum, and a reviewer of my Text of the Republic in Hermathena XXIV p. 256. We must understand the clause as still under the government of ὅπως, and not as independent; otherwise the verb becomes otiose, as it is in fact regarded by Hermann, Stallbaum and Baiter, all of whom bracket it.

ἐάνπερ ‐‐ μουσικὸς εἶναι . Cf. IV 432 A, 443 D, E.

οὐκοῦν ‐‐ ξυμφωνίαν ; sc. τῆς ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ ἕνεκα ξυμφωνιας ἁρμόσεται .

τοῦ πλήθους κτλ. : i.e. τοῦ πλήθους τῶν χρημάτων κτλ.: cf. VIII 563 B note οὐκ before ἐκπληττόμενος is not interrogative, but negatives ἐκπληττόμενος—αὐξήσει. The interrogative force of οὐκοῦν is carried on from the last sentence.

ἀλλὰ μὴν καὶ τιμάς γε κτλ. See on VIII 566 E. The idiom has more in common with ‘partitive apposition’ than with such an ἀνακόλουθον accusative as in Tim. 37 D (quoted by Schneider) ἡμέρας γὰρ καὶ νύκτας καὶ μῆνας καὶ ἐνιαυτούς, οὐκ ὄντας πρὶν οὐρανὸν γενέσθαι, τότε ἅμα ἐκείνῳ ξυνισταμένῳ τὴν γένεσιν αὐτῶν μηχανᾶται.

νὴ τὸν κύνα . See III 399 E note

ἔν γε τῇ ἑαυτοῦ πόλει : i.e. in the πολιτεία προσήκουσα of VI 497 A.

οὐ μέντοι ‐‐ πατρίδι . We may compare the story about Anaxagoras in D. L. II 7: τέλος ἀπέστη καὶ περὶ τὴν τῶν φυσικῶν θεωρίαν ἦν, οὐ φροντίζων τῶν πολιτικῶν. ὅτε καὶ πρὸς τὸν εἰπόντα, Οὐδέν σοι μέλει τῆς πατρίδος; Εὐφήμει, ἔφη· ἐμοὶ γὰρ καὶ σφόδρα μέλει τῆς πατρίδος, δείξας τὸν οὐρανόν. See also Antisthenes ap. D. L. VI 11. The question whether the wise man will take part in politics is raised by Aristotle in a somewhat different form (Pol. Γ 3. 1276^{b} 16 ff. al.), and afterwards became one of the stock questions of post-Aristotelian philosophy: see RP^{7} § 384 C note c.

θεία ‐‐ τύχη : such as is contemplated in VI 499 B, where see note.

νῦν . The reading νῦν δή has very little authority, and it is certain that νῦν sometimes refers to the immediate past: see on VIII 563 C.

τῇ ἐν λόγοις κειμένῃ : ‘the city which is founded in words.’ It is truer and more perfect, aye and more lasting too, just because it κεῖται ἐν λόγοις: for φύσιν ἔχει πρᾶξιν λέξεως ἧττον ἀληθείας ἐφάπτεσθαι (V 473 A) and ῥῆμα ἑργμάτων χρονιώτερον βιοτεύει (Pind. Nem. 4. 6).

ἀλλ) ‐‐ ἐν οὐρανῷ κτλ. ‘But perhaps it is laid up in heaven as an ensample for him who desires to behold it and beholding found a city in himself.’ If the philosopher is prevented from founding a city after the pattern in the Heavens, he can at all events ‘found himself’ (“sich selbst begründen” Schneider, and so also Bosanquet): cf. VI 496 C —497 A. ἑαυτὸν κατοικίζειν is a pregnant and powerful phrase, which involves not only the idea of the πόλις s. πολιτεία ἐν ἡμῖν (cf. 590 E, 591 E, X 605 B, 608 B), but also perhaps a hint that the παράδειγμα ἐν οὐρανῷ is as it were the μητρόπολις from which our souls should be colonised. Jowett and Campbell understand ἐκεῖ after ἑαυτὸν κατοικίζειν, while Richards thinks Plato may have written ἑαυτὸν <αὐτόσε> or <εἰς αὐτὴν> κατοικίζειν: but the word παράδειγμα, as well as τῷ βουλομένῳ ὁρᾶν καὶ ὁρῶντι, shews that the heavenly city is regarded as a model for the soul rather than as the place in which the soul should be planted. The conjectures αὐτὸ (sc. τὸ παράδειγμα) κατοικίζειν and ὁρῶντι πρὸς (s. εἰς) αὐτὸ κατοικίζειν (Herwerden) do not merit refutation. What does Plato mean by ἐν οὐρανῷ? It is surely something more than “harmlose populär-theologische Redeweise” (Pfleiderer zur Lösung etc. p. 33). The poet Gray (who aptly reminds us of Diogenes Laertius' epitaph on Plato πόλιν ἤλυθεν ἥν ποθ’ ἑαυτῷ | ἔκτισε, καὶ δαπέδῳ Ζηνὸς ἐνιδρύσατο III 45) remarks “ἐν οὐρανῷ, that is, in the idea of the divinity: see the beginning of the following book.” Apparently he understood the words of the Heaven of Ideas, a view which has, with various modifications and qualifications, found favour also with other critics (see Steinhart Einleitung p. 254 and cf. Susemihl Gen. Entw. II p. 248 ff. Proclus in Tim. 269 E seems to interpret the παράδειγμα as τὴν ἐν οὐρανῷ πολιτείαν τῆς ψυχῆς, but Plato is manifestly speaking of the πολιτεία τῆς πόλεως). Others have taken ἐν οὐρανῷ of the ‘Weltall’ or Macrocosm, as if the Universe itself were one great ideal city, after whose pattern we should regulate the City of the Soul (see Steinhart l. c. and p. 270 with Tim. 47 B, 90 D); but, as Schneider points out, we can hardly reconcile such an interpretation with VII 529 C—530 C, and ἀνάκειται is also against it. The sentence may be compared with Pol. 297 C, Laws 713 B ff. and especially 739 D, E, where the polity of the Republic is thus described: ἡ μέν δὴ τοιαύτη πόλις, εἴτε που θεοὶ ἢ παῖδες θεῶν αὐτὴν οἰκοῦσι πλείους ἑνός, οὕτω διαζῶντες εὐφραινόμενοι κατοικοῦσι· διὸ δὴ παράδειγμά γε πολιτείας οὐκ ἄλλῃ χρὴ σκοπεῖν, ἀλλ’ ἐχομένους ταύτης τὴν ὅ τι μάλιστα τοιαύτην ζητεῖν κατὰ δύναμιν. We might employ this passage to explain ἐν οὐρανῷ ἴσως παράδειγμα, but its tone is less elevated and impressive, and in particular it does not help us to understand τῷ βουλομένῳ ὁρᾶν καὶ ὁρῶντι. Plato's language is extraordinarily suggestive, and I confess that to me, as apparently to Susemihl (l. c. p. 249), these words suggest, not indeed the doctrine of Anamnesis in all its bearings, but something of the half-religious, half-poetical atmosphere with which Plato invests that doctrine in the Phaedrus. The mysterious and haunting phrase ἐν οὐρανῷ παράδειγμα recalls the ‘imperial palace whence we came,’ and the whole sentence reminds us once again of that profound and inspiring doctrine ἄνθρωπος οὐράνιον φυτόν, οὐκ ἔγγειον, which, as I have often pointed out, underlies so much of Platonism. The sister-doctrine of Immortality seems also to be implied, and from this point of view the Christian parallels are highly remarkable and significant: see for example Philipp. 3. 30 ἡμῶν γὰρ τὸ πολίτευμα ἐν οὐρανοῖς ὑπάρχει, and many other passages in the New Testament, e.g. Hebr. 11. 16, 12. 23, 13. 14: 1 Pet. i. 4, 2. iii. 13. I do not venture to assert that Plato consciously and deliberately thought of Anamnesis and Immortality when he wrote ἐν οὐρανῷ etc., but the words are steeped in the fragrance of these beliefs; and to regard the reference to heaven “as a mere passing figure of speech” (Bosanquet) seems to me to do less than justice to the wonderful depth and fervour of this passage.

τὰ γὰρ ταύτης κτλ. See Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II p. 338 and Theaet. 173 C ff., quoted by him. Interpreted strictly and by themselves, the words of Plato would mean only that the philosopher will abstain from public and political life except when some ‘divine chance’ enables him to exercise his true vocation. But taken in connexion with ἑαυτὸν κατοικίζειν they mean more. In founding the city within himself after the likeness of the heavenly city the philosopher is in reality a true πολιτικός, because he is thereby faithful to the principles of the true and perfect State: even while he lives, he is already in a sense a citizen of Heaven, for the Kingdom of Heaven is reproduced within him. In existing cities the truest politicians are sometimes those who abstain from politics altogether, according to Gorg. 521 D ff. I agree with Steinhart ( Einleitung p. 254) and Christ (Gr. Literaturgesch. p. 348 note 6) that Plato now speaks much less hopefully than before of the prospects of realising his ideal city upon earth: see on V 470 E, VI 499 C and 502 C. It is possible to force some of the earlier allusions into a sort of harmony with the words of this passage (see for example Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. d. Pl. Pol. pp. 637 ff.); but we cannot help feeling that the tone and atmosphere are very different. Steinhart (l.c. p. 703 note 264) traces the difference to Plato's disappointed hopes of the younger Dionysius. The conjecture is interesting, but even without this stimulus Plato may well have come to feel that his καλλίπολις is hardly of this world (cf. Laws 713 B), and that its true value lies in the religious, political, and moral ideals which it holds before mankind.

595A - 597E On a retrospect of our city, says Socrates, we can now see even more clearly than before that we did right in excluding imitative Poetry. What is Imitation? Examine it in the light of the Ideas, and you will find that it is the production of images or appearances which are third in order from Reality and Truth. There are, for example, three beds: (1) that which is in Nature, made, as we may say, by God: (2) that which the carpenter manufactures: (3) that which is the product of the painter's art. The first is, and must be, one: for there cannot be two Ideas of bed. We have thus two makers in connexion with the notion of bed: (1) a Nature-maker (φυτουργός), who is God; (2) a manufacturer (δημιουργός), viz. the carpenter. There is also (3) an imitator, i.e. the painter. Imitation is therefore concerned with a product third in sequence from Nature, and the tragic poet, among other imitators, is third from Royalty and Truth.

ff. Book X falls into two divisions, the first (595 A—608 B) dealing with Poetry, the second (608 C—621 D) with Immortality and the rewards of Justice both here and hereafter. The second half of the Book forms a welcome supplement to Plato's treatment of the main thesis of the Republic (see on 608 C); but the first division is of the nature of an episode, and might have been omitted without injury to the artistic unity of the dialogue (cf. Hirmer Entst. u. Komp. d. pl. Pol. p. 623). It is in no sense, as supposed by Schleiermacher ( Einleitung p. 55) and apparently also by Hirzel (der Dialog I p. 237 note), a fulfilment of the promise held out in III 392 C; nor ought we to construe ἴσως δὲ καὶ πλείω ἔτι τούτων III 394 D as a hint that the subject of Poetry is to be resumed: see note ad loc. Why then is the episode introduced at all? The chorizontists (such as Siebeck Unters. zur Phil. d. Griech. pp. 142 ff., Pfleiderer zur Lösung etc. p. 34 and Brandt zur Entwick. d. Pl. Lehre d. Seelenteilen p. 27), relying partly on the tone of the exordium, partly on ἀπολελογήσθω 607 B, assert that Plato is replying to certain comic poets (Pfleiderer), or to Antisthenes (Brandt), who had presumably fallen foul of Plato's treatment of Poetry in Books II and III. Cf. also Zeller^{4} II p. 556 note 2. But apart altogether from the question whether the Republic was issued en bloc or piecemeal, there is no actual evidence to support the presumption on which this theory rests (cf. 598 D, 607 B notes). The Platonic dialogue, like actual conversation, is at liberty to recall, modify, and expand the results of a discussion apparently finished (cf. Hirzel l.c. pp. 228—230, 236); and we have already had an incidental recurrence to the subject of Poetry in VIII 568 A—D. Granted that Plato wished to justify his exclusion of the Muses by metaphysical and psychological as well as moral and paedagogic arguments, the beginning of Book X is his best, and indeed, as Hirmer shews (l.c. p. 625), his only opportunity: see on 595 B. He may well have wished to do so: for his dethronement of the great educator of Greece (606 E) would be sure to arouse wide-spread hostility, and Plato almost seems to feel that it needs further justification even to himself (595 B note). Cf. Hirmer l.c. pp. 624—628 and see also on 598 D, 607 B.

The student will find an excellent and exhaustive account of Plato's theory of Aesthetics in Walter Gesch. d. Aesthetik im Altertum (1893) pp. 168—476. His attitude towards Poetry and Poets is very fully discussed by Reber Platon u. die Poesie (1864). Heine de rat. quae Platoni cum poet. Gr. intercedit, etc. (1880), and more recently by Finsler Platon u. die Arist. Poetik (1900) and Stählin Die Stellung d. Poesie in d. plat. Phil. (1901). Following on the path marked out by Belger in his dissertation de Arist. etiam in arte poetica Platonis discip. (1872), Finsler has succeeded in shewing that Aristotle's debt to Plato in his Theory of Poetry is far greater than is commonly supposed: and although the treatment of Poetry in Book X of the Republic must be confessed to be inadequate and unjust, Plato himself, as Walter and Stählin have recognised, furnishes us elsewhere with the materials for constructing a truer and more generous theory. See also on 598 E. It may be added that a study of the Poetics of Aristotle side by side with 595 A— 608 B will enable the student to understand both Plato and Aristotle better than if he confines himself to either alone. See also Butcher Aristotle's Theory of Poetry and Fine Art^{2}, pp. 115 ff.

ἐνθυμηθεὶς περὶ ποιήσεως . II 377 B—III 403 C.

τὸ μηδαμῇ ‐‐ μιμητική . See III 394 B —398 B. Plato speaks as if he had tabooed all mimetic poetry, but it is clear from III 396 E compared with 397 D, 398 B and 401 B—402 C that he did not condemn poetic and artistic imitation as such, but would have admitted it where the model imitated was good. See also on 595 C, 607 A, 608 A infra.

ἐπειδὴ ‐‐ εἴδη : viz. in Book IV and also throughout VIII and IX. The psychological theory of these books is laid under contribution in 602 C ff.: see note ad loc. It may seem strange that Plato makes no reference to the metaphysical doctrine of V—VII, since he derives his first argument (596 A— 601 B) from the theory of Ideas: but it was unnecessary for him to refer to it in this connexion, because the theory is itself expressly re-enunciated (εἷδος γάρ που κτλ. 596 A) before the argument begins.

ὡς ‐‐ εἰρῆσθαι : ‘between ourselves.’ Cf. IV 430 E note

αὐτά : viz. πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα, tragedy and other forms of μιμητικὴ ποίησις: not (as Schleiermacher) “wie sich die Dinge in der Wirklichkeit verhalten.” A knowledge of the real character of dramatic Poetry is the only antidote against its evil influence. On τυγχάνει ὄντα see I 337 B note

καίτοι φιλία γε ‐‐ λέγειν . Plato speaks with real feeling: no one who had so much of the poet in himself could be insensible to Homer's charm, and nearly every dialogue of Plato bears evidence of the affectionate admiration in which he held the ‘first of tragic poets.’ See Heine de rat. quae Platoni cum poetis Graec. intercedit pp. 8—15. The ancients classed Plato and Homer together: δύο γὰρ αὗται ψυχαὶ λέγονται γενέσθαι παναρμόνιοι, says Olympiodorus (vit. Pl. 6): and Longinus remarks that of all Greek writers Plato was Ὁμηρικώτατος—ἀπὸ τοῦ Ὁμηρικοῦ κείνου νάματος εἰς αὑτὸν μυρίας ὅσας παρατροπὰς ἀποχετευσάμενος (περὶ ὕψους 13. 3). See also the admirable remarks on Plato's imitation of Homer in James Geddes's essay On the Composition and Manner of Writing of the Ancients pp. 180—200, and Proclus' much less sound and instructive article ὅτι διὰ πάσης τῆς ἑαυτοῦ συγγραφῆς Ὁμήρου ζηλωτής ἐστιν ὁ Πλάτων ταῖς τε λεκτικαῖς ἀρεταῖς καὶ ταῖς πραγματικαῖς in his in remp. Kroll I pp. 163—177. There is a touch of something like filial love and piety in what Plato says of Homer in this passage, and we may well believe that he did not part company with the friend of his childhood without pain. From the way in which Plato here speaks, it looks as if he feared that his heart might after all get the better of his head (cf. infra 605 C, D, 606 B, 607 C ff.), and consequently tried by new and deeper arguments to provide an ‘antidote’ ( φάρμακον, or ἐπῳδή 608 A) for himself as well as others (so also Hirmer l.c. p. 626).

τῶν καλῶν κτλ. καλῶν is of course ironical. For the sense cf. 598 D, 602 B, 607 A, Theaet. 152 E οἱ <*>κροι τῆς ποιήσεως ἑκατέρας, κωμῳδίας μὲν Ἐπίχαρμος, τραγῳδίας δὲ Ὅμηρος and ib. 153 A, with Arist. Poet. 4. 1448^{b} 35 ff., 5. 1449^{b} 16 ff. It will be remembered that Aeschylus called his dramas τεμάχη τῶν Ὁμήρου μεγάλων δείπνων (Athen. VIII 347 E). Herwerden, quite without reason, so far as I can see, brackets τῶν τραγικῶν. It is unkind of Aristotle to purloin this sentiment in order to introduce his attack on Plato's theory of Ideas in Eth. Nic. I 4. 1096^{a} 11 ff., and Plato might well complain, in the words of Aeschylus, τάδ’ οὐχ ὑπ’ ἄλλων, ἀλλὰ τοῖς αὑτῶν πτεροῖς. To read ἁνήρ for ἀνήρ, as has been proposed, would make a general statement particular, and spoil the antithesis between ἀνήρ and ἀληθείας. The reference in ὃ λέγω is to ῥητέον in line 11 above: cf. VII 541 B.

μίμησιν κτλ. In III 392 C ff., μίμησις, in its application to Poetry, was regarded primarily as a form of style or λέζις, viz. the imitative or dramatic )( the narrative, and in this sense it included tragedy, comedy, and the strictly dramatic parts of epic and other poetry (394 C). But even in Book III μίμησις and its cognate notions have sometimes a wider application (e.g. 401 B—402 C). The following discussion tries to define the essential meaning of μίμησις in general by its relation to the Theory of Ideas. It should be noted that Poetry and Art were admitted to be μιμήσεις in Plato's day: cf. Laws 668 B τοῦτό γε πᾶς ἂν ὁμολογοῖ περὶ τῆς μουσικῆς, ὅτι πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτήν ἐστι ποιήματα μίμησίς τε καὶ ἀπεικασία, with Xen. Mem. III 10. 1—8, Plato Crat. 424 D, 430 B (τὰ ζῳγραφήματα —μιμήματα—πραγμάτων τινῶν, 434 A, Soph. 266 D), Prot. 312 D, Critias 107 B et al. See also on III 392 C and cf. Stählin Poesie in d. plat. Phil. p. 25. On the contrast between Plato's view of Imitation in Book X and that of Aristotle in his Poetics, see Butcher Theory of Poetry^{2} etc. pp. 115—152. Walter has justly remarked (Gesch. d. Aesthetik im Altertum p. 442) that μίμησις, with its question-begging connotation, was in many ways an unfortunate word by which to describe the essence of Art, though in view of what Aristotle made of it, I should not go so far as to say that ‘Imitation is an unproductive principle, and dries up aesthetic life’ (ib.). If Poetry, and not Painting and Statuary, had determined the Greek view of Art, we should probably hear more of Creation ( ποίησις), and less of Imitation, in ancient discussions on aesthetics; and it is difficult not to regret that Plato did not select a new and more fruitful point of view. See also on 598 A, B.

ἐπεὶ πολλὰ κτλ. is neither arrogant nor rude, if we realise the situation: see on VII 532 E f.

ἐκ τῆς εἰωθυίας μεθόδου κτλ. As in V 476 A (see note ad loc.), so here, Plato does not try to prove the Ideal Theory, but treats Glauco as already a loyal Platonist. The account which Plato here gives of his Ideas has been widely canvassed from many different points of view. Bosanquet (Companion pp. 381 ff.) appears to me to err by interpreting it throughout only in terms of modern life and thought. Others refuse to regard it as serious, in view of the inherent difficulties, and because of Aristotle's remark διὸ δὴ οὐ κακῶς ὁ Πλάτων ἔφη ὅτι εἴδη ἔστιν ὁπόσα φύσει Met. Λ 4. 1070^{a} 18: cf. also A 991^{b} 3 ff. with Bonitz's note. Others, again, like Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 242 ff.), hold that the Ideal Theory in Bk X is inconsistent with the theory expounded in V—VII, where we do not hear of Ideas corresponding to concrete and artificial objects, but only of Ideas of qualities (such as Justice) and the like. In reply to the last school of critics, we may point out that Plato is not bound to give an exhaustive account of the Ideal theory whenever he has occasion to make use of it. On the previous occasion he confined himself to Ideas of the virtues etc., because they only were relevant to his immediate purpose (see on V 476 A and cf. Grimmelt de reip. Pl. comp. et unit. pp. 81 ff., Hirmer l.c. pp. 646 ff. and Dümmler zur Comp. d. Pl. St. p. 14), and it is exactly the same reason which makes him cite Ideas of concrete and artificial objects in Book X. The view that Plato should not be taken seriously is as old as Proclus, who (in Tim. 104 F) observes οὐ γὰρ κατά· τινας ἰδέας ὁ τεχνίτης ποιεῖ ἃ ποιεῖ, εἰ καὶ δοκεῖ τοῦτο λέγειν ὁ ἐν Πολιτείᾳ Σωκράτης, ἀλλ’ ἐκεῖ μὲν τὰ εἰρημένα παραδείγματος εἴρηται χάριν καὶ οὐ περὶ αὐτῶν τῶν ἰδεῶν, but, apart from other considerations, the recurrence of the same form of the theory in other dialogues (see on 596 B, C) justifies us in taking Plato here also at his word. The history of the controversy is ably reviewed by Dr Beckmann (Num Plato artefactorum ideas statuerit, Bonn 1889), with whom and with Zeller^{4} II pp. 666, 701 al. I agree in believing this passage to be an authoritative exposition of the Ideal theory on one of its many sides.

εἶδος γάρ που κτλ. : ‘for we are, as you know, in the habit of assuming a certain idea—always one idea—in connexion with each group of particulars to which we apply the same name’: lit. ‘an Idea, one each’ i.e. each being one. There cannot be two or more Ideas of Bed for example: cf. 597 C. Unnecessary trouble has been raised about the translation of this sentence by Krohn (Pl. St. p. 240), whose version “in Bezug auf jedes der vielen Dinge nehmen wir je. eine Einheit als εἶδός τι an” is both strained and inaccurate. For the statement itself cf. V 476 A, 479 A, B, E, 480 A, VI 493 E and VII 507 B note Plato might have written any of the foregoing passages without believing in Ideas of anything beyond qualities and attributes: but that he did believe in other Ideas also is evident not only from Book X, but also from Phil. 15 A, 16 C, D and many other places quoted by Zeller^{4} II p. 701 note 1.

πολλαί πού εἰσι κλῖναι κτλ. Why does Plato select examples of artificial objects, when the Painter can equally well paint the features of Nature, as is virtually allowed in C? One reason is that otherwise he could not have constructed the descending scale θεός, κλινοποιός, ζῳγράφος 597 B ff. Had he selected e.g. mountains, it would be difficult to specify the middle term. Moreover in Soph. 266 B ff. we have a distinction drawn between θεία and ἀνθρωπίνη εἰδωλοποιική, the first producing likenesses of natural objects by natural agencies, the second likenesses of artificial objects by artificial means, and Painting is there also classed under the second head: τί δὲ τὴν ἡμετέραν τέχνην; ἆῤ οὐκ αὐτὴν μὲν οἰκίαν οἰκοδομικῇ φήσομεν ποιεῖν, γραφικῇ δέ τιν) ἑτέραν, οἷον ὄναρ ἀνθρώπινον ἐγρηγορόσιν ἀπειργασμένην; (266 C). Inasmuch as σκευαστά are elsewhere credited with less reality than φυτευτά (see on VII 532 B, C notes), the choice of these examples is also specially appropriate to Plato's main object, that is to say, the depreciation of imitative art.

ἀλλὰ ἰδέαι κτλ. For ideas of σκευαστά cf. especially Crat. 389 A—390 A, a passage which forms an admirable commentary on this. The anecdote about Plato and Diogenes in D. L. VI 53 (Πλάτωνος περὶ ἰδεῶν διαλεγομένου, καὶ ὀνομάζοντος τραπεζότητα καὶ κυαθότητα κτλ.) is pointless unless Plato believed in εἴδη τῶν σκευαστῶν .

οὐκοῦν ‐‐ κατὰ ταὐτά . Cf. Crat. 389 A ff. ποῖ βλέπων ὁ τέκτων τὴν κερκίδα ποιεῖ; ἆρ οὐ πρὸς τοιοῦτόν τι ὃ πέφυκε κερκίζειν; Πάνυ γε. Τί δέ; ἂν καταγῇ αὐτῷ ἡ κερκὶς ποιοῦντι, πότερον πάλιν ποιήσει ἄλλην πρὸς τὴν κατεαγυῖαν βλέπων, ἢ πρὸς ἐκεῖνο τὸ εἶδος, πρὸς ὅπερ καὶ ἣν κατέαξεν ἐποίει; Πρὸς ἐκεῖνο, ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ. Οὐκοῦν ἐκεῖνο δικαιότατ) ἂν αὐτὸ ὃ ἔστι κερκὶς καλέσαιμεν; Ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ. The Idea is conceived as a παράδειγμα: cf. VI 500 E—501 C and see on V 476 D. Borrowing the ontology of the Philebus, we might say that the carpenter has an ἄπειρον of wood, into which he introduces πέρας after the model of the Idea of Bed or αἰτία, thereby manufacturing a μικτόν or material bed (Schmitt die Verschiedenheit d. Ideenlehre in Pl. Rep. u. Phil. p. 25 note 68). We are not entitled (in view of 597 B and the phraseology of the present passage) to take ἰδέαν merely as the plan or form of bed in the mind of the carpenter: the Ideas of σκευαστά must be credited with the same attributes—transcendence, self-existence, etc.—as appertain to those of abstract qualities and φυτευτά (see on V 476 A), although the difficulties which such a view involves are undeniably greater in the one case than in the other. If we put ourselves in Plato's position—and Socrates is here speaking as one Platonist to another (εἰώθαμεν λέγειν)—it becomes correct to say that the carpenter is looking at the Idea rather than at his own νόημα, for the νόημα is nought apart from its object, the νοητόν (cf. V 476 E note), i.e. the selfexistent Idea of Bed, without which all the νοήματα in the world would be powerless to generate a bed because it is the αὐτὸ ὃ ἔστι κλίνη, and no mere νόημα, which is the true and essential cause of all material κλῖναι. See also on 597 B.

καὶ τόνδε ‐‐ δημιουργόν : i.e. καὶ τόνδε τὸν δημιουργὸν τίνα καλεῖς, sc. as well as the δημιουργὸς ἑκατέρου τοῦ σκεύους. Baiter ought not to have printed Vermehren's pointless conjecture καὶ τόνδε τινὰ καλεῖς τῶν δημιουργῶν (Pl. Stud. p. 118): for Plato is leading up to 597 B ζῳγράφος δή, κλινοποιός, θεός, τρεῖς οὗτοι ἐπιστάται τρισὶν εἴδεσι κλινῶν, and he again calls the painter a δημιουργός in D and E: so also χειροτέχνης just below.

ὃς ‐‐ χειροτεχνῶν . Cf. Soph. 233 E— 234 C, where the same conception is worked out in almost exactly the same way.

τάχα here means ‘soon,’ and not ‘perhaps’: cf. with Schneider Crat. 410 E.

καὶ ἑαυτόν presents no difficulty: cf. ταχὺ δὲ σαυτόν in E below. It is difficult to imagine why Liebhold proposed τὰ κατ’ ἐνιαυτόν (Philolog. for 1880 p. 168). Perhaps he thought the δημιουργός was ὁ θεός, an extraordinary error, which Peipers and others (see Zeller^{4} II p. 711 note 4) perpetrated, making God his own creator, and drawing some profound and far-reaching metaphysical lessons from their mistake.

καὶ πρὸς τούτοις κτλ. Soph. l.c. καὶ πρός γε θαλάττης [καὶ γῆς] καὶ οὐρανοῦ καὶ θεῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ξυμπάντων. The words in brackets occur only in Ξ, and were possibly introduced from this passage.

πάντα has two (not, as Baiter asserts, five) dots over it in A, but is in all the MSS and should not (with Baiter) be bracketed. It is important, in view of 598 C ff., to insist that there is nothing which the Painter and Poet cannot ‘make’: hence the emphasis.

ἐν Ἅιδου should also of course be kept, though cancelled by Herwerden. Polygnotus' famous picture of τὰ ἐν Ἅιδου at Delphi may serve as an illustration (Paus. X 28—31).

σοφιστήν : used as in Symp. 203 D δεινὸς γόης καὶ φαρμακεὺς καὶ σοφιστής. Plato may also mean to hint that the Painter and Sophist are birds of a feather: for in Soph. 233 E ff. a definition of the Sophist in the ordinary sense of the term is evolved out of just such an account of painting as we find here.

ποιητής . The Greek idea of the Poet as a ‘maker’ lends additional flavour to ποιεῖν and ποιητής throughout this argument.

δημιουργούμενος is suggested of course by δημιουργός just before: cf. III 395 B. The combination of this verb with τρόπος has a playful mock-heroic air.

κάτοπτρον κτλ. On the view of Painting here involved see 598 A note It is usual to compare Shakespeare's “hold the mirror up to nature,” but (as Bosanquet points out) there is more in Shakespeare's saying than in Plato's.

τῶν τοιούτων ‐‐ ζῳγράφος ἐστίν . The Painter will copy with less accuracy than a mirror, so that according to Plato's way of reasoning in this passage Photography is superior in point of truth to Painting (Reber Plato u. die Poesie p. 23). See however on 598 A.

οὐ—μέντοι . I 339 B note ἄρτι refers to 596 B.

εἰ καὶ τοῦτο κτλ. : sc. as well as the κλίνη made by the painter.

ἐπ’ αὐτῶν τούτων κτλ. For ἐπί see on V 475 A. τοῦτον in τὸν μιμητὴν τοῦτον (“hunc, quem quaerimus” Schneider) was found by Dübner to be the reading of A as well as the rest of Bekker's MSS, and Schneider restores it in his Addit. p. 77.

οὐκοῦν κτλ. For γίγνονται see on VIII 562 A. With ἐν τῇ φύσει cf. infra 597 C, 598 A, Phaed. 103 B and Parm. 132 D τὰ μὲν εἴδη ταῦτα ὥσπερ παραδείγματα ἑστάναι ἐν τῇ φύσει. Each of these passages brings ἡ φύσις into connexion with the Ideas: cf. also V 476 B, VI 501 B, Crat. 389 B ff. and infra 597 D, E. In the phrase ἐν τῇ φύσει, the expression ἡ φύσις means ‘Nature’ i.e. rerum natura (cf. R. G. Bury in Cl. Rev. VIII p. 299), but for Plato rerum natura, strictly interpreted, is the Ideal World. Plato's nomenclature is in harmony with the traditional usage of Greek philosophy, for “in Greek philosophical language, φύσις always means that which is primary, fundamental, and persistent, as opposed to that which is secondary, derivative, and transient” (Burnet Early Greek Phil. p. 11). Now in Platonism the primary, fundamental, persistent, is the εἶδος: and hence the φύσις or ‘nature’ of anything means its Idea (e.g. Phaedr. 254 B ἡ μνήμη πρὸς τὴν τοῦ κάλλους φύσιν ἠνέχθη), and the φύσις or nature of all things (rerum natura) becomes an expression for the World of Ideas (“regio idearum, ὁ νοητὸς τόπος” Schneider). Bosanquet would like to render φύσις by ‘evolution,’ “without understanding any definite theory of origins.” Such a translation would be, in my judgment, not only gravely misleading, but linguistically wrong; for ἐν τῇ φύσει οὖσα cannot mean ‘which evolution has produced’: the force of ἐν must be local—figuratively so, of course— exactly as in ὥσπερ παραδείγματα ἑστάναι ἐν τῇ φύσει referred to above. So also J. B. Mayor in Cl. Rev. X p. 121. To Krohn, φύσις appears to be “die allgemeine Gesetzlichkeit des Universums, die dem δημιουργός die Musterbilder liefert” (Pl. St. p. 249). This is nearer the truth, but we must not surrender the self-existence of the Ideas. See also on 597 D.

ἣν—θεὸν ἐργάσασθαι . “Occurrit, ut videtur, quasi ex improviso Platoni, Deum Idearum auctorem appellare” says Pansch (de deo Platonis p. 45), truly enough, in the restricted sense that we ought to lay no stress on this passage by itself as evidence for the origin of the Ideas. But, if God and the Idea of Good are the same (see on VI 505 A ff.), Plato is merely saying in theological language what he formerly said in philosophical, when he derived the οὐσία of all other Ideas from the Idea of Good (VI 509 B). See Krohn Pl. St. p. 242, where the same explanation is given, and Zeller^{4} II p. 666. It is not, I think, quite correct to dismiss θεός as merely “eine mythische Ausdrucksweise” (Hirmer Entstehung u. Komp. etc. p. 647), and Susemihl (Einleitung p. 262) is certainly wrong when he takes it to mean ‘a god.’ The sentence has been much discussed in connexion with the theory that Plato's Ideas are ‘thoughts of God’: see for example Hermann de loco Plat. de rep. VI 505 sq. p. 5 with Bonitz's reply Disput. Pl. duae p. 33 and Hermann's rejoinder Vindic. disp. de idea boni pp. 39 ff., and cf. Zeller l. c. pp. 664— 670. I have already said in App. III to Book VII that Plato himself says nothing to shew that he viewed his Ideas in this light; and it is only by reading into his words much more than they are naturally fitted to convey, that the present passage can be made to support the identification.

εἰ δύο κτλ. : not of course ‘if God had made’ etc. (D. and V.), but ‘if he should make’ etc., referring to the future, in harmony with οὔτε μὴ φυῶσιν. The words δύο μόνας mean ‘no more than two,’ “auch nur zwei” (Schneider). Even two (not to speak of more) would involve a fresh ἰδέα. Cf. Tim. 31 A τὸ γὰρ περιέχον πάντα ὁπόσα νοητὰ ζῷα, μεθ’ ἑτέρου δεύτερον οὐκ ἄν ποτ’ εἴη· πάλιν γὰρ ἂν ἕτερον εἶναι τὸ περὶ ἐκείνω δέοι ζῷον, οὗ μέρος ἂν εἴτην ἐκείνω, καὶ οὐκ ἂν ἔτι ἐκείνοιν ἀλλ’ ἐκείνῳ τῷ περιέχοντι τόδ’ ἂν ἀφωμοιωμένον λέγοιτο ὀρθότερον. The τρίτος ἄνθρωπος argument against the theory of Ideas rests on the same basis: see Parm. 132 E ff. with Arist. Met. A 9. 990^{b} 17 and Bonitz ad loc.

μίαν φύσει κτλ. : ‘created it, in its essential nature, one. So it appears. Shall we then call him the Nature- maker of bed, or something of the sort? It would at all events be fair to do so, since he has made both this and all besides in their essential nature.’ Connected with the notion ‘bed’ (observe the neuter τούτου), there are two makers: (1) its φυτουργός, who makes ἡ φύσει κλίνη, (2) its δημι‐ουργός, who makes κλίνη τις, a particular material bed. The first is God— the φυτουργός not only of ‘bed’ but of all else: the second a carpenter. φυτουργός is used by Plato in the peculiar sense of ὁ φύσει‐τι ποιῶν, the maker of e.g. the bed-by-nature, the table-by-nature, etc.; and the peculiar form of Glauco's answer (δίκαιον γοῦν κτλ.) shews that he was sensible of the linguistic experiment. Plato's meaning would have been easier for us to catch if (using substantives instead of pronouns), he had said μίαν φύσει κλίνην ἔφυσεν (created one bed-by-nature, cf. VI 501 B τὸ φύσει δίκαιον) and ἐπειδήπερ καὶ φυσει‐κλίνην καὶ φύσει‐τἄλλα πάντα πεποίηκεν, but what he does write is much more elegant. It seems to me certain <*> φύσις in this passage refers to the essen<*> nature (i.e. the Idea) of the thing in q<*> tion. Schleiermacher, Schneider, <*> Müller, to judge from their translatio<*> held the same view. The English tra<*> lators render the second φύσει ‘by crea<*> (D. and V.) or ‘by the natural proce<*> creation’ (Jowett), but apart from o<*> objections, φύσει surely cannot bea<*> sense so very different from that whi<*> has at the beginning of the argument: <*> 597 B note, where reference is made als<*> Bosanquet's ingenious, but, as I belie<*> wholly mistaken view.

τί αὐτὸν κλίνης κτλ. ; For the <*> tive cf. IX 582 C, 585 D, infra 597 E <*> (with J. and C.) Symp. 204 D τί τῶν κα<*> ἐστιν ὁ Ἔρως;

μιμητὴς οὗ ἐκεῖνοι <*> μιουργοί . There is (1) the φυτουργ<*>ς. <*> the δημιουργός, (3) the imitator of ‘b<*> The two former are each of them (in <*> wider sense) δημιουργοί of ‘bed.’ I<*> be noticed that ‘bed’ is treated <*> tempore (from βούλει οὖν to ὡμολογ<*> μεν) as a single undifferentiated no<*> because the contrast is shifted from <*> three beds to those who are concerne<*> their production. At 598 A εἰπὲ δε <*> κτλ. Plato again differentiates the no<*> in order to make it clear that the Pai<*> imitates only the material, and not <*> Ideal, bed.

τὸν τοῦ τρίτου κτλ. The gen<*> is like τί αὐτὸν κλίνης κτλ. above. <*> not think we ought (with J. and C. <*> supply δημιουργόν.

τοῦτ) ἄρα ‐‐ μιμηταί . Since <*> tragic poet is an imitator, he too wil<*> τοῦ τρίτου γεννήματος ἀπὸ τῆς φύσεω<*> in other words, τρίτος τις ἀπὸ βασιλέως <*> Baiter's text is misleading because <*> prints no comma after μιμητής ἐστι. That Tragedy is a branch of μίμησις, was universally allowed: see above on 595 C. Plato's procedure in reasoning from Painting to Poetry (cf. infra 598 C, 601 A, 603 B and 605 A) may be illustrated by Simonides' remark that ‘Poetry is vocal Painting,’ as ‘Painting is silent Poetry’ (ὁ Σιμωνίδης τὴν μὲν ζῳγραφίαν ποίησιν σιωπῶσαν προσαγορεύει, τὴν δὲ ποίησιν ζῳγραφίαν λαλοῦσαν Plut. de gloria Ath. 346 F)—a saying which Lessing appropriately cites in the preface to his Laocoon.

τρίτος τις κτλ. : ‘as it were third from King and Truth.’ The metaphor is a genealogical one (cf. III 391 C Πηλέως, σωφρονεστάτου τε καὶ τρίτου ἀπὸ Διός), and the King corresponds of course to the φυτουργός or God. On the one hand we have (1) God, (2) the τέκτων, (3) the μιμητής: on the other (1) the αὐτὸ ὃ ἔστι κλίνη, (2) a material κλίνη, (3) a picture of a material κλίνη: and just as the picture is τὸ τρίτον γέννημα ἀπὸ τῆς φύσεως, so the imitator is ‘third in descent’ (τρίτος — πεφυκώς) and consequently two degrees removed from ὁ θεός. The propriety of the term βασιλέως will be seen if we translate Plato's theological phraseology into its philosophical equivalent. When he tells us that God constructs the Idea of Bed, he means that the Idea of Good is the source of that Idea (597 B note), and the Idea of Good is King of the Ideal World: see VI 509 D. This is the application of the phrase: but it is possible enough that the expression itself was half-proverbial in Plato's time, and referred originally to the person who stood next but one in order of succession to the Persian throne. See App. I. The general sense is well illustrated by J. and C. from Dante In- ferno 11. 105 Si che vostr' arte a Dio quasi è nipote, i.e. Art is Nature's daughter, as Nature is God's: ‘so that your art is as it were the grandchild of God.’ It should be noticed that the drift of Plato's meaning can be expressed in terms of the simile of the line. The αὐτὸ δ ἔστι κλίνη, for example, belongs to EB (see Fig. 1 on p. 65), the material κλίνη to DC, and the picture of a Bed to the realm of εἰκόνες, that is to say AD. Similarly we may suppose that the state of mind of the carpenter is πίστις, and that of the Painter εἰκασία. See below on 601 E and cf. App. I to Book VII. Other views of the phrase τρίτος τις ἀπὸ βασιλέως are discussed in App. I.

598A - 598D Moreover it is not the Idea which is copied by the Painter, but only the manufactured objects, and even of these he copies only one particular aspect or appearance. Hence Imitation is far removed indeed from the Truth; and only a simpleton will be beguiled by it.

πότερα ἐκεῖνο ‐‐ ἔφη . In holding that the Art of Painting imitates only τὰ τῶν δημιουργῶν ἔργα. Plato degrades it to the level of photography, and the painter himself to a mere mechanical copyist, whose intelligence does not rise above εἰκασία (in the sense of VI 511 E: see note ad loc. and App. I to Book VII). Yet the highest art has in every age claimed to portray, not the so-called actual, but the Ideal: see for example Arist. Poet. 25. 6 and 17: “It may be impossible that there should be men such as Zeuxis painted. ‘Yes,’ we say, ‘but the impossible is the higher thing; for the ideal type must surpass the reality’” (Butcher's translation), and the recent development of this idea by W. J. Courthope, Life in Poetry and Law in Taste pp. 152, 165, 196 ff. and passim. In the present passage, Plato bases his unfavourable verdict on what must be admitted to be a narrow and scholastic interpretation of his own ontology, but in view of Books II and III as well as 605 C— 607 A below, we can hardly doubt that his attitude was determined in the first instance by educational rather than by metaphysical considerations, and that throughout the whole of Book X he was thinking less of the inherent possibilities of Art, than of actual Greek Art and Poetry considered as the exponents of a moral and religious creed which Plato himself emphatically disowns. See also on 607 A. In any case, the objections which he here urges do not touch the real essence of any form of Art except pure and unadulterated realism. Elsewhere throughout the Platonic writings there are not wanting indications of a juster estimate of the artistic faculty and its possibilities (see for example III 401 B—403 C, and especially V 472 D, and cf. Walter Gesch. d. Aesthetik im Altertum pp. 441 ff., 459 ff. and Stählin Stellung d. Poesie in d. Plat. Phil. pp. 56—65), and the sympathetic student of Plato will find it easy to construct a nobler and more generous theory of Aesthetic Art out of the doctrine of Ideas together with its corollaries of ἀνάμνησις and pre-existence. It is also a historical fact that Plato's own conception of a transcendent self-existing Beauty, ἀεὶ ὂν καὶ οὔτε γιγνόμενον οὔτε ἀπολλύμενον, οὔτε αὐξανόμενον οὔτε φθίνον, ἔπειτα οὐ τῇ μὲν καλόν, τῇ δ’ αἰσχρόν, οὐδὲ τοτὲ μέν, τοτὲ δ’ οὔ, οὐδὲ πρὸς μὲν τὸ καλόν, πρὸς δὲ τὸ αἰσχρόν ( Symp. 211 A), has proved an inexhaustible fountain of inspiration to some of the greatest artists, notably, for instance, in connexion with the Platonic Academy at Florence in the days of Michel Angelo: see Symonds, Renaissance in Italy II pp. 205, 207, 247, 323 ff. Those who have caught the spirit of Plato's teaching will agree with me when I say that the famous lines of Wordsworth on King's College Chapel

“They dreamt not of a perishable home, Who thus could build,”

are more truly and characteristically Platonic than Plato's attack upon poetry and painting in this passage.

ἆρα οἷα ἔστιν κτλ. The painter, as Bosanquet reminds us, operates in two dimensions, and so cannot copy the material bed “in its solid completeness, but only his partial view of it” i.e. the bed as it appears to him from one point of view, a particular φάντασμα of bed. His work, in fact, is σκιαγραφία (II 365 C note). It will follow that Painting is a stage lower than ‘third from truth,’ but Plato does not press the point, and in 599 A and D Poetry—the sister art to Painting—remains as before only τρίτον ἀπὸ τῆς ἀληθείας. See also on μιμητική in B below.

πεποίηται is passive, not middle, as J. and C. strangely imagine. Cf. 605 A ὁ δὴ μιμητικὸς ποιητὴς—οὐ πρὸς τὸ τοιοῦτον τῆς ψυχῆς πέφυκέ τε καὶ ἡ σοφία αὐτοῦ τούτῳ ἀρέσκειν πέπηγεν.

τὸ ὄν : not of course in the metaphysical sense, but in the sense in which e.g. the material bed ‘is’ as opposed to its φάντασμα, which only φαίνεται, and which is all that the painter copies. An apologist of Art might fairly reply to Plato that in another and profounder sense it is just because Art does ‘imitate’ the φάντασμα and not the material reality that her creations frequently possess a measure of ideality and truth beyond and above what Plato assigns to them here. Cf. Butcher, Aristotle's Theory of Poetry etc. pp. 127 ff., 157—162. For the construction see on III 407 B.

ἡ μιμητική . In this particular instance the inference from Painting to the whole of imitative art is hardly to be justified: for Sculpture, which is certainly, in the Greek way of thinking, a branch of μιμητική, cannot be said to copy only a φάντασμα of the material object to the same extent that Painting does. See however Soph. 235 E, 236 A.

διὰ τοῦτο ‐‐ εἴδωλον : ‘what enables it to manufacture all things is that it lays hold of but a little part of each, and even that is unsubstantial.’ πάντα ἀπεργάζεται recalls 596 C—E, while preparing us at the same time for πάσας ἐπισταμένῳ τὰς δημιουργίας κτλ. below in C. In σμικρόν τι ἑκάστου ἐφάπτεται the construction is like μεταλαμβάνουσι—τούτων τῶν τῆς ἀρετῆς μορίων οἱ μὲν ἄλλο, οἱ δὲ ἄλλο ( Prot. 329 E). For εἴδωλον Herwerden conjectures εἰδώλου: but the word refers to φαντάσματος above and must therefore be in apposition to the part and not the whole. The particular ‘appearance’ of a bed which a painter copies is properly regarded as only a little ‘part’ of it.

περὶ οὐδενὸς ‐‐ τῶν τεχνῶν : ‘although he does not understand about the arts of any one of them.’ According to this explanation, which is that of Prantl, περί governs τῶν τεχνῶν and τούτων has for its antecedent σκυτοτόμον, τέκτονα κτλ. The plural τῶν τεχνῶν is a trifling irregularity, due to the introduction of τοὺς ἄλλους δημιουργούς, in the absence of which Plato would doubtless have written περὶ οὐδετέρου τούτων ἐπαΐων τῆς τέχνης. For the distance between περί and its noun cf. VIII 551 C περὶ ἄλλου οὕτως ὁτουοῦν ἀρχῆς, Prot. 319 D περὶ τῶν τῆς πόλεως διοικήσεως (if Sauppe is right in construing περί with διοικήσεως), Laws 859 A οὕτω διανοώμεθα περὶ νόμων δεῖν γραφῆς γίγνεσθαι ταῖς πόλεσιν , Tim. 40 D τὰ περὶ θεῶν ὁρατῶν καὶ γεννητῶν εἰρημένα φύσεως ἐχέτω τέλος, and other examples in Lina de praepos. usu Plat. pp. 17 f. It is certainly wrong to translate the text by ‘without knowing anything about these arts,’ and we have no right to resort to such emendations as οὐδὲν τούτων ἐπαΐων τῶν τεχνῶν (Ast) or οὐδὲν περὶ τούτων (or τούτων πέρι οὐδὲν ) ἐπαΐων τῶν τεχνῶν (Richards). I now believe that Prantl's view, with which Stallbaum also agrees, is correct, and therefore withdraw my former conjecture τεχνιτῶν. That τεχνῶν is sound appears also from αὐτός τε οὐκ ἐπαΐων περὶ σκυτοτομίας in 601 A.

γράψας ‐‐ τέκτονα εἶναι . The same idea recurs in Soph. 234 B. The subject of δοκεῖν (opinari) is παῖδάς τε καὶ ἄφρονας ἀνθρώπους (Schneider). This is better than to make δοκεῖν=videri and supply τὸ ἐζωγραφημένον (with J. and C.).

ὑπολαμβάνειν δεῖ τῷ τοιούτῳ : ‘we must reply to’—(or ‘retort upon’) ‘such a person’: cf. (with J. B. Mayor in Cl. Rev. X p. 110) Prot. 320 C πολλοὶ οὖν αὐτῷ ὑπέλαβον κτλ. The antecedent of τῷ τοιούτῳ is τις. The words have been strangely misinterpreted by Schneider(“bei dem muss man annehmen” etc.), J. and C. (“we must understand by such a statement”) and others, forgetful of the parallel expression in the Protagoras. Vermehren actually goes so far as to conjecture ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ (Plat. Stud. p. 119).

γόητί τινι . Cf. Soph. 234 C.

διὰ τὸ αὐτὸς κτλ. In agreement with Dümmler ( Antisth. pp. 23 ff.), Stählin (Stellung d. Poesie etc. p. 26) takes this as a specific reference to Antisthenes. Antisthenes, in the first place, denied the Ideal theory and held that there could be no knowledge except of particulars: so that Plato might well insinuate that he was incapable of distinguishing knowledge from ignorance: cf. V 476 D note In the second place, Antisthenes was a champion of Homer, and discovered a sort of moral philosophy in his works (see Frag. 24—28 in Winckelmann Antisth. Frag. and Zeller^{4} II pp. 330 ff.). On the strength of these two facts Stählin has evolved the ingenious theory that Plato's motive throughout this part of the discussion is a purely polemical one, and that he did not seriously consider Poetry only ‘third from Royalty and Truth.’ Plato, thinks Stählin, says in effect: ‘Antisthenes holds that poets have knowledge of and copy particulars; but there is no knowledge of particulars, and particulars are copies of Ideas, so that on Antisthenes's own shewing Poets are ignorant, and Poetry is thrice removed from Truth: whereas Antisthenes thinks Homer was omniscient.’ The dagger is only lath: for Antisthenes was not an Idealist. Yet it is tolerably clear that Plato is refuting a view of poetry which found enthusiastic advocates in his own time, and Antisthenes may have been one of these, though the evidence falls far short of proof (see next note): but the purpose of this investigation is certainly not polemical and nothing more, and in spite of other passages in which Plato takes a more generous view of Poetry (see on 598 E), there is no good reason to suppose that his hostility is otherwise than serious here. See also on line 28.

598D - 601B We hear it said that tragedians, including Homer, have knowledge of that whereof they write; but it is not so. No one would seriously give himself to the production of copies if he could make originals. If the poet possessed true knowledge of what he imitates, he would rather do great deeds than sing of them; and Homer rendered no services to his fellow men in the sphere of action, invention, or even education, as the neglect he suffered in his own lifetime abundantly proves. The fact is that the Poet writes without knowledge. His productions are but images of images, and owe all their charm to their poetic setting.

τὸν ἡγεμόνα αὐτῆς Ὅμηρον κτλ. See 595 C note In τινων Dümmler and Stälhlin (ll. cc.) again recognise Antisthenes, but although Antisthenes seems to have believed in Homer, there is no evidence that he was a champion of Tragedy (note ὅτι οὗτοι κτλ.); and he was certainly not the only person in whose eyes Homer was regarded as at once a universal genius and the educator of the whole of Greece. It is not necessary to suppose that Plato has any individual person in his mind: there must have been many such apologists of Homer and dramatic poetry in Plato's day, and Plato as usual individualizes the type. See for instance the Ion of Plato and Ar. Frogs 1008 ff. It will, no doubt, help us to appreciate Plato's attitude towards Poetry if we remember that she was the de facto rival of Philosophy, and that (as Munk observes, die nat. Ordnung d. Plat. Schr. pp. 313 ff.) the Republic is in a certain sense a demand that Philosophy shall take the place which Poetry had hitherto filled in educational theory and practice: see especially the address to poets in Laws 817 A ff. ὦ ἄριστοι—τῶν ξένων, ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν τραγῳδίας αὐτοὶ ποιηταὶ κατὰ δύναμιν ὅτι καλλίστης ἅμα καὶ ἀρίστης· πᾶσα οὖν ἡμῖν ἡ πολιτεία ξυνέστηκε μίμησις τοῦ καλλίστου καὶ ἀρίστου βίου, ὂ δή φαμεν ἡμεῖς γε ὄντως εἶναι τραγῳδίαν τὴν ἀληθεστάτην. ποιηταὶ μὲν οὖν ὑμεῖς, ποιηταὶ δὲ καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν τῶν αὐτῶν, ὑμῖν ἀντίτεχνοί τε καὶ ἀνταγωνισταὶ τοῦ καλλίστου δράματος κτλ. Cf. also infra 600 A note But it is surely absurd to suppose that Plato was actuated by any feeling of personal jealousy towards Homer, and aspired to supplant him in the admiration of his countrvmen: ‘there is no envy in the choir divine’ ( Phaedr. 247 A). There is something almost pathetic in Dionysius' inability to understand and appreciate Plato when he assures us with monotonous and feeble iteration that ‘there was, there really was in Plato's nature, with all its excellences, something of vainglory. He shewed this particularly in his jealousy of Homer, whom he expels from his imaginary commonwealth after crowning him with a garland and anointing him with myrrh’ (Letter to Pompeius § 756, translated by Roberts).

ἀνάγκη ‐‐ ποιεῖν . The saying is attributed by Wilamowitz (Phil. Unters. IV p. 285) to Sophocles himself, on what authority he does not say. Is he thinking of Athen. I 22 B μεθύων δὲ ἐποίει τὰς τραγῳδίας Αἰσχύλος, ὥς φησι Χαμαιλέων. Σοφοκλῆς γοῦν ὠνείδιζεν αὐτῷ ὅτι εἰ καὶ τὰ δέοντα ποιεῖ, ἀλλ’ οὐκ εἰδώς γε? In any case the reference ought not to be thus limited, nor ought we to suppose (with Dümmler and Stählin, ll. cc.) that Antisthenes alone is intended, for Plato seems to be alluding to a tolerably widespread view and one which was freely represented in Apologies of Poetry. Understood in its full significance, the theory of Poetry which Plato is here combating requires us to believe that a poet who can represent a general, a pilot etc., knows the art of generalship, pilotage etc. (cf. 599 C ff.), and we are told that Sophocles was actually made στρατηγός because of his Antigone (see the Argument ascribed to Aristophanes the grammarian). If we realise the part which Poetry, and especially the poetry of Homer, played in Greek education, and remember that Aristophanes makes Homer the teacher of τάξεις, ἀρετάς, ὁπλίσεις ἀνδρῶν, it is by no means extra vagant to suppose that such views were actually maintained in Plato's time, though Pericles for example had a different criterion of strategic ability when he told Sophocles that he ‘knew how to write poetry, but not how to command an army’ (Περικλέης ποιέειν με ἔφη, στρατηγέειν δ’ οὐκ ἐπίστασθαι Athen. XIII 604 D). Cf. Ion 540 B—542 B and Stählin Stellung d. Poesie etc. p. 23 note 3. ‘The public,’ remarks Stählin, ‘whose views Plato here combats, allowed the authority of the poets to extend even to the domain of the particular arts. It was Plato who broke through this magic circle which surrounded Poetry.’ Aristotle followed in the same path, refusing to allow that a mistake in respect of some particular art is necessarily a flaw in the poetry: see Poet. 25. 1460^{b} 20 ff., 33 ff. Plato himself, of course, holds that poets are destitute of scientific knowledge, and compose their poems οὐ σοφίᾳ, ἀλλὰ φύσει τινὶ καὶ ἐνθουσιάζοντες Ap. 22 C: cf. also Phaedr. 245 A, Ion 533 D ff., Laws 719 C and Men. 99 C. The true Poet, according to Plato, is a seer: knowledge he has none, but instead of it intuition, enthusiasm and inspiration: he is in short ἔνθεος, because ἐπίπνους ὢν καὶ κατεχόμενος ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ (Men. l.c.). This view of Poetry is of course earlier than Plato: we meet with something like it in a striking fragment of Democritus ap. Dio Chrys. LIII 274 (quoted by Stählin l.c. p. 12) Ὅμηρος φύσεως λαχὼν θεαζούσης ἐπέων κόσμον ἐτεκτήνατο παντοίων, and Pindar likes to represent himself as the inspired mouthpiece of the Muses and Apollo. We cannot attain to a correct conception of Plato's aesthetic unless we are careful to remember that, although he refused to allow that the poet has knowledge, he did not deny him genius and inspiration. See also on 598 A supra.

πότερον μιμηταῖς κτλ. : ‘whether these men whom they have met are imitators, by whom they have been deceived’ etc. μιμηταῖς is of course predicative, and that is why τούτοις has no article. We certainly ought not (with Richards) to change τούτοις into τοιούτοις. Cf. IV 436 D note

τριττὰ ‐‐ ὄντος : ‘are three stages removed from Truth.’ One of Schneider's MSS has τριτὰ (sic), and Herwerden conjectures τρίτα, comparing τρίτος ἀπὸ τῆς ἀληθείας in D. Possibly Proclus also read τρίτα: see the critical note in Kroll's edition of the in remp. I p. 203. 22. If the numeral is an adjective agreeing with ἔργα, we must certainly read τρίτα, but it may be an accusative of extent, i. q. τρία ἀπέχοντα. I therefore think it safer to retain the MS reading, especially as τριττά was more likely to be corrupted into τρίτα than conversely.

φαντάσματα ‐‐ ποιοῦσιν . 596 E.

ἤ τι καὶ κτλ. : ‘or whether again there is something in what they say.’ ἢ καί is sometimes thus used instead of ἤ, from a feeling that it introduces something additional, viz. an additional alternative. Cf. (with Schneider) Hom. Il. II 238 and Pl. Laws 744 A. The force of ἢ καί in Ap. 27 E, Phaedr. 269 A and infra 602 D, 605 D is nearly, but not quite, the same.

ἐπὶ ‐‐ δημιουργίᾳ depends on σπουδάζειν, rather than on ἀφεῖναι. The word σπουδάζειν is emphatic: he might occasionally παίζειν ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις, but he would never make it the serious business of his life: cf. infra 602 B, VII 536 C note and Phaedr. 276 C ff. The whole of this passage reminds us very strongly of the depreciatory estimate of written books in the Phaedrus. Cf. 599 B note

τοῦτο ‐‐ ἔχοντα : ‘set this in the forefront of his life as his best possession,’ in accordance with the maxim τὰ καλὰ τρέψαι ἔξω in Pind. Pyth. 3. 83. προστήσασθαι is used like πρόστασις IX 577 A, and προστησάμενοι in VII 531 B is not very different. Others (Schneider, Stallbaum, etc.) think προστήσασθαι κτλ. means ‘to set before his life’ as an aim or goal. In itself, this rendering is unexceptionable; but it does not suit with ὡς βέλτιστον ἔχοντα. The word ἔχοντα cannot be equivalent to ἡγούμενον ‘considering’ (in spite of the exceptional phrase ἐντίμως ἔχειν VII 528 B note); nor is it easy to accept the version of Schneider “und dieses als das beste was er könnte.” The emphasis requires us to take ἔχοντα in its full sense (“als das beste was er habe” Schleiermacher). Stallbaum conjectures ὡς βέλτιστ’ ἂν ἔχοντα, but the text is sound. For βέλτιστον instead of τὸ βέλτιστον cf. (with Schneider) μέγιστον ἀγαθόν in I 330 D.

ἐν τοῖς ἔργοις . ἐπί for ἐν is called for by Herwerden, but cf. Laws 834 B τὰς σπουδὰς—τάς τε ἐν τῇ τροφῇ καὶ τὰς περὶ ἀγωνίαν αὐτῶν. In ἔργοις there is combined the twofold sense of ‘deeds’ and ‘originals’ )( μιμήματα: the originals of dramatic μίμησις are actions (603 C note).

καὶ εἶναι ‐‐ ἐγκωμιάζων . He would rather be Achilles than Homer. There is another side of the question, represented by Pindar's ῥῆμα δ’ ἑργμάτων χρονιώτερον βιοτεύει (Nem. 4. 6), and by Plato himself very forcibly in Symp. 209 D, and it is certainly unfair to insinuate that no one would write good poems if he were capable of doing great deeds. Some of Plato's expressions in this passage almost suggest the tone of a man of letters pining for a life of action: cf. VI 496 D notes

ὠφελία : not simply to the agent himself: cf. σφᾶς ὠφεληκέναι 599 E.

ἐρωτῶντες κτλ. Cf. Ion 537 C ff., Ap. 22 A—C. τοὺς ἐκγόνους are of course the Asclepiadae: see on III 405 D.

ὡρισάμεθα κτλ. See 597 E f. From ἀλλὰ καὶ δεύτερος we may infer that “the actual law-giver, in Plato's view, is second from reality” (Bosanquet).

τίς τῶν πόλεων κτλ. Contrast Symp. 209 C ff. where Homer and Hesiod are linked with Lycurgus, Solon, καὶ ἄλλοι ἄλλοθι πολλαχοῦ ἄνδρες, καὶ ἐν Ἕλλησι καὶ ἐν βαρβάροις, πολλὰ καὶ καλὰ ἀποφηνάμενοι ἔργα, γεννήσαντες παντοίαν ἀρετήν.

σὲ δὲ τίς κτλ. Yet it is a genuinely Greek sentiment that ‘Poets are the unacknowledged’—a Greek would have said ‘acknowledged’—‘legislators of the world’ (Shelley).

Χαρώνδαν κτλ. Charondas, of Catana in Sicily, the legislator of the Chalcidian colonies in Italy and Sicily, is not elsewhere mentioned by Plato, though frequently by Aristotle: see Susemihl and Hicks on Arist. Pol. A 2. 1252^{b} 14. The date of Charondas is probably the sixth century B.C.: see Niese in Pauly-Wissowa art. Charondas, where the authorities relating to this early legislator are cited and reviewed. It is worth noting, in view of Ἰταλία here and elsewhere in Plato ( Laws 777 C, Tim. 20 A: cf. also Laws 659 B), that an argument against the genuineness of the seventh Platonic Epistle has been derived from the fact that it mentions Italy (326 B, 339 D): see Hermann, Gesch. u. System p. 591 note 213.

Ὁμηριδῶν : ‘votaries of Homer,’ ‘Homer's devotees.’ So the word is rightly explained by Heine (de rat. quae Pl. c. poet. Gr. intercedit pp. 18—22), and also by Jebb (Homer p. 78). Cf. Ὁμήρου ἐπαινέταις 606 E and the use of Ὁμηρίδαι in Ion 530 E, Phaedr. 252 B. The original meaning of Ὁμηρίδαι is discussed by Jebb l.c.

ἀλλὰ δή like ἀλλὰ γάρ=‘at enim’ (II 365 C note).

εἰς τὰ ἔργα should be connected with σοφοῦ. The omission of εἰς in A^{1} (see cr. n.) is apparently accidental, for it occurs in all other MSS.

Θάλεώ τε ‐‐ καὶ Ἀναχάρσιος . Plato retains the Ionic genitive in the Ionic name: cf. Arist. Pol. A 11. 1259^{a} 6 Θάλεω τοῦ Μιλησίου. On Thales' useful discoveries see Zeller^{5} I p. 183 note 2. Anacharsis was credited by some authorities with the invention of the anchor and the potter's wheel (D. L. I 105).

ὁδόν τινα ‐‐ βίου Ὁμηρικήν . Yet in another and wider sense Homer was the founder of a ‘way of life,’ and the ὁδὸς Ὁμηρική, which Plato so strongly condemns in Books II and III, was in fact the ὁδὸς Ἑλληνική (Reber Platon u. die Poesie p. 25). From this point of view Plato's antagonism to Homer is only a symptom of his profound dissent from much that we are accustomed to regard as essentially characteristic of the Greek view of life. See on V 470 E and Bohne Wie gelangt P. zur Aufstellung s. Staatsideals, etc. p. 38.

Πυθαγόρειον τρόπον ‐‐ τοῦ βίου . The aim of the Πυθαγόρειος βίος was ἕπεσθαι θεῷ, and the rules of abstinence etc. by which its votaries sought to ‘follow God’ made them conspicuous (διαφανεῖς) and exceptional among the Greeks. See Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 159 —171.

ὁ γὰρ Κρεώφυλος κτλ. Κρεώφιλος was read before Ast on slight MS authority, and gives an excellent sense to τοῦ ὀνόματος—φανείη: but Κρεώφυ—λος is confirmed by all the best MSS, as well as by Callimachus (Epigr. 6 ap. Strabo XIV 638 Κρεωφύλου πόνος εἰμὶ κτλ.) and others: see Pape-Benseler s.v. Plato speaks of him as Homer's friend or disciple (for ἑταῖρος has this meaning here: cf. ἑταίρους in C and Soph. 216 A ἑταῖρον —τῶν ἀμφὶ Παρμενίδην κτλ. with Bonitz Ind. Arist. s.v.): others, including the Scholiast, say he was his son-in-law. The Epic poem Οἰχαλίας ἅλωσις was ascribed to Creophylus by Callimachus (l.c.): but according to another tradition, Creophylus received the poem from Homer himself in return for hospitality (Suidas s.v. Κρεώφυλος).

τοῦ ὀνόματος ‐‐ ἔζη . Cf. Cic. de repub. III Frag. 38 Nobbe Sardanapalus ille vitio multo quam nomine ipso deformior (as if Σαρδανό‐φαλλος). Κρεώφυ—λος (from κρέας and φῦλον: ‘Carnigena’ ‘Fleischgeburt,’ suggests Schneider) is an ὄνομα γέλοιον πρὸς παιδείαν: for Beef suggests anything but culture. “I am a great eater of beef, and I believe that does harm to my wits” (Twelfth Night I 3. 90). The Greeks had the same feeling: cf. Plato's remarks on the effects of over-much feeding and athletics in III 411 C—E μισόλογος δή, οἶμαι, ὁ τοιοῦτος γίγνεται καὶ ἄμουσος, and Euripides Frag. 284 Dindorf, with the comic fragment παχεῖα γαστὴρ λεπτὸν οὐ τίκτει νόον. Plato means that the proof of the pudding is in the eating: Homer must have been a poor teacher if his disciples (including Creophylus) learnt so little. Had he taught them successfully they would have proved their παιδεία by treating their master more respectfully: cf. Gorg. 519 C, D, where we are told that if teachers of δικαιοσύνη do not get paid by their pupils, it only shews that they have failed to teach their subject and therefore deserve no fees. λέγεται— ἔζη means ‘for it is said that he was much neglected even in his own age, when he was alive,’ whereas it is precisely during his lifetime that he would have been most respected if he had taught to any purpose: witness the enthusiasm aroused by Protagoras, Prodicus and other teachers! Thus understood, ὅτε ἔζη has a strong rhetorical emphasis and ought not to be discarded (with Cobet, Baiter, and Herwerden). For ἐκείνου after αὐτοῦ referring to the same person cf. VII 538 B and Riddell Digest of Platonic Idioms p. 143 § 49. If we adopt Ast's conjecture and read ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ ἐκείνου, the passage gains a little in point, because αὐτοῦ ἐκείνου will then refer to Creophylus: but it is difficult to make the subject of ἔζη different from the antecedent of αὐτοῦ ἐκείνου, and on the whole I no longer think there is any good reason for deserting the MSS.

ἀλλ’ οἴει κτλ. For οἴει thus used cf. Men. 93 C with Heindorf on Theaet. 147 B.

Πρωταγόρας μὲν ἄρα κτλ. With the structure of the sentence cf. (with Stallbaum) Crit. 50 E and Prot. 325 B, C, where ἄρα occurs, as here, in both clauses. See also on I 336 E and App. IV to Book I. Prodicus survived to 399 at least, but Protagoras seems to have died about 411; so that if the date of action of the dialogue is 410, the reference to Protagoras as apparently still living may seem an anachronism. But the slip is a trifling one in any case; and Socrates might quite well have spoken as he does even if either or both of the persons had recently died. See Introd. § 3.

οὔτε οἰκίαν ‐‐ παιδείας . Cf. Prot. 318 E ff. and Men. 91 A ff.

ἐπὶ ταῖς κεφαλαῖς περιφέρουσιν : ‘carry about shoulder-high’ (“auf den Händen tragen” Schneider). Ast quotes Dio Chrys. Or. IX p. 141 A ὑψηλὸν φερόμενον ὑπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου, and the imitation of this passage by Themistius Or. XXI p. 254 A ὃν ἡμεῖς διὰ ταύτην τὴν φαντασίαν μόνον οὐκ ἐπὶ ταῖς κεφαλαῖς περιφέρομεν. It is clear that the phrase has a honorific meaning, so that it cannot be, as Erasmus (quoted by Ast) imagined, “translatum—a matribus ac nutricibus, quae infantulos cunis impositos capite portant,” whether children were thus carried in antiquity or no.

ὀνινάναι . See cr. n. I agree with Hermann, Baiter and the Oxford editors in preferring ὀνινάναι to ὀνῆναι (so Bekker and Schneider on slight MS authority) or ὀνῆσαι (Stallbaum, after one MS of Aristides II p. 432). ὀνῆναι is a very dubious formation, and the present gives a better meaning than the aorist. The error arose from lipography of ‐να‐: and ὀνεῖναι, ὀνῆναι look like attempts to make the residue into an infinitive.

παρὰ σφίσιν οἴκοι εἶναι : ‘to be with them in their homes.’ παρὰ σφίσιν οἰκεῖν, which Cobet (V. L.^{2} p. 534) and Herwerden desire to read, would not necessarily mean more than ‘to dwell in their country.’ With the sentiment cf. Men. 89 B (quoted below).

αὐτοὶ ἂν ἐπαιδαγώγουν : ‘they would have made themselves their tutors and escorted them’ etc. παιδαγωγεῖν is used in the same playful way in Alc. I 135 D κινδυνεύσομεν μεταβαλεῖν τὸ σχῆμα, ὦ Σώκρατες, τὸ μὲν σὸν ἐγώ, σὺ δὲ τοὐμόν· οὐ γὰρ ἔστιν ὅπως οὐ παιδαγωγήσω σε ἀπὸ τῆσδε τῆς ἡμέρας, σὺ δ’ ὑπ’ ἐμοῦ παιδαγωγήσει. The proverb δὶς παῖδες οἱ γέροντες perhaps lends an additional point to ἐπαιδαγώγουν, as in Soph. Fr. 623 Dindorf=Eur. Bacch. 193 γέρων γέροντα παιδαγωγήσω σ’ ἐγώ.

μεταλάβοιεν . The regular sequence would be μετέλαβον, but cf. Men. 89 B οὓς ἡμεῖς ἂν—ἐφυλάττομεν ἐν ἀκροπόλει, κατασημηνάμενοι πολὺ μᾶλλον ἢ τὸ χρυσίον, ἵνα μηδεὶς αὐτοὺς διέφθειρεν (διαφθείρειεν conj. Madvig), ἀλλ’ ἐπειδὴ ἀφίκοιντο εἰς τὴν ἡλικίαν, χρήσιμοι γίγνοιντο ταῖς πόλεσιν. The difference is the difference between ‘should’ and ‘should have.’

πάντας τοὺς ποιητικούς : see on 595 C.

μιμητὰς εἰδώλων : ‘imitators of images.’ The words can scarcely mean ‘forgers of semblances,’ ‘imitative makers of shadows,’ as suggested by J. and C., in spite of 599 D εἰδώλου δημιουργός and τοῦ εἰδώλου ποιητής in 601 B. The images which the poet manufactures are in fact images of images, according to both 598 B and 596 B ff.: cf. 602 B note

νῦν δή . 598 B, C.

ὁ ζῳγράφος κτλ. : ‘the painter will make what seems to be a shoemaker, in the eyes of those who understand as little about shoemaking as he does himself, but judge by colour and form.’ The dative is the dative of person judging, and does not directly depend on δοκοῦντα εἶναι, though doubtless affected by it. This explanation is better, I think, than to construe τοῖς μὴ ἐπαΐουσιν either directly with δοκεῖν (so Vermehren Pl. St. p. 120, comparing ὥστε ἑτέροις—δοκεῖν below), or with ποιήσει (“und für diejenigen, die auch nichts verstehen” Schneider).

τοῖς ὀνόμασι καὶ ῥήμασιν . The dative is instrumental.

δοκεῖν ‐‐ δοκεῖν . The repetition “partim perspicuitatis studio, partim sermonis familiaris negligentiae cuidam tribuenda videtur” Schneider, who cites in illustration Laws 859 D, where there is a similar repetition of εἶναι. Other parallels will be found in Engelhardt Anac. Pl. Spec. III p. 44.

ῥυθμῷ καὶ ἁρμονίᾳ κτλ. Rhythm and Pitch are the two elements of Music: see III 398 D note The words αὐτὰ ταῦτα mean ‘just these’ and no more: viz. Metre and Music. For the sense cf. (with Ast) Isocrates Evag. 8—10.

ἔχειν . ἔχει was read till Bekker, apparently without any MS authority. The influence of φήσομεν is still felt.

ἐπεὶ γυμνωθέντα ‐‐ φαίνεται . Cf. Isocr. l.c. II ἢν γάρ τις τῶν ποιημάτων τῶν εὐδοκιμούντων τὰ μὲν ὀνόματα καὶ τὰς διανοίας καταλίπῃ, τὸ δὲ μέτρον διαλύσῃ, φανήσεται πολὺ καταδεέστερα τῆς δόξης ἧς νῦν ἔχομεν περὶ αὐτῶν and Pl. Gorg. 502 C, Symp. 205 C, Phaedr. 258 D ἐν μέτρῳ ὡς ποιητής, ἢ ἄνευ μέτρου ὡς ἰδιώτης. A cursory inspection of these passages of Plato might lead one to suppose that he defined poetry as no more than λόγος ἔχων μέτρον, but we can see from other passages in his writings that it was not the μέτρον, but the μῦθος which appeared to him to be the most essential part of poetry (e.g. Phaed. 61 B ἐννοήσας ὅτι τὸν ποιητὴν δέοι, εἴπερ μέλλοι ποιητὴς εἶναι, ποιεῖν μύθους ἀλλ’ οὐ λόγους: cf. Arist. Poet. 9. 1451^{b} 29 τὸν ποιητὴν μᾶλλον τῶν μύθων εἶναι δεῖ ποιητὴν ἢ τῶν μέτρων. See also Walter Gesch. d. Aesthetik im Alt. pp. 460, 463). Whether Plato would have spoken of a prose romance as a poem, is another question, and the passages to which I have referred make it unlikely that he would have done so. Aristotle seems to attach less importance than Plato to the metrical form: see Poet. 1. 1447^{b} 17 ff. οὐδὲν δὲ κοινόν ἐστιν Ὁμήρῳ καὶ Ἐμπεδοκλεῖ πλὴν τὸ μέτρον· διὸ τὸν μὲν ποιητὴν δίκαιον καλεῖν, τὸν δὲ φυσιολόγον μᾶλλον ἢ ποιητὴν κτλ. and ib. 9. 1451^{b} 2 ff.: but it is doubtful whether even Aristotle could have said with Sir Philip Sidney ‘One may be a poet without versifying,’ although he would certainly not quarrel with the converse statement that ‘one may be a versifier without poetry.’ See on the whole subject Butcher Aristotle's Theory of Poetry^{2} etc. pp. 143 ff. and Courthope Life in Poetry etc. pp. 68 ff.

τεθέασαι γάρ που . An example is afforded by III 393 B ff., but the reference is more general.

ἔοικεν ‐‐ προλίπῃ . Aristotle cites this as an example of an εἰκών ( Rhet. III 4. 1406^{b} 36 ff.).

601B - 602B The condition of Imitative art in respect of knowledge may be apprehended in the following way. In connexion with every object we can distinguish three arts, that which uses, that which makes, and that which imitates it. The user alone has knowledge of the object; the maker, when the user instructs him, has correct opinion; but neither knowledge nor correct opinion can be attributed to the imitator. He merely copies what appears to be beautiful to the ignorant multitude.

ἴθι δή, τόδε ἄθρει κτλ. Plato has already proved that Imitation is ‘third from Truth’ ἐκ τῆς εἰωθυίας μεθόδου (596 A), i.e. from the ontological standpoint provided by his own Ideal Theory. The following argument takes up a different standpoint, according to which knowledge is defined as ἐμπειρία or practical familiarity (601 C, D, 602 A). The attitude assumed throughout this section resembles in some respects that of the historical Socrates (601 D note). Can the two points of view be reconciled? Bosanquet makes an interesting attempt to do so (pp. 379, 389 ff.), but his misconception (as it seems to me) of Plato's Ideas renders his conclusions less valuable than they might otherwise have been. Krohn (Pl. St. p. 255) professes himself unable to effect a reconciliation. We must admit that Plato himself does not, as a matter of fact, endeavour in this passage to connect the two arguments. Had he chosen to make the effort, I think a careful study of Euthyd. 288 E— 290 D and Crat. 390 B—E will shew on what lines he might have proceeded (see on ἐμπειρότατον in 601 D), but it is safer to suppose that he has shifted his ground, and is applying a new and less strictly scientific μέθοδος to shew that the Imitator is third from knowledge, as Imitation is from truth.

ἡμίσεως ‐‐ ῥηθέν . See on 601 E. ἡμίσεως or ἡμισέως, in whichever way accented, is surely a full adverb, and not “the genitive used adverbially” (J. and C.) like ὀλίγου, πολλοῦ, etc., although there is good authority for the genitive in ‐εως from ἥμισυς (see Lobeck Phryn. p. 247). Stephanus preferred ἡμισέως: but the adverb follows the accent of the genitive plural (ἡμίσεων), and ἡμίσεως· ἐπίρρημα. Πλάτων Πολιτείας ἕκτῳ (Antiatt. in Bekk. Anecd. 98. 30)—a note which certainly refers to this passage: see Introd. § 4—supports the MS accentuation (Schneider). Liebhold's conjecture ἐπὶ μιμήσεως needs no refutation.

ἐπίσταται . See on ἐμπειρότατον in D below.

οὐκοῦν ἀρετὴ ‐‐ πεφυκός . The historical Socrates was in the habit of testing the beauty, excellence etc. of an object by the degree in which it fulfilled its function or purpose: see especially Xen. Symp. 5. 4 ff. together with other passages cited by Krohn Pl. St. p. 369. Plato himself adopts the same standard in I 352 E—353 E and elsewhere.

ἐμπειρότατον . Throughout the whole of this argument it is held that he who uses, e.g. an instrument, has knowledge of it (ἐπίσταται C, εἰδώς and εἰδότι E, εἰδότος and ἐπιστήμην etc. 602 A), and Plato says nothing to make us attach any metaphysical significance to the word ‘knowledge,’ which he often employs throughout his writings without any suggestion of the Ideas (e.g. II 374 D, IV 422 C). There is no doubt a certain sense in which —if we have regard to Crat. 390 B ff. and Euthyd. 288 E ff.—ὁ χρώμενος has, not indeed scientific knowledge of the Idea, but something analogous thereto. Dialectic, which is the scientific Knowledge of Ideas, is κατ’ ἐξοχήν the χρωμένη ἐπιστήμη, the Science which alone knows in what respect each thing is good and useful, and uses things accordingly (cf. Euthyd. 290 C, Crat. 390 C), proving itself thereby the royal or kingly science (VI 505 A note). Thus the man who uses a single instrument correctly occupies the same relative position in regard to that object which the dialectician occupies in regard to the totality of things, and is, in his own small way, a king compared with the maker and imitator of the instrument. Cf. Bosanquet p. 390. But if Plato had intended us to pursue this vein, he would, I think, have furnished us with some hints in the course of the argument itself. See also on 601 B.

οἷα ‐‐ χρῆται : ‘what are the good or bad points of the instrument he uses when he uses it,’ lit. ‘what good or bad things that which he uses does’—we cannot like the Greeks say ‘makes’— ‘in use.’ This interpretation, which is Schleiermacher's (“wie sich das was er gebraucht gut oder schlecht zeigt in Gebrauch”), seems to me the natural and obvious meaning of the Greek. In agreement, apparently, with Schneider's version, Campbell proposes “what specimens of that which he (the user) employs, the maker makes that are good or bad in actual use,” remarking that “the correlation of singular and plural arises from the collocation of particular and universal. The instrument (sing.) is good in some cases, but bad in others (plur.).” Campbell's solution has the advantage of referring ποιεῖ to ποιητής, and corresponds more exactly with χρηστῶν καὶ πονήρῶν αὐλῶν in E. The grammatical difficulty is however, I think, insuperable. If the subject to ποιεῖ must be ποιητής, it would even be easier to make ᾧ χρῆται=τούτῳ ὃς χρῆται—a rare form of attraction illustrated on V 465 D: but there is a certain elegance in applying ποιεῖ also to the instrument, which is in its way a ‘maker too’ and one by whose ἔργα the other maker must be guided. Herwerden remarks “expectabam potius οἷα ἀγαθὰ ἢ κακὰ (sc. ἐστι) ἐν τῇ χρείᾳ ὧν (i.e. τῶν οἷς ) κτλ.” It is well that his expectations have been disappointed.

ἐξαγγέλλει . Bekker and others write ἐξαγγελεῖ both here and in E below. The present echoes ἄγγελον γίγνεσθαι, and I agree with Schneider that change is needless, in spite of ἐπιτάξει and ὑπηρετήσει: cf. κεῖσθαι—ἔσεσθαι V 478 D. For the meaning cf. Crat. 390 B.

οἳ ἂν ὑπηρετῶσιν κτλ. I take this clause as a sort of parenthetical adjunct or characterisation of αὐλοποιῷ: ‘thus the fluteplayer informs the flutemaker about his flutes—the persons who are his servants in the art of fluteplaying— and he will give orders how they should be made, and the flutemaker will serve him.’ The liberty is great, but hardly greater than Plato allows himself elsewhere in the Republic: cf. III 411 C ἀκράχολοι οὖν καὶ ὀργίλοι ἀντὶ θυμοειδοῦς γεγένηνται, δυσκολίας ἔμπλεοι, IV 426 C ὡς ἀποθανουμένους, ὃς ἂν τοῦτο δρᾷ, VI 496 C, D, I 347 A note: and the break afforded by the interposition of this clause makes the difference of tense between ἐξαγγέλλει and ἐπιτάξει seem easy and natural. To the ordinary interpretation, which makes αὐλῶν the antecedent to οἳ ἄν, it is a serious and I think fatal objection that the verb ὑπηρετεῖν is used immediately afterwards of the flutemaker in a way which seems to imply that it has been used of him before: and it is also very strange and unnatural to speak of flutes as ὑπηρέται ἐν τῷ αὐλεῖν. Jowett's translation “which of his flutes is satisfactory to the performer,” though Schleiermacher, Schneider and Prantl take much the same view, cannot be fairly extracted from οἳ ἂν ὑπηρετῶσιν. Many inferior MSS read οἷα for οἵ: and Richards conjectures οἷα ποιοῦσιν or οἷα ἀποτελοῦσιν, but the change is much too great. I once suggested ὑπερέχωσιν for ὑπηρετῶσιν, but now believe the foregoing interpretation to be right.

ἐξαγγέλλει . See on ἐξαγγέλλει in D above.

πιστεύων . In the language of the Line, his state of mind is πίστις (cf. πίστιν ὀρθήν below): see App. I to Book VII. In 596 B on the other hand the δημιουργὸς πρὸς τὴν ἰδέαν βλέπει. Plato does not try to reconcile the two points of view (601 D note): but he might say that the objective reality of that which guides the δημιουργός is always the Idea, whether he acts on his own initiative or under the direction of another. See on 596 B. It should be noted that Poetry and the other imitative arts are placed higher, and not lower, than δημιουργία in Phaedr. 248 E. Here, however, Plato's purpose is a narrower one, viz. by means of an illustration derived from the mechanical arts to complete the proof—hitherto only ἡμίσεως ῥηθέν 601 C—that the Imitator does not εἰδὼς ποιεῖν, as many assert (598 E), but is in reality third from knowledge.

δόξαν ὀρθήν . See IV 430 B note

οὔτε ‐‐ πονηρίαν . The word εἰκασία, though not here used, represents the Imitator's state of mind: see on VI 511 E and App. I to Book VII.

ὁ ἐν τῇ ποιήσει μιμητικός . Stallbaum remarks “cave unam poesim intelli gas”: but ποίησις is certainly ‘poetry’ and nothing else, as Schneider shews, throughout the whole of this episode. It is poetical μίμησις with which the discussion is primarily and chiefly concerned: hence this passing exclamation —for it is nothing more: witness the asyndeton. With χαρίεις (ironical, of course) followed by οὐ πάνυ, in which the irony disappears, cf. IV 426 A, B (J. and C.). <οὔκουν> χαρίεις (Richards) is an unnecessary conjecture. The reading μιμήσει for ποιήσει (q and some other MSS) is tautological and absurd.

οἷον φαίνεται ‐‐ εἰδόσιν . He will copy τὰ τῶν πολλῶν πολλὰ νόμιμα καλοῦ τε πέρι καὶ τῶν ἄλλων (V 479 D).

τοῦτο μιμήσεται κτλ. τοῦτο is surely not “a cognate accusative” (J. and C.): see on μιμητὰς εἰδώλων 600 E. For παιδιάν τινα see on 599 A, and on ἐν ἔπεσι 595 C note

602C - 603B Consider, again, what is the part of our nature to which Imitation appeals. Painting depends for its effect on the optical delusions to which we are subject, and against which the arts of measurement, counting etc., are our only safeguard. The rational part of soul applies these arts, and proves itself the best by accepting their results. The opposing part is therefore one of the baser elements within us; and base will be the brood that springs from its union with imitative art, in Poetry as well as Painting.

ff. The reasoning from here to 607 A has been supposed to rest on a psychological theory irreconcileable with that of Book IV, to which the discussion expressly alludes (in 602 E). See for example Krohn Pl. St. p. 255 and Pfleiderer Zur Lösung etc., p. 38. It is true that Plato is here content, in view of his immediate purpose, with a twofold division of soul into (1) a rational and (2) an irrational, ἀλόγιστον (604 D, 605 B), or lower element. But the resemblance between the two theories is greater than the difference, for a the λογιστικόν is common to both, and b on its moral side the irrational element appears sometimes as the ἐπιθυμητικόν (606 D καὶ περὶ ἀφροδισίων — καὶ περὶ πάντων τῶν ἐπιθυμητικῶν κτλ.), sometimes as a degenerate form of the θυμοειδές (604 E, 606 A : cf. θυμοῦ 606 D). What is new is the assignment to the ἀλόγιστον of a certain quasi-intellectual power—viz. the power of forming false opinions (603 A, 605 C); but there was no occasion to raise this point in the earlier psychology, which was intended as a foundation for Plato's theory of the virtues. It becomes necessary to touch upon the question now, because imitative art aims at producing false opinions, and Plato accordingly assigns them to the ἀλόγιστον.

πρὸς Διὸς κτλ. The logical sequence is “iam vero haec imitatio non solum futilia efficit, sed etiam futilem animi nostri partem afficit” (Schneider). There is a certain awkwardness in making the transitional sentence interrogative in form, but the extreme animation carries it through. We cannot (with Stephanus) cancel οὐ and print a colon after ἀληθείας, for the interrogation is attested by πρὸς Διός .

μέν τί . μέν of course balances δέ in πρὸς δὲ κτλ., and μέντοι (Stallbaum with some deterioris notae MSS) is not so good.

καὶ ταὐτὰ καμπύλα τε κτλ. Nettleship (Lect. and Rem. II p. 349 note 2) reminds us that images in water were among Plato's examples of τὰ ἐφ’ οἷς εἰκασία ἐστίν in Book VI 510 A: but, as Jackson points out, Plato is here thinking of refraction, and not of reflection.

πᾶσά τις ‐‐ ψυχῇ . “πᾶσα cum αὕτη coniungendum et per attractionem pro πᾶν τοῦτο dictum videtur. τις nomini praepositum est ut Gorg. p. 522 D αὕτη γάρ τις βοήθεια ἑαυτῷ πολλάκις ἡμῖν ὡμολόγηται κρατίστη εἶναι” Schneider. For other examples of this sort of attraction see Riddell Digest p. 203 § 201. Conjecture is not necessary; but if it were, we could not acquiesce either in αὐτῇ for αὕτη (Richter Fleck. Jb. 1867 p. 147, with one MS), or even, I think, in πᾶσι for πᾶσα (Richards). B. D. Turner in his edition of Book X thinks we may translate “and this weakness (πάθημα, as it is afterwards specified) is manifested in our souls as every species of confusion.” This solution gives an awkward sense, and is grammatically less easy than Schneider's.

γοητείας οὐδὲν ἀπολείπει : ‘leaves no magic art untried.’

τὸ μετρεῖν ‐‐ ἱστάναι . Cf. Euthyph. 7 B, C, Prot. 356 B, Phil. 55 E, [περὶ δικαίου] 373 A and Xen. Mem. I 1. 9 ἃ ἔξεστιν ἀριθμήσαντας ἢ μετρήσαντας ἢ στήσαντας εἰδέναι. See also on IX 587 B.

ἐφάνησαν : ‘were discovered’ ‘were invented’=ηὑρέθησαν: cf. φανῆναι VII 528 D. The meaning is not ‘were found by us to be’ etc., as Liebhold supposes (Fleck. Jb. 1884 p. 522), and even Krohn, who actually thinks ἐφάνησαν may possibly contain a reference to some ‘lost fragment’ of the Republic (Pl. St. p. 252). Grimmelt, in his reply to Krohn, takes nearly the right view (de comp. et unit. etc. p. 90 note).

τὸ φαινόμενον ‐‐ βαρύτερον . ‘The apparently larger’ rules in us when we believe the nearer and smaller of two objects to be larger than a more distant object which measurement shews to be larger. Similarly in the other cases. There is no good reason for adding ἢ κουφότερον after βαρύτερον, as Madvig proposes to do: cf. IV 433 D note

τὸ λογισάμενον κτλ. : ‘that which has counted’ etc. For ἢ καί=‘or if you like’ see on 599 A.

τοῦτό γε κτλ. : sc. τὸ λογίσασθαι κτλ. In λογιστικοῦ there is a glance at the etymology of the word: cf. VII 525 B note

τούτῳ δὲ ‐‐ ὓμα περὶ ταὐτά κτλ. ‘And to this principle, when it has measured and signifies that some given objects are greater or less than or equal to some others, the contrary appearances are often presented in connexion with the same objects at the same time.’ τἀναντία is ‘the contrary,’ i.e. not ‘opposite appearances’ in general, but the contrary (in any given instance) of the impression formed without the aid of measurement: cf. τἀναντία in V 453 C, Euthyph. 6 A et al. The object A, for example, which is nearer and smaller, appears larger than B: but the λογιστικόν discovers after measurement that A is smaller and reports accordingly. We have thus two contrary coexisting impressions of the same object. One of the two impressions belongs to the λογιστικόν: does the other also? No, because, as shewn in IV 436 A—C, it is impossible for the same faculty to hold contrary opinions simultaneously in relation to the same objects. Hence the part of soul which δοξάζει παρὰ τὰ μέτρα is not the same as that which δοξάζει κατὰ τὰ μέτρα (i.e. the λογιστικόν). And as the part which believes λογισμός (viz. the λογιστικόν, cf. 604 D, 605 B) is the best, that which opposes it will be τῶν φαύλων τι ἐν ἡμῖν. J. and C. follow Schneider in translating τῷ αὐτῷ as instrumental (‘with the same faculty to form opposite opinions at the same time’); but it is much more natural to make it the dative with infinitive after ἀδύνατον, in view especially of τὸ—δοξάζον τῆς ψυχῆς immediately following. Rightly understood, IV 436 B is also in favour of taking τῷ αὐτῷ in this way. For other views of this difficult passage see App. II.

ἔλεγον : viz. in πρὸς Διὸς— ἔχει 602 C, although Socrates reads more into πρὸς δὲ δὴ ποῖον—ἔχει than the mere words by themselves convey.

τῷ ἐν ἡμῖν κτλ. See on 602 C.

φαύλη ‐‐ μιμητική . Cf. VI 496 A.

ἢ καὶ ἡ . See cr. n. “Inter ἤ et κα facile καὶ ἡ excidere potuit” (Schneider).

603B - 605C If we examine Poetry on its own merits, apart from the sisterart of Painting, we observe that Poetry imitates action. Now in action we often fluctuate between two impulses. When a great calamity befalls us, we are tempted to give way to grief, before the eyes of others; but Law bids us refrain, and try to cure the wound instead of hugging it. That which is best within us readily obeys: whereas the part that tempts us to dwell upon our sorrows is irrational, indolent, cowardly. Yet it is just this peevish, querulous side of human nature which most lends itself to imitation, and whose portrayal in dramatic art the vulgar most readily understand. Poetry is thus the counterpart of Painting; its products are low in point of truth, and it feeds our lower nature. We exclude the Poet from our city on both grounds.

μὴ τοίνυν κτλ. In 605 A Plato seems to think that his procedure in arguing from Painting to Poetry (597 E note) needs a word of explanation and defence. The following argument incidentally furnishes such a defence by deducing from an independent treatment of Poetry the conclusions to which we have already been led by τὸ εἰκὸς ἐκ τῆς γραφικῆς.

ὧδε δὴ προθώμεθα : ‘let us put it before us in this way.’ The object is easily supplied, and in other respects προτίθεσθαι is used as in II 375 D, Phil. 36 E and elsewhere: so that there is no good reason for suspecting the text. ὑποθώμεθα (Richards) has a different and less suitable meaning.

πράττοντας κτλ. Cf. Aristotle's definition of tragedy as μίμησις πράξεως κτλ. (Poet. 6. 1449^{b} 24) and Plato Laws 817 A ff. See also Stählin Stellung d. Poesie etc. pp. 35 f.

μή τι ‐‐ ταῦτα ; ‘It was nothing beyond this, was it?’ I have adopted Ast's conjecture (see cr. n.), which Schneider also favours, in preference to omitting ᾖ with q and two other MSS, Stallbaum, and Baiter. The imperfect may be a reminiscence of III 399 A—C. The different usages of μή with the subjunctive have not yet been thoroughly explained (see Cl. Rev. X pp. 150—153, 239—244), but it seems clear that μή cannot in interrogative sentences with the 3rd person subjunctive mean ‘num,’ and the meaning ‘perhaps’ (as in μὴ ἀληθὲς ᾖ) is unsuitable. The only exact parallel to this idiom in Plato is Parm. 163 D where Heindorf similarly restores ἦν, apparently with Waddell's approval. See however on the other hand Goodwin MT. p. 93.

ἐστασίαζεν . 602 C ff.

τοῖς ἄνω λόγοις . IV 439 C ff.

καὶ τότε . III 387 D, E.

τόδε . See cr. n. τὸ δέ, though supported by most MSS and retained by Bekker and others, cannot, I think, be right. “Nescias τὸ cum νῦν construendum, an per se pro τοῦτο accipiendum sit. Hoc communi, illud Platonicae loquendi consuetudini repugnat. Contra τόδε offensione caret, et quoniam nexus inter haec et superiora intercedens paullo ante particula δέ post νῦν significatus est, δή—abesse posse videtur” (Schneider).

ἀντιτενεῖν . See cr. n. Schneider and the more conservative editors keep the present; but it is much more difficult to defend such a difference in tense with τε—καί than for example in 601 D. Cf. I 342 A note Stobaeus (Flor. 124. 43) has μάχεσθαί τε καὶ ἀντιτείνειν, which may be right.

μόνος is bracketed by Cobet (V. L.^{2} p. 361) and others. Cf. however Polit. 307 E αὐτοὶ καθ’ αὑτοὺς μόνοι and other examples in Ast Lex. Plat. s.v. μόνος.

ποιήσει κτλ. Richards would write ποιῆσαι, but ποιήσει is much more forcible. The words ἃ—δρῶντα mean ‘which he would not like any one to see him do’: not “which he would not choose to see another doing” (J. and C.). Cf. ἃ εἴ τις αὐτοῦ ἀκούοι αἰσχύνοιτ’ ἄν. It should be remembered throughout this passage that violent demonstrations of grief did not offend the Greek sense of propriety so much as they offend ours: cf. Bosanquet Companion p. 396.

αὐτὸ τὸ πάθος : “the affliction itself” (D. and V.): “das Leiden selbst” (Schneider), objectively understood: not “perturbatio” (Ficinus) or “Leidenschaft” (Schleiermacher). See Krohn Pl. St. p. 256.

δύο is of course neuter, but δύο τινέ (q Flor. U) hardly makes the gender clearer and ought not to be preferred.

ἐν αὐτῷ . See cr. n. αὐτῷ, which Schneider and others retain, has a great preponderance of MS authority, but is not sufficiently precise: for the two principles do not merely belong to the man, but are in him: cf. 603 B. This kind of error is a common one in Paris A: see Introd. § 5. Morgenstern's conjecture αὐτώ, which Burnet adopts, would refer “ad proxime commemorata πάθος et λόγον·, quae diversa et duo esse Socrates iam supra posuit, non nunc demum colligit” (Schneider). φαμέν need not be parenthetical: for εἶναι can be omitted as well as ἐστί, and its presence would have been awkward here, on account of the εἶναι to which δύο is subject. See Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. pp. 33 f.

τῷ νόμῳ . Richards proposes τῷ λόγῳ in view of λόγος καὶ νόμος above and λογισμῷ 604 D. This conjecture would introduce a false and unpleasing contrast between τῷ λόγῳ and ὁ νόμος. The repetition of ὁ νόμος is for emphasis.

δήλου ὄντος ‐‐ προβαῖνον . Cf. Euthyph. 4 D and other grammatical parallels in Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 648.

οὔτε τι κτλ. The sentiment is repeated and expanded in Laws 803 B ff.

ὁ λόγος αἱρεῖ . Cf. IV 440 B and infra 607 B. The origin of this frequent phrase is, I think, to be sought in the legal rather than, as Schneider supposes, in the military meaning of αἱρεῖν. Cf. “voluptatem—convictam superiore libro” in Cic. de Fin. III 1. Badham (on Phil. 35 D) strangely conjectures that the figure is “borrowed from the draught-board.”

ἀλλὰ μὴ προσπταίσαντας κτλ. Cf. (with Stallbaum) Dem. Phil. I 40. The curious error πλήττοντος for πληγέντος, found in several MSS besides A, is perhaps due to a reminiscence of V 469 E.

πρὸς τῷ ἰᾶσθαι κτλ. See cr. n. In Stephanus-Hase Thes. s. v. πρός it is said that γίγνεσθαι πρός τι= “occupatum esse circa aliquid vel in aliquo vel in aliqua re,” but no certain examples are given. I agree with the Oxford editors in thinking the dative right as against the accusative, which the German editors retain. Cf. VIII 567 A note

πεσόν . The conjecture πταῖσαν (Herwerden Mn. XIX p. 340) is worse than unnecessary. ἀφανίζοντα agrees of course with the subject of ἐθίζειν, which is singular, in spite of προσπταίσαντας. We need not (with Apelt Obs. Cr. p. 12) write ἀφανίζοντας or ἀφανίζουσαν: see on I 347 A.

ἰατρικῇ κτλ. Stallbaum reads τὴν θρηνῳδίαν with q (see cr. n.). “In dictione poetica articulum etiam minus desidero” (Schneider). The article would be comparatively tame.

τούτῳ τῷ λογισμῷ means the λογισμός expressed in λέγει που ὁ νόμος (B) —ἀφανίζοντα (D). Stallbaum was the first to restore λογισμῷ (from ΑΠ etc.) for the λογιστικῷ of inferior MSS.

ἔχει κτλ. ἔχει= ἐνδέχεται, as often. The Euripidean drama forcibly illustrates what Plato here says. τὸ ἀγανακτητικόν may be regarded as a degenerate variety of the θυμοειδές: cf. III 411 A—C and supra 602 C note

μιμουμένου . See cr. n. μιμούμενον, if it could be taken as passive, would be better and more pointed; but there is apparently no other example of the present participle of this verb used passively, and we are hardly justified in reasoning from the perfect (μεμιμημένα Crat. 425 D) etc. to the present. Schneider thinks μιμούμενον may be active, ‘the imitator’ being said instead of ‘the imitation’ (“nor is it easy to understand one who tries to imitate him” J. and C.). But we cannot help feeling that εὐπετές as well as ῥᾴδιον ought to agree with ἦθος. I therefore follow Stallbaum in preferring the genitive absolute μιμουμένου, which has the authority of q and several other MSS in addition to Π.

ἄλλως τε ‐‐ ξυλλεγομένοις . Cf. VI 492 B.

πέφυκε τε ‐‐ πέπηγεν . It is easy to carry on the negative if we read τε and not γε, which is in all MSS except A^{1}. πέφυκε πρός, like πεποίηται πρός in 598 B, is here said of the relation of Art to that which it imitates, as appears from ἀλλὰ πρὸς—εὐμίμητον εἶναι. The word πέπηγεν means ‘is framed’ or ‘constructed,’ i.q. πεποίηται (598 B): cf. VII 530 D. The infinitive is the old datival infinitive of purpose ‘constructed for pleasing’ ‘to please’: see Goodwin MT. pp. 297, 310 f. Various unnecessary and unpleasing conjectures have been proposed: the addition of οὐ before τούτῳ (Stephanus), ἡ σοφία αὐτῷ τούτῳ ἀρέσκειν πέφυκεν (Cornarius Ecl. p. 102): the transposition of πέφυκε and πέπηγεν (Valckenaer on Eur. Phoen. 923): and οὐ τοῦ τούτῳ ἀρέσκειν πεπείνηκεν (Richter in Fleck. Jb. 1867 p. 147).

εἰ μέλλει ‐‐ τοῖς πολλοῖς . See on VI 493 D and cf. Reber Pl. u. die Poesie pp. 54—59.

οὐκοῦν δικαίως ‐‐ ζῳγράφῳ . See on 603 B.

μοχθηροὺς ‐‐ πόλιν κτλ. τούς is not required before μοχθηρούς any more than τούτοις after πόλιν (Herwerden's conjectures in Mn. XIX p. 340). With πολιτείαν—ψυχῇ cf. IX 590 E and X 608 B.

εἴδωλα εἰδωλοποιοῦντα κτλ. See cr. n. εἰδωλοποιοῦντα seems also to have been the reading of the first hand in Vind. F. The dative εἰδωλοποιοῦντι is retained by Schneider, who makes it agree with τῷ ἀνοήτῳ and regards ἀφεστῶτα as neuter plural. This interpretation, though grammatically tenable, is otherwise unsatisfactory. Plato (in 605 A) has just correlated Poetry with Painting because Poetry also a produces φαῦλα πρὸς ἀλήθειαν and b consorts with φαῦλόν τι τῆς ψυχῆς. On both grounds, he concludes, Poetry must be proscribed: for b τοῦτο ἐγείρει—τοτὲ δὲ σμικρά, and a εἴδωλα εἰδωλοποιεῖ. The chiastic sequence is usual in Plato. If we read εἰδωλοποιοῦντι, Plato assigns only one of his two main reasons for the exclusion of Poetry, viz. b, and the correspondence between this and the preceding sentence disappears. On this account Stallbaum and others are, I believe, right in restoring the accusative, and making ἀφεστῶτα, as well as εἰδωλοποιοῦντα, agree with τὸν μιμητικὸν ποιητήν. The error—an easy one after διαγιγνώσκοντι and ἡγουμένῳ — affected ἀφεστῶτα also in at least one MS, for Ξ has ἀφεστῶτι .

605C - 607A But the most serious count in our indictment is that Poetry is capable of corrupting, with few exceptions, even men of character and virtue. Tragedy stirs in us just those emotions which we are ashamed to indulge when suffering misfortunes of our own, and the consequence is that we succumb more readily in the hour of trial. The same may be said, mutatis mutandis, of comedy also. We shall therefore decline to model our lives after Homer, and refuse to surrender our city to the rule of Pleasure.

αὐτῆς . That is, τῆς ποιήσεως. Cf. VI 503 E note

τὸ γὰρ καὶ τοὺς ἐπιεικεῖς . See on 595 B.

τινὰ τῶν ἡρώων κτλ. Cf. III 387 D. In ῥῆσιν—κοπτομένους the contrast is between a ῥῆσις or set speech, spoken and not sung, “quales multae in tragoediis, Euripidis praesertim” (Casaubon apud Stallbaum), and κομμοί, which are sung. Hence ἢ καὶ—κοπτομένους, ‘or if you like singing and beating the breast,’ is perfectly accurate, and we ought not to change καὶ ᾄδοντας into κλάοντας or κλαίοντας (with Ast, Cobet, Baiter) or ᾄδοντας into ἀλύοντας (with Winckelmann). For ἢ καί cf. 599 A note The readings τινὰς—ὄντας—ἀποτείνοντας in q and some other MSS are only attempts to obliterate the common irregularity of a singular (τινά etc.) passing into a plural: see on I 347 A. Richards ‘suspects’ that Plato wrote μιμουμένου—ἀποτείνοντος—κλαίοντος—κοπτομένου. The conjecture is as unnecessary as it is bold.

χαίρομεν κτλ. Pity, according to Aristotle, as well as Plato, is aroused by Tragedy: see Poet. 6. 1449^{b} 27. With συμπάσχοντες κτλ. cf. Arist. Pol. Θ 5. 1340^{a} 12 ἔτι δὲ ἀκροώμενοι τῶν μιμήσεων γίνονται πάντες συμπαθεῖς, and with ἐπαινοῦμεν — διαθῇ Laws 800 D ὃς ἂν δακρῦσαι μάλιστα τὴν θύσασαν παραχρῆμα ποιήσῃ πόλιν, οὗτος τὰ νικητήρια φέρει , Phil. 48 A τάς γε τραγικὰς θεωρήσεις, ὅταν ἅμα χαίροντες κλάωσι and Ion 535 E. See also on 606 B and III 395 D.

ναὶ κτλ. It is unreasonable to take pleasure in and praise such exhibitions; for the appetite to which they minister is one which in the case of our own individual misfortunes we are careful to repress. Jackson points out that ναί (“ganz recht” Schneider) assents to what Glauco has just said, viz. οὐκ εὐλόγῳ ἔοικεν, and does not mean ναί, εὐλόγῳ ἔοικεν, as J. and C. suppose, taking ναί as the equivalent of the French si.

κατεχόμενον τότε : viz. ὅταν οἰκεῖόν τινι ἡμῶν κῆδος γένηται (605 D).

τότ’ ἐστὶν τοῦτο κτλ. : ‘is on those occasions the part of our nature which the poets satisfy and please.’ τοῦτο is the subject, and repeats τὸ βίᾳ κατεχόμενον κτλ., while τὸ—χαῖρον is in the predicate. A difficulty has been felt because τότε now refers to poetical exhibitions, whereas the other τότε had a different reference; but the emphatic place of the second adverb seems to place it in opposition to the first, and mistake is made impossible by the presence in the one case of ἐν ταῖς οἰκείαις συμφοραῖς, in the other of ὑπὸ τῶν ποιητῶν. Cf. also the double reference of αὖ—αὖ in 606 C. Madvig conjectures αὔτ’ ἐστι τοῦτο, Richards τοῦτ’ ἐστὶν αὐτό. I once read τοῦτό ἐστιν with q and Flor. U, but there is not sufficient reason for deserting the best MSS. On the theory of Tragedy involved in this sentence see 606 B note

τοῦ θρηνώδους τούτου . See on τὸ ἀγανακτητικόν 604 E.

ἑαυτῷ . “Plato passes from the rational part of soul to the man himself” J. and C. Hence καταφρονήσας below. The antithesis with ἄλλος ἀνήρ makes the meaning clear; and a similar transition occurs, as Schneider points out, in VI 486 A: see also note ad loc.

καταφρονήσας ‐‐ ποιήματος . He cannot bring himself to despise the whole poem: yet that is the only safe thing to do. From this point of view Plato's own καταφρόνησις ὅλης τῆς ποιήσεως is in itself the strongest testimony to the hold which Poetry had on him. See on 595 B.

ἀπολαύειν ‐‐ οἰκεῖα . Cf. III 395 C ff. and Laws 656 B.

θρέψαντα ‐‐ κατέχειν . Plato and Aristotle agree in holding that Pity is one of the principal emotions to which Tragedy ministers. The point at which they part company is where they begin to discuss the effect produced upon human life and conduct by the indulgence of this emotion in the mimicry of the stage. According to Plato, the emotion grows by what it feeds upon, and becomes more and more troublesome and deleterious in real life, the more we indulge it at the theatre: according to Aristotle, tragedy effects the ‘purgation’ of pity and its kindred emotions and tends to free us from their dominion in matters of more serious moment (Poet. 6. 1449^{b} 27 et al.). Aristotle hopes to effect by means of theatrical stimulation what Plato would attain by starving the emotions even in play. It is obvious that the Aristotelian theory of the drama was in this important respect developed in direct and conscious antagonism to the Platonic, to which, in other particulars, it owes much: see Finsler Platon u. die Arist. Poetik pp. 96 ff. I think it may fairly be argued that Plato's view is not less true to experience than that of Aristotle; for a spectacle which ‘purges’ the ἐλεεινόν in one man may strengthen it in another and make him more than ever inclined to self-pity. On the contrast between the Platonic and Aristotelian views see Butcher Aristotle's Theory of Poetry^{2} etc. pp. 237—268, especially 241 f., and for Aristotle's debt to Plato in his definition of tragedy consult the excellent essay of Siebeck Zur Katharsisfrage in his Unters. zur Phil. d. Gr. pp. 165—180.

ἐλεεινόν . ἐλεεινός and not ἐλεινός is the Platonic form of this word: see Schanz Phaedo p. VII.

ἆρ’ οὐχ κτλ. Cf. III 388 E.

ὅτι κτλ. : lit. ‘that whatever jests you would be ashamed to make yourself, but which you are mightily pleased to hear in comic representations, or it may be in private life, and do not hate as bad, you do the same thing’ etc. ‘Whatever’ is treated as equivalent to ‘if any’: see Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 945. I have followed Schneider in writing ἅν or ἃ ἄν instead of ἄν (see cr. n.), although he gives no other instance where ἄν appears to do double duty in this fashion. The usage, however, ought not on that account to be pronounced impossible; for cases in which a single relative pronoun forms, as here, the object of two opposing clauses, one representing a hypothetical, the other an actual situation, are extremely rare. We should also remember that ὅς is occasionally used instead of ὃς ἄν with the subjunctive, even in classical prose, according to the best MSS: e.g. Laws 737 B: see also Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 206. A sentence like the present is made easier by the mere existence of such an exceptional liberty of style. For the corruption of ἅν to ἄν cf. (with Schneider) Gorg. 486 E. All other attempts at emendation—and they are numerous—involve too much change: see App. III.

ἰδίᾳ : i.e. “intra privatos parietes et ab iis, qui artem non profitentur” (Schneider). The word has been held to refer to writings in prose: but see on II 363 E.

αὖ κατεῖχες . αὖ is “item, ut antea θρηνῶδες” (Stallbaum). Madvig's conjecture ἄν should not be adopted. The second αὖ (τότ’ αὖ) points the contrast between κατεῖχες and ἀνίης: cf. 606 A note

καὶ περὶ ἀφροδισίων κτλ. Cf. III 389 D ff., and (for the psychological theory of this passage) supra 602 C note ὅτι, which depends on ὁ αὐτὸς λόγος, is easy enough if we retain ὅτι in C: cf. VI 510 D οὐκοῦν καὶ ὅτι κτλ. and infra 613 D καὶ αὖ καὶ περὶ τῶν ἀδίκων ὅτι κτλ. Otherwise ὅτι becomes extremely difficult, although Stallbaum and Neukirch (in Pl. Pol. quaest. phil. I p. 49) think that ὁ αὐτὸς λόγος ἐστίν may even then be supplied. The word was accordingly suspected by Ast and bracketed by Baiter. Madvig conjectures ἔτι, and Richards would replace ὅτι τοιαῦτα by ἕτερα τοιαῦτα or οὐ τὰ αὐτά (understood interrogatively). The recurrence of ὅτι is, however, the strongest evidence in favour of its genuineness both here and above. See App. III. The pronoun τοιαῦτα takes its meaning from ἀφροδισίων etc. The note of interrogation after ἐργάζεται was added by Schneider. On ἄρδουσα see VIII 550 B note

Ὁμήρου ἐπαινέταις . Dümmler and Stählin suppose that Plato has Antisthenes in his mind: but see on 598 D.

ἄξιος . Campbell was the first to point out that ἄξιος, and not ἄξιον, is the reading of Paris A. There is no MS authority of any kind for ἄξιον, and it is intrinsically much inferior.

πρῶτον τῶν τραγῳδοποιῶν . See on 595 C.

ὕμνους ‐‐ ἀγαθοῖς . In Laws 801 E —802 A the same exceptions are allowed. Even religious hymns would fall under the heading of μίμησις, according to Plato's definition of the term: so that it is once more clear that his real quarrel is not with Imitation as such, but only with Imitation of the false and immoral. See on 595 A. For the construction cf. (with Stallbaum) Symp. 194 D τοῦ ἐγκωμίου τῷ Ἔρωτι. In pp. 55—59 of his Stellung d. Poesie in der plat. Phil. Stählin gives an interesting sketch of the kind of Poetry which Plato would have admitted in the Republic.

ἡδυσμένην . The same word is used by Aristotle in a narrower sense, with specific reference to what he considers the ἡδύσματα or seasoning of poetry, viz. metre and melody: see Butcher Aristotle's Theory of Poetry^{2} etc. p. 146 note 1. Here ἡδυσμένην points the way to ἡδονή; and for that reason ‘pleasurable’ is a more suitable translation than ‘honeyed’ (Jowett) or ‘highlyseasoned’ (D. and V.), although the epithet also suggests a comparison with cookery (cf. ὄψον ἡδῦναι Theaet. 175 E). For the sentiment cf. III 398 A f. αὐτοὶ δ’ ἂν τῷ αὐστηροτέρῳ καὶ ἀηδεστέρῳ ποιητῇ χρῴμεθα κτλ.

τοῦ κοινῇ ‐‐ λόγου : ‘the principle which the community shall in every instance have pronounced to be the best.’ See 604 B—D, where one example of such a λόγος is provided. For λόγος in this sense cf. (with Schneider) Crit. 46 B ἐγὼ—ἀεὶ τοιοῦτος οἷος τῶν ἐμῶν μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ πείθεσθαι ἢ τῷ λόγῳ, ὃς ἄν μοι λογιζομένῳ βέλτιστος φαίνηται. In his second edition Ast wished to place a comma after βελτίστου (‘that which has ever been judged best by all, viz. reason’). This interpretation lends a certain weight and dignity to the clause; but the other is easier and more natural. Cf. Shorey in A. J. Ph. XIII pp. 364 ff. Plato elsewhere provides against what he takes to be the antinomian tendency of Poetry by enacting that the Poet shall παρὰ τὰ τῆς πόλεως νόμιμα καὶ δίκαια ἢ καλὰ ἢ ἀγαθὰ μηδὲν ποιεῖν ἄλλο, and submit all his works to a state censorship (Laws 801 C, D), although in a striking passage of the Politicus (299 B, E) he himself insists that freedom is the very life of poetry and every other art. See Reber Platon u. die Poesie p. 71.

607B - 608B The quarrel between Philosophy and Poetry is nothing new; but, for our own part, we are willing to let Poetry return, as soon as she is proved to be not merely pleasant, but profitable. Till then, we shall use our argument as a charm to protect ourselves against her fascinations; for the issue at stake is greater than it appears.

ἀπολελογήσθω κτλ. See cr. n. The reading ἀπολελογίσθω— enumerata sunto or, according to Hermann, singulatim exputata sunto—though retained by Hermann and Baiter, is much less appropriate than ἀπολελογήσθω: for the whole of the preceding episode is an ἀπολογία or defence of Plato's attitude towards Poetry in Books II and III (595 A note). ἀπολελογήσθω is also more in accordance with ὅτι εἰκότως ἀπεστέλλομεν: and the words ὁ γὰρ λόγος ἡμᾶς ᾕρει “non tam eorum sunt, qui ius suum exsequi, quam qui excusare se valuerunt” (Schneider). The corruption, which recurs infra 607 D in Π, is by no means rare: see StephanusHase s.v. ἀπολογίζομαι. See also on VI 490 A. On ὁ γὰρ λόγος ἡμᾶς ᾕρει see 604 C note προσείπωμεν δὲ αὐτῇ=‘let us tell her also.’ With this use of προσειπεῖν cf. II 375 E note

παλαιὰ ‐‐ ποιητικῇ . There are few traces of this ‘ancient feud’ in the extant fragments of early Greek poetry. Pindar furnishes one, Fr. 209 ed. Bergk, ἀτελῆ σοφίας καρπὸν δρέπειν (said of the φυσιολογοῦντες: see above on V 457 B). The early philosophers on the other hand were constantly falling foul of Homer, Hesiod and the poets generally on theological and moral grounds: see for example Heraclitus Fr. 35, 43, 111, 119 Bywater, and Xenophanes and Empedocles in RP.^{7} §§ 82, 83, 140 A—140 D. The attitude of Pythagoras was equally hostile, if we may trust Hieronymus ap. D. L. VIII 21. Even those philosophers who defended Homer did not venture to take him at his word, but had resort to the allegorical method of interpretation (II 378 D note). The antagonism between Philosophy and Poetry—the latter “immortalising in imperishable creations the traditional faith, the former, just on account of that faith, condemning those creations” Krohn (Pl. St. p. 261)—was appreciated in its true historical significance by those Christian apologists who, like Clement, make philosophy a προπαιδεία to Christianity—ἐπαιδαγώγει γὰρ καὶ αὐτὴ τὸ Ἑλληνικόν, ὡς ὁ νόμος τοὺς Ἑβραίους, εἰς Χριστόν. προπαρασκευάζει τοίνυν ἡ φιλοσοφία, προοδοποιοῦσα κτλ. (Strom. I 5. 718 D, 720 A. Cf. Spiess Logos Spermatikos pp. 3—5).

καὶ γὰρ ‐‐ πένονται . The source of these quotations has not been discovered. They are all from poets, as Schneider holds; but we ought not to take παλαιά too strictly, and infer from it that all of them are very old. Plato's main object is to make out that his quarrel with Poetry is nothing new, for Poetry and Philosophy have quarrelled from the earliest times; and it is therefore inherently probable that the quotations are of very different dates. There is no a priori reason why some of them should not be from the contemporary drama; but some of them should be older; and those who refer them all to comedy, such as Ast, Prantl, and Heine (de rat. quae Pl. c. poet. Gr. intercedit p. 50 note 4), can hardly be right. Still less is Pfleiderer justified in citing them as expressions of the indignation which, according to his own chorizontic views, Books II and III had aroused in comic poets (Zur Lösung etc. p. 34).

ἡ λακέρυζα ‐‐ κραυγάζουσα . Cf. Laws 967 C, D καὶ δὴ καὶ λοιδορήσεις γε ἐπῆλθον ποιηταῖς, τοὺς φιλοσοφοῦντας κυσὶ ματαίαις ἀπεικάζοντας χρωμέναισιν ὑλακαῖς. The occasion which provoked this assault upon philosophy was—so Plato tells us—the atheistic teaching of Anaxagoras and his followers about the celestial bodies. Here the λακέρυζα κύων represents of course φιλοσοφία: but (in view of the passage in the Laws) it would be unsafe to identify δεσπόταν with Poetry. Probably the quotation is from some lyric poet.

μέγας ‐‐ κενεαγορίαισι is presumably also a lyrical fragment, directed against some notable philosopher, or less probably against some philosophical figment “cuius modi Δῖνος in Nubibus Aristophanis est” (Schneider).

ὁ ‐‐ κράτων : ‘the rabble-rout of alltoo-sapient heads.’ I have combined Herwerden's conjecture ΛΊΑ— for ΔΊΑ with my own suggestion κράτων (from κράς) instead of κρατῶν (Cl. Rev. X p. 105). τῶν λίαν σοφῶν ὄχλος | κράτων looks like a tragic fragment, and a comparison with Med. 305 εἰμὶ δ’ οὐκ ἄγαν σοφή and Hipp. 518, El. 296 γνώμην ἐνεῖναι τοῖς σοφοῖς λίαν σοφήν, suggests that the author is Euripides: cf. also VIII 568 A note The head stands for the whole personality, as in the familiar use of κάρα and κεφαλή in Tragedy and elsewhere (πολλὰς ἰφθίμους κεφαλὰς Ἄιδι προίαψεν Il. 11. 55 ἡ μιαρὰ κεφαλὴ αὕτη Dem. Cor. 153 et al.: see Blaydes on Ar. Ach. 285); and a learned poet like Euripides might the more readily have described philosophers by this feature, because the head, and not the heart or midriff, was believed to be the seat of intelligence not only by Hippocrates, but also by many of the philosophers themselves, including Pythagoras, Alcmaeo, Democritus and Plato: see Diels Dox. Gr. pp. 391^{a} 3, 391^{b} 5, 392^{a} 2, 427^{a} 8, Zeller^{5} I p. 448 and Gomperz, Greek Thinkers I pp. 148, 313. There are also, I think, traces of a similar view even in popular beliefs: see for example Ar. Clouds 1275 f. οὐκ ἔσθ’ ὅπως σύ γ’ αὐτὸς ὑγιαίνεις. Τί δαί; | Τὸν ἐγκέφαλον ὥσπερ σεσεῖσθαί μοι δοκεῖς. For other views of this passage see App. IV.

οἱ λεπτῶς ‐‐ πένονται : ‘the subtle thinkers, how that they are beggars after all.’ This quotation is probably from comedy, which abounds in references to μεριμνοφροντισταί, λεπτολόγοι etc. (cf. Ar. Clouds 101, 153 al.), and constantly ridicules the poverty and destitution of οἱ σοφοί: see the passages quoted in my edition of the Apology, pp. VIII f. There is nothing in the language to justify Schneider in attributing the fragment to a lyrical poet. A MS note in my copy of Schneider cites the proverb λεπτὴν πλέκειν· λεγόμενόν τι ἐπὶ τῶν πενήτων from Photius (p. 215. 12).

καταδεχοίμεθα . καταδέχεσθαι is ‘to receive home from exile’: cf. κατιέναι below. δεχοίμεθα, which Baiter reads on insufficient authority, is much less expressive and appropriate.

ξύνισμέν γε κτλ. See on 595 B.

ἀπολογησαμένη . Plato is hardly likely to let Poetry return on the promise of an ex post facto ἀπολογία: she must surely make good her defence before the decree of banishment can be repealed. Hence ἀπολογησαμένη, which Schneider and the Oxford editors adopt, is right as against the ἀπολογησομένη of A^{2} and a few inferior MSS (followed by Bekker and others).

εἰ δέ γε κτλ. The words from γε μή to φανῆ [ναι] have been found on one of the Oxyrhynchus Papyri, without any difference from the text of A except οὕτω for οὕτως and ἐνγεγονότα for ἐγγεγονότα (Grenfell and Hunt, Vol. I p. 52).

τῶν καλῶν πολιτειῶν . Ξ has κακῶν for καλῶν, oblivious of the irony.

ἀκροασόμεθα δ’ οὖν κτλ. ‘We shall listen, I say, in the conviction that this kind of poetry should not be taken seriously’ etc. A majority of MSS, including Α and Π, read αἰσθόμεθα instead of ἀκροασόμεθα (see cr. n.): but the present αἴσθομαι was not used in classical Greek, as Stallbaum successfully proves in his elaborate note (cf. also Kühner-Blass Gr. Gr. I 2. p. 354), and if it were, the meaning would still be unsuitable. Neither of the two variants, αἰσθώμεθα and εἰσόμεθα has any great MS authority, or is at all likely to be right. I formerly adopted Madvig's conjecture ᾀσόμεθα, which is in harmony with the Greek tendency to drop the preposition in repeating the reason why τῶν εἰρημένων should not, like ἐκείνοις in 612 B, refer to what Plato in 614 A calls ‘those goods which Justice by herself supplied’ (ἐκείνοις τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς οἷς αὐτὴ παρείχετο ἡ δικαιοσύνη): and it is much more natural to assign this meaning to τῶν εἰρημένων than to suppose ‘that Plato had two plans in his mind as to how to finish the Republic.’ I can find no sufficient evidence to justify any such idea.

πᾶς γὰρ ‐‐ ἂν εἴη . Cf. VI 486 A. Stallbaum follows Bekker in reading πρὸς τὸν πάντα with q and Flor. U, comparing VI 498 D, οὐχ ὑπὲρ τοῦ παντός below and Phaed. 107 C. “Videtur— πᾶς ad universum tempus, quod omnino dicitur, ab illo verbis πᾶς οὗτος etc. significato distinguendum sufficere, ac nescio an consulto scriptor, quum priorem πάντα χρόνον necessario definisset, hunc plane infinitum exhibuerit” (Schneider). Cf. Walbe Synt. Plat. spec. p. 26.

οἶμαι ἔγωγε : sc. ὑπὲρ τοῦ παντὸς δεῖν ἐσπουδακέναι. Cf. I 336 E note and App. ad loc.

οὐκ ᾔσθησαι κτλ. ‘Have you not observed’ etc. The light and airy tone with which Plato introduces this momentous topic has often been remarked upon; and we can hardly help feeling that οὐδὲν γὰρ χαλεπόν is too audacious to be taken seriously, in spite of Plato's immoveable conviction of the immortality of the soul (see on VI 498 D). The doctrine itself had of course long been an article of the Orphic and Pythagorean creeds (see Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 1 ff. and Laudowicz Präexistenz d. Seele u. Seelenwand. in Gr. Phil. pp. 1—29), and we must not suppose (with Thomas Gray) that it is the novelty of the idea which occasions Glauco's wonder. Glauco regards the originally half-theological doctrine of the immortality of the Soul with the same sort of well-bred incredulity which it inspired in most of Plato's contemporaries (cf. VI 498 D with I 330 D, E and Phaed. 69 E, 70 A, 80 D), and is astonished that a well-balanced mind should treat it seriously as a philosophical dogma capable of being established by rational argument.

εἰ μὴ ἀδικῶ γε . See on IV 430 D.

608D - 611A Everything, which suffers destruction, is destroyed by its own peculiar evil or disease, and that which cannot be destroyed thereby is indestructible. Now the evil which is peculiar to the soul is vice, and vice is powerless to slay the soul. We must beware of supposing that the soul is destroyed by bodily disease, unless it can be proved that bodily disease engenders within the soul its own specific evil; and if any one has the boldness to assert that the souls of the dying do actually become more vicious, he must be prepared to shew that vice, alone and by itself, is fatal to its possessor, which is far from being true. Vice would lose its terrors if death were the end of all things. We conclude that the soul is immortal, since neither its own nor any alien evil can destroy it.

ff. Socrates has already expressed his belief in the immortality of the soul in VI 498 D: cf. also ib. 496 E and I 330 D, E. The proof which Plato gives here has been widely discussed and severely, though often unfairly and unintelligently, criticised by many critics, to some of whom reference is made in the course of the notes. Plato does not stop to define what he means by ‘soul,’ nor the different senses in which he employs the word ‘death,’ and the consequence is that superficial inspection of his reasoning often sees a fallacy where there is only an ellipse. The best preparation for a study of this argument is a careful examination of the proofs in the Phaedo, to which Plato himself appears expressly to allude in 611 B: see note ad loc. It will be easier to understand the reasoning of Plato if we bear in mind the following considerations. (1) The duality of soul and body is assumed throughout the whole discussion. (2) It is the individual immortality of the soul which Plato wishes to prove. (In his excellent monograph Unsterblichkeitslehre Plato's, Halle, 1878, Bertram appears to me to have conclusively and once for all established this point as against Teichmüller Die Plat. Fr. pp. 1—23. Cf. Simson Der Begriff d. Seele bei Plato pp. 126—143). (3) The conception of soul as the principle of life, though not expressly enunciated here, is present to Plato's mind (609 D note). The question whether immortality (in the fullest sense of the term) belongs to the entire soul, or only to part of it, is not raised in the course of the proof itself, but from 611 B—612 A, it would seem that the λογιστικόν alone is indestructible (611 B note). At each successive incarnation the λογιστικόν is defiled ὑπὸ τῆς τοῦ σώματος κοινωνίας, and (according to Phaed. 81 B ff.) the pollution frequently adheres even after death, causing the soul to seek re-incarnation. The ultimate aim is apparently to be delivered from bodily existence altogether, and live ἄνευ σωμάτων τὸ παράπαν εἰς τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον ( Phaed. 114 C), but even then the soul would not—so at least I think—seem to Plato to lose its essential individuality and become absorbed. See on the whole subject Simson l.c. pp. 144—154 and cf. 611 B note

κακὸν ‐‐ λέγεις ; Richards would add ἴδιον or οἰκεῖον after λέγεις, comparing (for ἴδιον) 610 B, and (for οἰκεῖον) 609 C, 610 E. It is easy to understand εἶναι: ‘do you say that each thing has a particular evil and a particular good?’ See Schanz Nov. Comm. Pl. p. 33.

διέλυσεν καὶ ἀπώλεσεν . Throughout this argument, as throughout the Phaedo, destruction means dissolution (διάλυσις).

τὸ ξύμφυτον κτλ. The words ἑκάστου and ἀπολεῖ are bracketed by Herwerden, quite undeservedly. For the statement itself see on 609 E.

ἦν . “Imperfectum illud tempus indicat, quo res nondum satis cognita, et tamen ita, ut nunc apparet, comparata esset” Schneider. Cf. IV 436 C note

ἀδικία ‐‐ ἀμαθία . Vice is the evil peculiar to soul: cf. IV 444 C, Tim. 86 B ff. and Soph. 227 E.

ἀλλ) ὧδε ποίει . ποίει means ‘picture,’ ‘represent.’ που οἴει, which Liebhold conjectures ( Philol. 1880 p. 169), is wholly inapposite; for the sense requires an imperative. Ast suggests νόει or σκόπει, but the text is sound: see on VII 498 A.

ἕως ἂν ‐‐ χωρίσῃ . θάνατον must here be understood of the soul's death, otherwise the parallel with ὥσπερ —ἀφικνεῖται breaks down, and the reasoning becomes not merely fallacious, but absurd. We have, in fact, to distinguish between the death or dissolution of a the body (as described in C above ὥσπερ σῶμα — εἰς τὸ μηδὲ σῶμα εἶναι), b the soul, c the σύνολον, or body plus soul. If the soul is mortal, the moment at which it is dissolved and perishes is when the σύνολον dies, i.e. ( Phaed. 64 C, 67 D) when soul is separated from body (cf. Phaed. 70 A, 77 B, D, E, 80 D and 84 B). Plato reminds us of this by saying ἕως ἂν εἰς θάνατον ἀγαγοῦσα τοῦσώματος χωρίσῃ instead of merely ἕως ἂν εἰς θάνατον ἀγάγῃ. Cf. 610 D note

οὐδαμῶς ‐‐ τοῦτό γε . It is strange that Glauco should assent so readily. He is apparently thinking (as in 610 E) of the activity and vitality which wicked men so frequently display; but we may fairly ask ‘Why should soul be the only thing which is incapable of being destroyed by its own vice?’ It would surely be more true to hold that vice is able to kill the soul just because it is able ποιεῖν αὐτὴν κακήν (609 B), and Panaetius actually made use of a similar argument in order to prove the soul mortal (“nihil esse, quod doleat, quin id aegrum esse quoque possit. quod autem in morbum cadat, id etiam interiturum; dolere autem animos, ergo etiam interire” Cicero Tusc. Disp. I 79). Is ἆρα ἐνοῦσα—χωρίσῃ intended as an appeal to experience? Even if we allowed that experience is the proper tribunal, our experience of the effect of injustice on a human soul is limited to a single life; and why should not one soul wear out many bodies and perish at last through its own vice καὶ ᾖ αὐτὸ τοῦτο θάνατος, ψυχῆς ὄλεθρος (cf. Phaed. 87 B, 91 D. See also Deichert Plato's Beweise f. die Unsterblichkeit d. Seele pp. 46—48). These difficulties are serious, and possibly fatal: they have even led some critics to stigmatise the whole argument as a petitio principii (e.g. Brandt Zur Entwick. d. Pl. Lehre v. d. Seelentheilen p. 29). Plato does not attempt to solve them here; but a comparison of the present argument with Phaed. 93 A—94 B helps at all events to explain his position. Soul is always soul, and no soul is more a soul than any other ( Phaed. 93 B); hence the soul which is made evil by vice retains its vitality unimpaired. It is in fact the conception of soul as the principle of life which explains (from the Platonic point of view) Glauco's emphatic οὐδαμῶς. Cf. I 353 D τί δ) αὖ τὸ ζῆν; ψυχῆς φήσομεν ἔργον εἶναι; Μάλιστά γ), ἔφη, with note ad loc. It is on the essential connexion between ‘soul’ and ‘life’ that Plato builds his crowning argument for the immortality of the soul in the Phaedo (100 B ff., and especially 105 C, D). Cf. Zeller^{4} II p. 827 and infra 610 D note

αὐτῶν ‐‐ τῶν σιτίων . Herwerden (following Ξ) would omit τῶν σιτίων, but the contrast with σώματος μοχθηρίαν is improved by the presence of these words. αὐτῶν is ‘ipsorum’ exactly as in αὐτῶν ἐκείνων above: ‘of food itself’ )( body.

ὑπὸ δὲ σιτίων κτλ. Cf. 609 A, B. It is difficult to see where the ἔμφυτον κακόν comes in when the organism is destroyed by violence. Surely fire destroys wood without using σηπεδών as its instrument. The fact is that Plato's theory of a ξύμφυτον κακόν by which and which alone each object is destroyed, if destroyed it be, does not apply except where the object is independent of external influences, and such, throughout this proof, he supposes soul to be. Cf. 608 D note and Brandt l.c. p. 29.

ὀρθότατα . See cr. n. Vind. F has ὀρθώτατ’ ἄν, Vind. E ὀρθότατ’ ἄῤ: otherwise there is no variant. Schneider alone retains ἂν—λέγεις, but fails to justify the solecism. ὀρθότατ’ ἂν—λέγοις, which Hermann and Stallbaum take from Ξ and Flor. V, does not suit the situation here, as κάλλιστα ἂν λέγοις does in Laws 897 E. Both here and in Laws 656 A (where A has ὀρθότατα λέγοις) the simplest correction is ὀρθότατα λέγεις. For the error see Introd. § 5.

ἐξελέγξωμεν . Richards proposes ἐξελεγχθῶμεν, but the hortatory subjunctive is quite out of place with the passive here. See also on VII 534 C.

ὅ τι σμικρότατα is more idiomatic than εἰς ὅ τι σμικρότατα, which J. and C. suggest: cf. VI 509 D and Symp. 191 D.

ὁμόδε ‐‐ ἰέναι : ‘dares to close with the argument’ not ‘with us in argument’ (one of J. and C.'s alternatives). Cf. Euthyd. 294 D ὁμόσε ᾔτην τοῖς ἐρωτήμασιν, Euthyph. 3 C and Theaet. 165 E.

λέγειν ὡς πονηρότερος κτλ. I think it was Dr Johnson who said ‘Every man is a rascal when he is sick.’ For the omission of the copula with ὁμολογεῖν cf. II 374 A note

αὐτοῦ τούτου . See cr. n. The reading αὐτοῦ τοῦ, which has most of the MSS in its favour, is kept by Schneider, Stallbaum and Burnet (“ab ea, utpote suapte vi et natura perimente’ Schneider). Hermann and Jowett and Campbell read αὐτοῦ τούτου, which is intrinsically far better (‘this itself’ ‘just this’ as opposed to the external agencies mentioned below), and might easily have been corrupted into αὐτοῦ τοῦ .

ἀποθνῄσκειν ‐‐ οἱ ἄδικοι . If Injustice kills the soul, which is the principle of life (609 D note), the wicked should die of their own wickedness; for they cannot of course continue to live on after their soul expires. As it is, however, they have to be put to death by others, and (according to Glauco) their wickedness rather increases than diminishes their vitality. The argument may not be conclusive (609 D note); but we are surely not justified in charging Plato (as Brandt apparently does l.c. p. 29) with confounding either here or in 609 D the two notions of physical death and death of the soul.

ἀλλὰ μὴ ὥσπερ κτλ. For the construction cf. III 410 B note

διὰ τοῦτο . See cr. n. Schneider defends διὰ τούτου by Aesch. Ag. 447 πεσόντ’ ἀλλοτρίας διαὶ γυναικός: but Aeschylus regards Helen as an agent in the death of the fallen Greeks, and the meaning ‘on account of’ is even more necessary here than in 609 E δἰ ἐκεῖνα ὑπὸ τῆς αὑτοῦ κακίας. Cf. VIII 562 B note

οὐκ ἄρα ‐‐ κακῶν . Cf. Phaed. 107 C εἰ μὲν γὰρ ἦν ὁ θάνατος τοῦ παντὸς ἀπαλλαγή, ἑρμαῖον ἂν ἦν τοῖς κακοῖς ἀποθανοῦσι τοῦ τε σώματος ἅμ’ ἀπηλλάχθαι καὶ τῆς αὑτῶν κακίας μετὰ τῆς ψυχῆς. The thought expressed in these two passages contains the germ of a new argument for immortality. It might be urged that a future existence is necessary in order that the wicked may pay the penalty for their sins, so that Immortality would become a “postulate of the moral government of the universe” (Deichert l.c. p. 48). Plato is content merely to suggest this argument: neither here nor elsewhere does he place it in the forefront of his dialectical proof of immo<*>ality.

καὶ μάλα ζωτικὸν κτλ. Glauco is thin<*>ing of the extreme activity and vitality s<*>metimes displayed by the more aggressive kind of villain. A good example is f<*>nished by the career of Dionysius I of Syracuse. With ἄγρυπνον Stallbaum compares “ut iugulent homines surgunt de no<*> latrones” (Hor. Epp. I 2. 32)—an insta<*>ce on a small and petty scale of the sort of thing which is in Plato's mind.

611A - 612A It follows that the number of so<*>s is always constant, each of them retaining its individuality throughout. We have hitherto represented soul as a composite s<*>stance; but the composite cannot easily <*>e immortal; and if we would see the mul as it really is, we must view it apart from the body and those material accr<*>ons with which in human life it is clogg<*>d and encumbered. Then and only then shall we be able to see its true nature.

<*>εὶ ἂν εἶεν αἱ αὐταί : ‘it will always be the same souls that are in existence.’ α<*> αὐταί is the subject, not the predicate (as Teichmüller translates Plat. Fr. p. 7). Although οὔτε γὰρ— πλείους justifies ἀεὶ ἂν εἶεν αἱ αὐταί only in so far as concerns the total number of souls, αἱ αὐταί by itself means more than this, and implies the personal identity of each individual soul throughout all the vicissitudes of its endless existence. The conviction that the life of each particular soul is a continuous sequence of cause and effect stretching from eternity to eternity was firmly held by Plato, and he briefly reminds us of it here because the theory of future rewards and punishments, which he will presently describe, rests on that hypothesis and no other. For the history of this belief before the time of Plato see Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 134—136.

ὁτιοῦν ‐‐ ἀθάνατα . All things are either mortal or immortal: hence the immortal, if increased at all, must be so at the expense of the mortal, which will accordingly in course of time be exhausted. Cf. Phaed. 70 C—72 E, especially 72 B ff., where a similar train of reasoning is employed to prove ἐκ τῶν τεθνεώτων τοὺς ζῶντας γίγνεσθαι καὶ τὰς τῶν τεθνεώτων ψυχὰς εἶναι.

τῇ ἀληθεστάτῃ φύσει κτλ. In its true and essential nature soul is akin to the simple and incomposite: see Phaed. 78 B—81 A.

αὐτὸ πρὸς αὑτό goes with ἀνομοιότητος—διαφορᾶς: cf. διαφέρεσθαι πρὸς αὑτό and the like. The translation ‘viewed by itself’ (D. and V.) is quite wrong.

ὡς νῦν ἡμῖν ἐφάνη ἡ ψυχή refers to the tripartite division of soul in IV 435 A ff.: cf. (with Campbell) infra C νῦν δὲ εἴπομεν κτλ., 612 A νῦν δὲ—διεληλύθαμεν and (for the use of νῦν) ὥσπερ νῦν in VI 504 D and III 414 B note It is much less natural to connect the clause with ἀίδιον (“eternal as we have just proved the soul to be” D. and V., with whom Jowett and apparently also Schneider agree. Prantl and others take the right view). Now that he has proved the soul to be immortal, Plato takes the opportunity to suggest a revision of the psychology of Book IV, in which soul was treated as composite (435 A note): for nothing that is composite can well be immortal (cf. Phaed. l.c.). According to the theory which is rather suggested (612 A) than fully worked out in this chapter, the socalled lower ‘parts’ are not of the essence of soul at all, but only incidental to its association with body, and consequently perishable. Cf. Phaed. 66 C ff., 79 C, D and the θνητὸν εἰδος ψυχῆς of Tim. 69 C ff. Plato expresses himself with great reserve (612 A), but apparently intends us to believe that soul in its truest nature is λογιστικόν, and that the λογιστικόν alone is immortal (so also Simson Begriff d. Seele bei Plato p. 128: cf. also Grimmelt de reip. Pl. comp. et unit. p. 94 and Nettleship Lect. and Rem. II p. 357).

οἱ ἄλλοι . The reference is generally supposed to be to the arguments of the Phaedo. Krohn however (Pl. St. p. 266) compares παλαιὸς—λόγος οὗ μεμνήμεθα ( Phaed. 70 C), where Plato is thinking of Orphic and Pythagorean beliefs, and suggests that οἱ ἄλλοι should here be interpreted in the same way; while Pfleiderer (Zur Lösung etc. p. 41) sees an allusion to the Phaedrus and Meno. That the arguments of the Phaedo are included in the reference, is extremely probable both on other grounds, and also on account of the remarkable affinity between that dialogue and the whole of this section; but Plato's words are wide enough to cover all the proofs of immortality current in the Platonic school, whether published or not.

ἀναγκάσειαν ἄν . See on VI 490 C.

καθαρόν : sc. from body and its attendant evil: cf. Phaed. 81 B ff.

εὑρήσει : sc. τις, which is easily supplied after the verbal διαθεατέον: cf. (with Schneider) Euthyd. 299 D οὐκοῦν ἀεὶ δεῖ αὐτὸ ἔχειν—ἐν ἑαυτῷ; καὶ εἴη ἂν εὐδαιμονέστατος, εἰ ἔχοι κτλ.

ἐναργέστερον ‐‐ διόψεται . The theory of Justice and Injustice in Book IV rested on a psychology which explained soul not as καθαρόν, and by itself, but present in body (cf. 612 A). Plato hints that the new psychological standpoint will give us a new and higher conception of Justice. I agree with Hirzel (der Dialog 1 pp. 237 f.) in holding that this higher conception can only be the Idea. The plural refers to different conceptions of Justice and Injustice, rather than to “their various forms” (as J. and C. explain).

τὸν θαλάττιον Γλαῦκον . Glaucus, who had originally been a fisherman himself, when transmuted into a sea-god, became a patron god of sailors and fishermen. See Roscher Lex. d. Myth. s.v. and Frazer on Paus. IX 22. 7.

τά τε παλαιὰ ‐‐ ἄλλα δέ . For τε followed by δέ cf. II 367 C note

ἐκκεκλάσθαι . See cr. n. The reading κεκλάσθαι is found only in one inferior MS besides A. It is rather less suitable in point of meaning, and “quum ἐκκλᾶν perrarum, κλᾶν usu tritum sit, duorum codicum gratia vulgatum mutare durum videtur” (Schneider).

εἰς τὴν φιλοσοφίαν αὐτῆς . Cf. Phaed. 79 D ὅταν δέ γε αὐτὴ καθ’ αὑτὴν σκοπῇ, ἐκεῖσε οἴχεται εἰς τὸ καθαρόν τε καὶ ἀεὶ ὂν καὶ ἀθάνατον καὶ ὡσαύτως ἔχον, καὶ ὡς συγγενὴς οὖσα αὐτοῦ ἀεὶ μετ’ ἐκείνου τε γίγνεται, ὅτανπερ αὐτὴ καθ’ αὑτὴν γένηται καὶ ἐξῇ αὐτῇ, καὶ πέπαυταί τε τοῦ πλάνου καὶ περὶ ἐκεῖνα ἀεὶ κατὰ ταὐτὰ ὡσαύτως ἔχει, ἅτε τοιούτων ἐφαπτομένη.

ξυγγενὴς ‐‐ ὄντι . Cf. Phaed. 79 A ff., especially 80 A, B and Laws 899 D, 959 B, Tim. 90 A, C. Here we have yet another expression of the profound conviction which inspires the teaching of Plato, that man is an οὐράνιον φυτόν, οὐκ ἔγγειον. Herwerden would omit τῷ before ἀεὶ ὅντι, but the article adds emphasis by making ἀεὶ ὄντι look like a different category from ‘the divine and immortal,’ which is treated as a unity. Cf. I 334 E note

οἵα ἂν γένοιτο ‐‐ ἐπισπομένη . In the light of 611 B, C we may suppose that when the soul altogether follows after the divine it shakes itself clear of the body and the lower parts of soul associated therewith, and appears in its true unity as pure λογιστικόν<*> Cf. Grimmelt l.c. p. 94 and 608 D note

τοῦ πόντου ‐‐ ἐστίν . The imagery, which is of course suggested by the comparison with Glaucus of the sea, reminds us of Phaed. 109 B—110 B.

περικρουσθεῖσα is used with exactly the same meaning and construction as περιεκόπη in VII 519 A. The word is particularly appropriate here, because it might well be used of striking a vessel of any kind in order to shake off the integuments with which it has become incrusted in the depths of the sea. Cf. also the metaphorical use of circumcisa in Cic. de Fin. I 44. παρακρουσθεῖσα (Morgenstern) gives a wrong meaning, and περικουφισθεῖσα, which Liebhold suggests, is tame and inadequate.

πέτρας ‐‐ ὄστρεα is bracketed by Herwerden and Richards, the latter proposing as an alternative to insert καί before ἃ νῦν. The image is scarcely bolder than τὰς τῆς γενέσεως ξυγγενεῖς ὥσπερ μολυβδίδας in VII 519 A, and the comparison with Glaucus easily carries it through. ‘Stripped of stones and shellfish—the numerous and wild accretions of earth and stone which in consequence of these “happy” feastings as they are called have fastened themselves about her in her present state, because it is on earth that she feasts.’ Liebhold's conjecture γῇ ἐνοικουμένῃ and Madvig's γῆν ἑστιουμένῃ or γῆν εἰσῳκισμένῃ may be taken as indications of how far these critics are qualified to deal with the text of Plato. Plato means of course that the soul which feeds on earth becomes of the earth, earthy. Man is an οὐράνιον φυτόν ( Tim. 90 A) and should draw his sustenance from Heaven. The best commentary on the whole passage is VII 519 A, B, with the extracts from the Phaedo cited ad loc.: cf. also IX 586 A, B notes For the ‘happy feastings’ see on IV 421 B.

εἴτε ‐‐ ὅπως . For this formula cf. Phaed. 100 D and Laws 899 B. Plato seems clearly to imply that soul in its true nature is μονοειδής, although he refrains from dogmatising on the subject here. See on 611 B.

612A - 613E Now that we have proved Justice to be in itself, apart from all consequences, best for the soul, we may safely dwell on the rewards of Virtue both in life and after death. We revoke the concession which, for the sake of the argument, we formerly made, and restore to Justice the appreciation which in point of fact she does receive from gods and men. The just are dear to the gods and the special object of their providence, but it is otherwise with the unjust. Among men too, Injustice, though for a time it may run well, breaks down before the race is finished; whereas Justice reaches the goal and wins the crown. The honours and prizes which Glauco claimed for successful Injustice fall to Justice, and it is the unjust who suffer the insults and torments which he foretold for the just.

, B 7 οὐκοῦν κτλ. ‘Well then,’ said I, ‘did we not in our discourse clear away the imputations against Justice and abstain from bringing forward the wages’ etc. Jackson is inclined— perhaps rightly—to make the sentence categoric and not interrogative. In τὰ ἄλλα ἀπελυσάμεθα the word ἄλλα refers to the other points raised by Thrasymachus (I 337 A ff.), Glauco and Adimantus (II 358 E ff.), besides the complaint that Justice is usually recommended not on its own merits, but for the sake of its results (II 362 E ff.). For ἀπελυσάμεθα cf. VI 499 E ἀπολυόμενος τὴν τῆς φιλομαθίας διαβολήν , Ap. 37 B, Phaedr. 267 D, Arist. Rhet. III 14. 1415^{b} 37, 15. 1416^{a} 5 al. Other explanations of this difficult word and the variant ἀπεδυσάμεθα are discussed in App. V. Instead of ἐπηνέγκαμεν, I formerly read (with Cobet, Baiter and J. and C.) ἐπῃνέκαμεν. The scribe of Paris A (see cr. n.) seems to have had both readings before him, but to have finally decided in favour of ἐπῃνέκαμεν, which is in exact correspondence with μισθοὺς δὲ καὶ δόξας πάρες ἄλλοις ἐπαινεῖν II 367 D. All the other MSS read ἐπηνέγκαμεν except Par. K, which has ἐπηνέσαμεν. ἐπηνέγκαμεν should probably be preferred, both on account of the MS evidence, and still more because the aorist seems necessary to balance ἀπελυσάμεθα and ηὕρομεν. There is no special reason why the word ἐπαινεῖν in II 367 D should be echoed here: and it is not employed of Homer and Hesiod in II 363 A, to which ἔφατε refers. For the confusion cf. (with J. and C.) Pol. 307 A, where some MSS read ἐπηνέγκαμεν, and others ἐπῃνέκαμεν.

αὐτὸ δικαιοσύνην . See on II 363 A.

τὸν Γύγου δακτύλιον . II 359 C note

Ἄϊδος κυνῆν . See Il. V 844 f. αὐτὰρ Ἀθήνη | δῦν’ Ἄϊδος κυνέην, μή μιν ἴδοι ὄβριμος Ἄρης, with Leaf ad loc. Leaf observes that “the name Ἀίδης here evidently preserves something of its original sense, the Invisible (Ἀvίδης).” For other examples of the proverb see Blaydes on Ar. Ach. 390 .

νῦν ἤδη ἀνεπίφθονον . We may without prejudice consider the question of rewards, now that we have judged virtue and vice upon their merits; and it is even necessary to do so, if we are to take account of all the circumstances of the case. See on 608 C.

πρὸς ἐκείνοις : sc. τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς οἷς αὐτὴ παρείχετο ἡ δικαιοσύνη, as it is more fully expressed in 614 A.

ἡγεῖσθε ‐‐ κριθείη represents the general substance, though not the precise form, of the demands put forward by Glauco and Adimantus in II 361 A—D, 367 E. The reference is not more inexact than other cross-references in the Republic (see on 502 D al.), and Siebeck is hardly justified in suggesting that Plato's recollection of Book II had grown faint by the time he wrote Book X (Untersuch. zur Phil. d. Griechen p. 144). The reading ᾐτεῖσθε (see cr. n.) has some little support from the inferior MSS as well as from A. It is defensible in itself, and (as Campbell observes) “agrees better with ἔδωκα and δοτέον and with ἀπαιτῶ in the following sentence.” But ἡγεῖσθε is on the whole more natural with δοτέον εἶναι and ought probably to be retained. An unfortunate misprint in my edition of the Text of the Republic (1897) assigns to II the reading ᾐγεῖσθε (sic), and the error is repeated by Burnet in his apparatus criticus. In reality Π has ἡγεῖσθε.

κἂν εἰ . See on III 408 B.

ταῦτα : viz. Justice and Injustice.

ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν κτλ. See cr. n. The reading in the text has the approval of Schneider and others. It involves less departure from Π and A^{1} than either a ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν κεκριμέναι εἰσίν, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, πάλιν ἀπαιτῶ κτλ. (Hermann), or b ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, κεκριμέναι εἰσίν, ἐγὼ πάλιν (Ast, Stallbaum), or c ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν, ἦν δ’ ἐγώ, κεκριμέναι εἰσί, πάλιν ἀπαιτῶ κτλ. (Baiter, J. and C., Burnet). There is no authority for c except a marginal annotation in A, although Burnet erroneously attributes this reading to Vind. F and Stobaeus. See (for Vind. F) Schneider's note and (for Stobaeus) Flor. I p. 402. 22 f. Hense. To a and c it may also be objected that the contrast between Socrates on the one hand, and Glauco and Adimantus on the other, requires the presence of ἐγώ as the subject to ἀπαιτῶ: and in b the jingle ἦν δ’ ἐγώ—ἐγὼ πάλιν “valde insuave est” (Schneider).

ἡμᾶς . The reading ὑμᾶς, which Stallbaum adopts, has little authority, and is a needless change, for “Socrates ipse adhuc una cum reliquis iustitiam male audire et deos hominesque secus de ea statuere τοῦ λόγου ἕνεκα posuerat” (Schneider).

δοκεῖσθαι . Cf. VI 490 A.

κατ’ ἀρχὰς ὡμολογοῦμεν . I 352 B.

προτέρας ἁμαρτίας =‘former sin’ means the sins committed in a previous existence. Hence the imperfect ὑπῆρχεν (‘was to him from the first,’ i.e. from the moment of his birth).

οὐ γὰρ δὴ ὑπό γε θεῶν κτλ. Cf. (with Morgenstern de Plat. rep. comment. p. 141) Ap. 41 C, D and, for a proof of the divine Providence, Laws 899 D ff.

εἰς ὅσον δυνατὸν ‐‐ θεῷ . ὁμοίωσις θεῷ κατὰ τὸ δυνατόν is the ethical end for man: see Theaet. 176 B—177 A, and cf. II 383 C, VI 500 C, D, 501 B, C, and Laws 716 B—D together with the μελέτη θανάτου of the Phaedo and the old Pythagorean maxims ἕπου θεῷ, ἀκολουθεῖν τῷ θεῷ. Cf. also Rohde Psyche^{2} pp. 163, 285— 287.

ὅσοι ἂν ‐‐ μὴ κτλ. : “who run well from the lower end of the course to the upper, but not from the upper to the lower” etc. (J. and C.). Plato is thinking of the δίαυλος, and calls the outward and homeward journeys respectively ἀπὸ τῶν κάτω and ἀπὸ τῶν ἄνω. We must suppose, although there seems to be no other authority for the supposition, that the end from which the competitors started was spoken of as ‘down’ and the other end as ‘up.’ Schneider suggests that the outward limit may have stood higher, but Greek stadia seem always to have been level. The use of ἄνω and κάτω is as in περιπατεῖν ἄνω κάτω (Ar. Lys. 709), εἷρπ’ ἄνω τε καὶ κάτω (Eur. H. F. 953), and other examples quoted in Stephanus-Hase Thes. s.v. ἄνω p. 1063. The subject of ἀποπηδῶσι is not οἱ δρομῆς, but οἱ δεινοί τε καὶ ἄδικοι: so that τὸ μὲν πρῶτον corresponds roughly to ἀπὸ τῶν κάτω, and τελευτῶντες to ἀπὸ τῶν ἄνω. This interpretation is that of Schneider and the other editors. A wholly different view is taken by Riddell (Digest § 111) and Madvig. They understand τὰ κάτω of the lower, and τὰ ἄνω of the upper parts of the body (“who run fairly with their legs, but with the upper part of their bodies—head, neck, arms—in bad form” Riddell l.c. For the use of ἀπό cf. Laws 795 B, 832 E and Xen. Rep. Lac. 5. 9). But an allusion to the physiology of bad running is not in place here, and it is difficult to resist the impression that ἀπὸ τῶν κάτω and ἀπὸ τῶν ἄνω are significant parts of the comparison. On Riddell's view they are not, for there is nothing in the career of the clever and unjust which can well be illustrated by ‘running fairly with their legs’ etc. The point is, as τὸ μὲν πρῶτον—ἀποτρέχοντες expressly states, that they do well at first, but collapse before the end, like runners who run well as far as the καμπτήρ, but break down in the second half of the δίαυλος. For the illustration from the games cf. V 465 D note

τὰ ὦτα ‐‐ ἔχοντες . “A metaphor taken from horses and other animals, which let their ears drop when they are tired and overdriven” Thomas Gray. Schneider quotes Photius p. 572. 14 Porson τὰ ὦτα ἐπὶ τῶν ὤμων ἔχοντες· ἐπισείοντες τὴν κεφαλήν· ὃ ποιοῦσιν ἐκλελυμένοι. With οἱ δὲ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ—στεφανοῦνται cf. Pythag. Simil. 22 in Mullach Frag. Phil. Gr. I p. 486 τοῖς μὲν σταδιοδραμοῦσιν ἐπὶ τῷ τέρματι τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς νίκης, τοῖς δὲ φιλοπονήσασιν ἐπὶ τοῦ γήρως τὸ πρωτεῖον τῆς φρονήσεως ἀπόκειται .

ἔλεγες . II 362 B.

ἄθλιοι προπηλακίζονται : “are insulted in their misery” (D. and V.). ἄθλιοι is not altogether predicative (“are miserably insulted” J. and C.), although it goes more closely with προπηλακίζονται than with γέροντες γιγνόμενοι. Schneider translates “und Greise werdend bittere Schmach erdulden müssen.”

ἄγροικα ἔφησθα . II 361 E.

λέγων . See cr. n. I agree with Ast, Hermann, and Stallbaum in omitting εἶτα στρεβλώσονται καὶ ἐκκαυθήσονται “quia nec tempus antecedentibus congruit, nec sententiae ratio Socratem singula supplicia enumerare patitur” (Stallbaum). The passage to which the words refer runs as follows: μαστιγώσεται, στρεβλώσεται, δεδήσεται, ἐκκαυθήσεται τὠφθαλμώ (II 361 E): and εἶτα—ἐκκαυθήσονται (‘after that’—i.e. after they have been scourged —‘they will be racked’ etc.) is probably a marginal note intended to remind us of the further tortures specified in the earlier passage. Schneider and the Oxford editors retain the words as a parenthesis, which is, to say the least, exceedingly awkward.<

613E - 616B But what we have hitherto recounted is as nothing compared with the wages of Virtue and Vice hereafter. Let us hear the vision of Er, the son of Armenius. For twelve days he lay in a trance, during which his soul travelled to a meadow, where he heard the narrative of their experiences from other souls that had fulfilled the millennial period of reward or punishment. In most cases the recompense for good and evil actions was tenfold; but certain crimes were punished yet more sternly, and for some incurable sinners there was no hope at all.

χρὴ δ’ αὐτὰ ἀκοῦσαι κτλ. The Νέκυια of the Republic is one of the earliest extant Apocalypses, and many of its features reappear in later apocalyptic literature, including that of the early Christian era. See James Apocrypha Anecdota in Robinson's Texts and Studies. A careful comparison of the myth in the Republic with those of the Phaedrus, Gorgias, and Phaedo shews that in spite of discrepancies in detail, the four dialogues conspire to produce what is on the whole a tolerably consistent picture of the destiny of the human soul—a kind of ancient ‘Divina Commedia,’ as Döring points out (Archiv f. Gesch. d. Philos. VI pp. 475—490). The sources and affinities of Plato's eschatological myths have been much discussed. Besides the article by Döring on Die eschatologischen Mythen d. Plato (Archiv l.c.) the student should consult Ettig Acheruntica (Leipziger Stud. XIII 1891, pp. 251—402, especially 284 ff.), Norden Vergilstudien ( Hermes XXVIII 1893, pp. 360—406), and especially Dieterich Nekyia (Leipzig 1893), where the common features in ancient representations of the underworld are clearly exhibited. There are traces of Νέκυιαι before the time of Plato, and the investigations of Dieterich and others have made it clear that the materials of Plato's picture are derived in large measure from Orphic or Pythagorean traditions (Dieterich l.c. pp. 128 ff.: cf. also Norden l.c. p. 374, Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 91 ff., and Zeller^{5} I 1. p. 450. Dieterich may be wrong in some of his conjectures, as F. Weber tries to shew in his inaugural dissertation, Platonische Notizen über Orpheus München 1899 p. 20 note, but the broad outlines of his theory are in my opinion established beyond reasonable doubt). Evidence of Pythagorean and Orphic affinities will be cited in the notes. Cf. Proclus in remp. II p. 110 Kroll εἴτε δὲ ἔχει τὰ τῆς ἱστορίας οὕτως εἴτε καὶ μή, ζητεῖν ἄτοπον, τοῦ Πλάτωνος τὰ τοιαῦτα πλάττοντος μὲν οὐδαμῶς, κατὰ δὲ τὴν χρείαν τῶν προκειμένων ἀεὶ παραλαμβάνοντος καὶ χρωμένου πᾶσι μετὰ τῆς πρεπούσης περιβολῆς καὶ οἰκονομίας, ὡς καὶ τῇ Μαντινικῇ ξένῃ καὶ τῷ κατὰ τὸν Γύγου πρόγονον διηγήματι καὶ τῷ κατὰ τοὺς Ἀτλαντικοὺς λόγῳ καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς ὁμοίοις. We may well suppose, however, that the imagination of Plato dealt freely with his materials, and the myth of the Republic bears the unmistakeable impress of Plato's own genius in its artistic finish no less than in its religious and moral teaching.

ἑκάτερος . See cr. n. The accusative appears to be in all MSS except v K and Ξ^{2}.

ἀκοῦσαι is doubted by Stephanus, and bracketed by Ast, Stallbaum, and Baiter. There is nothing offensive in the repetition ἀκοῦσαι—ἀκοῦσαι (cf. VI 511 E note), and the second ἀκοῦσαι is welcome, if not necessary, as defining the exact nature of the debt (‘due to hear,’ i.e. ‘due to be heard,’ like καλὸς ἰδεῖν and the like). “The debt which has been incurred in words” (ἃ ἐδανείσασθε ἐν τῷ λόγῳ 612 C) “has to be paid in words” (J. and C.). ὑπὸ depends on ὀφειλόμενα rather than on ἀκοῦσαι. J. and C. take ἀκοῦσαι as=‘to have related concerning them,’ comparing ἀκοῦσαι σοφίσματα VI 496 A and Lys. 207 A; but it is more natural to give the word the same meaning as it bears just before.

Ἀλκίνου ‐‐ ἀπόλογον . Books IX—XII of the Odyssey were known as Ἀλκίνου ἀπόλογοι the ‘tales to Alcinous’: see Ael. Var. Hist. XIII 14 Ἀλκίνου ἀπολόγους [καὶ] Κυκλώπειαν καὶ Νέκυιαν καὶ τὰ τῆς Κίρκης. Cf. Arist. Poet. 16. 1455^{a} 2 and Rhet. III 16. 1417^{a} 13, from which it appears that the whole four books were also called collectively ὁ Ἀλκίνου ἀπόλογος. There is doubtless an allusion, as the Oxford editors remark, to the νέκυια of Od. XI, which is itself one of the ‘tales to Alcinous’; but the expression has also a proverbial application, being used of a long and tedious story (ἐπὶ τῶν φλυαρούντων καὶ μακρὸν ἀποτεινόντων λόγον Suidas s.v. Ἀπόλογος Ἀλκίνου. Other authorities will be found in Leutsch u. Schneidewin Paroem. Gr. I p. 210, II p. 13). For the paronomasia Ἀλκίνου — ἀλκίμου see Riddell Digest § 323.

Ἠρὸς τοῦ Ἀρμενίου κτλ. The names point to the East. Ἦρ ὄνομα κύριον Ἑβραικόν, says Suidas, and Er is one of the ancestors of Joseph, the husband of the Virgin Mary: see St Luke 3. 28. By some of the ancients, including Clement ( Strom. V 157 Migne), Er was identified with Zoroaster (Proclus l.c. p. 109). τοῦ Ἀρμενίου is of course ‘son of Armenius,’ not ‘the Armenian,’ as some ancient expositors imagined (see Proclus in remp. II p. 110). Plutarch Symp. IX 740 B appears to have read Ἁρμονίου, a reading which was known to Proclus (l.c.), and which commended itself also to the poet Gray: but Ἁρμονίου has no MS authority. Proclus himself adopts the same reading as that of our best MSS, and explains the passage quite correctly in p. 110. 19 ff.

δεκαταίων . The occurrence of the number 10 and its multiples is one of the Pythagorean elements of the story: cf. infra 615 A, B εἶναι δὲ τὴν πορείαν χιλιέτη (10^{3} years)—ὑπὲρ ἑκάστου δεκάκις—ὡς βίου ὄντος τοσούτου (10^{2} years) τοῦ ἀνθρωπίνου and εἰκοστήν in 620 B. See also on 614 C.

ἀναβιοὺς δὲ ‐‐ ἴδοι . Other miraculous stories about the dead or seemingdead returning to life again and describing what they have seen are given by Proclus l.c. pp. 113—116, 122. Cf. also Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 90—102.

ἀφικνεῖσθαι . In Phaed. 107 D and 113 D each soul is conducted by its δαίμων to the place of judgment.

τόπον τινὰ δαιμόνιον κτλ. The situation may be seen from the accompanying plan. AB is the τόπος δαιμόνιος or λειμών (614 E) in which the

judges sit. BC, AC' represent the two ways by which the souls when they are judged depart to receive their rewards or punishments. DA and D'B are the two ways by which the souls return to the meadow to be reincarnated, after their period of reward or punishment is complete. (Ast makes a grave error when he writes “duo ostia, alterum, per quod animae descendunt in corpora, alterum, per quod e vita redeant.” None of the four χάσματα represent the way by which the souls arrive at the meadow immediately after they leave the body.) The τόπος or λειμών appears also in the Phaedo and the Gorgias: εἰς δή τινα τόπον, οἷ δεῖ τοὺς συλλεγέντας διαδικασαμένους εἰς Ἅιδου πορεύεσθαι ( Phaed. 107 D): οὗτοι οὖν— δικάσουσιν ἐν τῷ λειμῶνι ( Gorg. 524 A). Ettig l.c. p. 306 is inclined to derive the idea from Homer's ἀσφόδελος λειμών. We find traces of a λειμών also in Empedocles v. 23 Karsten ἄτης ἂν λειμῶνά (apparently of the Earth) τε καὶ σκότος ἠλάσκουσιν, and in Orphic fragments (e.g. Fr. 154 Abel): cf. also Plut. de fac. orb. Lunae 943 C ἐν τῷ πραοτάτῳ τοῦ ἀέρος, ὃν λειμῶνας Ἅιδου καλοῦσι and Plat. Phaedr. 248 B (the ‘meadow’ or ‘plain of Truth’). In none of these passages is the meadow a place of judgment for departed souls; but πεδίον ἀληθείας is used of the judgment-place in the Axiochus (371 B), a dialogue full of Orphic influence; and it is therefore probable that Plato borrowed the meadow from some Orphic or Pythagorean dogma. We ought, I think, to conceive the meadow as situated somewhere on what Plato in the Phaedo calls ἡ ὡς ἀληθῶς γῆ, meaning the real surface of the earth as opposed to the misty hollows in which we live: see below on 616 A and cf. Susemihl Gen. Entwick. II p. 270. Some of the speculations of the Neoplatonists on this subject are given by Proclus l.c. pp. 128—136: but they are altogether fantastic and useless.

χάσματα . Roeper (de dual. usu Plat. p. 29) would read χάσματε (“id est, ut me monuit Usenerus, χάσματ’ ἐχομένω, a librario male suppletum”). The dual is also found in q and Flor. U; but there is hardly sufficient ground for deserting the best MSS: cf. III 395 A ἢ οὐ μιμήματα ἄρτι τούτω ἐκάλεις ; Lach. 187 A εἰ δ’ αὐτοὶ εὑρεταὶ γεγονότε (so B) τοῦ τοιούτου, and other passages in Roeper l.c. Proclus also has χάσματα ἐχομένω (l.c. p. 136. 17). With the two ways (BC, AC') by which the souls depart after judgment cf. Gorg. 524 A ἐν τῇ τριόδῳ ἐξ ἧς φέρετον τὼ ὁδώ, ἡ μὲν ἐς μακάρων νήσους, ἡ δὲ εἰς τάρταρον: also Phaedr. 249 A. The ‘two ways’ were a familiar feature in Orphic-Pythagorean pictures of the other world: for illustrations see Dieterich l.c. pp. 191 ff. and Rohde Psyche^{2} II p. 220 note 4.

εἰς δεξιάν . The way to the abode of the blest was generally figured as εἰς δεξιάν: see Rohde l.c. and Dieterich l.c. p. 85 note 2, where Dieterich quotes from an Inscription found in a grave in the district of Thurii χαῖρε χαῖρε δεξιὰν ὁδοιπορῶν Αειμῶνάς τε ἱεροὺς κατά τ ἄλσεα Φερσεφονείας. The whole of this Inscription, according to Dieterich, be trays Orphic and Pythagorean influences. Cf. 617 C note The other features (ἄνω, ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν, εἰς ἀριστεράν τε καὶ κάτω, ἐν τῷ ὄπισθεν) are also in keeping with Pythagorean notions: see Arist. Frag. 195 (1513^{a} 24 ff.) τὸ οὖν δεξιὸν καὶ ἄνω καὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἀγαθὸν ἐκάλουν, τὸ δὲ ἀριστερὸν καὶ κάτω καὶ ὄπισθεν κακὸν ἔλεγον, ὡς αὐτὸς Ἀριστοτέλης ἱστόρησεν ἐν τῇ τῶν Πυθαγορείοις ἀρεσκόντων συναγωγῇ.

διὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ . Presumably they passed up through the heavens to the outer surface of the heavenly sphere, as described in Phaedr. 247 B ff. Cf. also Proclus l.c. p. 160. 19 ff. πολλὰ δὲ ἐπορεύθησαν αἳ μὲν κατ’ οὐρανὸν συμπεριπολοῦσαι τοῖς οὐρανίοις θεοῖς κτλ.—clearly a reminiscence of Phaedr. 246 E ff.

, D σημεῖα κτλ. Cf. Gorg. 526 B. κάτω is fully explained in the myth of the Phaedo 111 C—114 C. Cf. infra 615 A.

πάντων ὧν ἔπραξαν from its correspondence with τῶν δεδικασμένων above suggests that our own actions are our doom.

καὶ διακελεύοιντο =‘and that they exhorted’ corresponds of course to καὶ διακελευόμεθα of the oratio recta. Stallbaum's explanation (“optativus ponitur loco accusativi cum infinitivo”) is untenable; nor is there any good reason for suspecting the text or writing διακελεύεσθαι with Eusebius (Praep. Ev. XI 35. 5) and others. The optative is much more dramatic and realistic. Cf. VIII 569 A note

ταύτῃ μέν is explained by καθ’ ἑκάτερον—γῆς i.e. (see the figure on p. 435) BC and AC'. Cornarius conjectured καθ’ ἕτερον μὲν τὸ χάσμα, but ἑκάτερον is much more elegant, and forms a better balance with κατὰ δὲ τὼ ἑτέρω (viz. D'B and DA).

ἐκ τῆς γῆς is not of course ‘from earth’ (D. and V.), but ‘out of the earth’ (‘aus der Erde’ Schneider). They have suffered punishment ἐν τῇ ὑπὸ γῆς πορείᾳ (615 A) ‘in their sojourn underground’ i.e. in the bowels of the Earth, as explained at length in Phaed. 113 E—114 B.

τὸν λειμῶνα . “Articulus locum quasi fama celebratum designat” Schneider. See on 614 C.

χιλιέτη . Cf. Virg. Aen. VI 748 ff. has omnes, ubi mille rotam volvere per annos | Lethaeum ad fluvium deus evocat agmine magno. There is little doubt that both Virgil and Plato took the period of 1000 years from some Orphic or Pythagorean source: see Dieterich l.c. pp. 116 ff. It will be observed that the thousand years do not, in the Republic, include the lifetime of the soul on earth, which Plato estimates at 100 years (615 B). In the Phaedrus on the other hand the entire interval from birth to birth is reckoned at 1000 years (249 A ff., compared with 248 D, E).

εὐπαθείας ‐‐ κάλλος suggests the beatific visions of the Phaedrus (247 A ff.).

πολλοῦ χρόνου : sc. ἐστί, as in Laws IV 708 D χρόνου πολλοῦ καὶ παγχάλεπον (Stallbaum). It is worse than needless to insert δεῖ (with Liebhold) after χρόνου.

ὅσα ‐‐ ἠδίκησαν . In Plato, as in Dante, doing wrong to others is the great sin.

τοῦτο δ’ εἶναι κτλ. ‘that is,’ said he, ‘once in every hundred years.’ τοῦτο δ’ εἶναι (‘namely’) explains ὑπὲρ ἑκάστου δεκάκις. This view is simpler and more idiomatic than (with Schneider) to make τοῦτο=τὸ δίκην δοῦναι ἐν μέρει ὑπὲρ ἑκάστου.

ὄντος τοσούτου . The same duration of human life is postulated also in Phaedr. 248 D ff., but retribution in that dialogue appears to be ἐννάκις, and not δεκάκις as here; cf. 256 E with 248 E. The number 100 is the square of the Pythagorean ‘perfect’ number 10, so that Pythagorean influence is doubtless at work again. See App. I to Book VIII p. 301, and cf. 614 B note It should also be remarked that the Greeks, like other races, had many stories to tell of the μακρόβιοι of early days, and the ‘Naturvölker’ of historic times were also credited with preternaturally long lives: see the evidence collected by Rohde Griech. Roman pp. 218, 236, 247 notes

καὶ ο<*>ον κτλ. : ‘and for example if’ etc. κομίσαιντο depends of course on ἵνα. Plato somewhat awkwardly coordinates his illustration with the principle itself (ἵνα—ἐκτίνοιεν): but there is not sufficient ground for expunging καί (with q^{2}, Stephanus and others).

πολλῶν . See cr. n. Par. D—followed here by Burnet—has πολλοῖς, “quod propter pluralem θανάτων ferri nequit” (Schneider). The passage quoted by J. and C. in defence of πολλοῖς from Laws IX 870 D τοὺς οὖν τούτων μηνυτὰς ἀναιροῦσι θανάτοις is not quite parallel.

πόλεις προδόντες κτλ. So in Virg. Aen. VI 620 vendidit hic auro patriam. Antiphon (de Her. Caed. 10) names as the three chiefest sins τὸ ἀποκτείνειν καὶ τὸ ἱεροσυλεῖν καὶ τὸ προδιδόναι τὴν πόλιν. Cf. also Dieterich Nek. pp. 66 ff.

εἰς δουλείας ἐμβεβληκότες is parallel, as Schneider points out, to αἴτιοι and not to προδόντες.

καὶ αὖ ‐‐ κομίζοιντο . It is not at first sight clear whether this applies to those who have come ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, or to those who, though condemned on the whole account, have done some good actions in their lives, and occasionally shewn themselves just and pious. The latter view is supported by Phaed. 113 D ἐκεῖ (in Acheron) οἰκοῦσί τε καὶ καθαιρό‐ μενοι τῶν τε ἀδικημάτων διδόντες δίκας ἀπολύονται, εἴ τίς τι ἠδίκηκεν, τῶν τε εὐεργεσιῶν τιμὰς φέρονται κατὰ τὴν ἀξίαν ἕκαστος, and is, I believe, what Plato means. Cf. 616 B note

εὐεργετηκότες . A few MSS, including q, have εὐηργετηκότες, which Rutherford (New Phryn. p. 245) and the grammarians regard as the regular Attic form: but εὐεργέτηκεν is found on Inscriptions of the 4th Century B.C. See Meisterhans^{3} p. 172 and Kühner-Blass I 2. p. 33.

τῶν δὲ εὐθὺς κτλ. : ‘about those who died as soon as they were born, and those who had lived but a short time’ etc., lit. “about the ‘as-soon-as-they-wereborn’ and the ‘short-lived’ etc.” The εὐθὺς γενόμενοι and the ὀλίγον χρόνον βιοῦντες were probably two well-recognised categories of the ἄωροι (as to whom see Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 411 ff.): hence the article τῶν. Cf. Virg. Aen. VI 428 dulcis vitae exsortes, et ab ubere raptos. A limbus infantum appears to have been a feature of early Orphic pictures of the underworld (Dieterich Nek. p. 158). It is unwise to insert ἀποθανόντων (Ast, Stallbaum) or ἀπογενομένων (Herwerden, Baiter) after γενομένων, or to read <ἀπο>γενομένων (Cobet), for, as Schneider observes, “de mortuis hic agi in aperto est.” Schneider's own interpretation may be gathered from his note “nec nostrates, opinor offenderet von denen, die eben erst geboren gewesen etiam non addito als sie starben.” I agree with Stallbaum in doubting whether εὐθύς can have this meaning: and it is safer, I think, to understand εὐθὺς γενόμενοι in the ordinary way. Others think that only one category is intended, taking ὀλίγον χρόνον βιούντων as equivalent to ἀποθανόντων (Purves, and so also D. and V. “those whose death followed close upon their birth”). But καί cannot be so easily ignored.

εἰς δὲ θεοὺς κτλ. Cf. Xen. Mem. IV 4. 19, 20 παρὰ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις πρῶτον νομίζεται τοὺς θεοὺς σέβειν. Οὐκοῦν καὶ γονέας τιμᾶν πανταχοῦ νομίζεται; Καὶ τοῦτο, ἔφη, and Pind. Pyth. 6. 23—27 and other passages in Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. pp. 191 ff., 275 ff. The categories of sinners in the Phaedo (113 E—114 B) correspond very nearly to those mentioned here. Cf. Dieterich Nek. pp. 165 ff.

αὐτόχειρος φόνου . See cr. n. In common with most editors I have adopted αὐτόχειρος in place of αὐτόχειρας. The error was easy, and the change is slight. Schneider understands εἰς before αὐτόχειρας, in a different sense from that which it bears with θεούς and γονέας. “Contorta sane loci interpretatio,” says Stallbaum, rightly. αὐτόχειρ φόνος (cf. the ἀνδροφόνοι of the Phaedo l.c.) does not necessarily mean either ‘suicide’ or ‘the murder of near relations’ (D. and V.), but merely ‘slaying with one's own hand,’ ‘homicide.’ See Jebb on Soph. Ant. 55.

Ἀρδιαῖος : a purely fictitious personage, no doubt, although verisimilitude is preserved by χιλιοστόν: cf. εἶναι δὲ τὴν πορείαν χιλιέτη 615 A.

οὐδ) ἂν ἥξει . ἄν with the future indicative is scarcely here ‘colloquial’ (as Goodwin holds, MT. p. 66), but has a solemn, half-tragic or poetical effect. There is the usual supply of emendations, such as οὐδ’ αὖ ἥξει (Madvig) οὐδ’ ἀνήξει (Herwerden), οὐδὲ μὴ ἥξει (Cobet), οὐδὲ δὴ ἥξει (Richards); but the idiom is sufficiently well established (see on VI 492 C), and, as Turner remarks, the variant ἥξοι (in Ξ and three other MSS) is itself also evidence in favour of ἄν.

σχεδόν τι ‐‐ τυράννους . Cf. Gorg. 525 D ο<*>μαι δὲ καὶ τοὺς πολλοὺς εἶναι τούτων τῶν παραδειγμάτων ἐκ τυράννων καὶ βασιλέων καὶ δυναστῶν καὶ τὰ τῶν πόλεων πραξάντων γεγονότας.

ἦσαν δὲ καὶ κτλ. : not “erant vero etiam aliqui privati ex eorum numero, qui magna perpetraverant facinora” (Stallbaum), but “erant vero etiam nonnulli privati et quidem de genere magnorum peccatorum” (after Schneider). With ἦσαν cf. Phaed. 59 B ἦν δὲ καὶ Κτήσιππος and Prot. 315 A.

ἐμυκᾶτο . Cf. Arist. an. post. II 11. 94^{b} 32 βροντᾷ—ὡς οἱ Πυθαγόρειοί φασιν, ἀπειλῆς ἕνεκα τοῖς ἐν τῷ ταρτάρῳ, ὅπως φοβῶνται (quoted by Zeller^{5} I p. 451 note 3). See also Plut. de gen. Socr. 591 C. The remarks of Proclus on this part of the myth deserve quotation: πάντα γὰρ ταῦτα φρικώδεις μὲν ποιεῖ τὰς ποινὰς καὶ ἀπαραιτήτους, ἀνυπερβλήτους δὲ τὰς μοχθηρίας δείκνυσι τῶν κολαζομένων, εἴπερ καὶ τὰ ἄψυχα φωνὴν ἀφίησιν ἔμψυχον κατ’ αὐτῶν καὶ τὰ κολάζοντα φάσματα δυσαντίβλεπτα καὶ τὰ δεσμωτήρια ἄφυκτα (l.c. p. 180).

ἀνιάτως ἐχόντων . Cf. Phaed. 113 E οἳ δ’ ἂν δόξωσιν ἀνιάτως ἔχειν διὰ τὰ μεγέθη τῶν ἁμαρτημάτων κτλ. See on II 380 B.

ἄνδρες ‐‐ ἄγριοι κτλ. These are the prototypes of the κολάζοντες ἄγγελοι of later apocalyptic literature: see for example Petri Apoc. vv. 21, 23 (Dieterich Nek. pp. 4 and 60). Cf. also Euseb. Praep. Ev. XIII 13. 5.

ἔφη : sc. ὁ ἐρωτώμενος (supra D).

τοὺς μὲν ‐‐ ἦγον . διαλαβεῖν· παλαιστρικόν τι (Hesychius). The word is explained in Bekker Anecd. 36 as τὸ ἑκατέρωθέν τινος λαβέσθαι. Cf. Hdt. IV 68 διαλελαμμένος ἄγεται, I 114 al. Some malefactors they seized in this forcible way and marched off direct to Tartarus (see on 616 A): others, and among them Ardiaeus, they tortured first, and utilised as παραδείγματα (infra 616 A note). Schneider translates “die nehmen die einen und führten sie abseits,” understanding διαλαβεῖν as ‘take aside’: a usage for which the lexica rightly or wrongly quote Aesch. F. L. 41 διαλαμβάνων γὰρ ἕκαστον ἡμῶν ἐν μέρει. The variants ἰδίᾳ λαβόντες (Ξ and some other MSS), ἰδίᾳ παραλαβόντες (Euseb. Praep. Ev. XIII 13. 5 and Clem. Strom. V 133 Migne) etc. point to a similar but not identical interpretation: cf. also Proclus l.c. p. 182. 6 ff. διαλαβόντες γὰρ ἄγουσιν οἳ μὲν ἄλλους, οἳ δὲ ἄλλους· τοῦτο γὰρ τὸ διαλαβεῖν, οἷον διανείμασθαι τὰς κολάσεις. But τοὺς μέν seems clearly to refer to some of the ἀνιάτως ἔχοντες, and none of this class is likely to have met with gentle treatment at the hands of the ἄνδρες διάπυροι. In Phaed. 113 E all the incurables are thrown εἰς τὸν Τάρταρον, ὅθεν οὔποτε ἐκβαίνουσιν. It may be noted that the reading διαλαβόντες is confirmed by Plutarch's imitation τοῦτον ἡ Δίκη διαλαβοῦσα (de ser. num. vind. 565 A).

ἐκτός : i.e. outside the στόμιον. It seems to me quite clear from this passage that the δαιμόνιος τόπος is not in the aether, as Proclus appears to suppose (l.c. pp. 128 ff.), but somewhere on the true surface of the earth as described in Phaed. 109 E ff.

ἐπ) ἀσπαλάθων κνάπτοντες . ἐπὶ κνάφου ἕλκων=διαφθείρων· τὸ γὰρ πρότερον οἱ γναφεῖς ἀκανθῶν σωρὸν συστρέψαντες, τὰ ἱμάτια ἐπὶ τοῦ σωροῦ ἔκναπτον· ὁ δὲ σωρὸς ἐλέγετο γνάφος. ὁ οὖν Κροῖσος τὸν ἐχθρὸν περιέξαινε ταῖς ἀκάνθαις καὶ οὕτως ἔφθειρεν (Hesychius, with reference to Hdt. I 92). In the Apocalypse of Peter v. 30 we read of χάλικες ὀξύτεροι ξιφῶν καὶ παντὸς ὀβελίσκου, πεπυρωμένοι, καὶ γυναῖκες καὶ ἄνδρες ῥάκη ῥυπαρὰ ἐνδεδυμένοι ἐκυλίοντο ἐπ’ αὐτῶν κολαζόμενοι. The form κνάμπτοντες appears in A (see cr. n.) and several MSS, but κνάμπτω is a bye-form of γνάμπτω and means not ‘card’ but ‘bend’ (Stephanus-Hase s.v.).

τοῖς ἀεὶ παριοῦσι κτλ. According to Norden l.c. p. 393 the idea that incurable sinners serve as παραδείγματα in Hades is probably Orphic or Pythagorean. It meets us also in Pindar (Pyth. 2. 21 ff., of Ixion) and in Virg. Aen. VI 618 ff. Phlegyasque miserrimus omnes Admonet, et magna testatur voce per umbras ‘Discite iustitiam moniti, et non temnere divos.’ The fullest exposition of the theory is to be found in Gorg. 525 B—D.

ὧν ἕνεκά τε κτλ. The words ταῦτα ὑπομένοιεν, which Schneider still retains after ἕνεκά τε, have scarcely any MS support and are an obvious gloss. The construction is ὧν ἕνεκά τε ἄγοιντο καὶ ὅτι εἰς τὸν Τάρταρον ἐμπεσούμενοι ἄγοιντο.

ὅτι εἰς . See cr. n. I formerly, with Hermann and Baiter, read εἰς ὅ τι, regarding τὸν Τάρταρον as a gloss. But there is reason in Richards' remark that οἷ or ὅποι would be more natural than εἰς ὅ τι: and in any case it is hardly likely that Plato would have omitted to specify the destination of these sinners by its name. Cf. Phaed. 113 E (quoted above on 615 E) and (for Plato's conception of Tartarus) ib. 112 A ff.

ἔφη : sc. ὁ ἐρωτώμενος (615 D), as before.

σφίσιν : i.e. to ὁ ἐρωτώμενος and his comrades.

τοῦτον ὑπερβάλλειν . The words τὸν φόβον, which Ξ and other MSS add after ὑπερβάλλειν, may be genuine, but as they are absent from A, q and several MSS besides, it is perhaps safer to omit them.

καὶ τὰς μὲν κτλ. At this point Er's own narrative is resumed.

τὰς εὐεργεσίας : ‘the blessings which they received.’ This clearly refers, as Proclus also believed (l.c. p. 185), to the souls ἐν τῇ ὑπὸ γῆς πορείᾳ. See on 615 B, and compare Matthew Arnold's well known poem ‘Saint Brandan.’

616B - 617D After spending seven days in the meadow, the souls that had returned from the journey of a thousand years rose up and departed, accompanied by Er. On the fourth day they reached a place from which they beheld a straight light, like a pillar, stretching through all Heaven and Earth, and after a day's journey they saw at the middle of this light the extremities of the chains of Heaven, and stretching from these extremities the spindle of Necessity with its eight concentric whorls, the circles of whose rims as they revolve carry with them severally the fixed stars and all the planets in their order. On each of the eight whorls is perched a Siren, uttering a single note, the eight notes thus produced result- ing in a single ‘harmony’ or mode. Meanwhile the three Fates, as they assist in the revolutions, keep singing to the Sirens' music, Lachesis hymning the past, Clotho the present, and Atropos the future.

ff. The astronomical difficulties in this part of the Republic have occasioned a great deal of controversy and discussion. Besides the various editions and translations of the Republic in English and German, and the commentaries of Proclus and Theo, the writers whom I have chiefly studied are Grote (Plato on the Earth's Rotation), Boeckh (Kleine Schriften III pp. 266—320), Donaldson (Transactions of the Cambridge Philosophical Society, X pp. 305—316), Susemihl (Gen. Entw. II pp. 273—278), Krohn (Pl. St. pp. 278—289) and Zeller^{5} I pp. 434 f. notes Donaldson's article, to which Dr Jackson first called my attention, although it lacks consistency and clearness, and passes over many difficulties, contains the germ of what I now believe to be the correct theory of the straight light. But nothing that has hitherto been published on the subject supplies at once a full and satisfactory explanation of the difficulties, and it is only through the kind cooperation of Professor Cook Wilson that I have at last been able to form a definite view as to the meaning and solution of this extremely complicated problem. From 616 B to the middle of 617 B my commentary is mainly based on the exhaustive criticisms and investigations which he has sent to me.

The general scope and purpose of the astronomical part of the myth would seem to be to set before the souls a picture of the ‘harmonies and revolutions of the Universe’ in conformity with which it is their highest duty and privilege to live. Cf. Tim. 90 C, D τῷ δ’ ἐν ἡμῖν θείῳ ξυγγενεῖς εἰσι κινήσεις αἱ τοῦ παντὸς διανοήσεις καὶ περιφοραί· ταύταις δὴ ξυνεπόμενον ἕκαστον δεῖ τὰς περὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ διεφθαρμένας ἡμῶν περιόδους ἐξορθοῦντα διὰ τὸ καταμανθάνειν τὰς τοῦ παντὸς ἁρμονίας τε καὶ περιφορὰς τῷ κατανοουμένῳ τὸ κατανοοῦν ἐξομοιῶσαι κατὰ τὴν ἀρχαίαν φύσιν, ὁμοιώσαντα δὲ τέλος ἔχειν τοῦ προτεθέντος ἀνθρώποις ὑπὸ θεῶν ἀρίστου βίου πρός τε τὸν παρόντα καὶ τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον. It will facilitate the study of the details if we observe in advance that Plato's description falls into two well-marked divisions or sections, viz. from ἀφικνεῖσθαι τεταρταίους down to τὴν περιφοράν (616 B, C), and from ἐκ δὲ τῶν ἄκρων (616 C) to the end of the myth. In the first section we have a representation of the outermost or sidereal sphere, girdled by a circle of light, which is prolonged through the poles into a column or shaft of light spanning the Universe from pole to pole and symbolizing to all appearances the cosmical axis. See on line 14 below. In the second section the scene is shifted, and we are introduced to a new picture of the celestial system, including the fixed stars, but without the encompassing girdle of light, assimilated to the poetical and suggestive figure of Necessity and her spindle, the shaft of which again represents the axis of the Universe. The details are fully discussed in the notes, where it is shewn that the two parts of the description cannot from their very nature be combined into a coherent and consistent whole, and that in consequence of their essential inconsistency Plato's passing attempt to reconcile them inevitably fails. See on ἐκ δὲ τῶν ἄκρων κτλ. 616 C and App. VI.

If the question is asked, ‘Does Plato's description embody a serious astronomical theory of the visible heaven and its machinery?’ what answer should be returned? The following remarks will indicate the kind of reply which seems to be in harmony both with Plato's general attitude on astronomical questions and with the special peculiarities of the myth before us. (1) The visible heavens, according to the Republic, are not the object of true Astronomy. The true Astronomer is concerned with ἃς τὸ ὂν τάχος καὶ ἡ οὖσα βραδυτὴς ἐν τῷ ἀληθινῷ ἀριθμῷ καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς ἀληθέσι σχήμασι φοράς τε πρὸς ἄλληλα φέρεται καὶ τὰ ἐνόντα φέρει (VII 529 D. See note ad loc.). We may therefore expect imagination and idealism to play a large part in Plato's astronomical pictures, more especially when they form part of a myth. (2) The greater portion of this passage is in reality a similitude representing the celestial system under the figure of the spindle of Necessity. Now it is clear that Plato deliberately sacrificed the reality of the sidereal sphere when he found it inconsistent with the figure which he had chosen (see on κύκλους κτλ. 616 D). And if he could concede so much to his comparison, the question arises, ‘Are we justified in regarding any of the machinery as seriously expressing Plato's real conception of the mechanism of the heavens?’ It will be found on reflection that the only satisfactory and safe reply is that all the machinery, including the material whorls and axis of the spindle, is poetical throughout. This does not of course exclude the supposition that some of the details of Plato's imagery are borrowed from earlier astronomical fancies, and it is highly probable that here, as elsewhere in the myth, he takes something from the Pythagoreans: see on 616 C, D, 617 B. (3) The entire description should in all probability be regarded as “essentially a symbolic representation and not an attempt at scientific explanation” (Cook Wilson). But ‘a symbolic representation should stand in some relation to the thing signified,’ and in this case all we can reasonably infer from Plato's symbolism is that, according to his belief, the Earth is in the middle: the Sun, Moon and Planets revolve round the Earth at different distances from the centre and with different velocities, participating in the general movement of the heavens and at the same time having a contrary movement of their own. As for the fixed stars, it would seem from the first part of Plato's description that he supposed them to be fixed in the outermost sphere of the Universe, round which he plainly supposes that the circle of the Milky Way extends. See also on 616 C, 617 A.

καὶ ἀφικνεῖσθαι κτλ. ‘And on the fourth day they arrived at a point from which they descried extending from above through all the heaven and earth a straight light, like a pillar, resembling the rainbow more than anything else, but brighter and purer.’ The souls see the light for the first time on the fourth day after they begin their march, and consequently on the eleventh day from Er's arrival at the meadow. The remaining incidents occupy one day, and it is on the twelfth that Er revives (δωδεκαταῖος— ἀνεβίω 614 B). See on ἕωθεν in 621 B. As far as the Greek is concerned, ἄνωθεν may be construed either with καθορᾶν or with τεταμένον. In the former case, we should probably have to suppose (with Boeckh l.c. p. 299) that Er's point of view is outside the Universe; but it will be shewn in Appendix VI that there are serious difficulties in the way of this supposition, and the second alternative is to be preferred. It has already been remarked that Plato in all probability thinks of the λειμών as somewhere on the true surface of the Earth described by him in the myth of the Phaedo (614 C note), and it is apparently along this surface that the souls progress until they come in view of the light. As regards the shape and position of the light, Plato's language is clear and precise. The light is ‘straight, like a pillar,’ and ‘stretched through all the heaven and earth.’ The only natural interpretation of these words is that a column or shaft of light spans the entire Universe, like the diameter of a circle, and passes through the centre of the Earth, which, according to Plato, is situated in the middle of the whole ( Phaed. 108 E ff., Tim. 40 B). With διὰ παντὸς—τεταμένον we may compare Tim. 40 B τὸν διὰ παντὸς πόλον τεταμένον (of the axis of the Universe). The words μάλιστα τῇ ἴριδι προσφερές refer, not of course to the shape, but to the colour of the light, as appears from λαμπρότερον δὲ καὶ καθαρώτερον. The correction of προσφερῆ to προσφερές in A (see cr. n.) is late, but προσφερές is intrinsically a better reading, and might easily have been altered to προσφερῆ under the influence of κίονα. In defence of προσφερῆ Schneider cites ἀπωχετευμένον in VI 485 D, but the two cases are not exactly parallel: see note ad loc. Other views on this passage are discussed in App. VI.

εἰς ὃ ἀφικέσθαι κτλ. ‘At this light they arrived after a day's march forward, and there, at the middle of the light’ etc. Instead of προελθόντας, A and other MSS have προελθόντες (see cr. n.), which Schneider defends by saying that the nominative refers not to all the party, but only to Er and his immediate companions. But even in that case the accusative would be more correct, and in point of fact it is clear from what follows that Er is accompanied throughout by all the souls about to be born again. A few other MSS besides q have the accusative. If the light is ‘straight, like a pillar,’ and stretches ‘through all the heaven and earth,’ it follows that as the Earth is in the middle of the Universe, the ‘middle of the light’ will be at the centre of the earth. See fig. i on p. 443. No other interpretation of κατὰ μέσον τὸ φῶς is either natural or easy: see App. VI. It would seem therefore that at the end of the fourth day after leaving the meadow the souls are at the central point both of the Universe and of the Earth, as is maintained by, among others, Schneider and Donaldson (l.c. p. 307); and this view is also in harmony with some of the most important features in the remaining part of the narrative: see on 617 B, 621 A, B.

καὶ ἰδεῖν αὐτόθι κτλ. ‘and there, at the middle of the light, they saw, extended from heaven, the extremities of its chains; for this light chains the heavens, holding together all the revolving firmament, like the undergirders of men of war.’ The pronoun αὐτοῦ is ambiguous, and as far as concerns the grammar might be referred either to τοῦ οὐρανοῦ or to τὸ φῶς. If we choose the former alternative, αὐτοῦ will be an objective genitive, denoting that which is bound; if the latter, the meaning, as Professor Cook Wilson points out, is ‘its chains,’ ‘its bands,’ i.e. ‘the chains of which the light consists,’ for in the next clause the light is said to be a chain ( ξύνδεσμος). The second of these views is on grammatical grounds somewhat more natural than the first; but whichever alternative we adopt, it is clear from the explanatory clause εἶναι γὰρ— περιφοράν, not only that the chains are the binding chains of heaven, but also that it is the light itself, and nothing else, which fulfils the function of binding the Universe together (εἶναι γὰρ τοῦτο τὸ φῶς ξύνδεσμον τοῦ οὐρανοῦ). In what way the light performs this office, Plato indicates by the much-disputed words οἷον τὰ ὑποζώματα τῶν τριηρῶν. The evidence on the subject of the ‘undergirders’ of ancient men of war has been collected and discussed by Boeckh Urkundenüber d. Seewesen des Attischen Staates pp. 133—138: see also J. Smith Voyage and Shipwreck of St Paul pp. 210—215 and Breusing Nautik d. Alten pp. 170—184. It may be taken as established that the ὑποζώματα were ropes and not planks, as some of the ancient commentators supposed (e.g. Proclus in remp. II p. 200. 25, a Scholiast quoted by Kroll l.c. II p. 381, and Suidas S.V. ὑποζώματα, who follows a scholium on Ar. Knights 279), and also that they were fastened round the outside of the vessel; but on the question whether the ὑποζώματα ran round the ship in a horizontal direction, or were passed under the hull, there is more room for difference of opinion. The former view is maintained by Boeckh and Breusing, the latter by J. Smith (l.c. pp. 108 f., 115, 210—215), who reminds us that a similar process, known by the name of ‘frapping,’ is still occasionally resorted to in the case of wooden ships during a storm at sea (pp. 108 f.). The evidence bearing on this matter has recently been investigated by Professor Cook Wilson (see Report of the Proceedings of the Oxford Philological Society for Hilary Term 1902 in Cl. Rev. XVI p. 234), who will shortly publish a detailed discussion of the whole subject. In the meantime he writes to me as follows:—“After careful reading of all the passages quoted by the authorities I feel sure (what one might infer a priori from the mechanical conditions) that this method” [i.e. frapping] “was known to the ancients, and was the method used in an emergency at sea, as e.g. in St Paul's ship. I conjecture also that these undergirders first had the name ὑποζώματα, and that if the belts or girdles supposed by Boeckh had this name, it was transferred to them from the true undergirders, which were probably the first and primitive form and remained in use always, even after the trireme belts had been invented.” The evidence in short, points to two kinds of ὑποζώματα (Cl. Rev. l.c.), the first employed occasionally under exceptional circumstances, and passing under the hull of the vessel, the second (see Boeckh l.c. p. 137) forming part of the regular equipment of a warship, attached before she went to sea, and running horizontally round the hull. The second variety is clearly represented on a bronze relief of the forepart of a war vessel, said to date from Roman imperial times, and now in the Berlin Museum. The sketch of the relief on p. 443, fig. ii is from a photograph in the possession of Professor Cook Wilson. There is also a (somewhat inaccurate) drawing of the relief in Beger Thesauri regii et electoralis Brandenburgicii Vol. III p. 406. (Some writers, and among them J. Smith, have maintained that the longitudinal bands in Beger's picture are only ornaments, and not ropes; but it is quite clear from the photograph that they are really ropes and serve as ὑποζώματα of the horizontal kind.) To which of the two varieties does Plato here allude? The words οἷον τὰ ὑποζώματα τῶν τριηρῶν, οὕτω πᾶσαν συνέχον τὴν περιφοράν, seem clearly to regard the ὑποζώματα as permanent σκεύη of warships, holding the hull together in ordinary circumstances, and not merely resources to be employed in times of difficulty and danger; and since the light whose action the ὑποζώματα serve to illustrate is (in Plato's view) an essential part of the Universe, the illustration is better and more pointed if the ὑποζώματα are also of the more permanent sort. It may also be noted that if Plato had meant the undergirders which pass under the keel he would probably have written ὑποζώματα τῶν νεῶν, and not ὑποζώματα τῶν τριηρῶν, for the vertical ὑποζώματα were not confined to triremes. For these reasons it would seem that Plato has in view such ὑποζώματα as are described by Boeckh, viz. girdles running round the hull from stern to stem outside the vessel.

It is clear, therefore, that the light not only passes through the centre of the Universe, but also, since it holds the heavens together, like the undergirders of men of war, round the outer surface of the heavenly sphere.

I have tried to represent the kind of picture in Plato's mind by fig. i on p. 443. The sphere of the heavens—represented by the circle dd', which is a section of the heavenly sphere—is virtually compared to a ship. The North pole, which is at b, corresponds to the stem, and the South pole, which is at c, to the stern of the vessel. The circular light caba'c corresponds to the ὑποζώματα, cab being that part of the light which corresponds to the ὑποζώματα on the port side, and ca'b the portion which corresponds to the ὑποζώματα on the starboard side. As the light in Plato's description passes through the centre of the Universe as well as round its exterior, the comparison of the light to horizontal ὑποζώματα would be all the more apposite if we might suppose that these ὑποζώματα were brought inside from stem to stern lengthwise and parallel to the ship's length, in a manner corresponding to the position of the straight part of the ‘binding light.’ But for this supposition there is no evidence, and it is clear from fig. ii that the lower ὑποζώματα at least could not have been brought inside, for they are below the water line. We must accordingly suppose that the comparison with ὑποζώματα extends only to that part of the light which surrounds the surface of the heavenly sphere. That the ends of the light are brought inside the sphere in Plato's picture is clear from the fact that the light stretches ‘through all the heaven and earth’ as well as round the Universe, and also because the souls see the ‘ends of its chains’ or bands at the middle of the light itself, which is also the centre of the Universe and Earth. We may presume that the ἄκρα τῶν δεσμῶν meet together at the centre, so that bc forms one continuous pillar of light stretching from pole to pole. See fig. i on p. 443.

The light was interpreted by some ancient commentators as the axis of the Universe, or a cylinder of aetherial fire surrounding the axis (Theo p. 143 Hiller, Suidas and Photius S.V. τεταμένον φῶς: cf. also Proclus in remp. II p. 199. 31 ff.), by others as the γαλαξίας κύκλος or Milky Way: see Proclus l.c. pp. 130. 4, 194. 19 ff. and Cicero de rep. VI 16. According to the view given above, the column of light follows the direction of the axis of the Universe, if, as we may reasonably suppose, b is the pole, and although Plato nowhere actually calls it the axis, we may fairly suppose that this is what it symbolises. I have found no parallel in ancient astronomical theories to this conception of a light stretching from pole to pole. The curved part of the light is no doubt suggested by the Milky Way, which was regarded by the Pythagoreans as either identical with, or an emanation from the circle of fire which, according to them, held the Universe together (Zeller^{5} I p. 435 note 2). I have sometimes thought that the soul with which in the Timaeus the Creator wrapped the body of the Universe without has reference also to the Milky Way as girdling the World; for the Pythagoreans called the γαλαξίας κύκλος the τόπος ψυχῶν. Plato's words are ( Tim. 34 B) ψυχὴν δὲ εἰς τὸ μέσον αὐτοῦ θεὶς διὰ παντός τε ἔτεινε καὶ ἔτι ἔξωθεν τὸ σῶμα αὐτῇ περιεκάλυψε. The parallel is certainly noteworthy, although περιεκάλυψε in the Timaeus rather points to a complete envelopment of the heavens, and διὰ παντός to the universal diffusion of the world-soul throughout the Universe.

ἐκ δὲ τῶν ἄκρων κτλ. : ‘and from the extremities they saw extended the spindle of Necessity, by which all the revolving spheres are turned. The shaft and hook thereof are made of adamant, and the whorl partly of adamant, and partly of other materials.’ With this sentence we pass to the second part of Plato's description, in which he tries to depict the movements of the celestial bodies by a new image—that of Necessity and her spindle. Regarded in itself, this image is tolerably clear and coherent, if we are willing to allow a large admixture of supernatural mechanics; but Plato fails to shew how it is to be reconciled with what has just preceded, and no one has hitherto succeeded in effecting the reconciliation, without doing violence to the Greek. See on 616 D, E and App. VI. The rapid imagination of the writer has already escaped from the earlier picture and fallen under the spell of a new conception, and we shall best apprehend his meaning if we consider what the peculiar nature of that conception demands. The ordinary spindle was shaped somewhat as in figure iii on p. 444, in which a b is the shaft, and c the whorl. (There is no hook in the figure: but its position would of course be at a.) The fibres were attached to the hook and twisted into a thread by the revolutions communicated to the spindle by the finger and thumb: see Blümner Technologie etc. I pp. 109—120, from whom the figure is borrowed. It is essential to the notion of a spindle that the hook should be fastened to the fibres which are to be spun. For this reason Plato finds it necessary, in using the similitude of a spindle, to attach the hook (ἄγκιστρον) to something which may correspond to the fibres; and he accordingly fastens it to the ends of the chains of light depending from the heavens in his previous image, at the point where these ends meet the ends from below, κατὰ μέσον τὸ φῶς. If we treat this construction as a piece of serious mechanics, Plato's device is open to many obvious criticisms. In fastening the spindle to the ἄκρα τῶν δεσμῶν from above, he forgets or ignores the ends from below. It will further be observed that he says nothing about the direction of the spindle: it is merely ‘stretched from the ends’ of the chains. We shall presently see that the shaft of the spindle symbolises the axis of the Universe, so that—if we are to connect the two images in Plato's mind —it is natural to suppose that the spindle extends downwards, following the line of the light. Here again there are difficulties, the most serious of which perhaps is that, as the axis of the Universe must go through the earth, the effect of attaching the spindle ‘at the middle of the light’ will be to depress the earth itself below the centre of the whole. But it should be remembered that Plato's object in this passage is not to furnish a scientific account of the celestial mechanism: see below on 616 D, E, 617 A. We are dealing with a work of literature and not of science, and the machinery of a myth ought not to be rigorously scrutinized from the scientific point of view. Inconsistencies of this kind are found to be inseparable from such poetical representations of the Universe. In the present case they arise chiefly from the juxtaposition of two essentially irreconcileable conceptions—that of a sphere girdled and traversed by light, and that of Necessity and her spindle. See on 616 D, E. For the rest, it should be noted that adamant symbolises τὸ ἀπαθὲς καὶ ἀδάμαστον (cf. Proclus l.c. II 209. 22), and is the appropriate material for the ἠλακάτη, since in Plato's picture the ἠλακάτη stands for the axis of the whole. ἠλακάτη is not elsewhere found in the sense of the shaft of a spindle: ordinarily it means ‘distaff.’ See on 616 D, E below. Plato does not inform us in what way the whorl is μεικτὸν ἔκ τε τούτου (i.e. ἀδάμαντος ) καὶ ἄλλων γενῶν: but I think he means that while the outermost circle, which is the circle of ταὐτόν ( Tim. 36 C), is composed of adamant, the others, which form collectively the circle of θάτερον, are made, either in whole or in part, of less durable stuff. Herwerden rejects the preposition before ἀδάμαντος, without any reason that I can see.

, D 21 τὴν δὲ τοῦ σφονδύλου φύσιν κτλ. The whorl of Necessity's spindle is a composite structure, consisting of eight concentric hemispheres, fitted into one another like a nest of boxes: see below on 616 E. The adverb διαμπερές should be construed with ἐξεγλυμμένῳ.

, E 27 κύκλους κτλ. : lit. ‘shewing their rims as circles above’ (“so dass sie ihre Ränder oben als Kreise zeigen” Schneider). Cf. 616 E τὸν τοῦ χείλους κύκλον. The translation “each concentric circle shewing its rim above the next outer” (D. and V.) betrays a complete misapprehension of the whole passage. Donaldson (l.c.) gives the sense correctly: “shewing their rims on the surface like so many circles.” The words νῶτον—ἐληλάσθαι mean ‘forming a single whorl, with a continuous surface, round the shaft, which is driven right through the middle of the eighth,’ not “and on their lower side all together form one continuous whorl” (Jowett). νῶτον is regularly thus used of the upper surface of an object: cf. for example Phaedr. 247 B ἔξω πορευθεῖσαι ἔστησαν ἐπὶ τῷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ νώτῳ. It is important to observe that there is no interval between the different lips: cf. Proclus l.c. II 216. 15 ff. ἡ συνέχεια τῆς ἐναρμόσεως διὰ τὸ μὴ παρεμπίπτειν κενὸν συνεχὲς ποιεῖ τὸ ἐκ πάντων νώτων ἐννοούμενον νῶτον ἀπὸ κυρτῆς εἰς κυρτὴν διῆκον, ἀπὸ τῆς ἐσχάτης ἐπὶ τὴν πρωτίστην, and see on 616 E below. On ἠλακάτην Proclus remarks εἰ δὲ διαμπερὲς ἐληλάσθαι διὰ πάντων φησὶν τὴν ἠλακάτην, συντόμως καὶ τὴν αἰτίαν ἐξέφηνεν, δἰ ἣν ἠλακάτην τὸν ἀξονα προσείρηκεν, καὶ ὅτι παρὰ τὸ ἐληλάσθαι (l.c. p. 214. 26 ff.). As the usual meaning of ἠλακάτη is ‘distaff’ and not the shaft of a spindle, I think it not unlikely that Proclus is right in this suggestion. For other verbal plays in the myth cf. 620 E note

In the rims of the different whorls are set the fixed stars and planets in the following order, beginning from the outside (see figure iv on p. 444):—

In the first. The fixed stars.

In the second. Saturn.

In the third. Jupiter.

In the fourth. Mars.

In the fifth. Mercury.

In the sixth. Venus.

In the seventh. The Sun.

In the eighth. The Moon.

Cf. Tim. 38 C f., where also, as here, Plato is following the Pythagorean order of planets: see Zeller^{5} I pp. 426 f. and (on the whole subject of ancient arrangements of the planets) Hultsch in PaulyWissowa, art. Astronomie and Schaubach Gr. Astron. pp. 398 ff. Some later authorities make Plato place Venus before Mercury (see for example Diels Doxogr. Gr. p. 345), but the order which I have given is in accord with [Epin.] 986 C— 987 C, and with the views represented by Proclus l.c. p. 219. 3 ff.

This conception of close-fitting concentric whorls, carrying the heavenly bodies in their rims or ‘lips,’ appears to be unique in ancient astronomy. How was Plato led to devise so original an idea? Possibly in this way. It would seem that the Pythagoreans had already developed the astronomical doctrine of Anaximander into a theory of celestial spheres, maintaining that the stars were “fastened in transparent circles or spheres, and turned round by the revolution of these circles on their axes” (Zeller^{5} I p. 415). In order to suit his image of the spindle and whorl, Plato apparently takes these Pythagorean spheres, and cuts them in half, producing a series of hemispheric cups or whorls, in the circular ‘lips’ of which the celestial bodies are fastened or bound (ἐνδεδεμένα, says Theo 150. 14 Hiller: cf. also Proclus l.c. 219. 24).

So far as the Sun, Moon and Planets are concerned, the resulting picture is clear and intelligible, but it is impossible to conceive of the fixed stars as occupying the ‘lip’ of one of the hemispherical whorls in the way in which the Sun for example may be supposed to do so. Whatever view we hold of the rest of the picture, it is likely that in this particular at least Plato himself did not think his comparison adequate to exhibit the phenomena: for in C above he has already represented the outermost heavens, in which dwell the fixed stars, not as the lip of a hemispherical shell or hollow, but as an actual sphere (πᾶσαν συνέχον τὴν περιφοράν). (The inconsistency is noteworthy as shewing that the two images employed by Plato are fundamentally irreconcileable. See on 616 C.) By this and other indications we may be led to suspect that the whole theory of hemispherical whorls is only a device rendered necessary by Plato's similitude. If he had any opinion on the subject at all, he may have accepted the Pythagorean doctrine of spheres; but no conclusion on this matter can be drawn from the Republic. Cf. 617 A note

τὸν μὲν οὖν πρῶτόν τε κτλ. According to this reading, which was known to Proclus (l. c. pp. 218 ff.) and is found in all our MSS without any important variation except the omission of ἕκτου (line 31) in Vat. Θ, the order of the different whorls in respect of breadth of rim, beginning with the broadest, is as follows:—

1. Whorl of Fixed Stars (first)

2. Whorl of Venus (sixth)

3. Whorl of Mars (fourth)

4. Whorl of Moon (eighth)

5. Whorl of Sun (seventh)

6. Whorl of Mercury (fifth)

7. Whorl of Jupiter (third)

8. Whorl of Saturn (second).

See fig. iv on p. 444. (This figure, which is a simplified form of a drawing in Professor Campbell's Plato's Republic, published by Murray 1902, is intended to illustrate the upper surface of the whorl of Necessity's spindle. The small disc in the centre represents a section of the shaft, and the order of breadths of rim is indicated by the arabic numerals.) What does Plato mean us to understand by the different degrees of breadth of rim? On this subject I formerly wrote:—“The simple and natural explanation is that the breadth of the rims represents the size of the different planets. Each rim must of necessity be broad enough to contain the planet which resides in it, and no reason can be conceived why it should be any broader” (Cl. Rev. XV p. 392). In maintaining this view, I supposed that the surfaces of the different whorls were separated from one another by an interval representing the distances between the several planets, interpreting νῶτον in 616 E (with Jowett) as the lower and not the upper side of the entire whorl. But, as Professor Cook Wilson points out, the Greek does not allow of this interpretation, for ἁρμόττων, καθάπερ οἱ κάδοι οἱ εἰς ἀλλήλους ἁρμόττοντες, and νῶτον συνεχὲς ἑνὸς σφονδύλου ἀπεργαζομένους περὶ τὴν ἠλακάτην (616 D, E) shew conclusively that the individual whorls are fitted closely into one another like a nest of boxes, their upper surfaces forming one continuous plane. Cf. Proclus l. c. 216. 8 μηδενὸς γὰρ ὄντος κενοῦ μεταξὺ τῶν ἐνηρμοσμένων σφονδύλων κτλ. From this it follows that, if the breadth of a rim is equal to the diameter of its planet, “planets in the same part of their orbit will touch one another, and if we carry out the principle to the centre whorl, the moon will be always touching the earth. Moreover the outer planet will be continually grazing a fixed star” (Cook Wilson). These considerations are fatal to the view which I advocated; and I take this opportunity of retractation. The theory which has most in its favour, as I now see, is that “the breadth of the rims is intended to signify the supposed distances of the orbits from each other” (Jowett and Campbell). “It would be extraordinary,” writes Professor Cook Wilson, “that Plato in representing the heavenly system by his whorls should not have represented somehow the distances between the orbits of the heavenly bodies, and the obvious way to do this was by making the thickness of the spheres to which they are attached, or (as he prefers whorls on account of the distaff of Necessity), the breadth of the rims of the whorls, symbolise these different distances.” On this view the natural position of the planet will be “close to the outer edge of its rim, and touching the outer surface of its hemisphere.” For a further discussion of this subject see App. VI.

The reading in the text is described by Proclus (l. c. II pp. 218-222) as δευτέρα καὶ νεωτέρα, κρατοῦσα δὲ ἐν τοῖς κεκωλισμένοις (κεκολασμένοις, conjectures Pitra) ἀντιγράφοις. Proclus tells us that there was also another reading, προτέρα καὶ ἀρχαιοτέρα, which we can see from his description to have been as follows:— τὸν μὲν οὖν πρῶτόν τε καὶ ἐξωτάτω σφόνδυλον πλατύτατον τὸν τοῦ χείλους κύκλον ἔχειν, τὸν δὲ τοῦ ἑβδόμου δεύτερον, τρίτον δὲ τὸν τοῦ ὀγδόου, τέταρτον δὲ τὸν τοῦ ἕκτου, πέμπτον δὲ τὸν τοῦ τετάρτου, ἕκτον δὲ τὸν τοῦ τρίτου, ἕβδομον δὲ τὸν τοῦ δευτέρου, ὄγδοον δὲ τὸν τοῦ πέμπτου. The origin, authority and interpretation of this reading are discussed in App. VI.

τὸν μὲν τοῦ μεγίστου : sc. σφονδύλου χείλους‐κύκλον.

ποικίλον . The epithet ποικίλον means ‘spangled,’ rather than “exhibiting a variety of colours” (D. and V.). The reference is to the heavens ‘stellis ardentibus aptum’: cf. Proclus l. c. 222. 29 φησὶ ποικίλον μὲν εἶναι τὸν τοῦ μεγίστου διὰ τὴν τῶν ἀπλανῶν ἀστέρων ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ κύκλῳ ποικιλίαν and VII 529 C note

τὸν δὲ τοῦ ἑβδόμου κτλ. The attributes which belong to the planets are poetically transferred to the rims which they inhabit.

τὸν δὲ τοῦ ὀγδόου . We infer that Plato believed the moon to be an opaque body fastened in the eighth rim and lightened by the Sun. The discovery that the moon shines with borrowed light was ascribed to Anaximenes (Zeller^{5} I p. 248).

τὸν δὲ τοῦ δευτέρου καὶ πέμπτου κτλ. The second and fifth are Saturn and Mercury, or Φαίνων and Στίλβων, as they were sometimes called, with reference to their brightness or colour. See the de mundo 2. 392^{a} 23 ff. Yellow, according to Plato, is a mixture of white and red ( Tim. 68 B). The third (τρίτον δέ) or Jupiter was known also as Φαέθων, and the fourth, or Mars, as Πυρόεις. Venus, which is the sixth, and comes next to Jupiter in whiteness, had the name Φωσφόρος (de mundo l. c.). Cf. [Epin.] 986 E ff. and Diels Dox. Gr. 344.

κυκλεῖσθαι δὲ δὴ κτλ. Cf. Tim. 36 C, D. The whorl of the fixed stars revolves from East to West, bearing with it in its revolution the other seven whorls. In this way Plato portrays the apparent daily revolution of the stars and planets. In order to represent the movements of the Sun, Moon and planets in their own particular orbits, Plato says that each of the seven inner whorls is all the while pursuing on its own account a motion in the opposite direction, viz. from West to East. The revolving whorls in the words of Proclus, ‘carry round the stars’ (περιάγουσι τοὺς ἀστέρας l. c. p. 226. 12) which are situated in their rims.

Would the mechanism of Plato's picture really produce the movements which it is intended to portray? The question may be interesting, but is irrelevant. Imaginary machines have imaginary properties; and Plato himself invokes the assistance of supernatural beings to carry on the movements (617 C). The important point to keep in mind, as Professor Cook Wilson observes, is that “Plato has realised that the apparent phenomena are what we call a composition of movements (or velocities). This composition of movements he is not attempting to explain, by giving the sort of machinery which he thought really produced it, but he is endeavouring to make us understand what the movements are (not how they originate), by putting the objects concerned in an imaginary machine, the movements of which we can represent to the senses, and which would produce such movements in the objects as they actually have.” For similar reasons it is impossible to draw any inference from this passage as to the question whether Plato believed in the daily revolution of the earth. In the Timaeus, according to Grote (Plato on the Earth's Rotation, pp. 13 ff.), the cosmical axis is “a solid cylinder revolving or turning round, and causing thereby the revolution of the circumference or the sidereal sphere,” and necessarily also carrying round with itself the Earth, which is massed or globed round the axis of the whole (εἰλλομένην περὶ τὸν διὰ παντὸς πόλον τεταμένον Tim. 40 B. ‘Massed’ or ‘packed’ is Boeckh's interpretation of εἰλλομένην, with which Grote also agrees; but whether the word really bears this meaning, is another question, which we need not here discuss.) In support of his explanation of the passage in the Timaeus, Grote appeals to the myth of the Republic; and the appeal would be justified if Plato's figure of Necessity's spindle were intended to explain the cause, and not merely to represent the form, of the celestial motions. As it is, the Republic does not warrant any conclusion either way. Cf. 616 D, E note

τάχιστα μὲν κτλ. Cf. Tim. 38 C, D, 39 C, 40 B and [Epin.] 986 E ff.

ἅμα ἀλλήλοις . Πλάτων καὶ οἱ μαθηματικοὶ ἰσοδρόμους εἶναι τὸν ἥλιον, τὸν ἑωσφόρον (Venus), Στίλβωνα (Mercury): see Diels Dox. Gr. 346 and cf. Tim. 36 D, [Epin.] 986 E and Proclus l.c. 226. 21. Plato's language certainly means that these three bodies travel at the same pace, and if their speed is the same, obviously they cannot complete their orbits in the same period. But it is doubtful whether the contradiction was present to Plato's mind, and Proclus may be right in holding that Plato was really thinking of the periods of the planets (l.c. and in Tim. 259 C). See also on 617 B below.

τρίτον δὲ κτλ. See cr. n. The article, which was first rejected by Schleiermacher, is probably a dittographical mistake. Schneider, Hermann and Baiter retain it, despite the ambiguity.

ἐπανακυκλούμενον . The revolution, relatively to that of the whole, is retrograde: hence ἐπανακυκλούμενον.

Ἀνάγκης γόνασιν . Plato means us to imagine Necessity as seated in the centre of the Universe. The notion is probably Pythagorean; for Parmenides, who attaches himself to the Pythagoreans in this part of his system (Zeller^{5} I p. 572), speaks of a central Ἀνάγκη as the cause of all movement and birth: see Diels Dox. Gr. 335. 12 ff. τῶν δὲ συμμιγῶν (sc. στεφανῶν) τὴν μεσαιτάτην ἁπάσαις τοκέα πάσης κινήσεως καὶ γενέσεως ὑπάρχειν, ἥντινα καὶ δαίμονα κυβερνῆτιν καὶ κλῃδοῦχον ἐπονομάζει δίκην τε καὶ ἀνάγκην, and Zeller l.c. p. 577 note 3. (Zeller identifies this Ἀνάγκη with the central fire of the Pythagoreans.) The same school seem also to have held that Ἀνάγκη surrounds and holds the world together (Diels l. c. 321), and Zeller thinks it is this external Ἀνάγκη of which Plato here avails himself (l.c. p. 434 note 3). But it is quite clear that Plato's Ἀνάγκη is in the middle: see on 616 B and 621 A, B. The interpretation of Plato's symbolism of course is that Necessity and Law spin the threads of life—the life of the Universe as well as that of man. ἐν τοῖς τῆς Ἀνάγκης γόνασιν is an echo of θεῶν ἐν γούνασι κεῖται and the like: cf. Proclus l.c. 227. 12.

ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν κύκλων κτλ. βεβηκέναι means ‘is perched.’ Proclus more suo assures us that the Sirens are ψυχαί τινες νοερῶς ζῶσαι (l.c. 238. 6), but they are of course only a poetic fiction to express the ‘music of the spheres.’ Cf. Merchant of Venice V I “There's not the smallest orb which thou behold'st, But in his motion like an angel sings.” Plato goes beyond Shakespeare, setting the angels on the orbs and making them sing. Cf. Milton Arcades 63 ff. “the celestial Sirens' harmony That sit upon the nine”—in Plato there are only eight— “infolded Spheres.” The seven planets by their movements were supposed by the Pythagoreans to give forth sounds corresponding to the notes of the Heptachord. This was probably the original form of the ‘Music of the Spheres.’ Later, it was held that the circle of the fixed stars had also a note of its own, and a ‘harmony’ or mode (see on III 398 E ff.) resulted like that of the Octachord. The underlying idea of the doctrine of the ‘Music of the Spheres’ was well expressed by Dorylaus when he said the Universe was the ‘organum Dei’ (Censor. de die natali 13: cf. also Milton Ode on the Nativity “And bid the bass of heaven's deep organ blow”). See also next note.

φωνὴν μίαν, ἕνα τόνον : ‘a single sound, a single musical note.’ “Additum ἕνα τόνον per epexegesin est” (Stallbaum). Cf. Proclus l.c. 236. 27 ff. ἡ μὲν γὰρ μία φωνὴ δηλοῖ τὴν ἀμετάβολον τοῦ τῆς ἐνεργείας εἴδους εἰς ἄλλο καὶ ἄλλο μέλος ὕπαρξιν, ὡς ἑκάστης Σειρῆνος ἀεὶ τὴν αὐτὴν ἱείσης φωνήν· ὁ δὲ εἷς τόνος τὴν ποιὰν φωνὴν ἐδήλωσεν εἰς ἑνὸς ἀπήχησιν φθόγγου τελοῦσαν· παρὰ γὰρ τὴν τάσιν καὶ ὁ φθόγγος καλεῖται τόνος. There is also perhaps a slight rhetorical effect, though less than in τὸ δεινόν, τὸ μέγα IX 590 A. The reading ἕνα τόνον is confirmed by Plut. de anim. procr. 1029 C and Proclus in Tim. 259 C and in remp. l.c. et al. It is difficult to understand ἀνὰ τόνον, which Hermann and Baiter read, following q and a few inferior MSS. ἀνὰ τόνον could hardly mean ‘one note each,’ as Hermann supposes. With regard to the ἁρμονία itself, the pitch of the several notes will of course be determined by the speed of the different whorls (cf. VII 530 D note), so that if we express the notes by the names of the circles which produce them, the ἁρμονία will be:—

It is clear that Plato is thinking of a sort of mode (ἐκ πασῶν δὲ ὀκτὼ οὐσῶν μίαν ἁρμονίαν ξυμφωνεῖν), but if we understand ἅμα ἀλλήλοις strictly, there will only be six notes, because Mercury, Venus and the Sun will each have the same note. Difficulties of this sort might have troubled the later Pythagoreans, but scarcely Plato, least of all in an imaginative picture of this kind. We note however that according to Plato the speed of the planets—except in the case of the Sun, Venus and Mercury—diminishes in proportion to their distance from the Earth. Now we may reasonably suppose that Plato thought the more distant planets took longer to complete their orbit than those which are nearer, so that it is by no means improbable that in speaking of the speed of the planetary movements, Plato really had in his mind the time occupied by the orbital periods and not the rate of progression of the planets themselves. See also above on ἅμα ἀλλήλοις. In that case the octave will be complete, because in order to complete their orbits in the same time, the Sun, Venus and Mercury will have to travel at different rates of speed. Later writers knew all about the Music of the Spheres, and a choir of eight Neo-Pythagoreans would have had no difficulty in rendering it on a small scale: see for example von Jan's Mus. Scr. Gr. pp. 241 ff., 271 ff., 418 f. Cf. also Zeller^{5} I pp. 429—434.

Μοίρας, λευχειμονούσας . Ettig l.c. p. 309 note 3 thinks this an Orphic trait, comparing Frag. 253 Abel Μοίρας—λευκοστόλους.

ἐπὶ τῶν κεφαλῶν . These words are bracketed by Herwerden, on the ground that περὶ τὰς κεφαλάς would alone be good Greek, an opinion which few scholars will share.

Λάχεσιν μὲν κτλ. Lachesis is the Fate of the Past, Clotho of the Present, and Atropos of the Future: cf. Laws 960 C, where Plato approves of the ancient tradition Λάχεσιν μὲν τὴν πρώτην εἶναι, Κλωθὼ δὲ τὴν δευτέραν, τὴν Ἄτροπον δὲ τρίτην and Proclus l.c. 244. 20 ff. The positions of Lachesis and Atropos were sometimes interchanged, as for example in [Arist.] de mundo 7. 401^{b} 18 ff. τέτακται δὲ κατὰ μὲν τὸ γεγονὸς μία τῶν Μοιρῶν, Ἄτροπος, ἐπεὶ τὰ παρελθόντα πάντα ἄτρεπτά ἐστιν, κατὰ δὲ τὸ μέλλον Λάχεσις (εἰς πάντα γὰρ ἡ κατὰ φύσιν μένει λῆξις), κατὰ δὲ τὸ ἐνεστὸς Κλωθώ, συμπεραίνουσά τε καὶ κλώθουσα ἑκάστῳ τὰ οἰκεῖα: cf. also Proclus l.c. 244.

τῇ δεξιᾷ χειρί . The right hand is reserved for the outermost whorl, or circle of the Same, which is the more honourable, and itself, according to Tim. 36 C, moves ἐπὶ δεξιά: the left for the less honourable circle of the Other, which moves ἐπ’ ἀριστερά (ib.). Pythagorean influence is doubtless at work again here: cf. 614 C note

συνεπιστρέφειν : “cum matre simul vertere” (Ficinus).

τὴν ἔξω περιφορὰν κτλ. The circle of the Same may be taken as the type of that which ‘is’: hence it is entrusted to Clotho, the Fate of τὰ ὄντα. The courses of the Planets or ‘wandering’ stars are symbolical of the unknown and (as it seems to us) uncertain Future, so that they are appropriately given to the Fate of the Future, i.e. Atropos. διαλείπουσαν χρόνον means ‘leaving intervals’ i.e. ‘from time to time.’ Clotho leaves off occasionally to make room for Lachesis, as Plato explains in τὴν δὲ Λάχεσιν below. Similarly also Proclus l.c. 252. 8.

ὡσαύτως : i.e. διαλείπουσαν χρόνον.

, D 21 τὴν δὲ Λάχεσιν κτλ. : ‘while Lachesis lays hold of either in turn, the one with the one hand, the other with the other’ (“abwechselnd den einen mit der einen, den andern mit der andern angreifend” Schneider). She turns the circle of the Same with her right hand, the others—here treated as a single περιφορά as in Tim. 36 C—with her left. The translation “laying hold of either in turn, first with one hand and then with the other” (Jowett) is not, I think, what Plato means: for it would seem from what is said of Clotho and Lachesis that the right hand is appropriated to the circle of the Same, the left to that of the Other: see on 617 C. The words ἐν μέρει—if my view is right— belong only to ἑκατέρας ἐφάπτεσθαι and not also to ἑκατέρᾳ τῇ χειρί. As the fate Past, Lachesis fitly contributes to both revolutions: for on the Past depends both the Present and the Future. A similar lesson is conveyed by representing the lots and samples of lives as lying in the lap of Lachesis: cf. also 620 A κατὰ συνήθειαν—αἱρεῖσθαι and 620 E note

617D - 619A As soon as they arrived upon the scene, the souls were called upon to choose new lives. The order of choosing was determined by lot; but there were many more samples of lives than lots, and every soul was made responsible for its own choice. The moment of choice is the supreme crisis of our fate, and it behoves us to spare no effort to equip ourselves for resisting the attractions of wealth and power, and selecting the better life, that is, the life of virtue.

Ἀνάγκης κτλ. Proclus' remarks on the style of this speech deserve attention: πανταχοῦ μὲν ὁ Πλάτων νοῦν ἡγεμόνα προστησάμενος ὧν φθέγγεται νοερῶν ὄντως ἐπάξια φθέγγεται θεαμάτων· ὅταν δὲ καὶ τοὺς κρείττονας ἡμῶν ἀπεικονίζηται, σαφῶς ἐνθεάζοντι προσέοικε καὶ τοὺς φοιβολήπτους μιμεῖται, ῥήματα ἀφιεὶς ὥσπερ βέλη νοῦ γέμοντα καὶ ὑψηλῶν ἐπιβολῶν· συνεξορμώσης δὲ αὐτῷ τῆς ἑρμηνείας ταῖς νοήσεσιν ἀκαλλωπίστως συνεστραμμένοις μὲν χρῆται φθέγμασιν, ἀπολελυμένα δὲ ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων αὐτὰ διίστησιν τὴν ἀπόλυτον μιμούμενος θέαν τῆς ψυχῆς ἀπ’ ἄλλων ἐπ’ ἄλλα πηδῶσαν· οἷα καὶ διὰ τούτων ἐργάζεται τῶν τοῦ προφητου λόγων, ἐν ἐλαχίστοις μὲν ἀπεριήγητα νοήματα συλλαβών, ἀσύνδετα δὲ τὰ τλεῖστα φθεγξάμενος, συστρέψας δὲ τὰ κῶλα τοῖς αἰνίγμασιν παραπλησίως (l.c. 269). The omission of articles also adds dignity and impressiveness: cf. VII 518 A al.

ψυχαὶ κτλ. Plato loosely calls the souls ἐφήμεροι, because their connexion with body is transient. In themselves of course, they are immortal—ψυχὴ πᾶσα ἀθάνατος ( Phaedr. 245 C). The explanation of Proclus is somewhat different, and, as often happens, too recondite: τὰς μὲν ἀνθρωπίνας ψυχάς, οὔτι γε πάσας, ἀλλὰ τὰς γενέσεως ἐπορεγομένας ἤδη καλῶν ἐφημέρους, ὡς θνητῶν καὶ ἐφημέρων ἁπτομένας (l.c. 270). περιόδου means of course τῆς ἀπὸ γενέσεως ἐπὶ γένεσιν περιόδου, viz. 1100 years (supra 615 A note); and θανατηφόρου, ‘fraught with death,’ ‘death-bringing’ agrees with περιόδου.

, E 28 οὐχ ὑμᾶς ‐‐ αἱρήσεσθε . Cf. infra 620 D, E ὃν εἵλετο δαίμονα—φύλακα ξυμπέμπειν τοῦ βίου καὶ ἀποπληρωτὴν τῶν αἱρεθέντων. Each individual soul is accompanied throughout its life on earth by a δαίμων of its own. This δαίμων is the personification of its destiny throughout that particular life—its genius in short, albus or ater (Hor. Epp. II 2. 189), according as the soul is εὐδαίμων or κακοδαίμων. There are not a few traces of this belief before the time of Plato, e.g. in Heraclitus' famous saying ἦθος ἀνθρώπῳ δαίμων ( Fr. 121 Bywater) in Pind. Ol. 13. 28 Ζεῦ πάτερ—Ξενοφῶντος εὔθυνε δαίμονος οὖρον, and often in Euripides (examples in Nägelsbach Nachhom. Theol. p. 113); and Döring (l.c. p. 489) is no doubt right in holding that the doctrine was not exclusively Orphic or Pythagorean. According to the popular view, which Plato himself is content to make use of in Phaed. 107 D ὁ ἑκάστου δαίμων, ὅσπερ ζῶντα εἰλήχει, we do not choose our δαίμων, but are rather allotted to it: cf. Theocr. 4. 40 αἲ αἲ τῶ σκληρῶ μάλα δαίμονος, ὅς με λέλογχεν, and the fine lines of Menander ἅπαντι δαίμων ἀνδρὶ συμπαρίσταται | εὐθὺς γενομένῳ, μυσταγωγὸς τοῦ βίου (Mein. Frag. Com. Graec. IV p. 238), together with Homer Il. XXIII 79 (κὴρ) ἥπερ λάχε γεινόμενόν περ. In the emphatic οὐχ ὑμᾶς δαίμων λήξεται, Plato proclaims his dissent from the popular view: the individual is himself responsible for his destiny (ἀλλ’ ὑμεῖς—αἱρήσεσθε). Hence αἰτία ἑλομένου· θεὸς ἀναίτιος. On later, especially Stoic, developments of the doctrine of a δαίμων see Rohde Pysche^{2} II p. 316 note See also on 620 D.

πρῶτος ‐‐ βίον . See on 618 A πολὺ πλείω τῶν παρόντων.

ἐξ ἀνάγκης . The choice, though free, is irrevocable: ἐνεδέχετο γὰρ καὶ ἄλλον βίον ζῆν, ἀλλὰ πρὸ τῆς αἱρέσεως, μετὰ δὲ τὴν αἵρεσιν ἀδύνατον (Proclus l.c. 275).

ἀρετὴ δὲ ἀδέσποτον . “Mortals that would follow me, Love Virtue, she alone is free” (Milton Comus 1018 f.). On Platonic principles, a thing is in so far as it is good (VI 509 B ff.), so that our truest individuality is nothing more or less than that which is the best and highest part of our nature: cf. the words of Aristotle, who in Eth. Nic. X 7. 1178^{a} 2 πλατωνίζει as follows: δόξειε δ’ ἂν καὶ εἶναι ἕκαστος τοῦτο (i.e. τὸ κράτιστον των ἐν αὑτῷ), εἴπερ τὸ κύριον καὶ ἄμεινον. We therefore attain our fullest development and enjoy our only true liberty as individuals by becoming servants of Virtue. In the words of Goethe, “Das Gesetz nur kann uns Freiheit geben.” Proclus' comment, though true and instructive as far as it goes, does not exhaust the significance of Plato's saying: ἀδέσποτον δὲ τὴν ἀρετήν, ἀλλ’ οὐ διὰ τὸ ἐφ’ ἡμῖν μόνον, ἀλλὰ διότι τὴν ψυχὴν ἐλευθέραν ἀποτελεῖ τῶν πικροτάτων δεσποτῶν, οἷς ἡ δουλεύουσα τῶν ἀγαθῶν στέρεται πάντων (l.c. 276. 5 ff. Cf. also Pl. Rep. I 329 C and especially Xen. Mem. IV 5. 3—5). The germ of the Platonic doctrine of moral freedom is to be found in the Socratic οὐδεὶς ἑκὼν πονηρός (see on IX 577 D, E): for its sequel, we should look to the Stoic theory of the freedom of the wise man (ἐλευθέρους τοὺς σπουδαίους μόνον Zeno ap. D. L. VII 33): see especially Epictetus Gnom. Epict. Stob. 31 ed. Schenkl ἐλευθερία καὶ δουλεία, τὸ μὲν ἀρετῆς ὄνομα, τὸ δὲ κακίας and the chapter περὶ ἐλευθερίας ib. Dissert. IV 1.

αἰτία ‐‐ ἀναίτιος . Cf. II 379 B ff. and Tim. 42 D. The whole of Lachesis' speech is frequently quoted or referred to by later Greek writers (see the references in Schneider's note), and these words in particular became a kind of rallying-cry among the champions of the freedom of the will in the early Christian era (Dieterich Nek. p. 115 note). A bust of Plato found at Tibur and dating from the first century B.C. bears the inscription αἰτία ἑλομένῳ (sic). Θεὸς ἀναίτιος, together with ψυχὴ πᾶσα ἀθάνατος (from Phaedr. 245 C). See Kaibel IGIS 1196 quoted by Dieterich l.c. With the sentiment itself cf. Laws 904 B—D.

πολὺ πλείω τῶν παρόντων . Cf. 619 B, 620 C. The combination of κλήρωσις and αἵρεσις, which appears also in Phaedr. 249 B, is according to Thompson “a mythical mode of reconciling freedom and necessity—choice being left free under limiting conditions.” I think the introduction of the lot is rather intended to account for the conspicuous inequalities between different men in respect of accidents of birth, fortune and the other ἀδιάφορα προηγμένα (to use a Stoic term). Ceteris paribus, a soul would presumably select a μετρίως κεχορηγημένον βίον: where it does not, we may suppose, in general, that the κλήρωσις compelled it to choose late. Cf. Plot. Ennead. II 3. 15 οἱ κλῆροι τίνες; ἢ—τὸ εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τόδε τὸ σῶμα καὶ τῶνδε γονέων καὶ ἐν τούτοις τόποις γίνεσθαι, καὶ ὅλως, ὡς εἴπομεν, τὰ ἔξω. This interpretation is supported also by the case of Odysseus below (620 C). See also on 619 D.

ζῴων τε γὰρ κτλ. Did Plato seriously believe in the transmigration of the soul? Teichmüller summarily dismisses the entire theory as unplatonic (Die Plat. Frage pp. 1—20), while Susemihl, in harmony with certain ancient writers (see the references in Simson Der Begriff d. Seele bei Platon p. 152 note), takes Plato at his word so far as concerns the passage of the soul into new human bodies, but refuses to allow that he could have believed in transmigration into the forms of the lower animals (Genet. Entwick. II p. 272). Plato's language is however quite explicit, and there is the less reason for resorting to an allegorical interpretation, because the doctrine was already familiar in Greek philosophical and religious thought (see F. Laudowicz Wesen u. Ursprung d. Lehre v. d. Präexistenz d. Seele etc. pp. 12—29 and Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 162 ff.), and is itself in general conformity with Plato's own conception of immortality. The doctrine of transmigration meets us frequently in Plato's dialogues, e.g. in Men. 81 A ff.; Phaed. 81 E ff., 113 A; Phaedr. 249 B; Tim. 42 B ff.: cf. 91 D ff. Most if not all of these passages have a mythical colouring, and should therefore be read in the light of the caveat which Plato subjoins to the eschatological myth of the Phaedo: τὸ μὲν οὖν ταῦτα διισχυρίσασθαι οὕτως ἔχειν, ὡς ἐγὼ διελήλυθα, οὐ πρέπει νοῦν ἔχοντι ἀνδρί· ὅτι μέντοι ἢ ταῦτ’ ἐστιν ἢ τοιαῦτ’ ἄττα περὶ τὰς ψυχὰς ἡμῶν—ἐπείπερ ἀθάνατόν γε ἡ ψυχὴ φαίνεται οὖσα, τοῦτο καὶ πρέπειν μοι δοκεῖ καὶ ἄξιον κινδυνεῦσαι οἰομένῳ οὕτως ἔχειν (114 D). That soul is immortal, Plato is firmly convinced: and transmigration he regards as probable, to say the least. Cf. 608 D note

διατελεῖς . This word, for which Cobet proposes διὰ τέλους, is extremely rare in classical Greek, occurring only here and in Soph. O. C. 1514.

εἰς πενίας κτλ. . “Expectes εἰς φυγάς τε καὶ πενίας καὶ εἰς πτωχείας κτλ.” (Herwerden). The text may well stand. Plato contrasts poverty and exile (πενίας τε καὶ φυγάς) with beggary, presumably at home (καὶ εἰς πτωχείας).

ψυχῆς δὲ τάξιν ‐‐ γίγνεσθαι . Cf. Hom. Od. XVIII 136 f. τοῖος γὰρ νόος ἐστὶν ἐπιχθονίων ἀνθρώπων | οἷον ἐπ’ ἦμαρ ἅγῃσι πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, XVII 322 f. and Empedocles 319 f. Karsten ὅσσον γ’ ἀλλοῖοι μετέφυν, τόσον ἄρ σφισιν αἰεὶ | καὶ τὸ φρονεῖν ἀλλοῖα παρίστατο with Karsten ad loc. See also on I 335 B.

τὰ δ’ ἄλλα : sc. except ψυχῆς τάξιν. In τὰ ἄλλα are included κάλλος, προγόνων ἀρεταί etc.

μεσοῦν τούτων : i.q. μεσοῦντα εἶναι τούτων, viz. πλούτων καὶ πενιῶν, νόσων καὶ ὑγιειῶν. Cf. 619 A τὸν μέσον—τῶν τοιούτων βίον.

τοῦ μαθήματος and μαθεῖν καὶ ἐξευρεῖν are bracketed by Herwerden. The emphatic pleonasm is thoroughly Platonic. Cf. V 472 C et al.

καὶ εἰδέναι . See cr. n. καί is found in several MSS besides Ξ and q. Hermann removes the καί before ξυντιθέμενα and places it before ἀναλογιζόμενον, but ἀναλογιζόμενον “necessario cum αἱρεῖσθαι cohaeret” (Schneider).

αἱρεῖσθαι κτλ . αἱρεῖσθαι ‘to make his choice’ is used absolutely as in 620 A. πρὸς τὴν τῆς ψυχῆς κτλ. means ‘defining the worse and the better life with reference to the nature of the soul, calling that worse’ etc. (So also Schneider.) The two parts of τόν τε χείρω καὶ τὸν ἀμείνω βίον are afterwards taken separately in χείρω μέν and ἀμείνω δέ, as with so-called ‘partitive apposition’: cf. 611 D and IV 431 A note Others take αἱρεῖσθαι with τόν τε χείρω καὶ τὸν ἀμείνω βίον, but αἱρεῖσθαι is different from διαιρεῖσθαι and the possibility of a zeugma is excluded because τὸν χείρω precedes τὸν ἀμείνω and not vice-versâ.

ἐκεῖσε looks forward, of course, to εἰς τὸ ἀδικωτέραν γίγνεσθαι. Herwerden's ἐκεῖ (=ἐν Ἅιδου) is both needless and wrong: for the soul becomes ἀδικωτέρα, if at all, during its life on earth: in Hades it is purged.

ἐάσει . Ξ and v, followed by editors before Schneider, have ἐᾶν. The future is easy if the sentence be made independent.

ξὺν νῷ . On ξύν see IV 424 E note

συντόνως ζῶντι : according to the motto (ἁπλοῦς καὶ) ἀτενής (VIII 547 E). συντόνως ζητοῦντι, which Herwerden conjectured, appears in q and Flor. U: but the reading of A is far more characteristic and significant.

619B - 620D Many were the instances of hasty and foolish choosing: and many the changes resulting both from choice and from the action of the lot. He who is ever faithful to the life of true philosophy, and whose lot does not fall out among the last, will be happy throughout all time. The spectacle was indeed one fitted to move pity, smiles, and wonder. In most cases, the souls chose in conformity with their previous lives—Orpheus, for example, selecting the life of a swan, Ajax that of a lion, and so on. It chanced that Odysseus had drawn the last lot of all, and after long search he found and joyously laid hold of the peaceful life of a private individual, for he was wearied of all his labours. There were changes from beasts to men, and from men to beasts, and every form of permutation.

ἔθει ἄνευ φιλοσοφίας κτλ. Cf. Phaed. 82 A f. οἱ τὴν δημοτικὴν καὶ πολιτικὴν ἀρετὴν ἐπιτετηδευκότες, ἣν δὴ καλοῦσι σωφροσύνην τε καὶ δικαιοσύνην, ἐξ ἔθους τε καὶ μελέτης γεγονυῖαν ἄνευ φιλοσοφίας τε καὶ νοῦ, and see also on VI 500 D, 506 C. It is interesting to observe that philosophic virtue is not a sine qua non for admission to the Platonic heaven. Throughout the whole myth, rewards and punishments are distributed for good and bad actions rather than for knowledge and ignorance (cf. 615 B ff.); and correct opinion or ‘Orthodoxy,’ in Plato's sense of the word, provided the lines have fallen to it in pleasant places, may well have been both blameless and beneficent on earth. But in the moment of supremest peril (618 B), when we have to choose another life, it is Knowledge, and not ‘Orthodoxy,’ that prevails. In the Phaedo l.c. Plato says that the ‘orthodox’ probably enter as before εἰς τοιοῦτον—πολιτικόν τε καὶ ἥμερον γένος, ἤ που μελιττῶν ἢ σφηκῶν, ἢ μυρμήκων, ἣ καὶ εἰς ταὐτόν γε πάλιν τὸ ἀνθρώπινον γένος, καὶ γίγνεσθαι ἐξ αὐτῶν ἄνδρας μετρίους.

ὡς δὲ καὶ εἰπεῖν : not “according to Er's account” (D. and V.), but ‘as one might say,’ ‘broadly speaking,’ i.q. ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν. Cf. Laws 639 E (ξύμπανθ’ ὡς εἰπεῖν), 795 D, Soph. 220 E, Phaedr. 258 E, and [Epin.] 976 E. These examples are cited by Grünenwald in Schanz's Beiträge zur hist. Synt. d. Gr. Spr. II 3. pp. 21 ff.

καὶ διὰ ‐‐ τύχην ‘as well as by the fortune of the lot’ is doubted by Herwerden, while Richards calls for καὶ <οὐ> διά, relying on 619 B καὶ τελευταίῳ—ἀθυμείτω and on ‘the drift of the whole passage.’ In point of fact, however, Plato nowhere denies that the fortune of the lot affects the issue. On the contrary, his whole theory supposes that it does, for those souls who choose late have fewer lives to choose from: see 617 E, 618 A, 620 C. ὁ τελευτῶν, it is true, need not despair (619 B), but none the less is the lot likely to produce μεταβολὴ τῶν κακῶν καὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν. Cf. Procl. l.c. 302. 15 ff. τούτοιν χρεία δυεῖν, ἑνὸς μὲν τῆς ὀρθῆς κρίσεως περὶ τὸ ἄμεινον καὶ χεῖρον τῶν προτεινομένων βίων, ἑτέρου δὲ τοῦ τὸν κλῆρον μὴ ἐν τοῖς ἐσχάτοις πίπτειν· τί γὰρ εἰ καὶ ὁ αἱρούμενος εἴη περὶ κρίσιν ἀσφαλής, ἀλλ’ οἱ προτεινόμενοι βίοι διὰ δή τινας αἰτίας οἱ τυχόντες εἶεν; See also on 618 A and following note.

ἐπεὶ κτλ. The connexion of ideas is: The fortune of the lot, and our individual choice, are the two influences that affect our destiny: for if our lot is reasonably early and we choose as befits philosophers, it will be well with us. ἐπεί “reddit rationem ante dictorum” (Schneider). The sense is surely both plain and satisfactory, although Richards asserts that “ἐπεί has no meaning, unless there was an οὐ preceding.”

οὐκ ἂν χθονίαν ‐‐ οὐρανίαν is explained by 614 B—D: see notes ad loc. In the Phaedrus those souls which choose the philosophic life three times successively are “excused from seven of the ten millennial probations through which the rest have to pass” (Thompson on 249 A).

γάρ is resumptive. For examples of this usage see Shilleto on Dem. F. L. 107.

κατὰ συνήθειαν κτλ. Cf. Phaed. 81 E ff. ἐνδοῦνται δέ, ὥσπερ εἰκός, εἰς τοιαῦτα ἤθη, ὁποἶ ἄττ’ ἂν μεμελητηκυῖαι τύχωσιν ἐν τῷ βίῳ κτλ.

Θαμύρου . Thamyris and not Thamyras was the usual form of this name, but Plato prefers Θαμύρας: cf. lon 533 C ἢ περὶ Θαμύρου ἢ περὶ Ὀρφέως, Laws 829 E τῶν Θαμύρου τε καὶ Ὀρφείων ὕμνων. The meaning of τὰ πολλά (‘for the most part’) will be seen from the case of Odysseus below (620 C f.).

ὡσαύτως. εἰκοστὴν κτλ. The reading εἰκοστήν is confirmed by Plut. Conv. Disp. VIII 5. 739 E ff. (διὰ τί Πλάτων εἰκοστὴν ἔφη ψυχην τοῦ Αἴαντος ἐπὶ τὸν κλῆρον ἐλθεῖν;) as well as by Proclus l.c. 265. 20 and elsewhere. It appears from these passages that some of the ancients found a subtle significance in εἰκοστήν: but the particular number is probably only a circumstantial detail intended to add verisimilitude to the narrative. See also on 614 B. Herwerden conjectures ὡσαύτως, ὡς τὸ <εἰκός· ....> εἰκοστὴν δὲ κτλ., and inserts between εἰκός and εἰκοστήν the words καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων—μίγνυσθαι from 620 D. There is however nothing to indicate that the text has suffered dislocation: see on 620 D below.

λέοντος βίον . Ettig ( Acheruntica l.c. p. 310) explains the choice of Ajax by referring to Tim. 91 E τὸ δ’ αὖ πεζὸν καὶ θηριῶδες γέγονεν ἐκ τῶν μηδὲν προσχρωμένων φιλοσοφίᾳ, but the conspicuous feature in Ajax was θυμός, and that is why he selects the life which typifies τὸ θυμοειδές: see IX 588 E. Cf. Proclus l.c. 316. 31 ff. ἡ μὲν Αἴαντος ψυχὴ πᾶσαν δηλοῖ ζωὴν ἀνδρικὴν μέν, πλεονάζουσαν δὲ κατὰ τὸν θυμὸν διὰ δή τινα φιλόνικον ψυχῆς ἕξιν, καὶ διὰ ταύτην ἐνδυομένην εἰς ἀνδρικὸν μὲν ζῷον, ἄλογον δέ. Empedocles, as we are told, held τὴν ἀρίστην εἶναι μετοίκησιν τὴν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὲν εἰς ζῷον ἡ λῆξις αὐτὸν μεταγάγοι, λέοντα γίγνεσθαι, εἰ δὲ εἰς φυτόν, δάφνην (Ael. Hist. An. XII 7): see Karsten on vv. 382 ff. of the περὶ φύσεως.

Θερσίτου . Thersites is the type of the πονηρὸς ἰδιώτης in Gorg. 525 E. Here, as often in later Greek writers, he stands for the buffoon (παγγέλοιος ἄνθρωπος διάστροφος τὸ σῶμα καὶ λελωβημένος Lucian adv. ind. 7). Cf. also Soph. Phil. 442 ff., Theopomp. Fr. 262 in Müller Fr. Hist. Gr. I p. 323 and Pythag. Simil. 32 in Mullach Fr. Phil. Gr. I p. 489, in the last of which passages Thersites and Achilles stand for two opposite types. The different varieties of lives which are illustrated in this passage (μουσικός, πολεμικός, βασιλικός, γυμναστικός, τεχνικός, μιμητικός) appear also (as Proclus observes l.c. 319. 25 ff.) in Phaedr. 248 D, E. See also Empedocles vv. 384—386 and Karsten ad loc.

πίθηκον . Cf. IX 590 B.

ἀπράγμονος . Eusebius (Praep. Ev. XIII 16. 11) has καὶ ἀπράγμονος, which occurs also in one of the Vatican MSS. Cobet would alter ἀπράγμονος to ἀπράγμονα. The text is quite satisfactory: for ἀνδρὸς ἰδιώτου is virtually a single word: cf. ἀνδρὶ—σοφιστῇ Prot. 312 C, ὑπὲρ ἀνδρὸς θητὸς ἄνδρα πρεσβύτην πατέρα Euthyph. 15 D, ἀνὴρ μάντις, ἀνὴρ νομεύς, ἄνδρες δικασταί and the like. “Sunt ἰδιῶται πολυπράγμονες: Ulyssis anima vitam ἀνδρὸς ἰδιώτου e numero τῶν ἀπραγμόνων quaerebat” (Schneider).

καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων ‐‐ μίγνυσθαι . See on 620 B. Herwerden's transposition is the less defensible because the words καὶ πάσας μίξεις μίγνυσθαι form an appropriate ending to this part of the picture.

τὰ μὲν ἄδικα κτλ. Cf. (with J. and C.) Phaed. 82 A τοὺς δέ γε ἀδικίας τε καὶ τυραννίδας καὶ ἁρπαγὰς προτετιμηκότας εἰς τὰ τῶν λύκων τε καὶ ἱεράκων καὶ ἰκτίνων γένη κτλ.

620D - 621D After all the souls had chosen, Lachesis bestowed on each its daemon or genius. Thereafter the choice was ratified by the remaining Fates, and finally by Necessity. In the evening the souls encamped by the river of Unmindfulness in the plain of Lethe, and all, save Er, drank its waters. At midnight, with thunder and earthquake, they were carried upwards to be born; and in the morning Er revived, and found himself upon the pyre.

The vision of Er is no mere idle tale, that perishes when it is told. If we give ear to its teaching, it will save our souls alive, and both here and hereafter, we shall fare well.

πρὸς τὴν Λάχεσιν κτλ. For Lachesis see on 617 C, D, and for δαίμονα 617 D, E notes

ἣν ‐‐ μοῖραν . In λαχών, ἐφαψάμενον and διεξελθόντα the individual himself is substituted for the soul: cf. IX 573 B. Proclus (l.c. 346. 9 ff.) interprets διεξελθόντα of Er, but this cannot be right. λαχών is said with allusion to Λάχεσις, from whose knees the lots were taken (617 D). It is appropriate that Lachesis should be the only Fate involved in the act of choice; for the Future is the child of the Past (cf. 617 C, D note). The selection is then ratified successively by the Fate of the Present, and the Fate of the Future, and finally, by Necessity herself, the mother of all three.

ἀμετάστροφα κτλ. ἀμετάστροφα is said, of course, with reference to the etymological meaning of Ἄτροπος, and ἐπικλωσθέντα in turn alludes to Κλωθώ. In the succeeding clause ἀμεταστρεπτί takes up ἀμετάστροφα again.

Λήθης πεδίον . The first mention in Greek literature of the plain of Lethe occurs in Ar. Frogs 186 τίς ἐς τὸ Λήθης πεδίον κτλ., but Aristophanes clearly presumes that his audience is already familiar with the idea, and Plato may well have borrowed it from Orphic and Pythagorean eschatologies. Cf. Ettig Acherunt. l.c. p. 310 note 6. The πεδίον Λήθης was probably a counter-picture to the πεδίον Ἀληθείας, of which we hear in Phaedr. 248 B: cf. also [Axioch.] 371 B. So also Proclus l.c. 346. 19 ff. ὅτι μὲν οὖν ἀντίθετόν ἐστι πρὸς τὸ τῆς Ἀληθείας πεδίον τὸ τῆς Λήθης πεδίον, δῆλον· εἴπερ τοῦτο μὲν ἄκαρπον καὶ ἄγονον καὶ αὐχμηρόν, ἐκεῖνο δὲ ζωῆς πλῆρες, τροφὸν τῶν ψυχῶν—ὡς ἐν Φαίδρῳ (248 B) μεμαθήκαμεν. For the later history of this conception see Rohde Psyche^{2} I p. 316 note 2, II p. 390 note 1 and Dieterich Nek. pp. 90 ff.

διὰ καύματός τε κτλ. J. and C. explain this by saying that “they are passing through the pillar of light.” I do not think that this idea was present to the mind of Plato, though the souls are no doubt somewhere in this region. The καῦμα and πνῖγος δεινόν are sufficiently appropriate touches without having recourse to so realistic an explanation.

Ἀμέλητα ποταμόν . Cf. Virg. Aen. VI 714 f. Lethaei ad fluminis undam Securos latices, et longa oblivia potant. Many other parallels are quoted by Dieterich Nek. pp. 90—94. As the πεδίον Λήθης has its counterpart in the πεδίον Ἀληθείας, so also we find traces in Greek legend of a ὕδωρ Μνημοσύνης as well as the ὕδωρ Λήθης (Paus. IX 39. 8).

τοὺς δὲ ‐‐ μέτρου is missing in q and several other MSS. “Fortasse supervacanea adeoque inepta haec videbantur alicui, qui statim quemlibet postquam bibisset omnia obliviscentem videret. Sed oblivionis vis et pertinacia varia est. Qui nimium bibit, in perpetuum obliviscitur, qui moderate, discere aliquando seu recordando scientiam repetere potest” (Schneider). μάθησις, we remember, is ἀνάμνησις ( Phaed. 76 A: cf. also 75 D and 76 D). It is likely enough that the Platonic doctrine of ἀνάμνησις was suggested by earlier Pythagorean beliefs of the same kind (Dieterich l.c. p. 122: cf. also Rohde l.c. p. 186 note).

ἐπιλανθάνεσθαι . There is no good reason for transferring to this place the clause αὐτὸς—πιεῖν as Herwerden wishes to do. In treating of this passage, Proclus quotes an interesting fragment of Aristotle's dialogue ‘On the Soul’ (l.c. 349. 17 ff. = Rose 1480^{b} 5 ff.): φησὶ γὰρ οὖν (sc. ὁ Ἀριστοτέλης) καὶ αὐτὸς ἐκ μὲν ὑγείας εἰς νόσον ὁδεύοντας λήθην ἴσχειν τινὰς καὶ αὐτῶν τῶν γραμμάτων ὧν ἐμεμαθήκεσαν, ἐκ νόσου δὲ εἰς ὑγείαν ἰόντα μηδένα πώποτε τοῦτο πάσχειν. ἐοικέναι δὲ τὴν μὲν ἄνευ σώματος ζωὴν ταῖς ψυχαῖς κατὰ φύσιν οὖσαν ὑγείᾳ, τὴν δὲ ἐν σώμασιν, ὡς παρὰ φύσιν, νόσῳ. ζῆν γὰρ ἐκεῖ μὲν κατὰ φύσιν αὐτάς, ἐνταῦθα δὲ παρὰ φύσιν· ὥστ’ εἰκότως συμβαίνειν τὰς μὲν ἐκεῖθεν ἰούσας ἐπιλανθάνεσθαι τῶν ἐκεῖ, τὰς δὲ ἐντεῦθεν ἐκεῖσε τῶν ἐνταῦθα διαμνημονεύειν. Cf. Timon of Athens V 1 “my long sickness Of health and living now begins to mend, And nothing brings me all things.”

μέσας νύκτας . The plural, in which νύκτες according to Heindorf on Prot. 310 D signifies horae nocturnae, is regular in this and similar expressions, e.g. πόρρω τῶν νυκτῶν ( Symp. 217 D) etc.

γενέσθαι ‐‐ γενέσθαι . “Is Plato really responsible for the clumsy and ill-sounding repetition of γενέσθαι?” Richards, who would omit the first γενέσθαι and write κατὰ μέσας for καὶ μέσας. A similar correction had already been suggested by Herwerden. Plato himself is not in the least averse to echoes of this kind: see on VI 511 E.

ἄνω . It follows that the souls just before their reincarnation are underground: see on Ἀνάγκης γόνασιν 617 B and διὰ καύματος κτλ. 621 A and Virg. Aen. VI 748 ff. Has omnis—Lethaeum ad fluvium deus evocat agmine magno: Scilicet immemores supera ut convexa revisant, Rursus et incipiant in corpora velle reverti.

εἰς ‐‐ ἀστέρας is an instance—rare in Plato—of an apparently accidental iambic. See Arist. Rhet. III 8. 1408^{b} 33 ff. ὁ δ’ ἴαμβος αὐτή ἐστιν ἡ λέξις ἡ τῶν πολλῶν· διὸ μάλιστα πάντων τῶν μέτρων ἰαμβεῖα φθέγγονται λέγοντες and Cope ad loc. For souls conceived as stars cf. Ar. Peace 833 f. οὐκ ἦν ἄρ’ οὐδ’ ὃ λέγουσι κατὰ τὸν ἀέρα | ὡς ἀστέρες γιγνόμεθ’ , ὅταν τις ἀποθάνῃ; and Plut. de gen. Socr. 591 D πολλοὺς ἀστέρας περὶ τὸ χάσμα παλλομένους (said of disembodied souls) and 591 F. Similarly the Milky Way which, in the words of Milton, is ‘powdered with stars’ (Par. Lost VII 581: cf. Arist. Meteor. I 8), is the abode of certain souls, according to a tolerably widespread tradition, which meets us also in antiquity: see for example Cic. de repub. VI 15, 16 and Manil. I 753— 804. Cf. also Ettig Acherunt. l.c. p. 348 note 2 and Rohde Psyche^{2} II pp. 95, 213 notes

ἕωθεν . ἄνωθεν (see cr. n.), which appears also in v<title>, is approved by Richards, but adds nothing to the meaning. <foreign xml:lang="grc">ἕωθεν</foreign> is of course the morning of the twelfth day as <foreign xml:lang="grc">μέσας νύκτας</foreign> above was the midnight of the eleventh: cf. <foreign xml:lang="grc">δωδεκαταῖος— ἀνεβίω</foreign> 614 B and 616 B note

κείμενον . See cr. n. ἤδη is inappropriate in itself, and has little authority besides A^{2}.

μῦθος ‐‐ οὐκ ἀπώλετο . A Scholiast remarks: τοῖς μὲν οὖν πολλοῖς προστιθέναι τοῖς μύθοις ἔθος ἦν, ὅτι μῦθος ἀπώλετο, δεικνύναι βουλομένοις ὡς ἄρα οἱ μῦθοι λέγουσι μὴ ὄντα, καὶ ἅμα ἐρρήθησαν καὶ οὐκ εἰσίν. (Cf. Theaet. 164 D and Phil. 14 A.) Πλάτων δὲ τοὐναντίον πανταχοῦ σῴζεσθαί τε καὶ σῴζειν φησὶ τοὺς μύθους τοὺς παρ’ αὑτῷ, μάλα γε εἰκότως· τῶν γὰρ ὄντων εἰσὶν ἐξηγηταί, καὶ ὠφέλιμοι διὰ τοῦτο. (The Scholium is from Proclus l.c. 354. 24 ff.). Plato means that the story of Er is οὐκ ὄναρ, ἀλλ’ ὕπαρ ἐσθλόν. A similar play on the proverb occurs also in Laws 645 B.

ἂν σώσειεν . Cf. III 417 A note The suggestion δὴ σώσει (Richards) is unnecessary: see Kühner Gr. Gr. II p. 977 b.

, D 20 αὐτοῦ τε ‐‐ εὖ πράττωμεν . I agree with Richards in taking τε as ‘both,’ not ‘and,’ and the καί before ἐνθάδε as ‘and,’ not ‘both.’ Schneider holds the opposite view, urging that “qui praemia virtutis reportat, eum inter reportandum et sibi et diis amicum esse oportet. Eo igitur tempore sibi diisque amicus ut sit, contendere non magis potest, quam ut vincat, quum palmam fert victoriae.” This is true enough, but a similar objection may be made against Schneider's own solution, which makes Plato say ἵνα, ἐπειδὰν—κομιζώμεθα—εὖ πράττωμεν: and, with Schneider's construction, the repetition καὶ ἐνθάδε is also, as Richards says, ‘very weak.’ Beginning as if he would say ‘both here and hereafter’ Plato elaborates the ‘hereafter’ into ἐπειδὰν— κομιζώμεθα, not without some sacrifice of logical coherence.

περιαγειρόμενοι : i.q. περιιόντες καὶ ἀγειρόμενοι. Cf. Tim. Lex. Plat. s.v. περιαγειρόμενοι νικηφόροι and Ruhnken's note. ἐπαγερμός was the name for this kind of ‘stipis collectio.’ The poet Gray proposed περιαγόμενοι, but the text is sound. For the imagery from the games see on V 465 D note

διεληλύθαμεν . J. and C. think there is “a playful suggestion of our having made the pilgrimage ourselves.” I do not believe Plato means more than merely ‘we have described.’

εὖ πράττωμεν . On εὖ πράττωμεν see the third Platonic epistle ad init. and Bernays Lucian u. die Kyniker pp. 3, 88. The Republic fitly ends with an adaptation of Plato's favourite phrase of salutation and farewell.